[From the U.S. Government Printing Office, www.gpo.gov]














Pacific Coast Alaska:
 Dixon Entrance to
Cape Spencer

22nd Edition









U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
National Ocean Service






         United
         States


Cos   8

      Pilot

  Pacific Coast Alaska:
  Dixon Entrance to
  Cape Spencer

  22nd Edition
  The last published change to the previous edition (21 st/i 994) was change 4
  Change 3 was published in Defense Mapping Agency Notice to Mariners 21
  dated 5/25/96 Change 3 was published in Commander Seventeenth Coast
  Guard District Local Notice to Mariners 18 dated 4/30/96 Change I through 4
  to the previous edition have been entered into this 22nd edition


         ï¿½.o?,TMosp.,



          ,fï¿½ENT O~ L
  U S DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
  Michael Kantor Secretary
  National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
  D James Baker Under Secretary of Commerce for Oceans
    and Atmosphere and Administrator NOAA
  National Ocean Service
  W Stanley Wilson Assistant Administrator for Ocean Services
    and Coastal Zone Management
  Washington DC 1996
  For sale by the National Ocean Service and its sales agents















                                            LIMITS OF UNITED STATES COAST PILOT
                       Atlantic Coast                                           Pacific Coast
                         1 Eastport to Cape Cod                                   7 California, Oregon Washington, and Hawall
                         2 Cape Cod to Sandy Hook                                 8 Alaska  Dixon Entrance to Cape Spencer
                        3 Sandy Hook to Cape Henry                               9 Alaska  Cape Spencer to Beaufort Sea
                        4 Cape Henry to Key West                               Great Lakes
                         5 Gulf of Mexico, Puerto Rico, and Virgin Islands        6 The Lakes and their Connecting Waterways

       Ir        1         1tw      15         140       130        120       110       1m0       90         80        70                   50













                                          - TNN                                                      SON-  \                                          wA









                                                               Los Ariieales _                  I          /
     44


















                                                                                                         9   }            . Puerto Rico
~r I...I0                                                                                                                          I





                                      K1 UMSdwayg Is


       liSO     1'0        IO        1         14r        o3M       IX        110       100       90         r          70       6E    s     0









                                              Preface


  The Umted States Coast Pilot is published by the National Ocean Service (NOS), National Oceamuc and Atmo-
sphenc Admimstration (NOAA), pursuant to the Act of 6 August 1947 (33 U S C 883a and b), and the Act of 22
October 1968 (44 U S C 1310)
  The Coast Pilot supplements the navigational information shown on the nautical charts The sources for updating
the Coast Pilot include but are not hrmted to field inspections conducted by NOAA, information pubhshed m
Notices to Manners, reports from NOAA Hydrographic vessels and field parties, mformation from other Govern-
ment agencies, State and local governments, mantime and pllotage associations, port authonties, and manners
  This volume of Coast Pilot 8, Pacific Coast Alaska, Dixon Entrance to Cape Spencer, cancels the 1994 (21st)
Edition
  Notice -Amendments are issued to thins pubhcation through U S Coast Guard Local Notices to Manners
A subscription to the Local Notice to Manners Is available upon apphcation to the appropriate Coast Guard
District Commander (Aids to Navlgation Branch) Consult appendix for address All amendments are also
issued m Defense Mappmg Agency Notices to Marmners
   Manners and others are urged to report promptly to the National Ocean Service errors, omisslons, or any condl-
tions found to differ from or to be additional to those pubhshed in the Coast Pilot or shown on the charts in order
that they may be fully investigated and proper corrections made A Coast Pilot Report form is included in the back
of this book and a Marinne Information Report form is pubhshed m the Defense Mapping Agency Notice to Manners
for your convenuence These reports and/or suggestions for mcreasmg the usefulness of the Coast Pilot should be
sent to
   Chief
   Office of Coast Survey (N/CS261)
   National Ocean Service, NOAA
   1315 East-West Highway, Station 7317
   Silver Spnng, MD 20910-3282























                                                                                                            In

















                                                          tol







                                                     lawock '     ,a



                                                                                      //l
                                      Cape aoku 



                                                          CaI    Man Cape Chac em



                                                       /    h~nEnemwwe  4
                                              L~'IJ3*


          so~~~~~~~~ 















13?JJW                       1 134'                                                                   IIT
                             Coast Pilot 8-Graphic Chapter Index







       IS?        'I.    136'                1I5                  3.40               133,                132,               ISV                130,
                                              Skagway




59.                                                                             _                             _








               NAW







                 '~~~~~en~~~~o a s         i       o              -rp  hper    I   Jndex





                       RECORD OF CHANGES


                FROM NOTICE TO
  CHANGE NO        MARINERS NO              ENTERED BY            DATE ENTERED












































VI











                                    Contents

                                                                               Page

Chapter 1  General Information         .      .                                     1
Chapter 2  Navigation Regulations.           .                                     33
Chapter 3  Alaska-Dixon Entrance to Cape Spencer .                                 72
Chapter 4  Dixon Entrance to Ketchikan    .    .                                   80
Chapter 5  Clarence Strait, Dixon Entrance to Wrangell                            100
Chapter 6  West Coast of Prince of Wales Island                                   126
Chapter 7  Summer Strait                                                          152
Chapter 8  Frederick Sound                                                        167
Chapter 9  Stephens Passage                          .                            174
Chapter 10 Chatham Strait .. .......................  194
Chapter 11 Lynn Canal .................... 207
Chapter 12 West Coast of Baranof Island .      ..                                 217
Chapter 13 Salisbury Sound and Peril Strait                                       229
Chapter 14 West Coast of Chichagof and Yakobi Islands                             235
Chapter 15 Cross Sound and Icy Strait                                             242
Appendix      . .. .                 .                                            256
Tables                                                              (Follow Appendix)
  Climatological                                                                  T-1
  Meteorological                                                                  T-5
  Mean Surface Water Temperature and Densities                                    T-6
  Determination of Wind Speed by Sea Condition                                    T-7
  Coastal Warning Displays                                                        T-8
  Distances                                                                       T-9
  Radio Bearing Conversion Table                                                 T-12
  Distance of Visibility of Objects at Sea  ..                                   T-13
  Conversion, Degrees to Points and Vice Versa                                   T-14
  Estimating Time of Transit                                                     T-15
  Standard Abbreviations for Broadcasts                                          T-16
  Measurement and Conversion Factors                                             T-19
  Metric Style Guide              .                                              T-22
Index                                                                 (Follows Tables)
Coast Pilot Report form                                                (Follows Index)



                                                                                VIi









                                            1 GENERAL INFORMATION

 (1)   UNITED STATES COAST PILOT -The National    chapter for further detail ) The controlling depth of a channel is
Ocean Service Coast Pilot is a senes of nine nautical books that    the least depth within the himts of the channel, it restncts the safe
cover a wide variety of information important to navigators of    use of the channel to drafts of less than that depth The centerline
U S coastal and intracoastal waters, and the waters of the Great    controlling depth of a channel applies only to the channel center-
Lakes Most of this book information cannot be shown graphically    line, lesser depths may exist m the remainder of the channel The
on the standard nautical charts and is not readily available else-    midchannel controlling depth of a channel is the controlling
where The subjects in the Coast Pilot include, but are not hmited    depth of only the middle half of the channel Federal project
to, channel descnptions, anchorages, bndge and cable clearances,    depth is the design dredging depth of a channel constructed by the
currents tide and water levels, prominent features, pilotage, tow-    Corps of Engmeers, U S Army, the project depth may or may not
age, weather, Ice conditions, wharf descnptions, dangers routes,    be the goal of maintenance dredging after completion of the chan-
traffic separation schemes, small-craft facilities, and Federal regu-    nel, and, for this reason project depth must not be confused with
latihons applicable to navigation                                  controlling depth Depths alongside wharves usually have been
 (2)   Notice -Amendments are Issued to this publication    reported by owners and/or operators of the waterfront facilities,
through U S Coast Guard Local Notices to Marinners A sub-    and have not been verified by Government surveys, since these
scription to the Local Notice to Mariners is available upon    depths may be subject to change, local authonties should be con-
appllcatlon to the appropriate Coast Guard District Com-    sulted for the latest controlhng depths
mander (Aids to Navigation Branch) Consult appendix for             (9)   In general, the Coast Pilot gives the project depths for
address All amendments are also Issued m Defense Mapping           deep-draft ship channels maintained by the Corps of Engineers
Agency Notices to Marinners                                        The latest controlling depths are usually shown on the charts and
 (3)   Bearings -These are true and are expressed in degrees    published in the Notices to Manners For other channels, the latest
from 000ï¿½ (north) to 3590, measured clockwise General bearings    controlling depths available at the time of publication are given
are expressed by initial letters of the points of the compass (e g,    In all cases, however, mariners are advised to consult with
N, NNE, NE, etc) Adjective and adverb endings, except in chap-    pilots, port and local authorities, and Federal and State
ter 2, Navigation Regulations, have been discarded Wherever pre-    authorities for the latest channel controlhng depths
cise bearings are intended degrees are used Light-sector beanngs     (lo)  Under-keel clearances -It is becomnung increasingly evl-
are toward the light                                               dent that economic pressures are causing marinners to navigate
 (4)   Bridges and cables -Vertical clearances of bridges and    through waters of barely adequate depth, with under-keel clear-
overhead cables are in feet (meters) above mean high water unless    ances being finely assessed from the charted depths, predicted tide
otherwise stated, clearances of drawbridges are for the closed    levels, and depths recorded by echo sounders
position, although the open clearances are also given for vertical-  (II)  It cannot be too strongly emphasized that even charts
lift bridges Clearances given m the Coast Pilot are those approved    based on modern surveys may not show all sea-bed obstructions or
for nautical charting and are supplied by the U S Coast Guard    the shoalest depths, and actual tide levels may be appreciably
(brdges) and U S Army Corps of Engineers (cables), they may be    lower than those predicted
as-built (verified by actual inspection after completion of struc-  (12)  In many ships an appreciable correction must be applied to
tures) or authorized (design values specified in permit issued prior    shoal soundings recorded by echo sounders due to the horizontal
to construction) No differentiation is made in the Coast Pilot    distance between the transducers This separation correction,
between as-built and authonzed clearances (See charts for hon-    which is the amount by which recorded depths therefore exceed
zontal clearances of bndges, as these are given m the Coast Pilot    true depths, increases with decreasing depths to a maximum equal
only when they are less than 50 feet (15 meters) ) Submanne    to half the distance apart of the transducers, at this maximum the
cables are rarely mentioned                                        transducers are aground Ships whose transducers are more than 6
 (5)   Cable ferries -Cable ferries are guided by cables fastened    feet (1 8 meters) apart should construct a table of true and
to shore and sometimes propelled by a cable ng attached to the    recorded depths using the Traverse Tables (Refer to discussion of
shore Generally the cables are suspended dunng crossings and    echo soundings elsewhere m chapter 1 )
dropped to the bottom when the femes dock Where specific oper-      (13)  Other appreciable corrections which must be applied by
atmg procedures are known they are mentioned m the text Since    many ships are for settlement and squat These corrections
operating procedures vary mariners are advised to exercise    depend on the depth of water below the keel, the hull form and
extreme caution and seek local knowledge DO NOT ATTEMPT            speed of the ship
TO PASS A MOVING CABLE FERRY                                         (14)  Settlement causes the water level around the ship to be
 (6)   Courses -These are true and are given in degrees clock-    lower than would otherwise be the case It will always cause echo
wise from 000ï¿½(north) to 3590 The courses given are the courses    soundings to be less than they would otherwise be Settlement is
to be made good                                                    appreciable when the depth is less than seven times the draft of the
 (7)   Currents -Stated current velocities are the averages at    ship, and increases as the depth decreases and the speed increases
strength Velocities are in knots, which are nautical rmles per hour  (15)  Squat denotes a change in trim of a ship underway rela-
Directions are the true directions to which the currents set       tive to her trim when stopped It usually causes the stern of a ves-
 (8)   Depths -Depth is the vertical distance from the chart    sel to sit deeper in the water However, it is reported that in the
datum to the bottom and is expressed in the same units (feet,    case of mammoth ships squat causes the bow to sit deeper
meters or fathoms) as the applicable chart (See Chart Datum this    Depending on the location of the echo sounding transducers, this






2                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION


may cause the recorded depth to be greater or less than it ought to    Mapping Agency (see Defense Mapping Agency Procurement
be. Caution and common sense are continuing requirements    Information in appendix).
for safe navigation.                                                 (28)  Notices and reports of improved channel depths are also
 (16)  Distances.-These are in nautical miles unless otherwise    published by district offices of the Corps of Engineers, U.S. Army
stated. A nautical mile is one minute of latitude, or approximately    (see appendix for districts covered by this volume). Although
2,000 yards, and is about 1.15 statute miles.                      information from these notices/reports affecting NOS charts and
 (17)  Heights.-These are in feet (meters) above the tidal datum    related publications is usually published in the Notices to Mari-
used for that purpose on the charts, usually mean high water. How-    ners, the local district engineer office should be consulted where
ever, the heights of the decks of piers and wharves are given in    depth information is critical.
feet (meters) above the chart datum for depths.                      (29)  Marine Broadcast Notices to Mariners are made by the
 (is)  Light and fog signal characteristics.-These are not    Coast Guard through Coast Guard, Navy, and some commercial
described, and light sectors and visible ranges are normally not    radio stations to report deficiencies and important changes in aids
defined. (See Coast Guard Light Lists.)                            to navigation. (See Radio Navigation Warnings and Weather, this
 (19)  Obstructions.-Wrecks and other obstructions are men-    chapter)
tioned only if of a relatively permanent nature and in or near nor-  (30)  Vessels operating within the limits of the Coast Guard dis-
mal traffic routes.                                                tricts can obtain information affecting NOS charts and related
 (20)  Radio aids to navigation.-These are seldom described.    publications from the Local Notices to Mariners. Small craft using
(See Coast Guard Light Lists and Defense Mapping Agency Radio    the Intracoastal Waterway and other waterways and small harbors
                                                                   within the United States that are not normally used by oceangoing
Navigational Aids Pub. 117.)
                                     Navitotnl  Adescub. "  3390vessels will require the Local Notices to Mariners to keep charts
 (21) Ranges.-These are not fully described. "A 339ï¿½ Range"
 (21)  Ranges.-These are not   fully described. "A 339' Rangeand related publications up-to-date.
means that the rear structure bears 339? from the front structure.
See Coast Guard Light Lists.
                                                                   U.S. GOVERNMENT AGENCIES PROVIDING
 (22)  Reported information.-Information received by NOS           MARITIME SERVICES
from various sources concerning depths, dangers, currents, facili-
ties, and other subjects, which has not been verified by Govern- (31) Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Depart
ment surveys or inspections, is often included in the Coast Pilot;    3    Anal PantH   Inspection SD
such unverified information is qualified as "reported," and    ment of Agriculture.-The Agricultural Quarantine Inspection Pro-
such unverified information is qualified as "reported," and    ga   n   nmlHat   rgaso  hsognzto   r
                                                                   gram and Animal Health Programs of this organization are
                should be regarded with caution.                  responsible for protecting the Nation's animal population, food
 (23)  Time.-Unless otherwise stated, all times are given in local    and fiber crops, and forests from invasion by foreign pests. They
standard time in the 24-hour system. (Noon is 1200, 2:00 p.m. is    administer agricultural quarantine and restrictive orders issued
1400, and midnight is 0000.)                                       under authority provided in various acts of Congress. The regula-
 (24)  Winds.-Directions are the true directions from which the    tions prohibit or restrict the importation or interstate movement of
winds blow. Unless otherwise indicated, speeds are given in knots,    live animals, meats, animal products, plants, plant products, soil,
which are nautical miles per hour. injurious insects, and associated items that may introduce or
                                                                   spread plant pests and animal diseases which may be new to or not
NOTICES TO MARINERS                                                widely distributed within the United States or its territories.
                                                                   Inspectors examine imports at ports of entry as well as the vessel,
 (25)  Notices to Mariners are published by Federal agencies to    its stores, and crew or passenger baggage.
advise operators of vessels of marine information affecting the      (32)  The Service also provides an inspection and certification
safety of navigation. The notices include changes in aids to navi-    service for exporters to assist them in meeting the quarantine
gation, depths in channels, bridge and overhead cable clearances,    requirements of foreign countries. (See appendix for a list of ports
reported dangers, and other useful marine information. They    where agricultural inspectors are located and inspections con-
should be used routinely for updating the latest editions of nautical    ducted.)
charts and related publications.
 (26)  Local Notice to Mariners is issued by each Coast Guard       (33)  Customs Service, Department of the Treasury.-The U.S.
District Commander for the waters under his jurisdiction. (See    Customs Service administers certain laws relating to: entry and
appendix for Coast Guard district(s) covered by this volume.)    clearance of vessels and permits for certain vessel movements
These notices are usually published weekly and may be obtained    between points in the United States; prohibitions against coastwise
without cost by making application to the appropriate District    transportation of passengers and merchandise; salvage, dredging
Commander.                                                         and towing by foreign vessels; certain activities of vessels in the
 (27)  Notice to Mariners, published weekly by the Defense    fishing trade; regular and special tonnage taxes on vessels; the
Mapping Agency, is prepared jointly with NOS and the Coast    landing and delivery of foreign merchandise (including unlading,
Guard. These notices contain selected items from the Local    appraisement, lighterage, drayage, warehousing, and shipment in
Notices to Mariners and other reported marine information    bond); collection of customs duties, including duty on imported
required by oceangoing vessels operating in both foreign and    pleasure boats and yachts and 50% duty on foreign repairs to
domestic waters. Special items covering a variety of subjects and    American vessels engaged in trade; customs treatment of sea and
generally not discussed in the Coast Pilot or shown on nautical    ship's stores while in port and the baggage of crewmen and pas-
charts are published annually in Notice to Mariners No. 1. These    sengers; illegally imported merchandise; and remission of penal-
items are important to the mariner and should be read for future    ties or forfeiture if customs or navigation laws have been violated.
reference. These notices may be obtained by operators of ocean-    The Customs Service also cooperates with many other Federal
going vessels, without cost, by making application to Defense    agencies in the enforcement of statutes they are responsible for.






                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                          3


Customs districts and ports of entry, including customs stations,    general rule can be given. (To obtain the times of slack water, refer
are listed in the appendix.                                         to the Tidal Current Tables.)
 (34)  The Customs Service may issue, without charge, a cruis-       (40)  Tidal Current Tables for the coasts of the United States
ing license, valid for a period of up to 6 months and for designated    are issued annually by NOS in advance of the year for which they
U.S. waters, to a yacht of a foreign country which has a reciprocal    are prepared. These tables include daily predictions of the times of
agreement with the United States. A foreign yacht holding a cruis-    slack water and the times and velocities of strength of flood and
ing license may cruise in the designated U.S. waters and arrive at    ebb currents for a number of waterways, together with differences
and depart from U.S. ports without entering or clearing at the cus-    for obtaining predictions for numerous other places. Also included
tomhouse, filing manifests, or obtaining or delivering permits to    is other useful information such as a method for obtaining the
proceed, provided it does not engage in trade or violate the laws of    velocity of current at any time, duration of slack, coastal tidal cur-
the United States or visit a vessel not yet inspected by a Customs  rents, wind currents, combination of currents, and current dia-
Agent and does, within 24 hours of arrival at each port or place in    grams. Some information on the Gulf Stream is included in the
the United States, report the fact of arrival to the nearest custom-    tables for the Atlantic coast.
house. Countries which have reciprocal agreements granting these      (41)  Tidal Current Charts are published by NOS for various
privileges to U.S. yachts are Argentina, Australia, Bahama          localities. These charts depict the direction and velocity of the cur-
Islands, Bermuda, Canada, Federal Republic of Germany, Great    rent for each hour of the tidal cycle. They present a comprehensive
Britain, Greece, Honduras, Jamaica, Liberia, the Netherlands, and    view of the tidal current movement in the respective waterways as
New Zealand. Further information concerning cruising licenses    a whole and when used with the proper current tables or tide tables
may be obtained from the headquarters port for the customs dis-    supply a means for readily determining for any time the direction
trict in which the license is desired. U.S. yacht owners planning    and velocity of the current at various localities throughout the
cruises to foreign ports may contact the nearest customs district    areas covered.
headquarters as to customs requirements.                              (42)   HOW  TO OBTAIN TIDAL PREDICTIONS AND
                                                                    DATA FROM THE NATIONAL OCEAN SERVICE.-NOS,
 (35)  National Ocean Service (NOS), National Oceanic and    which annually publishes Tide Prediction Tables and Tidal Cur-
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), Department of Comn-    rent Prediction Tables, is experiencing a shortage of funds to print
merce.-The National Ocean Service provides charts and related    and distribute those Tables. In addition, the role of NOS with
publications for the safe navigation of marine and air commerce,    regard to the publication of the Tables is redefined to be that of
and provides basic data for engineering and scientific purposes    maintaining and updating the tidal prediction database from
and for other commercial and industrial needs. The principal facil-    domestic and international sources and generating the annual pre-
ities of NOS are located in Silver Spring, Md.; in Norfolk, Va.    dictions and associated information. Therefore, beginning with
(Atlantic Marine Center); and in Seattle, Wash. (Pacific Marine    the 1996 edition of these Tables, NOS will no longer print and dis-
Center). NOAA ships are based at the marine centers. These    tribute book-form Tables as a standard nautical product.
offices maintain files of charts and other publications which are    (43)  The titles of the NOS publications affected are:
available for the use of the mariners, who are invited to avail      (44)  Tide Tables 1996 - East Coast of North and South America
themselves of the facilities afforded. (See appendix for addresses.)  including Greenland;
 (36)  Sales agents for Charts, the Coast Pilot, Tide Tables, Tidal  (45)  Tide Tables 1996 - West Coast of North and South Amer-
Current Tables, and Tidal Current Charts of the National Ocean    ica including the Hawaiian Islands;
Service are located in many U.S. ports and in some foreign ports.     (46)  Tide Tables 1996 - Central and Western Pacific Ocean and
A list of authorized sales agents and chart catalogs may be had    Indian Ocean;
free upon request from National Ocean Service, Distribution Divi-     (47)  Tide Tables 1996 - Europe and West Coast of Africa
sion (N/ACC3). (See appendix for address.)                          including the Mediterranean Sea;
 (37)  Nautical charts are published primarily for the use of the    (48)  Tidal CurrentTables 1996 - Atlantic Coast of North Amer-
mariner, but serve the public interest in many other ways. They are    ica;
compiled principally from NOS basic field surveys, supplemented       (49)  Tidal Current Tables 1996 - Pacific Coast of North Amer-
by data from other Government organizations.                        ica and Asia;
 (38)  Tide Tables are computed annually by NOS in advance of        (50)  Regional Tide and Tidal Current Tables 1996 - New York
the year for which they are prepared. These tables include pre-    Harbor to Chesapeake Bay;
dicted times and heights of high and low waters for every day in     (51)    Supplemental Tidal Predictions - Anchorage, Nikiski, Sel-
the year for a number of reference stations and differences for    dovia, and Valdez, Alaska - 1996.
obtaining similar predictions for numerous other places. They also   (52)  Although NOS will no longer print and distribute the
include other useful information such as a method of obtaining    Tables in a book format, a complete set of Tables will be made
heights of tide at any time, local mean time of sunrise and sunset    available to all who request it as a special compilation of predic-
for various latitudes, reduction of local mean time to standard    tion information on CD-ROM.  The CD-ROM will contain cam-
time, and time of moonrise and moonset for various ports.           era-ready PostScript page-images.  A PostScript reader will also
 (39)  Caution.-In using the Tide Tables, slack water should not    be included to allow viewing documents on-screen. There will be
be confused with high or low water. For ocean stations there is    a fee charged for production and distribution of the special compi-
usually little difference between the time of high or low water and    lation. Although available to all who request it, the CD-ROM
the beginning of ebb or flood currents; but for places in narrow    vehicle may also be used by private printers who wish to print in
channels, landlocked harbors, or on tidal rivers, the time of slack    book-form the full set of Tables for distribution to retailers and the
current may differ by several hours from the time of high or low    general public. The annual predictions and associated information
water. The relation of the times of high or low water to the turning    will be made available on the same schedule as followed in previ-
of the current depends upon a number of factors, so that no simple    ous years.






4                                                1  GENERAL INFORMATION


 (53)  In addition to the CD-ROM two new vehicles will be pro     (67)  Anyone with questions or comments regarding the above
vlded for obtalmng predictions First, for the approximately 3,700    subject or wishing more information should write, telephone or
domestic tide stations, a 3-day window of predictions for any date    fax to
in 1995 and 1996 will be offered on the NOS, Coastal and Estua-    (68)  National Ocean Service, NOAA
rmine Oceanography Branch, Tidal Information Distribution and      (69)  Attn Ocean and Lake Levels (N/OES232)
Education System (TIDES) electronic bulletin board which is        (70)  1305 East-West Highway
accessible by telephone modem (301) 713-4492, N-8-1 up to          (71)  Silver Sprinng, MD 20910-3281
9600 baud) During 1996, this feature will be expanded to include  (72)  Telephone (301) 713-2877
about 3 000 additional sites in 120 countries around the world     (73)  FAX (301) 713-4366
Second for domestic tidal reference stations predictions covering  (74)  NOS, in partnership with other agencies and institutions,
a 4-day period beginning on the day of inquiry will be available on    has established a series of Physical Oceanographic Real Time Sys-
the NOS  Coastal and Estuarmine Oceanography Branch, Mosaic    tems (PORTS) in selected areas These PORTS sites provide con-
Homepage on the Internet (http /lwww-ceob nos noaa gov)          stantly updated information on tidal and tidal current conditions
These two new commumcatlon pathways will also be used to con-    water temperature, and weather conditions  This information is
tinuously inform customers when prediction products become    updated every six minutes  The PORTS sites currently in opera-
available or finalized during the year Further, NOS will continue    tion include Tampa Bay, Florida, San Francisco, California and
to provide tide and tidal current prediction and associated informa-    New York/New Jersey, with future sites to be added  The infor-
tlon on the media and m the time-frames with which customers    mation is accessible through a computer data connection or by a
have been farmliar from past experience with NOS                 voice response system at the following numbers
 (54)  Thus, all requests for prediction and associated informa-  (75)  TAMPA BAY
tion continue to be welcome  Beginning immediately, NOS is         (76)  Voice response (813) 822-5836 or (813) 822-0022
accepting prediction data requests via two new communication       (77)  Data (813) 822-5931 (2400 baud N-8-1)
pathways  The first is the TIDES electromnc bulletin board  The    (78)  SAN FRANCISCO
second, is the NOS Coastal and Estuarnne Oceanography Branch,     (79)  Voice response (707) 642-4337
World Wide Web Homepage                                           (80)  Data (707) 642-4608 (2400 baud, N-8-1)
 (55)  As NOS is no longer printng and distributing the Tables    (8t)  NEW YORK/NEW JERSEY
in book-form the NOS Nautical Chart Sales Agents will no longer    (82)  Voice response (212) 688-7725
obtain the Tables in book-form from the NOS Dlstnbution Dlvl-    (83)  Anyone with questions or comments regarding the above
sion Instead they may obtain quantities of the Tables for resale to    subject or wishing more information should write telephone or
the public from various private printers and distributors  NOS is   fax to
aware of a small number of vendors who have shown interest m       (84)   National Ocean Service, NOAA
prnntmg and distributing the Tables in book-form  NOS requests     (85)  Attn Office of Ocean and Earth Sciences (OES333)
any and all parties who may be interested m pnnting and dlstnbut-  (86)  1305 East-West Highway, Station 6544
ing the Tables in book-form to contact NOS (address follows)      (87)  Silver Spnng, MD 20910-3281
 (56)  The U S Coast Guard, through the Federal regulation 33     (88)  Telephone (301) 713-2809
CFR 164 33 requires certain charts and publications be carried on  (89)  FAX (301) 713-4501
board vessels of 1 600 gross tons and greater when traversing U S
waters NOS has been in contact with the U S Coast Guard con-       (so)  Coast Guard, Department of Transportation - The Coast
cernlng this regulation  Questions concerning this regulation    Guard has among its duties the enforcement of the laws of the
should be addressed to Chief, Navigation Rules Branch, G-NVT-    United States on the high seas and m coastal and inland waters of
3 United States Coast Guard, Washington D C 20593-0001, tele-    the U S and its possessions, enforcement of navigation and neu-
phone (202) 267-0416, fax (202) 267-4826                         trality laws and regulations, establishment and enforcement of
 (57)  Anyone with questions or comments regarding the above    navigational regulations upon the Inland Waters of the United
subject or private pnnters and distributors wishing more informa-    States, including the establishment of a demarcation line separat-
tlon should write, telephone, fax or e-mall to                   ing the high seas from waters upon which U S navlgational rules
 (58)  National Ocean Service, NOAA                              apply, administration of the Oil Pollution Act of 1961, as
 (59)  Attn Tidal Predictions (N/OES33)                          amended, establishment and admnumstration of vessel anchorages,
 (60)  1305 East West Highway                                    approval of bridge locations and clearances over navigable waters
 (61)  Silver Spnng MD 20910-3281                                admministration of the alteration of obstructive bridges, regulation
 (62)  Telephone (301) 713-2815                                  of drawbridge operations inspection of vessels of the Merchant
 (63)  FAX (301) 713-4501                                        Marine, admeasurement of vessels, documentation of vessels,
 (64)  E-MAIL ipss@ceob-g30 nos noaa gov                         preparation and pubhcation of merchant vessel registers, reglstra-
 (65)  WWW http /fwww-ceob nos noaa gov                          tion of stack inmsgma port security, issuance of Merchant Manne
 (66)  Tidal observation data for some of the NOS tide stations,    licenses and documents, search and rescue operations, investiga-
and information about how to obtain other data, is available from    tion of manne casualties and accidents, and suspension and revo-
the NOS Ocean and Lake Levels Division This information is   cation proceedings destruction of derelicts operation of aids to
available on the World Wide Web at http //isis ngs noaa gov 801    navigation, pubhcation of Light Lists and Local Notices to Man-
olld/home html TELNET access to tidal data and information is   ners, and operation of Ice-breaking faclhties
available at wlnet2 nos noaa gov Tidal observation data is also    (91)  The Coast Guard, with the cooperation of coast radio sta-
available in hard copy by mail, and in some instances, by fax    tlons of many nations, operates the Automated Mutual-assis-
Special arrangements can be made for continuing access to data,    tance Vessel Rescue System (AMVER) It is an international
or for real-time access to certain data sets                     mantime mutual assistance program which provides important aid






                                                  I  GENERAL INFORMATION                                                           5


to the development and coordmation of search and rescue (SAR)        flag vessels and foreign flag 'War Risk' vessels must report and
efforts m many offshore areas of the world Merchant ships of all    regularly update their voyages to the AMVER Center This report-
nations making offshore passages are encouraged to voluntarily    mg is required of the following (a) U S flag vessels of 1,000
send movement (sailing) reports and penodic position reports to    gross tons or greater, operating m foreign commerce (b) foreign
the AMVER Center at Coast Guard New York via selected radio    flag vessels of 1,000 gross tons or greater, for which an Interim
stations Information from these reports Is entered into an elec-    War Risk Insurance Binder has been issued under the provisions
tromc computer which generates and maintans dead reckoning    of Title XII, Merchant Marine Act, 1936
positions for the vessels Characteristics of vessels which are valu-   (99)  Details of the above procedures are contained in the
able for determining SAR capability are also entered into the com-    AMVER  Users Manual  The system is also published In
puter from available sources of mformation                           DMAHTC Pub 117
 (92)  A worldwide communications network of racho stations           (loo)  Search and Rescue Operations procedures are contained min
supports the AMVER System Propagation conditions, location of    the International Maritime Organization (IMO) SAR Manual
vessel and traffic density will normally determine which station    (MERSAR) U S flag vessels may obtain a copy of MERSAR
may best be contacted to establish communications To ensure that    from local Coast Guard Marine Safety Offices and Manne Inspec-
no charge is applied, all AMVER reports should be passed    tion Offices or by writin g to U S Coast Guard (G-OSR), Washing-
through specified radio stations Those stations which currently    ton, DC 20593-0001 Other flag vessels may purchase MERSAR
accept AMVER reports and apply no coastal station, ship station,    directly from IMO
or landline charge are listed m each issue of the "AMVER Bulle-        (101)  The Coast Guard conducts and/or coordinates search and
tin publication Also hsted are the respective International radio    rescue operations for surface vessels and aircraft that are in dis-
call signs, locations, frequency bands, and hours of operation The    tress or overdue (See Distress Signals and Communication Proce-
 AMVER Bulletin  is available from AMVER Maritime Rela-    dures this chapter)
tlons, U S Coast Guard, Bulding 110, Box 26, Governor's Island,        (102) Light Lists, published by the Coast Guard, describe aids
NY 10004-5034, telephone (212)668-7764  Although AMVER               to navigation, consisting of lights fog signals, buoys, lightships,
reports may be sent through nonparticipating stations, the Coast    daybeacons, and electronic aids, in United States (including
Guard cannot reimburse the sender for any charges applied            Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands) and contiguous Canadian
 (93)  Information concerning the predicted location and SAR         waters Light Lists are for sale by the Government Pnntng Office
characteristics of each vessel known to be withm an area of inter-    (See appendix for address ), and by sales agents in the principal
est is made available upon request to recognized SAR agencies of    seaports Manners should refer to these publications for detailed
any nation or vessels needing assistance Predicted locations are    information regarding the characteristics and vlsibillty of hghts,
only disclosed for reasons related to marinne safety                 and the descriptions of light structures, hlghtships, buoys, fog slg-
 (94)  Benefits of AMVER particlpation to shlpping include (1)    nals, and electronic aids
improved chances of aid in emergencies, (2) reduced number of          (103)  Documentation (issuance of certificates of registry
calls for assistance to vessels not favorably located, and (3)    enrollments, and licenses), admeasurements of vessels, and
reduced tune lost for vessels responding to calls for assistance An   admmlstration of the various navigation laws pertammg thereto
AMVER participant is under no greater obligation to render assis-    are functions of the Coast Guard Yacht commissions are also
tance dunng an emergency than a vessel who is not particlpating      issued and certain undocumented vessels required to be numbered
 (95)   ALL AMVER messages should be addressed to Coast    by the Federal Boat Safety Act of 1971 are numbered either by the
Guard New York regardless of the station to which the message    Coast Guard or by a State having an approved numbering system
is delivered except those sent to Canadian stations which should    (the latter is most common) Owners of vessels may obtain the
be addressed to AMVER Halifax or AMVER Vancouver to    necessary information from any Coast Guard District Commander,
avoid mcurrmng charges to the vessel for these messages              Manne Safety Office or Marinne Inspection Office Coast Guard
  (96)  InstruLtions guiding participation in the AMVER System    District Offices, Coast Guard Stations, Marine Safety Offices
are available in the following languages Damsh, Chminese, Dutch,    Captain of the Port Offices Marne Inspection Offices and Docu-
English French, German, Greek, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Pol-    mentation Offices are hsted in the appendix (Note A Marine
ish Norwegian, Portuguese Russian Spanish and Swedish The    Safety Office performs the same functions as those of a Captain of
AMVER Users Manual is available from  AMVER Maritime                 the Port and a manne inspection office When a function is at a
Relations, U S Coast Guard, Building 110 Box 26 Governor s    different address than the Marinne Safety Office, it will be listed
Island, NY, 10004-5034, telephone (212)668-7764, Commander,          separately in the appendix)
Atlantic Area U S Coast Guard, Governors Island, N Y 10004-
5000, Commander, Pacific Area U S Coast Guard, Coast Guard             (o04) Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army-The Corps
Island, Alameda, CA 94501-5100, and at U S Coast Guard Dis-    of Engineers has charge of the improvement of the rivers and har-
trict Offices, Manne Safety Offices, Marnne Inspection Offices,    bors of the Umted States and of miscellaneous other civil works
and Captain of the Port Offices in major U S ports Requests for    which include the admlnlstration of certaiun Federal laws enacted
instructions should state the language desired if other than    for the protection and preservation of navigable waters of the
Enghsh                                                               Umted States, the establishment of regulations for the use, adrmn-
  (97)  For AMVER participants bound for U S ports there is an    Istration, and navigation of navigable waters, the establishment of
additional benefit AMVER particlpatlon via messages which    harbor linmes, the removal of sunken vessels obstructing or endan-
include the necessary information is considered to meet the    germing navigation, and the granting of permits for structures or
requirements of 33 CFR 160 (See 160 201, chapter 2, for rules    operations m navigable waters, and for discharges and deposits of
and regulations )                                                    dredged and fill materials in these waters
  (98)   AMVER Reporting Required -U S Manhtime Admuus-                (105)  Information concermnng the vanous ports, improvements,
tration regulations effective August 1, 1983, state that certain U S  channel depths, navigable waters, and the condition of the Intrac-





6                                                1  GENERAL INFORMATION


oastal Waterways in the areas under their jurisdiction may be    Virgin Islands Commission inspectors have authority to board
obtained direct from the Distnct Engineer offices (See appendix    ships to determne whether their radio stations comply with inter-
for addresses )                                                  national treaties, Federal Laws, and Comnmsslon regulations The
 (106) Fishtraps -The Corps of Engineers has general supervl-    commission has field offices in the principal U S ports (See
sion of location, construction, and manner of maintenance of all   appendix for addresses ) Information concerning ship radio regu-
traps, weirs, pounds, or other fishing structures in the navigable    lations and service documents may be obtained from the Federal
waters of the United States Where State and/or local controls are    Commumcatlons Comrmssion, Washington, D C 20554, or from
sufficient to regulate these structures, including that they do not    any of the field offices
interfere with navigation, the Corps of Engmeers leaves such reg-
ulation to the State or local authority See 33 CFR 330 (not carned  (lls) Inumgration and Naturahzation Service, Department of
in this Pilot) for applicable Federal regulations Construction per-    Justice -The Immigratlon and Naturalization Service administers
mats issued by the Engineers specify the lights and signals    the laws relating to admission exclusion, and deportation of
required for the safety of navigation                            aliens, the registration and fingerpnnting of ahens, and the natural-
 (107) Fish havens, artificial reefs constructed to attract fish, can    Ization of aliens lawfully resident in the Umted States
be estabhshed in U S coastal waters only as authorzed by a Corps  (116) The designated ports of entry for aliens are divided into
of Engmeers permit, the permit specifies the location, extent, and    three classes Class A is for all aliens Class B is only for ahens
depth over these 'underwater junk piles"                         who at the time of applying for admission are lawfully in posses-
                                                                   sion of vahd resident ahens' border-crossing identification cards
 (10o) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) -The U S            or valid non-resident aliens border-crossing identification cards
Environmental Protection Agency provides coordinated govern-    or are admissible without documents under the documentary waiv-
mental action to assure the protection of the environment by abat-    ers contained in 8 CFR 212 l(a) Class C is only for aliens who
ing and controlling pollution on a systematic basis The ocean    are arving in the United States as crewmen as that term is defined
dumping permit program of the Environmental Protection Agency    in Section 101(a) (10) of the Immigratlon and Nationality Act
provides that except when authorized by perminut, the dumping of    (The term "crewman" means a person serving in any capacity on
any material into the ocean is prohibited by the 'Marine Protec-    board a vessel or aircraft) No person may enter the United States
tlon, Research, and Sanctuanes Act of 1972, Pubhc Law 92-532,"    until he has been inspected by an immigratlon officer A list of the
as amended (33 USC 1401 et seq )                                 offices covered by this Coast Pilot is given in the appendix
 (109) Permits for the dumping of dredged matenal into waters of
the United States, including the territorial sea, and into ocean  (117) Defense Mapping Agency (DMA), Department of
waters are issued by the Corps of Engineers Permits for the    Defense -The Defense Mapping Agency provides hydrographic,
dumping of fill material into waters of the United States, including    navigational, topographic, and geodetic data, charts, maps, and
the territorial sea, are also issued by the Corps of Engineers Per-    related products and services to the Armed Forces, other Federal
mits for the dumping of other material in the territorial sea and    Agencies, the Merchant Manne and manners in general Publica-
ocean waters are issued by the Environmental Protection Agency   tions include Saiuhng Directions, List of Lights, Distances Between
 (0lo) Corps of Engineers regulations relating to the above are    Ports, Radio Navigational Aids, International Code of Signals,
contained in 33 CFR 323-324, Environmental Protection Agency    American Practical Navigator (Bowditch), and Notice to Man-
regulations are in 40 CFR 220 229 (See Disposal Sites this chap-    ners (See Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information in
ter)                                                             appendix)
 (iul) Persons or organizations who want to file for an apphca-
tlon for an ocean dumping pernut should write the Environmental   (118) Pubhc Health Service, Department of Health and Human
Protection Agency Regional Office for the region in which the    Services -The Pubhc Health Service admumsters foreign quaran-
port of departure is located (See appendix for addresses of    tme procedures at U S ports of entry
regional offices and States m the EPA coastal regions )            (119)  All vessels amvmg in the United States are subject to pub-
 (112) The letter should contain the name and address of the    lic health inspection Vessels subject to routine boarding for quar-
applicant, name and address of person or firm, the name and usual    antme inspection are only those which have had on board during
location of the conveyance to be used in the transportation and    the 15 days preceding the date of expected arrival or dunng the
dumping of the material involved, a physical description where    period since departure (whichever period of time is shorter) the
appropriate, and the quantity to be dumped and proposed dumpmg    occurrence of any death or ill person among passengers or crew
site                                                             (including those who have disembarked or have been removed)
 (113) Everyone who writes EPA will be sent information about a    The master of a vessel must report such occurrences immediately
final application for a pernumt as soon as possible This final apph-    by radio to the quarantine station at or nearest the port at which the
cation is expected to include questions about the descnption of the    vessel will arrive
process or activity giving rise to the production of the dumping   (120) In addition, the master of a vessel carrying 13 or more pas-
material, information on past activities of applicant or others with    sengers must report by radio 24 hours before arrval the number of
respect to the disposal of the type of material involved, and a    cases (includmg zero) of diarrhea m passengers and crew recorded
description about available alternative means of disposal of the    in the ship s medical log durng the current cruise All cases that
material with explanations about why an alternative is thought by    occur after the 24 hour report must also be reported not less than 4
the applicant to be inappropriate                                hours before arrival
                                                                     (121) ' 1 person" means person who
 (114) Federal Communications Commission-The Federal              (122)  1  Has a temperature of 1000F (or 38ï¿½C) or greater,
Communications Commission controls non-Government radio    accompamed by a rash, glandular swelhng, or jaundice or which
commumcations in the United States, Guam, Puerto Rico and the    has persisted for more than 48 hours, or







                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                       7


 (123) 2. Has diarrhea, defined as the occurrence in a 24 hour    the NWS and provides continuous broadcasts of weather informa-
period of three or more loose stools or of a greater than normal    tion for the general public. These broadcasts repeat taped mes-
(for the person) amount of loose stools.                          sages every 4-6 minutes. Tapes are updated periodically, usually
 (124) :Vessels arriving at ports under control of the United States    every 2-3 hours and amended as required to include the latest
are subject to sanitary inspection to determine whether measures    information. When severe weather threatens, routine transmis-
should be applied to prevent the introduction, transmission, or    sions are interrupted and the broadcast is devoted to emergency
spread of communicable disease.                                   warnings. (See appendix for NOAA Weather Radio Stations cov-
 (125) Specific public health laws, regulations, policies, and pro-    ered by this Coast Pilot.)
cedures may be obtained by contacting U.S. Quarantine Stations,    (131)  In coastal areas, the programming is tailored to the needs
U.S. Consulates or the Chief Program Operations, Division of    of the marine community. Each coastal marine forecast covers a
Quarantine, Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Georgia 30333.    specific area. For example, "Cape Henlopen to Virginia Beach, out
(See appendix for addresses of U.S. Public Health Service Quar-    20 miles." The broadcast range is about 40 miles from the trans-
antine Stations.)                                                 mitting antenna site, depending on terrain and quality of the
                                                                  receiver used. When transmitting antennas are on high ground, the
 (126) Food and Drug Administration (FDA), Public Health    range is somewhat greater, reaching 60 miles or more. Some
Service, Department of Health and Human Services.-Under the    receivers are equipped with a warning alert device that can be
provisions of the Control of Communicable Diseases Regulations    turned on by means of a tone signal controlled by the NWS office
(21 CFR 1240) and Interstate Conveyance Sanitation Regulations    concerned. This signal is transmitted for 13 seconds preceding an
(21 CFR 1250), vessel companies operating in interstate traffic    announcement of a severe weather warning.
shall obtain potable water for drinking and culinary purposes only  (132) NWS marine weather products are also disseminated to
at watering points found acceptable to the Food and Drug Admin-    marine users through the broadcast facilities of the Coast Guard,
istration. Water supplies used in watering point operations must    Navy, and commercial marine radio stations. Details on these
also be inspected to determine compliance with applicable Inter-    broadcasts including times, frequencies, and broadcast content are
state Quarantine Regulations (42 CFR 72). These regulations are    listed in the joint NWS/Navy publication Selected Worldwide
based on authority contained in the Public Health Service Act (PL    Marine Weather Broadcasts. For marine weather services in the
78-410). Penalties for violation of any regulation prescribed under    coastal areas, the NWS publishes a series of Marine Weather Ser-
authority of the Act are provided for under Section 368 (42 USC   vices Charts showing locations of NOAA Weather Radio stations,
271) of the Act.                                                  telephone numbers of recorded weather messages and NWS
 (127) Vessel Watering Points.-FDA annually publishes a list of    offices, and other useful marine weather information.
Acceptable Vessel Watering Points. This list is available from      (133) Ships of all nations share equally in the effort to report
most FDA offices or from Interstate Travel Sanitation Subprogram    weather observations. These reports enable meteorologists to cre-
Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition, FDA (HFF-312),    ate a detailed picture of wind, wave, and weather patterns over the
200 C Street SW, Washington, DC 20204. Current status of water-    open waters that no other data source can provide and upon which
ing points can be ascertained by contacting any FDA office. (See    marine forecasts are based. The effectiveness and reliability of
appendix for addresses.)                                          these forecasts and warnings plus other services to the marine
                                                                  community are strongly linked to the observations received from
 (128) National Weather Service (NWS), National Oceanic and    mariners. There is an especially urgent need for ship observations
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), Department of Com-    in the coastal waters, and the NWS asks that these be made and
merce.-The National Weather Service provides marine weather    transmitted whenever possible. Many storms originate and inten-
forecasts and warnings for the U.S. coastal waters, the Great    sify in coastal areas. There may be a great difference in both wind
Lakes, offshore waters, and high seas areas. Scheduled marine    direction and speed between the open sea, the offshore waters, and
forecasts are issued four times daily from more than 20 National    on the coast itself.
Weather Service Forecast Offices (WSFOs) around the country,       (134) Information on how ships, commercial fishermen, off-
operating 24 hours a day. Marine services are also provided by    shore industries, and others in the coastal zone may participate in
over 50 National Weather Service Offices with local areas of    the marine observation program is available from National
responsibility. (See appendix for Weather Service Forecast Offices    Weather Service Port Meteorological Officers (PMOs). Port
and Weather Service Offices for the area covered by this Coast    Meteorological Officers are located in major U.S. port cities and
Pilot.)                                                           the Republic of Panama, where they visit ships in port to assist
 (129) Typically, the forecasts contain information on wind speed    masters and mates with the weather observation program, provide
and direction, wave heights, visibility, weather, and a general syn-    instruction on the interpretation of weather charts, calibrate
opsis of weather patterns affecting the region. The forecasts are    barometers and other meteorological instruments, and discuss
supplemented with special marine warnings and statements, radar    marine weather communications and marine weather requirements
summaries, marine observations, small-craft advisories, gale    affecting the ships' operations. (See appendix for addresses of
warnings, storm warnings and various categories of tropical    Port Meteorological Officers in or near the area covered by this
cyclone warnings e.g., tropical depression, tropical storm and hur-    Coast Pilot.)
ricane warnings. Specialized products such as coastal flood,
seiche, and tsunami warnings, heavy surf advisories, low water     (135) National Environmental Satellite, Data, and Informa-
statements, ice forecasts and outlooks, and lakeshore warnings and    tion Service (NESDIS), National Oceanic and Atmospheric
statements are issued as necessary.                               Administration (NOAA), Department of Commerce.-Among its
 (130) The principal means of disseminating marine weather ser-    functions, NESDIS archives, processes, and disseminates the non-
vices and products in coastal areas is NOAA Weather Radio.    realtime meteorological and oceanographic data collected by gov-
This network of more than 350 stations nationwide is operated by    ernment agencies and private institutions. Marine weather obser-






8                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION


vations are collected from ships at sea on a voluntary basis. About    situations than warrant the distress procedure, the urgency signal
1 million observations are received annually at NESDIS's            PAN-PAN (PAHN-PAHN, spoken three times), or the safety sig-
National Climatic Center. They come from vessels representing    nal SECURITY (SAY-CURITAY, spoken three times), for radiote-
every maritime nation. These observations, along with land data,    lephony, are used as appropriate. Since radiotelegraph
are returned to the mariners in the form of climatological summa-   transmissions are normally made by professional operators, and
ries and atlases for coastal and ocean areas. They are available in    urgency and safety situations are less critical, only the distress
such NOAA publications as the U.S. Coast Pilot, Mariners    procedures for voice radiotelephone are described. For complete
Weather Log, and Local Climatological Data, Annual Sum-             information on emergency radio procedures, see 47 CFR 83 (not
mary. They also appear in the Defense Mapping Agency's Pilot    carried in the Coast Pilot) or DMAHTC Pub. 117. (See appendix
Chart Atlases and Sailing Directions Planning Guides.               for a list of Coast Guard Stations which guard 2182 kHz and
                                                                    156.80 MHz.) Complete information on distress guards can be
DISTRESS SIGNALS AND COMMUNICATION                                  obtained from Coast Guard District Commanders.
PROCEDURES                                                            (155) Distress calls indicate a vessel or aircraft is threatened by
 (136)  Coast Guard search and rescue operations.-The Coast    grave and imminent danger and requests immediate assistance.
Guard conducts and/or coordinates search and rescue operations    They have absolute priority over all other transmissions. All sta-
for surface vessels or aircraft that are in distress or overdue.    tions which hear a distress call must immediately cease any trans-
Search and Rescue vessels and aircraft have special markings,    mission capable of interfering with the distress traffic and shall
including a wide slash of red-orange and a small slash of blue on    continue to listen on the frequency used for the emission of the
the forward portion of the hull or fuselage. Other parts of aircraft,    distress call. This call shall not be addressed to a particular station,
normally painted white, may have other areas painted red to facili-    and acknowledgement of receipt shall not be given before the dis-
tate observation. The cooperation of vessel operators with Coast    tress message which follows it is sent.
Guard helicopters, fixed-wing aircraft, and vessels may mean the      (156)  Radiotelephone distress communications include the
difference between life and death for some seaman or aviator;    following actions:
such cooperation is greatly facilitated by the prior knowledge on     (157)  (1) The radiotelephone alarm signal (if available): The
the part of vessel operators of the operational requirements of    signal consists of two audio tones, of different pitch, transmitted
Coast Guard equipment and personnel, of the international distress    alternately; its purpose is to attract the attention of persons on
signals and procedures, and of good seamanship.    ,                radio watch or to actuate automatic alarm devices. It may only be
 (137) Note.-In August 1993, all Coast Guard communication    used to announce that a distress call or message is about to follow.
stations and cutters discontinued watchkeeping on the distress fre-   (158) (2) The distress call, consisting of:-the distress signal
quency 500 kHz. Distress and other calls to Coast Guard commu-    MAYDAY (spoken three times);
nication stations may be made on any of the following HF single       (159) the words THIS IS (spoken once);
sideband radiotelephone channels: 424(4134 kHz), 601(6200             (160) the call sign or name of the vessel in distress (spoken three
kHz), 816(8240 kHz), or 1205(12242 kHz).                            times).
 (138) International distress signals.-(l) A signal made by          (161)  (3) The distress message follows immediately and con-
radiotelegraphy or by any other signalling method consisting of    sists of:
the group "SOS" in Morse Code.                                        (162)  the distress signal MAYDAY:
 (139) (2) A signal sent by radiotelephony consisting of the spo-    (163) The call sign and name of the vessel in distress;
ken word "MAYDAY."                                                    (164) particulars of its position (latitude and longitude, or true
 (140) (3) The International Flag Code Signal of NC.                bearing and distance from a known geographical position);
 (141) (4) A signal consisting of a square flag having above or      (165) the nature of the distress;
below it a ball or anything resembling a ball.                        (166) the kind of assistance desired;
 (142) (5) Flames on the craft (as from a burning oil barrel, etc.)  (167) the number of persons aboard and the condition of any
 (143) (6) A rocket parachute flare or hand flare showing a red    injured;
light.                                                                (168) present seaworthiness of vessel;
 (144)  (7) Rockets or shells, throwing red stars fired one at a     (169)  description of the vessel (length; type; cabin; masts;
time at short intervals.                                            power; color of hull; superstructure; trim; etc.);
 (145)  (8) Orange smoke, as emitted from a distress flare.          (170)  any other information which might facilitate the rescue,
 (146)  (9) Slowly and repeatedly raising and lowering arms out-    such as display of a surface-to-air identification signal or a radar
stretched to each side.                                             reflector;
 (147)  (10) A gun or other explosive signal fired at intervals of   (171)  your listening frequency and schedule;
about 1 minute.                                                       (172)  THIS IS (call sign and name of vessel in distress). OVER.
 (148)  (11) A continuous sounding of any fog-signal apparatus.      (173)  (4) Acknowledgement of receipt of a distress message:
 (149)  (12) The radiotelegraph alarm signal.                       If a distress message is received from a vessel which is definitely
 (150)  (13) The radiotelephone alarm signal.                       in your vicinity, immediately acknowledge receipt. If it is not in
 (151)  (14) Signals transmitted by emergency position-indicat-    your vicinity, allow a short interval of time to elapse before
ing radiobeacons.                                                   acknowledging, in order to permit vessels nearer to the vessel in
 (152)  (15) A piece of orange-colored canvas with either a black    distress to acknowledge receipt without interference. However, in
square and circle or other appropriate symbol (for identification    areas where reliable communications with one or more shore sta-
from the air).                                                      tions are practicable, all vessels may defer this acknowledgement
 (153) (16) A dye marker.                                           for a short interval so that a shore station may acknowledge receipt
 (154)  Radio distress procedures.-Distress calls are made on    first. The acknowledgement of receipt of a distress is given as fol-
2182 kHz or VHF-FM channel 16 (MAYDAY). For less serious    lows:







                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                           9


 (174) the call sign or name of the vessel sending the distress       (203)  the words SEELONCE FEENEE (French for silence fin-
(spoken three times);                                                ished).
 (175) the words THIS IS;
 (176)  the call sign or name of acknowledging vessel (spoken    DISTRESS ASSISTANCE AND COORDINATION
three times);                                                        PROCEDURES
 (177)  The words RECEIVED MAYDAY.                                    (204) Rescue Coordination Centers.-There are four Rescue
 (178)  After the above acknowledgement, allow a momentary           Coordination Centers in Alaska. The centers depend upon infor-
interval of listening to insure that you will not interfere with    mation from many sources in order to perform effectively. Mari-
another vessel better situated to render immediate assistance; if    ners are requested to report any information to the nearest center
not, with the authority of the person in charge of the vessel, trans-    concerning fire, collision or other emergencies, foreign fishing
umit:                                                                vessels, oil spills, possible illegal entry, submarine sighting, ice-
 (179)  the word MAYDAY;                                             bergs, foreign naval vessels, or any other unusual sightings. (See
 (180)  the call sign and name of distressed vessel;                 the appendix for the location of the centers.)
 (181)  the words THIS IS;                                            (205)  Surface ship procedures for assisting distressed surface
 (182)  the call sign and name of your vessel;                       vessels
  (183)  your position (latitude and longitude, or true bearing and    (206)  (1) The following immediate action should be taken by
distance from a known geographical position);                        each ship on receipt of a distress message:
  (184)  the speed you are proceeding towards, and the approxi-        (207)  (a) Acknowledge receipt and, if appropriate, retransmit
mate time it will take to reach, the distressed vessel. OVER.        the distress message;
  (185)  (5) Further distress messages and other communica-            (208) (b) Immediately try to take D/F bearings during the trans-
tions: Distress communications consist of all messages relating to    mission of the distress message and maintain a D/F watch on 2182
the immediate assistance required by the distressed vessel. Each    kHz;
distress communication shall be preceded by the signal MAYDAY.         (209)  (c) Communicate the following information to the ship in
The vessel in distress or the station in control of distress commu-  distress:
nications may impose silence on any station which interferes. The      (210)  (i) identity;
procedure is:-the words SEELONCE MAYDAY (Seelonce is                   (211)  (ii) position;
French for silence). Silence also may be imposed by nearby             (212)  (iii) speed and estimated time of arrival (ETA);
mobile stations other than the vessel in distress or the station in    (213)  (iv) when available, true bearing of the ship in distress.
control of distress communications. The mobile station which           (214)  (d) Maintain a continuous listening watch on the fre-
believes that silence is essential may request silence by the follow-    quency used for the distress. This will normally be:
ing procedure: -the word SEELONCE, followed by the word DIS-           (215)  (i) 2182 kHz (radiotelephony).
TRESS, and its own call sign.                                          (216)  (e) Additionally, maintain watch on VHF-FM channel 16
  (186)  (6) Transmission of the distress procedure by a vessel    as necessary;
 or shore station not itself in distress: A vessel or a shore station   (217) (f) Operate radar continuously;
 which learns that a vessel is in distress shall transmit a distress    (218) (g) If in the vicinity of the distress, post extra lookouts.
 message in any of the following cases:                                 (219)  (2) The following action should be taken when proceed-
  (187)  (a) When the vessel in distress is not itself able to transmit    ing to the area of distress:
 the distress message.                                                  (220)  (a) Plot the position, course, speed, and ETA of other
  (188)  (b) When a vessel or a shore station considers that further    assisting ships.
 help is necessary.                                                     (221)  (b) Know the communication equipment with which
  (189)  (c) When, although not in a position to render assistance,    other ships are fitted. This information may be obtained from the
 it has heard a distress message that has not been acknowledged.      International Telecommunication Union's List of Ship Stations.
   (190)  In these cases, the transmission shall consist of:            (222)  (c) Attempt to construct an accurate "picture" of the cir-
  (191) the radiotelephone alarm signal (if available);               cumstances attending the casualty. The important information
   (192)  the words MAYDAY RELAY (spoken three times);                 needed is included under Distress Signals and Communication
   (193) the words THIS IS;                                            Procedures, this chapter. Should the ship in distress fail to transmit
   (194) the call sign and name of vessel (or shore station), spoken    this information, a ship proceeding to assist should request what
 three times.                                                         information is needed.
   (195)  When a vessel transmits a distress under these conditions,    (223)  (3) The following on-board preparation while proceeding
 it shall take all necessary steps to contact the Coast Guard or a    to the distress area should be considered:
 shore station which can notify the Coast Guard.                        (224)  (a) A rope (guest warp) running from bow to quarter at
   (196)  (7) Termination of distress: When distress traffic has    the waterline on each side and secured by lizards to the ship's side
 ceased, or when silence is no longer necessary on the frequency    to assist boats and rafts to secure alongside;
 used for the distress traffic, the station in control shall transmit on  (225)  (b) A derrick rigged ready for hoisting on each side of the
 that frequency a message to all stations as follows:                 ship with a platform cargo sling, or rope net, secured to the runner
   (197)  the distress signal MAYDAY;                                  to assist the speedy recovery of exhausted or injured survivors in
   (198)  the call TO ALL STATIONS, spoken three times;                the water;
   (199) the words THIS IS;                                             (226)  (c) Heaving lines, ladders, and scramble net placed ready
   (200) the call sign and name of the station sending the message;    for use along both sides of the ship on the lowest open deck and
   (201) the time;                                                     possibly crew members suitably equipped to enter the water and
   (202)  the name and call sign of the vessel in distress;            assist survivors;





10                                                I  GENERAL INFORMATION


 (227)  (d) A ship s liferaft made ready for possible use as a      (245) 5  Aircraft usually sink quickly (e g within a few mm
boarding station                                                   utes) Every endeavor will be made to give shnps an accurate posl-
 (228)  (e) Preparations to receive survivors who require medical    tion of an aircraft which desires to ditch When given such a
assistance including the provision of stretchers,                  position, a ship should at once consult any other ships m the vcmin
 (229)  (f) When own lifeboat is to be launched, any means to    ity on the best procedure to be adopted The ship going to the res
provide communications between it and the parent ship will prove    cue should answer the station sendmg the broadcast and give her
to be of very great help                                           identity, position, and intended action
 (230)  (g) A line throwing appliance with a light line and a       (246)  6 If a ship should receive a distress message direct from
heavy rope, ready to be used for maklng connection either with the    an aircraft, she should act as mdlcated m the Immediately preced-
ship in distress or with survival craft                             ng paragraph and also relay the message to the nearest Coast
 (231) Aircraft procedures for directing surface craft to scene    Radio Station Moreover, a ship which has received a distress
of distress incident -The following procedures performed In    message direct from an aircraft and is going to the rescue should
sequence by an aircraft mean that the aircraft is directing a surface    take a bearing on the transmission and  form the Coast Radio
craft toward the scene of a distress inmcdent,                     Station and other ships in the vicinity of the call sign of the dis
       (232) (a) Circling the surface craft at least once          tressed aircraft and the time at which the distress message was
                                                                     received followed by the bearing and time at which the signal
 (233)  (b) Crossing the projected course of the surface craftd                        y                                      g
close ahead at low altitude, rocking the wings, opening and clos-              ceased
ing the throttle, or changing the propeller pitch                    (247)  7  When an aircraft decides to ditch min the vicinity of a
 (234)  (C) Heading in the direction in which the surface craft is    ship     the ship should
                            The surface craft should acknowledge the signal by  (248) (a) Transmit homing bearings to the aircraft or (if so
to be directed The surface craft should acknowledge the signal by
                                                                     required) transmit signals enabling the aircraft to take Its own
changing course and following the aircraft If, for any reason, It is
impossible to follow, the surface craft should hoist the interna-   earngs
tlonal code flag NOVEMBER  or use any other signaling means          (249)  (b) By day make black smoke
                 ~~~available to indicate this  ~(250)  (c) By night, direct a searchlight vertically and turn on all
available to mdlcate this
                                                                     deck lights Care must be taken not to direct a searchhght toward
 (235) The following procedures performed by an aircraft mean    the aicraft, which mght dazzle the pilot
that the assistance of the surface craft is no longer required       (251)  8 Dtch         arcrafts d cult    dangerous A ship
 (236)  (a) Crossing the wake of the surface craft close astern at a    which knows that an aircraft tends to ditch should be prepared to
low altitude rocking the wings, opemng and closing the throttle or    give the pilot the following mformatlon
changming the propeller pitch                                        (252)  (a) Wddlrecon andforce
 (237) Since modern Jet-engined aircraft cannot make the charac-    (25)  () Windirection    and  length of pmary and second-
tenstic sound associated with opening and closing the throttle, or    ary swell systems
changing propeller pitch, ships should be alert to respond to the    (254)  (c) Other pertent weather mformaton
signals without the sounds when jets or turboprop aircraft are      (255)  The pilot of an aircraft wil choose his own ditching head-
                                                                     mvolved  mg If this is known by the ship, she should set course parallel to
 (238)  Surface ship procedures for assisting aircraft in dis-    the ditching heading Otherwise the ship should set course parallel
tress                                                              to the main swell system and into the wind component if any
 (239)  1 When an aircraft transmits a distress message by radio    (256)  9 A land plane may break up immediately on striking the
the first transmission is generally made on the designated air/    water and liferafts may be damaged The ship should therefore,
ground enroute frequency in use at the time between the aircraft    have a lifeboat ready for launching, and if possible boarding nets
and aeronautical station The aircraft may change to another fre-    should be lowered from the ship and heaving lines made ready in
quency, possibly another enroute frequency or the aeronautical    the ship and the lifeboat Survivors of the aircraft may have bright
emergency frequencies of 121 50 MHz or 243 MHz In an emer-    colored hfeJackets and location aids
gency, it may use any other available frequency to estabhsh con-     (257)  10  The method of recovering survivors must be left to
tact with any land, mobile or direction-finding station            the judgment of the master of the ship carrying out the rescue
 (240)  2 There is liaison between Coast Radio Stations aeronau-    operation
tical units, and land-based search and rescue orgamzations Mer-      (258)  11 It should be borne in nmnd that rmhtary aircraft are
chant ships will ordinanly be informed of aircraft casualties at sea    often fitted with ejection seat mechanisms Normally, their aircrew
by broadcast messages from Coast Radio Stations made on the    will use their ejection seats rather than ditch Should such an air-
international distress frequency of 2182 kHz Ships may, however    craft ditch, rather than the aircrew ball out and it becomes neces
become aware of the casualty by receiving                          sary to remove them from their ejection seats while still in the
 (241)  (a) An SOS message from an aircraft in distress which is    aircraft, care should be taken to avoid tnggenng off the seat mech-
able to transmit on radiotelephone on 2182 kHz                     amsms The activating handles are invariably indicated by red and
 (242)  (b) A message from a SAR aircraft                          or black/yellow colonng
 (243)  3  For the purpose of emergency communications with         (259)  12 A survivor from an aircraft casualty who is recovered
aircraft special attention is called to the possiblhty of conducting    may be able to give informaton which will assist in the rescue of
direct communications on 2182 kHz if both ship and aircraft are    other survivors Masters are therefore asked to put the following
so equipped                                                        questions to survivors and to communicate the answers to a Coast
 (244) 4 An aircraft in distress will use any means at its disposal    Radio Station They should also give the position of the rescuing
to attract attention, make known its position, and obtain help,    ship and the time when the survivors were recovered
including some of the signals prescribed by the applicable Navlga    (260)  (a) What was the time and date of the casualty9
tion Rules                                                           (261)  (b) Did you ball out or was the aircraft ditched9





                                                   1  GENERAL INFORMATION                                                         11


 (262)  (C) If you bailed out at what altitude7                      (284)  (1) If possible, have the patient moved to a position as
 (263)  (d) How many others did you see leave the aircraft by    close to the hoist area as his condition will permnt-time Is Impor-
parachute9                                                          tant
 (264) (e) How many ditched with the aircraft? (285)  (2) Normally if a litter (stretcher) Is required It will be
 (265)  (f) How many did you see leave the aircraft after ditch-    necessary to move the patient to the special litter which will be
ing9                                                                lowered by the hehcopter Be prepared to do this as quickly as
 (266)  (g) How many survivors did you see m the water?             possible Be sure the patient is strapped m, face up, and with a life
 (267)  (h) What flotation gear had they?                           Jacket on (If his condition will pernt)
 (268)  (1) What was the total number of persons aboard the air-     (286)  (3) Be sure that the patient is tagged to indicate what
craft prior to the accident9                                        medication, if any, was administered to him and when It was
 (269)  () What caused the emergency7                               admimstered
 (270)  Helicopter evacuation of personnel -Helicopter evacua        (287)  (4) Have patient s medical record and necessary papers m
                                                                    an envelope or package ready for transfer with the patient
tlon usually performed by the Coast Guard, Is a hazardous opera-
tion to the patient and to the flight crew, and should only be        (288)  (5) Again, if the patient s condition pernuts, be sure he is
                                                                    weanng a lfe jacket
attempted m event of very serious illness or injury Provide the           ng a life jacket
doctor on shore with all the information you can concerning the       (289) (6) Change the vessel's course to permit the ship to ride as
                                                                    easily as possible with the wind on the bow, preferably on the port
patient, so that an intelligent evaluation can be made concerning
                                                                    bow Try to choose a course to keep the stack gases clear of the
the need for evacuation Most rescue helicopters can proceed less
than 150 rmles offshore (a few new helicopters can travel 250 to    hoist area Once establshed, maitai course and speed
300 miles out to sea), dependent on weather conditions and other      (290) (7) Reduce speed to ease ship's motion, but maintain
variables If an evacuation Is necessary, the vessel must be pre-    steerageway
pared to proceed within range of the helicopter, and should be        (291) (8) If you do not have radio contact with the helicopter,
familiar with the preparations which are necessary prior to and    when you are m all respects ready for the hoist, signal the hehcop-
after its arnval                                                    ter in with a come on  with your hand, or at night by flashlight
 (271) When requesting hehcopter assistance                         signals
                                                                      (292)  (9) Allow basket or stretcher to touch deck prior to
 (272) (1) Give the accurate position, time, speed, course
weather conditions, sea conditions wind direction and velocity,    handling to avoid static shock
    type of vessel, voice and CW frequency for your ship             1293)  (10) If a trail line is dropped by the hehcopter, guide the
             (273) (2) If no t   already provided, give  compete  medial m basket or stretcher to the deck with the line keep the line free at
 (273)  (2) If not already provided, give complete medical mfor-    alltmes This ie will not cause shock
mation mcluding whether or not the patient slb ambulatory             (294) (tm ) Place the patient in basket, slttg with his hands
 (274)  (3) If you are beyond helicopter range, advise your diver-    clear of the sides or m the litter, as described above Signal the
sion intentions so that a rendezvous point may be selected          hehcopter hoist operator when ready for the hoist Patient should
 (275) (4) If there are changes to any items reported earler,    signal by a nodding of the head If he Is able Deck personnel give
advise the rescue agency Immediately Should the patient die    thumbs up
before the arrival of the helicopter, be sure to advise those assist-  (295)  (12) If it is necessary to take the htter away from the hoist
ing you                                                             point, unhook the hoist cable and keep it free for the helicopter to
 (276) Preparations prior to the arrival of the helicopter          haul in Do not secure cable or trail hne to the vessel or attempt
 (277)  (1) Provide continuous radio guard on 2182 kHz or specl-   to move stretcher without unhooking
bed voice frequency, if possible The helicopter normally cannot       (296)  (13) When patient is strapped into the stretcher, signal the
operate CW                                                          helicopter to lower the cable attach cable to stretcher sling (bn-
 (278)  (2) Select and clear the most suitable hoist area, prefera-    dle), then signal the hoist operator when the patient is ready to
bly aft on the vessel with a mmlmum of 50 feet (15 2 meters)    hoist Steady the stretcher so it will not swing or turn
radius of clear deck This must include the securing of loose gear,    (297)  (14) If a trail hne is attached to the basket or stretcher, use
awnings, and antenna wires Trice up running rigging and booms       it to steady the patient as he is hoisted Keep your feet clear of the
If hoist is aft lower the flag staff                                lme and keep the hne from becoming entangled
  (279)  (3) If the hoist is to take place at night, light the pickup  (298) Medical advice and/or evacuation -In the event a master
areas as well as possible Be sure you do not shine any lights on    of a vessel requires medical advice and/or there is a potential of
the helicopter, so that the pilot is not blinded If there are any    evacuation the followmg should be volunteered by the master
obstructions in the vicinity, put a hght on them so the pilot will be  (299)  Vessel s name and call sign
aware of their positions                                              (300)  Vessel s position and time at position
  (280)  (4) Point searchlights vertically to aid the flight crew in  (301)  Vessel s course speed and next port and estimated time of
locating the ship and turn them off when the helicopter is on the    arrival (ETA)
scene                                                                 (302) Patient s name, nationality, age, race and sex
  (281)  (5) Be sure to advise the helicopter of the location of the  (303) Patient s respiration, pulse and temperature
pickup area on the ship before the hehcopter arrves, so that the      (304)  Patient s symptoms and nature of illness
pilot may make his approach to aft, amidships, or forward as          (305) Any known history of similar illness
required                                                              (306)  Location and type of paun
  (282)  (6) There will be a high noise level under the hehcopter     (307) Medichcal supphes carried on board vessel
so voice commumcations on deck are almost Impossible Arrange          (308)  Medication given to patient
a set of hand signals among the crew who will assist                  (309)  Weather
  (283)  Hoist operations                                             (310) Communucation schedule and frequency






12                                               1  GENERAL INFORMATION


 (311) Coast Guard droppable, floatable pumps -The Coast    casts with virtually complete coverage of the approaches and
Guard often provides vessels m distress with emergency pumps by    coastal waters of the Umnted States, Puerto Rico, and the U S Vlr-
either making parachute drops by lowenng on helicopter hoist, or    gin Islands
by dehverinng by vessel The most commonly used type of pump        (322) Urgent and safety radiotelephone broadcasts of Impor-
comes complete in a sealed alurmnum drum about half the size of    tant Notice to Mariners items, storm warnings and other vital
a 50-gallon oil drum One single lever on top opens it up Don't be    marine information are transmitted upon receipt and urgent
smoking as there may be gas fumes inside the can The pump will    broadcasts are repeated 15 minutes later additional broadcasts are
draw about 90 gallons per minute There should be a waterproof    made at the discretion of the onginator Urgent broadcasts are
flashlight on top of the pump for mght use Operating instructions    preceded by the urgent signal PAN-PAN (PAHN-PAHN, spoken
are provided inside the pump container                           three times) Both the urgent signal and message are transmit-
 (312) Preparations for being towed by Coast Guard               ted on 2182 kHz and/or VHF-FM channel 16 Safety broad-
 (313) (1) Clear the forecastle area as well as you can          casts are preceded by the safety signal SECURITY (SAY-
 (314) (2) If a line-throwmg gun is used keep everyone out of    CURITAY, spoken three times) The safety signal is given on
the way until line clears the boat The Coast Guard vessel will    2182 kHz and/or VHF-FM channel 16, and the message is
blow a police whistle or otherwise warn you before finng         given on 2670 kHz and/or VHF-FM channel 22A
 (315) (3) Have matenal ready for chafing gear                    (323) Scheduled radiotelephone broadcasts include routine
                                                                 weather, small-craft advisories storm warnings navigational
 (316) Radar reflectors on small craft -Operators of disabled    information and other advisories Short-range broadcasts are
wooden craft and persons adrift m rubber rafts or boats that are, or    made on 2670 kHz and/or VHF-FM channel 22A, following a
may consider themselves to be, the object of a search, should hoist    prehliminary call on 2182 kHz and/or VHF-FM channel 16 (See
on a halyard or otherwise place aloft as high as possible any    appendix for a list of stations and their broadcast frequencies and
metallic object that would assist their detection by radar Coast    times for the area covered by this Coast Pilot)
Guard cutters and aircraft are radar equipped and thus are able to  (324) Weather information is not normally broadcast by the
continue searching in darkness and dunng other penods of low    Coast Guard on VHF-FM channel 22A in areas where NOAA
visibility It is advisable for coastal fishing boats yachts, and other    Weather Radio service is available See note below regarding
small craft to have efficient radar reflectors permanently installed    VHF-FM channel 22A
aboard the vessel                                                 (325) HF single-sideband broadcasts of high seas weather infor-
 (317) Filing Cruising schedules -Small-craft operators should    mation is available on the (carrier) frequencies 4428 7, 6506 4
prepare a cruising plan before starting on extended tnps and leave    8765 4, 13113 2, and 17307 3 kHz from Portsmouth VA and San
it ashore with a yacht club manna, friend, or relative It is advls-    Francisco, CA
able to use a checkmg-m procedure by telephone for each point      (326) Narrow-band direct printing (radio telex or sitor) broad-
specified in the cruising plan Such a trip schedule is vital for    casts of NAVAREA and other navigational warnings are transmit-
deternimng if a boat is overdue and will assist matenally in locat    ted on the following assigned frequencies
ing a missing craft in the event search and rescue operations      (327) Atlantic Ice reports 5320, 8502, and 12750 kHz
become necessary                                                   (328) Other Atlantic warnings 8490, 16968 8 kHz
 (318) Medical advice-Free medical advice Is furnished to sea-    (329) Pacific 87105, 87145 8718, 13077, 130845  17203
men by radio through the cooperation of Governmental and com-    22567, and 22574 5 kHz
merclal radio stations whose operators receive and relay messages  (330) HF radlofacslmile broadcasts of weather and ice charts are
prefixed RADIOMEDICAL from ships at sea to the U S Coast    made on the following frequencies
Guard and/or directly to a hospital and then radio the medical     (331) Atlantic 3242, 7530 8502 (ice only), 12750 (ice only)
advice back to the ships (See appendix for list of radio stations    kHz
that provide this service)                                         (332) Pacific 4298 (Kodiak), 4336  8459 (Kodiak)  8682
                                                                 12730, 17151 2 kHz
RADIO NAVIGATION WARNINGS AND WEATHER                              (333) National Standard Abbreviations for Broadcasts -A
 (319) Marine radio warnings and weather are disseminated by    listing of Standard Abbreviations for Textual Maritime Safety
many sources and through several types of transmissions Morse    Broadcasts is contained in tables T-16 through T-18 These abbre-
code radiotelegraph broadcasts of navigational warnings and other    vlations were jointly approved by the U S Coast Guard, National
advisories are not described, since these transmissions are nor-    Weather Service, Defense Mapping Agency, and the Radio Tech
mally copied only by professional radio operators U S Coast    mcal Commusslon for Mantunime Services In addition to appeanng
Guard NAVTEX, high-frequency (HF) narrow-band direct pnnt-    m radio broadcasts of the U S Coast Guard and National Weather
ing (radio telex) HF radlofacslmlle, and radiotelephone broad-    Service, they appear in Notices to Mariners of the U S Coast
casts of maritime safety information are summarized here (For    Guard and Defense Mapping Agency, and in NAVTEX
complete information on radio warnings and weather see             (334) Warning Regarding Coast Guard VHF-FM Channel
DMAHTC Pub 117 and the joint National Weather Service/Navy    22A Broadcasts -The Coast Guard broadcasts urgent and routine
publication Selected Worldwide Manne Weather Broadcasts )        maritime safety information to ships on channel 22A (157 10
 (320) Frequency units -Hertz (Hz), equal to one cycle per    MHz), the ship station transmit frequency portion of channel 22
second has been generally adopted for radio frequencies, accord-    of Appendix 18 of the International Telecommunications Union
ingly, frequencies formerly given m the Coast Pilot in kilocycles    (ITU) Radio Regulations This simplex use of channel 22A is not
(kc) and megacycles (mc) are now stated in kilohertz (kHz) and    compatible with the international duplex arrangement of the chan-
Megahertz (MHz), respectively                                    nel (coast transmit 161 70 MHz, ship transmit 157 10 MHz) As a
 (321) Coast Guard radio stations -Coast Guard radio stations    result many foreign flag vessels having radios tuned to the inter-
provide urgent, safety and scheduled marine information broad-    national channel 22 can not receive these mantime safety broad-






                                                  1  GENERAL INFORMATION                                                        13


casts A 1987 Coast Guard survey of foreign vessels in U S          appendix for a list of these stations in the area covered by this
waters mdicated that half of foreign vessels m U S waters did not    Coast Pilot )
have equipment on board capable of recelvmg channel 22A broad-      (342)  Commercial radiotelephone coast stations -Broadcasts
casts                                                              of coastal weather and warnings are made by some commercial
 (335)  Operators of vessels which transit U S waters and who do    radiotelephone coast stations (marine operators) on the normal
not have VHF-FM radios tunable to USA channel 22A are urged    transmitting frequencies of the stations Vessels with suitable
to either obtain the necessary equipment to monitor the radlotele-    receivers and desiring this service may determine the frequencies
phone frequency 2182 kHz and tune to 2670 kHz when a broad-    and schedules of these broadcasts from their local stations or from
cast is announced, or to carry a NAVTEX receiver                   Selected Worldwide Manne Weather Broadcasts or from the senes
 (336)  NAVTEX -NAVTEX is a mantime radio warning system    of Manne Weather Services Charts pubhshed by NWS
consisting of a series of coast stations transmlttmg radio teletype  (343) Local broadcast-band radio stations -Many local radio
(CCIR Recommendation 476 standard narrow band direct pnnt-    stations in the standard AM and FM broadcast band give local
mg, sometimes called Sltor or ARQ/FEC) safety messages on the    marine weather forecasts from NWS on a regular schedule These
internatonal standard medium frequency 518 kHz  Coast stations    statons are hsted on the series of Manne Weather Services Charts
transmit during preset time slots so as to rmnlmmuze interference    publshed by NWS
with one another Routine messages are normally broadcast four       (344) Reports from ships -The master of every U S ship
to six times daily Urgent messages are broadcast upon receipt,    equipped with radio transmitting apparatus, on meeting with a
provided that an adJacent station is not transmitting  Since the    tropical cyclone, dangerous ice, subfreezing air temperatures with
broadcast uses the medium frequency band, a typical station ser-    gale force winds causing severe ice accretion on superstructures
vice radius ranges from 100-500 NM day and night  Interference    derelict, or any other direct danger to navigation, is required to
from or receipt of stations farther away occasionally occurs at    cause to be transmitted a report of these dangers to ships In the
night                                                              vicinity and to the appropriate Government agencies
 (337) Each NAVTEX message broadcast contains a four-charac-        (345) During the West Indies hurricane season, June 1 to
ter header describing identification of station (first character),    November 30, ships in the Gulf of Mexico, Canbbean Sea area
message content (second character), and message serial number    southern North Atlanti Ocean, and the Pacific waters west of
(third and fourth characters) This header allows the mnucroproces-    Central Amenca and Mexco are urged to cooperate with NWS in
sor m the shlpborne receiver to screen messages, selectmg  only    furnishing these special reports in order that warnings to shipping
those stations relevant to the user, messages of subject categories    and coastal areas may be Issued
needed by the user and messages not previously received by the
user Selected messages are prnted on a roll of paper as received,    (346)  Tme Signals -The National Institute of Standards and
to be ready by the marner at his convenience  Unwanted mes-    Technology broadcasts time signals contminuously day and night
sages are suppressed  Suppression of unwanted messages is more    from Its radio stations WWV, near Fort Collns Colorado
and more important to the mariner as the number of messages,    (4049'49"N  105002'27"W) on frequencies of 2 5, 5 10, 15 and
including rebroadcasts, increases yearly With NAVTEX, a man-    20 MHz  and WWVH, Kekaha, Kaual Hawaii (21'59'26"N,
ner will no longer find it necessary to hsten to, or sift through, a    159046'00"W) on frequencies 2 5, 5, 10 and 15 MHz  Services
large number of irrelevant data to obtain the mformatlon necessary    include time announcements, standard time Intervals standard
for safe navigation                                                audiho frequencies, Omega Navigation System status reports geo-
                                                                  physical alerts, BCD (bmary coded decimal) tume code UT1 time
 (338)  Vessels regulated by the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS)    physical al      erts, BCD (binary coded decal) tim e o de UT  time
Convention as amended m 1988 (cargo vessels over 300 tons and    corrections, and high seas storm iformation
passenger vessels, on international voyages), and operating in       (347) Tu me announcements are made every miute commenc-
areas where NAVTEX service is available, have been required to    mg at 15 seconds before the minute by a female voice and at 7/2
carry NAVTEX receivers since 1 August 1993  The USCG dis-    seconds before the mmute by a male Voice from WWVH and
continued broadcasts of safety information over MF Morse fre-    WWV  respectively The  tme given s   Coord            ated Universal
quencles on that date                                              Time (UTC) and referred to the time at Greenwlch, England, l e
                                                                  Greenwich Mean Time
 (339) The USCG voice broadcasts (CH 22A), often of more            (348) NIST Time and Frequency Dlsseminaton Services,
inshore and harbor information, will remain unaffected by NAV-     Special Publication 432, gives a detailed description of the time
TEX  With NAVTEX, manners who do not have the knowledge    and frequency dissemnatlon services of the National Institute of
of Morse code necessary to receive safety messages, or who have    Standards and Technology  Smgle copies may be obtamed upon
difficulty receiving them on a timely basis should find a slgmfi-    request from the National Institute of Standards and Technology
cant advantage in owmng a NAVTEX receiver Manners not able    Time and Frequency Dlvlsion Boulder, CO 80303 Quantities
to man a radio on a 24-hour basis in order to hear cntical warning    may be obtained from the Government Pnting Office (see appen-
messages (e g, commercial fishermen) should also find a slgnifi-    dLx for address)
cant advantage m owning a NAVTEX receiver
 (340)  See appendix, U S NAVTEX Transnutting Stations, for a    NAUTICAL CHARTS
list of NAVTEX broadcast stations (Pacific Ocean) and message
content                                                             (349) Reporting chart deficiencies -Users are requested to
 (341) NOAA Weather Radio -The National Weather Service    report all significant observed discrepancies in and desirable addi-
operates VHF-FM radio stations usually on frequencies 162 40,    tions to NOS nautical charts including depth information in pn-
162 475, or 162 55 MHz, to provide continuous recorded weather    vately maintained channels and basins, obstructions, wrecks, and
broadcasts These broadcasts are available to those with suitable    other dangers new landmarks or the nonexistence or relocation of
receivers within about 40 miles of the antenna site (See the    charted ones, uncharted fixed private aids to navigation, and dele-






































                                                                 14O                         2
k                                        t                         I                      I                       I                          IIT"







                                                   1  GENERAL INFORMATION                                                        15


tlons or additions of small-craft facilities All such reports should    lar and sudden changes in depth indicate conditions associated
be sent to                                                         with pinnacle rocks coral heads, or boulders
 (350)  Chief, Manne Chart Division (N/CS2)                         (362) Information charted as "reported should be treated with
 (351) National Ocean Service NOAA                                 caution m navigating the area, because the actual conditions have
 (352)  1315 East-West Highway, Station 7317                       not been verified by government surveys
 (353)  Silver Spnng, MD  20910-3282                                (363) The date of a chart is of vital importance to the navigator
                                                                    When charted information becomes obsolete further use of the
 (354) Chart symbols and abbreviatlons -The standard sym-
 bols and abbreatons  approved for use on all regular nautical    chart for navigation may be dangerous Announcements of new
bols and abbreviations approved for use on all regular nautical
                 charts published by the Defense Mapping Agency and NOS are    editions of nautical charts are usually pubhlished m notices to mar-
charts published by the Defense Mapping Agency and NOS are
contained In Chart No  1, United States of America Nautical    iners The publication, Dates of Latest Editions, published quar-
Chart Symbols and Abbreviations This publication is available    terly, gives the edition and date of the latest edition of charts
afrom NOS Dilstbuti on Division (see Sales Information   appen-    published by NOS  It is distributed to sales agents, free copies
dix )                                                              may be obtained from the sales agents or by writing to Distribu-
                                                                    htion Division (N/ACC3), National Ocean Service (See appendix
 (355) On certain foreign charts reproduced by the Umnted States
and on foreign charts generally, the symbols and abbreviations    f or   address 
used may differ from U S approved standards It is, therefore, rec-  (364) Source diagrams - The Coast and Geodetic Survey has
omm                                                              t hat navigatorused may d fromU   approve standardsIt  therforerecently committed to adding a source diagram to all charts
ommended that navigators who acquire and use foreign charts and    1 500 000 scale and larger Ths diagram is  tended to provide
reproductions procure the symbol sheet or Chart No  1 produced
byreproductions procure the s ame foreign agency                   te manner with additional information about the density and reh-
                                                                   ability of the sounding data depicted on the chart The adequacy
 (356) The manner is warned that the buoyage systems shapes        with which sounding data depicts the configuration of the bottom
and colors used by other countries often have a different slgnifi  depends on the followmg factors
cance than the U S system                                            (365) *Survey technology employed (sounding and navigation
 (357)  Chart Datum -Chart Datum is the particular tidal datum    equpment)
to which soundings and depth curves on a nautical chart or bathy-   (366)  *Survey specifications in effect (prescribed survey line
metric map are referred The tidal datum of Mean Low Water has    spacing and sounding interval)
been used as Chart Datum along the east coast of the United States  (367)   Typeofbottom(e g,rockywithexistenceofsubmerged
and in parts of the West Indies It is presently being changed to    pinnacles, flat sandy, coastal deposits subject to frequent episodes
Mean Lower Low Water, with no adjustments to soundings, shore-    of deposition and erosion)
lines, low water lines, clearances, heights elevations, or i the    (368) Depth mformation on nautical charts is based on sound-
application of tide predictions for navigational purposes The tidal    ings from the latest available hydrographi survey, which    many
datum of Mean Lower Low Water is used as Chart Datum along    cases may be quite old The age of hydrographic surveys support-
the Gulf and west coasts the coasts of Alaska Hawaii, and other    ing nautical charts vanes  Approximately 60 percent of mshore
Umted States' and United Nations islands of the Pacific, and m     hydrography was acquired by leadline (pre 1940) sounding tech-
parts of the West Indies                                           nology
 (358) Mean Low Water is defined as the arithmetic mean of all      (369) The sounding information portrayed on NOAA nautical
the low water heights observed over the National Tidal Datum    charts is considered accurate but does not, as noted above repre-
Epoch Mean Lower Low Water is defined as the arithmetic mean    sent a complete picture of the seafloor because older sounding
of the lower low water height of each tidal day (24 84 hours)    technologies only collected discrete samples For example a lead-
observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch The National    line survey provides only a single point sounding  Electromc
Tidal Datum Epoch is the specific 19-year period adopted by the    echo sounders, which came into common use during the 1940 s,
National Ocean Service NOAA, as the official time segment over    collected continuous soundings along the path of the survey ves-
which tide observations are taken and reduced to obtain mean val-    sel, but no information between survey lines  Full bottom cover-
ues for tidal datums The present Epoch is 1960 through 1978        age technology which is transitiomng into use as a supplemental
 (359) Accuracy of a nautical chart -The value of a nautical    method m the early 1990's, will make leadhne and conventional
chart depends upon the accuracy of the surveys on which it is    echo sounder technologies obsolete in areas of complex bathyme-
based The chart reflects what was found by field surveys and what    try
has been reported to NOS Headquarters The chart represents gen-     (370) The following shows the eras of survey technology and
eral conditions at the time of surveys or reports and does not nec-    their impact on the adequacy with which the bottom configuration
essanly portray present conditions Significant changes may have    is portrayed
taken place since the date of the last survey or report              (371) Prior to 1940  The majonty of survey data acquired pnor
 (360) Each sounding represents an actual measure of depth and    to 1940 consisted of leadlne soundings which were positioned
location at the time the survey was made and each bottom charac-    using horizontal sextant angles  This poslhtionming method is con-
tenstic represents a sampling of the surface layer of the sea bottom    sidered to be accurate
at the time of sampling Areas where sand and mud prevail, espe-      (372) A deficiency with pre-1940 data exists in the leadline
clally the entrances and approaches to bays and rivers exposed to    sounding method because it represents discrete single-point sam-
strong tidal current and heavy seas are subject to continual    plng  Depths of areas between or outside of leadline sounding
change                                                             points can only be inferred or estimated leaving the possibility of
 (361) In coral regions and where rocks and boulders abound It   undetected features, especially in areas of irregular relief
is always possible that surveys may have failed to find every        (373) 1940 to present  During this period sounding data has
obstruction Thus when navigating such waters, customary routes    been collected using continuous recording single-beam echo
and channels should be followed and areas avoided where irregu-    sounders which yield a graphic record of the entire sounding







16                                                 1. GENERAL INFORMATION


line-not just isolated points. Using this graphic record, features    (377) Referring to the accompanying sample Source Diagram
which fall between the standard position fixes can be inserted into    and the above discussion of survey methods over time, a mariner
the data set. Positioning of the sounding vessel in this era has var-    transiting from Point X to Point Y, along the track indicated by the
ied from horizontal sextant angles to modem Global Positioning    dotted line, would have the following information available about
System satellite fixes.                                             the relative quality of the depth information shown on the chart.
 (374) Although the sampling is continuous along the track of the    (378)  -Point X lies in an area surveyed by NOS in 1926-27 at a
sounding vessel, features can be missed between sounding lines.     scale of 1:100,000. The sounding data would have been collected
                                                                    by leadline. Depths between sounding points can only be inferred,
 (375)  The spacing of sounding lines required to survey an area    and undetected features might exist between the sounding points
depends on several factors; such as water depths, bottom configu-    in areas of irregular relief. Caution should be exercised.
ration, survey scale, general nature of the area, and the purpose of  (379)  *The transit continues to cross areas surveyed by NOS in
the survey. For example, a 1:10,000-scale survey conducted in an    the 1920's using leadline survey technology. As depths decrease,
estuary will typically have 100-meter line spacing requirements,    the line spacing decreases, but depths still can only be inferred
but may be reduced to 50 meters or less to adequately develop an    between sounding points. Shoals and undetected features might
irregular bottom, shoal, or some other feature that may present a    exist between the sounding points in areas of irregular relief. Cau-
hazard to navigation. Also, hydrographic project instructions for    tion must still be exercised.
surveys may have required line spacing that deviates from these       (380) *The transit ends in an area charted from miscellaneous
general specifications.                                             surveys. These surveys may be too numerous to depict or vary in
 (376) The following table shows the various sounding technolo-    age, reliability, origin, or technology used. No inferences about
gies, line spacings, and areas or depths for each given period of    the fitness of the data can be made in this area from the diagram.
hydrographic surveying. The terminology used to describe the          (381) Referring again to the accompanying sample Source Dia-
different types of bottom in the table are derived from the first    gram, and the above discussion of survey methods over time, a
through fourth editions of the Hydrographic Manual and Hydro-    mariner could choose to transit from Point X to Point Y, along the
graphic Survey Guideline No. 69.                                    track shown with a dashed line.



   ERA                       SOUNDING TECHNOLOGY                     MAXIMUM LINE SPACING  AREAS OR DEPTHS
   PRE-1940                  Leadline                                      50 Meters                  Anchorages, Channel Lines
                                                                                                      Open Coast
                                                                                                      Even Botton
                                                                     200-300 Meters                    0-10 Fathoms
                                                                          0.5 Mile                    10-15 Fathoms
                                                                          1-4 Miles                   15-100 Fathoms

                                                                     Reduced as Necessary             Uneven Bottom
   1940 TO 1989              Continuous Recording Echo-sounder                                        Harbors & Restricted Areas
                                                                       50 Meters                      Shoal Development
                                                                      100 Meters                     <20 Fathoms
                                                                      200 Meters                      20-30 Fathoms
                                                                      400 Meters                      >30 Fathoms
                                                                                                      Open Coast
                                                                                                      Irregular Bottom
                                                                      100 Meters                      <20 Fathoms (Rocky points,
                                                                                                      spits & channel entrances)
                                                                                                      Smooth Bottom
                                                                      200 Meters                      <20 Fathoms (All Other Areas)
                                                                      400 Meters                       20-30 Fathoms
                                                                      800 Meters                       30-110 Fathoms
                                                                     1600 Meters                      110-500 Fathoms
   1989 TO PRESENT           Continuous Recording Echo-sounder                                        Harbors & Restricted Areas
                             (Metrication)                            100 Meters                      <30 Meters
                                                                      200 Meters                      30-50 Meters
                                                                      400 Meters                      >50 Meters

                                                                                                      Open Coast
                                                                      100 Meters                     <30 Meters (Rocky points, spits
                                                                                                      & channel entrances)
                                                                      200 Meters                      <30 Meters (All Other Areas)
                                                                      400 Meters                       30-50 Meters
                                                                      800 Meters                       50-200 Meters
                                                                     1600 Meters                      200-900 Meters







                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                          17


                                                                     (385) *The transit ends in an area where the charted hydrography
                  SOURCE  DIAGRAM                                   is derived from miscellaneous surveys. These surveys may be too
                                                                   numerous to depict or vary in age, reliability, origin, or technology
                                     ~~~souincca~                 ~used. No inferences about the fitness of the data can be made in
                                                                   this area from the diagram.
     l Miscellaneous Surveys      f   1992   NOS   1 20,000
    b  1926   NOS   1:40000       g   t926-27 NOS   1:10,000          (386)  By choosing to transit along the track shown by the dashed
                       NOS  ~~~~~1:100.000                         lie      mariner wOul 1:100,000,
    c  1958   NOS   1:80.000 line, the mariner would elect to take advantage of more recent sur-
    d  1926-28 NOS   1:8,000                                         vey information collected with more modem technology.
    e  1926-27 NOS   1:40,000                                         (387)  U.S. Nautical Chart Numbering System.-This chart
                                                                   numbering system, adopted by the National Ocean Service and the
                                                                   Defense Mapping Agency, provides for a uniform method of iden-
                               ï¿½Q    t  r~~~~~ /   ~~tifying charts published by both agencies. Nautical charts pub-
                                /(~~ J/b    \~~~~~~lished by the Defense Mapping Agency are identified in the Coast
                                                                   Pilot by an asterisk preceding the chart number.
                                                                     (388)  Corrections to charts.-It is essential for navigators to
                                          -  t 1    f\   f  46-    keep charts corrected through information published in the notices
                                                                   to mariners, especially since the NOS no longer hand-corrects
                                       \/~ ~~            ~        ~ ~ *  \  ~charts prior to distribution.
                             I/~~~ >                                   |~~~~~(389)  Caution in using small-scale charts.-Dangers to naviga-
              /             . \                                     tion cannot be shown with the same amount of detail on small-
                                                                   scale charts as on those of larger scale. Therefore, the largest scale
                                    I/~~~~~~ \   (        4Du       chart of an area should always be used.
             /          /         \       e  l(390)  The scales of nautical charts range from 1:2,500 to about
                                                                    1:5,000,000. Graphic scales are generally shown on charts with
            / 9                                                     scales of 1:80,000 or larger, and numerical scales are given on
                             ./  of          I                     ~~~smaller scale charts. NOS charts are classified according to scale
                              //.r~~~~~~~~~ 20'                     as follows:
                                                                     (391)  Sailing charts, scales 1:600,000 and smaller, are for use
                                                                  in fixing the mariner's position as he approaches the coast from
                                                               the open ocean, or for sailing between distant coastwise ports. On
                                                                   such charts the shoreline and topography are generalized and only
                      I/~~~~ ,#t~~~~~~~offshore soundings, and the principal lights, outer buoys, and
      /]/                                                   4.-     landmarks visible at considerable distances are shown.
                                                                     (392)  General charts, scales 1:150,000 to 1:600,000, are for
                     X'~~~~      /    {   /                         ~~~~~~~coastwise navigation outside of outlying reefs and shoals.
                                                                     (393)  Coast charts, scales 1:50,000 to 1:150,000 are for inshore
                                                                   navigation leading to bays and harbors of considerable width and
                                       Alp'~~         4p~ l4~      ~ for navigating large inland waterways.
           1*S        4p'       ~02' ï¿½V              0' z4F4a(394)  Harbor charts, scales larger than 1:50,000, are for har-
                                                                    bors, anchorage areas, and the smaller waterways.
                                                                     (395) Special charts, various scales, cover the Intracoastal
                                                                    waterways and miscellaneous small-craft areas.
                                                                     (396)  Blue tint in water areas.-A blue tint is shown in water
 (382)  *The transit again starts in an area surveyed by NOS in
                                                                    areas on many charts to accentuate shoals and other areas consild-
      1926-27 at a scale of 1:100,000. The sounding data would have    ered dangerous for navigation when using that particular chart.
been collected by leadline. Depths between sounding points can
      been collected by leadline. Depths between sounding points can    Since the danger curve varies with the intended purpose of a chart
only be inferred, and undetected features might exist between        a careful inspection should be made to determine the contour
                             a.                                    ~~~~~~~~~~~a careful inspection should be made to determine the contour
sounding points in areas of irregular relief. Caution should be    dept of the blue tint areas.
exercised.                                                             (397)  Caution on bridge and cable clearances.-For bascule
 (383)  *The transit then crosses an area surveyed by NOS in 1958    bridges whose spans do not open to a full vertical position, unlim-
at a scale of 1:80,000. The charted hydrography in this area would   ited overhead clearance is not available for the entire charted hori-
have been acquired by continuous recording single beam echo    zontal clearance when the bridge is open, due to the inclination of
sounder.  It is possible that features could have been missed    the drawspans over the channel.
between sounding lines, although echo sounders record all depths       (398)  The charted clearances of overhead cables are for the low-
along a sounding line with varying beam widths.                      est wires at normal high water unless otherwise stated. Vessels
 (384) *The transit then crosses an area surveyed by NOS in 1992    with masts, stacks, booms, or antennas should allow sufficient
at a scale of 1:20,000. The data is collected in metric units    clearance under power cables to avoid arcing.
acquired by continuous recording single beam echo sounder. It is       (399) Submarine cables and submerged pipelines cross many
possible that features could have been missed between sounding       waterways used by both large and small vessels, but all of them
lines, although echo sounders record all depths along a sounding     may not be charted. For inshore areas, they usually are buried
line with varying beam widths.                                       beneath the seabed, but for offshore areas, they may lie on the






18                                                1  GENERAL INFORMATION


ocean floor Warning signs are often posted to warn manners of    fish The reefs are constructed by dumping assorted junk ranging
their existence                                                    from old trolley cars and barges to scrap building material in areas
 (400) The installation of submarine cables or pipelines in U S    which may be of very small extent or may stretch a considerable
waters or the Continental Shelf of the United States is under the    distance along a depth curve, old automobile bodies are a com-
jurisdiction of one or more Federal agencies, depending on the    monly used material The Corps of Engineers must issue a permit,
nature of the mstallation They are shown on the charts when the    specifying the location and depth over the reef before such a reef
necessary information is reported to NOS and they have been rec    may be built However the reefbuilders adherence to permit
ommended for charting by the cognizant agency The chart sym-    speclfications can be checked only with a wire drag Fish havens
bols for submanne cable and pipeline areas are usually shown for    are outlined and labeled on the charts and show the minimum
inshore areas, whereas, chart symbols for submarine cable and    authorized depth when known Fish havens are tinted blue if they
pipeline routes may be shown for offshore areas Submarine    have a minimum authorized depth of 11 fathoms or less or if the
cables and pipelines are not described m the Coast Pilot           minimum authorized depth is unknown and they are in depths
 (401) In view of the serious consequences resulting from dam-    greater than 11 fathoms but still considered a danger to navigation
age to submarine cables and pipelines, vessel operators should    Navigators should be cautious about passing over fish havens or
take special care when anchornng, fishing, or engaging in under-    anchoring in their vicinity
water operations near areas where these cables or pipelines may      (410) Fishtrap areas are areas established by the Corps of Engi-
exist or have been reported to exist Manners are also warned that    neers, or State or local authority, in which traps may be built and
the areas where cables and pipelines were originally buried may    maintained according to established regulations The fish stakes
have changed and they may be exposed, extreme caution should    which may exist m these areas are obstructions to navigation and
be used when operating vessels in depths of water comparable to    may be dangerous The  limits of fishtrap areas and a cautionary
the vessel s draft                                                 note are usually charted Navigators should avoid these areas
 (402) Certain cables carry high voltage, while many pipelines      (411) Local magnetic disturbances -If measured values of
carry natural gas under high pressure or petroleum products Elec-    magnetic variation differ from the expected (charted) values by
trocution fire, or explosion with injury, loss of life, or a serious    several degrees, a magnetic disturbance note will be printed on the
pollution incident could occur if they are broached                chart The note will indicate the location and magmntude of the dis-
 (403) Vessels fouling a submarine cable or pipeline should    turbance but the indicated magnitude should not be considered as
attempt to clear without undue strain Anchors or gear that cannot    the largest possible value that may be encountered Large dlstur-
be cleared should be slipped but no attempt should be made to cut    bances are more frequently detected in the shallow waters near
a cable or plpelne                                                 land masses than on the deep sea Generally the effect of a local
 (404) Artificial obstructions to navigation -Disposal areas    magnetic disturbance diminishes rapidly with distance, but in
are designated by the Corps of Engineers for depostmng dredged    some locations there are multiple sources of disturbances and the
material where existing depths indcate that the intent is not to    effects may be distributed for many miles
cause sufficient shoaling to create a danger to surface navigation   (412) Compass roses on charts -Each compass rose shows the
The areas are charted without blue tint, and soundings and depth    date, magnetic variation, and the annual change m vanation Pnor
curves are retained                                                to the new edition of a nautical chart, the compass roses are
 (405) Disposal Sites are areas estabhshed by Federal regulation    reviewed Corrections for annual change and other revisions may
(40 CFR 220-229) in which dumping of dredged and fill material    be made as a result of newer and more accurate information On
and other nonbuoyant objects is allowed with the issuance of a    some general and sailing charts, the magnetic variation is shown
permit Dumping of dredged and fill material is supervised by the    by isogomc lines in addition to the compass roses
Corps of Engineers and all other dumping by the Environmental        (413) The Mercator projection used on most nautical charts
Protection Agency (EPA) (See Corps of Engmeers and Environ-    has straight-line meridians and parallels that intersect at right
mental Protection Agency, this chapter, and appendix for office    angles On any particular chart the distances between meridians
addresses )                                                        are equal throughout but distances between parallels increase pro-
 (406) Dumping Grounds are also areas that were established by    gressively from the Equator toward the poles, so that a straight
Federal regulation (33 CFR 205) However, these regulations have    line between any two points is a rhumb lihne This unique property
been revoked and the use of the areas dlscontinued These areas    of the Mercator projection is one of the main reasons why it is pre-
will continue to be shown on nautical charts until such time as    ferred by the manner
they are no longer considered to be a danger to navigation           (414) Echo soundings -Ships' echo sounders may indicate
 (407) Disposal Sites and Dumping Grounds are rarely men-    small variations from charted soundings, this may be due to the
tioned m the Coast Pilot, but are shown on nautical charts Man-    fact that various corrections (instrument corrections settlement
ners are advised to exercise caution in and m the vicinity of all    and squat, draft, and velocity corrections) are made to echo sound-
dumping areas                                                      ings m surveying which are not normally made m ordinary naviga-
 (408)  Spoil areas are for the purpose of depositing dredged    tion or to observational errors in reading the echo sounder
material, usually near and parallel to dredged channels, they are    Instrument errors vary between different equipment and must be
usually a hazard to navigation Spoil areas are usually charted    determined by calibration aboard ship Most types of echo sound-
from survey drawings from Corps of Engineers after-dredging sur-    ers are factory calibrated for a velocity of sound in water of 800
veys though they may originate from private or other Government    fathoms per second, but the actual velocity may differ from the
agency surveys Spoil areas are tinted blue on the charts and    calibrated velocity by as much as 5 percent, depending upon the
labeled and all soundings and depth curves are omitted Navlga-    temperature and sallmty of the waters m which the vessel is oper-
tors of even the smallest craft should avoid crossing spoil areas  ating the highest velocities are found in warm highly saline
 (409) Fish havens are established by private interests usually    water and the lowest in icy freshwater Velocity corrections for
sport fishermen, to simulate natural reefs and wrecks that attract    these vanations are deterrmned and applied to echo soundings dur-







                                                    1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                         19


ing hydrographic surveys. All echo soundings must be corrected        (421) Brilliant shore lights used for advertising and other pur-
for the vessel's draft, unless the draft correction has been set on    poses, particularly those in densely populated areas, make it diffi-
the echo sounder.                                                   cult to identify a navigational light.
 (415) Observational errors include misinterpreting false echos      (422) At short distances flashing lights may show a faint contin-
from schools of fish, seaweed, etc., but the most serious error    uous light between flashes.
which commonly occurs is where the depth is greater than the          (423) The distance of an observer from a light cannot be esti-
scale range of the instrument; a 400-fathom scale indicates 15    mated by its apparent intensity. The characteristics of lights in an
fathoms when the depth is 415 fathoms. Caution in navigation        area should always be checked in order that powerful lights visible
should be exercised when wide variations from charted depths are    in the distance will not be mistaken for nearby lights showing sim-
observed.                                                           ilar characteristics at low intensity such as those on lighted buoys.
                                                                      (424) The apparent characteristic of a complex light may change
AIDS TO NAVIGATION                                                  with the distance of the observer, due to color and intensity varia-
                                                                     tions among the different lights of the group. The characteristic as
                  (4    Reporting of defects in aids to navigation.-Promptly  charted and shown in the Light List may not be recognized until
 (416) Reporting of defects in aids to navigation.-Promptly
                                                                     nearer the light.
notify the nearest Coast Guard District Commander if an aid to    nearer the light.
                                                                      (425) Motion of a vessel in a heavy sea may cause a light to
navigation is observed to be missing, sunk, capsized, out of posi-    tnael aea                 ea  a    us e a  l htt
                                                                     alternately appear and disappear, and thus give a false characteris-
tion, damaged, extinguished, or showing improper characteristics  .
                                                                     tic.
 (417) Radio messages should be prefixed "Coast Guard" and           (426) Where lights have different colored sectors, be guided by
transmitted directly to any U.S. Government shore radio station    the correct bearing of the light; do not rely on being able to accu-
for relay to the Coast Guard District Commander. Merchant ships    rately observe the point at which the color changes. On either side
may send messages relating to defects noted in aids to navigation    of the line of demarcation of colored sectors there is always a
through commercial facilities only when they are unable to contact    small are of uncertain color.
a U.S. Government shore radio station. Charges for these mes-         (427) On some bearings from the light, the range of visibility of
sages will be accepted "collect" by the Coast Guard.                the light may be reduced by obstructions. In such cases, the
 (418) Lights.-The range of visibility of lights as given in the    obstructed arc might differ with height of eye and distance. When
Light Lists and as shown on the charts is the Nominal range,    a light is cut off by adjoining land and the arc of visibility is given,
which is the maximum distance at which a light may be seen in    the bearing on which the light disappears may vary with the dis-
clear weather (meteorological visibility of 10 nautical miles)    tance of the vessel from which observed and with the height of
expressed in nautical miles. The Light Lists give the Nominal    eye. When the light is cut off by a sloping hill or point of land, the
ranges for all Coast Guard lighted aids except range and direc-    light may be seen over a wider arc by a ship far off than by one
tional lights. Luminous range is the maximum distance at which    close to.
a light may be seen under the existing visibility conditions. By use  (428) Arcs of circles drawn on charts around a light are not
of the diagram in the Light Lists, Luminous range may be deter-    intended to give information as to the distance at which it can be
mined from the known Nominal range, and the existing visibility    seen, but solely to indicate, in the case of lights which do not show
conditions. Both the Nominal and Luminous ranges do not take    equally in all directions, the bearings between which the variation
into account elevation, observer's height of eye, or the curvature    of visibility or obscuration of the light occurs.
of the earth. Geographic range is a function of only the curvature    (429) Lights of equal candlepower but of different colors may be
of the earth and is determined solely from the heights above sea    seen at different distances. This fact should be considered not only
level of the light and the observer's eye; therefore, to determine    in predicting the distance at which a light can be seen, but also in
the actual Geographic range for a height of eye, the Geographic     identifying it.
range must be corrected by a distance corresponding to the height     (430)  Lights should not be passed close aboard, because in many
difference, the distance correction being determined from a table    cases riprap mounds are maintained to protect the structure against
of "distances of visibility for various heights above sea level."    ice damage and scouring action.
(See Light List or Coast Pilot table following appendix.) The max-    (43i) Many prominent towers, tanks, smokestacks, buildings,
imum distances at which lights can be seen may at times be    and other similar structures, charted as landmarks, display flashing
increased by abnormal atmospheric refraction and may be greatly    and/or fixed red aircraft obstruction lights. Lights shown from
decreased by unfavorable weather conditions such as fog, rain,    landmarks are charted only when they have distinctive characteris-
haze, or smoke. All except the most powerful lights are easily    tics to enable the mariner to positively identify the location of the
obscured by such conditions. In some conditions of the atmo-    charted structure.
sphere white lights may have a reddish hue. During weather con-       (432) Articulated lights.-An articulated light is a vertical pipe
ditions which tend to reduce visibility, colored lights are more    structure supported by a submerged buoyancy chamber and
quickly lost to sight than are white lights. Navigational lights    attached by a universal coupling to a weighted sinker on the seaf-
should be used with caution because of the following conditions    loor. The light, allowed to move about by the universal coupling,
that may exist:                                                     is not as precise as a fixed aid. However, it has a much smaller
  (419)  A light may be extinguished and the fact not reported to    watch circle than a conventional buoy, because the buoyancy
the Coast Guard for correction, or a light may be located in an iso-    chamber tends to force the pipe back to a vertical position when it
lated area where it will take time to correct.                      heels over under the effects of wind, wave, or current.
  (420) In regions where ice conditions prevail the lantern panes     (433) Articulated daybeacons.-Same description as for articu-
of unattended lights may become covered with ice or snow, which    lated lights (see above) except substitute daybeacon for light.
will greatly reduce the visibility and may also cause colored lights  (434)  Bridge lights and clearance gages.-The Coast Guard
to appear white.                                                    regulates marine obstruction lights and clearance gages on bridges







20                                                1. GENERAL INFORMATION


across navigable waters. Where installed, clearance gages are gen-    wind and current, they are'subject to sudden and unexpected
erally vertical numerical scales, reading from top to bottom, and    sheers which are certain to hazard a vessel attempting to pass close
show the actual vertical clearance between the existing water level    aboard.
and the lowest point of the bridge over the channel; the gages are   (444) Buoys.-The aids to navigation depicted on charts com-
normally on the right-hand pier or abutment of the bridge, on both    prise a system consisting of fixed and floating aids with varying
the upstream and downstream sides.                                 degrees of reliability. Therefore, prudent mariners will not rely
 (435) Bridge lights are fixed red or green, and are privately    solely on any single aid to navigation, particularly a floating aid.
maintained; they are generally not charted or described in the text  (445) The approximate position of a buoy is represented by the
of the Coast Pilot. All bridge piers (and their protective fenders)    dot or circle associated with the buoy symbol. The approximate
and abutments which are in or adjacent to a navigation channel are    position is used because of practical limitations in positioning and
marked on all channel sides by red lights. On each channel span of    maintaining buoys and their sinkers in precise geographical loca-
a fixed bridge, there is a range of two green lights marking the    tions. These limitations include, but are not limited to, inherent
center of the channel and a red light marking both edges of the    imprecisions in position fixing methods, prevailing atmospheric
channel, except that when the margins of the channel are confined    and sea conditions, the slope of and the material making up the
by bridge piers, the red lights on the span are omitted, since the    seabed, the fact that buoys are moored to sinkers by varying
pier lights then mark the channel edges; for multiplespan fixed    lengths of chain, and the fact that buoy body and/or sinker posi-
bridges, the main-channel span may also be marked by three white    tions are not under continuous surveillance, but are normally
lights in a vertical line above the green range lights.            checked only during periodic maintenance visits which often
 (436) On all types of drawbridges, one or more red lights are    occur more than a year apart. The position of the buoy body can be
shown from the drawspan (higher than the pier lights) when the    expected to shift inside and outside of the charting symbol due to
span is closed; when the span is open, the higher red lights are    the forces of nature. The mariner is also cautioned that buoys are
obscured and one or two green lights are shown from the draw-    liable to be carried away, shifted, capsized, sunk, etc. Lighted
span, higher than the pier lights. The number and location of the    buoys may be extinguished or sound signals may not function as a
red and green lights depend upon the type of drawbridge.           result of ice, running ice or other natural causes, collisions, or
 (437) Bridges and their lighting, construction, maintenance, and    other accidents.
operation are set forth in 33 CFR 114-118 (not carried in this       (446) For the foregoing reasons, a prudent mariner must not rely
Coast Pilot). Aircraft obstruction lights, prescribed by the Federal    completely upon the charted position or operation of floating aids
Aviation Administration, may operate at certain bridges. Draw-    to navigation, but will also utilize bearings from fixed objects and
bridge operation regulations are published in chapter 2 of the    aids to navigation on shore. Further, a vessel attempting to pass
Coast Pilot.                                                       close aboard always risks collision with a yawing buoy or with the
 (438) Fog signals.-Caution should be exercised in the use of    obstruction the buoy marks.
sound fog signals for navigation purposes. They should be consid-    (447) Buoys may not always properly mark shoals or other
ered solely as warning devices.                                    obstructions due to shifting of the shoals or of the buoys. Buoys
 (439) Sound travels through the air in a variable manner, even    marking wrecks or other obstructions are usually placed on the
without the effects of wind; and, therefore, the hearing of fog sig-    seaward or channelward side and not directly over a wreck. Since
nals cannot be implicitly relied upon.                             buoys may be located some distance from a wreck they are
 (440) Experience indicates that distances must not be judged    intended to mark, and since sunken wrecks are not always static,
only by the intensity of the sound; that occasionally there may be    extreme caution should be exercised when operating in the vicinty
areas close to a fog signal in which it is not heard; and that fog    of such buoys.
may exist not far from a station, yet not be seen from it, so the sig-  (448) Caution, channel markers.-Lights, daybeacons, and
nal may not be operating. It is not always possible to start a fog    buoys along dredged channels do not always mark the bottom
signal immediately when fog is observed,                           edges. Due to local conditions, aids may be located inside or out-
 (441) Avoidance of collision with offshore light stations and    side the channel limits shown by dashed lines on a chart. The
large navigational buoys (LNB).-Courses should invariably be    Light List tabulates the offset distances for these aids in many
set to pass these aids with sufficient clearance to avoid the possi-    instances.
bility of collision from any cause. Errors of observation, current   (449) Aids may be moved, discontinued, or replaced by other
and wind effects, other vessels in the vicinity, and defects in steer-    types to facilitate dredging operations. Mariners should exercise
ing gear may be, and have been the cause of actual collisions, or    caution when navigating areas where dredges with auxiliary
imminent danger thereof, needlessly jeopardizing the safety of    equipment are working.
these facilities and their crews, and of all navigation dependent on  (450) Temporary changes in aids are not included on the charts.
these important aids to navigation.                                  (451) Radiobeacons.-A map showing the locations and operat-
 (442) Experience shows that offshore light stations cannot be    ing details of marine radiobeacons is given in each Light List. This
safely used as leading marks to be passed close aboard, but should    publication describes the procedure to follow in using radiobea-
always be left broad off the course, whenever sea room permits.    cons to calibrate radio direction finders as well as listing special
When approaching fixed offshore light structures, large naviga-    radio direction finder calibration stations.
tional buoys (LNB), or a station on a submarine site, on radio       (452) A vessel steering a course for a radiobeacon should
bearings, the risk of collision will be avoided by ensuring that    observe the same precautions as when steering for a light or any
radio bearing does not remain constant.                            other mark. If the radiobeacon is aboard a lightship, particular care
 (443) It should be borne in mind that most large buoys are    should be exercised to avoid the possibility of collision, and sole
anchored to a very long scope of chain and, as a result, the radius    reliance should never be placed on sighting the lightship or hear-
of their swinging circle is considerable. The charted position is the    ing its fog signal. If there are no dependable means by which the
location of the anchor. Furthermore under certain conditions of    vessel's position may be fixed and the course changed well before







                                                   I. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                         21


reaching the lightship, a course should be selected that will ensure    caution must be exercised in their use. Stations established espe-
passing the lightship at a distance, rather than close aboard, and    cially for maritime services are more reliable.
repeated bearings of the radiobeacon should show an increasing        (463)  SATELLITE POSITION INDICATING RADIO BEA-
change in the same direction.                                       CON (EPIRB).-Emergency position indicating radiobeacons
 (453) Radio bearings.-No exact data can be given as to the    (EPIRBs), devices which cost from $200 to over $2000, are
accuracy to be expected in radio bearings taken by a ship, since    designed to save your life if you get into trouble by alerting rescue
the accuracy depends to a large extent upon the skill of the ship's    authorities and indicating your location. EPIRB  types are
operator, the condition of the ship's equipment, and the accuracy    described in the accompanying table.
of the ship's calibration curve. Mariners are urged to obtain this
information for themselves by taking frequent radio bearings,                               EPIRB Types
when their ship's position is accurately known, and recording the
results.
                                                                     Type             Frequency        Description
 (454)  Radio bearings obtained at twilight or at night, and bear-
ings which are almost parallel to the coast, should be accepted    Class A            121.5/243 MHz    Float-free, automatically-activating,
with reservations, due to "night effect" and to the distortion of                                      detectable by aircraft and satellite.
radio waves which travel overland. Bearings of aircraft ranges and                                     Coverage limited (see Chart).
standard broadcast stations should be used with particular caution    Class B         121.5/243 MHz    Manually activated version of Class
                                                                                                       A.
due to coastal refraction and lack of calibration of their frequen-    Class C        VHF ch 15/16     Manually activated, operates on
cies.                                                                                                  maritime channels only. Not
 (455)  Conversion of radio bearings to Mercator bearings.-                                            detectable by satellite. Not
Radio directional bearings are the bearings of the great circles                                       authorized after 2/1/99.
passing through the radio stations and the ship, and, unless in the    Class S        121.5/243 MHz    Similar to Class B, except it floats,
                                                                                                        or is an integral part of a survival
plane of the Equator or a meridian, would be represented on a                                          craft.
Mercator chart as curved lines. Obviously it is impracticable for a    Cat I          406/121.5 MHz    Float-free, automatically activated
navigator to plot such lines on a Mercator chart, so it is necessary                                   EPIRB. Detectable by satellite
to apply a correction to a radio bearing to convert it into a Merca-                                   anywhere in the world.
tor bearing, that is, the bearing of a straight line on a Mercator    Cat II          406/121.5 MHz    Similar to Category I, except is
chart laid off from the sending station and passing through the                                        manually actiated.
receiving station.
 (456)  A table of corrections for the conversion of a radio bearing  (464)  121.5/243 MHz EPIRBs. These are the most common
into a Mercator bearing follows the appendix. It is sufficiently    and least expensive type of EPIRB, designed to be detected by
accurate for practical purposes for distances up to 1,000 miles     overflying commercial or military aircraft. Satellites were
                                                                     designed to detect these EPIRBs, but are limited for the following
 (457)  The only data required are the latitudes and longitudes of
the radiobeacons and of the ship by dead reckoning. The latter is
                                                                      (465) (i) Satellite detection range is limited for these EPIRBs
scaled from the chart, and the former is either scaled from the
scal ed from the chart, and the former is either scaled from the    (satellites must be within line of sight of both the EPIRB and a
                                                                     ground terminal for detection to occur)(see Chart).
 (458)  The table is entered with the differences of longitude in    (466)  (ii) EPIRB design and frequency congestion cause these
degrees between the ship and station (the nearest tabulated value    devices to be subject to a high false alert/false alarm rate (over
being used), and opposite the middle latitude between the ship and    99%); consequently, confirmation is required before search and
station, the correction to be applied is read.                      rescue forces can be deployed.
  (459) The sign of the correction (bearings read clockwise from      (467)  (iii) EPIRBs manufactured before October 1989 may
the north) will be as follows: In north latitude, the minus sign is    have design or construction problems (e.g. some models will leak
used when the ship is east of the radiobeacon and the plus sign    and cease operating when immersed in water), or may not be
used when the ship is west of the radiobeacon. In south latitude,    detectable by satellite.
the plus sign is used when the ship is east of the radiobeacon, and   (468)  Class C EPIRBs. These are manually activated devices
the minus sign is used when the ship is west of the radiobeacon.    intended for pleasure craft who do not venture far offshore and for
  (460) To facilitate plotting, 180 degrees should be added to or    vessels on the Great Lakes. They transmit a short burst on VHF-
subtracted from the corrected bearing, and the result plotted from    FM channel 16 and a longer homing signal on channel 15. Their
the radiobeacon.                                                    usefulness depends upon a coast station or another vessel guarding
  (461)  Should the position by dead reckoning differ greatly from    channel 16 and recognizing the brief, recurring tone as an EPIRB.
the true position of the ship as determined by plotting the cor-    Class C EPIRBs are not recognized outside of the United States.
rected bearings, retrial should be made, using the new value as the   (469) New class C EPIRB stations will not be authorized after
position of the ship.                                               February 1, 1995. Class C EPIRB stations installed on board ves-
  (462) Radio bearings from other vessels.-Any vessel with a    sels before February 1, 1995, may be used until February 1, 1999,
radio direction-finder can take a bearing on a vessel equipped with    and not thereafter.
a radio transmitter. These bearings, however, should be used only     (470) 406 MHz EPIRBs.-The 406 MHz EPIRB was designed
as a check, as comparatively large errors may be introduced by    to operate with satellites. Its signal allows a satellite local user ter-
local conditions surrounding the radio direction-finder unless    minal to accurately locate the EPIRB (much more accurately than
known and accounted for. Although any radio station, for which    121.5/243 MHz devices), and identify the vessel (the signal is
an accurate position is defintely known, may serve as a radiobea-    encoded with the vessel's identity) anywhere in the world (there is
con for vessels equipped with a radio direction-finder, extreme    no range limitation). These devices also include a 121.5 MHz








                 120  60            0              ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~60  120  180

                                ~~~kt  C) ~~~~~~~~~             .   / ~~~~~~Notes

                                                                                       LUTs

                                 __    ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~~       ...-'4~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~X ~~~2 Churchill
                                            S        AR                                   ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~3 Edmonton
                                                                                        4 Goose Bay
                                                    Pe- ~~~~~~~~~~~5 Kodiak
                                   c                                                       ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~6 Lasham
                            4/    7 Off  .~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ~7 Moscow
                                                        7',)  8  ~~~~~~C'7~~~   60 ~~     8 Novosibirsk
                             --  .~~~~~~  ti.,          -  ~~~~~~~~~  K ~~10 Pt. Reyes
                           liD~~~~ ~~~~                                                     ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ rI'11 Sco~ttAFB

                  OPP 1                                              g~.30                  lTromso

                                  ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.I.  ... .z.
                   ~~~~~~~~~ M  K.                                                          SARSAT satellite
                   ...  ...                                                    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Ahitude  850 km
                                             -~~~~   Yil           r  ~~~~~~~~~~~N        Elevation Angle  5 deg>


    ~~~~...........
                                                   ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~M Now mo






                                                             .. . ..~     ~      ~~~~~ 75
      120            6     s    o                    6              120      ISO


1988 Satellite Visibility Area of SARSAT LUTs
    (represents approximate system coverage at 121.5 MHz;
         at 406 MHz, the System covers the entire globe)






                                                 1  GENERAL INFORMATION                                                       23


homing signal, allowing aircraft and rescue craft to quickly find    nated as secondaries Each secondary station is Identified as either
the vessel m distress These are the only type of EPIRB which    whiskey, x-ray, yankee, or zulu
must be certified by Coast Guard approved independent laborato-     (483) The master station is always the first station to transmit It
nes before they can be sold m the Umnted States                    transmits a series of nune pulses The secondary stations then fol-
 (471)  All 406 Mhz EPIRBs must be registered with NOAA  If    low m turn, transmitting eight pulses each, at precisely timed
you change your boat, your address or your phone number, you    intervals This cycle repeats itself endlessly The length of the
must re-register your EPIRB with NOAA  Request 406 MHz             cycle is measured m microseconds and is called a Group Repetl-
EPIRB registration forms from and mall or fax completed forms    hon Interval (GRI)
to                                                                   (484) LORAN-C chains are designated by the four most signifi-
 (472)  NOAAINESDIS                                                cant digits of their GRI For example, a chain with a GRI of
 (473)  SARSAT Operations Division, E/SP3                          89,700 microseconds is referred to as 8970 A different GRI is
 (474)  Federal Office Bulding 4                                   used for each chain because all LORAN-C stations broadcast in
 (475)  Washington DC 20233                                        the same 90 to 110 kilohertz frequency band and would otherwise
 (476) For further information on registering these EPIRBs call    interfere with one another
(301)763-4680 or fax (301)568-8649                                  (485) The LORAN-C system can be used m either a hyperbolic
 (477) An automatically activated, float-free version of this    or range mode In the widely used hyperbolic mode a LORAN C
EPIRB will be required on Safety of Life at Sea Convention ves-    line of position is determined by measuring the time difference
sels (passenger ships and ships over 300 tons, on international    between sychronized pulses received from two separate transmit-
voyages) of any nationality by 1 August 1993 The Coast Guard    tmg stations In the range mode, a lihne of position is determined by
requires U S commercial fishing vessels carry this device (by    measuring the time required by LORAN-C pulses to travel from a
May 1990 unless they carry a Class A EPIRB), and will require    transmitting station to the user's receiver
the same for other U S commercial unnispected vessels which          (486) A user's position is determined by locating the crossing
travel more than 3 miles offshore                                  point of two lnes of position on a LORAN-C chart Many recelv-
 (478) The COSPAS-SARSAT system -COSPAS  Space Sys-    ers have built-in coordinate converters which will automatically
tem for Search of Distress Vessels (a Russian acronym), SARSAT     display the receiver's latitude and longitude With a coordinate
Search and Rescue Satellite-Aided Tracking COSPAS-SARSAT           converter a position can be determned using a chart that is not
is an international satellite-based search and rescue system estab-    overprinted with LORAN-C lines of position
lished by the U S , Russia  Canada and France to locate emer-        (487) CAUTION  The latitude/longitude computation on
gency radio beacons transmitting on the frequencies 121 5, 243    some models is based upon an all seawater propagation path
and 406 MHz Since its inception only a few years ago, COSPAS-    This may lead to error if the LORAN-C signals from the van-
SARSAT has contributed to the saving of 1240 lives (as of June 6   ous stations involve appreciable overland propagation paths
1989), 554 of these mariners The Coast Guard operates two local    These errors may put the mariner at risk In areas requirimng
user terminals satelhte earth stations designed to received EPIRB  precise positioning if the proper correctors (ASF) are not
distress calls forwarded from COSPAS-SARSAT satellites,    applied Therefore, it is recommended that mariners using
located in Kodiak Alaska and Point Reyes, California The Air    Coordinate Converters check the manufacturer's operating
Force operates a third terminal at Scott Air Force Base IL         manual to determine if and how corrections are to be applied
 (479) Testing EPIRBs -The Coast Guard urges those owmng    to compensate for the dlscontmmnuity caused by the overland
EPIRBs to periodically examune them for water tightness, battery    paths
expiration date and signal presence FCC rules allow Class A B,       (488) There are two types of LORAN-C accuracy absolute and
and S EPIRBs to be turned on briefly (for three audio sweeps, or    repeatable Absolute accuracy is a measure of the navigator's abil-
one second only) during the first five minutes of each hour Signal    ity to determine latitude and longitude position from the LORAN-
presence can be detected by an FM radio tuned to 99 5 MHz or an    C time differences measured Repeatable accuracy is a measure of
AM radio tuned to any vacant frequency and located close to an    the LORAN-C navigator's ability to return to a position where
EPIRB FCC rules allow Class C EPIRBs to be tested within the    readings have been taken before
first five rmnutes of every hour for not more than five seconds      (489) The absolute accuracy of LORAN-C is 0 25 nautical
Class C EPIRBs can be detected by a marine radio tuned to chan-    miles, 95% confidence within the published coverage area using
nel 15 or 16 406 MHz EPIRBs can be tested through its self-test    standard LORAN-C charts and tables Repeatable accuracy
function, which is an integral part of the device                  depends on many factors so measurements must be taken to deter-
  (480)  Radar beacons (Racons) are low-powered radio trans-   rmne the repeatable accuracy in any given area Coast Guard sur-
ceivers that operate in the marine radar X-band frequencies When   veys have found repeatable accuracies between 30 and 170 meters
activated by a vessel s radar signal, Racons provide a dlstinctive    in most ground wave coverage areas LORAN-C position determiu-
visible display on the vessel's radarscope from which the range    nation on or near the baseline extensions are subject to sigmficant
and beanng to the beacon may be determined (See Light List and    errors and, therefore should be avoided whenever possible The
DMAHTC Pub 117 for details )                                       use of skywaves is not recommended within 250 miles of a station
  (48I) LORAN-C -LORAN, an acronym for LOng RAnge Nav-    being used, and corrections for these areas are not usually tabu-
igation is an electromc aid to navigation consisting of shore-based    lated
radio transmitters The LORAN system enables users equipped           (490)  If the timing or pulse shape of a master-secondary pair
with a LORAN receiver to determine their position quickly and    deviates from specified tolerances, the first two pulses of the sec-
accurately day or night in practically any weather                 ondary station's pulse tram will bhnk on and off The LORAN-C
  (482) A LORAN-C chain consists of three to five transmitting    receiver sees this blnking signal and indicates a warning to the
stations separated by several hundred miles Within a chain one    user This warning will continue until the signals are once again m
station is designated as master while the other stations are deslg-    tolerance A blinking signal is not exhibited during off-air periods






24                                                 1. GENERAL INFORMATION


so a separate receiver alarm indicates any loss of signal. Never use    locations as the tracking stations). These orbital data injections
a blinking secondary signal for navigation.                         are updated every 12 hours. Fix information may be accurate to
  (491)  In coastal waters, LORAN-C should not be relied upon as    (plus or minus) 50 meters.
the only aid to navigation. A prudent navigator will use radar,       (500)  Termination of NAVSAT. The Navy will terminate oper-
radio direction finder, fathometer and any other aid to navigation,    ation of the system by the end of 1996.
in addition to the LORAN-C receiver.                                  (501)  GPS Navigation System.-GPS is a space-based position-
 (492)  LORAN-C Interference                                        ing, velocity, and time system that has three major segments:
 (493) Interference to LORAN-C may result from radio transmis-    space, control, and user. The Space Segment is composed of 24
sions by public or private sources operating near the LORAN-C       satellites in six orbital planes. The satellites operate in circular
band of 90-110 kHz.                                                 20,200 km (10,900 nm) orbits at an inclination angle, relative to
 (494)  LORAN-C Charts and Publications                             the equator, of 55ï¿½ and with a 12-hour period. The system nor-
 (495) Navigational charts overprinted with LORAN-C lines of    mally operates with twenty-one satellites in service, the remaining
position are available from National Ocean Service, Distribution    three serving as active spares. At any given time, a minimum of
Division (N/ACC3). (See Appendix for address.)                      four satellites are observable from any position on earth, providing
 (496)  A general source of LORAN-C information is the    instantaneous position information. Each satellite transmits on two
LORAN-C User Handbook written by the U.S. Coast Guard. This    L band frequencies:  1575.42 MHz (L1) and 1227.6 MHz (L2).
publication can be purchased from the U.S. Government Printing    L1 carries a precise (P) code and a course/acquisition (C/A) code.
Office, Washington, DC (see Government Printing Office, Appen-    L2 carries the P code. A navigation data message is superimposed
dix).                                                               on the codes. The same navigation data message is carried on
 (497)  Satellite Navigation.-Satellite navigation presently con-    both frequencies. This message contains satellite ephemeris data,
sists of two global systems. Each may be considered a refinement    atmospheric propagation correction data, and satellite clock bias.
of celestial navigation, using artificial earth-orbiting satellites to  (502)  The Control Segment consists of five monitor stations,
form an electronic "constellation", serviced by land-based control    three of which have uplink capabilities, located in Colorado,
and tracking stations, and passively "sighted" by mobile receivers.    Hawaii, Kwajalein, Diego Garcia, and Ascension Island. The
These systems take advantage of three areas of technical advance-    monitor stations use a GPS receiver to passively track all satellites
ment: wide coverage demonstrated by the use of satellites for    in view, accumulating ranging data from the satellites' signals.
communications; precise control and measurement of time by    The information from the monitor stations is processed at the Mas-
means of stable oscillator frequencies; and rapidly developing    ter Control Station (MCS), located in Colorado Springs, CO, to
computer design and application. These systems have been devel-    determine satellite orbits and to update the navigation message of
oped by the U.S. Navy and the U.S. Air Force. The Navy system    each satellite. The updated information is transmitted to the satel-
is the Navy Navigation Satellite System (NAVSAT). The Air    lites via ground antennas. The ground antennas, located at Kwa-
Force system is the NAVSTAR Global Positioning System (GPS).    jelein, Diego Garcia, and Ascension Island, are also used for
NAVSAT became operational in 1964 and has been available for    transmitting and receiving satellite control information.
commercial use since 1967. GPS development began in 1973 and          (503) The User Segment consists of antennas and receiver-pro-
has reached initial operational capability.                         cessors that provide positioning, velocity, and precise timing to the
 (498) NAVSAT Navigation System.-The current NAVSAT                 user. The GPS receiver makes time-of-arrival measurements of
constellation contains ten satellites, each designated either    the satellite signals to obtain the distance between the user and the
OSCAR or NOVA, in near-circular, non-geostationary, polar    satellites. The distance calculations, known as pseudoranges,
orbits at an altitude of 600 miles. Seven satellites are operational    together with range rate information, are converted to yield system
and three satellites are stored in orbit. The system operates with a    time and the user's three-dimensional position and velocity with
minimum of four satellites in operation, with additional satellites    respect to the satellite system. A time coordination factor then
providing system redundancy and more frequent fix availability.    relates the satellite system to earth coordinates. A minimum of
Because the orbits converge over the poles, fix frequency    four pseudoranges are needed to produce a three-dimensional fix
increases with latitude. Fix frequency varies from an average of    (latitude, longitude, and altitude). GPS receivers compute fix
110 minutes at the equator to an average of 30 minutes at 80ï¿½.    information in terms of the World Geodetic System (1984),
Presently, due to non-uniform orbital precession, the NAVSAT        which may need datum shift correction before it can be accurately
satellites are no longer in evenly spaced orbits. Consequently, a    plotted on a chart. There are three different types of receivers.
user can occasionally expect a period greater than 6 hours between    Sequential receivers track only one satellite at a time, computing
fixes. This condition exists for less than 5 percent of system avail-    a fix after a series of pseudoranges have been sequentially mea-
ability. Each satellite sends satellite time and orbital parameter    sured; these receivers are inexpensive but slow. Continuous
data in 2 minute phase-modulated broadcasts on 150 MHz and 400    receivers have at least four channels to process information from
MHz frequencies.                                                    several satellites simultaneously; these process fix information the
 (499) A NAVSAT receiver measures frequency shifts (Doppler    fastest. Multiplex receivers switch at a fast rate from satellite to
effect) in the broadcast frequencies as a satellite moves along its    satellite, receiving and processing data from several satellites
orbit. The receiver compares this information to orbital position    simultaneously, producing a fix by a sort of "round-robin" process.
data received from the satellite, computing satellite-to-receiver     (504) GPS provides two services for position determination,
range applied to receiver position estimates. The use of two fre-    Standard Positioning Service (SPS) and Precise Positioning
quencies enables correction of ionospheric refraction errors. NAV-    Service (PPS). Accuracy of a GPS fix varies with the capability
SAT fixed tracking stations in Hawaii, California, Minnesota, and    of the user equipment. SPS is the standard level of positioning
Maine relay broadcast information from the satellites to a comput-    and timing accuracy that is available, without restrictions, to any
ing center. This center recomputes satellite position data, which is    user on a continuous worldwide basis. SPS provides positions
transmitted to each satellite via injection stations (in the same    with a horizontal accuracy of approximately 100 meters. PPS,







                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                         25


limited to authorized users, provides horizontal accuracy of 30    have spatial coherence over relatively large areas such as 100 to
meters or less.                                                     300 miles.
 (505) Differential GPS (DGPS)                                       (522)  Stations and Receivers.-Omega is operated as an inter-
 (506) The U.S. Coast Guard plans to provide a Differential GPS     national partnership between the United States, Argentina, Austra-
(DGPS) service for public use in all U.S. harbors and approach    lia, Liberia, France, Japan, and Norway. The U.S. Coast Guard,
areas by 1996, including the Great Lakes, Puerto Rico, most of    through the Omega Navigation System Center in Alexandria, VA,
Alaska, and Hawaii. The system will provide radionavigational    has operational control of the system. Modern transmission of
accuracy of 10 meters or less. DGPS reference stations will deter-    Omega signals is controlled by Omega signal format generators
mine range errors and generate corrections for all GPS satellites in    and cesium atomic frequency standards at each station. Each sta-
view. The DGPS signals will be broadcast using existing Coast    tion is synchronized within 2 microseconds of the mean reference
Guard radiobeacons. Monitor stations will independently verify    time of all eight stations. In addition, Omega system time is
the quality of the DGPS broadcast. Until the system is declared    within 5 microseconds of Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
operational by the Coast Guard, mariners are cautioned that signal    (523) Modern receivers are equipped with coordinate converters
availability and accuracy are subject to change due to the avail-    to display latitude and longitude, and do not require use of refer-
ability of GPS, testing of this developing service, and the unreli-    ence publications. Early receivers required Omega Propagation
ability of prototype equipment. For further information and/or    Correction (PPC) tables (OMPUB224100CA - 224318CF).
operational questions regarding GPS or DGPS, contact:                 (524) Omega receivers compute positions using the phase mea-
 (507) Commanding Officer                                           surements in one of two modes: direct ranging or hyperbolic. In
 (50o) U.S. Coast Guard Navigation Center                           both modes the receiver must be initialized to a known position.
 (509) 7323 Telegraph Road                                          Modern receivers contain a microprocessor-based PPC model to
 (510) Alexandria, VA 22310-3998                                    correct the nominal phase computations for diurnal and seasonal
 (511) Telephone: (703) 313-5900                                    variations.
 (512)  FAX: (703) 313-5920                                          (525)  Omega receivers may be designed to use one or all of the
 (513)  Electronic Bulletin Board Service (703) 313-5910.           Omega frequencies. The additional frequencies assist in lane res-
 (514)  OMEGA.-Omega is a very long range hyperbolic radio    olution and position fixing. Because of the long range and stabil-
navigation system operating between 10.2 kHz and 13.6 kHz. It    ity of the Omega signal, a single set of stations can be used to
provides navigational service throughout the world using a trans-    traverse thousands of miles.
mitting complex of eight stations. Since the transmissions are        (526)  Detailed Omega information is contained in the Coast
controlled by cesium atomic frequency standards, the signals can    Guard's Omega Navigation System User's Guide (COMDTPUB
be used for time dissemination.                                     P16566.3).
 (515)  Omega differs from LORAN by using very low radio fre-        (527)  Range and Coverage.-Signals radiated at the designed
quencies and phase-difference measurements techniques for navi-    power of 10 kW provide field strengths sufficient to allow phase
gation instead of the LORAN time difference measurement             tracking at any location in the world. No less than five LOP's
techniques.                                                         should be available in any area. Current coverage is depicted on
 (516)  Operation.-The system design calls for eight stations,    the Omega coverage software called ACCESS.  ACCESS is a
designated A through H, transmitting on a time-shared basis at the    computer-based coverage tool which gives predictions on a 24
frequencies of 10.2 kHz, 11.33 kHz, and 13.6 kHz.                   hour basis. The ACCESS package is available through:
 (517)  There is no master-slave relationship between stations.      (528) COMMANDING OFFICER
All stations are equal and each is, in a sense, a slave to the defini-  (529) NAVIGATION CENTER
tion of time. Since the transmitted signals from each of the trans-   (530)  7323 TELEGRAPH ROAD
mitting stations are in absolute phase, measurements may be taken     (531) ALEXANDRIA, VA 22310-3998
in pairs (for example: station A minus station B yields pair AB) to   (532) Telephone: (703) 313-5905 or 5906.
give a hyperbolic position line. Measurements may also be taken       (533) The Differential Omega mode will be limited in coverage
with respect to a precision source of phase (high quality oscillator,    according to the number of local monitors. However, the maxi-
(R); therefore, R minus station A yield range A) in the receiver to    mum range from any one monitor is expected to be approximately
give circular or range position lines.                              300 NM.
  (518) The intersection of two or more LOP's give's the              (534) When transmitted Omega signals are known to be unreli-
receiver's position.                                                able or disturbed by various phenomena, such as a polar cap dis-
  (519) Because of the cyclic nature of phase differences, the same    turbance (PCD), appropriate warnings will be transmitted via the
phase difference can be observed in multiple lanes. This is known    NAVAREA IV/XII, HYDROLANT/HYDROPAC message sys-
as lane ambiguity. Lane ambiguity can be resolved by setting the    tems and will be published in the DMA Notice to Mariners.
receiver's lane counter at a known or estimated location.
  (520) Because of the long distances that the Omega signal trav-
els, the variable effects of propagation of the signals through the                         Station List:
atmosphere are very important. Most modern receivers automati-
cally compensate for these effects using models for propagation      Station                                     Position
corrections (PPC's).                                                 Norway (A)                      66ï¿½25'12.7"N   13008'13.1"E
  (521) Accuracy improvement by as much as a factor of ten may        Liberia (B)                     618'19.3"N    10039'51.9"W
be obtained with a technique called Differential Omega. This         Hawaii (C)                       21ï¿½24'17.9"N   157ï¿½49'51.0"W
technique removes the propagation variation and prediction errors,   North Dakota (D)                46ï¿½21'57.4"N   98ï¿½20'08.2"W
which are the principle causes of positional inaccuracy in Omega.    Reunion (E)                     20ï¿½58'26.9"S   55017'23.6"E
These errors are removed by using the knowledge Omega signals        Argentina (F)                   43ï¿½03'12.8"S   65ï¿½11'26.8"W




26                                               1  GENERAL INFORMATION


 Australia (G)                 38ï¿½28'52 4"S   146ï¿½56'07 1"E      from the Regional Manager at U S Coast Guard Activities
 Japan (H)                     34ï¿½36'53 1"N   129 27'13 1"E      Europe, London, UK at 011-44-71-872-0943  If addltlonal infor-
                                                                mation is required after contacting COCO'S or the Pacific or
 (535) LORAN-C, OMEGA, GPS, DGPS, MARINE RADIO-    European Regional Managers contact the NAVCEN by calling
BEACON, AND GENERAL RADIONAVIGATION USER                         (703) 313-5900 or by writing Commanding Officer (OPS),
INFORMATION -The Commandant of the U S Coast Guard    NAVCEN (address above)
has consohdated radionavlgation operational control, manage-      (552) Scheduled Loran-C unusable times are published by
ment, and information responslbilities of the Commandant Radl-    announcements in USCG Local Notice to Mariners, Canadian
onavlgatlon Division (G-NRN), the Omega Navigation System    Coast Guard Notice to Shipping (NOTSHIP'S), FAA Notice to
Center (ONSCEN), Commander Atlantic Area (ATL), and Com-    Airmen (NOTAMS), FAA NOTAM "D"s and on the pre recorded
mander Pacific Area (PTL) at one field unit, entitled Navigation    service for the pertinent cham  In many cases scheduled outages
Center (NAVCEN) NAVCEN address                                   are preceded by Coast Guard Manne Radio Voice and NAVTEX
 (536) Commanding Officer                                        Broadcasts in the areas where coverage will be affected
 (537) USCG Navigation Center                                     (553) Military or government users with an official Govern-
 (538) 7323 Telegraph Road                                       ment Plain Language Address (PLAD) desiring inclusion on
 (539) Alexandna, VA 22310-3998                                  notification messages should request such m wntmg to NAVCEN
 (540) A reorganized G-NRN Staff remains at Coast Guard    address above  Requests must mclude a point of contact, tele-
Headquarters for policy and planning functions of the radlonavl-   phone number, why you need this service, and a Government
gation program                                                   PLAD  Due to the time sensitive nature of this information it is
 (541) NAVCEN provides the following services                    sent only by government message  These messages and other
 (542) Computer Bulletin Board (BBS)  The BBS provides    Loran-C information are also available to the public in the Loran-
Loran-C, Omega, GPS Marine Radiobeacon Differential GPS    C section of the NAVCEN Bulletin Board (BBS)
(DGPS), and general radlonavigation user information and status   (554) If you have a problem with Loran, contact the applicable
It is accessed by computer users with modems  The Coast Guard    COCO or Regional Manager for the rate used  If you need to
does not charge for access to the BBS  Modem setup parameters    check about unusable time, system failures or report abnormah-
8 bits, no panty 1 stop, 300-14400 BAUD call (703) 313-5910      ties, note the rate used model of receiver, location, type of prob-
 (543) GPS System  Current status recorded voice announce        lem, date, and time occurred  This will enable the COCO or
ments are available, phone (703) 313-5907 Printed materials on    Regional Manager to quickly check the records for the penod in
GPS may also be obtained, phone (703) 313-5900                   question and to provide a more exact answer to you
 (544) Omega  Current status recorded voice announcements         (555) WWV and WWVH broadcasts  Broadcasts from WWV
are available phone (703) 313-5906 NAVCEN generates a    of Fort Collins CO and WWVH ofKekaha, Kaual, HI contain
weekly Omega status advisory Address Indicator Group 8980    Omega and GPS information Omega summary status andpropa-
(AIG 8980) For further information contact the watchstander at   gation anomaly notification are broadcast from WWV at 16 rmn-
(703) 313-5900, available 24 hours                               utes after each hour, andfrom WWVH at 47 munutes after the hour
 (545) Loran-C information  the current operational status of    GPS information is broadcast from WWV at 14 to 15rmnutes after
all Loran-C stations is available from the coordinator of chain    each hour and from WWVH at 43 to 44 minutes after each hour
operations (COCO) or the Regional Manager The COCO mon-            (5:6) NAVSAT information  Orbital data and operational sta-
itors the day-to-day operations of the Loran-C chain and provides    tus is gathered by the Naval Satellite Operations Center (NAV-
information with a recorded telephone announcement or responds    SOC), Point Magu, CA  and supplied to the Defense Mapping
to quenes directed to the COCO personally The Regional Man-    Agency (DMA) for public dissemunation For additional mforma-
agers monitor the operation of the Loran-C chains in their areas  ton contact the following
Pertinent telephone numbers follow                                 (557) All users Orbital data and operational status is available
 (546) COCO Canadian east coast (CEC-5930) and Labrador Sea    from DMA, telephone (301) 227-2495  For more information
(LABSEA-7930) chains is located at Loran Monitor Station St    wnte
Anthony Newfoundland Canada Recorded announcement (709)            (558) Defense Mapping Agency Combat Support Center
454-3261  COCO (709) 454-2392                                      (559) ATTN COCO, Mail Stop d-17
 (547) COCO Great Lakes (GKLS-8970) and northeast US              (560) 6001 MacArthur Boulevard
(NEUS-9960) chains is located at Loran Station Seneca NY           (561) Bethesda, MD 20816-5001
Recorded announcement (607) 869-5395  COCO  (607) 869-            (562) Military/government   users  with  message
1334                                                             PLADS  NAVSOC maintains AIG 51 to disseminate NAVSAT
 (548) COCO southeast US (SEUS-7980) and south central US        status information  Information on being added to this AIG may
(SOCUS-9310) chains is located at Loran Station Malone, FL       be obtained by wnting or calling
Recorded announcement (205) 899-5227  COCO  (205) 899-            (563) Naval Satelhte Operations Center
5225/6                                                             (564) Bmlding 375, 661 13th Street
 (549) Information concerning the Gulf of Alaska (7960), Cana     (565) Point Mugu CA 93042-5013
dlan west coast (5990), US west coast (9940), Russian-Amencan      (566) Telephone (805) 989-4284
(5980) North Pacific (9990) and North Central US (8290) chains     (567) U S Naval Observatory  The U S Naval Observatory
may be obtained from the USCG Pacific Area Loran-C Regional    (USNO) provides the following services automated data services
Manager in Alameda, CA at (510) 437-3232                         for Loran-C Omega, GPS and NAVSAT information data service
 (550) European Loran-C informaton                               (menu driven) parameters - 8 bit no panty 1 stop, 1200 to 2400
 (551) Information concerning the Icelandic (9980) Norwegian    BAUD, access password CESIUM133  Time service (900) 410
Sea (7970) and Mediterranean Sea (7990) chains may be obtained    8463 or (202) 653-1800 General information (202) 653-1522/5






                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                       27


 (568)  National  Oceanographic  and  Atmospheric                  death and destruction in islands and countries throughout the
Administration: The U.S. Department of Commerce National    Pacific.
Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), Space           (581) The speed of tsunamis varies with the depth of the water,
Environment Services Center (SESC) disseminates information    reaching 300 to 500 knots in the deep water of the open ocean. In
regarding solar activity, radio propagation, ionospheric, and geo-    the open sea they cannot be detected from a ship or from the air
magnetic conditions. For more information:                         because their length is so great, sometimes a hundred miles, as
 (569)  For general information, and information about WWV and    compared to their height, which is usually only a few feet (a meter
satellite broadcasts, write or call:                               or 2). Only on certain types of shelving coasts do they build up
 (570) U.S. Department of Commerce                                 into waves of disastrous proportions.
 (571)  Space Environment Services Center, R/E/SE2                  (582) There is usually a series of waves with crests 10 to 40 min-
 (572)  325 Broadway                                               utes apart, and the highest may occur several hours after the first
 (573)  Boulder, CO 80303                                          wave. Sometimes the first noticeable part of the wave is the trough
 (574) Telephone (303) 497-3171.                                   which causes a recession of the water from shore, and people who
 (575)  For Public Bulletin Board System (PBBS): PBBS data    have gone out to investigate this unusual exposure of the beach
service (menu driven) parameters - 8 bit, no parity, 1 stop, 300 to    have been engulfed by the oncoming crest. Such an unexplained
2400 BAUD. PBBS will prompt you for the required initial infor-    withdrawal of the sea should be considered as nature's warning of
mation and lead you to the main menu. Telehone (303) 497-5000.     an approaching wave.
 (576)  Uniform State Waterway Marking System.-Many bod-            (583) Improvements have been made in the quick determination
ies of water used by boatmen are located entirely within the    and reporting of earthquake epicenters, but no method has yet
boundaries of a State. The Uniform State Waterway Marking Sys-    been perfected for determining whether a sea wave will result
tem (USWMS) has been developed to indicate to the small-boat    from a given earthquake. The Pacific Tsunami Warning Center,
operator hazards, obstructions, restricted or controlled areas, and    Oahu, Hawaii, of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Adminis-
to provide directions. Although intended primarily for waters    tration is headquarters of a warning system which has field report-
within the state boundaries, USWMS is suited for use in all water    ing stations (seismic and tidal) in most countries around the
areas, since it supplements and is generally compatible with the    Pacific. When a warning is broadcast, waterfront areas should be
Coast Guard lateral system of aids to navigation. The Coast Guard    vacated for higher ground, and ships in the vicinity of land should
is gradually using more aids bearing the USWMS geometric    head for the deep water of the open sea.
shapes described below.                                              (584) Storm surge.-A considerable rise or fall in the level of
 (577)  Two categories of waterway markers are used. Regulatory    the sea along a particular coast may result from strong winds and
markers, buoys, and signs use distinctive standard shape marks to    sharp change in barometric pressure. In cases where the water
show regulatory information. The signs are white with black let-    level is raised, higher waves can form with greater depth and the
ters and have a wide orange border. They signify speed zones,    combination can be destructive to low regions, particularly at high
restricted areas, danger areas, and directions to various places.    stages of tide. Extreme low levels can result in depths which are
Aids to navigation on State waters use red and black buoys to    considerably less than those shown on nautical charts. This type of
mark channel limits. Red and black buoys are generally used in    wave occurs especially in coastal regions bordering on shallow
pairs. The boat should pass between the red buoy and its compan-    waters which are subject to tropical storms.
ion black buoy. If the buoys are not placed in pairs, the distinctive  (585) Seiche is a stationary vertical wave oscillation with a
color of the buoy indicates the direction of dangerous water from    period varying from a few minutes to an hour or more, but some-
the buoy. White buoys with red tops should be passed to the south    what less than the tidal periods. It is usually attributed to external
or west, indicating that danger lies to the north or east of the buoy.    forces such as strong winds, changes in barometric pressure,
White buoys with black tops should be passed to the north or east.    swells, or tsunamis disturbing the equilibrium of the water surface.
Danger lies to the south or west. Vertical red and white striped    Seiche is found both in enclosed bodies of water and superim-
buoys indicate a boat should not pass between the buoy and the    posed upon the tides of the open ocean. When the external forces
nearest shore. Danger lies inshore of the buoy.                    cause a short-period horizontal oscillation of the water, it is called
                                                                    surge.
  (578) DESTRUCTIVE WAVES.-Unusual sudden changes in                 (586) The combined effect of seiche and surge sometimes makes
water level can be caused by tsunamis or violent storms. These    it difficult to maintain a ship in its position alongside a pier even
two types of destructive waves have become commonly known as    though the water may appear to be completely undisturbed, and
tidal waves, a name which is technically incorrect as they are not    heavy mooring lines have been parted repeatedly under such con-
the result of tide-producing forces.                               ditions. Pilots advise taut lines to reduce the effect of the surge.
  (579) Tsunamis (seismic sea waves) are set up by submarine
earthquakes. Many such seismic disturbances do not produce sea    SPECIAL SIGNALS FOR CERTAIN VESSELS
waves and often those produced are small, but the occasional large
waves can be very damaging to shore installations and dangerous     (587)  Special signals for surveying vessels.-National Oceanic
to ships in harbors.                                               and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) vessels engaged in sur-
  (580) These waves travel great distances and can cause tremen-    vey operations and limited in their ability to maneuver because of
dous damage on coasts far from their source. The wave of April 1,    the work being performed (handling equipment over-the-side such
1946, which originated in the Aleutian Trench, demolished nearby    as water sampling or conductivity-temperature-density (CTD)
Scotch Cap Lighthouse and caused damages of $25 million in the    casts, towed gear, bottom samplers, etc., and divers working on,
Hawaiian Islands 2,000 miles away. The wave of May 22-23,    below or in proximity of the vessel) are required by Navigation
1960, which originated off southern Chile, caused widespread    Rules, International-Inland, Rule 27, to exhibit:





28                                               1  GENERAL INFORMATION


 (588)  (b)(i) three all-round lights in a vertical line where they    towing, the helcopter s altitude vanes from 49 2 to 311 6 feet (15
can best be seen The highest and lowest of these hghts shall be    to 95 meters) above the water, and speeds vary from 0 to 30 knots
red and the middle hght shall be white,                           (600) Minesweeping helicopters are equipped with a rotating
 (589)  (11) three shapes m a vertical hne where they can best be    beacon which has a selectable red and amber mode The amber
seen The highest and lowest of these shapes shall be balls and the    mode is used dunng towing operations to notify and warn other
middle one a diamond,                                            vessels that the helicopter is towing
 (590) (111) when making way through the water, masthead          (601)  Submanne emergency identification signals -U S sub-
lights sidelights and a sternlight in addition to the lights pre-    mannes are equipped with signal ejectors which may be used to
scnbed m subparagraph (b)(l), and                                launch identification signals includmg emergency signals Two
 (591) (Iv) when at anchor, in addition to the lights or shapes    general types of signals may be used smoke floats and flares or
prescribed In subparagraphs (b)(i) and (ni) the hght, hghts or    stars The smoke floats, which burn on the surface produce a
shapes prescribed in Rule 30, Anchored Vessels and Vessels    dense colored smoke for a period of 15 to 45 seconds The flares
Aground                                                          or stars are propelled to a height of 300 to 400 feet (90 to 120
 (592) The color of the above shapes is black                    meters) from which they descend by small parachute The flares or
                                                                   stars burn for about 25 seconds The color of the smoke or flare/
 (593) A NOAA vessel engaged m hydrographic survey opera-
tions (making way on a specific tracklne while sounding the bot-                    g       g
tom) is not restricted in ItS ability to maneuver and therefore   (602) Green or black is used under traimng exercise conditions
exhibits at night only those lights required for a power-dnven ves-    only to indicate that a torpedo has been fired or that the finng of a
sel of Its length                                                torpedo has been simulated
 (594) Warning signals for Coast Guard vessels while han-         (603) Yellow indicates the submarine is about to rise to pen-
dlng or servicing aids to navigation are the same as those pre-    scope depth Surface craft termmate antsubmarine counterattack
scribed for surveying vessels (See Special signals for surveying    and clear vicinity of submarne Do not stop propellers
vessels, this chapter)                                             (604) Red indicates an emergency inside the submarine, she will
 (595) Minesweeper signals -U S vessels engaged in mine-    try to surface Immediately, if possible Surface ships clear the area
sweeping operations or exercises are hampered to a considerable    and stand by to assist In case of repeated red signals, or if the sub-
extent in their maneuvering powers With a view to indicating the    manne fails to surface m a reasonable time, she may be presumed
nature of the work on which they are engaged, these vessels will    disabled Buoy the location, look for submarine buoy, and attempt
show the signals hereinafter mentioned For the public safety, all   to estabhsh sonar communicaons Advise U S Navy authorities
other vessels, whether steamers or sailing craft, must endeavor to    immediately
keep out of the way of vessels displaying these signals and not    (605) Submarine marker buoys consist of two spheres 3 feet
approach them inside the distances mentioned herein, especially    (about 1 meter) in diameter with connecting structure, painted
remembering that it is dangerous to pass between the vessels of a    mternational orange The buoy has a wire cable to the submarine,
pair or group sweeping together                                  to act as a downhaul line for a rescue chamber The buoy may be
 (596) All vessels towing sweeps are to show By day, a black    accompanied by an oil slick release to attract attention A subma-
ball at the foremast head and a black ball at each end of the fore    rine on the bottom    distress may release this buoy If sighted
yard By night, all around green lights instead of the black balls,    such a buoy should be mvestigated and reported Immediately to
and in a similar manner                                          U S Navy authorities
 (597) Vessels or formations showing these signals indicate that It    (606) The submarine may transmit the International Distress
is dangerous for another vessel to approach within 1,000 meters    Signal (SOS) on Its sonar gear mdependently or m conjunction
(3,280 feet) of the mineclearance vessel Under no circumstances    with the red signal Submannes also may use these other means of
is a vessel to pass through a formation of minesweepers Mine-    attracting attention release of dye marker or air bubble, ejection
sweepers should be prepared to warn merchant vessels which per-    of oil, pounding on hull
slst in approaching too close by means of any of the appropriate  (607) Vessels Constrained by their Draft -International Navl
signals from the International Code of Signals In fog, mist, falling    gation Rules, Rule 28, states that a vessel constrained by her draft
snow, heavy rainstorms, or any other condition slmilanly restrict-    may, in addition to the lights prescribed for power-driven vessels
ing visibility, whether by day or mght, minesweepers while towing    m Rule 23 exhibit where they can best be seen three all-round red
sweeps when in the vicnlmty of other vessels will sound whistle    hghts m a vertical line, or a cylinder
signals for a vessel towing (one prolonged blast followed by two
short blasts)                                                    NAVIGATION RESTRICTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
  (598) The United States Is increasingly using helicopters to con-
duct minmesweeping operations and exercises When so engaged,       (608) Traffic Separation Schemes (Traffic Lanes) -To
helicopters, like vessels, are considerably hampered in their ablhty    increase the safety of navigation particularly in converging areas
to maneuver Hehcopters may function at mght as well as during    of high traffic density routes mcorporating traffic separation have
the day and in varying types of weather Accordingly, surface ves-    with the approval of the International Maritime Organization
sels approachmg helicopters engaged m minesweeping operations    (IMO) formerly the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative
should take precautions similar to those described above with    Organization (IMCO) been established in certain areas of the
regard to minesweeping vessels                                   world In the interest of safe navigation it is recommended that
  (599) Helicopters towing minesweeping gear, and surface    through traffic use these schemes, as far as circumstances pernut
escorts if any, will use all practical means to warn approaching    by day and by mght and in all weather conditions
ships of the operations being conducted Where practical mea-      (609) General principles for navigation in Traffic Separation
sures will be taken to mark or light the gear being towed While    Schemes are as follows







                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                         29


 (610)  1. A ship navigating in or near a traffic separation scheme  (630)  (k) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver when
adopted by IMO shall in particular comply with Rule 10 of the 72    engaged in an operation for the maintenance of safety of naviga-
COLREGS to minimize the development of risk of collision with    tion in a traffic separation scheme is exempted from complying
another ship. The other rules of the 72 COLREGS apply in all    with Rule 10 to the extent necessary to carry out the operation.
respects, and particularly the steering and sailing rules if risk of  (631)  (1) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver when
collision with another ship is deemed to exist.                     engaged in an operation for laying, servicing or picking up a sub-
 (611)  2. Traffic separation schemes are intended for use by day    marine cable, within a traffic separation scheme, is exempted from
and by night in all weather, in ice-free waters or under light ice    complying with this Rule to the extent necessary to carry out the
conditions where no extraordinary maneuvers or assistance by ice-    operation.
breaker(s) are required.                                              (632)  6. The arrows printed on charts merely indicate the gen-
 (612)  3. Traffic separation schemes are recommended for use    eral direction of traffic; ships need not set their courses strictly
by all ships unless stated otherwise. Bearing in mind the need for    along the arrows.
adequate underkeel clearance, a decision to use a traffic separation  (633) 7. The signal "YG" meaning "You appear not to be com-
scheme must take into account the charted depth, the possibility of    plying with the traffic separation scheme" is provided in the Inter-
changes in the seabed since the time of last survey, and the effects    national Code of Signals for appropriate use.
of meterological and tidal conditions on water depths.                (634) When approved or established, traffic separation scheme
 (613) 4. A deepwater route is an allied routing measure prima-    details are announced in Notice to Mariners, and later depicted on
rily intended for use by ships which require the use of such a route    appropriate charts and included in the Coast Pilot and Sailing
because of their draft in relation to the available depth of water in    Directions.
the area concerned. Through traffic to which the above consider-      (635) Oil Pollution.-The Federal Water Pollution Control Act,
ation does not apply should, if practicable, avoid following deep-    as amended, prohibits the discharge of a harmful quantity of oil or
water routes. When using a deepwater route mariners should be    a hazardous substance into or upon the United States navigable
aware of possible changes in the indicated depth of water due to    waters or adjoining shorelines, or into or upon the waters of the
meteorological or other effects.                                    contiguous zone, or in connection with activities under the Outer
 (614)  5. Users of traffic separation schemes adopted by IMO       Continental Shelf Lands Act or the Deepwater Port Act of 1974,
will be guided by Rule 10 of the 1972 International Regulations    or which may affect natural resources belonging to, appertaining
for Preventing Collisions at Sea (72 COLREGS) as follows:           to, or under the exclusive management authority of the United
 (615)  (a) This Rule applies to traffic separation schemes    States including resources under the Fishery Conservation and
adopted by the Organization.                                        Management Act of 1976. Discharges that do occur must be
 (616) b03) A vessel using a traffic separation scheme shall:       reported to the Coast Guard (National Response Center) by the
 (617)  (i) proceed in the appropriate traffic lane in the general    most rapid available means. To assist in swift reporting of spills, a
direction of traffic flow for that lane;                            nationwide, 24-hour, toll-free telephone number has been estab-
 (618)  (ii) so far as practicable keep clear of a traffic separation    lished (1-800-424-8802).
line or separation zone;                                              (636) Hazardous quantities of oil have been defined by the Envi-
 (619)  (iii) normally join or leave a traffic separation lane at the    ronmental Protection Agency as those which violate applicable
termination of the lane, but when joining or leaving from either    water quality standards or cause a film or sheen upon or discolora-
side shall do so at as small an angle to the general direction of traf-    tion of the surface of the water or adjoining shorelines, or cause a
fic flow as practicable.                                            sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the surface of the
 (620)  (c) A vessel shall so far as practicable avoid crossing traf-    water or adjoining shorelines. (For regulations pertaining to this
fic lanes, but if obliged to do so, shall cross as nearly as practica-    Act see 40 CFR 110.3, not carried in this Pilot.)
ble at right angles to the general direction of traffic flow.         (637) The Refuse Act of 1899 (33 U.S.C. 407) prohibits anyone
 (621) (d) Inshore traffic zones shall not normally be used by    from throwing, discharging or depositing any refuse matter of any
through traffic which can safely use the appropriate traffic lane    kind in U.S. navigable waters or tributaries of navigable waters.
within the adjacent traffic separation scheme. However, vessels of    The only exceptions to this prohibition are liquid sewage flowing
less than 20 meters in length and sailing vessels may under all cir-    from streets or sewers and discharges made from shore facilities
cumstances use inshore traffic zones.                               under a permit granted by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.
  (622)  (e) A vessel, other than a crossing vessel, or a vessel join-  (638)  The Act to Prevent Pollution from Ships (33 U.S.C. 1901)
ing or leaving a lane shall not normally enter a separation zone or    is based on the International Convention for the Prevention of Pol-
cross a separation line except:                                     lution from Ships, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 (MARPOL
  (623)  (i) in cases of emergency to avoid immediate danger;        73/78). For tankers over 150 gross tons and all other ships over
  (624)  (ii) to engage in fishing within a separation zone.         400 gross tons, MARPOL 73/78 requires the installation of new
  (625)  (f) A vessel navigating in areas near the terminations of    equipment to control overboard discharges of oil and oily waste.
traffic separation schemes shall do so with particular caution.     This includes oily-water separating, monitoring and alarm systems
  (626)  (g) A vessel shall so far as practicable avoid anchoring in    for discharges from cargo areas, cargo pump rooms and machinery
a traffic separation scheme or in areas near its terminations.      space bilges. New ships must have the equipment on board by
  (627)  (h) A vessel not using a traffic separation scheme shall    October 2, 1983, while existing ships have until October 2, 1986
avoid it by as wide a margin as is practicable.                     to comply.
  (628)  (i) A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the pas-    (639) Ships are also required to have an International Oil Pollu-
sage of any vessel following a traffic lane.                        tion Prevention Certificate verifying that the vessel is in compli-
  (629)  (j) A vessel of less than 20 meters (65.6 feet) in length or    ance with MARPOL 73/78 and that any required equipment is on
a sailing vessel shall not impede the safe passage of a power-    board and operational, and they must maintain a new Oil Record
driven vessel following a traffic lane.                             Book reporting all oil transfers and discharges. The Oil Record





30                                                 1  GENERAL INFORMATION


Book is available from the Government Printing Office (see           (649)  Exclusive Economic Zone of the United States -Estab-
appendix for address )                                             hshed by a Presidential Proclamation on March 10, 1983, the
 (640)  Other requirements for the protection of navigable    Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ) of the United States is a zone
waters -It is not lawful to tie up or anchor vessels or to float    contiguous to the temtonal sea, including zones contiguous to the
lografts in navigable channels in such manner as to obstruct nor-    terntonal sea of the United States, the Commonwealth of Puerto
mal navigation When a vessel or raft is wrecked and sunk in a    Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern Manana Islands (to the
navigable channel it is the duty of the owner to immediately mark    extent consistent with the Covenant and the Umted Nations Trust-
it with a buoy or beacon during the day and a light at night until    eeshlp Agreement), and Umnted States overseas terntones and pos-
the sunken craft is removed or abandoned                           sessions The EEZ extends to a distance of 200 nautical miles
 (641)  Obligation of deck officers -Licensed deck officers are    from the basehne from which the breadth of the terrtoral sea is
required to acquaint themselveswith the latest information pub-    measured In cases where the maritime boundary with a neghbor-
lished in Notice to Manners regarding aids to navigation            mg State remains to be determined the boundary of the EEZ shall
                                                                   be determined by the Umnted States and the other State concerned
 (642)  Improper use of searchlights prohibited -No person
shall flash or cause to be flashed the rays of a searchlight or other    in accordance with equitable pinciples
blinding light onto the bndge or into the pilothouse of any vessel   (650) Within the EEZ the Unted States has asserted to the
underway The International Code Signal "PG2  may be made by    extent permitted by  ternational law, (a) sovereign rights for the
a vessel inconvenienced by the glare of a searchlight in order to    purpose of explonng, exploiting, conserving and managing natural
appnse the offending vessel of the fact                            resources, both livmg and nonliving, of the seabed and subsoil and
 (643) Use of R         adar -Naviga tion Rules International-Inland  the superjacent waters and with regard to other activlites for the
                                                                   economic exploltation and exploration of the zone, such as the
Rule 7, states in part, that every vessel shall use all available    economic exploitation f exploration of the water currents and wds  and (b)
means appropriate to the prevailing circumstances and conditions    production of energy from the water, current and winds, and (b)
                 to determine if sk of collision exists If there is any doubt such    junrisdiction with regard to the establishment and use of artificial
                                                                   Islands, and installations and structures havmg economic pur-
nsk shall be deemed to exist Proper use shall be made of radar    islands, and installations and  s      tructures havi ng economic pur-
                                                                   poses, and the protection and preservation of the manne environ-
equipment if fitted and operational, including long-range scanning    ment
to obtain early warning of risk of collision and radar plotting or
equivalent systematic observation of detected objects                (651) Without prejudice to the sovereign nghts and junsdlction
                                                                   of the United States, the EEZ remains an area beyond the territory
 (644) This rule places an additional responsibility on vessels    and temtonal sea of the Umted States m which all States enjoy the
which are equipped and manned to use radar to do so while under-    high seas freedoms of navigation, overflight, the laying of subma-
way during periods of reduced vilslblity without in any way    nne cables and pipelines and other internationally lawful uses of
reheving commanding officers of the responsibility of carrying out    the sea
normal precautionary measures                                        (652) This Proclamation does not change existing Umnted States
 (645) Navigation Rules, International-Inland Rules 6, 7 8 and    policies concerning the continental shelf marine mammals and
19 apply to the use of radar                                       fisheries mcludmg highly migratory species of tuna which are not
 (646) Danger signal -Navlgatlon Rules International-Inland,    subject to United States jurisdiction and require international
Rule 34(d), states that when vessels in sight of one another are    agreements for effective management
approaching each other and from any cause either vessel fails to     (653) The Umnted States will exercise these sovereign rights and
understand the intentions or actions of the other, or is in doubt    jursdiction m accordance with the rules of international law
whether sufficient action is being taken by the other to avoid colh-  (654) The seaward limit of the EEZ is shown on the nautical
sion, the vessel m doubt shall immediately indicate such doubt by    chart as a hne interspersed periodically with EXCLUSIVE ECO
glvmg at least five short and rapid blasts on the whistle Such slg-    NOMIC ZONE  The EEZ boundary is coincidental with that of
nal may be supplemented by a light signal of at least five short and    the Fishery Conservation Zone
rapid flashes
 (647) Narrow channels -Navigation Rules International-             (655)  U S Fishery Conservation Zone -The United States
Inland, Rule 9(b) states A vessel of less than 65 6 feet (20 meters)    exercises exclusive fishery management authonty over all species
in length or a sailing vessel shall not impede the passage of a ves-    of fish except tuna, within the fishery conservation zone whose
sel that can safely navigate only within a narrow channel or fair-    seaward boundary is 200 rmles from the baseline from which the
way                                                                U S territorial sea is measured, all anadromous species which
  (648)  Control of shipping in time of emergency or war -In    spawn in the United States throughout their migratory range
time of war or national emergency, merchant vessels of the Umrted    beyond the fishery conservation zone, except within a foreign
States and those foreign flag vessels, which are considered under    country s equivalent fishery zone as recognized by the United
effective U S control, will be subject to control by agencies of the    States, all U S Continental Shelf fishery resources beyond the
U S Government The allocation and employment of such vessels,    fishery conservation zone Such resources include American lob-
and of domestic port facilities, equipment, and services will be    ster and species of coral, crab abalone conch, clam and sponge,
performed by appropriate agencies of the War Transport Adrmis-    among others
tration The movement, routing, and diversion of merchant ships       (656) No foreign vessel may fish aid, or assist vessels at sea in
at sea will be controlled by appropriate naval commanders The    the performance of any activity relating to fishing including, but
movement of merchant ships within domestic ports and dispersal    not linuted to preparation, supply storage, refngeration, transpor-
anchorages will be coordinated by the U S Coast Guard The    tation or processing within the fishery conservation zone or fish
commencement of naval control will be signalled by a general    for anadromous species of the United States or Continental Shelf
emergency message (See DMAHTC Pub 117 for emergency pro-    fishery resources without a permit issued in accordance with U S
cedures and communication instructions )                           law These permits may only be issued to vessels from countries






                                                  1  GENERAL INFORMATION                                                       31


recognizing the exclusive fishery management authority of the    receiver so as to be able to guard VHF-FM channel 13 the Bridge-
United States m an mternational agreement The owners or opera-    to-Bridge Radiotelephone frequency, in addition to VHF-FM
tors of foreign vessels desiring to engage in fishing off U S      channel 16 the National Distress, Safety and Calling frequency
coastal waters should ascertain their ehgiblity from their own flag    required by Federal Communications Commusslon regulations
state authonrities Failure to obtain a permit prior to fishing, or fail-    (See 26 01 through 26 10, chapter 2, for Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge
ure to comply with the conditions and restrictions established m   Radlotelephone Regulations )
the permit may subject both vessel and its owners or operators to
                                                                    (660) Marners are reminded that the use of bridge-to-bridge
adnmnstratve civil and cnrmnal penalties (Further details con-
                adnistrative civil and criminal penalties (Further details con-    voice communications in no way alters the obligation to comply
cerning foreign fishing are given in 50 CFR 611 (not camrned in    with the provisions of the Navigation Rules, International-Inland
this Coast Pilot)
 (657) Reports of foreign fishing activity within the fishery con-  (661  VHF-FM Radiotelephone -VHF-FM channel 16
servation zone should be made to the U S Coast Guard Immedi-    (156 800 MHz) is the international distress urgency safety, call-
ate reports are particularly desired, but later reports by any means    ing and reply frequency for vessels, publc and pvate coastal sta-
                                                                   tlons  In 1992 the Federal Communmcations Cormmsslon (FCC)
also have value Reports should include the activity observed, the
position, and as much identifying information (name number,    desg           nated VHF-FM channel 9 (156 450 MHz) for use s a gen-
                                                                   eral purpose callmg frequency for non commercial vessels, such
homeport, type, flag, color, size, shape etc ) about the foreign ves-
sel as possible and the reportmg party s name and address or tele-    as recreatlonal boats This move was designed to relieve conges-
phone number                                                       tion on VHF-FM channel 16  Non-commercial vessels are
                                                                   encouraged to use VHF-FM channel 9 for routine commumcations
                                                                   but distress, urgency, and safety calls should continue to be mi-
 (658) Bridge-to-Bridge Radlotelephone Communication -    tially made on VHF-FM channel 16
Voice radio bndge-to-bndge commumcation between vessels is an
                  effective aid in te p ns    w e tere              (662) The following table provides the frequency equivalents
effective aid In the prevention of collisions where there is
restncted maneuvering room andlor visibility VHF-FM radio Is    and general usage of selected VHF-FM channels which appear m
                   escd mvri g rm a nr    v isiy  ra o is         the Coast Pilot The letter "A" appended to a channel number mdl-
used for this purpose, due to Its essentially lme-of-slght character-
ushc and relatve freedom from static As VHF-FM has mcreas-    cates that U S operation of the particular channel is different than
                                                           istic and relative  the international operation,  e , U S stations transrmt and receive
ingly come into use for short-range communications in U S
                                                                   on the same frequency and international stations use different fre-
harbors and other high-traffic waters so has the number of ships    quencies
equipped with this gear increased
 (659) The Vessel Bndge-to-Bndge Radiotelephone Regulations,        (663) The information given here is extracted from the  Man-
effective January 1, 1973, require vessels subJect to the Act while    time Radio Users Handbook" published by the Radio Technical
navigating to be equipped with at least one single channel trans-    Commsson for Maritime Services Ordering information for this
ceiver capable of transmitting and receiving on VHF-FM channel    valuable comprehensive publication is included in the appendix
13, the Bndge-to-Bndge Radiotelephone frequency Vessels with        (664) All channels given below are designated for both ship-to-
multichannel equipment are required to have an additional    ship and ship-to-coast commumcations except as noted






32                                             1. GENERAL INFORMATION



                      Ship Frequency (MHIz)
  Channel        Transmit         Receive          Channel Usage
  1A             156.050          156.050          Port operations and commercial
  5A             156.250          156.250          Port operations
  6              156.300          156.300          Intership safety
  7A             156.350          156.350          Commercial
  8              156.400          156.400          Commercial (ship-to-ship only)
  9              156.450          156.450          Non-commercial
  10             156.500          156.500          Commercial
  11             156.550          156.550          Commercial and port operations (traffic advisories, including VTS in some
                                                    ports)
  12             156.600          156.600          Port operations (traffic advisories, including VTS in some ports)
  13             156.650          156.650          Navigational (ship-to-ship), also used at locks and bridges
  14             156.700          156.700          Port operations (traffic advisories, including VTS in some ports)
  16             156.800          156.800          Distress, safety and calling
  17             156.850          156.850          State or local government control
  18A            156.900          156.900          Commercial
  19A            156.950          156.950          Commercial
  20             157.000          161.600          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  22A            157.100          157.100          Coast Guard Liaison
  24             157.200          161.800          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  25             157.250          161.850          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  26             157.300          161.900          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  27             157.350          161.950          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  28             157.400          162.000          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  63A            156.175          156.175          VTS New Orleans
  65A            156.275          156.275          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  66A            156.325          156.325          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  67             156.375          156.375          Commercial (ship-to-ship only) (used in New Orleans VTS for ship-to-ship
                                                    navigational purposes)
  68             156.425          156.425          Non-commercial
  69             156.475          156.475          Non-commercial
  71             156.575          156.575          Non-commercial
  72             156.625          156.625          Non-commercial (ship-to-ship only)
  73             156.675          156.675          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  74             156.725          156.725          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  77             156.875          156.875          Port operations (ship-to-ship, to and from pilots docking ships)
  78A            156.925          156.925          Non-commercial
  79A            156.975          156.975          Commercial
  80A            157.025          157.025          Commercial
  84             157.225          161.825          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  85             157.275          161.875          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  86             157.325          161.925          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  87             157.375          161.975          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  88             157.425          162.025          Public correspondence in Puget Sound and parts of Great Lakes
  88A            157.425          157.425          Commercial, fishing (ship-to-ship) (except in parts of Great Lakes)










                                          2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS

 (1)   This chapter contains sections from the Code of Federal       (27)  'Towing vessel" means any commercial vessel engaged in
Regulations (CFR) that are of most importance in the areas cov-    towing another vessel astern, alongside, or by pushing ahead.
ered by Coast Pilot 8. Included from Title 33, Navigation and         (28)  "Vessel Traffic Services (VTS)" means a service imple-
Navigable Waters (33 CFR), are                                      mented under Part 161 of this chapter by the United States Coast
 (2)   Part 26, Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Regula-    Guard designed to improve the safety and efficiency of vessel traf-
tions;                                                              fic and to protect the environment. The VTS has the capability to
 (3)   Part 67, Aids to Navigation on Artificial Islands and Fixed    interact with marine traffic and respond to traffic situations devel-
Structures (in part);                                               oping in the VTS area.
 (4)   Part 80, COLREGS Demarcation Lines;                           (29)  "Vessel Traffic Service Area or VTS Area" means the geo-
 (5)   Part 110, Anchorage Regulations;                             graphical area encompassing a specific VTS Area of service as
 (6)   Part 160, Ports and Waterways Safety-General;                described in Part 161 of this chapter. This area of service may be
 (7)   Part 161, Vessel Traffic Management;                         subdivided into sectors for the purpose of allocating responsibility
 (8)   Part 162, Inland Waterways Navigation Regulations;           to individual Vessel Traffic Centers or to identify different operat-
 (9)   Part 164, Navigation Safety Regulations (in part);           ing requirements.
 (10)  Part 165, Regulated Navigation Areas and Limited Access       (30)  Note: Although regulatory jurisdiction is limited to the
Areas; and                                                          navigable waters of the United States, certain vessels will be
 (11)  Part 334, Danger Zones and Restricted Area Regulations;    encouraged or may be required, as a condition of port entry to
and from                                                            report beyond this area to facilitate traffic management within the
 (12)  Title 36, Parks, Forests, and Public Property (36 CFR),      VTS area.
 (13)  Part 13, National Park System Units in Alaska.                (31)  ï¿½26.03 Radiotelephone required.
 (14)  Note.-These regulations can only be amended by the            (32)  (a) unless an exemption is granted under ï¿½26.09 and
enforcing agency or other authority cited in the regulations.    except as provided in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, this part
Accordingly, requests for changes to these regulations should be    applies to:
directed to the appropriate agency for action. In those regulations   (33)  (1) Every power-driven vessel of 20 meters or over in
where the enforcing agency is not cited or is unclear, recommen-    length while navigating;
dations for changes should be directed to the following Federal       (34)  (2) Every vessel of 100 gross tons and upward carrying
agencies for action: U.S. Coast Guard (33 CFR 26, 80, 110, 160,    one or more passengers for hire while navigating;
161, 162, 164, and 165); U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (33 CFR         (35)  (3) Every towing vessel of 26 feet or over in length while
334); National Park Service, Department of the Interior (36 CFR     navigating; and
13).                                                                  (36)  (4) Every dredge and floating plant engaged in or near a
                                                                    channel or fairway in operations likely to restrict or affect naviga-
Part 26-Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Regulations          tion of other vessels except for an unmanned or intermittently
                                                                    manned floating plant under the control of a dredge.
 (15)  ï¿½26.01 Purpose.                                               (37)  (b) Every vessel, dredge, or floating plant described in
 (16)  (a) The purpose of this part is to implement the provisions    paragraph (a) of this section must have a radiotelephone on board
of the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act. This part-       capable of operation from its navigational bridge, or in the case of
 (17)  (1) Requires the use of the vessel bridge-to-bridge radio-    a dredge, from its main control station, and capable of transmitting
telephone;                                                          and receiving on the frequency or frequencies within the 156-162
 (1s)  (2) Provides the Coast Guard's interpretation of the mean-    MHz band using the classes of emissions designated by the Fed-
ing of important terms in the Act;                                  eral Communications Commission for the exchange of naviga-
 (19)  (3) Prescribes the procedures for applying for an exemp-    tional information.
tion from the Act and the regulations issued under the Act and a      (38)  (c) The radiotelephone required by paragraph (b) of this
listing of exemptions.                                              section must be carried on board the described vessels, dredges,
 (20)  (b) Nothing in this part relieves any person from the obli-    and floating plants upon the navigable waters of the United States
gation of complying with the rules of the road and the applicable    inside the boundary lines set forth in 46 CFR part 7.
pilot rules.                                                          (39)  (d) The Radiotelephone required by paragraph (b) of this
 (21)  ï¿½26.02 Definitions.                                          section must be capable of transmitting and receiving on VHF FM
 (22)  For the purpose of this part and interpreting the Act-       channel 22A (157.1 MHz).
 (23)  "Secretary" means the Secretary of the Department in          (40)  (e) While transiting any of the following waters, each
which the Coast Guard is operating;                                 vessel described in paragraph (a) of this section also must have on
 (24)  "Act" means the "Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotele-    board a radiotelephone capable of transmitting and receiving on
phone Act," 33 U.S.C. sections 1201-1208;                           VHF FM channel 67 (156.375 MHz):
 (25)  "Length" is measured from end to end over the deck            (41)  (1) The lower Mississippi River from the territorial sea
excluding sheer;                                                    boundary, and within either the Southwest Pass safety fairway or
 (26)  "Power-driven vessel" means any vessel propelled by    the South Pass safety fairway specified in 33 CFR 166.200, to
machinery; and                                                      mile 242.4 AHP (Above Head of Passes) near Baton Rouge;


                                                                                                                                 33





34                                             2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (42)  (2) The Misslsslppi River-Gulf Outlet from the terntonal    carned aboard a vessel ceases to operate, the master shall exercise
sea boundary, and withm the Mlssisslppl River-Gulf outlet Safety    due diligence to restore it or cause it to be restored to effective
Fairway specified m 33 CFR 166 200, to that channel s junction    operating condition at the earliest practicable time The failure of a
with the Inner Harbor Navigation Canal, and                      vessel's radiotelephone equipment shall not, m itself, constitute a
 (43)  (3) The full length of the Inner Harbor Navigation Canal    violation of this Act nor shall It obhgate the master of any vessel
from its junction with the Mlssissippl River to that canal's entry to    to moor or anchor his vessel, however, the loss of radiotelephone
Lake Pontchartram at the New Seabrook vehicular bridge           capablhty shall be given consideration m the navigation of the
 (44)  (f) In addition to the radiotelephone required by para-    vessel
graph (b) of this section each vessel described m paragraph (a) of  (58)  ï¿½26 07 Commumcatlons
this section while transting any waters wthin a Vessel Traffic Ser-  (59)  No person may use the service of, and no person may
vice Area, must have on board a radiotelephone capable of trans-    serve as, a person required to maintaln a hstening watch under
mltting and receivmg on the VTS designated frequency m Table    section 5 of the Act, 33 U S C, 1204, unless the person can com-
26 03(f) (VTS Call Signs, Designated Frequencies, and Monitor-    mumcate in the Enghsh language
mg Areas)                                                          (60)  ï¿½26 08 Exemption procedures
 (45)  Note A single VHF-FM radio capable of scanning or          (61)  (a) Any person may petition for an exemption from any
sequential monltonng (often referred to as dual watch' capabil-    provision of the Act or this part,
ity) will not meet the requirement for two radios                  (62)  (b) Each petition must be submitted    writing to U S
 (46)  ï¿½26 04 Use of the designated frequency                    Coast Guard Office of Navigation Safety and Waterway Services,
 (47)  (a) No person may use the frequency designated by the    2100 Second Street SW, Washmgton, DC 20593-0001 and must
Federal Communications Comminssion under section 8 of the Act,    state-
33 U S C  1207(a) to transmit any information other than infor-    (63)  (1) The provisions of the Act or this part from which an
mation necessary for the safe navigation of vessels or necessary    exemption is requested, and
 (48)  (b) Each ptests                                            (64)  (2) The reasons why marine navigation will not be
 (48)  (b) Each person who is required to maintain  a listening    adversely affected if the exemption is granted and if the exemption
watch under section 5 of the Act shall, when necessary, transmit   relates to a local communication system how that system would
and confirm, on the designated frequency, the intentlons of his    fully comply with the intent of the concept of the Act but would
vessel and any other information necessary for the safe navigation    not conform in detail if the exemption is granted
of vessels
                                                                    (65)  ï¿½26 09 List of exemptions
 (49)  (C) Nothing in these regulations may be construed as pro-
hlblting the use of the designated frequency to commumcate with    (66)  (a) All vessels navigating on those waters governed by
shore stations to obtain or furnish information necessary for the    the navigation rules for Great Lakes and their connecting and tnb
safe navigation of vessels                                       utary waters (33 U S C 241 et seq ) are exempt from the require-
 (50)  (d) On the navigable waters of the Unmted States, channel    ments of the Vessel Brdge-to-Brdge Radiotelephone Act and this
13 (156 65 MHz) lS an additional designated frequency required to    part until May 6, 1975
be monitored in accordance with ï¿½26 05(a) except that in the area  (67)  (b) Each vessel navlgatmg on the Great Lakes as defined
prescribed in ï¿½26 03(d), channel 67 (156 375 MHz) is the desig-   n the Inland Navigational Rules Act of 1980 (33 U S C 2001 et
nated frequency                                                  seq ) and to whinch the Vessel Bridge-to Bridge Radlotelephone
 (51)  (e) On those navigable waters of the Umnted States wlthin    Act (33 U S C  1201-1208) applies is exempt from the requre-
a VTS area the designated VTS frequency is an additional deslg-    ments in 33 U S C  1203 1204, and 1205 and the regulations
nated frequency required to be monitored in accordance with    under ï¿½ï¿½26 03, 26 04 26 05, 26 06, and 26 07 Each of these ves-
ï¿½26 05                                                           sels and each person to whom 33 U S C  1208(a) applies must
 (52)  Note  As stated in 47 CFR 80 148(b) a VHF watch on    comply with Articles VII, X, XI, XII, XIII, XV and XVI and
Channel 16 (156 800 MHz) is not required on vessels subject to    Technical Regulations 1-9 of The Agreement Between the
the Vessel Bridge-to Bridge Radiotelephone Act and participating    Unted States of Amerca and Canada for Promoton of Safety on
in a vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system when the watch is main-    the Great Lakes by Means of Radio, 1973
tamed on both the vessel bndge-to-bridge frequency and a desig-    (68)  ï¿½26 10 Penalties
nated VTS frequency                                                (69)  Section 9 of the Act states-
 (53)  ï¿½26 05 Use of radiotelephone                               (70)  (a) Whoever, being the master or person m charge of a
 (54)  Section 5 of the Act states that the radiotelephone required    vessel subject to the Act, fails to enforce or comply with the Act or
by this Act is for the exclusive use of the master or person in    the regulations hereunder, or whoever, being designated by the
charge of the vessel or the person designated by the master or per-    master or person m charge of a vessel subject to the Act to pilot or
son in charge to pilot or direct the movement of the vessel, who    direct the movement of a vessel fadls to enforce or comply with the
shall maintain a listening watch on the designated frequency     Act or the regulations hereunder-is hable to a civil penalty of not
Nothing herem shall be interpreted as precluding the use of porta-    more than $500 to be assessed by the Secretary
ble radiotelephone equipment to satisfy the requirements of this   (71)  (b) Every vessel navigated in violation of the Act or the
act                                                              regulations hereunder Is hable to a civil penalty of not more than
 (55)  ï¿½26 06 Maintenance of radiotelephone, failure of    $500 to be assessed by the Secretary, for which the vessel may be
radiotelephone                                                   proceeded against in any Distnct Court of the United States hav-
 (56)  Section 6 of the Act states-                              mg junsdlction
 (i7)  (a) Whenever radiotelephone capability is required by      (72)  (c) Any penalty assessed under this section may be renmt-
this Act, a vessel s radiotelephone equipment shall be maintained    ted or mutigated by the Secretary, upon such terms as he may deem
m effective operating condition If the radiotelephone equipment    proper







                                              2.  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                           35




       Table 26.03(f).-VESSEL TRAFFIC SERVICES (VTS) CALL SIGNS, DESIGNATED
                                FREQUENCIES, AND MONITORING AREAS


 Vessel traffic services 1   Designated frequency2
       Call Sign             (channel designation)                                     Monitoring area


                                                           New York


New York Traffic3 .....   156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) .....  The waters of the Lower New York Bay west of a line drawn from Norton Point
                                                       to Breezy Point and north of a line drawn from Ambrose Entrance Lighted
                                                       Gong Buoy #1 to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #9 thence to West
                                                       Bank Light and thence to Great Kills Light. The waters of the Upper New York
                                                       Bay, south of 40ï¿½42.40'N. (Brooklyn Bridge) and 40043.70'N. (Holland Tunnel
                                                       Ventilator Shaft); and in Newark Bay, north of 40ï¿½38.25'N. (Arthur Kill
                                                       Railroad Bridge), and south of 40ï¿½41.95'N. (Lehigh Valley Draw Bridge); and
                                                       the Kill Van Kull.
                          156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) .....    The waters of Raritan Bay east of a line drawn from Great Kills Light to Point
                                                       Comfort in New Jersey and south of a line drawn from Great Kills Light to
                                                       West Bank Light, thence to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #9, and
                                                       thence to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #1, and west of a line drawn
                                                       from Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #1 to the Sandy Hook Channel
                                                       Entrance Buoys (Sandy Hook Lighted Gong Buoy #1 and Sandy Hook Lighted
                                                       Bell Buoy #2).
                          156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) .....  Each vessel at anchor within the above areas.

                                                           Houston3


                                                       The navigable waters north of 29ï¿½N., west of 94ï¿½20'W., south of 29049'N., and
                                                       east of 95ï¿½20'W.:
Houston Traffic .......    156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) .....    The navigable waters north of a line extending due west from the southern most
                                                       end of Exxon Dock #1 (29ï¿½43.37'N., 95001.27'W.)
                          156.600 MHz (Ch 12) .....    The navigable waters south of a line extending due west from the southern most
                                                       end of Exxon Dock #1 (29ï¿½43.37'N., 95ï¿½01.27'W.).

                                                          Berwick Bay


Berwick Traffic .......   156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) .....  The navigable waters south of 29045'N., west of 91"10'W., north of 29ï¿½37'N.,
                                                       and east of 91ï¿½18'W.

                                                        St. Marys River


Soo Control ..........    156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) .....    The navigable waters of the St. Marys River between 45ï¿½57'N. (De Tour Reef
                                                       Light) and 46038.7'N. (Ile Parisienne Light), except the St. Marys Falls Canal
                                                       and those navigable waters east of a line from 46004.16'N. and 46ï¿½01.57'N. (La
                                                       Pointe to Sims Point in Potagannissing Bay and Worsley Bay).

                                                        San Francisco3


San Francisco Traffic ..   156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) .....  The waters within a 38 nautical mile radius of Mount Tamalpais (37ï¿½55.8'N.,
                                                       122ï¿½34.6'W.) excluding the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area.
                          156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) .....    The waters of the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area eastward to San
                                                       Francisco Bay including its tributaries extending to the ports of Stockton,
                                                       Sacramento and Redwood City.





36                                                 2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS



   Vessel traffic servicesl    Designated frequency2
          Call Sign             (channel designation)                                    Monitoring area



                                                              Puget Sound4


  Seattle Traffic5          156 700 MHz (Ch 14)           The navigable waters of Puget Sound, Hood Canal and adjacent waters south of
                                                           a line connecting Marrowstone Point and Lagoon Point in Admiralty Inlet and
                                                           south of a lihne drawn due east from the southernmost tip of Possession Point on
                                                           Whidbey Island to the shoreline
                             156 250 MHz (Ch 5A)           The navigable waters of the Strait of Juan de Fuca east of 124ï¿½40'W excluding
                                                           the waters m the central portion of the Strait of Juan de Fuca north and east of
                                                           Race Rocks the navigable waters of the Strait of Georgia east of 122ï¿½52'W
                                                           the San Juan Island Archlpelago Rosano Strait Bellngham Bay Admiralty
                                                           Inlet north of a line connecting Marrowstone Point and Lagoon Point and all
                                                           waters east of Whidbey Island north of a line drawn due east from the
                                                           southernmost tip of Possession Point on Whldbey Island to the shoreline
  Tofino Traffic6           156 725 MHz (Ch 74)            The waters west of 124ï¿½40'W withun 50 nautical rmles of the coast of
                                                           Vancouver Island mcludmg the waters north of 48ï¿½N  and east of 127ï¿½W
  Vancouver Traffic         156 550 MHz (Ch 11)            The navigable waters of the Strait of Georgia west of 122052'W  the navigable
                                                           waters of the central Strait of Juan de Fuca north and east of Race Rocks
                                                           including the Gulf Island Archipelago Boundary Pass and Haro Strait

                                                         Prince Willam Sound7


  Valdez Traffic            156 650 MHz (Ch 13)            The navigable waters south of 61"05'N east of 147020'W north of 600N  and
                                                           west of 146ï¿½30'W and all navigable waters m Port Valdez

                                                               Louisville7


  Louisville Traffic        156 650 MHz (Ch 13)            The navigable waters of the Ohio River between McAlpme Locks (Mile 606)
                                                           and Twelve Mile Island (Mile 593), only when the McAlpme upper pool gauge
                                                           is at approximately 13 0 feet or above

    NOTES
    1 VTS regulations are denoted m 33 CFR Part 161 All geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude) are expressed m North American
  Datum of 1983 (NAD 83)
    2 In the event of a communication failure either by the vessel traffic center or the vessel or radio congestion on a designated VTS
  frequency communmcatlons may be estabhshed on an alternate VTS frequency The bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency 156 650 MHz
  (Channel 13), is monitored in each VTS area, and it may be used as an alternate frequency however only to the extent that doing so
  provides a level of safety beyond that provided by other means
    3 Designated frequency momtonng is required withun U S navigable waters In areas which are outside the U S navigable waters
  designated frequency monitonng is voluntary However prospective VTS Users are encouraged to monitor the designatedfrequency
    4 A Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service was established by the Umnted States and Canada wlthin adjoining waters The appropriate vessel
  traffic center adrministers the rules issued by both nations however it will enforce only its own set of rules within its Junsdiction
    5 Seattle Traffic may direct a vessel to moImtor the other primary VTS frequency 156 250 MHz or 156 700 MHz (Channel 5A or 14)
  depending on traffic density, weather conditions or other safety factors rather than strictly adhering to the designated frequency required
  for each momtorinng area as defined above This does not require a vessel to monmtor both primary frequencies
    6 A portion of Tofino Sector s momtonng area extends beyond the defined CVTS area Designated frequency monmtonng Is voluntary m
  these portions outside of VTS junsdiction however prospective VTS Users are encouraged to monitor the designated frequency
    7 The bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency 156 650 MHz (Channel 13) is used in these VTSs because the level of radiotelephone
  transmisslons does not warrant a designated VTS frequency The hstenmng watch reqiured by ï¿½26 05 of this chapter is not hrmted to the
  mointonng area





                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      37


PART 67 - AIDS TO NAVIGATION ON ARTIFICIAL                         Department in which the Coast Guard is operating," includmg the
ISLANDS AND FIXED STRUCTURES (in part)                             authority to promulgate and enforce regulations under the Outer
                                                                   Continental Shelf Lands Act (43 U S C 1333) By a rule in 49
SUBPART 67 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                               CFR 1 9 the Secretary continued in effect actions taken prior to
                                                                   April 1, 1967 By rules m 49 CFR 1 4 (a) (2) and (f) the Secretary
 (73)  ï¿½67 01  1 Scope                                             of Transportation authorized the Commandant U S Coast Guard
 (74)  (a) The regulations in this part prescnbe the obstruction    with respect to his own organization, to exercise the authority
hghts and fog signals to be operated as privately mamntaned man-    granted to the Secretary as Executive head of that department by
time aids to navigation on the artificial islands and structures    any statute Executive order or regulation Section 1657 (e) of
which are erected on or over the seabed and subsoil of the Outer    Title 49 U S C provides for delegation and redelegation of pow-
Continental Shelf and in the waters under the jurisdiction of the    ers and functions vested in the Secretary By a rule m 49 CFR 1 4
United States, for the purpose of exploring for, developing,    (g) the Commandant Is authorized to redelegate and authorize suc-
removing and transporting resources therefrom                      cesslve redelegations withm the organization under his junsdlc-
 (7T)  (b) Subpart 66 01 in Part 66 of this subchapter shall be    ton
apphcable to all private aids to navigation erected on or over the  (85)  (b) Delegation of functions The Coast Guard District
Outer Continental Shelf in the same manner and to the same    Commander is hereby delegated responsibilihty for perfornung, or
extent as they are apphcable to private aids to navigation estab-    having performed the inspections, enforcement and adminmmstra-
lished, erected, or maintained in the waters under the jurisdiction    tion of such regulations, which are or may be required He may
of the Umted States                                                redelegate this authority as necessary to any person from the civil-
 (76)  ï¿½67 01 - 5 Definitions                                      ian or mihtary branch of the Coast Guard
 (77)  (a) Structures The term  structures" as used in this part    (86)  ï¿½67 01 - 15 Classlficaton of structures
shall include all fixed structures, temporary or permanent, for     (87)  (a) The vaned depths of water and manne commerce traf-
which a Corps of Engineers permit is issued It shall mclude, but    fic routes which exist in the waters over the Outer Contmental
is not necessarily hmuted to, all drilling platforms, production plat-    Shelf, and m other waters, permit the classfication of structures
forms, quarters platforms, pipe line riser platforms, manifold plat-    according to their location    such waters Those structures m the
forms, loading platforms boat landings, caissons, well protective    area seaward of the lne of demarcation, prescnbed by the regula-
structures, tank battery barges submerged on station, drlling    tions    this part, are designated as Class 'A' structures All struc-
barges submerged on location, breakwater barges submerged on    tures shoreward of the lime of demarcation, prescribed by the
location, artificial islands and all other piles, pile clusters, pipes, or    regulations m this part are designated as either Class B' or Class
structures erected m the waters                                    "C" structures
 (78)  (b) Class "A"  B ', or "C" structures The term "Class A,     (8)  (b) In the event a lie of demarcation is not prescrbed
B, or C structures refers to the classification assigned to struc-    the District Commander shall designate a structure "A", "B', or
tures erected in areas m which corresponding requirements for    "C as he deems appropriate
marking are prescribed
marking are prescribed                                               (s()  ï¿½67 01 - 20 Prescribing limes of demarcation
 (79)  (c) Line of demarcation The term 'line of demarcation        (89)  ï¿½6701 - 20 Pres          lines of demarcation
means the dividing line used administratively to dlstngush           (90)  In those areas where lines of demarcation are not pre-
between the areas in which structures shall conform to Class "A"    scbed or where they have been prescribed and require modfica-
and Cl ass B  or C ' requirements                                  tion, the District Commander shall submit his recommendations
                                             an Cas  o Creureensthereon to the Commandant for estabhshment or changes as
 (so)  (d) Outer Continental Shelf The term Outer Continental    thereon to the Commandant for establishment or changes as
Shelf means all submerged lands lying seaward and outside the    required When approved by the Commandant and upon publeca-
           area of lands beneath navgable waters as dened in the Sub-    tion in the Federal Register, such additions or changes in hnes of
area of lands beneath navigable waters as defined in the Sub- d
merged Lands Act (sec 2 67 Stat 29, 43 U  S C  1301), and of    demarcation shall be effective for the purposes of this part
which the subsoil and seabed appertain to the United States and      (91)  ï¿½67 01- 30 Equivalents
are subject to its junsdction and control                            (92)  The use of alternate equipment apparatus, or installation
 (81)  (e) Reliable operation The term "reliable as used m this    arrangements specified in this part may be permitted by the Ds-
part shall mean that dependability which will msure to the highest    tnct Commander to such extent and under such conditions as will
degree reasonably possible the uninterrupted operation of lights    result i n achievig a degree of safety or compliance with these
and fog signals as private aids to navigation for safety of manne    regulations equivalent to or above the mimmum requirements set
commerce                                                           forth m this part
 (82)  (f) Fog signal The term "fog signal" as used in this part
shall mean the audible sound signal, authorized as a private aid to    SUBPART 67 05 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
navigation, to mark a structure for the safety of marine commerce    LIGHTS
whenever the vislbility has been reduced by fog, mist, ram, falling
snow, smoke, dust, or other phenomena                                (93)  ï¿½67 05 - 1 Arrangement of obstruction hghts
 (83)  ï¿½67 01 - 10 Authority to regulate and delegation of          (94)  (a) Structures having a maximum horizontal dimension of
functions                                                          30 feet or less on any one side, or m diameter, shall be required to
 (84)  (a) Regulatory authority By virtue of the Department of    have one obstruction light visible for 360ï¿½
Transportation Act (Pub L 89-670, 80 Stat 931-950, 49 U  S C         (95)  (b) Structures having a maximum horizontal dimension of
1651-1659), estabhshmg the Department of Transportation, the    over 30 feet, but not in excess of 50 feet, on any one side, or in
U S Coast Guard together with its functions and duties under the    diameter shall be required to have two obstruction lights mstalled
Secretary of the Treasury was transferred to the new department    on diagonally opposite corners, 1800 apart or as prescribed by the
The Secretary of Transportation thereby became the head of the    District Commander, each hght to have a 360ï¿½ lens





38                                               2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (96)  (C) Structures having a horizontal dimension of over 50    structure to be marked by the lights which m his judgment are nec-
feet on any one side, or m diameter, shall be required to have an    essary for the safety of manne commerce, and without regard to
obstruction light on each corner or 90ï¿½ apart in the case of circular    the fact that the structure may be located m an area m which either
structures, or as prescribed by the District Commander, each light    Class "B  or Class "C  requirements are otherwise applicable
to have a 360ï¿½ lens                                                 The requirements for the lights m any of these cases shall not
 (97)  (d) Where the overall dimensions of a structure require    exceed those estabhshed for structures in the Class "A  areas
the installation of two or more obstruction lights, the lights shall
all be mounted on the same horizontal plane within the llrmtatlons    SUBPART 67 10 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FOG
of height specified m ï¿½67 20 - 5, ï¿½67 25 - 5, or ï¿½67 30 - 5, as    SIGNALS
applicable
 (98)  (e) Lesser structures and piles, pile clusters or flare tem-  (ilo)  ï¿½67 10 - 1 Apparatus requirements
plates, etc will not normally be required to be marked by obstruc-    (111)  The fog signal required by ï¿½ï¿½67 20 - 10, 67 25 - 10, and
tion lights, when they are located within 100 yards of a Class 'A",    67 30 - 10 must
'B" or "C' structure marked by established obstruction lights, but   (112)  (a) Have its maximum intensity at a frequency between
they shall be marked with red or white retro-reflective material,    100 and 1,100 Hertz
installed as prescribed by the District Commander                     (113)  (b) Sound a 2 - second blast every 20 seconds (2 seconds
 (99)  (f) All obstruction lights shall be installed in a manner    sound 18 seconds silence) unless otherwise authorized by the Dis-
which will permit at least one of them to be carned m sight of the    tnct Commander,
manner, regardless of the angle of approach, until he is within 50    (14)  (c) Have the range required by ï¿½67 20  10, ï¿½67 25 - 10,
feet of the structure, visibility permittmg                         or ï¿½67 30 - 10,
 (oo00)  ï¿½67 05 -5 Multiple obstruction lights                       (115)  (d) Have a height not exceeding 25 feet
 (l0l) When more than one obstruction light Is required by this      (116)  (e) Have not more than eight sound sources,
part to mark a structure, all such lights shall be operated to flash inapproved by the Coast Guard under 
                                                                      (117)  (f) Be approved by the Coast Guard under ï¿½67 10 - 15,
unison                                                              and
 (]02)  ï¿½67 05 - 10 Characteristlcs of obstruction hghts
 (103)  All obstruction lights required by this part shall be pow-   (i1)  (g) Be permanently mard with
ered from a reliable power source, including auxiliary power          ( 19)  (1) The date of Coast Guard approval,
sources as necessary They shall display a quick-flash charactens-     (120)  (2) The manufacturer and date of manufacture,
tic of approximately 60 flashes per minute, unless prescribed oth-    (121)  (3) A model designahon
erwlse in the permit issued by the District Commander Their           (122)  (4) The approved range, and
color shall be white when marking Class "A" and B" structures,        (123)  (5) The power necessary to comply with the provisions of
and either white or red as prescribed by the District Commander,    paragraph (c) of this section
when marking Class "C" structures In deterrmmng whether white         (124)  ï¿½67 10 - 5 Location requirements
or red lights shall be authorized the District Commander shall        (125) The fog signal required by ï¿½ï¿½67 20 - 10, 67 25 - 10, and
take into consideration matters concerning, but not necessarily    67 30 - 10 must
limited to, the dimensions of the structure and the depth of water    (126)  (a) Be located on the structure so that the sound signal
in which it is located, the proximity of the structure to vessel    produced is audible over 360ï¿½ in a horizontal plane at all ranges up
routes, the nature and amount of vessel traffic, and the effect of    to and includming the required range, and
background lighting                                                   (127)  (b) Be located at least 10 feet but not more than 150 feet
 (104) ï¿½67 05 - 15 Operating periods of obstruction lights          above mean high water
 (105) Obstruction lights shall be displayed at all times between    (128)  ï¿½6710 -10 Operatmg requirements
the hours of sunset and sunrise, local time, commencing at the        (129)  (a) Fog signals required by ï¿½ï¿½67 20 - 10, 67 25 - 10 and
time the construction of a structure is begun During construction    67 30 - 10 must be operated continuously, regardless of visibility
and until such time as a platform capable of supporting the    unless the fog signal Is controlled
obstruction lights is completed the fixed lights on an attending
vessel shall be used In addition, when lights are in use for general  (130)  (1) By an attendant on the structure
illurmnatlon to facilitate the construction or operation of a struc
ture, and can be seen from any angle of approach at a distance        (132)  (3) By a fog detection device capable of actvating the fog
equal to that prescribed for the obstruction lights for the class of    signal when the vlslblity m any direction is reduced to the range
structure, the actual operation of obstruction lights also will not be    at which fog signal operation is required by this part
required                                                              (133) (b) Dunng construction and until such hme as a fog signal
 (106)  ï¿½67 05 - 20 Minmum lighting requirements                     s installed and operating on a platform, the whistle of an attending
 (107)  The obstruction lighting requirements prescribed in this    vessel moored alongside the platform may be used to sound the
part are the mnmmum requirements only and shall not preclude the    signal required for the structure by this part
mamntainer from making apphcation for authorization to estabhsh       (134)  ï¿½6710- 15Approvaloffogsignals
more lights, or lights of greater intensity than required to be visl-  (135)  (a) The Coast Guard approves a fog signal if
ble at the distances prescribed provided, that the prescribed char-   (136)  (1) It meets the requirements for fog signals m ï¿½67 10 - 1
actenstics of color and flash duration are adhered to               (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) when tested under ï¿½67 10 - 20, or
  (108)  ï¿½67 05 - 25 Special hghtmg requirements                      (137)  (2) It is similar to a fog signal which was tested and
  (109) Whenever a structure is erected in a position on or adja     approved under the provisions of this section and the Coast Guard
cent to the edges of navigable channels and fairways, or lines of    has approved all variations in design construction production
demarcation, the District Commander is authorized to require the    and manufacture from the fog signal tested





                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      39


 (138) (b) A fog signal that is an identical production model of a  (151) (a) The anchorage grounds-(1) Hassler Harbor-explo-
fog signal which has been approved under paragraph (a) of this    slves anchorage The waters of Hassler Harbor within a circular
section is a Coast Guard approved fog signal                       area with a radius of 1,500 yards having its center at latitude
                                                                   55ï¿½12'52"N, longitude 131ï¿½25'52"W
Part 80-COLREGS Demarcation Lines                                    (1d2) (b) The regulations (1) Except in an emergency only a
                                                                   vessel that is transporting loading or discharging explosives may
 (139)  ï¿½80 01 General basis and purpose of demarcation            anchor moor or remain within the Hassler Harbor explosives
lines                                                              anchorage
 (140)  (a) The regulations in this part establish the lines of     (153)  (2) A master or person in charge of a vessel shall obtain a
demarcation delneating those waters upon which manners shall    wntten permit from the Captain of the Port Southeast Alaska, to
comply with the International Regulations for Preventing Colli-    anchor moor or remain within the explosives anchorage The ves-
slons at Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS) and those waters upon which    sel shall anchor in the position specified by the perrmt
manners shall comply with the Inland Navigation Rules               (154)  (3) The net weight of the explosives laden aboard all ves-
 (141)  (b) The waters inside of the hnes are Inland Rules waters  sels anchored, moored or remaining within the anchorage shall
The waters outside the lines are COLREGS waters                    not exceed 800,000 pounds
 (142)  (c) Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude   (155)  (4) The Captain of the Port, Southeast Alaska, may
or longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or    require a nonself-propelled vessel to be attended by a tug while
charts whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American    moored, anchored or remaining within the explosives anchorage
Datum of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are      (156)  (5) A wooden vessel must-
expressly labeled NAD 83 Geographic coordinates without the         (157)  (1) Be fitted with a radar reflector screen of metal of suffi-
NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to    cient size to permit target indication on the radar screen of com-
NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that    merclal type radar, or
are published on the particular map or chart bemg used               (158)  (n) Have steel bulwarks or
 (143)  ï¿½80 1705 Alaska                                             (159)  (ni) Have metalhc cases or cargo aboard
 (144) The 72 COLREGS shall apply on all the sounds, bays           (160)  (6) Each vessel moored, anchored, or remaining within
harbors, and mlets of Alaska                                       the explosives anchorage and carrying loading, or dischargmg
                                                                   explosives from sunnse to sunset shall display-
Part 110-Anchorage Regulations                                       (161) (i) A red flag from the mast or
                                                                    (162) (11) A sign posted on each side of the vessel reading
 (145)  ï¿½110 1 General                                              Explosives-Keep Clear-No Smoking or Open Flame" in letters
 (146)  (a) The areas described in Subpart A of tlus part are des-    that are 3 inches or larger and have sufficient contrast with the
Ignated as special anchorage areas pursuant to the authority con-    background to be seen from a distance of 200 feet
tauned in an act amending laws for preventing colhsions of vessels   (163) (7) Each vessel moored anchored or remaining within
approved April 22 1940 (54 Stat 150), Article 11 of section 1 of    the anchorage dunng the mght shall dlsplay-
the act of June 7, 1897 as amended (30 Stat 98 33 U S C  180),      (164)  (i) Anchor hlights, and
Rule 9 of section 1 of the act of February 8 1895 as amended (28     (165) (n) A 32 pomt red light located from the mast or highest
Stat 647, 33 U S C 258) and Rule Numbered 13 of section 4233    part of the vessel to be visible all around the horizon for a distance
of the Revised Statutes as amended (33 U S C 322) Vessels not    of 2 miles
more than 65 feet m length, when at anchor in any special anchor-
age area shall not be required to carry or exhibit the white anchor    Part 160-Ports and Waterways Safety-General
lights required by the Navigation Rules
 (147)  (b) The anchorage grounds for vessels described in Sub-    Subpart A-General
part B of this part are established and the rules and regulations in
relation thereto adopted, pursuant to the authority contained in     (66) ï¿½1601 Purpose
section 7 of the act of March 4 1915, as amended (38 Stat 1053,     (167)  Part 160 contains regulations implementmg the Ports and
33 U S C 471)                                                      Waterways Safety Act (33 U S C 1221) and related statutes
 (148)  (C) All beanngs in the part are referred to true mendian    (168)  ï¿½160 3 Definitions
 (149)  (d) Geographic coordinates expressed m terms of latitude    (169) Forthepurposesofthis subchapter
or longitude or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or       (170)  'Bulk" matenal m any quantity that is shipped, stored, or
charts whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American    handled without the benefit of package label, mark or count and
Datum of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are    carred m mtegral or fixed mdependent tanks
expressly labeled NAD 83 Geographic coordinates without the          (171)   Captain of the Port means the Coast Guard officer desig-
NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to    nated by the Commandant to command a Captain of the Port Zone
NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that    as described m part 3 of this chapter
are published on the particular map or chart being used              (172)   Commandant" means the Commandant of the United
                                                                   States Coast Guard
Subpart A-Special Anchorage Areas (None applicable to this          (173)  'Commandmg Officer Vessel Traffic Servlces means the
Coast Pilot )                                                      Coast Guard officer designated by the Commandant to command a
                                                                   Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) as described in part 161 of this chap-
Subpart B-Anchorage Grounds                                        ter
                                                                    (174)  Deviation" means any departure from any rule in this
 (150)  ï¿½110 232 Southeast Alaska                                  subchapter





40                                               2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (175)   District Commander' means the Coast Guard officer des-    within anchorages, regulated navigation areas and safety zones,
ignated by the Commandant to command a Coast Guard District    and to enforce Vessel Traffic Service and ports and waterways
as described in part 3 of this chapter                             safety regulations  This authority may be exercised by Vessel
 (176)  'ETA" means estimated time of arrival                      Traffic Center personnel  The Vessel Traffic Center may, within
 (177)  Length of Tow' means, when towing with a hawser, the    the Vessel Traffic Service area provide mformaton, make recom-
length in feet from the stern of the towing vessel to the stern of the    mendations, or to a vessel required under Part 161 of this chapter
last vessel in tow  When pushing ahead or towing alongside,    to participate in a Vessel Traffic Service issue an order including
length of tow means the tandem length m feet of the vessels in tow    an order to operate or anchor as directed, require the vessel to
excluding the length of the towing vessel                          comply with orders issued, specify times of entry movement or
 (178)  "Person means an individual, firm, corporation, assocla-    departure, restrict operations as necessary for safe operation under
tion, partnership, or governmental entity                          the circumstances, or take other action necessary for control of the
 (179)   State" means each of the several States of the United    vessel and the safety of the port or of the manne environment
States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto         (193)  ï¿½160 7 Appeals
Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands,        (194)  (a) Any person directly affected by a safety zone or an
the Trust Terntories of the Pacific Islands, the Commonwealth of    order or direction issued under this subchapter (33 CFR Subchap-
the Northern Maranas Islands, and any other commonwealth, ter-    ter P) may request reconsideration by the official who issued it or
rltory, or possession of the Unmted States                         in whose name it was issued This request may be made orally or
 (180)  'Tanke" means a self-propelled tank vessel constructed or    in writing, and the decision of the official receiving the request
adapted primarily to carry oil or hazardous materials in bulk in the    may be rendered orally or m writing
cargo spaces                                                         (195) (b) Any person directly affected by the establishment of a
 (181)   Tank Vessel  means a vessel that is constructed or    safety zone or by an order or direction Issued by, or on behalf of, a
adapted to carry, or that carnes, oil or hazardous material in bulk    Captain of the Port may appeal to the District Commander through
as cargo or cargo residue                                          the Captain of the Port The appeal must be in writing, except as
 (182)  Vehicle" means every type of conveyance capable of    allowed under paragraph (d) of this section, and shall contain
being used as a means transportation on land                       complete supporting documentation and evidence which the
 (183)  "Vessel" means every description of watercraft or other    appellant wishes to have considered Upon receipt of the appeal,
artificial contrivance used, or capable of being used, as a means of    the Dstnrict Commander may direct a representative to gather and
transportation on water                                            submit documentation or other evidence which would be neces-
 (184)  'Vessel Traffic Services (VTS)" means a service imple-    sary or helpful to a resolution of the appeal A copy of this docu-
mented under Part 161 of this chapter by the United States Coast    mentatlon and evidence is made available to the appellant The
Guard designed to improve the safety and efficiency of vessel traf-    appellant is afforded five working days from the date of receipt to
fic and to protect the environment  The VTS has the capability to    submit rebuttal materials Following submission of all materials,
interact with marine traffic and respond to traffic sltuations devel-    the District Commander issues a ruling in writing, on the appeal
opmg in the VTS area                                               Prior to issuing the ruling the District Commander may as a mat-
 (185) "Vessel Traffic Service Area or VTS Area" means the    ter of discretion, allow oral presentation on the issues
geopgraphical area encompassing a specific VTS area of service       (196)  (c) Any person directly affected by the establishment of a
as described in Part 161 of this chapter This area of service may  safety zone or by an order or direction issued by a District Com-
be subdivided into sectors for the purpose of allocating responsi-    mander, or who receives an unfavorable ruling on an appeal taken
billty to mdivldual Vessel Traffic Centers or to identify different    under paragraph (b) of this section, may appeal through the Dis-
operating requirements                                             tnct Commander to the Chief Office of Marine Safety, Security
 (186) Note  Although regulatory jurisdictlon is limited to the    and Environmental Protection, U S Coast Guard Washington,
navigable waters of the United States, certain vessels will be    D C  20593 The appeal must be in writing except as allowed
encouraged or may be required, as a condition of port entry, to    under paragraph (d) of this section The District Commander for-
report beyond this area to faclhtate traffic management within the    wards the appeal, all the documents and evidence which formed
VTS area                                                           the record upon which the order or direction was issued or the rul-
 (187)  "VTS Special Area' means a waterway within a VTS area    ing under paragraph (b) of this section was made, and any com-
in which special operating requirements apply                      ments which might be relevant, to the Chief, Office of Marine
 (188)  ï¿½160 5 Delegations                                         Safety Security and Environmental Protection A copy of this
 (189)  (a) District Commanders and Captains of the Ports are    documentation and evidence is made available to the appellant
delegated the authority to estabhsh safety zones                   The appellant is afforded five working days from the date of
 (190)  (b) Under the provisions of 33 CFR 6 04-1 and 6 04-6,    receipt to submit rebuttal materials to the Chief Office of Marine
District Commanders and Captains of the Ports have been dele-    Environment and Systems The decision of the Chief Office of
gated authority to establish security zones                        Marine Safety, Security and Environmental Protection is based
 (191)  (c) Under the provisions 33 CFR ï¿½1 05-1, District Com-    upon the materials submitted, without oral argument or presenta
manders have been delegated authority to establish regulated navi-    tion The decision of the Chief Office of Marne Safety Security
gation areas                                                       and Environmental Protection is issued in writing and constitutes
 (192) (d) SubJect to the supervision of the cogmzant Captain of    final agency action
the Port and District Commander, Commanding Officers Vessel          (197) (d) If the delay m presenting a written appeal would have
Traffic Services are delegated authority under 33 CFR 1 01-30 to    slgnmficant adverse impact on the appellant, the appeal under para-
discharge the duties of the Captamn of the Port that involve direct-    graphs (b) and (c) of this section may imtially be presented orally
ing the operation, movement and anchorage of vessels within a    If an initial presentation of the appeal is made orally the appellant
Vessel Traffic Service area including management of vessel traffic    must submit the appeal in writing within five days of the oral pre-






                                                  2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                        41


sentation to the Coast Guard official to whom the presentation was    (216)  (2) Conduct examinations to assure compliance with the
made. The written appeal must contain, at a minimum, the basis    safety equipment requirements for structures.
for the appeal and a summary of the material presented orally. If     (217)  ï¿½160.111 Special orders applying to vessel operations.
requested, the official to whom the appeal is directed may stay the   (21s) Each District Commander or Captain of the Port may
effect of the action while the ruling is being appealed.            order a vessel to operate or anchor in the manner directed when-
                                                                      (219) (a) The District Commander or Captain of the Port has
Subpart B-Control of Vessel and Facility Operations                 reasonable cause to believe that the vessel is not in compliance
                                                                     with any regulation, law or treaty;
 (198)  ï¿½160.101 Purpose.                                            (220)  (b) The District Commander or Captain of the Port deter-
 (199) This subpart describes the authority exercised by District    mines that the vessel does not satisfy the conditions for vessel
Commanders and Captains of the Ports to insure the safety of ves-    operation and cargo transfers specified in ï¿½ 160.113; or
sels and waterfront facilities, and the protection of the navigable   (221)  (c) The District Commander or Captain of the Port has
waters and the resources therein. The controls described in this    determined that such order is justified in the interest of safety by
subpart are directed to specific situations and hazards.            reason of weather, visibility, sea conditions, temporary port con-
 (200)  ï¿½160.103 Applicability.                                     gestion, other temporary hazardous circumstances, or the condi-
 (201)  (a) This subpart applies to any-                            tion of the vessel.
 (202)  (1) Vessel on the navigable waters of the United States,     (222)  ï¿½160.113 Prohibition of vessel operation and cargo
except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section;       transfers.
 (203)  (2) Bridge or other structure on or in the navigable waters  (223)  (a) Each District Commander or Captain of the Port may
of the United States; and                                           prohibit any vessel subject to the provisions of section 4417a of
 (204)  (3) Land structure or shore area immediately adjacent to    the Revised Statutes (46 U.S.C. 391a) from operating in the navi-
the navigable waters of the United States.                          gable waters of the United States, or from transferring cargo or
 (205)  (b) This subpart does not apply to any vessel on the Saint    residue in any port or place under the jurisdiction of the United
Lawrence Seaway.                                                    States, and within the district or zone of that District Commander
 (206)  (c) Except pursuant to international treaty, convention, or    or Captain of the Port, if the District Commander or the Captain of
agreement, to which the United States is a party, this subpart does    the Port determines that the vessel's history of accidents, pollution
not apply to any foreign vessel that is not destined for, or departing    incidents, or serious repair problems creates reason to believe that
from, a port or place subject to the jurisdiction of the United States    the vessel may be unsafe or pose a threat to the marine environ-
and that is in-                                                     ment.
 (207)  (1) Innocent passage through the territorial sea of the      (224)  (b) The authority to issue orders prohibiting operation of
United States;                                                      the vessels or transfer of cargo or residue under paragraph (a) of
 (208)  (2) Transit through the navigable waters of the United    this section also applies if the vessel:
States which form a part of an international strait.                  (225)  (1) Fails to comply with any applicable regulation;
 (209)  ï¿½160.105 Compliance with orders.                             (226)  (2) Discharges oil or hazardous material in violation of
 (210) Each person who has notice of the terms of an order issued    any law or treaty of the United States;
under this subpart must comply with that order.                       (227)  (3) Does not comply with applicable vessel traffic service
 (211)  ï¿½160.107 Denial of entry.                                   requirements;
 (212) Each District Commander or Captain of the Port, subject       (228)  (4) While underway, does not have at least one licensed
to recognized principles of international law, may deny entry into    deck officer on the navigation bridge who is capable of communi-
the navigable waters of the United States or to any port or place    cating in the English language.
under the jurisdiction of the United States, and within the district  (229)  (c) When a vessel has been prohibited from operating in
or zone of that District Commander or Captain of the Port, to any    the navigable waters of the United States under paragraphs (a) or
vessel not in compliance with the provisions of the Port and    (b) of this section, the District Commander or Captain of the Port
Tanker Safety Act (33 U.S.C. 1221-1232) or the regulations issued    may allow provisional entry into the navigable waters of the
thereunder.                                                         United States, or into any port or place under the jurisdiction of
 (213)  ï¿½160.109 Waterfront facility safety.                        the United States and within the district or zone of that District
 (214)  (a) To prevent damage to, or destruction of, any bridge or    Commander or Captain of the Port, if the owner or operator of
other structure on or in the navigable waters of the United States,    such vessel proves to the satisfaction of the District Commander
or any land structure or shore area immediately adjacent to those    or Captain of the Port, that the vessel is not unsafe or does not
waters, and to protect the navigable waters and the resources    pose a threat to the marine environment, and that such entry is
therein from harm resulting from vessel or structure damage,    necessary for the safety of the vessel or the persons on board.
destruction, or loss, each District Commander or Captain of the       (230)  (d) A vessel which has been prohibited from operating in
Port may-                                                           the navigable waters of the United States, or from transferring
 (215)  (1) Direct the handling, loading, unloading, storage, stow-    cargo or residue in a port or place under the jurisdiction of the
age, and movement (including the emergency removal, control,    United States under the provisions of paragraph (a) or (b)(1), (2)
and disposition) of explosives or other dangerous articles and sub-    or (3) of this section, may be allowed provisional entry if the
stances, including oil or hazardous material as those terms are    owner or operator proves, to the satisfaction of the District Com-
defined in Section 4417a of the Revised Statutes, as amended, (46    mander or Captain of the Port that has jurisdiction, that the vessel
U.S.C. 391a) on any structure on or in the navigable waters of the    is no longer unsafe or a threat to the environment, and that the
United States, or any land structure or shore area immediately    condition which gave rise to the prohibition no longer exists.
adjacent to those waters; and                                         (231)  ï¿½160.115 Withholding of clearance.






42                                              2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (232)  (a) Each District Commander or Captain of the Port may      (253)  "Carried in bulk" means a commodity that is loaded or
request the Secretary of the Treasury, or the authorized representa-    carried on board a vessel without containers or labels and received
tive thereof, to withhold or revoke the clearance required by 46    and handled without mark or count.
U.S.C. 91 of any vessel, the owner or operator of which is subject   (254)  "Certain dangerous cargo" includes any of the following:
to any penalties under 33 U.S.C. 1232.                               (255)  (a) Class A explosives, as defined in 46 CFR 146.20-7
                                                                    and 49 CFR 173.53.
Subpart C-Notifications of Arrivals, Departures, Hazardous           (256)  (b) Oxidizing materials or blasting agents for which a per-
Conditions, and Certain Dangerous Cargoes                          mit is required under 49 CFR 176.415.
                                                                     (257) (c) Highway route controlled quantity radioactive mate-
 (233)  ï¿½160.201 Applicability and exceptions to applicability.    rial, as defined in 49 CFR 173.403(1), or Fissile Class III ship-
 (234)  (a) This subpart prescribes notification requirements for    ments of fissile radioactive material, as defined in 49 CFR
U.S. and foreign vessels bound for or departing from ports or    173.455(a)(3).
places in the United States.                                         (258) (d) Each cargo under Table 1 of 46 CFR Part 153 when
 (235)  (b) This subpart does not apply to boats under the Federal    carried in bulk.
Boat Safety Act of 1971 (46 U.S.C. 1451, et seq.) and, except        (259)  (e) Any of the following when carried in bulk:
ï¿½160.215, does not apply to passenger and supply vessels when        (260) Acetaldehyde
they are employed in the exploration for or in the exploitation of   (261) Ammonia, anhydrous
oil, gas, or mineral resources on the continental shelf.             (262) Butadiene
 (236)  (c) Sections 160.207 and 160.209 do not apply to the fol-   (263) Butane
lowing:                                                              (264) Butene
 (237)  (1) Each vessel of less than 1,600 gross tons.              (265) Butylene
                                                                     (266) Chlorine
 (238)  (2) Each vessel operating exclusively within a Captain of   (267) Ethane
the Port zone.
                                                                     (268)  Ethylene
 (239)  (3) Each vessel operating upon a route that is described in  (269) Ethylene Oxide
a schedule that is submitted to the Captain of the Port for each port  (270) Methane
or place of destination listed in the schedule at least 24 hours in  (271) Methyl Acetylene, Propadiene Mixture, Stabilized
advance of the first date and time of arrival listed on the schedule  (272)  Methyl Bromide
and contains:                                                        (273) Methyl Chloride
 (240)  (i) Name, country of registry, and call sign or official    (274) Phosphorous, elemental
number of the vessel;                                                (275) Propane
 (241)  (ii) Each port or place of destination; and                 (276) Propylene
 (242)  (iii) Dates and times of arrivals and departures at those   (277)  Sulfur Dioxide
ports or places.                                                     (278) Vinyl Chloride
 (243)  (4) Each vessel arriving at a port or place under force     (279)  "Great Lakes" means Lakes Superior, Michigan, Huron,
majeure.                                                           Erie, and Ontario, their connecting and tributary waters, the Saint
 (244) (5) Each vessel entering a port of call in the United States    Lawrence River as far east as Saint Regis, and adjacent port areas.
in compliance with the Automated Mutual Assistance Vessel Res-       (280) "Hazardous condition" means any condition that could
cue System (AMVER).                                                adversely affect the safety of any vessel, bridge, structure, or shore
 (245)  (6) Each vessel entering a port of call in the United States    area or the environmental quality of any port, harbor, or navigable
in compliance with the U.S. Flag Merchant Vessel Locator Filing    water of the United States. This condition could include but is not
System (USMER).                                                    limited to, fire, explosion, grounding, leakage, damage, illness of a
 (246)  (7) Each barge.                                            person on board, or a manning shortage.
                                                                     (281)  "Port or place of departure" means any port or place in
       \U]7)   (8) Eachpublicvessel.                               which a vessel is anchored or moored.
 (248)  (9) United States or Canadian flag vessels, except tank     (282)  "Port or place of destination" means any port or place to
vessels or vessels carrying certain dangerous cargo, which operate    which a vessel is bound to anchor or moor.
solely on the Great Lakes.                                           (283)  "Public vessel" means a vessel owned by and being used
 (249)  (d) Sections 160.207, 160.211, and 160.213 apply to each    in the public service of the United States. This definition does not
vessel upon the waters of the Mississippi River between its mouth    include a vessel owned by the United States and engaged in a
and mile 235, Lower Mississippi River, above Head of Passes.    trade or commercial service or a vessel under contract or charter to
Sections 160.207, 160.211, and 160.213 do not apply to each ves-    the United States.
sel upon the waters of the Mississippi River between its sources     (284)  ï¿½160.205 Waivers.
and mile 235, above Head of Passes, and all the tributaries empty-   (285)  The Captain of the Port may waive, within that Captain of
ing thereinto and their tributaries, and that part of the Atchafalaya    the Port's designated zone, any of the requirements of this subpart
River above its junction with the Plaquemine-Morgan City alter-    for any vessel or class of vessels upon finding that the vessel,
nate waterway, and the Red River of the North.                     route, area of operations, conditions of the voyage, or other cir-
 (250)  (ï¿½) 160.203 Definitions.                                   cumstances are such that application of this subpart is unnecessary
 (251) As used in this subpart:                                    or impractical for purposes of safety, environmental protection, or
 (252)  "Agent" means any person, partnership, finn, company or    national security.
corporation engaged by the owner or charterer of a vessel to act in  (286)  ï¿½160.207 Notice of arrival: Vessels bound for ports or
their behalf in matters concerning the vessel.                     places in the United States.






                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                     43


 (287) (a) The owner master, agent or person m charge of a ves-    departure at least 24 hours before departing unless this notifica-
sel on a voyage of 24 hours or more shall report under paragraph    tion was made within 2 hours after the vessel s arrval of
(c) of this section at least 24 hours before entering the port or   (313) (1) The name and country of registry of the vessel,
place of destination                                               (314) (2) The name of each certain dangerous cargo carned
 (288) (b) The owner, master, agent, or person in charge of a ves-  (31b) (3) The amount of each certain dangerous cargo carned,
sel on a voyage of less than 24 hours shall report under paragraph  (316) (4) The stowage location of each certain dangerous cargo
(c) of this section before departing the port or place of departure  carned
 (289) (C) The Captain of the Port of the port or place of destma-  (317) (5) The operational condition of the equipment under 33
tion m the United States must be notified of                      CFR 164 35
 (290)  (1) The name and country of registry of the vessel,        (318) (6) The name of the port or place of departure, and
 (291)  (2) The name of the port or place of departure             (319) (7) The estimated time of departure from the port or
 (292)  (3) The name of the port or place of destination, and     place
 (293) (4) The estimnated time of arrival at the port or place     (320) If the estimated time of departure changes by more than
 (294) If the estimated time of arrival changes by more than six    six hours from the latest reported time, the Captain of the Port
hours from the latest reported tunime the Captain of the Port must be    must be notified of the correction as soon as the change is known
notified of the correction as soon as the change is known           (321) (b) The owner master agent, or person in charge of a
 (295) (5) The International Maritime Orgamzation (IMO) inter-    barge departing from a port or place m the United States for any
national number of each foreign flag vessel of 5,000 gross tons or    other port or place and carrying a certain dangerous cargo shall
more, which is constructed or adapted to carry, or that carries, oil   report the information required m paragraph (a)(l) through (a)(7)
in bulk as cargo or cargo residue                                 of this section to the Captain of the Port of the port or place of
 (296) ï¿½160 209 Notice of arrival Vessels bound from the    departure at least 4 hours before departing unless this report was
high seas for ports or places on the Great Lakes                  made wlthin 2 hours after the barge s arrival
 (297) In addition to complying with the requirement of            (322) ï¿½160 215 Notice of hazardous conditions
ï¿½160 207, the owner, master, agent, or person in charge of a vessel  (323) Whenever there Is a hazardous condition on board a ves-
bound from the high seas for any port or place of destination on    sel, the owner, master, agent, or person in charge shall immedl-
the Great Lakes shall notify the Commander, Ninth Coast Guard    ately notify the Captain of the Port of the port or place of
District, at least 24 hours before arriving at the Snell Locks Mas-    destination and the Captain of the Port of the port or place in
sena, New York of                                                 which the vessel is located of the hazardous condition
 (298) (a) The name and country of registry of the vessel, and
 (299)  (b) The estimated time of arrival at the Snell Locks, Mas-    Part 161-Vessel Traffic Management
sena, New York
 (300)  ï¿½160 211 Notice of arrival Vessels carrying certain    Subpart A-Vessel Traffic Services
dangerous cargo
 (301)  (a) The owner, master, agent or person m charge of a ves-  (324) General Rules
sel, except a barge bound for a port or place m the Umted States   (325)  ï¿½161 1 Purpose and Intent
carrying a certain dangerous cargo shall notify the Captam of the  (326) (a) The purpose of this part is to promulgate regulations
Port of the port or place of destination at least 24 hours before    implementing and enforcing certain sections of the Ports and
entenng that port or place of                                     Waterways Safety Act (PWSA) setting up a national system of
  (302)  (1) The name and country of registry of the vessel        Vessel Traffic Services that will enhance navigation, vessel safety
  (303) (2) The location of the vessel at the time of the report,  and marine environmental protection and promote safe vessel
  (304) (3) The name of each certain dangerous cargo carned,       movement by reducing the potential for collisions rammings, and
  (305) (4) The amount of each certam dangerous cargo carned,      groundings, and the loss of lives and property associated with
  (306) (5) The stowage location of each certain dangerous cargo   these incidents within VTS areas established hereunder
  (307) (6) The operational condition of the equipment under 33     (327)  (b) Vessel Traffic Services provide the manner with mfor-
CFR 164 35,                                                       mation related to the safe navigation of a waterway This informa-
  (308)  (7) The name of the port or place of destination, and     tion coupled with the manner s compliance with the provisions
  (309) (8) The estimated time of arnval at that port or place If   set forth m this part, enhances the safe routing of vessels through
the estimated time of arrival changes by more than six hours from    congested waterways or waterways of particular hazard  Under
the latest reported time, the Captain of the Port must be notified of    certain circumstances, a VTS may issue directons to control the
the correction as soon as the change is known                     movement of vessels m order to minimize the risk of collision
  (310)  (b) The owner, master, agent, or person In charge of a    between vessels or damage to property or the environment
barge bound for a port or place m the Unuted States carrying a cer-  (328) (c) The owner, operator, charterer, master, or person
tam dangerous cargo shall report the information required m para-    directing the movement of a vessel remains at all times responsl-
graph (a)(l) through (a)(8) of this section to the Captain of the    ble for the manner in which the vessel is operated and maneu
Port of the port or place of destination at least 4 hours before    vered, and is responsible for the safe navigation of the vessel
enterng that port or place                                        under all circumstances  ComplianLe with these rules or with a
  (311)  ï¿½160 213 Notice of departure Vessels carrying certain    direction of the VTS is at all tunes contingent upon the exigencies
dangerous cargo                                                   of safe navigation
  (312)  (a) The owner, master, agent, or person in charge of a ves-  (329)  (d) Nothing m this part is intended to releve any vessel
sel, except a barge, departing from a port or place in the United    owner operator charterer, master or person directing the move-
States for any other port or place and carrying certain dangerous    ment of a vessel from the consequences of any neglect to comply
cargo shall notify the Captain of the Port of the port or place of    with this part or any other applicable law or regulations (e g, the





44                                               2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


Internatihonal Regulations for Prevention of Collisions at Sea 1972  (347) Note  Although regulatory jursdictlon is limited to the
(72 COLREGS) or the Inland Navigation Rules) or of the neglect    navigable waters of the United States, certain vessels will be
of any precaution which may be required by the ordinary practice    encouraged or may be required, as a condition of port entry, to
of seamen, or by the special circumstances of the case             report beyond this area to faclhtate traffic management within the
 (330) ï¿½161 2 Definitions                                          VTS area
 (331)  For the purposes of this part                               (348)   VTS Special Area" means a waterway within a VTS area
 (332)   Cooperative Vessel Traffic Services (CVTS)" means the    m which special operating requirements apply
system of vessel traffic management established and jointly oper-    (349)  "VTS User' means a vessel or an owner, operator, char-
ated by the Umnted States and Canada within adjolmng waters In    terer, master, or person dlrectmg the movement of a vessel that is
addition, CVTS facilitates traffic movement and anchorages,          (350)  (a) Subject to the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radlotele-
avoids junsdictional disputes and renders assistance in emergen-    phone Act, or
cies in adJoimng United States and Canadian waters                   (351)  (b) Required to particlpate m a VMRS withun a VTS area
 (333)  "Hazardous Vessel Operating Condition means any con-    (VMRS User)
dition related to a vessel s ablhty to safely navigate or maneuver,  (352) "VTS User's Manual" means the manual estabhshed and
and includes, but is not himted to                                 dlstrinbuted by the VTS to provide the manner with a descnption
 (334) (1) The absence or malfunction of vessel operating equip-    of the services offered and rules m force for that VTS  Addition-
ment such as propulsion machinery steenng gear radar system,    ally, the manual may include chartlets showing the area and sector
gyrocompass depth sounding device, automatic radar plotting aid    boundanes, general navigational information about the area, and
(ARPA) radiotelephone, automated dependent surveillance equip-    procedures, radio frequencies, reporting provisions and other
ment, navigational lighting, sound signaling devices or similar    information which may assist the manner while in the VTS area
equipment                                                            (353) ï¿½161 3 Apphcabllity
 (335)  (2) Any condition on board the vessel likely to impair      (354) The provisions of this subpart shall apply to each VTS
navigation, such as lack of current nautical charts and pubhca-    User and may also apply to any vessel while underway or at
tens, personnel shortage, or simlar condition
                tions, personnel shortage, or slar condition      anchor on the navigable waters of the Umnted States within a VTS
 (336) (3) Vessel charactenstics that affect or restrict maneuver-
ability such as cargo arrangement, trim, loaded condition, under-    area, to the extent th    considers neces
keel clearance speed, or slrmlar charactenstcs
 (337)   Precautionary Area" means a routing measure compns-        (356) Each VTS User shall carry on board and maintain for
 (337)  Precautionary Area" means a routing measure compris-
ing an area within defined hints where vessels must navigate with    ready reference a copy of these rules
particular caution and within which the directihon of traffic may be  (357) Note  These rules are contamed in the applicable U S
recommended                                                        Coast Pilot, the VTS User s Manual which may be obtained by
 (338) "Towing Vessel means any commercial vessel engaged in    contacting the appropnate VTS, and periodically published in the
towing another vessel astern, alongside, or by pushing ahead       Local Notice to Manners  The VTS User's Manual and the World
 (339) "Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS)" is a sys-    VTS Guide, an Internatonal Manume Organzation (IMO) recog-
tem used to manage and track vessel movements within a VTS         mzed pubhcation, contain additional  formation which may assist
area  This is accomplished by a vessel providing information    the prudent manner while m the appropnate VTS area
under established procedures as set forth in this part, or as        (358)  ï¿½1615 Devlatlons from the rules
directed by the VTS                                                  (359) (a) Requests to deviate from any provision in this part,
 (340) "Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS) User'    either for an extended penod of time or If anticipated before the
means a vessel, or an owner, operator charterer, master, or person    start of a transit, must be subrmtted m wntmg to the appropriate
directing the movement of a vessel that is required to participate    Dstrict Commander Upon receipt of the wntten request, the Dls-
in a VMRS within a VTS area  VMRS participation is required    trict Commander may authonze a deviaton if It is determined that
for                                                                such a deviation provides a level of safety equivalent to that pro-
 (341) (1) Every power-driven vessel of 40 meters (approxl-    vided by the required measure or is a maneuver considered neces-
mately 131 feet) or more in length, while navigating,              sary for safe navlgation under the circumstances  An applicaton
 (342) (2) Every towing vessel of 8 meters (approximately 26    for an authorized devlation must state the need and fully describe
feet) or more in length, while navigating, or                      the proposed alternative to the required measure
 (343)  (3) Every vessel certificated to carry 50 or more passen-   (360)  (b) Requests to deviate from any provision in this part due
gers for hire when engaged in trade                                to circumstances that develop dunng a transit or immediately pre-
 (344)  "Vessel Traffic Center (VTC)" means the shore-based    ceding a transit, may be made verbally to the appropriate VTS
faclhty that operates the vessel traffic service for the Vessel Traffic    Commandmg Officer Requests to deviate shall be made as far m
Service area or sector within such an area                         advance as practicable  Upon receipt of the request the VTS
 (345)  'Vessel Traffic Services (VTS)  means a service imple-    Commanding Officer may authorize a devlation if it is determined
mented by the United States Coast Guard designed to improve the    that, based on vessel handling charactenstics traffic density radar
safety and efficiency of vessel traffic and to protect the environ-    contacts, environmental conditions and other relevant information,
ment  The VTS has the capability to interact with manne traffic    such a deviation provides a level of safety equivalent to that pro-
and respond to traffic situations developing m the VTS area        vded by the required measure or is a maneuver considered neces-
 (346)  "Vessel Traffic Service Area or VTS Area" means the geo-    sary for safe navigation under the circumstances
graphical area encompassing a specific VTS area of service This      (361) Services, VTS Measures, and Operating Requirements
area of service may be subdivided into sectors for the purpose of    (362)  ï¿½161 10 Services
allocating responsibility to individual Vessel Traffic Centers or to  (363) To enhance navigation and vessel safety, and to protect the
identify different operating requirements                          manne environment, a VTS may issue advisories or respond to






                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      45


vessel requests for information, on reported conditions within the  (393)  (7) A situation involving hazardous materials for which a
VTS area, such as:                                                 report is required by 49 CFR 176.48; and
 (364)  (a) Hazardous conditions or circumstances;                  (394)  (8) A hazardous vessel operating condition as defined in
 (365)  (b) Vessel congestion;                                     ï¿½161.2.
 (366)  (c) Traffic density;                                        (395)  ï¿½161.13 VTS Special Area Operating Requirements.
 (367)  (d) Environmental conditions;                               (396)  The following operating requirements apply within a VTS
 (368)  (e) Aids to navigation status;                             Special Area:
 (369)  (f) Anticipated vessel encounters;                          (397)  (a) A VTS User shall, if towing astern, do so with as short
 (370)  (g) Another vessel's name, type, position, hazardous ves-    a hawser as safety and good seamanship permits.
sel operating conditions, if applicable, and intended navigation     (398)  (b) A VMRS User shall: (1) Not enter or get underway in
movements, as reported;                                            the area without prior approval of the VTS;
 (371)  (h) Temporary measures in effect;                           (399)  (2) Not enter a VTS Special Area if a hazardous vessel
 (372)  (i) A description of local harbor operations and condi-    operating condition or circumstance exists;
tions, such as ferry routes, dredging, and so forth;                 (400) (3) Not meet, cross, or overtake any other VMRS User in
 (373)  j) Anchorage availability; or                              the area without prior approval of the VTS; and
 (374)  (k) Other information or special circumstances.             (401)  (4) Before meeting, crossing, or overtaking any other
 (375)  ï¿½161.11 VTS measures.                                      VMRS User in the area, communicate on the designated vessel
 (376) (a) A VTS may issue measures or directions to enhance    bridge-to-bridge radiotelephone frequency, intended navigation
navigation and vessel safety and to protect the marine environ-    movements, and any other information necessary in order to make
ment, such as, but not limited to:                                 safe passing arrangements. This requirement does not relieve a
 (377) (1) Designating temporary reporting points and proce-    vessel of any duty prescribed by the International Regulations for
dures;                                                             Prevention of Collisions at Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS) or the
 (378) (2) Imposing vessel operating requirements; or              Inland Navigation Rules.
 (379) (3) Establishing vessel traffic routing schemes.
 (380) (b) During conditions of vessel congestion, restricted vis-    Subpart B-Vessel Movement Reporting System
ibility, adverse weather, or other hazardous circumstances, a VTS
may control, supervise, or otherwise manage traffic, by specifying  (402)  ï¿½161.15 Purpose and Intent.
times of entry, movement, or departure to, from, or within a VTS
area.                                                                (403) (a) A Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS) is a
                                                                    system used to manage and track vessel movements within a VTS
 (381) ï¿½161.12 Vessel operating requirements.
                                                                    area. This is a accomplished by requiring that vessels provide
 (382)  (a) Subject to the exigencies of safe navigation, a VTS
                                                       thes  otionS    information under established procedures as set forth in this part,
User shall comply with all measures established or directions    or as directed by the VTS.
                                                                    or as directed by the VTS.
issued by a VTS.
 (383)  (1) If, in a specific circumstance, a VTS User is unable to  (404)  (b) To avoid imposing an undue reporting burden or
safely comply with a measure or direction issued by the VTS  the    unduly congesting radiotelephone frequencies, reports shall be
   safei                 ly c omply  with       a         measure or direct i on issued by the .,   thelimited to information which is essential to achieve the objectives
            VTS User may deviate only to the extent necessary to avoid    of the VMRS. These reports are consolidated into four reports
endangering persons, property or the environment. The deviation
shall be reported to the VTS as soon as is practicable.                        , position, sailing plan deviation and final).
 (384)  (b) When not exchanging communications, a VTS User          (405)  ï¿½161.16 Applicability.
must maintain a listening watch as required by ï¿½26.04(e) of this    (406) The provisions of this subpart shall apply to the following
chapter on the VTS frequency designated in Table 161.12(b) (VTS    VMRS Users 
Call signs, Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring Areas). In       (407)  (a) Every power-driven vessel of 40 meters (approxi-
addition, the VTS User must respond promptly when hailed and    mately 131 feet) or more in length, while navigating;
communicate in the English language.                                 (408) (b) Every towing vessel of 8 meters (approximately 26
 (385) Note: As stated in 47 CFR 80.148(b), a VHF watch on    feet) or more in length, while navigating; or
Channel 16 (156.800 MHz) is not required on vessels subject to       (409) (c) Every vessel certificated to carry 50 or more passen-
the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act and participating    gers for hire, when engaged in trade.
in a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system when the watch is main-     (410) ï¿½161.17 Definitions.
tained on both the vessel bridge-to-bridge frequency and a desig-    (411) As used in this subpart: Published means available in a
nated VTS frequency.                                               widely-distributed and publicly available medium (e.g., VTS
 (386)  (c) As soon as practicable, a VTS User shall notify the    User's Manual, ferry schedule, Notice to Mariners).
VTS of any of the following:                                         (412) ï¿½161.18 Reporting requirements.
 (387) (1) A marine casualty as defined in 46 CFR 4.05-1;           (413) (a) A VTS may: (1) Direct a vessel to provide any of the
 (388)  (2) Involvement in the ramming of a fixed or floating    information set forth in Table 161.18(a) (IMO Standard Ship
object;                                                            Reporting System);
 (389)  (3) A pollution incident as defined in ï¿½151.15 of this      (414) (2) Establish other means of reporting for those vessels
chapter:                                                           unable to report on the designated frequency; or
 (390)  (4) A defect or discrepancy in an aid to navigation;        (415) (3) Require reports from a vessel in sufficient time to
 (391)  (5) A hazardous condition as defined in ï¿½ 160.203 of this    allow advance vessel traffic planning.
chapter;                                                             (416) (b) All reports required by this part shall be made as soon
 (392)  (6) Improper operation of vessel equipment required by    as is practicable on the frequency designated in Table 161.12(b)
Part 164 of this chapter;                                          (VTS Call Signs, Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring Areas).





46                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS




          Tablel61 12(b)-VESSEL TRAFFIC SERVICES (VTS) CALL SIGNS, DESIGNATED
                                   FREQUENCIES, AND MONITORING AREAS


     Vessel traffic services    Designated frequency'
          (call sign)           (channel designation)                                   Monitonng area


                                                             New York


   New York Traffic2         156 700 MHz (Ch 14)           The waters of the Lower New York Bay west of a lihne drawn from Norton Pomt
                                                         to Breezy Point and north of a lihne drawn from Ambrose Entrance Lighted
                                                         Gong Buoy #1 to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #9 thence to West
                                                         Bank Light and thence to Great Kllls Light The waters of the Upper New York
                                                         Bay south of 40042 40'N (Brooklyn Bridge) and 40ï¿½43 70'N (Holland Tunnel
                                                         Ventilator Shaft) and in Newark Bay, north of 40038 25'N (Arthur Kill
                                                         Railroad Bridge) and south of 40041 95'N (Lehigh Valley Draw Bridge), and
                                                         the Kill Van Kull
                            156 550 MHz (Ch 11)          The waters of Raritan Bay east of a hne drawn from Great Kills Light to Point
                                                         Comfort m New Jersey and south of a line drawn from Great Kills Light to
                                                         West Bank Light thence to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #9 and
                                                         thence to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #1 and west of a hne drawn
                                                         from Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #1 to the Sandy Hook Channel
                                                         Entrance Buoys (Sandy Hook Lighted Gong Buoy #1 and Sandy Hook Lighted
                                                         Bell Buoy #2)
                            156 600 MHz (Ch 12)          Each vessel at anchor within the above areas

                                                             Houston2


                                                         The navigable waters north of 29ï¿½N, west of 94ï¿½20'W south of 29ï¿½49'N and
                                                         east of 95ï¿½20'W
   Houston Traffic           156 550 MHz (Ch 11)           The navigable waters north of a hne extending due west from the southern most
                                                         end of Exxon Dock #1 (29ï¿½43 37'N 95001 27'W)
                            156 600 MHz (Ch 12)          The navigable waters south of a line extending due west from the southern most
                                                         end of Exxon Dock #1 (29ï¿½43 37'N, 95001 27W)

                                                            Berwick Bay


   Berwlck Traffic           156 550 MHz (Ch 11)           The navigable waters south of 29ï¿½45'N, west of 9110'W  north of 29'37'N
                                                         and east of 91ï¿½18'W

                                                          St Marys Rlver


   Soo Control               156 600 MHz (Ch 12)           The navigable waters of the St Marys River between 45ï¿½57'N (De Tour Reef
                                                         Light) and 46038 7'N (Ile Panslenne Light) except the St Marys Falls Canal
                                                         and those navigable waters east of a line from 46ï¿½04 16'N and 46ï¿½01 57'N (La
                                                         Pointe to Sims Point in Potaganmssing Bay and Worsley Bay)

                                                           San Francisco2


   San Francisco Traffic     156 600 MHz (Ch 12)          The waters within a 38 nautical mile radius of Mount Tamalpais (37ï¿½55 8'N
                                                         122ï¿½34 6'W) excluding the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area
                            156 700 MHz (Ch 14)          The waters of the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area eastward to San
                                                         Francisco Bay including its tnbutaries extending to the ports of Stockton
                                                         Sacramento and Redwood City







                                                 2.  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                            47



  Vessel traffic services  Designated frequency' 
       (call sign)            (channel designation)                                      Monitoring area


                                                             Puget Sound3


Seattle Traffic4 ........   156.700 MHz (Ch. 14).....   The navigable waters of Puget Sound, Hood Canal and adjacent waters south of
                                                          a line connecting Marrowstone Point and Lagoon Point in Admiralty Inlet and
                                                          south of a line drawn due east from the southernmost tip of Possession Point on
                                                          Whidbey Island to the shoreline.
                           156.250 MHz (Ch. 5A) ....   The navigable waters of the Strait of Juan de Fuca east of 124ï¿½40'W. excluding
                                                          the waters in the central portion of the Strait of Juan de Fuca north and east of
                                                          Race Rocks; the navigable waters of the Strait of Georgia east of 122052'W.;
                                                          the San Juan Island Archipelago, Rosario Strait, Bellingham Bay; Admiralty
                                                          Inlet north of a line connecting Marrowstone Point and Lagoon Point and all
                                                          waters east of Whidbey Island north of a line drawn due east from the
                                                          southernmost tip of Possession Point on Whidbey Island to the shoreline.
Tofino Traffic5 ......... 156.725 MHz (Ch. 74).....  The waters west of 124040'W. within 50 nautical miles of the coast of
                                                          Vancouver Island including the waters north of 48ï¿½N., and east of 127ï¿½W.
Vancouver Traffic  .....   156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) .....    The navigable waters of the Strait of Georgia west of 122ï¿½52'W., the navigable
                                                          waters of the central Strait of Juan de Fuca north and east of Race Rocks,
                                                          including the Gulf Island Archipelago, Boundary Pass and Haro Strait.

                                                        Prince William Sound6


Valdez Traffic ........    156.650 MHz (Ch. 13) .....    The navigable waters south of 6I ï¿½105'N., east of 147020'W., north of 60ON., and
                                                          west of 146030'W.; and, all navigable waters in Port Valdez.

                                                              Louisville6


Louisville Traffic ...... 156.650 MHz (Ch. 13) .....  The navigable waters of the Ohio River between McAlpine Locks (Mile 606)
                                                          and Twelve Mile Island (Mile 593), only when the McAlpine upper pool gauge
                                                          is at approximately 13.0 feet or above.

  NOTES:
  1 In the event of a communication failure either by the vessel traffic center or the vessel or radio congestion on a designated VTS
frequency, communications may be established on an alternate VTS frequency. The bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency, 156.650 MHz
(Channel 13), is monitored in each VTS area; and it may be used as an alternate frequency, however, only to the extent that doing so
provides a level of safety beyond that provided by other means.
  2 Designated frequency monitoring is required within U.S. navigable waters. In areas which are outside the U.S. navigable waters,
designated frequency monitoring is voluntary. However, prospective VTS Users are encouraged to monitor the designatedfrequency.
  3 A Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service was established by the United States and Canada within adjoining waters. The appropriate vessel
traffic center administers the rules issued by both nations; however, it will enforce only its own set of rules within its jurisdiction.
  4 Seattle Traffic may direct a vessel to monitor the other primary VTS frequency 156.250 MHz or 156.700 MHz (Channel 5A or 14)
depending on traffic density, weather conditions, or other safety factors, rather than strictly adhering to the designated frequency required
for each monitoring area as-defined above. This does not require a vessel to monitor both primary frequencies.
  5 A portion of Tofino Sector's monitoring area extends beyond the defined CVTS area. Designated frequency monitoring is voluntary in
these portions outside of VTS jurisdiction, however, prospective VTS Users are encouraged to monitor the designated frequency.
  6 The bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency, 156.650 MHz (Channel 13), is used in these VTSs because the level of radiotelephone
transmissions does not warrant a designated VTS frequency. The listening watch required by ï¿½26.05 of this chapter is not limited to the
monitoring area.





48                                               2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


                 TABLE 161 18(a) -THE IMO STANDARD SHIP REPORTING SYSTEM


   A        ALPHA                          Ship                           Name, call sign or ship station identity, and flag
   B        BRAVO                          Dates and time of event        A 6 digit group giving day of month (first two digits),
                                                                          hours and minutes (last four digits) If other than
                                                                          UTC state time zone used
   C        CHARLIE                        Position                       A 4 digit group giving latitude in degrees and minutes
                                                                          suffixed with N (north) or S (south) and a 5 digit
                                                                          group giving longitude in degrees and rmnutes
                                                                          suffixed with E (east) or W (west), or,
   D        DELTA                         Position                        True beanng (first 3 digits) and distance (state
                                                                          distance) m nautical miles from a clearly identified
                                                                          landmark (state landmark)
   E        ECHO                           True course                    A 3 digit group
   F        FOXTROT                        Speed in knots and tenths of   A 3 digit group
                                          knots
   G        GOLF                          Port of Departure               Name of last port of call
   H        HOTEL                         Date, time and point of entry  Entry time expressed as in (B) and into the entry
                                           system                         position expressed as in (C) or (D)
   I        INDIA                         Destination and expected        Name of port and date time group expressed as in
                                          time of arnval                 (B)
   J        JULIET                        Pilot                           State whether a deep sea or local pilot is on board
   K        KILO                          Date, time and point of exit   Exit time expressed as m (B) and exit position
                                          from system                    expressed as in (C) or (D)
   L        LIMA                           Route information              Intended track
   M        MIKE                           Radio                          State in full names of commumcatlons stations/
                                                                         frequencies guarded
   N        NOVEMBER                       Time of next report            Date time group expressed as m (B)
   O        OSCAR                         Maximum present static          4 dihglt group giving meters and centimeters
                                          draught in meters
   P        PAPA                           Cargo on board                 Cargo and bnef detiuls of any dangerous cargoes as
                                                                         well as harmful substances and gases that could
                                                                         endanger persons or the environment
   Q        QUEBEC                        Defects, damage,                Bnef detail of defects, damage, deficiencies or other
                                          deficiencies or limitations    lirmtatlons
   R        ROMEO                         Descnption of pollution or    Bnef details of type pollution (oll, chemicals, etc) or
                                          dangerous goods lost           dangerous goods lost overboard, position expressed
                                                                         as m (C) or (D)
   S        SIERRA                        Weather conditions              Brief details of weather and sea conditions
                                                                         prevailng
   T        TANGO                          Ship's representative and/or   Detafils of name and particulars of ship's
                                          owner                          representative and/or owner for provision of
                                                                         information
   U        UNIFORM                        Ship size and type             Details of length, breadth, tonnage, and type, etc, as
                                                                         required
   V        VICTOR                        Medical personnel               Doctor, physician's assistant, nurse, no medic
   W        WHISKEY                       Total number of persons on    State number
                                          board
   X        XRAY                          Miscellaneous                   Any other mformatlon as appropriate (1 e , a detailed
                                                                         description of a planned operation, which may
                                                                         include its duration, effective area, any restrictions
                                                                         to navigation, notification procedures for
                                                                         approaching vessels, in addition, for a towing
                                                                         operation, configuration, length of the tow, available
                                                                         horsepower, etc , for a dredge or floating plant
                                                                         configuration of pipeline, moonng configuration,
                                                                         number of assist vessels, etc )





                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                    49


  (417) (C) When not exchanging communmcations a VMRS User         (450)  (2) If it departs from its promulgated schedule by more
must maintam a listening watch as descnbed In ï¿½26 04(e) of this    than 15 minutes or changes its limited operating area, make the
chapter on the frequency designated in Table 161 12(b) (VTS Call    estabhshed VMRS reports, or report as directed
Signs, Designated Frequencies, and Monitonng Areas)  In addi-      (451) (c) In those VTS areas capable of receiving automated
tion, the VMRS User must respond promptly when hailed and    position reports from Automated Dependent Surveillance Shlp-
commumcate in the Enghsh language                                borne Equipment (ADSSE) as required by ï¿½ 164 43 of this chapter
  (418) Note  As stated in 47 CFR 80 148(b) a VHF watch on    and where ADSSE is required, vessels equipped with an operating
Channel 16 (156 800 MHz) is not required on vessels subject to    ADSSE are not required to make voice radio position reports at
the Vessel Bndge-to-Bndge Radiotelephone Act and particlpating    designated reporting points as required by ï¿½161 20(b) of this part,
m a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system when the watch is main-    unless otherwise directed by the VTC
tamed on both the vessel bndge-to-bndge frequency and a deslg-    (452)  (1) Whenever as ADSSE becomes non operational as
nated VTS frequency                                              defined in ï¿½164 43(c) of this chapter before entering or while
  (419)  (d) When reports required by this part include time mfor-    underway in a VTS area, a vessel must
mation, such information shall be given using the local time zone  (453)  (1) Notify the VTC,
in effect and the 24-hour rmlitary clock system                    (454) (11) Make voice radio position reports at designated
  (420) ï¿½161 19 Salhng Plan (SP)                                  reporting points as required by ï¿½ 161 20(b) of this part,
  (421) Unless otherwise stated, at least 15 minutes before navl-    (455) (111) Make other voice radio reports as directed, and
gating a VTS area, a vessel must report the                        (456) (iv) Restore the ADSSE to operating condition as soon as
  (422) (a) Vessel name and type                                  possible
  (423)  (b) Position,                                             (457) (2) Whenever an ADSSE becomes non-operational due to
  (424)  (c) Destation and ETA                                    a loss of position correction information (i e, the U S Coast
  (425) (d) Intended route,                                       Guard differential global positionmg system (dGPS) cannot pro-
 (426) (e) Time and point of entry, and                          vde the required error correction messages) a vessel must
 (427) (f) Dangerous cargo on board or m Its tow as defined n     (458) (1) Make required voice radio position reports at deslg-
ï¿½160 203 of this chapter, and other required information as set out    nated reporting points required by ï¿½161 20(b) of this part, and
m ï¿½160 211 and ï¿½160 213 of this chapter, if applicable             (459) (11) Make other voice radio reports as directed
 (428) ï¿½16120 Position Report (PR)                                (460) Note  Regulations pertaimng to ADSSE required capabil-
 (429) A vessel must report Its name and position                ities are set forth m ï¿½164 43 of this chapter
 (430) (a) Upon pomint of entry into a VTS area,
 (431) (a) Ut designatedepontg point of entry into a     area, Subpart C-Vessel Traffic Service Areas, Cooperative Vessel
 (431)  (b) At designated reporting points as set forth in subpart    Traffic Service Area, Vessel Traffic Service Special Areas and
C, or                                                            Reporting Points
 (432)  (c)-When directed by the VTC
 (433) Note  Notice of temporary reporting points if estab-       (461) Note  All geographic coordinates contained in part 161
hshed, may be published via Local Notice to Manners, general    (latitude and longitude) are expressed m North Amencan Datum
broadcast or the VTS User's Manual                               of 1983 (NAD 83)
 (434) ï¿½161 21 Sailing Plan Deviation Report (DR)                 (462) ï¿½161 50 Vessel Traffic Service San Francisco
 (435) A vessel must report                                       (463) (a) The VTS area consists of all the navigable waters of
 (436)  (a) When its ETA to a destination varies significantly    San Francisco Bay Region south of the Mare Island Causeway
from a previously reported ETA,                                  Bndge and the Petaluma River Entrance Lights ' 1 ' and "2' and
 (437) (b) Any mtentlon to deviate from a VTS issued measure    north of Redwood City, its seaward approaches within a 38 nauti-
or vessel traffic routing system, or                             cal rmle radius of Mount Tamalpals (37ï¿½55 8'N, 122ï¿½34 6'W),
 (438)  (c) Any significant deviation from previously reported    and its navigable tributanes as far east as the port of Stockton on
information                                                      the San Joaquin River, as far north as the port of Sacramento on
 (439)  ï¿½161 22 Final Report (FR)                                the Sacramento River
 (440) A vessel must report its name and position                 (464)  ï¿½161 55 Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound and the
 (441)  (a) On arval at its destnaton, or                        Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service for the Juan de Fuca
 (442)  (b) When leaving a VTS area                              Region
 (443)  ï¿½161 23 Reporting exemptions                              (465)  The Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound area consists of
 (443)  (a)ï¿½161 23 Reportiherwisng exemptions   followmg vessels a the navigable waters of the United States bounded by a hne drawn
 (444) (a) Unless otherwise directed, the following vessels are    from the Washington State coastline at 48ï¿½23'08"N
exempted from providing Position and Final Reports due to the    124ï¿½43'37"W on Cape Flattery to the Cape Flattery Light at
nature of their operation                                        48023'30"N  124044'12"W on Tatoosh Island due west to the
 (445) (1) Vessels on a published schedule and route,            U S Territorial Sea Boundary, thence northward along the U S
 (446) (2) Vessels operating within an area of a radius of three    Territonal Sea Boundary to its intersection with the U S /Canada
nautical miles or less, or                                       International Boundary, thence east along the U S /Canada Inter-
 (447) (3) Vessels escorting another vessel or assisting another    national Boundary through the waters known as the Strait of Juan
vessel in maneuvenng procedures                                  de Fuca, Haro Strait, Boundary Pass, and the Strait of Georgia to
 (448) (b) A vessels described m paragraph (a) of this section    the Washington State coastline at 49000'06"N, 122ï¿½45'18"W
must                                                             (International Boundary Range C Rear Light) This area includes,
 (449) (1) Provide a Saihng Plan at least 5 minutes but not more    Puget Sound Hood Canal, Possession Sound, the San Juan Island
than 15 minutes before navigating within the VTS area and        Archipelago, Rosario Strait, Guemes Channel, Bellhngham Bay,







50                                             2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


the U.S. waters of the Strait of Juan de Fuca and the Strait of    61002'06"N., 146ï¿½40'W.; and southwest of a line bearing 307ï¿½
Georgia, and all waters adjacent to the above.                   True from Entrance Island Light at 61005'06"N., 146036'42"W.
 (466) (b) Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound participates in a   (480) (c) Additional VTS Special Area Operating Require-
U.S./Canadian Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service (CVTS) to    ments. The following additional requirements are applicable in
jointly manage vessel traffic in the Juan de Fuca Region. The    the Valdez Narrows VTS Special Area:
CVTS for the Juan de Fuca Region consists of all waters of the     (481) (1) No VMRS User shall proceed north of 610N. without
Strait of Juan de Fuca and its offshore approaches, southern Geor-    prior approval of the VTS.
gia Strait, the Gulf and San Juan Archipelagos, Rosario Strait,    (482) (2) For a vessel listed in paragraph (c)(3) of this section-
Boundary Pass and Haro Strait, bounded on the northwest by         (483)  (i) Approval to enter this area will not be granted to a ves-
48ï¿½35'45"N.; and on the southwest by 48023'30"N.; and on the    sel when a tank vessel of more than 20,000 deadweight tons is
west by the rhumb line joining 48ï¿½35'45"N., 124047'30"W. with    navigating therein;
48023'30"N., 124048'37"W.; and on the northeast in the Strait of   (484)  (ii) A northbound vessel shall remain south of 610N. until
Georgia, by a line drawn along 49ï¿½N. from Vancouver Island to    the VTS has granted permission to proceed; and
Semiahmoo Bay; and on the southeast, by a line drawn from          (485)  (iii) A southbound vessel shall remain in Port Valdez east
McCurdy Point on the Quimper Peninsula to Point Partridge on    of 146ï¿½35'W. and north of 61ï¿½06'N. until the VTS has granted per-
Whidbey Island. Canadian and United States Vessel Traffic Cen-    mission to proceed.
ters (Tofino, B.C., Canada, Vancouver, BC, Canada and Seattle,     (486) (3) Paragraph (c) (2) of this section applies to-
WA) manage traffic within the CVTS area irrespective of the        (487) (i) A vessel of 1600 gross tons or more; and
International Boundary.                                            (488) (ii) A towing vessel of 8 meters or more in length, except
 (467) (C) VTS Special Areas. (1) The Rosario Strait VTS Spe-    for a vessel performing duties as an escort vessel as defined in 33
cial Area consists of those waters bounded to the south by the cen-    CFR Part 168.
ter of Precautionary Area "RB" (a circular area of 2,500 yards     (489) (d) Reporting Points. (See TABLE 161.60(d))
radius centered at 48026'24"N., 122ï¿½45'12"W.), and to the north
by the center of Precautionary Area "C" (a circular area of 2,500    Part 162-Inland Waterways Navigation Regulations
yards radius centered at 48040'34"N., 122042'44"W.; Lighted
Buoy "C"); and                                                     (490) ï¿½162.1 General.
 (468) Note: The center of precautionary area "RB" is not         (491) Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude or
marked by a buoy. All precautionary areas are depicted on    longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or charts
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) nau-    whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American Datum
tical charts.                                                     of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are
 (469) (2) The Guemes Channel VTS Special Area consists of    expressly labeled NAD 83. Geographic coordinates without the
those waters bounded to the west by Shannon Point on Fidalgo    NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to
Island and to the east by Southeast Point on Guemes Island.      NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that
 (470) (d) Additional VTS Special Area Operating Require-    are published on the particular map or chart being used.
ments. The following additional requirements are applicable in     (492) ï¿½162.240 Tongass Narrows, Alaska; navigation.
the Rosario Strait and Guemes Channel VTS Special Areas:           (493) (a) Definitions. The term "Tongass Narrows" includes the
 (471) (1) A vessel engaged in towing shall not impede the pas-    body of water lying between Revillagigedo Channel and Guard
sage of a vessel of 40,000 dead weight tons or more              Islands in Clarence Strait.
 (472) (2) A vessel of less than 40,000 dead weight tons is       (494) (b) No vessel shall exceed a speed of seven knots between
exempt from the provision set forth in ï¿½161.13(b)(1) of this part.  Idaho Rock and Charcoal Point.
                                                                    (495) (C) No vessel shall while moored or at anchor, or by slow
 (473) (3) A vessel of less than 100 meters in length is exempt    passage or otherwise while underway, unreasonably obstruct the
from the provisions set forth in ï¿½161.13(b)(3) of this part.           passage and progress of oth er v essels.
                                                                  free passage and progress of other vessels.
Approval will not be granted for:
                                                                    (496) (d) No vessel shall moor or anchor to any structure of the
 (474)  (i) A vessel of 100 meters or more in length to meet or    United States other than mooring piers, wharves, and floats with-
overtake; or cross or operate within 2,000 yards (except when    out the consent of the Captain of the Port, Southeast Alaska. The
crossing astern) of a vessel of 40,000 dead weight tons or more;    office of the Captain of the Port, Southeast Alaska, is located in
                                                                  Juneau, Alaska.
 (475) (ii) A vessel of 40,000 dead weight tons or more to meet    (497) ï¿½162.250 Port Alexander, Alaska; speed of vessels.
or overtake; or cross or operate within 2,000 yards (except when   (498) (a) Definition. The term "Port Alexander" includes the
crossing astern) of a vessel of 100 meters or more in length.     entire inlet from its head to its entrance from Chatham Strait.
 (476) (e) Reporting Point. Inbound vessels in the Strait of Juan  (499) (b) Speed. The speed of all vessels of 5 tons or more
de Fuca upon crossing 124ï¿½W.                                     gross, ships register, shall not exceed 3 miles per hour either in
 (477)  ï¿½161.60 Vessel Traffic Service Prince William Sound.     entering, leaving, or navigating within Port Alexander, Alaska.
 (478) (a) The VTS area consists of the navigable waters of the   (500) ï¿½162.255 Wrangell Narrows, Alaska; use, administra-
United States north of a line drawn from Cape Hinchinbrook Light    tion, and navigation.
to Schooner Rock Light, comprising that portion of Prince Will-    (501) (a) Definitions. (1) The term "Wrangell Narrows"
iam Sound between 146ï¿½30'W. and 147ï¿½20'W. and includes Val-    includes the entire body of water between Wrangell Narrows
dez Arm, Valdez Narrows and Port Valdez.                         North Entrance Lighted Bell Buoy 63 and Midway Rock Light.
 (479) (b) The Valdez Narrows VTS Special Area consists of         (502) (2) The term "raft section" refers to a standard raft of logs
those waters of Valdez Arm, Valdez Narrows, and Port Valdez    or piling securely fastened together for long towing in Alaska
northeast of a line bearing 307ï¿½ True from Tongue Point at    inland waters in the manner customary with the local logging






                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                     51




             TABLE 161 60(d)-VTS PRINCE WILLIAM SOUND REPORTING POINTS

                                                                                             Latltude/
        Designator             Geographic name               Geographic descnption         Longitude            Notes

   1A                   Cape I-hnchinbrook             Cape HInchinbrook                 60ï¿½16 18 N     Northbound Only
                                                                                          146045 30"W
   1B                   Schooner Rock                  Schooner Rock                     60ï¿½18 42"N      Southbound Only
                                                                                          14605 1'36"W
   2A                   Naked Island                   Naked Island                      60ï¿½40 00 N      Northbound Only
                                                                                          147ï¿½01 24"W
   2B                   Naked Island                   Naked Island                      60040 00 'N     Southbound Only
                                                                                          147ï¿½05 00"W
   3A                   Bhgh Reef                      Bhgh Reef Light (Pllot Embark)    60ï¿½50 36"N      Northbound Only
                                                                                          146ï¿½57 30' W
   3B                   Bligh Reef                     Bhgh Reef Light (Pilot Disembark)  6005 l'00'N    Southbound Only
                                                                                          147001'24"W
   4A                   Rocky Point                    Rocky Point                       60057 48 N      Northbound Only
                                                                                          146047 30'W
   4B                   Rocky Point                    Rocky Point                       60057 48"N      Southbound Only
                                                                                          146050 00 'W
   5                    Entrance Island                Entrance Island Light             61ï¿½05 24"N
                                                                                          146ï¿½37'30 'W



interests, I e with booms, swifters, and taWl sticks It normally con-  (521)  (3) Tows other than rafts shall be taken alongside the tow-
tains 30 000 to 70,000 feet board measure of logs or piling and has    boat whenever possible
a width of 45 to 60 feet and a length of 75 to 100 feet            (522) (f) Anchorage Vessels may anchor m the anchorage basin
 (503) (b) Speed restrictions No vessel shall exceed a speed of    in the vicinity of Anchor Point No craft or tow shall be anchored
seven (7) knots in the vicinity of Petersburg, between Wrangell    in Wrangell Narrows in either the main ship channel or the towing
Narrows Channel Light 58 and Wrangell Narrows Lighted Buoy    channel nor shall any craft or tow be anchored so that it can swing
60                                                                into either of these channels
 (504) (c) Tow channel The following route shall be taken by all   (523) (g) Disabled craft Disabled craft m a condition of abso-
tows passing through Wrangell Narrows when the towboat has a    lute necessity are exempt from the regulations m this section
draft of 9 feet or less (northbound, read down, southbound, read
up)                                                               Part 164-Navlgation Safety Regulations (in part) For a
 (505) East of Battery Islets                                     complete description of this part see 33 CFR 164
 (506) East of Tow Channel Buoy 1 TC
 (507) East of Tow Channel Buoy 3 TC                               (524)  ï¿½164 01 Applicability
 (508) West of Tow Channel Buoy 4 TC                               (525) (a) This part (except as specifically lmited herein) applies
 (509) East of Colorado Reef                                      to each self-propelled vessel of 1600 or more gross tons (except
 (510) East of Wrangell Narrows Channel Light 21                  foreign vessels described in ï¿½164 02) when it is operating in the
 (511) West of Wrangell Narrows Channel Lighted Buoy 25           navigable waters of the United States except the St Lawrence
 (512) East of Tow Channel Buoy 5 TC                              Seaway
 (i13) East of Tow Channel Buoy 7 TC                               (526) ï¿½164 02 Apphcabdlity exception for foreign vessels
 (514) West of Petersburg                                          (527) (a) This part (including ï¿½ï¿½ 164 38 and 164 39) does not
 (5s5) East of Wrangell Narrows Channel Light 54 FR               apply to vessels that
 (516) East of Wrangell Narrows Channel Light 56 Qk FR             (>28) (1) Are not destined for or departing from a port or place
 (517) East of Wrangell Narrows Channel Light 58 FR thence    subject to the junsdictlon of the Umnted States, and
proceeding to West side of channel and leaving Wrangell Narrows     (529) (2) Are in
by making passage between Wrangell Narrows Channel Daybea-          (530) (1) Innocent passage through the territorial sea of the
con 61 and Wrangell Narrows North Entrance Lighted Bell Buoy    United States, or
63 F                                                                (531) (11) Transit through navigable waters of the Umted States
 (518) (d) Size of tows The maximum tows permitted shall be    which form a part of an international strait
one pile driver, or three unts of other towable equipment or seven  (532) ï¿½164 03 Incorporation by reference
raft sections                                                       (533) (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this
 (519)  (e) Arrangement of tows (1) No towhne or aggregate of    part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register
towlnes between towboat and separated pieces shall exceed 150    under 5 U S C 522(a) and 1 CFR part 51  To enforce any edition
feet m length                                                     other than that specified in paragraph (b) of the section the Coast
  (520)  (2) Raft and barge tows of more than one unit shall not    Guard must publish notice of change in the Federal Register and
exceed 65 feet in width overall Single barge tows shall not exceed    the material must be available to the public All approved material
100 feet in width overall                                         is on file at the Office of the Federal Register 800 North Capitol






52                                               2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


Street, NW., Suite 700, Washington, DC, and at the U.S. Coast         (556)  (i) Magnetic variation and deviation and gyrocompass
Guard, Marine Environment Protection Division (G-MEP), Room         errors are known and correctly applied by the person directing the
2100, 2100 Second Street, SW., Washington, DC 20593-0001 and    movement of the vessel;
is available from the sources indicated in paragraph (b) of this sec-  (557)  (j) A person whom he has determined is competent to
tion.                                                               steer the vessel is in the wheelhouse at all times (See also 46
 (534)  (b) The materials approved for incorporation by reference    U.S.C. 8702(d), which requires an able seaman at the wheel on
in this part and the sections affected are:                         U.S. vessels of 100 gross tons or more in narrow or crowded
 (535) International Maritime Organization (IMO) 4 Albert    waters or during low visibility.);
Embankment, London, SEI 7SR, U.K.                                     (558)  (k) If a pilot other than a member of the vessel's crew is
 (536)  Recommendation on Performance Standards for Auto-    employed, the pilot is informed of the draft, maneuvering charac-
matic Pilots, Resolution A.342(IX),adopted November 12,    teristics, and peculiarities of the vessel and of any abnormal cir-
1975 .................................... 13  cumstances on the vessel that may affect its safe navigation.
 (537) Radio Technical Commission For Maritime Services              (559)  (1) Current velocity and direction for the area to be tran-
(RTCM), 655 Fifteenth St., N.W., Suite300, Washington, DC           sited are known by the person directing the movement of the ves-
20005.                                                              sel;
 (538)  Minimum Performance Standards (MPS) Marine Loran C           (560)  (m) Predicted set and drift are known by the person
Receiving  Equipment,  RTCMPaper  12-78/DO-100,                     directing movement of the vessel;
1977 ................................................................. .....................ï¿½164.41  (561) (n) Tidal state for the area to be transited is known by the
1977.ï¿½164.41                                                          (561)  (n) Tidal state for the area to be transited is known by the
 (539)  RTCM, Recommended Standards for Differential    person directing movement of the vessel;
NAVSTAR GPS Service, Version 2.1 ,RTCM Paper 194-93/SC                (562)  (o) The vessel's anchors are ready for letting go;
104-STD 1994....................................164.43                (563) (p) The person directing the movement of the vessel sets
 (540)  International Telecommunication Union Radiocommuni-    the vessels speed with consideration for-
cation Bureau (ITU-R), Place de Nations CIH--121 Geneva 20            (564)  (1) The prevailing visibility and weather conditions;
Switzerland.
                                                                      (565)  (2) The proximity of the vessel to fixed shore and marine
 (541)  Optional Expansion of the Digital Selective-Calling Sys-    structures;
tern for use in the Maritime MobileService ITU-R Recommenda-
            192e16.4 f or                                          use in the Maritime Movi c e 1TR  Recommenda - A (566)  (3) The tendency of the vessel underway to squat and suf-
tion M.821, 1992 .................................... ..............................ï¿½164.43
                                                                    fer impairment of maneuverability when there is small underkeel
 (542)  Characteristics of a Transponder System using Digital    clearance;
Selective-Calling Techniques for usewith Vessel Traffic Services
and Ship-to-Ship Identification, ITU`-R Recommendation M.825,         (567)  (4) The comparative proportions of the vessel and the
              ~~~1992.                                  ~ï¿½164.43    channel;
 (543)  ï¿½164.11 Navigation under way: General.                       (56)  (5) The density of marine traffic;
 (544)  The owner, master, or person in charge of each vessel        (569)  (6) The damage that might be caused by the vessel's
underway shall ensure that:                                         wake;
 (545)  (a) The wheelhouse is constantly manned by persons           (570)  (7) The strength and direction of the current; and
who-                                                                  (571)  (8) Any local vessel speed limit;
 (546)  (1) Direct and control the movement of the vessel; and       (572)  (q) The tests required by ï¿½164.25 are made and recorded
 (547)  (2) Fix the vessel's position;                              in the vessel's log; and
 (548)  (b) Each person performing a duty described in paragraph     (573)  (r) The equipment required by this part is maintained in
(a) of this section is competent to perform that duty;              operable condition.
 (549)  (c) The position of the vessel at each fix is plotted on a   (574)  (s) Upon entering U.S. waters, the steering wheel or lever
chart of the area and the person directing the movement of the ves-    on the navigating bridge is operated to determine if the steering
sel is informed of the vessel's position;                           equipment is operating properly under manual control, unless the
 (550) (c) Electronic and other navigational equipment, external    vessel has been steered under manual control from the navigating
fixed aids to navigation, geographic reference points, and hydro-    bridge within the preceding 2 hours, except when operating on the
graphic contours are used when fixing the vessel's position;        Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters.
 (551)  (e) Buoys alone are not used to fix the vessel's position;   (575)  (t) At least two of the steering-gear power units on the
 (552)  Note: Buoys are aids to navigation placed in approximate    vessel are in operation when such units are capable of simulta-
positions to alert the mariner to hazards to navigation or to indi-    neous operation, except when the vessel is sailing on the Great
cate the orientation of a channel. Buoys may not maintain an exact    Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters, and except as
position because strong or varying currents, heavy seas, ice, and    required by paragraph (u) of this section:
collisions with vessels can move or sink them or set them adrift.     (576)  (u) On each passenger vessel meeting the requirements of
Although buoys may corroborate a position fixed by other means,    the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960
buoys cannot be used to fix a position: however, if no other aids    (SOLAS 60) and on each cargo vessel meeting the requirements of
are available, buoys alone may be used to establish an estimated    SOLAS 74 as amended in 1981, the number of steering-gear
position.                                                           power units necessary to move the rudder from 35ï¿½ on either side
 (553)  (f) The danger of each closing visual or each closing radar    to 30ï¿½ on the other in not more than 28 seconds must be in simul-
contact is evaluated and the person directing the movement of the    taneous operation.
vessel knows the evaluation;                                          (577)  ï¿½164.13 Navigation underway: tankers.
 (554)  (g) Rudder orders are executed as given;                     (578)  (a) As used in this section, "tanker" means a self-pro-
 (555) (h) Engine speed and direction orders are executed as    pelled tank vessel, including integrated tug barge combinations,
given;                                                              constructed or adapted primarily to carry oil or hazardous material






                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                     53


In bulk in the cargo spaces and Inspected and certificated as a     (598) (a) A proper anchor watch is mairtained,
tanker                                                              (599) (b) Procedures are followed to detect a dragging anchor,
 (>79)  (b) Each tanker must have an engmeenng watch capable    and
of monitoring the propulsion system, communicating with the         (600) (c) Whenever weather tide or current conditions are
bridge and implementing manual control measures immediately  Rlkely to cause the vessel's anchor to drag, action is taken to ensure
when necessary  The watch must be physically present In the    the safety of the vessel structures, and other vessels, such as being
machinery spaces or m the main control space and must consist of    ready to veer chain let go a second anchor, or get underway using
at least a hcensed engineer                                       the vessel's own propulsion or tug assistance
 (,80) (c) Each tanker must navigate with at least two licensed    (601) ï¿½164 25 Tests before entenng or getting underway
deck officers on watch on the bridge, one of whom may be a pilot    (602) (a) Except as provided m paragraphs (b) and (c) of this
In waters where a pilot is required, the second officer, must be an    section no person may cause a vessel to enter into or get underway
mdlivdual licensed and assigned to the vessel as master mate or    on the navigable waters of the Unmted States unless no more than
officer in charge of a navlgational watch, who is separate and dis-    12 hours before entenng or getting underway, the following equip-
tmct from the pilot                                               ment has been tested
 (581) (d) Except as specified in paragraph (e) of this section, a  (603) (1) Pnmary and secondary steenng gear The test proce-
tanker may operate with an auto pilot engaged only if all of the    dure includes a visual inspection of the steenng gear and its con-
followmig conditions exist                                        necting linkage, and, where applicable, the operation of the
 (>82) (1) The operation and performance of the automatic pilot    following
conforms with the standards recommended by the International       (604)  (1) Each remote steenng gear control system
Mantime Organization   IMn O Resolution A 342(R)                    (605) (11) Each steering position located on the navigating
 (583) (2) A qualified helmsman is present at the helm and pre-    bndge
pared at all times to assume manual control                         (606) (111) The main steenng gear from the alternative power
 (584) 3)  he tanker is not operating in any of the following    supply, f installed
areas                                                              (607) (iv) Each rudder angle mdlcator in relation to the actual
 (585) (1) The areas of the traffic separation schemes specified m  position of the rudder
subchapter P of the chapter
                 ~subchapter P of the chapter  ~(608) (v) Each remote steering gear control system power fall-
 (586) (11) The portions of a shippmg safety fairway specified m  u       re alarm
part 166 of this chapter
 (587)  (111) An anchorage ground specified in part 160 of this  c(609)  (vi) Each remote steering gear power umt failure alarm
 (587) (m) An an chorapter ge    ground   specified in part IIofthis (610)  (vii) The full movement of the rudder to the required
 chapter capablhites of the steenng gear
 (588) (iv) An area within one-half nautical mile of any U S      capablites of the steeing gear
shore                                                              (611) (2) All internal vessel control commumcations and vessel
 (589)  ï¿½16415 Navgaton bridge vslity                             control alarms
 (590) (a) The arrangement of cargo, cargo gear, and tnm of all    (612) (3) Standby or emergency generator for as long as neces-
vessels entenng or departing from U S ports must be such that the    sary to show proper functioning including steady state tempera-
field of vision from the navigation bridge conforms as closely as    ture and pressure readigs
possible to the following requirements                              (613) (4) Storage batteries for emergency lighting and power
 (591)  (1) From the conning position, the view of the sea surface    systems m vessel control and propulsion machinery spaces
must not be obscured by more than the lesser of two ship lengths   (614)  (5) Main propulsion machinery ahead and astern
or 500 meters (1640 feet) from dead ahead to 10 degrees on either   (615)  (5) Vessels navigatmg on the Great Lakes and their con-
side of the vessel  Within this arc of visibility any blind sector    necting and tributary waters, having once completed the test
caused by cargo, cargo gear, or other permanent obstruction must    requirements of this sub-part, are considered to remain in comph-
not exceed 5 degrees                                              ance until amving at the next port of call on the Great Lakes
  (592)  (2) From the conning position, the horizontal field of     (616)  (c) Vessels entering the Great Lakes from the St
vision must extend over an arc from at least 22 5 degrees abaft the    Lawrence Seaway are considered to be in compliance with this
beam on one side of the vessel, through dead ahead to at least    sub-part if the required tests are conducted preparatory to or dur-
22 5 degrees abaft the beam on the other side of the vessel Bhnd    ing the passage of the St Lawrence Seaway or within one hour of
sectors forward of the beam caused by cargo, cargo gear, or other    passing Wolfe Island
permanent obstruction must not exceed 10 degrees each, nor total    (617)  (d) No vessel may enter, or be operated on the navigable
more than 20 degrees, including any bhnd sector within the arc of    waters of the United States unless the emergency steering drill
visibility described m paragraph (a)(l) of this section           described below has been conducted wlthin 48 hours prior to entry
  (593) (3) From each bridge wing, the field of vision must    and logged m the vessel logbook, unless the drill Is conducted and
extend over an arc from at least 45 degrees on the opposite bow   logged on a regular basis at least once every three months This
through dead ahead, to at least dead astern                       drill must include at a mimmmum the following
  (594) (4) From the main steenng position the field of vision      (618) (1) Operation of the main steenng gear from within the
must extend over an arc from dead ahead to at least 60 degrees on    steenng gear compartment
either side of the vessel                                          (619) (2) Operation of the means of communications between
  (595) (b) A clear view must be provided through at least two    the navlgating bridge and the steering compartment
front windows at all times regardless of weather condition          (620)  (3) Operation of the alternative power supply for the
  (596)  ï¿½164 19 Requirements for vessels at anchor                steering gear if the vessel is so equipped
  (397) The master or person in charge of each vessel that is       (621)  ï¿½164 30 Charts, publications, and equipment Gen-
anchored shall ensure that-                                       eral







,54                                              2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (622)  No person may operate or cause the operation of a vessel    direction, with a note on the diagram stating that turns to port and
unless the vessel has the marine charts, publications, and equip-    starboard are essentially the same, may be substituted.
ment as required by ï¿½ï¿½164.33 through 164.41 of this part.            (646)  (2) The time and distance to stop the vessel from either
 (623)  ï¿½164.33 Charts and publications.                           full and half speeds, or from full and slow speeds, while maintain-
 (624)  (a) Each vessel must have the following:                   ing approximately the initial heading with minimum application of
 (625)  (1) Marine charts of the area to be transited, published by    rudder.
the National Ocean Service, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, or a       (647)  (3) For each vessel with a fixed propeller, a table of shaft
river authority that-                                              revolutions per minute for a representative range of speeds.
 (626)  (i) Are of a large enough scale and have enough detail to   (648)  (4) For each vessel with a controllable pitch propeller, a
make safe navigation of the area possible; and                     table of control settings for a representative range of speeds.
 (627)  (ii) Are currently corrected.                               (649)  (5) For each vessel that is fitted with an auxiliary device
  (628)  (2) For the area to be transited, a currently corrected copy    to assist in maneuvering, such as a bow thruster, a table of vessel
of, or applicable currently corrected extract from, each of the fol-    speeds at which the auxiliary device is effective in maneuvering
lowing publications:                                               the vessl.
  (629)  (i) U.S. Coast Pilot.                                       (650)  (6) The maneuvering information for the normal load and
  (630)  (ii) Coast Guard Light List.                               normal ballast condition for-
  (631) (3) For the area to be transited, the current edition of, or  (651)  (i) Calm weather-wind 10 knots or less, calm sea;
applicable current extract from:                                     (652) (ii) No current;
  (632) (i) Tide tables published by the National Ocean Service.     (653) (iii) Deep water conditions-water depth twice the vessel's
  (633)  (ii) Tidal current tables published by the National Ocean    draft or greater; and
Service, or river current publication issued by the U.S. Army        (654)  (iv) Clean hull.
Corps of Engineers, or a river authority.                            (655)  (7) At the bottom of the fact sheet, the following state-
  (634)  (b) As an alternative to the requirements for paragraph (a)    ment:
of this section, a marine chart or publication, or applicable extract,  (656)  Warning.
published by a foreign government may be substituted for a U.S.      (657)  The response of the (name of the vessel) may be different
chart and publication required by this section. The chart must be    from that listed above if any of the following conditions, upon
of large enough scale and have enough detail to make safe naviga-    which the maneuvering information is based, are varied:
tion of the area possible, and must be currently corrected. The
publication, or applicable extract, must singly or in combination    (65)  () Calm weather-wind 10 knots or less, calm sea;
contain similar information to the U.S. Government publication to    (660)  () Water depth twice the vessel's draft or rent;
make safe navigation of the area possible. The publication, or             (4) Clean hull; an       d
applicable extract must be currently corrected, with the exceptions  (661)
of tide and tidal current tables, which must be the current editions.  (662  (5) Intermediate drafts or unusual trim.
  (635) (c) As used in this section, "currently corrected" means     (663)  (h) Anecho depthsoundingdevice.
 corrected with changes contained in all Notices to Mariners pub-     (664) (i) A device that can continuously record the depth read-
 lished by Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic          ings of the vessel's echo depth sounding device, except when
 Center, or an equivalent foreign government publication, reason-    operating on the Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary
 ably available to the vessel, and that is applicable to the vessel's    waters.
 transit.                                                             (665) 0j) Equipment on the bridge for plotting relative motion.
  (636) ï¿½164.35 Equipment: All vessels.                              (666) (k) Simple operating instructions with a block diagram,
  (637)  Each vessel must have the following:                       showing the changeover procedures for remote steering gear con-
  (638)  (a) A marine radar system for surface navigation.          trol systems and steering gear power units, permanently displayed
  (639)  (b) An illuminated magnetic steering compass, mounted    on the navigating bridge and in the steering gear compartment.
 in a binnacle, that can be read at the vessel's main steering stand.  (667)  (1) An indicator readable from the centerline conning
  (640)  (C) A current magnetic compass deviation table or graph    position showing the rate of revolution of each propeller, except
 or compass comparison record for the steering compass, in the    when operating on the Great Lakes and their connecting and tribu-
 wheelhouse.                                                        tary waters.
  (641)  (d) A gyrocompass.                                          (668) (m) If fitted with controllable pitch propellers, an indica-
   (642)  (e) An illuminated repeater for the gyrocompass required    tor readable from the centerline conning position showing the
 by paragraph (d) of this section that is at the main steering stand,    pitch and operational mode of such propellers, except when oper-
 unless that gyrocompass is illuminated and is at the main steering    ating on the Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters.
 stand.                                                               (669)  (n) If fitted with lateral thrust propellers, an indicator
   (643)  (f) An illuminated rudder angle indicator in the wheel-    readable from the centerline conning position showing the direc-
 house.                                                             tion and amount of thrust of such propellers, except when operat-
   (644) (g) The following maneuvering information prominently    ing on the Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters.
 displayed on a fact sheet in the wheelhouse:                         (670) (o) A telephone or other means of communication for
   (645)  (1) A turning circle diagram to port and starboard that    relaying headings to the emergency steering station. Also, each
 shows the time and distance and advance and transfer required to    vessel of 500 gross tons and over and constructed on or after June
 alter course 90 degrees with maximum rudder angle and constant    9, 1995 must be provided with arrangements for supplying visual
 power settings, for either full and half speeds, or for full and slow    compass-readings to the emergency steering station.
 speeds. For vessels whose turning circles are essentially the same   (671)  ï¿½164.37 Equipment: Vessels of 10,000 gross tons or
 for both directions, a diagram showing a turning circle in one    more.





                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                     55


 (672) (a) Each vessel of 10 000 gross tons or more must have     the water or over the ground  Vessels constructed prior to Sep
m addition to the radar system under ï¿½ 164 35(a), a second marinne    tember 1, 1984 must have this equipment according to the follow-
radar system that operates independently of the first             ing schedule
 (673) Note Independent operation means two completely sepa-       (696) (1) Each tank vessel constructed before September 1,
rate systems from separate branch power supply circuits or distn-    1984 operating on the navigable waters of the United States-
bution panels to antennas, so that failure of any component of one  (697) (1) If of 40 000 gross tons or more, by January 1 1985,
system will not render the other system inoperative                (698)  (11) If of 10,000 gross tons or more but less than 40,000
 (674) (b) On each tanker of 10,000 gross tons or more that is   gross tons, by January 1 1986
subject to Section 5 of the Port and Tanker Safety Act of 1978 (46  (699) (2) Each self-propelled vessel constructed before Septem-
U S C 391a), the dual radar system required by this part must    ber 1, 1984, that is not a tank vessel, operating on the navigable
have a short range capability and a long range capability, and each    waters of the Umnted States-
radar must have true north features consisting of a display that Is  (700) (1) If of 40,000 gross tons or more, by September 1 1986,
stabilihzed m azimuth                                               (701) (11) If of 20,000 gross tons or more but less than 40 000
 (675)  ï¿½164 38 Automatic radar plotting aids (ARPA) (See    gross tons, by September 1 1987,
33 CFR 164)                                                         (702) (111) If of 15 000 gross tons or more, but less than 20,000
 (676) ï¿½164 39 Steering gear Foreign tankers                      gross tons, by September 1, 1988
 (677)  (a) This section applies to each foreign tanker of 10 000  (703) (b) The device must meet the following specifications
gross tons or more, except a public vessel, that-                  (704) (1) The display must be easily readable on the bridge by
 (678)  (1) Transfers oil at a port or place subject to the junsdic-    day or night
tion of the Urnted States, or                                      (705) (2) Errors m the indicated speed, when the vessel is oper-
 (679)  (2) Otherwise enters or operates in the navigable waters    atmg free from shallow water effect, and from the effects of wind
of the Umnted States except a vessel described by ï¿½164 02 of this    current and tide should not exceed 5 percent of the speed of the
part                                                              vessel or 0 5 knot, whichever is greater
 (680) (b) Definitions The terms used m this section are as fol-   (706)  (3) Errors m the indcated distance run when the vessel is
lows                                                              operating free from shallow water effect and from the effects of
 (681)  Constructed means the same as in Chapter II-1, Regula-    wind, current and tide should not exceed 5 percent of the distance
tlons 1 1 2 and 1 1 3 1, of SOLAS 74                              run of the vessel in one hour or 0 5 nautical mile in each hour
 (682) Existing tanker means a tanker-                            whichever is greater
 (683) (1) For which the building contract is placed on or after   (707) ï¿½164 41 Electronic position fixing devices
June 1 1979,                                                        (708) (a) Each vessel calling at a port in the continental United
 (684) (2) In the absence of a building contract, the keel of    States including Alaska south of Cape Prince of Wales except
which is laid or which is at a slmilar stage of construction on or    each vessel owned or bareboat chartered and operated by the
after January 1, 1980,                                            Unmted States or by a state or its political subdivision or by a for-
 (685) (3) The delivery of which occurs on or after June 1, 1982  eign nation, and not engaged in commerce, must have one of the
or                                                                following
 (686)  (4) That has undergone a major conversion contracted for   (709) (1) A Type I or II LORAN C receiver as defined in Sec-
on or after June 1, 1979 or construction of which was begun on or   tnon 1 2(e), meeting Part 2 (Mimmum Performance Standards) of
after January 1 1980 or completed on or after June 1, 1982        the Radio Technical Commission for Marine Services (RTCM)
 (687) Public vessel oil hazardous materials andforeign vessel    Paper 12-78/DO-100 dated December 20, 1977, entitled 'Mini-
mean the same as m 46 U S C 2101                                  mum Performance Standards (MPS) Marinne Loran-C Receiving
 (688) SOLAS 74 means the International Convention for the    Equipment' Each receiver installed on or after June 1, 1982 must
Safety of Life at Sea 1974 as amended                             have a label with the mformatihon required under paragraph (b) of
 (689)  Tanker means a self-propelled vessel defined as a tanker    this section If the receiver is installed before June 1 1982, the
by 46 U S C 2101(38) or as a tank vessel by 46 U S C 2101(39)     receiver must have the label with the information required under
 (690)  (c) Each tanker constructed on or after September 1    paragraph (b) by June 1, 1985
1984, must meet the apphcable requirements of Chapter II-1 Reg-    (710) (2) A satellite navlgatlon receiver with
ulations 29 and 30 of SOLAS 74                                     (711)  (1) Automatic acqulsliton of satellite signals after initial
 (691) (d) Each tanker constructed before September 1 1984,    operator settings have been entered and
must meet the requirements of Chapter II 1 Regulation 29 19 of      (712)  (n1) Position updates derived from satellite information
SOLAS 74                                                          dunng each usable satellite pass
 (692)  (e) Each tanker of 40 000 gross tons or more, constructed  (713) (3) A system that is found by the Commandant to meet
before September 1 1984, that does not meet the single-failure    the intent of the statements of availablhty, coverage and accuracy
criterion of Chapter II-1, Regulation 29 16, of SOLAS 74, must    for the U S Coastal Confluence Zone (CCZ) contauned in the U S
meet the requirements of Chapter II-1 Regulation 29 20, of    "Federal Radionavigation Plan' (Report No DOD-NO 4650 4 P, I
SOLAS 74                                                          or No DOT-TSC-RSPA-80-16, I) A person desiring a finding by
  (693) (f) Each tanker constructed before September 1, 1984       the Commandant under this subparagraph must submit a written
must meet the applicable requirements of Chapter II-1, Regula-    application describinmg the device to the Office of Navigation
tions 29 14 and 29 15, of SOLAS 74                                Safety and Waterway Services 2100 Second Street SW  Washing-
  (694)  ï¿½164 40 Devices to indicate speed and distance            ton, DC 20593-0001 After reviewing the application, the Com-
  (695) (a) Each vessel required to be fitted with an Automatic    mandant may request additional information to establish whether
Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) under ï¿½ 164 38 must be fitted with a    or not the device meets the intent of the Federal Radlonavlgatlon
device to indicate speed and distance of the vessel either through    Plan





56                                               2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (714) Note -The Federal Radionavigation Plan is available from     (741)  (10) Display a separate visual alarm which is triggered by
the National Technical Information Service, Springfield, Va        a VTS utilizing a DSC message to indicate to shipboard personnel
22161, with the following Government Accession Numbers             that the U S Coast Guard dGPS system cannot provide the
 (715) Vol 1 ADA 116468                                            required error correction messages, and
 (716) Vol 2 ADA 116469                                             (742)  11) Display two RTCM type 16 messages, one of which
 (717) Vol3 ADA 116470                                             must display the position error m the position error broadcast
 (718) Vol 4, ADA 116471                                            (743)  (c) An ADSSE is considered non-operational if it falls to
 (719) (b) Each label required under paragraph (a)(l) of thus sec-    meet the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section
tlon must show the following                                         (744) Note  Vessel traffic Service (VTS) areas and operating
 (720) (1) The name and address of the manufacturer                procedures are set forth in Part 161 of this chapter
 (721)  (2) The following statement by the manufacturer             (745)  ï¿½164 51 Deviations from rules Emergency
 (722) This receiver was designed and manufactured to meet Part     (746)  Except for the requirements of ï¿½164 53(b), in an emer-
2 (Mlmnimum Performance Standards) of the RTCM MPS for    gency, any person may deviate from any rule in this part to the
Manne Loran-C Receiving Equipment                                  extent necessary to avoid endangering persons, property, or the
 (723)  ï¿½164 42 Rate of turn indicator                             environment
 (724) Each vessel of 100,000 gross tons or more constructed on     (747) ï¿½164 53 Deviations from rules and reporting Non-
or after September 1 1984 shall be fitted with a rate of turn inch-    operating equipment
cator                                                                (748)  (a) If during a voyage any equipment required by this part
  (725)  ï¿½164 43 Automated Dependent Surveillance Ship-    stops operating properly the person dlrecting the movement of the
borne Equipment                                                    vessel may continue to the next port of call subject to the dlrec
  (726)  (a) Each vessel required to provide automated position    hons of the Dstrict Commander or the Captain of the Port as pro-
reports to a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) must do so by an    vided by 33 CFR 160
installed Automated Dependent Surveillance Shipborne Equip-          (749)  (b) If the vessel s radar, radio navigation receivers, gyro-
ment (ADSSE) System consisting of a                                compass, echo depth sounding device, or primary steering gear
  (727)  (1) Twelve-channel all in-view Differential Global Posi-    stops operating properly, the person directing the movement of the
tionng System (dGPS) receiver,                                     vessel must report or cause to be reported that it is not operating
  (728) (2) Marine band Non-Directional Beacon receiver capa-    properly to the nearest Captain of the Port District Commander,
ble of recevming dGPS error correction messages,                    or, if partclpating m a Vessel Traffic Service, to the Vessel Traffic
  (729)  (3) VHF-FM transceiver capable of Digital Selective    Center, as soon as possible
Calling (DSC) on the designated DSC frequency, and                   (750) ï¿½16455 Devlations from rules Contnuing operation
  (730)  (4) Control unit                                           or period of time
  (731)  (b) An ADSSE must have the following capabilities           (75i)  The Captain of the Port, upon written application may
  (732)  (1) Use dGPS to sense the position of the vessel and    authorize a devlaton from any rule m this part if he determines
determine the time of the position using Universal Coordinated    that the deviation does not Impair the safe navlgation of the vessel
Time (UTC),                                                        under anticipated conditions and will not result in a violation of
  (733) (2) Fully use the broadcast type 1, 2, 3, 5 6, 7 9, and 16    the rules for preventing collisions at sea The authonzaton may be
 messages, as specified m RTCM Recommended Standards for    Issued for vessels operating m the waters under the jurisdcton of
Differential NAVSTAR GPS Service in deterimning the required    the Captain of the Port for any contmumg operation or penod of
 information                                                        time the Captain of the Port specifies
  (734)  (3) Achieve a position error which is less than ten meters  (752)  ï¿½164 61 Marine casualty reporting and record reten-
 (32 8 feet) 2 distance root mean square (2 drms) from the true    tion
 North American Datum of 1983 (NAD 83) in the position mfor-          (753) When a vessel s involved m a manne casualty as defned
                  ~mati~on transitted to a VTS                     min 46 CFR 4 03-1 the master or person min charge of the vessel
  (735)  (4) Achieve a course error of less than 0 5 degrees from    shall-
 true course over ground in the course information transmitted to a   (74) (a) Ens ure compliance with 46 CFR 4 0'Notce of
 VTS,                                                                 (754)  (a) Ensure compliance with 46 CFR 4 05, ' Notice of
 VTS,                                                               Manne Casualty and Voyage Records, and
  (736)  (5) Achieve a speed error of less than 0 05 knots from    Marne Casualty and Voyage Records, and
 true speed over ground in the speed information transmitted to a     (755)  (b) Ensure that the voyage records required by 46 CFR
 VTS,                                                               4 05-15 are retained for-
  (737)  (6) Receive and comply with commands broadcast from a       (756)  (1) 30 days after the casualty f the vessel remains in the
 VTS as DSC messages on the designated DSC frequency,               navigable waters of the United States, or
  (738)  (7) Receive and comply with RTCM message broadcast          (757)  (2) 30 days after the return of the vessel to a Umnted States
 as minmum shift keying modulated medium frequency signals m        port if the vessel departs the navigable waters of the Umted States
 the manne radiobeacon band and supply the message to the dGPS      withm 30 days after the manne casualty
 receiver
   (739)  (8) Transmit the vessel's position tagged with the UTC     Part 165-Regulated Navigation Areas and Lmnuted Access
 position solution, course over ground, speed over ground, and    Areas
 Lloyd s identification number to a VTS
   (740)  (9) Display a visual alarm to indicate to shipboard person-    Subpart A-General
 nel when a failure to receive or utilize the RTCM messages           (758)  ï¿½165 1 Purpose of part
 occurs                                                               (759) The purpose of this part is to-






                                                  2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                         57


 (760)  (a) Prescribe proceduress for establishing different types    Subpart B-Regulated Navigation Areas
of limited or controlled access areas and regulated navigation         (781)  ï¿½165.10 Regulated navigation area.
areas;                                                                 (782)  A regulated navigation area is a water area within a
 (761)  (b) Prescribe general regulations for different types of    defined boundary for which regulations for vessels navigating
limited or controlled access areas and regulated navigation areas;   within the area have been established under this part.
 (762)  (c) Prescribe specific requirements for established areas;    (783)  ï¿½165.11 Vessel operating requirements  (regulations).
and                                                                    (784)  Each District Commander may control vessel traffic in an
 (763)  (d) List specific areas and their boundaries.                area which is determined to have hazardous conditions, by issuing
 (764)  ï¿½165.5 Establishment procedures.                             regulations-
 (765)  (a) A safety zone, security zone, or regulated navigation     (785)  (a) Specifying times of vessel entry, movement, or depar-
area may be established on the initiative of any authorized Coast    ture to, from, within, or through ports, harbors, or other waters;
Guard official.                                                        (786)  (b) Establishing vessel size, speed, draft limitations, and
 (766)  (b) Any person may request that a safety zone, security    operating conditions; and
zone, or regulated navigation area be established. Except as pro-      (787)  (c) Restricting vessel operation, in a hazardous area or
vided in paragraph (c) of this section, each request must be sub-    under hazardous conditions, to vessels which have particular oper-
mitted in writing to either the Captain of the Port or District    ating characteristics or capabilities which are considered neces-
Commander having jurisdiction over the location as described in    sary for safe operation under the circumstances.
33 CFR 3, and include the following:                                   (788)  ï¿½165.13 General regulations.
 (767)  (1) The name of the person submitting the request;            (789)  (a) The master of a vessel in a regulated navigation area
 (768)  (2) The location and boundaries of the safety zone, secu-    shall operate the vessel in accordance with the regulations con-
rity zone, or regulated navigation area;                              tained in Subpart F.
 (769)  (3) The date, time, and duration that the safety zone, secu-  (790)  (b) No person may cause or authorize the operation of a
rity zone, or regulated navigation area should be established;       vessel in a regulated navigation area contrary to the regulations in
 (770)  (4) A description of the activities planned for the safety    this Part.
zone, security zone, or regulated navigation area;
 (771)  (5) The nature of the restrictions or conditions desired;    Subpart C-Safety Zones
and                                                                    (791)  ï¿½165.20 Safety zones.
 (772)  (6) The reason why the safety zone, security zone, or reg-    (792)  A Safety Zone is a water area, shore area, or water and
ulated navigation area is necessary.                                 shore area to which, for safety or environmental purposes, access
 (773)  (Requests for safety zones, security zones, and regulated    is limited to authorized persons, vehicles, or vessels. It may be sta-
navigation areas are approved by the Office of Management and    tionary and described by fixed limits or it may be described as a
Budget under control numbers 2115-0076, 2115-0219, and 2115-    zone around a vessel in motion.
0087.)                                                                 (793)  ï¿½165.23 General regulations.
 (774)  (c) Safety Zones and Security Zones. If, for good cause,      (794)  Unless otherwise provided in this part-
the request for a safety zone or security zone is made less than 5     (795)  (a) No person may enter a safety zone unless authorized
working days before the zone is to be established, the request may   by the COTP or the District Commander;
be made orally, but it must be followed by a written request within    (796)  (b) No person may bring or cause to be brought into a
24 hours.                                                            safety zone any vehicle, vessel, or object unless authorized by the
  (775)  ï¿½165.7 Notification.                                         COTP or the District Commander;
  (776)  (a) The establishment of these limited access areas and       (797)  (c) No person may remain in a safety zone or allow any
regulated navigation areas is considered rulemaking. The proce-    vehicle, vessel, or object to remain in a safety zone unless autho-
dures used to notify persons of the establishment of these areas    rized by the COTP or the District Commander; and
vary depending upon the circumstances and emergency condi-             (798)  (d) Each person in a safety zone who has notice of a law-
tions. Notification may be made by marine broadcasts, local notice    ful order or direction shall obey the order or direction of the COTP
to mariners, local news media, distribution in leaflet form, and on-    or District Commander issued to carry out the purposes of this
scene oral notice, as well as publication in the Federal Register.   subpart.
  (777) (b) Notification normally contains the physical bound-
aries of the area, the reasons for the rule, its estimated duration,    Subpart D-Security Zones
and the method of obtaining authorization to enter the area, if        (799)  ï¿½165.30 Security zones.
applicable, and special navigational rules, if applicable.             (800)  (a) A security zone is an area of land, water, or land and
  (778)  (c) Notification of the termination of the rule is usually    water which is so designated by the Captain of the Port or District
made in the same form as the notification of its establishment.      Commander for such time as is necessary to prevent damage or
  (779)  ï¿½165.8 Geographic coordinates.                               injury to any vessel or waterfront facility, to safeguard ports, har-
  (780)  Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude or    bors, territories, or waters of the United States or to secure the
longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or charts    observance of the rights and obligations of the United States.
whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American Datum          (801) (b) The purpose of a security zone is to safeguard from
of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are    destruction, loss, or injury from sabotage or other subversive acts,
expressly labeled NAD 83. Geographic coordinates without the    accidents, or other causes of a similar nature-
NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to        (802)  (1) Vessels,
NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that      (803)  (2) Harbors,
are published on the particular map or chart being used.               (804)  (3) Ports and






58                                                2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (805)  (4) Waterfront facilities-in the United States and all terri-  (826)  (b) Special Regulations:
tory and water, continental or insular, that is subject to the jurisdic-  (827)  (1) All vessels may transit or navigate within the safety
tion of the United States.                                            zone.
 (806)  ï¿½165.33 General regulations.                                   (828)  (2) No vessels, other than a large passenger vessel over
 (807)  Unless otherwise provided in the special regulations in    1600 gross tons (including ferries), may anchor within the Safety
Subpart F of this part-                                               Zone without the express consent of the Captain of the Port,
 (808)  (a) No person or vessel may enter or remain in a security    Southeast Alaska.
zone without the permission of the Captain of the Port;
 (809)  (b) Each person and vessel in a security zone shall obey    Part 334-Danger Zones and Restricted Area Regulations
any direction or order of the Captain of the Port;
 (810)  (c) The Captain of the Port may take possession and con-       (829)  ï¿½334.1 Purpose.
trol of any vessel in the security zone;                               (830)  The purpose of this part is to:
 (811)  (d) The Captain of the Port may remove any person, ves-        (831)  (a) Prescribe procedures for establishing, amending and
sel, article, or thing from a security zone;                          disestablishing danger zones and restricted area;
 (812)  (e) No person may board, or take or place any article or       (832)  (b) List the specific danger zones and restricted areas and
thing on board, any vessel in a security zone without the permis-    their boundaries; and
sion of the Captain of the Port; and                                   (833)  (c) Prescribe specific requirements, access limitations and
 (813)  (f) No person may take or place any article or thing upon    controlled activities within the danger zones and restricted areas.
any waterfront facility in a security zone without the permission of   (834)  ï¿½334.2 Definitions.
the Captain of the Port.                                               (835)  (a) Danger zone. A defined water area (or areas) used for
                                                                     target practice, bombing, rocket firing or other especially hazard-
Subpart E-Restricted Waterfront Areas                                 ous operations, normally for the armed forces. The danger zones
 (814)  ï¿½165.40 Restricted Waterfront Areas.                         may be closed to the public on a full-time or intermittent basis, as
 (815)  The Commandant may direct the COTP to prevent access    stated in the regulations.
to waterfront facilities, and port and harbor areas, including ves-    (836)  (b) Restricted area. A defined water area for the purpose
sels and harbor craft therein. This section may apply to persons    of prohibiting or limiting public access to the area. Restricted
who do not possess the credentials outlined in 33 CFR 125.09    areas generally provide security for Government property and/or
when certain shipping activities are conducted that are outlined in    protection to the public from the risks of damage or injury arising
33 CFR 125.15.                                                        from the Government's use of that area.
                                                                      (837) ï¿½334.3 Special policies.
Subpart F-Specific Regulated Navigation Areas and Limited              (838)  (a) General. The general regulatory policies stated in 33
Access Areas                                                          CFR part 320 will be followed as appropriate. In addition, danger
 (816)  ï¿½165.1702 Gastineau Channel, Juneau, Alaska-safety    zone and restricted area regulations shall provide for public access
zone.                                                                 to the area to the maximum extent practicable.
 (817)  (a) The waters within the following boundaries are a           (839)  (b) Food fishing industry. The authority to prescribe dan-
safety zone: A line beginning at the Standard Oil Company Pier    ger zone and restricted area regulations must be exercised so as
West Light, located at position 58017.9'N., 134024.8'W., in the    not to unreasonably interfere with or restrict the food fishing
direction of 1400 True to Rock Dump Lighted Buoy 2A at position    industry. Whenever the proposed establishment of a danger zone
58ï¿½17.2'N., 134ï¿½23.8'W.; thence in the direction of 003ï¿½ True to a    or restricted area may affect fishing operations, the District Engi-
point at position 58ï¿½17.4'N., 134ï¿½23.7'W., on the north shore of    neer will consult with the Regional Director, U.S. Fish and Wild-
Gastineau Channel; thence northwesterly along the north shore of    life Service, Department of the Interior and the Regional Director,
Gastineau Channel to the point of origin.                             National Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic & Atmo-
 (818)  (b) Special Regulations:                                     spheric Administration (NOAA),
 (819)  (1) All vessels may transit or navigate within the safety      (840)  (c) Temporary, occasional or intermittent use. If the use
zone.                                                                 of the water area is desired for a short period of time, not exceed
 (820)  (2) No vessels, other than a large passenger (including    thirty days in duration, and that planned operations can be con-
cruise ships and ferries) may anchor within the safety zone with-    ducted safely without imposing unreasonable restrictions on navi-
out the express consent from the Captain of the Port, Southeast    gation, and without promulgating restricted area regulations in
Alaska.                                                               accordance with the regulations in this section, applicants may be
 (821)  ï¿½165.1705 Ketchikan Harbor, Ketchikan, Alaska-               informed that formal regulations are not required. Activities of
Safety Zone.                                                          this type shall not reoccur more often than biennially (every other
 (822)  (a) That portion of Ketchikan Harbor, Ketchikan, Alaska    year), unless danger zone/restricted area rules are promulgated
enclosed by the following boundary lines is a Safety Zone: A line    under this Part. Proper notices for mariners requesting that vessels
from Thomas Basin Entrance Light "2", latitude 55ï¿½20.3'N., lon-    avoid the area will be issued by the Agency requesting such use of
gitude 131038.5'W., to East Channel Lighted Buoy "4A",               the water area, or if appropriate, by the District Engineer, to all
 (823)  55020.4'N., 131038.9'W., to Pennock Island Reef Lighted    known interested persons. Copies will also be sent to appropriate
Buoy "PR",                                                            State agencies, the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, Washington,
 (824)  55020.3'N., 131040'W., to Wreck Lighted Buoy "WR6",          DC 20590, and Director, Defense Mapping Agency, Hydrographic
 (825)  55020.7'N., 13 1040.3'W., then following a line bearing    Center, Washington, DC 20390, ATTN: Code NS 12. Notification
064 degrees true to shore. This zone is effective 24 hours per day    to all parties and Agencies shall be made at least two weeks prior
from 1 May through 30 September, annually. Annual notices of    to the planned event, or earlier, if required for distribution of Local
these regulations will be issued in Local Notices to Mariners.        Notice to Mariners by the Coast Guard.





                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      59


 (841)  ï¿½334 4 Estabhshment and amendment procedures                (866) (c) Public heanng  The District Engineer may conduct a
 (842) (a) Application Any request for the establishment           pubhc hearing m accordance with 33 CFR part 327
amendment or revocation of a danger zone or restricted area must     (867) (d) Environmental documentation  The District Engineer
contain sufficient information for the District Engineer to issue a    shall prepare environmental documentation in accordance with
public notice, and as a mmnmum must contain the following          appendix B to 33 CFR part 325
 (843)  (1) Name, address and telephone number of requestor         (868)  (e) District Engineer s recommendation  After closure of
including the identity of the command and DoD facilhty and the    the comment period, and upon completion of the District Engl-
identity of a point of contact with phone number                   neer s review he/she shall forward the case through channels to
 (844) (2) Name of waterway and If a small tributary the name    the Office of the Chief of Engineers, ATTN  CECW-OR with a
of a larger connecting waterbody                                   recommendation of whether or not the danger zone or restricted
 (845) (3) Name of closest city or town county/parish and state    area regulation should be promulgated  The District Engineer
 (846)  (4) Location of proposed or existing danger zone or    shall include a copy of environmental documentation prepared m
restricted area with a map showing the location if possible        accordance with appendix B to 33 CFR part 325, the record of any
 (847)  (5) A brief statement of the need for the area its intended    pubhc heanngs, if held, a summary of any comments received and
use and detailed description of the times, dates and extent of    a response thereto, and a draft of the regulation as it is to appear in
restriction                                                        the Federal Register
 (848)  (b) Public notice (1) The Corps will normally publish       (869) (f) Final decision  The Chief of Engineers will notify the
public notices and Federal Register documents concurrently         District Engineer of the final decision to either approve or disap-
Upon receipt of a request for the establishment, amendment or    prove the regulations The Dstnct Engineer will notify the appli-
revocation of a danger zone or restricted area, the District Engl-    cant/proponent and publish a public notice of the final decision
neer should forward a copy of the request with his/her recommen    Concurrent with Issuance of the pubhc notice the Office of the
dation, a copy of the draft public notice and a draft Federal    Chief of Engineers will pubhsh the final decision in the Federal
Register document to the Office of the Chief of Engineers, ATTN    Reglster and either withdraw the proposed regulation or issue the
CECW-OR  The Chief of Engineers will publish the proposal inm   final regulation as appropriate The final rule shall become effec-
the Federal Register concurrent with the public notice issued by    tive no sooner than 30 days after pubhcatlon m the Federal Regis-
the District Engineer                                              ter unless the Chief of Engineers finds that sufficient cause exists
 (849) (2) Content The publihc notice and Federal Register doc-    and pubhshes that rationale with the regulations
uments must include sufficient information to give a clear under-   (870)  ï¿½334 5 Dlsestabhshment of a danger zone
standing of the proposed action and should include the followig      (871)  (a) Upon receipt of a request from any agency for the dls-
items of information                                               estabhshment of a danger zone, the District Engineer shall notify
 (850) (1) Applicable statutory authority or authorities, (40 Stat    that agency of ts responsibility for returning the area to a concd-
266, 33 U S C 1) and (40 Stat 892, 33 U S C 3)                     tion suitable for use by the pubhc  The agency must either certify
 (851)  (11) A reasonable comment period  The public notice    that it has not used the area for a purpose that requires cleanup or
should fix a hmntmg date within which comments will be received,    that t has removed all hazardous materials and muntions, before
normally a period not less than 30 days after publication of the    the Corps will disestablish the area  The agency will remain
notice                                                             responsible for the enforcement of the danger zone regulations to
                                                                   prevent unauthonzed entry mto the area until the area Is deemed
 (852)  (m1) The address of the District Engineer as the recipient
of any comments received                                           safe for use by the public and the area is disestablished by the
 (853) (1V) The identity of the apphcant/proponent                 Corps
                                                                     (872)  (b) Upon receipt of the certlfication required in paragraph
 (854)  (V) The Cnampe or htle address and telephone number of    (a) of this section, the District shall forward the request for dis-
the Corps employee from whom addilaonal mformation concern-
ing the Corps emp roposa l   may be obtanned                      establishment of the danger zone through channels to CECW-OR,
                                                                   with its recommendations  Notice of proposed rulemaking and
 (855)  (vi) The location of the proposed activity accompanied by    public procedures as outlined in ï¿½334 4 are not normally required
a map of sufficient detail to show the boundaries of the area(s) and    before publcaton of the fnal rule revoking a restrcted area or
Its relationship to the surrounding area                           danger zone regulation  The dlsestablishment/revocation of the
 (856)  (3) Distribution Public notice will be distributed In    danger zone or restricted area regulation removes a restriction on a
accordance with 33 CFR 325 3(d)(1)  In addition to this general    waterway
distribution public notices will be sent to the following Agencies   (873)   334 6 Datum
  (857)  (i) The Federal Avahtion Admustration (FAA) where the       (874)  (a) Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude
use of airspace Is involved                                        or longitude or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or
  (858)  (u) The Commander Service Force, U S Atlantic Fleet,    charts whose reference horizontal datum is the North American
if a proposed action involves a danger zone off the U S Atlantic    Datum of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are
coast                                                              expressly labeled NAD 83 Geographic coordinates without the
  (859) (111) Proposed danger zones on the U S Pacific coast    NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to
must be coordinated with the applicable commands as follows        NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that
  (860) Alaska, Oregon and Washington                               are pubhshed on the particular map or chart being used
  (861) Commander, Naval Base, Seattle                               (875) (b) For further information on NAD 83 and National Ser-
  (862) Cahforna                                                    vice nautical charts please contact
  (863) Commander Naval Base San Diego                               (876) Director, Coast Survey (N/CG2)
  (864) Hawraii and Trust Territories                                (877)  National Ocean Servlce NOAA
  (865) Commander, Naval Base, Pearl Harbor                          (878)  1315 East-West HIghway Station 6147






60                                              2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (879) Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282.                               (897) (4) Area No. 4. Due to the presence of communication
 (880) ï¿½334.1275 West Arm Behm Canal, Ketchikan, Alaska,    and power cables crossing from Revillagigedo Island to Back
restricted areas.                                                 Island no anchoring or towing of a drag is allowed. Anchoring is
 (881) (a) The areas-(1) Area No.1. The waters of Behm Canal    allowed within 100 yards of the shore of Back Island except
bounded by a circle 2,000 yards in diameter, centered on 55ï¿½36'N.,    within 100 yards of each side of the area where the cables are
131049.2'W.                                                       brought ashore. The termination location of the cables on the land
 (882)  (2) Area No. 2. The waters of Behm Canal bounded by a    is marked with a warning sign that is visible from the water.
circle 2,000 yards in diameter, centered at 55034'N.,131048'W.      (898) (5) Area No. 5. (i) The area will be open unless the Navy
 (883) (3) Area No. 3. The waters of Behm Canal excluding    is actually conducting operations. To ensure safe and timely pas-
those areas designated as areas Nos. 1 and 2 above, bounded by an    sage through the restricted area vessel operators are required to
irregular polygon beginning at the shoreline on Back Island near  notify the Range Operations Officer of their expected time of
 (884) 55032.63'N., 131045.18'W., thence bearing about 350ï¿½ to    arrival, speed and intentions. For vessels not equipped with radio
 (885)  55"38.06'N., 131046.75'W., thence bearing about 3000 to   equipment, the Navy shall signal with flashing beacon lights
 (886)  55038.52'N., 131048.15'W., thence bearing about 203ï¿½ to   whether passage is prohibited and when it is safe to pass through
 (887)  55033.59'N., 131ï¿½51.54'W., thence bearing about 112ï¿½ to    the area. A flashing green beacon indicates that vessels may pro-
the intersection of the shoreline at Back Island near 55ï¿½32.53'N.,    ceed through the area. A flashing red beacon means that the area is
131ï¿½45.77W., thence NE along the shoreline to the point of begin-    closed to all vessels and to await a green clear signal. Each closure
ning.                                                             of the area by the Navy will normally not exceed 20 minutes.
 (888) (4) Area No. 4. The waters of Clover Passage bounded by     (899) (ii) Small craft may operate within 500 yards of the shore-
an irregular polygon beginning at the shoreline on Back Island    line at speeds no greater than 5 knots in accordance with the
near                                                              restrictions in effect in area No. 3.
 (889) 55032.63'N., 131045.18'W., thence bearing 150ï¿½ to the       (900) (iii) During the period May 1 through September 15
intersection of the shoreline on Revillagigedo Island near        annually, the Navy will only conduct acoustic measurement tests
 (890) 55030.64'N., 131043.64'W., thence SW along the shore-    which will result in transitory restrictions in Area #5 for a total of
line to near                                                      no more than 15 days.
 (891) 55030.51'N, 131ï¿½43.88'W., thence bearing 330ï¿½ to the        (901) (iv) Transitory restrictions inArea#5 will not be enforced
intersection of the shoreline on Back Island near                 during daylight hours when Navy testing coincides with pre-
 (892)  55032.16'N., 131045.20'W., and from there NE along the    scheduled special events in Behm Canal. Special events are
shoreline to the point of beginning.                              defined as summer holidays or celebrations, competitions, or eco-
 (893) (5) Area No. 5. The waters of Behm Canal bounded to the    nomic endeavors scheduled by an agency or organization, and typ-
north by a line starting from Point Francis on the Cleveland Penin-    ically occurring every year for the utilization of natural resources
sula to Escape Point on Revillagigedo Island then S along the    of Behm Canal. Special events include commercial emergency
shoreline to Indian Point, thence S to the Grant Island Light at    seine fishery openings from July 25 through September 15, his-
55033.3'N., 131043.62'W., thence bearing 218ï¿½T to the S end of    toric salmon derbies lasting eight days or less, Memorial Day,
Black Island and continuing to the intersection of the shoreline on    Labor Day, Independence Day or any nationally recognized three
Betton Island at about 55031.52'N., 131ï¿½45.98'W., thence N along    day weekend to celebrate these holidays.
the shoreline of Betton Island to the western side below Betton    (902) (v) Public notification that the Navy will be conducting
Head at about 55ï¿½30.83'N, 131ï¿½50'W., thence bearing 283ï¿½ across    operations in Behm Canal will be given at least 72 hours in
Behm Canal to the intersection of shoreline near the point which    advance to the following Ketchikan contacts: U.S. Coast Guard,
forms the SE entrance of Bond Bay at about 55ï¿½31.60'N.,    Ketchikan Gateway Borough Planning Department, Harbor Mas-
131ï¿½56.58'W., thence NE to Helm Point on the Cleveland Penin-    ter, Alaska Department of Fish and Game, KRBD Radio, KTKN
sula, thence NE along the shoreline to the point of beginning at    Radio, and the Ketchikan Daily News.
Point Francis.                                                     (903) (c) Vessels will be allowed to transit Restricted Area #5
 (894) (b) The regulations-(1) Area No. 1. Vessels are allowed to    within 20 minutes of marine radio or telephone notification to the
transit the area at any time. No vessel may anchor within the    Navy Range Operations Officer.
restricted area or tow a drag of any kind, deploy a net or dump any  (904) (d) Enforcement. The regulations in this section shall be
material within the area.                                         enforced by the Commander, David Taylor Research Center and
 (895) (2) Area No. 2. Vessels are allowed to transit the area at    such agencies he/she may designate.
any time. No vessel may anchor within the restricted area or tow a  (905) ï¿½334.1310 Lutak Inlet, Alaska; restricted areas.
drag of any kind, deploy a net or dump any material within the      (906) (a) The areas- (1) Army POL dock restricted area.
area. Vessels are also prohibited from mooring or tying up to, loi-  (907)  (i) the waters of Lutak Inlet bounded as follows: Begin-
tering alongside or in the immediate vicinity of naval equipment    ning at the water's edge 900 feet northwest of the centerline of the
and barges in the restricted area.                                landward end of the POL dock; thence 800 feet, 50ï¿½ true; thence,
 (896) (3) Area No. 3. Vessels are allowed to transit the area at    1400 feet, 113ï¿½ true; thence 450 feet, 211ï¿½ true to the water's edge
any time. Due to the presence of underwater cables and instru-    at a point approximately 720 feet from the most southwest corner
mentation, anchoring is prohibited and the towing of a drag or any    of the seaward end of the POL dock; thence along the water's edge
object within 100 feet of the bottom is also prohibited. Anchoring    to the point of beginning.
is allowed within 100 yards of the shore of Back Island except     (908) (ii) The area will be marked at points approximately 200
within 100 yards of each side of the area where electrical and other    feet apart along the shore by white signs containing the word
cables are brought ashore. The termination location of the cables    "Warning." The signs will not be lighted.
on the land is marked with a warning sign that is visible from the  (909) (2) Dry Cargo dock mooring area. (i) The waters within
water.                                                            60 feet off the face of the dock.






                                                2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                     61


 (910)  (b) The regulations (1) No vessels or other craft shall    Natonal Preserve, Noatak National Preserve, Wrangell-St Elias
enter or remain m the Army POL dock restricted area when tank-    National Preserve, and Yukon-Charley National Preserve
ers are engaged m discharging oil at the dock                       (926)  (k) The term net" means a seme, weir net wire fish trap,
 (911)  (2) The dropping and dragging of anchors weights, or    or other inplement designed to entrap fish, except a landing net
other ground tackle within the Dry Cargo dock mooring area is       (927) (1) The term off-road vehicle' means any motor vehicle
prohibited                                                        designed for or capable of crosscountry travel on or immediately
 (912) (3) The regulations in this section shall be enforced by the    over land, water, sand, snow Ice marsh, wetland or other natural
District Engineer, U S Army Engineer District, Anchorage,    terram, except snowmachines or snowmobiles as defined m this
Alaska, and such agencies as he may designate                     chapter
                                                                    (928) (m) The term ' park areas' means land and waters admm-
Tltle 36-Parks, Forests, and Pubhec Property                      istered by the National Park Service wlthin the State of Alaska
                                                                     (929) (n) The term 'person' means any individual, firm corpo-
Part 13-National Park System Units in Alaska                      ration society, association, partnership, or any private or public
                                                                   body
Subpart A-Pubhec Use and Recreation                                 (930)  (o) The term possession" means exercising dominion or
 (913)  ï¿½13 1 Defimitons                                          control, with or without ownership over weapons traps, nets or
  (914) The following definitions shall apply to all regulations    other property
contained m this part                                              (931)  (p) The term "public lands' means lands situated in
  (915)  (a) The term "adequate and feasible access means a rea-    Alaska which are federally owned lands, except-
sonable method and route of pedestrian or vehicular transportatihon  (932) (1) land selections of the State of Alaska which have been
which is economically practicable for achieving the use or devel-    tentatively approved or validly selected under the Alaska State
opment desired by the applicant on his/her non-federal land or    hood Act (72 Stat 339) and lands which have been confirmed to,
occupancy interest, but does not necessarily mean the least costly    validly selected by, or granted to the Territory of Alaska or the
alternative                                                       State under any other provision of Federal law
  (916) (b) The term "aircraft" means a machine or device that is   (933) (2) land selections of a Native Corporation made under
used or intended to be used to carry persons or objects in flight    the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act (85 Stat 688) which
 through the air, including, but not hlimited to airplanes helicopters    have not been conveyed to a Native Corporation unless any such
 and gliders                                                       selection is determined to be mvahd or is relmquished, and
  (917)  (C) The term 'ANILCA' means the Alaska National            (934)  (3) lands referred to in section 19(b) of the Alaska Native
 Interest Lands Conservation Act (94 Stat 2371, Pub L 96-487    Claims Settlement Act
 (December 2, 1980))                                                 (935) (q) The term "snowmachine  or snowmobile' means a
  (918)  (d) The term "carry' means to wear, bear or carry on or    self-propelled vehicle intended for off-road travel primarily on
 about the person and additionally in the case of firearms, within or    snow having a curb weight of not more than 1,000 pounds (450
 upon a device or armal used for transportation                    kg) driven by a track or tracks in contact with the snow and
  (919) (e) The term "downed aircraft means an aircraft that as a    steered by a ski or skis on contact with the snow
 result of mechanical failure or accident cannot take off            (936) (r) The term 'Superintendent" means any National Park
  (920) (f) The term firearm means any loaded or unloaded pls-    Service official in change of a park area the Alaska Regional
 tol revolver, nfle, shotgun or other weapon which will or is deslg-    Director of the National Park Service, or an authorized representa-
 nated to or may readily be converted to expel a projectile by the    tlve of either
 action of expanded gases, except that It does not include a pistol or  (937)  (s) The term "take  or taking as used with respect to
 nfle powered by compressed gas The term "firearm" also includes    fish and wildlife means to pursue hunt shoot, trap net capture
 intant gas devises                                                collect, kill, harm or attempt to engage in any such conduct
   (921) (g) The term' fish and wildlife" means any member of the    (938) (t) The term temporary" means a continuous period of
 animal kingdom, mcludmg without hnlimitatlon any mammal, fish,    tihme not to exceed 12 months, except as specifically provided oth-
 bird (including any migratory, nonmigratory or endangered bird    erwlse
 for which protection is also afforded by treaty or other interna-  (939) (u) The term trap" means a snare trap mesh or other
 tional agreement), amphibian reptile, mollusk crustacean arthro-    implement designed to entrap anumals other than fish
 pod, or other invertebrate, and includes any part produce, egg or   (940) (v) The term 'unload  means there is no unexpended
 offspring thereof or the dead body or part thereof                shell or cartridge in the chamber or magazine of a firearm, bows,
   (922)  (h) The term "fossil" means any remamins impression, or    crossbows and spearguns are stored in such a manner as to prevent
  trace of any ammal or plant of past geological ages that has been    their ready use, muzzle-loading weapons do not contain a powder
  preserved, by natural processes in the earth's crust              charge, and any other implement capable of discharging a missile
   (923) (1) The term "gemstone  means a silica or igneous mm       into the air or under the water does not contain a rmssile or slmular
  eral including, but not limited to (1) geodes, (2) petrified wood,    device wlthm the loading or discharging mechamsm
  and (3) jade agate opal garnet or other mineral that when cut       (941) (w) The term weapon" means a firearm, compressed gas
  and pohshed is customarily used as jewelry or other ornament      or spring powered pistol or rifle bow and arrow, crossbow blow
   (924)  Q) The term National Preserve" shall include the follow-    gun, speargun hand thrown spear, slingshot explosive device or
  ing areas of the National Park System                             any other implement designed to discharge missiles into the air or
   (925) Alagnak National Wild and Scenic River Amakchak    under the water
  National Preserve, Benng Land Bridge National Preserve Denall       (942)  ï¿½13 2 Applicability and scope
  National Preserve Gates of the Arctic National Preserve, Glacier    (943) (a) The regulations contained in this Part 13 are pre-
  Bay National Preserve, Katmal National Preserve, Lake Clark    scribed for the proper use and management of park areas in Alaska






62                                               2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


and supplement the general regulations of this chapter. The gen-      (961)  (5) General public use cabins;
eral regulations contained in this chapter are applicable except as   (962)  (6) Cabins in wilderness areas;
modified by this Part 13.                                             (963)  (7) Use of temporary facilities related to the taking of fish
 (944)  (b) Subpart A of this Part 13 contains regulations applica-    and wildlife; and
ble to park areas. Such regulations amend in part the general regu-   (964j (8) New cabins and other structures otherwise authorized
lations contained in this chapter. The regulations in Subpart A     by law.
govern use and management, including subsistence activities,          (965)  (b) Applicability. Unless otherwise specified, this section
within the park areas, except as modified by Subparts B or C.       applies to all park areas in Alaska except Klondike Gold Rush
 (945)  (c) Subpart B of this Part 13 contains regulations applica-    National Historical Park and Sitka National Historical Park.
ble to subsistence activities. Such regulations apply to park areas   (966)  (c) Definitions. The following definitions apply to this
except Kenai Fjords National Park, Katmai National Park, Glacier    section:
Bay National Park, Klondike Gold Rush National Historical Park,
Sitka National Historical Park, and parts of Denali National Park.    (967)  "Cabi" means of a small, usually one-story dwelling of
The regulations in Subpart B amend in part the general regulations    simple construction, completely enclosed, with a roof and walls
contained in this chapter and the regulations contained in Subpart    which may have widows and door(s).
A of this Part 13.                                                    (968) "Claimant" means a person who has occupied and used a
                                                                     cabin or other structure as a primary, permanent residence for a
 (946)  (d) Subpart C of this Part 13 contains special regulations    substantial portion of the time, and who, when absent, has the
for specific park areas. Such regulations amend in part the general                              as his/her primary, permanent resi-
regulations contained in this chapter and the regulations contained    den e. Factors demonstrating    a person's primary, permanent resi-
                                                                     dence. Factors demonstrating a person's primary, permanent resi-
in Subparts A and B of this Part 13.
 in(947) (e) The regulationstained Bo this csPart 13  are applica-    dence include, but are not limited to documentary evidence, e.g.
 (947)  (e) The regulations contained in this Part 13 are applica-
                                                                     the permanent address indicated on licenses issued by the State of
ble only on federally owned lands within the boundaries of any
                                                                     Alaska and tax returns and the location where the person is regis-
park area. For purposes of this part, "federally owned lands"    tered to vote.
means land interests held or retained by the United States, but
does not include those land interests; (1) Tentatively approved,      (969)  "Immediate family member" means a claimant's spouse,
                 legislatively conveyed, or patented to the State of Alaska  or (2)    or a grandparent, parent, brother, sister, child or adopted child of a
legislatively conveyed, or patented to the State of Alaska; or (2)
                                                                     claimant or of the claimant's spouse.
interim conveyed or patented to a Native Corporation or person.
 (948)  ï¿½13.3 (Reserved)                                             (970)  "Possessory interest" means the partial or total ownership
 (949)  ï¿½13.4 Information collection.                               of a cabin or structure.
 (950)  The information collection requirements contained in         (971)  "Right of occupancy" means a valid claim to use or reside
ï¿½ï¿½13.13, 13.14, 13.15, 13.16, 13.17, 13.31, 13.44, 13.45, 13.49,    in a cabin or other structure.
and 13.51 have been approved by the Office of Management and          (972)  "Shelter" means a structure designed to provide temporary
Budget under 44 U.S.C. 3507 and assigned clearance number    relief from the elements and is characterized as a lean-to having
1024-0015. The information is being collected to solicit informa-    one side open.
tion necessary for the Superintendent to issue permits and other      (973)  "Substantial portion of the time" means at least 50 percent
benefits. This information will be used to grant statutory or admin-    of the time since beginning occupancy and at least 4 (four) consec-
istrative benefits. In all sections except 13.13, the obligation to    utive months of continuous occupancy in every calendar year after
respond is required to obtain a benefit. In ï¿½13.13, the obligation to    1986.
respond is mandatory.                                                 (974)  "Temporary campsite" means a natural, undeveloped area
 (951)  ï¿½13.10 (Reserved)                                           suitable for the purpose of overnight occupancy without modifica-
 (952)  ï¿½13.11 (Reserved)                                           tion.
 (953)  ï¿½13.15 (Reserved)                                            (975)  "Temporary facility" means a structure or other manmade
 (954)  ï¿½13.16 (Reserved)                                           improvement that can be readily and completely dismantled and/
 (955) ï¿½13.17 Cabins and other structures.                          or removed from the site when the authorized use terminates. The
 (956)  (a) Purpose and policy. The policy of the National Park    term does not include a cabin.
Service is to manage the use, occupancy and disposition of cabins     (976)  "Tent platform" means a structure, usually made of manu-
and other structures in park areas in accordance with the language    factured timber products, constructed to provide a solid, level floor
and intent of ANILCA, the National Park Service Organic Act (16    for a tent, with or without partial walls not exceeding three feet in
U.S.C. 1 et seq.) and other applicable law. Except as Congress has    height above the floor, and having only the tent fabric, the ridge
directly and specifically provided to the contrary, the use, occu-    pole and its support poles extending higher than three feet above
pancy and disposition of cabins and other structures in park areas    the floor.
shall be managed in a manner that is compatible with the values       (977)  (d) Administration-(1) Permit application procedures.
and purposes for which the National Park System and these park    Except as otherwise specified in this section, the procedures set
areas have been established. In accordance with this policy, this    forth in ï¿½13.31(a) of this chapter govern application for any permit
section governs the following authorized uses of cabins and other    authorized pursuant to this section.
structures in park areas:                                             (978)  (2) Notice and comment on proposed permit. Before a
 (957)  (1) Use and/or occupancy pursuant to a valid existing    permit for the use and occupancy of a cabin or other structure is
lease or permit;                                                    issued pursuant to this section, the Superintendent shall publish
 (958)  (2) Use and occupancy of a cabin not under valid existing    notice of the proposed issuance in the local media and provide a
lease or permit;                                                    public comment period of at least sixty days, subject to the follow-
 (959)  (3) Use for authorized commercial fishing activities;       ing exceptions: Prior notice and comment are not required for a
 (960)  (4) Use of cabins for subsistence purposes;                 permit authorizing use and occupancy for 14 days or less of a pub-





                                                 2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                        63


lic use cabin or use and occupancy of a temporary faclhty for the     (992)  (A) When no permit apphcation has been received for its
taking of fish or wildlife for sport or subsistence purposes        use and occupancy before October 20, 1987, one year after the
 (979) (3) Permit revocation (i) The superintendent may revoke    effective date of this section or
a permit or lease issued pursuant to this section when the supern-    (993) (B) One year after a permit application for its use and
tendent determines that the use under the permit or lease is causing    occupancy has been denied or a permit for its use and occupancy
or may cause significant detriment to the principal purposes for    has been revoked denied or has expired
which the park area was estabhshed  Provided, however, that If a      (994)  (11) A claimant or applicant whose appllcation for a per-
perrmttee submits a written request for a hearing concerning the    mat has been demed or whose permit has expired may remove all
revocation, based on the cause hsted above, of a permit or lease    or a portion of a cabin or other structure and its contents from a
Issued pursuant to paragraph (e)(l), (e)(2), (e)(4) or (e)(8) of this    park area to the extent of his or her possessory interest and under
section, the matter shall be assigned to an adminstrative law judge    conditions established by the Supenntendent, until the date the
who, after notice and hearing and based on substantial evidence in    cabin or structure IS considered abandoned
the adminmstrative record as a whole shall render a recommended       (995)  (in) The contents of a cabin or other structure are consld-
decision for the supenntendent's review The superintendent shall    ered abandoned when the cabm or other structure Is considered
then accept, reject or modify the admimstrative law judge's rec-    abandoned
ommended decision in whole or in part and issue a final decision      (996)  (v) A person whose permit for the use and occupancy of
in writin g                                                         a cabin or other structure Is revoked may remove his or her per-
 (980)  (u) The superintendent may revoke or modify any permit    sonal property from a park area under conditions established by
or lease issued pursuant to this section when the permittee violates    the Superintendent until one year after the date of the permit's
a term of the permut or lease                                       revocation
 (981)  (4) Appeal procedures   The procedures set forth in          (997) (v) The Superintendent shall dispose of abandoned prop-
ï¿½13 31(b) of this chapter govern appeals of a permit denial, a    erty in accordance with ï¿½ï¿½2 22 and 13 22 of this chapter  No
denial of a permit renewal, a pernut revocation and a superinten-
dent's final decision on a permit revocation issued pursuant to    been declared abandoned or determined to constitute a direct
paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this section                                 threat to the safety of park visitors or area resources
 (982)  (5) Permittee s interest (i) A pernmttee shall not accrue a
                                                                      (998) (9) Emergency use Dunng an emergency involving the
compensable interest in a cabm or other structure m a park area
compensable interest in a cabin or other structure in a park area    safety of human hfe, a person may use any cabin designated by the
unless specifically authorized by Federal statutory law
 (983)  (11) A cabmin or other structure in a park area may not be    Supentendent for offical government business, general public
                                                                     use or shared subsistence use The person shall report such use to
sold, bartered, exchanged, assigned or included as a portion of any
sale or exchange of other property by a perminttee unless specifi-
cally authonzed by Federal statutory law                              (999)  (e) Authonrized cabin use and occupancy  Use or occu-
 (984)  (ll) The Superintendent shall determine the extent and    pancy of a cabin or structure in a park area is prohibited, except
 nature of a perintee s possessory interest at the time a permit s    pursuant to the terms of a permit issued by the uperintendent
Issued of a per dessory intered    at   t he  time a permit is      under this section or as otherwise authorized by provisions of this
issued or denied
 (985)  (6) Cabin Site Compatibility  The Superintendent shall    chapter
establish pernut conditions that require a permittee-                 (aooo) (1) Use andlor occupancy pursuant to a valid existing
 (986)  () When constructing, mataining or repairing a cabin or    lease or permit  A person who holds a valid lease or permit in
other structure authorized under this section, to use materials and    effect on December 2, 1980, for a cab, homesite or sur sc-
methods that blend with and are compatible with the Immediate    ture not subject to the provisions of paragraph (e)(2) of this sec-
and surrounding landscape, and                                      tion, on Federal lands in a park area, may continue the use
 (987)  (a) When terminating an activity that mvolves a structure    authorized by that lease or perminut subject to the following condi-
authorized under this section, to dismantle and remove the struc-
ture and all personal property from the park area within a reason-    (1001) (1) Renewal  The uperntendent shall renew a valid lease
able period of time and m a manner consistent with the protecton    or permit upon Its expiration m accordance with the provisions of
of the park area                                                    the original lease or permit subject to any modifications or new
  (988)  (7) Access (i) A penrmttee under this section who holds a    conditions that the upermtendent finds necessary for the protection
pernut for use and occupancy of a cabin or other structure located    of the values and purposes of the park area
on public lands m a park area, not under valid existing lease or      (002) (11) Denial of renewal  The upenntendent may deny the
pernut in effect on December 2, 1980, does not have a "vahd prop-    renewal or continuation of a vahd lease or permit only after issu-
erty or occupancy interest' purposes of ANILCA section 1110(b)    ing specific findings, followg notice and an opportunity for the
and Its implementing regulations                                    leaseholder or pernuttee to respond that renewal or contminuation
  (989)  (1) When issuing a permit under this section, the Supenn-    constitutes a direct threat to, or a significant impairment of, the
tendent shall provide for reasonable access which is appropriate    purposes for which the park area was estabhshed
and consistent with the values and purposes for which the park        (1003) (in) Transfer  Subject to any prohibitions or restrictions
area was estabhshed                                                 that apply to transfer in the existing lease or permit, the Supenn-
  (990)  (in) All Impacts of the access to a cabin or other structure    tendent may transfer a valid existing lease or permit to another
are deemed to be a part of and shall be considered in any evalua-    person at the election or death of the original pernuttee or lease-
tlon of, the effects of a use authorized by a permit Issued under    holder only if the Supenntendent determines that
this section                                                          (1004) (A) The continued use Is appropriate and compatible with
  (991)  (8) Abandonment  (i) An existing cabin or other structure    the values and purposes of the park area,
not under valid lease or permit and its contents, are abandoned       (1005) (B) The continued use is non-recreational m nature




64                                              2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (1006) (C) There is no demonstrated over-riding need for pubhc    is being submitted  Such list need only include those immediate
use, and                                                          family members who will be eligible to continue to use and
 (1007) (D) The contmued use and occupancy will not adversely    occupy the cabin or other structure upon the death or departure of
impact solls, vegetation, water or wildlife resources             the original claimant
 (1008) (2) Use and occupancy of a cabin not under valid exlsting  (1018) (iv) Permit application deadhne  The deadlne for receipt
lease or pernut as of December 1, 1978  (1) A cabmin or other resi-    of a permit application for the occupancy and use of an exlstng
dential structure In existence and occupied by a claimant, both    cabin or other structure of an existing cabin or other structure
prior to December 18, 1973, with the claimant's occupancy con-    descrnbed m paragraph (e)(2)(1) or (ni) of this section is October
tmuing for a substantial portion of the time, may continue to be    20, 1987, one year after the effective date of this section  The
used and occupied by the claimant pursuant to a renewable, non-    Superinntendent may extend this deadline for a reasonable period
transferable five-year permit Upon the request of the claimant or    of time only when a permit applicant demonstrates that extraordl-
a successor who is an immediate family member and residing in    nary circumstance prevented timely application
the cabin or structure, the Superntendent shall renew this permit   (1019) (3) Use for authonzed commercial fishiung activities The
every five years until the death of the last Immediate family mem-    use of a campsite, cabin or other structure in conjunction with
ber of the claimant who was residing with the claimant in the    commercial fishing activities authorized by section 205 of
structure under permit at the time of issuance of the original per-    ANILCA m Cape Krusenstern National Monument, the Malaspma
mnut                                                              Glacier Forelands area of Wrangell-Saint Elias National Preserve
 (i009) (ii) A cabin or other residential structure in existence    and the Dry Bay area of Glacier Bay National Preserve is autho-
prior to December 1, 1978, with occupancy commenced by a    nzed pursuant to the provisions of ï¿½13 21(c) of this chapter and
claimant between December 18, 1973 and December 1, 1978           the terms of a pernut issued by the Superntendent
which a claimant has continued to occupy or use for a substantial   (1020) (4) Use of cabins for subsistence purposes  (1) A local
portion of the time, may continue to be used and occupied by the    rural resident who is an eligible subsistence user may use an exist-
claimant pursuant to a non-transferable pernumt  The Supennten-    ing cabin or other structure or temporary facility or construct a
dent may issue and extend such permit for a term not to exceed    new cabin or other structure, includming temporary facilities in a
December 1, 1999 for such reasons as are deemed by the Supernn-    portion of a park area where subsistence use is allowed, pursuant
tendent to be equitable andjust The Supenntendent shall review    to the applicable provisions of Subparts B and C of this Part and
the permit at least every two years and modify the perminut as neces-    the terms of a permit issued by the Superntendent  However the
sary to protect park resources and values                         Supenntendent may designate existing cabins or other structures
 (1lo0) (mii) Permit application  In order to obtain renew or    that may be shared by local rural residents for authorized subsis-
extend a pernut a claimant shall submit a written application  In    tence uses without a perminut
the case of an application to renew or extend a perrmt issued pur-  (1021) (11) For purposes of paragraph (e)(4) of this section, the
suant to this paragraph, if no circumstance relating to the perminut-    term local rural resident', with respect to national parks, monu-
tee's occupancy and use of the cabm or structure has changed m    ments, and preserves is defined m ï¿½ 13 42 of this chapter
the interim, applicable material submitted by the permittee to sat-  (1022) (ui) Permit application In order to obtain or renew a per-
isfy the original application requirements Is considered sufficient    mit, a person shall submit an application  In the case of an apph-
and need not be resubmitted  The following information is    cation to renew a permit issued pursuant to this paragraph If no
required to be included m a perminut application                  circumstance relating to the pernmittee s occupancy and use of the
 (1011) (A) Reasonable proof of possessory interest or right of    cabin or structure has changed in the interim applicable material
occupancy in the cabin or structure, demonstrated by affidavit, bill    submitted by the permittee to satisfy the original application
of sale, or other documentation In order for a claimant to qualify    requirements is considered sufficient and need not be resubmitted
for a permit described in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section, the    The following information is required to be included in a permit
claimant s possessory interest or right of occupancy must have    apphcation
been acquired prior to December 18, 1973 In order for a claimant    (1023) (A) An explanation of the applicant's need for the cabin
to qualify for a pernut described m paragraph (e)(2)(u) of this sec-    or structure
tion, the clamant's possessory interest or right of occupancy must  (1024) (B) A description of an applicant's past present and
have been acquired prior to December 1 1978                       anticipated future subsistence uses relevant to his or her need for
 (1012) (B) A sketch or photograph that accurately depicts the    the cabin or structure
cabin or structure,                                                 (1025) (C) A blueprint, sketch or photograph of the cabin or
 (1013) (C) A map that shows the geographic location of the    structure,
cabin or structure,                                                 (1026) (D) A map that shows the geographic location of this
 (1014) (D) The claimant's agreement to vacate and remove all    cabin or structure, and
personal property from the cabin or structure upon explration of    (1027) (E) A description of the types of occupancy and schedule
the pernut,                                                       for use of the cabin or structure
 (1015) (E) The claimant s acknowledgement that he or she has      (i028) All information may be provided orally except the cabin
no legal interest in the real property on whinch the cabin or struc-    blueprint, sketch or photograph and the map
ture is located,                                                    (1029) (Iv) Permit issuance  (A) In making a decision on a per-
 (1016) (F) Reasonable proof that the claimant has lived m the   mnut apphcation, the Supenntendent shall consider whether the use
cabin or structure during a substantial portion of the time and con-    by local rural residents of a cabin or other structure for subsistence
tminues to use the cabin or other structure as a primary permanent    purposes is customary and traditional m that park area and shall
residence and                                                     determine whether the use and occupancy of a new or existing
 (1017) (G) A list of all immediate family members residing with    cabin or structure is "necessary to reasonably accommodate  the
the claimant withm the cabin or structure for which the application    applicant's subsistence uses  In makming this determination, the






                                                  2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      65


Superintendent shall examine the applicant's particular circum-    Superintendent finds necessary to preserve the wilderness charac-
stances, including but not limited tohis or her past patterns of sub-    ter of the area. As used in this paragraph, the term "previously
sistence uses and his or her future subsistence use plans,    existing public use cabin" means a cabin or other structure which,
reasonable subsistence use alternatives, the specific nature of the    on November 30, 1978, was recognized and managed by a Federal
subsistence uses to be accommodated by the cabin or structure, the    land managing agency as a structure available for general public
impacts of the cabin or structure on other local rural resident who    use.
depend on subsistence uses and the impacts of the proposed struc-    (1042) (ii) Within a wilderness area designated by ANILCA, a
ture and activities on the values and purposes for which the park    new public use cabin or shelter may be constructed, maintained
area was established,                                              and used only if necessary for the protection of the public health
 (1030) (B) The Superintendent may permit the construction of a    and safety.
new cabin or other new structure for subsistence purposes only if a
                       other temporary facility would not adequately and reason-  (1043) (iii) A cabin or other structure located in a designated wil-
tent or other temporary facility would not adequately and reason-
                 accommodatetheapplicant'sse whout                 derness area may not be designated, assigned or used for commer-
ably accommodate the applicant's subsistence uses without signif-
                                                                      cial purposes, except that designated public use cabins may be
icant's hardship and the use of no other type of cabin or other    use           ct     th      eia         ed i       seris b
                                                                      used in conjunction with commercial guided visitor services, but
structure provided for in this section can adequately and reason-                                       g
                                                                     not to the exclusion of the general public.
ably accommodate the applicant's subsistence uses with a lesser    not to the exclusion of the general public.
impact on the values and purposes for which the park area was        (i0o44) (7) Use of temporary facilities related to the taking of fish
established.                                                       and wildlife. (i) In a national preserve where the taking of fish and
 (1031) (v) Permit terms. The Superintendent shall, among other    wildlife is permitted, the construction, maintenance or use of a
conditions, establish terms of a permit that:                      temporary campsite, tent platform, shelter or other temporary
 (1032) (A) Allow for use and occupancy during the harvest or    facility or equipment directly and necessarily related to such activ-
gathering of subsistence resources, at such times as may be rea-    ities is prohibited except pursuant to the terms of a permit issued
sonably necessary to prepare for a harvest season (e.g., opening or    by the Superintendent. This requirement applies only to a tempo-
closing a cabin or structure at the beginning or end of a period of    rary facility that will remain in place for a period longer than 14
use), and at other times reasonably necessary to accommodate the    days.
permittee's specified subsistence uses;                              (1045) (ii) Permit application. In order to obtain or renew a per-
 (1033) (B) Prohibit residential use in conjunction with subsis-    mit, a person shall submit an application. In the case of an appli-
tence activities and                                               cation to renew a permit issued pursuant to this paragraph, if no
 (1034) (C) Limit the term of a permit to a period of five years or    circumstance relating to the permittee's occupancy and use of the
less.                                                              structure has changed in the interim, applicable material submitted
 (1035) (vi) Temporary facilities. A temporary facility or struc-    by the permittee to satisfy the original application requirements is
ture directly and necessarily related to the taking of subsistence    considered sufficient and need not be resubmitted. The following
resources may be constructed and used by a qualified subsistence    information is required to be included in a permit application:
user without a permit so long as such use is for less than thirty   (1046) (A) An explanation of the applicant's need for the tempo-
days and the site is returned to a natural condition. The Superin-    rary facility, including a description of the applicant's hunting and
tendent may establish conditions and standards governing the use    fishing activities relevant to his or her need for the facility;
or construction of these temporary structures and facilities which   (1047) (B) A diagram, sketch or photograph of the temporary
shall be published annually in accordance with ï¿½ 1.7 of this chap-    facility;
ter.
 (1036) (vii) Shared use. In any permit authorizing the construc-   (1048) (C) A map that shows the geographic location of the tem-
tion of a cabin or other structure necessary to reasonably accom-    porary facility; and
modate authorized subsistence uses, the Superintendent shall         (1049) (D) A description of both the past use (if any) and the
provide for shared use of the facility by the permittee and other    desired use of the temporary facility, including a schedule for its
local rural residents rather than for exclusive use by the permittee.  projected use and removal. All information may be provided
 (1037) (5) General public use cabins.  (i) The Superintendent    orally except the diagram sketch or photograph of the facility and
may designate a cabin or other structure located outside of desig-    the map.
nated wilderness areas and not otherwise under permit under this     (1050) (iii) Permit issuance. (A) In making a decision on a per-
section (or under permit for only a portion of the year) as a public    mit application, the Superintendent shall determine whether a tern-
use cabin. Such designated public use cabins are intended for short    porary facility is "directly and necessarily related to" the
term recreational use and occupancy only.                          applicant's legitimate hunting and fishing activities by examining
 (1038) (ii) The Superintendent may establish conditions and    the applicant's particular circumstances, including, but not limited
develop an allocation system in order to manage the use of desig-    to his or her reasonable need for a temporary facility and any rea-
nated public use cabins.                                           sonable alternatives available that are consistent with the appli-
 (1039) (iii) The Superintendent shall mark all public use cabins    cant's needs. The Superintendent shall also consider whether the
with a sign and shall maintain a map showing their locations.      proposed use would constitute an expansion of existing facilities
 (1040) (6) Cabins in wilderness areas. The use and occupancy of    or use and would be detrimental to the purposes for which the
a cabin or other structure located in a designated wilderness area    national preserve was established. If the Superintendent finds that
are subject to the other applicable provisions of this section, and    the proposed use would either constitute an expansion above exist-
the following conditions:                                          ing levels or be detrimental to the purposes of the preserve, he/she
 (1041) (i) A previously existing public use cabin located within    shall deny the permit. The Superintendent may authorize the
wilderness designated by ANILCA may be allowed to remain and    replacement or relocation within the national preserve of an exist-
may be maintained or replaced subject to such restrictions as the    ing temporary facility or structure.





66                                              2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (1051) (B) The Superintendent shall deny an application for a     (1069) (a) This section applies to all park areas m Alaska except
proposed use that would exceed a cellng or allocation established    Klondike Gold Rush National HI-stoncal Park, Sitka National His-
pursuant to the national preserve s General Management Plan       toncal Park, the former Mt Mckinley National Park, Glacier Bay
 (1052) (iv) Pernut terms The Superntendent shall allow for use    National Monument, and Katmai National Monument
and occupancy of a temporary facility only to the extent that such  (1070) (b) Renewable Resources  The gathering or collecting,
facility is directly and necessarily related to the perrmttee's hunt-    by hand and for personal use only, of the following renewable
ing and fishing activltles and shall provide that the temporary    resources is permitted
facility be used and maintamed m a manner consistent with the       (1071) (1) Natural plant food items, includcng fruits, berries and
protection of the values and purpose of the park area m which it is    mushrooms, but not including threatened or endangered species,
located The Supenntendent may also estabhshpermnt terms that        (1072) (2) Driftwood and umnhablted sea-shells,
 (1053) (A) Limit use to a specified period, not to exceed the     (1073) (3) Such plant materials and mminerals as are essential to
applicable hunting or fishing season and such additional bnef pen-    the conduct of traditional ceremomes by Native Americans, and
ods necessary to maintain the facility before and after the season,  (1074) (4) Dead or downed wood for use In fires within park
 (1054) (B) Require the pernuttee to remove a temporary facility    areas
and all associated personal property from the park area upon ter-   (1075) (c) Rocks and Minerals  Surface collection, by hand
mmination of the permittee s hunting and fishing activltles and    (mcluding hand-held gold pans) and for personal recreational use
related use of the facilhty or on a specific date,                only, of rocks and rmnerals is permitted Provided, however, That
 (1055) (C) Require reasonable seasonal relocation of a tempo-    (1) collection of silver, platinum, gemstones and fossils is prohlb-
rary facility m order to protect the values and purposes for which    ited, and (2) collection methods which may result in disturbance
the park area was estabhshed                                      of the ground surface, such as the use of shovels, pickaxes, sluice
 (1056) (D) Require that a temporary facilihty be used on a shared    boxes, and dredges, are prohibited
basis and not exclusively by the perrmttee, and                     (1076) (d) Closure and Notice  Under conditions where it is
 (1057) (E) Limit the overall term of a permit to a reasonable    found that slgmficant adverse impact on park resources, wlldhfe
period of time, not to exceed one year                            populations, subsistence uses, or visitor enjoyment of resources
 (1058) (8) New cabins and other structures otherwise authorized    will result, the Supenntendent shall prohibit the gathering or oth-
by law The Superintendent may Issue a perminut for the construc-    erwise restrict the collectig of these items  Portons of a park
                                                                    area m which closures or restnctions apply shall be (1) pubhshed
titon, temporary use, occupancy, and maintenance of a cabin or
other structure whch is authorized by law but not governed by any    in at least one newspaper of general circulation m the State and
                                                                    designated on a map which shall be available for pubhc inspection
other paragraph m this section
 (1059) ï¿½1318 Camping and pmicicking                              in the office of the Superintendent or (2) designated by the post-
 (1060) (a) Camping  Camping is permitted min the park areas    ing of appropriate signs, or (3) both
                                                                     (1077) (e) Subsistence  Nothmg in this section shall apply to
except where such use is prohibited or otherwise restricted by the    local rural residents authzed to take renewable resources
Superintendent in accordance with the provisions of ï¿½ 13 30, or     (1078)  13 21 Talng of fish and wlldhfe
asset forth for specific park areas in Subpart C of this part
 (1061) (b) Picnicking  Picnlcking is permitted m park areas       (1079) (a) [Reserved]
                      where such activity is prohibited by the posting of appro-  (1080) (b) Fishing  Fishing is permitted in all park areas in
except signe such activity Is prohibited by the posting of appro-    accordance with apphcable State and Federal law, and such laws
pnrate signs                                                      are hereby adopted and made a part of these regulations to the
 (1062) ï¿½13 19 Weapons, traps and nets                            extent they are not inconsistent with ï¿½2 3 of this chapter
 (1063) (a) This section applies to all park areas m Alaska except  (1081) (c) Commercal fishing  The exercise of valid commer-
Klondike Gold Rush National Historical Park Sitka National His-    cial fishing nghts or privlleges obtained por to December 2,
toncal Park and the former Mt McKmley National Park, Glacier    1980, pursuant to exsting law in Cape Krusenstern National Mon-
Bay National Monument and Katmai National Monument                ument, the Malaspina Glacier Forelands area of the Wrangell-St
 (1064) (b) Firearms may be carried within park areas in accor-    Elias National Preserve, and the Dry Bay area of Glacier Bay
dance with applicable Federal and State laws except where such    National Preserve, mcludmg the use of these park areas for exlst-
carrying is prohlublted or otherwise restricted pursuant to ï¿½13 30  ing campsites, cabins and other structures, motorized vehicles, and
 (1065) (c) Traps bows and other Implements authorized by State    aircraft landings on existing airstrips may continue provided that
and Federal law for the taking of fish and willdhfe may be carried    all such use is directly incident to the exercise of those rights or
within National Preserves only dunng those times when the taking    pnvlleges
of fish and wldlife is authorized by applicable laws or regulations  (1082) (1) Restrictions  The Superintendent may restrict or
 (1066) (d) In addition to the authorities provided m paragraphs    revoke the exercise of a valid commercial fishung right or prinvlege
(b) and (c) of this section weapons (other than firearms) traps and    based upon specific findings, following public notice and an
nets may be possessed wlthm park areas provided such weapons,    opportunity for response that contmuation of such use of a park
traps or nets are within or upon a device or animal used for trans-    area constitutes a direct threat to or sigmficant Impairment of the
portation and are unloaded and cased or otherwise packed m such    values and purposes for which the park area was established
a manner as to prevent their ready use while m a park area          (1083) (2) Expansion of uses  (i) A person holdming a valid com-
 (1067) (e) Notwithstanding the provisions of this section, local    merclal fishing right or privilege may expand his or her level of
rural residents who are authorized to engage in subsistence uses,    use of a park area beyond the level of such use m 1979 only pursu-
includmg the taking of wildlife pursuant to ï¿½13 48, may use, pos-    ant to the terms of a permit Issued by the Supenntendent
sess, or carry traps nets and other weapons in accordance with      (1084) (11) The Supenntendent may deny a permit or otherwise
applicable State and Federal laws                                 restrict the expanded use of a park area directly incident to the
 (1068) ï¿½13 20 Preservation of natural features                   exercise of such rights or privileges, If the Supenntendent deter-





                                                 2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      67


mines, after conducting a public hearing in the affected locality,  (1099) (b) Criteria In determining whether to close an area or
that the expanded use constitutes either                           restrict an activlty on an emergency basis the Superintendent shall
 (loms) (A) A significant expansion of the use of a park area    be guided by factors such as public health and safety resource
beyond the level of such use during 1979 (taking into consider-    protection, protection of cultural or scientific values, subsistence
ation the relative levels of use in the general vlcinimty, as well as the    uses, endangered or threatened species conservation, and other
applicant s levels of use) or                                      management considerations necessary to ensure that the activlty or
 (1086) (B) A direct threat to, or significant impairment of, the    area is being managed in a manner compatible with the purposes
values and purposes for which the park area was estabhshed         for which the park area was established
 (10s7) (d) Hunting and Trapping (1) Hunting and trapping are       (iioo) (c) Emergency closures (1) Emergency closures or
allowed m national preserves inaccordance with applicable Fed-    restrictions relating to the use of aircraft, snowmachines, motor-
eral and non-conflcting State law and regulations                  boats, or nonmotorized surface transportation shall be made after
 (1088) (2) Violating a provision of either Federal or non-conflict-    notice and hearng, (2) emergency closures or restrictions relating
mg State law or regulation is prohibited                           to the taking of fish and wlldhfe shall be accompanied by notice
 (1089) (3) Engaging in trapping actlvlties as the employee of    and hearing, (3) other emergency closures shall become effective
another person is prohibited                                       upon notice as prescribed in ï¿½ 13 30(f) and (4) no emergency clo
 (1090) (4) It shall be unlawful for a person having been airborne    sure or restricton shall extend for a penod exceeding 30 days, nor
to use a firearm or any other weapon to take or assist in taking any    may It be extended
species of bear caribou Sitka black-tailed deer, elk coyote, arctic  (1lo0) (d) Temporary closures orrestnchons (1) Temporary clo-
and red fox mountamn goat, moose, Dali sheep, lynx, bison musk    sures or restrictions relating to the use of aircraft snowmachines,
ox wolf and wolverine until after 3 a m  on the day following the    motorboats or nonmotonzed surface transportation or to the tak-
day in which the flying occurred This prohibition does not apply    mg of fish and wildlife shall not be effective prior to notice and
to flights on regularly scheduled commercial airlines between reg-    heanng m the vicinity of the area(s) directly affected by such clo-
ularly maintained pubhc airports                                   sures or restrictions, and other locations as appropriate, (2) other
 (io09) (e) Closures and restrictions The Superintendent may    temporary closures shall be effective upon notice as prescribed in
prohibit or restrict the non-subsistence taking of fish or wildlife in    ï¿½13 30(f) (3) temporary closures or restnctions shall not extend
accordance with the provisions of ï¿½ 13 30 of this chapter Except i  for a penod exceeding 12 months and may not be extended
emergency conditions such restrictions shall take effect only after  (11o2) (e) Permanent closures or restrictions Permanent do
the Superintendent has consulted with the appropriate State    sures or restrictions shall be pubhshed as rulemaking m the FED-
agency having responsibility over fishing, hunting or trapping and    ERAL REGISTER with a minimum pubhc comment perod of 60
representatives of affected users                                  days and shall be accompanied by public hearings in the area
 (1092) ï¿½13 22 Unattended or abandoned property                    affected and other locations as appropriate
 (1093) (a) This section applies to all park areas m Alaska except  (1i03) (f) Notice Emergency temporary and permanent closures
Klondike Gold Rush National Historical Park and Sitka National    or restrictons shall be (1) pubhshed    at least one newspaper of
Historical Park, or as further restricted for specific park areas in    general clrculahon m the State and m at least one local newspaper
Subpart C of this part                                             if available, posted at community post offices within the vicinity
 (1094) (b) Leaving any snowmachine, vessel off-road vehicle or    affected made available for broadcast on local radio stations in a
other personal property unattended for longer than 12 months    manner reasonably calculated to inform residents in the affected
without prior perminssion of the Supenntendent is prohibited and    vicinity, and designated on a map which shall be available for pub-
any property so left may be Impounded by the Superintendent        lic inspection at the office of the Supenntendent and other places
 (1095) (c) The Superintendent may (1) designate areas where    convenient to the public or (2) designated by the posting of
personal property may not be left unattended for any time period   appropriate signs or (3) both
(2) establish lrmts on the amount and type of personal property      (104) (g) Openings In determining whether to open an area to
that may be left unattended, (3) prescribe the manner in which per-    public use or activity otherwise prohibited, the Superintendent
sonal property may be left unattended, or (4) established hmits on    shall provide notice m the FEDERAL REGISTER and shall upon
the length of time personal property may be left unattended  Such    request hold a heang m the affected vicinity and other locations
designations and restrictons shall be (1) pubhshed in at least one    as appropriate prior to making a final determination
newspaper of general circulation within the State posted at com      (1105) (h) Except as otherwise specifically permitted under the
mumty post offices within the vicinity affected, made available for    provisions of this part entry into closed areas or failure to abide
broadcast on local radio stations m a manner reasonably calculated    by restrictions established under this section is prohibited
to inform residents in the affected community, and designated on a   (1106) ï¿½13 31 Permits
map which shall be available for public inspection at the office of  (1107) (a) Apphcation (1) Application for a permit required by
the Superintendent, or (i) designated by the posting of appropriate    any section of this part shall be submitted to the Superintendent
signs or (ui) both                                                 having jurisdiction over the affected park area or in the absence of
  (1096) (d) In the event unattended property interferes with the    the Superintendent, the Regional Director If the applicant is
safe and orderly management of a park area or is causing damage    unable or does not wish to submit the apphcatlon m written form,
to the resources of the area, it may be impounded by the Supenn-    the Superinntendent shall provide the applicant an opportunity to
tendent at any tunime                                              present the application orally and shall keep a record of such oral
  (1097) ï¿½13 30 Closure procedures                                  apphcation
  (1098) (a) Authority The Superintendent may close an area or       (1108) (2) The Supermintendent shall grant or deny the application
restrict an activity on an emergency temporary or permanent    m wnting within 45 days If this deadline cannot be met for good
basis                                                              cause, the Superintendent shall so notify the applicant in wnting






68                                              2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


If the permit application is denied, the Superintendent shall spec-  (1124) Operate or Operating includes the actual or constructive
ify in writing the reasons for the denial.                        possession of a vessel or motor vessel.
 (1109) (b) Denial and appeal procedures. (1) An applicant whose   (1125) Private vessel means any motor vessel used for recreation
application for a permit, required pursuant to this part, has been    that is not engaged in commercial transport of passengers, com-
denied by the Superintendent has the right to have the application    mercial fishing or official government business.
reconsidered by the Regional Director by contacting him/her         (1126) Pursue means to alter the course or speed of a vessel or a
within 180 days of the issuance of the denial. For purposes of    seaplane in a manner that results in retaining a vessel, or a sea-
reconsideration, the permit applicant shall present the following    plane operating on the water, at a distance less than one-half nauti-
information:                                                      cal mile from a whale.
 (1110) (i) Any statement or documentation, in addition to that    (1127) Speed through the water means the speed that a vessel
included in the initial application, which demonstrates that the    moves through the water (which itself may be moving); as distin-
applicant satisfies the criteria set forth in the section under which    guished from "speed over the ground."
the permit application is made.                                     (1128) Tour vessel means any motor vessel under 100 tons gross
 (1111) (ii) The basis for the permit applicant's disagreement with    (U.S. System) or 2,000 tons gross (International Convention Sys-
the Superintendent's findings and conclusions; and                tem) that is rated to carry more than 49 passengers, or any smaller
 (1112) (iii) Whether or not the permit applicant requests an infor-    vessel that conducts tours or provides transportation at regularly
mal hearing before the Regional Director.                         scheduled route.
 (1113) (2) The Regional Director shall provide a hearing if       (1129) Transit means to operate a motor vessel under power and
requested by thr; applicant. After consideration of the written    continuously so as to accomplishone-half nautical mile of littoral
materials and oral hearing, if any, and within a reasonable period    (i.e., along the shore) travel.
of time, the Regional Director shall affirm, reverse, or modify the  (1130) Vessel includes every type or description of craft used as a
denial of the Superintendent and shall set forth in writing the basis    means of transportation on the water, including a buoyant device
for the decision. A copy of the decision shall be forwarded    permitting or capable of free flotation and a seaplane while operat-
promptly to the applicant and shall constitute final agency action.  ing on the water.
                                                                     (1131) Vessel use-day means any continuous period of time that a
Subpart C-Special Regulations-Specific Park Areas in Alaska       motor vessel is in Glacier Baybetween the hours of 12 midnight
 (1114) ï¿½13.65 Glacier Bay National Park and Preserve.            on one day to 12 midnight the next day.
 (1 115) (a) (Reserved)                                            (1132) Whale means any humpback whale (Megaptera novaean-
 (1116) (b) Resource protection and vessel management-            gliae).
 (1117) (1) Definitions. As used in this section:                  (1133) Whale waters means any portion of Glacier Bay, desig-
 (1118) Charter vessel means any motor vessel under 100 tons    nated by the superintendent, having ahigh probability of whale
gross (U.S. System) or 2,000 tons gross (International Convention    occupancy, based upon recent sighting and/or past patterns of
System) that is rated to carry up to 49 passengers, and is available    occurrence.
for hire on an unscheduled basis; except a charter vessel used to   (1134) (2) Permits. The superintendent will issue permits for pri-
provide a scheduled camper or kayak drop off service.             vate motor vessels in accordance with this part and for cruise
 (1119) Commercialfishing vessels means any motor vessel con-    ships, tour vessels, and charter vessels in accordance with
ducting fishing activities under the appropriate commercial fishing    National Park Service concessions authorizations and this part.
licenses as required and defined by the State of Alaska.            (1135) (i) Private vessel permits and conditions. Each private
 (1120) Cruise ship means any motor vessel at or over 100 tons    motor vessel must have a permit to enter Glacier Bay June 1
gross (U.S. System) or 2,000 tons gross (International Convention    through August 31.
System) carrying passengers for hire.                              (1136) (A) The superintendent may establish conditions regulat-
 (1121) Entry means each time a motor vessel passes the mouth of    ing how permits can be obtained, whom a vessel operator must
Glacier Bay into the bay; each time a private vessel activates or    contact when entering or leaving glacier Bay, designated anchor-
extends a permit; each time a motor vessel based at or launched    ages, the maximum length of stay in Glacier Bay, and other appro-
from Bartlett Cove leaves the dock area on the way into Glacier    priate conditions.
Bay, except a private vessel based at Bartlett Cove that is gaining  (1137) (B) June 1 through August 31, upon entering Glacier Bay
access or egress to or from outside Glacier Bay; the first time a    through the mouth, the operator or a private motor vessel must
local private vessel uses a day of the seven use-day permit; or each    report directly to the Bartlett Cove Ranger Station for orientation.
time a motor vessel is launched from another vessel written Gla-    (1138) (1) Failing to report as required is prohibited.
cier Bay, except a motor vessel singularly launched from apermit-   (1139) (2) The superintendent may waive this requirement
ted motor vessel and operated only while the permitted vessel    before or upon entry.
remains at anchor, or a motor vessel launched and operated from a   (1140) (ii) Commercial vessel permits and conditions. Each
permitted motor vessel while that vessel is not underway and in    commercially operated motor vessel must have the required per-
accordance with a concession agreement.                           mit(s) to enter Glacier Bay.
  (1122) Glacier Bay means all marine waters contiguous with Gla-   (1141) (A) To obtain or renew an entry permit, a cruise ship
cier Bay, lying north of animaginary line between Point Gustavus    company must submit and, after approval, implement a pollution
and Point Carolus.                                                minimization plan. The plan must ensure, to the fullest extent pos-
  (1123) Motor vessel means any vessel, other than a seaplane, pro-    sible, that any ship permitted to travel within Glacier Bay will
pelled or capable of being propelled by machinery (including    apply the industry's best approaches toward vessel oil-spill
steam), whether or not such machinery is the principal source of    response planning and prevention and minimization of air and
power, except a skiff or tender under tow or carried on board    underwater noise pollution while operating in Glacier Bay. The
another vessel.                                                   superintendent will approve or disapprove the plan.





                                                 2  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      69


 (1142) (B) Each cruise ship company must asses the impacts of    Species Act The supenntendent will request the NMFS assess and
its activities on Glacier Bay resources pursuant to the NPS        analyze and effects of vessel traffic authonzed by this section, on
research inventory and momtonng plan as specified in the appli-    the endangered and threatened species that occur in or use Glacier
cable concession perminut                                          Bay National Park and Preserve
 (1143) (C) The supenntendent at any tihme may impose operating     (1158) (1) Based on this biological opinion, apphcable authonty,
conditions to prevent or mtligate air pollution, water pollution,    and any other relevant information, the director shall reduce the
underwater noise pollution or other effects of cruise ship opera-    vessel entry and use levels for any or all categories of vessels in
tion                                                               this section effective for the 1998 season or any year thereafter if
 ( 1144) (D) The superintendent will immediately suspend the    required to assure protection of the values and purposes of Glacier
entry permit(s) of any cruise ship that fails to submit, implement    Bay National Park and Preserve
or comply with a pollution mlmimzation plan or additional operat-   (1159) (2) The director will publish a document in the Federal
ing condition                                                      Register on any revision in the number of seasonal entries and use
 (1145) (E) A commercial vessel, except a commercial fishing    days under this paragraph (b)(2)(v), with an opportumty for public
vessel, is prohibited from entenng Glacier Bay unless the operator    comment
notifies the Bartlett Cove Ranger Station of the vessel's entrylm-  (1160) (B) October 1, 1997 the superintendent will determine,
mediately upon entry or within the 48 hours before entry           with the director s approval, whether studies have been completed
 (1146) (F) Off-boat activity from a commercial vessel iS prohlb-    and sufficient scientific and other information has been developed
ited, unless the supenntendent allows it under conditions that the    to support an increase In cruise ship entries for the 1998 summer
superintendent establshes                                          season (June 1 through August 31) while assunng protection of
 (1147) (111) Exceptions from entry permit requirement A permit    the values and purposes of Glacier Bay National Park and Pre-
is required to enter Glacier Bay when                              serve Any increase will be subject to the maximum daily lirmt of
 (1148) (A) A motor vessel is engaged in official business of the    two vessel use-days If the superintendent recommends an
state or federal government                                        increase, the superintendent will publish a document of the
 (1149) (B) A pnvate motor vessel based at Bartlett Cove IS tran-    increase in the Federal Register with an opportunity for public
siting between Bartlett Cove and waters outside Glacier Bay, or is    comments
operated in Bartlett Cove in waters bounded by the public and        (1161) (C) By October 1, of each year (Beginning in 1998) the
admmmstratlve docks                                                superintendent will determine with the director's approval, the
 (1150o) (C) A motor vessel is singularly launched from a permit-    number of cruise ship entries for the following summer season
ted motor vessel and operated only while the permitted motor ves-    (June 1 through August 31) This determination will be based
sel remains at anchor, or a motor vessel is launched and operated    upon available scientific and other information and applicable
in accordance with a concession agreement from a permitted    authontles The number will be subject to the maximum daily
motor vessel while that vessel is not underway                     limit of two vessel use days The superintendent will publish a
 (1151) (D) A commercial fishing vessel otherwise permitted    document of any revision in seasonal entries in the Federal Regis-
under all applicable authonrities Isactually engaged in commercial    ter with an opportumty for public comment
fishing within Glacier Bay                                           (1162) (D) Nothing in this paragraph will be construed to prevent
 (1 i52) (E) The supenntendent grants a vessel safe harbor at Bar-    the supenntendent from taking any action at any time to assure
tlett Cove                                                         protection of the values and purposes of Glacier Bay National
 (1153) (iv) Prohlbltions (A) Operating a motor vessel m Glacier    Park and Preserve
Bay without a required permit is prohiblted                          (1163) (3) Operating restrictions (i) Operating a vessel within
 (1i14) (B) Violating a term or condition of a pernut or an operat-    one-quarter nautical mile of a whale is prohibited, except for a
ing condition or restriction issued or imposed pursuant to this    commercial fishing vessel actually trolling or setting or pulling
chapter is prohibited                                              long lines or crab pots as otherwise authorized by the supennten-
 (1155) (C) The superintendent may immediately suspend or    dent
revoke a permit or deny a future permit request as result of a viola-  (1164) (11) The operator of a vessel accidentally positioned
tion of a provision of this chapter                                within one-quarter nautical mile of a whale shall immediately
 (1156) (v) Restrictions on vessel entry The superintendent will    slow the vessel to ten knots or less without shifting into reverse
vessel entry in accordance with the following table                unless impact is likely The operator shall then direct or maintaun
                                                                   the vessel on as steady a course as possible away from the whale
                Allowable               Total        Perod         until at least one-quarter nautical mile of separation is estabhshed
Type of vessel    vessel     entries vessred by                   Failure to take such action is prohibited
                 use days                days
                 per day    allowed    allowed      hnutation       (1165) (111) Pursuing or attempting to pursue a whale is prohib-
                                                                   ited
Crniie Ship             2        (1)         (1)  Year round        (1166) (iv) Whale water restrictions (A) May 15 through August
Tour vessel             3                         Year round       31, the following Glacier Bay waters are designated as whale
Charter vessel          6       312         552  June 1 Aug 31    waters
Private vessel         25        468       1 971  June 1 Aug 31      (1167) (1) Lower bay waters, defined as waters north of an imag-
                                                                   inary line drawn from Point Carolus to Point Gustavus and south
'See paragraphs (b)(2)(v) (A) through (C) of this section          of an imaginary hne drawn from the northernmost point of Lars
                                                                   Island across the northernmost point of Strawberry Island to the
 (1157) (A) By October 1, 1996, the superintendent will remittate    point where it intersects the line that defines the Beardslee Island
consultation with the National Manne Fishenes Service (NMFS)       group, as descnbed in paragraph (b)(3)(vin)(A)(4) of this section,
and request a biological opinion under section 7 of the Endangered    and following that line south and west to the Bartlett Cove shore






 70                                              2. :NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


  (1168) (2) [Reserved]                                             kie Rock; or lone Island; or the northern three-fourths of Leland
  (1169) (B) June 1 through August 31, the following Glacier Bay    Island (north of 58ï¿½39.1'N. latitude; or any of the four small
 waters are designated as whale waters.                             unnamed islands located approximately one nautical mile north
  (1170) (1) Whidbey Passage waters, defined as waters north of    (one island), and 1.5 nautical miles east (three islands) of the east-
 an imaginary line drawn from the northernmost point of Lars    ernmost point of Russell Island; or Graves Rocks (on the outer
 Island to the northernmost point of Strawberry Island; west of    coast); or Cormorant Rock, or any adjacent rock, including all of
 imaginary lines drawn from the northernmost point of Strawberry    the near-shore rocks located along the outer coast, for a distance of
 Island to the southernmost point of Willoughby Island, the north-    11/2 nautical miles, southeast form the mouth of Lituya Bay; or the
ernmost point of Willoughby Island (proper) to the southernmost    surf line along the outer coast, for a distance of 1 /2 nautical miles
point of Francis Island, the northernmost point of Francis Island to    northwest of the mouth of the glacial river at Cape Fairweather.
the southernmost point of Drake Island; and south of the northern-   (1183) (B) Operating a vessel or otherwise approaching within
most point of Drake Island to the northernmost point of the Mar-   100 yards of a Steller (northern) sea lion (Eumetopias jubatus)
ble Mountain peninsula.                                            hauled-out on land or a rock or a nestling seabird colony: Pro-
  (1171) (2) East Arm Entrance waters, defined as waters north of    vided, however, that vessels may approach within 50 yards of that
an imaginary line drawn from the southernmost point of Sebree    part of South Marble Island lying south of 58ï¿½38.6'N. latitude
Island to the northernmost point of Sturgess Island, and from there    (approximately the southern one-half of South Marble Island) to
to the westernmost point of the unnamed island south of Puffin    view seabirds.
Island (that comprises the south shore of North Sandy Cove); and     (1184) (C) May 1 through August 31, operating a vessel, or oth-
south of an imaginary line drawn from Caroline Point across the    erwise approaching within V4 nautical mile of, Spider Island or any
northernmost point of Garforth Island to shore.                    of the four small islets lying immediately west of Spider Island.
  (1172) (3) Russell Island Passage waters, defined as waters        (1185) (D) May 1 through August 31, operating a cruise ship on
enclosed by imaginary lines drawn from: the easternmost point of    Johns Hopkins Inlet waters south of 58ï¿½54.2'N. latitude (an imagi-
Russell Island due east to shore, and from the westernmost point    nary line running approximately due west from Jaw Point).
of Russell Island due north to shore.                                (1186) (E) May 1 through June 30, operating a vessel or a sea-
  (1173) (C) The superintendent may designate temporary whale    plane on Johns Hopkins Inlet waters south of 58ï¿½54.2'N. latitude
waters and impose motor vessel speed restriction in whale waters.    (an imaginary line running approximately due west from Jaw
Maps of temporary whale waters and notice of vessel speed    Point).
restrictions imposed pursuant to this paragraph (b)(3)(iv)(C) shall  (1187) (F) July 1 through August 31, operating a vessel or sea-
be made available to the public at park offices at Bartlett Cove and    plane on Johns Hopkins Inlet waters south of 58"54.2'N. latitude
Juneau, Alaska, and shall be submitted to the U.S. Coast Guard for    (an imaginary line running approximately due west from Jaw
publication as a "Notice to Mariners."                             Point), within 1/4 nautical mile of a seal hauled out on ice; except
  (1174) (D) Violation of a whale water restriction is prohibited.    when safe navigation requires, and them with due care to maintain
The following restrictions apply in designated whale waters:        the 1/4 nautical mile distance from concentrations of seals.
  (1175) (1) Except on vessels actually fishing as otherwise autho-  (1188) (G) Restrictions imposed in this paragraph (b)(3)(vi) are
rized the superintendent or vessels operating solely under sail,    minimum distances. Park visitors are advised that protection of
while in transit, operators of motor vessels over 18 feet in length    park wildlife may require that visitors maintain greater distances
will in all cases where the width of the water permits, maintain a    from wildlife. See, 36 CFR 2.2 (Wildlife protection).
distance of at least one nautical mile from shore, and, in narrower  (1189) (vii) Closed waters, motor vessels and seaplanes. (A)
areas will navigate in mid-channel: Provided, however, that unless    May 1 through September 15, operating a motor vessel or a sea-
other restrictions apply, operators may perpendicularly approach    plane on the following water is prohibited:
or land on shore (i.e., by the most direct line to shore) through des-  (1190) (1) Adams Inlet, east of 135ï¿½59.2'W. longitude (an imagi-
ignated whale waters.                                              nary line running approximately due north and south through the
 (1176) (2) Motor vessel speed limits established by the superin-    charted (5) obstruction located approximately 21/4 nautical miles
tendent pursuant to paragraph (b)(3)(iv)(C) of this section.       east of Pt. George).
 (1177) (v) Speed restrictions. (A) May 15 through August 31, in    (1191) (2) Rendu Inlet, north of the wilderness boundary of the
the waters of the lower bay as defined in paragraph    mouth of the inlet.
(b)(3)(iv)(A)(l) of this section, the following are prohibited:      (1192) (3) Hugh Miller complex, including Scidmore Bay and
 (1178) (1) Operating a motor vessel at more than 20 knots speed    Charpentier Inlet, west of the wilderness boundary at the mouth of
through the water; or                                              the Hugh Miller Inlet.
 (1179) (2) Operating a motor vessel at more than 10 knots speed    (1193) (4) Waters within the Beardslee Island group (except the
through the water, when the superintendent has designated a max-    Beardslee Entrance), that is defined by an imaginary line running
imum speed of 10 knots (due to the presence of whales).            due west from shore to the easternmost point of Lester Island, then
 (1180) (B) July 1 through August 31, operating a motor vessel on    along the south shore of Lester Island to its western end, then to
Johns Hopkins Inlet south of 58ï¿½54.2'N. latitude (an imaginary    the southernmost point of Young Island, then north along the west
line running approximately due west from Jaw Point) at more than    shore and east along the north shore of Young Island to its north-
10 knots speed through the water is prohibited.                    ernmost point, them at a bearing of 15ï¿½ true to imaginary point
 (1181) (vi) Closed waters, islands and other areas. The follow-    located one nautical mile due east of the easternmost point of
ing are prohibited:                                                Strawberry Island, then at a bearing of 345ï¿½ true to the northern-
 (1182) (A) Operating a vessel or otherwise approaching within    most of Flapjack island, then at a bearing of 810 true to the north-
100 yards of South Marble Island; or Flapjack Island; or any of the    ernmost point of the unnamed island immediately to the east of
three small unnamed islets approximately one nautical mile south-    Flapjack Island, then southeasterly to the northernmost point of
east of Flapjack Island; or Eider Island; or Boulder Island; or Gei-    the next unnamed island, then southeasterly along the (Beartrack







                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                     71


Cove) shore of that island to its easternmost point, then due east to  (1201) (x) Closed waters and islands within Glacier Bay as
shore.                                                            described in paragraphs (b)(3)(iv) through (vii) of this section are
 (1194) (B) June 1 through July 15, operating a motor vessel or a    described as depicted on NOAA Chart #17318 GLACIER BAY
seaplane on the waters of Muir Inlet north of 59ï¿½02.7'N. latitude    (4th Ed., Mar. 6/93) available to the public at park offices at Bar-
(an imaginary line running approximately due west from the point    tlett Cove and Juneau, Alaska.
of land on the east shore approximately 1 nautical mile north of    (1202) (xi) Paragraphs (b)(3) (i) through (iii) of this section do
the McBride Glacier) is prohibited.                               not apply to a vessel being used in connection with federally per-
 (1195) (C) July 16 through August 31, operating a motor vessel    mitted whale research or monitoring: other closures and restric-
or a seaplane on the waters of Wachusett Inlet west of 136ï¿½12.0'W.    tions in this paragraph (b)(3) do not apply to authorized persons
longitude (an imaginary line running approximately due north    conducting emergency or law enforcement operations, research or
from the point of land on the south shore of Wachusett Inlet    resource management, park administration/supply, or other neces-
approximately 21/4 nautical miles west of Rowlee Point) is prohib-    sary patrols.
ited.                                                              (1203) (4) Marine vessel visible emission standards. Visible
 (1196) (viii) Noise restrictions. June I through August 31, except    emissions from a marine vessel, excluding condensed water vapor,
on vessels in transit or as otherwise permitted by the superinten-    may not result in a reduction of visibility through the exhaust
dent, the use of generations or other non-propulsive motors    effluent of greater than 20 percent for a period or periods aggregat-
(except a windless) is prohibited from 10:00 p.m. until 6:00 a.m.    ing more than:
in Reid Inlet, Blue Mouse Cove and North Sandy Cove.                (1204) (i) Three minutes in any one hour while underway, at
  (1197) (ix) Other restrictions. Notwithstanding any other provi-    berth, or at anchor; or
sions of this part, due to the rapidly emerging and changing eco-  (1205) (ii) Six minutes in any one hour during initial startup of
systems of, and for the protection of wildlife in Glacier Bay    diesel-driven vessels; or
National Park and preserve, including but not limited to whales,   (1206) (iii) 12 minutes in one hour while anchoring, berthing,
seals, sea lions, nesting birds and molting waterfowl:            getting underway or maneuvering in Bartlett Cove.
  (1198) (A) Pursuant to ï¿½ï¿½1.5 and 1.6 of this chapter, the superin-  (1207) (5) Restricted Commercial Fishing Harvest. Fishing for,
tendent may establish, designate, implement and enforce restric-    or retaining if accidentally caught, herring (Clupea), capeline
tions and public use limits and terminate such restrictions and    (Mallotus), sandlance (Ammodytes), pollock (Theragra),
public use limits.                                                euphausids (Thalasia), or shrimp (Pandalus and Pandalopsis)
  (1199) (B) The public shall be notified of restrictions or public    within Glacier Bay is prohibited.
use limits imposed under this paragraph (b)(3)(ix) and the termi-   (1208) (6) Trawling within Glacier Bay is prohibited.
 nation or relaxation of such, in accordance with ï¿½1.7 of this chap-  (1209) (7) The information collection requirements contained in
 ter, and by submission to the U.S. Coast Guard for publication as a    paragraph (b)(3) of this section have been approved by the Office
 "Notice to Mariners," where appropriate.                          of Management and Budget under 44 U.S.C. 3507 and assigned
  ([200) (C) The superintendent shall make rules for the safe and    Clearance Number 1024-0016. The information is being collected
 equitable use of Bartlett Cove waters and for park docks. The pub-    to allow the Superintendent to issue permits to allow vessels into
 lic shall be notified of these rules by the posting of a sign or a copy    Glacier Bay during the whale season. This information will be
 of the rules at the dock. Failure to obey a sign or posted rule is pro-    used to grant administrative benefits.
 hibited.









                            3. ALASKA-DIXON ENTRANCE TO CAPE SPENCER

 (1)   Alaska, the largest of the United States, occupies the    pal light stations are equipped with fog signals. (See the Light List
northwestern part of the North American continent. The State is    for a complete description of navigational aids.)
bordered on the E and S by Canada and on the W  and N by the          (10)  Electronic navigation.-Radar, loran, omega, and the
Pacific and Arctic Oceans. The northernmost point of Alaska is    radio direction finder have given the navigator means of determin-
Point Barrow (71023'N., 156028'W.); the westernmost point is    ing his position in any weather. The mariner should, however,
Cape Wrangell (52055'N., 172"26'E.) on Attu Island; and the    appreciate the limitations and sources of error of the various sys-
southernmost point is Nitrof Point (51ï¿½13.0'N., 179ï¿½07.7'W.), on    tems. Radar should be properly calibrated and tuned. Radio direc-
Amatignak Island. Cape Muzon (54040'N., 132ï¿½41'W.) is on the    tion finders must be calibrated and the operator should become
historic parallel which is the coastal boundary between Alaska and    experienced in the use of the equipment. Radar, radio direction
Canada's British Columbia. Cape Muzon is on the N side of Dixon    finder, omega, and loran equipment are subject to malfunctions
Entrance and is 480 miles NW of Cape Flattery, Washington;           which may not be immediately apparent to the operator, and there
between the two United States capes is the coastal area of British    are conditions when loran or radio signals may be subject to error
Columbia.                                                           when the shipboard receiver is operating properly. Soundings
 (2)   Alaska was purchased from Russia in 1867 and became an    should always be taken in critical places, and the position should
organized territory of the United States in 1912. By Presidential    be checked by visual bearings when possible.
proclamation of January 3, 1959, Alaska officially became the         (11)  Navigation by radar is facilitated along the coast of
49th of the United States. The population of the State was 300,382    Alaska and in the inland passage by the generally high relief of the
in 1970. Principal resources are oil, timber, fish, and coal. Alaska    coastline. The rugged coast provides many points, headlands,
has a general ocean coastline of 5,770 nautical miles and a tidal    small islands and islets, and large offshore rocks which give accu-
shoreline of 29,462 miles. The State is so huge that its description    rate radar ranges and bearings. In general mountain peaks give the
requires two complete volumes of the National Ocean Service's    best ranges along the waterways of and the approaches to south-
nine-volume series of United States Coast Pilots.                   eastern Alaska; tangents of islands, points, and headlands are usu-
 (3)   Coast Pilot 8 deals with the panhandle section of Alaska    ally unreliable. Radar ranges are more accurate than radar
between the S boundary and Cape Spencer: general ocean coast-    bearings. When two or more suitable targets can be positively
line is only 250 nautical miles but tidal shoreline total 11,085    identified, a better fix is obtained by radar ranges alone than by
miles.                                                              radar ranges and bearings. When visibility permits, visual bearings
 (4)   Subject area, most of which is part of the Tongass           should always be taken. When positioning by a bearing and a
National Forest, consists of a 30-mile-wide strip of mainland bor-    radar range of a single object, the identification of the target must
dered by an 80-mile-wide compact chain of islands. About 50,000    be positive. Floating aids should be used with caution as targets,
people live here, but when compared to the population of the other    and only when no adequate fixed objects are available.
49 states, southeastern Alaska and the Tongass National Forest are    (12)  Radio direction finder equipment is subject to several
underpopulated areas. This population is found in 16 organized    kinds of errors. Bearings obtained at twilight or at night, or bear-
communities that have been withdrawn from national forest land.     ings which are almost parallel to the coast should be accepted with
 (5)   Most of the islands are mountainous, rough, broken, and    reservations, due to "night effect" and to the distortion of the radio
are covered with dense growths of spruce, hemlock, and cedar    waves if traveling over land. Other sources of error in the system
except on the higher summits. The mountains on the mainland are    may be avoided by the proper calibration of the shipboard
higher, less wooded, and usually snowcapped.                        receiver.
 (6)   In midsummer the snowline is at altitudes of 2,000 to         (13)  Loran coverage is good in the W  approach to southeastern
3,000 feet on the mainland mountains. Glaciers form in the narrow    Alaska. However, loran coverage for coastwise navigation is
gorges of the coastal ranges and sometimes attain sufficient size to    somewhat unreliable because of the overland propagation of the
reach the water. On the islands the land usually does not reach suf-    signals.
ficient altitude to retain snow throughout the year.                  (14)  COLREGS Demarcation Lines.-The International Reg-
 (7)   Seabottom features are similar to those of the adjacent    ulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS)
land. The steep inclines and narrow gorges of the land continue    apply on all the sounds, bays, harbors, and inlets of Alaska. (See
below sea level and form a system of narrow deepwater straits that    Part 80, chapter 2.)
extends from Puget Sound to Cape Spencer. The rugged ridges           (15)  Ports and Waterways Safety.-(See 160, chapter 2, for
and peaks of the land area, and the absence of plains or extensive    regulations governing vessel operations and requirements for noti-
plateaus, are matched by the numerous rocks and reefs, sur-    fication of arrivals, departures, hazardous conditions, and certain
rounded by deep water, and the general absence of extensive    dangerous cargoes to the Captain of the Port.)
shoals except at the mouths of glacier-fed streams or rivers.         (16)  Anchorages.-The seabottom features in southeastern
 (8)   Disposal Sites and Dumping Grounds.-These areas are    Alaska are similar to the adjacent land; steep inclines and narrow
rarely mentioned in the Coast Pilot, but are shown on the nautical    rocky gorges that are not suitable for anchorages. However, many
charts. (See Disposal Sites and Dumping Grounds, chapter 1, and    places in the inside passages are suitable for temporary anchorage
charts for limits.)                                                  during the summer months. In fall and winter the navigator must
 (9)   Aids to navigation.-Lights, daybeacons, and buoys mark    be much more cautious in selecting shelter and good holding
the coast and inside passages of southeastern Alaska. The princi-    ground.


72






                                        3. ALASKA-DIXON ENTRANCE TO CAPE SPENCER                                                 73


 (17)  A special anchorage for recreational and other small craft    by the results of current observations at several inside locations
has been established in Favorite Channel between Point Stephens    between Dixon Entrance and Cape Spencer.
and Point Louisa. (See Part 110, chapter 2, for limits and regula-    (26)  Tidal currents.-Velocities of 4 to 6 knots are not uncom-
tions.)                                                             mon in some of the inside passages of southeastern Alaska. (See
 (1is)  Dangers.-Southeaster Alaska has many unmarked rocky    the Tidal Current Tables for more detailed information.)
ledges around its islands and in the approaches to inlets, straits,   (27)  Tsunamis (Seismic sea waves).-Several large earth-
and sounds. Kelp grows on most rocky bottoms and will be seen    quakes have occurred in or near southeastern Alaska during the
on the surface of the water during the summer and autumn    past 75 years. However, any tsunamis generated have been dam-
months, and should always be considered a sign of danger. Dead,    aging only near the epicentral area. The 10-meter tsunami
detached kelp floats on the water in masses, while live kelp    observed in 1899 from the Yakutat Bay earthquake was restricted
attached to rocks streams away level with the surface. A heavy    to the area near the bay. Likewise, in 1958, although Lituya Bay
surge will occasionally tear kelp away from rocks, and a moderate    experienced high waves, only waves of less than half a meter were
current will ride it under water where it will not be seen. Live kelp    reported at other points in southeastern Alaska. In 1949, a magni-
is almost always an indication of depths less than 10 fathoms.      tude 8.1 earthquake near Queen Charlotte Islands generated a tsu-
 (19)  Floating logs, deadheads, or sinkers are present through-    nami of .3 meter at Ketchikan.
out the year in all the inland waters, channels, passes, and inlets in  (28)  The tsunami generated by the Prince William Sound earth-
southeastern Alaska and are dangerous to navigation both day and    quake of March 28, 1964, caused great destruction in southern
night. Floating logs are especially prevalent at the entrance to    Alaska but little damage in southeastern Alaska. The Alaskan
inlets after high tides and storms.                                 Regional Tsunami Warning System was established following this
 (20)  Pipelaying barges.-With the increased number of pipe-    earthquake and became operational in September 1967. Its pri-
line laying operations, operators of all types of vessels should be    mary function is to detect and locate major earthquakes in the
aware of the dangers of passing close aboard, close ahead, or close    Aleutian-Alaskan region and in the event that tsunami generation
astern of a jetbarge or pipelaying barge. Pipelaying barges and jet-    is possible or probable, provide timely and effective tsunami
barges usually move at 0.5 knot or less and have anchors which    information and warnings to those residents of Alaska and the
extend out about 3,500 to 5,000 feet in all directions and which    Aleutian Islands likely to be affected. The center of the Warning
may be marked by lighted anchor buoys. The exposed pipeline    System is at Palmer Observatory where telemetered data from a
behind the pipelaying barge and the area in the vicinity of anchors    number of Alaskan seismograph stations and tide stations are
are hazardous to navigation and should be avoided. The pipeline    received and analyzed. Subsidiary warning centers are in opera-
and anchor cables also represent a submerged hazard to naviga-    tion at Sitka and Adak Observatories. These observatories have a
tion. It is suggested, if safe navigation permits, for all types of ves-    limited warning responsibility in nearby areas. Warnings are also
sels to pass well ahead of the pipelaying barge or well astern of the    broadcast by the National Weather Service on NOAA Weather
jetbarge. The pipelaying barge, jetbarge, and attending vessels    Radio.
may be contacted on VHF-FM channel 16 for passage instruc-            (29)  Local magnetic disturbance is prevalent in southeastern
tions.                                                              Alaska, as shown by magnetic observations at a great many
 (21)  A restricted area is in Lutak Inlet, off Lynn Canal. (See    places. The magnetic variations shown on a chart are intended to
334.1310, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)                   represent average conditions. In regions where there is marked
 (22)  Echoes.-In foggy weather, the distance offshore fre-    local disturbance, great care should be exercised, as there may be
quently can be estimated by noting the elapsed time between a    places where the variation differs several degrees from the aver-
sounding of a ship's whistle or siren and the resultant echo from    age. Even if the local disturbance has been investigated in consid-
the sides of hills or mountains. The distance in nautical miles from    erable detail by shore observations, the navigator should not rely
hill or mountain is about one-tenth the number of seconds between    entirely on his compass in such areas. Such investigations can give
sound and echo. In narrow channels with steep shores a vessel can    only values at specified points but do not give the extent over
be kept in midchannel by navigating so that echoes from both    which each observed value applies.
shores return at the same instant.                                    (30)  Significant local disturbance has been observed at East
 (23)  Tides.-Throughout southeastern Alaska there are consid-    Island, Duke Island, Nakat Inlet, Grindall Island, Tolstoi Point,
erable inequalities in the heights of the two high waters and the    Ernest Sound, Shakan Strait, Keku Strait, Port Snettisham, Taku
two low waters of each day; these differences average about 2 feet    Harbor, Gastineau Channel, Lynn Canal, Peril Strait, Granite
between successive high waters and 3 feet between successive low    Cove, and in North Passage (Icy Strait). It has been investigated in
waters. Because of such differences, the mean of the lower low    considerable detail by shore observations in the vicinity of
waters (rather than the mean of all low waters) has been adopted    Gastineau Channel, Port Snettisham, and Chilkoot Inlet. In the
as the plane of reference for NOS nautical charts of the area.      vicinity of Chilkoot Inlet, the variation observed at several points
 (24)  The average daily (diurnal) range of tide is 10 to 17 feet in    ranges from about 20ï¿½ W  of normal to 15ï¿½ E of the normal varia-
this part of Alaska; the greater ranges occur in the inside passages.    tion.
(See the Tide Tables for more detailed information.)
 (25)  Currents.-The prevailing current that sets NW along the       (31)  Weather.-This section is a general description of the cli-
coasts of British Columbia and southeastern Alaska may reach    mate and related features of southeastern Alaska. Details of navi-
velocities (estimated) of 1.5 knots; it is greatest with strong S    gational weather hazards may be found in the appropriate local
winds but may be completely canceled by strong NW winds. The    chapters. Climatological tables are in the appendix.
offshore extent of this current is not known but it is believed to be  (32)  Marine Weather Services Charts published by the National
strongest between the 100-fathom curve and the coast; that it    Weather Service show radio stations that transmit marine weather
extends to the inside passages of southeastern Alaska is indicated    broadcasts and additional information of interest to mariners.





74                                      3  ALASKA DIXON ENTRANCE TO CAPE SPENCER


These charts are for sale by the National Ocean Service, Dlstnbu-    then drains down the slopes attaining great force m narrow inlets
tion Division (N/ACC3) (See appendix for address )                 They can come up suddenly and successive strong gusts of winds
 (33)  The following is a seasonal overview of clhmatic features    from varying directions may cause vessels at anchor to yaw badly
that are of concern to manners along with a description of some    and possibly drag anchor Sometimes willhwaws are accompanied
weather-related problems While weather along both outside    by blinding snowstorms Even when pllotmg an outside route
routes and inside passages is described, details of local navlga-    close to the coast williwaws may be encountered near the mouths
tlonal weather hazards may be found m the appropriate chapters     of inlets
Chmatologlcal tables for the Important ports follow the appendix     (39)  The seemingly endless procession of wmter storms is
Temperatures are in degrees Fahrenheit                             responsible for the dreary, gray skies and frequent rain and snow
 (34)  Piloting this coast m wmter is made perilous by the many,    Preclpltaton can be steady or showery Showers vary in intensity
often intense, extratropical low pressure systems that find their    and are concentrated along cold or occluded fronts, m spiral bands
way to the Gulf of Alaska These storms, ongmatmg over central    E and NE of the storm's center, and m cumulus clouds wlthin the
and W Pacific waters, converge m the Gulf which acts as a catch    cold air SW of the center Steady preclpltation usually covers an
basin since it is rimmed by high coastal mountain ranges They are    extensive area NE and N of the center When storms approach
accompanied by fronts, strong and shifting winds, frequent preclp-    southeasterlies usually mean ra  while E and NE winds often
itatlon, and extensive cloudiness While occurring year round,    bring snow Preclpltaton occurs about 33 percent of the time in
they are usually most numerous and mtense from late fall through    winter about 20 to 30 percent of this falls as snow Overcast con-
midwinter They often amve on a NE heading at speeds of 15 to    dltions are present about 50 percent of the time The low pressure
25 knots, but many slow or stall as they become trapped m the    systems alternate with migratory high pressure systems which
Gulf Early winter storms are often younger and in a more vigor-    bring brief spells of clear weather Occasionally, a cold high pres-
ous stage of development than those later in the season Some stall    sure system will move m from the N or E and become entrenched,
and beat themselves out against the mountains while others inten-    enabling bght, clear skies to prevail for several days These lim-
slfy and control the weather from Dixon Entrance to Cape Spencer    Ited cold air outbreaks usually modify rapidly over the relatively
for several days Often the storms come m farmlies of four or five    warm waters The prevailmg W and SW atmospheric steenng cur-
that can domnate the weather pattern for 2 weeks or more           rents and the high coastal mounta  barriers prevent these conti-
 (35)  As a low approaches, winds back to the SE quadrant and    nental outbreaks from being a regular feature
strengthen Following the passage of the low's center, winds gen-
erally shift to the NW, although they may blow out of the SW for a   (40)  Preclpltatlon can restnct vlslblity to below 2 miles but
time Waves generated by these nearby storms are known as sea    except in a heavy rain or snowstorm, t does not fall below V mile
and usually follow the wind direction Swell, generated by distant    Sometimes precipitation will cool the air causing clouds to lower
storms, is mainly out of the W and NW In the statistics when both    and fog to form In general, visibilities of 5 miles or more are
are reported, the higher of the two is used Swell will be men-    encountered 80 to 85 percent of the tume Fog often forms when
tioned specifically when it is operationally significant           the air is much warmer than the water, not a common occurrence
 (36)  Along the sea routes N of Dixon Entrance gales (wind-    in wmter Warmest temperatures, both air and sea run about 50ï¿½ m
speeds of 34 knots or more) can be expected about 10 percent of    witer On occasion air temperatures drop ito the mdteens while
the time, most often from SE or S Windspeeds average 20 to 22    water temperatures range down to the mid 30's m open water
knots while wave heights of 12 feet or more are encountered about    (41)  The average monthly sea level pressure charts for spring
25 percent of the time In severe conditions, 40 foot seas have    resemble a battle for control of the Pacific basin between the
been reported Head or beam waves 12 feet or higher or following    advancing summer high and the retreating Aleutian Low The Low
seas of 20 feet or more may cause violent ship motions These    makes a stand m the Gulf of Alaska, through which migratory low
motions can be alleviated by a reduction in ships speed In these    pressure systems continue to roam with some regulanty While an
waters, speed reductions in winter are required about 5 to 10 per-    average of three to five lows per month pass close to the SE Alas-
cent of the time on most headings                                  kan coast, they are usually less intense than their winter counter-
 (37)  Along the inside routes, because of the rugged terrain,    parts This is subtly reflected in the rise in atmospheric pressure,
winds and waves may vary widely in drection and intensity The    but more dramatically observed at sea in fewer gales and calmer
shelterinng effect helps keep average windspeeds around 12 knots,    seas Maximum observed wave heights are now in the 20- to 25-
gales are rare Some narrow channels may cause a local increase    foot range High seas cause a reduction m ships' speed only about
in windspeed Descnptions of these effects may be found in the    1 percent of the time or less on most headings Changes that
local chapters Most of the mslde routes are somewhat exposed to    become noticeable in March accelerate dunng April and May In
southerhes and southeasterlies and these winds often average 13 to    open waters, gales are encountered about 5 percent of the time in
15 knots Seas are often calmer on the inside and observations    March, during April and May they occur less than 5 percent every-
indicate that wave heights of 5 feet or less are encountered up to    where Average windspeeds drop below 10 knots m most inner
50 percent of the time compared to 15 percent at sea Swell pene-    passages by May and even over open waters fall to 13 knots, com-
trates these straits only when its direction is in line with the    pared to 18 knots in March Although winds remain variable, they
entrance, and then it is rapidly dampened by refraction reflection,    are most likely to blow out of the SE and S The parade of lows is
and shoaling in the relatively shallow waters Swell usually has a    responsible for frequent precipitation (20 to 30 percent of the
long period and can be dangerous in the nearshore areas where    time) Snow becomes less likely as spnng progresses and by May
shoaling may cause an increase in wave height                      it is no longer a threat Fog becomes more of a problem by May
 (38)  Occasionally, downslope winds from the mountainous          (reported 10 percent of the time) Still, throughout the spnng, visi-
mtenor create problems along the inside routes Known as willi-    bllties of 5 miles or more can be expected 85 to 90 percent of the
waws' these are violent short-lived squalls with strong, gusty    time while vlsibilities of less than 2 miles occur about 5 percent
winds that result when cold air builds up in the mountains and    of the time






                                         3. ALASKA-DIXON ENTRANCE TO CAPE SPENCER                                                 75


  (42)  Increased daylight means rising air temperatures. By May,    required about 1 to 5 percent of the time; W  headings are most
subfreezing readings are unlikely in these waters. Mean air tern-    vulnerable. Along the inside passages, conditions are usually qui-
peratures gradually catch up to the more slowly climbing sea sur-    eter, although winds and waves from the S through W  can create
face temperatures during spring. By May, both average in the mid    rough conditions at entrances from the sea. Topography can create
40's with a range from the mid 30's to the mid 50's (sea water) and    locally hazardous wind and wave conditions.
mid 60's (air).                                                       (48)  Precipitation occurs 25 to 30 percent of the time. In Sep-
 (43)  The summer weather charts are usually dominated by the    tember, this falls as rain, except for a slight chance of snow in the
large, semi-permanent North Pacific high centered over the central    northernmost inland passages where the land has a marked influ-
E North Pacific Ocean. The waters of SE Alaska lie on the N edge    ence on temperatures. By November, about 10 to 20 percent of the
of that circulation. Just S of the area, winds blow mainly out of the    precipitation falls as snow. Snow falls most frequently in the
W  due to the clockwise circulation. Winds mainly from the SE       northeasternmost inland passages. Precipitation and fog, which is
through NW blow over this region because of the intrusion of    observed 5 to 10 percent of the time, restrict visibilities to below 2
migratory low pressure systems. These storm systems are least    miles about 10 percent of the time. Cloudy conditions blanket the
frequent, smallest, least.intense, and farthest N in summer but still    region nearly 50 percent of the time. This extensive cloud cover,
exert considerable influence on the weather. The counterclockwise   along with slowly cooling waters, helps keep the air temperatures
flow forces warm tropical air over heavier polar maritime air    in a confined range. In September, both air and sea temperatures
resulting in stratified high and middle clouds with occasional light    range from the mid 40's to mid 60's. By November, minimum air
rain or drizzle. About two or three low centers pass through the    temperatures drop to around 25ï¿½ compared to the low 40's for sea
area each month. Occasionally, a system will generate strong    water; both reach maximums in the mid 50's.
winds and rough seas, however, gales and waves of 12 feet or          (49)  Superstructure Icing.-Ice accretion is a complex process
more are encountered less than 5 percent of the time. Along the    that depends on sea conditions, atmospheric conditions, and the
inside passages, windspeeds of 10 knots or less and seas of 5 feet    ship's size and behavior. Icing can be caused by heavy sea spray,
or less are the rule. Even on the outside routes, maximum seas of    freezing rain, or fog. On large merchant vessels which pass
just 12 to 15 feet have been reported. Ships' speed is reduced by    quickly through icing conditions and which experience less wave
high seas less than 1 percent of the time on all headings.          wash in rough seas because of their high freeboard, it can mean no
 (44)  When high pressure extends over the region, winds, par-    more than slippery decks. At other times, even large vessels may
ticularly in the inside passages, are determined or influenced by    experience problems. Smaller ships with relatively lower free-
local conditions. Along the passages, nights may be calm with    board, such as fishing vessels, small merchant ships, and Coast
breezes picking up around daybreak, increasing during the day,    Guard cutters, are susceptible to wave wash in rough seas. Icing
and moderating around sunset: Directions and speed are often    can greatly increase a vessel's weight and elevate the center of
determined by topography.                                           gravity, making it top heavy. When ice accretion increases the sail
 (45)  The S and SE winds associated with the low pressure sys-    area of the vessel, wind action may result in an increased heeling
tems produce frequently cloudy skies while rain occurs 20 to 25    moment. Nonuniform ice distribution can change a vessel's trim.
percent of the time. Occasionally these winds, along with wester-    Icing also hampers steerability and lowers speed. Similar poten-
lies, are responsible for fog which causes visibilities to fall below    tially dangerous stresses can occur on oil-drilling and other sta-
two miles, about 15 percent of the time, and below 1/2 mile, up to 3    tionary platforms.
percent of the time. Advection fog, which forms when warm air         (so)  Freezing spray is the most common and dangerous form of
blows across cooler water, occurs along some of the inside pas-    icing. It can occur when the air temperature falls below the freez-
sages where water from melting glaciers helps keep sea surface    ing temperature of sea water (usually about 28.6ï¿½) and when sea
temperatures in the 48ï¿½ to 570 range. In these straits, visibilities    surface temperatures are below about 41ï¿½. The lower the tempera-
fall below 5 miles up to 30 percent of the time. Along the outside    ture and the stronger the wind, the more rapidly ice accumulates.
routes, the warm Alaska Current helps keep water temperatures in    Freezing spray may deposit thick layers of ice on rigging or on
the low 50's to mid 60's. Air temperatures are usually warmest    deck areas, rapidly increasing the vessel's weight, which can cause
during August when they range from about 50ï¿½ to 68ï¿½.                it to sink.
 (46)  Autumn is a season of change. The North Pacific subtropi-     (51)  The routes through this region, both inside and out, are
cal high begins to shrink as the Aleutian Low gradually reasserts    susceptible to superstructure icing in winter. Wind and tempera-
itself as the dominant climatic feature. The relatively light breezes    ture conditions are right for some degree of icing about 5 to 10
of summer are replaced by stronger winds generated by a rapidly    percent of the time in midwinter. Along the more exposed outside
increasing number of intense extratropical storms. The seas    routes, very heavy to severe icing (accumulations of 1.0 inches to
become rougher, precipitation more frequent, temperatures colder,    1.5 inches in 3 hours) have been reported.
and nights longer.                                                    (52)  The National Weather Service's regional offices at
 (47)  An average of about three to five low pressure centers    Anchorage and Fairbanks routinely issue structural icing forecasts
each month move through the area, while many more pass close    as part of their marine forecasting program.
enough to influence the weather. These systems come mainly from       (53)  Immersion hypothermia.-Immersion hypothermia is the
the W  and SW as two major storm tracks terminate in the Gulf of    loss of heat when a body is immersed in water. With few excep-
Alaska. Storms often move into this region at speeds of 15 to 25    tions, humans die if their normal rectal temperature of approxi-
knots, although many decelerate and stall. In the open waters,    mately 99.7 drops below 78.6ï¿½F. Cardiac arrest is the most
gales are encountered about 10 percent of the time by November;    common direct cause of death. The main threat to life during pro-
twice that of September. Seas of 12 feet or more are encountered    longed immersion is cold or cold and drowning combined.
10 percent of the time in September and 30 percent by October.        (54)  Cold lowers body temperature, which in turn slows the
Maximum wave heights of 25 to 35 feet have been observed. On        heart beat, lowers the rate of metabolism, and increases the
most headings, a reduction in ships' speed, due to high seas, is    amount of carbon dioxide in the blood. Resulting impaired mental






76                                     3. ALASKA-DIXON ENTRANCE TO CAPE SPENCER


capacity is a major factor in death by hypothermia. Numerous    lanes is known to the U.S. Coast Guard only through sighting
reports from shipwrecks and accidents in cold water indicate that    reports from mariners. Reports of glacier ice will not normally be
people can become confused and even delirious, further decreas-    announced in the Coast Guard Broadcast Notice to Mariners
ing their chances of survival.                                    unless the reported bergs or ice concentrations present an espe-
 (55)  The length of time that a human survives in water depends    cially hazardous situation.
on the water surface temperature and, to a lesser extent, on the per-  (63)  Monthly estimates of wind chill, hypothermia, iceberg,
son's behavior. Body type can cause deviations. For example, thin    and superstructure icing hazards are published in the Pilot Charts.
people become hypothermic more rapidly than fat people.             (64)  Optical Phenomena.-The two basic types of optical phe-
Extremely fat people may survive almost indefinitely in water near    nomena are those associated with electromagnetic displays and
32ï¿½F if they are warmly clothed,                                  those associated with the refraction or diffraction of light. The
 (56)  The cooling rate can be slowed by the person's behavior    aurora and Saint Elmno's fire are electromagnetic displays. Halos,
and insulated gear. A study was made of more than 500 immer-    coronas, parhelia, sun pillars, and related effects are optical phe-
sions in the waters around Victoria B.C. with temperatures ranging    nomena associated with the refraction and diffraction of light
from 390 to 61F. It was learned that if the critical heat loss areas    through suspended cloud particles; mirages, looming, and twilight
could be protected, survival time would increase. The Heat Escape    phenomena such as the "green flash" are optical phenomena asso-
Lessening Posture (HELP) was developed for those in the water    ciated with the refraction of light through air of varying density.
alone and the Huddle for small groups. Both require a life pre-    Occasionally, sunlight is refracted simultaneously by cloud sus-
server. HELP involves holding the upper arms firmly against the    pensions and by dense layers of air producing complex symmetric
side of the chest, keeping the thighs together, and raising the knees    patterns of light around the sun.
to protect the groin area. In the Huddle, people face each other and  (65)  A mirage is caused by refraction of light rays in a layer of
keep their bodies as close together as possible. These positions    air having rapidly increasing or decreasing density near the sur-
improve survival time in 480F water to four hours, approximately    face. A marked decrease in the density of the air with increasing
two times that of a swimmer and one and one-half times that of a    altitude is the cause of phenomena known as looming, towering,
person in the passive position.                                   and superior mirages. Looming is said to occur when objects
 (57)  Wind Chill.-Human and animal bodies, or any physical    appear to rise above their true elevation. Objects below the hori-
bodies warmer than their surroundings, lose heat. The rate of loss    zon may actually be brought into view. Towering has the effect of
depends on the barriers to heat loss, such as clothing and insula-    elongating visible objects in the vertical direction. A superior
tion, the speed of air movement, and the air temperature. Heat loss    mirage is so named because of the appearance of an image above
in humans increases dramatically in moving air that is colder than    the actual object. Ships have been seen with an inverted image
skin temperature taken as 91F. Even a light wind increases heat    above and an upright image floating above that.
loss, while a strong wind can actually lower body temperature if    (66)  Such mirages, especially looming and towering, are fairly
the rate of loss is greater than the body's heat replacement rate.  common in the area, with frequency increasing toward the higher
 (58)  Loss of body heat can also occur by breathing cold air into    latitudes. They are most common in summer when the necessary
the lungs and touching or leaning against cold objects. Heat loss is    temperature conditions are most likely. Another type, the inferior
not as great in bright sunlight where there is some radiant heat    mirage, occurs principally over heated land surfaces such is
gain. Convective cooling is the major source of body heat loss in    deserts, but may be observed occasionally in shallow coastal
shady areas and on cloudy days or nights.                         waters, where objects are sometimes distorted beyond recognition.
 (59)  Ice.-Sea ice affects only a small part of this area and then    In contrast to the superior mirage, the condition necessary for the
only during severe winters. Glacial ice, while more prevalent, is    inferior mirage is an increasing air density with height. Atmo-
usually limited to certain inner passages.                        spheric zones of varying densities and thicknesses may combine
 (60)  Glacial ice usually appears in the form of icebergs, growl-    the effects of the various types of mirages to form a complicated
ers, and ice flows, and is hazardous to navigation, particularly dur-    mirage system known as Fata Morgana.
ing periods of darkness and low visibility. Much of this glacial ice  (67)  The green flash is caused by refractive separation of the
is covered with mud and stones and resembles reefs or rocks    sun's rays into its spectral components. This may occur at sunrise
awash. Glacial ice is usually limited to Frederick Sound, Stephens    or sunset when only a small rim of the sun is visible. When refrac-
Passage, Cross Sound, and Icy Strait. These areas can be clogged    tive conditions are suitable, red, orange, and yellow waves of sun-
with ice while W of Cape Spencer glacial ice is rare. Occasionally,    light are not refracted sufficiently to reach the eye, whereas green
a berg will emerge from Cross Sound and be spotted 10 to 25    waves are. The visual result is a green flash in the surrounding sky.
miles seaward from Cape Spencer.                                    (68)  The refraction of light by ice crystals may result in many
 (61)  Sea ice forms when air temperatures cool sea water below    varieties of halos and arcs. Because red light is refracted the least,
its freezing point (about 28.60). Because water of low salinity and    the inner ring of the halo is always red with the other colors of the
in shallow areas freezes quickest, first ice generally appears near    spectrum following outward. Halos with radii of 22ï¿½ and 460 have
river mouths and close to shore. As the season progresses, the belt    been observed with the refraction angle within the ice spicules
of shore ice can spread and form an extension of the land. How-    determining which type may occur.
ever, because of the large tidal range there is generally very little  (69)  Solar and lunar coronas consist of a series of rainbow-
fast ice. Most of the sea ice that forms in severe winters is in the    colored rings around the sun or moon. Such coronas resemble
form of drift ice, which moves under the influence of winds, tides,    halos but differ in having a reverse sequence of the spectrum col-
and currents, and is constantly breaking up and consolidating.    ors, red being the color of the outer ring, and in having smaller and
During severe winters, sea ice may form in sheltered bays and    variable radii. This reversed sequence of the spectrum occurs
inlets N of 560N during January; it usually melts by April.       because coronas result from diffraction of light whereas the halo is
  (62)  Ice conditions are neither monitored nor forecast for    a refraction phenomenon. The radius varies inversely as the size of
Southeast Alaska waters. The presence of glacier ice in shipping    the water droplets. Another type of diffraction phenomenon is the






                                        3. ALASKA-DIXON ENTRANCE TO CAPE SPENCER                                                77


Brocken bow (also known as glory), which consists of colored    gass Narrows lead to Ketchikan, 659 miles from Seattle. The route
rings around shadows projected against fog or cloud droplets.      through Tongass Narrows joins Clarence Strait at Guard Island
 (70)  Ice blink, land blink, and water and land skies are reflec-    and continues NW to Stikine Strait, which leads N to Wrangell,
tion phenomena observed on the underside of cloud surfaces. Ice    749 miles from Seattle, or to Wrangell Narrows, 756 miles from
blink is a white or yellowish-white glare on the clouds above    Seattle.
accumulations of ice. Land blink is a yellowish glare observed on    (79)  Vessels that wish to avoid Wrangell Narrows can go
the underside of clouds over snow-covered land. Over open water    through Snow Passage, at the head of Clarence Strait, and con-
and bared land, the underside of the cloud cover when observed to    tinue through Sumner Strait and Decision Passage to sea or up
be relatively dark is known as water sky and land sky. The pat-    Chatham Strait, Frederick Sound, Stephens Passage, and
tern formed by these reflections on the lower side of the cloud sur-    Gastineau Channel to Juneau. Vessels bound for Skagway con-
faces is known as "sky map."                                       tinue up Chatham Strait and Lynn Canal.
 (71)  Auroral displays are prevalent throughout the year, but      (80)  The route through Wrangell Narrows enters Frederick
are observed most frequently in the winter. Records show that the    Sound near Petersburg, 771 miles from Seattle, and continues N
periods of maximum auroral activity coincide in general with the    through Stephens Passage and Gastineau Channel to Juneau, 879
periods of maximum sunspot activity.                               miles from Seattle. Vessels using Wrangell Narrows proceed from
 (72)  The cloudlike, luminous glow is the most common of the    Stephens Passage through Favorite Channel and Lynn Canal to
auroral forms. The arc generally has a faint, nebulous, whitish    Skagway, 962 miles from Seattle.
appearance and is the most persistent of the auroras. Ray auroras   (81)  Vessels bound for Sitka, 883 miles from Seattle, some-
are more spectacular but less persistent phenomena. They are usu-    times proceed to sea at Dixon Entrance or Cape Decision and
ally characterized by colored streaks of light that vary in color and    make an outside approach through Sitka Sound. Those desiring
intensity, depending on altitude. Green is the most commonly    shelter use the Inside Route through Wrangell Narrows and enter
observed hue, although red and violet may occur in the same dis-    Peril Strait from Chatham Strait; thence their courses are through
play. In the Northern Hemisphere this phenomenon is known as    Sergius Narrows, Salisbury Sound, Neva Strait, and Olga Strait to
the aurora borealis (northern lights).                             Sita.
 (73)  Saint Elmo's fire is observed more rarely than the aurora
and may occur anywhere in the troposphere. It occurs when static
                                                                   tat and other ports to the NW. From Juneau the route is S in the
electricity collects in sufficiently large charges around the tips of    Gastineau Channel, thence th rough     the N par t of St ephens Pas
pointed objects to ionize the air in its vicinity and leak off in
faintly luminescent discharges. Saint Elmo's fire is observed occa-    sage, thence through Saginaw Channel and part of Lynn Canal to
sionally on ship masts and on airplane wings in the vicinity of
                                                                   Cross Sound to the sea. The principal ports in southeastern Alaska
severe storms. It is described either as a weird, greenish glow or as    may also be reached from seaward through 
                                                                   may also be reached from seaward through the many deep
thousands of tiny, electrical sparks flickering along the sharp    entrance channels.
edges of discharging surfaces.

 (74)  Routes.-The Inside Route from Seattle, Washington, to        (83)  Principal ports.-The principal ports in southeastern
southeastern Alaska is by way of passages through British Colum-    Alaska are Ketchikan, including Ward Cove, Sitka, including Sil-
bia. (See British Columbia Sailing Directions, Volumes I and II,    ver Bay, and Wrangell, Skagway, and Juneau, the State capital.
published by the Canadian Hydrographic Service, and Pub. No.         (84)  Regular calls are made by deep-draft vessels at Met-
154, Sailing Directions (Enroute) British Columbia, published by    lakatla, Ketchikan, Ward Cove, Wrangell, Juneau, Lutak Inlet,
Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center.)           Skagway and Sitka (Silver Bay); and by container-laden barges
 (75)  The best route through British Columbia for deep-draft    from Puget Sound ports at Metlakatla, Saxman, Ketchikan,
vessels bound from Seattle to Alaska is by usual courses out of    Wrangell, Petersburg, Juneau, Port Chilkoot, and Sitka.
Puget Sound, thence across Strait of Juan de Fuca NE of Hein         (85)  The principal marine traffic in this part of Alaska, how-
Bank, 56 miles from Seattle, into the main channel of Haro Strait,    ever, consists of fishing vessels operating from canneries and cold
thence into Strait of Georgia through Boundary Pass.               storage plants, and log rafts being towed from lumber camps to
 (76)  The route through Strait of Georgia passes 1 mile N of    sawmills and pulpmills.
Ballenas Islands, 150 miles from Seattle. Continuing NW, the ves-   (86)  Pilotage, Alaska.-Pilotage except for certain exempted
sel enters Discovery Passage and encounters Seymour Narrows,    vessels, is compulsory for all vessels navigating the inside waters
216 miles from Seattle, where the current velocity is over 15    of the State of Alaska. Exempted from this requirement are (1)
knots. (See Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions at Seymour    vessels under enrollment, (2) fishing vessels registered in the
Narrows.)                                                          United States or in British Columbia, Canada, (3) motorboats as
  (77)  From Discovery Passage the route is through Johnstone    defined in Sec. 1 of the Federal Motor Boat Act of 1940 (54 Stat.
Strait, Race Passage, Broughton Strait, Queen Charlotte Strait,    163; 46 U.S.C. sec. 526 et seq.), (4) vessels of United States regis-
Goletas Channel, Christie Passage, and Gordon Channel into    try of less than 300 gross tons and towboats of United States regis-
Queen Charlotte Sound 1.5 miles W  of Egg Island Light, 347    try and vessels owned by the State of Alaska, engaged exclusively
miles from Seattle. From Queen Charlotte Sound the route contin-    on the rivers of Alaska, or in the coastwise trade on the west coast
ues N through Fitz Hugh Sound, Milbanke Sound, Grenville    of the United States including Alaska, Hawaii, and British Colum-
Channel, and Chatham Sound to the Canada-Alaska boundary    bia, Canada, (5) vessels of Canada, including cruise ships,
which crosses the inner part of Dixon Entrance 610 miles from    engaged in frequent trade between British Columbia and Alaska,
Seattle.                                                           provided that reciprocal exemptions are granted by Canada to ves-
  (78)  The Inside Route northward of Dixon Entrance is    sels owned by the State of Alaska and those of United States regis-
through Alaska waters. Revillagigedo Channel and part of Ton-    try, and (6) pleasure craft.





78                                     3  ALASKA DIXON ENTRANCE TO CAPE SPENCER


 (87)  The State of Alaska has established the following bound-   (105) (4) Sitka Sound - about 0 25 mile N of The Eckholms
anes of the mslde waters of Southeast Alaska                     Light (57000 6'N, 135021 5'W),
 (88)  A line drawn from Cape Spencer Light due S to a point of   (106) (5) Point Retreat - about 1 mile NW of Point Retreat
intersection which is due W from the southermost point of Cape    Light (58ï¿½24 7'N, 134ï¿½57 3'W)
Cross thence to Cape Edgecumbe Light, thence through Cape          (107) (6) Twin Islands  about 2 miles NE of Twin Island Light
Bartolome Light and extended to a point of intersection which is    TI (55ï¿½08 6'N  131ï¿½13 0'W), seasonal station utilihzed only from
due W of Cape Muzon Light, thence to a point which is 1 mile,    May 1 through September 30
180ï¿½ true from Cape Chacon Light, thence to Barren Island Light,   (108) The destination of vessels from the above pickup points
thence to Lord Rock Light, thence to the southernmost extremity    while not limited to them, is primarily for the following ports
of Garnet Point, Kanagunut Island, thence to the southeasternmost    Ketchlkan, Petersburg, and Wrangell from Guard Islands, Ketchl-
extremity of Island Point Sitklan Island, and thence a line drawn    kan, Metlakatla, and Juneau from Point McCartey, Klawock from
from the northeasternmost extrermty of Point Mansfield, Sitklan    Cabras Islands Sitka, and/or en route the Point Retreat pilot
Island, 040ï¿½ true, to where it intersects the mainland           pickup point, from The Eckholms, Hamines, Skagway and Juneau
 (89)  At all buoyed entrances from seaward to bays, sounds, nv-    from Point Retreat, and Misty FJords from Twm Islands
ers, or other estuanes for which specified boundary lines are not  (109) In Southeast Alaska, the vessels used as pilot boats serve
descnbed, the waters inshore of a line drawn approximately paral-    other functions However, when engaged m pilotage duties they
lel with the general trend of the shore drawn through the outer-    display the appropriate day and night signals The pilot boat
most buoy or other aid to navigation of any system of aids, are    assumes radiotelephone watch about 1 hour prior to a vessel s
inside waters                                                    ETA at the pickup point Contact is made on VHF-FM channel 16
 (90)  Vessels proceeding directly from points outside Alaska    or 13 with channel 12 as the working frequency
inside waters to an established pilot boarding station or pickup   (ilo)  Towage -Tugs are located at most ports in southeastern
point are excluded from compulsory use of a pilot when traveling    Alaska and are available for assisting vessels in mooring and
specified inside exclusion routes The inside exclusion routes for    unmoormnng at the various wharves and piers However, these tugs
southeastern Alaska are as follows                               are principally engaged in towing and handling log rafts and
 (91)  (a) travel via Clarence Strait to Guard Islands    barges Arrangements should be made well in advance through
(55ï¿½26 8'N  131ï¿½52 8'W)                                          shipping agents For further information, refer to the descnption of
 (92)  (b) travel via Clarence Strait to a point about 1 mile E of    the port
Point McCartey Light (55ï¿½06 8'N, 131ï¿½42 4VW)                       (ili) Vessel Arrval Inspection -Vessels subject to U S quar-
 (93)  (c) travel via Cape Bartolome in Bucarell Bay to Cabras    antme, customs, mmigration, and agricultural quarantine inspec-
Islands (55021 3'N, 133023 4'W),                                 tions generally make arrangements in advance through ships
 (94)  (d) travel via Cape Ommaney in Chatham Strat to a point    agents Government officials conducting such inspections are sta-
off Point Retreat Light (58ï¿½24 7'N  134ï¿½57 3W),                  tloned m most maJor ports Manners arriving at ports where offi-
 (95)  (e) travel via Sitka Sound to a point off The Eckholms    cials are not stationed, should contact the nearest activity
Light (57000 6'N, 135&021 5'W) (applies only to those vessels    providing that service (See appendix for addresses ) Unless other
bound for the port of Sitka), and (f) travel via Revlllaglgedo Chan-    wise directed, officials usually board vessels at their berths
nel to about 1 mile N of Twin Islands Light TI (55008 6'N          (11) Harbormasters are mentioned m the text when applica-
131ï¿½13 0'W) (applies to vessels traveling Behm Canal only dur-    ble They generally have charge of berthing vessels
ing the penod May 1 through September 30), in transiting Revllla-  (113) Supplies -Deep draft vessels usually obtain supplies
glgedo Channel, vessels must stay W of longitude 13105 0'W       before visiting Alaska ports Gasoline, diesel oil, diesel fuel, dshtil-
 (96)  The Alaska Coastwise Pilots Association and the South-    lates, lubncating oils and greases are available in all ports and at
                                                                  many of the operating canneries m southeastern Alaska Fuel oils
eastern Alaska Pilots Association provide pilot services for Yaku-
tat and ports S to the Canadian border                           for steamships are not available in southeastern Alaska Provl
                                                                  sions, fishing supplies, and some manne supplies are available at
       Thei Alaska Cra stwise P Io ts Association, PO Bare  6337  most ports m the area Ice for fishing vessels is available from cold
                                                                  storage companies and from operating canneries Fresh water is
Ketchikan, AK 99901 telephone 907-225-7245  FAX 907-247-    pped to most wharves, piers and floats
U4568                                                              (114) Repairs -There are no major repair facilities for large ves-
 (99)  Southeastern Alaska Pilots Association, PO  Box 6100,    sels in southeastern Alaska The nearest major repair facilities are
Ketchikan, AK 99901 telephone 907 225-9696, cable address,    in the Puget Sound area and Bntsh Columbia Marine railways
SEAPILOTS  radio call WKD-53  Their pilot office monitors    gnds and manne repair firms for smaller vessels are located in the
VHF-FM channels 16 and 13 and works on channel 12                larger cities of southeastern Alaska The smaller communities and
 (ioo) Pilot services should be arranged in advance through    operating cannenes usually have machine shops capable of mak
ships agents, or otherwise in sufficient time to enable the pilot to    mg minor repairs to small vessels Small craft are sometimes
travel to the area where the service is required                 beached on mudflats for minor repairs Electromnc repair firms and
 (loo) The established pilot boarding stations or pickup points    commercial divers are in the larger ports
for Southeast Alaska are as follows                                (15) Spare parts for machinery and electronic equipment are
 (102) (1) Guard Island - about 1 mile NW of Guard Islands    stocked in Ketchikan, Wrangell, Juneau, and Sitka Parts not
Light (55ï¿½26 8'N, 131ï¿½52 9'W)                                    stocked can usually be obtained from suppliers in Washington
 (103) (2) Point McCartey  about 1 rmle E of Point McCartey    Oregon and Callfornia by overnight air freight shipment
Light (55ï¿½06 8'N, 131ï¿½42 4'W)                                      (1 16) Communications -There is regularly scheduled steamer
 (104) (3) Cabras Island - about 1 mile NW of Cabras Island      and barge service between Puget Sound ports Prince Rupert,
Bucareli Bay (55ï¿½22 0'N, 133024 8'W)                             B C , and the ports of southeastern Alaska The State of Alaska







                                       3. ALASKA-DIXON ENTRANCE TO CAPE SPENCER                                             79


operates a vehicle and passenger ferry weekly from Seattle and     (126) Radiotelephone communication with the nearest Alascom,
daily from Prince Rupert, B.C. to Ketchikan, Wrangell, Peters-    Inc. coastal station is maintained by most active facilities and
burg, Sitka, Juneau, Haines, and Skagway; this service is less fre-    those in caretaker status.
quent during the winter from Prince Rupert, B.C. Passenger cruise  (127) Logging industry.-Logging camps are located along the
ships sail daily from Vancouver, B.C., to southeastern Alaska dur-    mainland and islands throughout southeastern Alaska. They are
ing the summer.                                                  established when the forest products are sold by the U.S. Forest
 (117) Scheduled airline flights are maintained daily from the    Service to private companies. A camp normally operates from 3 to
other states to several points in southeastern Alaska, where con-    10 years and has less than 100 people in the smaller camps, but the
necting service is available by scheduled or chartered flights to all   larger ones may have several thousand residents. The camps gen-
points in Alaska.                                                erally operate 9 or 10 months each year, closing to caretaker status
 (118) Radio transmission and reception is good in the main    only during the heavy snow periods.
channels of the inland waters of southeastern Alaska; however, it    (12s) Float facilities for tugs and small craft used in handling
becomes very poor when in inlets and passes shielded by moun-    and making up log rafts, and for seaplanes and barges used to
tains from the transmitting or receiving stations.               transport personnel and supplies are maintained by logging camps
 (119) Telephone service is available from most communities in    located along the waterways. These camps, in addition to main-
southeastern Alaska.                                             taining radiotelephone communication with Alascom, Inc., can
 (120) Alascom, Inc., operates a radio network that includes    usually provide fresh water, fuels, and provisions in an emergency.
coast stations with ship-to-shore service throughout most of       (129) Location of the various camps can be obtained from the
Alaska. Complete information on this service can be obtained    U.S. Forest Service in Ketchikan or Juneau or from the Alaska
from Alascom, Inc., Office of Public Affairs, Pouch 6607,    Loggers Association and the marine operations department of the
Anchorage, Alaska 99502.                                         Ketchikan Pulp Company in Ketchikan. This information can also
 (121) Reporting Marine Emergencies and Oil Spills.-Marine    be obtained from the logging engineering department of the
emergencies, oil spills, possible illegal entry, sightings of foreign    Alaska Lumber and Pulp Company in Sitka.
naval or fishing vessels, icebergs, submarines, or any other
unusual events should be reported to the nearest Coast Guard unit  (130) Standard Time.-All of Alaska E of 169ï¿½30'W. uses
by radio or by calling, toll free, Zenith 5555 anywhere in Alaska    Alaska standard time (Ak.s.t.), which is 9 hours slow of Green-
except Juneau, Douglas, or Kodiak. Within these cities, call 586-    wich mean time. Example: when it is 1200 at Greenwich, it is
2680 for Juneau/Douglas, and 487-5888 for Kodiak.                0300 in Juneau and Anchorage. All the Aleutian Islands W of
 (122) Small-craft facilities.-Small-craft floats for local and    169ï¿½30'W., including the communities of Adak, Atka, Attu, and
transient craft are maintained by most communities in southeast-    Shemya, use Hawaii-Aleutian standard time (H.A.s.t.), which is
ern Alaska. For further information, refer to the description of the    10 hours slow of Greenwich mean time. Example: when it is 1200
community in the text. Complete information on the location of    at Greenwich, it is 0200 at Adak.
these facilities may also be obtained from the State of Alaska,   (131) Daylight saving time.-In the State of Alaska, clocks are
Division of Waters and Harbors, Juneau, Alaska 99801.            advanced one hour on the first Sunday in April and set back to
 (123) A vessel of less than 65.6 feet (20 meters) in length or a    standard time on the last Sunday in October.
sailing vessel shall not impede the passage of a vessel that can   (132) Legal public holidays.-The following are legal holidays
safely navigate only within a narrow channel or fairway. (Nav-    in the area covered by this Coast Pilot: New Year's Day, January
igation Rules, International-Inland Rule 9(b).                   1; Martin Luther King, Jr.'s Birthday, third Monday in January;
 (124) Commercial fishing facilities.-Canneries and cold stor-    Washington's Birthday, third Monday in February; Memorial Day,
age companies in southeastern Alaska operate during the fishing    last Monday in May; Independence Day, July 4; Labor Day, first
season as prescribed by the Alaska State Department of Fish and    Monday in September; Columbus Day, second Monday in Octo-
Game. These canneries; cold storage companies, and their facili-    ber; Veterans Day, November 11; Thanksgiving Day, fourth
ties are active during some years and inactive in others; some are    Thursday in November; and Christmas Day, December 25. The
abandoned by their owners and the buildings and facilities fall into    national holidays are observed by employees of the Federal Gov-
ruins in a short time.                                           ernment and the District of Columbia, and may not be observed by
  (125) Active canneries, during the non-fishing season, and inac-    all the States in every case.
tive canneries and cold storage companies usually have a caretaker  (133) In addition, the following holidays are also observed in the
in attendance. Fresh water, and some fuels and provisions are usu-    area covered by this Coast Pilot: Seward's Day, last Monday in
ally available at these facilities in an emergency.              March, and Alaska Day, October 18.










                                     4. DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN

 (I)   This chapter describes the waters of Dixon Entrance,         (lo)  At Cape Muzon the flood current sets around the cape NE
Pearse and Portland Canals, Revillagigedo Channel, Tongass Nar-    and the ebb SW, with a velocity of about 2.4 knots at strength.
rows, Carroll and George Inlets, Behm Canal, Ward Cove, and the      (II)  At Nunez Rocks and Cape Chacon the currents are irregu-
city and harbor of Ketchikan.                                      lar and affected by storms. The flood generally sets E or NE. From
                                                                    the cape to Nichols Bay there is apparently an eddy with a W set
                                                                    close to the shores. Between the cape and the rock off the cape, the
nearby Pacific. Gales blow frequently from October through April,    current apparently always runs W, although not strong during the
mainly out of the SE, up the Hecate Strait. Sometimes N gales    last half of the flood. N of Cape Chacon an eddy runs to the S,
draw down Portland Inlet across the NE end of Chatham Sound,    close to the shore. Off the cape a current of 2 to 3 knots has been
making the crossing from Dundas Island to Cape Fox hazardous.    experienced.
Strong SW winds create a heavy beam sea on this same crossing.       (12)  On the ebb the general direction of the current is to the W.
Swells approach Dixon Entrance mostly from the W  and SW, par-    From Cape Chacon it runs in the direction of Nunez Rocks, proba-
ticularly in winter. They move through passages, break on shoals    bly forced to the S by the current from Nichols Bay; the latter sets
or against shorelines, and are heavy at times. In Caamano Passage,    E as far as the cape and then turns S. The current from the S
the W  coast of Dundas Island experiences almost continuous    entrance of Nichols Bay runs SE until it meets the main current
heavy swell. Parry Passage, as well as the W  and N coasts of Lan-    when it turns W  around Nunez Point. W  of Nunez Rocks the ebb
gara Island, is subject to prevailing ocean swell.                 current is W, but is affected by currents from inlets; there are small
  (3)   Uncertain currents and a number of hazards make naviga-    eddies along shore.
tion in Dixon Entrance treacherous when visibility is poor. Advec-   (13)  Between Cape Chacon and Zayas Island on the S, and
tion fog plagues these waters from July through September, when    Duke Island and Cape Fox on the N, the tidal currents are much
visibility less than 0.5 mile occurs up to 5 percent of the time, and    confused. In bad weather the heavy and confused sea sometimes
is often cyclical over a period of several days. At Langara Island,    looks like breakers.
fog is reported 4 to 9 days each month from May through Septem-      (14)  Between Dundas Island and Cape Fox the flood current
ber.                                                               sets E with an average velocity at strength of 2 knots and the ebb
                                                                     current sets W with an average velocity at strength of 3 knots.
                       (4)   Charts 16016, 1740.-Dixon Entrance, the S approach  (15)  (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions.)
  (4)f rom the Pacific Ocean to the inner channels  of southeastern  (16)  Additional information on currents in these waters is given
            from the Pacific Ocean to the inner channels of southeastern    in the Canadian Sailing Directions British Columbia (North), Vol-
 Alaska and the N seaward approach to those of British Columbia,         II
 is entered between Queen Charlotte Islands on the S and Dall and    ume II.
 Prince of Wales Islands on the N. It extends in a general E direc    (17)  Routes.-Because of the numerous dangers and uncertain
 tion from Cape Muzon and Langara Island to Dundas Island, a dis-    currents, navigation of Dixon Entrance at night or in thick or
 tance of about 75 miles, with an average width of more than 30    foggy weather is somewhat risky. In approaching from S the light,
                                                                     fog signal, and radiobeacon on Langara Island is a sufficient guide
 miles; it then contracts to a width of about 8 miles between Cape    to the entrance. In approaching from W or NW, Forrester Island is
 Fox and Dundas Island, and continues with this width to the    a good landmark. The light on Cape Muzon and the light on Cape
                                                                     a good landmark. The light on Cape Muzon and the light on Cape
 mouth of Portland Inlet, a distance of 17 miles.                   Chacon are good guides when in their vicinity, but the unmarked
  (5)   The International Boundary Line between the United    Nunez Rocks, about 3.2 miles SW from Cape Chacon, should be
 States and Canada runs through Dixon Entrance, Tongass    kept in mind. The light on Barren Island is also a good guide when
 Passage, Pearse Canal, and Portland Canal.                         going to the E part of Dixon Entrance; it is advisable to set a
  (6)   Bowie Seamount (chart 531) is a sharp pinnacle with a    course SE of the island in passing.
 depth of 15 fathoms in 53019'N., 135040'W.                           (18)  The high rugged coastline and the isolated islands are very
   (7)   Learmonth Bank is in the fairway of the W  entrance of    good radar targets.
 Dixon Entrance between 8 and 18 miles N of Langara Island and
 inside the 100-fathom curve. The bank is about 12 miles long, NW     (19)  Charts 17400, 17420.-Graham Island forms the S side
 and SE, and about 5 miles wide. The least depth is about 19 fath-    of Dixon Entrance for 50 miles from Langara Island to Hecate
 oms, over a bottom of sand, rock, and gravel.                      Strait. Its NW end is mountainous with Pivot Mountain, 1,922
   (8)   Currents.-In Dixon Entrance, the flood current runs E       feet high, the most conspicuous. This mountain, about 2.5 miles
 around Langara Island and sets along the N shore of Graham    back from the W shore, is round, somewhat detached from the oth-
 Island. In the area about midway between Rose Spit and Dundas    ers, and can be seen for about 50 miles in clear weather. Tow Hill,
 Island it divides: one part sets N past Dundas Island and the other    500 feet high, is a conspicuous landmark on the NE end of the
 S into Hecate Strait.                                              island, rising above the low and featureless land in its vicinity. It is
   (9)   The turn of the current in the vicinity of Rose Spit coin-    on the coast and is fronted by a perpendicular cliff nearly 400 feet
  cides approximately with the times of high and low water. At    high, composed of columnar volcanic rocks facing the sea and
  times the streams run as high as 4 knots in the vicinity of Rose    sloping gradually to the S.
  Spit, and cause heavy overfalls that have the appearance of shal-    (20)  Langara Island, on the S side of the W  end of Dixon
  low water in depths of 10 fathoms or more. This area should be    Entrance, is a small irregularly shaped, densely wooded island,
  navigated with great care. Give Rose Spit a wide berth.             close off Cape Knox, the northwesternmost point of Graham

                                                                                                                                    80






                                             4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                  81


Island Near the rmddle of the island is a succession of rounded   (32)  An inlet about 1 2 rmles E from Surf Point, is too deep for
hills of almost uniform height that extend m an E direction      anchorage and is open and exposed Foul ground extends about
 (21)  Langara Pomt Light (54015 4'N, 133ï¿½03 5W), 160 feet    0 2 mile off the point on the E side of the mlet
above the water, is shown from a white hexagonal tower on the      (33)  Bert Mlllar Cutoff is the passage to Nlchols Bay W of
NW end of Langara Island A fog signal pointing NNW  and a    Bean Island It forms a bight at each end, narrowing at the center
radiobeacon are at the light A white dwelling is about 135 yards E    to a channel about 30 yards long and 10 yards wide A depth of
of the hght                                                      about 13/4 fathoms is in the narrow part of the channel and sub-
 (22)  Forrester Island, about 14 5 miles off the Dall Island    merged rocks are in the bight at the N end At times the current
shore, is a prominent landmark for the approach to Dixon    through the channel is very swift
Entrance from NW  The island is wooded and mountainous the         (34)  Bean Island is wooded and has a number of rounded
highest peak is near the center of the island                    steep-sided rocky knobs From W  it shows as a rounded hill
 (23)  Cape Muzon, the S extremity of Dall Island, forms the    which stands well above the general level of the island Off the SE
NW headland of Dixon Entrance It is heavily wooded and rises to    poit of the island is a small wooded island from which sub-
a rounded peak 2 miles NW of the extremity of the cape Off the E    merged rocks extend
end of the cape is a group of small islands and rocks A breaker is  (35)  Nunez Poit, about 2 7 miles W  of Cape Chacon, is the
0 3 mile off the S shore of the cape Vessels should give the cape a    SE extremity of Bean Island It has several rocky ndges, with bare
berth of at least 1 mile A bank with a reported least depth of 14    bluffs 150 to 200 feet high on the seaward face
fathoms is 2 miles SW of Cape Muzon Light                          (36)  Nichols Bay is about 2 5 miles W of Cape Chacon Three
  (24)  Cape Muzon Light (54039 8'N, 132 ï¿½41 5'Wi) 80 feet    islands divide the entrance into two channels From the SE end of
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    the S island, irregular bottom with 2- and 21/2-fathom spots extend
white dia         m     ond-shaped daymark on the S extremity of the ape and    across the entrance of the S channel to a 43/4-fathom spot about 0 6
  (25)  Local             magrk on the S extrenty of the cape     mile to the NE of Nunez Point Durng sev-Dffere S gales ofseas pile up
  (25)  Locoal magnetic dsturbanhe -Dfferences obf ats much as    heavily at the entrance and are reported to break entirely across it
                                                                   at times A daybeacon is on the E side of the entrance of the N
                                                                   channel
  (26)  Chart 17433 -Point Marsh (54043 2'N, 132ï¿½19 1'W)           (37)  The bay has three anchorages, one in each of the three
about 13 mules E of Cape Muzon, Is a group of rocky islets all of    bights on the SW shore In entenng the first bight keep well off the
which are comparatively low and wooded lying close to the man    NW end of the N Island to avoid rocks Anchor m 16 fathoms
 shore of Pnnce of Wales Island Between 1 and 2 miles back of the    mud bottom 250 yards offshore The second anchorage is to the
point, the ground rises evenly and several irregular knobs show    NW of the peninsula, m depths of 15 fathoms, 300 yards offshore
 along the slope About 2 5 miles NE of the point Is a prominent,    The third anchorage is about 0 7 mile to the NW of the second
 almost bare hill, with rounded top Point Marsh Light (540    anchorage and about 0 6 mnule from the head of the bay, in depths
 42 7'N  132ï¿½17 7'W), 74 feet above the water, Is shown from a    of about 13 fathoms, soft mud bottom, 350 yards offshore
 skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on     (38)  Nichols Lake, a large freshwater lake, empties into the
 a small Islet about 1 mile SE of Point Marsh                     head of the bay through a stream Small boats anchor off the flats
  (27)  Mmme Bay, a small bight in the main shore back of Point    at the mouth of this stream
 Marsh, is much used by local fishermen and affords excellent       (39)  Routes -When about 1 mile from the entrance, bring the
 anchorage for small craft Enter the bay W of the small charted    bay wide open and head for the center of the N channel Stand in
 islets inside the entrance and run fairly close-to in order to avoid a    between the kelp patches Favor the N point at the entrance, and
 reef extending 30 feet out from the W shore opposite the southern-    then follow midchannel courses The narrowest part of the chan-
 most islet Heavy kelp covers much of the shoreline during the    nel, about 75 yards wide, is 1 rmle inside the entrance, where the
 summer, but the center of the bay is clear                       least depth is 7 fathoms
   (28)  Brownson Bay, about 1 5 miles NE of Point Marsh Light,     (40)  The S channel, used by small craft leads to the S of the
 is narrow, and its entrance is somewhat obstructed by islets and    islands Fishmg craft anchor in the lee of the 20-foot rock about
 rocks It affords indifferent anchorage in about 11 fathoms, 0 2    270 yards off the NE shore of Bean Island, and In the channel
 mile S of the rock awash near the head of the bay A private moor-    between the islands
 ing buoy is 200 yards E of the rock awash In entering, favor the   (41)  Cape Chacon, the SE point of Pnnce of Wales Island, is
 W side of the bay taking care to avoid a rock awash that Is about    about 23 miles E of Cape Muzon  Cape Chacon Light
 0 6 mile NE of the islets off the W point at the entrance        (54041 4'N, 132ï¿½01 0'W) 50 feet above the water is shown from
   (29)  In 1968 it was reported that the depths in Brownson Bay    a frame with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the S
 were considerably less than the charted depths, caution is advised  extremity of the cape
   (30)  Little Brownson Bay, on the E side of the entrance to      (42)  From the NE and SW quadrants the cape is easily recog-
 Brownson Bay, affords anchorage for small craft The bay is   nized by three hills, the outer appears as a perfect cone the second
  entered from the S, but local knowledge is required, the N passage    is slightly higher and somewhat rounded the third has a flat top
  can only be used by very small boats Wllhwaws sweep across the    The land to the NW is high and broken
  bay dunng SE gales                                                 (43)  A rock, awash at extreme low water and usually showing
   (31)  Surf Point, about 4 6 miles ESE of Point Marsh Light and    as a breaker is 260 yards SE from the cape The pass between the
  2 5 miles W of Nunez Point, rises rapidly to a knob and then to    rock and the cape has depths of 5 fathoms and is used by small
  higher ground to the N Brown Bear Rock is a prominent rock    craft For a distance of about 0 5 mile from the cape, tide rips are
  close to the point A submerged rock, cleared to 6 fathoms, is   likely to be severe for small craft
  about 0 4 rmle S of the point with deep water inshore Tide rips,   (44)  Nunez Rocks, about 1 4 miles S of Nunez Point are bare
  hazardous to small craft, are in the vlclmty                     at half tide and usually show as a breaker Shoal water extends 550



  82                                            4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN


 yards SE to a 3/4-fathom spot that frequently shows as a separate    7 3 miles SE of Mount Lazaro The larger rock is 25 feet high and
 breaker A 3/4-fathom spot is about 400 yards NE of the rocks The    shows some vegetation
 channel between Nunez Rocks and Nunez Pomt Is clear The rocks        (56)  Caution -Vessels without local knowledge should not go
 when passed to the S should be given a berth of 0 8 mule           inside the line of Hassler Reef, West Rock, and Club Rocks These
                                                                    waters should be navigated with great caution, and every appear-
   (45)  Chart 17434 -Duke Island, on the N side of Dixon    ance of kelp should be avoided It is quite possible that isolated
 Entrance between Clarence Strait and Revlllaglgedo Channel, is    pinnacle rocks may exist that show no kelp There is deep water
 low and heavily wooded, and shows numerous round-topped hills    close to Yellow Rock and Barren Island
 Mount Lazaro at its S end is a broad-topped mountain and the         (57)  Barren Island is a bare rock 30 feet high, about 8 5 rmles
 only part of the island visible for over 25 miles The S and SW      S of Mount Lazaro There are other small rocks and some kelp
 sides of the island should be avoided, as rocks and reefs extend    near It, but there is deep water withun about 0 2 miule in all direc-
 about 7 miles offshore Dangers are marked by kelp dunng the    tions Barren Island Light (54044 6'N, 131ï¿½21 O'W), 85 feet
 summer, but it is probable that this safeguard is lacking dunng the    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
 fall and winter The farthest outlying dangers are Hassler Reef,    white diamond-shaped daymark on the summit of the island
 West Rock, Club Rocks, Yellow Rocks, Barren Island, and a            (58)  West Devil Rock is a dangerous ledge in the NE part of
 reported rocky shoal, covered 3 fathoms with breakers in Its    Dixon Entrance, about 15 5 miles SSW of Mount Lazaro The
 immediate vicimty, about 4 rmles W of West Rock                    highest part of the rock bares 11 feet, and foul ground, on which
  (46)  Judd Harbor, on the S shore of Duke Island, is N of the E    the sea breaks, extends about 0 3 mile S, SW, and N of it A 21/2-
 end of Kelp Island It offers excellent shelter with swinging room    fathom shoal on which the sea breaks almost continuously in
 for vessels up to 175 feet long (short scope) When entenng the    moderate weather, Is 0 6 mile 3330 from the rock A submerged
 harbor do not rely on the compass, because there is local magnetic    rock is close SE of the 21/2-fathom shoal A 61/2-fathom and a 6-
 attraction                                                         fathom shoal are 0 9 mile 015ï¿½, and 2 3 miles 141ï¿½ from West
  (47)  The best entrance is N of East Island When abreast of the    Devil Rock, respectively
 NE point of Kelp Island, steer midchannel toward the prominent       (59)  East Devil Rock bares 2 feet and is about 3 3 miles N of
 pomt marking the W  side of the entrance to Judd Harbor When    Zayas Island The channel between this rock and Zayas Island
 about to round Into the bay give the point to the E a fair berth    Reef is apparently clear, but the N coast of Zayas Island should
because of a submerged rock 130 yards off that point Anchor in    not be approached closer than 1 rmle
 the center of the bay in 4 fathoms, sticky mud bottom This
anchorage is used extensively by fishing vessels dunng the fishing   (60)  Chart 17420 -Celestial Reef (54031'N, 131ï¿½28'W),
season and may be congested durng that period                      about 10 miles SSE of West Devil Rock, is about 1 mile long and
  (48)  Anchorage on the N side of Kelp Island, while good, is not    has three heads with less than 1 fathom over them near the S end
recommended for use except for those with local knowledge,    The depth over the remainder of the shoal is about 10 fathoms A
because the E entrance is shallow and the W  entrance has numer-    rock, covered 11/2 fathoms, is 0 7 mile NE of the reef Two 10-
ous reefs Currents through this passage are very strong at times   fathom shoals are about 0 5 miles N and 3 miles NNW of the reef,
  (49)  Kelp Island Anchorage, a bight in the E end of Kelp    respectively An 8-fathom shoal is about 2 rmles S of the center of
Island, offers fair shelter for small boats Anchorage is in 2 to 7    the reef
fathoms, rock and sand bottom Piles have been driven along the S     (61)  Zayas Island, in the NE part of Dixon Entrance and about
shore                                                               11 5 miles SE of Barren Island, is wooded flat-topped and high
  (50)  Local magnetic disturbance -Extreme magnetic distur-    near the S end A rock, with 4 feet over it, is about 0 7 mile N of
bances, with differences of as much as 50ï¿½ have been observed SE    Aranzazu Point, the NW extrermty of Zayas Island Foul ground
of Duke Island The magnetic compass should not be relied upon    marked by kelp extends along the N shore of the island with sev-
within the area outhned m magenta on the charts                    eral 5-fathom spots about 1 mile N of the island A hght marks the
 (51)  East Island, marked by a light on its E side, is a small    southernmost pomt of the island
island, 2 5 miles S of Duke Point, the easternmost point of Duke     (62)  McCullock Rock, a pinnacle rock with 9 feet over it, is
Island Round East Island with great care because of the outlying    about 4 miles W  of Jacmto Point, the SW extremity of Zayas
rocks to the W, the magnetic disturbance, and the uncertainty of    Island A 3-fathom shoal and a 5-fathom shoal are about 0 4 mile
the tidal currents                                                 ESE and about 1 3 miles NNE of the rock respectively
 (52)  Hassler Reef is an extensive shoal area with depths of 31/4  (63)  Dundas Islands, in the E part of Dixon Entrance, consist
to 10 fathoms about 7 8 miles W  of Mount Lazaro The reef is    of Dundas Island, Baron Island, Dunira Island, Melville
covered by heavy kelp during the summer and has deep water    Island, and numerous small islets and rocks Dundas, the north-
close-to Very irregular bottom extends 3 rmles to the S of Hassler    westernmost and largest island, has a number of conspicuous
Reef, and passage over that section is not recommended             mountains, of which Mount Henry, towards the S end of the
 (53)  A rocky shoal, covered 3 fathoms with breakers in Its    island, is the highest Two conspicuous hills are in the NW part of
immediate vicinilty, is reported about 2 5 miles SSW of Hassler    the Island Slab Hill, flat-topped with a knob is conspicuous near
Reef and about 4 rmles W of West Rock                              the NE end of the island
 (54)  West Rock, 12 feet high, is 6 3 miles SW of Mount Laz-       (64)  The coasts of the four large islands of the group are much
aro A rock with 2 fathoms over it and marked by kelp is about 0 6    indented by small creeks and bays
mile S of West Rock                                                  (65)  Caution -Recent surveys indicate less water than charted
 (55)  Club Rocks, two in number, bare, and surrounded by    in the vicinimty of Dundas Islands Manners are advised to navigate
reefs and kelp, are about 4 4 miles S of Mount Lazaro, the N rock    with caution in the vicimty of these islands as many rocks awash
is 40 feet high, and the S rock is 35 feet high Yellow Rocks, two    and submerged, and some marked by kelp, have been reported in
in number yellowish m color, and surrounded by kelp, are about    this area




                                             4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                    83


 (66)  Hollday Island Light (54037 4'N  130045 5W) 30 feet          (76)  Local magnetic disturbance -Differences of as much as
above the water, is shown from a white slatted daymark on a con-    5ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed m the W shore of
crete base on the N end of Holhday Island, which is 0 3 mile off    Nakat Inlet about 1 25 rmles N of Surprise Point
the NE end of Dundas Island                                          (77)  Nakat Harbor makes off from the SE part of Nakat Inlet
                                                                  and is separated from it by a chain of wooded islands An aban-
 (67)  Chart 17437 -Cape Fox, on the N side of Dixon               doned cannery dock, m rums is on the E shore of the harbor E of
Entrance, forms the W  side of Nakat Bay and the E point of the    Observation Rock In the S part of the harbor about halfway up
entrance to Revillaglgedo Channel The cape is mountainous and    the arm, off a small bight having a gravel beach anchorage and
wooded, with wooded islets close off its S shore The cape terim-    shelter for vessels of moderate size may be found i 19 fathoms
nates in remarkable high white cliffs, with a conspicuous saddle-    The N arm of Nakat Harbor also has anchorage, but poor shelter
shaped mountain, Harry Saddle, about 2 miles back A small-    A reef with two pinnacles that bare 3 feet is 200 yards from the W
boat channel between Fox Island and the cape is narrow and    shore about 0 3 mile N from Simonton Point Observation Rock,
crooked and should not be attempted without local knowledge        in the middle of Nakat Harbor is about 6 feet high with sub-
The channel has many piles andis used as a log storage area A      merged rocks that extend about 250 yards SE and NW from It A
rock awash is about 500 yards ENE from the E tip of Fox Island,    deep channel Is between the rocks and the shore, but the shore
a small island about 0 2 mile off Cape Fox                         must be given a berth of over 100 yards
                                                                    (78) The best channel for entering Nakat Harbor is SE of the
 (68)  Tree Point Light, described later in this chapter, is on the  (78) The  best      channel      for entering Nakat Harbor is SE of the
NE side of the lower end of Revillaglgedo Channel, about 3 7    southeasternmost Islet of the cham separating it from Nakat Inlet
miles NW of Cape Fox (See chart 17420 )                              (79)  Excellent anchorage may be had in 18 fathoms, mud bot-
                                                                  tom in the SW arm of Nakat Harbor, about 0 6 mile SE of Sur
 (69)  Lord Islands, about 2 5 miles SE from Cape Fox, are in    pnse Point Passage to the head of this arm is obstructed by a rock
two groups, separated about 0 7 mile, and have a number of    baring 3 feet m the middle of the constricted part of the arm Small
Islands in each group, with a clear channel between the groups     vessels should favor the W shore to avoid the rock and the exten-
The larger islands are wooded and 100 to 200 feet high Several    slve flats along the E shore At high water the SW arm is con-
bold and bare rocks are close to the Lord Islands Submerged    nected with the small bight, about 0 7 mile N of the daybeacon on
rocks and kelp fringe these islands and shoal water extends about    Tongass Reef, by a narrow passage that Is obstructed by trees and
0 5 mile N and NW of the N group The recommended channel    Is only navigable by small boats
into Nakat Bay is to the W of the islands and Thistle Rock, favor-  (80)  Tongass Reef, on the NE side of the bay, about 05 mile N
ing the Cape Fox shore                                             of Tongass Island, is awash at high water Tongass Reef Daybea
 (70)  Lord Rock, about 10 feet high is about 0 7 mile SW from    con (54ï¿½47 2'N, 130ï¿½44 7'W), on a skeleton tower with a red and
the S group of the Lord Islands  Lord Rock Light (54043 5'N,    white diamond shaped daymark on the N side of the reef, marks
130ï¿½49 2'W) 38 feet above the water is shown from a skeleton    the N entrance to Port Tongass Passage Rock and Track Rock,
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the high-    between Tongass Reef and the N point of Tongass Island cover at
est part of the rock                                               high water
 (71)  Nakat Bay, making N between Cape Fox and Tongass             (sO)  Port Tongass is a small harbor formed by the passage
Island is the entrance to Nakat Inlet and the W  approach to Port    between Tongass Island and the mainland Tongass Island is low
Tongass The bay does not afford anchorage                          and, except on the NE side, has ledges and submerged rocks that
 (72)  Boat Rock, 5 feet high, Is close to the W  shore at the    extend well out on all sides A launch passage is immediately N of
entrance to Nakat Bay Boat Rock Light (54046 8'N, 130048 o'    Tongass Island but is tortuous and obstructed and should be used
W), 46 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with    only with local knowledge Port Tongass is sometimes used as an
a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the SW end of the    anchorage but the bottom is hard and with wind and changing
rock                                                               tidal currents a vessel may drag her anchor and foul
                                                                    (82) The anchorage is 200 yards from the NE shore of the har-
 (73)  Craig Rock, near the middle of the bay and about 0 7 mile    bor E of Fort Point in about 20 fathoms hard bottom The flood
from the W  point of Tongass Island is awash at extreme low    current sets NW through the anchorage at about 1 knot The
water, with deep water all around It breaks in a heavy sea and is    anchorage may be entered by three channels The SE and SW
not marked by kelp                                                 entrances are described under Sitklan Passage
 (74)  Harry Bay, on the NW side of Nakat Bay, is deep and          (83)  The N entrance between Tongass Reef and the mainland is
exposed to the SE Slim Island is close to the W  shore at the      the one recommended and is the best entrance for vessels
entrance A boat passage is between the island and the mainland,    approachmg from W
but the island shore must be kept close aboard, because the W half   (84)  Sitklan Passage, except for its W entrance between Ton-
of the passage is foul A shoal with 6/4 fathoms over it is 0 4 mile    gass and Kanagunut Islands, is a deep narrow passage with steep
116ï¿½ from the S end of Shm Island Ledge Point on the E side of    wooded shores that extend ENE between the mainland and the
the entrance to the bay should be passed at a distance of 0 5 mile    NW shores of Kanagunut Island and Sitklan Island from Nakat
to clear the rocks off the point                                   Bay to Tongass Passage It forms the SE and SW approaches to
 (75)  Nakat Inlet extends in a N direction for about 8 miles      Port Tongass The E entrance of the passage from Tongass Passage
The shores are steep and heavily wooded to the water s edge The    is N of Point Mansfield This channel with depths of 16 to 42
main inlet is deep and affords no anchorage except near its head   fathoms is fairly straight and about 300 yards wide Dark Point,
The group of small wooded islands near the head of the inlet pro-    the turning point from Sitklan Passage into Port Tongass has a
vldes shelter for small craft Anchorage may be had in 8 to 13    bare rock about 5 feet high close-to
fathoms The inlet is clear of obstructions except near its head or  (85)  The W  entrance, on the S side of Tongass Island is
close inshore                                                      obstructed by rocks and kelp but is much used by small vessels




 84                                          4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN


 with local knowledge Strangers should use this entrance only      (94)  (See Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions in Pearse
 with small craft at high water All dangers in the passage are    Canal )
 marked by kelp A circular shoal with a least depth of 21/4 fathoms  (95)  Safa Islands, mostly wooded, are on the S side of the
 is about 0 6 mile NW of Tingberg Island in the W  entrance       channel off the entrance to Wales Harbor
 When rounding Katakwa Point, the SE extremity of Tongass           (96)  Fillmore Island forms the NW shore of Pearse Canal and
 Island, care should be exercised to favor the E shore of Port Ton-    Is separated from the mainland by Flllmore Inlet and Edward Pas-
 gass, which is steep-to and clear of dangers                     sage Several wooded islets are off its S shore Passage behind the
  (86)  Lincoln Channel is the narrow passage between Kanagu-    islets is not recommended except for small craft with local knowl-
 nut and Sltklan Islands It is very narrow at the N entrance with a    edge
 controlhng depth of 9 feet in nmdchannel In the S part of the chan-  (97)  Regina Cove indents the S shore of Fillmore Island about
 nel, about 0 2 mule N of the island in the bight, is a rock in mid-    2 miles from Male Point Anchorage IS available in the center of
 channel with 3/4 fathom over it A shoal with a depth of 1 fathom is   the bay in 14 fathoms, mud bottom A small shoal of 13/4 fathoms
 about 0 5 mile N from Garnet Point, the S extremity of Kanagu-    with deep water surrounding it, is near mudchannel about 0 2 mule
 nut Island                                                       off the entrance to the cove
  (87)  Kanagunut Island, low and heavily wooded, is frnged        (98)  Wales Harbour, on the British Columbia side of Pearse
 along its SW shore by rocky ledges that extend 200 to 700 yards    Canal, about 1 5 miles from Tongass Passage, affords good
 from the island                                                  anchorage m 14 to 18 fathoms, soft bottom, its entrance is some-
  (88)  Tongass Passage, between Sitklan and Wales Islands is a    what obstructed by islets and rocks, and only vessels with local
deep passage with steep shores that extends NW from Dixon    knowledge should attempt to enter it The usual anchorage is N of
Entrance It bends to the NE off the entrance to Sitklan Passage,    the larger island near the head of the harbor In entenng, follow the
separates Wales Island from the mainland, and forms the W        SW shore at a distance of about 200 yards until past the shoal in
entrance to Pearse Canal Tongass Passage is entered between    the entrance to the harbor
Haystack Island, a steep wooded islet, and Island Point, the SE    (99)  Three arms are at the head of the harbor the middle and
extrermty of Sitklan Island Rocks awash are about 300 yards W    largest opens out into a basin An island with an islet close SE of it
of Haystack Island From Bartlett Point, the W  extremity of    nearly closes the entrances to the W and middle arms the channel
Wales Island, to Phlpp Point, on the N shore of Wales Island    for enterinng them is W of the islands, but the chart is the best guide
about 1 mile NE of Bartlett Point, a rmdchannel course will lead    for navigating these waters
through deep water                                                 (loo) Wales Passage, between Pearse Island and Wales Island
  (s89)  Fillmore Inlet oins Pearse Canal on the Alaska side at the    on the British Columbia side of Pearse Canal, is free from mid-
SW end of Fillmore Island, and separates that island from the    channel dangers
mainland, it extends NE and is comparatively free to navigation,   (lo01) Winter Inlet, the entrance to which Is about 1 3 rmles NE
but there are numerous rocks and reefs close inshore The narrow    of the N entrance to Wales Passage, indents the NW shore of
entrance beyond the group of islets at the head of this inlet leads    Pearse Island It affords secure anchorage for small craft, the hold-
into two consecutive basins, each of considerable size The inlet    ing ground is good and there is ample swinging room in the wider
has no value as an anchorage                                     part The N shore is bold, except where small sandspits make out
  (90)  Willard Inlet is a narrow inlet that extends in a NW direc-    at the mouths of streams In entering favor slightly the S shore
tion from the NW side of Fillmore Inlet, about 1 5 miles N of    until past the first spit on the N side, and then keep the N shore
Male Point, the SW extrermty of Fillmore Island It is very nar-    close aboard when passing the bight on the S side to avoid a reef
row at the entrance, and the currents have great velocity, forming    that extends about 75 yards off a small wooded islet Ice forms in
swirls that extend well out from the mouth The times of high and    the harbor during winter, making It unsafe for small-craft shelter
low water inside the inlet are about 1 hour later than at other
places in the vicinity and the rise and fall about 2 feet less This  (102) Chart 17437, 17427 -Hidden Inlet, a narrow arm
inlet can only be entered at slack water and has no value as an    extends N into the mainland from Pearse Canal, about 8 miles S of
anchorage                                                        its junction with Portland Canal Hidden Point is on the NE side
 (91)  Edward Passage separates Fillmore Island from the    of the entrance to the inlet The entrance is less than 150 yards
mainland N and connects Fillmore Inlet with Pearse Canal The    wide, and the tidal currents through it set with a velocity of 8 to 10
passage is narrow, foul, and only navigable by small craft with    knots forming swirls that extend well into Pearse Canal The main
local knowledge                                                  body of the inlet is about 4 miles long, varying m depth from 30 to
 (92)  Pearse Canal is about 25 miles long (see chart 17420)    73 fathoms but there is only 21/2 fathoms at the entrance It can be
from Tongass Passage to its Junction with Portland Canal off Tree    entered only at slack water, and is of no value as an anchorage
Point, the N extremity of Pearse Island The British Columbia       (103) A rock with 2 fathoms over It is about 0 4 rmle S of Hid-
shore is formed by Wales Island and Pearse Island, and the    den Point Yelnu Islets are two wooded prominent islets on the W
Alaska shore by Fillmore Island and the mainland                 side of the Pearse Canal about 0 8 mile S of Hidden Point
 (93) The W entrance to Pearse Canal is to the S of a group of
heavily wooded islets about 0 8 mile SW of Male Point Pearse      (104) Charts 17427, 17425 -Portland Canal extends N from
Canal Island Light (54047 I'N, 130ï¿½36 5'W), 18 feet above the   its junction with Pearse Canal and Portland Inlet at Tree Point
water, is shown from a square skeleton tower with a white square    for about 57 miles to the towns of Hyder Alaska and Stewart,
daymark on the S point of the 150-foot island in the entrance to    B C The channel, clear and deep, has no dangers except for a rock
Pearse Canal A rock with 13/4 fathoms over It is 0 1 mile N of the    awash, about 0 2 rmle off the W (Alaska) shore, 2 3 miles above
light To enter from the W, pass in midchannel between this rock    River Point (55ï¿½34 2'N  130ï¿½08 2'W) It is reported that in the
and the southernmost of the islets S of Male Point A rocky shoal,    winter there are strong N blows in the canal and small boats often
covered 31/, fathoms is about 250 yards ESE of the light         ice up





                                             4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                    85


 (l05) Reef Island is close off the W  shore, abreast Spit    from N wmds A rocky ledge, which partly bares, extends N about
Point, at the entrance to Portland Canal Reef Island Light    75 yards from Green Islets The S part of the cove is shoal for
(55ï¿½04 7'N  130ï¿½12 2'W) 19 feet above the water, is shown from    about 175 yards offshore A fair anchorage with sufficient swing-
a spindle with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the S    ing room may be found in 13 fathoms 0 2 rmle from Green Islets
end of the island                                                  and the same distance from the E shore Small craft can anchor
 (106) Harrison Point, high and bold, is 2 5 miles N of Reef    closer inshore
Island Dickens Point, on the E shore is about 4 5 miles N of Spit    (120)  Cliff Point, on the W  shore, is about 3 3 miles above
Point A black rock 8 feet high, is close S of Dickens Point and a    Green Islets Verdure Point, about 4 5 miles N of Cliff Point, is
drying ledge extends a short distance from it                      conspicuous when the maple trees bloom
 (107) Sandfly Bay, on the W shore abreast Dickens Point, 14 5      (121) Lion Pomt, on the E shore about 3 rmles below the head
miles above Hidden Inlet has no value as an anchorage Stopford    of the canal is low and wooded and has a grassy flat in front The
Point, bold and conspicuous, Is on the E shore about 3 miles    bight in the shore just S of Lion Point is filled by a flat that bares
above Dickens Point                                                The Marmot River flows through a valley that trends to the E
 (0os) Halibut Bay, free of hidden dangers is on the W shore of     (122)  There is a government landing float at Marmot Bay, 0 5
Portland Canal, about 4 miles above Sandfly Bay Its shores are    mile northeastward of Lion Point, with a depth of 18 feet along-
generally bold, but on each side near the entrance are sandy    side at the southern end and 9 feet at the northern end
beaches with shoals that extend 80 yards offshore, and low grassy
land running 100 yards back Near the head of the bay extensive    Portland Canal, ar        e separated by the Reverdy Mountains (see
                                                                   Portland Canal, are separated by the Reverdy Mountams (see
flats, which bare make out from the W  shore almost all the waydge of bare mountains, of which Mount
across leavming a narrow channel close to the E side, through which
5 feet can be gaed to a narrow cbasne 2l to 4 fatheoms sdeep and    Dolly, the southernmost peak, 5,475 feet high, is conspicuous to
5 feet can be carned to a narrow basin 2 to 4 fathoms deep and
                 ~suitable only~for small craft                    the manner Throughout the year the discoloration of the water
                                                                   caused by the discharge from the Bear and Salmon Rivers extends
 (109) Hahbut Bay affords anchorage for vessels m the middle of    as far  as Glac
the bay m 10 fathoms, about 0 2 mile above Astronomical Point,    a r Sa          ier on (54 2 m l
the NE point at the entrance, and abreast a rocky pomt at the N end  (124)  Salmon River empties on the W  shore about 2 miles
of the sand beach on the W side, where the anchorage Is 450 yards    below Bear River Extensive fats make out m a fan shape from the
wide  also 700 yards farther up abreast the N end of the sand    mouth of Salmon Rlver, the N part extends about halfway across
beach on the E side in 10 fathoms, where the anchorage is 300    the canal, these flats are covered at high water and are steep-to
yards wide                                                         The E edge of the flats Is marked by buoys and a hlight Stewart
 (110)  Logan Pomt, on the E shore,                                Light (55054 7'N, 129ï¿½59 4'W), 12 feet above the water is
Pomnt                                                              shown from a square skeleton tower on the E side of the canal
 P(1t1)  Camp Pont on the W  shore about 4 5 miles NE of the    opposite Eagle Point, the N entrance point of Salmon River It is
 entrance to Halibut Bay IS wooded and precipitous                 reported that in the winter the mouth of the Salmon River freezes
entrance to Halibut Bay is wooded and precipitous
 (112)  Hattie Island, inm mdchannel about 6 miles above Halibut
Bay is about 700 yards long and has some stunted brush growing       (125) Bear Rver flows through an extensive wooded fat at the
on It Hattie Island Light (55017 2'N, 129058 4' W) 21 feet    head of Portland Canal The channels are subject to change during
above the water is shown from a pole with a slatted orange circu-    freshets The flats at the mouth uncover for 800 yards and are
lar daymark on the W side of the island Belle Bay, the bight E of    steep-to It is reported that they are slowly extending
Hattie Island, does not afford anchorage                            (126) Hyder, on the Alaska side of the boundary is a commu-
 (113)  Car Point Is on the E shore about 3 5 miles NW of Belle    nity occupying the flats off the mouth of the Salmon River and
Bay About midway between Car Point and Belle Bay are three    extends up the valley A 1 252-foot-long trestle with a small dock
conspicuous landslides                                             at its outer end extends SE over the mudflats from Eagle Point,
                                                                   which separates Portland Canal and the entrance to Salmon River
 (114)  Chart 17425 -Breezy Point (5521 5'N, 130002 3'W),    A 150-foot-long small-craft float with a seaplane float at its outer
about 5 miles N of Camp Point on the W  shore, Is conspicuous      end extends SW from the dock, the community operates the floats
Bluff Point, on the E shore, about 1 5 miles NE of Breezy Point,    A small-boat harbor with a seaplane fload and a launching ramp is
terminates in a high bold cliff                                    just NE of the trestle A buoy marks the entrance to the harbor In
 (us)  Tombstone Bay, on the W  side of Portland Canal about    June 1976, depths of 14 to 20 feet were reported along the NW
7 5 miles above Hattie Island, affords a temporary anchorage for    and SE sides of the 150-foot small-craft float A yacht club on the
small craft in 8 fathoms near the head of the N bight              W side of the canal between Hyder and Stewart has several floats
  (116) Maple Bay, on the E (Bntish Columbia) side of Portland    and finger piers
Canal, 8 miles above Hattie Island affords fair anchorage for       (127) Limited marine supplies, gasoline, diesel fuel, aviation
small craft, 300 yards from the S side in 7 to 8 fathoms In 1977, a    gasoline water provisions, and minor small-craft repairs can be
rock awash was reported about 150 yards offshore on the S side of    obtained in Stewart
the bay near the entrance                                            (128) Hyder, and Stewart, B C, about 2 mnules to the N  are con-
  (117)  Turn Point, on the W  side of Portland Canal, about 9 5    nected by a shore road that leads about 370 miles farther N to a
miles above Hattie Island, is 0 5 mile wide                        junction with the Yukon Province Highway 1 (ALCAN Highway)
  (I18)  Green Islets, two small wooded islets on the E side about    Seaplane service to Ketchikan is available, as well as telephone
21 5 miles above Hattie Island are connected with the shore by a    and radiotelephone communications with other cities in Alaska
short spit that bares                                              and Bntlsh Columbia
  (119) Fords Cove, on the E shore Just N of Green Islets, Is a      (129) Stewart Is a settlement on the Bntish Columbia side at the
bight in the shore affording fair shelter from S winds but none    head of Portland Canal Mining is the principal industry






86                                           4. DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN


 (130) Anchorage may be had in 25 to 30 fathoms near the head    through April. At the S entrance to the channel, advection fog is a
of the canal, about 550 yards off the E shore and about 450 yards S    problem, particularly from July through September. Throughout
of the flat fronting the mouth of Bear River, with the light marking    most of the channel and in Tongass Narrows, visibility is worst
the edge of the flat E of Eagle Point, bearing 229ï¿½. The holding    during the winter. At Ketchikan visibility drops below 1 mile on
ground is good, soft mud, but the anchorage is unprotected, being    up to 8 days each winter month, and 3 to 6 days of fog occur from
exposed to N and S winds that draw through the canal. Vessels    July through September. The waters around Mary Island are con-
should use caution in this area because the flat uncovers only at    sistently the most foggy. April, May, and June are the most fog-
low water and is very steep-to.                                   free months in the channel.
 (131) Numerous piles, the remains of the approaches to two
former wharves, are on the mudflats at the head of the canal.       (143) Chart 17434.-Boat Harbor, about 2.7 miles NW of Cape
 (132) The waters of Portland Canal in the vicinity of Stewart are    Fox (54ï¿½46.2'N., 130050.0'W.), is a small cove forming a poor
a seaplane operating area.                                        shelter for boats. It is badly exposed to SW. Two small wooded
 (133)  Currents.-In Pearse Canal the current has a maximum       islets are at the entrance, and the best passage for small boats is
velocity of 2.8 knots, diminishing toward the head of Portland    between these islets. Near the middle of the N entrance is a rock
Canal. (See Tidal Currents Tables for daily predictions of places in    that bares 5 feet.
Pearse and Portland Canals.)                                        (144) Tree Point Light (54ï¿½48.2'N., 130ï¿½56.0'W.), 86 feet
 (134) Stewart has a small hospital with a resident doctor and    above the water, is shown from a 66-foot white square tower on a
nurse in attendance; X-ray facilities are available.              building on Tree Point, 4 miles NW of Cape Fox.
 (135) Supplies.-Provisions in limited quantities can be           (145) Tree Point, low and timbered, has a rocky and steep-to
obtained. Gasoline, diesel fuel, stove oil, and aviation gasoline can    shore. The shoreline from Cape Fox to Tree Point is very irregular
be procured by tank truck by prior arrangement with two local oil    and studded with many wooded islets and bare rocks. Because of
companies; water is also available,                               the irregular bottom and inshore dangers this section of the coast
 (136)  Communications.-Radiotelephone and telephone ser-    should be given a berth of not less than 0.5 mile. The small bight
vices are available: A vessel makes regular calls, and an airline    at Tree Point affords no shelter from S seas. Humpy Point is 1
and ferries maintain regular service to and from Prince Rupert,    mile N of Tree Point.
with connections to other coastal points.
                                                                     (146) Foggy Point, about 7.5 miles N of Tree Point, is a low,
                                                                   rocky, wooded peninsula marked by a light.
 (137) Chart 17420.-Revillagigedo Channel and Tongass Nar-    rocky, wooded peninsula marked by a light
                                                                     (147)  The coast from Tree Point to Foggy Point is clear of dan-
rows (chart 17428) are connecting bodies of water that have a
combined length of about 53 miles from their junction with Dixon    gers except close inshore. A rock awash is about 0.6 mile N of
Entrance at Tree Point Light   to their junction with Clarence Strait    Foggy Point. Other kelp-marked rocks are SE of this rock.
                                                                     (148) Local magnetic disturbance.-Extreme magnetic distur-
at Guard Islands Light. On their S side they connect with Clarence
Strait through Felice Strait and Nichols Passage. Revillagigedo    bances exist SE of Duke Island. The magnetic compass should not
                                                                    be relied upon within the area outlined in magenta on the charts.
Island, separated from the mainland by Behm Canal, forms the
greater part of the N shore of the passages.                       (149) De Long Islands are a group of several low, wooded islets
 (138) Revillagigedo Channel extends in a general NW direction    2 to 3 miles NNW of Foggy Point. The bottom between them and
from Dixon Entrance for about 40 miles to Tongass Narrows, the    the mainland is exceedingly foul. Foul ground extends 0.7 miles
latter being a continuation of the channel, for 13 miles to Guard    SSE of these islands.
Islands. The dangers are shown on the charts. From its entrance to    (050) Kirk Point, about 4.5 miles NNW of Foggy Point, is a
Bold Island, Revillagigedo Channel is broad and comparatively    low, wooded peninsula. A kelp-marked reef, bare at low water, is
free of dangers; the rocks nearest the tracks of vessels show out of    about 550 yards W of the point. Heavy tide rips have been experi-
water and are readily distinguishable. Above Bold Island, the    enced during a SW blow in the vicinity of Kirk Point.
channel is narrow in places, but the principal dangers are marked   (151) Foggy Bay is a wide indentation in the shore between
by buoys and lights. No difficulty should be experienced in pass-    Foggy Point and Kirk Point. It is almost divided into two parts by
ing through in clear weather.                                     the De Long Islands and the foul ground that extends inshore from
 (139) Tides and currents.-The mean range of tide in Revilla-    them. The NW part of the bay is foul and seldom used.
gigedo Channel is about 13 feet and the diurnal range is about 15  (152) The S part of the bay is used considerably by fishing boats
feet. E of Duke Island the average velocity of the tidal current at    and affords safe anchorage for small craft in its SE and E ends.
strength of flood or ebb is about 0.5 knot. A set across the channel    Large vessels can obtain temporary shelter from S storms in the
is sometimes experienced in the vicinity of Twin Islands. Observa-    SE part of the bay, but the water is deep and the bottom lumpy.
tions taken in midchannel between Bold Island and Reef Point    Great caution must be exercised in entering in order to clear the
indicate that the current at that location sets NW most of the time    dangers which extend 0.6 mile N from Foggy Point, and also to
with a velocity up to 1 knot. The current in the channel is usually    give sufficient clearance to the submerged rocks and reefs that
too weak to be predicted.                                         extend 0.7 mile SE from the De Long Islands. As practically all
 (140) The tidal current in Tongass Narrows is weak; however,    the dangers are covered at high tide, it is recommended that this
currents of 2.5 and 3.0 knots have been reported in the vicinity of    bay be entered at low tide when the reefs are visible. Water may be
Idaho Rock. There is evidence of a weak NW nontidal drift. Cur-    obtained from a pipeline at the head of the bight in the SE corner
rents of an appreciable velocity are due to winds.                of the bay.
 (141) (See the Tidal Current Tables and Tide Tables for daily     (153) Excellent anchorage for small craft can be had in the E
predictions in Revillagigedo Channel and Tongass Narrows.)        head of Foggy Bay behind a large wooded island close to shore,
 (142) Weather-Because of its orientation, Revillagigedo Chan-    about 1 mile SE of the entrance to Very Inlet. Use the N entrance
nel is susceptible to the strong SE winds that blow from October    as the S opening bares at half tide.






                                             4. DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                    87


 (154)  Very Inlet, a narrow arm that extends NE, has its entrance    that extends NE for about 1.5 miles, where the ground rises
on the E side of Foggy Bay 2.2 miles N of Foggy Point. About 1.5    abruptly to the W point of a distinctive ridge running parallel to
miles inside the entrance, a branch extends in a SE direction. This    Boca de Quadra. The ridge has five distinct small peaks when
branch is very narrow for about 1 mile and then expands into a    viewed from the S along the coast; from other directions it shows
basin that has considerable foul ground and a number of small    from one to four tops. South Quadra Mountain is the highest
islets. The ebb current flows over the rapids in the narrowest part    point on the ridge.
of the branch for about 2 hours after low water. The passage has    (166) Ray Anchorage, a bight in the E side of Duke Island,
been made by a small vessel drawing 8 feet, but it should only be    affords shelter from S winds, but the bottom is hard and the
attempted at high-water slack. In entering, pass E of the ledge just    anchorage is open NE. Anchor about midway between the rocky
within the opening.                                                patch in the entrance to Morse Cove and the point about 0.6 mile
 (155)  At the head of Very Inlet is a small basin much used by    E, with the rocks bearing 2770 in 10 to 22 fathoms, rocky and hard
fishing boats. A branch, which can only be entered safely at high-    sandy bottom. Deeper water is nearer the rocks.
water slack, extends in a SE direction from the head of Very Inlet.  (167) Morse Cove, entered at the SW end of Ray Anchorage, is
The entrance is very narrow and, in the narrows, bares at low    a landlocked harbor with varying depths and mud bottom. The
water.                                                             entrance is very narrow and has a rock that bares 10 feet in the
 (156) The entrance to Very Inlet is between a reef awash at high    narrowest part, on the SE side of midchannel. The channel on the
water and a low wooded island. It is usually discernible during the    NW side of the rock is about 75 feet wide. Small craft with local
ebb by a strong current running out of the inlet. Favor the island    knowledge can enter, preferably at low water. The entrance chan-
shore in entering and keep in midchannel as far as the entrance to    nel from Ray Anchorage is on the SE side of the rocky patch in its
the first arm. Then pass midway between a large, wooded, round    entrance. Rocks awash are between the rocky patch and the W
islet and a small, grass-covered one, W of it. Just before entering    shore.
the narrows, favor the N shore slightly, then keep in midchannel.    (168) Reef Harbor is the indentation between Duck Islands,
Tide rips have been experienced about 0.5 mile SW from the    the reefs on the E, and the shore of Duke Island, S of Grave Point,
entrance to Very Inlet.                                            the N extremity of the island. It has depths of 24 to 26 fathoms,
 (157) House Rock, a small bare rock, is 0.3 mile 330ï¿½ from    mud bottom, but the swinging room is scant for the scope of chain
Kirk Point.                                                        required by this depth. Small craft may secure some protection
 (158) Black Rock Light (55001.4'N., 131 ï¿½03.6'W.), 55 feet    from S weather by anchoring as close as size permits in the lee of
above the water, is shown from a cylindrical house, on a pyrami-    Flag Point. Very small craft may use the wide part of the passage
dal skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark    between the two largest of the Duck Island group, but this anchor-
on the highest part of the rock, which is surrounded by kelp.      age is not secure in S weather.
 (159) Snail Rock, grass-topped and 28 feet high, is about 0.6      (169) Little Rock and Whale Rock are the extremities of a
mile NNE of Black Rock.                                            chain of rocks about 1 mile long, 2 miles NE of Grave Point. Bird
 (160) Between Black and Snail Rocks are numerous rocks, sub-    Island, about 1.5 miles WNW of Whale Rock, is about 20 feet
merged and awash, and the area should be avoided. A kelp patch    high and bare.
having a least depth of 11/2 fathoms is 0.5 mile 106 0 from Snail   (170)  Cat Island, Fripo Island, and Lane Island, between
Rock.                                                              Duke Island and Mary Island, are low and densely wooded. The
 (161) White Reef is an extensive white, shell-covered reef,    islands are surrounded by ledges that extend from 100 to 200
mostly covered at high water, about 2 to 3 miles NNE of Black    yards offshore. Small craft sometimes anchor off the middle of the
Rock in the entrance to Boca de Quadra. A rock, 5 feet high, is    W side of Cat Island, but there is little shelter.
near the N end of the reef.                                         (171) Danger Passage, between Cat and Mary Islands, is about
 (162) Kah Shakes Cove, a bight about 2 miles SE of the    350 yards wide between the 3-fathom curves and suitable only for
entrance to Boca de Quadra, is a good anchorage for small craft. A  small craft. It is reported that the shoals in the passage are marked
submerged rock is 175 yards from the E shore E of the center of    by kelp in the summer and fall.
the cove. Care must be exercised in entering the bight leading to    (172) Mary Island Light (55005.9'N., 131011.0'W.), 76 feet
Kah Shakes Cove. Numerous islets and rocks are on the S side of    above the water, is shown from a white square tower on a white
the entrance. Local knowledge is essential for entering and    building on the NE side of Mary Island. The island is compara-
anchoring in the cove. About 12 feet can be carried through the    tively low and densely wooded near the shores.
entrance channel between the rocky islets. The cove has excellent   (173) Mary Island Anchorage is a bight in the N end of Mary
holding ground in sticky mud.                                      Island between Point Winslow and Giant Point. It is a contracted
 (163) Bullhead (Bull Head) Cove, about 0.5 mile N of Kah    anchorage with fair shelter from SE and SW winds, but more
Shakes Cove, affords anchorage, but requires local knowledge to    room and better protection can be had in Custom House Cove.
enter. There is good holding ground in sand and mud; mooring    (See Felice Strait.) Ledges covered with kelp extend about 150
piles have been driven in the cove. In 1976, it was reported that    yards N of Point Winslow and Giant Point, and the entire S side of
the mooring piles were no longer visible. The inner part of the    the anchorage is shoal for 150 yards beyond the projection of the
cove is almost all bare.                                           shore. The approach is clear. Anchor in 12 to 15 fathoms, hard
  (164) Vessels too large to enter either Kah Shakes Cove or Bull-    sandy bottom.
head Cove can find fair protection in the bight between the coves.  (174) Twin Islands, two in number and low and wooded, are 1.8
The outer part of this bight is rough in heavy S weather; vessels    miles N of Mary Island. The NW and larger island is marked by a
should anchor as near the head as their drafts permit. The bottom    light on its NE side. Deep water is close-to in all directions, except
is sandy.                                                          for a submerged rock that is 250 yards N of the larger island.
  (165) Kah Shakes Point, on the S side of the entrance to Boca      (175) Boca de Quadra has its entrance on the E side of Revilla-
de Quadra, is the termination of a low, broad, wooded peninsula    gigedo Channel between Kah Shakes Point and Quadra Point,




88                                          4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN


about 6 miles E of Mary Island Light It extends NE to the flat that    anchorage Above Bactrlan Point, the main NE arm of Boca de
extends 0 8 mile from its head (See chart 17427 ) The sides are    Quadra is too deep for anchorage
steep-to and densely wooded, and there are no outlying dangers
 (176) Tides and currents -The mean range of tide in Boca de      (189) Chart 17434 -Slate Islands, on the NW side of the
Quadra is 12 7 feet, and the diurnal range is 15 feet Tidal currents    entrance to Boca de Quadra, are a group of four low, wooded
have an estimated maximum velocity of about 1 5 knots at the    islands with numerous intervemng rocks The three N islands are
entrance to Boca de Quadra, dimimmshing toward the head          almost connected at low water Slate Islands Light (55005 3'N
 (177) The preferred entrance Is between Slate Islands and White    131ï¿½03 2'W), 33 feet above the water, is shown from a spindle
Reef, following midchannel courses, passing on either side of Kite    with a red triangular daymark on the S end of the southernmost
Island, but preferably N of it                                   island of the group
 (178) Orca Point is on the E side of the inlet about 6 miles from  (190) The coast from Slate Islands extends N for about 6 rmles
the entrance                                                     to Point Sykes The shore is frminged by a number of islets and
 (179) Weasel Cove indents the N shore about 7 nmles from Kah    rocks A cove, about 1 2 miles S of Point Sykes, offers some pro-
Shakes Point, and affords anchorage in 17 to 19 fathoms, mud bot-    tection to small craft in moderate weather, but is not sufficiently
tom, about 0 5 mile above the E point at the entrance The    sheltered for use m heavy weather The best anchorage is m the lee
entrance and anchorage are clear but vessels must keep clear of    of the pomt on the S side of the cove m 8 to 10 fathoms, rock and
the flat that extends 700 yards from its head                    sand bottom
 (180) Badger Bay, separated from Weasel Cove by a promon-
tory, has 14 to 30 fathoms throughout its length and there is a    (191) Chart 17428 -Lucky Cove (55ï¿½12 7 'N  131015 9'W) is
small flat at its head                                           a small identatlon in the SW shore of Revlllaglgedo Island mid-
 (181) Kestrel Island, a small rocky islet close to the E shore, IS    way between Point Alava and Cone Island
about 1 5 miles SE of Orca Point Kite Island, low and wooded, is   (192) Hog Rocks, the easternmost of a chain of islands rocks
m the middle of the inlet about 2 5 miles SE of Orca Point       and reefs that extend SE about 4 miles from the shore of Annette
 (182) Vixen Bay, entered SW of Kite Island affords anchorage    Island, are two prncipal groups of rocks about 1 mile apart show-
at the head about 2 miles above the entrance In enterinng, the mai n ing about 6 feet at high water Hog Rocks Light (55010 7'N,
channel is W of Gannet Island Raven Island is close to the E     131017 0'W), 23 feet above the water, is shown from a truncated
shore 1 3 miles from Gannet Island Rocks, visible and sub-    concrete pyramid with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark
merged at various stages of the tide are S of and near Raven    on the SE rock of the group A ledge with 71/2 feet near its end
Island                                                           extends 0 3 mile SE from the light Good water is between the two
 (183) The anchorage Is between the rocks off Raven Island and    groups of rocks, and between the inner group and Walker Island
Gosling Island, which is at the head of the bay A ledge extends    By avoiding the rocks shown on the chart, small craft can pass
175 yards NW from the N end of Gosling Island Local knowledge    between Walker Island and Lewis Island, or between Lewis
is essential m anchoring near the head of the bay                Island and Ham Island
 (184) Anchorage for deep-draft vessels can be found about 0 3    (193) Ham Island, 2 rmles W of Hog Rocks Light 13 is low
mile S to SW of Kite Island m 20 to 30 fathoms, hard bottom      and densely wooded A deep channel is along the entire NE side of
                                                                  the island at an average distance from shore of 225 yards
 (185)  Chart 17427 - Mink Bay (55005 5 'N  130ï¿½43 4'W)           (194)  Cascade Inlet is a deep and narrow body of water
enters the S side of Boca de Quadra about 2 miles E of Kate Island,    between Ham and Annette Islands A narrow, crooked boat pas-
and has depths of 16 to 60 fathoms to near its head Cygnet    sage connects the inlet at its head with Revlllaglgedo Channel,
Island, low and wooded is on the W side of the entrance The nar-    small craft can find fair anchorage in midchannel in the broadest
row passage on the W  side of the island is frequently used by    part of this passage close to the W end of Ham Island
small craft A submerged rock is near midpassage about 100 yards    (195) Hassler Harbor, a bight on the N side of Annette Island,
S of the island Grouse Rock, which bares, is about 0 2 mile S    S of Bold Island, affords excellent shelter with good holding
from Cygnet Island, deeper water surrounds the rock A mooring    ground for small craft m SE gales A small grass-topped rock 10
buoy is about 200 yards S of Cygnet Island Anchorage may be    feet high is 0 2 mile W of Pow Island, which is in the bight An
found between Grouse Rock and Cygnet Island in 53/4 to 7 fath-    explosives anchorage is in Hassler Harbor (See 110 232, chapter
oms, off the old cannery site It is reported that the ruins of the old    2, for hmits and regulations )
cannery dock are no longer visible at the S end of the anchorage   (196) Bold Island, about 5 5 miles NW of Hog Rocks Light 13,
 (186) Humpback Creek enters from E about 0 8 mile from the    is in midchannel off the NE shore of Annette Island, between Reef
head of Mink Bay and caries a flat halfway across the channel A  Point and Harbor Point It is wooded and has several knolls
privately maintained mooring buoy is close N of the flat on the E    somewhat above the general level of the island The S shore of
side of the bay Above the flat is a secure anchorage, 0 3 mile    Bold Island is steep-to and has no off-lying rocks Shelter for
wide in 10 to 15 fathoms A flat extends 700 yards from the head    small craft may be found m the cove on the NE side of the island
of the bay Local knowledge is necessary to use this anchorage    Small boats sometimes moor to the dolphin near the head of this
 (187) Hugh Smith Lake empties through Sockeye Creek (chart    cove
17420) into the mlet about 0 3 mile N of the entrance to Mmk Bay   (197) Angle Point Light (55014 3'N, 131025 6'W ) 24 feet
A cabin is on the N bank at the head of Sockeye Creek A trail    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
leads from the inlet along Sockeye Creek to Hugh Smith Lake      white diamond-shaped daymark on the SW side of Bold Island
 (188) Marten Arm, entered about 1 5 miles N of the entrance to   (198) The passage N of Bold Island Is seldom used by large ves-
Mink Bay, has depths of 23 to 107 fathoms until near the flat that    sels Mastic Rock, marked by a daybeacon bares 2 feet and is
extends 0 7 mile from the head The arm is clear but has no    near the E end of this passage





                                             4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                    89


 (199)  The passage N of Round Island Is much used by local fish-    cove however, gasolihne, diesel fuel, provisions and repairs can be
ermen Numerous shoals are in this area, and passage should not    obtained m Ketchikan
be attempted without local knowledge                                (208)  The cove does not afford adequate protection during
 (200) Round Island, about 150 feet high and wooded, is about    severe weather, and boats should exercise caution when mooring
0 5 mile NE of the E end of Bold Island, with two wooded islets    overnight or for extended penods
between                                                              (209)  Cutter Rocks, two m number close together and uncover-
 (201) Thorne Arm has its entrance E of Bold Island and W of    mg 11 feet, are on the W side of the entrance to Carroll Inlet about
Cone Island Its general directlon is NNE, curving gradually to N   0 6 mile ESE from Mountam Point, they are marked by a hght A
The arm is free from outlying dangers Cone Island, dome-shaped    clear passage is between Cutter Rocks and Mountain Point
and wooded, is off Cone Point Washington Monument Rock,              (210)  Cahfornia Cove, on the W  side of Carroll Inlet and
0 5 mile SW of Cone Island, is covered 2 fathoms and surrounded    immediately E of Cahfornia Head, is a small open bight exposed
by much deeper water A number of small wooded islands are off    to the S The cove is deep except along the W  shore Two small
the W  shore of Thorne Arm near the head At the head of Thorne    wooded islets and a rock awash are close to the W shore
Arm In the cove E of Mop Point is a somewhat constricted             (211)  Gnat Cove Is on the E side of Carroll Inlet about 6 5 miles
anchorage in 18 to 20 fathoms, hard bottom Anchorage can also    above California Head and abreast Hume Island  A fair anchor-
be selected in the bight on the W side at the head between Snipe    age can be had off the entrance to the cove in 17 to 18 fathoms
Island and Mop Point m 25 to 30 fathoms soft bottom Small    soft bottom Foul ground extends 250 yards from the outer of two
craft may find shelter in the small cove NW of Snipe Island,    points at the S side of the entrance to the cove Small craft can find
between it and the adjoining small island A  mudchannel course    good moorage inside the cove by rafting up to the anchored log
leads safely through the arm and to the anchorages Private moor-    booms of a log storage area on the NE side of Gnat Cove Care
mg buoys are 2 2 and 2 5 males NE of Smpe Island                   should be taken, however to avoid the mudflats that extend from
 (202) Moth Bay is a narrow Indentation on the W  side of    the S shore and the rock ledges that extend into the SW bight of
Thorne Arm just inside the entrance In the middle of the entrance    the cove
to the bay is a small wooded islet and about 325 yards NW from       (212) In the main mlet between Gnat Cove and Island Point, a
its northernmost extremity is a smaller islet with a rock about 50    distance of 4 miles, there are depths of about 11 to 67 fathoms, and
yards to the SSW The preferred channel leads E of the islets Ves-    anchorage m suitable depth can be selected with the aid of a chart
sels up to 100 feet long can anchor in 20 to 24 fathoms rocky bot-    At its head the inlet narrows to 0 2 mile, with depths of 27 to 34
tom, about 0 4 mile above the smaller islet Swinging room is    fathoms, shoaling abruptly to the flat that extends about 0 7 mile
lirmted, and m SE weather vessels subject to yawing will find this    from the head
anchorage uncomfortable Small craft can find anchorage near the      (213) A midchannel course carnes safely to the flat at the head
head of the bay m 12 fathoms, soft bottom                          of the inlet, and also into Gnat Cove The only places requimng
 (203)  Coho Cove, about 1 2 miles W of Moth Bay and opposite    more than usual caution are the shoal opposite Spit Point about 1 2
the E end of Bold Island affords fair anchorage for small craft,    miles below Gnat Cove, and the area about 2 5 miles above Gnat
although the depths are great The best channel for entenng is on    Cove, abreast of Shoal Cove, where there Is a wooded islet 95 feet
the E side of the islet m the entrance                             high m the middle of the inlet, with a spur that extends 300 yards
 (204) Spire Island is small wooded, and about 150 feet high       from its NE side and a flat that extends 0 2 mile toward the islet
there is a small islet to the E close-to Spire Island Reef Light SI    from the mouth of a stream on the E side, E of the islet The S and
(55ï¿½16  'N, 131ï¿½30 O'W) 30 feet above the water is shown from    W sides of the Islet have a clear channel
a square, truncated concrete pyramid with a green square daymark     (214) In 1976, a logging camp was operating m the small cove
near the NE end of the reef that extends about 500 yards NE of    1 7 miles N of Shoal Cove rafting grounds extend from the S side
Spire Island The reef is covered 2 feet at its N end A l1/2-fathom    of the cove The logging camp maintains a float landing in the
rock is 0 3 mile WNW of the light Foul ground, with a dangerous    cove for small craft tugs, and float planes Water and gasoline are
rock awash at its end, extends W about 500 yards from the W end    available m an emergency Radlotelephone communications are
of the island                                                      available at the camp A 40-foot Coast Guard pier is at the S end
 (205)  Carroll Inlet has its entrance about 1 5 miles N of Spire    of the camp
Island Reef Light between Mountain Point and Carroll Point           (215)  George Inlet, joining Carroll Inlet from W  at California
The inlet extends N about 23 rmles California Head separates It   Head, extends N about 12 miles and has deep water throughout A
from George Inlet                                                  former cannery and wharf are on the W side of George Inlet about
  (206) Mountain Point Light (55017 6'N, 131ï¿½32 9'W), 29    3 5 miles above California Head In 1976 the wharf was in ade-
feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red    quate condition and the cannery buildings were being used for
and white diamond-shaped daymark on the SW tangent of Moun-    storage The stub pilings of a former wharf remain close N of the
tam Point                                                          present wharf, caution is advised m this area
  (207) Mountain Point is an unincorporated settlement on the        (216) Mahoney Bight, on the W  shore of the inlet 6 miles N of
point A launching ramp is on the point about 500 yards E of the    Cahfornia Head is good shelter for small craft except dunng SE
light Herring Cove is an unincorporated settlement on the shores    weather Its entrance is clear of dangers, with 10 fathoms leading
of Herring Bay, which indents the W shore of George Inlet about    into the inner bight, which has depths from 5 to 11 fathoms, hard
2 miles N of Mountain Point In the small cove 0 5 mile S of Her-    bottom
nng Bay locally known as Hole m-the Wall, the city of Ketchl-        (217) Midchannel courses lead safely through George Inlet pass-
kan maintains 493 feet of small-craft floats and a boat launchmg    mg W of Coon Island and Bull Island, two wooded islands off the
ramp In June 1976 depths up to 20 feet were reported alongside    E shore of the inlet about 8 2 and 9 7 miles respectively above
the floats Local regulations limit the maximnum size of vessels    Califorma Head Coon Island is identified by a large white quartz
using the floats to 65 feet Manne supphes are not available m the    outcrop showing on its S shoreline A privately maintained moor-






90                                           4. DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN


ing buoy is on the W  side of George Inlet about 1 mile NW of    steep-to, and the channel is clear if the island side is favored in the
Coon Island. The small cove close N of the mooring buoy is foul.  narrowest part of the channel. A lighted buoy is about 400 yards S
 (218) Coon Cove, in the E shore of the inlet opposite the S end    of the southernmost extremity of the island.
of Coon Island, offers good anchorage in 13 fathoms, mud bottom,    (229) Tongass Narrows West Channel Light 4 (55ï¿½19.1'N.,
S of the small tree-covered islet off the N shore, and is the best    131038.6'W.), 18 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
shelter in the inlet in SE weather. It is entered on a midchannel    tower with a red triangular daymark on the W  side of Pennock
course S of Coon Island.                                          Island.
 (219) The upper part of Coon Cove is a tidal flat. The S extrem-  (230) Radenbough Cove, on the NE side of and about 0.5 mile
ity of the flat is marked by prominent pilings. Small craft may find    S of the N end of Pennock Island, is S and directly across the
more convenient anchorage in 7 to 9 fathoms, soft bottom, just S    channel from Thomas Basin. Grids for vessels up to 30 feet long
of the pilings.                                                   are available in the cove.
 (220) Leask Cove, on the W  shore near the head of the inlet,     (231) Whisky Cove, on the E side of Pennock Island about 0.45
affords fair anchorage in depths of 10 to 15 fathoms, sand and    mile S of Radenbough Cove, is SW and directly across the chan-
gravel bottom, off the N shore of the cove. A prominent offshore    nel from the Coast Guard Base.
rock, bare at all stages of the tide, is on the E side of the entrance.  (232) Pennock Reef, 0.25 mile W  of the N extremity of Pen-
A shoal with a least depth of 2 fathoms is 400 yards NE of the W  nock Island, is small and bares at low water; a lighted buoy marks
side of the entrance.                                             the NW end of the reef. A shoal covered 2 fathoms is about 300
 (221) Bat Cove, just E of Leask Cove, affords excellent shelter    yards SE of the reef
for small craft, with anchorage at the head in 10 to 11 fathoms,
                                                                      (233) Foul ground extends about 200 yards N and about 400
mud bottom. The prominent offshore rock mentioned in the Leask
                                                                    yards NW, respectively, of the N and NW extremities of Pennock
Cove reference marks the W  side of the entrance to Bat Cove.
Hold close to the rock when entering the cove to avoid a rock    Island.
ledge, bare at low water, that extends one-third of the way across     234)  California Rock is a0.5 mile NW from in midchannel in the passage
                                                                    NE of Pennock Island and 0.5 mile NW from its SE end. The rock
the entrance from Bat Point on the E side.
                                                                    is small in extent, has 11/2 fathoms over it, and is marked by a
 (222)  Tsa Cove, on the E shore of the inlet NE of Bull Island, is    i small in extent, has  /2 fathoms over it, and is marked by a
                                                                    lighted buoy. A channel is on either side of the rock, but large ves-
difficult to enter but affords good shelter and anchorage in 10 to 14    lighted buoy. A channel is on  the side of the rock, but large es-
fathoms, mud and shell bottom. Small boats with local knowledge
enter between Bull Island on the SW and Granite Island on the       (235) Idaho Rock, covered 2 fathoms and marked by a lighted
NE, holding close to the Granite Island shoreline to avoid shoals    buoy, is 250 yards NNE of California Rock near the N side of the
that extend from the numerous rock islets off the NE end of Bull    passage.
Island.                                                             (236) Saxman is a small settlement in the bight indenting the
 (223) Small boats with local knowledge pass into Salt Lagoon    SW shore of Revillagigedo Island N of Idaho Rock and about 2
(chart 17420) at the head of the inlet, but only at or near high    miles SE of Ketchikan. The center of the settlement has a promi-
water slack. The entrance is very narrow, with dangerous rapids at    nent group of totem poles.
most stages of the tide.                                            (237)  A privately dredged basin protected on the S side by a
                                                                    breakwater is about 0.3 mile SE of Saxman; a row of breasting
 (224)  Chart 17428.-Tongass Narrows, a continuation of Revil-    dolphins is on the N side of the basin. A private light marks the W
lagigedo Channel, extends NW to Guard Islands in Clarence    end of the breakwater. In June 1976, the basin had a reported
Strait. The principal dangers are marked by buoys or lights, so that    depth of 10 feet. The basin is the site of a privately operated barge
no difficulty should be experienced in passing through in clear    and rail terminal. A loading ramp with an adjustable bridge at the
weather.                                                          head of the basin is used for handling containers to and from
 (225) The narrows is divided at its lower end by Pennock Island;    barges; two 25-ton forklifts are available. The terminal has four
the channel NE of the island is called East Channel locally, and    acres of open storage and 32,000 square feet of covered storage,
the channel SW of the island, West Channel. Both channels are    and is accessible from Ketchikan by highway.
good for vessels of any draft. Large vessels approaching Ketchi-    (238) The bight fronting Saxman N of Idaho Rock is used as a
kan from S usually pass through West Channel, since this gives    log raft storage area. Unlighted log rafts are frequently found close
them more turning room in making a port landing at the wharves.    to shore in this area; caution is advised.
A lighted buoy marks the edge of a shoal making out from the SW     (239)  Ketchikan (55020.5'N., 131038.7'W.), on the SW side of
side of West Channel. An isolated 91/2-fathom pinnacle rock is    Revillagigedo Island and on the E side of Tongass Narrows, is one
about 0.5 mile SSE from the southernmost extremity of Pennock    of the most important cities in Alaska. It is 659 miles from Seattle
Island.                                                           via the Inside Passage; 79 miles from the sea at Dixon Entrance
 (226) (See 162.240, chapter 2, for regulations governing naviga-    via Nichols Passage; 89 miles from Wrangell, and 220 miles from
tion in Tongass Narrows.)                                         Juneau.
                                                                     (240) Ketchikan has oil terminals, a sawmill, a cannery, and cold
 (227) Chart 17430.-Potter Rock, about 0.7 mile ESE of the E      storage plants, and is the distributing point and center of the com-
end of Pennock Island, is small, has 21/2 fathoms over it, and is    mercial, logging, and fishing industries of this part of southeastern
marked by a lighted bell buoy on its S side. A 71/4-fathom shoal is   Alaska.
about 0.2 mile SSE from the rock.                                   (241) The deepest draft of commercial vessels calling at Ketchi-
 (228) Pennock Island, which divides Tongass Narrows at its    kan was 34 feet in 1976. Commodities handled at the port include
lower end, is generally wooded. Several rock patches are 250 to    petroleum and petroleum products, fish and fish products, logs and
400 yards from shore around the SE end of the island. Other than    lumber products, wood pulp, chemicals, provisions, and general
the dangers previously mentioned, the S shore of the island is    cargo.






                                            4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                 91


 (242) Prommnent features -The bumldmgs of Ketchlkan Coast        (251) Tides and currents -At Ketchikan the mean range of tide
Guard Base at the S end of the waterfront the 410-foot tower,    is 13 feet and the diurnal range 15 4 feet There is usually a direct
NW of Bar Point the aerobeacon and gray-green gravel slopes of    current or eddy setting W along the face of the wharves (See the
the auirport, WNW of Bar Point, and a high yellow hotel and green    Tide and Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions at Ketchlkan )
condominium, close N and NE of Bar Point, respectively are    For this reason all large vessels make a port landing, those from
prominent                                                        the S frequently using West Channel, which is marked by a light
 (243) Channels -A Federal project provides for two small-craft    and buoys and making the necessary turn around the W end of
basins at Ketchukan Thomas Basin at Ketchikan Creek, with a    Pennock Island
project depth of 10 feet, and Bar Point Basin off Bar Point, with a  (252) Weather-This port has about 244 cloudy days a year, and
project depth of 15 feet in the NW section and 10 feet in the SE    rain falls on the average of about 236 days annually October is the
section                                                          wettest month it holds the 24-hour rainfall record of more than 7
 (244) Thomas Basin, the small craft harbor off Ketchikan    inches The marnne nature of the climate is evident by the fact that
Creek, is protected on its W side by a log boom, and on the S side    the umnimum temperature falls below freezing on about 76 days a
by a stone breakwater The harbor is entered from the S through a    year Moscow, at approximately the same latitude, records mil-
75-foot opening between the W log boom and the breakwater on    mum temperatures below freezing on about 170 days annually
the S a hght marks the entrance In January 1987, the basm had a    Winds are prevalent from the SE, and gales are mfrequent in this
controlhng depth of 10 feet except for shoahng to 51 feet at the    sheltered port Calm conditions are frequent (See page T-2 for
mouth of Ketchikan Creek between Floats 1 and 1A The city-    Ketchlkan clhmatological table)
operated floats in the basm have water and metered electricity, 80-  (253) Pllotage, Ketchlkan -Pilotage except for certain
foot and 65-foot grids are available Fuel can be obtained at the    exempted vessels, is compulsory for all vessels navigating the
faclhties just N of the Coast Guard base The U S Fish and Wild-    inslde waters of the State of Alaska (See Pilotage, Alaska,
life Service maintams a float for its own use on the N side of the    indexed as such chapter 3 for details )
basin behind the Federal Buflding                                  (254) Vessels en route Ketchikan via Clarence Strait, from the S,
 (245) The basm is controlled by a harbormaster, who maintains    meet the pilot boat about 1 mile NW of Guard Islands Light
an office at BarPointBasm  Local regulations hmnt the maximum    (55026 8'N, 131052 9'W), via Clarence Strait from the N, about 1
size of vessels using the basin to 80 feet in length and 9 feet in    mileEofPoit McCartey Lght(550068N  13142 4W)
draft A 3-knot and 'no wake" speed limit is enforced in the        (255) The pilot boat a tugboat, can be contacted by calling
basim                                                             KETCHIKAN PILOT BOAT  on VHF-FM channels 16, 13, or
 (246) Bar Point Basin, locally called Bar Harbor, is a small-    12
craft harbor off Bar Point about 1 35 miles NW of Thomas Basin     (256) Towage -Tugsup  to,800hoperatingoutofKetchskan
The harbor is protected on its W si de by a detached floatin g break-    available for assistance i docking and undockig They are
water, on its S side by a detached floating breakwater and arrangements
                                                                 equipped with VHF-FM channels 16 13 and 12 Arrangements
detached stone breakwater and on Its SE side by another stone
breakwater The harbor has three entrances which are marked by    for tugs should be made well in advance through ships' agents
lights and daybeacons The SE entrance is between the stone        (257)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural
breakwater and the detached stone breakwater The SW entrance    quarantine -(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections and
is between the two detached floating breakwaters, and the NW     appendix for addresses)
entrance IS N of the northernmost detached floating breakwater In  (258) Quarantine is enforced i accordance with regulations of
January 1987, the basm had controlling depths of 9 /2 feet in the E    the U S Publc Health Service (See Publc Health Service, chap-
half and 14 feet in the W half with lesser depths along the N side    ter 1) Contract hospital space is available i a private hospital i
The city-operated floats in the basin have water and metered elec-    an emergency
tncity Fuel can be obtamed at the oil faclhties just N of the Coast  (259) Ketchikan is a customs port of entry
Guard base A surfaced launchmg ramp and float are at the N end     (260)  Coast Guard -Captain of the port and manne mspection
of the basin                                                     functions at Ketchikan are handled by the Coast Guard Marine
                                                                  Safety Detachment at the Ketchikan Coast Guard Base at the SE
 (247) The basm Is under the control of a harbormaster, who
maintains an office at the NE corner of the basin Local regula-    end of the waterfront (See appendix for addresses)
                                                                   (261) Harbor Regulations -Local regulations require that ves-
tions hmit the maximum size of vessels usmg the basin to a length
                                                                  sels hlmut their speed to 5 knots when passming the waterfront area
bof 80 eet A 3-knot and 'no wake' speed hnut is enforced m the    Harbor regulations are enforced by the harbormaster, who mamn-
                                                                  tams an office at Bar Point Basin A copy of the regulations per-
  (248) Anchorage off Ketchlkan is liurted by the cable and pipe-    taming to speed and other matters may be obtained from the
line areas that extends NW through Tongass Narrows Scan the    harbormasters office  The harbormaster can be contacted on
chart carefully for limits of cable and pipeline areas before    VHF-FM channels 16 and 73, or by telephone (907) 225-3610
attempting to anchor The anchorage is secure for all but the heavi-  (262) Wharves -The Port of Ketchlkan has about 3 miles of
est winter gales, the confined channel admits no sea, and the tidal    developed waterfront on the E side of Tongass Narrows All the
currents do not exceed 1 5 to 2 knots                            wharves are privately owned The alongside depths for the facili-
  (249) (See 162 240, chapter 2, for regulations govermng navlga-    ties described are reported, for information on the latest depths
tion m Tongass Narrows)                                          contact the operator For a complete description of the port faclh-
  (250) The harbor area along the Ketchikan waterfront between    ties refer to Port Series No 38, pubhshed and sold by the U S
Thomas Basin and Bar Point is a safety zone (See 165 1 through    Army Corps of Engineers (See appendix for address )
165 7, 165 20 through 165 23, and 165 1705, chapter2 formlunts    (263) Chevron U S A  Ketchikan Wharf (55ï¿½20'01"N
and regulations                                                  131ï¿½37'33"W) 75 yards NW of Ketchikan Coast Guard Base,





92                                            4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN


283-foot face, depth alongside, 40 feet, deck height, 22 feet,       (276) Ketchikan Ferry Terminal Dock (55021'15"N
marked at each end by a pnvate light, receipt of petroleum prod-    131ï¿½41'34"W) 275 yards SE of Sunny Pomt, 140-foot face, 35-
ucts, plpelihnes to storage tanks, 6 metered hoses for fueling small    ton transfer bridge, depth alongside 35 feet, passengers and vehl-
craft, owned and operated by Chevron U S A, Inc                    cles, owned and operated by the State of Alaska
 (264) Chevron U S A  fuel float adjacent to the SE of main         (277) Ketchikan Airport and Metlakatla Terminal Slip
wharf, 160-foot face, depth alongside, 40 feet, 21 metered hoses    (55ï¿½21'17"N, 131ï¿½41'28"W) 120 yards E of the main ferry pier,
for fueling small craft, owned and operated by Chevron U S A,      five dolphins and a 35-ton transfer bridge, depth alongside 18
Inc                                                                feet, passengers and vehicles, owned by the State of Alaska and
 (265)  Union Oil Co Wharf 100 yards NW of Standard Ofil Co        operated by the Alaska Division of Marine Transportation and the
Wharf, 115-foot face, depth alongside, 65 feet, deck height, 221/2    city of Ketchikan
feet, receipt of petroleum products plpehnes to storage tanks, 2     (278) Sunny  Point  Cannery  Wharf  (55ï¿½21'18"N
metered fuel hoses for fueling small craft, owned and operated by    131ï¿½41'47"W) at Sunny Pomt, 195-foot face, depth alongside 30
Umon Oil Company of Calfornia                                      feet, deck height, 29 feet, NW corner marked by a light storage of
 (266) Union Oil Co fuel floats adjacent to the NW of main    fishung supplies, owned and operated by New England Fish com-
wharf, two floats each having an 86-foot face, depths along the    pany
inner sides are 15 feet and along the outer sides, 50 feet, each     (279) Ketchikan Transportation Company Pier (55ï¿½21'32"N,
float has eight metered hoses for fueling small craft, owned and    131ï¿½41'54"W) 450 yards NW of Sunny Point, 70-foot face, depth
operated by Union Oil Company of Califorma                         alongside, 10 feet, 4,000 square feet of covered storage forklifts
 (267)  Kanaway Seafoods Wharf (55020'11"N, 131ï¿½37'50"W)           with a capacity up to 4 tons, receipt and shipment of general
650 yard NW of Coast Guard Base, 462-foot face, E side 80 feet    cargo, operated by Ketchlkan Transportation Company
long, W  side 124 feet long, depth alongside, 26-30 feet, deck       (280)  Supphes -Provisions, and marinne and fishung supplies are
height, 22 feet, total berthing space, 422 feet, receipt of seafood,    available m Ketchlukan The three oil company terminals near the
and icing fishing vessels owned and operated by Kanaway Sea-    SE end of the waterfront have fuelhng floats for small craft m addl-
foods Co                                                           tion to wharf space for fuehng larger vessels Gasoline, diesel fuel
 (268)  Mobil Oil Corp Wharf (55020'13"N, 131ï¿½37'57"W) 700    diesel oil, distillates and lubricating oil and greases can be
yards NW of Coast Guard Base 50-foot face with 110-foot barge    obtained at these terminals Only diesel oil is available in Ketchl-
moored along face, depth alongside, 30 feet, deck height, 22 feet,    kan for large vessels Most of the wharves can provide water ice
pipelines to storage tanks, 12 metered hoses on barge for fueling    for fishing vessels can be obtained at the cold storage company
small craft, owned and operated by Mobile Oil Corp                 wharves
 (269) Totem Packing Co Wharf (55ï¿½20'17"N, 131038'06"W)             (281) Repairs - The Ketchikan Shipyard Facility is located in
200 yards SE of Thomas Basin, 170-foot face, depth alongside, 30    the Tongass Narrows adjacent to and NW of the Ketchikan Ferry
feet, deck height 22 feet, receipt of salmon, owned and operated    Terminal  The facility has a floating drydock over 1 000 feet of
by Totem Packing Co  Inc                                           deep water moorage, a fabncation shop pierside utilities and ship
 (270)  Port of Ketchikan, City Dock No  1 (55020'25"N,    support services  The floating drydock has a clear breadth
131038'47"W)  460-foot face, depths alongside, 35 to 40 feet,    between fenders of 107 feet a depth over blocks of 19 feet fully
deck height, 211/2 feet, general cargo, ferries, and cruise vessels,    Immersed, and a capacity of 9 600 tons The facility is the largest
owned and operated by the city of Ketchikan                        shipyard in Alaska and serves primarily larger vessels  Several
 (271)  Port of Ketchikan, City Dock No 2 100 yards NW of the    machine shops and repair firms along the waterfront can provide
city dock No  1, 540-foot face, depths alongside 40 to 60 feet,    hull engine electrical, and electronic repairs The largest shaft
deck height, 211/2 feet, owned and operated by the city of Ketchlu-    that can be produced by local machine shops is 30 inches by 16
kan                                                                feet Divers for underwater repairs and salvage work are available
 (272)  Five Star Seafoods Floats (55020'39"N  131039'07"W)        in Ketchlkan Engine spare parts are stocked by several of the
0 5 mile NW of Thomas Basin 400 feet of anchored floats, depth    local repair firms Spare parts not available locally can be ordered
alongside 30 feet loading of supplies to vessels, owned and oper-    by air freight
ated by Five Star Seafoods Co                                        (282)  Small-craft facilities -The city of Ketchlkan maintams
 (273) Talbot s Building Supply Wharf (55ï¿½20'43"N ,    several small-craft facilities in addition to Thomas Basin and Bar
13 1039'23"W) 0 7 mile NW of Thomas Basin, 356-foot face,    Point Basin, which were previously descnbed in this chapter
depth alongside, 35 feet, deck height, 24 feet, receipt and ship-   (283) Ryus Float 525 yards NW of the entrance to Thomas
ment of building supplies and general cargo, owned and operated    Basin and immediately N of Ketchikan City Dock No  1 125 feet
by Talbot's Inc                                                    of berthing space, 60 feet alongside hlimted to craft up to 80 feet
 (274)  E C Phillips & Son Pier (55020'52"N, 131039'56"W)          long, 4-hour limit alongside for loading and unloading and no
500 yards E of Bar Point, 232-foot face, 272 feet E and W  side,    vessels are permitted to tie-up when a cruise vessel is docked at
depths alongside, 30 feet, deck height, 24 feet, receipt of fish, W  Ketchikan City Dock No 1
side also used to ice fishing vessels, owned and operated by E C     (284) Hanson Float  290-foot concrete float on W  end of City
Philips and Son, Inc                                               Dock No 2, limited to craft up to 100 feet with a reported depth
 (275) Boyer Alaska Barge Line Terminal Fuel Dock and Barge    alongside of 20 feet in 1994
Ramp (55ï¿½21'15"N , 131ï¿½41'18"W)  500 yards SE of Sunny               (285) City Float 875 yards NW of the entrance to Thomas
Point, four dolphins and a transfer bridge, it dries at low water,    Basin, consists of a main NE-SW pier with two spur floats that
receipt and shipment of general cargo and logging supplies,    extend NW from It 1,680 feet of berthing space with depths of 20
receipt of petroleum products, owned and operated by Boyer    to 60 feet alongside limited to craft up to 80 feet long or as other-
Alaska Barge Line, Inc                                             wise posted, water and metered electricity available






                                             4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                    93


 (286)  Small-craft gnds are available in Thomas Basin and Bar    and has steep shores Smoke from the pulpmill on the N side of the
Harbor, city-operated boat launching ramps are at the N end of    cove is prominent from the entrance, at times it extends from Pen-
Bar Point Basin 12 7 miles N of the town at Knudson Cove, 5    msula Point to Rosa Reef Bolles Ledge, near the head and about
miles SE of the town at Mountain Point, and 6 9 miles E of the    250 yards off the E shore, is covered by a least depth of  l/? fath-
town at Hole-m-the Wall                                            oms A long log boom extends from the NE end of the pulpmill to
 (287) Communications -Ketchikan has regular passenger             the ledge East Island is a wooded islet off the NW side of the
express, and freight service to Puget Sound ports, Bntish Colum-    entrance At times the N side of the entrance and the entire cove
bra, and other Alaska ports and towns by water and air The    may become constricted by logs that are normally stored along
Alaska State Ferry System has daily ferry service during the sum-    both sides of the cove Floating logs and deadheads also may be
mer to Pnnce Rupert B C, Sitka, Wrangell, Petersburg, Juneau,    encountered in the cove and off the entrance, caution is advised A
Hames and Skagway, and weekly service to Seattle This sched-    midchannel course leads safely into the cove and there are no
ule is less frequent duning the winter In addition to the scheduled    known dangers other than those mentioned
airlines other air services operate from Ketchlkan on a charter     (298) Note In August-September 1983, hydrographic surveys
basis                                                              revealed general shoaling throughout Ward Cove with depths 1 to
 (288)  A highway parallels the Revillaglgedo shore of Tongass    3 fathoms less than charted
Narrows It extends from Hernng Bay to Settler's Cove, about 3 3      (299)  Anchorage may be had in 15 to 20 fathoms 0 1 mile NE of
miles NE of Knudson Cove in Clover Passage                         East Island Small craft often tie up to the anchored log booms m
 (289)  Telephone and radiotelephone commumcations are avail-    the cove
able with the other States and parts of Alaska                       (300) A cannery is on the SE shore 0 7 mile from the head of the
 (290)  East Clump is a wooded point on the S shore of Tongass    cove The wharf has a 150-foot face with a depth of 40 feet along-
Narrows opposite Bar Point East Clump Light 7 (55020 7'N,          side, deck height is 25 feet Water and electricity for fishing ves-
131041 2'W) 15 feet above the water, is shown from a square    sels may be obtained The cannery is owned and operated by Ward
frame structure with a square green daymark on the E extrermty of    Cove Packing Co  Fuel and marine supplies are available In
the islet
 (291) Sunny Pomt, on the N shore of the narrows about 0 7 rmle
NNW of East Clump Light 7, is the site of an abandoned canner        (301)  The Ketchlkan Pulp Company Wharf on the NW side of
and wharf The faciluhteis at Suiny Poit were described earliery i  the cove, has an 800-foot face, with depths of 20 to 40 feet along-
and wharf The facilities at Sunny Point were described earlier in
                 ths chapter under 'Wharves for Ketchkan The cannery wharf  side The NE end of the wharf had shoaled to less than 6 feet in
                                                                 ' 1983 vessels should not moor at the NE one-third of the wharf
marked at the end by a light, extends across the flats to deep water,
                 the center of the channel    Tongass Narrows s only about 125    Deck height is 24 feet One 35-ton gantry crane, one 30- and two
yards off It is reported that idal currents form an eddy off Char-    40-ton mobile cranes and six 5-ton lift trucks are available The
coal Pot, 200 yards NNW oft Sunny Poot, tending thato set vessels dlwharf is used for receipt of wood chips, caustic soda, and fuel oil
coal Point, 200 yards NNW of Sunny Point, tending to set vessels
off the wharf, caution must be exercised in coming alongside as
the strength of current is also unequal along the wharf and may    cargo The company is owned and operated by Louisiana-Pacific
cause a vessel to swing at bow or stern Vessels have struck the    Cor   Ketchikan Division
wharf several times                                                  (302) The Ketchikan Pulp Company Cant Barge Ramp on the
 (292) Ketchikan International Airport Is on the S side of the nar-    NE side of the cove and 800 feet E of the NE end of the pulp com-
rows opposite Charcoal Point A hexagon-shaped seaplane float is    pany wharf has a 240-foot face and four steel pile dolphins and a
moored about 140 yards N of the terminal building                  conveyor belt ramp with a usable berthing length of 390 feet The
                                                                   wharf has a 20-foot depth alongside The company is owned and
  (293) Chart 17428 -From East Clump NW for a distance of 2 5    operated by Lousana-Pacific Corp, Ketchlkan Division Barges
miles to Lewis Reef, shoals extend 50 to 200 yards from the S    are loaded by carts
shore of Tongass Narrows, but the channel is well marked by          (303) A car float used to load and unload railroad cars from
buoys                                                              barges is immediately SW of the pulp company wharf The float
  (294) Lewis Reef extends from the S shore at Lewis                hasa 100-foot face with 300 feet total berthing space, depth along-
Pomit about one-third the distance across Tongass Narrows and Is    side, 20 feet The float and wharf are connected by three sets of
bare at half tide Lewis Reef Light 11 (55022 5'N  131ï¿½44 2'W),    railroad tracks Waterborne commerce with Prince Rupert is car-
15 feet above the water is shown from a concrete pyramid with a    ned on
square green daymark on the SE edge of the reef                      (304)  Ward Cove is an umncorporated settlement on the high-
  (295)  Peninsula Point, about 0 4 mile N of Lewis Reef Light    way near the NW corner of Ward Cove
11, is the outer end of a neck of land built out from the N shore   (305) W of Ward Cove and near the N side of Tongass Narrows
The point is hard-topped and serves as a seaplane launching ramp   is a group of small islands partially wooded and rocks awash
A reef, marked at the N end by a buoy, extends about 200 yards    which are mostly surrounded by ledges These small islands pro-
NNW from the point, a 1/2-fathom depth is about 350 yards SE of    tect Refuge Cove from any swells that might be running in Ton-
the point                                                          gass Narrows The S side of the cove is clear Refuge Cove, an
  (296) Measured nautical mile -A 135ï¿½-315ï¿½ measured nauti-    unincorporated settlement is at the head of the cove A manna in
cal mile, about 0 8 mile NW of Lewis Reef Light 11 is along the    the cove has floats with a total berthing capacity of 3 500 feet in
Gravma Island shore opposite Ward Cove In 1976, the SE marker    length and a reported depth of 40 feet alongside The entrance to
was in poor condition                                              the cove is marked by a hght and daybeacons Water, electricity
  (297) Ward Cove, entered about 0 7 mile N of Pemnsula Point,    gasohne, some manne supphes storage and a launching ramp are
is on the N side of Tongass Narrows about 5 rmles NW of Ketchi-    available A 9-ton forklift that can handle craft up to 30 feet is
kan The cove is about 0 3 mile wide at the entrance wider inside,    available Some hull and engine repairs can be made Several prin-





94                                          4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN


vate small-craft floats are at the head of the cove, depths of 10 feet  (316) Charts 17434, 17424, 17422, 17420, 17423 -Behm
are reported alongside Water Is available on the floats          Canal borders the E, N, and W sides of Revillaglgedo Island, its E
 (306) Channel Island, about midchannel in Tongass Narrows    entrance, between Point Sykes and Point Alava, Is about 5 7
and W of the entrance to Ward Cove, Is wooded, and has a good    miles NNE of Mary Island Light The W entrance of the canal
passage on either side, but that on the S side is generally used A  between Point Hlggms and Caamano Pomt is about 2 miles N of
ledge extends 75 yards NE from the island Channel Island Light    Guard Islands Light, the distance from the E entrance to the W
14 (55023 7 'N, 131045 9'W), 24 feet above the water, is shown    entrance through Revillaglgedo Channel and Tongass Narrows is
from a skeleton tower on a concrete base with a triangular red day-    about 30 miles, the length of the canal from entrance to entrance is
mark at the W end of the island                                  about 100 miles The main channel of the canal is exceptionally
                                                                  free from dangers, with no submerged rocks or ledges that cannot
 l(307) Ohio Rbk, with 31/ fathoms over t and marked by and      be easily avoided by a stranger in clear weather It was reported
           lighted buoy, is 0 3 mile NW of Channel Island        that m the winter there are strong N blows and that small boats
 (308) Mud Bay, on the N side of the narrows about 1 5 miles    often ice up in Behm Canal
NW of Ward Cove, is shallow, with bare flats that extend 100       (317) Naval restrcted areas are in Behm Canal along the W
yards or more offshore A boatyard is on the N side of the bay at    side of Revlllaggedo Island (See 334 1275, chapter 2, for limits
the entrance Marine railways for craft up to 600 tons and 160 feet    and regulations )
long are available at the yard, and some maintenance and repairood current enters Behm Canal at each
work are done The arched roof of the boat shed is prominent from  (318)  Currents -Therent enters Behm Canal at each
                                                                  end and meets somewhere mn the vicinity of Burroughs Bay In
the narrows
                                                                  general the currents are not very strong, ordinanly from 1 to 1 4
 (309) Several totem poles and a replica of an old Indian meet-    knots Tide nps generally occur on the ebb at the mouths of the
inghouse are on the E point of Totem Bight, the first bight NW of    various tnbutaries Dunng the ebb a strong W set Is noticed m
Mud Bay                                                          Behm Canal at the entrance to Naha Bay (See the Tidal Current
 (310) Rosa Reef makes off about 0 2 mule from Rock Pomt on    Tables for daily predictions m Behm Canal ) In the early summer,
the S shore 1 8 miles NW of Channel Island, and is covered at    mulky colored water extends from Burroughs Bay to the W end of
highest tides Rosa Reef Light 15 (55024 8'N ,131ï¿½48 2'W), 24    Gedney Island and up into Yes Bay This is the result of the glacial
feet above the water is shown from a caisson with a square green    silt carried down by the nvers emptying into Burroughs Bay
daymark at the E end of the reef The bight S of Rosa Reef forms   (319) The cove E of Roe Poit, on the E shore, s a fair anchor-
an mdifferent anchorage, but is seldom used The W part of the    age for small craft in 5 to 10 fathoms, soft bottom
bight Is shoal for over 0 2 mile offshore
 (311) Pond Reef is about 0 2 mile from the N shore near the W    (320) Chart 17434 -Alava Bay, on the W shore of Behm Canal,
end of Tongass Narrows It is bare at half tide and usually sur-    about 2 8 miles NE of Point Alava (55011 6'N, 13111 1'W), is
rounded by kelp dunng the summer, and is marked by a hght on    partly open to S weather Depths m the main part of the W bight
the SW side                                                      are 16 to 28 fathoms, but fair shelter for small vessels can be
  (312) Vallenar Point, the NW extremity of Gravina Island, Is    found close inshore in 6 to 10 fathoms, soft bottom Some swell
low and wooded, and nses m a long easy slope to the high land of    but very little wind comes into the head of this arm A privately
the island A rocky patch, marked by a buoy, Is 700 yards NE of    maintained mooring buoy is in the W bight The entrance to the W
the point Close NW of the point are two wooded islets, and W of    bight is constricted by a 11/2-fathom shoal in midchannel The
them are rocks awash at highest tides, there is no safe passage    shoal is marked by thick kelp m the summer The E bight is clear
inside these rocks The northernmost rock, Vallenar Rock,    but too deep to afford anchorage
marked by a light, has deep water close to NW  Small boats with    (321) Narrow Pass is W of Rudyerd Island, on the W side of
local knowledge often use the passage between Vallenar Point and    Behm Canal 8 miles above Point Alava The NE and SW shores of
the small islands close-to It has a least found depth of 1 fathom in    Rudyerd Island are very foul and should be given a wide berth
the muddle of the passage It is necessary to pass between the two    Small craft can find some shelter from SE blows in the two narrow
shoals NE of Vallenar Point, which can usually be identified by    bights at the N end of the island Such craft have tied to the steep
being awash or by the surrounding kelp                           W shore of the W bight The head of the W bight is shallow and
  (313) Guard Islands, two in number, wooded, and close    rocky, m 1957 an anchored 50-foot cruiser grounded on a falling
together, about 1 5 miles NW of Vallenar Point, guard the W      tide 100 yards from the S shore
entrance to Tongass Narrows Guard Islands Light (55ï¿½26 8'N,
 131052 9'W), 74 feet above the water, is shown from a white        (322) Chart 17424 -Smeaton Bay enters Behm Canal from E
square tower on a rectangular building on the N island of the    10 miles above Point Sykes (chart 17434) and E of the S end of
group                                                            Smeaton Island On the S side of the entrance to the bay between
  (314) About 0 3 mile SE of Guard Islands is a large kelp patch    Carp Island and Short Point, a vessel can lie m summer m 19
marking a reef covered 4 feet Passage can be made on either side    fathoms, hard bottom, protected from the summer winds Small
 of the reef, but Inside Passage, between the reef and Vallenar    vessels may find shelter close to Short Point in 5 to 10 fathoms
Rock and 0 6 mile wide, is preferred An 83/4-fathom patch is near    Numerous shoals and rocks are close to Carp Island, foul ground
 the middle of Inside Passage about 0 7 mile SE from Guard    extends about 0 3 mile from the NW side of the island Another
 Islands Light                                                    deep-draft anchorage may be found on the S side of the bay near
  (315) Point Higgins, low and wooded Is on the N shore oppo-    the entrance to a small inlet 0 6 mile E of Short Point in 20 to 30
 site Vallenar Point The radio towers of the Coast Guard radio sta-    fathoms, hard bottom
 tion on the hills back of Point Higgins are useful landmarks but   (323) Seven miles from the entrance, the bay divides into Wil-
 they are not very prominent                                      son Armand Bakewell Arm  A mumng camp Is on the S shore of





                                             4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                  95


Wilson Arm about 3 5 miles from the entrance A floating pier is    above Point Sykes and 3 5 miles NE of New Eddystone Rock The
at the camp, and a pnvate moonng buoy is NE of the camp          bay and approaches are free from outlying dangers
 (324) Princess Bay, to the W  of Smeaton Island, is open and     (334) Two arms enter the bay from S, the lower, named Punch-
exposed to the S Deep water extends close to the shores, and    bowl Cove because of Its precipitous sides, is 2 2 miles and the
depths in the bay are too great for anchorage Short Pass, between    upper arm about 7 miles from the entrance Temporary anchorage
the N end of Smeaton Island and Wasp Point, has a depth of 11    may be found close to the S shore near the head of Punchbowl
fathoms                                                          Cove m 25 fathoms A pnvately maintained mooring buoy is on
 (325) A private moonng buoy is about 0 8 mile NNW of Wasp    the S side of the cove about 0 3 mile from the head
Point Small craft can find anchorage m the small bight m the W     (335) An anchorage m 20 fathoms, hard bottom, is near the head
shore about 1 mile N of Sharp Point (55020 7'N, 131ï¿½01 4'W) in    of the upper arm and opposite a prominent landslide Small craft
15 to 20 fathoms hard bottom This anchorage affords good pro-    can find temporary anchorage near the edge of the flats at the head
tection from S and SE winds Anchorage for small craft can be had    of the bay and the head of the upper arm Temporary anchorage
m the bight to W of Sharp Point, depths ranging from 5 to 20 fath-    may be had about 0 5 mile E of Point Lomse and about 400 yards
oms, hard bottom In entering favor the W shore Very small craft    N of a small but prominent landslide in 18 to 20 fathoms hard
can find a land-locked anchorage in the bight on the W  shore    bottom The bottom is very irregular
about 1 5 miles SW of Sharp Point m 2 fathoms soft bottom This    (336) Sargent Bay, on the W shore of Behm Canal opposite
bight and the entrance are foul Enter only on a rismg tide with    Rudyerd Bay, is open and exposed to S Depths throughout the bay
local knowledge and use extreme caution                          are too great for anchorage Cactus Point is the NE point and
 (326)  Wasp Cove is on the W  shore of Behm Canal, about 3    Tramp Point, the S point at the entrance A small-boat passage is
mules N of Smeaton Island It affords anchorage for small craft in    on the W side of the group of islands N of Tramp Point The pas-
5 to 7 fathoms soft bottom, free from obstructions               sage is clear but favor the islands to clear the foul ground along
 (327) Shoalwater Pass is a narrow body of water that separates    the W shore
Winstanley Island from the mainland The pass is divided into       (337) The channel on the W  side of Manzanita Island
two separate anchorages, the N one being the better of the two,    (55034 7'N, 130ï¿½55 9' W) is clear, with a controlling depth of
with depths of 5 to 33 fathoms mud bottom The S anchorage has    only 6 feet This channel is used to a large extent by small fishing
depths of 12 to 27 fathoms, mud bottom Small craft can pass    vessels Midchannel courses are good
through the narrows between the anchorages at high water Can-      (338) Manzanlta Bay, on the W  side of Behm Canal, W  of
die Island is on the W side of the S entrance to the pass A sub-    Wart Point (55035 3'N  130ï¿½56 5'W), affords good anchorage in
merged rock with 3 feet over it is near the middle of the S entrance    20 fathoms, soft bottom The head of the bay is filled with a fiat
about 0 9 mile N of Candle Island The bar at the N entrance has a    that bares and several rocks that bare are along the edge of the
depth of 9 feet and should not be crossed at low water except by    flat The anchorage is m the SE bight of the bay In entenng, favor
small craft A privately maintained mooring buoy is about 0 3 mnule    the E shore to avoid the rocks and flat previously mentioned The
SW of the bar at the N entrance to the N anchorage               Forest Service maintams a float m the small bight on the W side of
 (328) Entrance Island, which is fairly bold may be passed on    Wart Point Depths at the outer end of the float are reported to be 8
either hand in approaching the N entrance to Shoalwater Pass     fathoms The Forest Service also maintains a mooring dolphin off
Pass in rmdchannel between the hlghwater islet at the N end of    the mouth of Grace Creek, 4 7 miles N of Wart Point
Winstanley Island and Slag Point, then favor the mainland shore    (339) Snip Islands are off the W  shore of Behm Canal, 1 3
and proceed with caution until up with the wooded island on the    miles N of Grace Creek Good anchorage for small craft can be
Wlnstanley side of the channel Leave this island to the W and    had in the passage W of the islands in about 15 fathoms sandy
select an anchorage S of it                                      bottom The entrance is from N The S entrance is obstructed by a
 (329) Checats Cove, on the E side of Behm Canal is entered    bar that bares
about 1 7 miles NNE of Winstanley Island between Edith Point      (340) Walker Cove enters Behm Canal from E about 10 mules
on the N and Checats Point on the S The cove affords anchorage    above Rudyerd Bay entrance and abreast Snip Islands The cove
for small vessels, protected from S winds m about 8 to 10 fath    has great depths throughout except at the entrance The shores of
oms mud bottom about 100 to 200 yards N of Checats Point         Walker Cove are very abrupt and in some places almost perpen-
Strangers should select an anchorage at low water as the flats    dlcular A summer anchorage can be made in midchannel on the
extend for some distance and are then plainly visible            inside of the bar at the entrance between Hut Point and Ledge
 (330) New Eddystone Rock (55ï¿½30 2'N  130ï¿½56 2'W) 20    Point m 10 to 20 fathoms The bar has depths of 4 to 10 fathoms
miles above Point Sykes, is a remarkable shaft of rock 230 feet    Rocks and ledges off the entrance points are the only dangers m
high, nsmg from a sand shoal in the middle of the canal with deep    the cove Foul grounds extend about 0 25 mile WNW of Ledge
water surrounding it It may be passed on either hand keeping it at   Point and about 0 2 mile SW of Hut Point caution is advised in
a distance of 0 5 mile to avoid the sand shoal At the E extremity    the narrow entrance channel U S Forest Service mooring buoy is
of the shoal is a small pinnacle rock that uncovers about 4 feet  near the head of a bight on the S side of the cove about 5 miles
 (331) New Eddystone Islands are a group of islets and rocks     ENE of the entrance
some of which cover they extend for about 1 2 mules offshore NE    (341) Channel Islands are two wooded Islands about 0 6 mile
of New Eddystone Rock Small craft with local knowledge pass    off the E shore of Behm Canal, about midway between Walker
among these islands, but strangers should keep to W of them      Cove and Chlckamm River The Islands may be passed on either
 (332) Ella Creek, W of New Eddystone Rock, empties into the    side but care should be taken to avoid the reef, awash at high
small bight behind Ella Point on the W shore of Behm Canal A     water, that extends about 0 2 miles SE of the islands
mooring buoy is about 0 15 mile NW of Ella Point                  (342) Chlckamin River enters Behm Canal from E, between
  (333)  Rudyerd Bay, about 11 miles long enters Behm Canal    Fish Point and Trap Point, about 5 miles above the entrance to
from E between Point Eva and Point Louise, about 23 miles    Walker Cove Large flats occupy almost the whole of the bay at





 96                                            4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN


 the mouth of the river and extend almost to the two points at the    (350) Bell Island Hot Springs is a private seasonal fishing and
 entrance from Behm Canal Small craft can find temporary    health resort at the head of the cove at the SW end of Bell Island
 anchorage near the edge of the flat                                about 1 5 miles E of Smpe Point Light
  (343) Portage Cove on the W  side of the canal opposite the        (351) Bell Arm, which separates the NW shore of Bell Island
 entrance to Chickamn River bares Depths of 3 to 8 fathoms can    from the mainland, extends NE from Behm Canal and at its head
 be found at the entrance, but these drop off quickly to deep water  is joined by Anchor Pass, it has good anchorage in the expansion
  (344)  Saks Cove on the NE shore of Behm Canal 10 miles    at its head in 16 fathoms, soft bottom Sinpe Point Light on Snipe
 above the mouth of Chickamin River, affords anchorage near the    Point, marks the S entrance to Bell Arm Short Bay and Bailey
 N end There are no dangers, except the small flat at the NE corner    Bay are two small, narrow bays entermg the NW side of Bell
of the cove and a reef that uncovers 4 feet about 75 yards SE of    Arm Short Bay, the E one, has good anchorage m 17 to 20 fath-
Fire Point, the W point at the entrance                             oms, a flat extends about 300 yards from its head A private moor-
                                                                   ing buoy is near the fiat In April 1984, the buoy was reported to
  (345) Fitzgibbon Cove is on the NE shores of Behm Canal,    be submerged at high water A red float was attached to the buoy
about 2 6 miles N of Saks Cove and about 1 5 miles SE of the    to mark its position, caution is advised Inland from Bailey Bay is
entrance to Burroughs Bay The entrance between Dew Point and    an area of hot springs A mooring buoy is on the W side of Bailey
Hose Point is clear Center Islets, wooded, are near mudchannel     Bay about 1 mile from the head
0 4 mile inside the entrance Gibbs Rock, bare and 15 feet high, is   (352) Hassler Pass and Gedney Pass, on the E side of Behm
on the E side of the cove, 0 3 mile above Center Islets A sub-    Canal and S of Snpe Point Lght, separate Hassler Island from
merged rock with 6 feet over it is 110o yards 300  from Gibbs    Revillagigedo Island, the passes are broad and clear At the head
Rock The cove affords good anchorage about 0 2 mile above    of Gedney Pass is Shrimp Bay, and at the head of the latter in KIu
Gibbs Rock in 1 1 to 13 fathoms, mud bottom                        Bay Is a good anchorage In 16 fathoms soft bottom sintable for
  (346) Burroughs Bay, clear, enters Behm Canal from the NE         vessels of moderate size A private mooring buoy is on the W side
Unuk River enters the head of the bay from N and Klahml River    of Klu Bay
from NE, Unuk River Is said to be navigable a considerable dis-      (353) Dress Point Is a broad point on the E side of the S
tance for skiffs The head of the bay and the mouths of both rivers    entrance to Hassler Pass A snug anchorage for small craft in
are filled with flats There Is no secure anchorage Temporary    depths of 5 to 17 fathoms Is in the cove, 1 5 miles N of Dress Point
anchorage for moderate-sized craft can be selected on the E side    on the E side of Hassler Pass
Just S of the flat of the Klahml River in about 30 fathoms Small
                                                                    (354) Blind Pass, between Black Island and the NW side of
craft can anchor near the edges of the flats The depths at the head    Hassler land, is useless except as a small-craft anchorage in the
of the bay are gradually shoaling The U S Forest Service main-    basm at the SW end of the pass Because of rocks in this entrance,
                                                                   local knowledge IS necessary in entering the basin The pass is
                                                                   closed by a sandbar just NE of the basin The bar uncovers 3 feet
  (347) Chart 17422 -Anchor Pass is a narrow strait about 6    and IS studded with small boulders up to a foot in diameter NE of
miles W of the entrance to Burroughs Bay, which separates the NE   the bar the water is deep, ranging from 10 to 50 fathoms except for
end of Bell Island from the mainland Protected anchorage can be    a 3 /2-fathom spot near midchannel in the NE part of the pass A
found about 0 4 mile inside the S entrance in 30 to 32 fathoms of    privately maintained mooring buoy is in a small bight on the S
water, mud bottom The pass has good anchorage for small craft in    side about 0 9 mile NE of the bar
the small cove just S of the restricted N entrance in 3 to 5 fathoms,  (355)  Convenient Cove,  n the SW end of Hassler Island
soft bottom The N entrance to Anchor Pass is shallow and rocky     between It and Gedney Island, is too deep for anchorage The nar-
The least depth of the shoalest reef, in the middle of the pass at its    row passage ESE of the cove leadmg to Gedney Pass is clear
N end, is 11/2 feet A privately maintained mooring buoy is on the    except for some rocks on the N shore and a ledge that extends in a
E side of the pass about 0 8 mile NNW of Point Lees, the E pomt    N direction from the easternmost Islet
at the entrance to Anchor Pass
                                                                    (356) Yes Bay enters Behm Canal from the NW between Bluff
 (348) The estimated tidal current has a velocity of 2 to 3 knots at    Point and Syble Point  Bluff Point Light(55053 O'N
the N end of the pass and flows N from about 2 hours after low      131ï¿½44 8'W), 12 feet above the water is shown from a skeleton
water until 2 hours before the next low water From 2 hours before    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on Bluff
to 2 hours after low water the current flows S with a velocity of    Point on the SW side of the entrance to the bay The entrance is
about 1 knot                                                       free from dangers
 (349) Behm Narrows separates Bell Island from Revlllagigedo        (357) A fishing resort is on the N point of a narrow passage lead-
Island The shores of the narrows are generally steep and heavily    ing to the first basin, about 2 6 miles above the entrance of Yes
wooded Snipe Point Light (55055 5'N, 131ï¿½36 9'W), 18 feet    Bay Caution must be exercised in navigating the E end of this
above the water is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    passage, particularly in the vicinity of a wharf which stood 300
white diamond-shaped daymark on the SW end of Bell Island it   yards E of the resort No visible signs remain of the wharf A 65-
marks the W entrance to Behm Narrows and the S entrance to Bell    foot float landing at the fishing resort had in 1976 a reported
Arm Anchorage can be had in the bight on the N side of the nar-    depth alongside of 12 feet Water and gasoline are available The
rows about 1 6 miles E of Snipe Point Light and about 0 5 mile S    resort maintains radiotelephone communication with Ketchikan
of Bell Island Hot Springs The bight affords anchorage in about    Charter seaplane service with Ketchlkan is also available Anchor-
14 fathoms mud bottom Care should be taken to avoid the rocks    age can be had about 0 3 mile SE of the resort in 22 fathoms mud
and ledge on the N side of this bight In 1978, it was reported that    bottom A beached barge, covered at high water is in the small
foul ground with rocks was In the vicinity of the S point of the    cove in 55ï¿½54'55"N, 131ï¿½47'10"W  about 0 3 mile E of the
bight                                                              resort






                                              4. DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                   97


 (358) The narrow passage, close SSW of the fishing resort, leads  (365) Heckman Point, on the W shore of Behm Canal opposite
to the first basin where good anchorage can be had in 15 to 32    Bushy Point, is prominent and readily identified by some reddish
fathoms, mud bottom. A good small-boat anchorage in 8 fathoms    brown rocks. On the W side of the point is a small bight that is
is near the SE end of the first basin. At the head of the first basin is    used as a temporary anchorage for small craft.
a group of islands, E of which is a channel leading to the inner   (366) Traitors Cove, entered about 2.5 miles SSE of Bushy
basin, where good anchorage can be had in 11 to 12 fathoms, mud    Point Light, indents the E shore of Behm Canal about 15 miles
bottom.                                                           above Caamano Point. An island is in the middle of the entrance.
 (359)  Care is required in navigating Yes Bay, and strangers    Ledges extend N and S from this island, and the center of the
should do so at low water. Enter in midchannel and then favor the    channels on both sides are clear. About 300 yards W from the N
N shore. In entering the first basin, pass about 35 to 40 yards SSW    point at the entrance is a reef that uncovers 6 feet. It presents a real
of the resort site and keep the N shore close aboard until the basin    danger to craft leaving or entering the cove by the N entrance.
opens up. If going to the inner basin, keep about 100 yards off the  (367) The cove should be avoided by strangers as the strong
N shore until up to the group of islands that separate the two    tidal currents and rocks make navigation dangerous. The upper
basins. Here the channel narrows to about 75 yards because of a    part of the cove can be entered only by small craft at slack water,
submerged rock with 3 feet over it, and a rock awash at low water,    which is very short in duration; on the flood small craft should
both of which are on the W side of the channel. In passing through    keep away from the narrow entrance to the upper cove as there is
this channel, keep the NE shore aboard about 30 yards. The inner    danger of being swept through by the force of the current. There is
basin is clear.                                                   very little time of slack water on spring tides; the current changes
 (360) Spacious Bay, WSW of Bluff Point Light, is a broad bay    direction very suddenly. Marguerite Bay, the bight on the S shore
in the W shore of Behm Canal about 22 miles above Caamano    of Traitors Cove about 2 miles above the entrance, affords the only
Point  (55ï¿½30.0' N., 131ï¿½58.2'W.). Square Island is in the    anchorage in the cove. Rocks are on both sides of the bight near its
entrance near the S shore; the channel S of the island is not recom-    entrance, and a depth of 10 feet is found in midchannel at the
mended. Near its head the bottom is irregular and there is a con-    entrance.
siderable area of tidal flats with off-lying reefs and submerged    (368) Port Stewart is an indentation in the W  side of Behm
rocks. Good anchorage can be selected in the lee of Square Island,    Canal, 12.5 miles N of Caamano Point. Its S entrance is marked by
sand and mud bottom. A dangerous submerged rock has been    a light just S of Point Francis, a prominent wooded point. The N
reported about 0.4 mile NW of the island. The bights in the N     entrance point is not well defined, being low, flat country for 1
shore of the bay are not recommended for anchorage.               mile from the beach. Four wooded islets are across the mouth of
 (361) Snail Point, on the W side of Behm Canal about 3.8 miles    the bay. A clear channel is between the easternmost and southern-
S of Bluff Point Light, is readily identified by the distinct knoll,    most islets, but there are some off-lying rocks to avoid. The best
about 0.5 mile S of the point. On the W side of the point is a bight    entrance is N of the two islets. The passage between the southern-
0.5 mile long that affords good anchorage for small craft. A sub-    most wooded islet and the main shore is narrow, but clear, with a
merged rock with 3/4 fathom over it is in the middle of the bay, and    least depth of 5 fathoms.
small craft should favor the E shore until clear of this rock and   (369) Anchorage can be had in 16 fathoms, rock and mud bot-
proceed to the head of the bay for anchorage.                     tom, 350 yards 315ï¿½ from the NW point of the westernmost
 (362) Neets Bay indents the E shore of Behm Canal about 19    wooded islet. Small craft with local knowledge can find sheltered
miles above Caamano Point. The bay has no good anchorage.    anchorage in 5 to 6'/2 fathoms, mud bottom, in the land-locked
Small craft, however, can find fair shelter in the last cove (locally    bight in the N shore of Port Stewart, about 3.5 miles above Point
called Fire Cove) toward the head of the S side of the bay. Pass E    Francis. A log storage area is on the flats at the head of Port Stew-
of the small wooded islet and anchor E or S of it in 3 to 5 fathoms,    art.
sand bottom. In 1976, a logging camp was in operation in the        (370) The small bight on the E shore of Behm Canal, about 0.5
cove. A log storage area is 1 mile W of the camp. Floats for small    mile N of Escape Point opposite Point Francis, is too deep for
craft and seaplanes extend SW from the small wooded islet. Water    anchorage, although in good weather small craft anchor in the S
and fuel are available only in an emergency. Radiotelephone com-    end of this bight near Escape Point.
munications with Ketchikan are maintained. The bottom in Neets     (371) Raymond Cove and Wadding Cove, opposite Naha Bay,
Bay is very irregular and there are several dangers, one of which is    are indentations in the W  shore of Behm Canal about 3 and 3.9
a submerged rock with /4 fathom over it, 300 yards SW from the    miles, respectively, SW of Point Francis. They are useless as
W end of Bug Island, which is in the middle of the entrance to the    anchorages, and at low water there are extensive tidal flats of sand
bay. Enter Neets Bay either N or S of Bug Island but S of Clam    and gravel with some boulders.
Island, which is about 1.4 miles E of Bug Island. A shoal extends  (372)  Mike Point is a low, rocky point separating Wadding and
from Clam Island almost to the N shore of the bay.                Raymond Coves. The point is foul and should be given a good
 (363) Bushy Point, a prominent projection on the E side of    berth. The beach here is strewn with bleached logs and other drift,
Behm Canal about 2 miles S of Neets Bay, is readily recognized    and this is also true, to a lesser extent, of all the shore N to Point
from N and S by a series of dome-shaped hills immediately    Francis.
inshore from the point. Bushy Point Light (55043.9'N., 131ï¿½43.9'    (373)  Helm Bay indents the W shore of Behm Canal about 5.5
W.), 18 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with    miles above Caamano Point. The N entrance point is marked by
a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the W side of the    Trunk Island, off Helm Point, a small, prominent, slightly
point.                                                            wooded island. The S entrance point is marked by Helm Bay
 (364) Bushy Point Cove, a small bay inside of Bushy Point, is    Light (55034.8'N., 131055.7'W.), 14 feet above the water, shown
too deep for anchorage except for small craft that anchor close to    from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped day-
the beach at the head of the bay.                                 mark on the outermost islet on the SW side of the entrance.





 98                                            4  DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN


  (374) Behind Forss Island, on the W  shore, 3 3 miles in from    ceedming between Tongass Narrows and Naha and Moser Bays It
 the hght is a small cove at the head of which is a pnvately main   has several entrances from the N m deep narrow channels between
 tamed float with depths of 20 feet reported alongside in 1976      Cedar and Moser Islands, Stack and Grant Islands, and a deep
 Enter the cove from the N passing between two charted off-lying    wider entrance between Back and Grant Islands
 rocks                                                                (385) Back Island, low and heavily wooded is about 1 2 miles
  (375) There are some dangers, but midchannel courses carry    W of the S end of Grant Island A reef extends about 0 2 mile off
 safely to the head of the bay The channel leads between Thomas    the NW end of the island, and broken ground extends 0 3 mile E
 Island on the N and two wooded Islands joined by a reef to S Pass    of the island The channel between Back Island and Betton Island
In midchannel N of Forss Island and another wooded Island    to the SW is foul with reefs of submerged rocks and rocks awash
beyond, above which the bay is comparatively clear There is          (386) Hump Island is close off the E side of Betton Island about
 about 0 5 rmle of tidal flats at the head of the bay which drops sud-    0 4 mile S of Back Island A daybeacon is on the SE end of the
denly into deep water                                              island
  (376)  Anchorage is available m  midchannel in 16 fathoms, mud     (387) Betton Island is on the E side of the W entrance to Behm
bottom, about 1 2 miles above Forss Island, and in 21 fathoms      Canal Betton Head, on the W  side of the island, is a prominent
gravel and mud bottom, about 2 miles above the island The latter    feature of the locality
is the better anchorage
                                                                    (388) Joe Island, close SE of the S extremity of Grant Island, is
  (377) Smugglers Cove, W of Helm Bay Light Is on the W side
                  377Smugers C,  of His o_ te  si n nmdchannel near the N entrance with deep channels on each
of Behm Canal, about 5 miles N of Caamano Point It is a fair    side
anchorage for small craft, although local knowledge is necessary
      to clear the dangers Extensive tide flats are at the head of the  (389) Pup Island Is off the S extremity of Betton Island at the
cove                                                               SW entrance to Clover Passage A narrow channel less than 100
                                                                   yards wide with a depth of 5 fathoms is between the two islands
  (378)  Charts 17423, 17422 -Indian Point marks the N               (390) Clover Island is m in mdchannel in the SW entrance to Clo-
entrance to Naha Bay The country N of the point is heavily    ver Passage Deep channels are on each side of the island Clover
wooded The shore is rocky and generally steep-to                   Passage Entrance Light  (55028 7'N, 131048 7'W), 20 feet
  (379) Naha Bay, on the E side of Behm Canal about 11 5 mles    above the water, iS shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
NE of Caamano Point is a popular sports fishing and hunting area   whlte dIamond-shaped daymark on an Islet about 0 4 mile SW of
                                                                   Clover Island A ledge with rocks awash extends about 0 2 mile
The bay and Its approaches are clear Lonng is a village on the N   NE  of the l ight
side near the head of the bay Cache Island, round and wooded is
near the rmddle of Naha Bay and has deep water on all sides with     (391)  Knudson Cove is a small blght on the SE side of Clover
the exception of a 9-fathom spot about 0 3 mile W of the island    Passage about 0 6 mile ESE of Clover Passage Entrance Light
 (380)  The usual anchorage Is Just below the ruins of an old    Small craft use it as an anchorage A depth of 4 fathoms is at the
wharf about 300 yards from the shore of the village, in 19 fath-    entrance In 1970, the 4-fathom area was reported to provide good
oms, mud bottom The shore in front of the village should not be    anchorage m SE wmds up to 35 knots A daybeacon marks the W
approached closer than 100 yards Small craft can find anchorage    side of the entrance to the cove Another daybeacon near the head
in the small bay N of Dogfish Island where shelter is had from    of the cove marks a rock awash at half tide A floating breakwater,
any SW squalls which occasionally strke with considerable force    marked on the NW end by a pnvate daybeacon, Is m the cove
The bight E of the village is practically dry at low water A State-    Clover Pass is an umncorported settlement on Knudson Cove
maintained L-shaped small-craft float and a seaplane float joining   (392) The city of Ketchikan maintains small-craft floats with
It at the SE end are at the head of the cove W of the wharf in ruins  about 615 feet of moonng space, on the E side of Knudson Cove
In 1976, depths of 12 feet were reported alongside both floats     near the head In 1976, depths of 20 to 60 feet were reported
 (381) Roosevelt Lagoon is a body of brackish water that is con-    alongside Local regulations limit the size of vessels using the
nected to Naha Bay through a tiderace only at extreme high water    floats to 65 feet m length Two boat launchmg ramps with a float
The passage is dangerous and should not be used without local    in the rmddle are close SW of the approach pier Pnvate floats are
knowledge Small barges at one time made thlus passage              75 yards NE and 150 yards W  of the approach pier respectively
 (382)  Moser Bay, an indentation in Revillagigedo Island, is sep-    Clover Pass has telephone and highway communications with
arated from Naha Bay by Cedar Island, Moser Island, and    Ketchikan
Stack Island  Good anchorage for small craft is found m 7 fath-      (393)  Survey Point is on the SE side of the SW entrance to Clo-
oms m the small bight in the NW part of the bay, for larger craft in    ver Passage A fishung resort is 0 7 mile NE of the point In 1976
20 fathoms at the head of the bay Two pnvate homes with floats    the reported depths alongside the floats at the resort were 3 to 5
are on the E side of the bay At the head of the bay Is a tidal flat    feet Water gasoline and hlimited manne supphes are available
about 0 5 mile long A reef makes off SE from Cod Point, the N        (394) Tatoosh Islands, W  of Betton Island are a group of
point at the entrance to Long Arm                                  islands N of which are numerous off-lying rocks known as
 (383) Grant Island, on the E side of Behm Canal, is about 1 5    Tatoosh Rocks The southernmost Island has deep water close to
miles SSW of Naha Bay and about 8 miles NE of Guard Island    the W  shore, and a yellow chff 130 feet high on this island is a
Light  The island is heavily wooded  Grant Island                  good landmark The northwesternmost rock of Tatoosh Rocks is
Light(55ï¿½33 3'N  131ï¿½43 7'W) 18 feet above the water is shown    14 feet high and has an off-lying reef that bares 10 feet 140 yards
from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped day-    NW The rocks are hght colored and show well in clear weather A
mark on the W side of the island                                   hght marks the northernmost island
                                                                    (395) The passage between the southernmost Tatoosh Island and
 (384)  Chart 17422 -Clover Passage, a deep passage on the W       Betton Island is clear but the N end of the passage is rocky, and
side of Revillaglgedo Island, is frequently used by vessels pro-    local knowledge is necessary to navigate this area Small craft use







                                             4. DIXON ENTRANCE TO KETCHIKAN                                                    99


these waters for anchorage, but there is some danger from willi-    are urged to exercise extreme caution in this area because other
waws.                                                              dangers or shoals may exist.
 (396)  Bond Bay and the smaller indentations between Bond Bay      (398) Caamano Point Light (55ï¿½29.9'N., 131ï¿½59.0'W.), 41 feet
and Caamano Point Light are used as temporary anchorages by the    above the water, is shown from a steel post with a red and white
smaller fishing craft during the trolling season. These anchorages    diamond-shaped daymark on the southernmost part of the point.
are exposed to SE and are not recommended because of the sud-       (399)  Caamano Point, the W point at the W entrance to Behm
denness and great force with which the SE winds strike in this    Canal, is long and low. Its extremity is somewhat indefinite when
area.                                                              abeam, because of the Bond Bay shore in the background and
 (397) Bittersweet Rock (55ï¿½31.7'N., 131ï¿½55.7"W.), about 0.5    because the light is not on the actual point, but 0.5 mile W.
mile E of the S extremity of the point forming the N side of Bond
Bay, is a dangerous submerged rock covered 2 fathoms. Mariners








                      5 CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL

 (1)   This chapter describes Clarence Strait and the subsidiary    (is)  3  Provide for two-way traffic of large vessels along the
channels to Sumner Strait and Wrangell Also described are the    designated tracklines
numerous tributaries, islands islets, towns, and villages related to  (19)  4  Warn other gillnetters if they appear to be m the lane
these waterways Preferred passages through these waterways are    when there is commercial vessel traffic approaching
discussed                                                            (20)  5 Do not place sleep sets within or adjacent to the shlp-
                                                                  ping lane
 (2)   Charts 17420, 17360 -Clarence Strait extends in a N          (21)  Currents -The current has a maximum velocity of 4 knots
direction from Dixon Entrance for 45 miles to Guard Islands and    m Clarence Strait from the S entrance to the vlcmlty of Zarembo
the W entrance to Tongass Narrows and Behm Canal, and thence    Island At Cape Chacon, the flood current sets NE around the cape
in a NW direction for 67 miles to Sumner Strait From its S    and the ebb SW S of the lihne of Cape Chacon the tidal currents are
entrance to Zarembo Island, a distance of about 100 miles, the    much confused
channel is broad and comparatively free from dangers At              (22)  In general the currents in the strait set directly m and out
Zarembo Island the strait divides The channel E of the island,    dunng flood and ebb, except m the vlcmaty of the entrances to the
called Stikine Strait, is the route taken by vessels to Wrangell and    tnbutaries, where a slight set across the channel may be experin-
Wrangell Narrows that W of the Island, called Snow Passage, is    enced setting to or from them, especially the large tributaries, and
used by vessels bound to Wrangell Narrows or W through Sumner    along the shores of the strait where the current is either slack or
Strait because it is more direct                                   there is a small countercurrent The most noticeable of these coun
 (3)   Passage through Clarence Strait and subsidiary channels    tercurrents is at Dewey Anchorage and among the islands at
to Sumner Strait and Wrangell is described m the following order   Onslow Point, where it has considerable velocity, from 2 to 3
W  shore, Cape Chacon to Kasaan Bay, E shore, including Felice    knots, and sets directly opposite in directlon to the current in the
Strait and Nichols Passage, to Vallenar Pomt, Kasaan Bay and N     strait This countercurrent meets the main current at the entrance
to Kashevarof Passage, Snow Passage Ernest Sound and Zlmovla    of the large bay E of Point Stanhope and is confined to the bay
Strait, Blake Channel and Eastern Passage, and Stikine Stralt to    and the Immediate vlcimty of the shore SE (See the Tidal Current
Wrangell                                                           Tables for daily predlchons of places in Clarence Strait)
 (4)   Voluntary vessel traffic procedures have been adopted        (23)  Weather-The orientation of Clarence Strait and its prox-
for gillnet vessels and deep draft vessels transiting the N section    lmity to the continent influence its weather The strait is exposed
of Clarence Strait Snow Passage and Sumner Strait in the vlcimty    to the strong southeasterlies of fall and early winter, although shel-
of Point Baker  Traffic lanes about 0 2 mile wide, have been    ter may be found in several bays and inlets Winter gales may also
established for these areas as follows                             blow down the strait from the NW Williwaws blow in many of the
 (5)   3280 from a point in Clarence Strait abeam of Point Stan-    anchorages that are off the strait While these waters are often
hope in about 55059 4'N  132039 8'W to about 56009 3'N ,    sheltered from the summer advection fog, they are susceptible to
132050 8`W, thence                                                 winter radlation fogs The S part of the strait is more exposed here
 (6)   3330 to a point about 56ï¿½ 15 9'N, 132057 0'W, thence    poor visibilities are most likely m late summer and early fall
around the E side of Bushy Island to about 56ï¿½17 2'N
132058 0'W thence,                                                   (24)  Chart 17433 -Cape Chacon (54ï¿½41 5'N, 132ï¿½00 9'W)
 (7)   299ï¿½ to a point about 56018 6'N, 133004 9W, thence,         has been described in Chapter 4
 (8)   315 to a point about 56021  'N, 13309 5W thence,             (25)  From Cape Chacon to Stone Rock Bay the shoreline is
 (9)   277ï¿½ to a poit about 56 023 O'N  133038 7W, thence    rocky and the bottom irregular Temporary anchorage may be
 (9)   2770 to a point about 56023 0'N  133038 7'W, thence    obtained 0 5 mile offshore about 1 5 miles N from the cape in
around Point Baker, about mudway between Helm Rock and Man-    depths of 18 to 20 fathoms A   fathom shoal    about the cape mles
posa Reef to a point about 56ï¿½22 'N , 133ï¿½39 9`W, thence     ,     depths of 18 to 20 fathoms A 2-fathom shoal iS about 2 3 miles
 posa Reef204 to a point ab eam of Calder Rocks 13339    , thence,  NNE from the cape, and about 900 yards offshore from Huaji
 (10) 2040 to a point abeam of Calder Rocks in about ChIT
56015 l'N  133045 7'W
                                                                    (26)  Stone Rock, gray-colored and bare is 3 5 miles NNE of
 (a)   Cruise ships ferry vessels, and other deep-draft vessels    Cape Chacon Rocks awash and unmarked shoals are wlthm 0 4
are requested to observe the followmg practices                    mle of Stone Rock
 (12)   1 Announce your presence 30-45 rmnutes prior to enter-      (27)  Stone Rock Bay, about 4 5 miles N from Cape Chacon is
ing the area and at regular intervals while transting through the    an open bight with deep water and irregular bottom Foul ground
area                                                               extends off the entrance points, and there is a 51/4-fathom shoal
 (13)  2  Avoid meeting and do not overtake vessels in Snow    midway in the entrance Small fishing craft anchor close to shore,
Passage                                                            but the use of the bay as an anchorage is not recommended
 (14)  3 Travel along indcated tracklines as much as possible       (28)  Mallard Bay is about 5 miles N from Cape Chacon Foul
and maintain a safe speed                                          ground extends about 0 6 mile offshore from the point separating
 dis)  Gillnet vessels should                                      Stone Rock Bay and Mallard Bay
 (16)  1  Adequately mark the net end with lights and radar         (29)  Fair weather anchorage may be had near the head of the
reflectors                                                         bay in 15 fathoms, sandy bottom, with about 0 1 mile swinging
 (17)  2  Monitor VHF-FM channels 13 and 16 and listen for    room Favor the N shore of the bay when entering The channel
broadcasts by deep-draft vessels m the area                        between the shoals making out from the N and S shores is narrow


100





                                     5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                           101


  (30)  McLean Arm is a narrow inlet about 6 5 miles above         (38)  Local magnetic disturbance -Differences of as much as
Cape Chacon McLean Point, the S entrance point, is marked by    4ï¿½ from normal vanation have been observed N of the Kendnck
McLean Point Light (54ï¿½47 5'N, 131ï¿½57 4'W), 58 feet above    Islands
the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white     (39)  The N point of Kendnck Bay rses rather sharply to a flat-
diamond-shaped daymark The point is low but at a short distance    topped peak, forming a headland that shows prominently from
back rises to a dome-shaped hill Island Point, the N entrance    pomts along the W side of the strait
point Is a wooded island close to the main shore A bare rock, 22   (40)  The shoreline from the N entrance point of Kendck Bay
feet high, is 100 yards S of the point                           to Hidden Bay (chart 17432), a distance of about 2 2 miles is very
  (31)  The head of the arm has two branches The W and larger    broken Rocks are offshore from 0 2 to 0 4 mile
branch affords anchorage m its widest part m 20 fathoms, sticky
bottom, with swinging room for small vessels A flat extends 0 1
mile from the head of this branch Anchorage can be selected m      le long in a NW direction and about 0 1 mile wide, is about 1 2
about 17 fathoms at the entrance to the north branch, however it is   mile long m a NW drecn and about 0 1 Kendck B ay The channel is
less desirable, and care must be taken to avoid a ledge that bares,    narrow above the N enrance poths   of 3 to 6 f athoms, excy The channel I
and extends about 250 yards E from the point dividing the two       row and has general depths of 3 to 6 fathoms except m the
                 branches Large vessels can anchor at the head of the mun arm m  row part, where they range from 2 to 4 fathoms A rock covered
branches Large vessels can anchor at the head of the main arm in    31/4-fathoms is 0 3 mile offshore in line with the S shore of the
28 to 30 fathoms, irregular rocky bottom A midchannel course
will lead safely to the anchorage The willwaws come down from    mlet, while rocks, awash, are 0 3 mile to       the N pomt of
the adjacent mountains with considerable force A small craft        en ance
anchorage is close under the S shore about 3 2 miles inside the   (42)  Hidden Bay (54056 4'N  131058 7'W) indents the W
entrance Water can be obtained from several streams              shore of Clarence Stralt about 15 miles N of Cape Chacon The
 (32)  Gardner Bay, about 8 miles N from Cape Chacon, affords    entrance is less than 100 yards wide and is N of a group of rocky
good anchorage, but its narrow entrance restricts its use to small   islets A submerged rock covered 33 fathoms and rocks awash are
vessels only The N entrance point is a bold, hght-colored, rocky    off the entrance The largest Island of the group, 200 feet high, Is
pomt with timber on top A breaker close to the pomt and one m    to the S The S entrance point at the first narrows rses to a round-
the bight W  of the point frequently show A group of small    ing hill 260 feet high The N entrance point is low, with a httle
wooded Islands with rocks awash off the SE end is about 0 1 mile    knob near the extremity A depth of 1 fathom is m the entrance to
off the S entrance poimt                                         the first narrows, and rocks are close to its S shore Depths of 5 to
 (33)  A group of Islands choke the entrance to the inner bay    21 fathoms were obtained in the first cove A rock is 50 yards off
The channel N of the islands is narrow and crooked, its use is not    the E entrance pomt of the second narrows Depths i the second
recommended The channel S is about 100 feet wide and has a    narrows range from 1 to 6 fathoms and ledges project from the SE
least depth of 8 fathoms About midway between the islands off    shore Depths m the mner cove range from 4 to 18 fathoms
the point and those in the entrance is a 1 /2-fathom spot marked by  (43)  A stranger entering for the first time should select low-
kelp Water may be obtained from several streams                  water slack when the reefs outside and the rocks in the entrance
 (34)  Fishing vessels and small craft frequently use the channel    will be showing The currents in the narrow part of the entrance
S of the outer islands and rocks Midchannel courses suffice Cau-    are strong Small craft may, with care, work their way to the
tlon should be exercised when entenng, because the dangers are    entrance from the S back of the Islands The bay IS sutable for
unmarked Anchorage in 13 fathoms, mud bottom can be had im        mall craft only
the basin at the head of the bay The points at the entrance to the  (44)  Scott Point, about 1 mile N of Hidden Bay, is a round
basmi should be given a berth of about 150 yards                 point with an abrupt shoreline characterized by large gray ledges
 (35)  Kendrick Bay is about 10 miles above Cape Chacon          It rises rapidly to a peak
Except for a reef in the middle of the bay 2 miles inside the      (45)  Ingraham Bay is about 1 2 miles NW from Scott Point
entrance and 7/2 and 10-fathom spots 500 yards N and 0 5 mile    Rocks usually marked by kelp extend about 200 yards off the
SE respectively from the reef, it is free of off-lying dangers until    entrance points The entrance to Ingraham Bay is best approached
near Its head                                                    from the E in midchannel between the S entrance point and the E
 (36)  Three arms lead S and W from Kendnck Bay South Arm    end of the two groups of islets in the middle of the entrance A
is clear and near its head, affords good anchorage for small craft    depth of about 20 fathoms can be camed to the head of the main
Short Arm is clear of off-lying dangers except for an 8-fathom    bay and to an anchorage with sand and gravel bottom The channel
spot in the center of the arm, about 0 6 mile inside the entrance  N of the inner group of islets is very narrow and should not be
and submerged rocks, about 0 3 mile from the head West Arm is   used
foul for a distance of 0 5 mile inside the entrance and should be  (46)  The bay has two arms and is about 3 5 miles long to the
entered preferably at low water Enter S of the islets and proceed    head of the S arm The N arm starts about 0 8 mile within the
with caution Good anchorage for small craft can be had near the    entrance and is about 1 5 rmles long
head of the arm, however, dunng the colder winter months this      (47)  To enter the N arm pass S of the two groups of rocky
area has ice and cannot be used as an anchorage                  islets off its entrance A narrow channel extends into the N arm A
 (37)  Kendrick Islands, on the N side of the entrance to Ken-    shoal with a depth of 3V4 fathoms extends from the W shore to the
dnck Bay, are a group of about 20 islands varying m size, and for    middle of the channel
the most part wooded Foul ground extends about 0 7 mile SE of      (48)  The controlling depth in the narrows is 6 fathoms Follow
the mamin islands of the group Small craft with local knowledge    the trend of the channel leaving the small islet in the second nar-
can enter Kendrick Bay from N by passing N of all the Islands,    rows to the S and anchor in 10 fathoms, mud and sand bottom, in
between them and the main shore Good anchorage and shelter for    the bight at the head of the arm This arm is suitable for small craft
small craft can be found among the islands                       only






102                                 5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


 (49)  To enter the S arm, the small wooded islet, 200 yards N of   (60)  Moira Rock Light (55005.0'N., 131ï¿½59.8'W.), 40 feet
the long, wooded tongue that marks the SE point of the entrance to    above the water, is shown from a pipe structure with a red and
this arm, is left about 100 yards to the S. The channel leads    white diamond-shaped daymark on the highest part of Moira
between this islet and the long reef, 200 yards to the W, that paral-    Rock, the northernmost of a chain of islands that stretch from Rip
lels the shore.                                                    Point towards Adams Point. A rock with 6 fathoms over it is 1
 (50)  The S arm is characterized by numerous rocks and reefs;    mile ENE of Moira Rock. Moira Island, 0.6 mile long and
the controlling depth in the entrance is 3 fathoms. With local    wooded, is about 0.9 mile to the SSW of Moira Rock. The channel
knowledge 4 fathoms may be carried to the head where anchorage    between Moira Rock and Adams Point has depths ranging from
may be found for small craft in depths of 2 to 10 fathoms, with    about 26 to 189 fathoms.
excellent holding ground in mud bottom. The chart should be the      (61)  A small islet is about 0.2 mile ENE of the N end of Moira
guide.                                                             Island. Kelp and rocks are in the channel between them. A group
 (51)  Ingraham Point, the NW entrance point of Ingraham    of rocks, awash and marked by kelp, is midway between Moira
Bay, is low and wooded for a distance of 0.6 mile from the point    Rock and Moira Island. Deep water surrounds these rocks; the
where it commences a sharp rise to a wooded ridge. The shoreline    channel between them and Moira Rock is clear.
to Polk Island is rocky and foul.                                    (62)  Kegan Cove is about 2.8 miles SW of Black Point. The
 (52)  Polk Island is about 1.3 miles N of Ingraham Point. A       outer cove has fair anchorage in 8 to 12 fathoms, mud bottom. The
reef, bare at half tide, is midway in the channel between the island    inner cove has an entrance 50 yards wide and can be entered by
and the Prince of Wales Island shore. The N end of the channel is    boats drawing 5 feet, on the upper half of the tide. The W  shore-
obstructed by rocks and islets. There is a controlling depth of 2    line should be favored when entering. Excellent shelter and
fathoms in the narrow crooked section at the NE end. Small craft    anchorage in 63/4 fathoms, mud bottom, can be had inside. Kegan
with local knowledge can work their way through.                   Creek, outlet from Kegan Lake, flows into the head of the cove.
 (53)  A small rocky islet with a prominent tree is close to the SE  A marker on the E side of the stream indicates the end of a trail
end of Polk Island. It is noticeable from the N or S, for a distance    paralleling the creek to the shore of the lower part of the lake.
of 2 miles.                                                          (63)  Whiterock Island, about 0.3 mile SE of Moira Island, is
 (54)  Chichagof Bay is about 2.5 miles N from Ingraham Point.    irregular in shape and wooded. A large grayish-white, conical-
It is about 0.3 mile in length and width, and has varying depths    shaped rock is on the SE side of Whiterock Island. S is a smaller
from 23/4 fathoms in the entrace to 4 fathoms near the shore. A reef    rock with the same general features. The small cove on the NW
extends 0.1 mile in a N direction from the S shore, 0.2 mile from    shore of Whiterock Island is foul. Midway between the S ends of
the entrance point. A narrow inlet, with depths of 4 to 7 fathoms,    Moira and Whiterock Islands is a reef that uncovers 11 feet. A
extends 0.3 mile in a S direction from the SW corner of the bay. A  clear channel, about 250 yards wide, favoring Moira Island, is W
depth of 1 fathom is in the middle of the entrance to the inlet.   of this reef. The channel between Whiterock Island and the reef is
  (55)  Rip Point, about 3.2 miles N from Ingraham Point, is low    foul. Foul ground extends off the N and E shores of Whiterock
for about 1 mile back from the shore, then rises steeply to a long    Island for about 0.2 mile and off the S shore for about 0.5 mile.
ridge. There is a small wooded knob about 250 feet high in the
center of the flat area and several hummocks with an elevation of
200 feet or less. Foul ground extends 0.3 mile SE from the point.   (64   Chart 17432.-Menefee Anchorage, about  mile W from
                                                                    Rip Point (55ï¿½02.2'N., 131ï¿½58.7'W.), is much used by fishing
  (56)  Sun Rocks, the two most prominent rocks in this area,    craft, but is not suitable for large vessels. Anchorage may be had
about 100 yards long, 20 yards wide, and 15 feet high, are about    in about 15 fathoms, mud and rock bottom, with 200 yards swing-
0.2 mile SE from Rip Point. Tide rips extend 0.8 mile off Sun    ing room. By following the shoreline from Rip Point at a distance
Rocks and Rip Point during a SE wind and ebb tide.                 of 0.2 to 0.3 mile, a clear channel may be carried to the anchorage.
  (57)  A small cove is 0.3 mile SW from Rip Point. Rocks are on    A small cove in the S part of the anchorage  with depths of 25
both sides of the entrance about 50 yards offshore. A rock is about    A small cove in the enter and shoal water near the anchorage with depthre f 25
50 yards off the middle of the NW shore. Depths in the middle of    fathoms in the center and shoal water near the E shore, is entered
50 yards off the middle of the NW shore. Depths in the middle of    W of the midehannel islet.
the cove range from 9 to 21 fathoms; small-craft anchorage in 5 to
6 fathoms, fine sand bottom, may be had in the arm that extends S    (65)  Menefee Islands, about 1.3 miles W of Rip Point, are two
from the center of the cove,                                       large wooded islands. A narrow ledge and small rocky islets
  (55)  Moira Sound indents the W  shore of Clarence Strait,    project about 250 yards from the N shore of the W  and larger
about 25 miles N of Cape Chacon; it is 4.5 miles wide between    island. A group of three large islets and several smaller ones, cov-
Rip Point and Adams Point. Adams Point (55' 06.7'N.,               ering an area about 0.9 mile long in a SW direction, is about 0.5
 13 1059.7W.), the N entrance point, is low and wooded. Near the    mile NW of the larger Menefee  Island. Foul ground extends 300
extremity is a knob about 350 feet high. Rocks extend about 0.2    yards SE of the NE islands. The channel between these islands and
mile off the E shore of the point. The general direction of the    the Menefee group is obstructed at the NE end by an islet, and at
 sound is SW, and within the entrance it divides into three separate    the SW end by a midchannel rock that is awash at low water.
 arms.                                                               (66)  A bight is about 1.5 miles to the W  of Menefee Anchor-
  (59)  South Arm extends about 5 miles to the S and has numer-    age. In the center of the bight is a rock, awash at high water. A
 ous reefs that uncover at low water. Favor the E shore in entering.    bank with a least depth of 3 fathoms is about 0.2 mile W from the
 The S end of the arm affords good all-weather anchorage in about    rock. There are numerous rocks and islets along the S shores. The
 6 fathoms. West Arm has a length of 2.2 miles and then divides    small cove on the NE shore of the bight might furnish anchorage
 into two short arms, the N, known as Dickman Bay, the S as Fre-    for small vessels in 10 to 13 fathoms.
 derick Cove. Johnson Cove is about 2 miles long and indents the      (67)  Egg Islands are a group of wooded islands on the NW
 S shore of the sound about 2 miles S of Black Point (55ï¿½02.3'N.,    side of the entrance to Moira Sound, about 2.8 miles SW of Moira
 132ï¿½05.2'W.). The chart is the guide.                              Rock.






                                     5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                              103


  (68)  Niblack Anchorage, just W  of the Egg Islands affords        (77)  Scraggy Point and Inner Point, on the N and S sides,
good protection in depths of 6 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom Clare    respectively, at the entrance to Port Johnson, present no character-
Island is on the N side of the entrance to Nlblack Anchorage       istlcs of interest to the navigator
Safety Rock, grass covered and about 15 feet high Is m muden-        (78)  Dolorm  Bay is a small arm on the N side of Port Johnson
trance A ledge that uncovers 5 feet is 400 yards S of Clare Island    about 1 3 miles W of Inner Point The cove on the W side and near
and 250 yards off the S shore A rock covered 9 feet, is 0 5 mile    the head of the bay has a rock, covered 5 feet, near its center
from the head of the anchorage and 0 1 mile from the S shore       Dolorm  Bay is very restricted, the chart is the best guide
Vessels entering Nlblack Anchorage usually pass N of Moira           (79)  Paul Lake, about 0 9 mile NNW of Doloml Bay has a
Rock, Safety Rock, and the ledge S of Clare Island near the S    high prominent mountain near its head The sumnut is grass cov-
shore of the anchorage                                             ered, the slopes are umnform, and it is not often clouded
  (69)  From Adams Point to Point Halliday, the N point of the       (80)  French Harbor and Dutch Harbor are locally known
entrance to North Arm, the shoreline is broken and there are many    small-boat anchorages behind Wedge Islands 2 mules NE of the
rocks close to shore A 5-foot spot is about 0 4 mile E from Point    entrance to Port Johnson They do not furnish good anchorages for
Halliday A shoal making S from Point Halliday has a depth of 31/2    strangers, and the approaches are rocky
fathoms about 0 25 mile off the point                                (81)  Wedge Islands are a group of low islands and rocks 2
  (70)  North Arm, about 4 miles long and 0 3 mile wide at the    miles NE of the entrance to Port Johnson From the larger island,
entrance, is in the NW side of Molra Sound about 2 8 miles W of    rocks bare and awash extend for about 0 6 mile to the S, shoal
Moira Rock There is a 33/4-fathom spot in the center of the    and Irregular bottom extends about 1 mile to the SW A 2-fathom
entrance about 0 3 mile S of Point Halhday A secure anchorage    spot is 1 mile to the SSW of this island Rocks awash, marked by
can be found inside near the E shore, m the cove about 1 mile from    kelp, are 0 5 mile NW from the N end of the larger island A sub-
the entrance directly S of the small cedar-covered island, m 6 to 10    merged rock with a least depth of 3 feet and marked by kelp is 0 2
fathoms, mud bottom There is a rock awash near the middle of    mile N of these rocks A shoal with 71/2 fathoms over it is 0 8 mile
the cove                                                           to the N of the N end of large Wedge Island A channel 0 3 to 0 5
 (71)  Deichman Island, 2 miles inside the entrance of North    mile wide with a least rmdchannel depth of 30 fathoms, is about
Arm, has foul ground between it and the E shore, and foul ground    0 6 mile W  of large Wedge Island, its direction is 0300 This
extends about 400 yards SE and 300 yards S from It In passing    course is within 0 2 mile of dangerous shoals on either side, and
beyond Delchman Island, the S shore should be favored until past    those without local knowledge should not attempt to use the chan-
Beck Rock, about 700 yards to the W  which uncovers 12 feet    nel
Then a midchannel course will pass 200 yards NE of Cannery           (82)  Foul ground extends 0 3 to 0 5 rmle offshore, to the point
Rock, about 0 8 mile WNW of Beck Rock which uncovers 9 feet        4 miles N of Port Johnson From this point to Windy Point, a dis-
 (72)  At the head North Arm divides into two fingers The N        tance of 2 miles, foul ground extends 200 yards offshore
finger, Nowiskay Cove, affords good small-craft anchorage in
about 8 fathoms The W finger extends to Clarno Cove and Alken        (83)  Charts 17436, 17420 -Windy Point (55ï¿½13 O'N,
Cove Craft entering this finger should favor the S shore taking    131ï¿½58 8'W), low and wooded is between two small exposed
care to avoid the rock awash that is 240 yards SE of the small islet    coves with an island close-to on each side The S cove has rmd-
off the N point at the entrance By passing about 50 yards off the S    channel depths of 5 to 9 fathoms but is foul to the W of the small
beach, a least depth of 101/4 fathoms can be carried into Clarno    island and near the N shore The N cove has midchannel depths of
Cove where good all-weather anchorage is available in about 12    13/4 to 10 fathoms but is foul toward the head Rocks extend off the
fathoms soft mud bottom                                            point for about 240 yards
 (73)  The small unnamed bay S of Clarno Cove is entered by a       (84)  From Scraggy Point (55007 6'N, 132002 O'W), the N
narrow crooked channel with a least depth of 1 fathom, between    entrance point to Port Johnson, to Chasina Point, which is the
ledges that extend out from both shores The middle of this bay    point about 4 5 miles N from Windy Point, the land is thickly
provides excellent anchorage in about 4 fathoms                    wooded and slopes gently for about 0 2 mile from the shore and
                                                                   then nses quickly to a ridge Two small exposed coves are midway
 (74)  From Clarno Cove a narrow channel continues W  into    between Windy Point and Chasina Point Midchannel depths in
Alken Cove, which is shoal and mostly bare except for a small    the SE cove range from 5 to 10 fathoms, shoaling to 4 fathoms
area near the mouth where an anchorage can be found in about 9    near the head The NW cove has depths m the middle of 5 to 14
fathoms Favor the N shore in entering from Clarno Cove             fathoms the W bight has depths of 3 to 5 fathoms, the S bight is
 (75)  Cannery Cove, just NW of Cannery Point (55006 7'N,    foul
132ï¿½08 3'W), affords good anchorage in 13 fathoms and the           (85)  Currents in the vicinity of Wedge Islands to Skin Island
small bight on the NW side of the cove has small-craft anchorage    are stronger on the flood and reach an estimated velocity of 2
m 1V2 fathoms                                                      knots dunng spring tides Moderate tide rips are set up with the
 (76)  Port Johnson, a narrow deep inlet, that extends about 3 5    wind against the current N of Wedge Island in the vicinity of
miles in a W  direction, is on the W  side of Clarence Strait,    Windy Pomt (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions in
between Adams Point and Wedge Islands From the entrance, mid-    this area )
channel courses hold good There is good anchorage m 15 fathoms      (86)  Cholmondeley Sound is a deep inlet entenng Prince of
about 2 4 miles above the entrance Water is available from a    Wales Island between Chasma Pomt and Skm Island Its extreme
stream on the N shore about 0 2 mile below the head of the inlet    length from the entrance of the sound to the head of West Arm Is
Anchorage in about 11 to 14 fathoms, but with hlimited swinging    about 16 rmles, it has several arms, all of which are deep and bold
room, is at the head, and from this shore a trail through a divide    with heavily wooded mountain slopes ending with steep-to rock
leads to North Arm of Molra Sound                                  shorelines Cholmondeley Sound's tributaries have not been







 104                                 5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


closely surveyed but are generally free from dangers. The currents   (95)  Dora Bay, on the S side, about 7 miles inside the entrance
in the sound are too weak or variable to be predicted.             to Cholmondeley Sound, may be used as an anchorage, but is not
  (87)  Chasina Point, about 36 miles N of Cape Chacon and the    recommended. There is an irregular ridge, with a least depth of 7
S point of the entrance of Cholmondeley Sound, is a wooded          1/4 fathoms, in the middle of the bay about 1.1 miles inside the
rounded point without any prominent features. The land is low for    entrance.
a distance of about 0.8 mile and then rises rapidly. It is advisable  (96)  Sunny Cove is on the N side at the head of the main part
to give the point a berth of at least 0.3 mile in rounding it.     of Cholmondeley Sound, about 8 miles W  of Chasina Anchorage,
                                                                    and with local knowledge affords anchorage for small craft. Ves-
  (88)  Chart 17436.-Chasina Island is a low, wooded islet    sels entering Sunny Cove should steer midchannel courses. Sunny
about 0.7 mile WSW from Chasina Point, about 0.1 mile offshore.    Point is the rounding point on the E side of the entrance to the
The passage behind the island is foul. A 1-fathom spot is midway    cove.
between Chasina Point and Chasina Island and about 250 yards         (97)  The head of Cholmondeley Sound is divided into two
offshore.                                                          arms known as South Arm and West Arm. West Arm has a
  (89)  Chasina Anchorage, to the W of Chasina Island, affords    straight unbroken N shoreline. Its S shore has two indentations,
a lee only from E to S winds. Anchorage may be obtained on a    the first about 1.5 miles above the confluence of the two arms is
rocky patch in about 9 fathoms with the NW corner of Chasina    small but furnishes shelter for small craft with anchor depths of 4
Island bearing about 042ï¿½ and Skin Island Light bearing about    to 8 fathoms. The second indentation in the S shore is SSW of the
338ï¿½; swinging room is about 250 yards. Anchorage in 17 fath-    most E of the chain of small wooded islets. Anchorage with ample
oms, with the light on the same bearing, may be obtained farther    swinging room may be had here behind the islet in 7 to 15 fath-
offshore.                                                          oms, soft bottom. Enter the small bay from West Arm by keeping
                                                                   W of the islet. Anchorage may also be had in 7 to 15 fathoms, soft
  (90)  Charts 17436, 17420.-Skin Island, 0.8 mile off the NW       bottom, at the head of West Arm. This anchorage is exposed to
point of the entrance to Cholmondeley Sound, is wooded, and    strong winds drawing through the low pass from Hetta Inlet.
about 170 feet high on the SE side. A reef that uncovers 10 feet is  (98)  From the head of West Arm a portage trail leads W  about
about 450 yards to the SW of the island. A sunken wreck, with    3.5 miles to the head of Hetta Inlet.
less than 11 fathoms over it and a danger to navigation in this area,  (99)  South Arm is free of off-lying dangers as far as is known.
is about 200 yards SW of the S edge of the reef. A group of small    Vessels entering should steer midchannel courses to the head of
islets is between the reef and Skin Island. A rock, awash at low    the arm to anchorage in 6 to 10 fathoms, soft bottom. Strong
water, is about 0.1 mile off the point on the W  side of the island.    winds from Klakas Inlet draw through the low pass at the head of
Skin Island Light (55018.1'N., 132ï¿½04.3'W.), 33 feet above the    South Arm.
water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dia-      (loo) All tributaries of Cholmondeley Sound freeze in their
mond-shaped daymark on the NE point of the island.                 upper reaches during the winter.
 (91)  The channel between Skin Island and Prince of Wales          (lao) To enter Cholmondeley Sound, from a position 0.5 mile
Island shore to the W is navigable, but the bottom is very irregular.    NW of Chasina Island, vessels should steer 219ï¿½ to abeam of
Passage can be made through the channel without encountering    Hump Island, then steer midchannel courses to the head of West
depths of less than 63/4 fathoms, except for a 21/2-fathom patch    Arm, passing to the N of the chain of wooded islets.
about 0.85 mile 264ï¿½ from Skin Island Light. The bight SE of         (102) Clover Bay has its 0.2-mile-wide entrance between Clo-
Anderson Point, the S entrance point of Clover Bay, is foul.       ver Point and Anderson Point, the S entrance point, about 1.5
 (92)  Hump Island, 3.5 miles inside the entrance to Cholmon-    miles W  of Skin Island. A bare rock is about 120 yards N of
deley Sound, about 4 miles SSW of Skin Island, is timbered and    Anderson Point, and a rock with a depth of /4 fathom is in mid-
about 400 feet high, and presents a conical appearance.            channel in the entrance. Safe entry can be made on a course 245ï¿½,
 (93)  Lancaster Cove, about 1 mile SE of Hump Island, is the    passing between the midchannel rock and the rock off Anderson
N one of two coves E of an island on the E side of Cholmondeley    Point. Foul ground extends about 0.2 mile E from Anderson Point.
Sound. It affords good anchorage in 13 to 14 fathoms. It can be    An area, small in extent with a least depth of 11/2 fathoms, is about
entered on either side of the wooded island in its entrance. A bare    0.9 mile within the entrance and about 125 yards from the S shore;
rock is 0.1 mile N of the NW end of the island. An islet is close    otherwise depths within the bay range from 73/4 to 41 fathoms.
SW of the island, and a rock with a least depth of 3 fathoms is      (103) The head of the bay is blocked by small islands. A small
close E of the island about 55013'04"N., 132005'13"W. In 1959, a    cove with depths of 12 to 21 fathoms, except for lesser depths
survey vessel used an anchorage about 150 yards S of the wooded    along the edges, is to the N of King Island, the largest of the
island, in 12 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom, good holding ground.    group. A bar with a midchannel depth of 13/4 fathoms stretches
There were no dangers in the anchorage or approach.                across the entrance to the cove from King Island to the rock off the
 (94)  Kitkun Bay has its entrance W of Babe Islands, about 6    point on the N shore. A ledge extends 50 yards NW of King Island
miles SW of Chasina Point and extends in a general SW direction    within the cove.
from the S side of Cholmondeley Sound. The area was surveyed in      (104)  Clover Point, a narrow wooded neck of land about 100
1961. Entrance to the N part of the bay should be made through    feet high, projects NNE for about 0.6 mile. About 1 mile inshore
the W of two channels. The least depth in midchannel is 31/2 fath-    the land rises to a series of knobs and ridges with higher peaks
oms. Entrance to the S part of the bay can be made through a nar-    inland. A bank, small in extent with 61/4 fathoms over it, is 0.6
row channel about halfway down the E shore of the N part of the    mile NE from Clover Point.
bay. This channel is foul at the entrance; the foul area is marked by  (105) The cove to the W of Clover Point is blocked by rocks and
kelp. Currents in the channel and near the entrance are very strong,    islets. The open bight 1 mile NW of Clover Point is deep. A small
with tide rips near the entrance. The least depth in the narrowest    2'/2-fathom patch is in midentrance. The cove, that is 1.6 miles
part of the channel is 1'/2 fathoms.                               NW from Clover Point, has depths of 11 to 12 fathoms until near







                                    5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                           105


the head. Rocks extend off the S point of the entrance for 500    the currents have a maximum velocity of 4.2 knots. (See the Tidal
yards, and a rock, that uncovers 3 feet, is in midentrance. A flat    Current Tables for daily predictions for places in Felice Strait.)
area, with depths of 11 to 20 fathoms, extends about 1.5 miles in a  (120) Percy Point (54ï¿½56.8'N., 131ï¿½37.1'W.), the westernmost
NW direction from the N entrance point of the cove.               point of Percy Islands and on the N side of the SW entrance to
                                                                   Sealed Passage, is a small island, 150 feet high, with a bold, rocky
 (106) Charts 17434, 17435, 17436, 17428.-The E shore of    shore.
Clarence Strait from Dixon Entrance to Vallenar Point, at the W     (121) From Percy Point NE to Harris Island, the shore is free
end of Tongass Narrows, is formed by three large islands, Duke,    from dangers except close-to. Cow Island is a small, wooded
Annette, and Gravina, and a number of smaller islands. Between    island 100 feet high, N of the Percy Island Group. N of Cow
these islands flow Felice Strait and Nichols Passage which connect    Island are two wooded islets; between the islets and Cow Island
Clarence Strait with Revillagigedo Channel.                       are two reefs that bare.
                                                                    (122) Point Davison and the W part of Annette Island are low
 (107)  Chart 17434.-Sealed Passage is an approach to Felice    and wooded. There are numerous off-lying islands and reefs for
Strait from Clarence Strait and is between Duke Island on the E    some distance from the main shore. The extremity of Point Davi-
and Percy Islands and Hotspur Island on the W. On the SE side of    son is a double island with a small wooded patch on it, and is con-
the S end of the passage about 5.2 miles SW of Point White, the    spicuous only from E or W. Point Davison Light (54ï¿½59.7'N.,
W extremity of Duke Island, there are numerous rocks, submerged    131036.8'W.), 33 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
and awash, of which Hassler Reef and the Bee Rocks are the out-    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the outer-
ermost.                                                           most of the small islands off the S end of the point.
 (108) Duke Island, the rocks to S, and Hassler Reef, about 5.2    (123) Harris Island is a small wooded island 90 feet high NW
miles SW of Point White, have been described in chapter 4.        of Hotspur Island. Along the N shore of this island are consider-
 (109) Bee Rocks, about 3.7 miles SW of Point White, is a group    able quantities of kelp that should be given a berth of at least 150
of awash and submerged rocks that is marked by kelp. Passage    yards in rounding the island. Fair anchorage in 6 to 12 fathoms,
between Bee Rocks and Hassler Reef to the SW, and Point White    sandy bottom, can be had 0.2 mile NE of Harris Island. A light is
to the NE, is not recommended without local knowledge.            on the N end of the island.
 (110) A shoal with 13/4 fathoms over it, is about 2.8 miles S of  (124) A group of wooded islets are 0.2 to 0.8 mile off Sextant
Point White.                                                      Point, the first point NE of Point Davison. Foul ground extends
 (1I1) Percy Islands are a large number of low wooded islands    about 500 yards N and about 700 yards S of these islets. Between
on the NW side of Sealed Passage. The passages between these    the islets and Sextant Point is a clear, deep channel, about 400
islands are not navigable except for very small craft with local    yards wide. The main channel into Felice Strait and Tamgas Har-
knowledge. Anchorage can be had either NE or SW of the south-    bor passes E of the islets and midway between them and Harris
ernmost island.                                                   Island.
 (112) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as       ( 25) Foul        extends for 0.4 mile off Moss      which is
                                                                    125) Foul ground extends for 0.4 mile off Moss Point, which is
17 'I  from the normal variation have been observed in the vicin-    2 miles NE of Point,Davison.
ity of the southernmost island at 54056.0'N., 131ï¿½35.5'W.
 (113) Sealing Reef is a double-headed rock awash about 1 mile
 113ESE from the S extremity of Percy Islands.aboutmile            (126) Chart 17435.-Tamgas Harbor has its entrance about 1.5
 (114) A pinnacle rock, not marked by kelp, with a least found    miles N of Harris Island. It is a landlocked anchorage suitable for
 (11depth of 4  fathoms, is 15 miles ESE from the S extremity of    small and moderate-sized craft. The harbor is subject to strong
depth of 43/4 fathoms, is 1.5 miles ESE from the S extremity of
Percy Islands. The depth may be less. A group of rocks, some of    wids i winter Winds of over 60 knots from NE to S have  en
which are 6 to 8 feet high, are 1.5 miles WNW of Point White.     experienced when anchored off Cre           The depths are gen-
 (115) Hotspur Island, on the NW side of Sealed Passage NE of    erally good except near the SW shore, which is shoal.
Percy Islands, is heavily wooded and has its greatest elevation     (127) Survey Point, E of the entrance to Tamgas Harbor, is
near the N side.                                                  indefinite; both it and the SE section of Annette Island are low and
 (116) Werlick Island, S of Hotspur Island, is low and heavily    wooded for a distance of 1.5 miles, and then the land rises rapidly
wooded.                                                           to the summit of Davison Mountain.
 (117) Vegas Islands, 1.2 miles E of the S extremity of Hotspur    (128) Ajax Reef, about 2.5 miles E from Harris Island and about
Island and about 0.5 mile off the Duke Island shore, are 160 feet    0.7 mile offshore, extends 0.2 mile in a NE direction and uncovers
high and heavily wooded. Between them and Duke Island are sev-    12 feet. It is surrounded by kelp. A light is on the S side of the reef
eral rocks.                                                       on a rock awash at high water.
 (us) Felice Strait extends from Sealed Passage to Revilla-        (129) Grass Rock, 0.3 mile off Grey Point on the W side of the
gigedo Channel, between Duke Island, Dog Island, Cat Island, and    entrance, is 15 feet high and grass covered. A rock, bare at low
Mary Island on the SE, and Annette Island on the NW. It offers the    water and marked by kelp, is about 200 yards SSE from Grass
most direct route for vessels from the S end of Behm Canal, but is    Rock.
little used. There are several dangers, all charted, but those nearest  (130) Mule Rock, 0.2 mile from the E shore at the entrance,
the sailing line are marked or show above water, with the excep-    covers at high water; it may be passed on either side. Tamgas
tion of the 11/2-fathom depth on Bostwick Reef in 55ï¿½02.3'N.,    Harbor Entrance Light (55001.3'N., 131ï¿½30.8'W.), 30 feet
131ï¿½18.8'W. No difficulty should be experienced in making the    above the water, is shown from a small house on a skeleton tower
passage through the strait in daytime and with clear weather.     with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the rock.
 (119) Currents in Felice Strait have considerable strength. At    (131) Prominent features.-About 1.7 miles NW of Crab Point
Harris Island they have a maximum velocity of about 4.2 knots,    is a microwave tower (see chart 17434), with red obstruction
diminishing rapidly at short distances away. Around Snipe Island    lights, that is prominent inside Tamgas Harbor. The waterfall at





106                                 5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


the mouth of the creek at the base of Berry Knoll is visible only at  (142) Bostwick Reef is 1 rmle ENE of Indian Rock, It is of con-
low water A large prominent rock is on the beach off Tent Point    siderable extent, marked by kelp, and has a least found depth of
  (132) Anchorages -The best anchorage is in 6 fathoms m the    11/2 fathoms near its northernmost end
middle of the basin, about 0 5 mile N of Crab Point, taking care to  (143) Ryus Bay is on the NW side of Duke Island about 1 4
avoid the 21/2 fathom spot 0 4 mile NW of the point                miles E of Vegas Islands It is easy of access and well-sheltered
 (133) Weather-The climate of Annette Is governed by the Gulf    and affords excellent anchorage for small craft m 10 fathoms, mud
of Alaska topography, and its nearness to the paths of extratropl-    bottom
cal storms Its mantlme location provides relatively mild tempera-    (144) Tamgas Reef, about 0 8 mile off the N shore of Duke
tures with small daily variations Periods of subfreezing    Island appears as a five-headed rock One head shows about 3 feet
temperatures seldom exceed 10 days and a below 0ï¿½F reading has    at high water, the others show at various stages of the tide
occurred only once dunng the entire period of record Dunng the       (145) Nlquette Harbor, E of Ryus Bay, is on the NW side of
summer, while maximums occasionally climb into the 80's, a 90ï¿½F    Duke Island and is about 0 3 mile wide at the widest part It
reading is unlikely Storms moving E across the Gulf of Alaska    extends about 0 5 mile in a SW direction, narrowing to an inlet
dump frequent and heavy precipitation with annual amounts smrr-    that dnes, about 0 5 mile long A submerged rock is 100 yards off
lar to those along the Washington and Oregon coasts Precipitation    the E shore of the narrowest part of the entrance to the harbor, and
of some sort falls on an average of about 220 days each year, while    a rock awash is opposite close to the W  shore Favor the W shore
snow can be expected on 3 to 5 days per month from December    in entering Anchorage for very small craft may be had in 4 to 6
through March Accumulated snow depths of 1 foot or more are    fathoms in the bight within the entrance Two rocks, awash,
infrequent and, because of moderating temperatures, snow cover    extend about 150 yards N from the point on the S side of the W
seldom persists beyond a week or two As a result of topography,    shore of the bight
Annette averages about 65 percent as much precipitation as Ketch-    (146)  Dog Bay, about 1 4 miles ENE of Nlquette Harbor is a
Ikan, just 20 mules to N Winds blow out of the ESE through SSE     small open bight with 33 fathoms at the entrance, 17 fathoms near
Strong southeasterlles are frequent from October through March    the head, and 13 to 15 fathoms in the SE corner Rocks are off the
with windspeeds attaumng 28 knots or more 2 to 4 percent of the    E and W shores, as shown on the chart
time During summer afternoons, southerlies are common and            (147) Dog Island, Immediately E of Dog Bay, Is heavily
conditions with windspeeds of 4 to 10 knots, temperatures          wooded and has a rocky shore Between Dog Island and Cat Island
between 33ï¿½F and 89ï¿½F and no precipitation are encountered on    about 1 8 miles to the NE  are Double Islands Fish Islands and
about 20 days per month Thick fogs are infrequent and of short    Village Island
duration Visibilities of 0 25 miles or less occur on about 15 days   (148) Double Islands, small and wooded, are connected at low
each year, conditions are worst from July through October (See    water and are surrounded by a considerable area of rocks and reefs
page T-l for Annette climatologlcal table )                        that bare
 (134) Routes -In entenng Tamgas Harbor pass about 500 yards        (149) Fish Islands, two m number and surrounded by moder
W  of Tamgas Harbor Entrance Light and keep the E shore close    ate sized rocky ledges are about 150 feet high and heavily
aboard, distant not over 300 yards until about abeam of Tent Point  wooded
Then follow a midchannel track into the harbor avoiding the
                                                                    (15so) Village Island is low with a sand beach on all sides Dur-
                                                                  shoals that extend off Crab Pong the summer, grass grows rankly around the old grave sites and
 (135) Caution -A shoal, marked by a buoy at its outer extrem      decaying totem poles on the Island
ity, extends about 0 4 mile SE from Deer Point on the W side, 0 8    (i51) PondBaySEofDog  slandbetweent andDuke sland
mile above Grass Rock Shoals extend 300 yards offshore between    affords good anchorage when once inside, but is little used
Tent Point and Crab Point and 200 yards off Yellow Point, thus    because of the dangerous approach The entrance from Felce
narrowing the channel to a width of about 250 yards between these    Strait and Dog Bay W  of Dog Island, bares about 2 feet A 6-
points                                                             fathom passage leads N of Dog Island into Pond Bay, but it is
 (136)  Quarantine, customs, Immigration, and agricultural    obstructed by rocks and requires local knowledge to enter safely
quarantine -(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and          (152) The best approach to Pond Bay is from Revlllaglgedo
appendix for addresses )                                           Channel through Cat Passage between Grave Point and three
 (137)  Quarantine is enforced m accordance with regulations of    islets off the SE point of Cat Island The best water leads about 0 3
the U S Public Health Service (See Public Health Service chap      mile off Grave Point until up to a reef that extends SW from a
ter 1 )                                                            small highwater island off the NE point of the entrance to the bay
                                                                  thence it leads about midchannel It is advisable for strangers to
 (138)  Chart 17434 -Wallace Reef, 2 miles E from Ajax Reef    enter at low water and with caution Rocks m depths of 41/2 and 6
and about 0 5 mile off the Annette Island shore has a least depth    feet have been reported in the W end of Cat Passage
of 3/4 fathom over it and is surrounded by kelp                      (153) Beaver Creek, on the W  side of Mary Island, is a small
 (139) Snipe Island is small and is marked by a light The island    creek the entrance to which is not readily discerned at high water
is about 10 feet above the water and has a few grassy patches on    A 23/4-fathom spot is 0 3 mile to the SW of its entrance with a
the highest part                                                   rock awash between it and the shore
 (140) Annette Point, at the SE extremity of Annette Island, is     (154)  Customhouse Cove is an indentation in the W  side of
low and wooded and has deep water close-to                         Mary Island that affords good shelter during SE weather The
 (141) Indian Rock, 2 miles NE of Annette Point and 0 7 mile    anchorage is in the middle of the cove, 300 yards from the bare
off Annette Island, is a cluster of rocks about 0 3 mile m diameter,    ledges fnngmg the shore
several of which bare at extreme low water and are marked by         (155) Giant Point, the N extremity of Mary Island, has reefs
heavy kelp A lighted buoy marks the W side of the shoal            that extend 200 yards N from it






                                    5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                           107


 (156) Kwam Bay and Crab Bay are on the E shore of Annette    water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dla-
Island opposite Mary Island The former affords fair anchorage for    mond-shaped daymark
moderate-sized vessels and has an entrance S of the rocks in the   (165) A rock, bare at half tide, is 0 7 mule SW of Pomt McCartey
center of the bay Crab Bay is an excellent anchorage for small    Light Several other similar rocks are between this one and the
craft and IS used considerably                                   Bronaugh Islands A rock which uncovers 2 feet and has deep
                                                                  water close to it is about 0 3 mile ESE from Pomt McCartey This
 (157) Charts 17432, 17434 -Nichols Passage is between    rock is marked by a buoy A shoal, covered 25 feet is about 0 5
Annette Island on the E and Gravina Island on the W, and con-    mile SE of Point McCartey Light
nects Clarence Strait with the SE end of Tongass Narrows It        (166) Banks and broken ground, with least found depths of 7 to
offers the shortest route for vessels from Dixon Entrance and the S    15 fathoms, are about 0 9 mile NE from Point McCartey This area
part of Clarence Strait to Ketchikan There are several clusters of    should be avoided
dangerous rocks m the passage, but they are well marked and eas-   (167) The narrow passage between Bronaugh Islands and Grav-
ily avoided The channel generally used by large vessels passes W  ma Island has a least depth of 30 feet and is used considerably by
of Warburton Island and Kelp Rocks  Most small craft when    small craft It should be used only with local knowledge
entering or leaving Clarence Strait from the N  or from Moira     (168) Dall Bay, on the W  side of Nichols Passage about 1 5
Sound use the narrow channel that passes between the Bronaugh    miles N of Dall Head has many dangers that are shown on the
Islands and Gravina Island into Nichols Passage                  chart It offers good anchorage in 8 fathoms mud bottom between
 (158) Currents -Vessels bound to Nichols Passage from points    the two islands well inside the bay There is also small-craft
across Clarence Strait should take the current into consideration,    anchorage farther in, depth 3 fathoms, soft mud bottom Local
for the course is rarely made good In Nichols Passage the flood    knowledge IS essential for entering A privately maintained moor-
sets N with a velocity of 0 7 to 2 8 knots, the greatest strength    ing float is near the head of the bay The bay is used for stornng fish
being felt in the vicinity of Walden Rocks Currents are consider-    traps
ably influenced by the winds (See the Tidal Current Tables for
predictions for places in Nichols Passage )                        (169) Chart 17435 -Warburton Island Is about 2 8 miles NE
 (159) The SW end of Annette Island on the E side of Nichols    of Point McCartey and 1 4 miles from the W  shore of Annette
Passage, from Point Davison to Yellow Hill, is about 200 feet high    Island It is about 0 1 mile in diameter, 130 feet high and round
and wooded The shoreline is irregular and broken by numerous    topped and has steep, rocky shores A rock with 1ï¿½/ fathoms over
small bights, islands, and rocks Yellow Hill is a yellow-topped    it is about 200 yards NW of the island
hill 1 5 miles S from Metlakatla The summit is formed by several   (170) Warburton Island Light (55007 9'N, 131ï¿½37 9'W), 35
bare, rounded knolls of approximately equal elevation            feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red
                                                                  and white diamond-shaped daymark on the E side of the island
 (160) Chart 17434 -Hid Reef (see also chart 17432) Is about 2    (171) Kelp Rocks are four widely spaced patches surrounded by
miles off the W  shore of Annette Island at the S entrance to    deep water, NW of Warburton Island Light The northeasternmost
Nichols Passage On the reef are three distinct clumps of rocks   patch is marked on its NE side by a buoy, and the westernmost
bare at about half tide with narrow passages between them The    patch by a lighted bell buoy on the W side The northeasternmost
outermost rock is 2 8 miles SW from Cedar Point (55ï¿½05 8'N,    rock is on the range of the waterfall m Port Chester and the N end
131ï¿½36 4'W), and is marked by a lighted whistle buoy             of Gull Island
 (161) Canoe Cove indents the W shore of Annette Island about     (172) Port Chester is an extensive bay mdentming the W shore of
3 rmles S of Cedar Point The cove is used by small boats and is   Annette Island E of Warburton Island It is encumbered by numer-
entered through the N passage                                    ous islands and reefs, of which the southernmost Is Gull Island,
  (162) Smuggler Cove, immediately S of Cedar Point, is open    known locally as Crow Island, 150 feet high and wooded About
and exposed In the upper part of the cove is a beach of fine clear    0 4 mile WSW of Gull Island is a rock awash at highest tides Sur-
sand 200 yards long The microwave tower close ESE of Smug-    rounding it and extending to the islet E are extensive ledges with
gler Cove is promment from the cove and Nichols Passage          bare heads, the W extremity of these ledges is marked by a light
                                                                  Another ledge with bare heads extends about 0 6 mile E from Gull
  (163) Chart 17432 -Dall Head, the S extremity of Gravina    Island The bare head closest to Gull Island in thius ledge is known
Island, is the W headland at the S entrance to Nichols Passage It   locally as One-Tree Island A lighted buoy is on the E side of the
is low and wooded At a distance of 1 5 miles N of Dall Head the    1 /4-fathom rock lying about 0 7 mile ESE of Gull Island Village
land rises rapidly to the high mountains of Dall Ridge (chart    Point, on the S side of the entrance to Port Chester is low and
17434) with its high and remarkable peaks, forms a conspicuous    sandy with a gravel beach on the E side W of Village Point are
landmark from Clarence Strait and Dixon Entrance in clear    extensive reefs that bare to a distance of 0 2 mile offshore A hght
weather The S end of Dall Ridge is unusually rugged and broken    is on the pier on the W side of Village Point
The southernmost summit is crowned with a narrow cap of trees,     (173) Metlakatla (55ï¿½07 7'N  131ï¿½34 6'W), is a large native
below which for 600 feet are bare cliffs of gray and brownish    American community on the S side of Port Chester about 16 miles
rock Several rounded hills covered with dead trees show white    S of Ketchikan, through Tongass Narrows and Nichols Passage
against the mountains of Dall Ridge At the S end of Dall Ridge    (174) Metlakatla has a cold storage plant a cannery a sawmill
are two large landslides facing S                                and an oil termnal
  (164) Bronaugh Islands, that extend from 0 3 to 2 miles from     (175) Prominent features -The cold storage plant and a large
Dall Head, are low and wooded with rocks and reefs surrounding    white church with two square towers are prominent from Nichols
them The easternmost Island of the group, known as Point    Passage
McCartey,  is bare on the S and E edges It is marked by Point     (176)  Pilotage, Metlakatla -Pilotage except for certain
McCartey Light  (55ï¿½06 8'N, 131ï¿½42 4'W), 44 feet above the    exempted vessels is compulsory for all vessels navigating the





108                                 5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


inside waters of the State of Alaska (See Pilotage, Alaska,          (188)  Supplies -Gasoline, diesel fuel, distillates, and water are
indexed as such, chapter 3 for details )                           available at the fuel facility Provisions, fishing supphes and lhm-
 (177) Vessels en route Metlakatla meet the pilot boat about 1    ited amounts of marine supplies can be obtained in Metlakatla
mile E of Point McCartey Light (55ï¿½06 8'N, 131042 4'W)             Additional supphes may be obtained in Ketchikan 16 miles N
 (178)  The pilot boat, a tugboat, can be contacted by calling      (189) Repairs -There are no provisions for overhauling vessels
"METLAKATLA PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channels 16, 13, or    m Metlakatla Dunng the fishing season, the machine shop at the
12                                                                 Packing Company Wharf is available for minor repairs to small
 (179)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural    craft Extensive repairs for small craft are available in Ketchlkan
quarantine -(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections and    16 miles to the N
appendix for addresses )                                             (i90) Small-craft faclhties -A small-craft basin, protected by a
 (180)  Quarantine Is enforced m accordance with regulations of    breakwater, is close SW of the City Pier In February 1992 the
the U S Public Health Service (See Public Health Service, chap-    controlling depth was 10 feet in the entrance channel and basin
ter 1 )                                                            with lesser depths along the W edge and SW corner of the basin
 (Isl)  Wharves -Metlakatla has an oil company pier, a city pier,    The entrance Is marked by a hght on the NW end of the breakwa-
a State ferry terminal, a packing company wharf, a barge terminal,    ter There is 1,100 feet of berthing space along the floats  The
a barge ramp, a seaplane float, and pubhc and privately owned    basin is under the control of the harbormaster who monitors
small-craft facilities                                             VHF FM channel 16 and can also be contacted by telephone at
 (1s2) Union Oil Company Pier (55ï¿½07'55"N, 131ï¿½34'33"W)            (907) 886-4646  A combination seaplane and small-boat float is
on the W  side of Village Point, a manne fuel facility extends NE  on the NE side of Village Point
from the outer end of the approach pier, 80-foot face, S side 40     (191) Another small-craft basin, protected by breakwaters is 0 3
feet long, NE side 40 feet long, 10 to 12 feet alongside deck    mile W of Village Point In February 1992 the controlling depth
height, 26 feet receipt of petroleum products and fuel for small    was 9 feet (14 feet at midchannel) in the entrance channel thence
craft and fishing vessels owned by Metlakatla Indian Community    m January 1989, depths of 9 to 14 feet were available in the basin
and operated by Union Oil Company                                  except for lesser depths along the edges  The entrance is marked
 (183) Annette Island Packing Company Wharf (55ï¿½07'48"N,    by a light on the end of the NW breakwater and daybeacons just
131ï¿½34'14"W) about 300 yards SE of Village Point, 380-foot    off the end of the SE breakwater
face, SW side 70 feet long, NE side 120 feet long, 23 feet along-    (192)  Communications -The Alaska State Ferry System has
side, deck height, 26 feet, 17 forkhfts, one 25-ton forklift ice for    scheduled ferry service to Metlakatla Seaplanes from Ketchikan
fishing vessels and water are available, receipt of seafood, owned    also make scheduled trips to the community Metlakatla is con-
by Metlakatla Indian Company and operated by the Annette Island    nected with Annette by highway Telephone and radiotelephone
Packing Company                                                    communication is maintained with other States and parts of
 (184) Metlakatla City Dock (55ï¿½07'43"N , 131ï¿½34'02"W)             Alaska
about 200 yards SE of Annette Island Packing Company Wharf,          (193)  Scrub Islands, known locally as the Two Sisters, about
close E and parallel to the breakwater protecting the small-craft    0 8 mile E of Gull Island, have two scraggy clumps of trees and
basin to the W, 400-foot face, 35 feet alongside, deck height, 26    are surrounded by ledges, mostly covered at high water A buoy
feet, two 10-ton forkhfts, forklifts up to 20 tons are available   marks the NE side of the ledges
water and electnclty are available, receipt and shipment of general  (194) Hub Rock, known locally as Devils Rock, about 1 mile
cargo, shipment of logs, cants and occasionally lumber, owned    NNE of Village Pomt, is a small bare ledge about 6 feet above
and operated by Metlakatla Indian Community                        high water A 1-fathom spot is about 0 3 mile NNE from Hub
 (185) Metlakatla City Barge Ramp close S of the City Dock,    Rock
adjustable transfer bridge, 15 feet reported alongside the outer end
                                                                     (i95) Martin Rock, awash at low water, is 0 2 mile NW of Hub
of the ramp and the inshore is dry, uses same cargo handling    Rock, it is not marked by kelp
equipment as City Dock, water and electricity are available, two                                     miles N of Village Point and
25-ton mobile forklift trucks and tractors are available, receipt and  (196)  Murdo Island, about 1 1 miles N of Vllage Pot and
                 shipment of contaezed and roll-onroll-off general cargo  locally known as Battleship Island from Its former vegetation is
fowned by Metlakatla Indian Communty and ropgeerated by Foss    covered with grass and numerous trees Extensive ledges extend S
o       dby tAlaska LCommunite and Boyer Alaska Barge LFoesInc    W, and N from the island A daybeacon is 0 8 mile NW of Murdo
Alaska Line and Boyer Alaska Barge Line, Inc
  (186)  Louisiana-Pacific Annette Hemlock Mill Dock
(55ï¿½07'38"N, 131033'44"W) about 340 yards SE of the City             (197) Fllmore Rock Is about 0 3 mile NNW of Murdo Island
Dock, 20-foot T-head pier with six dolphms providing about 400    and bares 1 foot at lowest tdes
feet of berthing space, 10 feet alongside receipt of log rafts, ship-  (198)  Lively Rock is about 0 5 mile N from Murdo Island and
ment of wood chips and waster, owned by Metlakatla Indian Conm    has 5 feet over it at low water It is marked by a lighted buoy close
munity and operated by Loulslana-Pacific Corp  Ketchlkan    NE of the rock
Division                                                             (i99)  Hemlock Island, close to the N shore of Port Chester is
  (187) Alaska Manne Highway System, Metlakatla Ferry Terrm-    wooded It is fnnged with reefs, and at lowest tide is connected at
nal about 900 yards SE of the City Dock, 35-ton transfer bridge    its N corner with Annette Island
with three dolphins providing 250 feet of total berthing space 15    (200) Leading to Port Chester are three channels, of which the S
feet alongside, passengers and vehicles, owned and operated by    one, between Gull Island and Village Point is of chief Importance
the State of Alaska In 1976 a State ferry terminal was under con-    the dangers are shown on the chart Enter on a 0850 course with
struction at the same location of the present State ferry terminal  Warburton Island Light directly astern The second entrance is the
The new termnal has a designed berthing area of 235 feet and a    narrow passage between Murdo and Gull Islands, it is seldom
project depth alongside of 24 feet                                 used







                                    5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                             109


 (201) The N entrance leads from off Driest Point to midway    high water, and at that time the smaller rocks are covered. About
between Hemlock Island and the lighted buoy marking Lively    150 yards W  of the group is a rock that covers at half tide and
Rock, then SSE passing E of Scrub Island Buoy 7, then SSW to    shows kelp. The rock is marked by a light. Close N of the group
Port Chester.                                                      are other kelp-marked rocks, and 0.2 mile NNW is a rock with 1
 (202) Port Chester does not afford good anchorage. During SE    fathom over it. About 0.6 mile S of Walden Rocks is a rocky ledge
gales, winds blow with great violence across it, and williwaws of    that uncovers 12 feet: between it and Annette Island are a number
60 to 70 knots sweep down from Purple Mountain and across the    of rocks that bare.
anchorage. Anchorage is to be had in 14 fathoms, mud bottom,         (210) Walden Point offers considerable shelter for small craft
about 0.5 mile E of the Packing Company Wharf.                     directly offshore. Bailey Rock covers at high water, is marked by
 (203) Driest Point, on the NW side of Port Chester and separat-    a daybeacon, and is about 1 mile S of Walden Point.
ing it from Sylburn Harbor, is a narrow, rocky stretch of land, 250  (211)  Annette Bay, at the NW end of Annette Island, is about
feet high, and wooded down to high-water line. Foul ground    0.8 mile wide at the entrance and narrows to a small stream; it is
extends about 0.5 mile N from the point. Driest Point Light 4    about 3 miles long, has deep water, and does not afford anchorage
(55ï¿½10.6'N., 131ï¿½36.4'W.), 29 feet above the water, is shown from    for vessels. Small craft can anchor near its head in 7 to 8 fathoms.
a spindle with a red triangular daymark on the W extremity of the    Race Point, the N extremity of Annette Island, and the NE point
point.                                                             at the entrance to the bay, is wooded and has a height of about 150
 (204) Sylburn Harbor is a small bay N of Driest Point, the S    feet. A ledge with a rock awash extends 450 yards NW of the
end of which affords fair anchorage for small craft in 7 to 18 fath-    point. The point should be given a berth of over 0.3 mile.
oms. The easternmost branch of the harbor is known locally as
Japan Bay. About the middle of the outer entrance to Sylburn         (212)  Charts 17436, 17420.-The W  shore of Gravina Island
Harbor is a large double-headed rock that is covered several feet at    from Dall Head to South Vallenar Point is heavily timbered, bold,
high water. Strangers entering the harbor are advised to wait for    and rocky. Close to shore are many large boulders and rocks, and
low water when the dangers are visible. A 159ï¿½ course, with the    the bottom is rocky and uneven. The 100-fathom curve is from 0.5
middle of Blank Inlet (chart 17428) astern and the middle of the S    to 1 mile offshore, and it is advisable to give the coast a berth of
bight ahead, leads midway between the foul ground off Driest    that distance.
Point and the rock in the middle of the outer entrance.              (213) Tidal currents are usually strong close to shore, especially
                                                                    on the flood, reaching an estimated velocity of 2 knots. Small tide
 (205) Charts 17428, 17434.-Seal Cove (55ï¿½11'N., 131043'W.)    rips are found off the more prominent points when the wind is
is on the W side of Nichols Passage, 4 miles N of Point McCartey.    opposed to the current. W of Bronaugh Islands moderate tide rips
It has depths of about 30 to 40 feet, but is suitable only for small    are set up on a flood current with a N wind. Around South Vallenar
craft because of its narrow entrance. A reef, mostly bare at half    Point, an estimated velocity of 2.5 knots is reached on the flood
tide, extends across the entrance, through which are two channels.    and 1.5 knots on the ebb, with moderate tide rips when wind and
The N one has a depth of 8 feet and width of 75 yards, but it is full    current are opposed. W of Vallenar Point the flood current is esti-
of boulders and dangerous. The S entrance is generally used. It is    mated at 3 knots and 1.5 knots on the ebb with strong tide rips on
close to the S shore and has a depth of about 3 to 11 feet. The    the ebb during a SE storm.
channel is narrow and has thick kelp and strong currents. Caution   (214) Dall Head has been described with Nichols Passage.
is advised when entering Seal Cove by the N or S entrance. Seal
Cove Rock, covered 1/V4 fathoms and surrounded by kelp, is about    (215) Chart 17432.-Rocks and islands extend about 0.6 mile
0.4 mile E of the highest part of the reef in the entrance to Seal    offshore for a distance of 1.2 miles NW from Dall Head. A small
Cove.                                                              open bight, foul near the head, with depths of 6 to 7 fathoms in the
 (206) Bostwick Inlet, immediately N of Seal Cove, is on the W     entrance, is 1.4 miles NW from Dall Head. A small rocky islet is
side of Nichols Passage, 6 miles N of Point McCartey. It affords    off the S shore of the entrance. A rock awash is 400 yards off the
no shelter in SE weather. The S shore is generally foul, and the    wooded islet S of the entrance; it is 1.5 miles WNW of Dall Head.
upper part of the bay bares for 1.2 miles from the head. In enter-  (216)  Nehenta Bay, open to the S, is 2.5 miles NW of Dall
ing, follow the N shore at a distance of about 0.2 mile. A rock    Head. Depths of 12 to 16 fathoms were obtained in the channel W
awash at high water is on the SW side of the channel at about    of the small rocky islet in the middle of the entrance that marks the
55ï¿½13.2'N., 131044.0'W.                                            end of the chain of rocks and rocky islets that extend N from the
  (207)  Blank Inlet, about 4 miles N of Bostwick Inlet and W of    island at the S entrance point. Foul ground extends 0.1 mile from
Gravina Point, the E extremity of Gravina Island, extends 3 miles    the head of the bay, and a 6-foot spot is 650 yards 212ï¿½ from the
NW into the shore of Gravina Island. It is open to the sea from    midchannel rock. Depths of 73/4 to 14 fathoms were obtained in the
Nichols Passage and affords no sheltered anchorage. Two rocks    middle of the bay, while depths of 14 fathoms were obtained in the
awash are almost in the center of the inlet.                       small bight E of midchannel rock. The narrow arm, 0.4 mile long
  (208)  Blank Islands, two in number, 200 feet high and wooded,    in a NW direction on the NW side of the bay, has a depth of 31/2
are near the N side of the entrance to Blank Inlet. The S shoreline    fathoms at the entrance and 21/4 fathoms halfway to the head. A
is bare rock for 50 to 100 yards outside the trees, and the shore is    reef extends from the NE shore to within 50 yards of the SW shore
bold. Small craft can find good anchorage in the bight on the N    of this arm.
side of the islands. Blank Islands Light (55016.0'N.,                (217) Phocena Rocks, the highest 25 feet, are 275 yards off-
131ï¿½38.3'W.), 37 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton    shore, W of the NW point of the entrance to Nehenta Bay.
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped-daymark on the SE
extremity of the S Blank Island.                                     (218)  Charts 17436, 17420.-Phocena Bay (55ï¿½10.8'N.,
  (209) Walden Rocks are a group of bare rocks at the N entrance    131ï¿½48.5' W.), 3.6 miles NW from Dall Head, open to the S, has a
to Nichols Passage. The group at its E end shows about 10 feet at    5/4-fathom spot about midentrance and depths of 9 to 17 fathoms






110                                 5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


just within the entrance. Foul ground extends about 350 yards off    an estimated velocity of 2 to 2.5 knots. From Island Point S there
the N entrance point. The N end of the cove is foul for about 0.1    is generally a S eddy close to shore during flood tides. Off Island
mile from the shore, to the S of which is an area about 200 yards    Point and the E end of High Island, moderate tide rips are formed
wide, with depths of 1 to 3 fathoms, where fishermen find fair-    when the wind is against the current.
weather anchorage. The bight to the E of the S entrance point has    (228) Island Point, the S point at the entrance to Kasaan Bay, is
7 fathoms at the entrance and shoals rapidly to the head. The small    rounded and wooded and has an elevation of 228 feet. A small
cove immediately W of the N entrance point to the cove is foul.    rocky islet is close to the N shore and two small rocks are close to
 (219) Open Bay (55ï¿½11'45"N., 131ï¿½49'30"W.), 5 miles NW            the E shore of the point. The shoreline is grayish-white rock about
from Dall Head, is open to the W  and NW. Depths of 6 fathoms    25 feet high. Moderate tide rips are encountered off the point.
are found at the entrance, 13/4 fathoms 150 yards within, and shoal  (229) The small cove to the W  of Island Point has depths of 22
water to the head.                                                 fathoms at the entrance shoaling to 6 fathoms near the head. It is
 (220)  Grant Cove, about 14.5 miles NNW of Dall Head and 1.7    used as an anchorage by fishing boats, but is exposed to the N.
miles SSE of South Vallenar Point, is exposed to the W. The cove     (230) Twenty Fathom Bank is 2 miles ESE of Island Point. The
shoals from depths of over 20 fathoms at the entrance to depths of    bottom is rocky and has a least depth of 17 fathoms. The bank is
10 fathoms at the edge of the flat 300 yards from the head. Give    used extensively by fishermen engaged in trolling.
the shore S of the S entrance point to the cove a berth of about 0.3  (231) High Island, about 1.4 miles N of Island Point, is wooded.
mile. A mooring log is anchored near the head of the cove in 10    From the S there appears to be twin summits on the island, but
fathoms.                                                           they merge into one from the E and again become visible from the
 (221) The small cove 0.8 mile NNW of Grant Cove is open,    NW. The slope of the island is uniform. The NE and S shores are
exposed, shallow, and foul. A rock with a depth of about 1 fathom    abrupt and consist of gray rock, 20 to 40 feet high.
is about 300 yards W of the N entrance point to the cove. Another    (232) High Island Light (55'24.1'N., 132009.8'W.), 40 feet
rock, which uncovers 3 feet, is about 200 yards S of the N         above the water, shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white
entrance point; the area N of this rock should be avoided. The    diamond-shaped daymark on the NE side of the island, marks the
small cove 1.1 miles NNW from Grant Cove bares at low water,    entrance to Kasaan Bay. A rocky islet, 43 feet high and with a few
with the exception of a very narrow opening 200 yards long mid-    trees on it, is off the SE end of the island.
way in the entrance that has depths of about 2 fathoms. A large     (233)  Patterson Island, separated by a channel from the W end
kelp-marked shoal is about 0.5 mile WSW of the cove. A rock    of High Island, extends W  about 1.3 miles. The channel, about
with a depth of about 3 feet is near the S end of this shoal.       100 yards wide, is clear for small boats and has a depth of 3 fath-
  (222)  South Vallenar Point, about 1.7 miles N of Grant Cove,    oms. The island is timbered and has three summits; the highest is
is near the NW end of Gravina Island on the NE side of Clarence    at the E end. A bight makes into the S shore of the island near the
Strait.                                                            W end in the depression between the W summit and the E ridge. It
  (223)  A ridge extends about 0.8 mile N from South Vallenar    is used as an anchorage during N weather, but affords no protec-
Point. The bottom is rocky and very irregular. A rock, 5 feet high,    tion during SE weather. Several rocks that cover at high water are
is about 0.2 mile N of the point.                                  at the entrance. The outermost rock, which bares at half tide, is
  (224) Vallenar Bay, between South Vallenar and Vallenar    0.25 mile ESE from the W point of the entrance to the bight. A
Points, affords good shelter from winds drawing up the strait. A   house is at the head of the bight.
foul area with several rocks, some awash and others that uncover,    (234) A rock with 11/4 fathoms over it is about 0.4 mile SSW
extends about 0.5 mile N from the S shore of Vallenar Bay about    from the easternmost point of Patterson Island, and it is not always
0.2 mile E of the 5-foot high rock N of South Vallenar Point. A    marked by kelp; otherwise the passage S of the island is clear.
mudflat that dries extends about 0.4 mile from the head of the bay.  (235)  Grindall Island, the N point of the entrance to Kasaan
Anchorage in about 14 fathoms can be found 0.7 mile from the    Bay, is about 4.0 miles N from Island Point. It is heavily wooded
head of the bay about 350 yards off the E shore.                   and has two knobs near the SW end, the W  knob is the highest.
  (225) Vallenar Point is described in chapter 4.                   The E part of the island is low. Approach Point is the E extrem-
                                                                    ity of the island.
  (226)  Charts 17426, 17436.-Kasaan Bay, 47 miles N of Cape         (236) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
Chacon, has its entrance on the W side of Clarence Strait, between    5ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed on Grindall
Island Point and Grindall Island, where it is about 4.0 miles wide.    Island in the vicinity of Approach Point.
It extends about 17.5 miles NW to Karta Bay at its head. About       (237) Grindall Point, the SE end of Kasaan Peninsula, has a
halfway up the bay, in the middle, are several islands. The shores    symmetrical rounded hill that is visible in every direction. Being
of the bay and islands are steep-to and heavily wooded. A high,    separated from the higher land of the peninsula, it forms an excel-
steep mountain range extends along the N shore of the bay almost    lent landmark. From the upper reaches of Kasaan Bay it could
to the head. Fog often prevails in the S part of Clarence Strait,    possibly be mistaken for the hill on Grindall Island, which it
while it is clear in Kasaan Bay. During SE stormy weather, clouds    obscures from view.
and mist travel low along the N shore, while the S shore is gener-   (238) Grindall Passage is frequently used by those with local
 ally free from low-flying scud. During SE storms the sea at the    knowledge. It is safe for steamers, though the clear part of the
 entrance to the bay is rough and treacherous for small craft. Tem-    channel is only 150 yards wide in the narrowest part. A wooded
porary anchorage while waiting for the fog to lift may be had on    islet and two bare rocks about 550 and 750 yards, respectively,
 an extensive bank, 0.6 to 1.2 miles S from Grindall Point in depths    SSW of it are close to the W end of Grindall Island. A I '/2-fathom
 of 8 to 16 fathoms. All known dangers are shown on the chart.    spot is 275 yards 290ï¿½ from the southernmost rock. A rock with a
 Midchannel depths are generally good.                              depth of 21/4 fathoms is in the middle of the passage, 300 yards N
  (227)  Currents in Clarence Strait from Clover Bay to High    of the wooded islet off the W  end of Grindall Island. A patch of
 Island are most noticeable on the flood, and with a S wind attain    foul ground is on the W side of the S entrance to the passage. This







                                    5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                             111


foul ground will be cleared by keeping E of the range formed by    protected anchorage for small craft in about 4 to 9 fathoms, mud
two prominent points, one on either side of the cove on the W side    bottom, is at the head of the cove.
of the passage. The N point has a wooded islet close by that should  (248) McKenzie Inlet, the S branch of Skowl Arm, has its
not be mistaken for the point. Pass close to the S point of the cove    entrance about 3.7 miles W  of Skowl Point. The inlet extends
to avoid the 21/4-fathom spot in the middle of the passage. The N  about 5 miles in a S direction. McKenzie Rock, bare, is about 0.5
entrance is clear.                                                 mile W of Khayyam Point, the E point at the entrance; there is no
 (239)  A good anchorage for small vessels in N weather may be    safe channel between. A dangerous submerged rock is immedi-
had in what is locally called Grindall Anchorage, the small cove    ately N of McKenzie Rock. A rock, that uncovers 3 feet, and a
at the end of Grindall Point. Anchor in 5 to 12 fathoms, soft bot-    rock awash immediately to the NW, are about 400 yards from the
tom. In S weather fair protection can be found directly across the    E shore, 0.5 mile S of McKenzie Rock. The only good anchorage
pass off a U.S. Forest Service cabin. The U.S. Forest Service    in Skowl Arm for vessels of any size is in McKenzie Inlet, about
maintains a mooring buoy in the small cove close to the cabin.    500 yards N of East Sentinel Island, in 28 fathoms, mud bottom.
Fresh water may be obtained here. The current floods E through      (249)  About 1 mile inside the entrance, the channel leads
Grindall Passage, ebbs W, and is of moderate strength.             between East Sentinel Island and West Sentinel Island, two
 (240)  Trollers Cove is back of a chain of islands about 1.4 miles    rounded wooded islands. Kelp extends from the islands a short
W from Island Point. The cove has depths of 4 to 6 fathoms. It is    distance into the channel, which is narrow and has a depth of
considered a good small-boat anchorage and is used by those fish-    about 5 fathoms. A careful midchannel course between the islands
ing on Twenty Fathom Bank. Three channels may be used in    leads through safely; S of the islands the inlet is clear. There is
entering. The channel E of the islands bares, is foul, and should be    good anchorage near the head of the inlet on the W side of Pea-
used only by those with local knowledge. The channel in the mid-    cock Island, in depths of 7 to 10 fathoms, soft bottom.
dle of the chain of islands has a depth of 5 fathoms. It is marked by  (250) Paul Bight, on the W  side of the entrance to McKenzie
a light on the E end of a small island on the W side of the entrance    Inlet, affords anchorage for small craft in 3 to 5 fathoms. A group
to the cove. The channel W of the island is the best.              of bare rocks is off the N point at the entrance. In entering, favor
 (241) Round the W island at a distance of about 125 yards and    the S point.
then follow a midchannel course to the S of the islands. Pass about  (251)  Polk Inlet, the W arm of Skowl Arm, is entered about 4.7
50 yards S of the S shore of the E island to avoid a rock awash that    miles above the entrance to Skowl Arm, and extends W and S for
is about 100 yards S of the island. When abeam the SE end of the    about 9.3 miles. The entrance to the inlet is foul, and extreme cau-
island, anchor in about 4 fathoms.                                 tion must be exercised when entering. The current in the entrance
 (242)  The small cove W  of the W island has three rocky islets    to the inlet is weak.
and several rocks marked by kelp in the center. It is not recom-     (252) Black Rock bares 10 feet and is about 1 mile N from
mended as an anchorage.                                            Kasaan Point. The range formed by the NE tangent of Daisy
                                                                    Island, 1.3 miles NW of Black Rock, and the rocky islet SE of
                  (243)  Skowl Arm and Polk Inlet, its W  arm, have a combed    Daisy Island clears Black Rock by a distance of about 0.1 mile.
length of about 14 miles. The head of the inlet is only about 3
miles from the head of Cholmondeley Sound (chart 17436)              (253) Kasaan Island, low and wooded, and Round Island, a
miles from the intervhead of Cholmondeley Sound (chart 17436),    small wooded islet NW of Kasaan Island, are the most noticeable
though the intervening land is htgh.  kow  PoAmt,i the S poinst at    of the islands in the middle of Kasaan Bay. A reef that uncovers 9
the entrance to Skowl Arm, is the northern-most tip of Skowl       feet is 0.6 mile 1620 from the W  end of Kasaan Island. The chan-
                                                                    nel S of this reef and S of Kasaan Island has been found clear of
 (244)  Skowl Point Light (55ï¿½25.7'N., 13216. 1'W.), 15 feet    dangers. The entrance at both ends of the channel are clear, with
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    the exception of a 214-fathom spot 0.1 mile NW of Berry Island.
white diamond-shaped daymark on the outlying bare rock about    A 5L/4-fathom spot is 0.8 mile 1250 from the E end of Kasaan
300 yards N of the point at the entrance to Skowl Arm. Fishing    Island.
boats find good protection close to the shore immediately W  of      (254) Anchorage for small boats is to be found in the landlocked
Skowl Point during SE storms.                                      inlet on the NE side of Kasaan Island in 7 to 10 fathoms, soft bot-
 (245) On the N side, about 3.5 miles up the arm, is the aban-    tom. This is called Happy Harbor locally. The entrance is 2 feet
doned Haida village of Old Kasaan. No evidence of the village    deep, and caution is necessary in entering. A shoal, covered 11
remains; other than a few weathered totem poles and a few graves.    feet and marked by kelp, is 150 yards NNW of the rock awash off
The village site is part of Old Kasaan Village Historical Area,    the NE entrance point. Another shoal, covered 9 feet and marked
administered by the U.S. Forest Service. In front of the village site    by kelp, is 300 yards N of the same rock awash. After entering the
is a ledge, covered at high water, that extends about 100 yards off-    narrow channel, favor the E side until through the entrance.
shore.                                                               (255) The lagoon on the S side of Kasaan Island is sheltered, but
  (246) Smith Cove, the large bay E of Old Kasaan village site    subject to strong winds drawing through from the N. The channel
and about 2 miles W of Kasaan Point, affords good anchorage in    is very narrow and has a controlling depth of 4 feet.
10 to 20 fathoms, soft bottom. It should be entered with caution,   (256) A small cove, known locally as Linney Bay, 0.6 mile W
taking care to avoid the rocks and shoals off the two small wooded    of Daisy Island, is used regularly for storage of log rafts. Excellent
islets at the entrance and inside the bay.                         shelter is afforded in all weather, but center depths and bottom do
  (247)  Saltery Cove is a small bay, about 1 mile long, in the SE    not favor good anchorage. A 2-fathom shoal is just E of the center
shore of Skowl Arm, about 2.5 miles W of Skowl Point and close    of the entrance, but depths throughout the greater part of the bay
E of McKenzie Inlet. A group of islands, surrounded by foul    are 10 to 24 fathoms with no known dangers.
ground, is on the E side of the cove; this foul ground extends into  (257)  The small bay about 1.8 miles S of the W end of Kasaan
the cove about 0.5 mile from the E shore. The channel E of the    Island affords anchorage for small boats in depths of 6 to 10 fath-
group of islands in the entrance is the one mostly used. A well-    oms. A reef, which bares, extends about 200 yards SE from the







112                                 5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


small island at the SW side of the entrance, and another reef with a    lone tree on it is just off the point to the NE in Kasaan Bay. Reefs
dangerous rock at its end extends about the same distance to the    extend about 150 yards offshore on the Twelvemile Arm side. A 4-
NE. When entering the bay, favor the E point. A least depth of 21/4    fathom spot is about 300 yards NW of the point.
fathoms was obtained in the entrance.                                (266) Jarvis Island is about 1.1 miles SW of Outer Point along
 (258) Kasaan is a village on the N shore of Kasaan Bay about    the SE shore of Twelvemile Arm. The shoreline is abrupt like the
10 miles NW of Grindall Island. The former cannery wharf here    general shoreline. About 0.3 mile NE of Jarvis Island is a small
has a face 125 feet long with a depth of 32 feet alongside. Some of    grass-covered rock about 0.3 mile from shore. A 1-fathom shoal is
the pilings under the wharf are badly deteriorated, and some are    about 250 yards NW of this rock. About 1.5 miles SW of Outer
broken off. Neither water nor supplies are available. The cannery    Point and 0.2 mile W of Jarvis Island is a small island, with a reef
building fronting the wharf is in poor condition as the cannery has    about 50 yards in diameter, just off the NW shore. It is wooded
not been in operation since 1954. A State-maintained small-craft    and about 200 feet high to the tree tops. To a ship entering
and seaplane float, with 224 feet of berthing space, is about 25    Twelvemile Arm, this reef appears as two rocks awash, except at
yards N of the cannery wharf. In 1976, 10 to 25 feet was reported    very low water. At high water the reef is covered.
alongside the float. The State-operated radio station in Kasaan      (267) Loy Island is to the NE of the entrance to Hollis Anchor-
maintains radiotelephone communications with Ketchikan.    age on the W  shore of Twelvemile Arm. The water toward the
Kasaan Light (55032.1'N., 132ï¿½23.8'W.), 12 feet above the water,    center of the arm from the island is clear. Behind the island the
is shown from a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped    bottom is foul and full of reefs. The bight is hardly large enough
daymark on shore, S of the cannery. The point W of the village is    for anchorage, and the rocks render it of no value as such.
foul and should be given a berth of at least 150 yards.              (268) A ferry terminal is in Clark Bay, about 0.4 mile NNW of
 (259)  Coal Bay, on the S shore of Kasaan Bay about 3.8 miles    the NE point of Loy Island. The terminal has berthing space, with
SW of Kasaan and 1.5 miles SE of Outer Point, affords good    dolphins, of about 235 feet, and a reported depth alongside of
anchorage in 15 fathoms except in N weather. It is probable that    about 26 feet.
winter gales from the NW blow hard into the bay. A reef, that        (269) Hollis Anchorage, on the W  side of Twelvemile Arm,
bares, extends about 0.3 mile in a N direction off the W point of    affords good anchorage in 5 to 7 fathoms. The anchorage is some-
the entrance to the bay. A shoal, with 2 /4 fathoms over it, is about    what constricted by a rocky ledge that extends W about 200 yards
0.4 mile ENE from the same point.                                  from the W end of the island on the N side of the entrance, and by
 (260)  Kina Cove, about 0.5 mile W  of Coal Bay, affords good    the extensive flat in the NW part of the anchorage that extends off
anchorage in 7 to 10 fathoms, 0.8 mile inside the entrance. In    the mouth of Maybeso Creek. In entering Hollis Anchorage,
entering, follow a midchannel course. A reef is about 100 yards    avoid the gravel reef that uncovers 9 feet making off from the S
off the W  shore about 0.1 mile S of the W  point of the narrow    shore to the center of the channel, and the rock that uncovers 5 feet
entrance to the inner bay.                                         lying 80 yards off the N shore opposite the reef; the latter danger is
 (261) Karta Bay, at the head of Kasaan Bay about 2 miles NW       marked by a daybeacon.
of Sandy Point, affords good anchorage in 10 to 12 fathoms, with
                                                                      (270) The  approach channel to Hollis Anchorage has been
                 a clearance of about 430 yards. Mound Point (5534.6'N.,    cleared by a wire drag to a depth of 25 feet. The small arm of Hol-
132ï¿½34.0'W.), on the N side of the entrance to Karta Bay, is prom-
       132340'W) on the N side of the entrance to Karta Bay is prom-    lis Anchorage that extends NE has a controlling depth of 12 feet.
inent. A 4-fathom shoal is about 1.1 miles ESE from the point. A
                                                                    The usable area of the arm is very limited and is suitable only for
number of shoals with less water over them are farther inshore inm
the direction of Sandy Point.                                       wide at the entrance to the arm. The shoal area on the NW side of
 (262) The head of Kasaan Bay is separated from the main part of    the arm extends with depths of 5 to 10 feet for two-thirds of the
the bay by a chain of wooded islands and affords secure anchorage    distance across the entrance.
in 5 to 8 fathoms. In heavy SE weather the NE part of this inner
bay affords the only secure anchorage in 7 to 12 fathoms, soft bot-   27   Hollis is on the peninsula on the N side of the anchorage.
t    bay affords                       the only secure anchorage in   7    t no 12 fa  th , so ftbot-A small-boat float, with a seaplane float at its SW end, and'a sur-
tom. The best entrance is between the fourth and fifth islands
counting from E. This passage is 225 yards wide, but the channel
is only 50 yards wide between the 3-fathom curves, with a depth      (272)  Althouse Point is the S point at the entrance to Hollis
of 4 fathoms in midchannel.                                        Anchorage. A rocky shoal with 2 fathoms over it is 550 yards S of
 (263) Twelvemile Arm, a narrow inlet entered between Sandy    the point and 300 yards offshore.
Point on the N and Outer Point on the S, extends SW about 13         (273)  Harris River Bay, at the mouth of Harris River, is bare,
miles from near the head of Kasaan Bay. The depths are generally    but at high tide small craft can cross into the river.
good.                                                                (274) Midchannel courses lead in good water through
 (264)  Sandy Point (55033.2'N., 132ï¿½31.4'W.), the N point at the    Twelvemile Arm. Numerous rocky reefs at the points do not
entrance to Twelvemile Arm on the W  shore, is low and wooded.    extend more than 60 yards offshore. In the middle of the arm,
A reef about 300 yards wide extends off the point in a SE direction    about 400 yards NNE from the first wooded islet at the head of the
for about 500 yards. The approximate center of the reef is marked    arm, is a small grass-covered islet that is just awash at extreme
by a flat islet 5 feet high. The immediate vicinity of this reef is    high tide. A rocky shoal that bares is 400 yards NNE from this
shoal and rocky. For 1 mile to the SW, the shoreline forms two    islet and numerous patches of rocks that uncover 4 feet are
small bights, and is marked by rocks and islets. Beyond this point    between the islet and the W shore. Log booms and rafting grounds
the shore is comparatively clear to Loy Island and the entrance to    are reported to cover much of the head of Twelvemile Arm.
Hollis Anchorage, except for log rafts moored close ashore in the
vicinity of Pellett Point, 2.4 miles SW of Sandy Point.              (275)  Chart 17420.-Caamano Point, marked by a light
 (265)  Outer Point is a rocky, wooded promontory, on the S    (55029.9'N., 131ï¿½58.9'W.), is the S extremity of Cleveland Penin-
shore at the entrance to Twelvemile Arm. A small island with a    sula and the W  point at the W  entrance to Behm Canal; ledges







                                    5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                             113


extend SE from the point. Caamano Point and light, and Behm          (285) A State-operated radiotelephone is at the residence next to
Canal are described in chapter 4.                                  the store. A telephone is outside the store. Seaplane transportation
 (276)  The W  coast of Cleveland Peninsula from Caamano           to Ketchikan is available upon request. A supply and mail boat
Point to Lemesurier Point, a distance of 20.5 miles, is rocky, bold,    from Ketchikan calls weekly at Meyers Chuck.
and heavily wooded, and has deep water close inshore. The shore     (286) Anchorage for small craft can also be had in the narrow
is fringed with kelp and has many dangers, but none are more than    arm between Meyers Chuck and the mainland. This arm, however,
0.5 mile offshore. Very often a following sea will be encountered    freezes over in the winter and the outer harbor does not.
along this section of the coast; mariners are cautioned to guard     (287) To enter, give the NW point of Meyers Island a good berth
against being set onto these dangers.                              to avoid a submerged rock with 5 to 6 feet over it, which is
 (277) Launches may find anchorage in any of the several shal-    reported to be about 100 yards off this point. Pass midway
low bights that indent the W coast of Cleveland Peninsula between    between the light and the buoy and turn SE into the harbor.
Caamano Point and Lemesurier Point. These bights, however, are      (288) Misery Island is 0.5 mile NW from Meyers Chuck. The
surrounded with many dangerous rocks, and their use during    W shore is faced by almost perpendicular cliffs about 40 feet high.
stormy weather is attended with extreme danger.                    Two rocks, marked by a daybeacon, are S from the island; the out-
 (278) Lee Rock (55ï¿½42.2'N., 132ï¿½14.2'W.), close off the W         ermost, distant about 300 yards, bares 4 feet, and the inner rock
coast of Cleveland Peninsula, about 15.9 miles and 6.4 miles N of    bares 9 feet. A small rock, marked by kelp, two rocks awash, and a
Caamano Point and Ship Island, respectively, is about 20 feet high    reported submerged rock with about 4 feet over it extend from
and the westernmost of three rocky wooded islands at the entrance    about 300 to 600 yards E from near the S point of Misery Island.
to a small cove. Anchorage may be made in the center of the cove,    There is reported to be 3 to 4 fathoms in the passage between the
0.2 mile from its head in 8 to 14 fathoms. Passage can be made    N end of Misery Island and the mainland. Favor the mainland
between Lee Rock and the two E islands in 7 to 9 fathoms. There    shore.
is no safe passage between the two E islands or between the         (289) Lemesurier Point, the S point at the entrance to Ernest
islands and the shore. A reef 200 yards S of the easternmost island    Sound, and also the SW entrance point to Union Bay, is long, low,
and 100 yards offshore bares 10 feet.                              and wooded; its shores are bold. Ernest Sound and Union Bay are
 (279) Cabin Cove, indenting the W  coast of Cleveland Penin-    described later in this chapter.
sula, about 3.2 miles N of Ship Island, is shoal and should not be   (290) Lemly Rocks, 0.2 mile off Lemesurier Point, are about 3
entered.                                                           feet high. At low water there are three rocks close together with
 -(280) A rock (55ï¿½38.5'N., 132ï¿½12.5'W.), about 3 feet high, is    submerged rocks between them.
about 400 yards offshore 2.6 miles N of Ship Island. Midchannel      (291) McHenry Ledge, with a depth of 1/4 fathom and showing
depths between the rock and the shore are 8 to 14 fathoms.         kelp, is 0.7 mile 320ï¿½ from Lemly Rocks; it is marked by a lighted
                                                                    bell buoy 0.1 mile NW of it. There is a good passage between
 (281)  Chart 17426.-Niblack Point (55ï¿½33.1'N., 132ï¿½07.1'W.),    McHenry Ledge and Lemly Rocks, but the currents have consider-
5.5 miles NW of Caamano Point, is marked by a daybeacon.           able velocity; strong tide rips have been reported. A number of
 (282) Ship Island, 0.3 mile offshore on the E side of Clarence    groundings have occurred on Lemly Rocks in attempting the pas-
Strait, is about 4 miles NW of Niblack Point and 14.5 miles above    sage in thick weather.
Guard Islands. The island is 35 feet high and has a few scraggy
trees on it. A ledge extends a short distance from the S end. Ship   (292)  Chart 17426.-The W shore of Clarence Strait along the E
Island Light (55036.0'N., 132ï¿½12.1'W.), 40 feet above the water,    side of Kasaan Peninsula from Grindall Island to Windfall Harbor,
is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-    a distance of about 12 miles, is rocky, abrupt, and wooded, and
shaped daymark on the highest part of the island. Passage may be    rises rapidly to peaks. The shore close-in is paralleled by kelp beds
made in 10 to 15 fathoms midway between the island and the    that give a good indication of the many dangers along this section
mainland.                                                          of the coast; mariners are advised to exercise caution. Occasional
                                                                    beaches do exist, and these are covered by rocks ranging from
  (283) Chart 17423.-Meyers Chuck, a small harbor with good    pebbles to large boulders. Almost all contain a large number of
anchorage for small craft, is about 1.6 miles SE of Lemesurier    deteriorating cut timber. Among the small inlets and indentations
Point (55045.9'N., 132ï¿½16.9'W.) and immediately E of Meyers    along this coast, Lyman Anchorage and Windfall Harbor are the
Island. A light is on the N side of the island. The harbor is entered    largest.
between the light and a buoy that marks the end of the reef that     (293)  Streets Island is a low rocky islet, 0.4 mile from the W
extends SE of the small island NNW of Meyers Island. Meyers    shore of Clarence Strait, and about 2.3 miles NNW from
Chuck is a small settlement along the E shore of the harbor. The    Approach Point, Grindall Island. Kelp extends a short distance
lighted microwave tower at the settlement is readily visible up and    from the ends of the island. About 175 yards SE of the island is a
down Clarence Strait from Ship Island to Lincoln Rock.             rock covered 12 feet. A shoal area, with a depth of 3 fathoms near
  (284) A State-operated float with about 384 feet of berthing    its outer end and with lesser depths inside, extends ENE for about
space and a reported depth of 12 feet alongside the NE end, and 25    0.3 mile from the E side of Kasaan Peninsula towards Streets
feet alongside the rest is at the NE side of the harbor; a seaplane    Island. A narrow channel with a controlling depth of 15 fathoms is
float extends NW from the float near the approach pier. Care    between the outer end of this shoal and the island. However, this
should be taken to avoid the reef that bares about 25 feet NW of    passage is not recommended without local knowledge.
the head of the approach pier. A private float, S of the State float,  (294) Lyman Anchorage is on the SW shore of Clarence Strait
has gasoline and diesel fuel; water is available in an emergency. A  about 6.5 miles NW of Streets Island. Its outer part is an open
56-foot boat grid is available just inside the State-operated float.    bight about 1 mile wide at its entrance. The inner harbor extends
Limited amounts of provisions can be obtained at the store at the    0.6 mile to the SW from the head of the main bay, is about 200
head of the private float.                                         yards wide, and has a controlling depth of V2 fathom in its narrow





114                                5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


approach It offers excellent shelter m all weather for small craft in    rounding the N point, between the entrance channel and Thorne
4 to 5 fathoms, mud bottom                                       Bay proper follow a course slightly S of midchannel to avoid a
  (295) Lyman Point is the E point of the entrance Rocky shoals    gently sloping sandbar that extends SW from the point After this
are N and NE of the point                                        point is cleared, Thorne Bay is clear and has depths of 4'/4 fathoms
  (296) Lyman Rock Is a submerged rock near the middle of    or more to a line running SW from the lumber camp float m the
Lyman Anchorage                                                  small cove in the N shore of the bay Midbay, on a line with the
  (297) Hadley is a settlement on the S side of Lyman Anchorage    float bearing 052ï¿½, is a shoal with a least depth of 1 fathom NW of
E of Sawmill Point It was formerly a shipping point for the aban-    this line the bay shoals gently to the head A fan-shaped shoal area
doned mines m the vicinimty                                      extends about 0 25 mile from the mouth of the Thorne River
 (298) Figgins Point is a very bluff point about 0 8 mile N of    (306) Floating logs and deadheads may be encountered in the
Lyman Anchorage Rocks that bare are about 150 yards off the    bay and off the entrance, caution is advised Reefs and rocks m the
point                                                            entrance and out into Clarence Strait are usually covered with
 (299) Windfall Harbor, about 4 miles NW of Lyman Anchor-    kelp this kelp may be towed under by the existing currents
age, is a narrow, crooked inlet that extends SW for about I mile   (307) The bight S of the large island in the entrance to Thorne
Its entrance is obstructed by rocks reefs, and islands It is a poor    Bay affords a good anchorage m 14 to 20 fathoms the channel to
anchorage and should be avoided by all except small craft with    It favors the main S shore A large reef, covered with kelp, extends
local knowledge                                                  almost midway into this channel from the large island The small
                                                                   cove m the N shore of the bay, about 2 3 miles WNW of the island
 (300) Chart 17420 -From Windfall Harbor to Tolstol Point    in the entrance, has depths of 2 to 3 fathoms In 1976, a logging
small rocks and islets extend offshore for about 300 yards Tolstol    company was operating in this small cove and was maintaining
Point (55ï¿½40 2' N, 132ï¿½23 5'W), 9 miles above Lyman Point, is   several floats for small craft, tugs, and float planes Gasoline, die-
high bluff, and wooded, and has a low, bare rock close to its N  sel fuel water, and some provisions can be obtained in an emer-
end and a similar rock at Its W end                              gency  The logging company maintains telephone and
 (301) Local magnetic disturbance -Differences of as much as    radiotelephone communications with other States and parts of
3ï¿½/4o from normal variation have been observed at Tolstol Point  Alaska
                                                                    (308) Tolstol Island, about 2 miles NW of Tolstoi Point, is low
 (302) Chart 17423 -Tolstol Bay has its entrance W of Tolstol    and flat, with a few scrubby trees
Point and extends in a general S direction for about 4 miles The E  (309) Snug Anchorage is about 1 mile W of Tolstoi Island It is
shore is high and steep, the head of the bay is flat, and the land is   about 12 miles long and from 0 1 to 02 mile wide An islet is in
low and marshy Near the E shore at the head of the bay is a    the center of the bight at the head of the anchorage In entenng,
wooded islet and S of it is a line of rocks, some of which are coy-    pass S of the islands off the entrance, then favor the W shore to
ered at high water There is anchorage in about 10 to 15 fathoms i  avoid the rock awash that is about 300 yards S of an island off the
midchannel W of the wooded islet protected from all directions    N point of the entrance The channel passes to the SW of the small
except from N, from which direction the wind and sea come home,    islets that are close to the N shore Depths of 4 to 5 fathoms were
making the anchorage uncomfortable SW winds draw through    obtained in the narrowest part of the channel, and depths of 3 to 16
with considerable force A midchannel course leads to the anchor-    fathoms were found at the head of the cove In the small cove E of
age There are several prnvate mooring buoys in the bay           Snug Anchorage, depths of 12 to 15 fathoms were found Rocks
 (303) On the W  side of Tolstol Bay about 1 2 miles S of the
entrance is a small harbor marked by a wooded islet 150 yards off-    depths i lc at e the necessity for caution i  Snug Anchorage and
shore The entrance is obstructed by an islet in mndchannel and a   th    e cove to the E
rock that shows at low water off its E side, leaving a clear channel    the cove to the E
less than 100 yards wide on the NE side of the islet The anchor-   (310)  Forss Cove I about 1 8 rmles NNW from Tolstol Island
age IS m about 71/2 fathoms near the middle In entenng, pass S of    A narrow channel 0 3 mile long i a SW direction and in places
age outlymg wooded Islet                                         less than 50 yards wide opens into a bight 0 5 rmle long in a NW
 (34)Ter  s osaepasgeisiethe outlying wooded    smlslet          direction and 0 2 mile wide in which there are numerous small
 (304) There is no safe passage inmslde the group of small islands
close to the W point at the entrance to Tolstol Bay, although enter-    slets A mdchannel course sho       to the cove The SE shore
ing from SE between submerged rocks, one can find contracted    yards before the entrance opens into the cove The SE shore
anchorage for small cran find contracted    should then be favored to avoid a large reef and shoal area The
                                                                  bottom comes up to about 1i/4 fathoms at this point Anchorage in
                                                                   14 fathoms can be obtained 100 yards NW of the large island SW
                                                                  of the entrance The N part of the cove has numerous reefs and
132ï¿½28 2'W) has its navigable entrance on the N side of a large    shoal areas and should not e   cove has numenterous reefs and
island obstructing its mouth, 2 5 miles W of Tolstol Point The
entrance is marked on the N side by a light and reportedly by pn-  (311) From Forss Cove to Narrow Point there are numerous
vate daymarks A shoal area is close to the N shore of the channel    small bights exposed to S winds, in which there are rocks and
leading into Thorne Bay, N of the large island and extends over    small Islets
one-half of the way into the channel from the main shore toward    (312) Narrow Point, about 7 5 miles NNW of Tolstol Point
the island This area is thick with kelp, however, the kelp is towed    shows as a wooded knob just above the wooded shore in its vicin-
under when the current runs strong This current causes numerous    Ity Narrow Point Light (55047 5'N, 132028 6'W) 35 feet above
eddies and nps through the entrance After passing this shoal area    the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white
follow a mndchannel course to the entrance to Thorne Bay proper    diamond-shaped daymark on the point
Thorne Bay is about 0 4 rmle wide with an arm that extends about   (313) A small cove, open to the SE, is 5 5 miles NW of Narrow
1 5 miles SE and a larger arm that extends about 2 miles NW In    Point It is rocky in the N part






                                    5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                              115


 (314)  Chart 17423 -Ratz Harbor, about 7 miles NNW of Nar-    Island and Muffin Islands is clear Reefs extend offshore about 0 6
row Point, is a small anchorage that is little more than 0 5 mile    rmle to the N and NW of the Muffin Islands
long and 0 2 rmle wide It affords shelter from all winds except     (324) The SE and E shores of Stone Islands, about 0 6 mile N
from N to NE  and these probably blow home with some force         of Eagle Island, are foul, rocks extend offshore 0 2 to 0 5 mile
Wlliwaws from the SE at times strike with great force In this    The small bight between the Stone Islands affords shelter for very
anchorage The NW point at the entrance is a ledge with an islet    small craft to the SE of the wooded island in the entrance Anchor-
near the shore and two heads each with a single scrubby tree,    age may be obtained in 5 fathoms, mud bottom the channels lead-
near its SE end all connected at low water Ratz Harbor    ing to it are tortuous The cove in the N shore of the larger Stone
Entrance Light (55ï¿½53 3'N  132ï¿½35 8'W), 20 feet above the    Island is completely filled by flats No freshwater was found here
water is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dla-      (325) The channel between Onslow Island and Eagle Island is
mond-shaped daymark on the outer head or islet From the SE         clear except for reefs that make out from each side of the channel
point at the entrance a ledge covered only at high water extends    about 1 mile N from the S end of Eagle Island The end of each
175 yards NW and has two rocky heads The width of the channel    reef is marked by a rock, the rock on the E side of the channel
between is about 230 yards                                         uncovers 8 feet and the rock on the W  side uncovers 6 feet Mid-
 (315) A careful midchannel course carnes in clear Depths of 4    channel courses are good but, when passing between the two
to 11 fathoms were found at the entrance and 4 to 13 fathoms    rocks, slightly favor the E side The cove on the W  side of the
inside The usual anchorage is m the middle of the S part of the    channel to the S of the N end of Eagle Island has depths of 31/2
harbor There is a flat m the W indentation of the harbor, and a few    fathoms in the middle and 12 fathoms mud bottom, at the
stub pilings on the SE side of the harbor                          entrance Water may be obtained from a small stream at the head
                                                                    (326) The channel between Onslow and Stone Islands is irregu-
 (316)  Chart 17360 -The shoreline from Ratz Harbor NW to    lar depths of 6 fathoms being found near the S end A wooded
Clear Creek, a distance of 6 3 miles is practically straight A     island is in the passage with deep water between it and the larger
small rock 20 feet high, is 450 yards to the NE of the mouth of the    Stone Island Rocks awash are 0 1 mile E and 0 2 SE, respectively,
creek                                                              of the wooded island In passing, favor the larger Stone Island
 (317) Luck Point (55059'N, 132044W) on the W side of Clar-    The channel between Onslow Island and Carlton Island to the N is
ence Strait opposite Point Stanhope, Is a rounding point without    foul and bares The passage N of Carlton Island has depths of 51/,
marked features Here the shoreline turns WNW and changes from    to 7 fathoms and from the S passes E of the rock that uncovers
a steep, rocky formation to a boulder beach about 100 yards wide   about 8 feet and is 500 yards E of Carlton Island
About 0 4 mile WNW from Luck Point, a narrow ledge extends          (327) A dangerous rock that uncovers about 6 feet is in mid-
offshore for about 0 3 mile From about 0 7 rmle NW of Luck    channel in the passage N of Stone Islands Keep Stone Islands
Point to Coffman Cove, the coast is fnnged with bare, awash, and    close aboard about 100 yards distant when this rock is covered A
submerged rocks The outermost rock is about 0 3 rmle from the    dangerous ledge, which uncovers extends more than halfway
shore                                                              from Etolhn Island toward E Stone Island Rocks awash are just off
       (318) Etoln Island, on the NE side of Clarence Strait near its    the N end of the E Stone Island These dangers render this passage
                                                                   hazardous except at low water
head, separates Ernest Sound from Stkmine Strait The coast is
bold rocky and densely wooded and is broken by numerous              (328)  These channels are small boat passages and are not suit-
inlets and off-lying islands                                       able as anchorage because of the rocky bottom and the currents
                                                                   that vary in strength from 2 to 4 knots and often are considerably
 (319)  Chart 17385 -The Onslow Islands, on the N side at the    strengthened by a moderate breeze
entrance to Ernest Sound, are five wooded islands and numerous
small ones, the largest of which is Onslow Island, 3 5 rmles long          Chare                   nchorage, on te NE side of
                 ~and about 350 feet hiu~gh  ~Clarence Stralt opposite Ratz Harbor can be used as a summer
                                                                   anchorage but the bottom is irregular and rocky there are several
 (320)  The W shore of Onslow Island Is indented with small bays    dangers in the entrance and the protection is poor Gull Point, the
filled with ledges and rocks Small rocks and islets extend offshore    NW extremity of Onslow Island, is the SE pomt at the entrance A
0 1 to 0 5 mile An inlet about 0 5 mile long opening from the S    rock awash is about 200 yards NW of the point, and a reef, marked
and extending E, is about 1 8 miles from Ernest Point It is unsur-    by kelp and covered by 1 V/ feet of water is 0 6 mile SW of It
veyed but it is reported that 8 feet can be carned through the nar-    Carlton Island, flat and timbered Is the larger island NE of Gull
row neck near high water and that 4 fathoms, mud bottom are    Point a shoal extends 350 yards SW from Its W  end Mabel
obtained within Rocks awash and kelp are in the entrance and    Island, about 0 2 mile in diameter, is about 0 8 mile NW of Gull
tide nps extend off the point                                      Point a reef covered at half tide and without kelp is 0 6 rmle SSW
  (321) Ernest Point (55051 1'N  132ï¿½22 1'W) Is the southern-    of the Island two reefs that bare are about 0 8 mile to the NW The
most point of Onslow Island and is the NW point to Ernest Sound    channel between the reefs to the NW has a least depth of 17 feet a
Foul ground extends for 0 5 mule SSE of the point                  rock awash is 0 1 mile S of the E reef A 9-foot spot is 1 3 miles
  (322) Onslow Point, about 2 1 rmles ESE of Ernest Point, con-    NW of Mabel Island Center Island, about 0 1 mile in diameter is
sists of a large and small islet with a large bare rock to the SE,    about midway between Mabel Island and the N shore of Dewey
deep water is close SW of the point Reefs and foul ground con-    Anchorage A shoal with a least depth of 23 feet is between Center
nect Onslow Point with Eagle Island, a large wooded island N of    and Mabel Islands A reef extends about 75 yards off the NE side
Onslow Point The cove on the SE side of Eagle Island is foul       of Center Island, a rock awash is just off the end of the reef A
Tide nps form off Onslow Point                                     shoal with a least depth of 20 feet is 0 5 mule SE of Center Island
  (323) Muffin Islands are a group of four small wooded islands    The area between Center Island and the N shore of Dewey
about 0 4 mile E of Eagle Island The channel between Eagle    Anchorage is shoal and has a least depth of 21 feet






116                                 5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


 (330) Caution.-There may be other dangers that are not charted.    (341) In entering, pass about 0.1 mile N of Range Island, then
 (331) Split Island, small and wooded, is 0.3 mile to the S of the    turn between McHenry Islet and Nut Rock, favoring Nut Rock,
S extremity of Kelp Point (chart 17360), the NW entrance point    and follow the trend of the channel favoring the SE shore until
of Dewey Anchorage. A reef is close to the E end of the island.    past the rock awash NE of McHenry Islet; then follow midchannel
Double Island, small and wooded, is about 0.2 mile S of Split    courses. Anchorage may be had in 12 to 19 fathoms beyond the
Island. A small wooded islet is 0.1 mile SE of Double Island, and    turn in the channel. Foul ground extends about 0.3 mile from the
foul ground extends to the NE; the channel between is foul.        head of the inlet.
 (332) To enter Dewey Anchorage from S, stand in on the line of     (342) Jadski Cove, on the N side of McHenry Inlet, has its
the E sides of Mabel Island and Center Island until abreast of Gull    entrance about 1 mile NE of Range Island. A depth of about 101/4
Point, and then pass midway between Mabel Island and Carlton    fathoms was found in the bight in the NW end of the cove, but the
Island, taking care to avoid the 14-foot shoal 0.5 mile NW of Car-    approaches are foul.
lton Island. Anchor 0.4 to 0.5 mile NNW of Carlton Island in 15 to   (343) Burnett Inlet, about 5 miles NE of Point Stanhope,
18 fathoms.                                                        extends in a N direction for about 7 miles, with an average width
 (333) From W, pass 0.5 mile S of Double Island and head for the    of 0.2 mile. Fawn Island, wooded, is on the W side of the channel
N end of Center Island. When abeam the W end of Mabel Island,    at the entrance. Three small wooded islands and some rocks
proceed with caution to the anchorage. The chart is the guide.     extend 0.2 mile off the N shore of Fawn Island. A small wooded
 (334)  Small craft can find better anchorage 0.5 mile E of Carlton    islet, with a rock awash 150 yards off its N end, is 0.3 mile W  of
Island in 6 to 8 fathoms, hard sand bottom. This anchorage can be    Fawn Island. A 21/4-fathom spot is 0.5 mile SE of Fawn Island
entered from W, passing N of Carlton Island, or from SE, using
entered from W. passing N of Carlton Island, or from SE, using    close to the E shore. A midchannel entrance between Fawn Island
one of the passages described previously.                          and the E shore is safe from hazards. There is an anchorage for
                                                                    deep-draft vessels off the small cove on the E side of Burnett Inlet
                                                                    about 0.7 mile due E of Fawn Island. To safely reach this anchor-
 (335) Chart 17360.-McHenry Anchorage, about 7.5 miles N
                                          of Ernest Point 55 N   3  has a clear width of about    age area, approach from the S on a course that is tangent to the E
                                   ofErestoi 5'N   1 2.)  hs       edge of Fawn Island. At a distance of 0.3 mile from Fawn Island
700 yards and a length of about 1 mile from Avon Island to a small    come right to 070  and proceed to the anchorage area about 0.4
island at its head. It is sheltered except from W, and small vessels
can anchor in the SE part of the harbor with shelter from all winds.                                                bottom
Avon Island, on the N side of the entrance, is small, wooded, and
close to shore; it should be given a berth of over 250 yards. A reef    of Cannery oint, the W pot of the ent   ance. A reef, bare at low
extends about 400 yards in a SE direction from the SE side of0 yards off Cannery Point. The channel between
                                                                    it and the point is too narrow for ships to use. Two shoals sepa-
                    f Avon Island. Sand It, with a gesh on i t e     is 0 rated by depths of 12 fathoms are almost in midchannel between
mile WSW of Avon Island. Sand Islet, with a green bush on it, is
close to the SE point at the entrance; a reef that bares and shows    yards long in a            N direction, has a least depth of 1  fathoms near
                                   kelp exeds02 eNWfomian solxeds20fyards long in a N direction, has a least depth of 11/4 fathoms near
kelp extends 0.2 mile NW from It, and a shoal extends 250 E of    its N end; the S shoal, about 100 yards to the S, is narrow and has
Sand Islet.
                                                                    a least found depth of 61/4 fathoms. The 1/4-fathom spot is marked
 (336) To enter McHenry Anchorage, keep Avon Island aboard,    by a buoy. The channel between the shoals and the reef to the W
distant 450 yards, and anchor in the middle, with Sand Islet bear-    has depths of 10 to 37 fathoms.
ing 198ï¿½, in about 8 fathoms; or a small vessel can follow a mid-    (345) The small cove behind Cannery Point has depths of 6 to 7
channel course and anchor 250 yards W of the wooded island in    fathoms in the middle, with swinging room of about 150 yards,
the SE end of the harbor in 5 to 7 fathoms.                        and is used by fishing craft for an anchorage.
 (337) Quartz Rock is the extremity of the reef, awash at high      (346) North Burnett Island and South Burnett Island are
water, about 0.3 mile W from the point NW of McHenry Anchor-    close to the E shore of Burnett Inlet near the entrance. The passage
age.                                                               between the midchannel shoal and South Burnett Island has a least
                                                                    depth of 17 fathoms. Deadman Island, about 0.4 mile NNE of
 (338)  Chart 17382.-McHenry Inlet has its entrance 5 miles E    Cannery Point, is at the N end of the bight off the NW shore near
of Point Stanhope (56ï¿½00.9'N., 132036.5'W.), and 2.5 miles N       the entrance. A narrow shoal with depths of 61/4 fathoms is mid-
from McHenry Anchorage. It is horn-shaped, about 4 miles long,    way between Deadman Island and North Burnett Island. The
and about 0.4 to 0.8 mile wide. Foul ground extends about 1.5    channel W  of this shoal has depths of 10 to 27 fathoms, but leads
miles in a W direction from the SE entrance point. Range Island,    over a 41/4-fathom spot and probably less water. The channel E of
the small wooded island in midchannel at the entrance, is the most    this shoal has depths of 20 fathoms.
N of the group off this point and is about 0.4 mile to the SW of a   (347) The depth of the inlet remains greater than 10 fathoms
small rocky islet off the NW point of the entrance, with a clear    until about 1 mile S of the narrows. There are minimum depths of
channel between. A 2-fathom spot is 1.2 miles 310ï¿½ from Range    1 fathom at the narrows, which is obstructed by kelp. The inlet
Island. A long narrow ridge, with depths of 31/4 to 10 fathoms with    above the narrows, about 3.5 miles above Deadman Island, is
deep water on each side, is in midchannel in the direction of the    quite deep and clear. At periods of low water, the upper part of the
channel, 0.6 mile ENE of Range Island.                             inlet shoals to less than 5 fathoms with an even muddy bottom.
 (339) McHenry Islet, a small rocky islet, is 1.6 miles 082ï¿½ from    There is a prominent waterfall on the E shore 3 miles above the
Range Island. Foul ground extends in a SW direction from this    entrance. The inlet is too deep for secure anchorage.
islet for about 0.1 mile, and to the NW extends to the N shore of    (348) Mosman Inlet, about 4 miles NE of Point Stanhope,
the bay.                                                           makes NNW into Etolin Island for about 6 miles, with an average
 (340) Nut Rock is about 700 yards 220ï¿½ from McHenry Islet. A      width of about 0.3 mile. There are two rocks on the E side about
rock awash is 550 yards 0730 from McHenry Islet.                   0.8 mile above Marble Point, the E point at the entrance. A reef






                                    5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                              117


extends from the N end of the islet lying 1 mile NNW of Marble    distance of about 1 2 miles from Point Hamngton both shores of
Point to the W  shore This reef obstructs the N approach to the    the bay have some rocks close inshore
coves on the W side of the entrance to the inlet Above this area,   (358)  Local magnetic disturbance -Differences of as much as
the inlet is deep and free of obstructions                         30 from the normal variation have been observed at Point Har-
 (349)  Cooney Cove is a narrow mlet to the NE of Rocky Bay It   rington
is exposed to the S, the approach is foul, and there are rocks near  (359) The bay is easy of access, a midchannel course leads fair
the head                                                           into the inner basin The best anchorage is probably near the mid
 (350)  Rocky Bay, to the N of Point Stanhope is studded with    dle of the basin, favonng the E shore, m about 16 fathoms Small
rocky islets and rocks awash Streets Lake has its outlet m the    craft may find better bottom by anchonng in 6 fathoms close to the
middle bight at the head of Rocky Bay A rock with 1/2 fathom on it    E shore, just past a cabin on the beach and S of Independence
is 2 5 miles 060ï¿½ from Point Stanhope                              Island, a bare rock 3 feet high that is near the shore on the NE side
 (3M1) Point Stanhope is the S extrermty of a group of islands A   of the basin
rock with a depth of 1 fathom over it, marked by a buoy, is 0 8      (360) Mariposa Rock, with 31/4 fathoms over it and marked by a
mile SSW of the point There are several available passages    buoy off its NW side, is 0 6 mile 312ï¿½ from Point Hamngton
among these islands for small craft bound for Rocky Bay Three        (361) Kmndergarten Bay, the deep cove 2 miles N of Point Har-
Way Passage, having its entrance about 1 3 miles NW of Point    nngton is used extensively as an anchorage for small craft It is
Stanhope, is the best It has a depth of about 2L/2 fathoms, is nar  one of the best anchorages in the area and affords protection in all
row, leads close to several dangers, and requires local knowledge    weather, although at times strong winds will blow down from the
for its safe navigation                                            hills It was reported that the N side of the bay appeared to be
 (352)  Anchorage may be obtained by small craft drawing less    clear Enter midchannel, passing S of the wooded islet, and anchor
than 4 feet in the channel just E of Three Way Passage The widest    in 5 to 7 fathoms, soft bottom Manners are cautioned to avoid a
part of the channel is about 150 yards and is entered by way of    large rock covered 4 to 6 feet at high tide that was reported close
Three Way Passage There is an anchorage for very small craft in    SW of the largest islet near the head of the bay
the cove 2 6 miles NW from Point Stanhope The channel that           (362) Steamer Point, 3 miles N of Point Harnngton, is bold,
leads from the head of the cove to Rocky Bay bares m spots and IS    steep, and heavily wooded Deep water extends close to the point
suitable only for boats drawing about 1 to 3 feet with local knowl-    Steamer Point Light (56ï¿½13 4'N, 132ï¿½42 8'W), 30 feet above
edge and making passage at high water only                         the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white
 (353) The Etolihn Island shore from Point Stanhope NNW to    diamond-shaped daymark on a small wooded islet close N of the
Point Hamngton a distance of about 10 5 miles is rocky and gen-    point
erally foul A fnnge of islands parallel the coast about 0 6 rmle off  (363) Kashevarof Passage and Snow Passage form the head of
to Point Harrington It comprises Abraham Islands, Screen    Clarence Strait and are the two passages connecting with Summer
Islands, Marsh Island, Observation Island, and Steamer             Strait W  of Zarembo Island Kashevarof Passage is wide but is
Rocks, which is a wooded islet about 100 feet high with a rock 12    beset with rocks reefs, and shoals, with strong tidal currents and
feet high that marks the SSE extremity of a ledge that connects    tide nps The pass is used extensively by small craft Large vessels
them It is advisable for vessels navlgatmg the strait to give the    use Snow Passage which is clear and marked by lights and a
shore a berth of at least 1 5 miles and pass W  of Lincoln Rock    lighted buoy
West Light The passage E of the islands may be used by small        (364) (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions in the
craft The chart shows the known dangers                            passages )
 (3,4) Lincoln Rock West Light (56ï¿½03 4'N, 132ï¿½41 8'W), 58
feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower on a concrete  (365) Chart 17401 -An unnamed cove (56'01'N, 132049'W),
base with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on Lincoln    on the W  side of Clarence Strait about 2 3 miles SE of Beck
Rock A 35-foot white square tower on a house, 0 3 mile 062ï¿½    Island, is noticeable for its low-water area at the head, and a sand
from Lincoln Rock West Light, is prominent on an islet, It is the    beach about 300 yards wide The cove is fnnged with rocks and
site of a former lighthouse                                        shoals Manners without local knowledge, are to use caution in
  (353)  Abraham Islands are 0 6 mile off the W  shore of Etolihn    this area The chart is the best guide
Island The largest island is 150 feet high and wooded                (366) Coffman Cove, protected on the N by Coffman Island, is
  (356) Johnson Cove, to the E of the N end of Screen Islands,    close W  of the unnamed cove and about 1 5 miles SSE of Beck
offers anchorage for four or five small craft of less than 4-foot    Island The NW half of the cove is filled with rocks, some of
draft to those with local knowledge Strangers should not attempt    which bare Good anchorage for small craft may be had in the
entrance Swinging room is limited by ledges on the NW side of    middle of the SE part of the cove in 10 to 15 fathoms mud bot-
the cove and shoal water toward its head Several islands are off    tom and a midchannel course will carry in safely The outermost
the entrance The cove is entered S of the rock awash, 150 yards    dangers in the SE part of the cove are a 23/4-fathom spot and two
off the SE end of the large island near the entrance and E of the    rocks awash about 500 yards SSW, 0 3 mile SSW, and 0 5 mile S
rock, awash at high water in mndchannel at the entrance Water    of the southermost tip of Coffman Island, respectively A flat
may be obtained from streams that empty into the cove              extends about 0 2 mile from the SE end of the cove
  (3,7) Steamer Bay, E of Point Harrington, affords anchorage        (367) In 1976 a logging camp was operating m Coffman Cove
at its head but the holding ground is not good and SE winds draw    Logs are stored along the E shore of the SE part of the cove A
with considerable force through Porcupine Creek  It is open to    small-craft and seaplane float is on the E shore of the flat, about
NW The bay is 1 mile wide at its entrance gradually contracting    0 8 nmile SSE of Coffman Island Water and gasoline are available
near its head to less than 0 2 mile, then again widening into a basin    only in an emergency Radiotelephone communications are main-
about 0 3 mile long into which Porcupine Creek empties For a    tained with Ketchikan






118                                5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


 (368) Lake Bay is on the S side of Kashevarof Passage between    (378) Kashevarof Islands, on the NE side of Kashevarof Pas-
Stevenson Island and Coffman Island. Across the entrance and    sage, are low and wooded, though there are many bare rocks.
in the bay are detached islands and reefs and the best channel is    There are many passages between the islands, but all are beset
from NE between Beck and Coffman Islands.                        with rocks and reefs and require local knowledge for safe naviga-
 (369) Beck Island, small and wooded, is about 0.8 mile NW of    tion.
Coffman Island. Beck Island Light (56ï¿½02.9'N., 132ï¿½51.8'W.), 27   (379) The Blashke Islands form a group of islands at the SE end
feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red    of the Kashevarof group. All are wooded and separated by narrow
and white diamond-shaped daymark on the N side of the island; it   foul channels. Rose Rock, Rose Island, Seal Rock, The Triplets,
marks the entrance to Kashevarof Passage.                        and Deichman Rock are on the foul ground to the SE.
 (370)  Gull Rock and Barnacle Rock, awash at highest tides,      (380) The islets and bays at the NW end of Kashevarof Passage
are about 0.6 mile SSW and W, respectively, from Beck Island;    are described with Snow Passage following.
they should be given a berth of over 300 yards. There are also     (38s) The currents at the NW end of Kashevarof Passage are
extensive submerged reefs between Beck Island and Bush Rock,    similar to those of Snow Passage, but their velocity is consider-
 about 1.9 miles to the WNW. The latter is 35 feet high and has    ably less.
bushes on top.                                                     (382) The main channel, leading between Beck Island and The
 (371) Abreast Keg Point (56002'02"N., 132ï¿½55'18"W.), on    Triplets and as far NW as West Island, has been examined, and
Stevenson Island, the channel is about 150 yards between an    the dangers are shown on the charts. The section from West Island
extensive shoal that makes out from the E shore and a shoal pro-    to Fire and Echo Islands has many dangers and has not been
jecting out about 175 yards from Keg Point. There is good anchor-    closely examined, but there is an apparently clear channel leading
age inside the constricted entrance for large or small craft in 6 to    from the S end of West Island.
15 fathoms, soft bottom. The buildings of a fishery are on the E  (383) Kashevarof Passage Light (56010.8'N., 133ï¿½01.3'W.), 27
shore about 0.3 mile inside the entrance to Lake Bay Creek.      feet above water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
                                                                   white diamond-shaped daymark, on the W side of a small sparsely
 (372) Chart 17382.-Point Barnes (56003.6'N., 132ï¿½55.8'W.),    wooded islet off the W side of West Island.
the NE extremity of Stevenson Island, is low and wooded, without   (384) Exchange Cove, on the NW side of Kashevarof Passage
characteristics of interest to the navigator.                    about 2 miles NW of Kashevarof Passage Light, is about 0.2 mile
 (373) Barnes Lake is a saltwater lake of considerable extent    wide and 2.5 miles long, and is the largest sheltered anchorage in
lying SW of Stevenson Island. It has two outlets through which    this vicinity. It has room for several small vessels and is well pro-
strong currents flow during changes of tide. Small craft up to 10-    tected from all directions. The depths are 10 fathoms at the
foot draft may enter into the lake on high water slack, passing    entrance, shoaling gradually toward the head. Exchange Island
through Indian Creek, the W of the two entrances. This passage    forms the E shore of the N part of the cove.
has many dangers and must be navigated with extreme caution. It    (385) To pass through the N part of Kashevarof Passage, West
has a least depth of 3 feet in midchannel.                       Island should be left about 0.5 mile to the E to avoid a 23/4-fathom
 (374) At high water small boats with outboards go from Barnes    spot. Pass midway between West Island and Kashevarof Passage
Lake through Gold and Galligan Lagoon into large inner Sweet-    Light; thence about 0.2 mile to the E of the small rocky wooded
water Lake (chart 17360).                                        islet that is about 0.8 mile E of the S end of Exchange Island;
 (375) Whale Passage leads S and W of Thorne Island. The pas-    thence in midchannel between Exchange Island and the small dou-
sage is used extensively by tugs, oil barges, and a freight boat ser-    ble island to the N; thence in midchannel to W of Fire Island;
vicing a logging camp in the bay that extends NW from about the    thence between Tide and Bushy Islands, or Rookery and Tide
middle of the passage.                                           Islands.
 (376) This passage has many dangers and must be navigated        (386) There is another channel between Fire Island and Echo
with extreme caution. The chart is the best guide for mariners    Island. Echo Island, about 150 feet high and wooded, has foul
without local knowledge.                                         shores with the outermost danger extending about 800 yards SSW.
 (377) Shelter for small craft may be found on the N side of the    A rock wash, marked by a daybeacon, is in the channel about 1.1
passage near its S entrance in 5 fathoms, soft bottom, in the small    miles S of Echo Island; the channel W of Fire Island is preferred.
cove just after passing between the two charted rocks directly off a    The channel to the S of Shrubby Island is used by small craft. In
small cabin near the beach. The bay that extends to the NW near    making the passage, avoid kelp at all times. The bottom is very
the middle of the passage affords good anchorage with ample    irregular, and the channel has not been wire-dragged. The channel
swinging room in about 4 to 10 fathoms, soft bottom. In 1976, a    between East Island and Middle Island is used by small boats.
logging camp was operating on the NE side of the bay. Logs are     (387) There is a channel E from 0.9 mile N of the N end of West
stored on both sides of the bay. Floats for small craft, tugs, and    Island and S of the small wooded island with the two islets to the
seaplanes are at the camp. Fresh water and gasoline may be    E being left to the N; thence midchannel between Shrubby Island
obtained in an emergency. Radiotelephone communication is    and the most N of the Middle Islands. Follow the shore of the
maintained with Ketchikan. An excellent anchorage for small craft    Middle Islands about 0.3 mile off and S of the larger wooded
in all weather may be found when headed N from the middle of    island nearest Shrubby Island.
Whale Passage, on the E side between the-irregularly shaped       (388) On the S side of the last described channel, between the
wooded island and the shore of Thorne Island. Enter around the N  240-foot island and the larger island SE of it, is a shelter for small
end of the wooded island and N of the charted rocks, pass S along    craft in all weather. The entrance passes over a 1-fathom depth to
the E side of the island, keeping the charted rocks on the starboard    anchorage in 21/2 fathoms off a float and house.
side, and come to anchor in 4 to 5 fathoms of water, soft bottom,  (389) Key Reef is an extensive reef about 1.8 miles E from the
off the SE tip of the small island and a cabin on the shore of    Kashevarof Islands. The N end of the reef, about 3.5 miles W of
Thorne Island.                                                   Point Harrington, usually shows at high water as two rocks about





                                     5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                              119


5 feet high and about 100 yards long but they are awash at           (400) Excellent anchorage may be had NW of Bushy Island in
extreme high tides Key Reef Light (56ï¿½09 6'N, 132ï¿½49 9'W), 43      15 to 20 fathoms with Tide Island beanng 209ï¿½, distance 1 mile
feet above the water and shown from a single pile on a truncated    This anchorage is protected from all but winds from the NW
concrete pyramid with a red and white chamond-shaped daymark,        (401) The currents of Snow Passage somewhat resemble those
is near the N end of the reef A number of low water rocks are near    of Seymour and Sergius Narrows in their pecuhantles The flood
Key Reef Key Reef Rock about 0 7 mile SE uncovers 12 feet          or SE current has a velocity of 1 4 to 3 4 knots and the ebb or NW
 (390) Bluff Island is a small wooded island about 1 8 miles to    current 3 1 to 4 knots m the narrowest part of the passage Swirls
the W of Key Reef Reefs extend about 250 yards from the N and    of some seventy at times occur from abreast Ossipee Channel to
S ends of the island The E and W shores are clear                  the N end of Bushy Island, W of the last named point they are very
 (391) Zarembo Island, heavily wooded, is at the head of Clar-    much lessened In 1975, the NOAA Ship DAVIDSON observed
ence Strait A rather low valley extends E and W across the island    particularly steep waves at the N entrance to Snow Passage dunng
The shoreline is rocky, with off-lying rocks and reefs, except    strong S winds with contrary currents (See the Tidal Current
along the E shore                                                  Tables for predictions of times and velocities of the current in
 (392) Point Nesbitt, the S point of Zarembo Island is low, ns-    Snow Passage)
mg to high ground inshore                                            (402) Osslpee Channel is between Shrubby and Bushy Islands
                                                                    An exanmnatlon by means of the lead indicates a clear channel
 (393) Nesbiltt Reef is a dangerous reef that extends 0 8 miles Sk kelp and ledges  ne the chlead ndcates a               clear channel
from Point Nesbitt Near the outer end of the reef is a rock thatne                           the channel on both sides, but the  d
uncovers 12 feet There are rocks that bare a short distance outside    channel IS apparently clear
it and a string of rocks between it and the shore, which covers at
various stages of the tide The tidal currents have considerable    When the current runs N m Snow Passage its direction m Ossipee
velocity in its vicinity, and care should be taken, especially in    Channel is W, and when S in Snow Passage its direction in
foggy weather Shoals with a least depth of 51/2 fathoms over them    Osslpee Channel is E
are E of the reef Nesbltt Reef Light (56013 2'N  132051 7'W),        (404)  Tide Island, small and wooded, is about 2 2 mules WNW
                                                               a of Bushy Island Rocks marked by kelp and bare at low water are
27 feet above the water shown from a skeleton tower on a con-hy Island Rocks marked by kelp and bare at low water are
crete pier with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark is on the    to the SE and SW, close-to
S end of Nesbitt Reef                                                (405) Rookery Islands, three in number and wooded are in
                                                                    end of Nesbtt Reef  dchannel near the NW end of the passage and 1 8 miles SW of
 (394)  From Point Nesbitt NW to Macnamara Point, a low    Macnamara Point Between the islands are bare rocks and ledges
wooded point, a distance of 9 miles ledges extend offshore i       that cover, and close W of W Rookery Island are two islets each
places about 0 5 mile almost all of which bare Those abreast the    with a clump of trees Rookery Islands Light (56018 9'N
bare rocks close to the middle of the E side of Bushy Island are    133006 4'W) 40 feet above the water is shown from a skeleton
always covered and are marked by kelp at slack water Rocks    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the NE
extend about 0 5 mile S from Macnamara Point                       side of Round Island, the easternmost island of the group
 (395) From Macnamara Point NE to St John Harbor the shore is       (406)  Salmon Bay is about 1 2 mles WSW of Rookery Islands
fnringed with ledges to a distance of 0 5 mile in places, with broken    Small craft can find sheltered anchorage m 1 to 3 fathoms near the
ground farther out, and this shore should be given a berth of 1 mile    head It is extensively used as a harbor by local boats dunng cer-
or more                                                            tam seasons of the year In July 1985 a wreck covered at high
 (396)  Snow Passage is between Bushy Island, the northern-    water was reported in the center of the entrance to Salmon Bay in
most of the Kashevarof group, and Zarembo Island It is a deep    about 56ï¿½18 3'N  133009 1'W
channel with foul shores and strong tidal currents Snow Passage      (407) A hne of detached rocks about 1 4 miles long bare at dilf-
is largely used by vessels bound from or to Wrangell Narrows or    ferent stages of the tide and marked by kelp at slack water is about
between Clarence and Sumner Straits and not desinng to touch at    midway between Rookery Islands and Point Colpoys and from 0 2
Wrangell, as it is shorter than the route through Stikine Strait It is   to 0 7 mile offshore A daybeacon is on a rock at the NW end, 0 7
clear m mudchannel, except for a shoal with a depth of 41/ fathoms    mile NE of Bay Point The channel leading along the shore W of
in the middle of the channel at the N end, ENE of Rookery    them appears to be clear
Islands The shoal is marked on its W side by a buoy The shoals       (408) The bays and coves to the S of Salmon Bay are almost dry
in Snow Passage are clearly marked by kelp at slack water Dunng    at low water and have foul entrances They lead into a salt marsh
spnng tides, the passage may have a considerable number of drift-    that parallels the beach Overfalls currents and rocks make the
mg logs that may endanger vessels                                  various entrances dangerous except at high water It is reported
 (397)  Voluntary vessel traffic procedures have been estab-    that at extreme high water boats drawing 5 feet make the passage
hshed for gillnet vessels and deep-draft vessels transiting Snow    from Salmon Bay to the first bay to the S through the salt marsh
Passage  See the description of Clarence Strait at the beginmng      (409) Point Colpoys, about 4 5 rmles W of Macnamara Point is
of this chapter for designated tracklines and procedures           low and wooded  and is marked by Point Colpoys Light
 (398) Bushy Island Light (56016 6'N  132ï¿½57 6'W) 22 feet    (56ï¿½20 2'N  133ï¿½11 9'W)  19 feet above the water and shown
above the water and shown from a skeleton tower on a brown    from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond shaped day-
cylmdncal base with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark is    mark Irregular bottom extends about 0 3 mile to the N
on a rock off the NE end of Bushy Island, and marks Snow Pas-       (410) Bay Point is a low wooded point about 1 mile to the SE of
sage From points to the NW the light appears well off the Bushy    Point Colpoys
Island shore
  (399) A lighted buoy is about 0 7 mile SE from Bushy Island        (411) Chart 17360 -Ernest Sound and Stllkne Strait with their
Light It marks the E side of the channel close to a kelp patch near    connecting passages, Zimovla Strait, Blake Channel and Eastern
the edge of which are two rocks covered at half tide               Passage afford various routes from Clarence Strait to Wrangell





120                                5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


Large vessels go by way of Stlkine Strait but small craft fre-     (419) Small boats use the channel between Union Point, which
quently go by way of Ernest Sound and Zlmovla Stralt or by    is low and wooded and the two islets S of it
Ernest Sound, Blake Channel, and Eastern Passage The last two      (420) An estimated current velocity of 3 knots sets S around
routes afford better protection m stormy weather The distances to    Umon Point on the ebb
Wrangell by these routes from a point 2 miles W of Lemesuner       (42i) Local magnetic disturbance -Differences of as much as
Point are about 52, 50, and 60 rmles respectively                 10ï¿½ from the normal vanation have been observed m the E part of
                                                                  Umnon Bay and a difference of 38ï¿½ from normal vanation has been
 (412) Chart 17385 -Ernest Sound is the large body of water    observed at a small islet 0 8 rmle SW of Umon Point
that opens from Clarence Strait between Lemesuner Point and       (422) Vixen Harbor, 0 8 mile E of Union Point, is about 0 4
Onslow Point, with a width of about 4 5 miles between the points    rmle long with an even sand and mud bottom and an average
Its general direction is NNE for about 25 miles to Point Warde,    depth of 4i/2 fathoms The entrance channel, about 100 yards wide
from this point, under the name of Bradfield Canal it extends    has depths of only 2 fathoms In entenng, proceed carefully to the
about 17 miles in a general E direction, with a width of about 1    N of and close to the small islands in the entrance Temporary
mile There are numerous small islands in the sound and two large    anchorage for larger craft may be had in 16 fathoms, sand and
ones one on each side, about midway of its length                gravel, 0 4 rmle N of the small island in the entrance
 (413) From Ernest Sound two arms extend NNW andjoin N of
the northernmost extremity of Wrangell Island near the mouth of    (423)  Chart 17385 -Vixen Inlet, about 6 5 miles NE of
Stllkne River The W arm is called Zlmovla Strait The S part of    Lemesurier Point and S of Vixen Point (55ï¿½51 0'N, 132ï¿½05 5'
the E arm is called Blake Channel and the N part Eastern Passage  W ), has a small islet, Sunshine Island, in the middle of the
A passage to Wrangell through Ernest Sound, Blake Channel, and    entrance and a stream at the head A reef makes out from the W
Eastern Passage is practicable and is sometimes used Small craft    side of Vixen Point and extends S about 1 2 miles A reef with a
use Zlmovla Strait frequently                                    least depth of 3/4 fathom, not marked by kelp, is in the middle of
  (414) The princlpal dangers m the main part of Ernest Sound are    the entrance, 1 2 miles 284ï¿½ from Sunshine Island
McHenry Ledge (55ï¿½46 7'N, 132ï¿½18 0'W) with a depth of 1/4    (424) In entenng the passage to the S of Sunshine Island Is pref-
fathom and marked by a lighted bell buoy and a 23/4 fathom rock    erable Round the S end at a distance of about 250 yards and select
about 2 2 rmles NE of McHenry Ledge off the entrance to Union    anchorage in depths of 11 to 15 fathoms The inlet dnes for a con-
Bay A shoal area with a least depth of 13 fathoms is off the    siderable distance from the head of the flats dropping off sharply
entrance to Ernest Sound in 55ï¿½49 I'N  132ï¿½21 5'W To keep in   to 7 fathoms
the middle of the channel between Eaton Point (55ï¿½56 3'N ,         (425) Emerald Bay, open and exposed, is 2 8 rmles N of Vixen
 132ï¿½04 0'W) and the N end of Deer Island vessels should pass    Point It is used by fishermen during E weather but is a poor
0 6 mile W of Eaton Point, thence 1 2 rmles W of Point Peters the    anchorage A stream empties at its head
S extremity of Deer Island thence in midchannel between Deer      (426) Easterly Island, a small timbered island with sheer steep
and Nlblack Islands thence 0 6 mile W  of the N end of Deer    sides, is in rmidchannel about 2 8 miles N of Vixen Point Easterly
Island                                                           Island Light (55053 8'N  132ï¿½05 5'W), 28 feet above the water
  (415) Lemesurler Point, Lemly Rocks, McHenry Ledge the    is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-
 Onslow Group, on the N side of the entrance to Ernest Sound      shaped daymark on the N end of the island
 together with Ernest Point Onslow Point, and the passage leading  (427) Petersen Islands, separated by a narrow channel with a
 from Ernest Sound to Dewey Anchorage, have been described    depth of 3 fathoms and having the appearance of a split island are
 with Clarence Strait earlier m this chapter                      about 4 6 miles W  of Easterly Island Light and 3 miles SSW of
  (416) Currents -The currents in Ernest Sound follow the gen-    Brownson Island
 eral direction of the channel The flood current sets N with an     (428) Westerly Island, small and wooded, is about 1 4 rmles S
 average velocity of about 1 7 to 2 1 knots The ebb current sets S    of Brownson Island The channel between it and Brownson Island
 with about the same average velocity At the junction of Bradfield    is clear, except for the rocks N and NNE of Petersen Islands
 Canal and Blake Channel, the joining of the tidal currents cause  (429) Brownson Island, on the W side of Ernest Sound 7 rmles
 swirls (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions )     NE of Onslow Point is cut almost in two by a large lagoon A
                                                                   group of small islands is separated from the S end of the island by
  (417)  Chart 17423 -Umnon Bay is E of Lemesuner Point At its    a channel about 0 1 rmle wide, suitable for launches, which also
 head is a large lagoon, mostly bare, into which a large stream   find anchorage there
 Black Bear Creek, empties The waters of the bay are deep, but      (430) An island, small and wooded, is 0 7 mile SE of Brownson
 there is anchorage with protection from S, on the E side of the    Island Rocks awash at extreme high tide are about 0 2 rmle E of
 head of the bay, m about 18 fathoms The SW angle of the bay is   the N end of the island About 0 2 mile E of these rocks is a cluster
 foul for 0 2 mile offshore The only danger except near the shores,    of rocks that bare about 5 feet and are marked by a daybeacon
 is a rock with a depth of 23/4 fathoms m the middle of the entrance    These constitute a danger In navigating this section of Ernest
 and about 2 5 miles NNE of Lemesuner Point At high water do    Sound Eaton Point on the Cleveland Peninsula shore should be
 not approach the head of the bay too rapidly as the points at the    favored
 entrance to the lagoon are platforms of rock only 3 feet above high  (431) A small, narrow island with rocks off its N and S ends, is
 water and are not readily dlstlnguished Anchor m 18 fathoms      close to the E shore of Brownson Island, near the S end The chan-
 about 0 4 mile offshore on the E side of the head of the bay with    nel separating the two is used by launches, the deeper water being
 the NE point at the entrance to the lagoon beanng about 140ï¿½     W of the rock off the point N of the rmddle of the island
   (418) For anchorage fishermen use the cove behind the small      (432)  Canoe Passage separates Brownson Island from Etolhn
 islet (55ï¿½46 3'N  132ï¿½11 0'W) and the long cove behind Mag-    Island It runs in a N direction with depths too great for anchor-
 netic Point,  about 1 mile N of the islet                        age until the narrows are reached about 2 miles from the N end,







                                     5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                             121


where the channel dries and in places is 100 yards wide. Pass E of    is from 30 to 100 yards in width, has a depth of 14 fathoms at the
a small islet at the N end of the narrows. A shoal makes out about    N entrance, shoals to 2 fathoms 0.3 mile to the S, and thence to the
150 yards from the W shore,' 0.4 mile S of the N end of the pas-    S end is dry except at high water. It is used as an anchorage by
sage. Beyond this point midchannel depths are the greatest. At the    fishermen.
N end of Brownson Island, the passage turns E, increases in width,   (443) Southwest Cove, to the N of Bold Island, is too deep for
and affords anchorage in 13 fathoms, sand bottom.                  anchorage. A reef extends offshore about 100 yards from a point
 (433) Deer Island, E of the N part of Brownson Island, is on the    at the head of the cove. Very small craft find anchorage back of the
E side of Ernest Sound. There are a number of islands and rocks    island on the E side of the cove.
close to the W shore of the island.
                                                                      (444) Found Island, at the S entrance to Zimovia Strait and
 (434) Two coves indent the W shore of the S part of Deer Island.
                                                                    about 3.2 miles NE of Bold Island, is rectangular in shape and
The more S cove is entered from the S just W of Point Peters, the    wooded with ledges that extend about 100 yards off the N shore.
S point of Deer Island. The cove's W  shores are formed by two    Found Island Light (56'06.2N., 132004.8W.), 34 feet above the
islands. A depth of 10 fathoms can be carried in the narrowest part   er, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dia-
of the entrance by avoiding the foul ground that extends off the E  mond-shaped daymark on the SW side of the island. A grass-co
                                                                    mond-shaped daymark on the SW side of the island. A grass-cov-
side of the S island, and the rocks that extend about 0.1 mile off    ered rock 12 feet high is 0.2 mile W of the N end of the island. A
the W side of Point Peters. Depths inside range from 7 to 35 fath-    rock, covered 4 fathom and marked by a daybeacon, is 0.4 mile N
omns. There is a narrow small-boat passage between the two    of Found Island. Blanche Rock, 7 feet high, about 1.1 miles SSW
islands and between the N island and Deer Island. The more N
                                                                    of Found Island off the S point of the entrance to Zimovia Strait, is
cove, about 2 miles N of Point Peters, has depths of 8 to 38 fath-
oms. Rocks are 0.5 mile inside the entrance, 0.1 mile from the W
shore. The channel leading NW from the NW end of the cove            (445) Southeast Cove, about 1.5 miles NE of Found Island does
bares in places. This channel and the channels between the islands    not afford anchorage.
close to the W  shore of Deer Island are suitable for small boats   (446) Fools Inlet is about 5 miles NE of Found Island. Mudflats
only.                                                              bare 0.9 mile from its head, almost to two small islets. Anchorage
 (435) Kuakan Point is the N point of Deer Island. A 31/2-fathom    may be had in 14 to 19 fathoms S of the S islet.
spot is 0.2 mile N of the point, and a small cove too deep for       (447) Point Warde (56010.5'N., 131058.1'W.), to the SE of
anchorage is SE of the point.                                      Fools Inlet, is the S point at the entrance to Bradfield Canal. The
 (436) Seward Passage, deep and clear, separates Deer Island    point rises to two not very definite timbered knobs with higher
from the mainland. Watkins Point (55057.5'N., 132ï¿½02.3'W.), the    land to the E. The shore is rocky. Cliffs on the W face of the point
S point of the S entrance, is low and timbered. Sunny Bay and the    average 80 feet in height.
small coves between Watkins Point and Point Santa Anna, about
                                                                      (448) Foul ground extends about 75 yards off the N shore of the
3.2 miles to the ENE, are used by launches. A group of islands is    cove, 1 mile S of Point Warde. The cove has depths of 18 to 38
off the SW end of Sunny Bay, the outermost of which, Change    fathoms in the middle. It shoals gradually to the N shore. In the
Island, is timbered.                                               small bight on the N side of the cove, depths range from 6 to 9
  (437) Santa Anna Inlet is on the E side of Seward Passage    fathoms.
about 2.7 miles NNE of Point Peters. A shoal area extends about
200 yards off the SW shore about 0.5 mile from the entrance.        (449) Bradfield Canal is apparently free of dangers, although,
From 1 mile within the entrance the midchannel depths decrease    in 1976, a shoal about 10.8 miles above Point Warde with a depth
gradually from 18 to 9 fathoms near the head. Small craft will find    of 10 fathoms near the end was reported to extend toward the mid-
good anchorage in 9 fathoms near the head of the inlet.            dle of the canal from the N shore. About 12 miles from Point
  (438) Frosty Bay is on the E side of Seward Passage near the N    Warde, the canal is almost closed by Duck Point which is
end. Two rocks, bare at half tide, are about 150 yards N of the S    wooded. The small cove W of the point affords the best protection
point of the entrance. Fishing craft anchor in 7 fathoms in the SW  for small craft in the canal. The best anchorage is at the head of the
part of the bay. The head of the bay narrows, then widens, forming    cove in depths of 5 to 8 fathoms, soft bottom.
a bight with depths less than 1 fathom. A large stream empties at    (450) The navigable channel of Bradfield Canal above Duck
the head of the bay.                                               Point follows the N shore of the point, being restricted in one
  (439) Niblack Islands are a cluster of small islands between    place to a width of 0.2 mile by a small islet which is passed on its
Brownson and Deer Islands. The passage on the E side is deep and    S side. Beyond this point the canal continues 2 miles, where it
clear. South Niblack Islands Light (56000.4'N., 132ï¿½05.4'W.), 24    ends in a broad flat off the mouths of two large streams.
feet above the water, is shown from a square frame structure with   (451) Anan Bay, about 2.3 miles E of Point Warde, is an open
red and white diamond-shaped daymarks on the E side of the larg-    bight on the S shore of Bradfield Canal. A large salmon stream
est of the southernmost Niblack Islands.                           empties into Anan Bay and offers a good shelter and anchorage for
  (440) Bold Island, with a conspicuous cliff 100 feet high on the    small craft during S weather in 5 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom. A
W shore, is at the entrance to Menefee Inlet about 3.6 miles NNW   mooring float is on the E side of Anan Bay in about 56ï¿½11'10"N.,
of South Niblack Islands Light. A channel with adepth of 15 fath-    131 53'26"W. There are no known dangers other than those
oms separates Bold Island from a group of small islands to the S.  charted. The U.S. Forest Service maintains a bear observatory on
  (441) Menefee Inlet, on the W  side of Ernest Sound, is deep to    Anan Creek at the large waterfall about 0.5 mile from the beach.
within 1 mile of the head, where three fair-sized streams empty.    A trail marker on the beach indicates the end of a well-maintained
Anchorage may be had 1.2 miles from the head of the inlet in 14    trail leading inland along the creek and passing the bear observa-
fathoms, sand and mud bottom.                                      tory. This area is visited each year by many people who come to
  (442)  Fisherman Chuck separates Menefee Point, the low    observe the thousands of salmon in the stream and passing up the
wooded point on the S side of Menefee Inlet, from Etolin Island. It   falls, and the many black bear feeding on the salmon.






122                                 5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


 (452) Zimovia Strait, between Etolin Island and Wrangell           (464) A light is on the Wrangell Island shore 0.2 mile N of But-
Island, connects Ernest Sound with the E end of Sumner Strait. It   ton Island.
is about 25 miles long, varies in width from about 0.4 to 2.5 miles,  (465) Double Rock uncovers 11 feet, is marked by a daybeacon,
and furnishes a convenient route for small vessels bound from    and is close to the Wrangell Island shore about 0.2 mile W of the
Ketchikan to Wrangell. The critical part of the passage is in The    light. A rock, with 3/4 fathom over it and marked on its S side by a
Narrows, in the vicinity of Button Island, (56ï¿½12'04"N.,           buoy, is about 0.25 mile S of Double Rock.
132ï¿½15'05"W.), where the channel is tortuous, but marked by          (466) Midchannel Rock, which uncovers 3 feet and marked by
buoys, daybeacons, and lights.                                      a daybeacon, is 0.4 mile W  of Double Rock. A deserted village is
 (453)  Currents.-The flood current enters Zimovia Strait from    on the point about 0.3 mile N of Midchannel Rock.
both the N and S ends and meets near Village Islands. The approx-    (467)  Village Islands, a group of islands, rocks, and ledges, are
imate velocity of the current is 1.6 knots. Between Woronkofski    a part of a general shoal area that extends about 2.4 miles NW
Island and Wrangell Island, the ebb sets S and out through Chich-    from the W  end of Whaletail Point, and about 0.5 mile off the NE
agof Pass with a velocity of about 1.7 knots and the flood sets N  shore of the strait, with the main channel between.
with a velocity of about 1.7 knots. (See the Tidal Current Tables    (468) Village Islands Light 13 (56ï¿½12.8'N., 132ï¿½18.1'W.), 17
for daily predictions.)                                            feet above the water, is shown from a pile structure with a square
 (454) The channel in places is narrow and intricate, the depths    green daymark on a rock off the NE shore of the largest island of
are irregular, and local knowledge is desirable for safe navigation.  the group.
 (455) A small cove (56006.9'N., 132ï¿½07.0'W.) on the Etolin         (469) Village Rock, marked by a daybeacon, is on the NE edge
Island side of the channel, about 1.4 miles from the S entrance, has    of the channel about 0.3 mile from Village Islands Light 13.
depths of 18 fathoms 0.3 mile from the head, shoaling to 6 fath-     (470) Village Islands Rock, awash and marked by a daybeacon,
oms at the head.                                                   is about 0.6 mile NW of Village Islands Light 13 and marks the
 (456) Thoms Place, a cove on the Wrangell Island side of the    NW end of the general shoal area, at the W end of The Narrows.
channel, about 3.5 miles from the S entrance, has two small          (471)  Olive Cove is SSW of the Village Islands. A stream of
wooded islets in the entrance. A group of islets is near the head    considerable size empties through the flats, which at low water
close to the SW shore, and another close to the NE shore.          extend about 0.5 mile from the head of the cove. With local
 (457)  In entering, pass between the entrance islets, where sound-    knowledge anchorage may be had off the entrance in 10to 15 fath-
ings of 10 fathoms were obtained. The channel between the E islet    oms. Just inside the NW entrance point is a small private float with
and the Wrangell Island shore is foul. The SW shore and the head    a reported depth of 8 feet.
of the cove are foul and should be given a wide berth. A wooded      (472) A small cove, which dries, is about 0.7 mile E of Olive
island, about 0.2 mile in diameter, is about 0.2 mile off the head-    Cove. Foul ground extends about 700 yards offshore between
land on the W side of the entrance to Thoms Place.                 Whaletail Point and the cove. The two coves are best approached
 (458) A lagoon, about 0.8 mile long, is W  of Thoms Place.    from NW.
Rocks are off the entrance, and the channel is narrow, with a con-
trolling depth of 1/2 fathom. A small bight just inside the entrance  (473) Chart 17382.-Anita Bay, on the W  side of Zimovia
has depths of 6 to 10 fathoms. There are several smooth beaches    Strait, about 13 miles from the N entrance, is deep and clear
that have been used for beaching boats. The head of the lagoon is    inshore on both sides, except for a shoal that extends E about 0.2
foul.                                                              mile from the point of the cove on the S side of the bay, 3.7 miles
 (459)  Zimovia Islets, about 6 miles from the S entrance to the    from the entrance. Shoals extend about 0.1 mile off the entrances
strait, are a group of low wooded islands, the largest and highest of    to small coves, one on each side, about 0.6 mile from the head of
which has an elevation of 268 feet. Zimovia Strait Light 2    the bay. A depth of 10 fathoms may be obtained 0.2 mile from the
(56011.0'N., 132ï¿½12.8'W.), 23 feet above the water, is shown from    head of the bay, but beyond this it shoals rapidly. Anita Point
a small pile structure with a triangular red daymark on an islet off    (56ï¿½13.6'N., 132ï¿½22.4'W.), the S point of the entrance, rounded,
the W end of the largest island of the group.                      wooded, and indefinite, may be passed at a distance of 0.2 mile.
 (460)  Trap Rock, 0.4 mile WNW of Zimovia Strait Light 2 and    The bight in the NW shore of the bay near the entrance dries about
0.5 mile E of the entrance to Whaletail Cove, consists of a shoal of    50 yards offshore. A group of rocks is in the entrance to the bight
sand and boulders that bare 1 foot. A buoy is 100 yards E of the    in the NW shore, 1 mile W  of Anita Point. A cabin is on the N
rock. Foul ground is between the rock and the Etolin Island shore.  shore of the bight. Anchorage may be had near the head of the bay
 (461) A small islet, 125 feet high, is about 0.4 mile N from Trap    in 13 to 17 fathoms, mud and sand bottom, with swinging room
Rock. Small vessels anchor in the vicinity.                        somewhat restricted by flats that make out from the head and sides
 (462)  Whaletail Cove, W  of Trap Rock, has two branches; the    of the bay.
entrance has depths of about 1 foot. The W branch, which dries       (474)  Turn Island is close to the Wrangell Island shore about
almost entirely, has a small island at its entrance. Depths of 1 to 8    1.4 miles NE from Anita Point. Nemo Point is about 2.8 miles N
fathoms are found in the E branch, the greater depths are near the    of Turn Island.
S shore. This branch shoals rapidly near thehead.                    (475) The E shore of Zimovia Strait, between 2 and 5 miles
 (463)  Whaletail Point is: on the N side of the entrance to Whale-    above Nemo Point, is foul with rocks and islets that extend for 0.5
tail Cove. Button Island, 160 feet high and wooded, is near the N  mile offshore. Young Rock, about 4.5 miles N of Nemo Point,
end of a shoal area that extends between the island and Whaletail    with a depth of 2 fathoms and not marked by kelp, is in the center
Point. A buoy about 160 yards E of Button Island marks the N       of the strait at its junction with Chichagof Pass.
edge of the shoal area. A wooded island is about 0.2 mileS of But-
ton Island. The controlling depth across that part of the shoal area  (476)  Chart 17385.-Blake Channel, locally called Back
between these two islands is '/2 fathom, and it is obstructed by    Channel, having its entrance 3 miles NE of Point Warde
kelp.                                                              (56ï¿½10.5'N., 131ï¿½58.1'W.), connects Ernest Sound with Eastern






                                    5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                              123


Passage and through it with the E end of Sumner Strait Blake    marked by a hght, on the S side of the channel just W of the nar-
Channel Light 1 (56ï¿½12 6'N, 131ï¿½55 4'W), 28 feet above the    rowest part of the channel
water, is shown from a skeleton tower with green square daymarks     (485) Channel Island, about 100 feet high and wooded, is in
on the W  side of the channel entrance Because of deposits from    midchannel m Eastern Passage, about 1 3 rmles W  of The Nar-
the Stikme River, shoaling at the N end of Eastern Passage has    rows The island, marked near its N end by a light can be passed
progressed S From Gerard Point (56030 8'N, 132ï¿½19 6'W) the    on either side but the channel N is more direct The small cove SE
shoal extends SE for about 0 5 mile to and beyond the next small    of Channel Island is used as an anchorage by very small craft
creek The current from the South Arm of the Stikine River is        (486) Point Madan, on the E side of Eastern Passage, about 2
diverted through the channel off Green Point (56ï¿½32 5'N            miles WNW of The Narrows, is high and wooded, a shoal covered
132021 5W, chart 17360) The deepwater passage N of Highfield    21/4 fathoms is 0 2 mile SE of the pomt Madan Bay, E of Pomt
Anchorage, 1 7 miles SW of Gerard Point, has been narrowed to a    Madan, is deep and clear of dangers It offers excellent anchorage
width of less than 0 5 mile by the encroachment of the shoaling                                       pomt near Its head on the W
from sedimentation on its N side It is recommended that ships    side m 7 fathoms soft bottom Large vessels may find anchorage
using Eastern Passage favor Slmonof Island that is on the N side    m 12 fathoms soft bottom, farther offshore and near the head of
of Highfield Anchorage, passing a safe distance off A light is    the bay
shown from the N side of Sunonof Island
 (477)  Currents -In Blake Channel the flood current sets NNW       (487) Mill Creek empties into the N side of Eastern Passage
 (477) auvents of ake    annel  the flood currents about 5 miles above Point Madan A path leads from the shore to
                                                                   about 5 males above Point Madan A path leads from the shore to
with a velocity of about 2 2 to 3 knots and meets the flood current
from Eastern Passage in the vicillty of The Narrows The ebb cur-
rent sets m the opposite direction with a velocity of about 2 2 to 3
knots                                                                (488) Chart 17382 -Stikine Strait connects the N part of Clar-
 (478) In Eastern Passage NW of The Narrows, the flood current    ence Strait with the E end of Sumner Strait and the waters off the
sets SE and the ebb sets NW with average velocities of about 1 8    mouth of Shkme River The strait Is broad and deep and is gener-
knots The first and last of the ebb is backed into Eastern Passage    ally used by vessels going to Wrangell, or following the Inner Pas-
by the current from the Stlkine River (See the Tidal Current    sage from Clarence Strait to Wrangell Narrows Both shores of
Tables for daily predictions )                                     Stikine Strait are free from dangers except at a few points, and all
 (479) Blake Island, locally called Ham Island, is at the S    dangers are shown on the chart
entrance, with a narrow channel on each side A pinnacle rock not    (489) Currents -In Stlklne Strait the flood current sets N
marked by kelp, with a depth of 11/4 fathoms, is about 0 3 mile N  through the strait until met by the current from Stikine River W of
of the SE end of Blake Island A 5-fathom spot Is SW of Blake    Wrangell Harbor Velocity of the current is about 2 knots (See the
Island near the entrance about 150 yards from the Wrangell Island    Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions ) The glacial waters of
shore If the W channel is used, avoid the rocks off the point of the    the Stlkmne River usually discolor all the water m the vicinity of
cove on the W side of the channel when turning in from Bradfield    Wrangell Harbor
Canal                                                                (490) Quiet Harbor (56ï¿½14 2'N, 132ï¿½39 8'W) is on the SE side
 (480) The channel E of Blake Island passes E of a reef that    of Stlklne Strait about 2 5 miles S of Round Point, Zarembo
extends NW from the NW end of Blake Island and terminates in a    Island A well-protected and easily accessible anchorage, except
wooded islet at the narrowest part of the channel A rmdchannel    in N wind, is reported to be about 400 yards from the head of the
course will avoid the rocks along the E side of Blake Island The    harbor in about 16 fathoms, mud and sand bottom
tidal currents have considerable velocity in this vicinity, and a    (491)  King George Bay, on the W  side of Etolihn Island about
midchannel course should be followed through either channel        6 5 rmles NNE of Quiet Harbor, affords protection for small craft
  (481)  Neptune Island, about 7 5 miles NNW of Blake Island, is   in SE weather A log storage area is on its N side
low and wooded and marked at its SW end by a hght The lagoon        (492) Round Point, the SE extremity of Zarembo Island, drops
with its entrance E of Neptune Island shoals too rapidly for good    steeply from a high headland, rounding off m an almost perfect
anchorage The greater part of the lagoon bares at low water, and    quadrant The shorelme consists of gray and yellow chffs nsmg to
the E side is used for log storage Aaron Creek empties into the    heights of about 40 feet Round Point Light (56ï¿½16 7'N,
head of the lagoon                                                 132ï¿½39 5'W ), 24 feet above the water, is shown from a small
  (482) Berg Bay, N of Neptune Island, has depths of5 to 11 fath-    white house with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the
oms to near its head and affords the best anchorage m Blake Chan-    pomt
nel Vessels canenter on either side of the island in the mouth, but
                                                                     (493) Meter Bight, 4 miles N of Round Point is an open bight
should give the island a good berth, and avoid a reef that extends    with sand flats at the head over 1 mile in extent that bares for
                                               0 1 mile N of the inner end of the island A log storage area is    about 500 yards offshore Three streams empty through the flats
along the E shore in the E entrance A mooring float is on the E
side of the bay, near the head Other tributaries of Blake Channel
and Eastern Passage shoal rapidly inside their entrances and are    (494) South Cralg Point, marked by a hght is about 7 miles N
not good anchorages                                                from Round Point It has no special charactenstics
  (483) Between Neptune Island and The Narrows the S shore           (495) Fritter Cove, to the S of South Craig Point is an open
should be favored to avoid dangers that are off the N shore        bight with rocks off the N point of the entrance No information is
  (484) The Narrows, about 12 miles NNW of the entrance to    available regarding depths mslde
Blake Channel, is about 1 5 miles long and about 250 yards wide     (496) Roosevelt Harbor, NNW of South Craig Point, affords
at its narrowest part, and connects Blake Channel with Eastern    anchorage near the head for small craft in depths of 11 fathoms
Passage The only dangers are a reef off the N point at the E    mud bottom In entering, leave the grass-covered rock at the
entrance and a rocky area with 3 to 4 feet over it at high water and    entrance to the S The channel S of the rock is reported foul





124                                5  CLARENCE STRAIT DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL


 (497) Deep Bay is on the Zarembo Island side of the N end of    formed by Point Shekestl, that projects 0 4 mile in a NW dlrec-
Stkmine Strait, about 1 1 mile N of South Craig Point Light It Is   tion from the island A breakwater 200 yards long extends from
reported as too deep for anchorage until near the head           the N extremity of Point Shekesti and affords protection for small
 (498) Woronkofski Island, E of Zarembo Island, Is about 5 5    craft in the S part of the harbor Wrangell Harbor Breakwater
miles in diameter It rises In a series of peaks to Mount         Light 2 (56028 0'N, 132ï¿½23 1'W), 21 feet above the water is
Woronkofski near its center, and is timbered to a height of 2,500    shown from a skeleton tower with a red triangular daymark on the
feet The shoreline is generally rocky, with off-lying rocks close-    outer end of the breakwater
to                                                                 (511) Wrangell is a city on the N side of Wrangell Harbor, 89
 (499) Reef Point, low and wooded, is the SW extremity of    miles from Ketchikan and 148 miles from Juneau The deepest
Woronkofskl Island Rocks and kelp extend offshore for about 300    draft commercial vessel calling at Wrangell m 1976 was 33 feet
yards A rock, with 3/4 fathom on it, is about 0 6 mile NNW from    Wrangell has a cannery, a cold storage faclhty, large lumber mulls,
this point                                                       and two oil company faclhties
 (500) Drag Island, about 250 yards in diameter and about 150     (512) Pronmnent features An 80-foot-high standpipe on a low
feet high, is 0 2 mile S of the point                            ridge immediately E of the city of Wrangell and marked on top by
 (501) Point Ancon is on the W  side of Woronkofskl Island       a red light, a lighted microwave tower, and the aerobeacon at the
Point Ancon Light (56ï¿½24 3'N, 132033 3'W), 20 feet above the    airport are the most prominent objects seen m Wrangell from sea-
water, is shown from a square frame structure with a red and white    ward
diamond-shaped daymark on the point A rock awash and kelp are      (513) Channels A Federal project provides for a mooring basm
close to the point                                               withln the protected area in the SE part of the harbor and a break-
 (502) Wedge Point, about 1 1 miles NNE of Point Ancon, is a    water on the W side of the entrance, an inner basin on the tidal flat
low, thickly wooded point that shows prominently                 area E of Shakes Island with a connecting channel to it, all
 (503) Elephants Nose is a knob on a ridge near the N end of    dredged to a depth of 10 feet The connecting channel is marked
Woronkofski Island                                               by daybeacons, and the breakwater is marked by a light at its outer
 (504) Woronkofski Point, the N point of the Island, is low and    end In October 1993 depths of 10 feet were available except for
rounding without any marked characteristics A daybeacon marks    lesser depths alongside some of the moonngs and along the edges
the NE end of the point The shore SE of Woronkofskl Point    of the basins and connecting channel
should be given a berth of at least 0 5 rmle There are rocks along  (514) Anchorages -Wrangell Harbor affords shelter for vessels
this section of the coast and also piles enclosing log storage areas  only from offshore wmds Dunng heavy SE winter gales Hlghfield
 (505) Fivemile Island is about 1 9 miles N of Woronkofski    Anchorage is sometimes used for better shelter Good anchorage
Point Fivemle Island Light (56028 2'N, 132030 7'W), 34 feet    in strong SE weather has been found 0 8 mile off the NE side of
above the water, is shown from a single pile with a red and white    Woronkofski Island i about 23 fathoms, mud bottom
diamond-shaped daymark on the N end of the island
                                                                   (515) Dangers -The approach to Wrangell Harbor Is clear of
 (506) Chichagof Pass, between the S side of Woronkofski    dangers A shoal with 1 fathom on It extends about 80 yards N of
Island and the N side of Etolmhn Island, connects Stikine Strait with
                                                                  the breakwater Submerged dolphins are on both sides of the
the N part of Zlmovia Strait It is clear except for Young Rock,
                                                                  entrance channel, E of the breakwater, to the outer moonng basin
with a depth of 2 fathoms, at the E end of Chchagof Pass inm   Submerged piles and other wreckage are at the SE end of the outer
Zlmovia Strait East Point, at the E end of Woronkofskil Island, is
low and wooded The small cove on the N side of East Point is
used as a log raft storage area Circle Bay is an open blght W of   (516) Tdes and currents -The mean range of tide    Wrangell
East Pomnt                                                       Harbor is 13 3 feet, and the diurnal range 15 7 feet Tidal currents
 (507) Hat Island is at the entrance to Circle Bay, about 0 8 mle    m Wrangell Harbor are variable Vessels approaching the wharves
 (507) Hat Island is at the entrance to Circle Bay, about 0 8 mile
SW of East Point It is wooded, and is marked by a light on the   should note the way small craft are       g to anchor to deter-
                                      si7 R- a h e d a t 20      mine the direction of the current and should exercise caution in
side Rocks awash extend about 250 yards SW of Hat Island
                                                                  coming alongside
 (508) Chart 17384 -Highfield Anchorage is at the N end of        (517) Pllotage, Wrangell -Pllotage, except for certain
Wrangell Island, about 1 5 miles from Wrangell Harbor The    exempted vessels, is compulsory for all vessels navigating the
anchorage is in 6 to 15 fathoms, fine sand and mud bottom W of    inside waters of the State of Alaska (See Plotage, Alaska,
the line of and about midway between Point Highfield and Dead-    indexed as such, chapter 3 for details)
man Island, which is marked on its N side by Eastern Passage      (518) Vessels en route Wrangell meet the pilot boat about 1 mile
Light (56029 6'N, 132ï¿½22 2'W), the light is 13 feet above the    NWof Guard Islands Light (55026 8'N, 131052 9'W)
water and showing a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on a      (519) The pilot boat, a tugboat, can be contacted by calling
square frame Anchorage can also be had m 4 to 12 fathoms, fine    "WRANGELL PILOT BOAT  on VHF-FM channels 16 13, or
sand and mud bottom, E from that areas to directly N of Polk    12
Point and about halfway between Deadman Island and the shore       (520) Towage -Tugs up to 1,270 hp operating out of Wrangell
of Wrangell Island Light floating ice from Stiklne River is    and engaged princlpally in the towing of barges and log rafts are
encountered here in the sprinng and countercurrents render a vessel    available for assistance in docking and undocklng They are
very uneasy at times                                             equipped with VHF-FM channels 16, 13, and 9 The tugs are
 (509) City of Topeka Rock, marked by a light in Highfield    available on a 24-hour basis, and arrangements should be made
Anchorage about 50 yards N of the airport runway, is awash at low    well in advance through shipping agents
water                                                             (521)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural
 (510) Wrangell Harbor is on the W  side of the N end of    quarantine -(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections and
Wrangell Island, about 1 minle below Point Highfield It is a bight    appendix for addresses )







                                     5. CLARENCE STRAIT, DIXON ENTRANCE TO WRANGELL                                              125


 (522)  Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of     (534) Alaska Wood  Products, Shoemaker  Bay  Pier
the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-    (56ï¿½23'52"N., 132"20'28"W.); 4.5 miles SSW of Alaska Wood
ter 1.)                                                             Products, Wrangell Pier; 300 feet of berthing space; depth along-
 (523) Wrangell is a customs port of entry.                         side 32 feet; 7 acres of open storage; cargo handling equipment
 (524) Harbor regulations.-The harbormaster at Wrangell    available from the Alaska Wood Products, Wrangell Pier; owned
assigns berths and controls the use of the grid in the inner basin  and operated by Alaska Wood Products. The area N and S of the
He maintains an office on the trestle connecting Shakes Island to    pier is occupied by log booms and small craft; caution is advised.
Wrangell Island. The harbormaster's office monitors 2182 kHz          (535)  Supplies.-Provisions and fishing and some marine sup-
and VHF-FM channel 16.                                              plies are available in Wrangell. Two oil companies maintain piers
 (525)  Wharves.-All of the piers and wharves at Wrangell are    and fueling floats in the small-craft basin in the S part of the har-
privately owned and operated with the exception of the City Pier    bor. Gasoline, diesel fuel, distillates and lubricating oil and
and the State Ferry Pier, which are owned by the City of Wrangell    greases are available from the fuel facilities. There are no facilities
and the State of Alaska, respectively. The alongside depths given    for fueling large vessels at Wrangell. Water is available at the
for each facility described are reported; for further information on    wharves and on the floats in the small-craft basins; ice for fishing
the latest depths, contact the individual operators.                vessels is available at the Bar Harbor Seafoods Wharf.
                                                                      (536)  Repairs.-There are no drydocking or major repair facili-
 (526) Alaska Marine Highway System, Wrangell Ferry Terminal
 (56'28'28"N6)  132023'23"W.); 320 feet of berthing space with dolt    ties for large vessels in Wrangell or in southeastern Alaska. The
(56"28'28"N., 132ï¿½23'23"W.); 320 feet of herthing space with dol-
phins; depths of 24 feet alongside; owned and operated by the    nearest facilities are in British Columbia and the State of Washing
State of Alaska.                                                    ton. A marine railway that can handle vessels up to 80 feet in
                                                                    length and 8 feet in draft is available in the small-craft basin E of
 (527) Wrangell City Wharf (56"28'16"N., 132"23'14"W.); 0.2    Shakes Island. Another marine railway E of Shakes Island is avail-
mile SSE of the Alaska State Ferry Pier; 400-foot SW face; deck    able for wooden and metal hull repairs for small vessels up to 50
height, 24 feet; depth alongside, 35 feet; 100,000 square feet of    feet in length and 6 feet in draft. A machine shop for limited shaft
open storagd   e and 4,000 square feet of covered storage; owned and    repairs to small craft is adjacent to this small-craft basin.
operated by the city of Wrangell.                                     (537) Small-craft facilities.-The City of Wrangell operates
 (528)  Wrangell City Pier (56028'14"N., 132"23'07"W.); S side    about 3,300 feet of float space in the mooring basin in the S part of
275 feet, 200 feet of berthing space; depths of 24 to 35 feet along-    the harbor, and about 1,900 feet of float space in the inner basin E
side; two forklifts for containerized cargo; 4,800 square feet of    of Shakes Island. Fresh water and electric power are available on
covered storage; general cargo and passengers from cruise vessels;    all floats. A 65-foot grid is in the mudflats on the W  side of the
owned and operated by the City of Wrangell.                         trestle connecting Shakes Island to Wrangell Island.
 (529)  Wrangell City Transfer Bridge; immediately SE of             (538) Two fuel facilities are on the SSW side of the harbor. Also
Wrangell City Pier; 140-foot face; 72-ton capacity; raises and low-    on the SSW side of the harbor are sections of a float maintained by
ers by compressed air, using a large floating tank; designed for Lip    the State Fish and Wildlife Service and the U.S. Forest Service for
Barges, but can adapt to other type barges with advance notice;    their own use. A seaplane float is on the NE side of the channel
forklift and tractor equipment are available; 100,000 square feet of    leading to the S mooring basin about 200 yards 109" from the
open storage and 4,000 square feet of covered storage; roll-on/    Wrangell Harbor Breakwater Light 2.
roll-off general cargo; owned by the City of Wrangell and oper-       (539) Limited boat-launching facilities are available at the S end
ated by Foss Alaska Line and Boyer Alaska Barge Line, Inc.          of the S basin and close S of the ferry terminal.
 (530)  Bar  Harbor  Seafoods  Wharf  (56"28'01"N.,                  (540) Shoemaker Bay Boat Harbor, about 3.5 miles SSE of
132ï¿½22'52"W.); 125-foot face; depth alongside, 10 feet; deck    Wrangell, had a reported controlling depth of 15 feet in July 1976.
height, 24 feet; receipt of seafood, and icing fishing vessels; hoists    The entrance channel is marked by lights. The stalls can accom-
and forklifts available; owned by the city of Wrangell and oper-    modate 230 small craft, ranging from 20 to 62 feet with a 10-foot
ated by Bar Harbor Seafoods, Inc. and the city of Wrangell.         overhang. Metered electricity is available upon request, and fuel
 (531) Wrangell Harbor Cannery Float (56ï¿½27'56"N.,    can be obtained in Wrangell. A motel, restaurant and lounge, tele-
132"22'50"W.); 675-foot float; 10 feet alongside; moorage for    phone service, and a large vehicle parking area are available in the
fishing vessels and small craft; owned by the State of Alaska and    immediate vicinity.
operated by the city of Wrangell.                                     (541)  Communications.-Wrangell has regular passenger,
  (532)  Chevron U.S.A. Wrangell Dock (56"27'53"N.,    express, and freight service to Puget Sound ports, British Colum-
132"22'52"W.); 90-foot float; depth alongside, 10 feet; deck    bia, and other Alaska ports by water and air. The Alaska State
height, 25 feet; pipelines extend to storage tanks, 10,700-barrel    Ferry System operates daily service during the summer months to
capacity; receipt of petroleum products; bunkering vessels; owned    Prince Rupert, B.C., Sitka, Ketchikan, Petersburg, Juneau, Haines,
and operated by Chevron U.S.A., Inc.                                and Skagway; weekly service is available to Seattle; this schedule
  (533) Union Oil Co. Wrangell Dock (56"28'54"N.,                    is less frequent during the winter.
132"22'54"W.); 100-foot float; depth alongside, 10 feet; deck         (542)  Scheduled airlines and charter air services operate daily
height, 24 feet; pipelines extend to storage tanks, 4,500-barrel    from Wrangell.
capacity; receipt of petroleum products; bunkering vessels; owned     (543)  Telephone and radiotelephone communications are main-
and operated by Union Oil Co. of California.                        tained with the other States and other parts of Alaska.








                              6 WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND

 (1)   This chapter covers the outer coast between Dixon          (7)   Forrester Island is a National Wlldhfe Refuge under the
Entrance and Sumner Strait, and includes the inlets and bays on    jurisdiction of the U S Fish and Wildlife Service
the W coast of Prince of Wales Island and the off-lying Islands    (8)   There are no secure anchorages off Forrester Island Dur-
with the connecting bodies of water The area Is described m the    ing the summer, small craft anchor m four different places Wood
followmg order Forrester Island and W  coast of Dall Island,    Cove, Eagle Harbor, the N end, and the bight on the W side near
Meares Passage, Cordova Bay, Hetta Inlet Sukkwan Strait    the N end Anchorage is close to the beach at the edge of the kelp
Kalgani Strait, Tlevak Strait and Narrows, Ulloa Channel         m about 10 fathoms, rocky bottom There is a small freshwater
Bucareh Bay, San Alberto Bay, and Klawock Inlet Port Real    stream m Eagle Harbor
Marina, Portillo Channel, and San Christoval Channel Amaga         (9)   Wood Cove and Eagle Harbor are on the E side of the
Passage, Gulf of Esquibel, and Tonowek Bay, Bocas de Finas,    island, about 1 4 males and 0 8 mile respectively, from the N end
Tonowek Narrows, Tuxekan Passage, Davidson Inlet, Sea Otter        (lo)  Petrel Island is about 1 mile S from Forrester Island It
Sound, and El Capitan Passage The cities of Hydaburg on Suk-    has two wooded summits From a distance these look like two
kwan Narrows, and Cralg and Klawock on Klawock Inlet are    islands
described m this chapter
                                                                    described in this chapter  ()  South Rock, close to the S end of Petrel Island, is not very
                                                                  prominent Between South Rock and Petrel Island is a rock 73
 (2)   Chart 17400 -The connecting bodies of water along the    feet high, and several smaller rocks
W coast of Prance of Wales Island and between the off-lying
                 W  coast of Prince of Wales Island and between the off-lying  (12)  N of Forrester Island for 3 miles there are, in succession
islands, afford protected inside passages between Dixon Entrance    S     e a Lion Rock, 117 feet high, with a flat and grassy top, Cape
                                                                  Sea Lion Rock, 117 feet high, with a flat and grassy top, Cape
and Sumner Strait The main passages have been surveyed, but
there are several inlets and bays that have not been surveyed    Lowrie Island, wooded and marked by a l ight , and N orth Rocks
                                                                   Lowtie Island, wooded and marked by a light, and North Rocks
 (3)   Currents -A few observations made dunng June 1917, at    15 to 25 feet high a  ou with outlyin rocks and breakers
times when the sea and air were calm, show a NE to NW set vary-
  mg from 0 3 to 1 3 knots between Dall Island and Forrester Island  (13)  Breakers are numerous around the Forrester Island group
ingW of  owne Island at the 100-fathom curve, a NE to N sea of 0 1    but for the most part are close to shore or are readily discernible
W   of Lowne Island a      t the 1000- fathom  curve, a NE to N sea of 0 1    Butler Rock, 20 feet high, is 500 yards W from the point on the N
knot to 0 8 knot was   obser ved   Near the I 000-fath om curve, a    side of the bight in the NW end of Forrester Island Breakers are N
                                                                  and S of the rock A breaker between Sea Lion Rock and Lowne
 (4) The currents have considerable strength in the vlmlmty of
                                                                  Island is reported to break at low water springs with a moderate
the rocks and Islets off Forrester Island, and are irregular in direc-
tion, but generally have a N set durng flood Tide rips are usuallyng unusually                               ty has been marked
found around Forrester Island and in the passages between the    b    P
rocks                                                             (14)  The pass between Forrester Island and Petrel Island is
                                                                  used by fishermen At times the currents are severe and during
 (5) Weather-Along the inside passages between Dlxon
 Entrance and Sumner Stralt, the rugged pIslands W of Price of    heavy weather the pass is dangerous The channel around the N
Entrance and Sumner Strait, the rugged islands W  of Prince of
                                                                  end of Forrester Island and S of Sea Lion Rock and Cape Horn
Wales Island afford some protection from the rigors of the open    Rock i   orted clear, that between Sea Lion Rock and Cape
Gulf However, passages such as Cordova Bay and Kalgam Strait           R
as well as numerous inlets and harbors along these routes, are
exposed to heavy SE weather, which is prevalent from September    Island and North Rocks but the locality of North Rocks is
through April The worst conditions usually occur in November,    reported foul The passes are used only by small fishing craft and
December, and January when gales are encountered about 8 to 11    should only be attempted by those with local knowledge
percent of the time in open water strong winds are most often out  (15)  Wolf Rock, 13 5 miles 005ï¿½ from the highest summit of
of E through SE Winds are further intensified in some restricted    Forrester Island, is small in extent and bare of vegetation, it is sur-
passages, and when they blow across strong currents the waters    rounded by foul ground to a distance of about 0 5 mile
become treacherous Swells from the open ocean add to the prob-     (16)  Dall Island, the largest Island off the W coast of Pnnce of
lem in areas like Steamboat and Cordova Bays and North Kalgani    Wales Island Is about 40 miles long from Cape Muzon its SE
Harbor In addition because of the high elevations of the islands    extremity, to Eagle Point, Its NW extremity, in Meares Passage It
willhwaws can develop and create rough conditions in many of the   is about 8 5 miles wide between Cape Augustine and High Point,
inlets and passages Local weather knowledge is essential to the    in Tlevak Strait It Is mountainous, Thunder Mountain in the
safe navigation of these waters                                  vicinimty of Cape Lookout is 3,010 feet high Both the E and W
 (6)   Forrester Island (54ï¿½48' N , 133031'W), about 14 5    coasts of the Island are indented by numerous bays coves and
miles off Dall Island shore and about 30 miles WNW from Cape    inlets some of which are excellent harbors of refuge
Muzon, is wooded The N half of the Island is a ridge with distmc-  (17)  The W coast of Dall Island from Cape Muzon to Meares
tive summits, the S summit is rounding, relatively flat with a    Passage, a distance of about 40 miles, is rugged with prominent
ragged tree line, the next peak to the N is sharp, the third Is round-    partially wooded peaks ranging in elevation to about 3,000 feet
ing, and the N peak shows flat, with two knobs The S part of the   (18)  In 1972 a shoal covered 4 fathoms or less was reported in
island is a wooded flat with a knob on the E side At the S end of    54059 6'N  133016 6'W  about 4 3 miles SW of Sakle Point A
the island is a detached knob, which from E and W  directions    rock covered 2 fathoms or less is about 0 8 mile NW of the 4-
appears as a separate island                                     fathom shoal in about 55ï¿½00'03"N, 133ï¿½17'51"W


                                                                                                                              126






                                          6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                               127


  (19)  Chart 17409 -Chlckwan Bight, about 2 5 miles W  of    waws It can be entered either SE or NW of Dolgol Island, but the
Cape Muzon is open and exposed and has depths of about 30 fath-    NW entrance is more often used At low water the channels are
oms at the entrance decreasing to 12 fathoms near the head         fairly well defined Rocks that cover are a considerable distance
  (20)  Wolk Harbor, about 3 5 miles W of Cape Muzon, is deep    from the shores of the narrow channels, presenting elements of
throughout and is open and exposed Midchannel depths are 20 to    danger to those without local knowledge The chart shows known
40 fathoms There are tide nps off Wolk Point between Chickwan    dangers
Bight and Wolk Harbor                                                (29)  Anchorage may be had NE of the islands m the center of
  (21)  Llscome Bay, about 4 3 miles WNW of Cape Muzon,    the bay in 11 to 19 fathoms, mud bottom or m the bight N of the N
affords an anchorage for small vessels but is exposed to S weather    island in 11 to 13 fathoms A rock bare at low water is close to
and swell A submerged rock is about 100 yards off the E shore,    the NE end of the N island A small 6 I/4-fathom shoal is 0 2 mile
about 1 1 miles within the entrance where the bay narrows A        NE from the N island The small bight at the head of the bay is
small rock is about 230 yards N of the submerged rock Favonng    foul
the W shore depths of 40 fathoms at the entrance to about 16 fath-d currents -The mean tde range is about 9 feet
oms in the vcminity of the rocks may be caned Depths of 8 to 10    while the diurnal range is about 11 feet Currents are reported to
fathoms are found at the head of the bay                           seldom exceed 1 knot
  (22) Point Cornwallis, marked by a hght is a prormnent head-
land about 6 6 miles WNW of Cape Muzon At the extrermity is a
projecting rocky point 195 feet high, on the N side of which,        (31)  Chart 17408 -Gooseneck Harbor (54t53'N
close-to Is a sl1mlar point 131 feet high near whch are two small    133 03W)about4mlesNWoftheNWentrancepomtto   t
roclose-to is a similar point 131 f    eet high near which are pomt and    Bazan (chart 17409) is identified by a black rock, 65 feet high,
rocks A rock awash is imnmediately W of the projecting point and    close S of the entrance The upper half of the harbor is mostly
a submerged rock and a bare rock are about 0 3 rmle to the SE      close S of the entrance The upper half of the harbor IS mostly
Ima subme rgdately arock ofand a barthe po ckt  are abound-topped h0 3 mill   0 feet    obstructed by bare rocks and ledges, and the head is especially
Immediately back of the point is a round-topped hill 440 feet    foul A rock, awash at extreme low water is near the middle of the
high Stripe Mountamn, about 1 3 miles NE of the point IS    foul A rock, awash at extreme low water Is near the huddle of the
h                   igh Stripe Mountain, about 1 3 miles NE of the point is    entrance, 200 yards W of a small islet off the S shore A rock that
 2)ma rked by a prominent sd e on the N  of PolntW side   Two      bares is almost m amdchannel about 0 8 mile inside the entrance
 (23)  Security Cove is 2 7 miles N of Point Cornwallis Two        In entering follow the N shore at a distance of about 250 yards
rocks awash are close off the S shore at the entrance Depths at the    In entenng follow the N    shore at a distance of about 250 yards
entrance are deep but Irregular m the narrow part of the cove
depths of 61/2 fathoms are obtai ned Depths of 19 to 35 fathoms are    find anchorage for small craft 100 yards off the N shore, 1 5 miles
depths of 61/2 fathoms are obtained Depths of 19 to 35 fathoms are    within the entrance
found inside In the bight on the N side, close inside the narrowest
part of the entrance, small craft have found temporary anchorage     (32)  Gold Harbor, about 2 miles NW of Gooseneck Harbor, is
in depths from 6 to 22 fathoms A small lake about 0 5 mile    reported clear in midchannel On the N side of the bay is a peak,
mshore at an elevation of 950 feet empties mto the head of Secu-    on the S side of which Is a very prominent landshde, 110 yards
nrty Cove                                                          wide and 350 yards long with its top at an elevation of 1 560 feet
 (24)  Essowah Harbor IS about 1 7 mules NNW from Secunty    About 2 6 rmles from the entrance and about 0 6 mile NW of the
 (24)  Essowah Harbor is about 1 7 miles NNW from Secunityx        N shore are Twin Peaks about 500 yards apart The peaks are bare
Cove The entrance channel is about 0 3 mile long and 30 yards    N shore an elevation      about 500 yards apart The peaks are bare
wide, there are two rocks near the entrance Essowah Lakes
empty into the head of Essowah Harbor A small lake 0 5 rmle S        (33)  About 0 9 mile from the entrance to the S of mndchannel,
of Essowah Lakes, empties near the entrance to Essowah Harbor      is a small Island A  midchannel course passing N of the Island
 (25)  Parrot Rock is about 0 9 mile WNW  from Essowah             leads to the head of the bay where depths of 23 to 29 fathoms are
Point, the point S of the entrance to Essowah Harbor and is about    found The small cove W of the NW pomt of the entrance to Gold
0 2 mile offshore                                                  Harbor is foul
 (26)  Port Bazan (54ï¿½48 8'N  132058 5'W) is between two            (34)  Waterfall Bay is about 4 5 rmles NW of Gooseneck Har-
prominent mountain peaks about 15 rmles from Cape Muzon and    bor The entrance is distingushed by a bold, bare point on the SE
7 5 miles NW of Point Cornwallis The NW mountain top is a    slde and Gourd Island, a wooded islet in the middle Near the
small bare tip the SE mountain is roughly the shape of a rounded    head of the bay are extensive deposits of marble on the slopes of
cone, and is heavily wooded to the top Often when the tops of the    Twin Peaks two promnent bare sumrmts that are about 0 6 rmle E
mountains are enveloped in fog or low clouds, the latter mountain    of the head Two small islands one close to the N shore, and the
stands out clearly There are a number of islands within the port   other about in midchannel are about 0 9 mile ENE of Gourd
 (27)  Dolgol Island, at the entrance to Port Bazan is mound    Island Dangers are shown on the chart The bay has two promm-
shaped and wooded (with the seaward side rocky and bare of veg-    nent waterfalls one at the head and the other on the N shore close
etation) to heights of 50 to 100 feet There are through channels to    to the N island and several islets
the NW and SE W  from Dolgol Island, on the S side of the           (35)  The bay may be entered NW or SE of Gourd Island A
entrance to the N channel is a group of four islets close together  narrow area with 8 fathoms on it extends from the N shore of the
The W  side of the outermost islet is a precipitous sharp pointed    bay to wlthin 270 yards of the N side of Gourd Island A channel
rock, light brown to white 125 feet high, the E part is lightly    about 120 yards wide with depths of 26 to 38 fathoms is between
wooded The next larger islet is lightly wooded, the other two are    this area and the rocks and kelp that extend off the N side of Gourd
small and bare A shoal with a depth of 4 fathoms and probably    Island for about 100 yards
less is about 750 yards NW from the W extremity of the largest      (36)  The channel between the two islands withm the bay has a
islet                                                              depth of 15 fathoms near mndchannel A depth of 30 fathoms is
 (28)  Port Bazan affords good anchorage N and NE of the    available in the channel S of the S island with an 8-fathom spot
islands that stretch across the E part of the bay The anchorage is    marked by kelp, and a 31/4-fathom spot, which are about 0 2 mile
well protected from the swell and is generally free from wllll-    SW and 0 1 mule ESE respectively of the island If this channel is







128                                      6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


used, round the island at a distance of about 180 yards, and leave   (48)  Sea Otter Harbor on the N side of Cape Lookout divides
the 31/4-fathom spot to the E.                                     into two branches about 1.4 miles from the entrance.
 (37)  Anchorage may be had near the head of the bay in about       (49)  Entrance Island, a prominent rock, is 0.6 mile NW of
26 fathoms, sticky bottom. W  winds draw into the bay with con-    Cape Lookout and a little to the S of the middle of the entrance to
siderable force. With SE winds, williwaws are severe. Small craft    Sea Otter Harbor. Foul ground surrounds the island. Give the
anchor in 10 fathoms on the NW side of the bay, just N of the N    island a berth of 0.5 mile on the W  side, and a berth of about 0.3
island. There is anchorage for small craft, 50 feet long or less, in 5    mile from the N around to the S side. Kelp patches extend from
fathoms, mud bottom, in the small bight at the extreme head of the    the island to a breaker 0.8 mile in a S direction, and about 0.4 mile
bay.                                                               off Cape Lookout.
 (3s)  Cape Augustine (54ï¿½57.0'N., 133ï¿½09.8'W.), at the NW          (50)  Juel Point, the headland on the N side of Sea Otter Har-
side of the entrance to Waterfall Bay, has several bare black rocks    bor, is rugged and rocky. From the point the land slopes E for 1.3
close-to.                                                          miles to a summit, 1,100 feet high.
 (39)  Augustine Bay is a small bay N of Cape Augustine. Kelp       (51)  Inside the entrance to Sea Otter Harbor, rocks and reefs
and rocks extend offshore; depths of 8 to 16 fathoms are found    extend N about 0.6 mile from Cape Lookout. Within the entrance,
near the center of the bay. It is open and exposed and is not suit-    1.5 miles E of Entrance Island, a group of rocks extends 0.2 mile
able for anchorage.                                                off the N shore of the bay. The largest and southernmost rock of
 (40)  Welcome Cove is about 1.5 miles N of Cape Augustine.    this group is known as Gate Island. Clear Point is the W extrem-
Off the entrance the ground is foul, but there is a narrow channel    ity of the headland that divides the bay into two arms To the S of
into the cove, where anchorage may be had for small boats in 2to    this point is Nellag Island, with off-lying rocks close-to that
5 fathoms, mud bottom. The entrance should not be attempted    extend in a W direction.
without local knowledge.                                             (52)  In entering Sea Otter Harbor, small boats, with local
 (41)  Camp Cove is about 2.5 miles N from Cape Augustine          knowledge, frequently use a channel to the E of Entrance Island,
Off the entrance is a rock 15 to 20 feet high with foul ground that    passing close to Cape Lookout A rock awash, about 450
extends in a NNE direction to the shore. The S shore of the cove is                      ,   e
                                                                     (53)  Hook Arm, the N arm of Sea Otter Harbor, is well pro-
                                                                   tected from wind and sea. Anchorage may be had anywhere in the
 (42)  Devil Lake empties to the N of Devil Island, about 0.8    arm in 21 to 26 fathoms in the center and 17 to 19 fathoms at
mile to the N of Camp Cove. The channel at the entrance is very    either end, mud bottom. Small vessels can anchor in 8 to 15 fath-
narrow. The lake extends about 2.5 miles in a NE direction.        oms at the head of the arm or in the bight N of Channel Island. A
 (43)  Fisherman Cove is about 4.5 miles N from Cape August-    small sand and gravel beach is at the head of this bight.
ine. At the entrance is a small island that has a few scattered trees.  (54)  Camp Island, small and rocky, is close to the W shore of
In entering, pass the S point of this island at a distance of about    Hook Arm, about 0.5 mile N of Clear Point.
100 yards and steer for the left or W edge of the sand beach at the  (55)  Channel Island, separated by a very narrow passage from
head of the cove. The anchorage is about 170 yards wide, with    the W  shore of Hook Arm about 0.8 mile N of Clear Point, is
depths of 3 to 6 fathoms, mud bottom, and is large enough for four    wooded. Low Rock and a rock awash close E are 200 yards off
or five small fishing vessels.                                     the S shore of Channel Island.
 (44)  Sakie Bay is about 7.5 miles NNW from Cape Augustine.        (56)  Two small rocky islets are near the head of Hook Arm; the
Rocks and reefs extend 0.6 mile offshore in a WSW direction    outermost is 240 yards from the N shore.
from Sakie Point, the S point of the entrance. The outermost rock    (57)  The W end of Nellag Island should be given a berth of at
is 20 feet high. Table Rock is the most prominent of the rocks that    least 100 yards. The principal dangers in the channel are the rocks
extend about 320 yards off the N shore at the entrance. The chan-    off Camp Island and Low Rock, and the rocks awash.
nel, about 300 yards wide, is to the S of Table Rock. Tide rips,     (58)  Manhattan Arm, the SE branch of Sea Otter Harbor, is
severe for small craft, are experienced at the entrance. The bay has    exposed to the force of the wind and sea and is too deep for secure
not been thoroughly surveyed.                                      anchorage. A rocky islet, with off-lying rocks awash, is in the
 (45)  Middle Island is near the center of the bay. Near the head    middle of the arm.
of the bay and about 450 yards off the N shore is a group of small
islands and rocks. Anchorage can be found in the bay in 6 to 8       (59)  Chart 17407.-Foul Bay,immediately N of Juel Point
fathoms, sticky mud bottom.                                        (55ï¿½07.6'N., 133ï¿½13.6'W.), is about 2.5 miles N of Cape Lookout.
 (46)  Cape Lookout (55006'N., 133014'W.) is a prominent    In the center of the bay near the entrance is a cluster of submerged
headland about 2 miles N of Sakie Bay. From the cape, extending    rocks. The shores of the bay are foul where the bay narrows; reefs
in a SE direction, are four prominent peaks. Cone Mountain, 0.6    extend from either shore almost to midchannel, leaving a narrow
mile from the extremity of the cape, is a symmetrical, timbered    passage 50 to 100 feet wide through which very small boats pass
cone. Bear Mountain, 1.4 miles from the cape, is round topped,    to a secure anchorage in 3 to 5 fathoms near the head of the bay.
and timbered to an elevation of 1,800 feet. Thunder Mountain,    Only those with local knowledge should enter the bay.
the highest peak on Dall Island, 2.8 miles from the cape, has a      (60)  Meares Passage is at the NW end of Dall Island, between
bare, rugged summit.                                               it and Suemez Island, and affords passage from the sea to Tlevak
 (47)  There are several breakers off Cape Lookout. One, about    Narrows and the E part of Ulloa Channel. The approach to Meares
3.4 miles WNW from the cape, has no kelp on it and does not    Passage from W is foul in places for about 2 miles from the Sue-
break in a calm sea. A 21/2-fathom shoal, which breaks, is about    mez Island shore.
2.8 miles WNW from the cape; 0.4 mile N of it is another shoal,      (61)  Suemez Island, about 8.5 miles in diameter, is W of and
covered with a heavy mass of kelp, which breaks only in a heavy    separated from the N end of Dall Island by Meares Passage. The
sea.                                                               island is mountainous; the peaks are generally rounded and






                                         6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                               129


wooded, except near the summits The shoreline is rocky, fnnged       (72)  The best entrance to the bay is between Bamer Islands and
by small rocky islets and kelp, and indented by numerous bays and    Long Island, but Eureka Channel, E of Barrier Islands, is some-
inlets                                                             times used by vessels with local knowledge From Cordova Bay
 (62)  Arena Cove is a small open bight in the S shore of Sue-    and Hetta Inlet, Tlevak Strait and Sukkwan Strait extend NW and
mez Island W of Lontana Point, the S extremity of the island It    afford passage through channels to Bucareh Bay Small craft ply
has depths of about 17 fathoms near the entrance, shoaling to    from Ketchikan to Cordova Bay, Hetta Inlet and other points on
about 4 fathoms near the head                                      the W coast of Pnnce of Wales Island
 (63)  Diver Islands, off the E shore of Meares Passage are         (73)  Currents -In Cordova Bay and adjacent waters the flood
prominent in the approach from seaward The W island is wooded,    current sets N and the ebb current S The estimated velocity of the
the E island has a lone tree on its summit The passage E of the    current is 1 to 2 knots the stronger velocity occurs m the narrows
islands Is narrow, and its shores are marked by heavy kelp Most    (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions in Cordova
small craft coming from the S use this passage when the weather    Bay)
permits
 (64)  Diver Islands Light (55ï¿½10 7'N  133015 9'W), 130 feet        (74)  Chart 17409 -The W side of the entrance to Cordova Bay
above the water and shown from a small house with a red and    from Cape Muzon to Natoma Point (54ï¿½52 3'N, 132ï¿½37 4'W) is
white diamond-shaped daymark on the NW side of the island,    comparatively clear
marks the SW entrance to Meares Passage                             (75)  Off the E end of Cape Muzon are a group of small islands
 (65)  Diver Rocks, two in number and bare at half tide, are    and rocks On the main shore is a sandy beach where landings can
about 0 2 mile W of the island A 21/-fathom shoal, marked with    be made in good weather This area was occupied by the Halda
kelp, is 200 yards W of them                                       Tnbe (a Native Amencan tribe) at the time they migrated N from
 (66)  Diver Bay, on the SE side of Meares Passage at its    Bntish Columbia and Puget Sound territory Only a few graves
entrance, extends SE from Diver Islands The bay is clear except    now mark the site of their village of Kaigamr Rather severe tide
for a kelp marked rock, with /2 fathom over it, that is 650 yards    rips are experienced off the cape Along the S shore of the cape,
from the N shore about m midchannel Small craft can find excel-    close in, are several large rocks The shoreline in this section is
lent anchorage m the Hole m The Wall, an indentation in the N      rocky, precipitous, and marked by light-colored cliffs Breakers
shore, the entrance is narrow, but has a least depth of 41/4 fathoms  are about 0 2 mile off the S shore of the cape Vessels in passing
Pass either side of the l/-fathom rock in entenng                  should give the cape a berth of at least 1 rmle
 (67)  Bobs Bay, NE of Diver Islands is an irregularly shaped       (76)  Local magnetic disturbance -Differences of as much as
bay obstructed by a chain of reefs and islands The bay is divided    40 from normal vanation have been observed at Cape Muzon
mto three arms The northernmost arm is deep and clear and the        (77)  The N side of Cape Muzon trends NW for about 2 5 miles,
middle arm is foul and not navigable except by small boats The    forming the S side of McLeod Bay Temporary anchorage in 5 to
easternmost arm affords good anchorage for moderate sized craft    9 fathoms, exposed to all E winds, may be had m this bay, about
m 6 to 10 fathoms soft bottom Enter Bobs Bay 0 2 mile or more    0 5 mile NW of a green landslide The chart and the lead are the
S of the largest outer island, and follow the E side of the island at a    best guides, as landslides frequently occur, and there are several
distance of about 250 yards Pass in midchannel S of the high    landslides besides the one mentioned At the head of the bay is a
island off the entrance to the E arm                               small stream of freshwater and a sand and gravel beach for about
 (68)  Millar Rocks, a group of bare rocks surrounded by sub-    200 yards Little Daykoo Harbor, a small-boat harbor is close N
merged and rocks awashed are about 1 mile N of Diver Islands       of McLeod Bay
The passage N of the rocks is foul to the Suemez Island shore,      (78)  Daykoo Islands and Datzkoo Islands extend 2 miles in a
although there are deep passages between In heavy weather the    N direction from McLeod Bay, with a maximum distance of about
entire area appears to be covered with breakers                    1 mile offshore
 (69)  In the N part of Meares Passage, about on a line from        (79)  Long Island forms the W side of Cordova Bay for a dis-
Eagle Point to the summit of Ridge Island, at a distance from    tance of about 12 miles The E shore of the island is rugged and
Eagle Point of about 0 6 mile to 1 5 miles, there are several rocky    broken with a number of outlying islets and rocks within a dis-
kelp-marked patches with deep water between all should be    tance of about 0 5 mile There are also a number of mdentations
avoided                                                            and some anchorages
 (70)  Currents -The tidal currents in Meares Passage set NE on     (80)  A shoal area that ends in a submerged rock with 1 /4 fath-
the flood and SW on the ebb The estimated velocity of the current    oms over it and marked by kelp extends for 0 5 mile off the S
is about 1 to 1 8 knots S of Meares Island the flood sets E and the    point (54ï¿½45 1'N, 132ï¿½38 0'W ) of Long Island This point is
ebb W with an average velocity of 2 1 knots (See the Tidal Cur-    marked by a very prominent landslide about 0 3 mile mshore The
rent Tables for dally predictions for places in Meares Passage )   points at the S and SE parts of the island should be given a berth of
                                                                   not less than 0 8 mile
 (71)  Chart 17400 -Cordova Bay has its entrance on the NW          (81)  South Rocks, about 0 3 mile off the SE point of Long
side of Dixon Entrance between Cape Muzon (54ï¿½39 9'N,    Island, consist of two large rocks, 28 and 29 feet high, and several
132041 4'W) and Point Marsh and extends about 19 miles in a N      smaller rocks
direction from between Dewey Rocks and the SE end of Long            (82)  Coning Inlet is on the E side of Long Island about 4 5
Island The bay has a clear channel about 3 miles wide between    miles from the S end It is open to E and does not afford good
Barner Islands and Long Island, and an average width of about 3    anchorage A lagoon is at the head of the inlet, where it is con-
rmles from Ship Islands to Lime Point From the head of Cordova    nected by saltwater rapids
Bay at Lrne Point, Hetta Inlet extends in a general N direction for  (83)  Nma Cove, on the S side of Coning Inlet at the entrance,
about 15 miles to Gould Island                                     affords secure anchorage for small craft m 3 to 4 fathoms sticky





130                                     6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


bottom The anchorage is about 200 yards m extent and is S of the    two passages Rocky Pass and Kelp Passage, continuing E and
small islet in the center of the cove at its head                W, espectively of Middle Island, are useful only to small craft It
  (84)  Coning Point, the N point at the entrance to Comng Inlet    is possible to carry 2 fathoms of water through the W passage and
is low and wooded A conspicuous black rock 40 feet high is about    7 fathoms through the E
0 3 mule off the point                                             (95)  Mexico Point, at the SE end of Eureka Channel about 3
  (85)  Natoma Bay, on the E side of Long Island about 6 miles    miles NW of Point Marsh is the W extrermty of an island bluff
from its S end, is about 1 rmle m diameter and open to E and SE  and wooded, with several high rocky islets that extend about 0 1 to
Partially protected anchorage can be had m the N part of the bay in    0 5 mile off it The area along the S and SE sides of the island is
11 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom The entrance is on either side of    very foul, and there are numerous shoals rocks, and islets between
the two wooded islets m the middle of the entrance A 51/4 fathom    Mexico Point and Point Marsh Thompson Passage, used exten-
shoal is about 0 6 mile NW of the islets The shores of the bay are    slvely by fishing craft extends between the islands from 1 2 to 1 5
foul and should be given a good berth                            miles N and NE of Mexico Point Although 8 fathoms can be car-
 (86)  Natoma Point, low and wooded is the N point at the    ned through it this passage is not suitable for large vessels Small
entrance to Natoma Bay A large wooded, high-water islet is close    vessels using it frequently continue through the narrow passage
off the point to S Give the E side of the point and islet a berth of    off the mouth of Minnie Bay behind Point Marsh where 2 fathoms
about 0 3 rmle                                                   can be carried
                                                                    (96)  Hessa Inlet, NE of Mexico Point is about 3 5 miles long
 (87)  Chart 17433 -The E side of the entrance to Cordova Bay,    and has depths up to 32 fathoms The best approach to the inlet is
from Point Marsh (54043 2'N  132ï¿½19 1'W) to Shipwreck Point    through the passage N of Hessa Island, but it can be approached
(54ï¿½53 8'N, 132ï¿½29 5'W ), is very broken and abounds with    from the S via Buschmann Pass, only small craft with local
islands, reefs, shoals and pinnacles m random pattern The chan-    knowledge should attempt this pass which is narrow and full of
nels between the islands for the most part are deep with steep    rocks In Hessa Narrows the tidal currents attain a reported veloc-
sides but are often obstructed by shoals Currents and eddies about    ity of 6 to 7 knots
the islands, large tides, and exposure to ocean swells make the    (97)  Eureka Channel, between Barrier Islands and Prinnce of
running of straight courses difficult                            Wales Island, affords a short cut to Klakas Inlet and is sutable for
 (88)  Small fishing vessels bound between Point Marsh and    moderate-sized craft with local knowledge, large vessels should
Eureka Channel frequently pass through Minnie Cutoff, then run    use the passage W  of Dewey Rocks and Barrier Islands The
between the reefs close inshore along the SW coast of Prinnce of    depths in Eureka Channel are good but it is narrow and has sev-
Wales Island, and thence through Thompson Passage to Eureka    eral dangers that are generally marked by kelp in summer
Channel Local knowledge is necessary The area has few pro-         (98)  Far Point, on the W side of Eureka Channel and at the SE
tected anchorages for large vessels                              extremity of Barrier Islands, is about 1 4 miles NNW of Mexico
 (89)  Round Islands Light (54046 7'N, 132030 4'W) 56 feet    Point Eureka Channel Daybeacon 1 is on the S end of the small
above the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    island about 0 4 rmle NE of Far Point
white diamond-shaped daymark on the SW side of the western-       (99)  Center Island is a small round island with a few trees
most of the Round Islands, marks the E approach to Cordova Bay   about 1 6 rmles NNE of Far Point and 0 4 mule SSW of Leading
 (90)  Round Islands, about 7 miles NW of Point Marsh, consist    Point It is fairly steep-to on all sides and can be approached
of four small wooded islands about 140 feet high A dangerous    closely A rock, awash at high water and marked by Center Island
rocky reef that uncovers 6 feet is about 500 yards WSW of Round    Reef Daybeacon 3 is 350 yards W of Center Island
Islands Light Between the reef and the island are other rocks      (1oo) About 0 6 mule N of Leadmg Point is the narrowest part of
awash and kelp patches, this area should be avoided              Eureka Channel The Narrows has a least width of 125 yards
 (91)  Dewey Rocks, about 1 8 miles SSE of Round Islands    Good depths are found through The Narrows except for narrow
Light, are small in extent, and consist of one large rock and several    ledges close to the W shore About 480 yards N of the N end of
smaller ones that uncover at various stages of the tide A red sector    The Narrows is a submerged rock that is awash at extreme low
in Round Islands Light from 327ï¿½ to 3460 covers Dewey Rocks      tides
 (92)  Egg Rock, 20 feet high and bare, is about 0 5 mile N of    (lot) Guide Rocks, gray and marked by a daybeacon are about
Round Islands with extensive areas of kelp between A wooded    0 5 mile NNE of the N end of The Narrows and are conspicuous
islet 60 feet high, is about 1 mile N of Egg Rock Rocks awash are    except at high water, when coming through The Narrows
about midway between the wooded islet and Egg Rock Some            (102)  Currents Tidal currents through The Narrows have an
fishing vessels use Egg Passage, about 0 5 mile E of Egg Rock    estimated velocity of from 1 to 2 knots The flood sets N and the
and Round Islands, this passage is not recommended for strangers  ebb S
 (93)  Boat Rocks, two in number and bare, are about 2 5 miles    (103) Routes, Eureka Channel -From a point 670 yards W of
N of Round Islands, and are the northwesternmost dangers of this    the rocky islets off Mexico Point, a course of 002ï¿½ will keep in the
group E of a line from Round Islands to Boat Rocks are numerous    deepest channels and clear all dangers in the S part of Eureka
dangers                                                          Channel Center Island Reef Daybeacon 3 is on the leading bear-
 (94)  Barrier Islands are an extensive group of wooded islands    ing on this course It is almost on range with the E tangent of the
between 4 and 8 miles NW of Point Marsh, and E of Round    second group of islands W  of The Narrows The 002ï¿½ course
Islands Black Rock, 20 feet high and the southernmost large off-    passes 345 yards E of Eureka Channel Daybeacon 1 and if made
shore rock of the Bamer Island group is a conspicuous black rock    good keeps well clear of a submerged rock with a least depth of 3
near the SE edge of a foul area containing numerous rocks awash  feet that is about 0 7 mule NNE of Eureka Channel Daybeacon 1
A li/2-fathom shoal is approximately 0 7 mile SSE of Black Rock  When Center Island Daybeacon 3 is distant 440 yards and the W
Approach courses to seldom-used channels through the Barrier    bank of The Narrows is slightly open change course to 0220 and
Islands pass about 0 5 mile both E and W of Black Rock These    pass about midchannel between Center Island Reef Daybeacon 3






                                         6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                               131


and Center Island, slightly favoring the daybeacon, but keeping      (113)  Chart 17431 -Klakas Inletjoins Cordova Bay W of the
clear of the kelp bed that is NE of the daybeacon When Guide    entrance to Hunter Bay The inlet is about 1 mile wide, 12 miles
Rocks Daybeacon 4 shows in the middle of The Narrows, change    long, and 20 to 100 fathoms deep in midchannel Max Cove
course to 0320, which is a leading bearing on that daybeacon       (54ï¿½57 4'N, 132ï¿½24 3'W), about 2 5 miles above the entrance on
Continue on this course until the N tangent of the nearest island    the E side, offers good anchorage for small craft near the SE end
bears 275ï¿½ then change course to 3500 for Klakas Inlet and    in 8 fathoms, mud bottom The main entrance to Klakas Inlet is E
Hunter Bay Avoid the submerged rock that is 205 yards NE of the    of Klakas Island, the deepest water favors the W  side of the
N point of the island that forms the W side of The Narrows This    entrance Local fishermen frequently use Ruth Cutoff, the narrow
rock is awash at extreme low tides Small fishing vessels also fre-    pass N of Klakas Island that has a controlling depth of 13/4 fathoms
quently use the channel that leads to the NNW from a point about    and extends from Ruth Bay to Klakas Inlet
0 3 mile S of Center Island Reef Daybeacon 3 An extensive shoal     (114) Good anchorage in a depth of about 16 fathoms can be
area in this channel is 0 7 mile NW of the daybeacon where the    found E of a small wooded island about 1 5 miles ENE of the N
best water is near the W shore                                     end of Klakas Island A rock that uncovers 3 feet is about 0 2 mile
 (104) Wallace Rock, with 1/2 fathom over it and marked on its    SW of the small island
NW side by a buoy is about 2 3 miles NE of Boat Rocks Vessels       (115) Bird Rocks, about 1 3 miles SW of Klakas Island, have a
going to Hunter Bay usually pass well N of it                      gray appearance with a rounded white pinnacle that forms the
 (io0) Tah Bay, NE of Guide Rocks, has depths up to 37 fath-    highest point
oms Several rocks and reefs bare near the center of the bay The      (116) Shipwreck Point (54ï¿½53 8' N, 132ï¿½29 5'W), 2 5 miles W
best entrance is to the N of Tah Island the entrance S of that    of Klakas Island, is low and timbered, and rises to a knob 605 feet
island is partly obstructed by a rock with 1 fathom of water over it    high Barbara Rock, a low rocky islet, is about 300 yards off the
No good anchorages are available, although small craft can anchor    point An island, about 160 feet high, is close-to and W from this
near the beach at the S part of the bay                            point
 (106) Local magnetic disturbance -Differences of as much as        (117)  Ship Islands, 50 to 120 feet high, with outlying rocks and
40 from the normal variation have been observed S of Tah Island    ledges, are about 0 5 mile offshore, W of Shipwreck Point Small
in the vicimty of Anchor Island                                    craft from Turn Point pass N of Bird Rocks and between Ship-
 (107) Turn Island (54052 2'N  132023 6'W) is about 3 miles N      wreck Pomt and the island close-to The narrow channel has a sub-
of the N end of Eureka Channel and is the easternmost of a num-    merged rock The pass to the W  of the inner island Is preferable,
ber of small islands It is bare except for a small stunted growth of    avoid the rock i the middle of the entr
trees that gives It the appearance of a building It is bold-to on the  (    Kassanlet, just N ofthenorthernmostoftheShp Island
                                                                   group, has an entrance about 0 8 mile wide Good anchorage for
W  side but foul ground extends about 0 2 mule NNE and about
180 yards E A dangerous rock awash is close SSW of the island      small craft is available at Clam Cove and several places i the
                                                                   upper reaches A mooring buoy is about in the middle of the
 (108) Tuarn Point, marked by an abandoned light structure, Is entrance to Clam Cove
1 2 miles ENE of Turn Island and consists of a number of small,t Webster, about 6 miles NW of Shpwreck Po
low grassy rocks It is at the extremity of a low peninsula that is                       eof
                                                    wodefr  a  ta small projection where the E shore of Cordova Bay changes
                                                                   direction Near the point are a number of outlying rocks and reefs,
 (109) Hunter Bay makes m for a distance of about 2 5 miles E    and this shore should be given a berth of 0 5 mile
of Turn Point The entrance to the bay is obstructed on its N side   (120) Elbow Bay (54054 5'N, 132ï¿½39 4'W), on the W  side of
by a number of islets but the channel close around Turn Pomit Is    Cordova Bay, indents the NE side of Long Island and Is partially
comparatively clear About 1 mile above the entrance, the bay    protected by two wooded Islands connected at low water m the
contracts to a width of 275 yards, with a large bare rock in the    entrance Good anchorage for small vessels can be had m the SE
middle The best channel is between this rock and a rock awash    arm in 13 fathoms, mud bottom The anchorage is about 250 yards
about 200 yards N of it About 0 4 mile E of the bare rock is an    wide A large lagoon extends S from the W  end of the bay, where
arm leading NNE about 1 mile to Biscuit Lagoon Passage ito    It is connected by a narrow rocky channel Rapids make this chan-
this lagoon is through a narrow pass that is partially obstructed by    nel Impassable except at high water
several rocks Small craft of 3-foot draft can clear these rocks at   (121) To enter Elbow Bay, pass m mudchannel SE of the wooded
high water Tidal currents are strong, and passage should be    islets m the entrance and avoid the reefs making off to S of the
attempted only on the high-water slack                             islets The submerged rock m the middle of the bay can be passed
  (io) The Saltchuck Is the Chmook Jargon name for the brack-    on either side, the W side has the best water
ish lagoon to the NW of the upper end of Biscuit Lagoon The two      (122) Dova Bay, on the N side of Long Island about 2 miles
are connected but the passage is too shallow for navigation other    NW of Elbow Bay, appears to be well protected at its head, but
than by small skiffs                                               because of the configuration of the surrounding hills, SE and NW
  (Oil) Hunter Bay has good anchorage about 1 8 miles E from    winds draw across It with considerable force The shores are lined
the entrance in 10 to 15 fathoms The anchorage, however is sub-    with small islets and rocks
ject to strong willhwaws with wmds from the E meeting those of       (123) Tlevak Strait, described later in this chapter has its
equal force from the W  Velocities up to 78 2 knots have been    entrance on the W shore of Cordova Bay between Long Island and
experienced here Nearby off the S shore of the bay, is an islet sur-    Jackson Island
rounded by a flat of considerable extent About 0 4 mile beyond       (124) Shoe Rock (54056 9'N  132044 1'W), about 15 feet high,
the anchorage the bay contracts and is foul                        is about 160 yards NNE of the most easterly island of a group of
  (112)  Klinkwan Cove, E of Gusdagane Point (54ï¿½53 1'N,            small islands at the junction of Tlevak Strait and Cordova Bay
132ï¿½21 4'W), should be avoided as It contains many rocks Grave       (125) Jackson Island, about 1 8 mile N of Shoe Rock and close
Point is about 0 8 mile NW of Gusdagane Pomt                       SE of the S end of Sukkwan Island, has prominent cliffs on its S





132                                      6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


side About 300 yards SW of these cliffs are two dangerous rocks    merged and awash, between A submerged rock and a 4-fathom
that bare only on munus tides The channel between Jackson and    spot are 0 1 mile SW and 0 2 mile S, respectively from the south-
Lacey Islands, to the E is partially obstructed by Triplet Rocks   ernmost of the three bare rocks
The most prominent rock of this group uncovers 10 feet Jackson       (135) Mud Bay, the small cove about 2 miles N of Lime Point
Passage, the channel W of Jackson Island, is clear m midchannel    on the E shore of Hetta Inlet, is used extensively for anchorage
 (126) Lacey Island, about 0 9 rmle E of the SE end of Jackson    during the fishing season The anchorage has a depth of 4 to 10
Island, comprises three small wooded knolls close together and    fathoms with mud bottom A 1l/4-fathom rock is 100 yards N of
joined by the bare spits Foul ground extends up to 0 2 mile from    the islet on the S side of Mud Bay
the island                                                           (136) Alder Cove, the small cove 1 rmle N of Mud Bay, is used
 (127) Mellen Rock is a bare rock about 0 8 mule off the W shore    by small craft for anchorage in 4 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom dunng
of Cordova Bay and about 3 miles to the NE of Jackson Island       the fishing season The cove has no known dangers
Mellen Rock Light (55ï¿½01 6'N, 132040 0'W), 32 feet above the
water is shown from a pole with a red and white diamond-shaped       (137)  Eek Inlet, on the W side of Hetta Inlet, about 0 6 mile N
daymark on the rock                                                of Eek Point (55ï¿½08 4'N, 132ï¿½39 9'W) which Is marked by a
                                                                  light, may be used by fishermen with local knowledge A mid-
 (128) Hasslah Inlet, on the E shore of Cordova Bay, about 3    channel course leads to an anchorage in 8 fathoms, midway in the
miles ESE of Mellen Rock Light, is about 2 rmles long to the head    inlet about 0 3 mile NW of the narrow entrance
of its NE and E arms, the latter is a landlocked anchorage known     (138) Hetta Point, on the E side of Hetta Inlet about 3 2 miles
as Mabel Bay Mabel Island, on the S side of the entrance, is    NE of Eek Point, is bold, rocky, and heavily wooded The bight
wooded a low place in the center gives the appearance of two    about 0 8 mile S of the point in which are two wooded islets,
islands Helen Island, at the entrance to S arm and Mabel Bay is    affords temporary anchorage The cove E of the point affords
low and wooded and has rocky beaches on the N and W  shores    anchorage for small craft having local knowledge of the area The
and sandy beaches on the E and S shores                            cove has numerous reefs and shoal soundings
 (129) To enter Mabel Bay pass N and E of Mabel Island, giving      (139) Copper Harbor, on the E shore, 2 4 miles NNW of Hetta
it a berth of 0 2 mile, and steer for the E end of Helen Island Fol-    Point, is about 1 mile long and 0 3 mile wide A midchannel
low a careful midchannel course, passing NE of Helen Island, and    course leads to the head of the harbor, where there is anchorage in
anchor about 0 3 mile from the islet at the head in 10 to 12 fath   10 to 20 fathoms Simmons Point is at the S entrance to Copper
oms                                                                Harbor
 (130) Nutkwa Inlet and Keete Inlet are at the head of Cordova      (140) Deer Bay, on the W  shore about 2 miles above Copper
Bay E of Lime Point Nutkwa Inlet about 4 5 miles N of Point    Harbor, affords good anchorage in 5 to 16 fathoms, the midchan-
Webster is 1 5 miles wide at the entrance and extends about 5    nel course is clear A flat extends 0 3 mile from its head
miles NNE Depths range from 90 fathoms at the entrance to 10         (141) Jumbo Island, in the middle of the inlet about 2 5 miles
fathoms at the head with several shoals of 4 to 6 fathoms in    above Copper Harbor, is wooded The channels on either side are
between Nutkwa Point is the promontory between the two bays        about 300 yards wide, but the better channel is E of the island The
 (131) Nutkwa Lagoon is a narrow body of water about 3 5    W  channel should be attempted only at high water, as there is a
miles long with mudchannel depths of from 40 fathoms at the SW     rock with 1 fathom over it in midchannel at the entrance
end to 20 fathoms at the NE part Nutkwa Falls, at the head of        (142) Dell Island, about 1 1 rmles above Jumbo Island and close
Nutkwa Inlet, obstructs passage into the lagoon, on the higher    to the E shore is wooded Anchorage can be had m 14 to 16 fath-
water slacks drafts of 3 or 4 feet can be carried into the lagoon,    oms about 250 yards off the N shore of the inlet about 1 4 miles
but this passage should not be attempted without local knowledge   NE of Dell Island
 (132) Keete Inlet has its entrance about 2 5 miles E of Lime       (143) Gould Island practically closes the inlet for a distance of
Point The inlet has depths of more than 10 fathoms throughout,    about 1 4 miles Gould Passage, S of the island runs dry at about
except for several scattered shoal spots with depths of 4 to 8 fath  half tide and should not be attempted at any stage of the tide as a
oms Local fishermen bound from Cordova Bay to Keete Inlet    through passage into Portage Bay because of tidal currents and
usually pass S of Keete Island, about 0 8 mile W of Keete Point,    numerous rocks and dangers at the E end of the passage Sulzer
the S point of the entrance to the inlet A shoal with a least depth    Passage, N of the island, is navigable for small craft, but foul for 1
of 3 feet extends N about 0 5 mile from the N end of Keete Island  mile above the entrance, and the tidal currents have considerable
Inside the bay, a rock that uncovers 5 feet is about 1 1 miles E of    velocity It should be navigated only by those having thorough
Keete Point Good anchorage in 20 fathoms, mud bottom can be    local knowledge
had S of the small island at the bend in the inlet                   (144) Local magnetic disturbance Differences of as much as
 (133) Hetta Inlet extends 5 miles N from Lime Point to the    6ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed on Gould Island
entrance of Sukkwan Strait and is about 2 miles wide Then it         (145) Portage Bay, that part of the inlet above Gould Island, is
trends in a general NNW direction for 11 miles to Gould Island     about 1 5 miles long, with depths of 9 to 27 fathoms A trail leads
above which it is navigable for small craft only Above Sukkwan    from its head to the head of Cholmondeley Sound about 2 8
Strait, the width of the inlet decreases gradually from 1 2 miles to    miles
0 4 mile or less in places there are apparently no outlying dangers  (146)  Sukkwan Strait has its SE entrance between Eek Point
Considerable fishing for salmon is done m the inlet in season and    on the NE and Round Point, the E extremity of Blanket Island, on
boats may be found in all of its parts                             the SW  Eek Point Light (55ï¿½08 3'N, 132ï¿½40 O'W) 19 feet
 (134) Lime Point is the dividing point between Cordova Bay        above the water is shown from a square frame structure with a red
and Hetta and Nutkwa Inlets The tip of the point is marked by a    and white diamond-shaped daymark on Eek Point The strait
white marble formation that is conspicuous from S Three bare    extends 7 miles NW from Hetta Inlet to Sukkwan Narrows It has
rocks are about 0 2 mile S of the point with other rocks sub-    good depths and few dangers and is entered by vessels of consld-







                                         6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                               133


erable size as far as the village of Hydaburg. Saltery Point, 5.2    able for medium-sized vessels in 16 fathoms, mud bottom, in the
miles above the entrance.                                          bight on the same side of South Pass 1.5 miles from the narrows.
                                                                     (158) Lone Tree Island (Lone Spruce Rock), on the S side of
 (147) Chart 17407.-Sukkwan Narrows has a least depth of 21/4    the SW entrance to South Pass, is about 0.2 mile W of a 75-foot
fathoms in a narrow channel with rocky shoals on both sides. The    island. It is a low, grass-covered islet. A rock with two knobs is
average maximum current is about 1.3 knots and sets NW with the    close-to, to the W. A 1 /2-fathom spot is about 300 yards W of the
flood and SE with the ebb. The channel is buoyed, and its W        rock.
entrance is marked by Sukkwan Narrows Light (55ï¿½12.1'N.,            (159)  Goat Island Light (55010.1'N., 132ï¿½53.6'W.), 21 feet
132050.5'W.), 16 feet above the water and shown from a skeleton    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a triangular
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the N end    red daymark on Whisker Point, the S extremity of Goat Island.
of Sukkwan Island.                                                 The light marks the N side of the SW entrance to South Pass.
 (148) Hydaburg is an incorporated Native American village on       (160) Turn Rock, about 5 feet high and 20 yards in diameter,
the NE shore of Sukkwan Narrows. The village has an airport, a    and marked by a daybeacon, is about 0.8 mile W of the light.
post office, school, and church.                                     (161) North Pass, on the N side of Goat Island, is navigable by
 (149)  Caution.-Vessels drawing 15 feet or more when              shallow draft vessels at high-water slack with local knowledge.
approaching or leaving Hydaburg Cooperative Pier should avoid    Numerous rocks and reefs must be passed close aboard until clear
the submerged ledge that makes out into the channel from the    of North Pass to the W. Tidal currents are estimated at 3 to 4 knots.
point close E of pier. The ledge extends about 290 yards S of the    Surveys indicate a least depth of l2 fathom at the shoalest point of
pier and has a depth of 16 feet at its outermost end. A pinnacle    the pass.
rock at a depth of 21/4 fathoms is about 350 yards SW of the pier; it  (162) Natzuhini Bay, N of Hydaburg and Sukkwan Narrows, is
is marked by a buoy.                                               navigable for large fishing vessels. However, strangers should not
 (150) Wharves.-Hydaburg has one pier at the SE end of the vil-    attempt it because of the many reefs and shoals in it and the lack
lage, and small-craft facilities in the basin, at the NW end of vil-    of aids to navigation.
lage, and alongside the pier.
 (151)  Hydaburg Cooperative Pier (55012'08"N., 13249'24"W):        (163)  Chart 17400.-Kaigani Strait (54044.4'N., 132ï¿½40.2'W.)
      ,              . Hydaburg~ooperative~ier(55'12'08"N. ,132'49'24"W: * is the passage that extends from Cordova Bay to Tlevak Strait and
at the SE end of the village; berthing for larger vessels are at the   e passage that extends from Cordova Bay to Tlevak Strait and
outer end of this T-shaped pier; 2,300 square feet of warehouse    separates Long Island, and the group of islands NW of it, from
   st;gasoline and othsadiesel fuel can be obtained at the pe      Dall Island. Howkan Narrows, immediately N, is the narrow part
storage space;                                             pier    of the passage from American Bay to above Channel Islands; it is
during the summer.                                                 endangered by several unmarked shoals and reefs. Ships from
 (152)  Small-craft facilities.-Small-craft berthing is alongside    Dixon Entrance, bound through Tlevak Strait, should preferably
Hydaburg Cooperative Pier. In 1976, depths of 7 feet were    use the broad channel through Cordova Bay E of Long Island and
reported alongside.                                                enter Tlevak Strait between Long and Jackson Islands.
 (153) A small-craft basin is about 0.5 mile N of the Hydaburg      (164) S of American Bay, the strait is clear of dangers along a
pier. The State-operated floats in the basin provide about 65 ber-    midchannel course and may be navigated easily with the aid of the
thing spaces. In 1976, depths of 12 to 15 feet were reported along-    chart. N of American Bay the channel is tortuous, narrow, and
side. Water and electricity are available at the floats. A         complicated by strong currents; in the absence of aids to naviga-
harbormaster assigns berthing. A 100-foot by 39-foot grid is   tion, it is not recommended for use by large vessels.
inshore of the floats.                                               (165) The channel through Howkan Narrows opposite the
 (154)  Communications.-A supply boat makes weekly trips to    deserted village of Howkan is about 250 yards wide and is
Hydaburg. Scheduled commercial air travel is available at Hyd-    between a reef off Howkan, which uncovers 5 feet, and a reef off
aburg airport. Daily seaplane communication is maintained with    the W shore that has a depth of /2 fathom. The currents are strong
Ketchikan and with other cities on Prince of Wales Island. Hyd-    here and have an estimated velocity of about 3 knots. Strong
aburg has road connection with Craig. Telephone and radiotele-    winds greatly affect them. N of Howkan, the channel leads W of
phone communications are maintained with other States and parts    the Channel Islands, and extreme caution is necessary to avoid the
of Alaska.                                                         dangerous shoals on each side of the channel. After passing Keg
 (155) Above Sukkwan Narrows, Sukkwan Strait divides into    Point (54ï¿½53.8'N., 132ï¿½51.2'W.), shape the course as desired and
two parts known as South Pass and North Pass.                      be guided by the chart.
 (156) South Pass extends about 3.5 miles SW from Sukkwan
Narrows to Tlevak Strait. It has good depths in the middle of a      (166) Chart 17409.-The SE entrance to Kaigani Strait is about
channel that has many turns between islands, islets, and rocks.    1.8 miles wide between Kaigani Point on the NE and Datzkoo
 (157)  Scrag Islands, two wooded islands about 75 feet high, are    Islands on the SW. It is clear except for the 1 /4-fathom shoal 1
on the E side of South Pass about 1.2 miles to the SW of The Nar-    mile SE of Kaigani Point and the 3/4-fathom rock about 0.5 mile E
rows and are separated from Sukkwan Island only at high water. A   of the Datzkoo Islands.
reef with two bare rocks extends about 100 yards from Scrag          (167) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
Islands into the pass; it is marked by a buoy and kelp. A reef, with    30 from normal variations have been observed in the Daykoo
1/4 fathoms over it and marked by a buoy and kelp, is about 0.3    Islands, and 4ï¿½ in Kaigani Strait 1.2 miles NW of Kaigani Point.
mile N of Scrag Islands. A kelp patch marks a 1-fathom shoal         (168) Kaigani Point, at the SW end of Long Island, is low and
about 600 yards to the NNE of Scrag Islands. Depths of 5 to 9    wooded. A large rock, 18 feet high, is 0.7 mile NW of Kaigani
fathoms are found around this shoal. Small craft can find good    Point and about 0.2 mile offshore.
anchorage in South Pass in the small bay on the SE side, about 2.4  (169) Datzkoo Harbor is on the E side of Dall Island about 1.6
miles SSW of Sukkwan Narrows. Good anchorage also is avail-    miles NW of the Datzkoo Islands. The entrance is clear and is N of






134                                      6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


two wooded islands. Anchorage can be had in 15 to 20 fathoms,    used by small craft going to and from Mission Cove, but is narrow
soft bottom. A wooded islet, about 20 feet high, is visible in the    in places between kelp patches.
mudflats at the head of the harbor.                                  (180) Ham Cove, on the W  side of Kaigani Strait, about 0.8
 (170) South Kaigani Harbor, immediately N of Datzkoo Har-    mile W of Channel Islands, has a very narrow entrance and can be
bor, is constricted at the entrance by reefs on the N side and a rock    entered only by small craft.
that uncovers 5 feet on the S side. The channel about 100 yards      (l81) Pond Rock, which uncovers 4 feet and marked by kelp, is
wide has a depth of 41/2 fathoms. During the fishing season a fish-    0.5 mile NW of the W end of Channel Islands and 0.5 mile ENE
buying scow may be anchored in the harbor. The scow sells gaso-    of the entrance to Ham Cove. West.Mill Rock is the easternmost
line, diesel fuel, water, provisions and fishing supplies. In 1968, it   of two islets close to shore about 1 mile NW of Channel Islands.
was reported that anchorage for small craft was available in depths    Two rocks, which uncover 1 foot, and a grassy islet from which a
of about 5 fathoms, mud bottom, in the cove on the S side of the    reef makes off about 0.2 mile, are 0.3 mile ENE and 0.4 mile,
harbor about 0.7 mile above the entrance. In 1971, submerged pil-    NNW, respectively, of West Mill Rock. Kelp extends about 200
ings were reported in about the middle of the cove; caution is    yards off the SW side of the large island close W  to the NW
advised.                                                           extremity of Long Island.
 (171) North Kaigani Harbor, immediately N of South Kaigani         (182) From the NW end of Long Island, a group of islands and
Harbor, is entirely exposed to SE weather and the ocean swell, and    rocks extend about 5 miles NNW, two of the larger ones being
is of no use as an anchorage.                                      Aston Island and Grand Island. A smalltimbered islet, 50 feet
 (172)  The small bight about 0.8 mile N of North Kaigani Harbor    high, is about 0.9 mile NW from Grand Island; to the W  of this
has an entrance difficult even for small vessels. Good anchorage    islet, about 0.3 mile, is a cluster of rocks about 15 feet high. A 1-
may be had here in 5 to 10 fathoms. Very small vessels may    fathom spot, with a 3-fathom spot close to the N, is 0.4 mile W of
anchor near the head in about 31/2 fathoms.                        these rocks.
 (173) Pond Bay is on the SW side of Kaigani Strait about 3.5       (183) Square Island (54ï¿½58.2'N., 132ï¿½53.5'W.), so called from
miles N of North Kaigani Harbor. A wooded island is halfway    its appearance, is about 0.8 mile W  of Grand Island and is the
toward the head of the bay with a clear channel on the N side.    westernmost of a group of rocks and islets.
Anchorage may be had W of this island in desired depths up to 20     (184) Grace Harbor, about 3.5 miles NW of Channel Islands, is
fathoms, soft bottom. However, a strong wind blows up the bay in    on the W  side of Kaigani Strait, near its N end. When entering,
SE weather and, because of the danger from dragging, it is not rec-    give Luke Point (54ï¿½55.8'N., 132ï¿½53.7'W.), the N point at the
ommended for anchorage.                                            entrance, a berth of over 0:2 mile to avoid the rocks that extend SE
 (174) Bolles Inlet is a narrow inlet on the E side of Kaigani    from that point, and then stand in for the inner bay or basin in mid-
Strait about 6.5 miles N of Kaigani Point. The entrance is about    channel. Anchor near the middle of the basin in 10 to 16 fathoms,
0.5 mile NNE from a wooded islet 90 feet high. The entrance is    soft bottom, taking care to avoid a ledge that extends 150 yards
very narrow, and rapids occur here; the currents are estimated to    from the N shore. SW winds draw through a low divide from the
be at least 8 knots. It is reported that the inlet once had a logging    ocean.
camp and small craft used the entrance at high-water slack.          (185) Vesta Bay, 1.5 miles N of Grace Harbor, is entered
 (175) American Bay, on the W  side of Kaigani Strait opposite    between Luke Point on the S and Vesta Point on the N. The bay is
Bolles Inlet, is about 12 miles NNW of Cape Muzon. Good    about 1 mile long in a W direction and appears to be clear in mid-
anchorage may be had a little N of midchannel and about 400    channel. A 23/4-fathom spot is about 150 yards off the S shore of
yards WSW from the group of islands, known as Bay Islands,    the bay, 0.5 mile SW of Vesta Point. There is anchorage near the
which are on the N side of the entrance. Small craft may find good    head of the bay in 12 to 15 fathoms, soft bottom, with scant swing-
anchorage in 5 fathoms near the N shore in the cove just E of the    ing room. Bushy Island, small and wooded, is close to the head-
group of islands.                                                  land between Vesta Bay and Rose Inlet.
 (176) Mission Cove is a small bight on the E side of Kaigani       (l86) Rose Inlet, on the W  side of Kaigani Strait, is 1.5 miles
Strait about 1.4 miles NNE of American Bay. Small craft can    NW of Vesta Point and about 20 miles N of Cape Muzon (chart
anchor here in 6 to 8 fathoms, although there is considerable kelp    17409). Two groups of islands are in the entrance with the
in the cove. A submerged rock is close off the S shore just inside    entrance channel between. There are three patches of light-colored
the entrance.                                                      cliffs on the N point of the entrance. The larger and more southerly
 (177) Howkan Reef, bare at half tide and surrounded by kelp,    patch is roughly triangular in shape.
extends 400 yards SW from the shore S of the entrance to Mission     (187) A rock, awash at spring low water, is about 50 yards SE of
Cove; at the SE end of the reef is a small island with grave sites.    the prominent point on the N shore, about 1.6 miles WNW of
There is deep water close to the reef.                             Vesta Point. An unmarked ledge, about 300 yards long with a rock
 (178) The channel is 300 yards wide between Howkan Reef and    awash at lowest tides on its E end, is 0.7 mile W of the prominent
an extensive kelp patch about 600 yards in diameter on the W side    point on the N shore. Submerged pile ruins are 100 yards N of the
of Howkan Narrows. Mill Reef, between the kelp patch and the    ledge; caution is advised.
shore W of it, shows at high water. There is no safe channel
between the kelp patch and the W shore.                              (188)  Chart 17400.-Tlevak Strait and Tlevak Narrows sepa-
                                                                   rate Sukkwan Island and Prince of Wales Island from Dall Island
 (179)  Chart 17408.-Channel Islands (54ï¿½52.9'N.,                  and from the group of islands N of Long Island, and extend from
132ï¿½49.4'W.), near midchannel in Kaigani Strait and about 0.6    Cordova Bay to Ulloa Channel. From Cordova Bay, the main
mile NW of Mission Cove, are two wooded islands joined by a    channel of Tlevak Strait trends NW for about 10 miles to McFar-
bare spit. A rock, with a least depth of 21/4 fathoms, is in midchan-    land Islands and then NNW for about 14 miles to Tlevak Narrows;
nel, 550 yards S from the W end of these islands. The main chan-    the width of the strait is 1.2 to 4 miles. Islands are numerous, and
nel is SW of the islands. The channel NE of Channel Islands is    the shores are much indented.






                                          6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                                135


  (l89) The SE entrance to the strait, about 20 miles N of Cape       (200) Island Bay, the deep bight just N of Dunbar Inlet, affords
Muzon, is marked by Shoe Island Light (54ï¿½57.1'N.,    well-protected anchorage from all winds, except W, in depths of 6
132044.7'W.), 20 feet above the water and shown from a skeleton    to 7 fathoms, sticky to hard bottom. Swinging room is limited, and
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the NE         large vessels should anchor farther offshore in greater depths.
end of Shoe Island, about 0.7 mile off the N end of Long Island.      (201) Two miles N of Island Bay is a second bight with a small
  (190)  Currents.-The direction of maximum flood current (and    island to the NW. An indifferent anchorage is about 0.3 mile off-
ebb) varies considerably as one progresses through the 24-mile-    shore and 0.3 mile ESE from the S point of the island in depths of
long Tlevak Strait. Maximum average currents range from 1.5 to    8 to 12 fathoms, sticky bottom, but provides rather poor protec-
3.0 knots on the flood and 1.5 to 4.3 knots on the ebb; the strongest    tion. The entrance should only be attempted with local knowledge.
currents occurring in Tlevak Narrows. (See the Tidal Current          (202)  Profit Island (Gui Kangulas), 75 feet high, is a small
Tables for daily predictions for places in Tlevak Strait.)          prominent island, about midway between the McFarland Islands
 (191) Sukkwan Island is on the NE side of Tlevak Strait and    and Corlies Islands. A reef extends about 0.3 mile NNE from the
separated from Prince of Wales Island by Cordova Bay, Hetta    N end of the island.
Inlet, and Sukkwan Strait. It is mountainous, and its rugged coast-   (203) Baldy Bay is on the W  side of Tlevak Strait opposite the
line is indented by numerous inlets. The W shore of the island, just    McFarland Islands and is easily approached when coming from
outside of Dunbar Inlet and opposite the McFarland Islands, is    Cordova Bay. The entrance is between High Point and Reef Point.
very irregular and foul.                                            It has two large arms known as View Cove and Coco Harbor.
 (192) Lacey and Jackson Islands, on the N side of Tlevak Strait    High Point, bold and rounded, is the S point of the entrance to the
at the entrance from Cordova Bay, have been described previously    bay. Reef Islands are a large group of low wooded islands about
in this chapter.                                                    0.8 mile N of High Point. They are steep-to along the N shore.
 (193)  The group of islands, islets, and rocks that extend 5 miles    Reef Point, the N point of the entrance, is a long projecting point.
NW from the NW end of Long Island have been described with            (204)  View Cove Entrance Light (55003.2'N., 132ï¿½57.8'W.),
Kaigani Strait.                                                     35 feet above the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a
                                                                    red and white diamond-shaped daymark on a rock awash, is about
 (194)  Chart 17431.-Shoe Inlet (54ï¿½55.7'N., 132048.7'W.)           0.5 mile SE of Reef Point.
indents the NW part of Long Island, is about 2 miles long and 0.3     (205)  S of Reef Islands and just inside High Point is a small inlet
mile wide. The inlet is clear except near the shore. Anchorage for    with two arms at the head. The W arm is rather deep and clear, but
small vessels can be had near its head. Touchit Cove is a foul    the anchorage area is suitable only for small vessels; it is exposed
bight on the NE side of Shoe Inlet just within the entrance.        to williwaws. The E arm offers fairly good anchorage for small
 (195)  Cleva Bay, E of Shoe Inlet, is an open bight on the NW      vessels. The entrance is very narrow and partially obstructed by
end of Long Island and is of no importance as an anchorage.         rocks awash. Anchor in the center in 5 fathoms, sticky bottom. A
 (196)  Kasook Inlet makes into the S shore of Sukkwan Island 2     1/4-fathom spot is about 600 yards N of the entrance.
to 3 miles NW of Jackson Island and about 5 miles N of Shoe           (206)  Windy Cove, about 2 miles WNW of High Point, is nar-
Inlet. A cluster of small wooded islands with a good clear channel    row, clear, and deep. Its entrance is scarcely 100 yards wide with a
on either side are in the entrance. The inlet divides just inside the    depth of 1 fathom. Strong tidal currents prevail through this
islands. The NNW branch is about 1.8 miles long in a NNW direc-    entrance.
tion, and is midchannel course is clear, except at a point about      (207)  Coco Harbor is the W  arm of Baldy Bay. Entrance
midway of its length, where a ledge projects from the E side about    Island, off the entrance to the main reach, is a large island with a
half the distance across the inlet. On the NE side, at the head of the    constricted passage to the N and S. Off this island are numerous
inlet, good anchorage can be had in about 12 fathoms, soft bottom.    rocks and islets that must be avoided when entering Coco Harbor.
The other branch has a NE direction for about 0.8 mile to a bay    After these obstructions are passed, the channel is clear and deep,
from which a short arm extends SE. There is a good anchorage in    except close along the shores, to the head of the inlet.
about 10 fathoms, soft bottom, just inside the entrance to the short  (208)  Near the head of Coco Harbor are anchorage depths of 12
SE arm, favoring the S shore.                                       to 20 fathoms, soft bottom, but heavy williwaws prevail.
                                                                     (209) View Cove, the N arm of Baldy Bay, extends about 4.5
 (197)  Chart 17408.-McFarland Islands (55 04'N.,                   miles inside Reef Point and is practically free of obstruction. The
132ï¿½55'W.) are a group of large and small islands 3.5 miles in    shores are generally steep-to. There are some off-lying rocks
extent, on the E side of Tlevak Strait off the W coast of Sukkwan    about the S and E shores of Clam Island. About 0.8 mile from the
Island, about 5 miles NW of Kasook Inlet. The southernmost    head of the cove on the S shore is a small rather prominent island
island is bluff, high, and prominent. Among the islands are pas-    with foul ground between it and shore. A good anchorage, with
sages and fairly well-sheltered anchorages for small launches.      protection from all but W to NW winds, is about 0.25 mile from
 (198) Dunbar Inlet, E of McFarland Islands, has numerous           the head of the bay in 15 to 20 fathoms.
rocks and islets at the entrance, but a clear channel, about 0.2 mile  (210) Pile ruins of a wharf are on the N shore of View Cove
wide with least depths of 5 to 6 fathoms, leads to a protected    about 2 miles from Reef Point; caution is advised.
anchorage inside. Small craft can find good anchorage in the pas-     (211)  Clam Island is off the S shore of View Cove about 2.5
sage between Dunbar Inlet and Island Bay. A narrow passage N of    miles inside Reef Point and divides the head of View Cove into
the islands off the entrance to Dunbar Inlet may be used by small    two parts.
fishing vessels.                                                      (212) N of Clam Island an arm extends over 2 miles farther
 (199) When approaching from the S via Tlevak Strait, take care    inland; S of the island is a large circular bight about 0.8 mile in
to avoid the 3 l/4-fathom shoal a little W  of midchannel. between    diameter. E of Clam Island is a small cove offering fair anchorage
McFarland Islands and the W shore of Sukkwan Island.                for small boats.





136                                      6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


  (213) Green Inlet is a small narrow inlet on the S shore of View    rises to a knob 0 4 mnule from the beach that is separated by a very
Cove It offers good anchorage, with sticky bottom, for small    low saddle from a ridge to the S
craft, but the entrance IS shallow, runnang dry on minus tides, and  (223) When entering North Bay, favor the SE side and anchor
large mudflats extend a long distance from the head, also, there are    near the head of the bay in 12 to 15 fathoms soft bottom, with the
heavy wflhwaws                                                     high-water islet at the head, bearing about W  SE winds draw
  (214) View Cove has three indifferent anchorages In the bight    around Cayman Point and blow directly into the bay with severe
SW of Clam Island, anchor about 0 3 mile from the head of the    squalls and wlliwaws
bight in 17 to 18 fathoms, hard bottom, with the W end of Clam       (224) An open bight on the N side of Hassler Point has depths of
Island beanng 0340, distant 0 5 mile Off Clam Island, anchor in    29 to 31 fathoms at the entrance shoaling to 16 fathoms about 250
13 to 14 fathoms sticky to hard bottom, with the large bare rock    yards from the head The N side of the bight is formed by a
off the island bearing 270ï¿½ and distant 450 yards At the head of    wooded island between it and the main shore is a cove with
the long arm, anchor about 0 3 mile offshore in 16 to 18 fathoms   depths of 1 to 4 fathoms
At the head of the long arm the winds seem to blow harder than       (225) Guide Island, about 0 9 mile E of the entrance to North
outside, which is especially true for SE winds Opposite Clam    Bay is small wooded, and surrounded by kelp Reefs extend N
Island although apparently an exposed position, is fair protection    about 0 4 mule from it
for larger vessels, although the swinging room is restricted For     (226) Lively Islands, NNW of Guide Island are about 1 2 miles
large vessels the best anchorage is m the bight SW of Clam Island,    in extent and wooded There are several outlying rocks off the
where there is fanir protection and good swinging room             islands marked by kelp and mostly covered at high water The cur-
                                                                   rents have considerable velocity around the Lively Islands group
 (215)  Chart 17407 -Corlies Islands are a group of low wooded    and swirls occur in places
islands about 1 8 mules in extent, on the NE side of Tlevak Strait,  (227) Lively Islands Light (55013 7'N, 133ï¿½05 1'W), 20 feet
S of the W  entrance to South Pass, Sukkwan Stralt There is foul    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
ground among the islands and to the S of them About the middle    white diamond-shaped daymark on the W  side of the southern-
of the group is a channel for small craft with local knowledge     most Island of the group
 (216) A small-boat passage between Sukkwan Island and Cor-         (228)  In passing Lively Islands, consider the channel W of them
lies Island is used by small fishing vessels The entrance is easily    to be the main channel, and favor the Dall Island shore slightly
approached from the S The W  shores of Sukkwan Island should    The channel NE of Lively Islands is deep, safe, and largely used
be favored in order to clear the numerous rocks and small islets E    by small craft bound N, the dangers are charted
of Corlies Islands When up to the northernmost of the Corlies        (229) Round Island, about 0 5 mile E of the northernmost large
Islands, steer a midchannel course to avoid the thick patches of    Lively Islands Is a large, grass-covered rock about 20 feet high
kelp                                                               with a small clump of trees near its SW end It is steep to on all
 (217) Nichols Islands, about 2 miles NW of the Corhes Islands,    sides
are a group of wooded islands that extend in a NE direction for      (230)  Soda Bay is on the NE side of Tlevak Strait to the NE of
about 2 1 miles Fort Islet, small and wooded, is the most N of the    the Lively Islands Anchorage can be found in Soda Bay about 0 5
group                                                              mile E of Shelikof Island in about 20 fathoms, mud and shell bot-
 (21s) The Sentinels, a scattered group of five small wooded       tom The low surrounding land offers little protection from the
Islets and rocks that cover, are about 1 mile NNW of Nlchols    wind
Islands A rock with 3 fathoms over it is 3 2 miles 329ï¿½ from the     (231) Midway Island is a small wooded islet in the middle of
SW point of Nichols Islands and shghtly W  of a line from this    the strait about midway between the northernmost of the Lively
point to Guide Island This rock is light in color and bare of sea    Islands and Block Island
growth and can be seen on extreme low tide It Is large in extent     (232) Block Island is heavily wooded the S side of it is bold-to
and surrounded by deep water No kelp marks the area                The narrow passage N of the island is foul, and the currents are
 (219) Breezy Bay is on the W  side of Tlevak Strait abreast    unusually strong Tlevak Narrows Light 2 (55ï¿½15 8'N,
Nichols Islands, it is 2 miles wide between Eolus and Boreas        133ï¿½07 O'W) 22 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
Points It is divided into two arms and has several small islands    tower with a red triangular-shaped daymark on the SW side of the
and numerous rocks m the bay It does not appear to afford an    island
anchorage Eolus Point, on the SE side at the entrance, is high       (233) Turn Point, at the N extremity of Dall Island and just W
steep, and rocky A wooded island is close S of Boreas Point        of Block Island is a bluff, wooded knoll Foul ground extends
 (220) Farallon Bay is on the W  side of Tlevak Strait, about 3    about 300 yards SE and 150 yards N from the point
miles WNW of the Nichols Islands Enter in mudchannel The bot-
tom IS rocky and very broken SE winds draw through it, and it is     (234) Tlevak Narrows, locally known as The Skookum
not recommended as an anchorage Just E of the SE entrance point    Chuck, is a narrow and comparatively deep passage between
of the bay is a high-water islet that shows from S                 Block Island and Turn Point and connects Tlevak Strait and Ulloa
 (221) Halibut Nose is the promontory on the NE shore of Tle-    Channel A 63/4-fathom spot, near midchannel is about 0 3 mile
vak Strait opposite Farallon Bay It is irregular in outline and not    NW of Block Island Light A 1/2-fathom shoal 0 4 mile NW of
so high and prominent as some of the other headlands in Tlevak    Turn Point is marked on its S side by a buoy that is reported to tow
Strait                                                             under during large tides The channel S of the buoy is the one gen-
 (222) North Bay is on the W  side of Tlevak Strait, about 1 5    erally used
miles NNW of Farallon Bay and 2 8 miles S of Tlevak Narrows          (235) Good anchorage for small craft can be had in 3 /4 fathoms
Hassler Point, the NW pomt of the entrance Is timbered Cayman      soft bottom in the small cove on the N side of Tlevak Narrows,
Point, the SE point of the entrance, is low at the extremity and    the entrance to it is about 0 5 mile N of Turn Point





                                         6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                            137


 (236) Currents in the vicinity of Tlevak Narrows run very    61/2 to 10 fathoms rocky bottom on a shoal about 0 3 mile NW of
strong during large tides, in the narrowest part the velocity is over    the fishing resort The main dock (55ï¿½17 8'N, 133014 6'W) at
4 knots In the vicinity of Turn Point there is an approximate    Waterfall has a 70-foot face with depths of 28 feet reported along-
mnety-degree turn with strong currents, on both the flood and ebb,    side in 1976 The resort usually operates only dunng the summer
that swirl and cause whirlpools that can spin a boat around Cau-    Dunng the off season it has a caretaker A wharf with a 250-foot
tion IS advised while transiting this area Soon after passing    face is 500 yards N of the main dock depths of 24 feet were
through the narrows, the current greatly diminishes in strength,    reported alongside in 1976 Gasoline diesel fuel, and water are
beyond Guide Island and Meares Island it is almost imperceptible  available at the main dock A nearby store sells limited supplies
 (237) With the large tides there is very little slack while with the    and provisions A seaplane and a small-craft float are close N of
small tides, slack water lasts from 10 to 30 minutes, and there is   the main dock
not much current for 1 hour on either side (See the Tidal Current  (248) Waterfall has radiotelephone and seaplane communica-
Tables for predicted times and velocities )                      tions with Ketchikan during the summer
 (238) NE of Lively Islands it is reported that the current sets  (249) Port Refuglo is a large bay with two arms, on the W side
constantly NW, being stronger when the main stream W  of the    of Ulloa Channel opposite the fishing resort at Waterfall Its SE
islands is setting NW To take advantage of this constant set small    arm inside of Bocas Point, is 1 mile long and about 0 2 mile
craft bound N usually pass NE of the Lively Islands              wide, and near its head affords anchorage for small craft in about
 (239) The current setting NW divides into two parts off the E   12 fathoms Point Verde, the NW point of the entrance, is
end of Ulloa Island One part sets N of the island and the other    wooded
sets with considerable strength into Meares Passage                (250) Anchorage for larger vessels may be had between the E
                                                                  shore of the SW arm of Port Refuglo and the island at its head, in
 (240) Ulloa Channel is 9 miles long from Tlevak Narrows to    12 to 20 fathoms, sand or mud bottom The dangers are charted,
Bucareh Bay For a distance of about 3 miles from Tlevak Nar-    the chart is the guide
rows, it leads between the islands at the N end of Meares Passage  (251) San Adrian Island, 130 feet high IS about 0 7 mile N of
and is about 0 25-mule-wide and thence between Suemez Island    Point Verde Less than 100 yards to the SSE of San Adnan Island
and Pnnce of Wales Island, where Its width Is about 0 35 rmle at   are a smaller island and a reef that bares connecting them
its E end and 1 4 miles at its W end at Cape Flores, where it joins  (252) Adrian Cove, on the W  side of Ulloa Channel, at Its N
Bucareh Bay                                                      end, is open to N and is of no importance
 (241) Currents -The flood current in the channel sets SE, and    (253) Cape Flores, on the E side of Ulloa Channel at its N
the ebb NW  The average velocity of the currents is 1 8 to 2 2    entrance is the NW point of Joe Island, which is wooded Rocks
knots on both the ebb and flood (See the Tidal Current Tables for    bare at low water, and foul ground marked by kelp, extends about
predictions for places in Ulloa Channel )                        0 3 mile N of Cape Flores and about 0 3 mile SSE of the S end of
 (242) Ulloa Island, close to the W end of Tlevak Narrows, is   Joe Island A lighted buoy marks the NW extremity of the foul
wooded The main channel is close S of the island                 ground N of Cape Flores The channel on the NE side of Joe
 (243) Anchorage in 10 to 15 fathoms soft bottom near Tlevak    Island is largely used by small craft
Narrows, can be had m Ulloa Channel, at the entrance to a small
passage that is on the NW side of the largest Island N of Ulloa    (254) Chart 17400 -Bucarell Bay (55013 5'N  133031 0'W)
Island, between it and the main shore of Pnnce of Wales Island A  about 50 miles NW of Dixon Entrance, extends about 20 miles NE
shoal with a depth of 21/4 fathoms near its end extends about 0 2    from its SW entrance between Cape Bartolome and Cape Felihx
mile SW from the point 0 2 mile N of the W end of this island    Baker St Ignace, Lulu and San Fernando Islands form its W
Ulloa Island, and the 160-foot high island to the NW, can be    shore, and Suemez and Pnnce of Wales Islands form its E shore
passed on either side, but the channel N of Ulloa Island is foul  The passages between these islands connect the bay with the sea
  (244) Bush Islets, about 0 8 mile W  of Turn Point and S of    the Gulf of Esqulbel or Cordova Bay They are used by small ves-
Ulloa Island, consist of two rocks with a single tree on one of    sels and small craft as a protected route when proceeding along the
them A wooded islet 50 feet high and surrounded by kelp Is 700    outer coast between Dixon Entrance and Sumner Strait
yards NW of Bush Islets Two other islets are 0 2 and 0 3 mile,     (255) Currents -The tidal currentsm Bucareh Bay set NE on
respectively, SW of Bush Islets                                  the flood and SW on the ebb The average velocity of the current is
  (245) Meares Island, about 1 8 miles W of Tlevak Narrows is    1 0 to 1 5 knots on both the ebb and flood (See the Tidal Current
the largest island in Ulloa Channel Meares Island Light    Tables for daily predictions for places m Bucareh Bay)
(55ï¿½16 4'N, 133ï¿½10 6'W), 13 feet above the water, is shown from
a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark       (256) Chart 17406 -Cape Bartolome Light (55ï¿½13 8'N,
on the N side of the island The main channel is N of the island,    133036 9 'W) 158 feet above the water and shown from a skele-
the N side of which is bold-to A rocky islet is 275 yards SE of    ton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the S
Meares Island, with rocks and kelp between                       end of one of the islets S of Cape Bartolome, marks the entrance to
  (246) Ridge Island is off the E extremity of Suemez Island    Bucareh Bay
about 1 mile W  of Meares Island Light The island is high,        (257)  Cape Bartolome, the S extremity of Baker Island has
wooded, and joined to Suemez Island by a sandy neck awash at    several storm-swept islets some partly wooded off the main
high water Off the S side of the island are two wooded islets, with    shore The southernmost wooded islet 300 feet high, slightly
rocks submerged and awash, close W  The islets are connected    higher than those close to the cape, shows prominently from off-
with the island by a spit, bare at half tide                     shore The cape rises rather sharply A small rounded peak, 2
  (247) Waterfall, on the E side of Ulloa Channel and about 1 7    miles N from the cape with higher peaks on either side shows
miles above Ridge Island, is the site of a fishing resort Vessels    prominently when other peaks are clouded In rounding the cape,
 waiting for berthage at Waterfall can find temporary anchorage in    the outer wooded islet should be given a berth of about 1 mile A





138                                     6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


shoal with a least depth of 21/, fathoms is about 0 5 mile E of Cape  (268) Port Delores is on the E side of Bucarell Bay, 2 miles
Bartolome Light                                                  ENE of Point Arboleda It has generally broken bottom with a
  (258) The rocks and chffs NW of Cape Bartolome are black    rocky reef, about 400 yards in extent, in its center about 0 4 mile
while those SE are whitish gray, it is reported that this charactens-    inside the entrance Its use IS recommended only for small craft
tic is of considerable assistance in identifying the locahty when    and they can find anchorage m about 11 fathoms 0 4 mile from the
making the coast in thick weather                                head The anchorage is exposed to W winds
 (259) Baker Island, forming the W side of the S end of Bucareh   (269) Point Arucenas, the headland on the N side of Port
Bay is cut up by numerous bays and inlets The shore along the    Dolores and Pomt CangreJo, about 1 6 miles E of Point Aruce-
outer coast is precipitous and marked by ragged ledges and deep    nas, are wooded
clefts The interior is rugged, mountainous and generally wooded    (270) Cabras Islands are a small wooded group, about 1 5
 (260) Fortaleza Bay, on the W side of Bucareli Bay, about 4 5    miles NE of Port Dolores A reef that uncovers 5 feet and marked
miles N of Cape Bartolome, is a small open deepwater bight       by kelp is about 0 5 mile SW from this group
Lake Fortaleza, with an elevation of about 12 feet, empties mto    (271) St Ignace Island, on the NW side of Bucareh Bay about
the bay Thimble Cove, about 0 8 mile N of Fortaleza Bay, is a    11 5 miles from Cape Bartolome, is bold and wooded The E and
small exposed bight with bare rocks and rocks awash that extend    NE shores are mostly rocky, whereas the W and NW shores are
nearly across the entrance from the S shore                      gravel St Ignace Rock Light (55025 7'N, 133ï¿½23 7'W) 20 feet
                                                                  above the water is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
 (261) Port San Antonio, on the W side of Bucareh Bay, about
                                                              ,   white diamond-shaped daymark on St Ignace Rock about 0 8
6 5 miles N of Cape Bartolome has two arms at the head, one that
extends in a NNE and the other in a SSW direction The midchan-    mle NE of Slvester Poit, the NE end of St Ignace Island
nel is clear but a shoal with rocks that uncovers 7 feet is about 0 3  (272) Port Mayoral, the passage between St Ignace Island and
mile WSW from Point San Roque, the N point at the entrance       Baker Island, has depths of 6 to 12 fathoms, with irregular bottom
Depths in the bay decrease from 35 fathoms at the entrance to    Cristma Island,  small and wooded, and a cluster of high-water
about 8 fathoms at the head Small craft can find anchorage m the    islets are W of midchannel at the entrance, with a deepwater pas-
N arm in 5 to 7 fathoms and in the S arm in 10 fathoms mud bot-    sage on either side Foul ground extends 300 yards off the S end of
                                                                  the Island and for 550 yards off Canal Point The N entrance is
                                                                  obstructed by the Santa Rita group of islands between them and
 E(262) Port Asupecion, ofn the W  side of Bucaree Bay, 9 miles    the St Ignace Island shore is a narrow channel less than 50 yards
NNE of Cape Bartolome, offers protected anchorage in 12 to 21    wide with a least depth of 31/4 fathoms The channel between Santa
       fathoms, sand bottom, near its head The midchannel is clear  Rita and Baker Islands is passable at high water by rowboats and
 (263) CapeFelihx(550127'N  133ï¿½25 9'W)isattheSWendof    similar craft
Suemez Island The depths off the cape are comparatively regular
and good, but to the E, foul ground extends about 0 7 mile off-    (273) Chart 17405 -San Juan Bautista Island,    the N part of
shore Cliffs well up on the mountain side, and a steep light-col-    Bucarell Bay, is densely wooded and has two promnent summits
ored cliff a little to the NE of the cape, are the most prominent    The Island separates Bucarell Bay from Ursua Channel to the NW
landmarks NE of the cape is a small section of a chff of columnar    and San Alberto Bay to the N
formation somewhat unusual for this section of Alaska From the
                                                                   (274) Agueda Point, at the NE end and Diamond Point, at the
cape the shoreline trends in a N direction, forrmng the E side of    SW end of the island, have no special features as landmarks
Bucarehi Bay                                                     Deep draft vessels passing W of San Juan Bautlsta Island should
 (264) Port Santa Cruz is on the E side of Bucarell Bay 4 5    exercise caution m the area
miles N of Cape Felix The N shore is steep and rocky with          (275) Point Mihflores, bold and wooded, is the SE point of San
detached rocks close-to, whereas the rest of the shoreline is gener-    Juan Bautlsta Island San Juamto Island, about 500 yards ENE of
ally low, with rocky, gravel, or sand beaches Labandera Rock, a    the point, is wooded and from N and S directions shows as a
kelp-marked submerged rock covered 23/4 fathom is midway    prominent landmark clear of San Juan Bautista Island Deep water
between Point Rosary and Point San Jose, the two points at the    extends close to the pomt and Island
entrance A rock that bares at low water is about 0 7 mile ENE      (276  Port Estrella is S of San Juan Bautista Island and E of
from Point Rosary and 250 yards off the islet fronting Point    Cape Flores (55021 2'N, 13317 4'W) Foul ground marked at Its
Isleta With a moderate swell, the breakers on this rock can fre-    outer end by a lighted buoy, extends N for about 0 3 mile from
quently be seen at night                                         Cape Flores and about 0 2 mile S from Point Providence, the N
 (26i) In entenng, round Point Rosary or Point San Jose at a dis-    point of the entrance Anchor near the head of the bay in 7 to 9
tance of 0 2 mile and head for the point on the N side of the bay 1    fathoms Caution is necessary on entenng, as shoal water makes
mile inside the entrance Round this point at a distance of 300    out from each side of the bay
yards and select anchorage as desired in 12 to 17 fathoms, mud     (277) Tranquil Point, Point Batan, and Point Lomas (55ï¿½22 7
bottom Anchorage with more swinging room may be had to the S    'N, 133ï¿½10 5'W) on the SE shore of Bucareh Bay and SE of San
of the point m 17 to 19 fathoms, mud bottom The channel to the    Juan Bautista Island are headlands without any prominent fea-
N of Labandera Rock is preferable                                tures
 (266) Point Arboleda is a low point about 2 2 miles N of the     (278) Port Caldera, about 4 5 miles NE of Cape Flores and
entrance to Port Santa Cruz Several outlying islets and rocks    immediately E of Pomt Lomas, is open to the N It affords anchor
make it necessary to give the cape a berth of 0 5 mile in rounding    age for small craft A 6'/2-fathom spot is in the center near the
it A light is shown from the northernmost islet Point Quemada    entrance Foul ground extends about 300 yards off Point Iphige-
is midway between Pomt San Jose and Point Arboleda               ma, the NE headland at the entrance
 (267) Point Fula, Point Remedios, and Point Barrlgon are         (279) Trocadero Bay, E of the entrance to Port Caldera, extends
headlands on the NW shore of Suemez Island                       about 9 miles E from the head of Bucareh Bay, with a greatest





                                        6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                            139


width of about 3 miles The bay is locally known as Big Harbor    depth of 1 fathom m the N area and 3/4 fathom m the S area with
In the entrance is a group of islands, of which the largest is Madre    deep water between The N area is marked by a buoy on its NE
de Dlos Island, high and wooded The islands are bold-to, with a    side The usual course in passing Balandra Shoal leads E of it,
few outlying rocks, and the passages between them are mostly of    between the buoys marking it and Ballena Island Shoal
good depth Near the head of Trocadero Bay, islands and rocks are   (289) Fern Reef, marked by kelp, is about 1 5 miles NW of
numerous and the channel becomes more dlfficult From the head    Balandra Shoal and about 1 mile off the San Fernando Island
of the bay is an easy portage to Twelvenmle Arm, Kasaan Bay, on    shore Two rocky heads 0 2 mile apart and bare at low-water
the E side of Prince of Wales Island In entenng Trocadero Bay    spnngs, are conspicuous Fern Point is on the E extremity of San
the chart is the guide                                           Fernando Island A 21/4-fathom spot, marked on its SE side by a
 (280) The Ladrones Islands, E of Madre de Dios Island are a    lighted buoy is about 0 3 mile S of Fern Reef
group of small wooded islands m the entrance to Trocadero Bay      (290) Parida Island (55ï¿½31 2'N, 133ï¿½14 5'W) about 1 5 miles
Toti Island, a small wooded island, is 0 5 rmle N of Madre de    NE of Fern Point, is a proimnent wooded landmark in the middle
Dios Island                                                      of San Alberto Bay Parida Island Reef is 0 5 mile S from Panda
 (281) Port St Nicholas is N of Trocadero Bay Coronados    Island One head bares at low-water spnngs An area with a least
Islands, a group of islands, are midway m the entrance, and rocks    depth of 4 fathoms and marked by a buoy on its SE side IS 0 5 mile
and reefs, with two channels between, extend to the N Rancheria    SE of this reef, the depth may be less
Island is SSW of and close to Point Miraballes , the S point at    (291) Alberto Islands are NE of Panda Island and N of Fish
the entrance to Port St Nicholas Dangers are shown on the chart    Egg Island and Klawock Reef The southernmost island is wooded
About 2 miles N of Point Miraballes is a peak 2,940 feet high,    and is 1 7 rmles NE of Panda Island and about the same distance
hght green in the summer which shows conspicuously from N and    N of Fish Egg Island
S                                                                  (292) Alberto Reef extends 0 4 rmle WSW from the southern-
 (282) Balandra Island (55ï¿½27 2'N, 133ï¿½13 2'W) small and    most of the Alberto Islands, its highest point uncovers 5 feet A
wooded, is about 0 6 mile E of Agueda Point, at the junction of    51/2-fathom channel separates this reef from the southernmost
Bucarehl Bay and San Alberto Bay Foul ground extends 250 and    Alberto Island, the deepest water is found 100 yards off the island
100 yards off the E and W ends, respectively A 2'/2-fathom spot Is  (293) Wadleigh Rock is 0 5 mile E of the southernmost Alberto
0 2 mile NE of the island The channel between Balandra Island    Island and consists of two reefs about 100 yards apart The W reef
and San Juan Bautista Island has a least found depth of 4% fath-    bares at half tide and the E reef at low water The shoal is about
oms                                                              0 2 mile long in a N direction steep on the W  side, and can be
 (283) San Alberto Bay, with numerous shoals and broken areas,    passed 100 yards off
extends about 7 miles N from Bucarehli Bay to San Christoval
exteChannds  about 7 miles N  from Beli Ba y   t o   San Christoval  (294) Three rocky patches covered by about 5 feet are about 1
                                                                  mile NNW of Panda Island They are marked by a lighted buoy
  (284)  San Fernando Island, on the W side of San Alberto Bay
and on the NE side of Portlllo Channel (chart 17406), is about 7         marked by kelp  The range of the SW  end of P anda Island and the
miles in diameter, with low rocky shores cut up by numerous    NE end of San Juan Bautista Island passes a little NE of the
small indentations and bights Timbered hills and ndges cover the    patches
island
                                                                    (295) The Witnesses, locally known as Hour Islands, are
                                                                   wooded islets 2 rmles N of Panda Island Witness Rocks, about
  (285) Ursun Channel separates San Fernando and San Juan    0 9 mile W of The Witnesses, are almost covered at high water
Bautista Islands and connects Bucarell Bay and San Alberto Bay
Midchannel depths are good The pnrncipal dangers are a 41/2- and   (296) Abbess Island, at the N end of San Alberto Bay, about 0 5
a 53/4-fathom shoal about 1 0 mile W of Diamond Point on the   rmle W of Wadleigh Island, is surrounded by foul ground and
SW coast of San Juan Bautista Island, the shoal ground that    off-lymg Islets A winding, unmarked channel is between Abbess
extends about 0 4 mile S from Point Amargura, the S point of    Island and Wadleigh Island This channel has many dangers and is
San Fernando Island, and the shoal ground that extends about 0 4    only sutable for small craft with local knowledge
mile off Point Eugenia, the middle pomit on the NW side of San     297) Shlnaku Inlet makes off from the N end of San Alberto
Juan Bautista Island From this point to the shoal spot 0 5 mile    Bay and connects with Big Salt Lake and Klawock Inlet The inlet
WNW of Agueda Point the San Juan Bautista Island shore should    has much foul ground and the passages leadmg to Big Salt Lake
be given a berth of at least 0 4 rmle Irregular bottom with shoal    and Klawock Inlet are only good for small craft with local knowl-
 spots extends about 0 6 mile off the San Fernando Island shore   edge
near the N end of the channel The channel E of San Juan Bautista   (298) Klawock Inlet extends in a N direction from the head of
Island is more generally used                                    Bucareh Bay for about 7 5 mnules to the entrance of Big Salt Lake
  (286) Ballena Islands, two in number and wooded, are about    The inlet has two entrances The entrance from Bucareli Bay is SE
 1 2 miles NE of Balandra Island and about the same distance SW   of Fish Egg Island the entrance from San Alberto Bay is N of Fish
 of Fish Egg Island The bottom is foul between Ballena Islands    Egg Island
 and Fish Egg Island A reef, with a least reported depth of 3/4    (299) Cape Suspiro is the low wooded point on the E side of the
 fathom is 0 4 mile SW of the W Ballena Island with an extensive    S entrance to Klawock Inlet Port Bagial, a small cove on the E
 kelp patch between                                               side of Cape Suspiro, has depths of 4 to 5 fathoms W of the islands
  (287) Ballena Island Shoal, with a least depth of 13/4 fathoms is    on the E side
 0 6 mile W of the W Ballena Island Its W  side is marked by a      (300) Fish Egg Island, at the S end of Klawock Inlet is low and
 hghted buoy                                                      wooded Shoals extend off the SW end of the island to the Ballena
  (288) Balandra Shoal, about 1 1 miles W  of the W Ballena    Islands Fish Egg Reef extends for 350 yards SE of the SE point
 Island, consists of two small areas 0 2 mile apart, having a least    of the island and is marked by a hghted buoy at its outer end Cole





140                                      6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


Island, a low, wooded island, Is m the bight m the NE side of Fish   (312) Supplies -Water, gasoline diesel fuel distillates, and
Egg Island                                                         lubncating oils and greases are available at the oil pier and floats
 (301) Cralg is an incorporated settlement on the island at the S    The general stores m the community sell some fishing supplies
end of Klawock Inlet and close SE of Fish Egg Island The com-    and hmited provisions
munity has a cold storage depot, hotel, an oil terminal, and several  (313)  Repairs -A 60-ton travel hft is available to the public at
general stores A maintenance, support, and storage facility for    Pnnce Wales Marne  The community operates three gnds a 103-
fishing vessels is near the NW end of the island                   foot grid on the E side of the approach pier to Craig City Dock
 (302) Prominent features A brown water tank near the SW           and two 51-foot grids at the N end of Shelter Cove  A small
side of the island, several white oil tanks near the NW side of the    machine shop is available at Columbia-Wards Wharf
island, and a microwave tower close E of the brown tank are          (314)  Small-craft facilities -The community of Craig operates
prominent from the waters near Craig                               the small-craft basin and floats at Shelter Cove Water and electric-
 (303)  Channels -A Federal project provides for a mooring    ity are available on the floats A boat launching ramp and a U S
basin and a 100-foot-wide entrance channel protected by two    Forest Service float are on the W  side of the basin Craig has 200
breakwaters, in Shelter Cove at the SE side of Craig Island The    feet of float space at the W  side of the City Dock The floats
project depth for the entrance channel and basin is 11 feet In May    extend from the approach pier m a W direction for 50 feet, then N
1993, the entrance channel had a controlling depth of 10 feet    for 150 feet A depth of 8 feet was reported alongside the floats W
except for lesser depths near the W  channel edge above the N      of the City Dock Additional public float space is on the W side of
breakwater thence m March 1989, 11 feet m the basin except for    North Cove, about 500 yards E of the City Dock This 300-foot
lesser depths to 7 feet along the edges A 048ï¿½ range and a light on    float has a reported depth alongside of about 18 feet A privately
the NW end of the S breakwater mark the entrance channel Craig    owned fuehng float is at the Chevron Oil Dock Another pvately
Island, N side can be approached by using three natural channels   owned float with 200 feet of berthing space, extends from the S
The channel W of Craig Island, leading N, has a least found depth    side of the approach pier of Craig Fishenes Inc Pier The reported
of 23/4 fathoms at rmdchannel, It is marked by buoys The channel    depths alongside of the float are 8 to 25 feet and 4 feet along the
E of Craig Island Reef is deep the channel W has a least depth of    inside edge Water, electricity, and a laundromat are available at
41/2 fathoms in midchannel, E channel is marked by buoys           the float A seaplane float is on the W side of the cove W of North
 (304) Dangers -Craig Island Reef, marked by a lighted buoy,    Cove
is a submerged rock with 1 fathom over it about 0 6 mile NNE of      (315) Communcations -Craig has weekly barge and freight
the fish facility at Craig A shoal, about 400 yards in extent with    service with Ketchlkan and monthly barge and freight service
11/4 fathoms over it, is about 400 yards W  of Craig Island Reef   with Seattle A road connects Craig with Klawock Hollis iyd-
Fish Egg Reef extends from the SE point of Fish Egg Island for    aburg, and Thorne Bay Loggig Camp Klawock is about 7 miles
about 275 yards into the channel W  of Craig Island A lighted    N The road along the shore from Craig to Klawock is visible from
buoy is off the outer end A shoal extends about 300 yards from    Klawock Inlet Cralg has daily seaplane service with Ketchikan
the NW point of Craig Island, in a NNW direction obstructing the    and other settlements on Prince of Wales Island Telephone and
channel W of the island Another shoal extends m a N direction
about 300 yards from the NE point of Craig Island Both shoals    Alaska and wit other States
are marked off their outer ends by a buoy
 (305)  Currents -It is reported that the flood current sets toward  316)  Clam Island Is a low wooded island, about 1 mile N of
 (305the wharf and the ebb current sets off the wharf              Fish Egg Island Klawock Reef, marked by a lighted buoy at the
                                                                   SW end and an unlighted buoy at the S end, consists of four
 (306) Harbor regulations -The harbormaster controls the use
                                         ofteomuiyokd ,         groups of rocks that extend m a SW direction from the W end of
of the community dock, gnrids, and floats The harbormaster mo-    Clam Island
tors VHF-FM channel 16 and can be contacted by telephone (907-
826-3275) or FAX (907-826-3278)                                     (317) A channel, about 200 yards wide, with depths of 11 to 22
 (307) Wharves -All of the piers and wharves at Craig are on the    fathoms, separates the reef from the shoals off Fish Egg Island
N side of the island except for the faclhtles m Shelter Cove       The channel is marked by lighted and unlighted buoys A tow
 (308)  Columbia-Wards Wharf (55'28'41"N  133009'08"W ) the    channel, about 0 4 mile S, has depths of 31/4 to 7 fathoms and is
westernmost facility on the N side of Craig Island 146-foot face,    marked by a lght a  ghted buoy and daybeacons
20 feet reported alongside, support and storage facility for fishing  (318)  Entrance Potis a low wooded point about 0 3 mile E of
vessels, owned and operated by Columbia-Wards Cold Storage    Clam Island A channel leads between Entrance Point and Clam
Co                                                                 Island into the bay SE of the Alberto Islands The channel is foul
 (309) Whitepass Oil Dock  100 yards E of Columbia-Wards           and unmarked and should not be entered without local knowledge
Wharf, 90-foot face, 12 to 16 feet reported alongside, for fueling   (319) Klawock Island is near the head of Klawock Inlet A 1I/4-
small craft, owned and operated by Whitepass Alaska Oil Co         fathom spot marked by a lighted buoy is about 0 4 mile W from
 (310) Craig City Dock (55ï¿½28'42"N  133ï¿½08'58"W) about 150    the S end of the island
yards E of Columbia-Words Wharf, 72-foot face, 14 feet reported      (320)  Klawock Harbor, separates Klawock Island from the W
alongside, electnclty is available, owned and operated by the corn-    shore of Pnnce of Wales Island A large amount of freshwater dis-
munity of Cralg                                                    charged into Klawock Harbor from Klawock River and Klawock
 (311) Silverlining Seafoods Pier (55ï¿½28'52"N  133ï¿½08'25"W)        Lake causes severe ice conditions in the colder months of winter
about 0 4 mile NE of Craig City Dock, on the E side of North    The harbor is reported to freeze over at times durinng the winter
Cove, 124-foot face 23 feet reported alongside water and Ice are    There are times each winter when the harbor cannot be used by
available to fishing vessels, receipt and shipment of fish, owned by    small craft At these times, outside communication with Craig is
Shaan-Sect Company                                                 by the highway that extends between the two settlements






                                         6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                            141


 (321) Klawock is a community on the E shore of Klawock Har-    and shipment of fish; owned and operated by Southeast Seafood
bor. Two general stores, an airstrip, a sawmill, and a cannery are    Processors.
here.                                                              (337) Klawock Dock: about 150 yards S of Southeast Seafood
 (322) Klawock Harbor Entrance Light 2 (55ï¿½33.4'N.,    Processors Pier; 68-foot face; 12 feet alongside; electricity is
133ï¿½06.3'W.), 20 feet above the water, is shown from a small    available; operated by the community of Klawock.
house on a skeleton tower with a red triangular daymark on a con-  (338) Supplies.-Limited amounts of provisions can be obtained
crete pier, at the NE extremity of a reef that extends N of Klawock    at Klawock. During the fishing season, the cannery has water and
Island.                                                          ice for fishing vessels. The nearest fuel facility is at Craig.
 (323)  Channels.-The approach to Klawock Harbor is rocky and     (339)  Repairs.-A 68-foot grid is in the mudflats at the S side of
narrow. Depths of 31/2 to 8 fathoms can be made with local knowl-    Klawock Dock. A machine shop at the cannery can assist fishing
edge.                                                            vessels with minor repairs during the fishing season.
 (324) The entrance channel, about 200 yards wide, is between     (340) Small-craft facilities.-The community of Klawock oper-
Klawock Harbor Entrance Light 2 and a daybeacon, about 250    ates 766 feet of small-craft floats with a seaplane float at the N end
yards N of the light.                                            of the W float, about 0.2 mile S of Klawock Dock. Electricity is
 (325) Anchorages.-A small anchorage is in the bight S of the    available at the float; fuel is available at the cannery. Depths of 4
community. The S end of the anchorage has a high-water pass for    to 34 feet were reported alongside in 1976.
canoes to Klawock Inlet.                                          (341) Communications.-Klawock has daily seaplane service to
 (326) Dangers.-A reef extends S from Peratrovich Island into    Ketchikan and to other communities on Prince of Wales Island,
the entrance channel to Klawock Harbor. The S extremity of the    and weekly freight boat service with Ketchikan. A road connects
reef is about 250 yards N of Klawock Harbor Entrance Light 2 and    Klawock with Craig, Hollis, and Thorne Bay Logging Camp.
is marked by a daybeacon. A daybeacon about 175 yards SE of the    Craig is about 7 miles S. Telephone communications are main-
light marks the W side of a rocky shoal on the E side of the harbor    taned
entrance channel. This daybeacon should be given a berth of not
less than 35 yards.                                               (342) The head of Klawock Inlet consists of a series of irregular
 (327) Pilotage, Klawock.-Pilotage, except for certain exempted    flat islands broken by a great number of intricate channels.
vessels, is compulsory for all vessels navigating the inside waters    Beyond these is Big Salt Lake, which is separated from the inlet
of the State of Alaska. (See Pilotage, Alaska, indexed as such,    by an island, on both sides of which are narrow channels
chapter 3 for details.)                                          obstructed by ledges. These serve to dam the waters of the lake.
                                                                   The flow of water from the lake into the inlet at the lower stages of
 (328) Vessels en route Klawock meet the pilot boat about 1 mile
 (328)NW of Cabras Islands, Bucareli Bay (5522.0'N. 133ï¿½248W)    the tide is reversed near high water. A slack water occurs about 2
NW of Cabras Islands, Bucareli Bay (55ï¿½22.0'N., 133ï¿½24.8'W.).
                                                                   hours before and after high water at Klawock, at which time a
 (329) The pilot boat, a tugboat, can be contacted by calling
 (329) The pilot boat, a tugboat, can be contacted by calling    draft of about 8 feet can be taken into the lake. The passages above
                                                       AWOCK P T BAT" on VHF-FM channels 16, 13, or 12.    Klawock are intricate and foul in places, and should not be
 (330) Towage.-Two tugs, 500 hp and 700 hp, are available at    attempted without local knowledge. Guides can be obtained at
Klawock for assistance in docking and undocking. Arrangements    Klawock.
for tugs should be made well in advance through ship's agents.
 (331) Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural         (343) Chart 17406.-Port Real Marina, the passage on the N
quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and    side of Baker Island, connects Bucareli Bay with Siketi Sound and
appendix for addresses.)                                         thence with the Pacific Ocean. It is about 0.7 mile wide, but its use
 (332) Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of   is not recommended for any except small craft. The W entrance is
the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-    constricted; the bottom is very irregular. The E entrance is also
ter 1.)                                                          constricted by Rana Reef.
  (333) Wharves.-All piers and wharves at Klawock are on the E     (344) Rana Reef extends about 0.7 mile in a N direction from a
side of Klawock Harbor, except for the sawmill dock S of Kla-    point about 500 yards N of Point Gorda, the NW point of St.
wock Island and the logging dock on the W  side of Klawock    Ignace Island, almost to Arrecife Point,the SE point of Lulu
Island.                                                          Island. The reef has several rocky heads; the two highest are about
  (334) Alaska Timber Corporation Dock (55ï¿½32'26"N.,    8 feet high. There is a channel at each end of the reef, but the one
133ï¿½06'19"W.): about 0.2 mile S from the S end of Klawock    to the S is reported to be better, giving the St. Ignace Island shore a
Island; 603-foot face; 640 feet of berthing space with floats; 40    berth of 200 to 400 yards.
feet alongside; deck height, 8 feet; a pipeline extends from the   (345) Lulu Island, which forms the N shore of the passage, is
sawmill to a chip-loading spout on the S end of the dock; an 18-    less than 1 mile N of Baker Island. It is a large irregularly shaped
ton crane and four 10-ton forklifts are available; water and elec-    mountainous island with summits from 418 to 1,618 feet in eleva-
tricity are available if advance notice is given; shipment of lumber    tion.
and wood chips; owned and operated by Alaska Timber Corpora-      (346) Santa Rita Island is between St. Ignace and Baker
tion.                                                            Islands, and is part of a group of five low, irregularly shaped,
  (335) Klawock Logging Dock (55ï¿½33'17"N., 133ï¿½06'30"W.): on    wooded islands. The elevation of Santa Rita Island is 250 feet.
the W side of Klawock Island; 435-foot face; 590 feet of berthing    Rocky shores predominate.
space with mooring buoys; 40 feet alongside; deck height, 17 ï¿½/2    (347) Anchorage, reported to be the best in the vicinity, may be
feet; shipment of logs; owned by Sealaska Timber Corporation.    had in 12 fathoms in the bight between Santa Rita Island and St.
  (336) Southeast Seafood Processors Pier (55ï¿½33'28"N.,    Ignace Island.
133ï¿½05'54"W.): about 300 yards E of Klawock Harbor Entrance       (348)  Coposo Island, in midchannel near the E end of the pas-
Light 2; 95-foot face; 16 feet alongside; water is available; receipt    sage and about 0.5 mile N of Santa Rita Island, is small, wooded,






142                                     6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


and 120 feet high. It shows prominently from E and W directions.    feet high, is about 0.4 mile E of Abrejo Rocks. A 4-fathom spot is
Foul ground extends W from the island with a rock with 1 fathom    about 0.5 mile W, and a 3-fathom spot is about 0.5 mile N of
over it about 300 yards W from the center of the island. A shoal,    Abrejo Rocks.
reported covered by at least 3 feet, is about 330 yards SW from the  (363) Animas Island, close to Point Animas, is a small wooded
center of Coposo Island.                                         island 120 feet high. Foul ground extends in a N direction parallel
 (349) Sola Rock, marked by a daybeacon, is a pinnacle rock that    with the San Fernando Island shore.
uncovers 4 feet, 0.5 mile SW of Coposo Island.                     (364) Point Santa Gertrudis, the N extremity of Lulu Island, is
 (350) Pigeon Island, between Baker Island and Lulu Island, off    a low wooded point at the NW entrance to Portillo Channel.
the NW end of Baker Island, is wooded. A small wooded islet is
close to its SE shore, and a group of small rocky islets and sub-  (365)  Chart 17404.-San Christoval Channel is the passage
merged rocks are off its S shore.                                leading WNW from San Alberto Bay to the Gulf of Esquibel.
 (351) Paloma Pass is between Pigeon Island and Lulu Island.    There are numerous islands, reefs, and shoals with three passages
This pass and the pass SW of Pigeon Island have least depths of    between them, all of which present difficulties for vessels of any
31/2 fathoms in midchannel, but the channels are winding and    size, because of the narrowness of the passages and the strength of
lined with dangers. In 1992, numerous uncharted rock and shoals    the currents. The dangers, mostly marked by kelp in summer, are
were reported.                                                   shown on the charts.
 (352) In entering from the Pacific, pass the S end of Cone Island  (366) Catalina Island, near the E end of San Christoval Chan-
at a distance of about 0.5 mile and avoid the foul ground that    nel 0.5 mile off the S shore, is small, 145 feet high, and wooded.
extends off the Baker Island shore. Pigeon Island may be rounded    Rocks and foul ground extend almost 0.4 mile off the N and E
on the NE side through Paloma Pass or through the pass to the SW  sides of the island.
of the island. In Paloma Pass shoal water extends for about 180
                                                                    (367) Piedras Island, 0.6 mile N of Catalina Island, is a wooded
yards in an E direction from the N end of Pigeon Island. Halfway
                                                                   islet, 75 feet high. A reef marked by a buoy extends 200 yards N
from either end of the pass, rocks awash extend for 200 yards from    from the island;
the Lulu Island shore. At this place the channel, about 40 yards
wide, favors the Pigeon Island shore. Near the S end of the pass is
                a 3/2-fathom spot on the W side of the channel   by a lighted bell buoy off its SE side, is about midway between
                a 3-fathom spot on the W side of the channel.    Piedras Island and the easternmost Hermanos Island. The rock is
 (353) The pass to the SW of Pigeon Island is a more direct route,
passing between two small islets, the W one of which is in about
midchannel. Favor the E islet in passing through. The pass is   rent is running     g.
about 40 yards wide and has a depth of 31/2 fathoms. To the W of   (369) Cruz Islands are a group, 1.4 miles long, level, and
the W islet is a narrow channel with 3 to 33/4 fathoms.          wooded, close to the S shore of the E end of San Christoval Chan-
 (354) Coposo Island may be passed about 300 yards to the N and    nel with deep water between them and shore.
about 400 yards to the S; the S passage appears preferable. In     (370) Cruz Pass, between Cruz Islands and San Fernando
approaching the island, favor the N shore of the S passage and    Island, affords a passage for small craft through San Christoval
pass between Sola Rock and the reported shoal covered 3 feet    Channel; however, this pass is seldom used because the passage N
about 330 yards SW from the center of Coposo Island.             of Rosary Island is more direct and less difficult to navigate.
 (355) Portillo Channel connects Bucareli Bay at its N part with  (37i) Hermanos Islands, four in number, small and wooded,
the Gulf of Esquibel. It is of irregular width, about 2.5 miles    are about 0.5 mile N of Piedras Island. Range daybeacons on the
across the entrance and about 0.8 mile wide halfway between the    N islands mark the channel N of Cruz Islands.
ends. There are many islets in the channel, the S part of which is  (372) Point Ildefonso is the low wooded point of the island E
shoal; the bottom is irregular, and there are numerous kelp    from the Hermanos Islands. Rosary Island, the largest island of
patches. The N half is comparatively clear. The channel may be    the group, is near the N shore of San Christoval Channel. All of
used by small craft, but local knowledge is desirable for safe navi-    the islands of the group are low and wooded.
gation.                                                           (373) The channel on the N side of the Rosary Island group is
 (356)  The currents in the channel flow N and S with an esti-    used by small craft, which follow the general trend of the main
mated velocity of about 2 knots.                                 shore at a distance of about 250 yards.
 (357)  Reef Point, on the Lulu Island shore, is low and incon-   (374) Larzatita Island, 115 feet high and wooded, is the west-
spicuous.                                                        ernmost of the islands near the middle of San Christoval Channel;
 (358) San Clemente Island, about 1.5 miles from the S entrance    there is a good channel on either the E or W  side. Tuft Rock,
close off the shore of San Fernando Island, is wooded and about    small, and bare except at extreme high water, is 400 yards SE of
108 feet high. The channel to the E is shoal, and numerous rocks    Larzatita Island. A rocky patch, with 31/4 fathoms over it and
and reefs extend to the N.                                       marked by a buoy on its E side, is about 350 yards ESE of Tuft
 (359) Arboles Islet, near Lulu Island shore about 1 mile NW of    Rock.
San Clemente Island, is 90 feet high and wooded.                   (375) Larzatita Island Reef, marked by kelp and awash at half
 (360)  Snail Point, the W extremity of Caracol Island, on the E    tide, is 300 yards N of Larzatita Island. Its N extremity is marked
shore of Portillo Channel, is 80 feet high, wooded, and conspicu-    by Larzatita Island Reef Light (55035.0'N., 133ï¿½19.7'W.), 22
ous.                                                             feet above the water and shown from a caisson with a red and
 (361) Point Delgada, on the Lulu Island shore about 1.5 miles    white diamond-shaped daymark on a concrete pier.
from the NW entrance, is a gravel spit, grass covered inshore, and  (376) Point Santa Lucia is the easternmost of four points at the
conspicuous from the E.                                          N extremity of San Fernando Island, W  of Cruz Islands. Foul
 (362) Abrejo Rocks are about midway between the two points    ground extends about 0.2 mile N from the point. A small open
of the NW entrance; the highest is 6 feet. Quitasueno Rock, 12    cove, with depths of 8 to 24 fathoms, is W of the point.






                                          6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                               143


 (377)  Palisade Island, a low wooded island, is separated from    island, shoal water extends in a NE direction for 0.5 mile. Siketi
San Fernando Island by a channel about 100 yards wide, with    Point is at the SW extremity of Cone Island.
depths of 11/2 to 21/2 fathoms. Foul ground extends to the N and     (387)  Siketi Sound, between Cone Island and Baker Island, is
NW of the island for about 400 yards. Palisade Point, the extrem-    the Pacific Ocean entrance to Port Real Marina. The S part of the
ity of the small island close to and N of Palisade Island, shows    entrance is obstructed by the Gaviota Islets; the rest of the sound
prominently from W. Shoal spots are about 0.5 mile NNW and NE      is clear. At the NW end of the sound, a narrow channel leads to St.
of the point.                                                      Nicholas Channel, passing close along the Lulu Island shore and
 (378)  Point San Pasqualand Point Santa Rosalia are low           avoiding extensive reefs that extend off the NE end of Cone
wooded points on the N shore of San Fernando Island. A small    Island.
open cove, with depths of 14 to 20 fathoms, is between the points.  (388) Noyes Island, about 2.1 miles NNW of Baker Island, is
 (379)  Chart 17406.-Cape Bartolome, the S extremity of Baker    mountainous with rugged steep cliffs along the W  shore. Noyes
Island, has been described earlier in this chapter. About 3 miles    Peak, a triple-headed peak on the N part of the island, is a very
NNW from the cape is a low headland with a pinnacle rock, 50    conspicuous landmark and during clear weather has been seen
feet high, close to the beach. There are several dangers in the    from 50 miles offshore.
vicinity, the outermost is about 500 yards offshore. The chart      (389) St. Nicholas Point, the SE extremity of Noyes Island, is
shows all known dangers.                                           about 5.5 miles E from Cape Addington. The shoreline between
 (380)  Cape Chirikof, a prominent headland with a group of    the cape and the point forms a large open bight; at its head kelp
rocky islets close-to, is about 4.8 miles NNW from Cape Barto-    extends about 0.3 mile offshore. The shoreline is fringed with
lome. A small bay, about 1.4 miles long in a NNE direction and    rocks. From St. Nicholas Point the shoreline turns N, forming the
0.5 mile wide at the entrance, is E of the cape. At the W side of the    W side of St. Nicholas Channel.
entrance are two small rocky islets. A rock that bares is 285 yards  (390)  Cape Addington is the SW extremity of the narrow
S from the S islet. The head of the bay is shoal for almost 0.3 mile.    tongue of land which for 2 miles is less than 0.5 mile wide and
Small vessels find temporary anchorage in 6 fathoms, about 1 mile    forms the SW end of Noyes Island. The extremity of the cape is a
from the entrance, but the SW swell makes in heavily.              rocky knob, 65 feet high, cut by deep crevices. To the N of it are
                                                      Cape . Gra.    . m two timbered knobs. From offshore, the knobs appear as islets and
 (381) Granite Point, about 0.8 mile N from Cape Chirikof, is a
                                                                    the tops of the wooded knobs show flat. The cape rises to a rocky
rocky point with light-colored cliffs and ledges. From Granite
Point the shore trends NE for about 1.4 miles to a small cove. At    steep ridge, with jagged, serrated skyline. This ridge and the knobs
the entrance to the cove are two rocks awash; the outer one is    at the extremity of the cape serve as good landmarks.
                                    it       '~~~~~~ (391) Two rocky islets with rocks between bear WNW from
almost in midchannel. A 3 /4-fathom spot, usually marked by kelp,                   y
is 300 yards from the E shore at the entrance. A 13-fathom chan-    the cape. The outermost is about 0.2 mile offshore. Heavy tide rips
                                                                    form immediately W of these islets.
nel is between this spot and the outer rock. A rock that bares 3 feet
is 0.7 mile N of the entrance and about 700 yards offshore. Depths   (392)  Shaft Rock, 1.1 miles N of the cape, is conical in shape
                                                                    and light brown, and shows prominently from the S and N.
of 6 to 13 fathoms are found within the bay. Shoal water extends             and lig ht brown, and  shows prominently from the  and N
                 about 250 yards from the head of the bay.         Between the cape and Shaft Rock, ledges extend offshore for
                                                                    about 0.3 mile. The cape should be given a berth of at least 0.8
 (382)  Veta Bay, an open bight 3 miles NE of Granite Point, with    mile when rounding.
depths of 4 to 13 fathoms, is too exposed for safe anchorage. At     (393) Four miles NE of the cape, on the W  coast of Noyes
the head of the bay is a group of small rocks, awash at high water.    Island, is a small bay where small boats find anchorage in 4 to 8
Close to Veta Point, on the NW shore of the bay, are two small    fathoms, in calm weather, near the head of the bay
                                                                     (394)  Roller Bay, 6 miles NE of Cape Addington, is open,
 (383) From Veta Point the shoreline trends in a W direction for    exposed, and not recommended as an anchorage. At the head of
about 1 mile, then N for 0.3 mile, forming the headland, the N     the bay a tongue of land extends offshore and appears as a wooded
extremity of which is Outer Point. Arcada Rock, locally known    island. A small rocky islet is close to the S shore of this tongue,
as Arch Rock, 130 feet high, is close to the S end of the headland.    and two rocks awash are about 0.3 mile to the SW. The inner part
At times kelp extends about 0.6 mile SW from the rock.             of the bay is shoal. The outer part of the bay has 5 to 17 fathoms.
 (384) Outer Point, about 3.5 miles N from Granite Point, is a      (395) The head of the bay is the W end of a divide that extends
projecting rocky point. E of Outer Point, about 0.2 mile, is a prom-    across the island. From W directions, it is a conspicuous means of
inent knob 500 feet high, separated by a divide from high land to    identifying the locality. The headland at the N entrance point of
the E. Foul ground extends 0.6 mile NNW from the point. A bank    the bay rises to a prominent flat-topped mountain. At the W slope
of considerable area, with depths of 12 and 14 fathoms, is 2 miles    of the peak near the shore, pinnacle rocks over 100 feet high are
W of the point; lesser depths may exist.                           formed by deep clefts.
  (385) Gaviota Rock, about 40 feet high, is the largest of a group
of rocky islets, about 1 mile NNE of Outer Point. Breakers are      (396)  St. Nicholas Channel, connecting the Gulf of Esquibel
found 0.2 mile N of the islets. The bottom is shoal and irregular    with the Pacific Ocean, is 8 miles long in a NE direction, 0.5 mile
for about 0.6 mile from the islets. Foul ground is between the    wide at the S end, and 2.2 miles wide at the N end. Noyes Island
islets and the points to the E.                                    forms its W shore; Cone Island and Lulu Island, its E shore.
  (386) Cone Island, 2.5 miles N of Outer Point, is on the NW        (397) Prominent features.-The grassy hill at the SW part of
side of the Pacific entrance to Port Real Marina, and on the SE    Lulu Island is prominent from N directions, appearing rather
side of the entrance to St. Nicholas Channel. It has several sum-    sharp, covered with grass and brush, with a steep slope to the NE
mits, the tallest is 1,120 feet high and centrally located. The S end    and a gradual slope to the SW. The hills to the W appear as round-
of the island is clear of off-lying dangers. Kelp extends for 200 to    ing hills. The peaks at St. Nicholas Point and the peaks on Cone
300 yards off the NW and E shores. From the NE point of the    Island are prominent.





144                                     6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


 (398) Tides and currents -The current floods N and ebbs S       rounded ridge and a pinnacle rock at the extremity of the cape give
Dunng large tides, tidal currents are strong Heavy tide rips some-    it an appearance from E and W, that accounts for its local name
times occur near the entrance, extending from St Nicholas Point    (409) Uhtka Bay, E of Cape Uhtka, affords fair-weather anchor-
to Cone Island, which appear as breakers when viewed from N      age for fishing boats in depths of 6 to 8 fathoms The head of the
 (399) St Nicholas Point, at the S entrance of St Nicholas    cove should not be approached too closely as the shores are foul
Channel on the Noyes Island shore, is high, nsmg sharply Point    (410) The point 2 2 rmles E of Cape Ultka shows well at night
Santa Theresa, on the same shore about 1 rmle from St Nicholas    from the W entrance Rocks extend off this point for about 0 2
Point, presents no prominent features Point St Isidor, at the W  mile An 1l-fathom bank usually marked by kelp is 0 7 mile
extremity of Lulu Island, is low, with a gradual rise to Isldor Hill    NNW from the point The shoreline between this point and Cape
rounded and high Foul ground extends 0 2 rmle offshore from the    Ulltka should be given a berth of at least 0 4 mile
point and from the shore N of it Twin Rocks, 1 5 miles from
Point St Isidor, slightly to E of midchannel show two rounded     (411) Steamboat Bay, about 3 miles E of Cape Uhtka is 0 8
knobs, each about 6 yards in diameter A small timbered island is   mile wide at the entrance, and 0 2 mile wide at the head A 6-
about 0 7 rmle E of Twin Rocks A 1-fathom spot is 300 yards off    fathom spot, marked by kelp, is just within the entrance slightly
the N end of the island                                          W  of midchannel Good anchorage in 18 fathoms may be had
 (400) Kelly Cove, on the W side of St Nlcholas Channel 0 6    about 0 4 mile from the head of the bay The bottom is sand with a
mile from Point Santa Theresa, affords anchorage for small craft    rather hard crust, through which a heavy anchor sinks into softer
in 6 to 9 fathoms, rocky bottom                                  and better holding ground During heavy SE weather the wind
 (401) A fish-buying scow is usually anchored in the cove during    draws through with considerable force and may cause vessels to
the fishing season This vessel sells gasoline, diesel fuel water,    drag their anchors At low water, a sand and gravel beach extends
provisions, and fishing supphes The scow usually has a radlotele-    several hundred yards from the head of the bay Small boats
phone                                                            anchor close to the head of the bay The bay is open to the N dur-
 (402) San Francisco Island, three high water Islands 3 miles    ing N blows it affords httle protection It is reported that the ocean
from the N entrance and about 0 4 mile from the Lulu Island    swells enter the bay At mght, deep shadows are cast by the moun-
shore, is 108 feet high The S side is a sheer rock bluff, mconsplc-    tains and the entrance cannot always be readily dlstingulshed
uous because of Its dark color                                   Steamboat Point, rounding and indefinite, is the W entrance point
 (403) The bight 0 7 mile S of San Francisco Island affords    of the bay In 1976 It was reported that a landshde has left a prom-
anchorage for small craft in about 10 fathoms, sand and gravel    ment grey scar at about the 1,000-foot level on the NW side of
bottom The gravel beach at the head of the bight makes well off-    Steamboat Pot, showing well to Arriaga Passage and Sonora
shore Anchorage for small vessels may be had in 8 to 18 fathoms,    Passage
sand and gravel bottom, in the bight 0 7 mile E of San Francisco  (412) A 285-foot wharf Is on the W shore of Steamboat Bay near
Island, here the gravel beach at the head of the bight makes well    the head The face of the wharf Is 136 feet long and has a depth of
offshore                                                         18 feet alongside Pile ruins of a pier are immediately S of the
                                                                   wharf An oil dock, with a 40-foot face, is close N of the wharf A
 2 miles from the N entrance, is a low s   andy point, with sand and    75-foot small-craft float extends N from the 285-foot wharf Dur-
2 miles from the N entrance, Is a low sandy pomt, with sand and
                           grass near the high-water line It shows prominently and may be    ing the fishing season the facility for fishing vessels has fishing
grass near the high-water hne It shows prominently and may be
distinguished by its light color A rock awash is 1 mile SW from    supples, hnmuted provisions gasohne diesel fuel lubricating oils
Point San Francisco A shoal with 3/4 fathom over it and marked    greases, water, and ice A machne shop makes emergency repairs
by kelp, is about halfway between the rock and the W shore There    to s   mall craf t during t he fishing season, and radiotelephone com-
is deep water between the rock and the shoal and between the
shoal and the shore                                              vice is available during the summer The facility is in caretaker
                                                                   status in the winter
                                                                    (413) Point Incarnation, 3 6 rmles E of Cape Uhtka is the E
 (405) Marabllla Island, 0 8 rmle from the N entrance and about    entrance point A light marks the point, which is the N extremity
180 yards off Lulu Island, is wooded Rocks and reefs extend off    of a low wooded islet Rocks and kelp are off the pomt close-to
the S end for 0 4 mile and for a distance of 0 1 mile off the W and    From the point 8- to 10-fathom spots extend in a N direction for
N shores A 23/4-fathom shoal is 0 4 mile NW of the N end of    0 8 mile
Marabllla Island
                                                                    (414) St Joseph Island, at the NW end of Amaga Passage, has
 (406) Chart 17404 -Arnaga Passage, the channel N of Noyes    a number of high timbered knobs The W coast is rocky and foul,
Island and separating it from the Maurelle Islands is 4 rmles long    and the NW section should be given a berth of at least 1 mile
m an E direction and 1 to 1 8 miles wide                         Rocks and irregular bottom extend off the N coast for about 0 4
 (407) Tides and currents -In general, the current floods E and    mile The E and S coasts are, in general, rocky shelves that drop
ebbs W  Only at the W entrance has the tidal current any notice-    off rapidly A 10-fathom spot Is 0 3 rmle SW from the S point of
able effect Dnftmg kelp is frequently found in midchannel abeam    the island
the entrance to Sonora Passage                                     (415) San Lorenzo Islands, at the NE end of Arnaga Passage
 (408) Cape Ulitka Light (55033 7'N  133ï¿½43 7'W), 115 feet    consists of two timbered islands separated by a narrow channel
above the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    This channel is locally known as Hole m the Wall
white diamond-shaped daymark on the N end of the cape, marks      (416) A rmdchannel course through the very narrow SE entrance
the S side of the W entrance to Arnaga Passage The cape, locally    is safe, but when inside, the NE side of the channel should be
known as Snail Point, is a neck of land that projects about 0 6    favored when passing the vertical bluff on that side A submerged
mile m a N direction from the NW end of Noyes Island A long    rock which covers 4 feet, is about 150 feet off the W shore oppo-






                                         6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                               145


site the vertical bluff A depth of 3 fathoms can be carned past the  (426) The Maurelle Islands are a group of islands, rocks reefs,
rock on its NE side                                                and breakers forming the W side of the Gulf of Esquibel, covering
 (417)  Sonora Passage, between St Joseph Island and the San    an area about 12 5 miles long in a NNW direction and about 9
Lorenzo Islands connects Iphigenia Bay with Arnaga Passage It   miles wide
is about 1 7 miles wide, but has a very irregular bottom Sonora      (427)  Currents appear to be entirely tidal the strongest are
Passage affords the only ship channel among the islands The    reported around Timbered Island and the N end of St Joseph
chart shows the known dangers Vessels using this passage should    Island, but do not exceed 2 knots Between Timbered Island and
follow a mnudchannel course but the use of Arnaga Passage Is con-    the Wood Islands and to the SE, also to the N of St Joseph Island,
sidered preferable The channels between the islands that are used    currents run NE in flood and SW m ebb, between Emerald Island
by small boats are numerous, but have many dangers, mostly inmd-    and Feather Rock, the current runs E on flood and W  on ebb SW
cated by kelp                                                      of Emerald Island and Gull Island, flood sets SE and ebb NW  In
                                                                  the vicinity of Lambda Rock, S of Twin Islands, the flood runs E
 (418) The Gulf of Esquibel is 8 miles long from Noyes Island to    and the ebb, W  In the area between this rock and the San Lorenzo
Tonowek Bay and 6 miles wide from San Fernando Island to the    channels, little, if any, current was observed In the small passage
Maurelle Islands It is clear of islands and is connected to the sea    E of Wood Islands, the flood runs N and the ebb S
by several passages The navigation of the Gulf of Esqulbel pre-     (428) Caution -Without local knowledge navigation among
sents no difficulty The waters are generally deep except near the    these islands except m small craft, is dangerous
shores The known dangers are shown on the chart, the pnncipal       (429) Anguilla Island, one of the largest of the group, is tim-
one, Curacao Reef is marked by a buoy Small craft with local    bered and nses to an elevation of 630 feet From offshore the sum-
knowledge pass inside all the islands of the St Philp and Culebra    rmt may be recognized, appearing rather sharp, its skyline to the
groups A rock awash and a submerged rock are about 300 yards    W and SE appears lower and somewhat flat Anguilla Bay, on the
SE and ESE, respectively, of the 130-foot island off the SE end of    S side of the island, is foul at its head
St Philip Island                                                     (430) Esquibel Island, Turtle Island, Sonora Island, Twin
 (419) The Hermagos Islands, on the SE side of the Gulf of    Islands (Prmincesa Island and Favorita Island), and the unnamed
Esquibel are a group of low wooded islands N of Garcia Cove    islands are generally wooded, and have no charactenstics of
about 0 3 miles offshore from San Fernando Island A small    marked interest to the navigator The largest and highest of the
island with a prominent evergreen on its N side, is halfway    Wood Islands is wooded and rises conically to a height of 280
between the group and San Fernando Island Either side of this    feet, it is somewhat prominent from offshore An anchorage for
island has a small boat channel                                    small craft is in the W  side of Nagasay Cove, on the N side of
 (420) Point Garcia and Point Aguirre are low, wooded points    Esquibel Island in 4 fathoms, mud bottom
on the NW end of San Fernando Island Foul ground extends off-        (431) Timbered Island, very prominent from offshore the
shore for 0 5 rmle m a NW direction                                westernmost of the Maurelle group, is 198 feet high and wooded
 (421)  Garcia Cove is a small inlet at the NW  end of San    The shores are brown sheer cliffs and ravines Many rocks are
Fernando Island and 0 4 mile E of Point Garcia In December    close by Tide nps are N and S of the island A barren, gray island,
1983, a rock, which bares at low water, was reported in the    slightly smaller is just S of Timbered Island
approach to Garcia Cove in about 55ï¿½33'52"N, 133ï¿½25'47"W A           (432) From Timbered Island to the Wood Islands is a line of
group of small islets extends S from the E side of the entrance to    rocks and breakers that show in a moderate swell In heavy
the cove A rock that uncovers 7 feet is on the W side of the cove    weather, breakers may be seen for about 800 yards around the rock
at the entrance In December 1983 a large rock was reported in    0 8 mile 205ï¿½ from the center of Emerald Island (55ï¿½44 O'N,
the center of the cove in about 55ï¿½33'28"N, 133ï¿½25'41"W A 9-    133040 7'W) The body of water between the two groups of rocks
foot-high rock is just S of the large rock An islet was reported on    that are about 0 8 mile NW and about 0 6 mile W  from the W
the SW side of the cove in about 55ï¿½33'22"N, 133ï¿½25'54"W           shore of Little Dome Islet (55ï¿½41 5'N, 133ï¿½37 9'W) breaks in
Anchorage with restricted swmgmg room may be found in 9 fath       heavy weather
oms mud bottom about 150 yards S of the 9-foot rock in the cen-     (433) About 550 yards S of Feather Rock, 1 8 miles W of Little
ter of the cove                                                    Dome Islet, is a small area marked by kelp, that is dangerous in
  (422)  Aguirre Bay is an open bight S of Point Agulrre Rocks    heavy weather
awash extend part way across the entrance                            (434) About 0 5 mile W of the Wood Island group is an exten-
  (423) Blanqulzal Islands, St Philip Island, and Culebra           sive area of rocks and breakers that are marked by kelp Near the S
Islands are in the E part of the Gulf of Esquibel close to the Pnnce    end of this patch is a low, bare, round-topped rock
of Wales Island shore distant 3 4 5 and 6 miles respectively,        (435) Tide rips, heavy for small craft, were observed in the
NW of Larzatlta Island Reef Light They are comparatively low    vicinity of Timbered Island, the N end of St Joseph Island and
and heavily wooded At the SE end of St Philip Island is an old    Feather Rock
Native American village, known locally as Bobs Place Fair           (436)  Launch Passage, between Anguilla Island and Esquibel
anchorage for moderate-sized vessels can be had in midchannel    Island is frequently used In making passage from the Gulf of
off the village                                                    Esqulbel keep S of the rocks awash at half tide and the submerged
  (424) A rock awash, marked by kelp, is 0 5 mile off St Philip    rocks just inside the entrance When abeam the inner rock, change
Island at a point 1 4 miles 3110 from the W point of Blanqmzal    course to pass close to and just S of the two islands in nmdchannel
Islands                                                            Keep close to the islands From here the channel is clear to the
  (425)  Curacao Reef is 0 8 mile W  of the S end of Culebra    anchorage in Nagasay Cove, on the N side of Esquibel Island, the
Islands with deep water between The reef has a least depth of /2   chart is the best guide for manners without local knowledge
fathom, is small in extent, and marked by a buoy off its SW          (437)  NW of the anchorage in Nagasay Cove are numerous
extremity                                                          islands The channel between these and the Angullla Island shore







146                                      6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


is used. In passing N, favor the islands, passing W of two rocks in    Mountain, is timbered and has moderate slopes; from a consider-
midchannel. When past these rocks, favor the Anguilla Island    able distance offshore to the W, it may be recognized over the
shore. Near the N end of the channel are shoal spots. There is a    coast ridges. Cone Peak shows from the W  over long, wooded
rock awash 250 yards W of the NW island. The two islands off the    ridges as a low wooded cone. The 1,050-foot peak to the N shows
SW shore of Anguilla Island should be given a berth of at least 0.2    prominently from offshore.
mile. Deep water was found on all sides of the rock awash, 0.3       (449) Point Desconocida (55ï¿½41.7'N., 133ï¿½31.7'W.), the S point
mile NW of the N end of Turtle Island.                             of Heceta Island, marks the N side of the E entrance to Bocas de
 (438) There is a launch channel N of the San Lorenzo Islands,    Finas. Desconocida Reef, an area of broken ground, boulders, and
just S of Escurial Island.                                          submerged rocks, extends 700 yards SSE of the point. A rock,
 (439)  Tonowek Bay extends NE for about 6 miles from the Gulf    barely covered at low water at the outer end of the reef, is marked
of Esquibel to Tonowek Narrows and borders the SE side of Hec-    by a buoy on its SE side.
eta Island. Kabanof Rock, awash, is near midchannel about 0.9        (450) There is a secure anchorage in the W bight on the N side
mile SSW of the 1,085-foot hill on Heceta Island.                  of Anguilla Island, about 0.5 mile S of Bushtop Island. When
 (440)  Warm Chuck Inlet, on the NW side of Tonowek Bay, has    entering, pass about 200 yards E of Bushtop Island and stand in on
considerable foul ground, as indicated on the chart. A rock, with '/2    a S course. Anchor in 11 to 15 fathoms, soft bottom. Kelp and bro-
fathom over it, is in midchannel, 0.5 mile E of a well-defined point    ken ground are on the W side of the anchorage.
on the SW shore. About 0.7 mile N of this point is a group of        (451) Tonina Island is about 300 yards N of the W  end of
wooded islets. Rocks that uncover 7 feet are 150 yards S of the    Anguilla Island, with islets and rocks between. Twocrack Island,
group.                                                             on the S side of Bocas de Finas, is wooded and has two prominent
 (441)  Salt Lake Bay, on the SE side of Tonowek Bay, is about 2    crevices that can be seen only from the N and S. The island shows
miles NE of the Culebra Island Group. The entrance is choked by    up dark against Heceta Island.
a group of wooded islands. Two channels are used, one N of the       (452) Bushtop Island, about 0.8 mile SE of Twocrack Island is
group with a depth of 11/2 fathoms, the other S of the group with a    45 feet high and conspicuous from Bocas de Finas; 200 yards E of
                                                                   45 feet high and conspicuous from Bocas de Finas; 200 yards E of
depth of 212 fathoms. The NE and SW ends of the bay are shoal;    it is a small bare rock with a rock awash close W.
depths of 7 to 15 fathoms are found in the center. A number of
freshwater streams, emptying into the bay, attract salmon in con-    (453)  Dome Islets are two small wooded islands close together,
                 ~~~~~siderable numbers.   ~about 0.6 mile SW from the S end of Twocrack Island. Feather
 (442)  Harmony Islands, on the E side of Tonowek Bay, are a    Rock, 5 feet high, is about 2.4 miles W from Twocrack Island.
 (442) Harmony Islands, on the E side of Tonowek Bay, are a
group of high, wooded islands. There are channels between the        (454) From Bocas de Finas to Cape Lynch the coast is rugged,
islands of this group, but they are made difficult by numerous dan-    with numerous outlying islets and reefs, most of which show
gers. Rocks that cover are off the S and W points of the group.    above water. The main passage follows the general trend of the
 (443)  The channel E of the Harmony Islands and E of the islands    shoreline at a distance of 0.2 to 0.5 mile. The SW side of the pas-
to the S, off the entrance to Salt Lake Bay, is used extensively by    sage is fringed by an area of broken ground, reefs, and islets that
small craft plying between San Christoval Channel and Tonowek    extend about 3.6 miles NW from Emerald Island to Losa Island.
Narrows. The midchannel is safe and partially protected. It is a    This section of the passage is exposed to the swell from seaward,
continuation of the small-craft channel E of Blanquizal Island, St.    and during and after gales, vessels traversing it are subjected to a
Philip Island, and Culebra Islands.                                disagreeable beam sea that breaks furiously over the rocks on both
 (444) Nossuk Bay, in the NE part of Tonowek Bay 1.5 miles S    sides of the passage. Too much reliance should not be placed on
of Tonowek Narrows, is largely filled with islands and shoals.    the position of the buoys, especially after severe storms.
Nossuk Anchorage, in the N part of the bay, 0.7 mile S of            (455) White Cliff (55ï¿½43.9'N., 133ï¿½38.6'W.), on the Heceta
Tonowek Narrows, affords excellent anchorage in 10 fathoms, soft    Island shore, is a precipitous wooded point with white cliffs 100
bottom. The N entrance is narrow; the chart shows the least    feet high. About 0.8 mile SE of White Cliff is a conspicuous land-
depths.                                                            slide that extends down to the water from near the summit of the
                                                                   ridge. A lighted bell buoy, 0.6 mile W of White Cliff, marks the
 (445) Bocas de Finas is the passage leading from the junctionof    outer limit of dangers on the E side of the passage.
the Gulf of Esquibel with Tonowek Bay to Iphigenia Bay and the       (456) Emerald Island, about 1.2 miles W of White Cliff, is 45
Pacific Ocean. It is between Anguilla, Tonina, Bushtop, and Twoc-    feet high and flat, has several clumps of stunted spruce, and shows
rack Islands, which are the northeasternmost of the Maurelle    up green. The SE side has a very small sand beach. The ground in
group, and the SW coast of Heceta Island.                          the vicinity of this island is foul. A buoy, about 0.6 mile NNE of
 (446)  Current.-Between Emerald Island and Dead Tree Point,    Emerald Island, marks the outer limit of dangers on the SW side of
the estimated velocity of the current is about 2 knots.            the passage.
 (447) The Heceta Island shore, on the NE side of the passage, is   (457) Dead Tree Point, about 1.2 miles NNW of White Cliff,
steep with no outlying dangers. The SW side of the passage is foul    juts out from the higher land of Heceta Island and is low and
for about 0.3 mile off the Anguilla Island shore, and should be    wooded with bare cliffs at the water. Raso Rock, a large bare rock
avoided. The least width about 0.7 mile between Twocrack Island    20 feet high, is 0.6 mile WSW of Dead Tree Point. A rock, 6 feet
and Heceta Island is at the NW end end of the passage.             high, is about 0.7 mile NW of Raso Rock.
 (448) Heceta Island shows up prominently from the W. The S         (458)  Gull Island is about 2.3 miles WNW of Emerald Island.
end is rocky, rugged, and mountainous, and the W shore is formed    The island, 87 feet high, is light colored, grass covered at the top,
by light-colored cliffs; the N part of the island is lower and more    and somewhat flat, and has rather steep shores. Rocky islets and
heavily timbered. Bald Mountain has several bare summits and is    foul ground extend in a N direction for about 1.3 miles. The
a prominent landmark near the S end of the island. Timber Knob,    ground is foul to the ESE for about 0.4 mile. A rock that bares is
 centrally located on the S part of the island, and lower than Bald    0.9 mile WSW from Gull Island.






                                        6  WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                            147


 (459) Losa Island, about 2 miles WSW of Cape Lynch and 1 5    Ham Islands Strangers and larger vessels should use the longer
miles NNW of Gull Island, is only 5 feet high and is the western-    route through Karheen Passage
most of the chain of islands and reefs S and SW of Heceta Island   (471) For 1 5 miles NW from Cob Island, Karheen Passage has
Foul ground extends for 0 2 mile NW of Losa Island               an average width of about 0 5 mile The depths are generally good
 (460)  Cape Lynch Light (55046 9'N  133ï¿½42 1'W), 50 feet    except for an extensive kelp-marked ledge, with a least depth of
above the water and shown from a small house with a red and    13/4 fathoms over it in midchannel W of Karheen Cove During
white diamond-shaped daymark on an islet off the SW end of    summer streamers of kelp are visible along the W half of the pas-
Cape Lynch marks the W end of Heceta Island The light also    sage, just N of Chapm Island, in 3 to 5 fathoms
marks the NW approach to Boca de Finas, the approach to David-    (472) Karheen Cove is a small indentation on the NE side of
son Inlet and the E side of the entrance to Sumner Strait (See also    Karheen Passage at its NW end A bare rock is off the S point at
chart 17360 )                                                    the entrance A buoy marks the outer end of the ledge that extends
 t461) A kelp-marked ledge, with 1/,2 to 4/4 fathoms over it and a    about 400 yards SW from the S point
23/4-fathom spot at its outer end extends 0 7 mile NW of the cape  (473) Peep Rock, a conspicuous rock, marked by a light, is
 (462) Cone Bay, NE of Cape Lynch, is open and exposed to the    about 0 7 mile NW of Karheen Cove Shoal areas marked by kelp
W  The bottom is irregular, and kelp extends well into the bay    extend for about 700 yards W and about 500 yards NW of the
along the S shore                                                rock The channel E and N of the rock is clear and is generally
 (463) Tonowek Narrows (55ï¿½45 5'N, 133ï¿½20 i'W), locally    used in preference to the channel S, where there are unmarked
known as Little Skookum Chuck, connects Tonowek Bay and    dangers
Karheen Passage It has a least width of 100 yards between the 10-
fathom curves                                                     (474) Charts 17404, 17403 - Tuxekan Passage has its S
 (464) Currents -The currents in Tonowek Narrows set NE on    entrance on the SE side of Karheen Passage, and extends N along
the flood and SW on the ebb The velocity of the current is 3 0    the E side of Tuxekan Island for about 10 miles to El Capltan
knots (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions ) Tide    Passage The shores are heavily wooded throughout its length, and
rips have been reported but they are seldom dangerous even to    are indented with numerous bights, coves and bays that provide
small boats                                                      anchorage in any desired depth The width varies from a maxl-
 (465) Karheen Passage extends from Tonowek Narrows to Sea    mum of about 2 miles N of Staney Island to about 225 yards in
Otter Sound The SE part of the passage is characterized by islets,    Tuxekan Narrows This passage is preferred to Karheen Passage
ledges and generally broken ground surrounded by compara-    by some operators enroute between Tonowek Bay and El Capltan
tively deep water Much of the area is filled with kelp The channel    Passage
is marked by a daybeacon buoys and an unhghted range as far as     (475) Currents -The currents in Tuxekan Passage set generally
Karheen Cove and is used by vessels with a draft of about 17 feet  N on the flood and S on the ebb The velocity of the current is
 (466) Currents -Currents in Karheen Passage set NW on the    weak being less than 1 knot (See the Tidal Current Tables for
flood and SE on the ebb The velocity of the current is 0 4 to 0 5    daily predictions )
knot                                                               (476) Chart 17404 -Kauda Point (55ï¿½46 4'N, 133ï¿½15 5W), at
 (467) Point Swift is on the E side at the NE end of Tonowek    the S tip of Tuxekan Island and on the W side of Tuxekan Passage
Narrows Two totem poles and a gravesite can be seen on an island    is a small islet at high water and is conspicuous from the SW and
about 0 4 mile W of Point Swift, on the W side of Tonowek Nar-    NE
rows Point Swift Rock uncovers 5 feet and is 0 3 mile NNE of       (477) Kaguk Cove, at the S end of Tuxekan Passage, about 2
Point Swift A buoy is about 0 3 mile NNE of the rock and marks    miles SW of Kauda Point affords a well-protected anchorage in
the N end of the shoal area that extends from the rock A daybea-    depths of 4 to 8 fathoms, with a gentle sloping bottom
con is on a small islet 16 feet high on the W side of the channel  (478) The Dasam Islands are in the S entrance to Tuxekan Pas-
about 0 6 mile N from Point Swift                                sage midway between Kauda Point and the entrance to Kaguk
 (468) Ham Islands, a group of wooded islets, are about 1 8    Cove The islands are wooded and have boulder-strewn beaches
miles NE of Tonowek Narrows and extend about 1 mile in a SSE    An extensive kelp patch usually extends NE from the N island
direction from the E end of Heceta Island Reefs and broken    Other kelp patches over rocks awash, are E of these islands
ground extend E, S and SW of the islands A buoy about I1 miles     (479) Gaohl Islands, across the passage from Kauda Point,
NE of Point Swift marks a submerged rock about 0 3 mile S of the    form the SW shore of Winter Harbor, where good small-boat
southernmost of the three larger central islands of the group    anchorage is available m depths of 2 to 10 fathoms They are dlffi-
Another buoy is on the W side of a submerged rock marked by    cult to identify when approaching from the W
kelp about 1 mile NW of Kauda Point the S extremity of Tuxe-      (480) Yahku Cove, on the W side of Tuxekan Passage 1 5 miles
kan Island                                                       NNE of Kauda Point and Nundel Cove on the E side of the pas-
  (469) Trim Island is about 0 5 mile NE of the larger Ham        sage opposite Yahku Cove are not recommended for small-boat
Island, close to the Tuxekan Island shore Cob Island is about 0 3    anchorages Nundel Cove is deep and exposed to the N A rocky
rmle NW of Trim Island and 1 mile SSE of Karheen Cove Reefs    reef that is uncovered at high water constricts the entrance to
extend about 200 yards SE S and W of Cob Island A daybeacon    Yahku Cove
marks the reef on the W side of the island
  (470) Chapin Island, small and wooded is on the W side of        (48l) Chart 17403 -Staney Island, about 3 5 miles NE of
Karheen Passage W of Cob Islet An unlighted range of two day-    Kauda Point (55ï¿½46 4'N  133ï¿½15 5'W) is the largest and most
beacons on the N end of the island, in line 306ï¿½ marks the center    NW of a chain of wooded islands that extend into Tuxekan Pas-
of the channel N of Ham Islands and S of Trim Island and Cob    sage from the E shore The passage to the W and SW of Staney
Island Local fishing craft prefer the shortcut known as Canoe    Island is clear but from other directions it should be approached
Pass, which extends SW from Chapin Island between Heceta and    with caution A l/4-fathom rock and a 1'/2-fathom rock are 0 8







148                                      6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


mile and 0.5 mile N, respectively, of the island. NE from Staney    the light. During severe weather the seas are reported to pile up
Island the waters are generally foul with a number of submerged    heavily and it is advisable to give the point a berth of at least 1
rocks and rocks that uncover 1 to 7 feet.                          mile.
 (482) Naukati Bay is the largest indentation in the E shore of     (493) Whale Head (55ï¿½51.1'N., 133ï¿½40.9'W.), a prominent cliff
Tuxekan Passage. Its entrance, about 2 miles N of Staney Island, is    50 to 300 feet high that shows up conspicuously offshore to the
constricted by rocks and kelp, and the entire area has numerous    SW marks the NW side of the entrance. It is the S extremity of
islets, reefs, and rocks. In the narrow winding channel, 3 fathoms    Whale Head Island.
can be carried well in toward the head of the bay.                   (494) Broken ground extends 0.6 mile S of Whale Head, with a
 (483) Klinan Island, on the W  side of the entrance to Naukati    1/2-fathom shoal that breaks about 0.5 mile, and a 33/-fathom
Bay should be given a wide berth. A rock that uncovers 5 feet is    patch, marked by kelp, about 0.6 mile SSE of the head. Whale
about 0.3 mile SSW of the island, and the waters around it from E  Rock uncovers 3 feet and is 0.5 mile SSW of the head. A mid-
through S to W are foul.                                           channel course through the entrance clears all dangers.
 (484)  Nichin Cove on the W side of the passage, about 1.3 miles   (495) N of Whale Head Island is a chain of islands that extend to
WSW of Klinau Island, affords good small-craft anchorage.    the S end of Kosciusko Island. The passes between these islands
Larger vessels will find unprotected anchorage in 6 to 8 fathoms,    are suitable for small craft only.
mud bottom, off the entrance to the cove. A ramp and float, with a
                                                                     (496) Fake Pass, the southernmost of the two larger channels N
60-foot face, are on the W side of the cove near the entrance.
                                                                   of Whale Head Island, has a minimum depth of 4 feet. A rock
                                                                   awash is near the center of the SW entrance. The seas pile up
and about 6.5 miles N of Kauda Point, is not recommended as a    heavily on this rock and in the pass during moderate to severe SW
small-boat anchorage. At low water its entrance is almost closed
                                                                   weather. Cosmos Pass, the northernmost channel, has a control-
by rocks and reefs. The best water into it is the N channel. The
                                                                   ling depth of about 5 feet and current of not more than 3 knots, and
narrows NW of Little Naukati Bay is relatively clear and deep.     is used by small boats bound to and from Warren Channel. (See
 (486)  Village Rock, about 0.5 mile NW of the N end of Tuxekan
                                                                   chart 17402.) Breakers cover the W entrance to Cosmos Pass in
Narrows, is awash at high water and is marked by a daybeacon.
The safest and recommended route for northbound transit vessels    heavy SW weathe  A rock awash is near midchannel
                 is S and W  of Village Rock. Mariners transiting the waterway  (497) Port Alice, on the S side of Davidson Inlet E of Surf
                 is S and W  of Village Rock. Mariners transiting the waterway    Point, is a secure anchorage. A ledge, about 0.4 mile inside the
about 100 yards E of Village Rock should use care; detached rocks
and shallow water extend about 0.2 mile off Kinani Point.          entrance, extends about 0.5 mile from the E shore into the bay;
                                                                   two rocks that uncover 8 and 5 feet are near its center. To enter,
 (487)  Jinhi Bay extends SW from Village Rock. This bay shoals    give the points at the entrance a berth of about 0.5 mile an d enter
gradually to mud flats that bare in its SW extremities. It is studded
with small islets and numerous rocks that bare at various stages of    in midchannel  Follow the W  shore at a distance of about 250
                                                                   yards, passing W of the ledge until about 0.5 mile from the head of
tide. Only those with local knowledge should attempt to enter this                                                      the 
                 ~~~~~~~~~~~bay.    ~~~the port, where good anchorage will be found in the middle in 14
                                                                   to 18 fathoms, soft bottom. Water can be obtained by boats from
 (488) Elghi Island, near the N extremity of Jinhi Bay, is one of
the more prominent features of Tuxekan Passage. The waters to
the W  are foul, and a large rock that uncovers 4 feet is about 0.1  (498)  Green Island, 4.2 miles NE of Whale Head, is about 0.5
mile E of its N tip.                                               mile in diameter. A shoal with a depth of 21/4 fathoms near its cen-
 (489) Aikens Rock, 3 feet high and marked by a daybeacon, is   ter extends about 0.7 mile SSW from the small island SE of Green
about 400 yards E of the N end of Elghi Island. Kassan Islands,    Island. The 21/4-fathom spot and a 31/,-fathom patch about 300
about 1.4 miles N of Elghi Island, separate Tuxekan Passage from    yards to the SW are surrounded by kelp.
El Capitan Passage. These islands are heavily wooded and sepa-       (499) White Cliff Island is on the E side of Davidson Inlet
rated only by a narrow channel that runs dry at half tide.         about 4.2 miles E of Green Island. A rock, with 11/4 fathom over it,
 (490) Kahli Cove, between Kassan Islands and Prince of Wales    is about 1.4 miles W of the island, and a 31/2-fathom shoal, marked
Island, provides suitable anchorage for small craft. The SW        by kelp, is about 1.9 miles WNW from the NW extremity of the
entrance is constricted by rocks and reefs, but a narrow winding    island. Davidson Inlet and Sea Otter Sound have numerous other
channel is open. The NW entrance is less winding and has fewer    unmarked isolated dangers and shoals. They are shown on the
rocks.                                                             chart and, with close attention, can be avoided.
                                                                     (500) Edna Bay is on the W side of Davidson Inlet, 5.5 miles N
 (491) Davidson Inlet is the W part of a large expanse of water,    of Whale Head. It has good anchorage about 0.3 mile from the S
NE of Iphigenia Bay, between Heceta Island and Kosciusko    shore in 14 to 17 fathoms, soft bottom. Islets and foul ground
Island. The E part, Sea Otter Sound, is separated from it by a chain    make out 0.5 mile from the W end of the bay; foul ground makes
of islands that extend SW from Marble Island and Orr Island. The    off in the N part of the bay, about 750 yards from the W shore and
shores and islands in the inlet and sound are wooded and generally    about 500 yards S from an islet.
high. The entrance to El Capitan Passage is at the NE end of Sea     (501) In September 1986, an uncharted reef, covered 5 feet, was
Otter Sound.                                                       reported about 50 feet SW of the face of a T-float at the N end of
 (492) The entrance to Davidson Inlet is 2 miles wide between    Edna Bay. A dangerous shoal area near the float is marked by
Whale Head and Surf Point, the NW extremity of Heceta Island.    buoys.
Surf Point Light (55050.0'N., 133ï¿½38.0'W.), 29 feet above the       (502) Limestone Point, the N entrance point to the bay, is
water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dia-    marked by Edna Bay Entrance Light  (55056.3'N.,
mond-shaped daymark on the point, marks the SE side of the    133037.0'W.), 23 feet above the water and shown from a skeleton
entrance. Surf Point is low and wooded. From it broken ground    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the end of
extends about 0.7 mile N, with a l/4-fathom shoal 0.3 mile NE of    the point.







                                         6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                               149


 (503) Entrance Island forms the SW side of the entrance to the    submerged rocks that are generally marked by kelp during sum-
bay. A narrow channel, W of the island, has a controlling depth of    mer.
3 fathoms, but should be used only by those with local knowledge.    (513) Turn Point (55ï¿½50.8'N., 133ï¿½21.5'W.), low and wooded,
Kelp-marked reefs extend 300 yards S of the island. A shoal, with    is on the E shore of the sound and forms the N point at the NW
depths of 31/2 fathoms near its S end and 73/4 fathoms at the N end,    entrance to Karheen Passage. The cove E of Turn Point has con-
extends 0.2 mile N of the island and about halfway across the    siderable foul ground.
entrance. At about midchannel 18 fathoms are found. A 9-fathom      (514) About 1.7 miles S of Turn Point are a group of wooded
spot is just inside the entrance about 0.3 mile W  of Edna Bay    islands that form the S shore of the NW entrance of Karheen Pas-
Entrance Light. Near the center of the bay are two unmarked    sage. Shoals, marked by kelp, extend for about 0.5 mile N of the
shoals with depths of 6 and 8 fathoms. The chart is adequate for    W islands of this group. Good anchorage for small vessels can be
the entrance E of the island.                                      found back of the islets and shoals about 1.2 miles WSW of the
 (504) A rock, covered 9 feet and marked by a buoy, is at the SE    light on Peep Rock (55ï¿½49.2'N., 133ï¿½19.8'W.). By running on a
end of the extensive shoal area making out from the W side of the    NW course, keeping Clump Island on range with the gap between
bay. About 300 yards SE of this shoal is an unmarked 8-foot shoal.  the two largest islands in this group, the mariner will find suitable
 (505) Edna Bay Light 3 (55056.5'N., 133ï¿½39.5'W.), 20 feet    depth in less than 20 fathoms.
above the water and shown from a small house with a green           (515) The cove on the N end of Heceta Island, just W of Camp
square daymark on the W escarpment of the bay, is the guide for a    Island and about 5 miles SW of Turn Point, is shoal in its E part.
channel between these shoals, leading NW to an inner bay. The    Protected anchorage for small craft can be found in the western-
10- and 14-foot shoals are near midchannel about 275 and 375    most of two bights at the head of the cove, with restricted swing-
yards, respectively, N of the light. Strangers should not attempt    ing room.
this channel without first obtaining local information.              (516) Gas Rock is the bare islet about 0.6 mile from Heceta
 (506)  Small boats will find excellent shelter in the extreme SW  Island and 4 miles E of Whale Head. Clump Island, 2.8 miles
part of the bay from winds from the SE through S to W, in depths    ENE of Gas Rock, is the outer one of a group 1.3 miles S of Eagle
of 3 to 12 fathoms, with good holding ground, sticky mud.          Island, with foul ground between. A shoal with depths of 43/4 to
 (507) Van Sant Cove is a small open bight on the W  side of    61/2 fathoms is about 0.9 mile SSW of Clump Island.
Davidson Inlet, about 4 miles NE of Edna Bay. A reef is off the S    (517) White Cliff Island is about 0.9 mile N of Eagle Island. It
point of the entrance.                                             is wooded and has a prominent white cliff on the SW side, Fox
 (508)  Tokeen Cove, opposite Van Sant Cove, is on the NW end    Rock is about 0.4 mile W of the Eagle Island group. Dove Island,
of Marble Island. Anchorage can be had W of the ruins of a wharf,    Owl Island, Hoot Island, and Cap Island are some of the small
on the E side of the cove, in 14 to 18 fathoms. Small craft can find    wooded islands in the N part of Sea Otter Sound. The passages
anchorage in 4 to 8 fathoms, soft bottom. The cove is shoal S of    between Owl Island, Hoot Island, and Orr Island should be used
the wharf site. A rock that uncovers 6 feet is 300 yards W from the    only with local knowledge.
NE point of the cove.                                                (518)  Cyrus Cove, N of Owl Island, is a small bight in the N
 (509) Tokeen Bay, on the E side of Davidson Inlet, about 12    part of the sound and is an excellent anchorage for small boats.
miles NE of Whale Head, extends ENE for about 4 miles. Its E       The best anchorage, in depths of 5 to 11 fathoms, good holding
side is connected with El Capitan Passage by a high-water boat    ground, mud bottom, is in the center of the N part where the cove
passage. A shoal, with about 1/2 fathoms over it, is in the middle    branches to E. Five fathoms can be carried through midchannel to
of the bay, about 2.4 miles E of the N point at the entrance. Else-    this anchorage. Smaller vessels may anchor in shoaler water in
where in the bay a midchannel course is clear, but there are rocks    midchannel in the E arm of the cove.
near the shores and care is required in its navigation.             (519) The channel close E of White Cliff Island is known as
  (510) Anchorage can be found in the middle of Tokeen Bay,    White Cliff Passage. A rock, with 9 feet over it, is in midchannel
about 0.5 mile E from the N point at the entrance in 14 to 16 fath-    about 0.35 mile SE of the SE end of White Cliff Island.
oms; also at the N end, NE side, and SE end of the bay. There are
several sheltered anchorages for small craft, one of which is at the  (520) Charts 17403, 17387.-El Capitan Passage has its
head of the bay behind the small islet in 4 fathoms, mud bottom.    entrance on the NE side of Sea Otter Sound. It extends about 18
The area E of the small wooded islands in the SE part of the bay    miles in a N direction from Sea Otter Sound to Aneskett Point,
also offers good anchorage in 4 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom.         then trends W for about 6.5 miles to Shakan Strait. The S part of
  (5sl) Marble Passage extends NE from the NE part of David-    the passage is 1 to 4 miles wide, forming a bay about 7 miles long
son Inlet between Marble Island  and Orr Island. The               with numerous rocks and islets. To the N of this section the pas-
approaches to the channel at each end are obstructed by rocks and    sage is 0.3 to 1 mile wide and is comparatively clear to Aneskett
ledges, and about midway between the ends the channel shoals to    Point. The shoreline should not be approached too closely, as
depths of about 2 feet. Numerous rocks both submerged and    numerous rocks, awash at various stages of the tide, are close-to.
awash are throughout the passage. The tides meet in the N part of    From a point about 3.5 miles W of Aneskett Point to Shakan Strait
this passage.                                                      a 12-foot channel has been dredged through the shoals to provide a
                                                                    protected route for fishing vessels and log rafts.
  (512)  Sea Otter Sound extends W from Karheen Passage and          (521) Numerous bights and inlets indent the shores of the pas-
Tuxekan Island along the N side of Heceta Island to Davidson    sage. The islands in the passage are heavily wooded without any
Inlet. Its NW shore is formed by numerous islands, large and    marked characteristics of interest to the navigator.
small. The sound is about 6 miles in extent, with depths of 15 to   (522)  Channels.-Local knowledge is desirable for safe naviga-
75 fathoms, irregular bottom. The sound has few desirable anchor-    tion through the channels in El Capitan Passage. This applies in
ages. With the assistance of the chart, depths suitable for anchor-    particular to the section between Aneskett Point and Shakan Strait,
age can be found on its E side, but care is required because of    including Dry Pass. From N of Tenass Island to Aneskett Point,







150                                     6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND


midchannel courses hold good; from Sea Otter Sound to Tenass        (531) Twin Islands are a group of small islands about 12 feet
Island, various courses among the islands may be followed. The    high about 0.6 mile W of the S end of E1l Capitan Island. Several
charts are the guide to safe navigation. The channel above Anes-    rocks are on the reef 0.4 mile NE of Twin Islands.
kett Point favors the S shore until about 1.8 miles W of the point,  (532) Fir Rock is a rock awash at higher high water 0.3 mile
where it takes a turn to the SSW and narrows. Here a small    WNW of Twin Islands. Rocks awash are close-to.
wooded islet in the midchannel should be left to the W. Then for    (533) Keski Island is a wooded island about i mile N of Knob
about 1.5 miles a midchannel course should be followed to the E    Island on the W side of El Capitan Island. Foul ground extends
end of a Federal project about 2.8 miles long that provides for a    250 yards W from the S end of the island, and irregular bottom
12-foot channel dredged through seven shoals, including Dry    extends 0.25 mile W off the NW part of the island.
Pass, to the W entrance of El Capitan Passage at Shakan Strait.     (534) Flat Island is a small island on the S end of the large shoal
Daybeacons mark the dredged sections of the channel. In June    area E of and close to Teal Island. To the NE of Flat Island is
1992, the controlling depth was 5 feet in the dredged sections of    another small island. Submerged rocks extend in a N direction
the channel except for lesser depths along the N channel edge    from Flat Island for 250 yards to a rock awash at high water.
between Daybeacons 5A and 6 and on the S side of the channel in     (535) White Point is the NW point of a bight on the W side of
the vicinity of Daybeacon 9.                                      E1l Capitan Island E of Singa Island. Foul ground extends for about
 (523) Anchorages.-All of El Capitan Passage is protected, and    100 yards S of White Point. Teal Island is the southernmost of
large vessels can anchor wherever the depths are suitable; the    three large islands W of El Capitan Island. Rocks extend off the S
chart is the best guide. Small craft can usually find anchorage in    shore for about 0.2 mile.
the bights and inlets that indent the shores of the passage.        (536) San Island is the largest and middle of the group W of El
 (524) Tides and currents.-The mean range of tide in El Capitan    Capitan Island. Between San Island and Teal Island are several
Passage is 8.7 feet and the diurnal range is 10.8 feet. In the S part    islets and foul ground.
of El Capitan Passage, the current floods N from Sea Otter Sound.  (537) Singa Island is the northernmost of the three large islands
In the channel between E1l Capitan Island and Tuxekan Island, the    W of El Capitan Island. Between Singa Island and San Island are
velocity of the current may reach 3 knots. In the channel N of Ten-    several islets with channels between, navigable by small boats.
ass Island the current is reported to be negligible. In Dry Pass, the  (538) Scow Island is a small island NNE of Singa Island and
current floods E with a velocity of 1.8 knots and ebbs W with a    about 0.3 mile NW of the N end of El Capitan Island.
velocity of 0.9 knot. (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily pre-  (539) Hub Rock (55056.5'N., 133017.8'W.), 8 feet high, almost
dictions.) High and low water in this vicinity occur at practically    in midchannel, E of El Capitan Island, is a prominent landmark
the same time as at Sitka.                                        marked by a daybeacon. Foul ground and irregular bottom extend
 (525) Chart 17403.-Cap Island is at the S entrance to the pas-    for almost 0.2 mile from N through W to S from the rock.
sage. Knob Island, about 0.5 mile N of Cap Island, is a small      (54o) Graveyard Island, about 1.4 miles NNE of Hub Rock, is
wooded island with two knobs. The channel between it and El    a small island with a few graves on it at the entrance to Sarkar
Capitan Island is about 100 yards wide and has depths of 2 to 3    Cove.
fathoms. Rocks are offshore on either side of this channel. Rocks   (541) Brockman Island, about 0.6 mile to the NW of Grave-
extend off the shore of the island for about 100 yards. Dot Island    yard Island, is the largest and most southerly of a group of three
is the larger of two islands about 0.3 mile N of the northernmost    islands.
point of Cap Island.                                                (542) Burnt Island is the small island about 325 yards NNE of
 (526) El Capitan Island is near the S end of the passage. A nar-    Brockman Island. The island is covered with a heavy growth of
row inlet is in the S side of the island where rocks and depths less    underbrush and a few young second-growth trees. Burnt Island
than 1 fathom are found. Off the SE end of the island, separated    Light 5 (55058.4'N., 133017.8'W.), 15 feet above the water, is
from it by a narrow, high-water channel, is a small wooded island.    shown from a skeleton tower with a square green daymark on the
A daybeacon marks a group of rocks off the E side of E1l Capitan    island.
Island. On the W side of E1l Capitan Island, about 1.6 miles N of   (543) Tenass Island, about 1 mile N of Burnt Island, is SE of
Knob Island, is a deep bight with three islands in the entrance.  the E entrance to Tenass Pass. A 4-fathom shoal is 0.6 mile NE of
 (527) New Tokeen is a small settlement at the head of the bight  the N end of the island.
                                                                     (544) Sarkar Cove, on the E side of E1l Capitan Passage, is
 (528) New Tokeen Harbor Entrance Light (55ï¿½56.2'N.,    entered about 1.3 miles SE of Burnt Island Light 5, and is about 6
133"19.9'W.), 35 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton    miles from Sea Otter Sound and about 18 miles from Shakan
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the S end    Strait (chart 17387). The cove affords good anchorage in 6 to 8
of the southernmost island at the entrance.
                                                                   fathoms, mud bottom. A large lake empties into the head of the
 (529) The bight is entered from the S through a clear channel. A  cove through a series of rapids. Water at the lower end of the lake
wharf, with a 100-foot face and reported to be in poor condition, is   is brackish, and at the head is fresh. The lake is an important
on the N side of the bight; depths of about 24 feet were reported    spawning ground for red salmon.
alongside in 1976. A mooring float 180 feet long is anchored in     (545) In entering Sarkar Cove favor the N shore to avoid a rock,
the bight for the use of fishing vessels. Limited amounts of ice,    awash at high water, 0.6 mile NE of Sarkar Point. A 3'/2-fathom
gasoline, diesel fuel, water, and provisions can be had during the    patch is 0.2 mile E of Graveyard Island.
fishing season.                                                     (546) On the N side of Sarkar Cove are the ruins of a few houses
 (530) New Tokeen maintains radiotelephone communications    and a wharf.
with other parts of Alaska and with other States. Charter seaplane  (547) Salt Water Lagoon is about 0.5 mile NE of Sarkar Cove.
service is available with Ketchikan and communities on Prince of    It is connected to Tunga Inlet by short rapids. Water ebbs from
Wales Island.                                                     the lagoon for about 21/2 hours after low water. At slack water,







                                         6. WEST COAST OF PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND                                               151


about 2ï¿½/ hours after high water, a launch drawing 4 feet may pass    Sarkar Cove (see chart 17403) and about 6 miles S from Aneskett
through the entrance into the lagoon.                              Point. Depths of 8 to 10 fathoms were found within the cove
 (548) Clam Cove is a small cove about 1.1 miles N of Sarkar    except toward the head where it is shoal.
Cove. Clam Island and rocks block the S part of the entrance. The    (552) Devilfish Bay is on the W  side of the passage about 3
head of the cove is shoal. Mariners should navigate with caution,    miles NNW of the entrance to Sarheen Cove and 3.5 miles S of
referring to the latest edition of the chart.                      Aneskett Point. The bay consists of two parts connected by a nar-
 (549) Rocky Cove is a small cove about 0.4 mile N of Clam    rows; the E part has depths of 34 to 52 fathoms at the entrance,
Cove. In midchannel, off the entrance, is a rock awash at minus    shoaling to 71/2 fathoms about 0.1 mile from the narrows. The
tides with deep water on all sides; it is usually marked by kelp.    bight in the N corner of this part of the bay is shoal.
The cove is foul.                                                   (553) The narrows, about 170 yards wide, expands into an arm
                                                                  with depths of 7 l/2 to 18 fathoms at midchannel to within 0.8 mile
 (550) Tenass Pass, N of Spanberg Island, candc Barockman   Pof the head. About 0.5 mile from the head of the arm, in midchan-
Pass, S of the island, connect Tokeen Bay with E1 Capitan Pas-    nel is a submerged rock with 3/4 fathom over it. The narrows is
sage. Both passes bare at low water. Tenass Pass carries slightly nl sasbegdrc ih34fto vriTenrosi
sage. Both passes bare at low water. Tenass Pass carries shighly    constricted by a rock in midchannel, awash at high water. Depths
more water than Brockman Pass, but is very narrow, having a    of 3 V2 fathoms W and 5 fathoms E of the rock were found, but the
width of 25 feet at one place where the current exceeds 5 knots at    channel should not be attempted until seen at low water. Currents
                time. Bats rawng 7fee hav goe thoug Brokma Pas onchannel should not be attempted until seen at low water. Currents
times. Boats drawing 7 feet have gone through Brockman Pass on    of 2 to 3 knots were observed in the vicinity of the rock.
                extreme high tides. ~~~~~~~~~of 2 to 3 knots were observed in the vicinity of the rock.
                 ~~~~~~extreme high tides.  ~(554) Aneskett Point, bold and wooded, is on the W side of the
                                                                  passage where its trend turns from N to W. N from the point is a
 (55l)  Chart 17387.-Sarheen Cove (56ï¿½03.0'N., 133ï¿½15.9'W.)    wooded island that may be passed on either side.
is on the E shore of El Capitan Passage about 5.3 miles N of








                                                  7 SUMNER STRAIT

 (1)   This chapter describes Iphlgenia Bay, Sumner Strait, and     (17)  2  Momtor VHF-FM channels 13 and 16 and hsten for
the many bays bordering it the S part of Keku Strait including    broadcasts by deep draft vessels m the area
Rocky Pass, Duncan Canal Wrangell Narrows, Dry Strait Stikne         (18)  3 Provide for two-way traffic of large vessels along the
River and the city and harbor of Petersburg                        designated tracklines
                                                                    (19) 4 Warn other glllnetters if they appear to be in the lane
 (2)   Charts 17360, 17400 -Sumner Strait is one of the great    when there is commercial vessel traffic approaching
mlets into southeastern Alaska from the sea The strait has three     (20)  5 Do not place sleep sets within or adjacent to the ship-
entrances The main entrance from the sea, between Coronation    ping lane
Island and Warren Island, is about 5 8 miles wide Warren Chan-       (21)  Currents -From the S entrance to Sumner Stralt in Iphl-
nel, the entrance E of Warren Island between it and Cape Pole is    genia Bay, the current floods N to the vlcmlty of Point Baker
about 1 2 miles wide and is used by vessels bound to and from    where it turns E with an estimated velocity of 2 knots W  of
Davidson Inlet and Bucareh Bay Decision Passage the entrance    Zarembo Island the current divides One branch passes through
between Cape Decision and the Spanish Islands is about I mile    Snow and Kashevarof Passages and meets the flood current from
wide and is used by vessels bound to and from Chatham Strait       Clarence Strait near Key Reef The second branch sets N and E of
These entrances are descnbed under separate headings               the island until it meets and is overcome by the current from the
 (3)   The usual route of vessels bound N from Clarence Strait is    Stikine River The ebb sets in generally the opposite direction with
by way of Snow Passage or Stikme Strait to Sumner Strait and    considerably greater velocity The edge of the current from the
thence to Wrangell Narrows Vessels too large to make the passage    Stikine River is well defined by its muddy white appearance Near
through Wrangell Narrows with safety continue W through Sum        the end of the ebb it is sometimes noticed to be W  of Vank Island
ner Strait round Cape Decision and go N through Chatham Strait    and S in Chlchagof Pass and Stikine Strait Between Point Baker
or W  to sea by way of Cape Ommaney In fog or thick weather,    and Strait Island, the irregulanties of the bottom produce heavy
vessels bound around Cape Decision instead of using the channel    swirls and surface disturbances
N of Spamsh Islands can continue S and round Helm Point enter-
                                                                    (22)  The ebb current flows from the vicinity of Wrangell
img Chatham Strait between Hazy Islands and Coronation Island,    through Sumner Strait and through Stlkine Strait and Chlchagof
or pass to sea S of Hazy Islands Almost all of Sumner Strait has    Pass to Clarence Strait
been examined, and the dangers are shown on the chart
                                                                    (23)  It is reported that strong currents and heavy tide nps occur
 (4)   Voluntary vessel traffic procedures have been adopted    off Cape Decision, Fairway Island Point St Albans, and the small
for gillnet vessels and deep-draft vessels transiting the N section    islands to the N
of Clarence Strait, Snow Passage, and Sumner Strait m the vlcmlty
of Point Baker  Traffic lanes, about 0 2 mile wide have been         (24)  (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictons)
established for these areas as follows                               (25)  Weather -The S part of Sumner Strait is most susceptible
 (5)   3280 from a point in Clarence Strait abeam of Point Stan-    to strong winds with a S component whereas the N part is vulner-
hope in about 55ï¿½59 4'N  132039 8'W to about 56009 3'N              able to easterlies These winds blow year round, but are strongest
13250 8'W, thence,                                                 from October through February when gales in the nearby open sea
 (6)   3330 to a point about 56'15 91'N, 132057 0'W, thence    occur about 10 percent of the time and wave heights of 10 feet or
                around the E side of Bushy Island to about 5617 2'N  more are encountered about 15 to 20 percent of the time many of
132058 0'W thence                                                  these open-ocean waves arrive from SE through SW Reduced vis-
 132ï¿½8(7)    99toapointWabout 56018 6'N  133004 9'W thence,        ibility is a problem from June through September Visibilities of
                                                                  less than 2 miles are encountered 10 to 15 percent of the time,
 (8)   3150 to a point about 56ï¿½21 0'N, 133ï¿½09 5'W, thence,        most often m the N part of the Straut
 (9)   2770 to a point about 56ï¿½23 0'N, 133ï¿½38 7'W  thence
around Point Baker about midway between Helm Rock and Man-
                                                                    (26)  Chart 17400 -Iphlgenla Bay extends between the Mau-
        ~~posa  Retoapitaot50 N,1339Wthnrelle Islands on the E and Coronation Island on the W, and is the
 (10) 2040 to a point abeam of Calder Rocks in about
 (6)  20 4ï¿½5 to a point abeam of Calder Rocks in about    approach from the sea to Sumner Strait, Warren Channel, Davld-
                                                                  son Inlet, Bocas de Finas, Sonora, and Arriaga Passages The
 (11)  Cruise ships ferry vessels, and other deep-draft vessels    depths are generally good but the bottom is very irregular, and
are requested to observe the following practices                   there are several dangers On the E side of the bay deep water pre-
 (12)   1 Announce your presence 30-45 minutes prior to enter-    vails until within 1 5 miles of a line passing from the NW end of
ing the areas and at regular intervals while transiting through the    St Joseph Island to Timbered Islet to Losa Islet, where the depths
area                                                               become irregular
 (13)  2  Avoid meeting and do not overtake vessels in Snow         (27)  Vessels bound from the S for Davldson Inlet and Warren
Passage                                                            Channel should give Timbered Islet a berth of 1 to 1 5 rmles those
 (14)  3  Travel along indicated tracklines as much as possible    bound for Sumner Strait should favor the Coronation Island side
and maintain a safe speed                                          of the entrance Those bound for Cape Ommaney can pass
 05)  Gillnet vessels should                                       between Hazy Islands and Coronation Island on a midchannel
 (16)   1  Adequately mark the net end with lights and radar    course or pass outside of the Hazy Islands giving them a berth of
reflectors                                                         at least 1 mile


152






                                                       7. SUMNER STRAIT                                                         153


 (28)  Charts 17386, 17402.-Warren Island is almost rectan-    miles S from the SW point of Kosciusko Island; Black Rock, the
gular in shape, with numerous peaks. Warren Peak,near the N        southernmost, is 50 feet high and pointed on top. Cape Pole is the
end of the island, is snow covered from November to May. From    W  point of Kosciusko Island. In July 1975, a rock awash was
N it shows prominently as a sharp, almost conical peak. From W,    reported S of Black Rock in about 55ï¿½52'00"N., 133ï¿½45'41"W.
the skyline appears as a series of jagged summits; near the S end    (38)  The tidal currents set N on the flood and S on the ebb. The
of the island it appears lower and rounding. From the S, the sky-    currents have a velocity of 1.4 knots on the flood and 2.4 knots on
line appears ragged and irregular. The land rises abruptly from the    the ebb. Heavy tide rips form NW of the entrance to Pole Anchor-
shore and is heavily timbered; the peaks are generally bare.       age.
 (29)  With the exception of small stretches of sand beach in       (39)  Halibut Harbor, on the S side of Kosciusko Island, E of
Warren Cove, False Cove, and in the two small coves in the N       its SW point, is protected by numerous islands and affords anchor-
coast, the shoreline is a rocky shelf. Off-lying rocks that bare at    age for small vessels in 16 fathoms. The entrance is foul, and only
different stages of the tide are from 50 to 600 yards off the W    those with local knowledge should attempt to enter.
coast and about 175 yards off the S coast.
                                                            coast and about 175 yards off the S coast.  (40)  Coronation Island, W of Warren Island, is triangular in
 (30)  Off the S end of Warren Island are three groups of danger-    shape, divided into three peninsulas by Windy Bay on the W side
ous, rocky, unmarked shoals. The outermost group, about 2.8    and Aats Bay on the N side, the heads of which are separated by a
miles S of Boot Point, does not show but breaks occasionally with    range 1 mile in the center of the island. From offshore the NE
a long heavy break at low water. Another group, about 2.7 miles    peninsula shows heavily wooded ridges of moderate slopes, but
                                                                    peninsula shows heavily wooded ridges of moderate slopes, but
SW of Boot Point, has two rocks awash, one of which uncovers S    without characteristics of interest to the navigator. The W  and N
feet. The third group, about 1.5 miles SW of the point, has a rocky    sides of the island are described with Chatham Strait.
islet 15 feet high. Alice Rocks, with a least depth of 13/4 fathoms,
are about 0.3 mile NW of the islet. Between the islet and Boot       (41)  The S end of Coronation Island appears from offshore to
Point heavy tide rips were observed when the wind was against the    the W as timbered ridges with gentle slopes from Needle Peak, in
        current. Broken ground and shoals with a least depth of 2 fathoms    the center of the island, to Helm Point, where they terminate in
cuwere found iBroken this areaound and it should be avoided.       yellow and reddish cliffs. The summit of Needle Peak is not very
 (3)  Pouint Borlase is an indefinite point at the NW end of War-    definite and appears flat with a series of sharp knobs of a grayish
 (3!)  Point Borlase is an indefinite point at the NW end ofWar-    olor
ren Island. Borlase Rock, with two rocky heads that uncover 3
feet and generally show as a breaker, is 0.7 mile W of Point Bor-    (42)  Windy Peak, on the NW side of Windy Bay, is prominent.
lase. A group of rocks with a least depth of 2 fathoms is from 1.3    From the W and SW it shows as a cone marked by a large land-
to 1.6 miles S of Borlase Rock and about 0.5 mile offshore. A 61/  slide. From the NW and S it shows as a flat-topped mountain with
fathom spot is about 0.4 mile NE of the N end of Warren Island. A  a small knob on the W end.
large kelp patch with a depth of 33/4 fathoms is 500 yards off the  (43)  Pin Peak, on the NW end of the island, is easily recog-
NW shore of the island about 1.4 miles NE of Point Borlase.        nized as a long ridge covered with trees and shrubs. Near the S
 (32)  The two small coves in the NW coast of the island close E   part of the ridge is a conspicuous knob or point. The ridge for sev-
of Point Borlase offer protection for small craft in SE weather.    eral hundred feet below the summit is loose rock, without vegeta-
Anchorage may be had in 4 fathoms, mud bottom.                     tion, and shows as light yellow from a W  direction. The peak is
 (33)  Warren Cove is on the E shore of Warren Island, about 2    not conspicuous from a N direction, because it shows against
miles from the S end. In entering, favor the S shore and give it a    higher peaks to the S. From the summit the ridge has a rounding
berth of at least 300 yards until inside the entrance, thereby avoid-    slope to the depression between it and Windy Peak. To the N the
ing a shoal covered 11/2 fathoms that extends about 250 yards N    slope is gradual and drops in a long hollow or concave shoulder to
from the S point at the entrance. A rock awash is 250 yards S of    a height of 900 feet, where there is an abrupt and noticeable
the N point at the entrance. Between this rock and the shore is a    change to a steep slope that ends at the shoreline.
bare rock. This area is usually kelp-marked. At low water a sand     (44)  Helm Point, perhaps the most conspicuous and prominent
beach extends a considerable distance from the head of the cove.    headland in southeastern Alaska, is the S extremity of Coronation
There is a small gravel beach just inside the entrance on the S side    Island. Differing from most of the capes and points in this section,
of the cove; the light color of it may often be distinguished at    which have moderate slopes, it rises vertically in sheer weather-
night.                                                             beaten cliffs to a height of 1,085 feet and ends abruptly in what
 (34)  Anchorage may be had in 7 fathoms, sand bottom, in the    appears to be flat tableland. The point is cut by numerous crevices
center of Warren Cove. A heavy swell enters the cove during SE     and caves, one of which shows prominently from the S. Devoid of
weather. At night, in the approach to the cove from the S, the    vegetation, of a light yellow to reddish color, barren and bleak, it
entrance is not readily picked up, because the headland to the N   is the nesting place of thousands of sea birds. Local conditions are
shows prominently, while that to the S does not, and the entrance    such that it is generally visible in moderately thick weather when
to False Cove is easily mistaken for that to Warren Cove.          other sections are not visible. In approaching Helm Point in thick
 (35)  False Cove, the small bight 1.5 miles N of Warren Cove,    weather, the soundings give very little indication of shoaling or the
affords anchorage in depths of 4 to 5 fathoms, sand bottom, behind    existence of rocks. Two rocks, awash at half tide, and a reported 5-
the kelp-marked rocks awash that extend across the N half of the    fathom shoal, are 1.4 miles 240ï¿½, and 0.4 mile SE, respectively,
entrance.                                                          from Helm Point Light.
 (36)  Local magnetic distrubance.-Differences of as much as        (45)  Helm Point Light (55049.6'N., 134ï¿½16.2'W.), 140 feet
4ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed in False Cove.         above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
  (37)  Warren Channel leads between Warren Island and    white diamond-shaped daymark on the S extremity of a point
Kosciusko Island to the E. No outlying dangers were found in    about 0.4 mile ENE of Helm Point. This point has the appearance
the channel proper, which has depths of 17 to more than 100 fath-    of a dome-shaped grassy islet that is prominent from NE and SW.
oms. Numerous islets and rocks above water extend about 2.8    The light marks the W side of the entrance to Sumner Strait.





154                                                 7  SUMNER STRAIT


  (46)  China Cove, just N of Helm Point Light, is an open bight   (59)  Charts 17360, 17386, 17402 -This section covers the W
into which a heavy swell enters in SE weather The sandy bottom    side of Sumner Strait from Cape Decision to the S entrance to
slopes gently, and anchorage may be had m 5 to 10 fathoms        Keku Strait From Iphlgenla Bay to Strait Island, Sumner Straut
  (47)  From Helm Point to Cora Point, the coastline is marked by    follows a N direction, and at Strait Island It turns E to its junction
ledges and cliffs Rocks extend about 600 yards offshore          with Stikine Strait near the town of Wrangell
  (48)  Cora Point is the extremity of a projecting ledge at the   (60)  The W side of Sumner Strait between Cape Decision and
NE end of Coronation Island Cora Island, a small wooded islet    Keku Strait is indented with many inlets and bays, and has many
about 0 7 mile S of Cora Point, is about 170 feet high and has a    islets, rocks, and reefs that extend from 1 to 2 miles off the maun
cluster of rocks close-to A clump of trees on the island shows    shore into the strait Lighted buoys mark the outermost dangers
prominently from the direction of Helm Point Small craft may       (61)  Fairway Island (56ï¿½02 4' N, 134ï¿½03 I'W), small and
find protected anchorage in SE weather behind the island, i 6    wooded, is on the W side of the S end of Sumner Strait about 3 6
fathoms, mud and gravel bottom                                   miles NE of Cape Decision Light It IS surrounded by kelp, rocks,
  (49)  The Spanish Islands are a chain of wooded Islands and    and reefs, bare at various stages of tide Two rocks with 6- and 7-
rocks that extend N from the NE extremity of Coronation Island m  foot heights are 0 5 mile S of the island and nearby is another rock
the direction of Cape Decision At its NE end, the S large island    that uncovers 10 feet
has a wooded summit that shows prominently from the W  A small     (62)  Port McArthur is about 4 5 miles N of Cape Decision It
rocky islet with a scrub growth is 0 3 mile off the W shore      is protected at the entrance by a group of islands and reefs and It
 (50)  A submerged rock is about 1 6 miles WV NW of the NW       affords anchorage that is not secure because large swells run to the
end of the southernmost of the Spanish Islands During severe    head of the bay For small craft the most secure anchorage is in 4
weather the seas pile up heavily Rocks awash and submerged    fathoms behind South Island In bad weather the landing can be
rocks extend up to 0 2 mile off the E side of the N island       made behid the sland, from where an emergency trail leads to
 (51)  A narrow 20-fathom channel separates Coronation Island    Cape Decision Light In 1968, this traiul was reported poorly main-
and the S Spanish Island The chart shows the dangers, and    tamed and difficult to follow The entrance to Port McArthur leads
courses can be laid out as desired Tide nps are usually very heavy    N and W  of North Island and has a clear width of 300 yards
in this channel                                                  between the kelp patches Freshwater can be had from small
 (52)  A channel 120 yards wide with depths of 8 to 12 fathoms    streams at the head of the harbor
is between the S large Spanish Island and the small islet off its N  (63)  North Island and South Island, at the entrance to Port
end Between this small islet and the small islet to the NE of it IS a    McArthur, are low and wooded with surrounding ledges they are
narrow channel with depths of 8 to 9 fathoms Small craft some-    about 0 5 mile apart N and S Between them is a rocky islet and
times anchor in 8 to 14 fathoms in the bight formed by these islets    numerous rocks awash and ledges surrounded by kelp The pas-
and the rmiddle island
                                                                   sages S of South Island, and between South and North Islands, are
 (53)  The middle island has an elevation of 370 feet near Its N  shoal and rocky and should not be attempted without local knowl-
end with a moderate slope to the S From offshore It appears as a    edge
flat ridge A rocky islet 35 feet high, is 0 3 mile off the E side of
                                                                    (64)  Two large kelp patches are about 0 4 mile and 0 5 male E
the island near its S end Broken ground and submerged rocks are
                between ts islet and the mddle island            and ESE, respectively, from North Island The S patch has a least
                between ths islet and the middle island          depth of 1/2 fathoms and the N patch has a least depth of 3 fath-
 (54)  Spanish Islands Light (55059 2'N, 134ï¿½06 3'W), 38 feet            oms
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
    white diamond-shaped daymark on the N extremty of the north-   (65)  Kelp patches and an area of foul ground extend to the W
ernmost of the Spansh Islands The light marks the SE side of    and N of North Island for a distance of 0 3 mile When entering
Decision Passage                                                 Port McArthur, give this area a good berth
 (55)  Cape Decision, the S extremity of Kuiu Island, IS a low,   (66)  Lemon Point, on the opposite side of the entrance chan-
bare rocky point, from which the land rises gradually to an irregu-    nel, is low and has several bare rocks off it On the SE and S sides
lar timbered ridge It stands out well when approached from a    kelp extends a short distance out, and the point should be given a
direction to pass through the passage between It and the Spamsh    berth of 400 yards in rounding into the port A rock, covered at
Islands Avoid the large kelp patches 1 5 and 2 miles NW from the    half tide, 0 4 mile ENE of the outer bare rock off Lemon Point, is
cape and about 0 8 mile off the Kum Island shore                 marked by Lemon Point Rock Light (56004 4'N, 134006 7W)
 (56)  Cape Decislon Light (56000 1'N, 134008 2'W), 96 feet    26 feet above the water and shown from a small house on a pier,
above the water is shown from a white square tower on a white    with a red triangular daymark on a skeleton tower The rock is sur-
square building at the S end of the cape A fog signal is at the    rounded by kelp and is the only senous danger on the W side of
light                                                            the channel
 (57)  Decision Passage, 1 mile wide between Cape Decision        (67)  To enter Port McArthur, pass N and W of North Island and
and the Spanish Islands, is used by large vessels bound from Sum-    SE of Lemon Point Rock Light When the outer rock off Lemon
ner Strait to Chatham Strait or Cape Ommaney The passage is    Point is abeam, round the point and keep in midchannel to the
clear however the cape and the islands should be given a berth of    anchorage
not less than 0 2 mile Vessels rounding the cape are cautioned to  (68)  The shores of Port McArthur are steep-to, the 5-fathom
give this area sufficient berth                                  curve is less than 200 yards off the high water line except at the
 (58)  The large body of water to the W of the Spanish Islands    head of the bay Anchorage depths are about 16 fathoms with the
and to the N of Coronation Island has been closely surveyed and    exception of S of Lemon Point where there Is a depth of 12 fath-
all dangers found are shown on the chart After prolonged severe    oms
gales very heavy breakers have been seen on spots where the       (69)  Affleck Canal, the entrance to which is W of Point St
shoalest water was found                                         Albans and NW of Fairway Island, is 14 miles long in a N dlrec-







                                                       7. SUMNER STRAIT                                                        155


tion. The depths in general are great but very irregular, especially  (80)  A midchannel course is followed in the middle arm until
near the shores and at the head of the canal.                     about 1 mile from the entrance when the E shore is followed at a
 (70j  Marble Islet, named from its formation, marks the W        distance of about 200 yards. This arm is deep to within 0.5 mile of
point of 'the entrance to Affileck Canal. Near it are several small    its head where it shoals gradually to the tidal flats off the mouth of
islets.                                                           the principal streams that empty into Bear Harbor.
 (71)  Bush Islets, on the S side of the entrance to Kell Bay, are  (sl)  On the W shore of Affleck Canal, about 3 miles N of Bear
three in number, and from 10 to 12 feet high. The two N islets are    Harbor, is a grass-topped islet, about 5 feet high. A depth of about
sparsely wooded. The area to the W is foul and covered with thick    10 fathoms can be carried to about 1 mile S of the head of the
kelp during the summer.                                           canal by favoring the W  shore at all times in order to avoid the
 (72)  A dangerous rock, covered 1 fathom, is in Affleck Canal,    extensive kelp patches and shoals in the E side. About 1 mile S of
1,300 yards 151ï¿½ from the center of Bush Islets. From this rock a    the head of the canal, the E shore is foul and studded with rocks;
kelp patch extends in a NW direction for about 250 yards.         the foul area extends from 300 to 400 yards offshore.
  (73)  Kell Bay is about 7 miles N of Fairway Island on the W      (82)  The two main inlets on the E side of Affleck Canal are not
side of Affleck Canal. One mile inside the entrance and about 500    recommended as shelter; the heavy ground swell runs into both,
yards off the S shore is a wooded islet 10 feet high; deep water    well toward their heads. The entrances of both are free of obstruc-
exists between this islet and the S shore of the bay. An area of foul    tions. The S inlet, which is about 500 yards long, is about 5.5
water, marked by thick kelp in the summer, extends for a distance    miles N of the E entrance point of Affleck Canal. Inside are depths
of about 0.4 mile NW from the N end of the islet. Within this area    of 5 to 7 fathoms, soft bottom. A group of rocks that bare 7 feet
are several rocks and islets, bare from 3 to 15 feet at high water,    and are surrounded by kelp are about 0.7 mile 2320 from the S
and, in addition, there are rocks with,2 to 9 feet over them at low    entrance point of this inlet.
water. The N shore of the bay is very broken, with numerous         (83)  The N inlet about 1 mile further N has an entrance about
indentations, wooded islets, and rocks.                           350 yards in width, and extends E for about 0.8 mile. Its center has
  (74)  At the head of the bay are two arms that extend in a NW    depths of 9 to 12 fathoms. Vessels desiring to enter this inlet
and SW direction. The NW arm is about 1.5 miles long. Two    should favor the N shore, as a rock that bares 6 feet is about 340
 wooded islands and numerous rocks mark the S side of the    yards inside the entrance and about 70 yards off the S shore.
 entrance. Vessels entering this arm should proceed with caution,   (84)  Point St. Albans is about 7.5 miles NE of Cape Decision.
 favoring the N shore until abreast the largest wooded islet, and    Rocks and heavy kelp extend 1.1 miles S, and a 3-fathom spot is
 then favor the S shore in order to avoid the rocks awash and bare 8    1.8 miles S of the point; heavy tide rips and swirls may be experi-
 feet at low water, near the N shore. The entrance to the extreme    enced off this extensive kelp patch. Off-lying rocks and reefs
 head of the.arm is blocked by obstructions that do not permit entry    extend to a distance of 0.3 mile offshore along the E shore of
 of even small vessels at low tides.                               Affleck Canal to the point opposite Marble Islet.
  (75)  The SW arm is separated from the main body of Kell Bay      (85)  Point St. Albans Reef is an extensive foul area, about 1.6
 by three wooded islands. To enter, pass midchannel between the    miles ENE of Point St. Albans, The highest part of this area is a
 islands and the SW. shore, follow the SW shore at a distance of    rock awash at high water, in the NW part of the kelp patch.
 150 yards until the S point of the W island has passed abeam.    Numerous other rocks bare at various stages of the tide. A lighted
 Then stand in midchannel, taking care to round the S side of the    bell buoy, off the end of the reef, also marks a 61/2-fathom shoal.
 island at a distance of 200 yards so as to avoid the ledge that    Vessels should pass to the E of the buoy.
 extends about 150 yards offshore. Anchorage may be had in 9 to
                                                                       (86) From Point St. Albans to Point Amelius, about 7.5 miles
 12 fathoms, soft bottom.
                   (76) Thebasin at the headotheWarmto the N, islands and reefs extend offshore to a distance of 1.5
                                                                     miles. This section of the coast is foul and marked by kelp. A rock
 anchorage for small craft in depths of 4 to 5 fathoms, soft bottom.    awash at low water is in the kelp patch about 28 miles NE of
 The entrance is constricted, being only 30 to 35 yards wide, and
                                                                      Point St. Albans. There are passages between and inside the group
 vessels entering are advised to proceed with caution keeping close
                                                                      of islets located 4 miles N of Point St. Albans. This area is foul,
 to the W shore, which is abrupt and steep-to.
                                                             e W shore, which is abrupt and steep-to.  with numerous rocks and kelp patches, and only those with local
   (77) Affleck Canal is clear E of the small wooded islet, about
                    (77)  Afeck Canalis clear E of the small wooded islet, about    knowledge should enter. Small vessels may find shelter in the two
  10 feet in elevation, about 1 mile N of Kell Bay. There are several
                                                                      small bays 3 miles and 4.5 miles N of Point St. Albans. The bays
 rocks in the immediate vicinity of this islet. A lagoon, connected
                                                                      are exposed to the E, and there are shoals off the approaches.
 with Affleck Canal at high water, is on the W shore about 2 milest depth of
  N of Kell Bay.                                                      (87)  Amelius Island Shoal, a rocky shoal with a least depth of
   (78)  Bear Harbor is on the W  side of Affleck Canal, about 4    41/4 fathoms, is about 1.8 miles ESE of Amelius Island, the outer-
  miles N of Kell Bay. From the entrance to its head, it is about 2    most islet off Point Amelius. A lighted buoy is on the  side of the
  miles long in a NW direction. The harbor has three arms; the E is   shoal. Deep-draft vessels should avoid passing close to the buoy.
  deep and open to the S; the middle and W  arms are sheltered and    (88)  The bight W of Point Amelius is exposed to the SE and is
  afford suitable anchorage for small vessels. The approach to these    used only as a temporary anchorage. Louise Cove, on its W side
  two arms is S of the island at the entrance. The deepest part of the    near the head, affords anchorage for small vessels in 31/2 fathoms.
  channel, about 51/4 fathoms, is 100 yards off the shore of the     (89)  An isolated 31/4-fathom shoal is about 2.5 miles N of Ame-
  island. Favor the shore of this island in entering and navigate with    lius Island and about 0.3 mile offshore.
  caution. After the E tip of the island is passed abeam by 100 yards,  (90)  Port Beauclerc is a large arm on the W  side of Sumner
  a midchannel course will lead over a 1/2-fathom spot marked by    Strait, the entrance to which is about 11 miles N of Point St.
  kelp. This spot is the end of a reef making out from the S shore.  Albans and 10 miles WSW of Point Baker. Beauclere Island,
    (79)  After the entrance is passed, midchannel courses lead into    small and wooded, is off the middle of the entrance, with a
  the W arm that is deep except along the S shore near the head.    wooded islet close N of it.




156                                                   7  SUMNER STRAIT


 (91)  Beauclere Island Light (56ï¿½15 4'N, 133051 3'W) 30            (104) Charts 17360, 17402 -Warren Channel to Point Baker
feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red    covers the E shore of Sumner Strait below Strait Island Shipley
and white diamond-shaped daymark on a rock on the E side of the    Bay, Shakan Bay Shakan Strait, and Port Protection are the
island A reef extends 300 yards E from the small wooded islet      Important harbors in this section The coast is bold and rugged
 (92)  The narrow passage S of Edwards Island is clear and    with many off-lying rocks and islets Calder Rocks and Helm
deep in midchannel The E shore of the cove NW of Edwards    Rock are the pnncipal offshore dangers
Island, is formed by a small island with a very small Islet off its N  (lo5) Voluntary vessel traffic procedures have been estab-
end The entrance to the cove is N of the islet                     hshed for gillnet vessels and deep-draft vessels transiting Sumner
 (93)  There is anchorage, exposed to the S, m the bight on the E  Strait m the viclmty of Point Baker  See the descnption of Sum-
shore, 3 miles from the entrance to Port Beauclerc                 ner Strait at the beginning of this chapter for designated tracklines
 (94)  Anchorage in Port Beauclerc may be had N of the small    and procedures
island that is about 1 4 rmles N of Edwards Island but the anchor-   (106) Pole Anchorage, on the E side of the S end of Sumner
age is obstructed by a large kelp patch, with a depth of 3 fathoms    Strait, affords an anchorage for small vessels protected from NE
and possibly less which Is 0 7 mile N from the small island Good    and SE winds, it is exposed to W winds and swells The SW point
anchorage may be found S of Edwards Island m 20 fathoms, sand    of the entrance is a large mass of grassy-topped rocks about 10
bottom, enter from the E in midchannel on a course of 2780         feet high, that extend about 0 6 mile N of Cape Pole, the passage
Small-boat anchorage is available in the small cove W  of the    between them and the cape has many bare rocks and almost dnes
charted rock awash on the S side of this island, or in the cove on    There is considerable kelp for some distance N of the grassy-
the Kum Island side S of the E end of Edwards Island               topped rocks The N point at the entrance is a wooded islet close to
 (95)  Anchorage may also be had m the S arm in 4 or 6 fathoms,    shore, kelp extends some distance NW of it also about 100 yards
mud bottom Enter by the narrow passage S of Edwards Island and    W
slightly favor the E shore of the arm to avoid a sunken rock,        (107) Anchorage can be had m 10 to 11 fathoms mud bottom,
marked by kelp, 1 mile W of the W end of the narrow passage S of    with the N end of Warren Island showing about midway between
Edwards Island On the E shore of the arm, 1 mile SE from the    Cape Pole and the grassy-topped rocks Small fishing vessels may
narrow passage, is a point close to a 3 /2-fathom spot             find sintable anchorage SE of Cape Pole E of a large kelp patch
 (96)  Caution -Where local knowledge is lacking, caution is    m any desired depth
advised in entenng Port Beauclerc                                    (10s) Fishermans Harbor, a bight NE of Pole Anchorage, is
 (97)  Boulder Point, about 4 miles N from Beauclerc Island, is    used extensively by small fishing craft Cape Pole is a settlement
                                                                   used extensively by small fishing craft Cape Pole IS a settlement
a bold rounding point with numerous rocks close-to
 (9)a b   old rounding point w ith  num erous  rocks close-to trait3mat the E side of the harbor A 60-foot small-craft and seaplane float
                                                                   Is operated by a logging camp on the E side of the harbor In 1976,
Boulder Point It has two islets and several outlying rocks along its   the reported depth alongside was 18 feet A T-shaped wharf is on
NW shore and rocks awash S of the islets in midchannel Small         e             the harbor opposite the small-craft and seaplane
                                                                   the SW side of the harbor opposite the small-craft and seaplane
craft may anchor m the cove on the W  side of the peninsula pomt    float In June 1983, the T-shaped wharf was reported not i use S
at the S side of the entrance to the bay m 5 to 6 fathoms, mud bot-    of the small-craft and seaplanefloat are groups of piling used for
tom There are dangers off the points at the entrance to this cove,
                                                                   log storage Gasoline, water, hmlted provisions, and a small
and it should be entered with caution A kelp-marked reef with    machine shop are available m an emergency only A freight boat
rocks awash is 1 8 miles WSW from the S end of Sumner Island
                                                                   from Ketchlkan visits weekly, and radiotelephone commumca-
 (99)  Sumner Island is 4 3 miles NNE of Boulder Point It has    tions are maitaied
steep, rocky shores and is surrounded by small rocky islets that
                                                                     (109) Fishermans Harbor Light (55O58 0'N 133ï¿½47 7'W) 17
extend NW to Kuiu Island and SE from the SE point of the island    feet above the water, is  s hown from a skeleton tower with a red
for about 0 5 mnle Several reefs extend a short distance off the NE  and white diamond-shaped daymark on the edge of a reef on the
shore of the Island and should be approached with caution          and white diamond-shaped daymark on the edge of a reef on the
                                                                   SE side of the harbor A daybeacon is on a reef on the E side of the
 (loo) Alvin Bay, NW of Sumner Island is clear of dangers
except for a depth of 13/4 fathoms in the center near where It starts
to narrow At this point a small islet is on the S side of the bay with  (lo) To enter Fishermans Harbor at the S end steer 1490 head-
a rock between it and the S shore there are also rocks N of the    mg for Fishermans Harbor Light, being careful to avoid the reefs
islet                                                              and a submerged pile on the NE side of the channel in about
 (1o0)  To enter pass N of the islet leaving the detached rocks on    55058'21"N  133047'54"W, then haul gradually S, heading for
the starboard side Good anchorage may be had inmsde in 41/4 fath-    the W side of the float on the E side of the harbor When abreast of
oms mud bottom With caution, this entrance can be made easily    the float anchor m any desired depth The channel has a control-
The bay is used extensively for anchorage dunng the fishing sea-    lmg depth of 2'/2 fathoms about 0 3 mile NW of the light, but
son                                                                deepens gradually when approaching the float
 (102)  Strait Island is in the middle of Sumner Strait 3 miles     (ii)  Point Hardscrabble, about 2 2 rmles NE of Cape Pole is
NW of Point Baker It is divided into two parts at high water, and    not very prominent Two small islets are about 600 yards W of the
is low and wooded Mariposa Reef, which partly bares extends    point There are depths of from 41/2 to 11 fathoms between the
about 0 8 mile S from the island A lighted bell buoy is about 250    extensive kelp patches that are between the islets and the point A
yards off the S end of the reef                                    small cove, 5 5 mules NNE of Cape Pole affords protection from
 (103) A rock that uncovers at low water Is 0 3 mle WNW of the    S weather for small vessels, but is open to N
NW tip of Strait Island, it is not marked by kelp, and there are
strong currents around it A shoal covered 21/4 fathoms is 0 35 mile  (112)  Charts 17386, 17387 -Ruins Point(56ï¿½04 0'N
S of this rock, and another shoal area, covered 23/4 fathoms, is    133ï¿½42 0'W), 8 miles NNE of Cape Pole (chart 17402), is on the
about 0 2 mile WSW of the rock                                     S side of the entrance to Shipley Bay The point is poorly defined






                                                      7. SUMNER STRAIT                                                        157


and has no prominent features. Finger Shoal and other foul    end of Hamilton Island, is 0.3 mile wide, but between the 5-
ground extend about 0.5 mile from the shore in the vicinity.      fathom curves is constricted to about half that, by reefs on both
 (113) Shipley Bay, entered about 2 miles NE of Ruins Point, has    sides. About midway of its length is a 51/4-fathom rocky shoal in
good anchorage available at the head. Bluff Island, 200 feet high    midchannel about 0.2 mile E of the daybeacon marking the SE end
and wooded, is in the middle of the entrance. The vertical E face is    of Hamilton Island. Off-lying dangers are few, and none is more
a rookery for sea birds; the W side has gradual slopes. Islets and    than 200 yards offshore. A log storage area is along the E shore,
rocks extend about 0.4 mile from the W extremity of the island.   0.5 mile S of the entrance to El Capitan Passage.
 (114) The S approach to Shipley Bay extends between the S tip     (124) Hamilton Island, Middle Island, Divide Island, and
of Bluff Island and a tiny islet 0.5 mile N of the S shore. The area    Fontaine Island are heavily wooded islands in the center of Sha-
between the islet and the S shore is mostly foul, and passage    kan Bay. Of the several passages between and around them, Sha-
should not be attempted except by small craft with local knowl-    kan Strait is the principal one; the others are used only by small
edge. A rock awash at minus tides is 1 mile SE of the S tip of Bluff    craft with local knowledge.
Island; navigable water extends on all sides of this rock that is sur-  (125) Mount Calder, a sharp conical peak projecting above the
rounded by thick kelp and is easily distinguishable at all stages of    dark timbered slopes, is an outstanding landmark. Easily identified
tide during summer. From a small wooded islet on the N side of    by its light-gray color, it can be seen from the entrance to Sumner
the entrance, foul ground extends for about 0.7 mile SE. This con-    Strait in clear weather.
stricts the passage to a width of only about 0.5 mile along the S   (126) Calder Bay is on the N side of Shakan Bay N of Middle
shore. E of this point, however, the bay is generally clear, although    Island. Depths shoal gradually from about 9 fathoms at its
the depths are irregular and there are several rocks 100 to 200    entrance to the tidal flat about 0.6 mile from the entrance.
yards off the S shore.                                             (127) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
 (115) About 4 miles from the entrance, the bay is constricted by    6ï¿½ from the normal variation may be expected in Shakan Strait.
a promontory jutting out from the S shore. A small wooded islet
surrounded by foul ground is off the point. W of the point is a
                                                                    17360) astern and Shakan Bay Light a little on the starboard bow.
large bight in which are two islands. Anchorage in 3 to 10 fathoms
is available in the bight W of the islands; poor holding ground.   (129)  In entering Shakan Strait, favor the N point slightly. When
Winds are reported to draw with great force through the gap to the    1.2 miles inside the entrance to the strait, favor the N shore
S during SE storms.                                               slightly, otherwise follow a midchannel course to the anchorage,
                                                                    about 0.8 mile SSW of the entrance to El Capitan Passage, a dis-
 (116) The best anchorage is near the S shore at the head of the
 bay, just E of the point 1 mile from the head of the bay, in depths    tance of 4 miles. Anchor about 0.3 mile offshore in 7 to 9 fathoms,
bay, just E of the point 1 mile from the head of the bay, in depths
of 15 fathoms, mud bottom, and good holding ground. A small
cove just W of the point is suitable for small craft; depths are 3 to  (130) At night, deep shadows make it difficult to distinguish the
5 fathoms, mud and sand bottom.                                   entrance to the channel between Hamilton Island and Kosciusko
 (117)  Shipley Bay may be entered safely from either side of    Island. The channel between Divide Island and Middle Island is
Bluff Island.                                                     used by small craft.
 (118)  Shakan Bay is on the E side of Sumner Strait about 6       (131) Barrier Islands, on the N side at the entrance to Shakan
miles NNE of Ruins Point. The bay, including Shakan Strait, is    Bay, are two islands with numerous rocks and islets around and
circular in shape. Its entrance is between Shakan Island on the S    between them. Both islands are almost level and wooded. A reef
and the Barrier Islands on the N. The center of the bay is almost    extends about 0.7 mile S from the S point of the W island. A rock
filled with islands. At the E extremity of Shakan Strait, the bay    with 2 1/2 fathoms over it, about 0.7 mile W  from that point, is
connects with El Capitan Passage.                                 marked on the W side by a lighted bell buoy.
 (119)  The N shore of the bay is foul for about 1.5 miles offshore  (132)  Calder Rocks are dangerous kelp-marked reefs off the E
and should be avoided. The E part of the outer bay is extremely    shore of Sumner Strait, the southernmost point that is about 2
foul.                                                             miles NW of the Barrier Islands. From this southernmost point,
 (120) The Nipples, 1 mile SE of Shakan Strait, and Mount         which bares 3 feet, the reefs extend 1.2 miles in a N direction with
Calder, N of the bay and 2 miles NE of Barrier Islands, are good    little depths over them and with deep water close-to. A lighted
landmarks for the bay.                                            whistle buoy is close W  of the N end. There is good passage on
 (121)  Station Island, off the S point at the entrance, is marked    each side of Calder Rocks; the E one is generally used by small
by Shakan Bay Light (56008.9'N., 133ï¿½37.5'W.), 25 feet above    craft, and the W one is used by larger vessels.
the water and shown from a small house with a red and white dia-
mond-shaped daymark on a brown skeleton tower on the N side of      (133) Chart 17378.-Hole in the Wall (56ï¿½15.7'N.,
the island. There are submerged rocks and rocks awash between    133ï¿½38.5'W.) is a small cove on the E side of Sumner Strait, E of
Station Island and Shakan Island, which is close W.               Calder Rocks and 2.5 miles N of Barrier Islands (chart 17387).
  (122) Shakan Island, 0.3 mile W of Station Island, is about 18    The entrance is through a very narrow passage 0.5 mile long,
feet high and is covered by scrubby trees. A rock awash and a 3-    between high bluffs, and opens into a basin 400 yards in diameter.
fathom shoal are about 0.2 mile and 1.2 miles, NNW and SW,    Two rocks that bare are in the narrow entrance. Depths in the basin
respectively, of Shakan Island. The area S of the islet and E of the    are from 1/2 to 7 fathoms; it may be used for anchorage, but is sub-
3-fathom shoal has several detached rocks, all marked by kelp,    ject to strong winds drawing through the entrance. The bottom is
and other dangers. The chart is the best guide.                   sand and mud. Small craft pass through the narrow entrance only
  (123) Shakan Strait, comprising the S part of Shakan Bay, is   at half tide or higher water.
about 4.6 miles long, averages 0.4 mile in width, and is semicircu-  (134) Labouchere Bay is about 1.8 miles N of the entrance to
lar in shape. It affords a clear and safe route to El Capitan Passage.    Hole in the Wall and about 4 miles S of Point Baker. It is studded
The W entrance, marked by a daybeacon on an islet off the SW      with islets and rocks, the entrance being partially closed by





158                                                   7  SUMNER STRAIT


Labouchere Island and the islands and reefs that extend SE of it to  (143) Point Baker is a settlement with two general stores on the
the shore                                                          inner bay E of Point Baker and about 0 4 mile S of Point Baker
 (135) There Is sheltered anchorage for small vessels Just inside    Light Gasohne, provisions, water, diesel fuel, and fishing supplies
the bay on the S side in about 56ï¿½17 2'N, 133ï¿½39 0'W, in depths    can be had at the stores A State-maintained 391-foot small-craft
of 3 to 21 fathoms, mud and sand bottom Three detached rocks    float with a seaplane float at its end is at Point Baker In June 1976,
that cover at half tide are near the head of the anchorage Small    depths of 10 to 12 feet were reported alongside A 45-foot grid is
fishing craft anchor SE of the rocks and near the sand beach in 2 to    in the mudflats about 60 yards NNW of the float Dunng the fish-
5 fathoms The recommended entrance to Labouchere Bay is from    ing season, a fish-buying scow usually moors at Point Baker Pro-
the NW Small fishing vessels may enter Labouchere Bay from the    visions, fishing supplies gasoline, diesel fuel, and water are
S on a N course, through a channel passing E of the kelp-marked    available from the scow The settlement maintains radiotelephone
submerged reef at the entrance, 0 5 mile SE of Labouchere Island   communications A freight boat visits weekly from Ketchlkan, and
and avoiding the large kelp beds on their nght                     charter seaplanes are available from Ketchikan
 (136) In 1976 a logging camp was at the cove about 1 7 miles       (144) The shores of the bay are steep-to and lined with thick
ENE of Labouchere Island There are a small-craft float, a sea-    kelp The midchannel passage, with a controlling depth of 21/2
plane float, and log storage in the cove Water and gasoline are    fathoms, leads to the float The inner bay is restricted by several
available m an emergency only A road connects Labouchere Bay    submerged off-lying dangers and is not recommended as an
with Port Protection The logging camp maintains radiotelephone    anchorage This port is used extensively dunng the fishing season
communicatlons with the Alaska Loggers Association in Ketchl-        (145) Point Baker Light (56ï¿½21 5'N , 133037 0'W) 20 feet
kan                                                                above the water is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
 (137) Protection Head, a bold white bluff, 1 mile N of    white diamond-shaped daymark on the NW end of the outer island
Labouchere Island, is an outstanding landmark visible from the S    on the E side of the entrance to Point Baker anchorage Point
for many miles                                                     Baker Anchorage Daybeacon is on the E side of the passage
 (138) Port Protection has its entrance 1 5 miles S of Point       about 0 2 mile S of the hght A narrow constricted passage which
Baker, the NW extremity of Pnnce of Wales Island, and 1 5 miles    extends from the head of Point Baker Harbor into Port Protection,
N of Protection Head The entrance is marked by Port Protection    is used considerably by very small craft drawing up to 3 feet at
Light (56019 6'N, 133ï¿½36 7'W), 19 feet above the water, shown    half tide or higher
from a pile with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the       (146) Helm Rock, covered 21/2 fathoms, is about 0 75 mile
NE end of the wooded island at the SW side of Wooden Wheel    NNW of West Rock Light and on a line between the S point of
Cove, 1 mile inside the entrance, and by a daybeacon on a    Strait Island and Point Baker and 0 8 mile from the latter A
detached reef, 0 3 mile off the N shore A ship may enter Port Pro-    lighted bell buoy is about 0 2 mile N of the rock There are usually
tection on either side of the daybeacon while being careful to pass    heavy tide rips and swirls around it A rocky shoal with 3 fathoms
the reef at a safe distance There is good anchorage for large craft    over it is 700 yards NNE of Point Baker The usual course is mid-
1 8 miles in from the daybeacon and SW of the chain of small    channel between Point Baker and Strait Island Small craft fre-
wooded islands m the upper half of the bay, in 6 to 18 fathoms,    quently pass between Point Baker and Helm Rock to avoid the
mud and sand bottom A more sheltered anchorage may be had E        current and swirls around the rock
of the chain of islands                                              (147) Merrifield Bay, 1 mile E of Point Baker, is good anchor-
 (139) To reach the second anchorage, proceed from the first on    age for small vessels in 8 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom but is open
an ENE course keeping the two N of the small wooded islands to    to the N On the W side at the entrance are several bare rocks, and
the NW Pass close to the tangent of the larger island on the right  a httle W of the entrance about 0 55 mile E of Point Baker Light is
Depths in the passage between the islands are 6 to 11 fathoms      East Rock, a large rock, awash at highest tides
Good anchorage in 10 fathoms, mud bottom, is directly ahead and
about halfway between the island passed on the right and the E       (148)  Charts 17360, 17368 -Keku Strait, marked by lights and
shore of the bay This is the best shelter in the bay, affording pro-    daybeacons connects Summer Strait with Frederick Sound and
tectlon in all weather Small vessels may find anchorage m 5 to 8    separates Kuiu Island from Kupreanof Island The strait consists
fathoms a little farther m                                         of three parts a large bay at the S and N ends, and a narrow, itn-
 (140) The shores of Port Protection are usually frminged with    cate passage, about 18 miles long known as Rocky Pass, that con-
kelp and the soundings, though deep, are irregular and the bottom    nects the two bays The following description covers the S bay and
rocky Log raft mooring facilities are along the SW shore about    Rocky Pass The N part is described with Frederick Sound, chap-
1 2 miles S of Port Protection Light                               ter 8
 (141) Port Protection is a small settlement on the NE side of      (149) The bay forming the S entrance to the strait is very foul,
the port in Wooden Wheel Cove and S of Port Protection Light       particularly the E and NE shore Navigation through any part of
Along the beach are some homes and an abandoned shrimp can-    the bay should be with caution The entrance to the bay is between
nery A 250-foot State-maintained small-craft float is anchored on    Sumner Island and Point Barre
the W  side of the cove with 4 to 8 fathoms reported alongside in    (120) In the S bay anchorage can be had about 300 yards off the
June 1976 Water is available Radiotelephone communications    E shore, E of Meadow Island Anchorage can also be had in Thre-
are maintained                                                     emile Arm, or in the NE part of the bay E of the entrance to
 (142) Joe Mace Island is on the N side of the entrance to Port    Rocky Pass
Protection West Rock,  in a cluster of dry rocks and rocks on a      (151) Point Barrie forms the E point at the S entrance to Keku
reef is about 300 yards N of Joe Mace Island The rock is marked    Strait Reefs and shoals extend from 0 5 to 1 mile off the point
by West Rock Light (56ï¿½21 2'N, 133ï¿½38 2'W), 20 feet above    Barrie Island, 0 9 mile SE of the point, is a wooded island mak-
the water, and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white    ing a good mark for entenng Keku Strait from the E Foul ground
diamond-shaped daymark                                             extends from the island to the shore






                                                      7  SUMNER STRAIT                                                         159


 (152) W and NW of Point Barne are numerous off-lying rocks,        (166) Devils Elbow, about 14 miles N of Point Barrie is the
reefs, and Islets Trouble Island, 2 males NNW of Point Barne, is    most dangerous part of the pass The channel here makes a full
a prominent wooded Islet at the outside edge of the foul area      right-angle turn It had a controlling depth of 5 feet in 1977
Small craft with local knowledge can follow an Irregular passage     (167)  Local magnetic disturbance -Differences of as much as
through this area, but this should not be attempted when the exten-    3ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed in the Devils
slve kelp beds are not showing                                     Elbow in the vicinity of 50ï¿½38'N, 133ï¿½41'W
 (153)  Conclusion Island is the large densely wooded island        (168) Beck Island is a small island m the center of the pass
about 4 5 miles WNW of Point Barne and 3 rmles N of Sumner    about 6 5 rmles N of the S entrance and about 0 7 mile S of Sum-
Island, it has several peaks and is generally steep-to             mut Island S of Beck Island is Brown Bear Head Island with off-
 (154) No Name Bay, about 3 miles W of Conclusion Island, is    lying rocks awash to the S
constricted at its head by several wooded islets Near the head is    (169) Summit Island, a relatively large island about halfway
anchorage sintable for small craft                                 through the pass, is at the S end of the most constricted part of the
 (1D5) Seclusion Harbor is a small inlet about 3 5 miles NNW       pass, known as The Summit The island is low and wooded to the
of the W end of Conclusion Island A cham of islands is E of its    high-water mark, with large tide flats about the N and E sides
entrance                                                             (170) The Summit is the narrow passage, W and NW of Sum-
  (156) Threemule Arm, N of Seclusion Harbor, makes off to the    mut Island, through which a channel has been dredged The chan-
W  at the NW end of the bay Its entrance is obstructed by rocks    nel had a controlling depth of 5 feet in 1977 Passage through The
By proceeding with care vessels can enter passing NE of the islet    Summit should be attempted only with local knowledge
in the middle of the entrance, and find good protected anchorage     (171)  Local magnetic disturbance -Differences of as much as
in the muddle of the arm m 5 to 8 fathoms soft bottom              4ï¿½ from normal vanation have been observed m Keku Strait N of
  (157)  In 1974, a survey revealed a rock awash in the middle of    The Summit, m the vicimlty of 56ï¿½42'N, 133044'W
the arm in 56ï¿½35'45"N  133ï¿½50'10"W                                   (172)  High Island, about 10 5 miles N of Keku Strait S entrance
  (158) Meadow Island is a low, wooded island in the E part of    and 1 8 miles S of Beacon Island, is the largest island in Keku
the bay 4 miles N of Point Barne The island is used as a fox farm  Strait The W  arm of the island has a conspicuous comcal peak
Foul ground extends 300 yards S and 0 6 mile N of the island       Boats awaiting the tide often are off the NW point of this part of
                                                                    the island Just S of the point are several clusters of mooring piles
  (159) Chart 17372 -Skff Island (56ï¿½31 1'N, 133041 O'W) on    close-m along the shore, and anchorage in 12 to 18 feet can be
the E side of the bay at the S end of Keku Strait, is low and    secured just NW of the point
wooded and is surrounded by rocks and reefs A small-boat pas-        (173) Beacon Island marks the turn in the general direction of
 sage is E of the island                                            the pass from N to W  A low-water rocky ledge extends all around
  (160) About 11 miles WNW of Skilff Island is a small, wooded    the island to the extent of 125 yards E of the island and 200 yards
 Island divided at high water The cut is quite prominent from E     SW of the island
 and W  The S pomt of the island is a bold hght-colored cliff, eas    (174) Passage E of Beacon Island leads into Big John Bay, a
 ily identified                                                     large bay that extends N and E of Horseshoe Island Fishing ves-
  (161) Monte Carlo Island, near the center of the bay Is a rela-    sels often anchor in the SE arm of Big John Bay in 18 to 24 feet,
 tlvely large low, wooded islet 2 5 miles SSW of the entrance to    soft bottom This anchorage Is protected from all directions except
 Rocky Pass It is surrounded by foul ground particularly to the S   NW  The N part of Big John Bay is considered good game coun-
 E and N Clear of the foul ground to the N, is a passage leading to    try Entenng from the W the channel leads N of Horseshoe Island
 the W that affords indifferent anchorage m 6 to 7 fathoms, sticky    and between the larger two of the islands W of Horseshoe Island
 bottom The small cove on the N side of the island affords anchor-   (175) Berry Island, SW of Horseshoe Island and about 1 2
 age for small craft but the entrance is difficult because of the    miles WNW of Beacon Island is small but quite prominent in the
 numerous rocks and reefs                                           viclmty the vegetation has a rather distinct shade The island is on
   (162) Rocky Pass has its S entrance about 8 miles N of Point    the SW part of a reef that extends about 0 3 mile NE This reef
 Bare                                                               which covers at half tide, should be given a wide berth
   (163)  A Federal project provides for a channel dredged to a       (176) Stedman Cove, the deep bight in the SW shore of Horse
 depth of 5 feet through Devils Elbow and The Summit, the shal-    shoe Island, affords the best anchorage in the vicinity for small
 lowest parts of the pass                                           craft, it is well protected from almost every dlrection, particularly
   (164) The pass is used by fishing vessels, cannery tenders, and    from SE and from N to NW  It is a convenient place to await
 tugs with log rafts The draft which can be carried through    favorable tidal conditions before proceeding S through the pass
 depends on the tide It is reported that 12 feet can be carried       (177) When enternng the cove, care should be taken to avoid the
 through 40 percent of the time with a resultant saving of from 30    long sandspit that extends about two-thirds the distance across the
 to 80 miles Because of strong currents narrow channel, and sharp    entrance from the E shore The point of this spit is usually marked
 turns it is advisable to make passage at or near high-water slack  by a pole Continue beyond the second point along the E shore and
   (165) The depths through Rocky Pass are generally shallow and    anchor in 12 to 18 feet in the inner cove
  small craft can anchor practically anywhere with the aid of the     (178) Entrance Island, a long narrow island marking the N
  chart Larger craft can enter the S end of the pass for a distance of    entrance to Rocky Pass is low and wooded to the high-water line
  2 miles until opposite Tunehean Creek and select anchorage    A low-water ledge extends 225 yards off the S shore of the island
  according to draft either to N or S of the rmdchannel reef off the    Strong tidal currents run around the N end of Entrance Island, and
  mouth of the creek At the N end of Rocky Pass, larger craft can    this area is not very favorable for use as an anchorage Even the
  anchor in Big John Bay Stedman Cove, or in the channel as far S    head of the bight NE of Entrance Island is a poor anchorage area,
  as 1 mile below High Island                                        being too exposed





160                                                  7  SUMNER STRAIT


 (179) Tides -The range of tide at The Sumnut Is about the same   (190)  Chart 17381 -Red Bay indents the S shore of Sumner
as at Ketchikan, but the time of tide occurs about /2 hour later than    Strait, 11 miles E of Point Baker and 3 miles W of Point Colpoys
at Ketchlkan In the S and N bays of Keku Strait, the range of tide    (chart 17360) The chart shows all known dangers It is used
is about 0 8 of that at Ketchikan, and the time of tide is about the    extensively for anchorage during the fishing season
same as at Ketchikan When proceeding in either direction, it is    (191) The entrance Is through a narrow and rocky channel about
best to enter Rocky Pass about 11/2 to 2 hours before high water    0 7 mile long, with depths of 1 to 41/2 fathoms The narrowest part
There are many places at each end of Rocky Pass where vessels    of the channel is between the SW side of Bell Island and a rock
waiting for the tide can anchor Strangers should make passage on    awash off the SE end of Danger Island At about 0 8 mile S of this
a nsmg tide and be careful to remain in the channel because of the    area, the channel leads between two grassy rocks 13 and 16 feet
many unmarked dangers close to the channel edge (See the Tide    high, and then W of Range Islet (56ï¿½18'15"N, 133ï¿½19'48"W),
Tables for daily predictions )                                   which is wooded A reef, bare at low water, is about 90 yards
 (180) Currents -The flood current enters Keku Stralt at both    NNW from the N end of Range Islet S of Range Islet the bay is
ends and meets in varying places between High Island and The    about 2 miles long and 0 4 mile wide, with depths of 3 to 15 fath-
Summit At the entrance to Rocky Pass the tidal current has a    oms A rock awash is near the S end of Red Bay in 56ï¿½16'52"N,
velocity at strength of 0 9 to 1 2 knots                         133019'08"W, about 1 4 miles S of Range Islet
 (181) At Devils Elbow the velocity of current is 1 8 to 2 4 knots,  (192) Dead Island, small and wooded, is close N of Bell Island
this being the strongest current encountered in the pass Slack    and forms the E point at the entrance, a reef with bare heads
water occurs at practically high and low water The perod of slack    extends 0 2 mile NE of the islet Pine Point forms the NE
at low water lasts only 5 or 10 minutes, and the current attains    entrance of the outer bay Bell Island and Danger Island, low and
considerable velocity within a half hour of this time The high-    wooded, form the E and W sides of the narrow entrance and are
water slack lasts considerably longer and passage through Devils    separated from the main shore by shallow passes useless for nav-
Elbow can easily be made within an hour before and after the    gation except for a high-water canoe channel behind Bell Island
high-water slack                                                   (193) Vessels not wishing to enter or waiting for the proper stage
 (182) At The Summit strong currents set in within 1 hour of    of tide may anchor at the entrance to Red Bay in the bight W of
high-water slack attaining a velocity of about 2 6 knots Through    Dead Island Another anchorage is in the middle, NE of Dead
The Summit and the passages N of The Summit, the currents are    Island, in 7 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom Larger vessels should
quite variable because of frequent shallow depths and the mtncate    anchor farther out with more swinging room in 18 to 20 fathoms
topography High-water slack occurs near high water, but the ebb    Inside the entrance the anchorage most used is the small bay E of
current runs for a considerable time after low water (See the Tidal    Flat Island i 4 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom This is good shelter
Current Tables for daily predictions)                            m all weather Vessels wlshing to go farther into the bay may find
                                                                   anchorage m 5 to 9 fathoms, mud bottom
                                                                    (194) Tidal currents in the narrow entrance to the bay have
  ChBaker                                  and Helm Rock have been descbed earer   this chapter  velocities of 3 to 5 knots, with very short intervals of slack at
Baker and Helm Rock have been descnbed earlier m this chapter
  (184) In Buster Bay, the open bight 6 5 mles E of Point Baker    (195) About 12 feet iS the greatest draft that can be safely camed
(56ï¿½21'N, 133ï¿½37'W) vessels may find anchorage with shelter    in at low water The safest time to enter is at or shortly before,
from S winds in 10 fathoms, sand bottom, about 0 7 mile from    high-water slack All dangers are marked by kelp, but it is run
shore                                                            under dunng the strength of the current
  (185) Totem Bay, about 10 5 miles NE of Point Baker, is a large  (196) Enter between the bare rock at the NE end of Danger
indentation on the N shore of Sumner Stralt, midway between    Island and the SW end of Dead Island, favonng the latter and then
Point Barne and Mitchell Point A reef extends 1 2 miles E from    favor the W or Danger Island shore until halfway through the pas-
the W point at the entrance A shoal extends 0 2 mile off the E    sage, when the E or Bell Island shore should be favored to avoid
point at the entrance                                            the rock close to the SE point of Danger Island Bnng the E grassy
  (186) To enter the bay, approach from E, keepmg about 1 nmile    rock in line with the W  side of Range Islet about 0 3 mile S of
off Moss Island and about 0 5 mile off the E point at the entrance    Flat Island, and steer that range until near the rock, and then pass
The bay has depths of 7 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom and is good    midway between the two grassy rocks and W of Range Islet Then
protection except in S weather Shoals extend over 0 2 mile from    follow a midchannel course up the bay and select anchorage as
the shores of the bay                                            required
  (187) Shingle Island, low and wooded, is about 1 5 miles S of
the entrance The bay and Its approaches have reefs that extend S   (197) Chart 17360 -Two miles E of Red Bay (56ï¿½20'N
of the island and detached submerged rocks                       133ï¿½18'W) is an open bight sheltered from S winds, that affords
  (188) The Eye Opener is a rocky ledge near the nmiddle of Sum-    anchorage for vessels of any size in 10 to 15 fathoms, mud bot-
ner Strait, about 11 7 miles E of Pomt Baker It is marked by The    tom about 0 5 mile offshore The shore from Pine Point to Point
Eye Opener Light (56023 2'N, 133ï¿½16 6'W), 28 feet above the    Colpoys is rocky and should not be approached closely
 water and shown from a skeleton tower on a brown cylindncal
base with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark A rock with       (198) Chart 17382 -Point Colpoys, low and wooded is on the
 1 fathom over it not marked by kelp and a rock with 5 1/4 fathoms    NW side of Clarence Strait where it joins with Sumner Strait
 over it and marked by a buoy, are 0 4 mile SW and 1 8 miles SE,    Point Colpoys Light (56020 2'N  133ï¿½11 8'W) 19 feet above
 respectively of the hght                                         the water is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white
  (189) Douglas Bay is a bight, open S about 4 miles N of The    diamond-shaped daymark on the point Irregular bottom extends
 Eye Opener and E of Moss Island It has depths of 5 to 6 fathoms,    about 0 3 mile N from the point A rock, which uncovers 5 feet
 but IS not important as an anchorage                             and is marked by a daybeacon is 1 2 miles E of the light Shoals







                                                      7. SUMNER STRAIT                                                       161


and foul ground extend about 2 miles SE from the rock to Rookery  (210) Anchorages.-Several good anchorages were found in
Islands.                                                         Duncan Canal, usually in depths of 8 to 15 fathoms, sticky mud
 (199) McArthur Reef, covered 3 fathoms, is about 3.2 miles E    bottom, good holding ground.
of The Eye Opener and 3.6 miles N of Point Colpoys. The reef is    (211) Currents.-The flood enters Duncan Canal with a velocity
marked by a lighted bell buoy.                                   of 1 to 2 knots and runs in the direction of its axis, except at the W
 (200) Mitchell Point, on the SE end of Kupreanof Island and    entrance of Beecher Pass, through which it passes into Wrangell
about 6.7 miles N of Point Colpoys, is low, level, and rocky. A  Narrows, causing a crosscurrent in this immediate vicinity. The
broad tapering reef, showing considerable kelp, extends about 2.2    ebb flows in an opposite direction, and the same crosscurrent, with
miles SE from the point. The extreme outer end of the reef bares;    a W set, is found at Beecher Pass. The flood current has a W set in
at high water it is usually marked by tide rips. A lighted buoy    the vicinity of the rocks that are off the S end of Woewodski
marks the SSW entrance of the narrow channel leading to the W    Island. Strong tide rips are found at the entrance to the canal.
of Level Islands.                                                  (212) In 1959 a survey vessel experienced moderate to strong
 (201) Level Islands, heavily wooded, are about 2.5 miles E of    currents in the entrance between Kupreanof and Woewodski
Mitchell Point. S of the W island is a small islet surrounded by    Islands, especially near Butterworth Island. Strangers should use
rocks, and the entire group is surrounded by a shelving ledge and    caution when navigating this passage. The effect of the current
by kelp that extends out nearly 0.5 mile. A pinnacle rock, with 3    diminishes inside the canal proper, but light to moderate tide rips
fathoms over it, marked by a lighted buoy, is 0.6 mile SE of Level    have been noted in midchannel as far as Indian Point.
Islands in the direction of Vichnefski Rock. The passage SW and   (213) Routes.-Enter Duncan Canal E of Lung Island, proceed in
W of Level Islands is foul. A white tower on the N side of the E    midchannel W  of Butterworth Island, and follow midchannel
Level Island is reported obscured by trees from Sumner Strait.   courses. The known dangers are shown on the chart. Caution is
 (202) White Rock is 1 mile NE of the E end of Level Islands    needed in navigating it.
and can be readily recognized by its white appearance and         (214) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is complu-
detached position. Several rocks awash are S of White Rock. The    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
outermost, 0.2 mile S, is marked by kelp.                        Alaska. The pilot boarding station for Duncan Canal is about 1
 (203) Kah Sheets Bay, N of Level Islands, is shoal and has    mile NW of Guard Islands Light (55ï¿½26.8'N., 131052.9'W.). (See
many dangers. Three wooded islands are S of the N entrance    Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
point. Small fishing craft frequently anchor W of the S island in 1  (215) Towage.-Three 500 hp tugs from Wrangell are available
1/2 fathoms, mud bottom.                                         for assistance in docking and undocking vessels at the Alaska Bar-
 (204) Vichnefski Rock, on the SE side of Sumner Strait, about    ite Facility in Duncan Canal. Arrangements should be made in
0.8 mile N of Point St. John, Zarembo Island, is long and bare, and    advance through ship's agents.
awash at extreme high water. It is marked by Vichnefski Rock
Light (56026.3'N., 133ï¿½00.9'W.), 33 feet above the water, is       (216)  Chart 17382.-Foremost Rock (56ï¿½30.2'N., 133000.3'W.)
shown from a skeleton tower with red and white diamond-shaped    uncovers 12 feet and is marked by a daybeacon. It is near the E
daymark. SE of Vichnefski Rock are several ledges that partly    end of a reef 0.8 mile long off the entrance to Duncan Canal,
bare, and the passage between the rock and Point St. John should    almost on a line joining White Rock and the W  point at the
not be attempted except by small craft with local knowledge.     entrance to Wrangell Narrows and about 1 mile from the point.
 (205) St. John Harbor, on the NW side of Zarembo Island and      (217) Lung Island, wooded, is on the W side of the entrance to
E of Vichnefski Rock Light, is sheltered except from N. Low    Duncan Canal. A small islet, 25 feet high and wooded, is in mid-
Point and Point St. John, respectively, are to the N and S of the    channel W of Lung Island; each side of this islet has a narrow pas-
entrance. Northerly Island and Southerly Island are in the outer    sage, the W passage being foul.
part of the harbor. Two large rocks are close to the N side of     (218) Baby Island is on the E side of the entrance to Duncan
Northerly Island, and rocks that bare and are marked by kelp are    Canal, about 1.1 miles ENE of the SE end of Lung Island.
just outside of them. Vessels should enter midway between North-  (219) Butterworth Island, wooded, is close off the W shore of
erly Island and Low Point.                                       Woewodski Island and on the E side of Duncan Canal, about 1.5
  (206) Anchorage in about 14 fathoms, mud bottom, can be had    miles from the entrance. The narrow passage between Butterworth
midway between the middle of Southerly Island and the first bight    Island and Woewodski Island is navigable for small craft at high
in the opposite shore of Zarembo Island. Anchorage in 7 fathoms    water, but is not recommended for strangers.
can be had farther in, but the currents are strong.               (220) Butterworth Island Light 2 (56ï¿½32.2'N., 133ï¿½04.5'W.),
  (207) Small craft can enter St. John Harbor SW of Northerly    21 feet above the water, is shown from a frame structure with a red
Island and Southerly Island, taking care to avoid a rock, awash at   triangular daymark on the W side of the island. The light marks
half tide, 200 yards SW of the S point of Northerly Island, and a    the E side of the entrance to Duncan Canal.
similar rock that is 80 yards S of Southerly Island. A daybeacon is
on the point about 1 mile E of Low Point.                          (221)  Chart 17360.-Woewodski Island separates the lower
                                                                   part of Duncan Canal from the lower part of Wrangell Narrows,
  (208)  Chart 17360.-Duncan Canal has its entrance 3 miles W     and is separated from Lindenberg Peninsula by Beecher Pass. The
of the entrance to Wrangell Narrows. From its head a low marshy    island is wooded and mountainous.
valley, sometimes used as a portage, extends to Portage Bay. The  (222) Beecher Pass Light 4 (56034.8'N., 133ï¿½04.5'W.), 15 feet
soundings in the canal generally are less than 20 fathoms and    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red trian-
somewhat irregular. Commercial crabbers and shrimpers operate    gular daymark on the NW point of the island. In the first bight to
in the canal.                                                    the S of the light are the buildings of the abandoned Olympic
  (209) A daybeacon marks the W side of the entrance to Duncan    Mine. A trail leads inland to Harvey Lake. A 43/4-fathom shoal,
Canal; a light on Butterworth Island marks the E side.           marked by a buoy on its SW side, and a 31/4-fathom shoal are on







162                                                   7. SUMNER STRAIT


the E side of Duncan Canal, about 1 mile and 1.7 miles, respec-    feet above the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red
tively, S of Beecher Pass Light.                                   and white diamond-shaped daymark on a reef off the point. Point
  (223)  Beecher Pass, 4 miles within the entrance to Duncan        Howe, 4.5 miles to the E of Point Alexander, presents no special
Canal, connects the canal with Wrangell Narrows; it is filled with    features.
islets and reefs showing much kelp. Fair Island is at the W end of   (234) Woodpecker Cove is a small indentation on the N side of
the pass. A reef extends about 700 yards in a N direction from the    Sumner Strait, close W  of Point Howe. It affords anchorage for
NW end of Woewodski Island, and rocks are off the E end of Fair    small craft with protection from Stikine winds.
Island in the middle of the channel to the S of Fair Island. Reefs   (235) Station Island, about 1.7 miles E from Point Howe, is
extend about 250 yards off the N shore of Fair Island, and a rock is    small and timbered. The shoreline is rocky with cliffs 15 to 30 feet
about 250 yards E of its E point. All known dangers are charted.    high. Station Island Light (56029.7'N., 132ï¿½45.7'W.), 19 feet
The pass is used by tugs with tows and extensively by fishermen    above the water, is shown from a square frame structure with a red
and hunters, and is easily navigated with proper caution. Boats    and white diamond-shaped daymark on a rock off the E side of the
may pass either N or S of Fair Island with safety. Depths of about    island.
10 feet can be carried through Beecher Pass to Wrangell Narrows.     (236) Blind Slough enters the S end of Mitkof Island about 2
 (224) To go through Beecher Pass, steer midchannel courses    miles NE of Station Island. It has a wooded island at the entrance
from W until beyond the E end of Big Saltery Island, and then    and another island 1.7 miles inside. The head of the slough divides
with the chart as a guide, favor the S shore until almost abeam of    into several arms. A large stream empties into the E arm. From the
No Thorofare Point.                                                head of the slough, low ground extends to Wrangell Narrows. The
 (225) The bay between Keene Island and Big Saltery Island (see    slough is too shallow to be of use as an anchorage except for small
chart 17375) is good shelter and used extensively. A rock, which    craft, and then local knowledge is desirable. In 1976, there was log
uncovers at extreme low tide, is about 0.2 mile E of Big Saltery    storage along the E and N shoreline of the slough.
Island in 56ï¿½36.0'N., 133000.0'W. Anchor in 8 to 13 fathoms, mud     (237) Baht Harbor, on the N shore of Zarembo Island, about
bottom. Small craft also anchor near the W end of the pass in the    3.5 miles E of Low Point (56027.1'N., 132ï¿½56.9'W.), is a broad,
small cove on the N side, N of Fair Island in 2 to 3 fathoms.      open bight, affording anchorage in SE winds. The anchorage is in
 (226) Little Duncan Bay, entering the W  shore of Duncan    the middle of the bight, in 12 to 15 fathoms, about 0.2 mile off-
Canal opposite Beecher Pass, about 5 miles from the entrance, is    shore. At high water, the navigator should not seek less than 15
shallow, but affords protected anchorage for small craft. Emily    fathoms.
Island is a small, wooded islet on the S side of the bay. Foul       (238) Little Baht Harbor, 1 mile W  of Craig Point, affords
ground extends in a SE direction from the N point at the entrance.  anchorage for small craft in 11 fathoms, soft bottom, behind a
 (227) Grief Island, on the E side of Duncan, Canal NW of    wooded islet and off the mouth of a small creek. There is consider-
Beecher Pass, must not be approached closely, as foul ground is    able current at the anchorage, and its use is recommended only in
found close inshore and SW of it. A rock that bares is 1.2 miles    case of emergency.
340ï¿½ from the island.                                                (239) Craig Point, marked by a light, is on the N shore of
 (228) A rock with a depth of /2 fathom over it, 1.7 miles 323ï¿½    Zarembo Island, about 2.5 miles E of Baht Harbor.
from the NW point of Grief Island, is marked by a buoy close W.      (240)  Vank Island, about 2 miles off the NE end of Zarembo
In 1972, a survey revealed a shoal covered 61/2 fathoms in    Island, is timbered and has two prominent hills. The S shore is
56038'33"N., 133ï¿½09'22.8'W., about 0.6 mile SE of a mooring    marked by cliffs 40 feet high in places; the N shore is low and
facility.                                                           strewn with rocks. A small church on the N end of the island is
 (229)  Castle Islands are a group of small islands, most of them    visible from N. A light is on Neal Point at the S end of the island.
wooded, on the SW side of Duncan Canal, about 9 miles from the    Mud Bay is to the NW of Neal Point. It is deep at the entrance,
entrance. Castle River empties into the bight W  of the islands.    shoals rapidly, and is not regarded as a favorable anchorage. The
The head of the bight is filled with a mudflat. The entire area is    bight in the N end of Vank Island at times is used as a small-craft
shoal to the W  of the Castle Islands from the S end of Big Castle    anchorage.
Island, the largest in the group. A shoal covered 1/4 fathom is about  (241) Two Tree Island, a small rocky islet off the N end of Vank
2.1 miles NNW  of Big Castle Island in 56041'57"N.,    Island, is marked by a light. A2-fathomspotis about 1 mileNNW
133012'00"W.                                                       from Two Tree Island. Passage may be made on either side of
 (230)  Wharves.-The only commercial facility in the canal is a    Vank Island, but the S is preferred.
barite mining facility.                                              (242)  Sokolof Island, NE of Vank Island, is timbered. The cen-
 (231)  Alaska  Barite  Facility  Berth  (56ï¿½39'02"N.,             ter is low and is drained by a stream running W, which empties
133ï¿½10'01"W.): on the W  side of the larger islet S of Big Castle    into a bay used as an anchorage by small boats except during W
Island; 600 feet of berthing space; a reported depth alongside of 35    winds. In 1976, log storage took up most of the bay.
feet in 1976; the facility consists of a conveyor trestle, loading   (243) Wilson Islands are at the S end of Dry Strait about 2.2
tower, and a boom with a loading capacity of 1,000 tons per hour;    miles N of Sokolof Island. The two low, rocky islands are thickly
a causeway connects the two islets.                                wooded with spruce.
 (232) Mitkof Island, triangular in shape, is mountainous and
wooded at the N and S ends, with a low divide in an E and W          (244)  Chart 17360.-Dry Strait, mostly bare at low water,
direction through the central portion. Wrangell Narrows is to the    affords passage for small craft at high water between the head of
W and Federick Sound and Dry Strait to the N and E, respectively.  Sumner Strait and the head of Frederick Sound. It is extensively
                                                                   used by fishing boats and towboats operating between the towns of
 (233) Chart 17382.-Wrangell Narrows to Wrangell.-Point    Wrangell and Petersburg. The channel requires local knowledge
Alexander,  the E point of the S entrance to Wrangell Narrows, is    for safe navigation. Boats should attempt the passage only on the
marked by Point Alexander Light (56030.5'N., 132ï¿½27.0'W.), 17    upper half of a rising tide. There are no abrupt changes in depth.







                                                       7. SUMNER STRAIT                                                          163


The water is muddy at all times, and strong currents are experi-    flood tide. Waterborne traffic through the narrows consists of
enced in places, 5 knots having been observed at times at Bla-    cruise ships, State ferries, barges, and freight boats carrying lum-
quiere Point.                                                       ber products, petroleum products, fish and fish products, provi-
 (245) Dry Strait Light 1 (56035.0'N., 132ï¿½32.6'W.), 29 feet    sions, and general cargo.
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a green          (254)  Channels.-The Federal project for Wrangell Narrows
square daymark on Blaquiere Point on the W  side of the S    provides for several dredged sections 24 feet deep through the nar-
entrance to Dry Strait. The channel passes close E of Blaquiere    rows, except for a dredged section W  of Turn Point, that has a
Point and to the W  of the small islet 0.9 mile N of the point. A   project depth of 27 feet. In May 1993, the controlling depth in the
light on the W shore, about 3.5 miles NW of the islet, marks the N  dredged section from Frederick Sound to Scow Bay was 23 feet
end of the shoal water area through the strait.                     (24 feet on centerline from Frederick Sound to Petersburg), except
 (246) Dry Island and Farm Island are on the E side of Dry    for lesser depths along the edges; thence in April 1994, 17 feet (20
Strait NNE of Blaquiere Point. Boats should not attempt passage    feet at midchannel) in the dredged section from Lighted Buoy 42
between these islands. A poor channel can be followed at high tide    to Light 8, except for lesser depths to 14 feet in the W half of the
between Farm Island and Sergief Island to the S.                    channel near Bush Top Island and 9 feet in the E half of the chan-
 (247)  Kadin Island, about 2.5 miles S of Sergief Island, is 1,810    nel abeam North Ledge; thence in February 1992, 22 feet in the E
feet high, and wooded. Rynda Island and Greys Island, W  of    half and 24 feet in the W half, except for lesser depths along the E
Kadin Island, and Pocket Island and Hidden Island, NW of Dry    channel edge, in the dredged section S of Battery Islets. Some of
Island, are within Dry Strait. Fivemile Island, marked by a light, is    the cuts have a tendency to fill, and considerable maintenance
about 1.8 miles N from the N end of Woronkofski Island and is    dredging has been required. Once or twice each year exceptionally
described with Stikine Strait.                                      low tides occur, at which time the water level may fall as much as
 (248)  A rock with 3/4 fathom over it and a rock awash are about    4 feet below chart datum.
0.6 mile ENE of Liesnoi Island, a small wooded island to the S of     (255)  Currents.-The currents enter Wrangell Narrows from
Kadin Island.                                                       both ends on the flood and meet a little S of Green Point
 (249)  The Stikine River has its source in a small lake in British    (56ï¿½42.0'N., 132057.2'W.). At the N end of the narrows during the
Columbia near 57ï¿½10'N., 128ï¿½00'W., and is about 200 miles long,    turn of the tide on the last of the flood and the first of the ebb, an
It flows in a SW direction through glaciers and gorges; one of the    unexpected current of about 2 knots sets NW directly across the
latter, very narrow and about 30 miles long, is known as the Grand  channel. The velocity of the current in the narrows varies from
Canyon. The river freezes in the winter, and with the spring fresh-    place to place. Off Petersburg the velocity of the current is 3.5
ets the current builds up great force. The river is usually navigable    knots. The strongest currents occur off Turn Point and off Spike
from about May 1 to October 15. The highest water is generally in    Rock and South Ledge Light. The velocity of the current at times
July. Vessels drawing 3 feet and less navigate the river to Tele-    of strength at these points is between 4 and 5 knots. During spring
graph Creek, B.C., about 143 miles above the mouth.                 and tropic tides, velocities of 6 to 7 knots may occur. (See the
 (250) Stikine River empties by two mouths: one, the N channel,    Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions.)
following the mainland W, enters the head of Frederick Sound; the     (256)  Ice.-Occasionally a few stray pieces of ice from Le Conte
other follows the mainland S and forms the only navigable    Bay (chart 17360) work into Wrangell Narrows as far as Green
entrance to the river. The N channel can be navigated only by    Point (56042.0'N., 133ï¿½57.2'W.). The pieces are sufficiently large
small craft at high water. The S entrance has a least depth of about    to make them dangerous to navigation.
2 feet at mean lower low water. The mean range of tide is about
  1l'4 feet, and the diurnal range is about  14 feet. The channel is (257)  Routes.-Specific courses for Wrangell Narrows would be
111/2 feet, and the diurnal range is about 14 feet. The channel ise 
                                                                a dis-    of little help and could be confusing. The navigator should pay
from 0.2 to 0.5 mile wide. Tidal effects have been noted for a dis-attention to the chart as the narrows are well marked with
                                                                     close attention to the chart as the narrows are well marked with
                 tance of about 17.4 miles above the mouth.         aids to navigation that should be closely followed.
  (251) The Federal project provides for snagging of the Stikine
River from its mouth to the Canadian border, a distance of about      (258)  In some cases with twin screw vessels, the engines are
26 miles above Gerard Point (56031'N., 132020'W.). Snagging    reversed in order to help make the sharp turns. Inquiry of local
operations abvre made annually by the U.S. Forest Service.         Spilots showed that they did not use courses in the narrows because
  (252)  No permanent directions can be given since the channel    of strong currents and sharp turns. In foggy weather vessels come
                                                                     to anchor at either end of the narrows and wait until the fog clears
across the mud flats at the mouth of the river changes with every
freshet. Strangers can obtain directions from the masters of the    away The anchorage off Anchor Point, about 8.5 miles above the
                                                            range   can s     the    of the SS entrance, is also available to vessels under the stress of weather.
river boats at Wrangell. The channels of the S arm of the Stikine
River are followed by experienced boatmen by the appearance of        (259)  On the course between Deception Point and Point Lock-
the water. There is a strong S current in the channel. The water    wood, there is a strong tendency to be set to the W  with a flood
appears to boil in the deeper parts, while over the shoals it runs    current. At Point Lockwood Rock Light, a sharp turn is necessary
smoothly and evenly.                                                and usually the time required to get on course makes it necessary
                                                                     to immediately change to the next course. Commercial vessels
  (253)  Chart 17375.-Wrangell Narrows extends in a general N        make this turn by going hard left and hard right without steadying.
direction for 21 miles from near the E end of Sumner Strait to the    (260) On the course between Burnt Island Reef and South
E part of Frederick Sound. The channel is narrow and intricate in    Ledge, there is a tendency to be set to W on the flood.
places, between dangerous ledges and flats, and the tidal currents    (261)  On the course out of the N end of the narrows during the
are strong. It is marked by an extensive system of lights, lighted    flood, there was found to be a strong W  set especially in the vicin-
ranges, daybeacons, and buoys that, with the aid of the chart, ren-    ity of Prolewy Rocks.
ders the navigation of the narrows fairly easy for small craft, even  (262)  Low-powered vessels usually enter the narrows on the last
without local knowledge. It is safest to enter either end late on a    of the flood and carry a favorable current all the way through. The







164                                                 7. SUMNER STRAIT


currents meet about 8 miles from the N entrance and 12 miles      (274) North Ledge is a bare reef marked by a light on the E side
from the S entrance.                                             of the channel 0.5 mile N of South Ledge. North Point is on the
 (263) Vessels too large to make the passage through Wrangell    W side of the narrows between North and South Ledges. A reef
Narrows safely, continue W through Sumner Strait, round Cape    that extends off the point is marked by a light.
Decision, and go N through Chatham Strait, or W to sea by way of   (275) Bush Top Island, N of North Ledge, is to the W  of the
Cape Ommaney. Smaller vessels regularly using Wrangell Nar-    channel. The SE edge of the reef surrounding the island is marked
rows sometimes use the longer passage to their advantage when    by a light.
not favored by suitable conditions of tide or daylight in the nar-  (276)  Spruce Point, low and wooded, is on the E side of the
rows.                                                            channel opposite Bush Top Island.
 (264) (See 162.255, chapter 2, for navigation regulations for the  (277)  Colorado Reef is a reef that bares, on the W side of the
Wrangell Narrows.)                                               narrows opposite Anchor Point, about 8.5 miles above Point
 (265) Midway Rock is about 1.3 miles N of Point Alexander,    Alexander. A mud flat fills the large bight between Anchor Point
the E point at the S entrance to Wrangell Narrows, and 400 yards    and Blind Point. A narrow channel, called Blind Slough, is navi-
from the E shore. It is low and marked by a light.               gable for small craft at high tide and leads across the mudflat to
 (266) Anchorage with protection from N and NE winds can be    the mouth of Blind River. A fixed highway bridge with a 38-foot
had near the W shore of the S end of the Narrows W of Midway    span and a clearance of 6 feet is about 3.5 miles above the
Rock, in 6 to 12 fathoms, sticky bottom.                         entrance to the river.
 (267) Point Lockwood, 1.6 miles N of Midway Rock, is marked      (278) The winding channel between Anchor Point and Rock
by a light. A ledge is close to the W  shore nearly 0.5 mile above    Point, about 2.2 miles to the N, is well marked by lights, buoys,
the point. A dangerous flat that bares extends 300 yards off the    and a daybeacon.
mouth of a stream on the E shore opposite the ledge.               (279) The dredged anchorage area, 200 yards wide, is on the W
 (268) Point Lockwood Rock, covered 3/4 fathom, is 200 yards    side of the channel NW of Anchor Point. The controlling depth in
off the W shore, about 0.6 mile N of Point Lockwood. The rock is   the anchorage was 26 feet in 1963.
marked on the NE side, its highest point, by a light. A rock, cov-  (280) Vexation Point is the E point of Woody Island, about 9.5
ered 23/4 fathoms, but with no kelp, and marked by a light, is about    miles N of Point Alexander. The edge of the reef that makes off to
300 yards N of Point Lockwood Rock and the same distance S of    the NE of the point is marked by a light. The tow channel, with a
the southernmost Battery Islets. The main channel leads W of    reported controlling depth of 10 feet in 1976, passes to the W of
Battery Islets and has a clear width of 100 yards with rocks on    the main channel between Anchor Point and Woody Island.
both sides. Two lighted buoys mark the edge of the shoal water on
the W side of the channel, and on the E side of the channel a light    Point on the E side of the channel opposite Vexation Point. It is
marks the NW edge of the reef off the northernmost islet. The tow    marked by               a light.
channel used by small craft and tows runs E of Battery Islets and        Green Rocks ared by about 0.8 mile N of Vexa-
is marked by buoys. Dense kelp extends into this channel from     (282)  Green Rocks are wooded and about 0.8 mile N of Vexa-
                 bothIS~~~~~~~~~ sidestion Point. The N end is marked by a daybeacon and S end by a
  both sides .                                                   light. The main channel passes E of Green Rocks.
  (269) Boulder Point, on the W side of the narrows about 0.4
mile NW of Battery Islets, is marked by a light.                   (283) Papkes Landing, on the E side of the narrows, about 11
  (270) No Thorofare Point, on the W side of the channel 5 miles    miles N of Point Alexander, is the site of a State-maintained small-
above Point Alexander, is the S point of the E entrance of Beecher    craft float. In 1976, the 100-foot-long float had a reported depth of
Pass. Beecher Pass has been described with Duncan Canal earlier    12 feet alongside. A lumber company bulkhead pier that runs dry
Pass.i                n the chapter.                             at low water is close N of the float. The U.S. Forest Service main-
  (271) Spike Rock, about 0.6 mile N of No Thorofare Point and    tains a log pond and rafting area just N of the pier. A road extends
475 yards SE of Keene Island, is close to the W edge of the chan-    N about 10 miles along the E shore of the narrows from Papkes
nel and is marked by kelp in the summer and fall. Uncharted pin-    Landing to Petersburg and SE about 17 miles through Blind
nacles were reported in the area of Spike Rock. Mariners are    S        lough to Dry Strait.
advised to use extreme caution when transiting the area. A lighted  (284) North Flat is a wide flat that bares, on the E side of the
channel buoy is close S of the rock. The dredged channel E of the    channel, N of Papkes Landing and SE of Green Point
rock is marked by lights, on the E edge, and by a lighted centerline    (56ï¿½42.0'N., 13357.2'W.). South Flat is a smaller flat that bares
range. Pick up the lighted range promptly when approaching    on the opposite side of the channel. The main ship channel
range. Pike Rock froup the lighted range promptly when approaching    between the flats is marked by lights and a lighted buoy.
Spike Rock from the N.
  (272) Burnt Island, small and wooded, is on the W side of the    (285) From the light off Green Point the channel widens to
channel about 6.1 miles above Point Alexander. A light marks the    almost the whole width of the narrows, and the water deepens to
end of the rock ledge that extends S from Burnt Island. The E edge    15 to 20 fathoms.
 of the reef off the N side of the island is marked by a buoy. Cau-  (286) A logging company has an 80-foot floating pier on the W
tion is advised when transiting this area due to the proximity of    side of the narrows about 0.75 mile N of Green Point.
 the ledge to the W channel limit. Burnt Island Reef is on the E    (287) Mountain Point, about 2.3 miles N of Green Point, is
 side of the channel, NE of Burnt Island, and is marked by a light.    marked by a light 43 feet above the water.
 The dredged channel that leads W  of the reef is marked by a       (288) Scow Bay, on the E side of Wrangell Narrows, is about 2
 lighted range.                                                   miles below Petersburg and immediately S of Blunt Point. At
  (273) South Ledge, a reef marked by kelp in the summer and    night, the lights from the community of Scow Bay show promi-
 fall, is on the E side of the channel about 7 miles above Point    nently on the narrows. A restaurant and lodge are 0.6 mile S of the
 Alexander. The E edge of the channel NW of the ledge is marked    bay. The small-craft float at the lodge had a reported depth of 12
 by a light. The W edge of the channel is also marked by a light.  feet alongside in 1976.







                                                      7. SUMNER STRAIT                                                        165


 (289) A 300-foot-long lumber wharf, formed by a landfill, is    percent from the N and NNE; higher winds have been observed
about 0.3 mile SW of Blunt Point. A barge ramp with an adjust-    from other directions.
able transfer bridge is at the NW end of the wharf; the rest of the  (303) Fog is observed on an average of 10 to 12 days in each
wharf is not used to berth vessels. In 1976, depths of 9 feet were    month except September and October, when fog occurs on an
reported alongside the barge ramp. There are three acres of open    average of 16 to 19 days each month. Snowfall, however, is the
storage for lumber and containers on the wharf, and a 25-ton fork-    greatest restriction to visibility in the winter. (See page T-2 for
lift is available to handle these products.                       Petersburg climatological table.)
 (290) At Blunt Point the channel narrows and boulder patches,     (304) Pilotage, Petersburg.-Pilotage except for certain
marked by kelp, are on either side. A light marks the edge of the    exempted vessels, is compulsory for all vessels navigating the
reef on the E side of the channel off Blunt Point. The light is most    inside waters of the State of Alaska. (See Pilotage, Alaska,
brilliant down channel, diminishing around the rest of the horizon.  indexed as such, chapter 3, for details.)
 (291) At Turn Point, about 1.5 miles N of Blunt Point, a shoal    (305) Vessels en route Petersburg meet the pilot boat about 1
extends to NW halfway across the narrows. Frequent dredging is    mile NW of Guard Islands Light (55026.8'N., 131052.9'W.).
necessary to keep the channel open at this point. The dredged      (306) The pilot boat, a tugboat, can be contacted by calling
channel is marked by two lighted ranges, lighted buoys, and three    "PETERSBURG PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channels 16, 13, or
lights. The tow channel passes E of the three lights marking the E  12.
edge of the bend in the main channel off Turn Point.               (307) Towage.-Tug assistance is not normally required for
 (292) Petersburg Creek, which empties into the narrows from    docking or undocking vessels at Petersburg. If such services are
the W side opposite Turn Point, is navigable for small craft at high    required or desired, commercial towboats up to 320 hp operating
tide.                                                             from Petersburg and engaged in towing of barges and log rafts are
 (293) Bayou Point is the N point at the entrance to Petersburg    available. Towboats up to 1,270 hp are available from Wrangell.
Creek. A road extends along the shore behind the point.             (308) Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural
 (294) West Petersburg is a small settlement on the W  side of    quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and
Wrangell Narrows, 1.6 miles inside the entrance opposite Peters-    appendix for addresses.)
burg.                                                               (309) Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of
   (295) Prolewy.Rocks, off the W point just inside theNentrance ..the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-
 (295) Prolewy Rocks, off the W point just inside the N entrance
to Wrangell Narrows, are marked by a daybeacon. The tow chan-    ter 1.)
nel passes NW of the main channel and SE of the daybeacon. A        (310) Petersburgisacustomsstation.
lighted bell buoy marks the N entrance to Wrangell Narrows.        (311) A Coast Guard vessel is stationed at Petersburg.
 (296) Petersburg is a fishing center on Mitkof Island, on the E    32) Harbor regulationsA   speed limit of 7 knots is pre-
                                                                   scribed for Wrangell Narrows off Petersburg Harbor. (See
side of Wrangell Narrows, 1 mile inside the N entrance. The city
has two cold storage plants, four canneries, two oil terminals, and
a sawmill. Petersburg is the home port of over 300 fishing boats.  (313) Peters burg city   ordinance prescribes a 4 mph   and "no
                                                                   wake" speed limit inside the floats at the city boat harbors.
The deepest draft of a commercial vessel calling at the port in     (314) Wharves  -Al l the wharves in Petersburg are privately
1976 was 19 feet. Commodities handled at the port include fish
                                                                   owned and operated except City Pier, which is owned by the city,
and fish products, logs and lumber products, machinery, petroleum    and the Ferry Terminal, which is owned and operated by the State
and petroleum products, provisions, and general cargo.            of Alaska.
 (297) Prominent features.-A church spire, about 1.2 miles         (315) Nelbro Packing Co. Wharf (5648'24"N., 132'58'38"W.):
ENE of Turn Point, is conspicuous from seaward.                   160-foot face; depth alongside, 13 feet; deck height, 24 feet; two
  (298)  Channels.-A Federal project provides for a depth of 24    2'/4- and one 13/-ton forklifts; receipt of fish; owned and operated
feet in the approaches to the existing wharves; a small-craft basin    by Nelbro Packing Co., Inc.
11 to 15 feet in depth; and a short channel 8 feet deep to the S side  (316) Alaska Marine Highway System, Petersburg Ferry Termi-
of the Whitney-Fidalgo Pier. In May 1993, the project depths    nal (56048'31"N., 132058'28"W.): 130-foot face; depth alongside,
were generally available throughout the harbor except for lesser    28 feet; total berthing space with dolphins, 420 feet; loading and
depths along the basin edges.                                     discharging passengers and vehicles via a 35-ton transfer bridge;
  (299) Anchorages.-The harbor affords excellent protection for    operated by the State of Alaska.
small craft. Larger vessels may find protected anchorage 0.3 mile   (317) City Pier (56ï¿½48'37"N., 132ï¿½58'12"W.): 160-foot face;
S of Scow Bay in 4 to 5 fathoms, mud bottom.                      depths alongside, 20 feet; deck height, 27 feet; receipt and sale of
  (300) Dangers.-All known dangers are charted, and most are    marine fuels, oils, and lubricants; owned by the City of Petersburg
marked. There are two shoals, each marked by heavy kelp, 100 to    and operated by White Pass Alaska, Inc. and U.S. Coast Guard.
240 feet N of the N end of Petersburg Processors Inc. Pier.        (318) Union Oil Co. Pier (56ï¿½48'40"N., 132ï¿½57'53"W.): 65-foot
  (301) Tides.-The mean range of tide is 13.4 feet and the diurnal    face; depth alongside, 18 feet; deck height, 30 feet; receipt and
range is 15.7 feet at Petersburg.                                 sale of marine fuels, oils and lubricants; owned and operated by
  (302) Weather.-Petersburg has a typical maritime climate with    Union Oil Co.
mild winters, cool summers, and an annual precipitation of more     (319) Chatham  Strait Seafoods Pier (56ï¿½48'47"N.,
than 100 inches. Petersburg's location shields it from most of the    132ï¿½57'44"W.): 300-foot face; depth alongside, 20 feet; deck
high winds observed in the channels of southeastern Alaska with a    height, 27 feet; owned and operated by Chatham Strait Seafoods
resulting average annual wind speed of about 4.3 knots. The high    Co. A strong current was reported to set off the wharf on the ebb
winds can occur from almost any direction, but most commonly    tide.
blow from either N, NNE, SSE, or SE. About 45 percent of the        (320) Alaskan Glacier Sea Food Co. Wharf (56ï¿½48'49"N.,
winds, 21 knots or more, blow from the SSE and SE, and about 30    132057'26"W.): 60-foot face; depth alongside, 13 to 15 feet; deck







 166                                                     7. SUMNER STRAIT


height, 26 feet; one 2- and two 1'/-ton forklifts; receipt of sea-    long. In 1977, depths of 11 to 15 feet were available in the N boat
food; owned and operated by Alaskan Glacier Seafood Co.               harbor. In January-May 1979, depths of 12 to 15 feet were
  (321)  Petersburg Fisheries Wharf (56ï¿½48'52"N., 132ï¿½57'30"W.):      reported in the S boat harbor. Water and electrical power are avail-
W  face 175 feet; depth alongside, 26 feet; deck height, 26 feet;    able on all floats. Surfaced boat-launching ramps are in the SE
nine 1- to 2-ton forklifts; receipt of fish, loading of supplies, and    corner of the N boat harbor and in the SW corner of the S boat har-
icing fishing vessels; owned and operated by Icicle Seafoods. A      bor. The harbormaster assigns berths, controls the use of the
strong current is reported to set on the wharf on the flood and ebb.  small-craft grids, and maintains an office on the approach pier in
  (322)  Petersburg Fisheries Supply Pier (56048'56"N.,    the NE corner of the N boat harbor. The harbormaster's office
132ï¿½57'26"W.): 45-foot face; depth alongside, 20 feet; deck    monitors VHF-FM channel 16.
height, 26 feet; receipt and shipment of fish, loading of supplies,    (326)  Several floats maintained by the U.S. Coast Guard for
and icing fishing vessels; owned and operated by Icicle Seafoods.     their own vessels are on the N side of the Chatham Strait Seafoods
  (323)  Supplies.-Provisions, fishing supplies, and some marine    Pier in the SW part of the N boat harbor. A float for the use of the
supplies can be obtained in Petersburg. Water is available at all    U.S. Forest Service is on the S side of the Chatham Strait Sea-
wharves. Gasoline, diesel fuel, distillates, lubricating oils, and    foods Pier in the NW part of the S boat harbor.
greases can be had at the oil companies' wharves. Only diesel oil      (327)  A State-maintained 95-foot small-craft float is 0.5 mile W
is available in Petersburg for large vessels. Fishing vessels can    of the Chatham Strait Seafoods Pier at West Petersburg close NE
obtain ice at the wharves of the canneries and cold storage plants.   of Bayou Poirit. In 1976, a depth of 6 feet was reported alongside.
  (324)  Repairs.-There are no drydocking or major facilities for       (328)  Communications.-Petersburg has regular passenger,
larger vessels in Petersburg or in southeastern Alaska. The nearest    express, and freight service to Puget Sound ports, British Colum-
facilities are in British Columbia and the State of Washington. A     bia, and other Alaska ports by water and air. The Alaska State
marine railway that can handle vessels up to 60 feet long is avail-    Ferry System has daily service during the summer to Prince
able in the mudflats 0.1 mile S of the Chatham Strait Seafoods    Rupert, B.C., Ketchikan, Wrangell, Juneau, Haines, Skagway, and
Pier. A 191-foot small-craft grid is on the E  side of the N boat    Sitka, and weekly service to Hoonah, Kake, and Seattle. This
harbor, and a three tiered grid with individual lengths of about 100    schedule is less frequent during winter. Scheduled airlines operate
feet is on the E side of the S boat harbor. Emergency shaft repair    daily from Petersburg; charter air service is available. A highway
and minor repairs can be made in several machine shops adjacent    parallels the N shore of Mitkof Island along Frederick Sound for
to the waterfront. Repairs to electronic equipment can be made by    about 5 miles from Petersburg, and parallels the W  shore of Mit-
several local firms.                                                 kof Island to Blind Slough, across to Blind Slough on Sumner
 (325)  Small-craft facilities.-The city of Petersburg operates    Strait, and along the S and E shores of Mitkof Island to about 1
two boat harbors immediately N and S of the Chatham Strait Sea-    mile above Blaquiere Point, about 27 miles from Petersburg.
foods Pier. The harbors berth up to 260 vessels from 16 to 85 feet    Petersburg maintains telephone and radiotelephone communica-
                                                                    tions.









                                               8 FREDERICK SOUND

 (1)   This chapter describes Frederick Sound, Le Conte and    rock awash is close to the E point of the entrance A small islet is
Thomas Bays, the N part of Keku Strait, Saginaw and Security    on the W side at the entrance Cosmos Point the E point of the
Bays, and the city and harbor of Kake                            entrance, is wooded
                                                                   (lo)  Coney Island is steep-to the edge of Stikine River flats is
 (2)   Charts 17320, 17360 -Frederick Sound has its entrance    about 0 5 rmle E of it, and reefs extend 0 3 mile N from the point
from Chatham Strait between Kingsmull Point and Pomt Gardner    0 8 mnule S of the island
and extends NE to The Brothers and Cape Fanshaw, at the            (i1)  Le Conte Bay, on the N side of the head of Frederick
entrance to Stephens Passage, and SE to Dry Strait, a high-water    Sound, at times is inaccessible because of floating ice The great
boat passage connecting it with the E end of Sumner Strait The    depths in the bay prevent anchorage Le Conte Bay is entered from
sound is open and clear of obstructions, and has few offshore dan-    Fredenck Sound through a very narrow passage just N of Stlkme
gers to navigation The shores and islands of the sound are all    River flats At the entrance, a reef that bares at low water extends
high                                                             from the N shore halfway across the passage The junction of the
 (3)   Currents -The tidal current on the flood enters Frederick    reef and the N shore is privately marked by a white rectangular
Sound from Chatham Strait, it sets N into Stephens Passage and    marker at tree line about 1 5 miles N of Camp Island Several
through the E arm The ebb sets in the reverse direction          groundings have occurred on this reef, extreme caution is advised
 (4)   Strong flood and ebb currents were observed in the vlcm-    The bay is very shallow along its W  edge from the mouth N to
ity of Cape Fanshaw, Round Rock, and in the passage between    Timber Point
Turnabout Island and Kupreanof Island Standing waves were         (12)  Large icebergs from Le Conte Glacier are a menace to
sometimes observed in the vicuuty of Cape Fanshaw when strong    navigation from Camp Island to Frederick Point
winds shift rapidly from SE to N                                   (13)  The shores of Frederick Sound, from Wrangell Narrows to
 (5)   Current observations made between Cape Fanshaw and    Cape Strait, are bold The SW shore can be safely approached as
Cape Strait indicate that the ebb or W  current is considerably    close as 0 5 mile A ledge which uncovers about 8 feet, is about
stronger than the flood In the vicinity of Cape Strait the ebb    0 3 mile from the head of the bight about 3 miles N of Prolewy
velocity is about 1 5 to 2 knots and it is probable that the current    Point, the NW point of the entrance to Wrangell Narrows
floods only with the largest tides of the month                    (14)  The McDonald Islands are two small islands about 3 8
 (6)   Weather-Although sheltered from the open Gulf, Freder-    miles E of the N entrance to Wrangell Narrows The E island, 228
ick Sound and its surrounding waterways are subject to local    feet high is the larger
effects because of the high ground that surrounds the area Many    (l5)  Brown Cove, on the NE side of the sound about 5 5 miles
locations are vulnerable to strong SE winds, whluch are a problem    NE of the entrance to Wrangell Narrows affords indifferent
from October through February Vlslblhties are most often a prob-    anchorage in 11 to 12 fathoms at the entrance The head of the
lem from about November through March, and least often a haz-    cove bares at low water
ard in April, May, and June The winter maximum indicates          (16)  Sukoi Islets, locally known as Sockeye Islets, are two
restrictions of visibilities because of snow Precipitation is most    wooded islands, with a smaller one between, about 3 8 miles N
likely from September through December with an October peak,    from the entrance to Wrangell Narrows and about 1 mile off the W
when about 9 inches falls on 18 days on average Temperatures    shore of Frederick Sound The westernmost and largest island is
fall below freezing on about 90 days durinng the year, while in    about 330 feet high The easternmost island is about 120 feet high,
summer they chmb to 700F or above on just a few Extremes range    and the middle island is low Sukoi Islets Light (56053 7'N
from just below 0ï¿½F to about 80ï¿½F over the open water To the SE,    132ï¿½56 6'W) 18 feet above the water is shown from a skeleton
in the more restricted and more continental regions, the tempera-    tower on a concrete pier with a red and white diamond-shaped
ture range is much greater and extremes range from about -15ï¿½F    daymark on the westernmost islet The usual channel is W of the
to the mid 80's                                                  islets
 (7)   Ice -Glacial ice from Le Conte Bay is generally present in
the E arm of Fredenck Sound, and at hmes m large quantities The   (17)  Charts 17367, 17360 -Point Agassiz (56ï¿½55 4'N
ice generally follows the N shore of the sound as far as the    132ï¿½53 O'W), on the SE side of Frederick Sound, is low and
entrance to Thomas Bay Under certain conditions of wind and    wooded An extensive marsh flat extends about 2 rmles to the N
weather, ice may be expected as far as the Sukoi Islets and it may  (18)  Beacon Point, on the W shore WNW of Point Agassiz
also be found at Cape Strait and Turnabout Island Occasionally a    and about 3 6 rmles N of Sukoi Islets, is marked by a daybeacon
few stray pieces of ice work into Wrangell Narrows as far as       (19)  Cape Strait is marked by Cape Strait Light (56ï¿½59 9'N,
Green Point, making navigation dangerous                         133ï¿½05 5'W), 30 feet above the water shown from a skeleton
                                                                  tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark
 (8)   Chart 17360 -Camp Island, Pocket Island, and Iidden        (20)  About 1 4 rmles SE of Cape Strait are a small valley and
Island are wooded islands on the flats N of Dry Strait           bight A reef which has a wooded islet, extends 0 2 mile off the
 (9)   Ideal Cove has its entrance on the S side of Frederick    point on the E side of the bight
Sound, about 13 8 rmles SE of Wrangell Narrows and 1 2 rmles S     (21)  Thomas Bay, about 3 6 miles E of Cape Strait, Is the large
of Coney Island Log storage extends along the E shore of the    estuary on the N side of Frederick Sound between Wood Point and
cove to the head At times logs take up the whole cove Small    Point Vandeput The entrance marked by buoys is about 10 miles
craft desiring moorage will tie up to the log booms A well-defined    N of the N entrance to Wrangell Narrows and 22 miles ESE of


                                                                                                                             167





168                                                8  FREDERICK SOUND


Cape Fanshaw Good anchorage with protection from SE weather    mond-shaped daymark The point is low and rocky at its end Bay
can be had off the S shore well inside Wood Point Very good    Point, the W point at the entrance, is bold and wooded
small-craft anchorage can be had in either of two small coves on  (36)  Farragut Bay has two arms The W arm Is smaller, and its
the E shore of Ruth Island in depths of 3 to 10 fathoms, soft bot-    entrance is obstructed near mudchannel by a rock awash and by a
tom                                                              shoal that extends from the W shore Vessels may enter by favor-
 (22)  Thomas Bay, from the bar to Baird Glacier, at its head, is   ing the E shore The E arm expands into a large bay known as
about 10 miles long The moraune of Baird Glacier was reported to    Francis Anchorage  SE winds are reported to draw through the
have encroached to a point about 900 yards S of Elephants Head    anchorage with velocities up to 60 mph Small craft may find
m 1976 On the SE side is an arm that extends S to the moraine of    anchorage with adequate protection m close to the E shore, just N
the Patterson Glacier These glaciers do not discharge ice into the    of the projecting point, in 4 to 5 fathoms The extensive tidal flats
bay                                                              at the head of the bay were reported to be encroaching in 1976
 (23)  Wood Point, the E point of the entrance to Thomas Bay, is    Tidal currents have little velocity in the bay
low and wooded A kelp-covered reef, largely bare, extends 0 6      (37)  Read Island is just inside the entrance on the E side of
mile off Wood Point A lighted bell buoy and an unlighted buoy    Farragut Bay A very narrow passage, which may be used by small
mark the W extrermty of the reef                                 craft, and with reported depths of 4 fathoms leads between the
 (24)  Point Vandeput is the S extremity of a low neck of land    Island and Grand Point In June 1988 an obstruction was reported
that extends 2 5 rmles S from shore on the NW side of the entrance    m the passage about 0 25 mile NNW of Grand Point Light in
to the bay A detached clump of trees is at the end of the wooded    about 57ï¿½05'45"N  133ï¿½11'13"W A shoal area with a rock awash
section of the point A narrow channel, with a depth of 4 fathoms,    about midway and an unnamed Islet at the outer end extend off the
separates the reef S of the point from a kelp-covered bar that    NE end of Read Island
extends 0 8 mile farther in a SE direction A buoy marks the SE     (38)  Flock Rock is a small rock Islet m the middle of the pas-
end of the bar The 4-fathom channel should be used with local    sage N of Read Island Submerged rocks are reported to be
knowledge                                                        between Flock Rock and the shore
 (25)  The entrance channel between the bar and the reef W of     (39)  A small vessel can make a temporary fair-weather anchor-
Wood Point has depths of 43/4 to 14 fathoms                      age between Grand Point and the S end of Read Island in 5 to 6
 (26)  The tidal currents have a velocity of about 3 knots over    fathoms, hard bottom Of the four coves or indentations making
the bar at the entrance to Thomas Bay, and swirls occur at times    into the E side of Read Island, the third, leading N, is reported to
from the shoal spot m the middle of the channel to Point Vandeput  provide the best anchorage for small vessels in 3 to 5 fathoms
The swirls are little felt m the channel E of the shoal spot     rocky bottom A log storage area is along the E shore of the bay
 (27)  Spurt Point, in Thomas Bay, about 3 5 miles E of Point    about 1 2 miles E of the NE tip of Read Island The best passage to
Vandeput, is steep and wooded                                    Francis Anchorage is W of Read Island, and between Flock Rock
 (28)  In 1982, several rocks that bare at low water were reported    and Read Island, about 0 2 mile off the latter The chart is a suffi-
to be about 0 8 mile W of Spurt Point, caution is advised in this    cient guide
area                                                              (40)  Portage Bay, on the S side of Frederick Sound 7 miles W
 (29)  Bock Bight, about 1 8 mules E of Wood Point, is a narrow    of Cape Strait and nearly opposite Farragut Bay, is a secure
and deep bight The entrance to the bight is bare nearly 2 hours    anchorage, but its entrance is narrow The tidal currents in the
before low water, forming a dam with deep water inside that over-    entrance have considerable velocity at sprinng tides Ice forms in
flows with great force except at slack water                     the bay during extreme cold weather Portage Islets, two in num
 (30)  Ruth Island is the large Island on the W  side of the    ber, are in Frederick Sound about 0 8 mile W of the entrance and
entrance to the SE arm of the bay, close to its N end are a small    0 4 mile offshore
islet and some low-water rocks The NW entrance to the passage      (41)  The entrance channel has a controlling depth of 31/2 fath-
W of Ruth Island is shoal, but may be used by small vessels      oms, but is constricted by shoals to a width of 150 yards Shoals
 (31)  Spray Island Is on the E side of the SE arm E of the cen-    make out from the shores of the bay and also from the head to 0 8
ter of Ruth Island A moonng buoy is about 0 25 mile SE of the    mile N of Stop Island Harrington Rock, 3 feet high, Is about
island in about 56ï¿½59'51"N, 132047'08"W                          0 2 mile NW of Stop Island
 (32)  Anchorage for small boats may be had in 5 fathoms off the  (42)  Portage Bay Light 3 (57000 3'N, 133ï¿½19 4'W), 16 feet
NW entrance of the passage between Ruth Island and the main-    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a square
land Anchorage for small vessels may be had in the bight E of    green daymark on the end of East Point West Point is marked by
Spray Island in 18 fathoms The anchorage Is close to the beach    a daybeacon
that is steep-to Anchorage for larger vessels may be had in 11     (43)  High-water slack is the best time to enter Portage Bay
fathoms, mud bottom, off the bight at the SE end of Ruth Island  Small boats have used the grass hne of East Point, Hook Point
 (33)  Scenery Cove, in the N part of Thomas Bay, does not    and a small hiull in the background as an entrance range Round
afford anchorage except for small craft Large vessels can anchor    East Point about 200 yards off and follow rmdchannel courses
at the entrance to the cove in 7 to 15 fathoms                     (44)  Anchor in 4 to 6 fathoms from 1 to 1 5 miles NNW of
 (34)  Farragut Bay is the large indentation on the N side of    Stop Island The water shoals gradually toward the shore, there are
Frederick Sound, about 8 miles NW of Cape Strait The entrance,    no dangers outside the 3-fathom curve
between Grand Point and Bay Point, is about 20 miles NW of the
N entrance to Wrangell Narrows and 12 miles ESE of Cape Fan-      (45)  Charts 17360, 17368 -From Farragut Bay to Cape Fan-
shaw                                                             shaw, the shore should not be approached closer than 0 5 mile
 (35)  Grand Point, the E point at the entrance to Farragut Bay,    The coast is bold and heavily wooded Point Highland, 4 2 miles
is marked by Grand Point Light (57ï¿½05 5'N, 133011 2'W), 16    SE of Cape Fanshaw, is steep-to and wooded but is not prorm-
feet above the water and shown on a pile with a red and white dla-    nent







                                                    8. FREDERICK SOUND                                                      169


 (46)  Cape Fanshaw, at the junction of Stephens Passage and    Entrance Light 2 (56ï¿½59.1'N., 134001.2'W.). A narrow channel,
Frederick Sound, is a long, low, wooded point terminating in a    between the chain and the Kupreanof Island shore, leads SE to
moderately long point of bedrock, with a mound of bedrock at the    Kake Harbor and the city of Kake. Grave Island, small and
extreme end and deep water within 0.2 mile of the point. Cape    scrubby, is about 1 mile S of Kake and 3 miles SE of the north-
Fanshaw Light (57011.1'N.,133034.4'W.), 33 feet above the    westernmost reef. The island is marked on its NE side by Kake
water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dia-    Harbor Light (56057.6'N., 133ï¿½57.2'W.), 16 feet above the water
mond-shaped daymark on the point of the cape.                    and shown from a square frame with a red and white diamond-
 (47)  Turnabout Island, about 13.5 miles WSW of Cape Fan-    shaped daymark. Anchorage may be found in Kake Harbor in 15
shaw, is high and wooded. The shores are fairly bold except at the    fathoms, soft mud, between the city and Grave Island.
S end. The cove on the NW side of the island has temporary        (55)  Kake, about 4.4 miles SE of Point Macartney, is a com-
anchorage for small craft. An islet, 0.5 mile SW of Turnabout    munity with three stores, a lodge, and an Alaska Public Health
Island, shows as two rocks about 20 feet high, at high water; but at    Center with a nurse in attendance every other month. A lighted
low water the ledge surrounding the islet shows for about 800    microwave tower at Kake is prominent from the strait. Reefs,
yards SW and on the line of the bare rocks. A clear channel 1.5    marked by a light and a buoy on their outer edges, and extensive
miles wide, between these rocks and Pinta Rocks, may be safely   flats, also marked by a buoy, extend 600 yards offshore and about
used in the daytime and with clear weather. Turnabout Island    0.9 mile SE of Kake, respectively. A fish weir, marked by a private
Light (57007.9'N., 133ï¿½59.3'W.), 23 feet above the water, is    seasonal light, is about 250 yards NW of the cannery pier.
shown from a spindle with a red and white diamond-shaped day-      (56)  Routes.-The best approach to Kake Harbor is from the
mark on an islet N of Turnabout Island. A 5 3/4-fathom spot is    NW on a SE course from between Point White and the light about
about 0.7 mile SSW of the light in about 57ï¿½07'22.7"N.,          1.1 miles to the SSW. The approach to the City Pier is marked by a
133059'56.9"W.                                                   light and a daybeacon. If bound for the piers 1 to 1.5 miles SE of
 (48)  Pinta Rocks are two patches of rocks surrounded by    Kake, pass SW of the buoys marking the reefs off the village and
extensive kelp beds about 2.2 miles S from Turnabout Island and    the flats SE of it; when clear and S of the southeasternmost buoy,
about 1 mile off the main shore. East Pinta Rocks, covered at    head for the piers, taking care to avoid the tidal flats to the N and
about half tide, are marked on the N side by a buoy. West Pinta    the reef marked by a light about 0.3 mile SSW of the Alaska State
Rocks are marked at the W end by a light, 30 feet above the water    Ferry Terminal (56ï¿½57.7'N., 133ï¿½55.1'W.). A landing on either
and shown from a pile with a red and white diamond-shaped day-    side can be made at the cannery pier.
mark.                                                              (57)  Small craft coming from the W usually pass 100 yards off
 (49)  The passage S of Pinta Rocks is used extensively by small    Payne Island, the northernmost of the Keku Islands, and head for
craft, and is especially valuable when going against the current,    Kake Harbor Light on Grave Island, course 088ï¿½, until within 0.5
since the currents here are much weaker than those N of the rocks.    mile of it, and then pass N of the light. Small fishing vessels
Slack water in this passage occurs up to 2 hours before predicted    approaching Kake and the cannery from the S often pass through
high and low waters.                                             the reef N of Hamilton Island. The channel is marked by daybea-
 (50)  Cape Bendel, a rounding wooded point, is about 4 miles S    cons but may be dangerous and should only be attempted with
of Turnabout Island. In rounding Cape Bendel, keep well offshore    local knowledge, preferably on a rising tide.
to avoid the foul ground and rocks awash that extend 0.8 mile off  (58)  Wharves.-Kake has three commercial wharves and
the cape in the direction of West Pinta Rock.                    small-craft floats.
 (5s)  Keku Strait, northern part.-Keku Strait is divided into    (59)  The City Pier (56ï¿½58'23"N., 133ï¿½56'38"W.): SE end of
three parts: a S bay, a N bay, and a narrow intricate passage about    Kake; 67-foot face; 9 feet reported alongside; used by fishing ves-
18 miles long known as Rocky Pass, which connects the two bays.    sels; owned by the State of Alaska and operated by the community
The S bay and Rocky Pass are described in chapter 7. Rocky Pass    of Kake.
is shown in detail on chart 17372.                                (60)  Kake Tribal Fuel Company Pier (56ï¿½57'48"N.,
 (52)  The N bay of Keku Strait is about 13 miles long from the    133ï¿½55'19"W.): about 1 mile SE of Kake; 150-foot face; 10 feet
entrance to Point Camden where the bay branches, the W branch    reported alongside; fueling and loading supplies to fishing vessels;
forming Port Camden and the E branch forming Rocky Pass. The    owned and operated by the Kake Tribal Fuel Company.
NE shore of the bay is formed by Kupreanof Island and the SW       (61)  A cold storage dock is about 70 yards NW of Kake Tribal
shore by Kuiu Island. The entrance from Frederick Sound is    Fuel Company Pier. Ice for commercial fishing vessels and fresh
between Point Macartney and Cornwallis Point.                    fish are available.
 (53)  PointMacartney, the NE point at the entrance from Fred-    (62)  Alaska  State  Ferry  Terminal  (56ï¿½57'41"N.,
erick Sound, 2.5 miles S of Cape Bendel, is a long, low, wooded    133ï¿½55'10"W.): 235 feet with dolphins; 25 feet reported alongside;
point, terminating in an abrupt wooded islet with two tree- and    35-ton steel transfer bridge; passengers and vehicles; owned and
brush-covered masses of rock between, all connected by a rocky    operated by the State of Alaska.
platform at low water. Point Macartney Light (57001.5'N.,         (63)  Supplies.-Limited amounts of provisions can be had at
134003.5'W.), 20 feet above the water, is shown from a pile with a    Kake. Gasoline, diesel fuel, oils, and greases are available at the
red and white diamond-shaped daymark on a small islet off the    Kake Tribal Fuel Company Pier, and by truck to the other piers.
point. A rock awash is about 0.8 mile SE of the light.           Water is available year-round at the fuel pier and seasonally at the
  (54)  Point White is about 2 miles SE of Point McCartney.    cold storage dock.
Rocks and reefs extend SE from a point about 1.1 miles SSW of      (64)  Repairs.-A 72-foot grid is on the S side of the approach
Point White. The rocks and reefs connect with Mosquito Islands,    of the City Pier.
Grave Island, Burnt Island, and Hamilton Island, to form a         (65)  Small-craft Facilities.-A small-craft and seaplane float
chain over 4 miles long. The chain is parallel to and about 1 mile    branches NW from the approach of the City Pier. A State-main-
off the NE shore of the bay and is marked at its NW end by Kake    tained 420-foot small-craft float with over seventy 32- to 40-foot







170                                                  8. FREDERICK SOUND


stall floats, connected to shore by a 307-foot approach pier,    daymark on the SW end of the point and marks the entrance to
extends into Portage Bay, about 2.3 miles SE of Kake. In 1976, 3    Davidson Bay.
to 15 feet was reported alongside the float, but caution should be   (76)  Rocky Pass, extending SE from Point Camden and con-
exercised during periods of extreme spring tides that sometimes    necting with the S bay of Keku Strait, is a high-water passage for
reach minus 4 feet. Two lights and a daybeacon mark the approach    small craft. (See description in chapter 7.)
from the N, but the area surrounding the float is foul and approach  (77)  Tidal currents enter the NW part of Keku Strait and Port
should only be made with local knowledge.                          Camden from Frederick Sound. The velocity in the open strait is
  (66)  Communications.-The Alaska Ferry System runs twice    reported to be about 1.2 knots.
weekly during the summer to Petersburg and Sitka. Daily seaplane
service with Juneau, Petersburg, and Sitka is available. Telephone   (78)  Chart 17368.-Saginaw Bay indents the N shore of Kuiu
and radiotelephone communications are maintained.                  Island for about 7 miles in a SE direction. Cornwallis Point, the
  (67)  Keku Islands, on the SW side of Keku Strait, comprise a    N point at the entrance is low and wooded. Cornwallis Point
group of wooded islands, with outlying reefs, between which are    Light (56ï¿½55.9'N., 134ï¿½16.4'W.),34 feet above the water, shown
no practicable channels. There are other reefs on the SW side, but    from a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark
they have sections showing above water and are easily avoided in    on the SW part of the point, marks the entrance to the bay. Shoal
daytime. Between Keku Islands and the reefs on the NE side is a    water extends about 0.3 mile W  and N from Cornwallis Point. A
channel about 1.5 miles wide and 8 miles long to Point Hamilton,    rock that uncovers 7 feet, an extension of rock out from the point,
with depths of 7 to 50 fathoms. S of Eva Island the channel is   is 0.1 mile WNW of the light. The high point of the rock is away
about 1 mile wide, between Point Hamilton and Hound Island, and    from the main point of land. On an ebb tide, the current from Sag-
leads between kelp-marked rocks and shoals on both sides.          inaw Bay sets toward the rock. When the current is against the
 (68)  Eva Island, about 8 miles SE of Point Macartney, is    wind, a considerable tide rip results. Mariners are advised to give
wooded and marks the turn of the channel when bound for Hamil-    the point a wide berth when rounding it.
ton Bay or Port Camden. Off its W end is a bare rock.                (79)  Sachem Island, small and wooded, is in midchannel in
 (69)  Point Hamilton, about 0.9 mile SE of Eva Island, marks    Saginaw Bay, about 2.7 miles SSE of Cornwallis Point. Shoals
the entrance to Hamilton Bay. A mound-shaped islet is connected    and other dangers extend in a NW-SE direction near midchannel
at low water with the point,                                       from a point about 1.6 miles NW of Sachem Island to the head of
                                                                   the bay. In the approach to the head of the bay, there are also
 (70) Hamilton Bay, on the NE side of Point Hamilton, is a
secure anchorage for vessels of any size. The entrance is clear in    numerous islands with surrounding ledges.
  idchannel, and extensive bare flats are at the head of the bay.    (80)  Halleck Harbor, on the NE side of Saginaw Bay about
Two  large streams enter near the head  .                           1.5 miles SE of Cornwallis Point, is the best anchorage in Saginaw
Two large streams enter near the head.
                                                                   Bay, but is open W, and the bottom is generally hard and in places
                                                                    uneven. It is readily distinguished by high white bluffs on its NE
Eva Island to the middle of Hound Island, are fringed with kelp to    side. At the foot of these bluffs are some houses and gravesites.
                                                                   The best channel to enter is 0.4 mile wide between the 31/2-fathom
 (72)  Hound Island is about 2 miles S of Eva Island. It is 1.5    rock in the entrance and the NW point. The bight at the NW end of
miles long, low, and wooded, with outlying rocks at either end; on    the harbor dries. Anchorage can be had in the middle of the harbor
its N side are extensive kelp patches. A rock that uncovers 3 feet is    in 8 to 12 fathoms.
about 1.2 miles S of Hound Island.                                   (81)  The piling ruins of a high-water dock are in the cove on
 (73)  Pup Island, about 2.8 miles SSE of Hound Island, is    the E side of Saginaw Bay about 3 miles SE of Halleck Harbor
small, steep, and wooded, and marks Point Camden, the E point    and N of a high island that is close to the N shore.
at the entrance to Port Camden.;                                     (82)  The piling are in rotted condition, and only stubs, covered
 (74)  Port Camden, the entrance to which is on the W  side of    at high water, remain. These stubs are a hazard to small boats that
Pup Island and 14 miles from Point Macartney, is an inlet 13 miles    might maneuver too close to shore in this area. A private 75-foot
long and 1.5 miles wide for a distance of 5 miles from its entrance.    float, used by small boats, is anchored immediately NW of the pile
At this point are several islands, the most important and in mid-    ruins. In 1976, 15 feet to bare was reported alongside. Gasoline is
channel, is Cam Island. From these islands the inlet contracts    available in an emergency only. Anchorage in 9 to 10 fathoms,
gradually to its head, which has a portage to Bay of Pillars. From    with protection from the prevailing SE winds, can be had about
the entrance to Cam Island there is 8 to 34 fathoms; above Cam     300 yards SW of the small-craft float. In 1976, a log storage area
Island there is 8 to 24 fathoms, decreasing to 4 to 8 fathoms 2    was along the N and NE shores of the high island in the cove.
miles from its head. A good anchorage can be found in 20 fathoms     (83)  A logging camp was operating off the SW shore of Sagi-
in the wide part of Port Camden SW of Cam Island, favoring the    naw Bay, 2.5 to 3.4 miles SE of Sachem Island. A small-craft and
SW shore of the inlet. Good anchorage, protected from all direc-    seaplane float is at the NW end of the camp, and a log storage area
tions but the N, is available in 4 to 10 fathoms in the cove SE of    is at the SE end. A mailplane calls three times weekly in the sum-
Cam Island. Favor the W  shore of the cove to avoid a large reef    mer. Gasoline and a small machine shop are available in an emer-
and a 3-fathom shoal to the N on the E side of the cove. An excel-    gency only. Radiotelephone communications are maintained.
lent anchorage for small boats can be had in a small cove on the E   (84)  Security Bay, about 4.5 miles SW of Cornwallis Point, is
shore E of Cam Island. The entrance shoals to 21/2 fathoms. Keep    a secure anchorage. Numerous islands and ledges obstruct the
close to the W shore of the entrance. Beware of the reefs on the N  entrance and bay, which should be entered with caution because of
side of the entrance to this cove. Anchorage in 4 fathoms, well    the possibility of unknown dangers.
protected on all sides, can be had.                                  (85)  Roadstead Island is in the middle at the entrance, from
 (75)  Salt Point Light (56050.7'N., 133ï¿½52.0'W.), 17 feet above    which a chain of three small islands, Flat Island, Cedar Island,
the water, is shown on a pile with a red and white diamond-shaped    and Harbor Island, extends about 0.7 mile in a SE direction. The







                                                     8. FREDERICK SOUND                                                        171


usual entrance to the bay is between Roadstead Island and Paraly-    the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white
sis Point. It is marked by Security Bay Light 1 (56052.4'N.,    diamond-shaped daymark. There is a clear channel about 2 miles
134ï¿½22.4'W.), 32 feet above the water, shown from a skeleton    wide between Round Rock and the NW shore, but the bottom is
tower with a square green daymark on the SW end of a ledge that    irregular and the depths are from 9 to 40 fathoms. The water is
extends from the N end of Roadstead Island.                        much deeper E of Round Rock and between it and The Brothers.
 (86)  Bibb Shoal, usually showing kelp, is an extensive shoal      (97)  Pybus Bay is located on the NW side of Frederick Sound,
with 1/2 fathom over it, on the W  side of the entrance to Security    W  of its junction with Stephens Passage and about 3.5 miles
Bay, N of Paralysis Point.                                         WNW of Round Rock Light. It is divided into two arms by a long
 (87)  Christmas Island is the largest of several small islands on    point from which three groups of islands, rocks, and reefs extend
the S side of Security Bay at its entrance; the island is bluff.    in a S direction. The best anchorage in the bay is in Cannery Cove.
Between Christmas Island and Cedar Island, the channel is 0.2    Good anchorage is also available in the northeastern half of Pybus
mile wide.                                                         Bay between the San Juan islands and Admiralty Island in 14 to
 (88)  Cleft Island, in the middle of Security Bay, about 1.1 mile    18 fathoms of water.
SE of Christmas Island, is about 0.6 mile long and has a deep        (98)  Point Pybus, the N point at the entrance to Pybus Bay, is
notch in its W end. At its SE end are some bare rocks. A narrow    low and wooded. A group of rocks extend 0.6 mile S from the
islet, about 0.3 mile long, is close to the NE side of Cleft Island.  point.
 (89)  Retaliation Point, about 0.4 mile N of Cleft Island, is      (99)  San Juan Islands, low, wooded, and surrounded by foul
bluff, steep-to, and wooded. Cedar Bight is E of Cleft Island. Its    ground, are about 0.8 mile SW of Point Pybus. A rock with '/2
entrance, between Cleft Island and Retaliation Point, is obstructed    fathom over it is 0.4 mile SW of the southernmost and largest
by a ledge bare at lowest tides and surrounded by kelp. The SE    island; dangerous rocks are 0.2 mile W  of the W  point of this
part of the bight is shoal and rocky; otherwise the depths are 4 to 6    island.
fathoms, rocky bottom.                                              (loo)  Southwest Islands are a narrow chain of four wooded
 (90)  A foul area extends W about 0.2 mile from the middle of    islands, parallel with the W  shore of the bay, about 1.5 miles SW
Cleft Island to a 1/2-fathom spot. Indian Rock, a few feet above    of San Juan Islands. Foul ground extends about 0.5 mile S of
high water, and Stewart Rock, close N, are W of the island and    Elliott Island, the largest of the group, and two rocks that uncover
both surrounded by foul ground. The usual passage is through the    11 and 14 feet are 0.3 mile NNW of the northernmost island of the
narrow channel between the rocks and the /2-fathom spot.           group. Two dangerous rocks, bare at half tide, are about 0.2 and
 (91)  The best anchorage in Security Bay is about 0.5 mile SE     0.3 mile W of Long Island, the middle island of the group.
of Cleft Island in 9 to 11 fathoms, midway between the large        (lot)  Grave Island, steep-to, and wooded, is on the W side of
island on the NE side and a wooded islet and some bare rocks near    West Channel, about 0.7 mile W  of the N extremity of Elliott
the SW side. Anchorage can also be had between the W  end of    Island, and is a prominent landmark for this channel. Bare rocks
Cleft Island and Harbor Island, in 11 to 16 fathoms, clear of the    are 0.2 mile N of the island and about 0.8 mile S of the island.
lï¿½-fathom rock 0.2 mile SE of Harbor Island. The head of the bay    (102)  Grave Island Light (57016.0'N., 134ï¿½05.0'W.), 18 feet
is foul with several reefs, some of which cover at high water.     above the water and shown from a small house with a red and
 (92)  Band Cove is just E of Hourigan Point and W of Bibb    white diamond-shaped daymark on the SE side of Grave Island,
Shoal, at the entrance to Security Bay. A small vessel can anchor    marks the entrance to Pybus Bay.
in the entrance in about 6 fathoms, but the cove is not clear and is  (103) Midway Islands are the triangular group of wooded
open from the NW to SW. With Security and Saginaw Bays avail-    islands N of Southwest Islands and E of the entrance to Cannery
able, the cove is not recommended as an anchorage.                 Cove. Each island of the group has foul ground surrounding it. A
                                                                   dangerous rock that uncovers 2 feet is 0.7 mile SE of the N island.
 (93)  Charts 17360, 17320.-This section covers the NW shore    A 2-fathom rock is about halfway between this dangerous rock
of Frederick Sound from Pybus Bay to Chatham Strait. Anchorage    and the N island.
can be had in Surprise Harbor, Herring Bay, or Chapin Bay. Small     (104)  Cannery Cove indents the W  shore of Pybus Bay, about
vessels can find secure anchorage in Murder Cove.                  3.5 miles NW of Elliott Island. The cove is nearly landlocked and
  (94)  The Brothers, a number of large and small wooded            affords secure anchorage in 6 to 15 fathoms, sticky bottom. A
islands, are about 2.5 miles off the W shore at the junction of Fre-    large island with an islet close to the S forms the N point at the
derick Sound and Stephens Passage.                                 entrance. A rock with 1/4 fathom over it is in the middle of the
  (95)  Secure anchorage for small craft can be found in the nar-    entrance. Only a few broken piles mark the site of the cannery
row passage close W of the West Brother Island and between it   wharves that formerly stood on the S shore of Cannery Cove. A
and the small islet surrounded by reefs close W. The entrance is    seasonal fishing cabin (57ï¿½18.4'N., 134ï¿½08.1'W.), with a floating
from S, passing close along the W  shore of the West Brother    dock for small craft, is on the S shore of the cove. The cabin mon-
Island. The N approach is foul. Three to four knot currents have    itors VHF-FM channel 16.
been observed between The Brothers. Tide rips can occur at the      (105) Donkey Bay, on the W side of Pybus Bay, about 1.8 miles
northern end of the passes between the islands. The passage    N of Cannery Cove, is an open bight that bares in its W part and is
between the East and West Brother offers deep water. A foul area    of no importance to navigation.
extends 0.5 mile S of East Brother and should be avoided. The        (106) Henrys Arm, the southernmost of the two coves opposite
passage between East Brother and the island to the E has a shoal    Donkey Bay, has depths of 1 ï¿½4 to 63/4 fathoms.
laying 0.15 mile E of East Brother.                                 (107) The channel between Point Pybus and the San Juan
                                                                   Islands is not recommended except for small craft with local
  (96)  Chart 17363.-Round Rock, 40 feet high and bare, about    knowledge.
2.7 miles SW from West Brother Island (chart 17360), is marked       (los) The best passage between the E and W parts of the bay is
by Round Rock Light (57015.6'N., 133ï¿½56.2'W.), 49 feet above  , between the NW Midway Island and the mainland. An unmarked







172                                                  8. FREDERICK SOUND


rock with a depth of 21/2 fathoms over it is 0.5 mile W  of the N  is running. In N winds, an indifferent anchorage may be had in the
point of the NE Midway Island. West Channel, described below, is    entrance to South Passage in 63/4 fathoms, with the SE side of
recommended for vessels bound for Cannery Cove.                    Liesnoi Island bearing 082ï¿½, and Point Napean and Sharp Point
  (109) West Channel extends between Grave Island and South-    in line, bearing 189ï¿½.
west Islands and then between the Midway Islands and the W
shore of the bay. Several dangers, which are shown on the chart,     (118)  Charts 17336, 17320.-Chapin Bay is a small inlet on the
are passed when using this channel. Rocky islets about 6 feet high    N side of Frederick Sound, and on the SW side of Point Napean
are about 0.6 mile S of Grave Island. They are not easily picked up    (57ï¿½08.5'N., 134ï¿½17.5'W.), affording secure anchorage in 9 to 11
at night. Strong crosscurrents may be encountered between Spruce    fathoms, sandy bottom. A reef, marked by kelp, extends 0.6 mile
Island and the entrance to West Channel.                           NE from the W point at the entrance, terminating in a bare ledge in
  (110) Little Pybus Bay (57ï¿½15'N., 134ï¿½08'W.), close W  of    the middle of the entrance. A ledge, bare at half tide, is 330 yards
Pybus Bay and NW of Spruce Island, is about 2.5 miles long and 1    SW from the N point at the entrance, and kelp shows about 400
mile wide at the entrance, and is open to the S. A chain of islets,    yards S of the ledge. There is also kelp in the middle of the chan-
reefs, and broken ground extends about 1.5 miles S of the E        nel, about 0.8 mile inside the entrance, and a shoal extends 150
entrance point. Shoal water, with several islets and rocks, extends    yards E from the point on the W side of the S entrance to the nar-
about 1.2 miles from the head of the bay.                          rows. A log storage area is on the SW side of Chapin Bay about
  (111)  Spruce Island, small, wooded, and 2 miles from the    1.4 miles above the entrance.
Admiralty Island shore, is 3 miles S of Grave Island Light and 6     (119) It is safest to enter Chapin Bay at low water. Enter about
miles NW of Turnabout Island. (See also chart 17360.) A ledge    400 yards SW of the half-tide ledge off the N point at the entrance
that uncovers 4 feet extends 500 yards SW of the island.           and keep the N shore aboard at a distance of 200 yards until in the
                                                                   narrows. A midchannel course leads safely to the anchorage in the
 (112)  Chart 17365.-Woewodski and Eliza Harbors have a com-    basin above the narrows.
mon entrance between Point Napean and Deepwater Point 9              (120) Herring Bay, 10 miles NE of Point Gardner Light, has its
miles WNW of Turnabout Island. (See also chart 17360.) The    entrance between Point Brightman and the point to the N that
entrances are much obstructed by dangerous ledges, and with the    separates Herring Bay from Chapin Bay. A tongue of land, pro-
close proximity of better anchorages the use of these harbors is    longed by rocks, reefs, and kelp patches, extends in a SE direction
seldom necessary. Liesnoi Island, of irregular shape, is in the    from the bay, dividing it centrally into two parts.
entrance.                                                            (121) A rock awash is about 225 yards W  of the charted 3-
 (113)  Deepwater Point Light (57ï¿½10.3'N,, 134ï¿½14.2'W.), 17    fathom shoal in the middle of the NE arm of the bay.
feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red      (122) There is a fair anchorage, open to the SE, in the SW corner
and white diamond-shaped daymark on a small islet about 0.2    of the bay, about 0.8 mile from the head. To make this anchorage,
mile W of the point.                                               follow the S shore at a distance of about 0.4 mile, the chart being
 (114)  Woewodski Harbor is the open bight between Liesnoi    the guide.
Island and Deepwater Point. Ledges and rocks, covered or awash
at various stages of the tide and generally marked by kelp, extend   (123)  Chart 17320.-Carroll Island (57ï¿½01.7'N., 134ï¿½28.5'W.),
NE from Liesnoi Island halfway across Woewodski Harbor.    on the N side of Frederick Sound, is a small island about 5.5 miles
Polivnoi Rocks, three bare rocks surrounded by ledges, are at the    SW of Point Brightman and 4.5 miles E of Point Gardner Light.
N edge of this foul ground. The only anchorage for large vessels in    The island is conspicuous, but appears as a point of the main
Woewodski Harbor is NE of this foul ground in 20 to 26 fathoms,    shore.
hard bottom, and exposed to SE winds. Small vessels find tempo-
rary shelter off Bluff Point in 6 fathoms, and S of Polivnoi Rocks   (124) Chart 17336.-Walker Point, about 2.4 miles ENE of
in 3 to 6 fathoms, soft bottom.                                    Point Gardner Light, is the end of a low wooded peninsula sepa-
 (115) Eliza Harbor is a deep inlet with generally bold shores.    rating Murder Cove from a foul bight E of it. Ledges and kelp sur-
The only available anchorage is at the S end of the harbor, off the    round the point to a distance of 0.2 mile.
W  side of Liesnoi Island in depths of 18 to 20 fathoms. On each     (125) Bartlett Point is the end of a long, low, wooded strip sep-
side of Liesnoi Island are narrow passages called North and South    arating Murder Cove from Surprise Harbor; the end of the point is
Passage, leading to Eliza Harbor.                                  two wooded islands joined by dry ledges. A bare ledge extends
 (116) North Passage to Eliza Harbor enters from the NW part    300 yards S, and foul ground marked by kelp extends 0.5 mile SE
of Woewodski Harbor. This passage is straight, but narrow; its N   and SW of the point, and more than halfway across Surprise Har-
shore is bold-to, its S shore foul, and submerged rocks and kelp    bor.
patches extend to midchannel, leaving a navigable passage 75 to      (126) Murder Cove has its entrance between Bartlett Point and
100 yards wide with least depths of 6 fathoms. The rocks on the S    Walker Point, 2 miles E of Point Gardner. The channel narrows to
side of the passage cause tide swirls; the ebb has a velocity of 4    300 yards 0.4 mile inside the entrance, between a bare ledge on
knots, and the flood about 3 knots. When through the passage,    the E and two rocks, each with a clump of scrub, on the W. Above
haul S and anchor in midchannel in 18 to 20 fathoms, soft bottom    this point the channel has a width of about 200 yards between
in places, at two-thirds the distance toward Thumb Point, the SW   kelp-marked ledges, and it is best to enter at low water when the
extremity of Liesnoi Island.                                       dangers show. The tide rips are sometimes heavy across the
 (117) South Passage, S of Liesnoi Island, is reduced by sub-    entrance when the wind is strong against the current.
merged rocks at its narrowest part to a width of 70 yards, has a     (127)  Tyee is an abandoned cannery on the E side of Murder
sharp turn and strong tidal currents, and should not be attempted    Cove, about 1.2 miles N of Walker Point. Only submerged piles,
except at slack water and with local knowledge. The rocks are    that extend 130 yards from shore, remain of the cannery and fuel
marked by kelp, which, however, does not show when the current    piers. Ruins of the cannery building and cabins are on shore. A







                                                     8. FREDERICK SOUND                                                        173


60-foot float with 5 feet reported alongside is 150 yards off the E  (129) Surprise Harbor, on the E side of Point Gardner, is open
shore. An unoccupied dwelling and a fishing cabin are on the NE    S, has much kelp, and is not a good anchorage. It is, however, a
side of the cove. The cabin monitors VHF-FM channel 16 daily    good lee when the wind is blowing strong down Chatham Strait.
except during the winter months. Fair anchorage, unprotected         (130) To enter, keep from 0.2 to 0.5 mile off the W shore, using
from SE winds, is in midchannel, in 8 to 11 fathoms, off the can-    caution and avoiding kelp. Anchor about midharbor in 7 fathoms,
nery site.                                                         rocky bottom.
 (128) Point Gardner, the S extremity of Admiralty Island, is
low and wooded, and has two rocks 20 to 30 feet high, 600 yards S    (131) Chart 17320.-Yasha Island, about 3.5 miles SE of Point
of the point. The W of the two rocks is marked by Point Gardner    Gardner, is small, low, wooded, and surrounded by kelp to a dis-
Light (57ï¿½000.6'N., 134ï¿½36.9'W.), 65 feet above the water and    tance of 200 yards. A rock with a depth of 13/4 fathoms over it is
shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-    about 1 mile 3180 from the N point of the island. A lighted buoy
shaped daymark. A prominent mound is 0.2 mile NNE from the    marks the NNW side of the rock.
point, and a conspicuous round hill is 1.3 miles NNE from the       (132) Heavy tide rips will be found between Yasha Island and
point. The water is clear 0.2 mile from the rocks off the point, but    the buoy. These tide rips sometimes extend across to Point Gard-
the rocks should be given a berth of 0.5 mile to avoid frequent tide    ner and along that shore E as far as Carroll Island, and are danger-
rips.                                                              ous for small boats.








                                              9 STEPHENS PASSAGE

 (I)   This chapter describes Stephens Passage, Holkham Bay,      (lo)  Storm Islands, about 1 5 miles N of Cape Fanshaw, con-
Endicott Arm Tracy Arm Taku Harbor, Gastineau Channel, Auke    slst of a wooded island and several rocks the southernmost Bird
Bay Tee Harbor and the city of Juneau including the communi-    Rock, is grass covered and marked by a light on the S side A
ties of Douglas and Auke Bay                                     ledge extends about 300 yards WSW of Bird Rock A grass-cov-
                                                                 ered rock is between the larger Storm Island and Bird Rock A 3 3/
 (2)   Chart 16016 -Stephens Passage extends from its Junc-    4 - fathom shoal was reported about 300 yards NE of the light
tion with Frederick Sound at Cape Fanshaw (57ï¿½11 i'N ,   marking Bird Rock in about 57ï¿½12'37 O"N  133ï¿½35'05 1"W
133ï¿½34 3'W) in a general NNW direction for about 88 miles to    There is no safe passage through Storm Islands and adjoining
Shelter Island, which divides it into two channels, Saginaw Chan-    rocks, and the passage between Storm Islands and Whitney Island
nel and Favorite Channel, and connects it with Lynn Canal        is narrowed to about 0 6 mile by a ledge awash at half tide 0 2
Numerous islands are in both entrances to the passage, but other-   rmle NE of the N end of Storm Islands
wise it is open deep and generally free from dangers               (11)  Whitney Island, wooded forms the NE shore of Fan-
 (3)   Anchorages -The waters of Stephens Passage and its    shaw Bay and the W shore of Cleveland Passage Duck Point, the
branches are generally deep, and there are few good anchorages   S point of the island, and Bill Point, the N point, are marked by
Anchorage can be had in Cleveland Passage Gambier Bay, Sey-    lights
mour Canal Taku Harbor Gastineau Channel, Young Bay, Fritz         (12)  Cleveland Passage, separating Whitney Island from the
Cove, Auke Bay, Barlow Cove, Tee Harbor, and Eagle Harbor        mainland, is 0 5 mile wide and affords good anchorage near its SE
Temporary anchorage can also be found m Port Houghton, Hobart    end The depths vary from 8 fathoms at its SE end to over 70 fath-
Bay, Sanford Cove (Endicott Arm), Limestone Inlet Taku Inlet    oms at the NW end A rocky shoal covered 11/4 fathoms, IS
and Adams Anchorage                                              reported about 250 yards off the W shore of the passage about 0 9
 (4)   Currents -The flood current enters Stephens Passage   rmle N of Duck Point The anchorage is about 0 8 mile N of the
from both ends and meets in varying places W of Point Arden, the    narrowest part of South Passage, favoring the E shore, in 12 to 20
ebb current flows in the opposite direction The velocity of the    fathoms, soft bottom take care to keep clear of East Spit Small
current is 0 5 to 2 knots In Saginaw Channel, the current fre-    craft find anchorage m 4 to 8 fathoms E and N of East Spit Winds
quently ebbs throughout the day when the Moon is in quadrature   from W to N bring m a slight swell, but do not seem to blow home
The ebb current in this channel is considerably stronger than the    with any force Winds from SE, however, blow down from the
flood The currents have considerable velocity in the entrance to    mountains with great force during the SE blows in Frederick
all the larger bays and inlets that make off from Stephens Passage,    Sound
causing tide rips and swirls (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily  (13)  The entrance from NW is much safer because a rmdchan-
predictions of places in Stephens Passage)                       nel course leads safely to the anchorage South Passage has a
 (5)   Weather -The prevailing winds are SE throughout the    midchannel depth of 11 fathoms At the N end of South Passage
year During the winter the winds are more variable and winds    are East Spit and West Spit, projecting N and NE respectively
from the NE quarter may prevail particularly in January SE gales    East Spit is about 0 25 mile into the SE end of Cleveland Passage
may occur at any season but they are more frequent and more    A rock is at the E end of West Spit
severe in winter than in summer Fog may occur at any time but is
                                                                   (14) Small boats can find anchorage E of Duck Pomt close to
more frequent during the winter reaching its maximum in Janu-
                                                                 the mainland m 10 to 12 fathoms with protection from NE and SE
ary The least fog occurs during April to July, inclusive, the mini-    blows
mum being in May
 (6)   Ice is discharged from glaciers In Tracy and Endicott      (15)  The tidal currents have a velocity of 1 to 2 knots in South
Arms and is always found m Holkham Bay, and is prevalent in    Passage
Stephens Passage off the entrance to that bay Occasional pieces of  (16)  Steamboat Bay is 1 rmle NNE of Whitney Island and has
ice may be expected in all parts of the passage In daytime with    Foot Island on its N side McNairy Point is the S point and Fort
clear weather it is not a serious menace to navigation, but it is dan-    Point the N point at the entrance The bay has generally deep
gerous at nmght or in thick weather                              water except for a reef that uncovers, about 400 yards N of
                                                                 McNaury Point and has an advantage as an anchorage near Cleve-
 (7)   Chart 17365 -Cape Fanshaw, on the E side at the junc-    land Passage Foot Island is connected with a rocky reef at the
tion of Stephens Passage and Frederick Sound is a long, low,    head of the bay by a sandspit The narrow passage on the NE side
wooded point terminating in a sandspit with a reef and rocks at    of Foot Island might afford shelter to small craft in 7 to 10 fath-
the extreme end and deep water within 0 2 mile                   oms abreast the middle of the island
 (8) Cape Fanshaw Light (57011 1'N 133034 4'W), 33 feet
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    (17)  Chart 17360 -The Five Fingers, about 6 mules NNW of
white diamond-shaped daymark on the point of the cape            Cape Fanshaw are a group of islets the larger ones wooded and
 (9)   Fanshaw Bay, on the NE side of Cape Fanshaw is con-    ledges that extend about 3 miles in a NW direction and about 1 5
nected with Cleveland Passage by South Passage Anchorage can    miles wide  The SE islet is marked by Five Finger Light
be made in the SE side at the head about 600 yards offshore and    (57ï¿½16 2'N, 133ï¿½37 9'W), 81 feet above the water and shown
0 5 mile SW of Whitney Island m 12 to 15 fathoms sand and shell    from a white concrete tower rising from the center of a building A
bottom sheltered from NE and SE winds                            reef, covered at high water, extends 300 yards SW from the light


174







                                                     9. STEPHENS PASSAGE                                                        175


 (18)  Akusha Island, the N island of the group, is wooded and    rocks, extend from the points of this entrance, leaving a navigable
the largest. Rocks are about 1 mile to the W. Deepwater channels    channel about 100 yards wide and 51/% fathoms deep into the inner
are on all sides of the group.                                     bay. A rock with 1 fathom over it has been reported about 0.5 mile
 (19)  Sail Island, about 5.3 miles NW of Five Finger Light, is    NNE of the S point at the entrance to the inner bay.
wooded. It has two hummocks with low land between and is con-       (28)  Just within the entrance to the inner bay, a narrow arm
spicuous when approaching from the N. At the S end are two    leads NW to a basin, where a constricted anchorage in 10 fathoms
small islets and a rock awash. A 3-knot current has been observed    may be found. In entering this basin, pass close E of the rocky
over a 6/-fathom shoal 1.0 mile to the NNE of the northern tip of    islets just inside the entrance.
Sail Island.
                                                                     (29)  The channel leading to the basin at the head of the bay is
 (20)  False Point Pybus is on the W  side of Stephens Passage,    very narrow. Heavy overfalls at the end of the narrow passage are
about 9.5 miles NW of Five Finger Light. A daybeacon marks the    dangerous for small craft, except during a short period at slack
point 1 mile to the SSW of False Point Pybus.                      water
 (21)  Point Walpole on the E side of Stephens Passage, about
7.3 miles N of Cape Fanshaw, is the W extremity of the W wooded      (30)  Temporary anchorage may be found in 27 fathoms, soft
islet on the S side of the entrance to Port Houghton. The shores of    bottom, NE of Entrance Island, with the N point of the entrance to
the bight SE of the point are foul.                                Hobart Bay in range with the S shore of the small islet N of
                                                                   Entrance Island, Temporary anchorage may also be found in the
 (22)  Port Houghton is an extensive bay, about 9 miles above          t SE  of E ntrance Island  in 17 fatho ms,    soft  bottom,  about 0.2
Cape Fanshaw. Robert Islands are a group of islands forming the    bight SE of Entrance sand in 17 fathoms, soft bottom, about 0.2
S point of the entrance. The waters of Port Houghton are very   hmile from a fine sand beach. The N tangent of the easternmost of
deep, and afford no shelter for large craft. A good small-craft    The Twins just shuts with the S tangent of the westernmost of The
                                                                   Twins.
anchorage may be found in Sandborn Canal, which is a long nar-
row arm SE of Walter Island, in 8 fathoms, soft bottom. This is a    (31)  Caution. The foregoing information relative to anchor-
good winter anchorage if ice does not bother. A midchannel    ages has been obtained from a source considered reliable. In enter-
course into it is clear. The proximity of Cleveland Passage makes    ing the S anchorage favor the shore of Entrance Island, keeping on
it unnecessary to use Port Houghton for anchorage except in win-    the range mentioned above. A ledge makes out about 160 yards
ter. A reef is reported to extend about 0.5 mile N from the N side    from the point on the S shore.
of Walter Island. In 1971, rocks awash were reported off the        (32)  Sunset Island is a large rounded island, about 4.5 miles N
unnamed point, on the S side of the bay about 3.5 miles ENE of    of The Twins and SSW of the entrance to Windham Bay. A reef
Walter Island; caution is advised in this area because depths and    awash is about 0.1 mile off the S shore, and a rock awash at low
character of bottom are not totally known. The chart is the best    water is about 0.1 mile off the E point of the island.
guide.                                                               (33)  Windham Bay, on the SE side of Point Windham, has its
 (23)  McDonald Rock is in the broad part of Stephens Passage,    entrance about 7.5 miles N of The Twins and about 17 miles N of
about 8.8 miles N of Five Finger Light; it is small, has 3 V4 fathoms    Five Finger Light. In the middle of the entrance is a small group of
over it with deep water close-to, and is marked by a lighted buoy    wooded islets, with a deep passage on either side. Reefs extend
on its N side. The range of the SE tangent of East Brother over the    about 0.2 mile E of the islands. Close E of Point Windham is
middle of Sail Island crosses this dangerous rock, which is almost    another small group of islets. The northernmost islet is wooded,
directly in the track of vessels from Cape Fanshaw through    and the islet SW of it has some shrubbery on it.
Stephens Passage.
                 Stephens Passage.                                   (34)  Windham  Bay  Entrance  Light (57033.7'N.,
                                                                    133ï¿½32.6'W), 35 feet above the water, is shown from a small
 (24)  Chart 17363.-The Twins are two wooded islets on the E    house with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the
side of Stephens Passage about 9.8 miles NNE of Five Finger    southeasternmost islet, about 0.6 mile E of Point Windham.
Light (chart 17360) and off the entrance to Hobart Bay.
 (25)  Hobart Bay, on the N side of Point Hobart, has its           (35)  Indifferent anchorage, in about 20 fathoms, may be had
 entrance about 14 miles N of Cape Fanshaw and 3 miles E of The    off the ruins of Windham N of the flat near the head of the bay.
Twins. A pinnacle rock, covered 3 o fathoms, is on the N side of    There is constricted anchorage in the cove just E of the S point of
Hobart Bay entrance about 1.1 miles W  of Entrance Island in    the entrance to the bay in 25 fathoms. Small craft anchor closer in.
about 57ï¿½24'55"N., 133ï¿½28'41"W. A light about 0.3 mile offshore     (36)  A fog bank of varying density frequently hangs over the
marks the S side of the entrance to the bay.                       upper part of Windham Bay, especially at night.
  (26)  Entrance Island, 458 feet high, is in the entrance to        (37)  From its 1.5-mile-wide entrance, Windham Bay narrows
Hobart Bay. A small islet is 0.1 mile N of the island. A small bay,    rapidly and connects with a deep inner basin about 4 miles long
suitable for small craft, indents the SE side of the island for about    and 0.5 mile wide. This narrow connecting channel is constricted
300 yards. A house on the neck of land that forms the S side of the    to about 100 yards by a ledge on its N side that bares. In passing
entrance to the small bay is prominent when coming around the S    through the narrows, great care should be exercised and the S
side of the island from W. A State-maintained 100-foot-long    shore kept aboard at a distance of about 50 yards. From the point
small-craft and seaplane float is near the head of the small bay off    on the S shore SE of the ledge, a spur that bares extends about 20
the SW shore. The float is connected to shore by a long log cat-    yards. A small wooded islet is close to the N shore about 0.6 mile
walk, that is reported to be in poor condition. The float is used pri-    W of the narrows. The extensive flat that extends from the SE side
marily as a weather layover facility. In 1976, depths of 15 feet    of Windham Bay leaves a passage about 0.2 mile wide close to the
were reported alongside the float. A privately owned radiotele-    N shore up to within 0.4 mile from the head of the bay. Chuck
phone is available on shore in an emergency.                       River, entering the head of the bay, is reported to be navigable in a
  (27)  About 0.5 mile NE of Entrance Island, projecting points    rowboat for about 1 mile. During the winter the head of Windham
narrow the entrance into the inner bay. Bars, on which there are    Bay to the narrows freezes over.






176                                                9  STEPHENS PASSAGE


 (38)  Chart 17360 -Point League (57ï¿½37 6'N, 133ï¿½40 0'W),    wooded Two pinnacle rocks, covered 21/2 and 2 fathoms are 0 4
on the E side of Stephens Passage about 5 3 miles NW of Point    mile and 0 6 male, respectively, NW of the unnamed Island Once
Windham, is a gently rounding precipitous point The cliff about    past these rocks, the inner bay is relatively clear
30 feet high, is whitish The point rises rapidly to a lofty mountain  (50)  Anchorage, with good protection from all but SW wmds
with partially bare slopes Point Lookout is about 1 4 miles N of    is in the bight about 1 4 miles NNW of Ga  Island, in about 11
Point League and is hummock and timbered                         fathoms with sand and mud bottom
 (39)  Anchorage has been obtained m the cove between Point
League and Point Lookout by a vessel 150 feet long m 15 fathoms   (51)  Snug Cove, on the S side of the iner bay about 2 miles
close to the entrance near the N shore, but it is not recommended  WSW of Church Point, has anchorage i n 15 to 20 fathoms soft
It is exposed to SW winds and is constricted by a shoal making out    bottom Small craft find good protection here in 4 to 7 fathoms
from the S shore and shoal water inside the cove                 Large vessels reach the cove by way of the channel close E of
 (40)  Thistle Ledge, covered at high water and marked by kelp,    Church Point Gain Island, and the unnamed island to the NW,
is about 0 6 mile from the E shore of Stephens Passage about 1    two charted rocks are about 500 yards NNW of the unnamed
mile N from Point Lookout The shore is foul between Thistle    island with a shoal of 8 9 fathoms between the south rock and the
Ledge and Point Astley, about 3 miles N A small islet is 0 8 rmle    NNW end of the unnamed island A S course can then be laid to
S of Point Astley                                                pass about midway between the unnamed island and Muse Island
                                                                  0 7 mile to the SW Only small boats can navigate the passage

 (41)  Chart 17362 -Gambler Bay has its entrance on the W        between Church Poit and Gain Island because of the rocks
side of Stephens Passage, about 8 miles N of The Brothers (chart   (52)  The preceding paragraphs have pointed out the channels
17360) There are numerous islands and ledges in the entrance, but    into Gambier Bay and the dangers to be avoided Specific courses
with the aid of the chart it can readily be entered in the daytime  would be of little help and could be confusing The navigator
  (42)  Point Gambler, the NE point at the entrance to Gambler    should pay close attention to the chart
Bay and the SE end of Gambler Island is marked by Point Gam-
bler Light (57026 1'N, 133050 4'W), 38 feet above the water        (53)  Charts 17360, 17300 -Seymour Canal has its entrance
and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond     W of Pomt Hugh (57034 5' N, 133049 'W), 15 5 miles N of The
shaped daymark                                                   Brothers It extends m a NW direction into Admiralty Island for
  (43)  The bay is irregular in shape and is divided into two parts    about 38 miles, with an average width of about 3 miles The sur-
by a chain of narrow islands and reefs The outer bay, which    vey of the canal is old and incomplete and dangers exist m addi
extends from Point Gambler about 7 miles in a NNW direction Is   tion to those shown on the chart, especially near the shores The
about 1 7 miles wide at the entrance its N end is an inlet that    upper part of the canal (chart 17300), to a distance of about 21
affords anchorage in 15 to 20 fathoms soft bottom Anchorage m    miles from its head, is filled with Islands, ledges, and rocks
6 to 17 fathoms, mud bottom, can be had N of Good Island It can    Tledeman Island, 15 mules above Point Hugh, divides the canal
be approached without difficulty, but care should be taken to avoid    for a distance of 8 miles Above Tiedeman Island Is another large
 the foul ground that extends off the NW point of Good Island     island called Swan Island A rock that bares at low water and sur-
  (44)  Romp Island is about 0 4 mile NW of Gambier Island    rounded by an extensive bed of kelp is 1 mile S of the SE end of
with ledges between                                              Tiedeman Island Dorn Island and Faust Island, 1 5 miles E of
  (45)  The chain of islands and reefs including Chapel Island    Tiedeman Island, and Bug Island, 1 mile E of Swan Island are
 and Price Island, paralleling Gain Island and the mainland at    small and wooded A 4 fathom ridge extends about 300 yards S of
 Church Point divides the outer part of the bay into two passages  the SW end of Dorn Island The waters of the canal are m general
 In navigating the passage west of this chain care should be taken    deep By passing W of Dorn and Faust Islands and E of Tedeman
 to avoid the bare rocks, that extend 165 yards out from the point,    Island and Swan Island, the canal may be navigated to the head of
 0 5 mile SSE of Church Point                                     Fool Inlet, though above Tiedeman Island the passage is narrow
  (46)  Currents have a velocity of about 3 knots in the passage    and somewhat intricate A 1V2-fathom spot is close E of Tiedeman
 between Church Point and Gain Island, and some swirls occur    Island m about 57049'42"N, 134007'57"W In December 1986 a
 around the ledges E and N of Gain Island                         6-fathom spot was reported about 3 5 miles NW of Faust Island in
  (47)  Price Island is 680 yards from the W shore of the outer    about 57051'11"N , 134007'48"W N and NE of Swan Island
 bay A rocky shoal with a least depth of 5 fathoms is about 1 mile    numerous submerged pinnacles nse to wthin 2 fathoms of the sur
 SE from the S end of Pnce Island, with deep water between it and    face An extensive area of ridges and reefs extends 1 mile SE from
 the ledges, that have a number of bare heads, that extend 0 6 mile    the E side of the entrance to Kmg Salmon Bay In the upper part of
 SE of the island A large, conspicuous, gray boulder on the S ledge    the canal the depths are moderate and anchorage can be selected
 is a good landmark                                               in places for which the chart is the guide The extreme head of the
  (48)  Chapel Island, small in extent, is about 0 8 mile N of    canal is separated by a portage of less than 0 5 mile from Oliver
 Pnce Island A rock that bares 1 foot is about 0 4 mile E of Chapel    Inlet Vessels transiting the canal N of Tiedeman Island should use
 Island Ledges extend about 0 9 mile NW from the NW point of    caution and local knowledge
 Chapel Island to a channel about 450 yards wide The reef on the
 NW side of this channel is marked by Gambier Bay Entrance          (54)  Currents in excess of 4 knots during both flood and ebb
 Light 2 (57027 9'N, 133055 2'W ), 16 feet above the water and    have been observed in the channel that approaches Fool Inlet in
 shown from a skeleton tower with a red triangular daymark        Seymour Canal
   (49)  Tree Island appears as a clump of trees just N of Gain     (55)  Point Hugh is the S extrermty of Glass Peninsula, a long
 Island At low water Tree Island appears at the end of a spit off    narrow, and moderately high strip of land that separates Seymour
 Gain Island in reality it is a part of Gain Island About 0 3 mile    Canal from Stephens Passage Rocks, awash, are about 400 yards
 NW of Tree Island is a much larger unnamed island which is   off the point







                                                    9. STEPHENS PASSAGE                                                        177


 (56)  There is a 6-fathom spot approximately 2.2 SSE of Point    Point. The passage on the NW side of Windfall Island is foul. The
Hugh in about 57ï¿½32'42"N., 133045'36"W. Deep draft vessels are    midchannel depths in the harbor are 12 to 19 fathoms.
advised to stand clear of this area.                                 (64)  On the W  shore near the head of the harbor is a trail
                                                                   marker and shelter cabin. A trail, maintained by the Forest Ser-
 (57)  Chart 17360.-Pleasant Bay is a small cove on the SW         vice, starts near the cabin and extends inland 9 miles to Lake Has-
side of Seymour Canal, 7 miles above Point Hugh (57ï¿½34.5'N.,    sellborg.
133049.0'W.), which affords anchorage for small craft. Two islets   (65)  On the shoreline W  of the N end of Windfall Island is a
are in its entrance. The channel between the two islets is foul. A  trail marker indicating the beginning of a trail maintained by the
reef extends about 150 yards N from the NW islet. The best chan-    Forest Service, leading 1 mile inland to a sheltered platform for
nel to enter is between this reef and the very prominent point of    observing bears. A private floathouse, with a radiotelephone, is
broken rock resembling a breakwater on the NW side of the    beached at the entrance to Pack Creek about 0.8 mile NW from
entrance. This breakwater reef shows prominently at all stages of    the NW side of Windfall Island.
the tide. The channel is about 75 to 100 yards from the point of the  (66)  Windfall Harbor should be approached only by the chan-
breakwater reef. Depths of about 6 fathoms are in the entrance,    nel W of Tiedeman Island, which is about 0.8 mile wide. In using
and depths of 2 to 5 fathoms are inside the bay. Anchor in 4 fath-    this passage keep in midchannel, except at a point 2 miles above
oms about 300 yards SW of the NW islet. The bottom here is    the SE end of the island, where the W shore, which is bold, should
apparently a thin layer of mud on rocks that makes poor holding    be favored to avoid a patch of rocks about 700 yards off the E
ground in heavy S weather. A spit extends 125 yards SW of the    shore. A 3/4-fathom spot is 0.8 mile E of Staunch Point. Enter the
islet.                                                             harbor SE of Windfall Island and anchor anywhere in 15 to 17
 (58)  The head of the bay bares except for a pool just W of the    fathoms, sticky bottom, preferably near the SE shore.
small point that projects from the NW shore. Small craft can pass   (67)  King Salmon Bay, on the W  side of the canal near its
into this pool at high water and have sufficient depth and swinging    head, affords anchorage but the approach is difficult. The U.S.
room for one or two boats at low water. This is an excellent shelter    Fish and Wildlife Service patrol vessel BRANT reported ground-
in N winds. Water can be obtained from a spring in the little bight    ing on a gravel bar that extends 100 yards W from the end of the
near this pool.                                                    long point forming the W side of the bay.
 (59)  Mole Harbor is on the SW shore of the canal, about 9
miles above Point Hugh. A flat that bares at low water extends 0.6  (68)  Chart 17369.-Point Hugh Light (57037.2'N.,
mile from the head of the harbor. Beacon Rock, in the middle of    133048.4%W.), 34 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
the entrance, is part of a chain of rocky reefs extending from the S    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the point
side of the entrance to the harbor to 400 yards NW of Beacon    on the W  shore of Stephens Passage 2.9 miles N of Point Hugh.
Rock. The reefs bare at low water. Rasp Ledge, a small bare rock,    About 1.2 miles S of the light, rocks extend offshore about 0.2
is 0.2 mile NE of Flaw Point, the N point at the entrance. A 21/ï¿½-    mile
fathom shoal and a 3-fathom shoal are 0.5 mile and 0.3 mile SW       (69)  Midway Point, about 10 miles N of Point Hugh, is distin-
of Flaw Point, respectively. Enter midway between Beacon Rock    guishable from seaward and made prominent by a white rock cliff
and Rasp Ledge; when abeam of Flaw Point, maintain a distance    about 30 feet high, backed by a round grassy knoll.
of 0.2 mile from the N shore and come to a W heading, using care    (70)  Point Glass, about 4.5 miles N of Midway Point, is an
to avoid the 21/4- and 3-fathoms shoals. Anchor in 13 to 17 fath-    indefinite point. The shore is steep and rocky. Rocks covered at
oms, sticky bottom, about 1 mile within the harbor, giving the    half tide are about 0.2 mile offshore, 0.7 mile S from the point. A
shores a berth of about 0.2 mile. Small craft can find anchorage    rock, awash at half tide, is 0.3 mile S of the point about 100 yards
SW of Beacon Rock in 3 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom.                  offshore.
  (60)  Sore Finger Cove, on the NE shore of the canal about 4.5     (71)  Holkham Bay is an inlet, with two extensive arms, on the
miles N of Mole Harbor, offers good anchorage in 1 to 5 fathoms    E side of Stephens Passage, about 8.5 miles NE of Point Hugh
with shelter from all but W winds.                                 Light and about 28 miles N of Five Finger Light. The water in
                                                                   both arms is very deep, in some places more than 200 fathoms. In
                                                                   both arms the shores are steep and high.
  (61)  Charts 17360, 17300.-Short Finger Bay (57048.5'N.,           (72)  Currents.-The tidal currents have an estimated velocity
134002.0'W.) is a small bay on the E shore of Seymour Canal    of 4 knots at the entrances to Tracy Arm and Endicott Arm, form-
about 16 miles N of Point Hugh and directly E of Faust Island      ing swirls in these areas. Currents of much greater velocity are
Good shelter from S weather and anchorage in 5 to 10 fathoms,    found in Fords Terror
mud bottom, can be had here.                                         (73)  Glaciers discharge ice into both Tracy Arm and Endicott
  (62)  Winning Cove, about 3.5 miles NNE of Faust Island, is a    Arm. It is always present in Holkham Bay, sometimes in large
shallow inlet of no importance in the E shore of the canal.        quantities, and is prevalent in Stephens Passage off the entrance to
                                                                    the bay in greater or smaller quantities. This ice is dangerous at
  (63)  Chart 17300.-Windfall Harbor is on the W  shore of    night or in thick weather, and in entering Tracy Arm or Endicott
Seymour Canal, abreast the NW end of Tiedeman Island, and    Arm care should be taken when near the ice, as the swirls are often
about 23.5 miles N of Point Hugh. Windfall Island, large and    dangerous.
high, is in the middle of the entrance. A flat extends about 0.8 mile  (74)  Point Astley and Point Coke are the S and N points,
from the head of the bay, and a long bight indents its W shore 1.5    respectively, at the entrance to Holkham Bay. A group of three
to 2.8 miles SW of Windfall Island; both dry. The entrance to    rocky islets are about 0.1 mile off Point Astley. The highest of the
Windfall Harbor is SE of Windfall Island between Late Point, the    three is about 35 feet high; the westernmost about 15 feet high;
S end of the island, and Staunch Point, directly opposite on    and the third, close NE of the highest one, is about 5 feet high. A
Admiralty Island. A 21/2-fathom shoal extends 0.3 mile S of Late    gravel bar connects the two larger ones at low water.





178                                                 9  STEPHENS PASSAGE


  (75)  A cove about 0 2 mile m extent close under the E side of    Follow around the S side of Harbor Island and the Round Islet
Point Coke rmght afford a lee and anchorage for small craft with    group at a 0 2-nmle distance and pass nmdchannel between the lat-
heavy NW winds blowing down Stephens Passage                       ter and Wood Spit Light The chart should be the guide
 (76) An anchorage with shelter from SE winds may be had in
the W bight between Point Astley and Wood Spit, m 20 to 30 fath-     (s8)  Chart 17300 -Tracy Arm, the N arm of Holkham Bay,
oms, hard bottom                                                   takes a general N directon for 9 miles and then turns E 13 miles to
 (77)  Harbor Island is a high wooded island in the rmddle of    its head where two large glaciers North Sawyer and South Saw-
the entrance to Holkham Bay In N weather the bight on the SE    yer, discharge into salt water The arm is often clogged by small
side of the island affords safe anchorage for small craft in 2 to 8    icebergs for several miles, and great care is needed in navigating
fathoms, hard bottom A group of five islets, the largest and south-    the ice field At times South Sawyer Glacier is very active, and
easternmost of which is Round Islet, is within 0 7 rmle SE of Har-    huge blocks of ice fall off its face into very deep water These set
bor Island There is a safe passage through the group for small    up waves that have been observed as high as 25 feet however, a
craft                                                              small boat can nde the waves safely if it keeps a few miles distant
 (78)  A long, low wooded point extends W from the mainland E    from the glacier face and avoids getting packed in the ice flow
of Harbor Island An extensive flat, with boulder patches on it,    North Sawyer Glacier ordinarily is much less active Tracy Arm
extends up to 1 2 miles from the point The edges of the flat are    with its deep water and bold shores, is one of the outstanding
steep-to Sand Spit, a small islet, stands on the SE edge of the flat    fiords of southeast Alaska
Two bare rocks on the flat are 0 4 and 0 8 mile SW of Sand Spit      (s89)  The entrance to the arm is about 1 mile wide The naviga-
 (79)  The passage between Harbor Island, the Round Islet    ble channel Is about 0 4 mile wide, has a depth of 61/2 fathoms and
group, SE of it, and the flat, is about 0 8 mile wide and has depths    is marked by two unlighted buoys, a 215ï¿½ lighted range on the NW
of about 23 fathoms in midchannel                                  end of Harbor Island a light on the E shore of the arm and heavy
 (80)  Wood Spit is a long narrow spit that extends about 0 8    kelp beds in the summer on the SE side The buoys, reportedly,
mile in a N direction from the S entrance point of Endicott Arm    may become submerged during periods of strong current  Tidal
At high water it shows as a small partially wooded island, about    swirls will be met in the entrance except at slack water
20 feet high Two boulder patches are 0 2 mile N of the spit Wood     (90)  Wlliam Cove, a deepwater anchorage with constricted
Spit Light (57044 3'N, 133ï¿½34 6'W), 27 feet above the water and    swinging room and hard bottom with patches of mud is at the
shown from a tower with a red and white diamond-shaped day-    head of a large bight on the W  side of Tracy Arm about 6 miles
mark is on the N end of the boulder patches                        above the entrance to the arm An anchorage for small boats in 5
 (81)  Between Wood Spit Light and the SW end of the flats N of    fathoms rocky bottom is reported available in the small bight on
it the channel leading into Endicott Arm is 0 5 mile wide and has    the W  side of the arm, about 2 miles above the entrance A rock
depths of 18 fathoms 0 44 mile off Wood Spit Light                 awash is about 0 2 mile SE of the entrance to the small bight To
 (82)  Endicott Arm is the S arm of Holkham Bay Sumdum             enter Tracy Arm, pass N of Harbor Island pick up the 215ï¿½
Island is in midchannel, abreast Sanford Cove Bushy Islands    unlighted range astern and pass between the rocky shoal on the
are two small islets midway between Sumdum Island and the NE       NW side and the shoal water on the SE side of the entrance
shore Dawes Glacier, at the head of the arm extends to the    Thence steer for the daybeacon on the E shore of Tracy Arm and
water's edge This glacier occasionally calves off enough Ice into    proceed m midchannel m the arm, the chart is the guide
the arm to hamper navigation senously                                (91)  Midway Islands are two small, sparsely wooded Islets, 16
 (83)  Fords Terror is a narrow inlet that extends 5 miles in a N  miles N of Point Hugh and 2 miles off the E shore of Stephens
direction Its entrance dangerous except at high water slack, is on    Passage Rocks awash at highest tides, are between them, with
the N side of Endicott Arm, 10 miles SE of Sumdum Island Tidal    deep water close-to A ledge extends about 0 2 rmle S from the S
currents rush through the narrowest part of the inlet with great    islet, which is marked by Midway Islands Light (57ï¿½50 2'N,
velocity The controlling depth through the narrows is 1/4 fathom    133048 9'W) 83 feet above the water and shown from a skeleton
Fords Terror has magnificent scenery and affords a relatively safe    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark
anchorage                                                            (92)  Twin Point, a narrow wooded point with steep rocky
 (84)  Brown Glacier, at the head of Fords Terror has receded      shores the more northerly of two slrmlar points is on the W  side
and the shorelne is about 0 5 mule E of the former charted position    of Stephens Passage about 7 5 miles NW of Midway Islands
of the edge of the glacier                                         Light
 (85)  Sanford Cove, on the S shore of Endicott Arm, 5 miles        (93)  Station Point, about 6 miles to the N of Twin Point, is
within the entrance, is one of the two available anchorages m the    wooded and rises to a knob 1 4 miles inshore A small wooded
arm It has a depth of 36 fathoms and is protected except from N    islet 105 feet high is 300 yards off the point The bight about 0 5
winds Rock Point forms the NE side of the cove A shoal with a    mile S of the islet, is used as a fair-weather anchorage by small
depth of 41/2 fathoms extends 0 3 rmle off the point A flat extends    craft
out 300 yards in the S part of the cove An occasional piece of ice   (94)  South Island, about 2 miles SE from Station Point, is
dnfts into the cove, but is of no danger to vessels at anchor      wooded Reefs extend 50 to 100 yards from its shores except at
 (86)  Routes, Holkham Bay and Endicott Arm -In approach-    the SE end, where a reef extends about 0 5 mile SE Two small
ing from S give the E shore of Stephens Passage a berth of 1 mile    wooded islets are close to the point to the SW of South Island
or more From a position 0 8 to 1 mile NW of Point Astley steer    Anchorage in 14 fathoms sticky bottom has been found to the W
for Sumdum Glacier, and pass in mndchannel between Wood            of South Island In the bight to the S of the small islets small craft
Spit Light and the Round Islet group passing 0 44 mile off the    can find fair-weather anchorage
light
 (87)  In approaching from W, pass about 0 5 mile S of Point        (95)  Charts 17313, 17300 -Port Snettisham has its entrance
Coke and steer SE leaving Harbor Island 0 2 mile or more to NE     on the E side of Stephens Passage, about 7 miles N of Midway







                                                    9. STEPHENS PASSAGE                                                     179


Islands and 10 miles SE of Grand Island. It is about 1.7 miles wide  (105) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
at the entrance and has a NE direction for 4.3 miles, narrowing    100 from normal variation have been observed in the vicinity of
somewhat, and dividing into two arms. Speel Arm, the N arm, is    Grave Point.
7.5 miles long to the flat at the mouth of Speel River at its head. A  (106) Grave Point Light (58ï¿½03.7'N., 134ï¿½03.1'W.), 45 feet
powerplant and a 2,000-foot airstrip are at the head of Speel Arm.    above the water, shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white
Gilbert Bay, the south arm, is 3.5 miles long to the flat that    diamond-shaped daymark on the SW extremity of Grave Point,
extends 1 mile from its head, above which is a low valley 3 miles    marks the N side of the entrance to the harbor.
long to Holkham Bay.                                               (107) The anchorage is in about 13 fathoms, soft bottom, favor-
 (96)  Point Styleman is the NW point of the entrance, and    ing the E shore. A slight eddy current in Taku Harbor from
Point Anmer, marked by yellow and white cliffs, is 1 mile S of    Stephens Passage is sometimes noticed on the flood and, with
the SE point of the entrance.                                    large tides, swirls are produced that cause a vessel to surge some-
 (97)  Local magnetic disturbance. Extreme magnetic distur-    what on her cables at times. The N winter winds from the interior
bance exists in Port Snettisham and Gilbert Bay. The magnetic    draw through the valley back of the harbor with great force. In the
compass should not be relied upon within the area outlined in    winter these conditions, when at their severest, render the anchor-
magenta as shown on charts 17300 and 17313.                      age somewhat dangerous.
 (98)  A private channel and basin are at the head of Speel Arm,  (108) Enter Taku Harbor on a midchannel course using the chart
but it was reported in 1976 that the channel and basin were no    as a guide.
longer maintained. The basin was reported to freeze over in the  (tog) The ruins of a wharf are on the E shore of Taku Harbor. A
winter.                                                          State-maintained T-shaped small-craft float, with a 200-foot face,
                                                                   is about 0.1 mile S of the ruins. About 100 feet of float space con-
 (99) The shores of Port Snettisham are steep and wooded.
Because of the great depth, it is not suitable as an anchorage,    nects the face with about 260 feet of approach sections from shore.
                                                              thoughIn 1976, depths of 10 to 20 feet were reported alongside the small-
though in case of necessity a vessel may anchor in about 20 fath-  
oms at the head of either Speel Arm or Gilbert Bay, close to the    craft float
flats. A poor but possible anchorage in 28 fathoms, sticky bottom,  (11o) Slocum nlets onthe  shoreofStephensPassage,about
                                                                   4.5 miles N of Grave Point Light and 2.5 miles NE of Grand
can be found in the small cove W of Mist Island, about 1.8 miles
ENE of Point Stylerman. It is exposed to S winds and eddies during    Island. It is almost filled with flats. The water is deep close to the
                                                                   flats, but it does afford convenient anchorage.
strong tides. Anchorage can be had directly across from Mist
Island, on the SE side of Port Snettisham in a small cove in 5 to 15  (1)  CirclePoint,theSpointoftheentrancetoSlocum nlet,
fathoms, hard bottom.                                            rises to Butler Peak, a prominent conical peak.
 (100) The port is entirely free from dangers, but there are large
flats at the head of all the arms. Moderately heavy tide rips are    P assage, 17.5 miles NW          of Midway Islands and 3.5 miles S of
                                                                   Point Arden, is marked on its NE side by Grand Island Light
 (101) A barge dock and a small-craft float are in the basin at the    (58006.0'N., 13406.5'W.), 47 feet above the water and shown
head of Speel Arm. Gasoline is available in an emergency only. A    from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped day-
machine shop is available for emergency use. A supply barge vis-    mark. It has three knolls and rises abruptly from deep water. A
its twice a year. Telephone and radiotelephone service is available    good channel is on each side of the island; the E one is generally
only in an emergency. Seaplanes visit Port Snettisham on a weekly    favored.
schedule.                                                          (113)  Cove Point, on the W side of Stephens Passage, about 1.6
 (102) Whiting River empties into the middle arm at the NE part    miles NW of Grand Island, rises to a timbered knob, with a
of Gilbert Bay.                                                  depression between it and a ridge to the NW. Two rocks are close
                                                                   to the S shore of the point; the outer rock bares and the inner rock
  (103) Charts 17314, 17300.-Limestone Inlet has its entrance    uncovers 12 feet. Doty Cove, S of Cove Point, is deep. Flats at the
on the E side of Stephens Passage, about 13 miles NNW of Mid-    head of the cove drop off rapidly to 20 fathoms.
way Islands Light and 2 miles SE of Taku Harbor. It is a narrow
arm that extends in an easterly direction. The depths are 13 to 30  (114) Chart 17315.-Point Arden is a rocky bluff on the W side
fathoms in the lower half of the inlet, and a vessel may anchor    of Stephens Passage about 3.5 miles N of Grand Island and 11.2
anywhere in midchannel, but the holding ground is not very good.    miles from Juneau. Point Arden Light (58009.6'N.,
With the close proximity of Taku Harbor, vessels seldom find it   134ï¿½10.7'W.), 50 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
necessary to enter. The upper half of the inlet is filled by a flat,    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the NE
most of which covers at high water. An overhead power cable with    end of the point.
a clearance of 93 feet crosses the inlet about 0.3 mile above the  (115) Taku Inlet, on the E side of Stephens Passage, has its
mouth. The maximum safe clearance under this 138,000-volt line    entrance about 2.7 miles NE of Point Arden Light. The inlet is
is 80 feet.                                                      about 15 miles long from Bishop Point, the W entrance point, to
  (104) Taku Harbor, about 19 miles SE from Juneau, indefits the    Taku Glacier at its head. A l/4-fathom depth is about 100 yards
E shore of Stephens Passage about 3 miles SE of Grand Island.    SE of Bishop Point.:
The entrance is between Stockade Point and the SE tangent of       (116) Anchorage.-The inlet has no secure anchorage and is
Grave Point. In the approach from the S, its position is readily    exposed to strong winds. The best general anchorage, with fair
known by the projecting high land of Grave Point and Taku    protection from S winds, is to be had in 5 to 7 fathoms, soft bot-
Mountain rising behind the point. Taku Mountain is prominent in    tom, 2 miles ENE of Jaw Point and about 0.5 mile offshore. Tem-
Stephens Passage from Sunset Island N to Point Tantallon. A flat   porary anchorage, partially protected from N winds, can be had in
extends about 0.2 mile from the head.                            from 3 to 7 fathoms, soft mud bottom, E of the Annex Creek






180                                                9. STEPHENS PASSAGE


Power Station. Another anchorage in midchannel, in 3 to 8 fath-    ens to 10 fathoms in about 0.2 mile. Along the edge of the flat for
oms, soft mud bottom, is E of Flat Point. This anchorage is not    a distance of 0.2 mile SW of Flat Point, boulders and rock ledges
sheltered from the wind.                                         bare at extreme low water. This area should be avoided by small
 (117) Currents.-In Taku Inlet, currents have greater velocity on    boats except at high water. If the Flat Point-Taku Point range is
the ebb than on the flood. At Taku Point, the ebb current has an    kept slightly open, a least depth of 4 fathoms will be had and this
estimated velocity of 3 to 4 knots at times. At the entrance to Taku    flat avoided. Depths increase as the range is opened.
Inlet the velocity of the ebb current does not exceed 2 knots. (See  (129)  Gastineau Channel, separating Douglas Island from the
the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions.)                 mainland, extends NW for 13 miles from Stephens Passage, and
 (118) Winds.-The conformation of Taku Inlet is such that N      then W for 2.5 miles to Fritz Cove. The channel is marked by
winter gales sweep down the inlet and across Stephens Passage    lights, lighted and unlighted buoys, and daybeacons. The section
with great force, often accompanied by a blinding snowstorm. SE    of the channel from Salmon Creek NW for about 2 miles is
gales draw through the inlet.                                    marked by seasonal buoys. Juneau, 8 miles above the SE entrance,
 (119) Ice.-Taku Glacier has now pushed up the moraine ahead    is the head of deep-draft navigation. The channel from Juneau to
of its face, and ice no longer is a serious threat to navigation in the    Fritz Cove, a distance of 7.5 miles, crosses Mendenhall Bar and
inlet. A few small chunks of ice occasionally drift down the inlet,   is navigable only by small craft with local knowledge. This part of
but these are rarely more than 3 to 4 feet wide.                 the channel is subject to considerable shoaling; mariners are
 (120) For a distance of about 9 miles, from Bishop Point to    advised to obtain the latest local information concerning channel
about 2.6 miles above Jaw Point, the water is deep and the shores    conditions.
bold. Thence to about 2.6 miles S of Taku Point, a distance of     (130) Caution.-The transit of the channel from Buoy 7 to Light
about 3 miles, the channel is narrowed by a flat that extends out    21 is limited by Mendenhall Bar. In 1983, it was reported that the
from the E shore. From 2.6 miles S of Taku Point the channel is   shallowest part of the bar, between Daybeacons 15 and 17, bared
ill-defined, narrow, and subject to change, and should not be tra-   at 10 feet above Mean Lower Low Water. The bar may be crossed
versed without local knowledge. Large vessels should not venture    only when the tide is high enough, i.e., when the tide is at least 10
N of Flat Point because of the extensive shoaling at the head of    feet above Mean Lower Low Water, plus the draft of the vessel
Taku Inlet. It is reported that the deepest water between Flat Point    transiting, plus a safety factor suitable for the vessel and operator.
and Scow Cove is 4 feet in the channel about 100 yards off the W  In selecting a safety factor, mariners should consider that the
shore of the inlet.                                              actual height of high tide can differ appreciably from the predicted
 (121) Jaw Point is the prominently projecting point on the E    high tide and that most often the actual height is less than the pre-
shore about 5.5 miles within the entrance; there are high cliffs on    dicted height.
the E shore S of it. Flat Point is on the W shore 3 miles N of Jaw  (131) Tide gages are on Mendenhall Bar Channel Lights 5 and
Point. Greely Point, on the E shore, 4 miles S of Jaw Point, is   21. The zero mark on these gages is at the level of the least depth
distinguished by its reddish-brown color.                        of the channel across Mendenhall Bar. Thus, the reading on these
 (122) Sunny Cove is on the W  side of the inlet about 4 miles    gages at higher tidal elevations shows the amount of water avail-
above Cooper Point, which is reddish-brown. In a small bight    able over the shallowest part of the channel. Since this reading
between Sunny Cove and Flat Point about 1.3 miles NE of Sunny    shows the actual tide level over the bar, it is unaffected by what-
Cove is the Annex Creek Power Station, which furnishes electric    ever difference there may be between the actual and the predicted
power to Juneau, and a small wharf at the station. The power sta-   tide.
tion constitutes a good landmark. The bottom bares alongside the   (132) A free diagram of the channel across Mendenhall Bar is
wharf.                                                           available from the Aids to Navigation Branch of the Seventeenth
 (123) Taku Point is on the E shore S of the mouth of Taku River    Coast Guard District office in Juneau. (See appendix for address.)
and 4.5 miles N of Flat Point.                                     (133) A 5 mph speed limit with wake not to exceed 6 inches in
 (124) Norris Glacier is on the W side of Taku Inlet, about 4.5    height is enforced in Gastineau Channel between Juneau Isle and
miles N of Flat Point.                                           Buoy 7.
 (125) The early prospectors used to go up Taku River by canoe    (134) Marmion Island, about 300 yards to the NE of Point Tan-
to the fabulous Yukon gold fields.                               tallon, the SE point of Douglas Island and the SW point of the SE
 (126) Taku Glacier, the discharge of which is blamed for filling    entrance to Gastineau Channel is small, flat-topped, and bushy.
in the head of the inlet, is almost the only one of all Alaska's gla-    Marmion Island Light (58011.9'N., 134ï¿½15.4'W.), 50 feet above
ciers that is still advancing. It pushes ahead of it vast quantities of    water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dia-
sediment that have filled up the formerly deep basins in the inlet.  mond-shaped daymark. A shoal with a least depth of 43/4 fathoms
 (127) Because of the extensive shoaling at the head of the inlet    extends 0.2 mile E of the light.
that bars the mouth of Taku River, no directions can be given for  (135) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of 5ï¿½ from
proceeding N of the line between Scow Cove and Davidson    normal variation have been observed in Gastineau Channel in the
Creek.                                                           vicinity of latitude 58ï¿½15'N.
 (128) Caution.-Small craft should exercise caution when          (136) Sheep Creek Flat, 4.5 miles above Marmion Island and
maneuvering in shoal water especially off Sunny Cove, Annex    close S of Thane, on the E side of Gastineau Channel, extends
Creek Power Station, and off Turner Creek on the E side of Taku    0.25 mile across the channel from the mouth of Sheep Creek and
Inlet. These areas have scattered boulders that stand 2 to 5 feet    bares. The outer limit of the flat is marked by a light.
above the surrounding bottom. Because of the discoloration of the  (137) Thane is a residential section of the borough of Juneau on
water it is impossible to see them even when covered by only a    the NE side of Gastineau Channel, 5 miles from Stephens Passage.
foot of water. There is a flat for 1.5 miles alongshore S of Flat    A highway connects it with Juneau.
Point that extends off a greatest distance of 0.5 mile offshore. It  (138) Juneau Isle, a small wooded promontory opposite the S
has depths of 1/2 to 2 fathoms over it within these limits and deep-    edge of Douglas, is connected to Douglas Island by a roadway. A





























                 GAS~~~~~~~~~tN~~~~~~~AU OHANNEL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

44   2               4~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c
                                               44  4  2                          2~~~~~~~~~

              2      2     244           44~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                                           7~~~~~~~,244 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ c
                                   2 44<42  44 22  7    4  44 44  4~ ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c
                                                                                   4   4~~~~~~~~~C

           2  4  44         4~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~2~~C
                                                      4444  2           -44    2~~~~~~













                                                                                                                                                                                                             Co





                                                                    GASTINEAU CHANNEL















                                                                                                                                         Juneau Mountain










                                                                                                                                                                                 x






                                                                                                                                      0          A                                    . <
                                                                                                                               0000  #00000                                        <0A00

                                                                                                                                    00 0  <oVooo

                                                                                                                                                 500o

                                                                                                                                                 V..ooOooo o.4

                                                                                                                             < ,,       .    o .02<0 .uS0<20<Q00   3
                       0   0                                                                            0       0               0<0<02 .:oo            0<oo .                       00000              0O
                                                                                                                        0ï¿½30<003%<0: .<ï¿½<.
                                                                                                                       o              0   00A                                                              Co
                                                                                             02      02o o0 o <2k<0                      00.                                                       2




                                                                                                                   * . <0.
                                                                                                                          <020020,0    o20    .      00
                                                                                                                                  .ï¿½0000   00     o<<o 00<oo<
                                                                                                                                   .. .0000 0020
                                                                                                                           <2oo00              o<oo00<ï¿½o
                                                                                                                                     0                 oooo..o.                                               Co
                                                                                                                               ï¿½               000000oo o                                                Co



                                                                                                          20                     W000                                                 3ï¿½o02 00020001
                                                                                                                                       40000  000<00oo00 004<ï¿½00 0  00 002000000j<





                                                                                                        00002 000<. oo02oo<ooooooo             .Oo 00,0<0>0 .0 ï¿½                          00&
                                                                                                     0 0 o00. 00 .0202ï¿½<.                       00Ooo4
                                                                                                       0.0000<0<0000000 <000<0000000000<joi  .000.000000 0.Oooo   200 . 0     0   002 00000  OooAo02ooï¿½000
                                                                                                                                                                                      002020002.0 . 0000.00002 00<02
                                                                                                                    .:000220002o<,  0.<0< <0000   02<3004<0oA30<       00 .   oooo<000
                                                                                               W0o<                  .2<  0<0<00                                  0<02  00   0<0-<0o<00o  ,.OOO


                                                                                                    ;o;AAoo000002o00< 0020.0         .00.00..000000 <ï¿½<   0<                    jo.0002 02
                                                                                                      0200 02 ï¿½ï¿½00000.0<002    0 oO 002000.0200oï¿½. i3:j0 ï¿½o<0o02  00                           .0.0002


                                                                                                                                                                     0         oï¿½         o0
                                                                                                                                                            .00.           0




                                                                                                                                                                               0   .0  <0  20


                                                                                                                                                                   '0       0<     0
                                                                                                                                                  0320  0   00                0             0     0
                                                                                                                                                                                         0             0
                                                                                                                                                                           00      00<
                                       Oo   00                          -              00       00.                   0    0  0<0   0        0   0<



00   2                            <0200                  000                                                  <<oï¿½00o           00

                                                                                                                     00<      >00       0 0 00000 0..o00<o      02
                                                                                                                   00   00  000
                                                                                                2'                      0 0.,

                 _____________________________                                                                     0  000      '00              20 0O



























             GASTINEAUCHANN~~~~~~~~~~~L                                              A~
               AC  ï¿½  47C~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~  C                                C'     ~      ~      ~       ~      ~      ~      ~     ~      ~    ~     c

             p         p                                                                        CC                  AC~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
                                <A  C>                                 ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I) C
AC  C  C                                                             ACACA  <'A~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
   AC  AC  A                            'C."     P      P' ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~A  ~ ~ ~      ~     A<   AC                         C~ ~ ~~~~L
                 C  A~~~~~~~~~~~~  C  A   -                                                                                   K~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~U


























                                                                                                                                                        ;,0





                                                                                                                                                        wr




184                                                9. STEPHENS PASSAGE


light is on the NE end of the isle, and a tall white flagpole is near    cable with a reported clearance of 55 feet crosses the channel just
the S end. The U.S. Bureau of Mines occupies the buildings on the    NW of the bridge.
isle.                                                               (153) Tides.-(See the Tide Tables for daily predictions at
 (139) Douglas is a residential section of the borough of Juneau    Juneau.)
on the SW side of Gastineau Channel, about 6.5 miles from           (154) Currents.-In Gastineau Channel, the current floods NW
Stephens Passage. A highway connects it with Juneau by way of    and ebbs SE past Juneau with a velocity of 2.0 knots. (See the
the Juneau-Douglas Bridge.                                        Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions.) Currents at the
 (140) Wharves.-A city dock is at Douglas. Douglas also has a    wharves in Juneau Habor, NE of the centerline of Gastineau Chan-
protected harbor with small-craft facilities.                     nel, are much weaker than at midchannel. The current follows the
 (141) Douglas City Dock (58016'40"N., 134'23'11"W.): 105-    shoreline, going around the harbor in a counterclockwise direction
foot face; 20 feet reported alongside; owned by the State of    on the flood and clockwise on the ebb.
Alaska; in 1976, the dock was reported to be inactive.              (155) Weather.-Juneau is well within the area of maritime influ-
 (142)  Small-craft facilities.-Douglas Boat Harbor, on the    ences that prevail over the coastal areas of southeastern Alaska,
inshore side of Juneau Isle, has a Federal project depth of 12 feet.    and is in the path of most storms that cross the Gulf of Alaska.
The basin is protected by a 105-foot-long jetty, marked by a light,    Consequently, the area has little sunshine, generally moderate
that extends from the westernmost end of the isle. In April 1993,    temperatures, and abundant precipitation. The surrounding rugged
the controlling depth in the basin was 10 feet with lesser depths    terrain causes considerable variation in the weather within rela-
along the project limits. Enter the basin between the jetty and the    tively short distances.
Douglas City Dock.                                                  (156) Temperature variations, both daily and seasonal, are usu-
 (143) The small-craft floats in Douglas Boat Harbor, operated by    ally small because of the marine influence. On average, the differ-
the city of Juneau, can accommodate about 135 craft including    ence between maximums and minimums ranges from about 9'F in
transients. The basin has a boat launching ramp and a 52-foot grid.    December to around 18F in June. Extremes range from 90'F in
Water and electricity are available; fuel and other supplies can be    July to -22'F in February with above 800F readings occurring
obtained in Juneau.                                               from May through August, while -20ï¿½F temperatures have been
 (144) The spit off the mouth of Lawson Creek, about 0.8 mile    recorded in December, January, and February. The city is often
                                                                   warmer than the airport in winter. Periods of severe cold, which
NW of Douglas, is marked by a light.
                                NW45Thp of Dnglas,  atIs miled bo a t,  usually begin with strong northerlies, are most often the result of
 (145) The rock dump of mine tailings, about 1 mile S of Juneau,    cold air from NW Canada flowing across the Juneau ice field and
                                                                   cold air from NW Canada flowing across the Juneau ice field and
extends from the NE shore. Shoal water extends from the dump
                                                                   times strong winds, known locally as "Taku Winds," occur in the
 (146)  Juneau, the State capital of Alaska, is a thriving city. They draw down the mountain passes
city's primary commerce is in containerized cargo, fish and fish    from N, but their force is modified somewhat under the lee of the
products, petroleum products, and tourism. It is on the NE side of    highland E of Juneau. SE gales may occur in the vicinity of Juneau
Gastineau Channel, 8 miles N of Stephens Passage. Extensive    at any season, but they are much more frequent in winter than in
hard-rock gold mining operations formerly were carried on, but    summer. They are usually accompanied by rain. In summer, SE
the mines have been closed since 1943.                            winds seldom blow home and when they do, the confined channel
 (147) Prominent features.-Prominent are the ruins of the mine    admits but little sea.
buildings on the mountain slope above the S end of the Juneau       (157) February to June mark the period of lightest precipitation;
business district, the tank farm at the rock dump about 1 mile S of    monthly averages are about 3 to nearly 4 inches. After June the
Juneau, the Federal Building on Gold Creek, Juneau-Douglas    monthly amount increases gradually, reaching a maximum during
fixed highway bridge, the lighted TV tower NW of the bridge, and    October when it averages 8 inches. Monthly averages of precipita-
the Governor's Mansion (58ï¿½18'11"N., 134ï¿½24'47"W.), a large    tion then tend to decline from November until February.
white colonial mansion with green roof.                             (158) The first snow usually occurs in the latter part of October.
 (148)  Channels.-The approach to Juneau from the SE through    On the average there is very little accumulation on the ground at
Gastineau Channel is clear and deep. The approach through Fritz    low levels until the last part of November. Snow accumulation
Cove and Mendenhall Bar from the NW is narrow, shallow, and    usually reaches its greatest depth during the middle of February
seasonally marked to show the best water; this approach should be    when it averages around 10 inches at the Juneau Airport. Snow
attempted only during high water. The draft of the deepest vessels    cover is usually gone before the middle of April. (See page T-4 for
calling at Juneau in 1976 was 30 feet.                            Juneau climatological table.)
 (149) Anchorage.-Anchorage is available off the wharves, NE       (159) Pilotage, Juneau.-Pilotage, except for certain exempt
of the cable area, in 12 to 19 fathoms, soft bottom. Permission,    vessels, is compulsory for all vessels navigating the inside waters
however, must be obtained from the Coast Guard Captain of the    of the State of Alaska. (See Pilotage, Alaska, indexed as such,
Port prior to anchoring in this area from June through September.  chapter 3 for details.)
 (150) The harbor area off the waterfront at Juneau is a safety    (160) Vessels en route Juneau via Chatham Strait meet the pilot
zone. (See 165.1 through 165.7, 165.20 through 165.25, and    boat about 1 mile NW of Point Retreat Light (58024.7'N.,
165.1702, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)                 134ï¿½57.3'W.).
 (151) Dangers.-Shoals extend off the mouths of the creeks and     (161) Vessels en route Juneau may also meet the pilot boat about
are, for the most part, marked. In navigating Gastineau Channel do    1 mile E of Point McCartey Light (55ï¿½06.8'N., 131ï¿½42.4'W.).
not approach the shores too closely, especially the SW shore.       (162) The pilot boat, a crewboat, can be contacted by calling
Stream flats and deposits from mine tailings extend well offshore.  "JUNEAU PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channels 16, 13, or 12.
 (152) Bridges.-The Juneau-Douglas fixed highway bridge over       (163) Towage.-Tugs up to 750 hp operating from Juneau and
Gastineau Channel has a clearance of 50 feet. An overhead power    engaged principally in the towing of barges and log rafts are avail-











I I P-M,    ;4





























                                NAI=---

                                                                         -   -                                        D
                                                                                                  cn
                                                                                                  m
                                                                                                  10

                                                                                                  z
                                                                                                  co
                                                                                                  11
                                                                                                  CIO
                                                           --                                                                     cn

                                                                                                  C
                                                                                                  m











                                    El





















                                                                                                  I
                                                                                                  A





































                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          c0



















































M- I


                                                                                                                                                          ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I

                                                                     ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~  ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~    ~     ~     ~     ~    ~     ~    ~     ~    ~     ~    ~    ~    ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ c
























0-t











       1Ili










                                                                                                                  70
                                                                                                                  00
















iz~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0




















                                                                                                                  100
                                                                                                                   En'
                                                                                                                  cn1






                                                     9. STEPHENS PASSAGE                                                        189


able for assisting in docking and undocking. They are equipped       (175) U.S. Coast Guard Base, Juneau Wharf (Subport)
with VHF-FM channels 16, 13, and 6. Arrangements for tugs    (58017'55"N., 134ï¿½24'38"W.): 760-foot face, 36 to 40 feet along-
should be made well in advance through shipping agents.            side; deck height, 24 feet; mooring of U.S. Coast Guard and other
 (164) Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural    Government vessels; owned by U.S. Government and operated by
quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and    U.S. Coast Guard, National Marine Fisheries Service, and Alaska
appendix for addresses.)                                           Army National Guard.
 (165) Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of     (176) Chevron U.S.A. Juneau Wharf (58ï¿½17'51"N.,
the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-    134024'50"W.): 100-foot face, 500 feet with dolphins; 30 feet
ter 1.)                                                            alongside; receipt and sale of petroleum products, bunkering ves-
 (166) Juneau is a customs portof entry.                           sels; owned by Alaska Electric Light and Power Co. and operated
 (167)  Coast Guard.-The U.S. Coast Guard station is on the    by Chevron U.S.A., Inc.
NW side of the harbor at the U.S. Government Wharf (Subport). A      (177) Jet Supply Co. Wharf (58018'00"N., 134026'01"W.): 200-
marine safety office and a vessel documentation office are in    foot face; 20 feet alongside; 30-foot-wide ramp is midway along
Juneau. (See appendix for address.)                                the face; two 25-ton container forklifts; 41/2 acres open storage;
 (16) Ha rbo        r r egulation ss.-The harbormaster assigns berths    receipt of conventional and containerized cargo; owned and oper-
 (168) Harbor regulations.-The harbormaster assigns berths
at the city float, Aurora Basin, Harris Harbor, and Douglas Boat    ated by Trucano Construction Company.
Harbor, and controls the use of the grids in Harris Harbor and       (178) Supplies.-Provisions, and marine and fishing supplies are
Douglas Boat Harbor. The harbormaster is on call 24 hours daily,   available in Juneau. Diesel fuel, diesel oil, gasoline, distillates,
Douglas Boat Harbor. The harbormaster is on call 24 hours daily,
and his office is on the S shore of Aurora Basin just inside the S                        oil 
entrance. The harbormaster's office monitors VHF-FM channel 16    be harves. Only diesel il is available  for large vessels. Water can
                                                                    be had in the summer at all of the wharves and at the U.S. Govern-
from 0800 to 1630 daily during the summer and year round on
                                                  Sundays. Working frequencies are channels 12 and 68. The call    ment Wharf in the winter. Ice for fishing vessels can be obtained at
Sundays. Working frequencies are channels 12 and 68. The call
sign is WAB-950. The harbormaster can also be contacted by tele-    the c    stoage cmpany wharf.
                                                                      (179) Repairs.-There are no drydocking or major repair facili-
                     po Wharve.-All ofthewharvesinJuneau are3     ext.vties for large vessels in Juneau or in southeastern Alaska. The
 (169)  Wharves.-AII of the wharves in Juneau are privately    nearest facilities are in British Columbia and the State of Washing-
owned and operated with the exception of the City Wharf and    ton. Two private 50-ton cranes, that can handle small craft up to 5
                 Ferry Terminal, and the U.S. Government Wharf, known as Sub-    feet in draft at high water, are available for mariners' use about 1.6
port. (For information on the latest depths, contact the individual    miles NW  of Juneau-Douglas Bridge, on the NW  side of
                                                                    miles NW of Juneau-Douglas Bridge, on the NW side of
operators of each facility.)                                       Gastineau Channel. A 450-foot small-craft grid is in the NE part
 (170) Union Oil Terminal (58017'26"N., 134ï¿½23'37"W.): 100-    of Harris Harbor, and a 52-foot grid is in the SW part of Douglas
foot face; depth reported alongside, 40 feet; 90-foot small-craft    Boat Harbor. Both grids are for public use. Several machine shops
fueling barge moored W of wharf; pipelines extend to tank farm in    and repair firms along the waterfront can provide hull, engine,
rear; receipt of petroleum products from barges and tankers and    electrical, and electronic repairs.
discharge to vessels and small craft; owned by Union Oil Co. and    (180)  Small-craft facilities.-Harris Harbor and Aurora Basin,
operated by Taku Oil Sales, Inc.                                   both Federal projects, are small-boat basins just N of Juneau-Dou-
 (171) Foss Alaska Line Terminal (57017'30"N., 134ï¿½23'35"W.):    glas Bridge, and Juneau City Float, immediately NW of the City
343 feet of berthing space with dolphins; 20 feet reported along-    Wharf and Ferry Terminal. All three facilities are operated by the
side; a 20-foot wide pontoon transfer bridge; two 26-ton container    city of Juneau. The harbormaster monitors VHF-FM channels
forklifts, and 3 acres of open storage; containerized and noncon-    16 and 73 and can be contacted by telephone (907-586-5255) or
tainerized general cargo; owned by Foss Alaska Line and Pacific    FAX (907-586-5367).
Marine Properties, Inc. and operated by Foss Alaska Line, a          (181) Harris Harbor, immediately N of the bridge, has a 12-
Dillingham Maritime Co.                                            foot project depth and is protected by two rock-mound breakwa-
 (172)  City Wharf and Ferry Terminal (58ï¿½17'49"N.,                ters. In April 1993, depths of 8 to 12 feet were available in the har-
134ï¿½24'00"W.): 345-foot face, S side 80 feet long, N side 115 feet    bor. A light at the end of the N breakwater marks the entrance.
long; 30 feet alongside; deck height, 26 feet; 25-ton container     (1s2)  The harbor floats can accommodate over 178 commercial
forklifts; 2 acres of open storage; 35-foot adjustable transfer    fishing vessels and about 136 pleasure craft. Berths for transients
bridge; transfer of passengers and vehicles from and to Alaska    are available. A seaplane hangar and float are in the SE part of the
State Ferries and cruise ship traffic, and receipt and shipment of    harbor, and a 450-foot grid is in the NW part. Water and metered
containerized cargo on barges; owned and operated by the city of    electricity are available at the floats.
Juneau and State of Alaska.                                          (183) Aurora Basin, 0.5 mile NW of Harris Harbor, has a
  (173) Juneau Cold Storage Company Wharf (58ï¿½17'53"N.,    project depth of 14 feet in the SE half and 12 feet in the NW half.
134024'09"W.): 216-foot face; 27 to 39 feet alongside; deck    The basin is protected on the NW side by a breakwater, marked by
height, 26 feet; one 2-ton and 11/4-ton forklifts; one 11/2-ton and    a light, and by a detached breakwater on the channel side. In April
one '/2-ton electrical hoists; two ï¿½/4-ton hydraulic hoists; 20,000    1993, depths of 8 to 12 feet were available in the N part of the
square feet cold storage; 20,000 square feet covered storage;    basin, and 12 to 14 feet in the S part. The basin can be entered at
receipt and shipment of fish, and supplying fishing vessels; owned    either end of the detached breakwater. The SE end of the detached
and operated by Juneau Cold Storage Company.                       breakwater is marked by a light.
  (174) City of Juneau, Alaska Steamship Wharf (58ï¿½17'56"N.,         (184) The basin can accommodate 474 small crafts. Water and
134ï¿½24'13"W.): 484-foot face; depths alongside, 12 feet at the N   metered electricity are available at the floats. A 105-foot-long float
end and 30 feet at the S end; receipt of general cargo and passen-    with facilities for fueling small craft is at the SE end of the basin.
gers; owned and operated by the city of Juneau.                    In March 1980, the depth alongside the float was 14 feet. Gaso-






190                                                9. STEPHENS PASSAGE


line, diesel oil, and lubricating oils and greases are available at the    long gentle slope in a SE direction. A low, rocky cliff, fringed by a
float.                                                           kelp patch of 100 yards offshore, extends about 0.2 mile W along
 (185) Juneau City Float (58017'51"N., 134ï¿½24'03"W.), immedi-    the point.
ately NW of the City Wharf and Ferry Terminal, provides 350 feet   (196) Admiralty Cove is on the S side of Stephens Passage W
of transient space for loading and unloading of supplies.        of Point Young. It does not afford anchorage except for small craft
 (186) Communications.-Juneau has regular passenger, express,    because of shallow water. A small vessel can anchor in the cove S
and freight service to Puget Sound ports, British Columbia, and    of the island on the SW side of Admiralty Cove, in 3 to 6 fathoms,
other Alaska ports and towns by water and air. The Alaska State    mud bottom. This is a favorite anchorage for small craft but is
Ferry System, operating from Juneau and Auke Bay, about 12    open to W  winds. A conspicuous trail-marker on the SE shore
miles NW of the city, has daily ferry service during the summer to    marks the end of a good trail maintained by the U.S. Forest Ser-
Haines, Skagway, Hoonah, Petersburg, Sitka, Wrangell, Ketchi-    vice. The trail extends 4.5 miles to Admiralty Lake and is much
kan, and Prince Rupert, B.C., and weekly service to Kake and    used by trout fishermen and hunters in season. A shelter cabin is
Seattle. This schedule is less frequent during the winter. In addi-    on the beach near the end of the trail, and another is on the shore
tion to the scheduled airlines, other air services operate from    of the lake.
Juneau on a charter basis.                                         (197) A long narrow sand beach fronting a large tidal marsh is at
 (187) A highway parallels Gastineau Channel and Favorite    the head of the cove, into which empties Admiralty Creek, a
Channel from Little Sheep Creek, about 5 miles SE of Juneau, to    swift shallow stream.
Echo Cove, about 33 miles NNW of Juneau. The highway on           (198) Young Bay is the broad bight in the S shore of Stephens
Douglas Island parallels Gastineau Channel and Fritz Cove from    Passage W of Point Young. Scull Island, a grass-covered rock 53
Paris Creek, about 1 mile SE of Douglas to Outer Point, about 11    feet high with deep water around it, is in the middle of the
miles NW of Douglas.                                             entrance. A rocky shoal with a least depth of 11/2 fathoms extends
 (188) Juneau maintains radiotelephone and telephone commufi-    about 300 yards S of Scull Island. A good foot trail maintained by
                                              cations with the other States and parts of Alaska.  the U.S. Forest Service extends from the SW side of Young Bay to
                                                                    the shore of Hawk Inlet. The cliff on the SE shore about midway
 (189) Chart 17315.-Stephens Passage continues NW from    between the head of the bay and Point Young is marked by a light-
Point Arden (58009.6'N., 134010.6'W.) for about 22 miles to a    colored scar 60 feet high and 30 feet wide.
junction with Saginaw Channel and Favorite Channel. (See chart
                                                                      (199) Anchorage with shelter from SE winds can be had about
17300.) False Arden is a prominent point 1 mile WNW of Point
17300.) False Arden is a prominent point           I mile WNW of Point    0.5 mile from the SE side of the bay, between Point Young and the
Arden.
      *ild) Douglas Island, between.  Stephens Passage and Gastineauhead, in 18 to 22 fathoms, soft bottom. Small vessels may anchor
 (190) Douglas Island, between Stephens Passage and Gastineau    closer in shore in desired depths.
Channel, is large and wooded. It has several prominent peaks
ranging in height from 2,500 to 3,500 feet. The S shore of the     (200) Horse Island and Colt Island, connected at low water and
island is fairly bold and steep-to and can be followed at a distance
of 0.3 mile.                          .                          entrance point to Young Bay. Colt Island, the N island, has ledges
 (191) Point Tantallon, a timbered point with a rocky beach, is    on its NE and NW sides. The N point of Colt Island appears as a
                                                                    separate islet about 20 feet high, but is a part of the island at all
at the SE extremity of Douglas Island. Icy Point is 0.6 mile W of    separate islet about 20 feet high, but is  of the island at all
Point Tantallon.                                                 stages of the tide.
 (192) Point Hilda, the W point of a large bight, is about 8 miles  (201) Horse Island, the larger and southernmost of the two
to the W  of Point Tantallon. Point Hilda Light (58013.0'N.,    islands, has shoal ground that extends about 0.2 mile off the S
134030.4'W.), 20 feet above the water, is shown from a square    shore of the island and practically continuous rock ledges extend
frame structure with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on    from the S tip of the island in a SSE direction across the entrance
the point. There is good anchorage and shelter from N weather 1    of a cove SSW of the island. A fair anchorage for small boats is
mile E of the light in depths of 6 to 15 fathoms,                had in this cove, but its use is not recommended because of the
 (193) Inner Point, marked by a daybeacon, is 2.8 miles W of    obstructions across the entrance. The best water for entering the
Point Hilda. Middle Point, 4.3 miles WNW of Point Hilda, is    cove from the SE is just N and close to a part of these ledges that
marked by a light; a shoal extends 0.2 mile off the point.       uncover 7 feet about 0.6 mile SSE from the S end of Horse Island.
                                                                      (202) A fair anchorage for small boats with protection from S
 (194)  Chart 17300.-Oliver Inlet has its entrance on the S side    winds can be had in midchannel W of Colt Island in 12 to 15 fath-
of Stephens Passage about 5 miles W of Point Arden (58009.6'N.,    oms, mud bottom. Approach the anchorage from the N and avoid
134ï¿½10.6'W.), through a narrow channel 1 mile long and 200 yards    the ledge and rock that uncover 10 feet about 0.6 mile NNW of
wide. The inlet is accessible only at high water to boats and small    Colt Island, and the various small ledges and rocks near the
craft. The narrow entrance of the inlet is bared at low water by a    shores.
natural dam of rocks, over which the water pours like a waterfall  (203) Horse Shoal, about 0.6 mile E of Horse Island, consists of
except at slack water. At high-water slack, small vessels drawing    two patches 0.5 mile apart, both of which bare at half tide. A light
not over 6 feet can enter. The currents in the entrance have a    marks the S patch.
velocity of 6 to 8 knots, forming heavy swirls. A portage about 0.5  (204) Shaman Island, about2.3 miles NE of Colt Island and 0.2
mile long connects this inlet with the head of Seymour Canal.    mile to the N of Outer Point, is wooded, and is connected with
                                                                    Douglas Island by a gravel bar. There is a rock awash at extreme
 (195) Chart 17315.-Point Young (58011.6'N., 134ï¿½33.7W.) is    low tides 0.1 mile off the N end of the island.
on the S side of Stephens Passage about 12.2 miles W of Point     (205) Dornin Rock, with 7 feet over it, is 0.4 mile W of Shaman
Arden. The extremity of the point is grass covered and has a peb-    Island. George Rock, about 1 mile NNW of Outer Point, is awash
ble beach. From the point the land rises in a timbered ridge with a    at highest tides. It is marked by a light.







                                                     9. STEPHENS PASSAGE                                                        191


 (206)  Fritz Cove, NE of Outer Point, the NW extremity of    feet alongside the outer 100 feet of each side of the pier. The pier
Douglas Island, affords anchorage and shelter from S and E winds.    is used to berth Park Service vessels.
A boat-launching ramp is along the S shore at Fritz Cove about 1.6   (216) Auke Bay has highway connections with Juneau, 12 miles
miles inside the entrance.                                         SE, and with Echo Cove, 21.5 miles N. Juneau Airport is about 2
 (207) Entrance Point, at the E end of Fritz Cove, is a wooded    miles E of Auke Bay on filled ground just E of the mouth of Men-
knoll connected with Douglas Island by a low spit. A fish rearing    denhall River.
structure is anchored in 10 fathoms close SW of Entrance Point..
 (208)  Spuhn Island, with a high wooded knob at its SW end, is     (217) Chart 17316.-Portland Island is a wooded island at the
on the N side of Fritz Cove, about 1.6 miles W of Entrance Point.    junction of Stephens Passage with Saginaw Channel and Favorite
Gibby Rock with /4 fathom over it about 0.7 mile WSW from    Channel. A reef, covered for the most part at high water, extends
Spuhn Point, the S end of Spuhn Island, is marked by a light. To    0.7 mile NW from the N end of the island. Portland Island Light
enter Fritz Cove, pass on either side of George Rock and follow    (58ï¿½21. 1'N., 134045.5'W.), 20 feet above the water and shown on
the shore of Douglas Island, giving it a berth of 0.2 mile. Anchor    a pile with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark, marks the
about 400 yards from shore and 0.4 mile SW of Entrance Point in    end of the reef.
20 to 25 fathoms, soft bottom.                                       (218)  Saginaw Channel connects Stephens Passage with Lynn
 (209) Auke Bay is a popular fishing and boating recreational    Canal and separates Mansfield Peninsula, the NW end of Admi-
area N of Fritz Cove. Coghlan Island is on the SW side of Auke    ralty Island, from Shelter Island. This channel is used by vessels
Bay, about I mile NW of Spuhn Island. A buoy is off the N end of    going from Stephens Passage to Chatham Strait or Icy Strait.
Coghlan Island. Point Louisa and Indian Point are on the N           (219) Symonds Point, the S point at the entrance to Saginaw
shore of the bay, about 1.2 miles NW and 0.6 mile N, respectively,    Channel, about 2.8 miles W of the N extremity of Portland Island,
of the N extremity of Coghlan Island. Fairhaven is on the shore of    is low and wooded; it rises with a gradual slope to Lone Mountain.
the bay between these two points. After passing 0.2 mile S and E     (220) Lone Mountain,Mount Robert Barron, and the low
of Coghlan Island, enter the bay on a NE course with the summit    divide between them are conspicuous landmarks on Mansfield
of the island astern. Anchorage for small craft, with protection    Peninsula.
from SE winds may be found at the head of Auke Bay.                  (221) Shelter Island, at the NW end of Stephens Passage and E
 (210) Auke Bay is a community with general stores, a ferry ter-    of the N end of Mansfeld Peninsula,separates Saginaw Channel
                                                                    from Favorite Channel. The island is timbered. A dome-shaped
minal, and seasonal small-craft facilities on the NE shore at the    from Favorite Channel. The island is timbered. A dome-shaped
head of Auke Bay. The National Marine Fisheries Service has a    peak on the NW part of the island forms an excellent landmark
head of Auke Bay. The National Marine Fisheries Service has a
biological laboratory at Auke Bay. Auke Lake and Mendenhall    when coming down Lynn Canal. The SE part of the island is a
Glacier are about 0.3 mile and 3.6 miles inland, respectively, from    long ridge. Reefs extend off the NW end of the island for about 0.5
the community.          . .                                        mile. Shelter Island Light (58022.5'N., 134048.5'W.), 20 feet
                                                                    above the water, is shown from a frame structure with a red and
 (21i) The Alaska State Ferry Terminal (58ï¿½22'54"N.,
                                                               '    white diamond-shaped daymark on the SE side of the island.
134ï¿½41'11"W.) on the N shore of Auke Bay and is the only deep-       it  diamondpe    aymrk on hSEsde  f the island
                                                                    About 0.2 mile NW of the light, a reef makes offshore for about
draft facility in this area. The face of the terminal is 265 feet long
with a reported depth alongside of 22 feet in 1976                 300 yards.
                                                                     (222)  Strauss Rock, 0.5 mile S of the SE end of Shelter Island
 (212) The National Marine Fisheries Service Float, about 0.33    and marked by a buoy, has 2 fathoms over it. It is of small extent
mile E of the ferry terminal along the E shore of Auke Bay, is for    and dangerous. Submerged rocks and broken ground are between
the use of their own vessels. It has a 120-foot face, and in 1996,    Strauss Rock and the SE end of Shelter Island.
the reported controlling depths were 18 feet along the outside edge  (223)  Adams Anchorage, off the S end of Shelter Island and
and 10 feet along the inside edge.                                 NW of Strauss Rock, offers good anchorage in 11 fathoms and
 (213) Auke Bay Public Float Facility is along the E shore of    very good anchorage for small craft in less depth, close to the
Auke Bay about 330 yards N of the National Marine Fisheries Ser-    shore during N weather.
vice Float. There are 56 transient berths from 17 to 60 feet long. In  (224)  Favorite Reef, in the SE part of Saginaw Channel, bares
1976, the reported depths were 10 to 35 feet alongside the floats.    at half tide and is marked on its S part by Favorite Reef Light
The floats have a 72-hour tie-up limit. A large parking area, and a    2(58022.8'N., 134051.7'W.), 33 feet above the water and shown
float with a surfaced boat-launching ramp on each side are adja-    from a pile with a red triangular daymark. The reef is about 0.4
cent to the public floats. The Juneau harbormaster has control of    mile from the Shelter Island shore, with a deep channel between,
the public float facility and the 45-foot grid about 60 yards NE of    which is seldom used, as it is partially obstructed at its SE end by a
the floats. A U.S. Coast Guard patrol boat is stationed at the facil-    reef that uncovers 6 feet and extends out about 0.2 mile from Shel-
ity.                                                               ter Island.
  (214) Two private marinas are at the head of Auke Bay, N of the    (225) Barlow Point is about 2.8 miles NW from Symonds Point
public float facility. Each facility can accommodate about 180    and about 1.1 miles W  of Favorite Reef Light. Barlow Islands
small craft, and can provide gasoline, diesel fuel, water, ice,    extend about 1.4 miles in a NNW direction from Barlow Point.
marine supplies, provisions, dry storage, and minor repairs. A 15-  (226)  Barlow Cove is on the NE side of the N end of Mansfield
ton mobile lift, a crane capable of handling craft up to 4 tons, and    Peninsula. A light on Point Retreat, described in chapter 11, marks
forklifts up to 10 tons are available at the marinas. The S side of    the W point of the entrance and the Barlow Islands form the E
the facilities is protected by a floating breakwater with a light at its    point of the entrance. The waters throughout the cove are deep.
W end.                                                             Anchorage may be obtained 0.2 mile from the SE side at the head,
  (215) The National Park Service Pier is at the head of the cove    in 22 to 23 fathoms, soft bottom.
immediately W of Indian Point. This 321-foot pier has a 60-foot      (227) In entering, favor the Barlow Islands to avoid the foul
face, and, in 1976, the depth alongside the face was 10 feet, with 5    ground that extends about 0.2 mile offshore SE of Point Retreat.





































al I I    nMP
               .~~~ .
         *                           ~~~N~N                   I         uII:IN                     






                                                    9. STEPHENS PASSAGE                                                     193


There is a narrow passage between Barlow Point and the Barlow    water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dia-
Islands through which 20 feet can be carried, but it is unfit for ves-    mond-shaped daymark on the N point of the entrance.
sels and is filled with tidal eddies and swirls except at slack water.  (234) A private marina at the head of the S arm of Tee Harbor
 (228) Faust Rock, in Saginaw Channel 1.1 miles from Barlow    operates on a seasonal basis. A private buoy marks a slow no-
Islands and in line with them, is of small extent, has 23/4 fathoms    wake speed zone in the approach to the marina. The marina can
over it, and is marked on the N side by a lighted bell buoy, which    accommodate about 120 small craft at the floats. Gasoline, diesel
is reported to heel over considerably from icing in the winter. It   fuel, lubricating oils, greases, limited supplies, ice, and a boat-
can be passed on either side.                                    launching ramp are available.
 (229) Favorite Channel connects Stephens Passage with Lynn       (235) Cohen Island is about 0.9 mile NNW from Point
Canal N of Shelter Island. It is the channel used by vessels going    Stephens. It is timbered on the N end, bare and rocky on the S end,
from Stephens Passage to upper Lynn Canal points and Skagway.    and has two rocks awash, close to the NW shore.
Eagle Glacier and Herbert Glacier are prominent from Favorite     (236) Aaron Island, 1 mile E of the middle of Shelter Island
Channel between Aaron Island and Vanderbilt Reef.                and 2 miles NW of Tee Harbor, is wooded. Aaron Island Light 2
 (230) Lena Cove is on the E shore of Favorite Channel, about 2    (58ï¿½26.3'N., 134ï¿½49.6'W.), 20 feet above the water, is shown from
miles NE of Shelter Island Light and N of Point Lena. It affords a    a skeleton tower with a triangular red daymark on the NW side of
SE lee, but the bottom is rocky and is not a good anchorage for    the island. A grass-covered rock, 35 feet high, is 200 yards N from
large vessels. Rocks awash are close to the NE shore, N of the N  Aaron Island to which it is connected by a reef at low water. A
point of the entrance.                                           shelving ledge, largely covered at half tide, extends 0.2 mile S
 (231) Point Lena, the SW point at the entrance to Lena Cove, is    from the S end of Aaron Island.
low and wooded. Rocks awash are about 100 yards from the N         (237) Cohen Reef, awash at high water, is about 0.6 mile ESE
shore of the point. The wreck of the SS PRINCESS KATHLEEN        of the S end of Aaron Island. A daybeacon is on the W side of the
is in 20 fathoms about 100 yards W of the point. In 1953 it was    reef.
reported that the minimum depth over the wreck was 40 feet at      (238) Eagle Reef, about 1.2 miles N of Aaron Island, is awash at
low water.                                                       highest tides. A rock, 7 feet high, is on the N end of the reef.
 (232) Four lighted towers are about 0.3 mile to 0.7 mile SE from  (239) Bird Island, 2.2 miles E of the N extremity of Shelter
Point Lena.                                                      Island, is wooded.
 (233) Tee Harbor, on the E side of Favorite Channel, 1.5 miles   (240) Gull Island, about 0.8 mile NNW of Bird Island, is
N of Point Lena, affords anchorage in the middle just within the    wooded. Reefs extend off the S point and the SW shore for about
points at the entrance, in 12 to 14 fathoms. During SE weather,    250 yards and for about 100 yards off the E shore. A small islet is
williwaws are severe at times. Small craft avoid these by anchor-    close to the N end of Gull Island.
ing in 6 to 9 fathoms at the S end of the S arm close to the beach.  (241) Amalga Harbor, a small landlocked cove about 1.9 miles
Winter N winds can be avoided by small craft by anchoring in the    E of Bird Island, affords good small-craft anchorage in 3 to 4 fath-
N arm, close to the beach, in 4 to 9 fathoms. Tee Harbor has tele-    oms, rocky bottom. The harbor has a State-maintained surfaced
phone and highway connections with Juneau. Point Stephens    boat-launching ramp.
Rock, with 1 fathom over it and marked by a buoy on its SW side,   (242) Eagle Harbor, immediately N of Amalga Harbor; affords
is 0.2 mile NW from Point Stephens, the S point of the entrance.    anchorage in moderate weather. Good holding ground is found in
Tee Harbor Light (58ï¿½25.7'N., 134ï¿½46.0'W.), 33 feet above the    depths of 14 fathoms near midharbor.








                                                 10. CHATHAM STRAIT

 (1)   This chapter describes Chatham Strait and its tributaries.    shore is so high and bluff that the strong SW winds cannot blow
Also described are the settlements of Baranof, Angoon, Tenakee    down into the strait, but draw around Cape Ommaney and N
Springs, and Port Alexander, including the various logging camps    through the strait, usually bringing fog and rain as far as Point
in the bays, inlets, and coves along the strait.                     Gardner.

 (2)   Chart 16016.-Chatham Strait is the most extensive of          (8)   Chart 17320.-In the approach to Chatham Strait from
the inland passages of southeastern Alaska. It is about 18 miles    seaward, Hazy Islands are distinctive from their position and form
wide at its entrance between Cape Ommaney and Coronation    a good landmark when they can be seen. They are also sometimes
Island and about 13.5 miles between the cape and the W  shore of    useful for fixing the position when it is thick inshore. The passage
Kuiu Island, with a length of 138 miles from Coronation Island N    between them and Coronation Island is clear. Cape Ommaney is
to Rocky Island. The main strait is clear, open, and deep through-    high and an important landmark. 'The summit back of the cape
out, but some of the bays and bights are foul. In the winter, ice    appears as a rounded knob with gentle sloping shoulders that drop
forms in many of the bays and inlets, particularly those into which    steeply to the water's edge. In the approach from the W in thick
large freshwater streams empty and which have narrow entrances.    stormy weather, there is a possibility of mistaking the high land
The W  shore as far as Point Augusta is high, bluff, and rugged,    NW of Larch Bay for that edge of the cape.
and free from hidden dangers in the way of navigation from point      (9)   From Sumner Strait, vessels enter Chatham Strait between
to point; except in the vicinity of the E entrance to Peril Strait. The    Cape Decision and the Spanish Islands. At times the S part of
water is shoaler on the E side, and the reefs extend out farther, but    Sumner Strait has had very dense fog that extended about 1 mile
in most cases they are in the bights and bays, and in no case do    to the W  of Cape Decision, beyond which it was clear. Approach-
they extend beyond a line drawn 0.5 mile off from point to point,    ing from the S, make Coronation Island and pass between it and
except a ledge about 1 mile offshore at Point Crowley.              Hazy Islands. In thick weather, should Coronation Island not be
 (3)   Soundings are not a sufficient guide in these waters in    sighted, a sharp lookout should be kept for Hazy Islands. Whistle
thick weather; 20 and 30 fathoms are frequently found within a    echoes along the Coronation Island coast on either side of Windy
few yards of the shore, while 0.2 mile from the shore, 100 to 200    Bay have usually been sharp and distinct. The current sets NW
fathoms are not at all' unusual. An almost universal feature is the    along the coast, with an estimated velocity of 1 knot, depending
occurrence of flats, with one or more small streams, at the head of    on the wind, and, should Coronation Island not be sighted, a vessel
all bights and inlets. The slope, from 8 to 10 fathoms to a few feet,    may be set toward Cape Ommaney. There are several dangers off
is abrupt, and in approaching the head of an inlet at high water,    the N side of Coronation Island. Once in Chatham Strait the navi-
exercise care in anchoring to give the flats a sufficient berth to    gation is easy, for it is wide and comparatively clear, with fair
avoid grounding at low water.                                        anchorages at short distances.
 (4)   Currents.-The flood current enters Chatham Strait at the       (10)  To vessels equipped with a radio direction finder, the Cape
S entrance between'Cape Ommaney and Cape Decision and sets N        Decision radiobeacon will be of great assistance in making the
entering Frederick Sound, Peril Strait, and other bodies of water,    entrance to Chatham Strait.
The flood from the N enters the strait from Icy Strait. The two
                                                                     (Ii)  The high rugged coastlines of Cape Ommaney and Coro-
meet in the vicuinity of Point Hayes and South Passage Point. On    nation Island, and the peaks of the Hazy Islands reportedly make
the ebb, the directions are reversed. The average velocity of the
current is between 1.0 and 2.0 knots with an estimated maximum       good radar targets when approaching Chatham Strait from the W
                                                                    and S.
velocity of 3.5 knots. Strong tide rips are found around the various    and S.
points, sometimes extending 1 mile or more into the strait when       (12)  Hazy Islands form two distinctive groups about 8 miles
the current is strong. These are dangerous for small, open boats,    W of Coronation Island and are separated by a channel 1.2 miles
especially at points surrounded by broken ground. Sometimes they    wide with depths of 25 to 40 fathoms: The NW group consists of
will be encountered well offshore without apparent cause.           three prominent islets; the largest is Big Hazy Islet, 258 feet high
 (5)   Along the E shore from Cape Decision to Point Crowley, a    and conical. The second largest of this group, about 0.3 mile NW,
strong NW set has been noted during the flood. During the ebb the    has three sharp, well-defined summits. The smallest of the group
current in the opposite direction is weak, and very often there is a    consists of two jagged rocks that are connected at low water, but
NW eddy. The current seems to travel along the shore in definite    appear as one isletwith two summits.
streams. The outer limit of the current stream is marked by drifting  (13)  The SE group is low: The N islet of this group has two
material, and the difference in current on either side can be noted.    grassy knobs and a very sharp pillar-shaped knob. Off the SE side
It appears that the flood current travels from the sea toward and up    of this islet are two rocks, close-to. The S islet of this group is a
the E shore of the strait and that the ebb is strongest on the W side.  very low rocky reef with a breaker about 300 yards off the S end
 (6)   (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions of    of the islet.
places in Chatham Strait.)                                            (14)  Hazy Islands are a National Wildlife Refuge under the
 (7)   Weather.-The wind gerierally draws through Chatham    jurisdiction of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service.
Strait parallel to its axis, but, if from NE, will come down Freder-  (l5)  In thick weather, the N group of islets can usually be seen
ick Sound and be felt in heavy squalls through the divides in the    in time to avoid trouble, but the S group is dangerous. Although
mountains on the E side. It sometimes draws through Tenakee    the fathometer gives evidence of shoaling, it is very slight until
Inlet and Peril Strait if blowing strong NW outside. Most of the W   within less than 0.5 mile of the islets.


194






                                                     10. CHATHAM STRAIT                                                        195


 (16)  Currents are irregular. The coastal currents near the    to the E of Nation Point, is a prominent rocky point. The land rises
islands appear to set NW with a velocity of about 1 knot, but in the    in a timbered ridge of moderate slope.
vicinity of the islets the currents seem to be modified by the      (27)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
branch from Chatham Strait. Currents with a N set and a velocity    3ï¿½ from normal variations have been observed at Aats Point.
of about 1 knot were found 5 miles N of the Hazy Islands.            (28)  Egg Harbor is on the E side of Nation Point, directly
 (17)  Cape Ommaney, the W point at the entrance to Chatham    under Pin Peak. It is a secure anchorage, except from N winds.
Strait, is a remarkable promontory terminating in Ommaney Peak,    The shoreline halfway to the head of the bay is rocky, then beyond
a bluff, rugged, rocky 2,005-foot-high mountain, detached from    it is sandy. About 0.5 mile within the entrance, on the W shore, are
the higher land N by a low depression running through from Port    caves about 30 feet high, two shacks, and a white boulder beach
Conclusion. Wooden Island, sparsely wooded, is close SE of    that can usually be seen at night. A trail leads from this place to
Cape Ommaney.                                                      near the summit of Pin Peak, where mining has ceased.
 (18)  Cape Ommaney Light (56009.6'N., 134ï¿½39.7'W.), 168            (29)  A rock, which bares, is 0.1 mile off the W  shore at the
feet above the water, is shown from a post on Wooden Island.    entrance. Kelp extends from the shore to about 20 yards beyond
This light, together with Helm Point Light, Point Crowley Light 2,    the rock. In entering the bay at night this rock is the main danger,
and Cape Decision Light, marks the approach to Chatham Strait.     as it can seldom be picked up and usually does not show as a
                                                                    breaker.
 (19)  Chart 17402.-From Helm Point to Windy Bay the shore-         (30)  Off the E point of the entrance is a rock about 10 feet high.
line of Coronation Island is rugged and rocky, with steep brown    About 160 yards to the NW of this rock is a rock awash at high
and yellow cliffs. In the bight W  of Helm Point is a rock awash.    water.
Between Helm Point and Windy Bay are off-lying rocky islets, the    (31)  The channel between the rocks off the point is about 500
outermost is 40 feet high and 1.3 miles W from Helm Point and    yards wide, and a midchannel course leads to safe anchorage in 5
about 0.5 mile offshore. It is of grayish color, without vegetation,    to 7 fathoms, sand bottom. During SE gales, williwaws sweep
with deep water close-to, and is generally visible in moderately    down with considerable force and heavy ground tackle is neces-
thick weather. A reef with rocks awash at half tide is 1 mile SW of    sary to prevent dragging. On the E side of the bay, halfway to the
Helm Point.                                                        head, is a small bight used by fishing craft, as it affords better pro-
 (20)  Windy Bay, on the W  side of the island, is well protected    tection. Near this place is a low portage to the bay to the E.
from the sea by rocks and reefs that extend from the N shore of the  (32)  Alikula Bay, E of Egg Harbor, is free of dangers, and
entrance to within 0.3 mile of the S shore. A line of breakers usu-    anchorage can be selected according to size of vessel in either the
ally shows on the reefs;                                           outer or inner part of the bay.
                                                                      (33) Aats Bay, E of Aats Point, has two arms. The W arm is
 (21)  The shoreline of the bay is generally rocky. The head of     (33   Aats Bay, E of Aats Point, has two arms. The W  arm is
                                                                    too deep for secure anchorage; the E arm affords anchorage in 6 to
the bay has a sand beach about 350 yards long, and a deposit of
                 sand is near the mouth of the stream on the S side of the bay.  8 fathoms, sand and mud bottom. The entrance of the E arm has a
sand is near the mouth of the stream on the S side of the bay.
                                                                    ll/2-fathom rock marked by kelp. At times there is a kelp patch
 (22)  The depression in which the bay lies is readily distin-    about 200 yards to the S of the rock. Favor the E shore in entering.
guished from offshore, although the surrounding peaks are high.    During severe SE gales, williwaws are felt with considerable
From offshore, Windy Peak is a good landmark. The entrance is S    force, and heavy ground tackle is necessary to prevent dragging.
of the reefs. Follow the general trend of the S shore about 0.2 mile    The bay is exposed to N weather.
off. When approaching the S inner point where the bay narrows,       (34)  Gish Bay is about 1 mile E of Aats Bay; and rocks, which
change course so as to pass about 220 yards off the point; beyond,    uncover about 3 feet, are midway between the entrance points.
the bay is clear. Depths of 12 to 20 fathoms are carried through the    The bay is full of kelp and has depths of 3 to 7 fathoms; shoal
channel.                                                           water extends 0.3 mile from its head. It is not suitable as an
 (23)  Anchorage may be had in 22 fathoms, mud and sand bot-    anchorage. Channel Island, a small island with a few trees, is 0.5
tom, off the stream on the S side of the bay or near the head, but    mile offshore and marks the entrance to the bay. The island shows
swinging room is restricted. The stream may be identified by the    up well from E and W. During moderately thick weather it is a
grassy area near its mouth. Fishing boats and other small craft may    good landmark.
anchor in shoaler water closer in. During SE gales the wind is felt  (35)  From Aats Bay to Cora Point the shoreline is irregular.
with considerable force, and the depths throughout the bay, aver-    Near Cora Point, on the N shore, is Shrub Islet, a small rocky islet
aging about 30 fathoms, mud bottom, are too great for secure    with a few trees on it. S of the islet isa small cove where small
anchorage.                                                         launches anchor in 5 to 10 fathoms.
  (24)  From Windy Bay to Nation Point, the NW point of the          (36)  Dangers.-The rocks off the S end of Coronation Island
island, the shoreline is rocky and rugged. Off the rounding point,    are described under Helm Point. The most important dangers off
about 1.8 miles to the SW of Nation Point, are two rocks about    the N coast are as follows: A 2-fathom spot, which during heavy
300 yards offshore; the S rock shows breakers in moderate    weather shows as a breaker, is 2.3 miles NNE from Nation Point;
weather, the N rock bares. A rock, which uncovers about 4 feet, is   it is not marked by kelp. A rock that uncovers 8 feet is 1.1 miles
0.3 mile N of the two rocks.                                       NNW from Aats Point. A very heavy breaker 0.2 mile SE of the
  (25)  Nation Point, at the NW end of Coronation Island, is    rock was occasionally observed during a severe gale, but the shoa-
rocky, with breakers close-to on the W  side. Depths of 14 to 39    lest depths found were 71/2 fathoms. A 6- to 8-fathom patch,
fathoms were obtained 0.3 mile from the point. The land rises    marked by kelp during the summer, is 0.4 mile W  of the rock. A
rather steeply at first, then with a gradual slope to Pin Peak.    rock awash at extreme low water is 0.5 mile NE of Aats Point.
  (26)  From Nation Point to Cora Point, the shoreline is cut up by  (37)  The channel between Coronation Island and the Hazy
numerous bays and inlets; the principal ones are Egg Harbor and    Islands is clear. Spanish Island and Cape Decision are described in
Aats Bay, both affording anchorage. Aats Point, about 2.3 miles    chapter 7.






196                                                  10. CHATHAM STRAIT


 (38)  Chart 17386.-Point Howard (56004.2'N., 134ï¿½14.0'W.),         (49)  The small arm on the NW side has a narrow entrance
on the E side of Chatham Strait about 5 miles NW of Cape Deci-    channel with dangers on both sides. Vessels entering should favor
sion, consists of a detached rocky ledge back of which is a group    the S shore in the narrow entrance. Good anchorage is inside the
of several bare mountain peaks, including Mount McArthur.          arm in 7 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom.
 (39)  Howard Cove, between Cape Decision and Point                 (50)  The shore near the S entrance point of the port is irregular
Howard, is open to the W and is not considered a secure anchor-    and foul. The head of the first arm on the S side affords anchorage
age. The temporary use of the cove is recommended only for small    in 12 fathoms. Favor the SW side near the head to avoid the 33/4-
craft of not over 6-foot draft with local knowledge.               fathom shoal shown on the chart.
 (40)  Crowley Bight, a fair-weather anchorage, is an indenta-      (51)  In the second arm on the S side, anchorage may be had in
tion in the shoreline between Point Howard and Point Crowley. It    7 to 17 fathoms, mud bottom. The channel to the basin at the head
is exposed and affords poor holding ground.                        of this arm is narrow with 33/4 fathoms at its entrance, but can be
 (41)  Point Crowley is a prominent headland on the E shore 8    entered by small vessels with safety.
miles NW of Cape Decision. Most of the higher peaks in this          (52)  Harris Cove, between Port Malmesbury and Gedney Har-
vicinity are bare. A group of rocks, which uncover about 5 feet    bor and about 1.3 miles N of Point Harris, extends to the basin at
and on which the sea breaks at practically all stages of the tide, is    the NW end of Port Malmesbury, with low land between. This
about 1 mile SW from the point. The passage between the rocks    bight is used by small craft for anchorage in all but W weather.
and the point may be used to take advantage of the prevailing N      (53)  Point Cosmos is about 3.5 miles N of Point Harris. It rises
current when northbound.                                           by several broad terraces to a bare-topped mountain. At Point Cos-
 (42)  Point Crowley Light (56007.2'N., 134ï¿½15.5'W.), 45 feet    mos the shore trends NE for about 2 miles to the entrance of Ged-
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    ney Harbor.
white diamond-shaped daymark on the point.                           (54)  Gedney Harbor, about 23 miles N of Cape Decision, has
 (43)  The N entrance point of Table Bay, about 2 miles N of    its entrance on the E side of Chatham Strait 2 miles NE of Point
Point Crowley, consists of an island close to a tongue of lowland,    Cosmos. The harbor is a horseshoe-shaped cove, averaging about
which affords some shelter from the swell in the N arm of the bay.    0.2 mile in width, that surrounds a wooded island that is about 1
Temporary anchorage may be had in 13 to 16 fathoms, mud bot-    mile long. The passage E of the island is blocked at its N end by
tom. Favor the SE shore and take care not to anchor too close to    rocks and reefs.
the rocks, awash at high water, off the N shore of the arm. In the   (55)  The entrance to the harbor is on either side of a ledge
northernmost part of the N arm is a good place to beach a vessel in    about 400 yards long, about 0.2 mile W of the island. The NW and
case of emergency. Fishing vessels generally anchor in the SE arm    SE ends of the ledge are bare heads that show only a few feet
of the bay. At high water small craft can enter the land-locked    above the highest tides. The channels on each side of the ledge are
cove on the W  side of the N arm by passing between the wooded    clear in midchannel. About 0.3 mile SE of the ledge the passage
island on the N side of the cove and the rocky islet S of this island.    SW of the island is narrowed to a width of about 200 yards by a
At low water this entrance has bare rocks.                         sharp point projecting from Kuiu Island. Kelp and shoal water
 (44)  The entrance to Table Bay is marked on each side by bold,    extend about 50 yards off the point.
rocky bluffs that are very distinctive in color; those on the N side  (56)  The harbor is used extensively by fishermen during the
are dark, and those on the S side are light and show prominently    season. Anchorage is available in most parts of the harbor in 6 to
when in the sun. The low gap at the E end of the bay is prominent    12 fathoms, mud bottom.
in contrast with the high land on either side.                       (57)  A fish-buying scow is usually anchored in the harbor dur-
                                                                    ing the summer. Water, ice, gasoline, diesel fuel, limited provi-
 (45)  Charts 17376, 17320.-Port Malmesbury is on the E side    sions, and fishing supplies are available on the scow.
of Chatham Strait, 17 miles N of Cape Decision. On the SE side of    (58)  Tebenkof Bay is on the E side of Chatham Strait N of
the port are two arms; one about 1.7 miles inside the entrance and    Gedney Harbor. Its entrance is between Point Ellis on the N and
the other near the head. The NW side has a short arm about half-    Swaine Point on the S. The bay extends inland for about 7 miles
way between the entrance and the head of the port.                 and branches into three arms of irregular shape. The high regions
 (46)  Point Harris, the N entrance point to Port Malmesbury, is    N and S of the entrance merge into the low-lying hills that cover
a bare rocky platform, 40 to 50 feet high, that extends 0.2 mile out    the entrance islands and the long projecting points of the bay. The
from the tree line. Point Harris Light (56017.4'N., 134018.0'W.),    islands inside the bay and the E shore of Chatham Strait are low
32 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red    and a distinctive feature of the locality.
and white diamond-shaped daymark on the point. Back of the           (59)  Windfall Islands are three islands from 1 to 2 miles N of
point the land rises gradually at first and then more abruptly, to    Swaine Point. Troller Islands are six islands just NE of Windfall
form a prominent detached peak. This mountain has a dark green    Islands. They are separated from Kuiu Island by Helianthus Pas-
growth of timber on the W  slope and a large yellow landslide on    sage, a narrow passage obstructed by a 2-fathom rock near mid-
the S slope.                                                       channel at its S entrance. This passage has strong currents during
 (47)  One-half mile E of Point Harris is another prominent    spring tides. Troller Point is the most N point of the Troller Island
point. Its face is a steep bluff of light gray rock. The land rises    group.
abruptly here to form a small knob; the low land back of the knob    (60)  From some distance offshore in Chatham Strait, Windfall
rises uniformly to the first-mentioned peak. The knob is prominent    Islands and Troller Islands appear as a continuous stretch of shore-
from the NW direction and is visible over Point Harris.            line.
 (48)  A reef extends about 350 yards off the point on the N side   (61)  Davis Rock is a bare rock in the entrance to Tebenkof
of the port about 1.5 miles E of Point Harris. The bight W  of this    Bay, about 0.9 mile NW from Troller Point. It forms an excellent
reef affords fair-weather anchorage, protected from N winds, in 15    landmark for entering the bay. SW from the rock are a number of
fathoms, soft bottom.                                              shoals and submerged pinnacle rocks as shown on the chart. A






                                                     10. CHATHAM STRAIT                                                       197


rock, 15 feet high, similar to Davis Rock in appearance, is off     (75)  Bay of Pillars extends about 10 miles NE from Point Ellis
Troller Point.                                                    and is comparatively clear for 4.5 miles. Above this the bay is foul
 (62)  Explorer Basin is between Kuiu Island and the off-lying    and must be navigated with caution.
Windfall Islands and Troller Islands. It affords fair anchorage dur-  (76)  The best approach to the bay is on a SE course passing
ing S weather. The entrance is obstructed by shoals off Swaine    about 0.9 mile N of Point Ellis Light 8, then following a midchan-
Point and the southernmost Windfall Island.                       nel course on about 0680 into the bay.
 (63)  Thetis Bay, the S arm of Tebenkof Bay, affords excellent    (77)  Temporary anchorage for small boats can be had in a cove
anchorage near its head in 9 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom.           about 2.1 miles NE of Point Ellis in 10 to 20 fathoms, mud and
                                                                    shell bottom.
 (64)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
40 from normal variations have been observed on the W shore of      (78)  The ruins of a cannery wharf and a saltery wharf are on the
Thetis Bay at 56025.7'N., 134010.3W.                              SE side of Bay of Pillars, about 3.5 miles above Point Ellis. The
                                       6 etaneo Bay, the Sarea around the wharves is foul with submerged pilings and
 (65)  The entrance to Petrof Bay, the SE arm, is endangered by    debris, and should be avoided or navigated with extreme caution.
numerous reefs and shoals. The N side of the entrance channel is   In 1981, the NOAA Ship DAVIDSON foud           e anchorage in
                                                                    In 1981, the NOAA Ship DAVIDSON found secure anchorage in
marked by Tebenkof Bay Light 1 (56027.0'N., 134ï¿½08.3W.), 14    70 knot SW winds, 1 mile NNE of the cannery in 15 to 20 fath-
feet above water, shown from a small house with a square green    oms, mud bottom.
daymark on a small island on the E side of the entrance. A daybea-  (79)  A rock awash is on the S side of the bay about 0.5 mile NE
                                                                     (79)  A rock awash is on the S side of the bay about 0.5 mile NE
con is on a rock awash, 1.7 miles SE from the light.              of the cannery wharf in about 56036'18"N., 134014'00"W.
 (66)  Good anchorage can be selected in various parts of Petrof   (80)  Four small islands are on the SE side of the bay, about 4.5
Bay; the chart is the best guide.                                 miles above Point Ellis. Secure anchorage for small vessels can be
 (67)  Piledriver Cove is a small cove on the N side of Tebenkof    found about 400 yards E of the islands and the same distance from
Bay, about 4 miles ESE of Point Ellis.                            the shore, in 10 to 11 fathoms. It is safer for a stranger to enter at
 (68)  Happy Cove, on the N side of the bay 3 miles SE from    low water. The channel is about 150 yards wide between the N end
Piledriver Cove, is well sheltered. Its entrance is marked by one    of the islands and the reef to the N. The channel N of the reef is
bare and one wooded island. The inner cove, separated from the    about 150 yards wide and is the most direct route to the upper
lower part by a narrow channel, has sand bottom and beach.        parts of the bay.
 (69)  Gap Point is the southernmost extremity on the N shore      (81)  About 6 miles above the entrance a narrow foul channel
of Tebenkof Bay about 1.2 miles SE from Happy Cove. From the    leads into the inner bay, which is clear and deep. The narrow
entrance to Tebenkof Bay, it is distinguished by the gap between    entrance to the inner bay has strong tidal currents and should only
the islet S of it and the point.                                  be entered at slack water or with local knowledge. A rock awash is
 (70)  Elena Bay, the N arm, affords good anchorage at various    at midchannel at the W  end  o         f the narrow entrance in about
places.                                                           56038'00"N., 13401 1'03"W. Two rocks, covered 3/4 fathom and 114
                                                                    fathoms, are about 160 yards and 250 yards ENE of the rock
 (71)  Routes.-The entrance to Tebenkof Bay N of Davis Rock    awash, respectively
is clear and may be navigated easily with the aid of the chart. In
approaching this entrance from S, take care to avoid the dangers   (82) Anchorage can be found in the cove to the SW co
                 SWofDavispRock.Smallcaftcanthevi the inner bay in 4 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom. A 1 /2-fathom spot
SW of Davis Rock  Small craft cand enter the bay via Explorer    is near the center of the cove. Good anchorage in 2 to 7 fathoms,
                                                                    mud bottom, is found in any part of the arm leading S at the head
                                                                    of the bay.
 (72)  Charts 17370, 17320.-The Bay of Pillars and Rowan           (83)  Rowan Bay has a very irregular bottom and much kelp
Bay, on the E side of Chatham Strait, share a common entrance    and is suitable only for small vessels. Strangers should preferably
about 38 miles N of Cape Decision. The bight that forms the    enter at low water and exercise care, because there are many
entrance between Point Ellis and Point Sullivan is about 7.2 miles    charted and uncharted shoals in the bay and at its entrance.
wide and indents the coast 2.5 miles in its main part. The two bays  (84)  A rock awash, with deep water around it, is about 0.8 mile
have secure anchorages. The bight has many islands, rocks, and    SW of the narrow entrance to Rowan Bay. It is marked by kelp. In
reefs, especially between the two arms, but a deep channel leads    1975, a rock, covered about 21/2 fathoms, was reported in about
into each arm.                                                    56037.5'N., 134020.1'W., about 1.2 miles SW of the rock awash.
 (73)  Point Ellis (56ï¿½33.8'N., 134019.2'W.), the S point of Bay    Another danger spot, covered 11/2 fathoms, is about 300 yards NW
of Pillars, is 16.5 miles N of Point Harris. The point is low and    of the 21/2-fathoms covered rock in about 56 ï¿½37.6'N., 134ï¿½20.3'W.
rocky. Rising steep and bluff back of it is a high wooded ridge    Mariners are advised to exercise caution in this area.
with two prominent landslides on its S face; the E one is inverted  (85)  The entrance to Rowan Bay, 5 miles N of Point Ellis, has
"V" in shape. These slides are bare and can be seen for a long dis-    depths of 10 to 20 fathoms, however, uncharted shoals from 3 to
tance from S or SW. A rock, covered 13/4 fathoms, is about 0.3    ll/, fathoms are reported; local knowledge is advised. The shores
mile WSW of the point in about 56ï¿½33'40"N., 134019'40"W. A        at the entrance are foul. At 1.2 miles within the entrance there is
bare reef is 0.4 mile WNW of Point Ellis. The reef is marked by    an island in the middle. The deep channel follows the SW and SE
Point Ellis Light (56034.0'N., 134020.0'W.), 30 feet above the    sides of the island at a distance of about 200 yards. The passage N
water, shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-    of the island is narrow and bordered on both sides by foul ground,
shaped daymark. Kelp is between the reef and the point, and also    but it is preferred because a nearly straight approach is possible.
extends about 0.5 mile N from the reef. A rock awash is about 0.3   (86)  E of the island, the bay has a NE direction with depths of 3
mile N of the reef in 56ï¿½34'22"N., 134019'39"W.                   to 12 fathoms, and is a secure anchorage. A rock, covered 2 fath-
  (74)  Islands, islets, reefs, and bare and covered rocks are on the    oms, is about 0.3 mile ENE from the island in the middle of the
N side of the entrance to Bay of Pillars; kelp is in the area.    bay in about 56ï¿½39'34"N., 134ï¿½ 15'05"W. A rock, covered 13/4 fath-






198                                                 10. CHATHAM STRAIT


oms, is about 300 yards NE of the 2-fathom rock. Two large          (96)  A lighted 3340 range leads through the center of the
streams enter the head, and an extensive flat borders the entire N  entrance channel and close SW of a buoy that marks the SE end of
shore between them to a distance of over 0.5 mile, but the shoaling    a shoal with rocks awash.
is gradual up to 3 fathoms.                                         (97)  A submerged pipeline crosses the channel about 50 yards
 (87)  In 1981, a logging camp was operating in Rowan Bay on    N of the 334ï¿½ rear range marker. The pipeline is marked by two
the NW shore on both sides of the point about 0.6 mile NNE of the    orange floats at each end. Vessels are cautioned not to anchor in
island. A small-craft and seaplane float is about 0.2 mile W of the    this area.
point. A log storage area and log booms are in the N part of the    (98)  A speed limit of 3 miles per hour is prescribed for certain
bay. Gasoline and a machine shop are available in an emergency    vessels in Port Alexander. (See 162.250, chapter 2, for regula-
only. Radiotelephone communications are maintained with other    tions.)
parts of Alaska, and with other States.                             (99)  Port Alexander, a fishing settlement with a general store,
 (88)  Point Sullivan, about 7.2 miles N of Point Ellis, is low    is on the E side of the harbor. It has a public wharf and two State-
and wooded. The land rises gradually back to a ridge. A chain of    maintained small-craft floats. The public wharf is in the outer har-
islands, bare and submerged rocks, and kelp extend about 1.2    bor at the S end of the settlement. In 1976, depths of 12 feet were
miles SSE from the point. E of these islands is a bight, open to the    reported along the face. Just N of the public wharf is one of the
S, where temporary anchorage can be found in 13 to 20 fathoms.    two State floats. The 412-foot-long float, with a seaplane float at
 (89)  Washington Bay is on the E side of Chatham Strait, about    its N end, can accommodate craft on both sides; depths of 10 to 20
45 miles N of Cape Decision and about 2.5 miles N of Point Sulli-    feet were reported alongside in 1976. The second small-craft float
van. The bay is deep and has high, steep sides; its entrance is not    is on the E side of the inner harbor, about 500 yards N of the pub-
visible far from shore. Washington Bay Light (56043.1'N.,    lic wharf. The 250-foot-long float can accommodate craft on both
134023.7'W.), 33 feet above the water, is shown from a spindle    sides. In 1976, depths of 10 to 20 feet were reported alongside.
with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the point on the     (1oo) Limited amounts of gasoline, diesel fuel, water, and provi-
S side of the entrance. A 5/2-fathom spot is about 0.5 mile S of    sions can be obtained in the summer at the general store. Ice is
Washington Bay entrance in about 56042'30"N., 134023'25"W.    available in the summer from a fish-buying station.
Rocks and kelp extend off the N point of the entrance. Submerged    (1ol) A 48-foot grid is immediately W of the approach pier to
pilings extend about 50 yards off the N shore, about 0.5 mile from    the small-craft float on the E side of the inner harbor.
the head of the bay; caution is advised in the area. Temporary      (102) The settlement maintains radiotelephone communications
anchorage can be had in the middle of the bay about 0.7 mile from    with other parts of Alaska and with other States.
the head.                                                           (103) Point Conclusion, 6.5 miles N of Cape Ommaney, is low,
 (90)  The head of the bay is not recommended as an anchorage,    flat, and wooded. The point is the N extremity of a comparatively
because of insufficient swinging room. In the winter, violent SE    low peninsula between Port Alexander and Port Conclusion. A
winds draw down the N side of the head of the bay. Mariners    small island is close off the point. Graveyard Cove is an open
should follow a midchannel course when entering the bay.          bight on the SE side of the point. Flotsam Islet is in the SE part of
                                                                   the cove.
 (91)  Chart 17320.-Kingsmill Point is on the E side of            (104) Port Conclusion has its entrance W of Point Conclusion.
Chatham Strait at its junction with Frederick Sound. It is marked    The soundings are deep and somewhat irregular, but the port and
by Kingsmill Point Light (56050.6'N., 134ï¿½25.2'W.), 25 feet    approaches have been found clear of dangers. On the SE shore of
above the water and shown from a small house with a red and    the port, 0.3 mile SSW of Point Conclusion, is a cove about 0.2
white diamond-shaped daymark. Frederick Sound is described in    mile long with a sandy beach at its head. About 0.9 mile farther
chapter 8.                                                        SW, on the same shore, is Ship Cove where Vancouver (English
                                                                   navigator and discoverer) moored his vessels. A few piles on the
 (92)  Charts 17331, 17320.-Breakfast Rock is about 0.3 mile    SE side of the cove mark the site of a former saltery. A line of dol-
off the W  shore of Chatham Strait, about 4 miles NNE of Cape    phins in an E-W direction is about in the middle of the entrance to
Ommaney and about 0.9 mile SSE of Port Alexander Light. It is 5    the cove. A marker is on the NE and SW sides of the entrance to
feet high, small in extent, and bare, and has deep water close-to.    the cove. The cove affords protected anchorage for small craft in
Small boats with local knowledge use a passage between this rock    21/2 to 4 fathoms. The only ship anchorage in Port Conclusion is in
and the reef that extends out from the shore.                     midchannel, about 0.3 mile N of Ship Cove and S of the 53/4-
 (93)  Port Alexander, indenting the W shore of the strait about    fathom spot, in 13 to 20 fathoms, rocky and uneven bottom. The
5 miles N of Cape Ommaney, is a small-boat harbor with an    holding ground is poor, and its use is not recommended. John
entrance 150 yards wide.                                          Bay, on the W side opposite Point Conclusion, is a deep bight of
 (94)  Port Alexander Light (56ï¿½14.4'N., 134039.0'W.), 68 feet    no importance.
above the water, is shown from a small house on a skeleton tower    (105) Ruins of two saltery wharves are on the W side of Port
with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the high bare    Conclusion at its head. In 1976, the N wharf was pile ruins, and
rocky point at the S side of the entrance.                        the S wharf had loose outer piles and an unstable deck. Caution is
 (95)  A Federal project provides for a 150-foot-wide channel,    advised.
15 feet deep, that leads through ledge rock at the main entrance   (106) Port Armstrong is 1.5 miles N of Point Conclusion. From
and a 40-foot-wide channel that is 6 feet deep at the entrance to    Point Eliza, the S point at the entrance, a narrow ledge, which
the inner harbor. In July 1992, the controlling depth was 15 feet in    uncovers shortly after high water, extends E for about 200 yards in
the main entrance channel except for shoaling on the W  channel    a continuation of the point. Vessels should keep about 0.5 mile off-
edge in about 56ï¿½14'26.9"N., 134ï¿½38'57.0"W. The channel to the    shore until abreast of the entrance.
inner harbor is no longer maintained, and local knowledge is nec-   (107) About 0.3 mile W of Point Eliza is the narrowest part of
essary for safe entry.                                            the channel with bold shores, leading to the inner landlocked basin






                                                     10. CHATHAM STRAIT                                                        199


of Port Armstrong. This basin affords the best anchorage in the     (116) Radiotelephone communication is maintained with other
vicinity. The anchorage is in the W end of the basin in 11 to 20    parts of Alaska and with other States.
fathoms, soft bottom. A midchannel course carries in safely.' All   (117) New Port Walter is at the head of a small cove on the N
dangers are shown on the chart.                                    side and about 0.8 mile from the entrance to Port Walter. A stream,
 (108) The ruins of a wharf are on the N side of the basin at Port    with a flat at its entrance, is at the head of the cove. A rock, bare at
Armstrong, just above the narrows. In 1976, there were stub piles    extreme tide, is close to the E entrance point to the cove. A rock,
at the outer end and most of the decking was gone. Pile ruins of    bare at high water, is off the W point of the cove, with a reef that
another pier are about 75 yards NE of the wharf ruins.             extends part way from the shore.
 (109) Miner Cove, about 0.8 mile N of Port Armstrong               (118) Big Port Walter, a basin with depths 22 to 55 fathoms, is
entrance, is an open bight that might afford temporary anchorage    entered through a narrow passage 0.4 mile long leading from the
for small craft.                                                   anchorage W of the wooded islet. The passage is almost straight,
                                                                    with a depth of 34 fathoms in midchannel at its narrowest part.
 (110)  Charts 17333, 17320.-Port Lucy has its entrance on the    The maximum current in the entrance is estimated to be 2 knots. A
W shore about 10.5 miles N of Cape Ommaney. The anchorage for    large stream enters in the N part, and two streams empty in the SW
large vessels is near the head, abreast a deep gulch on the NW     part of the bay. One of the latter is a cascade from a lake about 800
side, in about 20 fathoms. Small vessels can go farther in and    feet high. The shores are steep-to, and there are apparently no dan-
anchor in about 10 fathoms. From the head of the port low land    gers. The basin is too deep for good anchorage and freezes in win-
extends through to the W side of Baranof Island at Puffin Bay, and    ter. With an accumulation of snow, the ice becomes 8 to 10 feet
winds from those quarters may draw through in consequence, but    thick during severe winters and lasts almost until spring.
without any sea. The port is easy of access and apparently has no    (19) The ruins of a wharf are at the head of Big Port Walter;
dangers.                                                           caution is advised.
 (111)  Toledo Harbor is a small, horseshoe-shaped bay with         (120) Port Herbert has its entrance about 16.5 miles N of Cape
depths of 31/4 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom, which is 12.7 miles N of    Ommaney and 6.5 miles S of Patterson Point. The water is too
Cape Ommaney and about 0.9 mile S of Port Waiter Light 5. It is    deep for anchorage, and there are apparently no dangers. There are
used considerably by small local fishing craft. It has an entrance    no islets or rocks at its entrance, which distinguishes it from Port
about 75 yards wide with a midchannel depth of 5 fathoms. The    Walter.
NE part of the harbor is shoal.
 (112) Port Walter has its entrance about 14 miles N of Cape        (121) Charts 17335, 17320.-About 4 miles N of Port Herbert
Ommaney and 9 miles S of Patterson Point. Port Walter Light    and 2.3 miles S of Patterson Point is a small bight used for anchor-
(56ï¿½23.2'N., 134038.2'W.), 20 feet above the water and shown    age by local fishing craft during the summer.
from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped day-      (122) Patterson Point (56ï¿½32.4'N., 134'38.2'W), on the W side
mark, is on the S point at the entrance. Near the head of Port    of Chatham Strait 23 miles N of Cape Ommaney, is the E point at
Walter, a little S of midchannel, is a wooded islet. A high-water    the entrance to Patterson Bay. It is high, bluff, bold, and extends N
rocky islet, from which a reef extends in a N direction into the    to a series of high rugged peaks, and is the S end of a high moun-
channel, is 50 yards N of the wooded islet. Anchorage in 11 to 14    tain ridge between Patterson Bay and Chatham Strait. The point is
fathoms, sandy bottom, can be had between the islet and the N      conspicuous from the S. Patterson Bay shows as a deep gulch in
shore.                                                             the high rugged mountains.
 (113) Little Port Walter, W of the S entrance point, consists of   (123) Patterson Point Light (56032.4'N., 134ï¿½38.3W.), 50 feet
an inner and outer harbor with a narrow connecting channel. A      above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
flat, grass-covered rock and two wooded islets are on the W side    white diamond-shaped daymark on the S end of Patterson Point.
of the entrance. The National Marine Fisheries Service Laboratory   (124) Mist Cove, about 1.4 miles SW from Patterson Point, is
on the NW side of the port 0.5 mile SW of Port Walter Light 5 is    an open bight too deep for anchorage. A waterfall on the SW side
prominent at the entrance to the port. This building and another    of the cove is visible from well N in Chatham Strait.
nearby dwelling appear as one large white building. A small          (i25) Deep Cove has its entrance 1.1 miles W  of Patterson
bridge that crosses the stream at the head of the port is also promi-    Point. A narrow peninsula makes out from the N shore about 2.4
nent.                                                              miles within the entrance. A stream with a flat at its mouth empties
 (114)  The narrow channel, connecting the inner and outer har-    at the base of the peninsula on its N side. Another stream with a
bors, has a width of about 30 yards with a depth of 31/4 fathoms    waterfall empties at the head of Deep Cove. Anchorage can be
and is subject to shoaling. Vessels should enter the port between    made near the small flat below this waterfall in 20 to 25 fathoms,
half and high tide only and preferably on a rising tide. They should    soft bottom. The water in the cove is otherwise too deep for
pass along the SE side of the channel and make a slow turn to    anchorage.
enter the inner harbor. Too sharp a turn may throw the stern into   (126)  Patterson Bay has its entrance W of Patterson Point. Con-
shoal water.                                                       stricted anchorage in 22 to 24 fathoms can be made below the
  (115)  Good protected anchorage for small craft can be had in the    wooded islet at the head and abreast a small green point on the W
inner harbor in 6 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom. The current in the    side formed by the debris from the cliffs above it. Several streams
entrance to the outer harbor is estimated to be 1 knot. SW winds    enter the bay. No directions are necessary, and there are apparently
draw down the creek at the head of the inner harbor, but no other    no dangers in the bay.
winds are felt. A 47-foot warehouse dock is near the tip of the
small point about 300 yards SW of the narrow connecting channel.    (127) Charts 17336, 17320.-Gut Bay is on the W  side of
A 90-foot float with an incubation pen at its outer end extends SW  Chatham Strait, about 34.5 miles N of Cape Ommaney. At 0.3
from a small point about 100 yards NE of the previously men-    mile E of the narrow entrance and 300 yards from the S side is a
tioned point.                                                      rocky patch with 41/2 fathoms; vessels should pass N of it. The





200                                                10. CHATHAM STRAIT


entrance is about 100 yards wide with bold shores. The sides are    water, rocky bottom, and no good anchorage. Temporary anchor-
bluff, bold, and rocky, in some places almost perpendicular. On    age can be had in the middle of the bay in 26 fathoms. At its head
the S side, 2.5 miles from the entrance, is the narrow opening of a    is a prominent cascade seen from a distance in Frederick Sound.
little bay, between high ridges, with a depth of 3/4 fathom. Small  (138) A waterfall, about 300 feet high, which shows well in Fre-
craft can enter this bay at high water and anchor in about 3 fath-    derick Sound is 1.8 miles S of Cascade Bay.
oms.
  (128) The water in the main bay is deep, but a temporary         (139) Charts 17337.- Warm Spring Bay is on the W side of
anchorage can be had on the S side 0.5 mile within the entrance,    Chatham Strait, about 56 miles N of Cape Ommaney and 7 miles
off a rocky ledge and small stream, in about 20 fathoms. This    NW of Point Gardner. The bay has good anchorage for small craft,
anchorage is not good, because the bottom is rocky, and the wind    but the anchorage for large vessels is indifferent.
draws through. A fair anchorage can be had near the head in 10 to
20 fathoms.                                                        (140)  Warm Spring Bay Light (57ï¿½04.8'N., 134ï¿½46.5'W.), 27
  (129) Hoggatt Bay is about 2 miles N of Gut Bay and extends    feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red
back into the mountains of Baranof Island. The sides are steep and    and white diamond-shaped daymark on the S point of the
bold and the water deep, over 100 fathoms through the middle.    entrance. A microwave tower, about 1 mile WNW of the light on a
Hoggatt Bay Light (56045.9'N., 134'39.3'W.), 40 feet above the    knob along the N shore, is prominent at the entrance to the bay.
water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dia-    Two billboard reflectors, one along the S shore and the other at the
mond-shaped daymark on the S side of the entrance to the bay.    head, are prominent in the bay. At the head of the bay is a water-
  (130) Red Bluff lBay is 4.5 miles N of Hoggatt Bay and 10 miles    fall, visible from Chatham Strait, and near the waterfall are several
W of Kingsmill Point, and is named from the prominent rocky red    warm minera springs.
hill N that come down to a low point on the N side of the entrance.  (141) Warm Spring Bay is of easy access, and with the chart as a
The small islands in the entrance to the bay almost close it. The    guide no trouble should be experienced in entering. Midchannel
bay extends back into the mountains. About the middle it chokes    courses are recommended.
to about 100 yards between high cliffs, but the channel is good. On  (142) Two small bights in the S shore afford anchorage for small
the S side at the head of the bay is a large stream; a flat extends    craft. The W one is preferable, because of shoaler water, from 12
about 0.4 mile from the head and 0.3 mile E from the mouth of the    to 15 fathoms.
stream.                                                            (143) The only anchorage in the bay for large vessels is off the
 (131) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of 5ï¿½ from    W bight in 25 fathoms, but the bottom is rocky and the current
normal variation may be expected in the channel entering Red    from the cascade usually sets out, making a vessel lie broadside to
Bluff Bay.                                                       SE winds that draw into the bay.
 (132) There are channels on both sides of the westernmost island  (44) A shoal with a depth of 61/4 fathoms is about 200 yards off-
in the entrance, but the S channel, being straight, is considered    shore and about 230 yards E of Warm Spring Bay Light 15. There
safer for long vessels than the wider rounding channel E of the    may be less water, so it should be avoided when entering the bay.
island. Great care should be taken to stay at midchannel.        Care should be taken to avoid the reef that makes out 60 yards
 (133) A small vessel may anchor just inside the entrance inthe    from the N shore at a point about 200 yards E of Baranof.
channel between the islands and the S shore. An anchorage can be   (145) Baranof is a village on the N side of Warm Spring Bay at
had 1.8 miles from the entrance, where the bay begins to narrow,
in 8 to 14 fathoms about in midchannel. The bottom is rocky. The    small aproach ier with a seaplane float at its end and a small-
wind draws through strongly when it is blowing in the strait. At    craft float that extends ESE from near its outer end. The 250-foot-
the head, favoring the N shore and NNE of the flat at the mouth of  -
                                                                    long small-craft float can accommodate craft on both sides; in
the stream, is a good anchorage in 12 to 16 fathoms with soft bot-
                                                                    1976, depths of 12 to 20 feet were reported alongside. Water is
tom and perfect protection.
 (o34) A reef extendsifrom the NE shore of the bay for about 75    available on the 250-foot float. A 40-foot grid is close E of the
 (134) A reef extends from the NE shore of the bay for about 75    small approach pier. Charter seaplane service from Sitka and
yards, at about 1 mile NW of the northwesternmost island in the    sm all approach pier. Charter seaplane service from Sitka and
entrance. The outer end of the reef is bare at almost all stages of
the tide and should be given a berth of at least 50 yards. The bay is  (146) Takatz Bay has its entrance on the W side of Chatham
reported to ice up from the head to the entrance islands during the    Strait about 10.5 miles NW of Point Gardner and 16 miles S of
winter.                                                          Point Thatcher. It terminates in a flat about 0.4 mile in extent,
                                                                    formed by a mountain stream emptying as a waterfall.
 (135) Chart 17320.-Between Red Bluff Bay and Cascade Bay,        (147) Point Turbot, the N point at the entrance to Takatz Bay, is
11 miles N, are four small bays where small craft may find a depth    marked by White Rock, a large white rock about 50 yards off. A
suitable for anchorage in smooth weather, but only one, Nelson    high waterfall about 2 miles N of Point Turbot is visible from N a
Bay, has protection. None of the bays is important,              considerable distance.
 (136) Nelson Bay, about 6.8 miles N of Red Bluff Bay, is an      (148) The S point at the entrance to Takatz Bay is the N point of
open bight at the head of which is a circular cove having two islets    a high wooded promontory forming the SE side of the bay.
across the entrance. The entrance to the cove is between the N islet  (149) The entrance of Takatz Bay is not visible until close S of
and the point N of it, and is 75 yards wide with a depth of 5 fath-    Point Turbot. Give Point Turbot a berth of not less than 0.2 mile
oms. The cove is 250 yards in diameter between the 10-fathom    when E of it and pass in midchannel between Point Turbot and the
curves, and the general depth is 15 fathoms, soft bottom. This    outer bare rocks off the S point at the entrance. Leave the two
cove is suitable only for small craft.                           inner bare rocks off the S point at the entrance about 150 yards to
 (137) Cascade Bay is on the W  side of Chatham Strait, about    the S, and favor the S shore for about 0.5 mile to avoid a sub-
4.5 miles W of Point Gardner (57ï¿½01'N., 137ï¿½37'W.). It has deep    merged rock in midchannel. Then follow a midchannel course.





                                                     10. CHATHAM STRAIT                                                      201


 (150) The bay affords secure anchorage about 1.8 miles within    (161) Point Lull Light (57ï¿½18.6'N., 134ï¿½48.4'W.), 50 feet
its entrance in 15 to 18 fathoms, soft bottom, in the basin that    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
opens out just before reaching the narrows.                      white diamond-shaped daymark on the E side of Point Lull.
 (151) Small craft may pass through the narrows in midchannel
and anchor 0.2 to 0.4 mile beyond them, but should not pass the    (162) Chart 17320.-Point Thatcher (57ï¿½25'N., 134ï¿½50'W.) is
largest islet 0.5 mile beyond the narrows, as the flat at the head    the NE extremity of Catherine Island and the S point at the E
begins there. All known dangers in the bay are charted.          entrance to Peril Strait. Peril Strait and Sitkoh Bay are described in
 (152) The promontory on the SE shore of the bay also forms the    chapter 13.
N shore of a bight, with the Takatz Islands, a group of islands on  (163) Wilson Cove, on the E side of Chatham Strait, is an open
the S side. The bight has no anchorage; the water is very deep and    bight in the W coast of Admiralty Island, about 8 miles N of
the bottom irregular.                                            Point Gardner. Two small wooded islands and foul ground with
 (153) Kasnyku Bay, on the W side of Chatham Strait about 14    kelp extend 0.4 mile off the S shore. The entrance has an extensive
miles NW of Point Gardner, has deep water and no secure anchor-    reef covered at highest tides. Wilson Cove should be avoided, as it
age. A small white house structure of a discontinued light is on the    affords no protection as an anchorage, except from E winds. The
SE end of the island at the head of the bay.                     bottom of the cove is foul with depths of 4 to 8 fathoms in places.
 (154) The entrance to the bay is between North Point and    But should it be necessary to enter the cove, stand in parallel to the
Round Island, and its surrounding group of small wooded islets,    S shore, pass S of the reef in the mouth of the cove, keep clear of
off the S point of the entrance.                                 the kelp on both sides, and anchor in 8 fathoms.
 (155) Cosmos Cove is on the W side of Chatham Strait about       (164) Table Mountain, on the S shore of Whitewater Bay, is
5.5 miles N of Takatz Bay and 2 miles S of Kelp Bay. The cove    peculiarly eroded near the summit. It is the first prominent peak N
affords anchorage with good shelter in 10 to 15 fathoms, soft bot-    of Point Gardner.
tom, for small vessels. The head of the cove is shoal for a distance (165) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
of about 0.8 mile.                                               6ï¿½ from the normal variation have been reported in Chatham Strait
 (156) Kelp Bay (57017'N., 134"51'W.), a large indentation in    in midchannel between 57'l5'N., and 5723'N.
the NE coasts of Baranof Island, is 10.5 miles S of the E entrance
of Peril Strait and 17.5 miles NNW of Point Gardner. Its entrance
is between North Point the S extremity of Catherine Island, and    (166) Charts 17341, 17320.-Whitewater Bay has its entrance
                                                                   on the E side of Chatham Strait between Point Caution and Woody
South Point on Baranof Island. The bay has no known commer-
       SouthcPoint on Baranof Islactivity. ba hs o  nwncome-     Point, 15 miles N of Point Gardner and 13 miles S of Killisnoo
 1ci7 The malin bay extends about c3t5miesNWwvhere ity.          Island. The bay at the head connects by a narrow passage with a
 (157) The main bay extends about 3.5 miles NW where it   lagoon, bare at low water. Secure anchorage can be had near the
divides into three arms. Middle Arm extends in a W direction.
South Arm extends in a general SW direction. The Basin,in the S   ea         ay.
part of the bay, is bordered on the E by two groups of islands that  (167) Caution.-No recent surveys have been made of the bay.
include Pond Island, Crow Island, and other adjacent islands.    The bottom is very irregular, and there is no certainty that all dan-
                                                                   gers are charted. In 1975, a 1/2-fathom spot was reported in the
Portage Arm, which extends in a NW direction, is reported to    gers are charted. In 1975, a 1
                                                                   entrance to the bay, about 0.6 mile E of Lone Tree Islet, in about
connect with Hanus Bay, in Peril Strait, by an overgrown portage.  57et5'11"N  134t37'06"W
 (158) Anchorages.-Anchorages in the bay are few, the best
being in the SE corner of The Basin. Another is in Middle Arm      (168) Point Caution is marked by Lone Tree Islet, which is
about 0.8 mile from its head in 22 to 25 fathoms, soft bottom. A  350 yards off the point. Foul ground and kelp extend over 0.9 mile
small vessel can find temporary anchorage in Portage Arm about    W and 0.9 mile N from the point.
2.7 miles above the entrance in midchannel, in 10 fathoms, but     (169) Healy Rock, about 0.2 mile N of Flag Point, on the S
this anchorage has scant swinging room and is exposed to SE    shore of the bay and 1.3 miles SE of Point Caution, is low, bare,
winds that draw through the arm,                                 and surrounded by ledges marked by kelp. Sand Point, named
 (159) Dangers.-The survey of the bay is old and incomplete,    from its formation, is on the N shore about 0.8 mile NE of Healy
and dangers may exist in addition to those shown on the chart. The    Rock and marks the entrance to the anchorage. A shoal with a sub-
known dangers include shoal water that extends 0.4 mile S of    merged rock, dangerous to navigation, at its end extends 300 yards
North Point; ledges that extend off South Point; extensive shoals    SE from Sand Point. North Island, low and wooded, is close to
and dangerous rocks in the cove on the SE side of Pond Island;    the N shore, 0.5 mile E of Sand Point.
Yellow Rock and the shoals SE, S, and WNW of it; Plover Rock,     (170) Anchorage may be had in 10 fathoms, soft bottom, 0.2
with surrounding shoals and rocks that uncover; several detached    mile SW of North Island with Black Point and Sand Point in line.
shoals and a rock awash from about 0.3 to 0.9 mile S of Plover     (171) Woody Point, the N point at the entrance, has a small,
Rock; Zubof Rock in the middle of the entrance to The Basin, and    rocky, wooded islet about 100 yards NW from it.
extensive shoal areas with depths as little as 1 fathom in the E and  (172) Foul ground marked by kelp extends about 0.3 mile from
SE parts of The Basin.                                           the N shore of the bay for a distance of 1.3 miles S of Woody
  (160)  Catherine Island is a large high island off the NE end of    Point. The most projecting is a bare ledge that extends 0.3 mile W
Baranof Island. Mountains take up the greater part of the island.    from the first point SSE of Woody Point. Kelp surrounds the ledge
Point Lull, the SE extremity of Catherine Island, forms the E side    to a distance of 250 yards.
of Echo Cove, a narrow bight, which extends in a NNW direction.    (173) Russian Reef is the N end of shoal water and broken
Thecove is open to the S and affords temporary anchorage for    ground that extends 1.2 miles N of Woody Point. The reef is about
small craft only. A submerged reef, marked by kelp, extends 0.6    0.4 mile in extent in a NW direction and rises abruptly from very
mile S of Point Lull. Vessels transiting Echo Cove and The Basin    deep water on three sides, bares in places, and is marked by kelp.
in Kelp Bay should use caution or seek local knowledge.          Tide rips form off the reef.






202                                                  10. CHATHAM STRAIT


  (174)  Chaik Bay is on the E side of Chatham Strait about 19       (187) Channels.-The S channel leads between Table Island and
miles N of Point Gardner. About 2 miles from the entrance it   Killisnoo Island and between the SE end of Killisnoo Island and
divides into two arms. The N arm extends NE, and the S arm    about 150 yards NW of the daybeacon marking Lone Rock.
extends E, where it termiriates in a long flat at the mouth of a     (188) The N channel leads between Killisnoo Island and Kenas-
stream.                                                            now Rocks and between Killisnoo Island and Admiralty Island. In
  (175) The N arm has good anchorage in 12 fathoms, sticky bot-    summer kelp extends entirely across the channel. The kelp is use-
tom, but is open SW. The S arm has considerable foul ground and    ful in defining the channel. The least depth in both channels is
should be avoided by strangers.                                    about 4 fathoms.
 (176)  Caution.-Numerous uncharted rocks have been reported        (189) A 9-foot spot, marked on its S side by a lighted buoy, is in
in Chaik Bay. A submerged rock has been reported on the bar    the NW part of the harbor in about 57ï¿½28'19"N., 134033'37"W.
across the entrance to the S arm midway between the two small    The chart is the guide for both channels.
islets. The chart is the guide in entering the bay.                  (190) The anchorage is in midharbor off the E end of Killisnoo
 (177) A bare islet is 0.8 mile NW of Rocky Point, the S point at    Island, in 14 to 15 fathoms. The harbor is somewhat exposed to
the entrance, and a ledge covered at half tide extends 0.3 mile NW  SE gales, but no considerable sea makes into the anchorage.
from the islet. A bare ledge is about 0.3 mile from the N shore of
                                                                      (191)  The tidal currents at Killisnoo Harbor are irregular, but the
the bay inside Village Point. A kelp-marked patch with 41/4 fath-    averages show that the current on the last half of the falling tide
oms is 0.3 mile NW of the wooded island in the middle of the bay    and the first part of the rising tide sets from Hood Bay W through
1.5 miles within the entrance.
                                                                    the harbor and N channel, and that the current on the second half
                                                                    of the rising tide and first half of the falling tide sets E through the
 (178)  Charts 17339, 17320.-Distant Point, about 23 miles N of    N channel and the harbor into Hood Bay. (See the Tidal Current
Point Gardner, is the S point at the entrance to Hood Bay. Directly    Tables for daily predictions.)
behind it are two mountains which are between Chaik Bay and
                                                                      (192) The current follows the channel, and the velocity is not
Hood Bay. The larger mountain is rounded on top, 2.8 miles S of    important except in the narrow part of the N entrance.
Distant Point, and a spur of this mountain runs toward the water
   'and teninates in a whitish cliff.                               (193)  An Alaska State Ferry Terminal, with 26 feet reported
and terminates in a whitish cliff.
 (179) fHood Bay has its entrance on the E side of Chatham         alongside, is on the NW shore of Killisnoo Harbor, about 0.15
                                                                    mile NE of Killisnoo Harbor Light 7. A steel transfer bridge, with
Strait, between Distant Point and Killisnoo Island. It has a general
                                                                    24 feet reported alongside, is immediately NE of the terminal. A
SE direction from its entrance, curving to about E and then
divides. The bay is about 7 miles long from the entrance to the    small-craft grid is immediately N of the steel transfer bridge. The
                                                                    steel transfer bridge, with dolphins, will accommodate a 235-foot
junction with both arms. North Arm has a flat 0.5 mile wide at its
                                                                    ferry loading and unloading passengers and vehicles. A highway
head. South Arm is free from midchannel dangers inside its    ferry loading and unloading passengers and vehicles. A highway
                                                                    connects Killisnoo Harbor with Angoon about 1.9 miles to the
entrance. Anchorage is available in each arm for large vessels in
                                                                    NNW.
suitable depths. Small craft find anchorage at the head of each arm
in 5 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom.                                      (194) Killisnoo Island is wooded; Point Samuel is its W end. A
 (180)  A rock with 2 fathoms over it and 1.2 miles NE of Distant    ledge, well bare at low water, extends about 125 yards off the SE
Point is marked by a lighted buoy. A buoy marks a rock with 2V1/    end of Killisnoo Island. A buoy marks the reef off the N side of
                                                                    the W end of Killisnoo Island.
fathoms over it 1.4 miles NW of House Point. In 1992, a 6 fathom
spot was reported in the channel in Hood Bay where it narrows        (195)  Table Island, about 30 feet high, sandy, and grass cov-
between Cabin Point and the S shore in about 57022'36"N.,    ered, is about 0.5 mile S of Killisnoo Island. It is surrounded by
134o28'18"W.                                                       reefs to a distance of about 0.3 mile. On its N side the 3-fathom
 (181)  Cabin Point, about 3.5 miles SE of the entrance buoys,    curve is fairly close to the island, but kelp extends out about 300
extends 0.4 mile from the NE shore of the bay. The cove W of the    yards into 6 and 8 fathoms. A shoal, marked at its outer end by a
point is foul; the cove NE of the point is shoal, but offers anchor-    lighted buoy, extends NE from the island. A small islet is 0.1 mile
age for small craft and shelter from N weather in 4 to 10 fathoms,    SW of the island.
hard sand bottom. Shoal water extends about 0.5 mile S from the      (196)  Sand Island, 1.1 miles SE of Table Island, is about 10 feet
point.                                                             high and is the NW end of a chain of reefs 1.9 miles long parallel
 (182) A shoal extends about 0.4 mile W from the point on the N    to the E shore of Hood Bay. A straight but narrow channel is
shore about 1.7 miles E of Cabin Point. Winds of considerable    between these reefs and the E shore. A bar with 41/2 to 10 fathoms
force are reported in the North Arm.                               over it is between Sand Island and Table Island.
 (183) Ice in South Arm makes navigation unsafe and quite often     (197) Lone Rock, which bares, is 0.3 mile SE of the SE end of
impossible during the winter. Ice also forms in North Arm from its    Killisnoo Island. It is surrounded by kelp and is marked by a day-
head to within 0.3 mile of the entrance to the arm.                beacon. The bottom is foul, and considerable kelp is between the
 (184) Pile ruins of two wharves are on the N side of the entrance    rock and the SE shore and no safe channel between.
to North Arm. Caution is advised.                                    (198) Kootznahoo Roads is on the N side of Killisnoo Island
                                                                    and forms part of the N channel leading to Killisnoo Harbor.
 (185) Killisnoo Harbor is on the E side of Chatham Strait, 27.5    (199) Kenasnow Rocks is an extensive ledge about 0.6 mile off-
miles N of Point Gardner, and on the N side of the entrance to    shore SW of Angoon, and marked on the N side by a lighted buoy.
Hood Bay.                                                          Portions of the ledge are always above water, and it is surrounded
 (186) Killisnoo Harbor Light 7 (57028.3'N., 134ï¿½34.1'W.), 16    by heavy kelp, especially on its inshore side. There is a channel
feet above the water, is shown from a small house on a skeleton    between it and the shore, the latter being fringed with kelp for
structure with a green square daymark on a concrete pier on a rock    some distance. The S end of the ledge is about 0.8 mile N of
off the NE point of Killisnoo Island.                              Killisnoo Island.






                                                     10. CHATHAM STRAIT                                                       203


 (200) Angoon, about 1.8 miles N of Killisnoo Island, is a village  (208) SE of Village Rock, the S shore is clear for about 0.5 mile.
with a general store, a seasonal hotel, and bordered on its W and E    The N side is obstructed by a ledge marked by kelp at slack water
sides by Chatham Strait and Kootznahoo Inlet, respectively. At    and terminates in Rose Rock, which is reported to be about 6 feet
Angoon, an antenna, a microwave tower, and a small green tank    high. A red triangular daymark on a pipe is shown from the shore
farm are prominent from Chatham Strait. Angoon has a health    SW of Rose Rock and about 600 yards SE of the light on Village
center, with a nurse in attendance every other month.             Rock.
 (201)  Weather.-Located in the more sheltered recesses of         (209) Currents.-The tidal currents have great velocity in
Chatham Strait, Angoon has a slightly more continental influence    Kootznahoo Inlet, and the inlet should be navigated at slack water,
than more exposed locales. Average maximum temperatures range    the safest condition being low water slack. In September 1975,
from 32ï¿½F in January to 62ï¿½F in July, with 111 days of freezing    however, a small boat from the Coast Guard Cutter CLOVER was
temperatures and 4 days of 70ï¿½F or above, on average. While pre-    able to transit the inlet as far as Buoy 6, about 1.4 miles above the
cipitation is frequent, falling on about 110 days annually, amounts    mouth, at high water slack without difficulty. They did encounter
are on the light side with 47 inches annually, compared to an aver-    erratic, sometimes strong, currents. (See the Tidal Current Tables
age of 169 inches at Port Alexander. Precipitation is most likely    for times of predictions.) The flood current at the entrance sets in
from September through February. Snow totals 77 inches in an    almost parallel to the NE shore, and so continues until it reaches
average year with highest amounts occurring in December, Janu-    Village Rock, where it divides, one part going NE around Turn
ary, and February.                                                Point and the other continuing SE around Rose Rock, where it
 (202) The village pier, a 525-foot-long T-headed pier with a 48-    again divides. One part continues SE into Favorite Bay, while the
foot outer face, extends into Chatham Strait. In 1992, depths of 40    other turns short around the rock and divides again, one part going
feet were reported along the outer face. The harbormaster    NE and the other following the N channel.
assigns berths and can be contacted by telephone (907-788-3630)     (210)  Vessels rounding Rose Rock at slack water can carry slack
or VHF-FM channel 1 or 16. Gasoline, diesel fuel, lube oil, distil-    water all the way to Mitchell Bay.
lates, greases, electricity, and water (during summer) are available  (211) At Village Rock, the currents have a velocity of 5 to 8
at the pier. Limited amounts of provisions and lodging are avail-    knots; at Point Bridge, as high as 10 knots; and at Passage Island,
able in town.                                                     as high as 7 knots. Rapids begin at Village Rock and continue until
 (203) A small-craft float, operated by the village, and a seaplane    well past Rose Rock.
float are in Kootznahoo Inlet; these facilities are described later in  (212) From Pillsbury Point to Point Bridge the current is very
this chapter. Radiotelephone and telephone communications are    swift, probably reaching 10 knots, with much boiling and swirling,
maintained. A highway connects Angoon with Killisnoo Harbor    the worst place being at Point Bridge. This can be passed only at
about 1.9 miles SSE. A freight boat from Seattle calls monthly    slack water, which lasts only a few minutes.
Seaplanes call daily from Juneau in the summer.                    (213) Through all the narrow channels leading into the various
                                                                    bays the currents have great velocity, and they should not be
 (204) Danger Point, on the E shore of Chatham Strait, 30 mies    attempted in any kind of a boat except at slack water. (See the
N of Point Gardner and 2.5 miles N of Point Samuel, the W         Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions.)
extremity of Killisnoo Island, forms the S point at the entrance to  (214)  Caution.-The navigation of Kootznahoo Inlet should not
                 Kootznahoo  nlet. Danger Point Light (5730.9N,    be attempted by strangers. A guide can be obtained at Angoon,
134036.4'W.), 30 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on a con-    Petersburg, and Sitka.
                                                                      (215) A seaplane float is in the small cove about 600 yards SE of
crete pier near the end of the reef that extends about 0.2 mile N
                                                                    the daybeacon W of Rose Rock. The village of Angoon maintains
from the point.                                                   small-craft floats about 600 yards SE of the seaplane float. Ber-
  (205) Kootznahoo Inlet is an intricate group of narrow pas-    thing is on both sides of the floats. In 1976, a least depth of 10 feet
sages, lagoons, and bays on the E shore of Chatham Strait 2.8    was reported along the floats. The harbormaster assigns berths.
miles NE of Killisnoo Island. It is full of rocks and reefs, and    A tidal drydock is available. A 72-foot-long grid is on the SE side
through the narrow passages the tidal currents rush with great    of the approach pier to the small-craft floats. Water and electricity
velocity. The navigation of Kootznahoo Inlet is such that it should    are at the small-craft floats. Supplies and communications facili-
not be attempted except by small craft of short length and ready    ties are available at Angoon, about 0.8 mile NW.
turning qualities, and then only at slack water and with local     (216) Favorite Bay has anchorage in 10 to 17 fathoms near the
knowledge. Fishing vessels are the only ones that navigate the    SW shore anywhere NW of a high bluff marking the end of the flat
inlet.                                                            that extends 1 mile from its head. The bay is used as a fishing
  (206)  The entrance is between Danger Point and Kootznahoo    ground for herring.
Head, and it extends SE to Turn Point, where it divides into three  (217) The passage to Favorite Bay is obstructed at its NW end
arms. The southernmost arm continues in a SE direction to Favor-    by a series of rocks that bare. A buoy marks a 11/2-fathom rocky
ite Bay; the northernmost extends NE to Mitchell Bay; the middle    shoal on the W  side of the entrance. There are deep passages
arm, also extending E, leads among the islands, is obstructed at its    among these rocks. The SE end of the passage is obstructed by a
entrance, and is navigable only by small craft. The lagoons    rock in midchannel about 0.2 mile NW of the NW end of Favorite
between the islands are full of rocks and reefs, and are not naviga-    Bay.
ble except by small craft.                                          (218) From E of Rose Rock, the N channel turns sharply NW
  (207) From its entrance the inlet is free from obstructions until    along the NW side of the reef making out from Channel Point.
Village Rock is reached. Village Rock, marked by a light, is a    Between this ledge and another extensive ledge on the N side of
large low-water ledge that extends toward Turn Point halfway    the channel the distance to Stillwater Anchorage is about 0.3 mile.
across from the village of Angoon on the SW side. Large swirls     (219) Stillwater Anchorage is about 1.3 miles long from Turn
occur here, caused by the great velocity of the tidal currents.   Point NE to Pillsbury Point, and 300 to 600 yards wide, with gen-







 204                                                  10. CHATHAM STRAIT


 eral depths of 16 to 24 fathoms. W of Pillsbury Point a short arm    (229) Basket Bay, on the W side of Chatham Strait, 11 miles N
 makes NE about 0.5 mile.                                           of Point Hayes, narrows slightly at its head. At the mouth of a
   (220)  From Stillwater Anchorage the channel leads close to an    large stream is a flat that extends about 400 yards into the head of
 islet on the S side, between it and a ledge that extends about 200    the bay. The bay is exposed to the SE, has a rocky bottom and
 yards SW of Pillsbury Point. The channel then narrows to about    depths of 12 to 40 fathoms, and is not recommended as an anchor-
 140 yards, with reefs on both sides, and extends NE for 0.5 mile to    age. The midchannel course up the bay is clear.
 Point Bridge where it passes between a reef on the N side and a
 bold bank on the S side. The channel then has a NE direction for     (230) Charts 17300, 17320.-Tenakee Inlet is on the W  side of
 about 0.8 mile, with a width of less than 200 yards and bold    Chatham Strait, 97 miles N of Cape Ommaney. The entrance is
 shores, and then widens to 0.2 mile and continues in the same    between South Passage Point and East Point, and is 2.5 miles
 direction for 1.6 miles to Hemlock Point. Then the channel turns    wide. It has a general W direction for 10 miles and then WNW for
 E for 1 mile to North Point, E of which is Mitchell Bay. Exten-    25 miles, narrowing near its head to about 0.3 mile. At its head is a
 sive ledges on the N side extend SW from North Point.              flat 0.8 mile in extent, and on the S shore 4 to 7 miles from its head
  (221) Mitchell Bay is connected at its W end with a lagoon full    are three bights filled by flats. At 1.8 miles from the head of the
 of rocks, reefs, and shallow water. Several islands are in the bay 1    inlet is a steep portage connecting with Port Frederick in Icy
 mile from its W end, and the water is foul between them and the    Strait. The depths in the inlet are great, and the dangers easily
 W  end of the bay. From its entrance at North Point, the channel    avoided. A number of bays on the S side afford anchorage.
 follows the N shore for 1 mile, where it passes between it and Dia-  (231)  Anchorage may be made at the head of Tenakee Inlet near
 mond Island, the northernmost island in the W part of the bay.    the sand flat in 7 to 10 fathom; hard gravel and shell bottom.
 Beyond Diamond Island, Mitchell Bay is clear and has general         (232)  Currents.-In Tenakee Inlet, S of Tenakee Springs, the
 depths of 12 to 20 fathoms near Diamond Island, decreasing to 10    current velocity is about 1 knot.
 fathoms at its E end.                                                (233) Tenakee Inlet Entrance Light 1 (57046.3'N.,
  (222) Davis Creek extends SW from Mitchell Bay and then    134056.1'W.), 33 feet above the water, is shown from a spindle
 widens into Kanalku Bay. Lighter Creek makes WSW from    with a square green daymark on a rock awash about 0.5 mile N of
Davis Creek about 0.7 mile from its N end, and has depths of 1/2    South Passage Point, the S entrance point to the inlet. A 4L/4-
to 41/2 fathoms. Davis Creek is foul. At its N entrance a ledge,    fathom shoal is about 500 yards E of the light.
which partly bares, extends E from the W  shore, enclosing Pas-      (234) A 23/4-fathom shoal is in Trap Bay about 3 miles WSW
sage Island and almost closing the channel. At the S end of Davis    from Tenakee Inlet Entrance Light 1.
Creek is Stone Island; an extensive ledge crosses the channel at     (235) A 21/2-fathom shoal is on the S side of Tenakee Inlet about
this point, with a narrow passage through.                         5.2 miles W  of Tenakee Inlet Entrance Light 1 in about
  (223)  Kanalku Bay is a clear open basin with depths of 6 to 10    57045'41"N., 135005'30"W. A 3-foot shoal is about 0.4 mile SE of
fathoms. In the bay are two islands, and at its head two large    the 21/2-fathom shoal.
streams and a flat, 0.5 mile wide. On the S side are extensive coal  (236) East Point, the N point at the entrance to Tenakee Inlet,
croppings and a deposit of marble.                                 can be identified by a grassy knoll at its outer end. A 13/4-fathom
                                                                    spot extends about 0.4 miles S of East Point.
  (224)  Chart 17300.-The bight on the N side of Point Hepburn       (237) Cannery Point is on the N side of the inlet 4.5 miles W of
(57056.4' N., 134ï¿½45.0'W.), about 26 miles N of Kootznahoo Head    Tenakee Inlet Entrance Light 1.
(chart 17320), affords anchorage for small craft in 5 fathoms with   (238)  Local magnetic disturbance. Differences of as much as
shelter from SE winds. A stream enters the head of the bight. A    3ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed in the vicinity of
logging camp is at the base of the stream. Deadheads and floating    Cannery Point.
                 logs were reported in the area.                    (239) A daybeacon marks a rock awash about 2.2 miles W  of
logs were reported in the area.
  (225) Square Cove, on the E side of Chatham Strait, 2 miles N     Cannery Point. A 3 ï¿½-fathom shoal is about 250 yards S of the
                                                                    rock.
of Point Hepburn and 7 miles SE of Point Augusta, is on the N
side of Cube Point. It affords anchorage for small craft with pro-   (240)  In 1980, a logging camp was operating on the W  side of
     tection from SE winds. Th  cove is about 500 yards long and    Corner Bay, about 6.9 miles W of Tenakee Inlet Entrance Light 1.
about half that wide. It has a depth of about 3  fathoms within 200    A log storage area is on the E side of the bay. The camp has a 60-
yards of its head and deeper water farther out. There are no dan-    foot small-craft and seaplane float, and, also mooring buoys.
gers. A stream enters at each end of the sand beach at its head; the    Radiotelephone communication is available    at th camp.
E one forms a cascade.                                               (241) Tenakee Springs, on the N side of Tenakee Inlet about 9
                                                                    miles inside the entrance, is a community with a general store and
                                                                    warm springs.
 (226)  Charts 17338, 17320.-Point Hayes  (57028.8'N.,              (242) A light marks the small islet close to the N shore about 0.6
134050.6'W.) is the N point of the E entrance to Peril Strait. A   mile ESE of Tenakee Springs.
lighted bell buoy marks the SE extremity of Morris Reef, which is    (243) Tenakee Reef, about 0.7 mile SSW of Tenakee Springs, is
off Point Hayes. Point Craven is about 1.2 miles SW of Point    two separate rocks and marked by a light at the S end. The north-
Hayes.                                                             erly rock is covered at high water. A rock, marked by a daybeacon,
 (227) Peninsular Point, about 1.5 miles N of Point Hayes, is   is 0.4 mile NW of Tenakee Reef.
formed by a wooded hill that is off the general trend of the shore,  (244) The community maintains a pier which accommodates
and to which it is connected by a low, narrow valley.              passenger ferries. A marine fuel facility and an inactive crab can-
 (228) White Rock is a prominent light-colored rock off the edge    nery are at the outer end. The pier has a 64-foot face; 184 feet with
of a flat at the mouth of a stream about 4 miles N of Point Hayes.    dolphins. In 1980, depths of 20 feet were reported alongside. A 3-
A prominent valley extends inshore W of White Rock.                fathom shoal is about 170 yards S of the pier.





                                                     10. CHATHAM STRAIT                                                        205


 (245)  Gasoline, diesel fuel, and water (during the summer) are    Passage Point. A 3-foot shoal is about 0.5 mile NW of the rock.
available at the fuel facility, and limited amounts of provisions and    Redcliff Islands are in the middle of the bay about 5.9 miles
fishing supplies can be obtained from the general store. Meals and    inside North Passage Point. A rock covered 13 feet is about 0.7
lodging are available in the community. A 51-foot grid is on the E    mile NNE of the E end of the easternmost island. A rock awash,
side of the approach pier to the small-craft floats.               marked by a daybeacon, is about 0.5 mile NW of the westernmost
 (246) State-maintained small-craft floats are about 0.5 mile E of    island; two submerged rocks covered 5 feet and 8 feet are close W
the city pier at Tenakee Springs. The floats can accommodate craft    and SW, respectively, of the daybeacon. The main bay has no
on both sides, and are protected by two floating breakwaters. In    anchorages, but small vessels may find temporary anchorage at the
1980, depths of 10 to 25 feet were reported alongside the floats. A  head of the bay or off the flats at mouths of streams, of which there
seaplane float and heliport are about 80 yards E of the city pier.  are several.
 (247)  Tenakee Springs has scheduled seaplane service three        (256)  North Passage Point, the N point at the entrance to Fresh-
times a week to Juneau. Ferry connections with Juneau and Sitka    water Bay, is long, low, level, wooded, and distinctive from other
are available. Telephone and radiotelephone communications are    points in the vicinity. Kelp usually extends for more than 100
available at the general store.                                    yards off the end of the point.
 (24s)  Kadashan Bay, on the S side of Tenakee Inlet opposite       (257) Wachusett Cove is a small bight on the SW side of Fresh-
Tenakee Springs, is filled with a flat that bares.                 water Bay, 2 miles NW of East Point. The cove is almost filled
 (249)  Crab Bay, 4 miles SW of Tenakee Springs, is on the S    with a flat and has a small stream at its head. A fair-weather
side of the inlet. The bay is navigable for vessels up to 100 feet    anchorage may be made between the points at the entrance to the
long. The S side and the head of the bay have streams and mudflat    cove in 4 to 10 fathoms.
areas. The N side of the bay is deep, with steep banks. Anchorage    (258) Pavlof Harbor is 1.5 miles NW of Wachusett Cove. A
is available in the bay in 5 to 25 fathoms. A wooden, stone-filled    large stream enters the SW part of the harbor. A reef, covered at
logging jetty and a private seasonal mooring buoy are at the S side    half tide, extends about 100 yards from the E point at the entrance,
of the entrance to the bay. A  /2-fathom spot is immediately E of    and the entire E side of the bay is bordered by a flat 250 yards
the mooring buoy.                                                  wide. A pinnacle rock, covered at half tide, is 200 yards from the
 (250) Saltery Bay, 3 miles NW of Crab Bay, is navigable for    W side halfway up the bay. Anchorage may be made outside the
vessels up to 80 feet long. The entrance is narrow but deep. Near    rock in about 15 fathoms and in the middle between the rock and
the head, the bay opens into a small basin with depths ranging    the SE shore. The clear anchorage is 350 yards wide in 5 to 12
from 5 to 15 fathoms. A mudflat extends 1.2 miles from the head    fathoms, sand and rock bottom. The shelter is good, and the harbor
of the bay. Anchorage is available in the basin area in a soft mud    is easily entered, though in strong W or N weather the wind draws
and gravel bottom. A 4-fathom shoal is on the N side of the    down the bay with considerable force.
entrance to Saltery Bay in 57ï¿½47.0'N., 135ï¿½22.0'W.                   (259) Cedar Cove, on the S side of Freshwater Bay 1.2 miles
 (251) Two small rocks, covered at half tide and marked by a    NW of Pavlof Harbor, affords good shelter for small craft drawing
daybeacon, are 0.7 mile from the NE shore of Tenakee Inlet and    less than 10 feet, but its entrances are very narrow and foul.
7.5 miles NW of Tenakee Springs. In passing them, favor the S        (260) Iyoukeen Cove is close N of the entrance to Freshwater
shore somewhat. A reef was reported to extend between these    Bay, from which it is separated by a long, narrow, wooded penin-
rocks and the NE shore.                                            sula, terminating in North Passage Point. It does not afford shelter
 (252)  Seal Bay is on the S side of the inlet 10 miles WNW of    except from offshore winds, but can be used temporarily by
Tenakee Springs. A 63/4-fathom shoal and a 1 1/2-fathom shoal are    anchoring about 0.5 mile from the S shore in 23 fathoms.
in the entrance to Seal Bay in about 57ï¿½50'52"N., 135ï¿½28'51"W.,      (261) False Bay, 5 miles N of Iyoukeen Cove, is an open bight
and 57ï¿½50'48"N., 135ï¿½29'44"W., respectively. A 53/4-fathom shoal    with deep water. Fair emergency anchorage for small craft may be
is E of the 63/4-fathom shoal in about 57ï¿½50'57"N., 135028'09"W.    found in its S part in 3 to 5 fathoms, rocky bottom.
A flat extends 0.8 mile from its head, and a rock, covered at high  (262) Point Augusta, on the W  side of Chatham Strait at its
water, is near the middle of the bay 1.5 miles inside the entrance.    junction with Icy Strait, is marked by Point Augusta Light
The depths are 19 to 29 fathoms, soft bottom, between the rock    (58002.4'N., 134ï¿½57.1'W.), 48 feet above the water and shown
and the flat, a distance of about 0.8 mile.                        from a square frame with red and white diamond-shaped daymark
 (253) Long Bay is on the SW side 2.5 miles NW of Seal Bay.    on the point.
From the NW point at the entrance a reef, covered at half tide,      (263) Point Marsden is on the E side of Chatham Strait oppo-
extends E about 0.5 mile. A 3V2-fathom spot is in about the middle    site Point Augusta.
of the entrance to Long Bay in about 57ï¿½52'31"N., 135ï¿½33'59"W.
The bay has depths of 5 to 15 fathoms, mud bottom, affording         (264) Charts 17316, 17300.-Hawk Inlet has its entrance on the
secure anchorage. A mudflat extends 0.6 mile from the head.        E side of Chatham Strait 10 miles SE of Rocky Island Light 13
  (254)  Upper Tenakee Inlet above Long Bay is navigable to    (58ï¿½10.6'N., 135ï¿½03.1'W.). It has a N direction for a distance of 5
within 1 mile of the head. A portage, on the N shore of upper Ten-    miles from its mouth. It then contracts and changes to a NE direc-
akee Inlet, provides a connection to Port Frederick in Icy Straits    tion, terminating in a basin about 1 mile in diameter.
for boats small enough to be carried 300 yards over land.           (265) A foul area, marked by kelp and bare at low water, extends
                                                                    about 0.35 mile S of Hawk Point. The entrance to the inlet is
  (255)  Chart 17300.-Freshwater Bay, about 4 miles N of Tena-    marked by lighted and unlighted buoys.
kee Inlet Entrance Light 1 (57ï¿½46.3'N., 134ï¿½56.1'W.), has its        (266) Piledriver Cove, which dries, is on the S side of the inlet
entrance on the W side of Chatham Strait between East Point and    at the entrance. Two small islets are on the W side of the entrance
North Passage Point. It extends 11 miles NW, terminating in a    to the cove; submerged pilings are in the entrance in about
sand flat with a large stream. Heide Rock, a bare rock about 8 feet    58ï¿½05'11"N., 134046'21"W. Another small cove, about 0.6 mile
high and about 0.5 mile from the N shore, is 3.5 miles inside North    SW of Piledriver Cove, offers good anchorage for small craft in all





206                                                  10. CHATHAM STRAIT


but NW winds in 9 to 13 fathoms. A ledge extends 0.2 mile NW         (269) An abandoned fuel pier (58007'35"N., 134045'15"W.),
from the SW entrance point; another ledge, bare at half tide, is in    with a 45-foot face, has 10 feet alongside. A small-craft and sea-
the middle of the entrance. A deep channel is on each side of the    plane float with 4 feet alongside is about 300 yards S of the pier.
ledge in the middle of the entrance, but the channel on the NE side    During summer, water and the use of a radiotelephone are avail-
is better. The anchorage is in the middle of the cove, about 300    able from a caretaker in an emergency.
yards SE of the ledge.                                               (270) Anchorage for shallow-draft vessels can be had in 4 to 6
 (267) Two streams enter Hawk Inlet on its E side about 0.8 mile    fathoms in the basin at the head of the inlet. Extensive mud flats
above the entrance, and form an extensive flat extending two-    surround the anchorage. The channel leading to the basin has a
thirds of the way across the inlet; the W edge is marked by a light. least depth of 2I/2 fathoms. To make the channel, keep off the E
The channel between the light and the W shore is about 100 yards    shore by about 0.1 mile. The channel is winding with strong cur-
wide with 6 fathoms in the middle. A N-S shoal with a least depth    rents and should not be attempted without local knowledge.
of 2 fathoms extends from about 0.25 to about 0.65 mile NNE of
                                                                      (271) Currents.-Tide rips and currents of considerable velocity
the light. The light should be given a berth of about 125 yards,    are reported in the entrance, E and SE of the entrance buoy. The
then the W shore favored for about 0.7 mile.                       maximum flood and ebb is at the light marking the flat, and is esti-
 (268) Ruins of a cannery are on the E side of Hawk Inlet about    mated to at least 4 knots. Mariners with deep-draft vessels should
1.4 miles N of the light.                                          make transits during slack water. The ebb current at the fuel pier
                                                                    has very little velocity; the flood is reported to set slightly toward
                                                                    the pier.







                                                    11. LYNN CANAL

 (1)   This chapter describes the waters of Lynn Canal, and    apparently tidal. Off Berners Bay, rips and eddies are noted and
Chilkat, Chilkoot, Lutak, and Taiya Inlets. Also discussed are the    sets across the channel occur. From Point Sherman to Chilkoot
port facilities at Port Chilkoot, Haines, Skagway, and in Lutak    Inlet currents are quite regular and of moderate strength. Off the
Inlet.                                                            mouth of the Endicott River, at times, the river water extends a
                                                                   considerable distance offshore, where its limits are often well
 (2)   Chart 17300.-Lynn Canal extends from the junction of    defined. In the vicinity of the Chilkat Islands the currents are mod-
Chatham Strait and Icy Strait, at Hanus Reef, in a NNW direction    erate and no peculiarities were noted. In Chilkoot Inlet, the cur-
for about 58 miles to Seduction Point, where it divides into two    rents are regular and apparently tidal. South of the Katzehin River
arms, called Chilkat Inlet and Chilkoot Inlet; the latter inlet    much freshwater is noticeable. In the constricted channel, between
extends 25 miles farther N from Seduction Point. At Rocky Island,    the bar and the W shore, the currents are strong, but not irregular.
the canal is 5 miles wide; from Point Howard to Ralston Island    In the vicinity of Indian Rock, an E set across the channel has been
about 3 miles wide; thence it averages 6 miles wide to Seduction    noted. The current in Taiya Inlet is moderate and regular. (See the
Point. The canal is nearly free of dangers, and the water is gener-    Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions.)
ally very deep. The shores as a rule are very high and wooded,      (20)  Weather.-The high shores of Lynn Canal tend to guide
with many bare mountain peaks and small glaciers in nearly every    winds along its axis while the narrowing to N intensifies winds
ravine. It is reported that in the winter N winds in the canal often    blowing from S or SE. Southerlies often reach 16 knots or more.
attain a maximum speed of about 70 knots.                         In winter, winds from N have been reported to 70 knots along the
 (3)   Voluntary vessel traffic procedures have been adopted    canal. The sheltering effect of these shores allows a relatively
for gillnet vessels and deep-draft vessels transiting Upper Lynn    wide swing in temperatures. Average maximums range from about
Canal. Traffic lanes, about 0.2 mile wide, have been established    30ï¿½F in January to the low 60's in July with minimums running
for this area as follows:                                         about 8ï¿½ to 120 colder. On average, temperatures drop to freezing
 (4)   3580 from a point 1.25 miles, 270ï¿½ from Point Sherman    or below on 115 days, while about 10 days see readings climb to
Light to a point about 0.6 mile, 090ï¿½ from Eldred Rock Light,    70ï¿½F or more. Extremes range from about -14ï¿½F to 83ï¿½F. Precipi-
thence;                                                           tation is most likely from September through January; an average
 (5)   3460 to a point about 0.7 mile, 090ï¿½ from Talsani Island    of 9 to 19 inches of snow per month falls from December through
Light, thence;                                                    March.
 (6)   3380 to a point about 0.3 mile, 270ï¿½ from Katzehin Flats
Lighted Bell Buoy 4, thence;                                       (21)  Chart 17316.-Hanus Reef is a dangerous reef that is at
 (7)   3440 to a point about 0.4 mile, 090ï¿½ from Indian Rock    the junction of Chatham Strait, Icy Strait, and Lynn Canal. The
Light, thence;                                                    highest part of the reef, awash at half tide, is marked by Hanus
 (8)   0060 into Taiya Inlet.                                     Reef Light (58ï¿½07.8'N., 135ï¿½00.0'W.), 25 feet above the water
 (9)   Cruise ships, ferry vessels, and other deep-draft vessels    and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-
are requested to observe the following practices:                 shaped daymark on a concrete pier. The light marks the entrance
 (10)  1. Announce your presence 30-45 minutes prior to enter-    to Lynn Canal. At times the tidal current attains a velocity of 2 to 3
ing the area and at regular intervals while transiting through the    knots over the reef.
area.                                                               (22)  Rocky Island, grass covered and marked by a light, is 3.2
 ( l)  2. Travel along indicated tracklines as much as possible    miles NW of Hanus Reef. The water is deep to within 250 yards of
and maintain a safe speed.                                        the island. As the currents are erratic in the channel between
 (12)  Gillnet vessels should:                                    Rocky Island and Point Couverden, the slight saving in distance
 (13)  1. Adequately mark the net end with lights and radar    this channel offers does not warrant its use; however, if used, ves-
reflectors.                                                       sels should favor Rocky Island, as shoal water extends from Point
 (14)  2. Monitor VHF-FM channels 13 and 16 and listen for    Couverden.
broadcasts by deep-draft vessels in the area.                       (23)  Swanson Harbor is formed by a group of islands and
 (15)  3. Provide for two-way traffic of large vessels along the    reefs off the extreme SE point of the mainland at the junction of
designated tracklines.                                            Icy Strait with Chatham Strait and Lynn Canal. It affords good
  (16)  4. Warn other gillnetters if they appear to be in the lane    anchorage and shelter. The NE side of the harbor is formed by
when there is commercial vessel traffic approaching.              Couverden Island and a small island between its NW end and the
  (17)  5. Do not place sleep sets within or adjacent to the ship-    mainland, all connected at low water. The SW side is formed by
ping lane.                                                        Ansley Island and Entrance Island.
  (18)  Anchorage can be had in Funter Bay, William Henry Bay,      (24)  Swanson Harbor Entrance Light 2 (58ï¿½11.6'N.,
W of Sullivan Island, Portage Cove (Chilkoot Inlet), and Lutak    135004.7'W.), 21 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
Inlet. Temporary anchorage can also be had in St. James Bay,    tower with a red triangular daymark on the SW side of Couverden
Berners Bay, and at Skagway. Small craft can find anchorage in    Island.
several coves.                                                     (25)  Sharp Ledge extends SE from the SE end of Entrance
  (19)  Currents in Lynn Canal have a velocity of 0.3 to 1 knot in    Island. This ledge is covered at half tide and marked by kelp. In
the S part, diminishing in velocity toward the head. From Point    May 1983, it was reported that Sharp Ledge extends farther S and
Whidbey to Point Sherman the currents are quite regular and    E than shown on the chart. Extreme caution is advised.


                                                                                                                               207






208                                                    11. LYNNCANAL


 (26)  No Use Ledge, which uncovers 12 feet, is about 0.4 mile    10 to 20 feet was reported along the outside and 5 feet was
NW of the NW end of Couverden Island. A small narrow channel,    reported along the inside of the float. Water is available in the
marked by piles between the small island N of Couverden Island    summer. Only a few buildings mark the sites of the stamp mill and
and No Use Ledge, leads E from Swanson Harbor to a cove on the    smelter that once stood in this area.
N side of Couverden Island; this channel should only be used by      (37)  Anchorage in Funter Bay can be made about 0.2 mile SW
small craft at high water.                                         of the cannery ruins. Small craft can find protected anchorage in
 (27)  To enter Swanson Harbor, bring Rocky Island astern on a    Coot Cove or Crab Cove. The channel to the W of Bare Island is
NW course and follow the SW shore of Couverden Island at a dis-    frequently used by boats proceeding to the inner harbor float.
tance of about 250 yards until Entrance Island is passed. Then       (38)  The Kittens, two small wooded islands 0.2 mile offshore,
steer a midchannel course until up with the NW end of Couverden    are 0.6 mile NW of Clear Point.
Island. Then follow the shore of Ansley Island at a distance of      (39)  Naked Island is 1.1 miles NW of Clear Point and 0.5 mile
about 250 yards to the anchorage. Anchor with the NE side of    offshore, with deep water between. Naked Island Light
Entrance Island just open from the E side of Ansley Island, and    (58ï¿½15.3'N., 134056.7'W.), 44 feet above the water, is shown from
with the NW end of Ansley Island bearing S, distant 0.3 mile, in    a square frame with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on
14 to 16 fathoms, soft bottom. Small vessels anchor close in the    the highest part of the island. A rock awash is 160 yards from the
head of the bay or to the E side of the head behind No Use Ledge.  Mansfield Peninsula shore and about 900 yards NE of the light.
 (28)  Couverden Island and the islands close by appear from    North Ledge, awash at high water, is 0.1 mile NW of Naked
most points of view as a long, low, wooded point, the SE extrem-    Island. A rock awash at high water, is 0.1 mile E of the SE tip of
ity being Point Couverden. The State of Alaska has a floating    the ledge.
pier at the NW end of Couverden Island.                              (40)  Point Howard, on the W  side of Lynn Canal, is about 6.8
 (29)  Couverden Rock is 2.4 miles NNE of Rocky Island and    miles N of Rocky Island. A ledge that bares is about 0.2 mile S of
should not be approached closer than 200 yards. It is the outer one    the point. Good anchorage in 15 to 25 fathoms, soft bottom, may
of the group of islands and rocks that extends 4 miles SE from the    be found in Howard Bay NW of Point Howard. Anchor with the
W shore of Lynn Canal.                                             tip of Point Howard ESE at a distance of about 0.7 mile.
 (30)  Funter Bay, the best and most convenient anchorage in        (41)  False Point Retreat, on the E side of the canal 7 miles N
the vicinity, is on the E side of Chatham Strait at its junction with    of Naked Island, is marked by a light.
Lynn Canal, about 10.5 miles S of Point Retreat and 5.5 miles NE     (42)  Point Retreat, the N extremity of Admiralty Island, is at
of Rocky Island.                                                   the turning point from Lynn Canal to Saginaw Channel. Ledges,
 (31)  Near the S point at the entrance are several small islands    awash at half tide, extend about 300 yards N from Point Retreat,
with a clear channel between. Station Island, the largest and    and about the same distance off its W  side for 0.5 mile S. Point
wooded, is joined to two small islets S at low water. Rat Island,    Retreat Light (58024.7'N., 134057.3'W.), 63 feet above the water,
bare, is 0.2 mile NE of Station Island; a ledge that bares extends    is shown from a white square concrete tower on a building. Sev-
0.1 mile NW from it.                                               eral white buildings and a radio tower are prominent.
 (32)  Funter Bay Entrance Light 1 (58014.5'N., 134ï¿½55.0'W.),       (43)  Hump Island, at the junction of Saginaw Channel with
shown 16 feet above the water from a pedestal on a house with a    Lynn Canal, is wooded. A reef extends 300 to 400 yards offshore.
green square daymark on Clear Point, marks the N side of the         (44)  Lincoln Island is separated from the NW end of Shelter
entrance to Funter Bay.                                            Island by a narrow navigable channel about 0.2 mile wide. The
 (33)  Four islets are in Funter Bay between Clear Point and the    island is wooded and has three summits, one at each end and one
head. Bare Island is the first from Clear Point. A 1-fathom shoal    in the middle separated by low divides. On the S shore at the base
is about 100 yards SE of Bare Island. Curlew Ledge, bare at low    of the middle knob are some prominent boulders.
water, is 200 yards S of Bare Island. A shoal, with 13/4 fathoms     (45)  Ralston Island, close to the NW end of Lincoln Island, is
over it, extends 100 yards S from the ledge and is marked at its SE    wooded. Little Island, grass covered and marked by a light, is
end by a buoy. Gauge Island, the second islet, is wooded and sur-    about 0.3 mile N of Ralston Island. A rocky ledge extends about
rounded by ledges. Star Rock, a small pinnacle, bare at lowest    0.3 mile N. A detached 23/4-fathom shoal is about 700 yards NW
tides, is 120 yards N of Gauge Island. Ledge Island, the third    of the island.
islet, is surrounded by bare ledges. The fourth islet, and the larg-  (46)  Lynn Sisters are two wooded islands, close to the W
est, is at the head of the bay and is connected with the main shore    shore of Lynn Canal, about 3.5 miles SW of Little Island. They are
at low water.                                                      connected with each other and with the shore at low water.
 (34)  Coot Cove, at the NW end of the bay, has extensive            (47)  Poundstone Rock, about 3.8 miles ESE of Little Island
beaches at its head. Crab Cove, with depths of 33/4 fathoms to 12    and 1.1 miles S of Sentinel Island, has 23/4 fathoms over it and is
fathoms, is at the NE end of the bay.                              marked on its NW side by a lighted bell buoy. From Poundstope
 (35)  The ruins of a cannery wharf are on the N side of the bay,    Rock, a ridge extends 3 miles toward Vanderbilt Reef with depths
between Coot Cove and Crab Cove. In 1976, the SE face of the    of 51/4 and 7 fathoms at about 1.4 miles NW of the rock.
wharf had fallen in and dangerous stubs protruded. A State-main-     (48)  Sentinel Island, about 3.5 miles N from the N extremity
tained 100-foot small-craft float with a seaplane float at the SE end    of Shelter Island, is marked by Sentinel Island Light (58032.8'N.,
extends E from the head of the wharf in ruins. In 1976, 15 to 20    134055.4'W.), 86 feet above the water and shown from a white
feet was reported alongside the float. Water is available in the    square tower on a building. A fog signal is at the light. A white
summer. Radiotelephone communications are available at a pri-    building on a dock at the SE end of the island is prominent. A
vate residence. A rock ledge is off the SE side of the wharf. Cau-    shelving ledge extends about 0.2 mile in a NW direction from the
tion is advised.                                                   N end of the island.
 (36)  A State-maintained 150-foot-long small-craft float is on     (49)  Benjamin Island, about 0.8 mile NE of Sentinel Island, is
the SE side of the bay E of Funter Bay Entrance Light 1. In 1976,    timbered and has a white shore in the middle section below the
















B t   __l                                                                --


*:_::  -


                       ~~rrr~~~rr~~l~~B~~pesrllppm~~~~~~







                                                                                           z




                                                           I II

                                                            III








210                                                     11. LYNN CANAL


tree line. A small wooded islet is close to the S point of the island,    side. Small craft may enter the lagoon at half tide in the flats just
and a small grassy islet is 0.2 mile NE of the N point of Benjamin    NE of the river's mouth.
Island; rocks that bare extend 0.3 mile N.                           (60)  Berners Bay is a large indentation on the E side of Lynn
  (5o)  Temporary anchorage, with protection against severe    Canal between Point Bridget and Point St. Mary. From Point
winds, may be had in the bight in the S side of Benjamin Island.   Bridget it has a N direction for 6 miles to the extensive flats at the
 (51)  North Island is wooded, and is separated from the end of    head where several large streams make in. The bay is open to S
Benjamin Island by a narrow shallow channel with strong cur-    winds, but in fine weather temporary anchorage in 16 to 25 fath-
rents. A shoal with 31/4 fathoms over it is 0.1 mile SW of North    oms may be selected near the head; the chart should be the guide.
Island.                                                              (61)  E of Point Bridget are two bights. The westernmost is
 (52)  Vanderbilt Reef, about 4 miles NW of Sentinel Island    filled by flats, and the water is shoal for over 0.3 mile offshore.
Light, is a rock that uncovers 12 feet. It is marked by Vanderbilt    Echo Cove, the E bight, has its entrance 2 miles E of Point
Reef Light (58ï¿½35.5'N., 135ï¿½01.0'W.), 36 feet above the water    Bridget. A highway connects Echo Cove to Juneau about 39 miles
and shown from a skeleton structure on a concrete pier with a red    SSE. The entrance is nearly blocked by a flat making out from the
and white diamond-shaped daymark.                                  W point, leaving a very narrow channel that follows the E shore at
 (53)  Yankee Cove, a small bight on the E shore of Lynn Canal,    a distance of 150 yards and has a controlling depth of 23/4 fathoms.
is 1.2 miles NE of North Island. Bessie Creek empties into the    Inside, the depths are 41/2 to 10 fathoms, and small vessels using
head of the cove.                                                  caution can enter and find secure anchorage.
 (54)  Bridget Cove, about 3.2 miles NE of Vanderbilt Reef, is      (62)  Point Sherman, on the E side of Lynn Canal, about 9
behind Mab Island, affording anchorage for small craft in 4 to 7    miles NNW of Berners Bay, is prominent. Point Sherman Light
fathoms, with scant swinging room. Small boats may secure better    (58ï¿½51:3'N., 135009.1'W.), 47 feet above the water, is shown from
protection by anchoring inside the cove opposite the N end of Mab   a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark.
Island; the beach makes out about 100 yards at low water. A well-    Temporary fair-weather anchorage may be had in 14 fathoms, mud
defined trail crosses to the river mouth on the S side of Berners    bottom, in the bight N of Point Sherman. In approaching from S
Bay.                                                               give the point a wide berth. A ledge, with 2 fathoms at its end,
 (55)  St. James Bay is on the W  side of Lynn Canal, inside of    extends 0.3 mile NW from Point Sherman; it bares a considerable
Point Whidbey, the E point of the entrance, about 11.5 miles    distance from the point.
NNW of Point Retreat. This bay extends about 4.5 miles in a N        (63)  Sherman Rock, 0.5 mile SW of Point Sherman, has about
direction to its head, where a large stream enters, forming exten-    1 fathom over it.
sive mud flats. A temporary anchorage, in 20 fathoms, soft bot-
tom, may be selected on the E side of the bay, 2 miles N of Point    (64)  Chart 17317.-Sullivan Island, on the W  side of Lynn
Whidbey. The anchorage is open to SE winds.                        Canal about 6 miles NW of Point Sherman, is timbered. It has sev-
 (56)  The Lynn Brothers are a chain of islands parallel to the    eral knobs on the S end; the highest is separated by a saddle from
W  shore of St. James Bay. Small boats can enter the basin W  of    the ridge at the N end of the island. Sullivan Rock, wooded and
the islands by a 5-fathom channel through the reefs at the S end of    marked by a light, is off the S end of the narrow wooded island S
the islands.                                                       of Sullivan Island.
 (57)  From Point Whidbey the W  shore of Lynn Canal extends        (65)  Anchorage may be had in 18 fathoms, sticky bottom, in
in a NNW direction, with some indentations and rocky shoreline,    the bight in the W  shore, W  of the S end of Sullivan Island. Ves-
about 3.6 miles to a narrow inlet leading into Boat Harbor, a    sels entering from the S should favor the islands. Entering from
basin with depths up to 14 fathoms. It can be entered by small    the N the only dangers to be avoided are the rocks awash, and the
craft only because of its contracted entrance; which is reported to    rock with 3/4 fathom over it, 0.4 mile off the W shore in about the
be about 60 feet wide at its narrowest part. In 1993, the channel    middle of the island. This rocky area is marked at its N end by a
was reportedly well-defined at low water, but boulders along the    daybeacon.
bottom of the entrance reduce the controlling depth to about 11/2    (66)  Anchorage for small boats, with protection against N
fathoms. The currents have considerable velocity through the    winds, may be had in the small bight on the E shore of Sullivan
entrance and the period of slack water on low tide reportedly lasts    Island near the SE end. In entering avoid the reef that extends
less than normal. From just N of Boat Harbor to Danger Point, for    about 0.2 mile off the NE entrance point.
about 3.2 miles, brown rocky bluffs are visible along the W shore    (67)  Eldred Rock, about 7.3 miles NNW from Point Sherman
of Lynn Canal.                                                     and 1.4 miles from the E shore of Lynn Canal, is marked by
 (58)  William Henry Bay is on the W  side of Lynn Canal, 9    Eldred Rock Light (58058.3'N., 135013.2'W.), 91 feet above the
miles N of Point Whidbey. It is easy of access and is the best    water, shown from a white octagonal tower on a building. The
anchorage from S weather in this vicinity. According to local    white buildings on the rock are also prominent. A ledge extends
reports, N winds are felt with considerable force. Enter in mid-    about 300 yards NW from Eldred Rock, and a rock with 3/4 fathom
channel, and when the second waterfall on the W shore of the bay    over it is 0.3 mile 325ï¿½ from Eldred Rock Light. A submerged
is abeam, anchor in 14 fathoms, soft bottom, about 0.4 mile from    wreck is about 150 yards SE of the 3/4-fathom sounding.
the head. The shores are high and bold. Beardslee River enters at    (68)  Chilkat Islands, a chain of four wooded islands, extend 5
the head, where there is a flat 350 yards wide. Pile ruins of an 80-    miles in a SSE direction from Seduction Point. Kataguni Island,
foot wharf on the E side of the bay are no longer visible. The face    the southernmost, is about 2.5 miles NNW of Eldred Rock. Shi-
of the wharf extended into 20 feet of water.                       kosi Island, N of Kataguni Island, has a bight in its N side that
 (59)  Endicott River, about 4 miles N of William Henry Bay,    affords anchorage for small craft with shelter from moderate S
flows from the W through a narrow, deep gorge in the mountains.    winds. A shoal with depths of as little as 1 fathom, and terminat-
A broad shoal makes out from the mouth of the river nearly 0.7    ing with a rock that bares, extends over 0.2 mile N from the E
mile. A narrow channel follows close around the cliff on the S    point of the bight. Favor the W point of the bight in entering. Tal-







                                                       11. LYNN CANAL                                                       211


sani Island Light (59004.7'N., 135ï¿½16.4'W.), 16 feet above the     (so)  Jenkins Rock, with 13/4 fathoms over it, is 0.2 mile from
water and shown from a square frame with a red and white dia-    the NE shore, 1 mile NW from the entrance to Letnikof Cove.
mond-shaped daymark, marks the NE point of Talsani Island, the    Less water than is charted has been reported on this rock.
northernmost of the Chilkat Islands.                               (81s)  Pyramid Harbor is the bight in the W shore of Chilkat
 (69)  Chilkat Inlet, the W arm at the head of Lynn Canal, is 9    Inlet, about 5.5 miles NW from Glacier Point and opposite Letni-
miles long in a NW direction, from Seduction Point to McClellan    kof Cove. The bight appears to have shoaled considerably, and
Flats at the mouth of Chilkat River. The arm is narrowed to 0.8    anchorage is not recommended. Pyramid Island, midway across
mile by Glacier Point, 2.5 miles from Seduction Point; it then    Chilkat Inlet from Pyramid Harbor, is grass covered, and has
expands to 2.5 miles and maintains this width for some distance,    rocky shelving beaches; a spit, bare at lowest tides, connects the
narrowing to 2 miles at its head.                                island with the shore about 0.7 mile to the NE. The edge of
 (70)  Local magnetic disturbances.-Differences of as much as    McClellan Flats, in the mouth of Chilkat River, appears to have
20ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed in Chilkat Inlet and    moved out to enclose both the harbor and the island.
Chilkoot Inlet.                                                    (82)  Chilkat River is a shallow stream about 50 miles long,
  (71)  Seduction Point is the SE extremity of Chilkat Penin-    flowing in a general SE direction, and is about 2 miles wide at its
sula, which separates Chilkoot Inlet and Chilkat Inlet. Near the    mouth. The mouth is so choked with sandbars as to be practically
end is a knob, then a depression and a gradual rise to another    closed for anything except canoes, and the bar at low water
knob, 2.5 miles from the point. Dalasuga Island, small and    appears as if dry clear across. The village of Klukwan is 26 miles
wooded, is about 0.4 mile to the NW of the point. A rock that    above Seduction Point. A highway follows the river from Haines.
bares 3 feet is 1 mile NW of Seduction Point.                     (83)  Chilkoot Inlet, the E arm at the head of Lynn Canal,
  (72)  The E shore of Chilkat Inlet is very irregular. The shore-    extends 12.6 miles in a N direction from Seduction Point, and then
line consists of gravel and boulder beaches with short, rocky sec-    divides; the E and principal arm, called Taiya Inlet, trends N for
tions. There are several bights that furnish fair weather anchorage    about 13 miles. Chilkoot Inlet has on its E side, and Taiya Inlet on
for small boats.                                                 both sides, lofty mountain glaciers in their gorges. The midchan-
  (73)  Glacier Point, on the W side of the entrance to Chilkat    nel depths are great throughout. Katzehin River Flat and Indian
Inlet, is the wooded and grassy moraine of Davidson Glacier,    Rock are the only dangers in Chilkoot Inlet. It is reported that in
which slopes uniformly back from the moraine. A flat that bares    the winter N winds often attain a maximum speed of about 70
and is about 0.2 mile wide borders the W shore for 2 miles S and    knots in Chilkoot Inlet and Taiya Inlet.
the same distance W of Glacier Point, but at the point it is only  (84)  Local magnetic disturbances.-Differences of as much as
200 yards wide. From the point to McClellan Flats the W shore is    200 from normal variation have been observed in Chilkat Inlet and
rocky, and partly a boulder beach.                               Chilkoot Inlet.
  (74)  A ledge that bares extends 0.2 mile S from the point on the  (85)  Mud Bay is a small cove, on the W shore about 4 miles
 E shore of Kalhagu Cove.                                         NNW of Seduction Point, from which low land extends across the
  (75)  Kochu Island, about 2.3 miles N of Glacier Point, is low,    peninsula to Letnikof Cove, and is connected with Haines by a
 small, and thickly wooded. The passage between the island and    gravel road.
 the E shore is obstructed by a /2-fathom spot in midchannel and by  (86)  Katzehin River enters Chilkoot Inlet through a deep val-
 a reef that extends about 0.3 mile from the E shore in the direction    ley on the E side of Chilkoot Inlet, 14 miles above Eldred Rock
 of the ledge that extends 0.4 mile off the SE end of Kochu Island.    Light. From the mouth of the river a flat, which bares to its outer
 Lehunua Island, small and wooded, is E of the center of Kochu    edge, extends. two-thirds of the distance across the inlet, and
 Island, close to the E shore of the passage. A rock, awash at half    alongshore for 1.5 miles on either side of the mouth. The W edge
 tide, is close to the NW end of Lehunua Island.                  of the flat is marked by a lighted bell buoy moored in 13 fathoms.
   (76)  Letnikof Cove, on the E shore of Chilkat Inlet, about 1.6    The buoy is reported to heel over because of ice during the winter.
 miles N of Kochu Island, affords anchorage for small craft,    Caution is advised in transitting the area W of the flat during the
 exposed to NW winds near the head of the cove, in 6 to 10 fath-    fishing season, because of the heavy fishing boat traffic.
 oms.                                                              (87)  Battery Point, marked by a light, is on the W  side of
   (77)  The W entrance point to the cove is marked by Letnikof    Chilkoot Inlet, 7.8 miles N of Seduction Point. Johnson Rock,
 Cove Light 2 (59ï¿½10.4'N., 135ï¿½24.0'W.), 25 feet above the water,    awash and unmarked, is about 0.1 mile S of the S extremity of the
 shown from a small house with a red triangular daymark.          point. Kelgaya Bay is a small cove on the N side of Battery Point.
   (78)  The wharf of a storage and fish buying facility is on the S  (88)  Portage Cove, on the W  shore about 2.5 miles NW of
 side of the cove near the head. In 1976, 25 to 28 feet was reported    Battery Point, affords the best anchorage and shelter in Chilkoot
 alongside the 98-foot wharf face. Gasoline, diesel fuel, fishing    Inlet. The anchorage is about 0.2 mile off the wharf in 12 to 15
 supplies, provisions, and a small machine shop are available to    fathoms, soft bottom. N winds blow home and bring in some sea.
 fishing boats during the fishing season. The facility operates a    From the anchorage the water shoals gradually to a gravel and
 marine railway that can handle fishing vessels up to 40 feet for    boulder beach, which bares some distance out, and the water is
 repairs. It has a 2-ton hand-powered hoist and two 1-ton forklifts    shoal 200 yards offshore. An unlighted buoy marks a 3-foot spot
  for handling supplies. Radiotelephone communications are main-    about 325 yards NE of Nukdik Point, the N entrance point.
  tained. A highway connects the facility to Haines, 5 miles NW,     (89)  Haines is a city with several hotels, motels, machine
  and Flat Bay, 2 miles SE.                                        shops, and general stores on the W side of Portage Cove. It is 950
   (79)  The State-maintained seasonal small-craft floats are across    miles from Seattle and 88 miles from Juneau, and is at the S end of
  the cove from the support facility. The 500 feet of floats have a 4-    a highway running along the Chilkat River and Klehini River
  day limit, and a surfaced boat-launching ramp is 55 yards NW of    through the Porcupine Mining District and connecting with the
  the floats.                                                      Alaska Highway.






212                                                    11. LYNN CANAL


 (90)  Prominent features.-The two tank farms in Haines and a       (105) Alaska Marine Highway System, Haines Ferry Terminal:
tank farm at Tanani Point, about 2.4 miles N of Haines, are con-    E 250 feet of the Lutak Dock and Transfer Bridge; 23 to 25 feet
spicuous.                                                          alongside; 35-ton adjustable transfer bridge; passengers and vehi-
 (91)  Weather.-Haines has a predominantly maritime climate.    cles; operated by the State of Alaska. In June 1979, a shoal with a
This area receives abundant precipitation year round with very    least depth of 71/2 feet was just off the W side of the terminal ramp.
heavy accumulation of snowfall during the winter. Measurable         (106) Chilkoot Lumber Co. Wharf (59ï¿½17'10"., 135ï¿½28'31"W.):
precipitation falls on just slightly less than half of the days of the    NW of Lutak Dock and Transfer Bridge; 640 feet berthing space;
year. The area experiences considerable cloudiness, and only    28 feet alongside; two 10-ton front-end loaders; one pneumatic
about 1 day in 5 can be classified as clear. Differences between    chip loader, capacity 350 tons per hour; 40 acres open storage with
daily maximum and minimum temperature readings average about    4 acres staging area; shipment of wood chips and logs; owned and
150 during all months of the year.                                 operated by Chilkoot Lumber Company.
 (92)  The prevailing winds at Haines are from the W  and SE.       (107) Supplies.-Provisions, fishing supplies, and limited marine
Lynn Canal provides a funneling effect to produce the SE winds;    supplies can be had at Haines. Gasoline and diesel fuel may be had
the narrowing canal often tends to intensify winds moving from    by tank truck at the approach pier in the small-craft basin. There is
the S or SE direction. The relatively low passageway from the W    no provision for bunkering large vessels.
provides a channel through which winds reach Haines from that        (108) Repairs.-There are no drydocking or major facilities for
direction. (See page T-3 for Haines climatological table.)          larger vessels in Haines or Southeast Alaska. The nearest facilities
 (93)  Pilotage, Haines.-Pilotage, except for certain exempted    are in British Columbia and the State of Washington. A 65-foot
vessels, is compulsory for all vessels navigating the inside waters    grid is in the NW part of the small-craft basin. A marine railway,
of the State of Alaska. (See Pilotage, Alaska, indexed as such,    which can handle vessels up to 40 feet, is at Letnikof Cove.
chapter 3 for details.)                                            Machine shops in Haines are available to small craft for minor hull
 (94)  Vessels en route Haines meet the pilot boat about 1 mile    and engine repairs.
NW of Point Retreat Light (58ï¿½24.7'N., 134057.3'W.).                 (109)  Communications.-The Alaska Marine Highway System
 (95)  The pilot boat, a crewboat, can be contacted by calling    has daily scheduled ferry service to Skagway, Juneau, Petersburg,
"HAINES PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channels 16, 13, or 12.              Wrangell, Ketchikan, Sitka, and Prince Rupert, B.C., and weekly
 (96)  Towage.-Tugs up to 600 hp operating out of Haines and    service to Hoonah, Kake, and Seattle. This service is less frequent
800 hp operating out of Skagway are available for docking and    during winter. The ferry terminal is on the SE side of Lutak Inlet,
undocking. The tugs are equipped with VHF-FM channels 12, 13,    about 3.5 miles N of Haines. Scheduled and chartered airlines
and 16. Arrangements must be made well in advance.                 serve the city. The airport is about 2.6 miles W  of Haines. Tele-
 (97)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural    phone and radiotelephone communications are maintained.
quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and          (10o)  Small-craft facilities.-The city of Haines operates a
appendix for addresses.)                                           small-craft basin that is protected on its N side by a breakwater
 (98)  Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of    and on its E side by a detached breakwater. The S end of the
the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-    detached breakwater is marked by a light. The basin is entered
ter 1.)                                                            through a dredged channel SW of the detached breakwater. In
 (99)  Customs,-Haines is a customs station.                       April 1993, the controlling depth was 15 feet in the entrance chan-
 (l00) Wharves.-The piers and wharves at Haines are on the W       nel with 8 to 14 feet available in the basin. In April 1994, danger-
and SW shores of Portage Cove and on the S shore of Lutak Inlet.    ous rocks were reported on the N channel edge just S of the end of
 (l01) Northwest Terminals Ltd. Dock (59ï¿½13'42"N.,    the pier that extends from the W  shore at the entrance in about
135ï¿½25'53"W.): SW shore of Portage Cove; offshore mooring    59013'58"N., 135026'21"W. The harbormaster controls the use
platform with 220 feet of berthing space; 33 feet reported along-    of the grid and makes berthing assignments. The harbormaster's
side; pipelines extend to storage tanks on shore; receipt of petro-    office, at the small-craft basin, monitors VHF-FM channel 16. The
leum products; owned and operated by Northwest Terminals Ltd.      harbormaster can be contacted by telephone (907-776-2448 or
 (102) Chevron U.S.A., Haines Terminal Wharf (59ï¿½13'47"N.,    907-766-2760). A surfaced ramp is immediately E of the grid in
135ï¿½26'04"W.): NW of Northwest Terminals Ltd. Dock; 252-foot    the NW part of the basin. Water in the summer and electricity are
NE face; 25 feet reported alongside; pipelines extend to storage    available at the floats.
tanks on shore; receipt of petroleum products; owned by The          (111)  Low Point, on the E side of Chilkoot Inlet, is 2.8 miles
White Pass and Yukon Corp., Ltd. and operated by Chevron    NE of Haines and about 1 mile SE of Indian Rock Light.
U.S.A., Inc.                                                         (112) Indian Rock, about 1 mile NW of Low Point, is a danger-
 (103) Haines  Terminal P.O.L. Dock  (59ï¿½16'48"N.,    ous reef about 0.2 mile long E and W; atthe eastern end is a pinna-
135ï¿½27'01"W.): on S shore of Lutak Inlet about 1.7 miles WNW       cle rock, awash at lowest tides. Indian Rock Light (59ï¿½16.4'N.,
of Indian Rock Light; 200-foot face with 1,200 feet of berthing    135ï¿½24.0'W.), 15 feet above the water, is shown from a pile struc-
space with dolphins; 38 feet alongside; water and electricity; pipe-    ture with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the rock.
lines extend to tank farm in rear; receipt and shipment of petro-    (113) Lutak Inlet, the W arm of Chilkoot Inlet, is 5 miles long.
leum products; owned by the U.S. Government and operated by    Taiya Point is the NE entrance point, and Tanani Point, the SW.
the U.S. Army.                                                     At its head it receives Chilkoot River, a short stream that drains
 (104) Lutak Dock and Transfer Bridge (59'17'01"N.,                Chilkoot Lake; at the mouth of the river is a flat nearly 0.5 mile
135ï¿½27'55"W.): NW of P.O.L. Dock; 750-foot face; 23 feet along-    wide. A fixed highway bridge with a 40-foot span and a clearance
side; water and electricity; 7 acres open storage; receipt and ship-    of 8 feet crosses the mouth of the river. Anchorage with good
ment of general cargo, logs, and lumber; owned by the city of    holding ground for large vessels can be had in a depth of 40 fath-
Haines and operated by Southeast Stevedoring Corp. and the city    oms about 2.5 miles from the head of the inlet, to 20 fathoms
of Haines.                                                         about 0.8 mile from the head. In winter, Lutak Inlet offers the only




































z






214                                                    11. LYNN CANAL


good protection on Lynn Canal from N winds, although small           (124) Tides.-The mean range of tide at Skagway is 14.1 feet,
boats will experience icing.                                       and the diurnal range is 16.7 feet.
 (114) The waters of Lutak Inlet in the vicinity of the U.S. Army   (125)  Currents.-The velocity of the tidal current ranges from
POL Dock and the Army Dry Cargo Wharf have been prescribed    0.3 knot on the flood to 0.7 knot on the ebb. During the ebb, the
as a restricted area. (See 334.1310, chapter 2, for limits and regu-    current sets toward the railway wharf, so that vessels departing
lations.)                                                          from the N half of the wharf have difficulty clearing another vessel
 (115) Taiyasanka Harbor, about 5.8 miles N of Battery Point,    moored at the S end. (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily pre-
is a small harbor at the foot of the Ferebee River valley. The har-    dictions.)
bor has a narrow entrance that is protected from S, but exposed to   (126) Weather.-The prevailing wind direction is S from March
winter winds drawing down the Ferebee Glacier. There is 12 fath-    through November and reverses to N during December, January,
oms in the narrow entrance, which is 100 yards wide and close to    and February. Fog occurs only about 2 percent of the time and is
the W  side. A rock spit extends over halfway across the entrance    most frequent during August, September, and October. Snow
from the W  end of the narrow neck of land, which is the bare part    totals 35 inches on about 19 days a year, but there is precipitation
of the moraine that almost closes the entrance. The tidal currents    on about 115 days a year.
have an estimated velocity of 3 knots in the entrance. Log storage   (127)  Pilotage, Skagway.-Pilotage, except for certain exempted
takes up the SE end of the basin. Small craft tie up to the booms    vessels, is compulsory for all vessels navigating the inside waters
for moorage. Icing is experienced in the harbor in winter.         of the State of Alaska. (See Pilotage; Alaska, indexed as such,
 (116)  A prominent waterfall, locally called Cavanaugh Falls, is    chapter 3 for details.)
on the E side of Taiya Inlet, about 1.5 miles N of Low Point.        (128) Vessels en route Skagway meet the pilot boat about 1 mile
Nahku Bay is the narrow bay between Skagway and the head of    NW of Point Retreat Light (58ï¿½24.7'N;, 134ï¿½57.3'W.)
Taiya Inlet. Good anchorage is available in midchannel in 30         (129) The pilot boat, a crewboat, can be contacted by calling
fathoms about 0.5 mile from the head. The bottom is sticky mud;    "SKAGWAY PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channels 16, 13, or 12.
it shoals gradually. During the summer with prevailing S winds,      (130) Towage.-An 800-hp tug is available at Skagway for
there is little protection from the short choppy seas coming in    assisting in docking and undocking from May to October. Other
from Taiya Inlet.                                                  commercial towboats are available from Haines or Juneau year
 (117)  Taiya River,at the head of Taiya Inlet, is navigable for    round. The tug and towboats are equipped with VHF-FM chan-
small boats and canoes as far as high water can be carried, a short    nels 16, 13, and 12. Arrangements for towboats and tug should be
distance above the mud flats. Canoes can be poled or towed by    made well in advance through ship's agents.
line for a greater distance.                                         (131) Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural
 (118)  Skagway, a city on the delta formed by the Skagway         quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and
River at the N terminus of the Inside Passage to Alaska, is essen-    appendix for addresses.)
tially a transfer point between water and rail shipping routes. It is  (132) Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of
the ocean terminus of the White Pass and Yukon Route Railway,    the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-
the Alaska Marine Highway System from Seattle to Skagway, and    ter 1.)
a branch of the Canol pipeline. Skagway is also a popular port of    (133) Skagway is a customs port of entry.
call for the numerous cruise ships that sail the Inside Passage. The  (134)  Wharves.-The wharves at Skagway are on the E side of
principal commodities handled at the port include petroleum prod-    Taiya Inlet at the S end of the city.
ucts, zinc and lead ore concentrates, building and construction      (135) White Pass and Yukon Corp. Wharf (59026'47"N.,
materials, asbestos, and general cargo. The deepest draft of any    135ï¿½19'26"W.): 1,200 feet usable berthing space; 21 to 33 feet
commercial vessel calling at the port in 1976 was 39 feet.         alongside in May 1994; two 30-ton straddle carriers, two 10-ton
 (119)  The Skagway River originates in White Pass at the    forklifts; 2 acres open storage; pipelines extend to tank farm in
boundary between British Columbia and Alaska, and flows SW         rear; storage capacity for 213,000 barrels; containerized and gen-
for 14 miles. Because of its shallow depths and swift currents, the    eral cargo, cruise ship traffic, and receipt of petroleum products;
river is not navigable.                                            owned and operated by White Pass and Yukon Corp., Ltd.
 (120) Skagway Breakwater Light 2 (59ï¿½26.9'N., 135ï¿½19.4'W.),        (136) Alaska Marine Highway System, Skagway Ferry Terminal
19 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red    (59ï¿½26'57"N., 135ï¿½19'25"W.): 250 yards NW of Railway Wharf;
triangular daymark on the NW end of the breakwater protecting    160-foot face, 385 feet with dolphins; 17 feet alongside; passenger
the Skagway Small-Boat Basin, on the SE side of the harbor.        and vehicle traffic; owned and operated by the State of Alaska.
 (121) Prominent features.-The warehouse and elevator of the        (137) Skagway Terminal Co. Pier (59ï¿½27'03"N., 135ï¿½19'29"W.):
ore terminal SW of Skagway, the gold cupola of a hotel, and the    200 yards NW of the Ferry Terminal; 175-foot T-head pier; 1,300
oil tanks at the ferry terminal and at the railway wharf are conspic-    feet berthing space with dolphins; 37 feet alongside; 108,000
uous from seaward.                                                 square feet covered storage and 10 acres open storage; conveyor
 (122)  Channels.-The approach to Skagway is clear and deep;    and elevator with 1,200-ton-per-hour capacity; shipment of bulk
the chart is the best guide.                                       lead and zinc ore; owned and operated by Skagway Terminal Co.
 (123) Anchorages.-There is no safe anchorage for large vessels     (138) Broadway Dock (59ï¿½27'02"N., 135ï¿½19'28"W.); 120 yards
at Skagway. The anchorage in the NE part of the harbor off the    SE of Skagway Terminal Co. Pier; 240-foot face, 970 feet with
railway wharf is small, being limited by the cable area. The wind    dolphins; 30 feet reported alongside in 1994.
draws through the valley and anchorage. With N gales a vessel is     (139) Supplies.-Arrangements can be made to truck gasoline
liable to drag anchor because of the steep pitch of the bottom, and    and diesel fuel to the Railway Wharf. Gasoline is available in the
under such conditions a safer berth can be had at the wharf. Pro-    small-craft basin. Water is available at the Railway Wharf and at
tection from the N can be had in Nahku Bay, for vessels under 200    the floats of the small-craft basin. Limited amounts of provisions
feet long. Large vessels can anchor in Lutak Inlet.                and marine supplies can be had at the general stores.



                                      -owo-- -
















                                                                  a- .
                                                                  o M







                                                                                                                        p
                                                                                                                        z
                                                                                                                        z
                                                                                                                        n



W-- ----
0---







216                                                    11. LYNN CANAL


 (140) Repairs.-The White Pass and Yukon Route railway oper-    the basin. Water (during summer), electricity, and gasoline are
ates a fully equipped machine shop; these facilities are available to    available at the floats.
marine interests for emergency repairs. A 60-foot small-craft grid   (142) Communications.-The White Pass and Yukon Route is a
is in the E corner of the small-craft basin.                       railway of 3-foot gage, 111 miles long, that extends from tidewater
 (141) Small-craft facilities.-The Skagway Small-Boat Basin,    up the Skagway Valley to White Pass and across the international
protected by a breakwater marked by a light, is just northward of    boundary to Whitehorse, the head of navigation on the Yukon
the White Pass and Yukon Route railway wharf. A Federal project    River. The railway maintains daily service with Whitehorse from
provides for an 8-foot entrance channel. Local interests have    May to September.
expanded and deepened the basin. In May 1994, the controlling        (143) The Alaska Marine Highway System has daily ferry ser-
depth was 8 feet in the entrance with 9 to 14 feet in the basin. Silt-    vice to other southeastern Alaska ports and Prince Rupert, B.C.,
ing encroaches the NE basin limits between dredgings. The har-    with weekly service to Seattle. Scheduled and chartered airlines
bormaster assigns berths and can be contacted by telephone (907-    operate from Skagway airport on the NW side of the city. Tele-
983-2628) and on VHF-FM channel 16, The harbor capacity is    phone and radiotelephone communications are maintained. Skag-
about 165 boats. A launching ramp, grid, and seaplane float are in    way has highway connections with the Alaska Highway.










                                   12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND

 (1)   This chapter describes the W coast of Baranof Island, the    (s)   Bobrovoi Point, about 1.8 miles NW of Cape Ommaney,
coasts of Kruzof Island and Sitka Sound, and the city and port of    is the SE point at the entrance to Larch Bay. It terminates in a
Sitka. The E coast of Baranof Island has been described with    wooded hummock that may be mistaken for Wooden Island during
Chatham Strait in chapter 10.                                      an approach from NW.
                                                                    (9)   Larch Bay is a large open bay with an arm that extends in
 (2)   Chart 17320.-Baranof Island, about 90 miles long with    a NE direction. Anchorage may be found in about 20 fathoms in
a greatest width of about 22 miles, forms about one-third of the    this arm. Small launches use this arm during the fishing season
outer coastline of southeastern Alaska between Cape Muzon and    when fair weather prevails. Rocks extend about 500 yards off the
Cape Spencer. The W  coast from Cape Ommaney at Chatham    W point of the entrance to the bay. There are low depressions
Strait to Point Kakul at Peril Strait is about 80 miles. Mt. Katlian,    between the bay and Chatham Strait.
4,303 feet high, is in the N part of the island. The greater eleva-  (lo)  Little Puffin Bay, about 5.8 miles NW  of Cape
tions are on the S part of the island.                             Ommaney, has depths of 21 fathoms at the entrance, decreasing to
 (3)  Prominent features-Vessels making the Sland at Cape    7 fathoms about 0.3 mile from the head, and then shoals rapidly.
  u(3)   Prombin ent featuresr.bVessels making the land at Cape    At the head of the bay are a stream and a gravel beach with out-
Edgecumbe in thick rainy weather may be aided in their determi-       pping rocks. Exposed anchorage for small vessels may be had
nation of position by the color of the rocks. The rocks and cliffs N    in 6 to 7 fathom s, hard anchorage for small vessels may be had
of Cape Edgecumbe are decidedly black as far as Cape Georgiana,    avoid rocks awash and b        reakers off the S  shore near the entrance.
and the rocks S of Cape Edgecumbe are a whitish gray from    avoid rocks awash and breakers off the S shore near the entrance.
and the rocks S of Cape Edgecumbe are a whitish gray from                  Sealion Rocks (56'15.1'N., 134'50.0'W.) are a cluster of
Biorka Island to Whale Bay. The shore for 3 miles N of Cape
                                                                   four dark rocks about 7.5 miles above Cape Ommaney and
Edgecumbe rises in a precipitous cliff of dark brown lava about    four  dark  rocks about  7.5 miles above Cape Ommaney and
200 feet high and forms a prominent landmark. Numerous large    directly off the entrance to Puffin Bay. Several smaller outlying
c      ave   s or blowholes can be seen in this lava cliff. Nmosag rocks are close-to. The central rock is pyramidal in appearance
  caves or blowholes can be seen in theis lava cliff, swith steep sides; the others are somewhat more massive. The
  (4)   From Cape Ommaney, the W  coast of Baranof Island    depths are good on all sides of the rocks, but it is better to pass S
trends NW to Biorka Island, a distance of 50 miles. For a distance    of them in entering Puffin Bay
of about 20 miles from the cape, the shoreline has numerous inlets  (12)  Puin Bay is about 7.2 miles NW of Cape Ommaney.
and indentations, which, as anchorages, furnish poor protection    the NW shore near the entrance is a massive patch of white rock.
 except to very small craft. The shore is of gray, storm-swept rock.          the bay range from 90 fathoms near the entrance to 23
From the headlands and points along the coast, the land rises to    fathoms close to the head. A small bight in the NW shore, 1 mile
 peaks and ridges in the interior of the island. The lower slopes are    within the bay, furnishes temporary anchorage with limited swing-
 timbered; the ridges and summits are snow-covered until well into    ing room for small craft. The entrance to the anchorage has a
 the summer. The shoreline to the N of Biorka Island has the same    depth of 11 fathoms in a channel about 60 yards wide between
 general features, but is less forbidding. During foggy weather
 generalong the coastures, but is oftless forbidding. During foggy weChatham Strait.  shoals that extend from both points of the entrance. The cove fur-
               'along the coast, it is often clear in Chathan Strait.  nishes little protection from S. The small cove in the SE shore near
  (5)   Weather.-This coast is exposed to the weather from the    the head of the bay furnishes anchorage for small craft in 5 to 8
 Gulf of Alaska with some protection afforded in the N by Kruzof    fathoms in the middle of the cove. The very narrow entrance chan-
 Island. However, from October through March, the area is    nel has depths of 12 fathoms. Williwaws blow with considerable
 pounded by gales, which blow about 10 percent of the time in    force during SE gales.
 open waters, and by waves which reach 8 feet or more up to 30        (13)  Driftwood Cove is a little bay 1.2 miles N of Sealion
 percent of the time. Wind waves and swells from distant storms    Rocks; its entrance is obstructed by reefs marked by kelp patches.
 also find their way into many of the bays and inlets. Strongest    The cove is exposed.
 winds are usually out of the N, E, and SE. Along the coast, strong  (14)  Big Branch Rock is a massive, dark, round-topped rock,
 southeasterlies trigger williwaws in many areas. Precipitation is    about 1.8 miles NNW of Sealion Rocks and about 1.6 miles SE of
 frequent year round; in winter, up to one-third of it falls as snow.    Redfish Point.
 Visibilities are worst during June, July, and August as warm air     (15)  Redfish Cape is a narrow peninsula appearing as a com-
 blows over still-cool waters.                                      paratively low, wooded ridge, parallel to the coast; it is the only
                                                                     apparent low ridge in the vicinity. From N a short distance above
   (6)   Charts 17330, 17320.-Cape Ommaney, the S extremity    Redfish Cape, a white conspicuous cliff is seen in the midst of the
  of Baranof Island, is a remarkable promontory terminating in    timber. A chain of barely separated wooded islets extends 0.5 mile
 Ommaney Peak, a bluff, rugged, rocky mountain, detached from    S from the end of the cape; the southernmost one terminates in
  the higher land N by a low depression running through from Port    Redfish Point (58ï¿½18. 1'N., 134052.5'W.). Between Redfish Point
  Conclusion. Wooden Island, close SE of the cape, is marked by    and Big Branch Rock are the entrances to Little Branch Bay, Big
  Cape Ommaney Light (56009.6'N., 134ï¿½39.7W.). (See chapter    Branch Bay, and Redfish Bay.
  10, for descriptions of the island and light.)                      (16)  Redfish Breaker, awash at low water, is 0.1 mile S of the
   (7)   Ommaney Bay is an open bight on the W  side of Cape    outer rocks S of Redfish Point. It breaks except in calm weather. A
  Ommaney and is of no importance to navigation. Eagle Rocks are    rocky patch with a least-found depth of 31/2 fathoms is about 0.5
  a group of bare rocks close off the first point W  of Cape    mile SE from the same point. A shoal covered 7 fathoms is about
  Ommaney.                                                           0.6 mile S of the point.

                                                                                                                                 217






218                                         12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND


 (17)  Little Branch Bay is about 1.9 miles long to the narrows,   (26)  Snipe Head, the NW entrance point of Snipe Bay, is a
which are barely 75 yards wide, and widens into a basin. About    conspicuous straight-topped headland.
0.4 mile SSW of the narrows is an island, separated from the E      (27)  Sandy Bay, 3 miles N of Snipe Bay, extends in a NNE
shore by a channel 50 to 100 yards wide. Midchannel depths in the    direction and divides into two arms 0.8 mile from the entrance; a
bay range from 81 fathoms near the entrance to 21 fathoms off the    long narrow arm extends N and a second arm extends E.
island, 12 fathoms in the narrows, and 17 fathoms in the middle of  (28)  Good anchorage may be had in 22 to 24 fathoms at the NE
the basin at the head. About 0.8 mile within the entrance, a narrow    head of the E arm off the waterfall. About 0.8 mile within the arm
channel in the SE shore, entered only at high water, leads to a    a group of islets extends off the N shore. Pass well S of these to
lagoon that has depths of 1 to 71/2 fathoms.                      avoid a l/2-fathom spot, not marked by kelp or showing any sur-
 (18)  Little Branch Bay Light (56ï¿½18.2'N., 134050.7'W.), 109    face indication, which is about 0.1 mile S of the islands. Anchor-
feet above the water, shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    age may be had either in the bight W of the islands or in the arm
white diamond-shaped daymark, marks the entrance to Little    that extends NW from the E arm.
Branch Bay and Big Branch Bay.                                      (29)  A 71/2-fathom spot in the middle of the entrance causes the
 (19)  Big Branch Bay, separated from Little Branch Bay by a    seas to pile up dangerously in SE weather.
high narrow neck of land, extends in a NNE direction and narrows    (30)  The Third Kekur, a conspicuous conical rock islet, is 1.6
in width 2.5 miles from the entrance, then widens again. An arm    miles NNW of the NW entrance point of Sandy Bay.
indenting the W  shore about 0.9 mile from the W entrance point     (31)  Close Bay consists of an open bight and a lagoon that can
has depths from 9 to 20 fathoms, where small boats can find good    only be entered on the flood. Several breakers are off the NW
shelter. About 2 miles from the entrance.to Big Branch Bay is an    point of the entrance.
islet close to the W shore. The bight on the E shore E of this islet  (32)  Whale Bay has its entrance between Point Lauder and
affords indifferent anchorage in 23 fathoms. Depths up to 66 fath-    North Cape. It extends in a NE direction for about 4 miles, where
oms are found above the narrows.                                  it divides into two arms, Great Arm and Small Arm.
 (20)  Redfish Bay has its entrance between Redfish Cape and       (33)  Point Lauder, low and wooded, about 15 miles NNW of
Beavertail Island. From its entrance the bay extends in a general    Redfish Cape, is the SE point of the entrance to Whale Bay.
N direction, narrowing in places to about 100 yards and in one      (34)  North Cape (56036'N., 135008'W.), the NW point of the
place to about 80 feet. The channels are probably safe, but too nar-    entrance to Whale Bay, 4 miles NW of Point Lauder, is an island
row for safe steering; there is no certainty that dangers do not    close to shore with three hills on it. The middle hill is the highest.
exist. The use of the bay by vessels other than small craft is not  (35)  Still Harbor, at the entrance to Whale Bay, is about 1.5
recommended.                                                      miles N of Point Lauder. The entrance, about 0.1 mile wide, is N
 (21)  Tenfathom Anchorage,.within the entrance of Redfish    of Tikhaia Islands, the chain of rocky islets that extend NNW
Bay, about 0.6 mile E of Redfish Cape, furnishes secure anchorage    from the point NE of Point Lauder. The NE shore at the entrance is
for small craft. The entrance is about 75 yards wide.             foul.
 (22)  The small bay 2.6 miles NNW of Redfish Cape furnishes       (36)  About 1 mile above the entrance to Still Harbor, a group of
good shelter for small boats, but the entrance is so narrow and the    islets and rocks extend from the SW shore, restricting the channel
turns so sharp that a vessel of any size cannot enter, especially if   to about 150 yards. A rockyledge extends about 250 yards from
there is any swell.                                               the NE shore toward the north point of the 30-foot island that is
 (23)  Byron Bay is 4.3 miles N of Redfish Cape and is appar-    close to the SW shore, about 1.2 miles from the entrance. The only
ently clear, but too deep for secure anchorage. Indifferent, tempo-    anchorage is at the head of the harbor, and even there the swell is
rary anchorage may be obtained in about 22 fathoms close to the    felt in heavy weather; this anchorage is not recommended.
W shore about 0.8 mile within the entrance. Close to the W shore,   (37)  Port Banks has its entrance about 2.7 miles NE of Still
near the head, is a small island above which small craft can find    Harbor. A submerged rock on which there is a depth of 1 3/4 fath-
anchorage. A thin, high waterfall, visible from offshore, empties    oms is about 0.5 mile N off the W  point of the entrance; it is
into a lake NNW of the bay. A flat over 100 yards wide is at the    reported to break in a moderate swell. Deep water surrounds this
head of the bay. In. entering, favor the E shore, which is bold and    rock.
steep-to.                                                          (38)  It is recommended that vessels bound for Port Banks steer
 (24)  Kekur Point (56ï¿½23.1'N., 134ï¿½57.0'W.), a rounded point    midchannel courses until clear of the off-lying dangers, then head
backed by a flat-topped ridge, is about 4.5 miles NNW of Redfish    into Port Banks, favoring the E shore. The Makhnati Islands can
Cape. First Kekur, a group of black rocks, is off the S extremity    usually be identified in thick weather; they furnish a good leading
of this point. A breaker over a least-found depth of 23/4 fathoms,    mark for clearing the off-lying 13/4-fathom rock. It is reported that
surrounded by deep water, is about 0.4 mile NW from the First    breakers extend from this rock to the SW point of the entrance
Kekur.                                                            during very heavy weather; under such conditions it is probably
                                                                   better to make Rakovoi Bay. After the 50-foot islet at the entrance
 (25)  Charts 17328, 17320.-Snipe Bay, indenting the W coast    to Port Banks is passed, the only obstruction is the small rocky
of Baranof Island, has its entrance about 18 miles NW of Cape    islet, 6-foot high, 1.1 mile from the entrance. Pass to the E of this
Ommaney and 1.8 miles N of Kekur Point. The bay is deep and    islet. About 0.4 mile beyond, the bay widens and forms a basin
clear except for the rocks close to the shore at the entrance. The    that has depths of about 15 fathoms. Good anchorage in depths
islets off the SE entrance point are wooded. A group of islets is    from 8 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom, may be had in Port Banks
close to the NW entrance point. About 1.4 miles within the    which is used extensively during the fishing season.
entrance in the SE shore is a sheltered bight with 35 fathoms in the  (39)  Kritoi Basin, used extensively during the fishing season,
middle. At the head of Snipe Bay are two short branches. A con-    is between Port Banks and Rakovoi Bay. The bay affords excellent
spicuous waterfall empties into the head of the N branch. Depths    shelter, but is used mostly by small craft, because of its narrow
of 31 fathoms were obtained in the small bight S of the NE branch.  entrance, about 75 yards wide. The entrance between Finger






                                             12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND                                               219


Point and Krishka Island is deep and clear except for a depth of   (49)  A small bay extends from the head of Necker Bay where
21/4 fathoms about 0.3 mile inside the entrance in 56ï¿½35.9'N.,    anchorage may be found in 20 fathoms, soft bottom.
135ï¿½00.0'W. Good anchorage in desired depths from 5-to 20 fath-   (50)  Slate Islets, a group of rocky islets, parallel the shore
oms, mud bottom, can be had in the basin.                        between Necker Bay and Walker Channel. One of the SE islets has
 (40)  Rakovoi Bay is 1.2 miles E of Port Banks. An island close    a few trees on it. Between the islets and the main shore is deep
to the E point makes the channel about 275 yards wide. The chan-    water, but many rocks make navigation dangerous without local
nel E of the island is foul and suitable only for small boats.    knowledge.
Anchorage may be found S of the island at the entrance in about
18 fathoms or farther up the bay in 20 fathoms.                   (51)  Charts 17326, 17320.-Crawfish Inlets, with entrances
 (41)  Great Arm, the NE arm of Whale Bay NNE of Rakovoi    6.5 to 11.5 miles NW of North Cape (56ï¿½36'N., 135008'W.), con-
Bay, narrows to less than 0.3 mile at a distance of 5.3 miles from    sist of two principal arms connected about 5 miles inland by Cedar
the entrance. A small bay indents the SE shore 3.5 miles from the    Pass. The inlets and entrances are generally deep and clear, but
entrance, and another bay is at the narrows. Both bays have depths    between the two principal entrances are off-lying dangers.
of over 30 fathoms. Great Arm is clear. An excellent anchorage    (52)  Walker Channel is the SE entrance to Crawfish Inlet, and
with sand and mud bottom is in the small bay on the E side of the    Aspid Cape, low and wooded, forms the SE point at the entrance.
arm about 3.5 miles above the entrance to the arm. However, in     (53)  Jamboree Bay, with a depth of 51/2 fathoms in the
the arm proper depths are too great for anchorage. Kakovo Island    entrance, extends SE from the head of Walker Channel. In enter-
is off the N entrance point to Great Arm.                        ing, keep in midchannel, and anchor near the head of the bay in 10
 (42)  Small Arm extends in a NNE direction from the NW side    to 17 fathoms with good holding ground. SE winds sweep through
of Whale Bay. At its head it turns E for 0.6 mile. Makhnati    the anchorage with considerable force.
Islands, a group of wooded islands, are off the entrance to Small  (54)  Rakof Islands are a group of wooded islands between
Arm. Anchorage may be found among them, but it is exposed and    Walker Channel and the entrance to West Crawfish Inlet. Beau-
not recommended. The depths in Small Arm are too great to afford    champ Island, the largest island of the group, forms the NW side
anchorage. If the W shore is favored when passing the Makhnati    of Walker Channel. Scow Island, the SW island of the group, is W
Islands, no obstructions will be encountered throughout the length    of Beauchamp Island.
of the arm.                                                       (55)  Scow Bay indents the W shore of Beauchamp Island and
 (43)  Necker Bay, about 35 miles NW of Cape Ommaney and    is much used by local fishermen as an anchorage. Favor the SE
3.5 miles N of North Cape, has its entrance between the Yamani    shore when entering the bay, passing S of all the islands near the
Islets and the Guibert Islets. Yamani Islets, a group of wooded    entrance. It is reported that the safe channel in the narrows leading
islets about 4 miles N from North Cape, form the NW entrance    to a basin at the head of the bay is very close to the S shore. There
point of Necker Bay. Good anchorage for small craft can be had N  is good anchorage off the point about 0.8 mile above the entrance
of the islets in Yamani Cove.                                    on the N shore of the bay in 10 fathoms, mud bottom; also in the
 (44)  Guibert Islets, consisting of three low, bare, rocky islets    basin in 21/2 to 3 V4 fathoms, mud bottom.
and several small rocks, are about 3 miles N of North Cape and     (56)  Middle Channel is a passage leading to Crawfish Inlet
0.5 mile off the SE point at the entrance to Necker Bay. A rocky    from the sea, midway between Walker Channel and West Crawfish
patch where 10 fathoms were found is about 0.5 mile N of the    Inlet. Setting a course from SW, to pass close to the NW side of
northernmost of the Guibert Islets in the middle of the bay; it is    Scow Island, then adjusting course as necessary to clear the island,
reported to break in extremely heavy weather. Except for the dan-    islets, and rocks N of Scow Island will lead clear of the dangers up
gers previously described, deep water is found throughout the bay.    to this entrance. One mile inside this entrance, near midchannel, is
About 5.6 miles from the entrance the bay widens and anchorage    a submerged rock with 1 /2 fathoms over it and marked by kelp,
can be found in 30 fathoms on the E side of the bay.             which should preferably be passed to the S.
  (45)  Two remarkable headlands are about 2 miles NE of the       (57)  Biali Rock, bare and white, is the extreme W islet of a
Guibert Islets, one on either side of Necker Bay. The rocky out-    chain of bare islets that extend W from Rakof Islands. Foul ground
crop shows well offshore and makes a good landmark.              extends for about 1 mile S and E of the rock. South Rocks are a
  (46)  Toy Harbor, on the SE shore of Necker Bay, about 5    group of rocks, awash at high water, near the SE limit of the foul
miles above the entrance, is reported to afford shelter for small    ground.
boats.                                                             (58)  An inside passage furnishes protection for small craft
  (47)  Dorothy Cove, N of Toy Harbor and about 6 miles above    bound for Sitka. Pass E of Scow Island, avoiding the rock in mid-
the entrance to Necker Bay, affords excellent anchorage for small    channel, and through Cameron Pass. Favor the SE shore of Mid-
craft in depths of about 6 to 10 fathoms E of the largest islet near    die Channel until up to Second Narrows. Pass E of a large rock
the head of the cove. The entrance to the anchorage, S of this islet,   off the point, then favor the S shore, and take a midchannel course
is about 125 yards wide.                                         through the narrows. A shoal of 21/2 fathoms is in Second Nar-
  (48)  Secluded Bay is separated from the N part of Necker Bay    rows. Head N until up to an opening leading NW. Favor the NE
by a large island. The S entrance is extremely narrow, 30 yards at    shore of this opening, passing a rock near the shore and avoiding a
one place, with least known depth of 6/2 fathoms. The N entrance,    submerged rock in the center. Then head NE for about 0.6 mile
N of the island, is wider, but is obstructed by a ledge that extends    and turn W around a point, passing in midchannel through First
NE about 100 yards from the N point of the island, leaving a clear    Narrows. Cross West Crawfish Inlet and enter Windy Passage.
channel of about 100 yards with a depth of 31/2 fathoms. A large   (59)  Crawfish Inlet is deep and clear except for a rock that
stream enters the N part of the bay, and an extensive flat strewn    uncovers 3 feet in midchannel, about 3.5 miles from its junction
with boulders makes off the mouth of this stream. Anchorage may    with Walker Channel, Middle Channel, and Cedar Pass. The inlet
be found in 17 fathoms in the N part of the bay off this flat, and    can be entered from seaward through Walker Channel or Middle
 small craft can find anchorage in 6 fathoms in the S part of the bay.    Channel; the former is safer.






220                                          12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND


 (60)  Cedar Pass, connecting Crawfish Inlet with West Craw-        (74)  The passage along the W  shore of Golf Island, between
fish Inlet, is suitable only for small craft. In using the pass, favor    this island and the Jackknife Islands, has good water close along
the W  shore up to the narrows, then keep a midchannel course.    the shore of Golf Island. A foul area extends NE of the Jackknife
Lodge Island is the large island that forms the W  side of Cedar    Islands. The shoals W of the S end of Golf Island break in a slight
Pass.                                                              swell.
 (61)  West Crawfish Inlet extends NE for about 8 miles where       (75)  The passage between the Jackknife Islands and Elovoi
it divides into two arms. The N arm, opposite Cedar Pass, is clear    Island is clear if vessels keep close to Elovoi Island, passing W
in midchannel except for a landslide shoal with 41/2 fathoms over    and N of the wooded islet 0.3 mile W of the N end of Golf Island.
it, which is off the W  shore about 0.8 mile from the entrance.      (76)  The passage between Legma Island on the E and Maid
Shamrock Bay leads E from a point near the head of the inlet.    Island and Tava Island on the W is clear in midchannel. Small
The inlet and bays are too deep for good anchorage.                craft can pass between Maid Island and Tava Island with local
 (62)  Necker Islands are a group of low, wooded islands that    knowledge.
extend NW from the entrance to West Crawfish Inlet. Between the      (77)  The passage between Torsar Island and Fragrant Island
islands are many passages. An inside passage for small craft leads    is dangerous and should not be used except with local knowledge.
through Windy Passage, Dorothy Narrows, and Hot Springs Bay,         (78)  These passages are for small craft only and should be used
which are between the islands and Baranof Island.                  with caution. The only ship route into Windy Passage is through
 (63)  The most prominent landmark in the Necker Islands is    West Crawfish Inlet.
The Beehive (56ï¿½46.9'N., 135ï¿½24.0'W.), a knob 430 feet high at
the SW end of Golf Island, the long narrow island W of Gornoi              to        p ass 0.4 mile E of North Rock in a N direction, passing W of
                                                                    to pass 0.4 mile E of North Rock in a N direction, passing W of
    Island.                                                        Elovoi Island and the three small wooded islands about 400 yards
 (64)  Rachek Island is the fairly large wooded island at the S    off its shore and E of Fragrant Island. Keep midway between visi-
end of the Necker Island group. It has high light-gray cliffs on its   ble objects.
seaward side. There is clear water to the SW of this island.
                                                                     (80)  Herring Bay indents Elovoi Island. The approach W  of
 (65)  North Rock is an isolated black rock, block-shaped, and    Kirbas Island is impassable. In entering by the approach E of Kir-
awash in a heavy sea, 1.4 miles W  of Rachek Island. Fishermen
                                                                    bas Island, pass W  of a bare 20-foot rock off the E point of the
 are known to trawl S of thelargeis ght-gray rock ,2,mileN         entrance and follow midchannel. Excellent anchorage can be had
 (66)  John Rock is the large light-gray rock, 2 miles NW of    for small craft in 3 to 4 fathoms, mud bottom.
North Rock. Broken ground, with several isolated breaking shoals,
is between North Rock and John Rock.                                 (81)  Biorka Island is the most westerly and largest of the
       (67)Windy Passage is the S approach to Hot Springs Bay    Necker group. Point Woodhouse, the S point of the island, is
 m(67)                            Wi ndy Passage is t h e     approadch  t o   Hot Springs B aymoderately high and wooded. Rocks and small islands are close to
                 from West Crawfish Inlet. A midchannel course is clear  the point. Three of the small islands are named Kaiuchali Island,
 (68)  President Bay is at the SE end of Windy Passage. By         Terbilon Island, and Impassable              Island.
keeping in midchannel, entrance to the bay can be made on either
side of the wooded islands in the entrance. Good anchorage, with     (82)  Little Biorka Island is NW and close to Biorka Island
mud bottom, is afforded small craft well toward the head of the    with a narrow passage between. This pass is foul, but in good
bay. A basin at the head of the bay is accessible only to skiffs.  weather small boats can use it with local knowledge. The S neck is
 (69)  Sevenfathom Bay, 0.7 mile N of President Bay, affords    a bare, rugged rock cliff. The W  and N sides are bare rock cliff.
 better anchorage than President Bay. When entering, keep in mid-    This island is wooded in its center. A bare islet is at the S point.
better anchorage than President Bay. When entering, keep in mid-
channel until near the head of the bay. A ledge that uncovers 8 feet  (83)  Vasilief Rock, awash at high water, is about 1 mile S of
is off the S shore about 0.2 mile from the head of the bay. This    Point Woodhouse. Breakers are reported visible in this section in
ledge, which bares, has a sand flat 100 yards wide. Good anchor-    rough weather.
age for small craft in 51/2 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom, can be found   (84)  Golovni Island, about 2.4 miles SE of Point Woodhouse,
in the bay.                                                        has two parts. The inshore half is high and wooded; the outer half
 (70)  Big Bay, at the NW end of Windy Passage, is narrow at   is a high, bare, gray rock, rounded on top, with a perpendicular S
the entrance, with greatly increased width inside. Anchorage is   face.
good in 5 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom, 0.3 mile off the stream at      (85)  Jacob Rock, about 0.8 mile S of Golovni Island, is a
the SE end of the bay.                                             large, outstanding, dark-gray rock.
 (71)  Dorothy Narrows, between Windy Passage and Hot               (86)  Biorka Channel, SE of Biorka Island, furnishes a short
Springs Bay, has 1/2 fathom of water at lowest tides. Elovoi Island    route into Sitka Sound from the SW. The towers of the aero radio
Rock uncovers 3 feet in midchannel N of the narrowest part, and is    range on Biorka Island are prominent when making Biorka Chan-
marked by a daybeacon. Coming from the S, keep midchannel    nel from N or S; flashing red lights mark these towers at night.
through the narrowest part, then swing right to avoid the rock.    Vessels should keep between the 50-fathom curves on entering
When past Elovoi Island Rock, swing left to avoid a rock awash at    from S until past the N end of Wrangell Island, then head N. This
half tide, 250 yards NE of the daybeacon. Local knowledge is    channel is clear except for rocks and shoals as shown on the chart.
essential.                                                         The velocity of the current is about 0.4 knot. (See the Tidal Cur-
 (72)  The passage between Gornoi Island and the group of    rent Tables for predictions.)
islands SE of it is clear except for a rocky islet and two rocks     (87)  Gunboat Rock, about 1.2 miles NE of Vasilief Rock, has
awash off the SE side of Gornoi island. To avoid this danger, favor    two pinnacles and looks like a gunboat when seen from certain
the SE side of the passage. Do not use this passage to reach the    directions. The rock is a good landmark. A small reef awash,
outside because of offshore rocks.                                 which breaks in all but dead calm weather at high water, is 0.45
 (73)  The passage between Gornoi Island and Golf Island is    mile 1980 from Gunboat Rock. Depths of 33/4 and 81/2 fathoms are
very foul and should not be used.                                  0.6 and 0.7 mile SE and on the opposite side of the channel from






                                             12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND                                                  221


Gunboat Rock. Broken ground with rocks awash extend about 0.3    entrance to Sitka Sound. A 19-fathom bank about 4.6 miles SW
mile N of Gunboat Rock.                                            from Cape Edgecumbe is on the range with St. Lazaria Islands,
 (88)  Symonds Bay is the E cove indenting the N side of Biorka    slightly open of Shoals Point.
Island, and is sometimes a convenient anchorage for small vessels   (98)  Sitka Point is about 1 mile SE of Cape Edgecumbe Light.
deterred from entering the sound by thick weather. Entrance Islet    Foul ground extends about 0.3 mile S from the point and about 0.2
is N of and close to the W point of the entrance.                  mile W  of Cape Edgecumbe Light. The water is clear outside
 (89)  Hanus Islet is N of and close to the E point of the    these reefs. Fishing vessels frequently anchor on the E side of
entrance. The depths range from 20 fathoms at the entrance to 41/2    Sitka Point close inshore and N of the reef, marked by kelp, that
to 61/4 fathoms at the anchorage near the head of Symonds Bay.    extends 300 yards off the E side of the point. This anchorage is
The chart shows the dangers in the bay.                            exposed in E or S weather.
 (90)  The bay is open N, but affords anchorage with shelter        (99)  Mount Edgecumbe, on Kruzof Island, is the prominent
from S winds, sand and shell bottom. The best shelter is near the    landmark for Sitka Sound. From any point seaward, it is easily
head inside the V4-fathom rock in 41/ to 61/4 fathoms, but it is suit-    distinguished by its isolated position, its flat top, it peculiar
able only for small craft. Large vessels should anchor in midchan-    streaked appearance, and its reddishness. The upper part is a bare
nel just inside the entrance in 12 to 13 fathoms.                  volcanic cone, usually snow-covered. Extending down the sides of
 (91)  A U.S. Government wharf, a mooring buoy, and a sea-    the cone are numerous deep gullies or ravines, in which the snow
plane float are on the W side near the head of Symonds Bay. The    lies until late in the summer, giving it a peculiar appearance. The
wharf, 178 feet long and with a 16-foot face, had a reported depth    crater is 300 to 400 feet deep.
of 6 feet alongside in 1976. Biorka Island maintains telephone       (loo) St. Lazaria Islands, about 1 mile off the S shore of Kru-
communication with Sitka. Water is available on the island.        zof Island, form the St. Lazaria National Wildlife Refuge. These
 (92)  Biorka Reef is 1.2 miles 283ï¿½ from the southernmost    islands are of a peculiar volcanic formation and are frequently vis-
point of Little Biorka Island. The reef is a rock awash, with deep    ited by tourists. Deep water is close-to on all sides of the islands
water around it, and breaks in moderate weather; it has no kelp.    except for a reef that extends about 125 yards off the NE point of
The channel between the reef and Little Biorka Island is about 1    the easternmost island. Small craft frequently anchor close inshore
mile wide, clear, and practicable for vessels of any size.         in 8 to 10 fathoms, rocky bottom, on the N side of the island,
 (93)  Hot Springs Bay (56050'N., 135023'W.) is between Elo-    which affords protection in moderate S weather.
voi Island and Baranof Island. Torsar Island marks the NW point      (101) Low Island is a bare flat island, surrounded by a large
of the entrance to the bay. Fragrant Island is the large island SE    area of shoals and breakers marked by kelp, which extends to
of Torsar Island. Kolosh Island is the large island on the N side of    Shoals Point. The highest part of the island is only 7 feet above
the bay.                                                           high water and is swept by heavy seas in S storms. The island is of
 (94)  The hot springs on the NE side of the bay have a tempera-    lava formation partly covered by sand and shells and is difficult to
ture of about 145ï¿½F., and the water contains chlorine, iron, magne-    identify at a distance.
sia, and sulphur.
                                                                     (102) Charts 17326, 17320.-Vitskari Island, about 10 miles E
 (95)  Chart 17320.-Sitka Sound has its entrance from the sea    of Cape Edgecumbe, is a bare rock about 20 feet high. It is marked
between Biorka Island and Cape Edgecumbe. It extends in a N        by Vitskari Island Light (57ï¿½00.0'N., 135032.7'W.), 50 feet
direction about 16 miles, with a width E and W  of 5 to 10 miles.    above the water, and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
The E and N shores are fringed with numerous islands and rocks    white diamond-shaped daymark. A racon is at the light.
and indented by bays and inlets. At its N end, the sound connects    (103)  Vitskari Rocks are a group of bare rocks and rocks awash
with several bays and estuaries that extend N, and with Olga    NW of Vitskari Island. Between the rocks and Low Island is a
Strait, which is part of a navigable inland passage connecting    channel 1 mile wide; however, the channel between the island and
Sitka Sound, through Neva Strait and Peril Strait, with Chatham    Kulichkof Rock is always used by vessels bound for Sitka.
Strait. The shores are wooded, rendering it difficult to distinguish  (104) Camel Mountain (56052.2' N., 135ï¿½20.0'W.), on the SE
them from the wooded islets at a distance. Land along the shore    side of Sitka Sound, is a prominent landmark with two humps at
usually rises rapidly a short distance from the sea, culminating in    its summit. When seen from W  it shows a perfect cone-shaped
broken mountains. The islands are mostly small, low, and sparsely    outline.
wooded.                                                              (105) Peisar Island is about 2.5 miles NE of Biorka Island.
                                                                    Rocks are 0.2 to 0.5 mile offshore.
  (96)  Charts 17325, 17320.-Cape Edgecumbe, about 64 miles          (106) Viesokoi Rock is about 0.7 mile SE from the S extremity
NW of Cape Ommaney, is the SW extremity of Kruzof Island.    of Peisar Island.
The cape is formed by a cliff of black lava, about 100 feet high.    (107) The entrance to Kanga Bay is about 1.9 miles E of Peisar
Foul ground extends 400 yards off the shore of the cape, and there    Island, and the inner bay has depths of 10 to 21 fathoms. The
are banks with depths of 8 to 9 fathoms, about 0.8 mile S of the    channel passes NE of the small islet about midway between the
cape, on which the sea breaks in very heavy weather. The rocks    entrance and the head of the bay. Foul ground extends 0.2 mile in a
and cliffs N of Cape Edgecumbe are decidedly black as far as    NW direction from the S point of the entrance to the bay.
Cape Georgiana, whereas those S of Cape Edgecumbe, from              (108) Redoubt Bay is NE of Kanga Bay. The head of the bay
Biorka Island to Whale Bay, are whitish-gray. These color charac-    has two arms, which are deep. Redoubt Lake empties into the E
teristics are of considerable assistance in identifying the locality in    arm. The entrance to Redoubt Lake is not navigable by any type
thick weather.                                                     craft, because the entrance has the remains of a rock dam across it
  (97)  Cape Edgecumbe Light (56059.9'N., 135ï¿½51.4'W.), 100    and the lake level is about 9 feet above high water level of the bay.
feet above the water and shown from a square frame with a red    The entrance to the lake has very steep rapids. A boat lift has been
and white diamond-shaped daymark, marks the N side of the    built along the N side of the entrance so that small boats up to 16







222                                         12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND


feet can be lifted into the lake. The U.S. Forest Service maintains    from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped day-
the boat lift.                                                   mark, marks the islets. The Belknap Islands are close SE of The
 (109) Islet Passage, in which depths of 11 to 29 fathoms are    Eckholms.
found, leads from Kanga Bay to Redoubt Bay. Fankuda Islet is at    (121) Deep Inlet, which has a narrow entrance SE of The Eck-
the N end of the passage. Soundings of 18 fathoms were found W   holms, has no anchorage. A large flat rock with 3/4 fathom over it is
of the islet and 13 fathoms in the channel to the E. Various chan-    on the S side and partly blocks the entrance.
nels lead into Redoubt Bay and Kanga Bay through the numerous      (122) Aleutkina Bay, N of the entrance to Deep Inlet, offers fair
wooded islands off the entrances; these areshown on the chart. A  anchorage in 15 to 17 fathoms, mud bottom. The bay has two
daybeacon on a rock awash, about 0.4 mile W of Round Island,    entrances. The W entrance, between Emgeten Island and Error
marks the W  side of Koka Island Passage, which is part of the    Island, is clear, and a midchannel course will lead to the anchor-
inside route for small vessels between Sitka and Hot Springs Bay.    age. The E entrance is between Fassett Island and Silver Point,
Kita Island is the outermost of the larger islands of the group off    and a midchannel course will likewise lead safely to the anchor-
Povorotni Point (56057.2'N., 135024.0'W.), which is low and    age.
wooded.                                                            (123) Leesoffskaia Bay, joined with Aleutkina Bay to the SW
 (110) Many islets and rocks are offshore between Povorotni    by a narrow passage, affords anchorage for small vessels in any
Point and Cape Burunof. Submerged rocks extend about 0.4 mile    desired depth. The entrance is about 250 yards wide. Vessels desir-
W of Cape Burunof; many isolated rocks are even further off-    ing to make use of this well-sheltered anchorage should follow the
shore. The entire area of rocks and islets should be navigated with    N shores close-to in order to avoid the extensive sand and mud-
caution. Use latest edition of the chart.                        flats bordering the S shores. The bottom is mud in the middle of
 (111) Vasilief Bank, marked by two rocks that uncover 10 feet,    the bay, but rocky near the shores.
about 0.5 mile apart and awash at high water, is about 1.5 miles W  (124) Camp Coogan Bay, on the SE side of Eastern Channel,
of Povorotni Point.                                              about 3.5 miles E of The Eckholms Light, has a narrow, but clear,
 (112) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as    entrance, and a landlocked anchorage inside for small vessels in
4ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed on Obsechki    63/4 to 14 fathoms, mud bottom. Several streams enter at its head,
Island, which is about 1.2 miles NW of Povorotni Point.          where a flat makes out about 0.2 mile.
 (113) Kulichkof Rock, steep-to and bare, is about 2.2 miles N    (125) No Thorofare Bay, N of Camp Coogan Bay, is composed
of Vasilief Bank. It is a prominent landmark. A small group of    of two landlocked bodies of water connected by narrow, shallow
rocks, awash at high water, is about 0.2 mile N of the rock, and 0.2    channels. Only small boats can enter and then only at high-water
mile WNW is a rock covered 1 foot that breaks in a moderate    slack, because of strong currents in the outer narrows. High water
swell. Rocky patches, usually marked by some kelp at low water,    is 3/4 hour later than high water at Sitka; low water is 21/2 hours
are charted E. A lighted bell buoy, about 0.5 mile NNW from the    later; for high-water heights subtract 3.8 feet from the high-water
rock, marks the E side of the main channel to Sitka.             height at Sitka. Shoal depths of 3/4 fathom are off the entrance and
 (114) Zenobia Rock, with 21/4 fathoms over it, is about 2 miles    in the outer narrows, and a rock awash at high water is on the S
ENE of Kulichkof Rock and about 1 mile WSW of Liar Rock, the    side of the outer narrows near the inner end.
westernmost rock of The Eckholms.                                  (126) Birdsnest Bay is a small shoal bay between Camp Coo-
 (115) The shoreline from Caution Island (56056.2'N.,    gan Bay and No Thorofare Bay. A small foul passage connects
135ï¿½21.6'W.) N to Deep Inlet is rocky with heavy spruce timber    with Camp Coogan Bay, but can be used only by small boats at
growing to the storm high-water line. Many off-lying islets, and    half tide or more. Use this passage only with local knowledge.
rocks, awash and submerged, are found along this coast, making it    (127) Silver Bay, at the E end of Eastern Channel, extends in a
dangerous to traverse without local knowledge. A pass, carrying 1    NE direction for 0.8 mile, then SE about 4.4 miles. A light on
fathom at low water, is used by small boats and fishing craft    Entry Point on the W side, marks the entrance to the bay.
between Povorotni Point and the islets off it, but should not be    Unlighted log rafts, moored close to shore, extend about 2.2 miles
attempted without local knowledge.                               from Sugarloaf Point. On the opposite side of the bay log rafts
 (116) Three Entrance Bay, the long narrow shallow bay S of    extend from Herring Cove to Bear Cove. Smoke from the pulpmill
Cape Burunof with three entrances, is a protected anchorage for    in Sawmill Cove can be seen in the bay.
small boats, but is seldom used. The N entrance is the best and    (128) Sawmill Cove, at the N end of Silver Bay, about 1 mile
will carry 11/4 fathoms. In W weather, all entrances are exposed to    above the entrance, is the site of a large pulpmill with wharves on
the open sound. Do not use this bay without local knowledge.     the W  side of the cove. The facilities for Sawmill Cove are
 (117) Pirate Cove, the first cove NE of Cape Burunof, is a pro-    described later in this chapter under wharves for Sitka.
tected anchorage at the head, but is constricted and shoal. Two to  (129) Herring Cove is on the N side of Silver Bay, about 1.5
three small boats can anchor.                                    miles within the entrance. In 1976, the entire bay was used for log
 (118) Samsing Cove, the second cove E of Cape Burunof, is a    storage. At times, small craft can tie up to the log storage booms.
well-protected anchorage for small boats with easy access from    Mariners should pass with caution the 1 /2-fathom spot in the mid-
the W side and good holding ground of mud and sand in 2 to 81/2   dle of the entrance.
fathoms.                                                           (130) Bear Cove is on the E side of Silver Bay, halfway up the
 (119) Sandy Cove, the cove E of Samsing Cove and SW of the    SE arm. Most of this cove, in 1976, was used for log storage, and
entrance to Deep Inlet, is a protected anchorage for small craft in   like Herring Cove, small craft at times can tie up to the log storage
51/4 to 91/4 fathoms, mud and sand bottom.                       booms.
 (120) The Eckholms are a small group of islets and bare rocks    (131) Arguello Island is a small island on the S side at the head
at the entrance to Eastern Channel, about 1.8 miles NNE of Cape    of Silver Bay. Anchorage in 15 fathoms can be had W  of the
Burunof; the easternmost islets are wooded. The Eckholms Light    island. Enter to the W of the island, because a 11/4-fathom shoal is
(57000.6'N., 135021.5'W.), 33 feet above the water and shown    in the middle of the passage S of the island. Small vessels can






                                             12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND                                                  223


anchor in 8 fathoms, with a constricted swinging area, about 0.2    9 and 11. In 1966, shoaling also was reported in the same area;
mile SSE of the island. During NE and S winds, anchorage is poor    extent of shoaling is unknown. Caution is advised in transiting this
in the SE end of Silver Bay.                                       area.
                                                                    (141). Anchorages.-Anchorage in 7 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom,
 (132) . Charts 17327, 17320.-Sitka Harbor and approaches.-    can be had at the Eastern Anchorage about 0.4 mile SW of the
The greater part of the approaches to Sitka Harbor covers the NE   entrance to Jamestown Bay. The swell from outside makes this
side of Sitka Sound. The area is reef studded, with numerous    anchorage uneasy in S weather.
wooded islands and isolated shoals. These are charted and need no    (142) Anchorage can also be had at the Western Anchorage, E
detailed description because they lack outstanding or prominent    of Channel Rock, but it is not very convenient, because of its dis-
features. Lights mark the principal islands in the approaches or at    tance from the landing.
the turns in channels; buoys mark the reefs and shoals in way of    (143) During the winter NE gales sometimes sweep across the
the channels. The harbor is easy to approach, and with due atten7    Eastern Anchorage with considerable force and make it rather
tion to the chart and by following the aids, the navigator should    unsafe. In S gales the sea is felt considerably at both the Eastern
have little difficulty in entering in clear weather.               and Western Anchorages.
 (133) Japonski Island, wooded, is the largest island in the        (144) Whiting Harbor, W of Japonski Island, affords anchorage
approaches to Sitka. There is a wharf along its E side. Sealing    in about 12 fathoms, mud bottom, with Japonski Island Aero Light
Cove, a shallow basin off the SE end of the island, is formed by    (57003'14"N., 135021'52"W.) bearing 0400, distant 0.4 mile. This
Charcoal Island and Alice Island on its SW and S sides, and by    anchorage is exposed to W and NW winds and swells and is sel-
Harbor Island on its E side. The entrance to the basin is marked    dom used, because most vessels prefer the Eastern Anchorage at
by a light and daybeacons. The submerged ruins of a pier are on    Sitka.
the SW side of the entrance and extend more than half way across    (145) Jamestown Bay, about 1.5 miles E of Sitka, affords
the entrance. These islands are connected to Japonski Island by    anchorage in 9 to 12 fathoms, mud bottom, about 400 yards off-
landfills. The runway of the Sitka airport extends SE along the SW  shore and 300 yards W  of the rocks, awash at high water, in the
side of Japonski Island, thence over a landfill to the S end of Char-    NE part of the bay.
coal Island, (locally called Fruit Island). An aerolight is shown    (146)  Other anchorages may be used by large ships, and many
from near the NW end of Japonski Island.                           others are suitable for small fishing vessels' and other small craft,
 (134) Mount Edgecumbe is an unincorporated community on    provided local kn
Japonski Island. The State of Alaska maintains a large school with    and dangers. One of the best ship anchorages is just off the chan-
                                                                   and dangers. One of the best ship anchorages is just off the chan-
the necessary housing for students and staff on the island.
 the necessary housing for students and staff on the island. hnel courses for the NW approach to Sitka. The average depth is 8
 (135)  Channel Rock Light 8 (57ï¿½03.6'N., 135022. 1'W.), 26 feet    fathoms, mud bottom, with Channel Rock Light 8 bearing 289ï¿½,
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a triangular    distant about 0.2 to 0.3 mile.
red daymark, on the rock that is almost in midchannel at the NW
                                                                     (147) Dangers.-There'are numerous rocks, reefs, and shoals in
entrance to Sitka Harbor.                                          the approaches to Sitka Harbor, all of which are charted; most are
 (136)  Sitka, the site of an early Russian settlement and once the
capital of Alaska, is a major fishing port on the E side of Sitka    nels are marked.
Sound. Sitka is the main distribution point for the settlements in             . a m a
the NW section of SE Alaska; Two oil companies, a large pulp-        (148) Pasbcge  ofSimpsonRock adTsaritsaR            shouldbe
                                                                   avoided, because of the numerous obstructions S of Kayak
mill, and several seafood processing plants are here. Sitka also has
a National Military Cemetery, a National Monument, and the    Islands, Whale Island, and Bamdoroshni Island.
Alaska Pioneer Home. The deepest draft of vessels calling at the     (14) In September 1987, a 9-fathom shoal spot was reported
                                                                   about 1.1 miles NE of Bamdoroshni Island, 300 yards N of Rocky
port in, 1976 was 30 feet.                                  .      Patch in about 57001'57.5"N., 135017'53"W.
 (137)  Prominent features.-The white building of the Indian
Health Service Hospital, at the NW side of Mount Edgecumbe, on       (150) Middle Channel has numerous shoals and dangers and
Japonski Island, the lighted towers of Sitka-Mount Edgecumbe    should be used only by small vessels with thorough local knowl-
(John O'Connell) Bridge, a grey cement silo on the NW  side of    edge. The passage between Kayak Islands and Whale Island is
Jamestown Bay, and the aerolight at the airport, on the W  side of    foul and the bottom very irregular. A 3/4-fathom depth is near the
Japonski Island, are the most prominent objects when approaching    center of this passage.
the harbor.                                                          (151) Harbor Rock, marked by a daybeacon, is inthe NW part
 (138) Channels.-From the sea, three natural channels lead to    of Sitka Harbor in about 57003'14"N., 135020'47"W. Boulders
Sitka among islands and reefs on the NE side of Sitka Sound.    with 3 fathoms and 23/4 fathoms are about 140 yards 1250, and 250
Eastern Channel is the widest and main entrance; the principal    yards 1350, respectively, from Harbor Rock. These boulders are
dangers are marked by buoys. Middle Channel has its entrance    close to and E of the courses followed by ships; caution is advised.
between Kayak Islands and Passage Islands; it is not recom-          (152) Bridges.-The Sitka-Mount Edgecumbe (John O'Connell)
mended. Western Channel is used by vessels that enter from the    Bridge is a fixed highway bridge with a clearance of 52 feet and
sea and wish to go alongside a wharf heading SE; the channel has    crosses the S entrance to Sitka Harbor from Harbor Island to the
its entrance W of Makhnati Island.                                 vicinity of Castle Hill in Sitka.
  (139) A Federal project provides for a channel 22 feet deep and    (153) Tides.-(See the Tide Tables for predictions at Sitka.)
150 feet wide on the E side of Harbor Rock. The channel marked      (154) Currents.-In the open sound the tidal currents are weak
by lighted buoys on the W  side of Harbor Rock has a controlling    and somewhat rotary turning clockwise. Stronger currents may be
depth of about 26 feet and a width of about 120 feet.              expected among the islands.
  (140) In 1962-1966, vessels have reported striking submerged       (155) In Sitka Harbor the flood sets NW and the ebb SE. Veloci-
objects in the channel W of Harbor Rock between Lighted Buoys    ties are small. In midchannel off the wharves velocities of 0.5 knot






224                                          12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND


were observed. (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predic-       (170)  Sitka  Sound  Seafoods  Wharf  (57ï¿½03'06"N.,
tions.)                                                             135020'33"W.): about 475 yards NW of the bridge on the E side of
  (156)  Weather.-Winter is the most difficult season. With tern-    the harbor; 195-foot SW face, SE side 440 feet long, NW side 365
peratures around the freezing mark, E and SE winds blow more    feet long; 36 feet alongside the face; 22 feet along the SE and NW
than 50 percent of the time from October through February; south-    sides; water is available; SE side of wharf used to berth tugs; sea-
easterlies average 10 knots or more. Calms occur 14 to 18 percent    food processing and freezing plant at rear; six hoists to 3/4-ton, and
of the time, compared to 20 to 25 percent from May through Sep-    one 2- and three 1-ton forklifts are available; receipt and occa-
tember when NW winds are frequent. Visibilities are worst in win-    sional shipment of seafood; mooring, fueling, and icing fishing
ter and summer; precipitation is most frequent in fall. Snow falls    vessels; owned and operated by Sitka Seafoods, Inc.
from November through April. (See page T-3 for Sitka climato-        (171) Fresh Fish Co. Wharf (57ï¿½03'11"N., 135ï¿½20'38"W.): about
logical table.)                                                    670 yards NW of the bridge on the E side of the harbor; 110-foot
 (157) Pilotage, Sitka.-Pilotage, except for certain exempted    face with 15 feet alongside; deck height, 17 feet; receipt of sea-
vessels, is compulsory for all vessels navigating the inside waters    food, mooring fishing boats and small craft; operated by Fresh
of the State of Alaska. (See Pilotage, Alaska, indexed as such,    Fish Co.
chapter 3 for details.)                                              (172) Seafood Producers Cooperative Wharf (57ï¿½13'15"N.,
 (158) Vessels en route Sitka meet the pilot boat about 0.25 mile    135ï¿½20'42.5"W.): 228-foot face; depth alongside, 16 feet; deck
N of The Eckholms Light (57000.6'N., 135021.5'W.).                 height, 20 feet; four 11/2-ton hoists, and three 1- to 3-ton capacity
 (159) The pilot boat, a tugboat, can be contacted by calling    forklifts; receipt and occasional shipment of seafood, icing fishing
"SITKA PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channels 16, 13, or 12.               vessels; owned and operated by Seafood Producers Cooperative.
 (160) Towage.-Tugs up to 2,200 hp are available 24 hours a day     (173)  Sitka City Dock (57003'18"N., 135020'49"W.): 350-foot
at Sitka for assistance in docking and undocking. They are    face; depth alongside, 18 feet; deck height, 20 feet; shipment of
equipped with VHF-FM channels 16, 13, and 12. Arrangements    fish, and mooring of vessels; owned and operated by the City of
for tugs should be made well in advance through ships' agents.     Sitka.
 (161)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agriculturalFuelDock(5703'19"N., 13520'50"W.):about350
quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and    yards NW of Sitka City Dock; offshore steel float with 60-foot
 (162)app end ix for addresses.) *enforced in accordance withs of    face; depth alongside, 12 feet; receipt of petroleum products, bun-
 (162) Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of    kering vessels; pipelines extend to storage tanks at rear, total
the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-
ter 1.) The Indian Health Service maintains a large, well-staffed    capacity 13,000 barrels; one   and two 2-inch pipelines extend to
                                                                   metered pumps on float; owned and operated by Sitka Fuels, Inc.
hospital on Japonski Island; it is available to the public in emer-
   gency cases. Sitka also has a community hospital.                (175)  U.S. Coast Guard Wharf (57ï¿½03'01"N., 135ï¿½20'37"W.):
 genc(163)  Sitka s acustomsport ofentry.                          about 340 yards NW of the bridge on the W  side of the harbor;
 (164)  Coast Guard.Sitka Coast Guard Air Station is at Sitka    223-foot face; 42 feet alongside; deck height, 25 feet; water and
Airport on the NW part of Japonski Island. A Coast Guard vessel    electrical connections are available; berthing for U.S. Coast Guard
is stationed at Sitka.                                             and other Government vessels; owned and operated by U.S. Gov-
 (165) Wharves.-The wharves for Sitka are on the W side of
Sawmill Cove, in Sitka Harbor, and in Starrigavan Bay. All           (176) Darrin Barge Landing (57007'01"N., 135023'30"W.):
wharves except the U.S. Coast Guard Wharf and the Alaska State    about 4.8 miles N of the bridge at the S side of an unnamed cove;
Ferry Terminal are privately owned and operated.                   343 feet of berthage, with dolphins; 10 feet alongside; three 15-ton
 (166) Alaska Lumber and Pulp Company Dock (5702'44"N.,    hand winches are available; 2 acres open storage; one 25-ton fork-
135013'44"W.): on W  side of Sawmill Cove; 500-foot face; depth    lift; a 12-foot and a 16-foot steel ramp; receipt and shipment of
alongside, 28 feet; deck height, 20 feet; water and electrical con-    containerized cargo; operated by Foss Alaska Line and owned by
nections are available; four 8-ton forklift trucks are available;    Dorothy Darrin.
78,490 square feet of covered storage is available; pulpmill         (177)  Alaska  State  Ferry  Terminal  (57ï¿½07'47"N.,
machine shop can be used in an emergency; shipment of pulp;    135022'50"W.): about 5.6 miles N of the bridge, on the S side of
owned and operated by Alaska Lumber and Pulp Company, Inc.         Starrigavan Bay; 450 feet of berthing, with dolphins; 30 feet
 (167) Alaska Lumber and Pulp Company Transfer Bridge and    alongside; 35-ton transfer bridge; transport passengers and vehi-
Chlorine Dock (57002'48"N., 135013'40"W.): 268 feet with dol-    cles; bus transportation to Sitka is available from the terminal;
phins; 15 feet alongside; rail connections to the pulpmill; receipt    owned and operated by the State of Alaska, Division of Marine
of chemicals; owned and operated by Alaska Lumber and Pulp    Transportation.
Company, Inc.                                                        (178) Sampson Tug and Barge Company Dock (57ï¿½07'47"N.,
 (168) Alaska Lumber and Pulp Company Utility Dock                 135ï¿½22'36"W.): about 5.8 miles above the bridge, 300 yards E of
(57ï¿½02'52"N., 135013'39"W.): 170-foot face; 35 feet alongside;    the ferry terminal on the S side of Starrigavan Bay; 190-foot face;
pipelines extend to tank farm in rear; special purpose crane is on    30 feet alongside; receipt and shipment of containerized general
dock; receipt of wood chips; owned and operated by Alaska Lum-     cargo and moorage and repairs to company tugs; owned and oper-
ber and Pulp Company, Inc.                                         ated by Sampson Tug and Barge Company.
 (169) Chevron U.S.A. Wharf (57ï¿½02'55"N., 135ï¿½20'20"W.):            (179)  Supplies.-Provisions, fishing supplies, and limited
most S wharf on the E side of Sitka Harbor, about 75 yards N of    amounts of marine supplies are available in Sitka. Diesel fuel, gas-
the Sitka-Mount Edgecumbe Bridge; 150-foot face; depth along-    oline, distillates, lubricating oils, and greases can be obtained at
side, 30 feet; deck height, 25 feet; pipelines extend to tank farm in    the wharves of the oil companies. All of the wharves have water;
rear; receipt of petroleum products by barge; owned and operated    and ice for fishing vessels can be obtained at the Conway Corpora-
by Chevron U.S.A., Inc.                                            tion Wharf.






                                              12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND                                                   225


 (180) Repairs.-There are no drydocking or major repair facili-    side the floats. There are 97 berths and 10 transient berths at the
ties for large vessels in Sitka or in southeastern Alaska. The near-    floats. Water and electricity are available.
est facilities are in British Columbia and the State of Washington.   (190) A 90-foot small-craft fuel float is on the NW side of the
A marine railway is on the NW side of Jamestown Bay, about 1.6    Sitka Sound Seafoods Wharf.
miles E of Sitka. The railway can handle craft up to 80 feet long,    (191) Thomsen Harbor (Thomsen Boat Harbor), protected by an
28-foot beam, and draft not exceeding 8 feet, for self repairs.     L-shaped floating breakwater, is the most northerly basin on the E
 (181)  A boatyard immediately W  has a 50-foot bulkhead with    side of Sitka Harbor, about 330 yards NNW of Harbor Rock Day-
18 feet alongside, and a 236-foot float and a 46-foot float for craft    beacon. In 1976, depths in the basin were reported to range from
being repaired. A 3-ton hoist and a 12-ton forklift can handle    about 30 feet in the entrance and the W part of the basin to about 6
boats up to 26 feet long for repairs to fiberglas hulls and engines.    feet along the E side of the basin. About 260 craft can be accom-
Marine supplies and dry storage are available.                      modated alongside the floats where water and electricity are avail-
 (182) The city-operated grids, 80 feet and 96 feet long, are close    able. Transient berths are available. A boat-launching ramp is at
NE of the City Float and 0.2 mile N of the bridge. Water, in sum-    the S end of the harbor.
mer, and electricity are available. There is a 72-hour limit on the   (192)  In July 1987, a wreck was reported just W  of the entrance
grids.                                                              to the basin in about 57ï¿½03'21"N., 135ï¿½20'59"W.
 (183)  A privately owned and operated repair facility for tugs is   (193)  Communications-Sitka has regular passenger, express,
on the S side of Starrigavan Bay. A grid inshore handles craft up to    and freight service to Puget Sound ports, British Columbia, and
500 tons and 110 feet long for a 3-hour maximum time limit, for    other Alaska ports and towns by water and air. The Alaska Marine
hull repairs. This grid is available for public use only in an emer-    Highway System, operating from Starigavan Bay, about 5 miles
gency. Also at the facility is an independent machine shop that can    N of the city, has daily ferry service during the summer to Juneau,
do limited shaft repairs and complete diesel engine repairs. Sev-    Haines, Skagway, Petersburg, Wrangell, Ketchikan, and Prince
eral machine shops and an electronic repair shop are available at    Rupert,. B.C., and weekly service to Kake, Hoonah, and Seattle.
the Sitka waterfront for minor repairs.                             The schedule is less frequent during the winter. In addition to the
 (184)  Small-craft facilities.-The city operates four small-boat    scheduled airlines, other air services operate from Sitka on a char-
basins and two grids at Sitka. A fourth basin is operated by the    ter basis. Radiotelephone and telephone communications are
U.S. Forest Service. These facilities are on the E side of the har-    maintained with the other States and other parts of Alaska.
bor, except for the city-operated small-boat basins in Crescent Bay   (194) The National Military Cemetery is about 0.3 mile N of
and Sealing Cove. The city harbormaster with an office at the    Crescent Bay.
City Float enforces a 3-knot speed limit and a no-wake law in the
           City   o and s a 35-knot speed limit in the main harbor channel  (195) Sitka National Historical Park, 57 acres in area, is E and
makes berthassignmts anda theed city basins                         t    maind  h bontros  ch ane l  W of the entrance to Indian River. It is the site of the Indian stock-
makes berth assignments in the city basins, and controls the use of    ade where the Tlingit Tribe made their last stand against the Rus-
                                                                     ade where the Tlingit Tribe made their last stand against the Rus-
the grids. The harbormaster can be contacted on VHF-FM channel
16 (156.80 MHz) and by telephone (907-747-3439).
 (185) The Crescent Bay Boat Basin, on the N side of Crescent
Bay is about 0.35 mile ENE of the E end of Sitka-Mount                (196) Charts 17324, 17320.-Watson Point (57ï¿½04.0'N.,
Edgecumbe Highway Bridge. A Federal project provides for a 10-    135021.8'W.) is on the E side of the NW approach to Sitka Harbor,
foot depth in the entrance channel and basin. In June-July 1992,    about 0.9 mile NW of Harbor Rock. A rocky ledge extends about
the controlling depth was 10 feet in the entrance channel and bas              off the point. When approaching Sitka Harbor from the
except for lesser depths along the edges of the project. The basin    NW, exercise care to give this point a berth of about 300 yards,
is entered at the SW end between two breakwaters, which have    and pass about 50 yards W  of the lighted buoy about 350 yards S
their ends marked by lights. A shoal, marked by a buoy, is about    of the point.
100 yards S of the W  breakwater light. The floats can accommo-       (197) Kasiana Islands are a group of islands on the W  side of
date 500 small craft. Electricity is available, but water can be had    the NW approach to Sitka Harbor. A reef, well marked by kelp,
only in the summer. No transient moorage is available. A boat-    extends about 0.6 mile SE of the easternmost island and termi-
launching ramp is at the SW end of the basin.                       nates in a rock awash. The rock awash is on a line from the E tan-
  (186)  Sealing Cove Boat Basin is at the SE end of Japonski    gent of the islands to the middle of Battery Island, and is almost
Island between Mount Edgecumbe and Alice Island. In May 1987,    midway between them.
the controlling depth was 8 feet in the entrance channel; a light     (198) Halibut Point, on the E side of the channel, is about 2.4
and daybeacons mark the entrance channel. Transient berths, elec-    miles NW of Watson Point.
tricity, water, and a launching ramp are available in the basin.      (199) Old Sitka Rocks are a group of rocks that bare at all
  (187) A 50-foot small-craft fuel float with a depth of 12 feet    stages of the tide and extend 0.5 mile from the E shore. The N and
alongside is on the NW side of the Standard Oil Company Wharf.      largest one has two or three scraggy trees, and the rest are bare.
  (188) The U.S. Forest Service Basin is the most southerly on the    The westernmost rock of the group covers only at highest tides
E side of the harborjust N of the Standard Oil Company Wharf. A     and is marked by Old Sitka Rocks Light 2 (57006.9'N.,
Federal project provides for a 10-foot deep basin. In 1977, the    135024.7&'W.), 30 feet above the water and shown from a skele-
basin was at project depth. The basin is used by vessels of the U.S.    ton tower with a red triangular daymark. The main channel is W of
Forest Service and other Government agencies in the area.           Old Sitka Rocks, but a narrow channel is between them and an
  (189) The City Float, a divided basin with a N and S section,    island near the shore. The shore from Old Sitka Rocks to Western
each with its own entrance, is on the E side of the harbor directly    Anchorage should not be approached closer than 300 yards.
opposite the Government Wharf on Japonski Island. The basin is        (200) The channel passing W of Old Sitka Rocks and E of Mid-
protected on the channel side by a log boom breakwater. In 1976,    die Island and Kasiana Islands is the main channel for all vessels
a depth of 6 feet was reported in the entrance channels and along-    southbound for Sitka via the inside route. This route contains deep







226                                         12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND


water and the only danger is a 5-foot rocky shoal, marked by a    wise Islands and Beehive Island. Small vessels can anchor in the
buoy on its E side, about 0.6 mile SW of Halibut Point.          cove W of Beehive Island in 5 to 6 fathoms.
 (201) Starrigavan Bay is a bight, open W, on the E side about    (209) Nakwasina Passage separates the N side of Halleck
1.5 miles N of Old Sitka Rocks, and just S of the entrance to    Island from Baranof Island. It has a NE direction for about 1.9
Katlian Bay. "Old Sitka," now a State Historical Monument, is on    miles from the N entrance of Olga Strait, then it takes an E trend
the point dividing the two coves on the E side of the bay. In 1799,    for about 3 miles to where it joins Nakwasina Sound. The W part
the Russian fort of St. Michael stood on this point. The N cove is   of the passage is about 0.8 mile wide, with about 15 to 20 fathoms,
filled by a flat, and a rock that bares is 150 yards off the N shore W  affording anchorage. The navigable channel is winding and con-
of the end of the flat. The anchorage is abreast the S cove, about    stricted in places to 30 yards by extensive flats. The limits of the
400 yards from shore, in 18 to 20 fathoms, soft bottom. W winds    channel are distinguishable at low water. The controlling depth in
and some sea have a fair sweep into this bay. State-owned and    the best channel is about 10 feet; this passage is suitable only for
operated fish pens are anchored on the NE side of the bay; mari-    small craft. In Nakwasina Passage the currents are, in general, too
ners are advised to use caution in this area.                    weak or variable to be predicted. However, in the channel about
 (202) The Alaska State Ferry Terminal is on the S shore of Star-    1.5 miles W of Allan Point, the current velocity is 2.0 knots on
rigavan Bay. In 1976, depths of 30 feet were reported alongside    the flood and 1.6 knots on the ebb. (See the Tidal Current Tables
the terminal. Bus transportation between the terminal and Sitka is   for daily predictions.)
available.                                                         (210) Krestof Sound is W of Krestof Island and connects Neva
 (203) A private barge facility with a 12-foot and a 16-foot steel    Strait with Sitka Sound, through Hayward Strait. Sound Islands
ramp is on the SW shore of the small cove, about 0.7 mile ENE of    are at the NE part of the sound. The sound is out of the line of
Old Sitka Rocks Light 2 and about 0.5 mile S of Starrigavan Bay.    travel and is of no commercial value. At its NW end the sound
Containerized cargo is handled at the facility. (See wharves at    connects by a high-water passage with Sukoi Inlet. At its S end the
Sitka for a detailed description of the facilities in this area.)  sound is filled by Magoun Islands, with a narrow channel E and
 (204) Katlian Bay has its entrance about 2 miles NNE of Old    W  of them and a boat channel through them. East Channel is
Sitka Rocks and extends in a NE direction, curving E near its   clear in midhannel; the dangers are shown on the chart. West
head. There are no dangers except a flat that extends about 0.2    Channel should not be attempted except by small craft.
mile from the head of the bay. At 2.5 miles within. the entrance to  (211) De Groff Bay opens N of East Channel; its entrance is
the bay an arm extends NW; fair anchorage: can be had in this arm    narrow, has a depth of 33/4 fathoms, is overgrown with kelp, and
NW of the group of islands on the N side in 11 to 20 fathoms, and    should only be attempted by small craft. Port Krestof is a broad
very small vessels can anchor in Cedar Cove, the narrow part at    bight on the S side of West Channel; an anchorage can be had in 6
the head of this arm, in 4ï¿½1/ to 7 fathoms.                      to 13 fathoms, taking care at high water not to get on the flat that
 (205) Promisla Bay, on the NW side of Sitka Sound about 1.3   fills the S end of the port to a distance of about 0.5 mile out to an
miles W from Siginaka Islands, indents the SE shore of Krestof    islet 12 feet high. A better anchorage can be had in Mud Bay, W
Island. There is a small wooded island in its entrance with a bare    of the Magoun Islands, taking care to avoid the 3-foot shoal about
rock about 0.2 mile E of the island. The depths in the bay are 15 to    130 yards off the SE point of the bay. Two private mooring buoys
21 fathoms, and a fair anchorage can probably be had near its head    are in Mud Bay. Hayward Strait, connecting East Channel with
in 16 fathoms, mud bottom, with good protection in almost any    Sitka Sound, has a good channel through it, but the shores are
weather.                                                         fringed with rocks and reefs, especially at its S entrance, where
 (206) Olga Strait, between Krestof Island and Halleck Island,    they extend almost to midchannel from the W side and well off
                                                                   from the shore on the NE side.
is 4 miles long in a NW direction, with an average width of 0.2
mile, and forms a part of the inside route from Sitka to Salisbury  (212)  A microwave tower, that can be seen from Hayward Strait
Sound. It is in general clear, with a controlling depth of 4 fathoms    and Sitka Sound, is on a hill about 2.6 miles W of the N entrance
in midchannel. On both sides of the channel are small flats where    to Hayward Strait.
streams empty and the shores are fringed with kelp except off      (213) Currents.-The flood current enters Krestof Sound from
these flats. In Olga Strait the current sets NW on the flood and SE    Sitka Sound through Hayward Strait and from Salisbury Sound
on the ebb. Off Creek Point the velocity is 1.6 knots on the flood    through Neva Strait and, when the water has risen high enough,
and 1.2 knots on the ebb. (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily    through Sukoi Inlet. They meet somewhere in the sound. (See the
predictions.) About 100 yards off Eastern Point is a rock with a    Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions of places in the entrance
least depth of 5 feet. About 0.8 mile within the SE entrance is a    to the sound from Hayward Strait.)
shoal about 300 yards across with a least depth of 20.feet, marked  (214) Neva Point Reef extends about 75 yards S from Neva
by a light. It extends about two-thirds of the way across the chan-    Point on the E side of the S entrance to Neva Strait. It is marked by
nel from the SW shore. Scattered kelpgrows all over the shoal.   Neva Point Reef Light 12 (57014.1'N., 135ï¿½33.1'W.), 17 feet
 (207) Middle Shoal is 2,2 miles from the SE entrance to Olga    above the water, with a red triangular daymark on a pile off the
Strait, midchannel between two small streams, one on each side. It   point.
is 400 yards long in the direction of the channel, with lumpshav-  (215) Neva Strait between Baranof Island and Partofshikof
ing 18 to 22 feet over them. At the N end of the shoal is a lighted    Island, together with Olga Strait, is the inside route between Sal-
buoy, and a daybeacon is at the S end. Kelp grows all over the    isbury Sound and Sitka Sound. The strait is narrow throughout and
shoal, but usually shows only at slack water,                    foul and requires careful piloting especially in Whitestone Nar-
 (208) Nakwasina Sound separates the E side of Halleck Island    rows.
from Baranof Island. It extends from the S entrance of Olga Strait  (216) A Federal project provides for a channel dredged to a
in a general NE direction and connects with Nakwasiria Passage.    depth of 24 feet through ledge rock in Whitestone Narrows. In
The sound is contracted at its S end to about 0.2 mile by Cross-    February 1988, the controlling depth was 14 feet (24 feet at mid-






                                             12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND                                                  227


channel). The channel is marked by a light, lighted and unlighted    water by a canoe passage with Krestof Sound. The inlet is compar-
buoys, and a 3450 lighted range.                                   atively clear until near its head, but the shores are foul. Anchorage
 (217)  In Neva Strait the flood current sets generally S and ebb    may be selected in any place desired, according to depths of water
current N. The current velocity is about 1.4 knots. (See the Tidal    and swinging room required. The best anchorage is about 2.5
Current Tables for daily predictions.)                             miles inside the entrance, opposite a small stream and flat on the
 (218) Whitestone Cove, NE of Whitestone Point, is a good    W  side, in 7 to 10 fathoms. Only small craft should go into the
anchorage with depths from 5 to 7 fathoms.                         narrow part of the inlet beyond this point.
 (219) The limits of the channel in Neva Strait are well marked     (229) Scraggy Islands are 1.8 miles NW of Kane Islands Light
with thick kelp that shows when the current is weak. At low water    25 and 0.5 mile from the SW shore. The largest island is scantily
the limits are best defined by bare rocks and kelp. The dangers in    wooded with two clumps of trees. Ledges with bare heads extend
the strait are charted and well marked by aids.                    0.4 mile SSE from the island. The channel SW of the island is not
 (220)  Columbine Rock, about 3 feet high and marked by a day-    recommended. The island is surrounded by ledges that bare to a
beacon, is close to the W shore about midway through the strait. A  distance of 100 to 200 yards.
shoal, covered 2 feet, on the opposite side of the channel, is
marked by a lighted buoy. Wyvill Reef, covered at high water, and    (230)  Charts 17325, 17320.-The W  coast of Kruzof Island
marked by a lighted buoy, is about midway between Columbine    trends N and is indented by Shelikof Bay and Gilmer Bay. Mount
Rock and Highwater Island.                                         Edgecumbe occupies the S third of Kruzof Island and is an unmis-
 (221) Highwater Island, wooded and prominent, is connected    takable landmark for this part of the coast. There are no hidden
with the E shore at low water. Anchorage for small craft is found    outlying dangers until Cape Georgiana is reached. Submerged
SE of Highwater Island in 8 fathoms. A rock, with 31/2 fathoms    rocks do exist in the bays and bights along this coast. The 100-
over it and marked by a lighted buoy, is midway between the W      fathom curve is 8 miles from shore abreast Cape Edgecumbe, 12
side of Highwater Island and the W  shore. The main channel    miles abreast Cape Georgiana, and the soundings decrease regu-
between the island and the buoy is about 125 yards wide.           larly to the coast.
 (222) Entrance Island, small and wooded, is close to Zeal          (231) The shore from Cape Edgecumbe to Neva Bay rises in a
Point. Entrance Island Light 24 (57017.5'N., 135ï¿½36.3'W.), 30    precipitous cliff of brown lava and forms a prominent landmark.
feet above the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red    Numerous large caves or blowholes are to be seen in this lava cliff.
triangular daymark on the SW point of the island, marks the N      From Neva Bay to Beaver Point the shore is lower and rises in
entrance to Neva Strait.                                           gradual wooded slopes. The shore between Cape Edgecumbe and
 (223) St. John Baptist Bay is to the E of Entrance Island. The    Beaver Point is fringed with ledges that extend 0.1 to 0.5 mile off-
NE shore is clear and bold for 1 mile, then is irregular with two    shore, and shoal water, marked by thick kelp, extends from 0.2 to
small bights that are flats at low water. The SW shore from    0.5 mile offshore. The bottom slopes regularly out to beyond the
Entrance Island to where the bay narrows is irregular with deep    50-fathom curve and is uniformly rocky. There are no dangers
water close by the points. A timbered islet is 200 yards off the SW  more than 0.5 mile offshore.
shore and 0.6 mile SE of Entrance Island, with rock ledges that are  (232) Neva Bay, 2.5 miles N of Cape Edgecumbe, is open to the
covered at high water and extend to the next point. S of the islet    sea and the entrance is choked with kelp; it is of no importance to
the bight is clear, furnishing good anchorage for small craft in 7    navigation.
fathoms. After this point is passed, the SE shore is clear except for  (233) Beaver Point, 5.5 miles N from Cape Edgecumbe, is low
flats from small streams.                                          and wooded and forms the S point to Shelikof Bay. A reef, marked
  (224) Anchorages for moderate-sized vessels are near the center    by thick kelp and having numerous rocks that bare, extends for 0.8
of the narrow part of the bay in 11 to 15 fathoms, and on the N    mile N of Beaver Point. The open bight, close E of the point, is
side just NW of the narrow part in 19 fathoms. This bay is open to    full of rocks and kelp.
the sea through Salisbury Sound, which gives prevailing NW           (234) Shelikof Bay, with depths ranging from 10 to 20 fathoms,
winds a clear sweep to the anchorages. In SE weather the bay is   is open W, and is not recommended as an anchorage. Off Beaver
said to be subject to severe williwaws that make the anchorages    Point and along the S shore kelp grows thick out to 6 and 10 fath-
undesirable.                                                       oms. In the SE corner is a sand beach 1.5 miles long. The N side of
  (225) Gilmer Cove is on the SW shore 1.2 miles NW  of    Shelikof Bay is foul with numerous rocky islets and ledges that
Entrance Island. It is 250 yards long by 75 yards wide, with a flat    extend 0.3 to 1 mile offshore.
150 yards wide at the head, and is a fit anchorage only for small   (235) Port Mary, at the head of Shelikof Bay, has general
craft in 7 fathoms.                                                depths of 3 to 5 fathoms except atits N end where it is shoaler. A
  (226) Kane Islands are two low and wooded islands with sev-    large rock, about 20 feet high, is off the S entrance point. The only
eral rocks and reefs close-to, except on the SE side, where they    known danger in Port Mary is a rock awash 300 yards off the SE
extend 300 to 400 yards in a direction parallel to the channel. They    shore and 0.7 mile NE of the S entrance point. Small craft can find
are surrounded with kelp and have good water close to their edges.    protected anchorage in S weather in the small bight, with a high
The rocks on the SE side of the easternmost island are covered    rock in its center, on the SE side of the port.
with grass. The channel is good on either side of the islands, but  (236) Small vessels can find partially protected anchorage in the
the NE side is always used, because it is more direct.             bight called Cuvacan Covej on the N side of Shelikof Bay, about
  (227) Kane Islands Light 25 (57019.4'N., 135039.8'W.), 40 feet    1.6 miles E of Slaughter Island, and E of a group of islands and W
above the water and shown from a square frame structure with a    of a bold, wooded point. To enter the cove, pass S and E of the
green square daymark on the E side of the E Kane Islands, marks    group of islands and anchor in 3 to 4 fathoms, sand bottom.
the NE channel.                                                      (237) Goleta Cove is on the N side of Shelikof Bay, about 1.1
  (228) Sukoi Inlet has its N entrance about 0.8 mile W of Kane    miles E of Slaughter Island. The cove affords protected anchorage
Islands and affords good anchorage. At its head it connects at high    for small craft and is much used by local fishermen. A large bare






228                                         12. WEST COAST OF BARANOF ISLAND


rock is in the middle of the entrance, and the passage E of the rock    The bight on the SE side of the bay affords the best anchorage for
is choked with other rocks and kelp. A rock that bares at half tide    craft up to 150 feet long. An anchorage, E of the reef, has depths
is in the middle of the W passage. To enter, pass very close W of    of 5 to 6 fathoms, hard bottom.
the large bare rock and E of the rock that bares at half tide.      (242) A submerged rock is on the E side in the approach to the
 (238) Point Mary, the N point at the entrance to Shelikof Bay, is   bay, on line from Point Amelia to a white rocky islet about 58 feet
high and wooded. Slaughter Island, off Point Mary, is grass-cov-    high and close to the E shore. The rock is about 0.4 mile from the
ered and connected with the shore at extreme low water. Rocks    islet, has 31/2 fathoms over it, and shows a breaker at low water
that bare at various stages of the tide are off the E, SW, and W  with a moderate swell.
sides of the island.                                                (243) Approaching from S, give the E shore a berth of over 0.8
 (239) Point Amelia (57ï¿½13.5'N., 135ï¿½52.4'W.), 13.7 miles N of   mile to clear the submerged rock off Slaughter Island and the sub-
Cape Edgecumbe, is the NW point at the entrance to Gilmer Bay,    merged rock described above. Otherwise, there are no dangers and
and is the most prominent point between Cape Edgecumbe and    a midchannel course leads safely through the bay.
Cape Georgiana. The point is the terminus of a peninsula. Two       (244) Sealion Islands are 3.5 miles N of Point Amelia. They are
small knolls are at the seaward end; the inner one is wooded and    five in number, the easternmost about 0.8 mile from shore. The
the outer one a cone-shaped rock. Rocks bare at half tide are about    two largest are grass covered, the E one has a number of dead
200 yards offshore. In the bight 2 miles NNE of Point Amelia is a    trees. The easternmost of the group is partially covered with grass;
conspicuous sand beach 0.4 mile long. the remaining two are bare rocks.
 (24o) Gilmer Bay is on the SE side of Point Amelia. About 1       (245) Eagle Rock is about 1.6 miles N of the westernmost
mile inside Point Amelia the bay contracts to 0.6 mile wide; it then    Sealion Islands and 1.4 miles SSW of Cape Georgiana. It is dome-
expands to 1 mile, and terminates in a narrow arm.                shaped and bare.
 (241) The anchorage for large vessels is in midchannel, halfway   (246) Sealion Cove is a small cove about 2 miles SSE of Cape
up the narrow arm in about 15 fathoms, sticky bottom. In summer    Georgiana. A sand beach at the head is almost 1 mile long. A
the swell does not come much beyond the entrance of the arm, but    small peninsula forms its S point.
there is no record of the value of the anchorage in winter gales.










                                 13. SALISBURY SOUND AND PERIL STRAIT

 (1)   This chapter describes Salisbury Sound, Hoonah Sound    sets W. The current velocity is 1 to 1.5 knots. (See the Tidal Cur-
and Peril Strait, the inside passage from Chatham Strait to Sitka,    rent Tables for daily predictions.)
via Neva Strait and Olga Strait.                                  (9)   Cape Georgiana is the S point at the entrance to Salisbury
                                                                   Sound. Mount Georgiana, 1,383 feet high, is a rounded hill,
 (2)   Chart 17320.-Weekly scheduled mail and passenger ves-    about 0.7 mile E of the cape. About 2 miles SE from the cape is
sels bound from Wrangell, Petersburg, Juneau, or Skagway to    the first prominent peak that, from S and W, seems to rise gradu-
Sitka pass through Peril Strait and Salisbury Sound and then pro-    ally from the low point by a series of steps. This is a prominent
ceed S through Neva Strait and Olga Strait. Under adverse condi-    landmark from SW for Salisbury Sound.
tions, when coming S from Juneau or Skagway, they sometimes       (10)  Sea Rock is an irregular, bare ledge, about 6 feet high, 0.6
pass through Icy Strait and Cross Sound, then outside to Salisbury    mile NW of Cape Georgiana. Morskoi Rock, 0.6 mile W of Sea
Sound before entering Neva Strait. Sergius Narrows in Peril Strait    Rock, has 1 fathom over it, is not marked by kelp, and has the sea
is a difficult passage to make under any conditions, because of its   usually breaking over it. The rock is marked on its NW side by a
narrowness and strong tidal currents and eddies. Passage through    seasonal buoy.
Sergius Narrows should only be attempted at slack waterep channel is between these two rocks, and between
erably at high-water slack, and with local knowledge. Small craft,    Sea Rock and the cape, but neither is recommended. Strong tide
barge, and ship traffic is heavy through the narrows; caution is   rips are found around the cape and these two rocks when the wind
advised.                                                         is from NW or NE, whereas with S winds the rips are more preva-
  (3)   Weather.-Salisbury Sound is open to prevailing wind and    lent around Point Leo, on the N side of the entrance to the sound.
sea from the Gulf of Alaska, whereas Peril Strait is sheltered
somewhat by Chichagof Island. In the sound, SW swells fre-         (12)  Klokachef Island, on the N side at the entrance to Salis-
somquently roll in and break aong the    shoreund, sometimells reaching    bury Sound, is of triangular shape. On its S side, bare cliffs, 900
quently roll in and break along the N shore, sometimes reaching
Baranof Island. Winds often draw through Salisbury Sound and    feet high, have the appearance of the N half of a crater and are
                                                                    prominent from well out to sea to the SW. Bare reefs extend from
into Peril Strait, which, because of its orientation, is susceptible to    prominent from well ou to sea to the SW. Bare reefs extend from
both strong southeasterlies and northerlies. These winds are most    the S and W sides of the island. At the   point are sev eral bare
                                                                    rocks and Vincent Reef that extends about 0.4 mile S and gener-
l     ikely from October throu gh frequently disappeavyrs at the mouthies of    ally has the sea breaking over it. From the NW point of the island
moves into the sound but frequently disappears at the mouths of    the Fortuna Reefs extend as a partially submerged reef for 600
Fish Bay and Neva Strait. Occasionally, the fog reaches Peril    the Fortuna Reefs extend as a partially submerged reef for 600
 Strait as far as Sergius Narrows and sometimes fills the strait N of    yards NW to two bare rocks; and thence from these rocks for 0.5
                                                                    mile W as a submerged reef, showing some kelp and always a
                                                                    breaking sea. Klokachef Point, the S point of Klokachef Island, is
                                                                    the N point at the entrance to Salisbury Sound and is marked by
  (4)   Chart 17323.-Salisbury Sound has its entrance from the    Kiokachef Island Light (5724.2'N., 135054.3vW.) 85 feet above
 sea 200 miles NW of Dixon Entrance and connects Peril Strait and    the water and shown from a square frame with a red and white dia-
 Neva Strait with the Pacific Ocean between Cape Georgiana and    the w    ate r and shown from a square frae with a red and white da
 Klokachef Island. About 1.8 miles from the E end, the channel is   ond-hape daymark.
 contracted to 1 mile by Goloi Islands on the N side and Sinitsin   (13)  OlgaRock, about 1.2 miles W of Klokachef Point, on line
 Island on the S. Vessels bound for Sitka from Cross Island, Yak-    with Klokachef Point and the N shore of Salisbury Sound, has '/2
 tat Bay, and the coast W  commonly enter through Salisbury    fathom over it and, except at high water and a very smooth sea,
 Sound, as the distance is less than by way of Cape Edgecumbe and    always shows a breaker. Deep water is between Klokachef Island
 that route puts them sooner into smooth water.                   and the rock.
   (5)   The shores of the sound are foul, especially the N side,   (14)  Kalinin Bay, on the S side of Salisbury Sound 2.5 miles
 which is studded with islands, rocks, and reefs with some kelp. It   inside the entrance, has anchorage near its head that is used by
 is open to the prevailing wind and sea, and generally a SW swell    fishing craft, but its narrow entrance is obstructed by rocks. Large
 rolls in and breaks along the N shore, sometimes reaching Baranof    craft should favor the SW shore in approaching the entrance in
 Island. There are no dangers through the middle of the sound, but    order to avoid a 31/4-fathom kelp-marked shoal off the entrance.
 the depths are irregular and the bottom rocky; banks with depths    Favor the W shore in entering until up to the first bend, then steer
 of 6 to 20 fathoms have been found in the middle of the entrance.  midchannel courses. A large rock awash is about 100 yards off the
   (6)   The country back of the N shore is steep and rugged. The    E shore at the narrowest part of the channel, just before the bay
 S shore is more undulating, though quite high near the ocean, and    widens to form the main anchorage. Another rock awash is close
  is covered with trees from the top to the water's edge.          E.
   (7)   Approaching Salisbury Sound from seaward, especially       (15)  A submerged rock with 1 fathom over it, and usually
  from W, it is sometimes difficult for a stranger to recognize the    marked by a halibut float during the summer, is 100 yards off the
  entrance until close-to. The bare, rugged mountains on the N side    W shore and about 100 yards NW of the large rock awash. Also
  of the sound are prominent, and the sand beach at the head of    marking this site is the ruins of a building with stub piling that
  Sealion Cove (see also chart 17325), 2 miles S of Cape Georgiana,    extends 10 yards offshore. Strangers should enter at half tide or
  is at times useful in identifying the cape.                      low water, passing about 30 yards W of the large rock. Well-pro-
   (8)   Currents.-The current from the sea sets E on the flood    tected anchorage in any weather can be found near the head of the
  into Salisbury Sound, Peril Strait, and Neva Strait. The ebb current    bay in 4 to 5 fathoms, soft mud bottom.

                                                                                                                                  229






230                                        13. SALISBURY SOUND AND PERIL STRAIT


 (16)  Sinitsin Island, low and wooded, is about 0.8 mile E of    0.2 mile W of the outer Channel Rock. There are heavy tide swirls
the entrance to Kalinin Bay, and is the farthest projection on the S    through this narrow part of the strait. The buoy tows under when
side of Salisbury Sound. It should not be approached closer than    currents are strong.
0.2 mile on its N side and 0.5 mile on its W  side. Deep water      (27)  Channel Rocks.extend 250 yards N from the S point at
extends close up to the E side of the island. Small craft sometimes    the N end of Kakul Narrows. The largest rock is about 3 feet high
pass between the island and Kruzof Island, but strangers should    and close-to; N of it are two rocks that cover only at the highest
use this passage with extreme care.                               tides. Kakul Narrows Light 4 (57022.4'N., 135041.0'W.), 27 feet
 (17)  Sinitsin Cove, on the S side of Salisbury Sound 1 mile SE    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red trian-
of Sinitsin Island, has deep water, an irregular, rocky bottom; its    gular daymark. A rock that bares is close N of the light. There is
shores are fringed with ledges. In bad weather the swell rolls    thick kelp close-to, N and E of these rocks.
heavily into this cove.                                             (28)  FishBay has its entrance on the E shore S of Sergius Nar-
 (18)  Goloi Islands, about 5.9 miles E of Klokachef Point and    rows. Sand and gravel beaches show along the shores at low
0.5 mile off the N shore, are two in number and bushy; the N one    water, and at its head is a flat nearly 0.5 mile in extent. In 1976, a
is divided at high water; the S one has the appearance of a flat-    log storage was on this flat. The easternmost of the Haley Rocks
tened cone. There are a number of other islands along and close to    in the entrance, are covered 4 feet and they are surrounded by
the N shore, but these and Krugloi Islands, 0.5 mile E, are the    kelp. A rock awash is 250 yards W  of Haley Rocks. Haley
most prominent. These islands are surrounded by kelp rather    Anchorage, 300 yards from the S shore and about 0.3 mile W of
close-to, and there is deep water close to the edge of the kelp on    Haley Point, has depths of 18 to 20 fathoms, sand bottom, and
their S sides.                                                    affords fair shelter in S weather. Haley Point is a sand flat termi-
 (19)  Round Island, about 0.9 mile E of Goloi Islands, is    nating in a high-water island.
wooded and close to the N shore of Salisbury Sound at the           (29)  Schulze Cove is on the N side of Fish Bay. Piper Island,
entrance to Peril Strait.                                         low and wooded, is in the entrance; the navigable channel, about
                                                                    0.2 mile wide, is between it and the W shore; the channel on the E
 (20)  Chart 17320.-Peril Strait is important as affording a fre-    side of the island should not be attempted. The only danger in the
quently used passage from Salisbury Sound, and the waters S to    approach to the cove is Haley Rocks. It is reported that SE winds
Chatham Strait. Its total length is about 39 miles. From Salisbury    draw through the cove with considerable force.
Sound it extends in a general NE direction for 11.5 miles through   (30)  In 1983, a log storage area occupied most of the cove. The
Kakul Narrows, Sergius Narrows, and either Rose Channel or    log storage rafts are not easily discernible during periods of dark-
Adams Channel to Povorotni Island; this part of the strait is nar-    ness or when visibility is reduced; caution is advised.
row, has frequent changes in direction, and strong tidal currents,  (31)  Suloia Bay, W of the S entrance to Sergius Narrows, has
and strangers, other than small craft, are advised to take a pilot.    anchorage for small craft near its head in 18 to 22 fathoms, rocky
From Povorotni Island the strait has a general NE direction for    bottom. The shores are foul near the anchorage, contracting it
about 4.5 miles to Otstoia Island, where it turns SE for 16 miles to    somewhat, and it is not recommended. Swirls make well into the
Lindenberg Head, and then E for about 7 miles to Chatham Strait.    bay. Suloia Point, the S entrance point to the bay, is marked by a
Some of the more serious dangers are marked by buoys or lights.   light. Suloia Islet,wooded, is in the bay 0.2 mile from the S side
A pilot may sometimes be acquired at Sitka, Juneau, or Ketchikan.  with rocks between. Suloia Rock, bare at low water, is 400 yards
 (21)  Fog from Salisbury Sound occasionally makes into Peril    N of Suloia Islet.
Strait as far as Sergius Narrows, and at times fills the strait N of  (32)  Sergius Channel is a 24-foot-deep and 450-foot-wide
the narrows.                                                      dredged channel that leads through Sergius Narrows. In January
 (22)  Currents.-The flood current from Salisbury Sound sets    1990, the controlling depth was 20 feet, except for 16 feet in the S
NE through Sergius Narrows and Adams Channel and meets the    outside quarter. The channel is marked by two buoys on the S side;
flood from Chatham Strait in the broad part of Peril Strait between    one buoy marks a rock, covered 16 feet, and the other marks the N
Povorotni Island and Otstoia Island; the ebb current sets in the    side of Wayanda Ledge, which makes into the S side of the chan-
opposite direction. In Peril Strait the strongest currents are in    nel. The channel between the buoys and the N project limits is
Sergius Narrows, where the velocity is 5.9 knots on the flood and    about 300 feet wide. Mariners are advised to use caution. Vessels
5.5 knots on the ebb. For other places in the strait, the velocity of    should pass through the narrows only at or near slack water, espe-
the current is between 1.4 and 2.5 knots. (See the Tidal Current    cially with the large tides, and preferably at high-water slack. At
Tables for daily predictions.)                                    the strength of the current it is not safe for any vessel bound either
                                                                    way, especially long ones, between Francis Rocks and Liesnoi
 (23)  Chart 17323.-Point Kakul, the SE point at the entrance    Shoal. With the smallest tides those with local knowledge pass
to Peril Strait from Salisbury Sound, is bold and wooded. Kakul    through at all stages of the current.
Rock, with 2 fathoms over it and marked by kelp, is 275 yards W     (33)  Mariners are advised to be on hand at least one-half hour
from the point. A lighted buoy marks the W side of the rock.      before the predicted times of slack water in case abnormal condi-
 (24)  Kakul Narrows forms the entrance to Peril Strait from    tions cause slack water to occur earlier than the stated times. If the
Salisbury Sound. The narrows are deep, the dangers are marked by    current tables are not available, tide tables may be used. In Sergius
aids, and they are easily navigated. The narrows have been found    Narrows the current turns N to S about 2 hours before the time of
clear as shown on the chart.                                      high water at Sitka and from S to N about 1 3/4 hours before the
 (25)  Salmonberry Cove is a small bight on the NW side of    time of low water at Sitka. These are average times and do not
Kakul Narrows where small craft can find indifferent and partially    take into consideration variations due to tidal inequalities as do the
protected anchorage.                                              current table predictions.
 (26)  Brad Rock, with about 1 fathom over it and marked by a      (34)  At the strength of the current the water is very much dis-
buoy, is 175 yards from the NW side of Kakul Narrows, and about    turbed, heaving up over West Francis Rock, Prolewy Rock, and







                                            13. SALISBURY SOUND AND PERIL STRAIT                                              231


 Wayanda Ledge in the middle and boiling and swirling in the    islet on the N side, W of Big Island in 10 to 12 fathoms, soft bot-
 channel, especially at the end where the water is passing out. The    tom. A rock about 10 feet high; is 100 yards SE of Big Island, and
 channel is so narrow and the current so variable in direction that if   kelp-marked rocks extend 100 yards SE of the rock.
 a vessel gets a sheer she may be carried onto the ledges or shore   (45)  Middle Point Rock, marked by a light, is 300 yards W of
before she can be straightened out. With a strong N flowing cur-    Middle Point with a narrow channel between. The rock is cov-
rent a sharp deflection occurs at Shoal Point, which is dangerous,    ered at half tide. A ledge with 2 fathoms over it is 350 yards SSE
especially to long vessels bound S, as it sheers the bow E in the    of Arthur Island.
direction of Wayanda Ledge, and there is little room to straighten  (46)  Yellow Point, marked by a light, is about 0.6 mile N of
out again on the proper channel line. With a strong S-flowing cur-    Middle Point. A rock, bare at half tide and marked by a daybea-
rent a similar sharp deflection occurs W of West Francis Rock,    con, is 150 yards offshore, 0.3 mile E of Yellow Point.
which is dangerous, especially to long vessels, bound either way,  (47)  Wooded Big Rose Island and Little Rose Island are in
as it sheers the bow in toward the cove on the W  side. (See the    midchannel 3 miles S from Pogibshi Point. Adams Channel is the
Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions in Sergius Narrows.)   passage E of them; Rose Channel is the passage W.
  (35)  Vessels awaiting slack water at Sergius Narrows usually     (48)  Rose Island Rock, bare and marked by a light, is 200
slow down before reaching it. If anchorage is desired when N of    yards off a bight on the E side of Big Rose Island. A light is 350
the narrows, Bear Bay is convenient for small vessels. Deep Bay is    yards to the N.
a much better anchorage, but its entrance is narrow.               (49)  Rose Channel Rock, marked by a daybeacon, is 250
  (36)  A small-craft channel that passes S of East Francis Rock    yards NW of Little Rose Island and 400 yards from the W shore. It
and Rapids Island is narrow. The channel is used extensively by    is awash at highest tides and is a danger only when using Rose
local fishermen and should only be used with local knowledge.    Channel.
The current is reported to be weaker in this channel than in the    (50)  Povorotni Island, low and wooded, is 500 yards NNW of
Sergius Narrows channel.                                          Pogibshi Point and is marked by a light on the NW end of the
  (37)  Rapids Island is a small wooded island near the middle of    island. The island shows against a wooded highland in coming
Sergius Narrows. East Francis Rock, 350 yards SW of the SW        from N and is not readily seen until fairly close-to. A bare ledge is
point of Rapids Island, has a least depth of 11/2 fathoms. West    between the island and Pogibshi Point; the narrow passage
Francis Rock, marked by a lighted buoy, 400 yards  WNW of the    between this ledge and the point is suitable only for small craft.
W point of Rapids Island, has leaf kelp that only shows at slack    (51)  Poison Cove has its entrance W of Povorotni Island. In
water. West Francis Rock and the immediate area surrounding the    1976, a log storage area occupied most of the cove. Small craft
rock has a least depth of 21 feet. Mariners are urged to exercise    desiring moorage can tie up to the log booms, although they are
caution in the area. Vessels pass NW of the rock. In this vicinity    moved often.
the swirls and whirlpools are very strong while the current runs S.  (52)  From Pogibshi Point the shoreline trends in a NE direction
 (3S)  Prolewy Rock, 0.1 mile N of the middle of the N side of    for about 5.5 miles to Nismeni Point, about 1 mile beyond Otstoia
Rapids Island, uncovers 8 feet. Wayanda Ledge, within the 4-    Island. (See also chart 17338.) Deadman Reach is the stretch of
fathom curve, extends about 150 yards N of Prolewy Rock into the    water off the flat between Otstoia Island and Pogibshi Point, about
S side of the channel about 180 feet; the NNE side of the ledge is    2.2 miles from the latter. Anchorage may be made in several
marked by a buoy.                                                 places along the shore.
 (39)  Sergius Narrows Light 9 (57ï¿½24.5'N., 135037.9W.), 17        (53)  Pogibshi Anchorage, in about 20 fathoms, soft bottom, is
feet above the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a green    in Goose Cove on the NE side of Pogibshi Point off the entrance to
square daymark, is on the N side of the narrows.                  a small lagoon. Favorite Anchorage, in 17 fathoms, is about 1.2
 (4o)  Liesnoi Shoal, about in midchannel 300 yards S of Mid-    miles SW of Otstoia Island and 0.2 mile from shore. Anchorage
way Rock, has a least depth of 11/4 fathoms and is marked by a    may also be made 0.4 mile SW of Otstoia Island.
lighted buoy close to the edge of the kelp between the shoal and   (54)  Emmons Island is about 5 miles N of Povorotni Island. A
Mountain Head; and 400 yards from the latter. Midway Rock,    bar, which bares, extends W  from the westernmost point of
grass covered, is awash at highest tides.                         Emmons Island 0.3 mile into the channel between Emmons Island
 (41)  Point Siroi Island, marked by a light, is about 0.8 mile    and Chichagof Island. Passage can be made in 9 to 15 fathoms by
NE of Mountain Head.                                              holding a midchannel course to within 0.5 mile of the westernmost
 (42)  Bear Bay, on the SE shore, has anchorage for small ves-    point of Emmons Island; the course should then be shaped so as to
sels only, but is convenient if awaiting slack water in Sergius Nar-    hold the Chichagof Island shore aboard at about 300 yards while
rows. Enter in midchannel and anchor with Arthur Island in line    passing the bar.
with the SW side of Bear Bay Island, bearing N, in 13 to 18 fath-   (55)  Ushk Bay has its entrance on the W side about 2.5 miles
oms, soft bottom. Vessels should not go above the range given to    SW of Emmons Island. Secure anchorage may be found in the bay,
avoid swinging onto the ledge on the S side of the bay.           in 18 to 20 fathoms, soft bottom. Log storage areas are near the
 (43)  Deep Bay, on the NW side of the strait between Big Island    head of the bay and along the S shore. Caution is advised during
and Little Island, is a good anchorage, and the most convenient for    the periods of reduced visibility.
large vessels N of Sergius Narrows while awaiting slack water in    (56)  Hoggatt Reefs are about 2.7 miles NE of Povorotni Island
the narrows. Grasstop Rock, about 5 feet high, is midway    and 1.2 miles from the E shore. The largest and highest part of the
between Big Island and Little Island, and is marked by a daybea-    reef at the E end is Hoggatt Island, a grass and sand islet covered
con. The best passage into the bay is between the rock and Big    only at highest tides. Ledges, covered at about half tide, are W of
Island.                                                           the island; and rocks, covered at ordinary high water, are S of it.
 (44)  To enter, keep the S side of Big Island aboard at a distance    The S end of the reef is marked by a light.
of 100 yards in passing Grasstop Rock, then follow a midchannel    (57)  Dolph Rock, which bares, is about 0.8 mile off the W
course into the bay and anchor 0.2 to 0.8 mile beyond the wooded    shore at the entrance to Ushk Bay and 1.2 miles W  of Hoggatt







232                                        13. SALISBURY SOUND AND PERIL STRAIT


Island. In 1976, it was reported that the rock was only visible on    W  edge of the cove are shoal. A rock quay projects from the S
extreme low tides.                                                 shore near the head, but is surrounded by a shoal that bares.
 (58)  Ford Rock, which bares only at lowest tides, is about 0.8    Anchorage with minimum depths of 15 fathoms is found within
mile N of Hoggatt Island and 1.5 miles W of Krugloi Islet, about    the cove, E of a line running NW from the cabins on its E edge. A
in line between it and the N point at the entrance to Ushk Bay.    shoal extends 0.4 mile into the arm 1.5 miles NW of Fick Cove.
 (59)  Otstoia Island, low and wooded, with dead trees standing    Just to the N of the shoal the South Arm divides into two branches,
at its NE end, is 4.5 miles NE of Povorotni Island. Otstoia Island    Patterson Bay leading WSW and another small branch leading
Light (57033.7'N., 135027.0'W.), 17 feet above the water, is    NNW.
shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-            (67)  The N branch of the South Arm is clear to within about 1
shaped daymark on the S end of the island.                         mile of its head; a flat extends about 0.8 mile from the head. In the
 (60)  Elovoi Islet, small and wooded and marked by a light, and    middle, about 1.8 miles within the entrance, is a rock that bares
Krugloi Islet, small with a clump of trees in the middle, are close    91/2 feet. Clear passage may be gained by staying about 200 yards
together about 0.6 mile W of Otstoia Island.                       off either shore when passing the rock; a ledge extends about 250
                                                                    yards offshore from a point N of the head. Anchorage can be made
 (61)  Charts 17323, 17338.-A flat extends about 300 yards off    300 to 500 yards N of the rock in 13 to 16 fathoms. The N branch
the Duffield Peninsula shore constricting the channel between it   connects to the North Arm during tides greater than 12 feet, when
and Otstoia Island to a clear width of about 150 yards. A lighted    the passage can be made by skiff.
buoy, about 200 yards S of Otstoia Island Light, marks the edge of   (68)  Patterson Bay, the S branch of the South Arm, has shoals
the flat. The channel has a depth of about 71/4 fathoms.           fringing its NW side and a flat at its head. Near its entrance on the
 (62)  Cozian Reef, with V4 to 10 fathoms over it, extends about    N, adjacent to Point Reynard, is a small, NW trending inlet
0.7 mile NE of the NE end of Otstoia Island. The reef is marked    (57ï¿½40.7'N., 135ï¿½42.9'W.), about 0.3 mile long, that offers anchor-
near its E extremity by a lighted bell buoy.                       age for small craft in 3 to 8 fathoms in its center. Douglass Bay
 (63)  Nismeni Point is low and wooded and is about 1.1 miles    (57ï¿½41.0'N., 135ï¿½44.0'W.), just to the W  around Point Reynard,
E of Otstoia Island. A submerged rock is 200 yards from the shore    affords anchorage in 5 to 12 fathoms. To enter, keep the E shore
and 0.5 mile W of Nismeni Point. A reef extends 0.4 mile E of the    aboard at a distance of 200 yards to avoid the reef to the W, and
point.                                                             anchor in the middle of the bay about 0.4 mile from the head. Near
                                                                    the center of the branch, opposite Douglass Bay is a 4-fathom pin-
  (64)  Charts 17323, 17320.-Hoonah Sound is the prolonga-    nacle, the only obstruction in the central channel of Patterson Bay.
tion of Peril Strait NW  of Emmons Island (57036.0'N.,    Anchorage may be made near the head in 24 fathoms, but care
135'32.5'W.). Vixen Islands, a group of small islands, is about    should be taken to avoid the extensive tidal flats that extend 0.5
0.5 mile to the NW of Emmons Island. They consist of two    mile from the head.
wooded islands; the northernmost island has an isthmus in the cen-
ter almost dividing it from its low rocky NE side. A bar extends     (69)  Chart 17338.-Broad Island, 200 feet high and wooded,
about 0.1 mile SW from the southernmost island. A midchannel    is 2.1 miles NE of Otstoia Island and 0.5 mile off the N shore at
reef, baring 5 feet, obstructs the passage between Emmons Island    the entrance to Hoonah Sound. Broad Island Light (57035.1'N.,
and the Vixen Islands. Ledges and shoal areas fringe the NW         135023.6'W.), 14 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
shore of Emmons Island. Small craft may make the passage in 3 to    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the W
10 fathoms by holding the wooded Vixen Islands close aboard at    side of the island. Passage may be made between Broad Island and
about 200 yards and staying well clear of the ledge that extends    Chichagof Island to the N. Midchannel depths range from 40 to 60
about 150 yards NE of the wooded and rocky northernmost island.    fathoms; a shoal extends 0.2 mile NE from Broad Island, and a bar
Moser Island, about 2.5 miles NW of Emmons Island, divides    extends 0.2 mile out from the tree line on Chichagof Island into
Hoonah Sound into two arms, connected at high water at the NW      the channel.
end of Moser Island.                                                 (70)  On the N shore of Peril Strait, 2.5 miles E of Broad Island,
  (65)  North Arm is comparatively clear to within 2 miles of its    a large landslide extends up the mountain side for several hundred
head, where a rock, covered 3 feet, is midchannel surrounded by a    feet.
shoal. The shoal extends for 0.6 mile SSE from an island on the N    (71)  Nismeni Cove, on the E side of Nismeni Point, affords
 side of the arm. There is no safe passage between the island and    anchorage for small craft, with protection from S winds. To enter,
the N shore of the arm. A restricted passage, usable by small craft,    keep the S shore aboard at a distance of about 200 yards to avoid
 is available along the S shore of the island. To make the passage in    the reef off Nismeni Point, and anchor in the middle of the cove
 7 to 12 fathoms, keep the S shore of the island aboard at about 200    about 0.3 mile from the head, in 6 fathoms, fair holding ground.
 yards and 0.2 mile off the N shore of the arm until well past the    (72)  Peschani Point is a low wooded point on the S side 2.8
 island and rock. Passage may also be made in 30 to 35 fathoms    miles NW of Rodman Bay. The point is marked by a light.
 along the S shore. Care should be taken to avoid the gravel bar,     (73)  Rodman Bay, on the S side 6 miles SE of Nismeni Point,
 projecting 0.3 mile from the tree line, at the mouth of a stream on    offers good anchorage at its head. The wide mouth of the bay con-
 the S shore of the arm SSE of the island. A flat extends 0.5 mile    tains several shoal areas: Rodman Rock, with 1 fathom over it
 from the head of the North Arm; a wooded island, with a ledge    and marked by a buoy, is in the bay about 0.5 mile NW of the E
 that extends about 0.2 mile E from its E shore, is near the center of    point at the entrance; depths of 3 fathoms are found on an exten-
 the flat. The tidal flat is W of a N-S line through the middle of the    sive shoal 0.9 mile W of Rodman Rock; shoals with depths of 13/4
 ledge; anchorage may be made E of this line in 15 to 25 fathoms.   fathoms extend out to 0.5 mile from the W shore about 0.7 mile S
  (66)  South Arm extends NW about 5.5 miles along the S shore    of Point Elizabeth, and from the S shore about 0.3 mile W  of the
 of Moser Island. On the S side of the arm, 1 mile within its    entrance to Appleton Cove. Safe passage to the head of the bay
 entrance and just W of a wooded islet, is Fick Cove; the head and    may be gained by passing 0.2 mile to the N and W  of Rodman







                                            13. SALISBURY SOUND AND PERIL STRAIT                                               233


Rock Buoy 1 until SW of the buoy; continuing, stay 0.6 mile off      (86)  McClellan Rock, about 200 yards off Lindenberg Head,
the S shore until S of Point Elizabeth, and follow a midchannel    with no safe passage between, covers at highest tides. It is marked
course up the narrow part of the bay to its head.                  by McClellan Rock Light (57027.2'N., 135ï¿½01.6'W.), 17 feet
  (74)  Point Benham and Point Elizabeth, rounded wooded    above the water, shown from a cylindrical pier with a red and
points, are, respectively, E and W of the entrance to Rodman Bay.    white diamond-shaped daymark.
Point Benham is marked by Point Benham Light (57029.0'N.,           (87)  Hanus Bay is a broad open bight in the S shore S of Lin-
 135ï¿½11.9'W.), 19 feet above the water and shown from a square    denberg Head. At the W end of the bay are two coves; the S one
frame structure with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark.       almost bares, the N one has anchorage for small craft. Ledges that
  (75)  Lauf Islands are on the E side near the head of Rodman    bare are about 200 yards off the N point of this cove and about 300
Bay. The anchorage is 0.2 to 0.3 mile SW of Lauf Islands in 14 to    yards off the S point. Hanus Bay is not recommended for large
 15 fathoms, soft bottom. A midchannel course leads safely to the    vessels, because of its irregular bottom and exposed situation. A
anchorage. Flats extend 0.5 mile from the mouth of streams that    temporary anchorage might be made in its entrance. Small craft
enter the SE and SW corners of the head of the bay. SW winds    frequently anchor in the cove at the SE side of the bay in 3 fath-
blow with considerable force through the pass at the head of Rod-    oms, mud bottom. The anchorage is approached through the
man Bay.                                                           entrance E of Dead Tree Island. It offers no shelter during SE
  (76)  Appleton Cove, about 1.5 miles inside Rodman Bay on         weather as strong winds draw through Portage Arm and are known
the S shore, affords good anchorage and lee from seas for small    to have blown small vessels out of the bay. The area is used for
craft though winds may be quite strong. The entrance channel is    storage of log rafts. Care should be given to avoid a 1-fathom
deepest E of center, about 0.1 mile off the E shore. Care should be    shoal 0.4 mile NNW of the N tip of Dead Tree Island.
taken to avoid a reef and foul area about 0.2 mile S of the SE cor-  (88)  Eva Islands, close to the S shore and about 1.6 miles E of
ner of Prince Island.                                              Point Hanus, have broken ground on all sides. A bare rock is
  (77)  False Island, small and wooded, is connected to Chich-    about 400 yards N of the small wooded islet NW of Eva Islands,
agof Island by a rocky isthmus that covers only on extreme high    and a submerged rock is 600 yards NE of the same wooded islet.
waters. A log storage area occupies most of a small cove formed    Svenson Rock, submerged and sparsely marked by kelp, is 0.5
by False Island and the mainland. The cove opens to the NW and    mile W of the same wooded islet.
has depths ranging from 2 to 6 fathoms and offers protection for     (89)  Fairway Island, wooded and marked by a light, is about 2
small boats from storms from all but the NW. Care should be    miles NW of Point Thatcher. Submerged ledges with 1 to 2 fath-
given to avoid the submerged ledge that extends about 100 yards    oms over them exist at 0.6 mile and at 0.4 mile W  of Fairway
NW from the NW tip of the island.                                  Island. Ledges, which are bare at low tide, extend 400 yards E of
 (78)  Saook Bay has its entrance on the S side of Peril Strait, 4    the island. S of Fairway Island the bottom is very irregular and
miles SE of Rodman Bay. Paradise Flats extend about 0.8 mile    there are several shoal areas.
from its head. The bay affords a good and convenient anchorage       (90)  Midway Reef is about 0.4 mile long in a N direction. A
with shelter from all winds. Water can be had from small streams.  rock awash is near the N end of the reef about 0.8 miles E of Fair-
 (79)  Saook Point and Point Kennedy are the N and S points of    way Island.
the entrance to Saook Bay. A depth of 24/ fathoms exists 0.4 mile   (91)  Traders Islands, low and wooded, are 0.5 mile S of Fair-
off shore and 0.5 mile E of Point Kennedy.                         way Island. Thatcher Channel is the narrow channel S of Traders
 (80)  To enter, take a midchannel course until approaching the    Islands. A shoal sounding of 41/4 fathoms is in midchannel, 1.85
small islands on the SE side. Keep the islands and the SE shore at    miles WNW of Point Thatcher. The Traders Islands and Catherine
a distance of 150 yards to avoid two 21/2-fathom shoals about 0.3    Island should be given a 250-yard berth when going through
and 0.4 mile NW and WNW of the largest islands, and a sand and    Thatcher Channel. The chart is the guide.
gravel flat that extends to midchannel from a small stream coming    (92)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
from a ravine in the W  shore. The anchorage is in midchannel 0.6    4ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed in Peril Strait
mile S of this ravine, in 18 fathoms, mud bottom. There is a log    from McClellan Rock to Point Thatcher.
raft storage buoy S of the anchorage, about 0.3 mile N of the flats  (93)  Point Thatcher, the S point at the E entrance to Peril
in midchannel.                                                     Strait, is low and wooded, and terminates in a ledge 250 yards
 (81)  False Lindenberg Head, steep and wooded, is on the N        long, with three bare heads. A rock with 23/4 fathoms over it is 0.6
side of the strait, 2.3 miles NE of the entrance to Saook Bay.     mile N of Point Thatcher, and a submerged feature of 61/2 fathoms
 (82)  A bight is on the N shore of Peril Strait, about 1.5 miles    is 0.7 mile NW of the point.
ESE of False Lindenberg Head and about 0.8 mile NW of Linden-       (94)  Point Craven, the S point at the entrance to Sitkoh Bay,
berg Head. A rock, covered 21/4 fathoms, is in, and slightly E of,    is 1.4 miles N from Fairway Island. Point Craven Light
the entrance to the bight.                                         (57ï¿½27.8'N., 134ï¿½52.0'W.), 35 feet above the water, is shown from
 (83)  Lindenberg Head is a wooded knoll on a point projecting    a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark
from the NE shore 2.2 miles E of False Lindenberg Head.            on the outer of two bushy islets off the point.
 (84)  Lindenberg Harbor is a small cove on the W side of Lin-      (95)  Point Hayes, the N point at the entrance from Chatham
denberg Head and affords protection from N and E. The anchorage    Strait, is moderately high, but is low at the extremity. Two wooded
is in the middle of the cove in 12 to 15 fathoms, with indifferent    islets, about 60 feet high, and a bare rock are close to the point.
holding ground. A private mooring buoy is in the W  side of the      (96)  Morris Reef is a dangerous group of ledges and sub-
harbor. In 1976, a log storage area was occupying most of the N    merged rocks surrounding Point Hayes to a distance of 0.9 mile to
side of the harbor.                                                the E, 1.1 miles to the S, and 0.8 mile to the W. The SE extension
 (85)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as    of the reef is broken ground with patches of kelp and depths of 2
4ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed in Peril Strait    feet to 7 fathoms, and is marked at its SE extremity by a lighted
from McClellan Rock to Point Thatcher.                             bell buoy that is 1.5 miles SE of Point Hayes. On a line between






234                                       13. SALISBURY SOUND AND PERIL STRAIT


the buoy and Peninsular Point, i.5 miles N of Point Hayes, is an   (99)  Anchorage can be made 0.2 to 0.4 mile from the head of
extensive reef, marked by kelp, which partly bares.               the bight on the N shore 2 miles from Point Hayes, in 15 to 20
 (97)  Sitkoh Bay has its entrance between Point Craven and    fathoms, soft bottom, sheltered except from SE winds. Secure
Point Hayes. The bay is deep throughout in midchannel, but there    anchorage can be had near the flat at the head of the bay about 1.4
are several flats at the mouths of streams, and an extensive one, I    miles above the cannery in 17 to 22 fathoms, soft bottom. Care
mile wide, at its head.                                           should be taken to avoid the extensive tidal flat that extends 1.1
                                                                   miles from the tree line at the head. A bar surrounding a small
 (98)  , Chatham, on the SW side of Sitkoh Bay, about 2.1 miles   island extends 0.2 mile into the bay from the S shore, 1.8 miles
inside the entrance, is the site of a privately-owned inactive can-
                nery  Thecannry warf  as afaceof 20 fet wih 30feet from the head. A private mooring buoy is on the NE side of Sitkoh
nery. The cannery wharf has a face of 200 feet with 30 feet Byaot04ml Eo hta
reported alongside in 1976. A rock awash and a seasonal seaplane
float is off the SE end. A pier close NW of the cannery wharf had  (100) Entering Sitkoh Bay, keep the Point Craven shore aboard
                                20feetdin 1976. Acess to the cannery    distant about 0.3 mile to clear Morris Reef, and then keep in mid-
                20 feet reported at its outer end                ~channel. The chart is the guide.
wharf may be intermittently blocked during the winter when Sit-
koh Bay has 2 to 3 inches of ice as far as 3 miles down from the
head. Icebreakers visit the area on an irregular schedule.










                 14. WEST COAST OF CHICHAGOF ISLAND AND YAKOBI ISLAND

 (])   This chapter describes the W coast of Chichagof Island     (7)   Fortuna Strait is used, especially by small craft, when
and Yakobi Island from Fortuna Strait to Cape Bingham. Also dis-    bound to Khaz Bay from Salisbury Sound.
cussed are the numerous bays and coves, and an inside passage for  (8)   Leo Anchorage, on the NE side of Fortuna Strait, narrows
small vessels that extends along the greater part of this coast.  at the head, where there is a stream and small flat. The anchorage
 (2)   Weather.-While these coasts are exposed to the rigors of    affords a fair shelter from N winds, but it is not recommended in S
the Gulf of Alaska, the climate is tempered somewhat by the mari-    weather. With S winds there is less swell near the W  side. The
time location. From October through February, winds and waves    anchorage is near the middle in 15 to 20 fathoms, or for small craft
pound the shoreline creating a hazard to navigation. Swells from    near the head in 5 to 7 fathoms. The bottom is hard with sticky
distant storms often arrive from SW while heavy seas are more    patches.
often out of S and SE. Gales are encountered about 10 percent of   (9)   Point Slocum is about 3.5 miles NNW of Klokachef
the time in open waters. The maritime influence is evident in the    Island. A bare, flat rock, about 30 feet high, is about 200 yards
average maximum temperatures which run in the mid 30s (ï¿½F) in    SSW of the point; inside the rock a boat landing can be made in
winter and minimums which are only about 50 to 70 colder. In    ordinary weather. A breaker is about 0.5 mile W of Point Slocum.
winter, temperatures drop to freezing or below on about 80 to 85    An isolated breaker is about 0.6 mile S from this point.
days and in summer usually remain below 700F. Extremes range
from just below 0ï¿½F to about 800F. Precipitation is plentiful year  (10)  Chart 17322.-Khaz Head, a bold, bluff headland, partic-
round, particularly in October, November, and December.    ularly noticeable from SW, is about 7 miles NW of Klokachef
Reduced visibilities are a problem in June, July, and August and    Island (chart 17323), and about 4 miles NNW of Point Slocum
also in winter; poor visibilities in winter often occur in snow.  (57027.9'N., 135058.0'W.). It is the NW end of Khaz Peninsula, a
                                                                   rugged peninsula between Slocum Arm of Khaz Bay and the sea.
  (3)   Chart 16016.-The W  coast of Chichagof Island has a        (1)  Khaz Point, the SW point of Khaz Head, shows from the
general NW direction for about 38 miles from the W  end of    SE as a conical hill. It is about 2.8 miles NW of Point Slocum. The
Klokachef Island to Cape Cross, and then the coast trends N for 10    shore between these points forms a shallow bight in which there is
miles to Yakobi Rock. The main shore is formed by Chichagof    much foul ground as well as numerous breakers. Breakers extend
Island, which has numerous mountain peaks. From Klokachef    about 0.8 mile W of Khaz Point. A rock, awash at high water, at
Island to Khaz Bay the 100-fathom curve is about 13 miles off-    the end of the reef that extends S from the point, is used as a land-
shore. The 50-fathom curve is about 6 miles offshore, and inside    mark by local motorboats that keep close inshore. The surf shows
of that distance the soundings are irregular and less than 50 fath-    on this rock at all times.
oms, except a narrow pocket with depths of 50 to 101 fathoms,      (12)  Piehle Passage is entered close-to, W of Khaz Point, and
which extends about 5.5 miles SW from Khaz Bay entrance. From    leads among the rocks and islets W of Khaz Head to Slocum Arm.
the entrance of Khaz Bay to Cape Edward, the coast is formed by    This passage is extensively used by small craft with local knowl-
numerous islets, rocks, and breakers, that prevent a close approach    edge, but is difficult for strangers. The entrance at Khaz Point is
to the shore.                                                    closed by breakers in heavy weather. Good protected anchorage
  (4)   An inside passage for small vessels extends along the    for small craft can be had in the bight at the NW end of Khaz Head
 greater part of this coast. From Salisbury Sound this route leads N  on the SE side of Piehle Passage. Anchorage can be selected at the
through Fortuna Strait and then outside to Khaz Bay. Small craft    head of the bight in 8 to 10 fathoms, mud and gravel bottom.
 sometimes enter Slocum Arm through Piehle Passage, which is        (13)  From Khaz Head a chain of numerous islands, rocks, and
 close W of Khaz Head. From Khaz Bay the route leads through    reefs, some wooded and all generally low, extend about 3.4 miles
 Ogden Passage and Surveyor Passage to Portlock Harbor, thence    NW to Ramp Island and Deuce Island, at the entrance of Khaz
 through Imperial Passage to the outside coast. Small craft can take    Bay.
 the shorter route from Khaz Bay, passing through Ogden Passage    (14)  Middle Breaker is on a bare rock about 2 miles WNW of
 and Kukkan Passage and Bay. Small craft with local knowledge    Khaz Point and almost 1 mile from the nearest islet to the E.
 can leave Portlock Harbor by Dry Pass. From Portlock Harbor to     (15)  Kaz Breakers, marked by a lighted whistle buoy off the
 Lisianski Strait the route leads outside, thence through Lisianski    W side, are the outer dangers in approaching Khaz Bay from S,
 Strait and Inlet to Cross Sound.                                 and are on a reef about 1.4 miles W of Middle Breaker.
  (5)   This entire coast has been surveyed and is shown on a      (16)  Outer Rocks are the southernmost bare rocks on the W
 series of large-scale charts; all known dangers are charted.     side of the entrance to Khaz Bay. They are two in number, about
                                                                    250 yards apart. Outer Rocks are distinctly darker than the rocks
  (6)   Chart 17323.-Fortuna Strait separates Klokachef Island    to the N, moundlike in appearance, and can easily be identified by
 from Chichagof Island. The SE entrance is between ledges that    strangers.
 extend W  from Chichagof Island and Vincent Reef, which            (17)  Black Island is the highest of a group of small islands
 extends S from the E end of Klokachef Island. A shoal marked by    about 3.2 miles NW of Outer Rocks. It is the only wooded island
 kelp, with a least depth of 2ï¿½/4 fathoms, is 0.5 mile N from the E    of the group and forms an easily distinguishable landmark. Two
 end of Klokachef Island. A rock, with 1/2 fathom over it and    bare rocks are about 0.8 mile W of Black Island. A group of bare
 marked by kelp, is about 600 yards from the N shore on the W side    islets and rocks extends 0.8 mile S of Black Island. Breakers
 at the entrance to Leo Anchorage.                                extend 2 miles W of the island.


                                                                                                                               235






236                              14. WEST COAST OF CHICHAGOF ISLAND AND YAKOBI ISLAND


 (18)  White Sisters are two outlying large white rock islets,    miles NW from that head to Deuce Island. The arm is free from
about 2.2 miles NNW of Black Island.                               dangers, with the exception of a rock, bare at half tide, 300 yards
 (19)  Inside the lines joining Outer Rocks, Black Island, White    from the NE shore.
Sisters, and Cape Edward are numerous bare rocks and reefs, but      (31)  Ford Arm, NE of Khaz Head, extends NE from Slocum
the four mentioned are the most prominent and easily recognized.   Arm and is constricted in places by islands and rocks. At its head
 (20)  Khaz Bay, about 11 miles NW of Klokachef Island, is 2.2    is an expansion about 0.8 mile in diameter, from which arms
miles wide at its entrance between Ramp Island (57 33.7'N.,    extend SE and NW. The SE arm has some islets and a flat at its
136ï¿½05.2'W.) and Outer Rocks, and extends N about 2 miles to    head; there is anchorage for vessels NW of the islets in desired
Quit Point. Here it divides into an extensive system of inland pas-    depths up to 15 fathoms. The NW arm has anchorage for small
sages that extend E, N, and W, and connects with the sea NW of    craft at its head in 6 to 15 fathoms. Small craft can also anchor in
Cape Edward, through Kukkan Bay and Portlock Harbor.               Elf Cove, the cove N of the N point at the entrance to the NW
 (21)  The entrance, marked by a lighted whistle buoy off Khaz    arm, in 5 to 8 fathoms; a ledge bare at half tide is close to the N
Breakers, is wide and has deep water, but is difficult to recognize    side of the cove.
because of the many islets and bare rocks. In the entrance are a     (32)  The entrance to Ford Arm is marked on the SE side by a
number of breakers that show except at high water with an excep-    group of small wooded islands that should not be approached
tionally smooth sea, and help shape the course in daylight and    closely. Two miles inside the entrance on the SE shore is a project-
clear weather. Once in the entrance, vessels should have no diffi-    ing point.
culty in going into Slocum Arm or through Ogden Passage to           (33)  Falcon Arm, 1.4 miles SE of Ford Arm, extends NE and
Kimshan Cove. Klag Bay is difficult except for small vessels at    narrows to 350 yards at its head. A rock with 1 foot over it is 0.4
slack water.                                                       mile inside the bay, in the middle. Favor the NW shore for 0.5
 (22)  Black Rock, about 1.1 miles NE of Outer Rocks, covers at    mile from the entrance to avoid this rock and then keep in mid-
high water and is generally marked by a heavy breaker.              channel. The depths in the wide part of the arm are 22 to 25 fath-
 (23)  Ramp Island, small, about 100 feet high, and scantily    oms. A good anchorage is in an expansion above a point on the
wooded, is the westernmost of the islands on the E side of Khaz    NW side 1.5 miles from the entrance in 11 to 14 fathoms, soft bot-
Bay.                                                               tom.
  (24)  Deuce Island is the northwesternmost wooded island on        (34)  Waterfall Cove, about 1.8 miles SE of Falcon Arm, is
the E side of Khaz Bay, and is about 0.5 mile N of Ramp Island.    identified by a large waterfall about 1 mile above its head. Two
At its NW end is a round bald knob. Ninefoot Shoal, about 0.5    bights are at the head; the E one dries and the W one, which has 4
mile NNW of Deuce Island, is marked by a buoy.                     to 11 fathoms, affords anchorage for small craft.
  (25)  Quit Point is the S end of the southernmost of the low        (35)  Island Cove, about 4.5 miles SE of Falcon Arm, has sev-
wooded islands on the N side in the entrance to Khaz Bay, and is    eral islands in it near the shore. The anchorage is in the SE end of
about 1.2 miles NW of Deuce Island. The end of the point is bare,    the cove in about 16 fathoms. Favor the SE point of the cove when
and at the timber line is about 90 feet high. This island is some-    entering and avoid a flat that extends about 300 yards from the N
what higher than others near it, and from most points shows as two    shore of the anchorage.
knobs. The S knob is the larger and higher, with a saddle between.
A bare, rocky islet is about 0.3 mile W  of Quit Point, and there is    a     small point with a wooded knll 80 f eet high.  Anchorage for
                                                                    a small point with a wooded knoll 80 feet high. Anchorage for
foul ground, generally marked by breakers, between this islet,    small craft is in the cove W of this point in 6 to 10 fathoms.

  (26)  Rough Channel, W  of Quit Point and Gray Rock, is an          (37)  Flat Cove, on the NE side 6 miles SE of Falcon Arm, has
  entrance to Ogden Passage from Khaz Bay. Its N end has rocks    depths of 12 to 32 fathoms to the flat that extends 700 yards from
entrance to Ogden Passage from Khaz Bay. Its N end has rocks    its head.
above and under water that contract the channel to about 200
yards. Because it generally has heavy swell, the channel should be   (38)  Good anchorage is 0.5 to 0.6 mile from the head of
avoided except possibly at low water with a smooth sea. Smooth    Slocum Arm in 16 to 18 fathoms. A flat extends about 0.2 mile
Channel is the better entrance to Ogden Passage.                   from its head.
  (27)  Guide Rock, bare and 15 feet high, is about 0.3 mile ENE     (39)  Klag Bay, at the head of Khaz Bay, is cluttered with
of Quit Point, and is the easternmost of the bare rocks that extend    islands, and the shores are foul especially on the E side behind the
0.2 mile E from the island. It is an important mark for entering any    islands in the bay. The two entrances to the bay lead through nar-
of the arms.                                                       row crooked channels, with foul shores and strong currents, which
  (28)  Smooth Channel, the best entrance to Ogden Passage, is    are difficult except for small vessels at slack water. Strangers
protected from the ocean swell by a chain of wooded islands and    should enter at low water slack when the dangers will show above
ledges. From N of Guide Rock it extends in a NW direction, with    water or be indicated by kelp.
 depths of 7 to 33 fathoms. Smooth Channel also forms the             (40)  The main entrance is through The Gate, which has its
 approach to Klag Bay and connecting bodies of water. S of Vorota    entrance 1 mile N of Guide Rock. It has a depth of 4 3/4 fathoms
 Island in 20 to 25 fathoms is an excellent anchorage for vessels up    and a width of 50 yards at its narrowest part, between a daybeacon
 to 250 feet long. With heavy SW swells some of the turbulence    on the E side of Vorota Island and a rocky 1-fathom shoal 20 yards
 enters the anchorage, but not enough to make it unsafe.             off a sparsely wooded islet on the E side of the entrance. A 008ï¿½
  (29)  Doolth Mountain, 7 miles N of the entrance to Khaz Bay,    unlighted range marking the centerline of the channel clears the 1-
 is wooded. It stands out from the higher mountains farther inland    fathom shoal.
 and is the most prominent one near the coast.                        (41)  Elbow Passage is the W entrance to Klag Bay. The W part
  (30)  Slocum Arm extends SE from Khaz Bay. Its SW side is    of this passage has a midchannel depth of 23/4 fathoms and is con-
 formed by the mountainous Khaz Peninsula terminating W  at    stricted in places to a width of about 75 yards by kelp-marked
 Khaz Head, and by the chain of wooded islands that extends 3.4    shoals.







                                 14. WEST COAST OF CHICHAGOF ISLAND AND YAKOBI ISLAND                                         237


 (42)  The two entrance channels merge N of The Gate and the    merged rock is in the middle of the channel W of Port Island, mak-
channel then continues through Elbow Passage around the S and E    ing it unsafe.
sides of Klag Island. The pass W of Klag Island is almost blocked   (54)  Kimshan Cove, E of Fitz Island, has depths of 6 to 11
at the N end and is suitable only for small boats and launches. N of    fathoms. Anchorage can be selected anywhere in the cove, being
Klag Island the bay is comparatively clear, though there are a    careful to avoid the pile ruins of a wharf on the SE side of the
number of islands in it.                                           cove.
 (43) Anchorage can be found in the bay above Klag Island in
depths of from 3 to 20 fathoms.                                     (55)  Chart 17321.-Surveyor Passage is the passage that
 (44)  Currents.-It is reported that the currents in Elbow Pas-    extends from Portlock Harbor to Ogden Passage NW of Kimshan
sage, S of Klag Island, are strong and the passage is navigable    Cove. Many submerged rocks are in the passage. A daybeacon
only near the time of slack water.                                 marks a reef, that uncovers about 7 feet, on the NE side of the pas-
 (45)  Ice forms in Klag Bay early in January and is a hazard to    sage 0.4 mile SE of Lydonia Island. A rock awash is 50 yards off
navigation through February and most of March.                     the NE shore in the narrow part of the passage about 0.5 mile SE
 (46)  Caution.-The last of the ebb sets out of Elbow Passage W    of the daybeacon. Lydonia Island is a wooded island in the NW
with great velocity through the W entrance, forming heavy swirls,    end of Surveyor Passage. The channel W  and S of the island is
and passage should be attempted only at slack water, preferably    foul, and large vessels always use the E channel.
low-water slack.
                                                                    (56)  Minnie Reef, marked by a daybeacon and which uncovers
 (47)  Lake Anna has its entrance through a narrow channel    about 5 feet, is in the main channel N of Lydonia Island. The area
from the E side of the N end of Elbow Passage. There is anchorage    between the reef and the island is very foul.
at the S end of the lake in 6 to 15 fathoms. About 1.1 miles NE of
the entrance a ledge with bare heads extends to midchannel from
the E side; the channel is NW of it. At the N end of the lake is an    sage, and has two islands obstructing its entrance. The best pas-
                                                                   sage into the bay is between Point Lydonia and the northernmost
anchorage in 5 to 12 fathoms. Lake Anna should only be entered    of these islands, although small boats can pass between them. The
by those with local knowledge because of its narrow entrance and    shoreline is steep and rocky except at the head where there is a
extreme currents, except at slack water.
                extreme currents, except at slack water.           large sand and gravel flat. Strong winds draw through the bay
 (4s)  Sister Lake is joined to the NE end of Lake Anna by a    from the head, and it is not recommended for shelter.
narrow, foul passage 0.5 mile long. Passage should be made at
slack water only. It is reported that slack water occurs about 21/2  (58)  The currents in Surveyor Passage are small. The flood
hours after slack water at Sitka, and that the currents reach a max-    enters the passage from both ends and meets in the vicinity of the
imum strength of about 12 knots. The S end of this lake is only
200 yards from Ford Arm and about 300 yards from Double
Cove, a small bay at the NE end of Khaz Bay, with low land          (59)  Chart 17322.-Kukkan Bay is between Edward Islands
between. The lake is reported to be deep, with good anchorage in    and Herbert Graves Island, and immediately N of Pole Point
the coves. The lake should be navigated with caution.              (57ï¿½39.6'N., 136ï¿½13.8WV.). It is poorly protected and is used only
 (49)  Khaz Bay is connected with Portlock Harbor by Ogden    as a passage into Ogden Passage through Kukkan Passage. The
Passage and Surveyor Passage, and is a navigable route for small    principal entrance is N of Edward Islands, but vessels can also
vessels. Another route, partially protected, leads from Ogden Pas-    enter S of these islands. Kukkan Bay is connected with Ogden
sage through Kukkan Passage and Bay to South Passage, which is    Passage by Kukkan Passage and is used by fish packers of about
the S entrance to Portlock Harbor. This route is recommended for    12-foot draft at all stages of the tide; however, the spot shown as 2
small craft only. Rough Channel and Smooth Channel have been    fathoms, on the N end of the shoal area off Pole Point, breaks in
described previously in this chapter.                              heavy weather and may have less than 2 fathoms on it. It should be
 (50)  Ogden Passage is entered from Khaz Bay through Rough    avoided by all vessels. Pole Point, on the S side of the bay, is a
Channel or Smooth Channel, the latter being the best. From Klag    bare, bluff point with high, wooded land behind it. Ittar Rock is a
Bay it can be entered through the W part of Elbow Passage. The    bare rock 12 feet high in the middle of the entrance to Kukkan
depths in Ogden Passage are generally good and the dangers are    Passage.
charted, but several narrow passages and sharp turns make its nav-  (60)  Tawak Passage extends S from the NW end of Kukkan
igation difficult for large vessels. The bottom is generally rocky,    Passage, and affords a protected, although intricate, passage for
and the only good anchorage is in Kimshan Cove.                    small boats along the coast. The N end of the passage is foul and
  (5i)  Frog Rock is a steep, grassy rock, about 35 feet high, and    should not be used without local knowledge. The islands W  of
is the outermost of a small group of islets in the E side of the pas-    Tawak Passage are called the Myriad Islands.Gig Pass is a deep,
sage.                                                              narrow passage leading from the S end of Tawak Passage to
  (52)  Snipe Rock, about 0.6 mile SW of Frog Rock, is a flat,    Ogden Passage.
grassy rock about 10 feet high and is part of a long submerged       (61)  Edward Islands are two groups of prominent, wooded
ledge. It is marked by a daybeacon and is in the entrance to Kuk-    islands, on the W  side of Kukkan Bay, about 0.8 mile S of Cape
kan Passage which leads through Kukkan Bay to the sea, N of    Edward. Foul ground extends for over 0.5 mile W of these islands.
Cape Edward.                                                       A brown, bare rock, 16 feet high, is I mile SSW from Edward
  (53)  Fitz Island, Dippy Island, and Port Island are wooded    Islands.
islets that are at the junction of Ogden Passage and Surveyor Pas-   (62)  Cape Edward, on the W point of Elkugu Island, is about
sage. A daybeacon marks a reef with /, fathom over it, which is on    2.6 miles N of White Sisters. A rock, bare at high tide, is about 0.5
the NW side of the channel between Fitz Island and Dippy Island.    mile WSW of the cape, and there are submerged rocks 300 yards
Boats passing between the daybeacon and Fitz Island should give    N and 500 yards ESE of this rock. Elkugu Bay, on the E side of
the daybeacon a berth of at least 75 yards to avoid the reef. A sub-    Cape Edward, is exposed to the S and is of no importance.







238                             14. WEST COAST OF CHICHAGOF ISLAND AND YAKOBI ISLAND


 (63)  Chart 17321.-Portlock Harbor is formed on its seaward    entrance and to the S of a rock in midchannel, 0.1 mile from the W
side by Hogan Island and Hill Island. Hogan Island is almost flat-   end and to the S of a small rocky islet near the N shore, 0.1 mile
topped and timbered with scrubby growth. The shoreline is very    from the E end of this section. The pass then expands into a basin,
steep and rocky, with practically no sand beach except for small    with a group of islets at the SW end.
coves, which are unfit for beaching any size boat. Hill Island is  (73)  Anchorage in Dry Pass is reported in the cove on the N
well timbered except in the NW section, which is almost a flat pla-    shore back of a large island in 6 fathoms, sticky bottom, and also
teau sparsely wooded with scrub spruce. The highest point of the    in the cove on the SE shore in 4 to 7 fathoms.
island is near the center. Herbert Graves Island, on the S side of  (74)  From the NE side of the basin the pass continues in a NE
the harbor, is sparsely wooded except for a high, wooded hill on    direction for about 0.5 mile and then turns SE to Portlock Harbor.
the E part, which is a prominent landmark. The W half of the       (75)  The coast from Imperial Passage to Lisianski Strait is very
island is low and rolling with numerous small lakes and swampy    irregular and characterized mainly by bold cliffs, rocky beaches,
areas. Mount Lydonia, on Chicagof Island E of the harbor, is a    and many small islands, inlets, and bays. The immediate shoreline
prominent landmark and the highest mountain in the vicinity.     and larger islands are well wooded, but the rolling country back
 (64)  Portlock Harbor is used chiefly by boats going through the    from the beach are stretches of open marsh with lakes or tidal
inside waters to Ogden Passage. It has three entrances from the    lagoons. Two or three miles inland the mountains rise to eleva-
sea: South Passage, Imperial Passage, and Dry Pass. Imperial Pas-    tions of 2,000 to 3,000 feet and are generally bare above 1,200
sage is used by most vessels, although South Passage is equally    feet. North Mountain, about 1.8 miles to the N of Mirror Harbor,
good. Dry Pass is foul and is used only by small boats.          which is 4.3 miles N of Hill Island Light, is timbered to an eleva-
 (65)  South Passage is between Cape Edward and Point    tion of about 1,600 feet and appears dark against the peaks
Hogan, which is the S point on Hogan Island. Reefs extend for 0.3    beyond. As seen from the S it shows cone-shaped with a shoulder
mile S from Point Hogan.                                         220 feet lower that extends to E. Mount Douglas, a rounded dou-
 (66)  Imperial Passage, between Hogan Island and Hill Island,    ble peak, is about 1.5 miles E from Mirror Harbor.
is the main entrance into Portlock Harbor. The group of islands off  (76)  Dangers.-There are many outlying rocks and breakers
the NW side of Hogan Island form a good landmark; the outer    along this coast and many rocks and shoals extend N from Cape
ones are grass covered and the inner ones have a few trees. Two    Dearborn. Several rocks are S of Skinner Island, and several sub-
reefs, awash, are 500 yards W of the center of the outer islands.    merged rocks are S from Porcupine Islands.
The N side of Imperial Passage is marked by Hill Island Light      (77)  Cape Dearborn, the W extremity of Hill Island, is a bold
(57043.7'N., 136016.6'W.), 60 feet above water, and shown from a    bluff about 80 feet high and has several small rocky islets close-to.
square frame with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on       (78)  Little Bay is 1.5 miles NNE from Cape Dearborn. Point
the S end of Hill Island.                                        Weigle, the N point of the entrance, is 1.5 miles N from Cape
 (67)  Peer Island, a bare rock 20 feet high, is in the passage    Dearborn. The entrance to the bay is wide and clear, except near
about 500 yards E of the light, and there is a shoal that extends 150    the shores, and has a depth of about 11 fathoms decreasing to 27/2
yards S of this rock, with a least depth of 13/4 fathoms. Several    fathoms near the head of the bay where it is foul.
shoal areas are off the entrance to the passage where a heavy sea  (79)  Cormorant Island,Shag Rock, Grace Island, Middle
will break.                                                      Island, and Snag Island form a group about 1.7 miles N from
 (68)  Anchorage can be found in Portlock Harbor about 300    Cape Dearborn. Fern Rock, Gull Rock, and a rock awash mid-
yards NE of Sholin Island, in 7 to 18 fathoms, rocky bottom.    way between the two, are 270 yards N of Grace Island. Davison
Anchorage can also be had at the junction of Goulding Harbor and    Bay, the bight E and NE of this group, has depths of 31/2 to 15 fath-
Dry Pass in 15 to 18 fathoms. Most of the bays making off from    oms.
Portlock Harbor are too deep for good anchorage.                   (80)  Fleming Island is 2 miles N of Cape Dearborn. Mirror
 (69)  Didrickson Bay has its entrance on the E side of Portlock    Harbor is N of Fleming Island and has depths of 3 to 4 fathoms in
Harbor 0.7 mile NNE of Lock Island. Between submerged rocks    the middle. In 1972, the harbor was reported to be a good anchor-
and reefs on each side, the entrance is deep and clear. A 6-foot    age for small craft with excellent protection and holding qualities,
waterfall at the head of the bay can be seen from the entrance.    soft bottom. The channel leading to the harbor is between Fleming
Good anchorage can be had near the head of the bay in 5 to 16    Island and the group to the W. It is intricate, narrows to about 10
fathoms, mud bottom.                                             yards, and in places has depths of about 1 fathom. Local knowl-
 (70)  Pinta Bay extends N for 2.1 miles from Portlock Harbor.    edge is required for safe passage.
Two small, wooded islands on the W  side of the entrance are       (sl)  Point Shultz is the S point of Fleming Island, and Fair-
joined by a reef that bares. E of these islands the entrance is clear.    way Rock is 275 yards SW from Point Shultz. In 1972, a ledge
 (71)  Goulding Harbor, at the NW end of Portlock Harbor, has    reportedly covered about 10 feet was reported to extend E about
two branches. Baker Cove is the N branch. The NE branch termi-    200 yards from Fairway Rock. Passage W of the rock was recom-
nates in a shallow cove, bordered with sand and gravel flats. With    mended. West Arm, N of Pluma Island, is foul, but limited
local knowledge it is possible to take launches of 4 feet or less    anchorage for small craft is available.
draft to the head of the cove where a large stream empties into the  (82)  Skinner Island is the largest of the outer islands of the
bay. Small craft can anchor near the flat at the head of the cove.    group on the W side of the entrance to Mirror Harbor. A rocky
Soundings taken at the entrance to the NE branch show a depth of    islet is 300 yards W and breakers and foul ground extend 0.8 mile
1 fathom on a reef of considerable size that extends from the S    SW.
point of the entrance to the arm.                                  (83)  Caution Pass is close E of Skinner Island. It is used by
 (72)  Dry Pass, the N passage from Portlock Harbor to the    small local launches going to Bertha Bay.
Pacific Ocean, is N of Hill Island. For 0.4 mile from the W end,   (84)  Bertha Bay, an open bight about 0.9 mile wide at the
the pass is less than 0.1 mile wide and is foul. A narrow channel    entrance, extends in a N direction from Skinner Island. The bay is
with depths ranging from 3 to 10 feet passesbetween rocks at the    rocky at the head and is very foul; it affords little protection from






                                  14. WEST COAST OF CHICHAGOF ISLAND AND YAKOBI ISLAND                                        239


the ocean swell. Even small boats must keep over 600 yards from    vicinity of Miner Island currents are 0.5 to 2 knots. Eddies and
the shore to avoid rocks and reefs. White Sulphur Springs and    swirls occur between Miner Island and. Chichagof Island. The cur-
two U.S. Forest Service buildings are on the NE side of the bight.    rents from Cross Sound and Lisianski Strait appear to meet in the
Small craft usually anchor in West Arm, and users of the White    vicinity of Miner Island. An ebb current of 0.5 knot from Stag Bay
Sulphur Springs follow a trail, about 0.5 mile long, to the springs.    has been experienced.
Local knowledge is advised.                                         (94)  Point Theodore, on the W side of the S entrance, is low
 (85)  Porcupine Rock is a prominent bare rock, about 1.4 miles    and wooded, with a background of high mountains. Two wooded
W of Beric Island, the westernmost of the Porcupine Islands.      islands are within the entrance close to the point. Rocks and reefs,
 (86)  Porcupine Islands, so named from the shape of the outer    bare at various stages of the tide, extend for 0.5 mile in a S direc-
one, are about 1.2 miles W  of the entrance to Bertha Bay, and    tion from the point.
about 1 mile offshore. Extensive bare ledges prolonged by break-   (95)  Star Rock, about 1 mile S of Point Theodore, is awash at
ers extend 0.5 mile S from the islands. Winifred Island is the    high water; a seasonal bell buoy is moored about 200 yards SW of
largest of the group. Two rocky islets are about 0.5 mile N of Por-    the rock.
cupine Islands. A submerged rock with 2ï¿½/ fathoms over it and      (96)  Point Urey, the E point of the S entrance to Lisianski
showing a breaker in a moderate sea is about 300 yards NW of the    Strait, is low, flat, and timbered; it has a small sharp knob near the
rocky islets.                                                     S end. Rocks and foul ground extend about 1.4 miles off the point;
 (87)  Islas Bay extends N from Porcupine Islands. On its NW      the most prominent is Porcupine Rock. Submerged rocks and
side are numerous inlets, most of which have shoal water and    rocks awash at high water are about midway between Porcupine
rocks at the entrances. Ilin Bay and Porcupine Bay branch off    Rock and Point Urey. Threenob Rock, a conspicuous triple-
from the N end.                                                   headed rock, is 0.4 mile SW from the point.
 (88)  Porcupine Bay is about 0.3 mile in diameter and has gen-    (97)  Urey Rocks, about 0.8 mile W from Point Urey, are two
eral depths of 8 to 12 fathoms. A wooded island, 90 feet high, is in    bare rocks; the E rock is longer and wider. Small rocks and foul
the W part of the entrance. The entrance SE of this island is clear.    ground practically surround Urey Rocks. Kelp extends to the
The entrance NW is shoaler and narrower. A waterfall at the E end    shores of Chichagof Island and Esther Island.
of the bay shows from the entrance. The harbor affords protected    (98)  Esther Island, just within the entrance, is heavily tim-
anchorage.                                                        bered. Near the middle of the island on the E side is a bight that
 (89)  Ilin Bay, narrow, rocky, and suitable for small craft only,    almost cuts the island into two parts, and during storm tides the
has its entrance 0.5 mile W of the entrance to Porcupine Bay. An    seas almost wash across. The E shore of Esther Island is on the W
anchorage in 8 fathoms, mud bottom, is in the upper half of the    side of what is known locally as the Inside Passage. Rocks extend
bay, but this anchorage is exposed to the S. A more protected    for about 0.5 mile NNE of the N end of Esther Island. Lisianski
anchorage is in Zhilo Cove, behind the islands, on the E side of    Strait Light 2 (57ï¿½50.7'N., 136ï¿½26.1'W.), 53 feet above the water,
the bay in 3 to 4 fathoms, mud bottom. The S and W entrances    is shown from a square frame with a red triangular daymark on
between the islands leading to this anchorage are foul, but the N  Esther Island. The light, most brilliant on the bearing 044ï¿½ and
entrance at the head of the bay is clear.                         diminishing in intensity around the remainder of the horizon,
                                                                    marks the SW entrance to the strait.
 (90)  Chart 17303.-Lisianski Strait, between Yakobi Island        (99)  Lumber Cove is a small-boat anchorage NW of Point
and Chichagof Island, about 11 miles long and from 0.2 to 0.8    Urey. Midway in the entrance is a small steep island that is cov-
mile wide, follows a general NNE direction and connects Lisian-    ered with trees. In entering, pass close to the island, leaving it to S.
ski Inlet with the Pacific Ocean. The waters throughout the strait    When clear of the island, pass in midchannel and anchor near the
are generally deep, but the SW entrance is foul. From the SW end    head of the cove in 5 to 6 fathoms, sticky bottom.
NNE, the strait is clear until 1.2 miles to the SW of the junction  (loo)  Canoe Cove, about 1.4 miles N of Point Urey, furnishes
with Lisianski Inlet, where there are two small islands; the N is    anchorage for small boats in 4 to 5 fathoms, sticky bottom. The
grass covered with a lone tree on it, and the S is rocky and    anchorage is small, about 250 yards wide. It has two entrances,
wooded, with several rocks close-to. A light is about 100 yards S    known locally as the North Pass and the West Pass; both are nar-
of the S island. Kelp extends from the islands to the Chichagof    row. At low water North Pass bares for a short distance while West
Island shore.                                                     Pass has about 1 foot at its shoalest part. At the seaward end of
 (91)  From the SW entrance the land presents a succession of    West Pass is a heavy growth of kelp. A good supply of water will
low, wooded hills, gradually rising to sharp rocky peaks.         be found on the E side of the cove. Lumber Cove and Canoe Cove
 (92)  The S entrance channel to Lisianski Strait is about 125    are connected at high water by narrow Canoe Pass.
yards wide, with a reef on the E side with 21/2 fathoms over it, and  (ml) Lost Cove, about 1 mile above the light on Esther Island,
rocks on the W side. Favor the W side, especially if the current is   affords anchorage for small vessels in 11 to 17 fathoms, mud bot-
ebbing, because there is a SE set then.                           tom. The anchorage is about 300 yards wide. Midway between the
 (93)  Currents.-Outside the rocks and reefs at the S entrance    entrance points is a rock that uncovers 5 feet and is marked by
the current floods to the N and ebbs to the S. Near the entrance    kelp during the summer and fall. Water may be had at the head of
among the rocks, on the ebb, a set to the SE has been experienced.    the arm near the end of the cove.
Tide rips are encountered here, with an ebb current against the     (102) Stag Bay is on the E side of Lisianski Strait, 6 miles from
wind. Swirls are formed in the vicinity of Esther Island, and the    the S entrance. The shores are steep and precipitous, the land ris-
current has been reported to exceed 3 knots at times; From Esther    ing rapidly on each side. The slopes are timbered to an elevation
Island to about 0.5 mile to the S of the islands near the N entrance    of about 600 feet, and to an elevation of about 1,000 feet with a
the current is slight; swirls and eddies are formed 0.5 mile to the S    scrub growth, above that the entire country is generally barren.
of the islets. Along the islets a current of 0.5 to 2 knots floods to    About 2.5 miles from the entrance on the S side is Cub Moun-
the N and ebbs to the S. N of the islets the current is small. In the    tain, a prominent peak, which from the entrance shows steep on







 240                              14. WEST COAST OF CHICHAGOF ISLAND AND YAKOBI ISLAND


 the N side near the summit, with a shoulder on the S side. At the    The point can be identified by a prominent cross of white quartz in
 head of the bay is an extensive tide flat, the greater part of it bares    the dark basalt that forms the point. This cross is about 40 feet
 at lowest tides and the approach is very steep. Depths within the    above the waterline and close below the tree line.
 bay at the center range from 27 fathoms at the entrance to 41 to 73  (114)  Takanis Bay has its entrance close W of Point Satchrun.
 fathoms inside.                                                   Several narrow arms make off from the bay in various directions.
   (103) Along each shore are mountain streams at the mouths of    The bay is exposed to the S, but small craft can usually find pro-
 which banks have been formed that extend offshore for 100 to 150    tected anchorage in its branches. The long narrow arm at the head
 yards. In entering follow midchannel courses. There is an anchor-    of the bay is clear, but has too limited swinging room for anchor-
 age at the head of the bay off the flats in 40 fathoms, with    age. The W half of Takanis Bay is foul and should be avoided.
 restricted swinging room; this anchorage is not recommended.        (115) The usual anchorage for small craft is in the NW branch,
  (104) A nickel exploration camp is at the mouth of Bohemia    which contains a small, wooded island near its head. There is
 Creek, on the W side of Lisianski Strait, about 1.6 miles SW of its    ample swinging room S of this island in 61/2 fathoms, mud and
 junction with Lisianski Inlet. The camp consists of three promi-    rock bottom. Very small craft anchor N of this island, which
 nent buildings and a small-boat float about 60 feet long. In 1976, a    affords more protection but limited swinging room, the best
 depth of 6 feet was reported alongside the float. A shoal at the    approach being E of the island.
 mouth of the creek is marked by a daybeacon.                        (116)  Small craft with local knowledge sometimes anchor in the
  (105) Rock Point, at the S side of the junction of Lisianski Strait    lagoon E of the upper end of Takanis Bay. The entrance is in the E
 and Lisianski Inlet, is marked by a light.                        shore of the bay, about 1.2 miles N of Point Satchrun, and is
  (106) Miner Island, at the junction of Lisianski Strait and    through a long, narrow arm about 25 yards wide, between bold
 Lisianski Inlet, is separated from Yakobi Island at high water by a    cliffs. The tidal currents through this arm are very swift, and this
channel about 100 yards wide. It is heavily wooded and sur-    passage should not be attempted except at high-water slack and
rounded by kelp.                                                  with good local knowledge. Anchorage exposed to the S can be
  (107) Junction Island, a small wooded island marked by a light,    found in the middle of the bay in 8 fathoms, mud and rock bottom,
is in Lisianski Inlet about 0.5 mile off the Chichagof Island shore,    about 0.5 mile above the large flat rock on the E side of the bay
and 0.9 mile SE of Miner Island.                                  just inside the entrance.
  (10o) A rocky ledge extends about 200 yards N from Junction       (117) Cape Cross, the southwesternmost extremity of Takanis
Island; kelp extends about 50 yards beyond this. Two rocks, each    Peninsula, is about 5.2 miles NW of Point Theodore. The point is
covered 1/4 fathom and marked by kelp, are about 0.2 mile and 0.5    comparatively low and wooded and identified by a high, rocky
mile N of Junction Island                                         islet 0.2 mile off the cape, on which is a prominent clump of trees.
  (309) Yakobi Island is densely wooded in its lower part, but    Two large, bare islets are N of this islet and are connected at
contains many high, bare, mountain peaks. The S and N parts of    extreme low water. Foul ground extends for 500 yards W  and for
the island are low; the interior and E parts are high. The W coast    300 yards S of the islet.
of the island is broken by many islands and off-lying rocks into    (11) Between Takanis Bay and Cape Cross are numerous small
numerous bays and bights, forming frequent shelter for small    islands, some of which are wooded. With local knowledge small
craft.                                                            boats can pass among these islands, but there is much foul ground
  (110)  Greentop Island, about 1 mile NW of Point Theodore, is    and there are no protected anchorages. White Crag Island, the
the outermost and largest of the numerous small islands, mostly    outermost island about midway between Cape Cross and Point
wooded, that are between Point Theodore and Squid Bay. The    Satchrun, is bare, and has a conspicuous white top which forms a
island is marked on its SE side by Greentop Island Light    prominent landmark. Foul ground and breakers extend almost 1
(57ï¿½51.3'N., 136030.1'W.), 79 feet above the water and shown    mile S of the cape.
from a post with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark. Close-     (119) Between Cape Cross and Surge Bay the coast is rocky and
to NE of Greentop Island is Greentop Harbor, which extends in a    broken with numerous large rocks close to shore. The 20-fathom
NE direction. Enter the harbor N of Greentop Island, passing N of    curve follows the coast at a distance of about 0.5 mile, outside of
the two large islands and the small elbow-shaped island. Favor the    which there are no dangers. Off Surge Bay, however, the 20-
N shore of the harbor, being careful to avoid the rock near the N  fathom curve extends for more than 2 miles offshore, and there are
shore.                                                            several 8- and 9-fathom spots from 1 to 1.8 miles offshore; but
 (111) Secure anchorage may be had in the harbor in 4 to 7 fath-    there are no dangers more than 1 mile off the general coastline.
oms, mud bottom, about 0.3 mile from the head. A large anchor-    Two miles N of Cape Cross is a large bight. Considerable kelp is
age is on the E side of the harbor. This anchorage has a depth of 5    found here, and there is no protected anchorage even for small
to 8 fathoms, mud bottom, but there are rocks that bare in the    boats in the main part of the bight. A rock with less than 2 fathoms
entrance, and caution is required in entering. The other passages    over it is reported in the SW part of the bight in about
among the islands are foul and should not be attempted except by    57ï¿½56'18"N., 136ï¿½34'14"W. A seasonal bell buoy is about 0.2 mile
very small craft with local knowledge.                            SW of the rock. In the S part of the bight, E of the large wooded
 (112) Squid Bay is about 2.5 miles NW of Point Theodore and    island, is an inner bight called Deer Harbor. It is entered only on
about 1.3 miles N of Greentop Island. The anchorage here in 5 to    the upper half of the tide. Vessels should pass S of the large
17 fathoms, soft bottom, is exposed to S. The entrance is clear and    wooded island. Sheltered anchorage may be had in either the N or
is bounded to SE by the high, wooded shoreline, and to the NW by    S arm of Deer Harbor in 4 to 7 fathoms, mud bottom.
a large area of foul ground that extends to Point Satchrun. All ves-  (120) Surge Bay, about 4.1 miles N of Cape Cross, is an open
sels should keep well away from this foul area. In entering, favor    bight with numerous rocks, and is suitable only for small vessels
the SE shore.                                                     with local knowledge. The small bights on the E side of the bay
 (113) Point Satchrun, bold and wooded, is on the SE side of the    are open W. The only protected anchorage for larger vessels is at
entrance to Takanis Bay, about 3 miles NNW of Greentop Island.    the extreme N end of the bay, the passage to which leads among







                                 14. WEST COAST OF CHICHAGOF ISLAND AND YAKOBI ISLAND                                      241


numerous small islands and rocks. In about the center of the bay is   are no protected anchorages for large vessels. There are no dan-
a high rocky islet, with two grass-covered knolls on it, which is   gers that extend more than 0.5 mile off the outermost islets.
the best mark for the bay. The best entrance to the bay is S and E  (123) Yakobi Rock is about 0.6 mile W of Cape Bingham and is
of the islet; the entrance NNW of it is through kelp, and in W   the farthest offshore of the numerous rocky islets in the vicinity.
weather breakers extend clear across the entrance.                (124) Hoktaheen Cove, a small, open, and exposed cove about
 (121) Surge Bay Entrance Light (57ï¿½58.6'N., 136ï¿½33.7'W.), 65    1.2 miles S of Cape Bingham, is suitable only for small craft, and
feet above the water, is shown from a steel post with a red and    local knowledge is required for its entry. A small timbered knob is
white diamond-shaped daymark on a small islet marking the S    about 0.3 mile S of the S shore of the cove, and two somewhat
entrance to Surge Bay.                                           sharp knobs are 1.5 miles S of the cove.
 (122) From Surge Bay to Cape Bingham (58ï¿½05.5'N.,                (125) BinghamCove,requiringlocalknowledgetoenter, is on
136032.5'W.), the coast is very broken with many off-lying rocks    the S side of Cape Bingham. The cove is open to the W, but has a
and islets. Most of the coves among these islets are foul, and there    well-sheltered S arm. It is reported that local fishing boats use
                                                                   Bingham Cove as a foul weather anchorage.









                                        15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT

  (1)   This chapter describes Cross Sound and Icy Strait, which      (11)  Cross Sound weather is mostly maritime while Icy Strait
are the northernmost sea connections for the inland passages of    reflects some continental influences. Average maximums in Cross
southeastern Alaska. Also described are the tributary waterways    Sound range from the mid 30's (ï¿½F) in winter to the mid 50's in
and the various communities in the area, such as Pelican, Elfin    summer with a 70 to 90 drop to minimum. In Icy Strait, the range
Cove, Gustavus, and Hoonah.                                         is from around freezing to the mid 60's with a 100 to 150 drop to
                                                                    minimum. At Cape Spencer, the extreme low is -1ï¿½F compared to
  (2)   Chart 17300.-Cross Sound and Icy Strait are the north-    -250F at Gustavus. Cape Spencer receives about twice as much
ernmost sea connections for the inland passages of southeastern    precipitation as Gustavus, on average. Both locations show a peak
Alaska, separating the mainland between Cape Spencer and Point    during October, November, and December.
Couverden, and from Yakobi Island and Chichagof Island between        (12)  Glacial ice in varying quantities is prevalent in Icy Strait
Cape Bingham and Point Augusta. The waterway is about 61            and Cross Sound throughout the year. The ice comes from Glacier
miles long from Cape Spencer at the W entrance to Point Augusta,    Bay, and most of it is usually found at Glacier Bay entrance and
at its junction with Chatham Strait. It averages 4 to 8 miles wide,    from there to Inian Islands. It is quite thick in Cross Sound, and
but in places this is reduced by islands.                            ice has been seen 10 to 15 miles seaward of Cape Spencer and as
 (3)   Currents.-The current from the sea sets NE on the flood    far E as Point Augusta. The pieces are large enough to make them
into Cross Sound and Icy Strait and meets the flood current in    dangerous to navigation. Ice at times piles up heavily along the
Chatham Strait S of Point Augusta. The ebb current sets in the    shore from Point Adolphus to Eagle Point.
opposite direction. The velocity varies with the range of tide and
width of passage. The ebb velocity is stronger than the flood.        (13)  Chart 17302.-Cross Sound is that part of the passage SW
 (4)   In the wide parts of Cross Sound, the estimated velocity of    of the Inian Islands. Icy Strait is that part E of Inian Islands.
the current is 1.2 knots on the flood and 2 knots on the ebb.
                                                                      (14) The N shores of the sound are mostly high, formed by the
 (5)   Between Inian Islands and Point Wimbledon, the current    slopes of the Fairweather range. The S side, formed by the Chich-
has a velocity of 2.9 knots on the flood and 5.1 knots on the ebb.    agof group, is compratively low.
When the current is strongest, heavy swirls occur NW of the Inian
Islands. Daily predictions for times of slack water and velocity of   (15)  Caution.-From Cross Sound to Excursion Inlet, shoalings
the current in North Inian Pass are given in the Tidal Current    amounting to as much as 6 feet in several critical areas were dis-
Tables.                                                             closed during 1959. It is probable that these shoalings and others
                                                                    not yet discovered were due to the major earthquake of July 10,
                            .'(6)  .    of the sladsnthnarowestpartoftepa1958. Accordingly, mariners are urged to use caution in navigating
between them and Point Lavinia, the velocity of the ebb current is
6 knots, and heavy dangerous rips and swirls occur, especially
with an ebb current and W or SW winds.
 (7)   In North Passage and South Passage of Icy Strait, the esti-   (16)  Chart 17303.-Cape Bingham, the NW  extremity of
mated velocity of the ebb current is 3.6 to 4.1 knots. There are    Yakobi Island and the SE point at the entrance to Cross Sound, is a
swirls and tide rips at times off the entrance to Glacier Bay. At    low, irregular, rounding, wooded point with a gradual rise for
Point Augusta the tidal currents usually have little velocity. (See    about 1 mile to the interior. Numerous open glades occur in the
the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions for places in Cross    vicinity. Low timbered islets and points extend offshore for a dis-
Sound and Icy Strait.)                                              tance of about 0.4 mile.
 (s)   Strong tide rips occur at the entrance to Swanson Harbor      (17)  From Cape Bingham to Soapstone Point the shoreline is of
with a slight S breeze.                                              a very irregular and broken character and presents an almost con-
 (9)   On the S side of Icy Strait between Point Sophia and Point    tinuous line of perpendicular cliffs with numerous indentations
Augusta very little current is encountered. Occasionally, when       and inlets, at the heads of which are gradual sand beaches. Numer-
weather indicates a SE storm along the outer coast in the vicinity    ous columnlike pinnacle rocks and small rocky islets mark the
of the entrance to Chatham Strait, a current of 2 or 3 knots may be    entire shoreline.
noted, flowing in a W  direction along the shore in this locality. Its  (is)  Soapstone Point, on the W  side of the entrance to Lisian-
direction seems to be unaffected by the stage of the tide.           ski Inlet, is the extremity of a neck of land of bold appearance with
 (lo)  Weather.-While Cross Sound is exposed to wind and    a shoreline of steep cliffs. W is a small cove open and exposed and
weather off the Gulf of Alaska, its orientation lessens the effect of    with depths of 8 to 9 fathoms at the entrance. E is Soapstone
the strong southeasterlies and northerlies of fall and winter. It is    Cove, a narrow inlet that has at its head a valley with a stream.
more exposed to winds and seas from SW through NW. These    Depths shoal rapidly from 25 fathoms at the entrance to less than 1
winds are most frequent in summer and fall; fall conditions are    fathom 0.5 mile within Soapstone Cove. In October 1978, an 8-
roughest. Swells from distant storms often arrive from SW from    fathom shoal was reported off the entrance to the cove, about 0.5
October through March. Poor visibilities are most frequent in    mile ENE from Soapstone Point. From the shoreline in the vicinity
summer and winter. During July and August, warm air moving          of the point the land rises rapidly and is generally timbered to ele-
across the still-cool waters results in fog. Poor winter visibilities    vations of about 1,500 feet. The bottom is very irregular for a dis-
often result from rain and snow and are usually worst from Gusta-    tance of about 1 mile in a NW direction from this point. Rocks and
vus westward.                                                       kelp extend off the point.


242







                                               15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT                                                 243


 (19)  Chart 17301.-Cape Spencer, the NW entrance point to         (29)  If bound for the head of the inlet, pass NE of Miner Island
Cross Sound, is a conspicuous headland. Extending from the cape    and Junction Island, follow midchannel courses for about 3 miles
for about 1.2 miles in a S direction is a large shoal area in which    beyond Junction Island, then favor the SW shore until well past
there are rocky islets, some of the inner ones wooded, and rocks,    the flats off the NE shore at Pelican and the 5-foot rock almost in
the outer ones usually showing as breakers. From the shoreline the    midchannel about 0.6 mile beyond. Follow midchannel courses
cape rises rapidly to timbered ridges.                            until near the head of the inlet, then favor the SW shore through
 (20)  Cape Spencer Light (58ï¿½11.9'N., 136038.4'W.), 105 feet    the narrows and proceed in midchannel to anchorage.
above the water, is shown from a white square concrete tower on a   (30)  In November 1989, a rock, covered 93/4 fathoms, was
rectangular concrete building on the outermost large, rocky islet S    reported about 0.3 miles SE of the 5-foot rock in about
from Cape Spencer. A fog signal is at the light.                  57056'24.2"N., 136012'16.1"W.
 (21)  Dicks Arm, about 1 mile N of Cape Spencer Light, is a       (31)  Column Point, the NE headland of Lisianski Inlet,
narrow inlet less than 200 yards wide in places that extends in a N  receives its name from the columnlike masses of rock that extend
direction for about 2 miles. From the head of the arm is a gradu-    from its shores. The shoreline is rough and broken and is marked
ally rising valley, passing over a saddle to Taylor Bay. A narrow    by steep cliffs 20 to 100 feet high. The land E rises rapidly and is
channel, with depths of 21/2 to 12 fathoms leads E of Zip Rock, 20    timbered to elevations of about 1,500 feet. Small rocky islets and
feet high and bare, through the off-lying rocks and islets to the    rocks awash, marked by kelp, extend about 0.4 mile offshore, just
inlet. Depths of 3/4 to 8 fathoms are found in the inlet to within 0.5    inside the entrance to Lisianski Inlet. The W extremity of the foul
mile of the head, where it is shoal.                              area is marked by a seasonal buoy.
                                                                     (32)  The SW shore of Lisianski Inlet is bold, but broken by a
 (22)  Chart 17302.-Taylor Bay, on the NW side of Cross    number of small bights. Mite Cove, 2.5 miles from the entrance,
Sound has its entrance about 6 miles NE of Cape Spencer. The bay    is the best anchorage for small craft. Mite Island is off the NW
is open to the SE. Brady Glacier, at the head of the bay, has a face    point of the entrance. Kelp and rocks extend for about 50 yards
about 2 miles long; about 400 feet high, and presents a broken,    offshore of the island. Depths of 13 to 20 fathoms were obtained
ragged appearance, with dark streaks. Off the face of the glacier    in the channel SE of the island, while to the S depths of 5 and 6
there is an extensive flat that drops off rapidly to 10 to 12 fath-    fathoms were found. Protected anchorage may be had in 11 to 12
oms. The flat at the face of the glacier is extending rapidly down    fathoms, soft bottom, in the center of the cov e are several
the bay. Vessels proceeding up the bay should use caution and    freshwater streams, and at the head of the cove and on each side
keep sounding. Extensive shoaling has been reported in the upper    are sand and gravel beaches. Mite Head, the SE point of the
half of the bay with bare spots in some places. The bottom is mud.    entrance, is marked by a lght
The SW side of the bay is shoal for 0.5 mile offshore. At the       (33)  A rock awash, marked by a daybeacon, is 350 yards off
entrance to Taylor Bay a rock that exposes at low water is about    the SW shore about 3 miles above Mite Head. There is deep water
0.75 mile off the SW shore.                                       between it and the SW shore.
 (23)  Taylor Island, high and hummocky, forms the NE side of      (34)  Basalt Knob, on the NE shore about 4 miles above Mite
                                                                   Head, is marked by a light.
the bay for 1.9 miles from the entrance with small rocky islets up
to 0.4 mile off the S end of the island. From Taylor Island a chain  (35)  The NE shore of Lisianski Inlet from inside the entrance to
                                                                    opposite Miner Island is clear. The beach is rocky, and the land
of small islets extend NW. There is no navigable channel between
the islets and the shore.                                         rises rapidly to mountain ridges, timbered to an elevation of about
                                                                    1,500 feet. To the head of the inlet the shoreline is generally rocky
 (24) Fern Harbor, the inlet on the E side of Taylor Island,
  exte4 Fd abt a rbile inhe NWldirect  andois  the 0.3   ile wide .  '    with several islands and points with flats extending short distances
extends about 1 mile in aNW direction and is about 0.3 mile wide.
Depths of 25 fathoms were found at the entrance and depths of 9
to 11 fathoms, sticky bottom, within the cove. A boulder reef    woodare
closes the head of the bay except a narrow high-water channel
                                                                     (36)  Pelican, on the NE shore of Lisianski Inlet about 4.5 miles
near the Tsmall             craft.                                SE of Miner Island, is a community with a cold storage plant, a
small craft.
                                                                    general store, and a restaurant. Lodging is also available in this
                                                                    community.
  (25)  Chart 17303.-Lisianski Inlet follows a general SE direc-    (37)  Pelican Entrance Light (57057.3'N., 136ï¿½13.8'W.), 17
tion for about 21.5 miles. There is temporary anchorage for ves-    feet above the water and shown from a post with a red and white
sels up to 150 feet long off the E side of Miner Island in 20    diamond-shaped daymark, is about 190 yards off the end of the
fathoms, rocky bottom, poor holding ground. The vessel swings to    breakwater.
the current, and the effects of wind drawing through the channel   (38)  Dangers.-The dangers in the immediate area are two
are felt. Good anchorage and shelter may be had at the head of    rocky islets and rocks awash S of the light and off the flat that
Lisianski Inlet in 15 fathoms, soft, sticky bottom. Small boats    extend from the shore S of the breakwater. A 2'/,-fathom shoal and
anchor alongshore where the depths are not too great, particularly    a rock, covered 11/2 fathoms, are in the entrance to Pelican Harbor
in Mite Cove, off Miner Island, and off the flats alongshore.     in about 57057'27.8"N., 136013'53.9"W., and 57'57'24.9"N.,
  (26)  Currents in Lisianski Inlet are reported slight and set fair    136013'47.7"W., respectively.
with the channel.                                                  (39)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural
  (27)  In entering, favor the SW shore until inside the entrance    quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and
then follow midchannel courses. The chart is the guide.           appendix for addresses.)
  (28)  If bound for Lisianski Strait, round Miner Island at a dis-  (40)  Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of
tance of about 300 yards. This passes close to an 8-fathom spot    the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-
surrounded by deep water.                                         ter 1.) Pelican is a customs station.







244                                            15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT


 (41)  Wharves.-The wharves at Pelican are privately owned          (53)  Point Lucan, 3 miles NE of Column Point, is a prominent
and operated, except for a State ferry terminal on the NW side of    wooded headland. From Column Point to Point Lucan the shore-
the breakwater. The wharves and the small-craft floats are partially    line consists of almost unbroken precipitous cliffs 50 to 100 feet
protected from SE winds by the breakwater and the rocky islets.    high, with the exception of a narrow strip of sand beach 0.5 mile
 (42)  Pelican  Cold  Storage  Wharf  (57'57'36"N.,                SSW of Point Lucan. Heavy masses of kelp extend offshore for
136013'47"W.): 125-foot face; 20 feet reported alongside; ship-    0.2 to 0.5 mile. A small rocky islet is 0.4 mile offshore about 1.2
ment of freight, ice, and receipt and shipment of fish at the face;    miles NNE of Column Point. From the shore the land rises rapidly
owned and operated by Pelican Seafoods, Inc.                       and the slopes are heavily timbered.
 (43)  Pelican  Crab  Cannery Wharf  (57ï¿½57'36"N.,                  (54)  Three Hill Island, NW of Point Lucan, has three promi-
136ï¿½13'43"W.): about 45 yards E of the Seafoods Wharf; 95-foot    nent wooded hills separated by low saddles; the SE summit is
face; 15 feet reported alongside; 1/2-ton hoists; receipt and ship-    somewhat flat; the NW summit appears conical. The SW shore is
ment of crabs; owned and operated by Pelican Seafoods, Inc.        fringed with rocks and rocky islets. Off the SE extremity of the
  (44)  Pelican Fuel Pier (57057'37"N., 136013'40'"W.): about 35    island are two small rocky islets close together, about 25 feet high.
yards NE of the SE corner of the Crab Cannery Wharf; 60-foot    Three Hill Island Light (58009.2'N., 136023.0'W.), 80 feet
face; 12 feet reported alongside; receipt and sale of petroleum    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
                                                                     above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
faproducts; 12 feet reported alongside; receipt and sale of petroleum Inc.  white diamond-shaped daymark on the W islet. Between the light
  (45)   Alaska S tate Ferry Terminal (57ï¿½57'28.5 "N.,    and the rocky islet off Point Lucan is a deepwater channel 0.2 mile
136ï¿½13'34"W.): on the NW  side of the breakwater; 20 feet    wide
reported alongside; owned and operated by the State of Alaska.       (55)  George Islands, a group of four islands at the entrance of
                  reported .longside; owned and operated by the  a.  Port Althorp, are about 8 miles NE of Cape Bingham. The larger
  (46)  Supplies.-Provisions and fishing supplies can be obtained    Port Althorp, are about 8 miles NE of Cape Bigham. The larger
  (46)  SuP~lies.-Provisions and fishing supplies can be obtained    islands are sparsely wooded. The two N islands are small with off-
at the general store; gasoline, diesel fuel, lubricating oils, greases,    lying rocks that extend about 0.1 mile in a N direction. A light is
aviation fuel, and water at the fuel pier; and ice for fishing vessels    on an islet off the northeasternmost island.
and water at the cold storage wharf.                                 (56)  The westernmost and largest of the George Islands is
  (47)  Repairs.-Vessels up to 75 feet long can be handled at one    irregular in shape with a deep indentation. Granite Cove, on its S
of the city-operated grids in the mudflats E of the fuel pier. Two  side is open to the S. The sides of the cove are irregular cliffs, and
other city-operated grids, capable of servicing three vessels, are    the head is a shingle beach. A shoal point extends for about 150
between the fuel pier and small-boat basin. A nearby machine    yards from the rock off the point on the W shore of the cove where
 shop is available to small craft for minor engine repairs.         the shoreline turns W.
  (48)  Small-craft facilities.-A Federal project provides for a     (57)  Local magnetic disturbances.-Differences of as much as
 small-boat basin dredged to a depth of 12 feet between the    30 from normal variations have been observed on George Islands
 wharves on the N and a breakwater 1,000 feet long on the S. The    at the head of Granite Cove.
 city-operated small-craft floats close SE of the fuel pier provide   (58)  From a low depression in the center of the island, at the
 about 3,600 feet of float space. In August 1991, 12 feet was    head of Granite Cove, the land rises to the S to an elevation of
 reported alongside the floats except for lesser depths along the    about 300 feet, steep and with rocky cliffs on the S side; N of the
 floats on the N and E outer parts of the harbor. A seaplane float is    depression the land rises less steeply to an elevation of over 200
 at the W end of the second float E of the fuel pier. Water and elec-    feet. The W and S shores are fringed with rocks and kelp.
 tricity are available at the floats.                                 (59)  The easternmost island, separated from the W  island by a
  (49)  A 60-foot small-craft float, with 10 feet alongside, is about    narrow channel with a depth of 31/4 fathoms, rises to an elevation
 25 yards NE of the E corner of Pelican Seafoods Wharf. An 800-    of over 100 feet; the shores are fringed with kelp and rocks, and
 pound hoist for transferring supplies for the general store is on the    kelp is off the S end, close-to. On the S side of the island is a white
 float. Another small-craft float, with 6 to 8 feet alongside, is on the    gravestone 4 feet high and 30 feet above water cemented to the
 N side of the Pelican Fuel Pier.                                   bare rock outcrop.
   (50)  Communications.-Pelican has scheduled year-round sea-        (60)  Gaff Rock is about 0.4 mile W  of the SW end of the W
 plane service to Juneau and Sitka. A supply boat calls monthly    George Islands. There is no safe passage between the rock and the
 from Seattle. Telephone and radiotelephone services are main-    island; kelp surrounds the rock, and there is a kelp patch to the E.
 tained with other parts of Alaska and with other States.             (61)  Currents.-Current observations in the entrance E of
   (51)  About 1.5 miles from the head, Lisianski Inlet is narrowed    George Islands indicate that the current usually flows N with a
 to a width of about 330 yards by Soloma Point, a grassy point    varying velocity that reaches a strength of about 2 knots 21/4 hours
 projecting from the NE shore. Beyond this the inlet widens to    before flood strength in North Inian Pass. (See the Tidal Current
 about 0.5 mile. At the head of the inlet is a flat that bares for about    Tables for daily predictions.)
 0.5 mile. Two streams empty here. The N stream is about 60 yards     (62)  Point Lavinia, about 10 miles E of Cape Spencer, is the N
 wide and of considerable volume; the current is swift, but the    headland at the entrance to Port Althorp. The point appears to
 water is shoal. Beyond the flat is a grass-covered area, the W  end    form a little bluff at its extremity with rather low land behind it,
 of a large valley.                                                 rising in a SE direction. It is wooded, and depths of 21/4 to 5 1/4
                                                                      fathoms extend 200 yards off the point. The point is marked by
   (52)  Chart 17302.-Port Althorp, on the SE side of Cross    Point Lavinia Light (58013.3'N., 136ï¿½21.3'W.), 60 feet above the
  Sound, between Point Lucan and Point Lavinia, with Three Hill    water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dia-
  Island and George Islands across the entrance, narrows to an inlet    mond-shaped daymark.
  about 0.3 mile wide near the head. An aquatic farm (58ï¿½07.1'N.,      (63)  Elfin Cove is a narrow inlet in the NE shore of Port
  136ï¿½17.9'W.) is behind an inlet on the W side of the port 1.3 miles    Althorp E of the E George Islands. A large islet with several
  from the head. Three passes lead to Port-Althorp.                  smaller ones close N is in the middle of the entrance to the cove;







                                                15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT                                                 245


channels are on either side of the islet. A light marks the northern-    able distance off the N shore. Depths of 1 fathom were found in
most of the smaller islets.                                       the bight and in the channel.
 (64)  The main entrance channel to the cove, SW of the large      (75)  The ruins of a pier are on the SW side of Port Althorp,
islet, is marked by Elfin Cove Entrance Light 2 (58ï¿½011.7'N.,    about 1.5 miles SE of Point Lucan. Anchorage may be had in 15 to
136ï¿½21.1'W.), 48 feet above the water, shown from a small house    20 fathoms, mud bottom, at the head of Port Althorp. Small craft
with a red triangular daymark on the S entrance point. The channel    anchor closer in, near the head in 5 fathoms, soft bottom. In 1992,
then leads SE between rock ledges and through a narrow cut into    local fisherman reported that cable remnants were pulled up in the
the inner harbor.                                                 vicinity of 58ï¿½08'12"N., 139ï¿½19'18"W. In entering, the channel E
 (65)  Channels.-A Federal project provides for two dredged    of the islet is preferred. At the head of the bay is a flat with a
sections in the main channel; a 9-foot section just N of Elfin Cove    stream emptying into the SE corner.
Entrance Light 2, and an 8-foot section through the narrow cut that  (76)  The Inian Islands, consisting of five principal islands,
leads into the inner harbor. In July 1992, depths of 5 feet were    five smaller islets, and a few rocks, are between Point Wimbledon
available in the dredged channels with shoaling just N of Light 2    and Point Lavinia and separate Cross Sound from Icy Strait. They
and off the SW point of the settlement of Elfin Cove.             are close together, mountainous, and wooded. The NW island rises
 (66)  Anchorages.-The harbor affords protected anchorage in    to a conical peak with a shoulder on the SE side. North Inian
either of the two basins in the inner harbor and is extensively used    Pass Light (5816.3'N., 136024.1'W.), 64 feet above the water, is
by small fishing vessels. Care should be taken when anchoring in    shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-
the lower basin of the inner harbor; numerous vessels have been    shaped daymark on the NW point of the NW island.
reported dragging anchor and often going aground on the eastern    (77)  South Inian Pass connects Cross Sound and Icy Strait S
shore.                                                            of the Inian Islands. Two shoal spots are off the point on the S side
 (67)  Dangers.-The principal danger in the approach to the    of the pass at the E entrance; the N one, a rock awash, is marked
cove is a 1 /4-fathom rock, marked by kelp, about 500 yards NNW   by a lighted bell buoy; the S spot is covered by 2 fathoms at low
of Elfin Cove Entrance Light 2. The rocky ledges on the sides of    water.
the entrance channel are marked by daybeacons.                      (78)  South Rock, at the entrance to the bight in the S side of
                                                                     the pass, and Dad Rock, at the entrance to the irregular indenta-
 (68) Elfin Cove, a fishing settlement on the NE side of the har-
                                                                     tion in the N side of the pass, both bare and are marked by kelp.
bor, has a small hotel, restaurant, electronic shop, and laundromat
                              open from May through Septembe   A general store maintains    There are no dangers in South Inian Pass proper and no anchor-
open from May through September. A general store maintains
limited supplies year round.                                      ages.
                                                                      (79)  The current is stronger than in North Inian Pass, approach-
 (69)  A fuel float with a 250-foot face is in the outer harbor,    in 9 knots on the ebb at times. The flood is considerabl weaker.
about 240 yards E of Elfin Cove Entrance Light 2. In 1991, 9 feet   g                                                  y
                                                                     Severe tide rips and swirls occur, especially at the W entrance,
was alongside the float. Gasoline, diesel fuel, lubricating oils, and    with an ebb current and W or SW wind.
greases can be obtained from the float. Water and limited provi-
sions are available in the summer. On the S side of the SW corner    Lav inia s   hould be given a ber t    h of not less than 250 yards to
                                                                     Lavinia should be given a berth of not less than 250 yards to
of the float, a fish-buying scow, with ice and a limited amount of    avoid a rock exposed 3 feet at MLLW, NW of the point. Ice is
provisions and fishing supplies, is docked in the summer.         occasionally encountered.
                                                                     occasionally encountered.
 (70)  The settlement of Elfin Cove operates small-craft floats in  (81)  Earl Cove is the indentation about 400 yards wide in the E
both the inner and outer harbors. A 203-foot float with a capacity    side of Inian Islands. It is clear, and a small vessel may anchor
for 12 boats with 21 feet on the NW end and 9 feet on the inshore    here temporarily in 8 to 16 fathoms, but it is exposed E and gener-
side in 1991, is just E of the fuel float. A 34-foot seaplane float is   ally has considerable ice.
at the NW end of the 203-foot float. The floats at the N end of the  (82)  North Inian Pass is between the N coasts of the Inian
                                                                      (82) North Inian Pass is between the N coasts of the Inian
inner harbor provide 46 berths for small craft with depths of 13 to    Islands and Point Wimbledon. A dangerous rock awash is about
18 feet alongside in 1991. Water is available at the gangway.    0.6 mile ENE from the NE entrance point of Inian Cove, and
There is a private float landing on the E shore of the inner harbor.  about 0.2 mile offshore; a bare rock is between this shoal spot and
  (71)  A community-operated grid that can handle craft up to 60    the shore.
feet in length is in the inner harbor W of the small-craft floats. A  (83)  Point Wimbledon, about 3 miles E from the S extremity
nearby machine shop is available for minor engine repairs.        of Taylor Island, is a bold headland rising sharply to about 0.8
  (72)  Elfin Cove has scheduled seaplane service with Juneau.    mile off the beach, then with less slope to higher peaks to the NW.
Telephone and radiotelephone communications are maintained    It is thickly wooded and presents a continuous shoreline of gray
with other parts of Alaska, and with other states.                cliffs about 50 feet high. In the bight between Taylor Island and
  (73)  Althorp Rock, about 15 feet high and marked by a light,    Point Wimbledon is a rather prominent headland off which a shoal
is in the middle of Port Althorp, about 0.5 mile E of Three Hill    extends for about 0.6 mile. Ice from Glacier Bay is frequently
Island. Several rocks that cover are close-to. A group of rocks,    encountered.
several of which show at high water, are W of Althorp Rock; kelp   (84)  Inian Cove, on the N side of Inian Islands, is a secure
usually marks the rocks. Deep water is found between the patches,    anchorage with a clear width of about 600 yards. Its entrance is
but the use of these channels is not recommended.                 about 0.8 mile E of the NE point of the westernmost Inian Island.
  (74)  On the NE shore of Port Althorp, about 5 miles SSE of    A small grassy islet with steep rocky sides is off the N point of the
Point Lavinia, is a cove with a small island near the N shore and a    entrance. Kelp grows in deep water on both sides in the entrance.
small islet with rocks close-to near the E shore. Depths of 18 fath-    Ice drifts into the cove, usually along the SW side, but is not con-
oms near the head to 29 fathoms in the middle were obtained.    sidered dangerous to vessels at anchor.
From the N part of the cove an inlet extends E for about 0.3 mile  (85)  Approaching from E, pass N of foul ground that extends
to a bight about 0.3 mile in diameter; flats extend for a consider-    0.2 mile off Inian Islands, 0.7 mile ENE of the entrance to the






246                                          15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT


cove. From W the approach is clear. Enter in midchannel and steer    shore from the E side of the island and about 0.9 mile SSE from
E so as to keep the NE shore aboard, distant 100 yards, in the nar-    the light; a reef extends about 0.2 mile from the SE point of the
rowest part of the cove. Anchor in the wide part of the cove in 7 to    island. Tide rips occur off this reef, off Jacks Cove, and about 1
9 fathoms, soft bottom.                                          mile E of South Passage Light. Willoughby Cove on the SE side
                                                                   of Lemesurier Island, affords anchorage in 8 to 10 fathoms in the
 (86)  Chart 17300.-Icy Strait extends from Inian Islands in an    E part of the cove about 0.2 mile off the beach; a strong eddy
E direction for about 16 miles to Point Adolphus, where it takes a    occasionally sweeps in a small iceberg.
SE direction for about 27 miles to its junction with Chatham       (95)  North Passage and South Passage lead N and S of
Strait. It averages 6.5 miles wide, but in places this is reduced by    Lemesurier Island, respectively. North Passage is more often used,
islands.                                                         furnishing a more direct passage to sea. A 5 /4-fathom reef is in
 (87)  Glacial ice from Glacier Bay may be found in the strait in    the entrance to North Passage, 2.3 miles 033ï¿½ from Lemesurier
small quantities mainly in the winter. Some of these isolated bergs    Island Light 4. South Passage is clear, but the S shore should be
are dangerous to small- and medium-sized vessels.                given a berth of at least 0.8 mile to avoid the reef and submerged
                                                                   rocks off Goose Island.
 (88)  Chart 17302.-Point Dundas, the E point of the entrance     (96)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
to Dundas Bay, on the NW shore of Icy Strait to the N of Inian    70 from the normal variations have been observed in North Pas-
Islands, is bold, steep, and wooded. There is deep water close to    sage.
the point, the 50-fathom curve is less than 0.2 mile offshore.     (97)  From the E point at the entrance to Idaho Inlet
 (89)  Dundas Bay has its entrance on the NW side of Icy Strait,    (58013.2'N., 136ï¿½09.6'W.), the shoreline is low and wooded and
N of Inian Islands. The main bay is about 2 miles wide and 4 miles    trends to the E for 4 miles to Mud Bay. Mud Bay River empties
long in a N direction. The N end of the main bay is filled by flats to    through the sandspits at the head of the bay, where flats extend for
a distance of about 1.3 miles from its head. Between the flats is a    a considerable distance. The three wooded islands on the W side
channel of very deep water leading N toward the mouth of the    of the bay are separated from the mainland by a narrow channel
Dundas River. SW of the flats is a channel along the SW shore of    that bares. Foul ground, bare in places, extends 0.5 mile offshore
the bay leading into the narrow crooked inlet that extends 5 miles    from the N side of Goose Island, the largest of the wooded
in a NW direction, and then turning abruptly S and reaches to    islands. There is a depth of 5 fathoms about 1.8 miles ENE of
within 1 mile of Taylor Bay, with low land between. Numerous    Quartz Point, the NE point of Goose Island.
deadheads have been observed in the bay.                           (98)  Anchorage may be had in 5 to 9 fathoms, 1 mile from the
 (90)  Ice begins to form in November in the N and SW arms of    head of Mud Bay, but is exposed from W to NE, and at times ice is
the bay and may linger into May if colder weather prevails.      encountered. In entering from the W, give the N shore of Goose
 (91)  Anchorage in 8 to 12 fathoms, sticky bottom, can be had    Island a berth of at least 0.8 mile and Quartz Point a berth of 0.5
about 0.3 mile off the SW shore, opposite a wooded islet, about 3    mile.
miles N of Point Wimbledon. The only danger is the flat about 0.8  (99)  Point Adolphus, the northernmost point of Chichagof
mile NE of the islet. The anchorage is exposed to the SE, and    Island, is marked by Point Adolphus Light (58017.1'N.,
heavy ice drifting with the current is sometimes troublesome. At    135047.1'W.), 20 feet above the water and shown from a small
the anchorage the tidal currents have an estimated velocity of 2.5    house with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark. It is a bold
knots.                                                           prominent point covered with timber and rising to a rounded sum-
 (92)  Idaho Inlet has its entrance on the S shore SE of Inian    mit. Tide rips occur N of the point. About 1 mile SW is another
Islands. A shoal extends about 0.2 mile W from the E point at the    rounded peak. The shoreline between Mud Bay and Point Adol-
entrance to Idaho Inlet. Anchorage can be made in 15 fathoms in    phus is fairly regular. Pinta Cove, the bight on the E side of Point
the entrance to Gull Cove, on the E shore of the inlet just S of this    Adolphus, has been used as a temporary anchorage, but is not rec-
point. At low water a small vessel can select an anchorage closer    ommended. A '/2-fathom rock is near the center of the cove.
in, with better shelter from N winds in depths of 15 fathoms.      (100) Flynn Cove is on the S side of Icy Strait, about 7 miles SE
 (93)  Shaw Islands, two in number and wooded, are on the W      of Point Adolphus and about 1.7 miles SE of Eagle Point. A shoal
side about 1.8 miles inside the entrance. The islands are connected    extends 300 yards NW from the NW extremity of Burger Point,
by a ledge, but a good channel is on each side of them. A mid-    the high wooded peninsula forming the NE side of the cove.
channel course leads safely to the head of the inlet, where there is    Harry Island, small and wooded, is in the entrance 600 yards NW
anchorage in 18 fathoms, mud bottom, in the middle about 0.4 to    of this point. An islet is 0.3 mile W of Harry Island. A submerged
0.5 mile WNW of a wooded islet. Container barges often use this    rock is reported to be about 50 yards SE of Harry Island. A 2 3/4-
anchorage during foul weather. Small craft find anchorage closer    fathom spot was reported to be about 800 yards NNW of the
to the head of the bay in 5 to 10 fathoms. A marker at the head of    island in about 58ï¿½13'23.2"N., 135ï¿½36'16.7"W.
the bay marks a trail that extends inland for about 8 ,miles to the
head to Tenakee Inlet. The trail is maintained by the U.S. Forest  (1ol) Pleasant Island, on the N side of Icy Strait about 4.5
Service.                                                         miles NE of Point Adolphus, is comparatively low. The Knob,
 (94)  Lemesurier Island is in the middle of Icy Strait, 4 miles E    near the middle of the S shore, is a prominent wooded knob. Noon
of the Inian Islands. Lemesurier Island Light (58ï¿½19.1'N.,    Point is the E extremity of Pleasant Island. Rocks and kelp extend
136ï¿½02.6'W.), 42 feet above water, is shown from a small house    0.6 mile off the point.
with a red and whitle diamond-shaped daymark on the NE point of    (102) Icy Passage Light 2 (58023.2'N., 135ï¿½37.7'W.), 22 feet
the island. South Passage Light (58ï¿½15.5'N., 136ï¿½06.9'W.)    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red trian-
marks the SW point of the Lemesurier Island. The island is   gular daymark off the N shore of Pleasant Island, marks the S side
heavily timbered and has several summits. A small wooded island    of Icy Passage, the channel between Pleasant Island and the N
is about 200 yards off the NW shore. A shoal extends 0.4 mile off-    shore. Mudflats extend off the N shore to within 0.8 mile of the N






                                               15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT                                                 247


shore of Pleasant Island. The shallow cove on the N shore of    on the E side of the inlet. The inlet divides into two arms 4.5 miles
Pleasant Island, SE of the light, offers fair shelter in 1 to 8 fath-    inside the entrance.
oms, mud bottom.                                                   (109) Vessels will find indifferent anchorage near the head of the
 (103) Gustavus is a community with an airport on the N shore    E arm, 0.2 mile from the E shore, in about 30 fathoms. Small craft
of Icy Passage at the mouth of Salmon River. A lighted buoy,    can select anchorage in about 10 fathoms in the coves at the head
about 3.7 miles W  of Icy. Passage Light 2, marks the river    of the W arm.
entrance. Prominent from offshore is the silver tank farm SE of the  (0lo) Excursion Inlet, a small settlement on the E shore about
community. A State-maintained T-head pier, with a 48-foot face    3.3 miles above the entrance, is the site of a cannery. A wharf at
and 10 feet reported alongside in 1976, is about 0.3 mile E of the    the cannery has a 130-foot face. A seaplane float and a seasonal
entrance to Salmon River. A seasonal 100-foot small-craft float    small-craft float are'just N of the wharf. In 1976, 10 feet was
extends E off the NE corner of the T-head pier. A W swell makes    reported alongside the small-craft float. Vessels usually stem the
the pier and float a poor moorage for small craft. Freight boats call    current, making either a port or starboard landing at the cannery
during the summer. A highway connects Gustavus and the airport    wharf. The flood current is reported to set about parallel with the
with the headquarters of the U.S. National Park Rangers and a    face of the wharf; the ebb sets off the wharf, particularly during
lodge at Bartlett Cove. Upon advance notice bus service is avail-    the first part of the ebb. At low water, large vessels will ground at
able from the airport to Bartlett Cove, which is part of the Glacier    the bilge keel next to the wharf in soft mud, but will have 25 to 30
Bay National Monument. Gustavus is served by a scheduled air-   feet at the keel line, the shoalest water being at the S corner of the
line from Juneau in the summer. Radiotelephone and telephone    wharf. The oil wharf, 165 feet S of the cannery wharf, has a least
communications are maintained with other parts of Alaska, and    depth of about 20 feet at the face and a length of 40 feet. During
with other States.                                                the fishing season provisions and fishing supplies can be obtained
 (104) Weather.-Gustavus is somewhat protected from the harsh    at the cannery general store, water and ice at the cannery wharf,
winds of fall and winter by its inside location. Gales are rare while    and gasoline, diesel fuel, distillates, lubricating oils, and greases at
winds of 17 to 27 knots blow about 4 to 7 percent of the time from    the oil wharf.
October through April. The best weather conditions are likely on    (mil)  The cannery maintains radiotelephone communication.
May through September afternoons, when, on an average of 20    Scheduled seaplane service, daily in the summer and weekly in the
times per month, surface winds range between 4 and 10 knots,    winter, is maintained with Juneau.
temperatures are 33ï¿½ to 870F, and no precipitation occurs. Poor     (112) A caretaker is in charge of the cannery when it is not in
visibilities are most likely in summer and autumn, falling below    Operation.
0.5 mile on 2 to 3 days per month from July through September      (l 3) Point Carolus, the W point at the entrance to Glacier Bay,
and again from December through March. During the summer,    is a low gravel and boulder point, back of which it is low and tim-
visibilities are worst in the early morning because of fog, while    bered; high land is W and N.
winter shows less of a diurnal variation since both fog and snow    (114) An extensive reef and several rocks are off the point. Ves-
are responsible. Snow is most likely from November through    sels rounding Point Carolus should give it a berth of over 1 mile in
March, averaging 66 inches annually. Precipitation is most fre-    order to stay outside the dangers. A small cove, into which a
quent during October through February. Temperatures drop to    stream empties, is about 1 mile SW from the point.
freezing or below on an average of 144 days annually and climb to   (lls) Point Gustavus (58ï¿½23'N., 135ï¿½55'W.), the E entrance
70'F or above on about 12 days. Extremes range from -25ï¿½F to    point to Glacier Bay, is low and wooded and does not exceed 200
870F.                                                             feet in elevation. The beach is of gravel and boulders. It is advis-
 (105) Pleasant Island Reef is an extensive reef, 1 mile S of    able for all vessels to stay well outside Ancon Rock when round-
Pleasant Island. The reef is marked by a lighted bell buoy.    ing Point Gustavus. Old pilings of fishtraps are in the area E of the
Between the reef and the S shore of Pleasant Island is a 3/4-fathom    point. A shoal bare at low water is 1 mile N of the point; the bot-
rock (58ï¿½19'23.7"N., 135ï¿½38'06.4"W.); between this rock and the tom in this localty is broken and uneven.
reef is a narrow channel with depths of 20 to 30 fathoms.           (116) Ancon Rock, which uncovers 1 foot, is about 0.4 mile
                                                                    SSW of Point Gustavus and is marked by a buoy 0.3 mile to the
                                                                    W. A rock that uncovers 3 feet is 0.2 mile NW of Ancon Rock.
  (106)  Charts 17302, 17316, 17318.-Porpoise Islands, a group    Broken ground with depths of 3 to 53/4 fathoms and a possibility of
of four islands, are near the E end of Icy Passage, about 2 miles E    less, extends 1.2 miles S of Point Gustavus; it should be avoided.
of Noon Point, Pleasant Island. The southernmost and largest        (117) Glacier Bay has its entrance on the N side of Icy Strait
island is high and wooded, and has a prominent yellow cliff about    between Point Gustavus and Point Carolus. It is about 50 miles
370 feet high on the S side. The NW end of the island is a long low long to the head of Muir Inlet, 54 miles to the head of John Hop-
point, terminating in a clump, beyond which a sandspit extends    kins Inlet, and 62 miles to the head of Tarr Inlet, its NW arm, near
almost to the next island.                                        the Canadian border. From Point Gustavus to Willoughby Island,
  (107) Foul ground extends off the islands in places for almost    the E shore, including Beardslee Islands, is low and quite shelv-
0.3 mile. A 13 '4-fathom spot is 0.6 mile NW of the northernmost    ing, and the W shore is low for a short distance back; above Wil-
island in about 58'20'57.4"N., 135ï¿½30'09.6"W. Anchorage may be    loughby Island both shores of the bay are steep and foul, and
had in 10 to 17 fathoms, clay and sand bottom, good holding    should be avoided. All the shoals of less than 6-fathom depth are
ground, off the W side of the largest island, with the tangents of    covered with kelp part of the year, but this kelp cannot be
the largest island bearing 031ï¿½ and 125ï¿½. The strong current and    depended upon to indicate the dangers as the strong current tows
SE exposure make this area a poor anchorage.                      the kelp under most of the time.
  (108) Excursion Inlet, a deep, clear, narrow inlet in the N shore  (118)  Glacier Bay National Park and Preserve, 4,400 square
of Icy Strait, has its entrance N of Porpoise Islands. About 2.5    miles in area, comprises all of Glacier Bay. It has over 20 tremen-
miles NE of the W entrance point is an extensive area of low land    dous glaciers and many others almost equally impressive. They






248                                             15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT


illustrate all stages, from actively moving ice masses to those that    down the bay on the large tides than the small, and winds also
are nearly stagnant and slowly dying.                               exert a marked influence on the ice movements.
 (119)  Humpback whales frequent Glacier Bay. The U.S.               (126)  Occasionally in the winter the great mass of ice from Muir
National Park Service advises that Glacier Bay National Park and    Glacier is congested.in Muir Inlet as far S as Wachusett Inlet, and
Preserve is involved in a management program to minimize the    in the summer as far S as Muir Point. Icebergs are frequently in
impact of motor vessels on the whales. All motor vessels are pro-    Glacier Bay off Tlingit Point, and occasionally a few small bergs
hibited from pursuing or approaching within 0.5 mile of hump-    are S of Willoughby Island.
back whales. In the period June 1 through August 31, all mariners,    (127) The ice from Lamplugh Glacier and Reid Glacier is so
except commercial fishermen, are required to have advance per-    scattered that vessels usually have little difficulty in passing. Tarr
mission from the Superintendent, Glacier Bay National Park and    Inlet almost never has a dense ice pack except at the face of Mar-
Preserve, to enter Glacier Bay past a line extending from Point    gerie Glacier and Grand Pacific Glacier. Usually ice cover in
Carolus to Point Gustavus. A 10 knot speed limit and mid-chan-    Johns Hopkins Inlet is dense in the winter as far E as Lamplugh
nel travel requirements are in effect in the lower bay during the    Glacier. It covers only the SW leg of the inlet in the summer. Ice
summer whale use season.                                            may occasionally be thick as far SE as Drake Island. Fog is fre-
 (120) Requests for entry authorization are submitted to the    quently in the bay, particularly in late summer.
ranger station in Bartlett Cove, addressed to Superintendent, Gla-    (12s)  Caution.-The navigation of Glacier Bay outside of the
cier Bay National Park and Preserve, U.S. Park Service, Bartlett    main channels is not considered safe without local knowledge.
Cove, Gustavus, Alaska 99826, or by telephone (907) 697-2268 or    The shoals are occasionally marked by grounded ice.
by VHF-FM radiotelephone. The ranger station, call sign, KWM-         (129)  Ocean liners and other vessels that cruise the bay are
20, monitors VHF-FM channel 16, from 0800 to 1600 daily.            advised to watch for kayaks and canoes in the area.
 (121)  (See 36 CFR 13.1 through 13.31 and 13.65b, chapter 2,        (130) Vessels are advised to carry extra propellers aboard when
for regulations governing Glacier Bay National Park and Pre-    navigating Glacier Bay, and single-screw vessels should not
serve.) For current regulations and information, mariners are    attempt to navigate the bay at all.
encouraged to read the information board at the Park Service            Bartlett    Cove, 4 miles N of Point Gustavus, formed by
                                                                      (131) Bartlett Cove, 4 miles N of Point Gustavus, formed by
information station at Bartlett Cove or contact the station by tele-    the mainland on the SE and Lester Island on the NW, is large and
phone or radiotelephone.                                            affords good anchorage. It is open to the SW, but the holding
 (122)  A lodge at Bartlett Cove, with accommodations, is open    ground is good. The best anchorage in the cove is about 0.2 mile
during the summer season. Cruise ships enter the bay frequently    off the SE side in 7 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom. Take care not to
during the summer season.                                           approach too close to the head of the cove. In S weather small
 (123)  Currents.-The tidal currents from Point Gustavus to Wil-    boats can anchor close inshore on the SE side of the cove. The
loughby Island at times attain a velocity of 6 knots or more. Heavy  water on the NW side of the cove is deeper; anchorage for large
tide rips and swirls occur abreast Beardslee Islands, especially. off    vessels is recommended in the center of the cove in 8 to 16 fath-
the channel SE of the NW island of the group. From this channel    oms.
the ebb current sets across the bay and meeting the direct current    (132) To enter Bartlett Cove, follow the E shore of Glacier Bay
coming down on either side of Willoughby Island produces heavy    at a distance of 1 to 1.5 miles offshore for 4 miles from Point
swirls and rips during large tides. Above Willoughby Island the    Gustavus to the entrance of the cove, and enter in midchannel. No
currents have little velocity. (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily    dangers exist that are not connected with the shore except at the
predictions of times and velocities of the current.)                head of the cove and off the E and W  entrance points. The reef
 (124) Ice.-Numerous discharging glaciers enter the bay, and    making off the E entrance point is particularly dangerous. Foul
glacial ice is always present, sometimes in enormous quantities in    ground extends for about the same distance off the W point of the
Muir Inlet, Tarr Inlet, and Johns Hopkins Inlet. The quantity of ice    entrance and is marked at times by kelp.
discharged into Glacier Bay varies from year to year and is greatly   (133) The 300-foot T-head pier of the U.S. National Park Ser-
affected by seismic activity and local weather. Variations in ice    vice is on the SE side of Bartlett Cove. In 1976, 11 feet was
conditions throughout the bay follow no absolutely predictable    reported alongside the 115-foot head with a dolphin 30 feet off the
pattern. Water circulation near the glaciers is very erratic as fresh-    NE end. It has been reported that strong currents run parallel
water enters at all depths. Swirls and eddies are common and    along the face of the pier with a W  set on the ebb. Mooring facili-
cause the ice to move slowly in all directions. After a dry spell,    ties alongside the pier are limited and available on a first-come-
rain causes calving and dense ice packs. When the ice falls from    first-served basis up to 2 hours. Mariners are encouraged to anchor
the faces of the glaciers, it may create waves 30 feet high. There-    out and use skiffs to land. Government vessels have priority
fore, small boats should not approach closer than 0.5 mile to    alongside the pier. A 100-foot mooring float with 13 feet reported
active glaciers. Icebergs  are unstable and should not be    alongside and a seaplane float at the end are on the NE side of the
approached closely because, if disturbed by swell from the small    pier. Close NE of the pier is a seaplane takeoff/landing area
boat passing, they may roll over or break apart at any time.        marked by private seasonal buoys and used from May 15 to Sep-
 (125) Beginning in January, Glacier Bay is at times frozen in its    tember 30. Anchoring is prohibited. Warning signs are posted on
upper reaches and in the bays and inlets where much freshwater is    the T-head pier. Close to the pier, the U.S. National Park Service
discharged. In the upper end of all bays and inlets, the ice never    maintains a headquarters and a ranger station throughout the year.
gets thick during the winter freeze-over, and it either thaws or is    A lodge, close to the ranger station, is available on a seasonal
broken by the wind and waves. The greatest amount of float ice is    basis for food, showers and laundry. Gasoline, diesel fuel, stove
found in the spring, and it lessens as the season advances. In June    oil, and water are available at the pier during the summer. Water
the ice in front of the glaciers, as seen from mountains farther    can also be obtained at the mouth of the stream that empties into
down, appears to be solid at the head of the bay. More ice comes    the head of the cove. A U.S. Park Service Ranger, at headquarters,






                                               15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT                                                  249


controls the use of a grid that can handle vessels 80 feet long    and waves by the small islets and affords some protection for
inshore of the SW side of the T-head pier.                         small boats in all but SE weather.
 (134)  The U.S. National Park Service at Bartlett Cove maintains   (144)  The main channel of Glacier Bay passes about 1 mile E of
radiotelephone and telephone communications. A road connects    the Willoughby Island shore. Whidbey Passage, a well-defined
with Gustavus and the airport. Bartlett Cove is serviced from    and deep channel, separates Willoughby Island from the mainland
Juneau by scheduled and charter seaplanes, and by a scheduled    to the W.
airline at Gustavus airport in the summer.                          (145) Francis Island is a densely wooded islet, 1.6 miles NW of
 (135) Beardslee Islands, low, hilly, and sandy, 5 miles above    Willoughby Island, with a deep channel between. Drake Island,
Point Gustavus, extend N along the E shore of Glacier Bay and    like Willoughby Island, is densely wooded. The shores are rocky
should be given a good berth. The SW and W  sides are quite    and steep, with short stretches of gravel beach; a depth of 8 fath-
shelving, and there are detached shoals N of them for a consider-    oms is about 2.6 miles 0620 from the NE end of Drake Island.
able distance. Beyond these islands the E side of the bay has        (146)  Marble Islands, high and sparsely forested, and weath-
shoals and sand dunes formed by the glacial debris from the head    ered to a slate color, are 1.4 miles apart; the S one is 3 miles NE of
of the bay; many of these shoals show only at low water.           Willoughby Island. Just off the S end of South Marble Island are
 (136)  Beardslee Entrance about 7.5 miles above Point Gusta-    some rocks awash, and relatively shoal water extends in a narrow
vus and on the SE side of Strawberry Island, is the approach to the    ridge some 750 yards SE. A shoal, reported to uncover and
area among the Beardslee Islands. The shoals at the entrance,    marked by kelp, is midway between North Marble Island and
although they have comparatively deep water over them, cause    South Marble Island and makes passage dangerous between
numerous swirls and the tide rips. Among the islands are a number    them. Shallow water extends NW from the N end of North Marble
of anchorages, but local knowledge is necessary for their    Island. Near the N extremity of the shoal, 470 yards from the
approach.                                                          island, is a rock that uncovers about 6 feet.
 (137)  Sita Reef is about 0.5 mile N of the N side of Strawberry   (147) Leland Islands, the two islands about 1.7 miles E of the
Island. A rocky area, about 2 miles N of Strawberry Island, is in    Marble Islands, are low, thickly wooded, and have an extensive
the E half of the channel up Glacier Bay.                          area of shoal water surrounding them and a large reef to the S. The
 (138) A group of reefs about 5.5 miles N of Strawberry Island    channel between these islands and the Marble Islands is navigable,
consists of coarse gravel and scattered boulders and is considered    but caution is necessary.
the N extremity of the Beardslee Islands. The tidal currents in     (148) Beartrack Cove, which indents the E shore of Glacier
Sitakaday Narrows between Rush Point (58ï¿½28.0'N., 136004.5'    Bay about 13 miles N of Point Gustavus, is very deep throughout,
W.) and the Beardslee Islands at times reach an estimated velocity    and the bottom slopes steeply from the shore. Beartrack River, a
of 5 knots.                                                        stream of considerable size, empties into the upper end of the
 (139) Berg Bay is on the SW side of Glacier Bay, 10 miles    cove. To anchor in 20 fathoms or less a vessel must lie about 175
above the entrance. Two channels enter the bay. The passage N of    yards off the low-water line. Strong W winds bring swells into the
Netland Island is not recommended, because rocks constrict the    cove.
Glacier Bay end and low water the Berg Bay end of the channel.       (149) A deep channel passes N between the Leland Islands and
The controlling depth is 5 feet. The main entrance is between Lars    the mainland, and then between North Marble Island and Sturgess
Island, on the SE side of the entrance, and Netland Island, on the    Island. It affords good passage from Beartrack Cove to Sandy
NW side. A shoal, reported to uncover, obstructs the channel at    Cove and Muir Inlet.
the Glacier Bay end. In entering Berg Bay, a vessel should pass     (150) Spokane Cove is 6.5 miles NW of Beartrack Cove. In
midway between the 3/4-fathom spot and the low-water line on the    entering, care must be taken to pass S of the rock off the N shore
N side of the channel. The controlling depth is 22 feet. Care    and to avoid the boulders which fringe the shore of the mainland.
should be taken until past the shoal area making out from the S    The entrance channel has a depth of 10 fathoms. This cove is used
shore. It is advisable to make passage at or near high water. Kelp    by fishing boats with local knowledge but is open to winds from
grows in about 6 fathoms, but the strong currents make the kelp    the NW. Anchorage can be had in 5 to 8 fathoms, mud and sand
tow under most of the time except during slack water.              bottom.
  (140)  A narrow, tortuous channel leads into the SE arm of Berg    (151) There are two rocks 0.5 mile off the S entrance point. The
Bay but its use is not recommended, because the bottom is rocky    S one uncovers 12 feet and the N one 21/2 feet.
with many boulders. The currents are strong except for a short      (152)  Sturgess Island is 3 miles N of North Marble Island. Stur-
time immediately preceding and following high water. Below half    gess Island has a longitudinal ridge that rises from the water with
tide there is a divided gradient between Berg Bay and the water in    an even slope. A chain of islets extends SE from Sturgess Island.
this arm.                                                          A 5-fathom shoal is about 0.5 mile SW of Sturgess Island. There
  (141) In the approach to Berg Bay from SE, Lars Island, on the    are shoal areas in the W half of the strait between Sturgess Island
SE side at the entrance, shows as detached from the shore and is    and the large island to the E, but deep water is found if the E shore
readily identified.                                                is favored.
  (142) Anchorage is good in about 18 fathoms about 1 mile           (153) Good holding ground for larger vessels can be found 0.25
inside the entrance. Small craft can anchor farther inshore for pro-    mile S of Sturgess Island in 15 fathoms.
tection from S winds. Good anchorage, with protection from N         (154) North Sandy Cove, between the mainland and the two
winds, can be had in the N arm. Small craft also have good    islands about 1.2 miles E of Sturgess Island, affords anchorage in
anchorage in the W arm.                                            4 to 6 fathoms, good holding ground, and good protection from
  (143) Willoughby Island, about 12.5 miles above Point Gusta-    winds from any quarter. Ice rarely drifts into the cove. Two chan-
vus, is a densely wooded mountain, and three small islets are close    nels lead into North Sandy Cove. The N channel on the E side of
to its N end. Johnson Cove, the small indentation at the NE        Puffin Island, the N island, has a depth of 29 fathoms and is pre-
extremity of Willoughby Island, is partially protected from wind    ferred. The S channel that leads between the two islands has a con-






250                                           15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT


trolling depth of 5 fathoms and is used to some extentby local    SW sections of the inlet. Controlling depths are 1i/4 fathoms for
fishing vessels.                                                 the N channel and 31/2 fathoms for the S channel. The'waters are
 (155) South Sandy Cove, immediately S of North Sandy Cove,    very muddy, and submerged shoals cannot be seen except for
is used by fishing vessels with local knowledge. Excellent anchor-    those marked by turbulent currents.
age can be had any place in the cove, including the bight at the SE  (164) Hunter Cove on the W side of Muir Inlet, 9 miles above
side of the head, in 5 to 8 fathoms, mud and sand, bottom. This    the entrance, is a bight formed by the recession of Plateau Gla-
anchorage is almost always free of ice, but is open to winds from    cier; the cove is a good temporary anchorage. When using this
the SW. In entering, take care to pass S of the rock about 250 yards    bight, take care to avoid two rocks, which uncover 2 feet; close E
S of the small islet on the N side of the entrance, and to avoid the    of the bold point at the N entrance.
boulders that fringe the SE shore. The entrance channel has a       (165) Wachusett Inlet is on the W  side of Muir Inlet about 6
depth of 10 fathoms. There are two rocks 0.5 mile W  of the S    miles NW of Adams Inlet. A shoal (58ï¿½56.8'N., 136ï¿½08.0'W.) with
entrance point. The S one uncovers 12 feet, and the N one 2 feet.    a depth of 31/2 fathoms is near the middle of the entrance; large
Do not attempt passage between the rocks and the point.           icebergs frequently ground on this shoal. A berth of 0:25 mile
 (156) Muir Inlet extends N then W fora distance of over 24    should be given this shoal, because it slopes gently to the deeper
miles from the N side of Glacier Bay. At its entrance the shores are    depths. A reef, which uncovers 9 feet, is about 1 mile from the
steep and timbered, but in the area of Wachusett Inlet the E shore    entrance of the inlet and about 500 yards from the S shore. Vessels
is an area of terminal moraine with gently sloping beaches. N of    should favor the N shore.
Sealers Island the W  shore is barren and steep and continues as    (166) Wachusett Inlet extends over 9 miles from its entrance, W
described to the head of the inlet. The E shore becomes barren and    to the terminus of Plateau Glacier. The mouth and inward to the
steep near Riggs Glacier and remains so to the terminus of Muir    narrowest part of the inlet have depths ranging from 34 to 42 fath-
Glacier. Numerous shifting glacial streams line the moraines, and    oms at midchannel. The next few miles deepen to over 100 fath-
a number of glaciers empty into the inlet. Good depth is found in    oms then gently slope upward to the face of the glacier aid a depth
midchannel.                                                       of about 29 fathoms midchannel. The N shore of the inlet is
 (157) Muir Glacier, at the head of Muir Inlet, discharges bergs    mostly glacial moraine left by the recession of Burroughs and Pla-
continuously, and the ice makes navigation precarious.            teau Glaciers. The S shore is more steep than the N shore; barren
 (158) Tlingit Point, on the W side of the entrance, is rock out-    rock is interspersed with pebble beaches formed from alluvial
crop. Sebree Island,  close to the W shore, at:the entrance to the    fans.
inlet, is heavily wooded, and is connected to the mainland by       (167) Sealers Island, a small rocky island with steep sides, is
gravel and mud flats. Small vessels can anchor in Sebree Cove,    close to the E shore of Muir Inlet and about 7 miles N of Adams
between Tlingit Point and the S part of Sebree Island; the holding    Inlet. Small fishing vessels can anchor in Goose Cove, the small
ground is good. The cove is exposed to S winds, but ice seldom    cove E of the island. The cove is narrow and shoal, but generally
drifts in. An unnamed islet is in the entrance to the cove, about 0.5    free from ice during the summer.
mile S of Tlingit Point.                            -               (168) The NW arm of Glacier Bay has a NW direction, with a
 (159) Caroline Shoal, on the W side of Muir Inlet2 miles above    width of 2 to 5 miles, and a precipitous shoreline with depths
Tlingit Point, is a gravelly spit that is barely awash at high water.    greater than 20 fathoms within 200 yards of the shore. Lone
The N side of the shoal is occasionally markedby grounded ice-    Island has a rocky, precipitous shoreline and is in midchannel
bergs.                                                '           about 3.4 miles NW of Drake Island. A rock is reported to be
 (160) Garforth Island, 85 feet high and densely wooded except    about 0.3 mile S of the island in about 58043'00"N,, 136017'28"W.
at the N end, is on the E side of Muir Inlet, about 2.8 miles NE of    Geikie Rock,  6 feet high, is off Geikie Inlet, 1.8 miles S of Lone
Sebree Island. The channel between the island and the E shore of    Island. The occasional grounding of ice in the vicinity indicates a
the inlet has a controlling depth of 6 fathoms. The shoal part of the    shoal of some extent. A large rock, which uncovers 11 feet, is 900
channel usually has a considerable amount of kelp. A good    yards 042ï¿½ from Geikie Rock.
anchorage for vessels too large for most anchorages in the upper  '  (169) Geikie Inlet extends 8 miles SW from the S shore of Gla-
reaches of the bay is reported to be about 0.25 mile N of Garforth    cier Bay. Midchannel depths range from 40 to 80 fathoms with
Island.                          :                                unobstructed depths greater than 10 fathoms that extend to within
 (161) Adams Inlet, on the lower E shore of Muir Inlet, is deep    200 yards of shore.
at the entrance. However, the remainder of the inlet is dangerous   (170) Shag Cove is 1 mile within the entrance to Geikie Inlet on
to enter without local knowledge. Strong tidal currents (especially    the S shore. Depths in the 2-mile-long cove range from 1 V2 to 6
in the entrance) and shoals exist throughout all branches leading to    fathoms to within 100 yards of the shore with the exception of two
the bays of the inlet. A large rock marks the narrowest part of the    areas: 3 fathoms, 300 yards off the W  shore, 0.8 mile within the
entrance channel. It is N of the centerline of the entrance, about    entrance, and 7 fathoms, midchannel, 0.6 mile within the entrance.
2.7 miles from the mouth. Passage to the N of the shoal is pre-    These shoals are not a hazard to navigation for any size vessel
ferred; give equal berth to the shoal and N shoreline of the    likely to operate in the cove; however, passage may be made in 10
entrance channel. Controlling depth is 3 fathoms.                 to 40 fathoms by staying 250 yards off the E shore. An area foul
 (162)  During periods of ebb and flood, the tidal velocity is    with rocks extends 300 yards offshore from the point and small
greatly increased in the vicinity of-this rock, because of the con-    island at the SW entrance to the cove. This foul area extends
striction in the channel. White water dashes about the rock, and    toward the large island 0.2 mile to the NNE. Passage may be made
large whirlpools are shed from its sides.                         by small craft by staying within 100 yards of the large island. Pro-
 (163)  No glaciers discharge ice into the inlet, and only occasion-    tected anchorage may be had in 5 to 20 fathoms at the head of the
ally will ice be found within the inlet. A large island is in the cen-    cove, soft bottom.
ter of the inlet just past the entrance channel. Channels lead      (171)  Tyndall Cove is 2 miles SW of Shag Cove. Unobstructed
around the N and S sides of the island to large bays at the E and    midchannel depths range from 10 to 40 fathoms with depths






                                               15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT                                                  251


greater than 10 fathoms within 100 yards of the shore. A gravel    sage may be made into the cove by skiff through a 0.7-mile-long
bar extends 400 yards offshore from the large stream on the W      NW-trending channel originating near the center of the gravel bar
shore at the entrance to the cove. Anchorage may be made in 10 to    at the NW end of Charpentier Inlet and passing N of the flat gravel
20 fathoms at the head of the cove, soft bottom.                   island.
 (172) An island is 0.4 mile off the SE shore of Geikie Inlet, mid-  (178) Scidmore Bay is SE of Scidmore Glacier, NW of Char-
way between Tyndall Cove and Shag Cove. A shoal surrounds the    pentier Inlet and W  of Gilbert Peninsula. Depths are 20 to 46
island, which should not be passed closer than 500 yards. A wide    fathoms with depths greater than 5 fathoms within 200 yards of
berth should be given to a rock awash (58ï¿½38.1'N., 136023.1'W.),    the shore. Two unnamed islands are near the center of the bay.
600 yards off the SE shore, 0.6 mile SSW of the island, directly N  Two rocks (58ï¿½48.6'N., 136ï¿½37.2'W.) are 100 yards off the N
of the E side of the entrance to Tyndall Cove.                     shore of the E island, and a reef is 200 yards W of the NW point of
 (173) A foul area (58044.3'N., 136ï¿½24.2'W.), awash at low    the E island. A rock (58ï¿½48.2'N., 136ï¿½37.5'W.) is 30 yards off the
water, is 0.7 mile off the SW shore of the W  arm of Glacier Bay    SW shore of the W  island. A submerged rock (58ï¿½48.0'N.,
and 3.5 miles WNW  of Lone Island. A 1 /2-fathom shoal    136037.6'W.) is 500 yards SW of the S end of the W island. Strong
(58044.5'N., 136025.9W.) is 800 yards off the S shore and 1 mile    NW and SE winds blow through the bay, and best anchorage is
W  of the foul area. Safe passage may be had into Hugh Miller    made in 10 to 20 fathoms in the lee of the islands, soft bottom. To
Inlet by staying 100 to 600 yards off the S shore, from the promi-    enter Scidmore Bay, hold a midchannel course from Charpentier
nent point 3.5 miles NW of Geikie Rock to a small unnamed cove    Inlet.
on the S shore just within the mouth of the inlet. Unobstructed      (179) Blue Mouse Cove, 3 miles SW of Tidal Inlet, is at the SE
depths greater than 5 fathoms extend to within 100 yards of the    end of Gilbert Peninsula. Unobstructed depths greater than 5 fath-
shore; a gravel bar at the mouth of the stream near the middle of    oms extend to within 150 yards of the shore, with central depths
the cove extends 250 yards offshore from the apparent shoreline    from 15 to 30 fathoms, good holding ground. During the summer,
and should be avoided. Anchorage may be had in 5 to 35 fathoms    the U.S. National Park Service maintains a ranger station at Blue
in the cove, soft bottom.                                          Mouse Cove. A patrol boat is at the station. The patrol boat and
 (174) Two unnamed islands 5.6 miles NW of Lone Island sepa-    ranger station monitor VHF-FM channel 16 (156.80 MHz).
rate Hugh Miller Inlet from Blue Mouse Cove to the N. Passage        (180) Tidal Inlet, about 3 miles ENE of Gilbert Peninsula, is 4
should not be attempted from the SW or SE into Blue Mouse    miles long, with central depths of 26 to 130 fathoms and unob-
Cove. Midchannel depths in Hugh Miller Inlet range from 30 to 57    structed depths greater than 10 fathoms within 150 yards of the
fathoms. Division Island (58ï¿½46.2'N., 136032.5'W.) separates    shore. An 8'/4-fathom shoal is 450 yards ESE of the prominent
Charpentier Inlet and upper Hugh Miller Inlet. No attempt    point on the W side of the entrance to the inlet. Anchorage is best
should be made to enter the head of Hugh Miller Inlet between    in 5 to 20 fathoms off the S shore, 2.6 miles from the entrance, and
Division Island and Gilbert Peninsula without local knowledge;    100 yards NW of a prominent reef 100 yards from the apparent
numerous rocks and foul areas exist in this area. The SW shore of    shoreline; anchorage in other areas is difficult, because of exces-
Hugh Miller Inlet between the unnamed cove and Division Island    sive depths.
should be kept at least 500 yards to port when passing from the      (181) Composite Island is 6 miles NW of Tidal Inlet between
unnamed cove to the NW part of Charpentier Inlet. A rock    Rendu Inlet and Queen Inlet. Clear passage may be made on all
(58ï¿½45.4'N., 136ï¿½29.9'W.) is 250 yards offshore 0.7 miles NW of    sides of the island in depths of 60 to 140 fathoms. Unobstructed
the NW entrance point of the unnamed cove. A 3-fathom shoal is    depths greater than 10 fathoms extend to within 100 yards of the
300 yards NE of a low grassy island just off the prominent point    shore. Anchorage may be had 200 yards off the NW shore in 20
0.6 mile NW of the NW entrance point of the unnamed cove, and    fathoms.
a 3/2-fathom shoal is 450 yards N of the same island.                (182) Rendu Inlet, 7 miles long, is NW of Composite Island;
  (175) To pass through Hugh Miller Inlet into Charpentier Inlet,    central depths are 40 to 98 fathoms, with unobstructed depths
follow a midchannel course until the N and westernmost low    greater than 20 fathoms within 100 yards of the shore.
rocky island is abeam to port and then follow a SW course so as to   (183)  Queen Inlet is N of Composite Island; central depths are
pass midchannel between the SE end of Division Island and the    30 to 80 fathoms, with unobstructed depths greater than 20 fath-
rocky island about 500 yards S of the southeast point of Division    oms within 200 yards of the shore. Triangle Island is at the head
Island. Take care to pass well clear of the islands, which are    of the inlet and is surrounded by tidal mud flats. In 1992, Triangle
fringed by reefs and shoal areas. Midchannel depths are 4 to 30    Island was reported to be covered by sand and silt.
fathoms between the rocky islands and Division Island. Rocks and     (t 84) Neither Rendu Inlet nor Queen Inlet offers safe anchorage,
foul areas extend SSE from the westernmost rocky island to shore,    because of the steeply sloping bottom and excessive depths. Take
and the area should be avoided.                                    care to avoid the rapidly building bars at the heads of these inlets.
  (176) Charpentier Inlet extends about 6 miles SSE from the         (185) Glacier Bay continues NW from the Gilbert Peninsula and
SSW end of Division Island. Depths in the inlet are 40 to 83 fath-    Composite Island to Russell Island. The principal channel passes
oms with unobstructed depths greater than 10 fathoms 100 yards    to the S of Russell Island with central depths of 120 to 220 fath-
offshore. Two rocks (58044.9'N., 136ï¿½31.4W.) are 100 yards N of    oms.
the prominent point on the E shore at the entrance to the SE arm of  (186) A group of small rocky islets are 1.8 miles E of the SE
the inlet. Anchorage may be had in soft bottom anywhere in the    point of Russell Island. The largest islet at the SE end of the group
inlet. The SE arm is navigable to its head where anchorage may be    has a prominent, dome-shaped peak that is about 36 feet above
had in 10 to 20 fathoms.                                           mean sea level. Reefs and foul ground extend for 900 yards NW
  (177) A small 0.5-mile diameter tidalbasin (cove), 1.3 miles W    from the dome for an area 300 yards wide. The SE end is steep-to.
of Division Island, is separated from the N arm of Charpentier       (ls7) A single rocky islet is 1 mile N of the SE point of Russell
Inlet by a high flat gravel island. The cove is 15 fathoms deep at its   Island. A reef extends 500 yards from the SE end of the islet. A 4-
center, but is separated from the inlet by a bar at low water; pas-    fathom shoal (58ï¿½55.6'N., 136045.3'W.) is 0.6 mile E of the islet.






252                                            15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT


 (188) Russell Island has two rocky peaks and is covered with       (196) To enter Reid Inlet, go W past the entrance; turn and steer
alderbrush on the lower slopes and moraine areas. The S, NE, and    135ï¿½ parallel to and about 300 yards off the shoreline NW of the
N slopes are rocky and steep at sea level. The SW and W sides are    entrance. Approach is best made at low tide when the channel is
gently sloping.                                                    well marked by the bars on either side.
 (189) Along the NE side of Russell Island are several islets and   (197) Johns Hopkins Inlet leads W and then SW from Russell
rocks awash, all within 400 yards of the mean high-water line.    Island for about 9 miles to the terminus of Johns Hopkins Gla-
Bare and submerged rocks extend out 400 yards from the SE point    cier. Lamplugh Glacier is on the S side of the entrance to the
of the island.                                                     inlet. Several smaller glaciers feed into the inlet at various places.
 (1o9)  The N shore of Glacier Bay from Rendu Inlet to Russell    Depths range from 200 to 43 fathoms as one proceeds into the
Island is steep with gravel and boulder beaches. A large glacial    inlet Both shores are steep-to with very few offshore rocks, all of
outwash area is N of Russell Island. A small natural basin with a    which are within 50 yards of shore. Both shores are mountainous
controlling depth of 1 fathom at the entrance is on the far E flank    with extremely steep bare rock slopes. Rock and ice falls are very
of the outwash, 2 miles N of the SE point of Russell Island.       common along the SE shore in the lower section of the inlet. The
                                                                    inlet has no anchorages.
 (191) Anchorage may also be found in 15 to 25 fathoms in an          98) Tarr Inlet leads NW from Russell Island for about 9 miles
area 0.3 miles S of the basin. The anchorage is N of a line running to Grand Pacific Glacier, the largest glacier entering Glacier Bay.
from the NE corner of Russell Island, SE, through the islets and    to Grand Placier, thhe lalyvforghe past glacifew years, and the
reefs to the domed islet 1.8 miles E of the SE point of Russell    face was 0.7 mile SE of the United States-Canadian border in
Island. Approach is made by following the N shore, keeping mid-    1972. Margerie Glacier is on the SW shore of the inlet and adja-
way between the shore and the line of islets and reefs. The off-    cent to Gr     aciic. The NE shore has several alluvial fans of
shore side of the channel should be favored to avoid the 4-fathom    gravel cobbles, and boulders. The SW shore is steep bare rocks
shoal. Anchorage is in mud with gravel and cobbles anywhere    except for one gently sloping valley leading S from a cove about 7
from the islet due N of the easternmost point of Russell Island up    miles NW of Russell Island. Depths in the cove slope gently off-
to the northeasternmost point of Russell Island.                   shore so that the 30-fathom line is 1,000 yards N of the high-water
  (192) To continue through the passage around the N side of the    line at the head of the cove. Ice collects in the cove in sufficient
island, stay midchannel, but favor the island side until abeam of    quantity to interfere with small vessels attempting anchorage.
the first rocky point on the NW side of the outwash. Then favor    Depths greater than 10 fathoms can be carried to within 200 yards
the mainland side, passing about 250 yards off the second rocky    of shore throughout Tarr Inlet. The exceptions to this are the cove
point on the N shore. Then steer WNW into Tarr Inlet, avoiding    described above and the NE shore at the entrance to the inlet.
the 23/4-fathom ridge (58ï¿½57.1'N., 136ï¿½51.3'W.), 650 yards NW of    Depths range from 186 fathoms at the entrance to 127 fathoms 0.5
the N point of Russell Island. This course will also avoid a 2-    mile from the face of the glacier.
fathom submerged rocky ridge (58ï¿½57.6'N., 136052.4'W.) that
extends 300 yards off the next rocky point on the mainland (third    (199)  Chart 17302.Port Frederick, on the S side of Icy Strait
point from the outwash and 1 mile NW of the N point of Russell    between Crist Point and Point Sophia, has no known dangers other
Island). Passage is recommended only for vessels with draft suffi-    than those charted. It offers several very good anchorages with
ciently small to clear the charted shoals.                         good holding ground and shelter.
  (193) Anchorage may be found on the NW side of Russell Island      (200) Small craft approaching from W  use Gedney Channel.
between the northernmost and the westernmost points, about 0.4    This channel is not recommended for large vessels, because of the
mile offshore. Depths are 5 to 20 fathoms in mud bottom with    unmarked dangers. Large vessels use midchannel courses between
 gravel and cobbles. There is a 41/2-fathom shoal (58 ï¿½56.9'N.,    Point Sophia and Cannery Point to E, and Pinta Rock and Halibut
 136052.2'W.) 0.7 mile W  of the northernmost point of Russell    Rock to W.
 Island and a 4-fathom rock (58ï¿½56.5'N., 136ï¿½52.1'W.) 500 yards       (201) If bound for Hoonah, give Cannery Point and the shore to
 NW of the westernmost point of the island. The 5-fathom depth    E a berth of 200 yards or more. The approach is clear.
 curve is from 200 to 500 yards offshore from the N point around to   (202)  Crist Point, the W point at the entrance, is marked by two
 midway along the SW shore of Russell Island. Ice coming here    islands about 0.7 mile off its N side. Hoonah Island, the NW and
 from Tarr Inlet grounds, melts and deposits gravel, cobbles, and    larger one, is 270 feet high and wooded; a reef with 2 fathoms
 occasional boulders on the bottom.                                 over it extends about 0.3 mile N off the NW end of Hoonah Island.
  (194) The S shore of Glacier Bay from the Gilbert Peninsula to    Scraggy Island, 40 feet high and sparsely wooded, is about 0.8
 Johns Hopkins Inlet is steep and rocky with occasional outwash    mile SE of Hoonah Island; a rock awash is midway between
 areas. A rocky reef (58ï¿½53.0'N., 136050.3W.), 1.4 miles WNW of    Hoonah Island and Scraggy Island. Pinta Rock, awash and
 Ibach Point, is 200 yards offshore. Numerous rocks are awash less    marked by kelp for about two-thirds of its length, is about 0.8 mile
 than 100 yards offshore along the S shore.                         SE of Scraggy Island. A lighted bell buoy marks the NE side of
  (195) Ibach Point, 1.7 miles S of the SE point of Russell Island,    Pinta Rock. A 43/4-fathom shoal is about 0.9 mile NE of Pinta
 marks the E side of the entrance to Reid Inlet. The entrance, 0.5    Rock.
 miles SW of Ibach Point, is partially blocked by gravel bars that    (203)  Gedney Channel is SW of Hoonah Island and Scraggy
 extend 500 yards off the E shore and 200 yards off the W  shore.    Island. Shoal spots are at the edge of the channel.
 The entrance controlling depth is 3 fathoms for a width of 200       (204) Halibut Island on the W  side, about 1 mile inside the
 yards. The inlet extends S for about 2 miles to the face of Reid    entrance to the port, is wooded, and foul ground extends 0.3 mile
 Glacier. Anchorage may be had in 10 to 20 fathoms 500 yards past    E from it. Halibut Rock, which uncovers, is about 0.6 mile S of
 the entrance to either the NE or SW. Several abandoned wooded    Halibut Island. There is kelp for a distance of about 100 yards NE
 structures of an ore processing operation are on the W side of the    to W  of the rock, but none on its SE side. A 1/2-fathom rock is
 entrance.                                                          about midway between Halibut Island and the W  shore.






                                               15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT                                                   253


 (205) Point Sophia shows from E as a wooded hill, somewhat    available; storage of fishing supplies and repairs to privately
bluff at the water's edge; S of the hill is a V-shaped saddle, from    owned fishing vessels, with emergency repair available to others;
which the hill rises to high land. From Point Sophia to Cannery    owned and operated by Excursion Inlet Packing Corporation. This
Point, the shore is free of dangers.                                facility is only open in the summer.
 (206)  Cannery Point, on the SE side of the entrance to Port Fre-   (218) Supplies-Limited amounts of provisions and fishing sup-
derick, 2 miles SW of Point Sophia, is similar in appearance to    plies can be obtained at the general stores in town and at Hoonah
Point Sophia, but lower. Port Frederick Light 3 (58ï¿½07.9'N.,    Seafoods Pier. Gasoline, diesel fuel, distillates, lubricating oils,
135ï¿½27.9'W.), 26 feet above the water and shown from a skeleton    greases, and water are available at the oil facilities. Ice for fishing
tower with a green square daymark, marks the entrance to Port    vessels can be obtained at the Hoonah Cold Storage Dock.
Frederick. A support and storage facility for fishing vessels is a    (219)  Repairs.-A grid that can handle vessels up to 100 feet is
short distance inside of Cannery Point. The wharf for this facility    inside the Inner Harbor; another grid that can handle vessels up to
is discussed later in this chapter, under wharves at Hoonah.        40 feet is on the S side of the approach pier to the city floats, about
 (207) Hoonah Point, 0.8 mile S of Cannery Point, is a rocky        120 yards N of the Hoonah Cold Storage Dock. Aluminum
bluff, wooded on top, and appears detached from the hill nearby.    repairs, equipment storage, and fishing supplies are available at
About 0.6 mile S of Hoonah Point is Pitt Island, the northernmost    the Inner Harbor. No facilities are available for engine repairs;
of several islands near the E shore. The island is wooded.          local mechanics may be found for hire.
 (208) Hoonah Harbor is SE of Hoonah Point and between Pitt          (220) Small-craft facilities.-The city-operated small-craft floats
Island and the NE shore. The anchorage is between, or a little    are about 120 yards NNW of the Hoonah Cold Storage Dock. The
inside, the NW end of Pitt Island and the W  end of the city of    over 650 feet of floats provide side mooring for 24-hour transient
Hoonah, in 11 to 14 fathoms, soft bottom. The anchorage is not    vessels; contact the harbormaster on VHF-FM channel 16 or tele-
well protected from SW, but the holding ground is good. Broad    phone (907-945-3670). Depths alongside were reported at 12 feet
gravel beaches extend from the N side of Pitt Island and off the    in 1990. It is recommended that only small craft and skiffs moor
village.                                                            on the inshore side of the float. A seaplane float extends from
 (209)  Hoonah, a city on the NE shore of Hoonah Harbor, has    shore about 200 yards NW of the city float approach pier. In the
three general stores, a motel, two restaurants, a medical clinic, a    winter, SW winds sometimes draw through with considerable
crab processing plant, a cold storage company, and a support and    force.
storage facility for fishing vessels.                                 (221)  Small-craft floats, with about 170 feet of berthing space,
 (210) Wharves.-The wharves and floats at Hoonah are all on    extend from the N corner of the Hoonah Cold Storage Dock. A
the NE shore of Hoonah Harbor, except the facility inside Cannery   fuel float for small craft is at the NW face of the dock. At Hoonah
Point.                                                              Seafoods Pier, a 50-foot small-craft float extends off the SE side
 (2I1) Hoonah Cold Storage Dock (58ï¿½06.6'N., 135ï¿½26.7'W.):    with a 9-foot depth reported along its offshore side and 6 feet
about 0.7 mile SE of Hoonah Point; 100-foot SW face; 19 feet    reported along the inshore side. The privately owned facility
alongside; water is available; a 1-ton hoist and two 1-ton forklifts    inside Cannery Point has small-craft floats, which are used only in
are available; shipment of ice and supplies to fishing boats, receipt    the summer season, The floats extend off the NW and SE sides of
of fish; operated by Hoonah Cold Storage.                           the Excursion Inlet Packing Corporation Dock.
 (212) A fuel float is on the NW face of the pier; water is avail-   (222) A boat basin, known locally as the Inner Harbor, operated
able; receipt and sale of petroleum products; operated by the Kane    by the Hoonah Harbormaster is close S of Hoonah. The S and W
Store at the head of the dock.                                      boundaries are formed by a breakwater which connects the S end
 (213)  Hoonah Seafoods Pier (58ï¿½06.8'N., 135ï¿½26.8'W): about    of Pitt Island to the shore. A second breakwater extends W  300
0.2 mile NW of the Hoonah Cold Storage; 100-foot NW face; 16    yards from Hoonah toward Pitt Island and is marked on its west-
feet alongside; water and electricity are available; a l/2-ton fork-    ern extremity by a light. A short breakwater extends E from Pitt
lift is available; shipment of fishing supplies; operated by Hoonah  Island and is also marked by a light. The Inner Harbor is entered
Seafoods.                                                           from the N by passing E of Pitt Island, close aboard the Hoonah
  (214)  Chevron (Standard) Oil Company Berth: 40-foot face at    Cold Storage Dock, and then turning SW between the two lighted
the NW side of Hoonah Seafoods Pier; 16 feet alongside; water is    breakwaters. In September 1991, the controlling depth was 12
available; receipt and sale of petroleum products; operated by    feet (18 feet at midchannel) in the entrance channel with depths of
Standard Oil Company.                                               8 to 18 feet in the basin. Floats in the basin provide berthing for
  (215) Hoonah City Dock (58ï¿½06.9'N., 135ï¿½27.1'W.): about 0.4    260 boats up to 62 feet long; 600 feet of berthing is available for
mile NW of the Hoonah Cold Storage Dock; 140 face, 250 feet of    transients on both faces of the nothernmost float; vessels up to 100
berthing space with dolphins; 23 feet alongside; 3,040 square feet    feet long have been berthed. Electricity and water are available.
covered storage is available; receipt of general cargo; owned and    The basin has 153 feet of float mooring for skiffs.
operated by the city of Hoonah.                                       (223)  At the E end of the southernmost breakwater is a fish pass
  (216)  Alaska State Ferry Terminal (58ï¿½07.0'N., 135027.4'W.):    60 feet wide. Riprap bottom and strong currents make navigation
about 0.5 mile NW of the Hoonah Cold Storage Dock; 235 feet of    in the pass dangerous. The waters S of the Inner Harbor and Pitt
berthing space with dolphins; 22 feet alongside; concrete pontoon    Island are shallow and foul with rock debris. This area, as well as
transfer bridge is available; transfer of passengers and vehicles;    the fish pass, should only be transitted by skiffs and small vessels
owned and operated by the State of Alaska, Division of Marine       with local knowledge.
Transportation.                                                       (224)  Communications.-Hoonah maintains daily seaplane and
  (217)  Excursion Inlet Packing Corporation Dock (58ï¿½07.8'N.,    airplane communications with Juneau. A dirt landing strip is about
135ï¿½27.7'W.): about 1.3 miles NW of the Hoonah on the SW side    1.2 miles SE of the city. Three ferries a week stop at Hoonah, con-
of Cannery Point; dock has a 110-foot face; 30 feet is reported     necting this port with Angoon, Kake, Tenakee Springs, Pelican,
alongside; water and electricity are available; two 3-ton hoists are    Sitka, Juneau, and Haines. Telephone and radiotelephone commu-






254                                            15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT


nications are maintained with other cities in Alaska and with other  (235)  Salt Lake Bay, at the S end of Port Frederick, inside The
States.                                                            Narrows, extends in a S direction, with depths of 43 fathoms at the
 (225) SE of Hoonah is a small inlet, divided by a low wooded    entrance to 9 fathoms off the flats, which extend about 0.2 mile
point. Mudflats, which uncover, and marsh grass fill the inlet.    from the SE corner. The bay then extends SW to a lagoon, Salt
False Point is the low, wooded point S of Pitt Island. A rock,    Chuck, which is entered through an opening less than 150 yards
covered 5 feet, is 0.3 mile WSW of Pitt Island, and shoaling to 2    wide and 0.2 mile long. The opening has depths of about 5 feet; a
feet extends 0.2 mile SW of Pitt Island. Long Island, 0.6 mile SW  rock awash is on the E side. Salt Chuck has 81/4 fathoms in the
of Pitt Island, is wooded, and connected with the E shore of the    middle. The opening to Salt Chuck has swift currents and riptides
bay by flats that have islets and rocks. A reef, awash, and a rock,    during maximum tides; local knowledge is advised.
covered 3 feet, are 0.1 mile NW of Long Island. A small wooded       (236) A logging camp with a small pier and a float is on the E
island, with a reef that extends about 300 yards off its W  end, is    side of the entrance to Salt Lake Bay.
between Pitt Island and Long Island, 0.2 mile NNE of the latter.     (237) Neka Bay, on the W  side of Port Frederick about 9 miles
Local knowledge is required for safe navigation and anchorage    from the entrance, extends in a W direction. It is divided into three
between Pitt Island and Long Island. Strangers should stay well    arms by two low, wooded peninsulas. Neka Island is 0.2 mile E
clear of this area.                                   :            from the extremity of the N peninsula. Two rocks, awash and
 (226) Game Point, about 2.8 miles SSW of Inner Point Sophia,    unmarked, are in midchannel S of Neka Island. Rocks covered 3/4
is low and wooded. A narrow neck of land extends about 0.2 mile    fathoms and 1i/2 fathoms are 0.2 mile SE and 0.1 mile N of Neka
in a NE direction from which flats stretch to Long Island. Game     Island, respectively.
Creek, a large salmon creek, empties into the flats.                 (238) From Neka Island, the N arm follows a WNW direction,
 (227) Humpback Creek empties into the N end of a bight filled    narrowing to less than 0.3 mile, thence the arm follows a WSW
by flats on the W  shore, about 2.3 miles W of Game Point.         direction, terminating in a large basin. The greater part of the basin
 (228)  From Game Point the shore trends in a SW direction for    is navigable at high water for vessels of 2- or 3-foot draft; it dries
about 2.2 miles to a wooded point that extends about 0.4 mile in a    at low water About 0.4 mile inside the entrance to the N arm are
N direction. In the small inlet, E of the point, are depths of 15 fath-    private mooring buoys, used for barge transfer. Tugboats from
oms at the entrance, shoaling to 1 fathom near the head. Two sub-    Seattle and southwestern Alaska exchange barges at this site and
merged rocks are in the inlet.                                     at times use the buoys for weather layover. On the S side of the
 (229) Burnt Point, 3.3 miles SW of Game Point, is wooded and    channel, 0.3 mile from the entrance to the narrow part, is a small
rises rapidly to higher ground to the SE. Grassy Rock, a small    wooded island with a bight to the SSW. A depth of 23/4 fathoms
grass-covered rock, is about 0.2 mile off Burnt Point. In the bight    was found in the S channel leading to the bight; a rock is in the W
E of Grassy Rock are depths of 40 fathoms at the entrance to 13    channel.
fathoms near the head. Flats extend off the E side of the bight for  (239) North Bight, the middle arm of Neka Bay, with the
350 yards. Seagull Creek, about 1.8 miles S of Burnt Point, has    entrance S of Neka Island, has depths of 6 to 12 fathoms, sticky
flats that extend offshore about 0.5 mile from its mouth.          bottom. A rocky spot, covered 1/2 fathom, is about 0.9 mile above
 (230)  Chimney Rock, about 2 miles SW of Burnt Point and    the entrance in about 58ï¿½02'01"N., 135039'46"W. At the head it
about 0.5 mile E of the S point of the entrance to Neka Bay, is a    narrows to a small, irregularly shaped bight, shoal except for a
small wooded islet. A reef extends from Chichagof Island shore    very narrow channel with depths of 3 to 6 fathoms.
almost to Chimney Rock, leaving a channel about 100 yards wide
                  wi4fathom. This reef has a small islet. Rocks, coy-  (240)  The entrance to South Bight is constricted to a width of
with a depth of 3/ fathom. This reef has a small islet.  Rocks, cov-    about 100 yards by a long narrow point that projects from the S
ered and uncovered, are about 0.2 mile N of Chimney Rock in    shore. A rock awash is off the N entrance point in about
                                                                    shore. A rock awash is off the N entrance point in about
                                                                    58o01'34"N., 135o39'05"W.
  (231) Midway Island (57ï¿½59.8'N., 135036.5'W.), small and
wooded, is about 3.3 miles SSW of Burnt Point. Midway Rocks,
0.5 mile WNW of Midway Island, are two rocks, about 0.1 mile         (241)  Chart 17316.-The Sisters, near the middle of Icy Strait,
apart, that uncover 4 feet. A reef extends from the W  shore, inside    about 5 miles ENE from Point Sophia, consist of two islands con-
the rocks, for a distance of about 200 yards. A 1-fathom shoal is    nected by a sand beach. The N island is heavily wooded. The S
close N of the rocks in about 58000'09"N., 135037'25"W.            island is very narrow, with a clump of trees at each end, giving the
  (232) Anchorage may be had in 51/2 to 12 fathoms in Eight    group the appearance of three islands. There is a 114-fathom spot
Fathom Bight, which indents the N shore about 3 miles WNW of    0.4 mile SSE from the SE end of the S island. The Sisters Light
The Narrows. A logging camp with a small pier is on the W side    (58ï¿½10.3N., 135015.4"W.), 69 feet above the water, is shown from
of Eight Fathom Bight. The camp monitors VHF-FM channel 16.        a skeleton tower at the S end of the N island. An aero radiobeacon
  (233) The head of Port Frederick is divided into two inlets by a    is about 190 yards SSW of the light.
low, wooded peninsula with rocks awash off its NE end that           (242) Sisters Reef, 1.1 miles W  of the N end of The Sisters,
extend to Bell Island, which is low and wooded. Depths of 26    uncovers two heads and has no kelp. At times the tidal current has
fathoms are found at the entrance to the N inlet, shoaling to 71/2    a velocity of 2 or 3 knots over the reef.
fathoms near the head.                                               (243) Spasski Island, about 2.2 miles S of The Sisters, is
  (234)  The S inlet is long and narrow with several bends and has    marked on its N side by Spasski Island Light 12(58ï¿½08.0'N.,
depths of 6 to 11 fathoms in the widest part, except near the    135ï¿½16.3'W.), 30 feet above the water, and shown from a small
shores. The channel to the two arms at the head of this inlet leads    house with a red triangular daymark. The island is small and
between the point and the rock and has depths of 51/2 fathoms.    divided at high water; the larger part has several trees on it. A reef,
Tide flats fill the NW arm, which extends to a canoe portage 70    showing well in places at low water, extends 0.4 mile S from it. A
yards wide to Tenakee Inlet. Depths of 1/2 fathom are found at its    detached rock, bare at low water, is about 0.6 mile SE of the
entrance. The SW arm has depths of 3 to 5 fathoms, sticky bottom.  island. Shoal spots exist on the following distances and bearings






                                                15. CROSS SOUND AND ICY STRAIT                                                   255


from the light: 0.2 mile 310o, 31/2 fathoms; 0.7 mile 301o, 41/4 fath-  (245) The anchorage, exposed to the NE, is in 9 to 10 fathoms in
oms; 0.5 mile 277o, 1 fathom; 0.8 mile 134o, 5V/4 fathoms.          the middle of the W end of the bay, with Neck Point bearing NE.
 (244)  Spasski Bay is on the S shore to the SW of Spasski Island.   (246)  The shore E of Point Sophia and the reef NW of Neck
Neck Point, the N point at the entrance, is a high, rocky, wooded    Point should be given a berth of 0:8 mile.
peninsula, connected with the main shore by a low narrow neck.
Several submerged rocks are about 700 yards N of Neck Point; the      (247)  Chart 17300.-Whitestone Harbor (58 04'N.,
least depth over the rocks is 1'/2 fathoms. Rocks, usually marked    135ï¿½04'W.), on the S side of Icy Strait about 7 miles E of Pulizzi
by kelp, extend E of Neck Point. A 13/4-fathom shoal is about 0.6    Island, is an inlet about 1 mile long in a W direction. The SW arm
mile ESE of Neck Point. An opposing wind and current causes    of the harbor is foul. The shores at the entrance are foul. Enter the
treacherous sea conditions in the entrance to the bay; exercise cau-    harbor at midchannel, thence favor the N shore to avoid a reported
tion when entering the bay. In the SE end of the bay are extensive    boulder that bares just S of the center of the harbor. Anchorage for
sand flats, and behind the low point is a grassy flat covered at high    small craft is in the arm on the N side of the harbor, in sand and
water. Pulizzi Island, a small triangular wooded island, with rocks    gravel bottom.
0.1 mile off the NE end, is off the E end of the bay. The shores of   (248) Chatham Strait is described in chapter 10. Lynn Canal is
the bight at the W  end of the bay are wide sand and gravel    described in chapter 11.
beaches.









                                                        APPENDIX

 (1)   Sales Information.-National Ocean Service (NOS) and        (25)  U.S. Coast Pilot 8, Pacific Coast Alaska, Dixon Entrance
unclassified Defense Mapping Agency (DMA) publications and    to Cape Spencer.
nautical charts are sold by NOS and its sales agents in many U.S.  (26)  U.S. Coast Pilot 9, Pacific and Artic Coasts, Alaska-Cape
ports and in some foreign ports. Mail orders should be addressed    Spencer to Beaufort Sea.
to:                                                                (27)  Distance Tables
 (2)   National Ocean Service,                                    (25)  Distances between United States Ports.
 (3)   Distribution Division (N/ACC3),                            (29)  Tide Tables
 (4)   6501 Lafayette Avenue,                                     (30)  Europe and West Coast of Africa, including the Mediterra-
 (5)   Riverdale, MD 20737-1199.                                 nean Sea.
 (6)   Telephone orders may be placed (Visa or Mastercard         (31)  East Coast, North and South America, including Green-
accepted) by calling 301-436-6990. Mail orders must be accompa-    land.
nied by a check or money order (payable in U.S. funds) payable to  (32)  West Coast, North and South America, including the
NOS, Department of Commerce. Remittance from outside the    Hawaiian Islands.
United States should be made either by an International Money      (33)  Central and Western Pacific Ocean and Indian Ocean.
Order or by a check payable on a U.S. bank. Chart catalogs, which  (34)  Supplemental Tidal Predictions-Anchorage, Nikishka,
include a listing of authorized sales agents, are free upon request.    Seldovia, and Valdez, Alaska.
The National Ocean Service maintains over-the-counter cash sales   (35)  Tidal Current Tables
offices at Distribution Division, Riverdale (see address above),  (36)  Atlantic Coast, North America.
and at 222 West 7th Street, Anchorage, AK 99513-7574.             (37)  Pacific Coast, North America and Asia.
 (7)   National Ocean Service Offices                             (38)  Tidal Current Charts
 (8)   Washington, DC (Headquarters): Assistant Administra-       (39)  Boston Harbor.
tor, National Ocean Service, NOAA, Herbert C. Hoover Bldg.,        (40)  Narragansett Bay to Nantucket Sound.
14th Street and Constitution Avenue, NW, Washington, DC            (41)  Narragansett Bay.
20230-0001.                                                        (42)  Long Island Sound and Block Island Sound.
 (9)   Silver Spring: Chief, Office of Coast Survey (N/CS),       (43)  Delaware Bay and River.
National Ocean Service, NOAA, 1315 East-West Highway, Silver       (44)  Upper Chesapeake Bay.
Spring, MD 20910-3282.                                            (45)  Charleston Harbor, S.C.
 (10)  Norfolk: Director, Atlantic Marine Center, National        (46)  Tampa Bay.
Ocean Service, NOAA, 439 West York Street, Norfolk, VA             (47)  Puget Sound, Northern Part.
23510-1114.                                                        (48)  Puget Sound, Southern Part.
 (11)  Seattle: Director, Pacific Marine Center, National Ocean   (49)  Dates of Latest Editions gives the edition and date of the
Service, NOAA, 1801 Fairview Avenue East, Seattle, WA 98102-    latest edition of charts and publications of the National Ocean Ser-
3767.                                                            vice. Published quarterly and available free from NOS Distribu-
                                                                 tion Division (see address above).
 (12)  Charts and Publications-National Ocean Service
                                                                   (so)  Charts and Publications-Other U.S. Government
 (13)  Nautical Charts (See Chart Catalogs).                     Agencies
 (14)  United States Coastal and Intracoastal waters, and posses-
sions.                                                             (51)  A partial list of publications and charts considered of nav-
 (15)  Great Lakes, Lake Champlain, New York State Canals,    igational value is included for ready reference of the mariner. In
and the St. Lawrence River-St. Regis to Cornwall, Canada.        addition to the agents located in the principal seaports handling
 (16)  Publications (See the publication Dates of Latest Edi-    publication sales, certain libraries have been designated by the
tions for latest editions and prices).                           Congress of the United States to receive the publications as issued
 (17)  Coast Pilot                                               for public review.
 (18)  U.S. Coast Pilot 1, Atlantic Coast, Eastport to Cape Cod.  (52)  Government Printing Office.-Publications of the U.S.
 (19)  U.S. Coast Pilot 2, Atlantic Coast, Cape Cod to Sandy    Government Printing Office may be ordered from Superintendent
Hook.                                                            of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington,
 (20)  U.S. Coast Pilot 3, Atlantic Coast, Sandy Hook to Cape    D.C. 20402-9325. Orders may be charged to Visa or Mastercard
Henry.                                                           by calling 202-512-1800 during normal business hours. Inquiries
 (21)  U.S. Coast Pilot 4, Atlantic Coast, Cape Henry to Key    on availability, cost, etc. of GPO publications may be addressed to
West.                                                            a 24-hour FAX number: 202-512-2250.
 (22)  U.S. Coast Pilot 5, Atlantic Coast-Gulf of Mexico, Puerto  (53)  Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information.-
Rico, and Virgin Islands.                                        Unclassified publications and charts of the Defense Mapping
 (23)  U.S. Coast Pilot 6, Great Lakes: Lakes Ontario, Erie,    Agency (DMA) are available from National Ocean Service Distri-
Huron, Michigan and Superior, and St. Lawrence River.            bution Division. (See Sales Information, beginning of this Appen-
 (24)  U.S. Coast Pilot 7, Pacific Coast, California, Oregon,    dix.) Classified DMA publications and charts are available to
Washington, and Hawaii.                                          authorized users from Defense Mapping Agency Combat Support


256






                                                        APPENDIX                                                          257


Center (Attn: PMSR), Washington, DC 20315-0020. DMA Cus-           (72)  International Code of Signals (Pub. 102): Published by
tomer Assistance Office may be contacted at 1-800-826-0342 or    Defense Mapping Agency (see Defense Mapping Agency Pro-
287-2495 (Autovon).                                              curement Information above).
 (54)  Nautical Charts                                            (73)  Selected Worldwide Marine Weather Broadcasts: Pub-
 (55)  U.S. Waters:                                              lished by National Weather Service; for sale by the Government
 (56)  Apalachicola, Chattahoochee and Flint Rivers Navigation    Printing Office. (See Government Printing Office, early this
Charts, Alabama River Charts, and Black Warrior-Tombigbee        appendix.)
Rivers River Charts: Published and for sale by U.S. Army Engi-    (74)  Navigation Rules: Navigation Rules, International-Inland
neer District Mobile, P.O. Box 2288, 109 St. Joseph Street,    (COMDTINST M16672.2 series): Published by the U.S. Coast
Mobile, Ala. 36628.                                              Guard; for sale by Government Printing Office. (see Government
 (57)  Flood Control and Navigation Maps of the Mississippi    Printing Office, early this appendix.)
River, Cairo, Ill. to the Gulf of Mexico: Published by Mississippi  (75)  Federal Requirements for Recreational Boats: Pub-
River Commission and for sale by U.S. Army Engineer District    lished by U.S. Coast Guard; available without charge by contact-
Vicksburg, P.O. Box 60, U.S. Post Office and Courthouse, Vicks-    ing the toll free Boating Safety Hotline (telephone, 800-368-
burg, Miss. 39180.                                               5647.)
                                     bug . has   ...(Mississippi  (76)  Port Series of the United States: Published and sold by
 (58) Upper Mississippi River Navigation Charts (Mississippi
                                                                Corps of Engineers, U.S. Army, Water Resources Support Center,
River, Cairo, Ill. to Minneapolis, Minn.): Published by U.S. Army   t Facilities Branch Casey Building Fort Belvoir VA 22060-
Engineer North Central Division and for sale by U.S. Army Engi-    Port Facilities Branch, Casey Building, Fort Belvoir, VA 22060
                                                                5586.
neer District St. Louis, 210 N. Tucker Boulevard, St. Louis, Mo.
 63101. A(77)  Maritime Radio Users Handbook: Published and sold
                                                                by Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services, 655 Fif-
 (59)  Charts of the Illinois Waterway, from Mississippi River at   teenth Street N.W. Suite 300 Washington DC 20005-570
Grafton, Ill. to Lake Michigan at Chicago and Calument Harbors:
Published and for sale by U.S. Army Engineer District Rock
Island, Clock Tower Bldg., Rock Island, Il 61201.                  (7)-  CorpsofEngieers Offices
 (60)  Foreign Waters: Published by Defense Mapping Agency        (79)  Alaska District Office: Bldg. 21-700, Elmendorf Air
(see Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information above).      Force Base, Box 898 Anchorage Alaska 99506-0898
 (61)  Marine Weather Services Chart: Published by the
 National Weather Service for sale by NO  Distribution Division   (80so)  The Alaska District includes the coastal and tributary
National Weather Service; for sale by NOS Distribution Division
                                 (see Salesnformtionaovwaters of the State of Alaska.
(see Sales Information above).
 (62)  Publications                                               (81)  Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Offices.-
 (63)  Notices to Mariners:                                     Regional offices and States in the EPA coastal regions:
 (64)  The Local Notice to Mariners is available without charge   (82)  Region I (New Hampshire, Vermont; Maine, Massachu-
upon application to the appropriate Coast Guard District Com-    setts, Connecticut, Rhode Island): J.. Kennedy Federal Bldg.,
mander (see address further on). The Defense Mapping Agency    Boston, MA 02203.
Notice to Mariners is available without charge by operators of     (83)  Region IL (New Jersey, New York, Puerto Rico, Virgin
ocean-going vessels (see Defense Mapping Agency Procurement    Islands): 26 Federal Plaza, New York, NY 10278.
Information above).                                                (84)  Region III (Delaware, Maryland, Virginia, District of
 (65)  Special Notice to Mariners are published annually in    Columbia, Pennsylvania): 841 Chestnut Street, Philadelphia, PA
Defense Mapping Agency Notice to Mariners 1. These notices    19107.
contain important information of considerable interest to all mari-  (85)  Region IV (Alabama, Florida, Georgia, Mississippi,
ners. Interested parties are advised to read these notices.      South Carolina, North Carolina): 345 Courtland Street, NE.,
 (66)  Light Lists (United States and Possessions): Published    Atlanta, GA 30365.
by U.S. Coast Guard; for sale by the Government Printing Office.  (86)  Region V (Illinois, Indiana, Michigan, Minnesota, Ohio,
(See Government Printing Office, early this appendix.)           Wisconsin): 230 South Dearborn Street, Chicago, IL 60604.
 (67)  List of Lights (Foreign Countries): Published by           (87)  Region VI (Louisiana, Texas): 1445 Ross Avenue, Dallas,
Defense Mapping Agency (see Defense Mapping Agency Pro-    TX 75270.
curement Information above).                                       (88)  Region IX (California, Hawaii, Guam): 215 Fremont
 (68)  Sailing Directions (Foreign Countries): Published by    Street, San Francisco, CA 94105.
Defense Mapping Agency (see Defense Mapping Agency Pro-            (89)  Region X (Alaska, Oregon, Washington): 1200 Sixth Ave-
curement Information above).                                     nue, Seattle, WA 98101.
 (69) Radio Navigational Aids, Pub. 117: Published by
Defense Mapping Agency (see Defense Mapping Agency Pro-            (90)  Coast Guard District Offices
curement Information above).
 (70)  The Nautical Almanac, the Air Almanac, and Astro-          (91)  Commander, Seventeenth Coast Guard District, Federal
nomical Almanac: Published by U.S. Naval Observatory; for sale    Bldg., Box 25517, Juneau, AK 99802-5517. The coastal and tribu-
by Government Printing Office. (see Government Printing Office,    tary waters of the State of Alaska.
early this appendix.)                                             (92)  Note: A Marine Safety Office combines the functions of
 (71)  American Practical Navigator (Bowditch) (Pub. 9):    the Captain of the Port and Marine Inspection Office.
Published by Defense Mapping Agency (see Defense Mapping           (93)  The symbol (D) preceding an office indicates that a Docu-
Agency Procurement Information above).                           mentation Office is at the same address.





 258                                                       APPENDIX


  (94)  Coast Guard Marine Safety Offices                           (118)  Cape Fanshaw (57ï¿½12'N., 133ï¿½28'W.), 0503 and 1703
  (95)  Anchorage, Alaska: Federal Building and U.S. Court-    Ak.s.t.
 house, 222 West 7th Avenue 99513-7565.                              (119) Mount Althorp (58ï¿½05'N., 136024'W.), NE side of Lisian-
  (96)  (D) Juneau,-Alaska: 2760 Sherwood Lane 99801-8545.         ski Inlet, 0533 and 1903 Ak.s.t.
  (97)  Coast Guard Stations.-Most of the stations listed are in    (120) Mount Robert Barron (58014'N., 134ï¿½50'W.), 0603 and
 the area covered by this Coast Pilot. They have search and rescue    1803 Ak.s.t.
 capabilities and may provide lookout, communication, and/or         (121) Yakutat (59031'N., 139046'W.), 0503 and 1703 Ak.s.t.
 patrol functions to assist vessels in distress. The National VHF-   (122) NMJ-3, Valdez, Alaska:
 FM Distress System provides continuous coastal radio coverage       (123) Cape Hinchinbrook (60ï¿½15'N., 146ï¿½39'W.), 1633 and
 outwards to 20 miles on channel 16. After contact on channel 16,    2233, Ak.s.t.
 communications with the Coast Guard should be on channel 22. If    ((124) Boswell Bay (60ï¿½25'N., 146ï¿½08'W.), 0415 and 1215,
 channel 22 is not available to the mariner, communications may be    Ak.s.t.
 made on channel 12. Selected stations guard the International       (125) Naked Island (60ï¿½38'N., 147ï¿½20'W.), 0415 and 1215
Radiotelephone Distress, Safety, and Calling Frequencies.         Ak.s.t.
  (98)  Alaska:                                                     (126)  Point Pigot (60ï¿½49'N., 148ï¿½22'W.), 0433 and 1233 Ak.s.t.
  (99)  Juneau (58017.9'N., 134024.6'W.). On the NW side of the     (127)  Valdez (61ï¿½08'N., 146ï¿½16'W.), 1615 and 2215 Ak.s.t.
harbor at the U.S. Government Wharf (Subport).                      (128) NOJ, Kodiak, Alaska:
  (100) Ketchikan Base (55019.9'N., 131037.5'W.). On the NE         (129)  Diamond Ridge (59ï¿½42'N., 151ï¿½34'W.), about 4.3 miles
side of Tongass Narrows about 0.6 mile SE of Ketchikan.           NW of Homer Airport, 0533 and 1633 Ak.s.t.
  (101) Kodiak Support Center (57044.3'N., 152ï¿½30.4'W.). On the     (130) Rugged Island (59056'N., 149024'W.), 0703 and 2033
N side of Womens Bay about 4.5 miles SW of Kodiak.                Ak.s.t.
  (102) Kodiak Air Station (57044.3'N., 152ï¿½30.4'W.). At Kodiak     (131) Site Summit (61ï¿½15'N., 149ï¿½32'W.), about.9.5 miles ENE
Support Center.                                                   of Anchorage, 0903 and 1733 Ak.s.t.
  (103) Sitka Air Station (57003.2'N., 135021.9'W.). On Japonski    (132) Narrow Cape (57ï¿½26'N., 152ï¿½25'W.), 0703 and 2033
Island.                                                           Ak.s.t.
  (104)  Coast Guard Radio Broadcasts.-Urgent, safety, and          (133) Pillar Mountain (57ï¿½47'N., 152ï¿½27'W.), 0533 and 1633
scheduled marine information broadcasts are made by Coast    Ak.s.t.
Guard radio stations. In general, these broadcasts provideinforma-  (134)  Sitkinak Dome (56ï¿½33'N., 154ï¿½10'W.), 0903 and 1733
tion vital to vessels operating in the approaches and coastal waters    Ak.s.t.
of the United States including Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin          (135) Cape Gull (58ï¿½09'N., 154ï¿½09'W.), 0533 and 1633 Ak.s.t.
Islands. Transmissions are as follows:                              (136) Tuklung Mountain (58051'N., 159ï¿½27'W.) about 6 miles
  (105) By radiotelephone:  (a) upon receipt; (b) repeated 15    ENE of Kulukak Point, 0903 and 1733 Ak.s.t.
minutes later, (for urgent messages only); (c) text only on the first  (137) U.S. NAVTEX Transmitting Stations.-NAVTEX cover-
scheduled broadcast unless cancelled; (d) additional broadcasts at    age is reasonably continuous to 200 NM off the U.S. East, Gulf,
the discretion of the originator.                                 and West Coasts; Puerto Rico; Southwest Alaska; Hawaii; and
 (106) Urgent broadcasts are preceded by the urgent signal    300-400 NM off Guam.  U.S. Coast Guard NAVTEX broadcast
PAN-PAN. Both the urgent signal and message are transmitted on    stations (Pacific Ocean) and message content follow:
2182 kHz, and VHF-FM channel 16.                                    (138) Long Beach (NMC)(Station Q)
 (107)  Safety broadcasts are preceded by the safety signal        (139) Eleventh Coast Guard District Broadcast Notices to Mari-
SECURITY. After the preliminary safety signal is broadcast on    ners.
2182 kHz and VHF-FM channel 16, broadcast stations will shift to    (140) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.
2670 kHz and VHF-FM channel 22A, respectively.                      (141) Gale, storm, and Hurricane warnings.
 (108) Scheduled broadcasts.-The following Coast Guard radio       (142) Coastal weather forecasts for Point St George to Guada-
stations make scheduled broadcasts, preceded by a preliminary    lupe Island and 60 NM offshore.
call on 2182 kHz and VHF-FM channel 16 at the times and fre-        (143) Broadcast times: 0045, 0445, 0845, 1245, 1645, 2045
quencies indicated (VHF-FM channel 22A; control stations are    GMT.
given, followed by remote antenna sites.):                          (144) San Francisco (NMC) (Station C)
 (109) NMJ-2, Ketchikan, Alaska:                                   (145) Eleventh Coast Guard District Broadcast Notices to Mari-
 (110) Gravina Island (55ï¿½22'N., 131048'W.), 0615 and 1815    ners.
Ak.s.t.                                                             (146) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.
 (1m) Cape Decision (56ï¿½00'N., 134ï¿½08'W.), 0533 and 1733           (147) Gale, storm, and hurricane warnings.
Ak.s.t.                                                             (148) Offshore marine weather forecasts for:
 (112) Zarembo Island (56ï¿½21'N., 132ï¿½52'W.), 0515 and 1715         (149) North of 300N., East of 160ï¿½E.;
Ak.s.t.                                                             (150) South of 300N., East of 140ï¿½W.
 (113) Sukkwan Island (55006'N., 132046'W.), 0515 and 1715         (151) Broadcast times: 0000, 0400, 0800, 1200, 1600, 2000
Ak.s.t.                                                           GMT.
 (114) Mary Island (55005'N., 131ï¿½10'W.), 0533 and 1733 Ak.s.t.    (152) Astoria (NMW)(Station W)
 (115) NOU, Sitka, Alaska:                        -                (153) Thirteenth Coast Guard District Broadcast Notice to Mari-
 (116)  Mud Bay (57ï¿½09'N., 135039'W.), on Kruzof Island, 0003,    ners.
0450, 1203, and 1533 Ak.s.t.                                        (154) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.
 (117) NMJ-1, Juneau, Alaska:                                      (155) Gale, storm, and hurricane warnings.







                                                         APPENDIX                                                           259


 (156) Offshore marine weather forecasts for the Canadian bor-    can (supervised by Juneau port of entry); Petersburg (supervised
der to Point St. George and 250 NM offshore.                      by Wrangell port of entry).
 (157) Broadcast times: 0130, 0730, 1330, 1930 GMT.
 (158) Kodiak (NOJ)(Station J)                                     (195) National Weather Service Offices.-The following offices
 (159) Seventeenth Coast Guard District Broadcast Notice to    will provide forecasts and climatological data or arrange to obtain
Mariners.                                                         these services from other offices. They will also check barometers
 (160) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.                     in their offices or by telephone; refer to the local telephone direc-
 (161) Gale, storm, and hurricane warnings.                       tory for numbers.
 (162) Offshore marine weather forecasts for the Canadian bor-     (196) Anchorage, Alaska: International Airport; 632 6th Ave-
der to 850N including the Aleutian Chain.                         nue.
 (163) Broadcast times: 0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300         (197) Annette, Alaska: Airport.
GMT.                                                                (198) Barrow, Alaska: Wiley Post-Will Rogers Field.
 (164) Adak (NOJ)(Station X)                                       (199) Barter Island, Alaska: Airport.
 (165) Seventeenth Coast Guard District Broadcast Notice to        (200)  Bethel, Alaska: Airport.
Mariners.                                                           (201) Cold Bay, Alaska: Airport.
 (166) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.                      (202) Homer, Alaska: Municipal Airport.
 (167) Gale, storm, and hurricane warnings.                        (203) Juneau, Alaska: Federal Office Bldg.
 (168)  Coastal weather forecasts for the Andrean of Island vicin-  (204)  King Salmon, Alaska: Airport.
ity.                                                               (205) Kodiak, Alaska: Airport.
 (169) Broadcast times: 0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300         (206) Kotzebue, Alaska: Ralph Wein Memorial Airport.
GMT.                                                                (207) Nome, Alaska: Airport.
 (170) Honolulu (NMO)(Station O)                                   (208) St. Paul Island, Alaska: Airport.
  (171) Fourteenth Coast Guard District Broadcast Notice to Mar-    (209) Unalakleet, Alaska: Airport.
iners.                                                             (210) Valdez, Alaska: Coast Guard VTS Building.
  (172) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.                      (211)  Yakutat, Alaska: State Airport.
  (173) Gale, storm, tropical storm, and typhoon warnings.          (212) Radio Weather Broadcasts.-Taped or direct broadcasts
  (174) Offshore marine weather forecasts for:                     of marine weather forecasts and storm warnings are made by com-
  (175) North Pacific to 50ï¿½N. and 160ï¿½E. to 1400W.;               mercial and Coast Guard radio stations in the area covered by this
  (176) South Pacific to 25ï¿½S. and 160ï¿½E. to 1100W.                Coast Pilot. These broadcasts usually are made several times a
  (177) Broadcast times: 0040, 0440, 0840, 1240, 1640, 2040    day; the transmission schedules are shown on the Marine
GMT.                                                              Weather Services Chart for Alaskan Waters.
  (178) Guam (Station V)                                            (213) The weather broadcasts schedules of Coast Guard radio
  (179) Marianas Section Broadcast Notice to Mariners.             stations are also listed in the descriptions of Coast Guard marine
  (180) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.                     services found elsewhere in this appendix.
  (181)  Gale, storm, tropical storm, and typhoon warnings.         (214) The National Weather Service offices in Alaska broadcast
  (182) Offshore marine weather forecasts.                         marine forcasts and warnings for coastal waters on the frequencies
  (183) Broadcast times: 0100, 0500, 0900, 1300, 1700 GMT.         and at the times (Alaskan standard time when the state is observ-
                                                                   ing standard time, and Alaskan daylight saving time when the
  (184) Rescue Coordination Centers.-Listed below are the    state is observing daylight saving time) indicated.
locations of the centers in Alaska; refer to the local telephone   (215) KDG-58, Annette: 4125 kHz, 0700 and 1645;
directory for numbers.                                              (216) KDG-91, Yakutat: 4125 kHz, 0930 and 1930;
  (185) Juneau, Alaska: U.S. Coast Guard Station.                   (217) KCI-98, King Salmon: 4125 kHz, 1100 and 1715; sea-
  (186) Anchorage, Alaska: Elmendorf Air Force Base.               sonal April 1 through October 15;
  (187) Kodiak, Alaska: U.S. Coast Guard Support Center.            (218) KCI-95, Cold Bay: 2512 kHz (April 1 through October
  (188) Adak, Alaska: Adak Naval Station.                          15), 4125 kHz (October 16 through March 30), 1030 and 2030;
                                                                     (219) WBH-29, Kodiak: 4125 kHz, 0800 and 1800;
  (189) Customs Ports of Entry and Stations                         (220) KCI-94, Nome: 4125 kHz, 1130 and 2130.
                                                                     (221) NOAA Weather Radio.-National Weather Service VHF-
  (190) Vessels may be entered and cleared at any port of entry or    FM radio stations provide mariners with continuous FM broad-
 customs station, but at the latter only with advance authorization    casts, radar reports, and surface weather observations. These sta-
 from the Customs Service district director.                       tions usually transmit on 162.55 or 162.40 MHz. Reception range
  (191) Pacific Region                                             is up to 40 miles from the antenna site, depending on the terrain,
  (192) Anchorage District:                                        type of receiver, and the antenna used. The following VHF-FM
  (193) Ports of Entry: Anchorage, Dalton Cache (59027.1'N.,    radio stations with location of antenna are located in Alaska:
 136ï¿½21.6'W.), Juneau, Ketchikan, Sitka, Skagway, Valdez,            (222) WXJ-26, Ketchikan (55022'N., 13140'W.), 162.55 MHz.
 Wrangell.                                                          (223) WXJ-83, Wrangell (56028'N., 132022'W.), 162.40 MHz,
  (194) Customs Stations: Barrow (supervised by Fairbanks port:     (224) WXM-97, Haines (59ï¿½17'N., 135ï¿½27'W.), 162.40 MHz.
 of entry); Dutch Harbor (supervised by Anchorage port of entry);    (225) WXJ-80, Sitka (57ï¿½03'N., 135ï¿½21'W.), 162.55 MHz.
 Haines (supervised by Dalton Cache port of entry); Kaktovik         (226) WXJ-25, Juneau (58023'N., 134ï¿½46'W.), 162.55 MHz.
 (Barter Island) (supervised by Fairbanks port of entry); Kenai      (227) WXK-69, Yakutat (59ï¿½30'N., 139039'W.), 162.40 MHz.
 (Nikishka), Kodiak (supervised by Anchorage port of entry); Peli-   (228) WXJ-79, Cordova (60ï¿½33'N., 145ï¿½45'W.), 162.55 MHz.






260                                                      APPENDIX


 (229) The National Weather Service provides Radiofacsimile       (245) Department of Agriculture, Animal and Plant Health
Weather Information for Alaskan waters through the Coast    Inspection Service (APHIS) Offices.-Listed below are ports cov-
Guard Communications Station Kodiak, AK (NOJ). Broadcasts    ered by this volume where APHIS inspectors are available to
are made daily at 0400, 1000, 1800, and 2200 UTC, on 4298 and    inspect plants, and plant and animal products, and locations of
8459 kHz. For further information, contact the National Weather    Animal Import Centers where livestock and birds are inspected.
Service National Meteorological Center at (301) 763-8442, or fax  (246) Information on importation of plants, animals, and plant
(301) 899-8903.                                                  and animal products is available from APHIS, Department of
                                                                 Agriculture, Federal Building, 6505 Belcrest Road, Hyattsville,
 (230) National Weather Service Forecast Offices (WSFOs).-    Md. 20782. The specific offices to contact are as follows: for
Scheduled coastal marine forecasts are issued four times daily by    plants, including fruits and vegetables, and plant products, Plant
Weather Service Forecast Offices. (See National Weather Service,    Protection and Quarantine, Room 635, telephone 301-436-6799;
chapter 1, for further details.) Individual WSFO's and their spe-    for animal products, Import-Export Animals and Products Staff,
cific area of broadcast coverage are as follows:                 Room 756A, telephone 301-436-7885; and for live ruminants,
 (231) Juneau, Alaska: Southeast Alaska. Outside waters-Dixon    swine, equines, and poultry and other birds, Veterinary Services,
Entrance to Cape Suckling, out 60 miles; inside waters-Dixon    Import-Export Animals and Products Staff, Room 764, telephone
Entrance to Skagway including Lynn Canal-Glacier Bay, Icy    301-436-8590.
Strait-Cross Sound, Chatham Strait, Stephens Passage, Frederick    (247) Alaska:
Sound, Sumner Strait, and Clarence Strait.                         (248) Anchorage: Anchorage International Airport; Box 6191,
 (232) National Weather Service Port Meteorological Officers    Annex Post Office, 99502.
(PMOs).-Port Meteorological Officers provide assistance on mat-   (249) Animal Import Centers:
ters of weather chart interpretation, instruments, marine weather  (250) Honolulu, Hawaii: P.O. Box 50001, 96850.
communications, and requirements affecting ship operations. (See   (251) Miami, Fla.: P.O. Box 523054, 33166.
National Weather Service, chapter 1, for further details.) The near-  (252) Rock Tavern, N.Y.: New York Animal Import Center,
est PMO to the area covered by this Coast Pilot is at:           Stewart Airport, Rural Route 1, Box 74, 12575.
 (233) Seattle, Wash.: 7600 Sand Point Way, NE 98115.
 (234) Anchorage AK: 222 West 7th Avenue, 99513-7565.             (253) Immigration and Naturalization Service Offices

 (235) Public Health Service Quarantine Stations. -Stations       (254) Alaska:
where quarantine examinations are performed:                       (255) Anchorage: Federal Bldg., 701 C Street, 99513.
 (236) Anchorage: Anchorage International Airport, U.S. Quar-     (256) Haines: Mile 41 Haines Highway (Dalton's Cache),
antine Station, Box 190083, Anchorage, Alaska 99519-0083.        99827-0506.
 (237) At other ports, quarantine and/or medical examinations     (257) Ketchikan: 111 Main Street, 99901.
are usually performed by Public Health Service contract personnel  (258) Skagway: P.O. Box 475, 99840.
or by quarantine inspectors from the nearest quarantine station.   (259) Dutch Harbor: Factory Trawler Bldg., 2315 Airport
Inquiries concerning quarantine matters should be directed to the    Beach Rd., 99692.
nearest quarantine station.
                                                                   (260) Federal Communications Commission Offices
 (238) Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Regional Offices
                                                                   (261) District field offices:
 (239) Northeast Region (New York, Maine, Connecticut, New        (262) Anchorage, Alaska: 6721 West Raspberry Road 99502.
Hampshire, Vermont, Rhode Island): 830 Third Avenue, Brook-
lyn, NY 11232.                                                     (263) Radio shore stations providing medical advice.-Mes-
 (240) Mid-atlantic Region (Delaware, Pennsylvania, Virginia,    sages to shore stations may be transmitted in code groups or plain
Maryland, Ohio, New Jersey): U.S. Customhouse, 2nd and Chest-    language; messages should be signed by the master and be pre-
nut Streets, Philadelphia, PA 19106.                             fixed RADIOMEDICAL.  The following stations will provide
  (241) Southeast Region (South Carolina, North Carolina, Geor-    radio service for medical advice. (See Medical advice, chapter 1.)
gia, Alabama, Louisiana, Mississippi, Florida, Puerto Rico): 60    (264) NOJ, Kodiak, AK, U.S. Coast Guard on HF single-side-
Eight Street, N.E., Atlanta, GA 30309.                           band radiotelephone channels 424 (4134 kHz), 601 (6200 kHz),
  (242) Midwest Region (Illinois, Indiana, Michigan, Wisconsin):    816 (8240 kHz), or 1205 (12242 kHz).
20 N. Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60602.                          (265) WKN, Ketchikan, AK, Alascom, Inc.,
  (243) Southwest Region (Texas): 3032 Bryan Street, Dallas,       (266) WKQ, Point Lena, Juneau, AK, Alascom, Inc., and
TX 75204.                                                          (267) WKR, Nome, AK, Alascom, Inc.: 1000-1900 A.k.s.t.
  (244) Pacific Region (California, Hawaii, Alaska, Washington,    Monday-Friday; 1100-1500 A.k.s.t. Saturday; 1100-1200 A.k.s.t.
Oregon): 50 U.N. Plaza, San Francisco, CA 94102.                 Sunday and holidays, maintain a continuous guard on 500 kHz.








                                                                                                                          T-1

                                                  CLIMATOLOGICAL TABLES

       These tables were prepared by the National Environmental Satellite, Dale. and information ' means less than 0.5 percent,
      Sen/ice. Slation level pressure refers to the actual pressure taken at the elevation of the "means less than 0.5 day,
      station. Where it has been reduced to sea level. the term sea level pressure is used. Time t means trace (not measurable) of precipitation,
      given is local standard time.


                                        ANNE'I-I'E, AK (55'02'N.. 131'34'W.) Elevation 110 fl. (33.5m)


        WEAltIER ELEMENTS JAN, FEB. MAR. APR. MAY  JUNE JULY AUG. SEPT,  OCT.  NOV. DEC. YEAR YEARS OF
                                                                                                             RECORD
       SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (Millibars) ...................... 1011.O 1011.2 1012.1 1014.0 1016.7 1016.4 1018.1 1016.6 1014.7 1009.8 1009.7 1008.2 1013.2 26
     TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean .............................. 33.5 36.7 38.3 42.8 49.4 54.6   57.8 58.3 54.0 46.9 39.9 35.9 45.7 30
Mean Daily Maximum .................... 38.0 41.5 43.7 48.6 52.2   61.0 64.0 64.6 59.8 51.7 44.3   40.1 51.1 30
Mean Dairy Minimum ..................... 29.0 31.8 32.8   36.7 42.6 48.1 51.6   51.9 48.1 42.1 35.5 31.6   40.1 30
Extreme Highest ........................ 61 63 62 72                        88 89 86              90 80 71 67 62 90                              15
Extreme Lowest ........................ 3 6 15 22 31 37 40 40 34 25 10 I I 15
        RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage (1000 l.s.t.) ............ 77 79 74 73 72 75 77 79 80 81 79 79 77 15
Average Percentage (1600 I.s.L] ............ 73 73           67 66          64     68      68 71 72 77 76 77 71                                  15
          CLOUD COVER
Average Amount (Tenths] ................. 7.8 8.1 8.0 7.8 73                       8.1 7.8 7.8 7.8 8.7 8.4 8.5 8.0 28
Mean Number of Days with Clear Skies ....... 5        3 4 4 4                       2 4 4 4 2 2 3 42 28
Mean Number of Days with Cloudy Skies ...... 22 21 23 20                    21 21 21 21 20 25 24 24 263 28
          PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (Inches) ................... 10.42 9.27 9.15   8.77 6.20   5.05   5.42 7.15 10.01 17.85  12.87   12.14 114.30 30
GreatestAmount(Inches) ................. 20.69 18.06 23.57 21.35 14.68 10.40 10.85  20.72 16.96   34.87 28.09 28.09  189.90 26
I.east Amount (inches) ................... 0.77   0.73 3.00 1.23 1.57 1.15 0.56 0.71 2.52 8.82 3.61 4.38 80.84 28
Ma~mum in 24 hrs. (inches) ............. 4.65 5.58 4.02 4.75 4.29 3.79 2.63   4.68   5.04 7.59 5.19   5.20 7.59 28
Mean Amount of Snow [Inches) .......... 16.0 12.8 10.8 2.7 0.2 0.0 O.0 0.0 0.0 0.2 3.6 13.1 59.4 28
Maximum Snowtall in 24 hm. (inches) ........ 12.3 14.2 11.8 14.0 5.0 0.0 0.0    0.0 0.0 3.2 9.6 12.8 14.2                                        28
Mean Number of Days with Snow (One Inch or
 More) .............................. 5 4 3 1 t                                    0 0 0 0                       1 2 3 18 28
~).01 Inch or More, Mean Number of Days ..... 19 19          20 18 17 15 14 15 18                                24 22 23 224 28
              WIND
;,,lean Wind Speed (Knots) (0700 I.s.f.) ........ 11.0    10.5 9.6 9,0 7.4 7.2 6.4 6.3 7.6 10.6 11.4 11.3
                                                                                                                29
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) (1300 I.s.f.) ........ 11.6 11.2 11.2 11.2 9.8 9.6    8.8- 8.7 9.6 11.8 12.0    11.4 29
_r3irection (Percentage of Obs.): 0700 I.s.t,
 Horth ............................... 8.9 6.4 7.2 6.4 4.0 2.6 5.1 4.4 5.2 3.4 6.7 6.8 29
 NoAh Norlheast ....................... 5.3 2.0 3.3    2.8 1.3 0.9 09    0.9 2.1 2.5 4.1    3.4 29
 NoAheast. .......................... 7.8 6.3 5.7 3.0 1.5 1.1 0.7 0.8 2.5 3.4 8.0 5.9 29
 ~ast Northeast ....................... 6.0 5.1 4.0 3.1 1.1 0.7 0.5 0.6 1.8 3.4 5.6 5.6 29
 Fast ............................... 5.3 5.0 5.9 4.4    3.8 1.8 1.4    2.0 2.7 4.0    5.7 4.9 29
 Fast Southeast ....................... 15.2 t3.9 13.0    14.8 11.2               9.5    7.1 8.0 9.2 17.5 15.9 t7.3 29
 :3outheast ........................... 12.9 11.5 13.9 13.6 15.3 16.4 16.4 18.0 18.1 16.7 15.1 t2.0 29
 South Southeast ...................... 8.0 9.,I 7.4 10.1 11.3 14.3 14.1 11.3 12.4 11.3 9.0 9.6 29
 South .............................. 5.8 7.0 6.5 7.2 7.1 8.4 7.2 7.5 6.7 9.4 6.9 7.2 29
 South Southwest ...................... 2.8 3.3 3.1    2.9 2.5 3.7 2.3                           2.6 2.3    3.9    3.6 4.1 29
 Southwest ........................... 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.9 2.2 1.6 1.7 2.0 t.5 2.4 2.0 2.9 29
 West Southwest ...................... 1.2 1.7 1.9 1.3 1.1 1.5 1.3 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.5 1.8                                                          29
 West ............................... 0.8 0.9 1.7 1.2 1.7 2.2 2.5                                1.7 1.6 1.5            1.2 1.9 29
 West Northwest ....................... 1.4 2.2 1.6 2.8 4.5 6.1 5.9 4.5 2.0 2.0 1 .t 1.5 29
 NoAhwest ........................... 2.6 4.7 4.5 5.3 8.0 9.9 10.2 9.0 7.4 3.7 3,3 2.7 29
 North Northwest ...................... 7.1 11.2 11.5 10.0 12.9 10.5    10.6 12.5    11.6    6.5 6.3    6.3 29
 Calm ............................... 7.3 5.8 7.5 9.2 10.5 8.8 12.0 13.5 12.2 7.0 6.0                                          6.2 29
Direction (Percentage of Obs.): at 1300 I.s.t.
 NoAh ............................... 6.9 3.8    3.0 2.1 1.0    0.9 0.8 1.2 1.9 1.9 4.9 6.6 29
 North Northeast ....................... 3,2 1.6 1.8 1.1 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.8 2.5 2.9 29
 NoAheast ........................... 6.4 4.3 2.9 1.2 0.6 0.3 0.3 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.3                                                               29
 East NoAheast ....................... 6.3 3.7 3.7 3.0 0.7 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.9 2.5    5.3 6.t                                                       29
 East ............................... 4.3 3.8 4.8 2.2 1.3 0.6 0.2 0.9 1.5 3.3    4.8 4,6 29
 East Southeast ....................... 13.7 13.2 11.3 7.9 4.1    3.4 3.0 3.5    6.0    13.5 16.6 13.9 29
 Southeast ........................... 14.1 13.1 14.4 13.6 10.7 9.4 10.7    8.9 14.0 170 16.7 12.9 29
 South Southeast ...................... 9.2 11.5    12.8 17.4 20.6 23.3   22.1 19.6 17.0 17.9 10.1 10.7 29
 South .............................. 6.6 8,3 8.7 14.4    17.4    18.4 18.6    16.4 13.2 11.8 8.3    8.8 29
 South Southwest ...................... 3.2 3.7 5.8 7.4    5.8 8.9 7.6 7.7 6.1 4.4 3.7 4.0 29
 Southwest ........................... 2.0 3.4 3.5 3.5    4.2 4.7    4.3 4.1 3.2 2.7 2.4 3.6 29
 West Southwest ...................... 1.6 2.3 2.7 2.7 2.6 3.7 4.0    3.0 2.0 2.7 2.0 2.5                                                        29
 West ............................... 1.8 2.9 3.1 3.5 5.2    5.2 6.0    5.4 4.8 2.8 2.0 2.0 29
 West NoAhwest ....................... 1.8 4.4 4.6 8.1 10.3 8.9 8.9    9.7 6.9 4.2 1.8                                         1.4 29
 NoAhwesl ........................... 3.5 6.7 7.2 6.7 9.9 8.4 6.2 11.5 13.1 5.2 3.7 3.5 29
 North Northwest ...................... 8.4 9.6 7.0 4.8 4.6 2.$    4.5 5.7 6.g 4.9 6.8 6.5 29
 Calm ............................... 6.9 3.6 1.9    0.5 0.9 0.4 0.8 1.3 1.0 2.0 4.4 5.7 29
            VISIBILITY
Days with Visibility equal to or leas than 1/4 mile 1 I I I                         I 2 2 3 2 1 16                                               28







T-2

                                                  CLIMATOLOGICAL TABLES

       These tables were prepared by the National Environmental Sstettite, Date, and information ' means less than 0.5 percent.
      Service. Station level pressure refers to the actual pressure taken at the elevaï¿½on of the  "means less than 0.5 day.
      station. Where it has been reduced to sea level, the term sea level i~essure is ussd. 'r'mne t means trace (not measurable) of precipitation.
      given is local standard time.


                                       KETCHIKAN. AK (55'21'N., 131~39'W.} ElevaUon 15 It. (4,6m)


        WEATHER ELEMENTS JAN.  FEB. MAR. APR. MAY JUNE JULY AUG. SEPT;  OCT. NOV. DEC.
                                                                                                     YEAR YEARS OF
                                                                                                           RECORD
      TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................ 34 34 39 43 50 55 58 59 55 48 41 37 46                                                                     29
Mean Daily Maximum .................... 39 41 45                    50      57     62 64 66               61 53 46 41
                                                                                                      52 29
Mean Daily Minimum ..................... 29 31 33 36 42 48 51 52 48 43 36                                                        32 40
                                                                                                              29
Mean Highest in Each Month .............. 49          50     53 62 73 76 77 78 72 62 55                                          51 82 29
Mean Lowest in Each Month ............... 14 16 22 28 34 41                                44      46     39 31 22 18 5                           29
        RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage (0300 I.s.t.} ............ 51 87 84 87 87 90 90 91 90 89 86 89 87 5
Average Percentage (1500 I.s.t.) ........... 76 76 71 70 63                         68 70          69 72 79 78 68 75 5
          PRECIPITATION
MeanAmount(Inches) ................... 13.2 11.4 11.5 11.7 8.3 7.6 7.5 10.5 13.9 21.8 18.0    15.4 150.8 29
0.01 Inch or More, Mean Number ol Days ..... 21 16 20                20 17 16 18 15 19 25 24
                                                                                                 23 236 25
              WIND
Maximum Wind Speed (Knots) ............. 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3    4.3 3.5 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4,3 4.3                                                    9
Prevailing Wind Direction .................. E SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE 25
Direction (Percentage of Ohs.)
 North ............................... I              2      I I 1 I 1 1 2 3 1 10
 North Northeast ....................... I 1 0 0 0 0                                                                     0 10
 Northeast ........................... 3 4 2 2 I 1 1 2 3                                                          3      4       5 3 10
 :-ast Northeast ....................... I            2 1 1 I 1 t 0
 ~ast ............................... 9 10 9 7 6                                    3 3 4 4 9                           12 11 7 10
 ::;_st Southeast ....................... 5 3 2 3 4 3 3 2 3 5 4 5 4 10
 ~.outheast ........................... 23 17 25 29 33 34 32 28 28 40 25 22 28 10
 South Southeast ...................... 4 2 4                        6 2 3 4 2 3 2 2 4                                                  3 10
 South .............................. 4 2 3 4 6 4 5 4 4 4 3 3 4 I 0
 -'--3ou t h Southwest ...................... 0              1       0              0              0 0 0                                         10
 -~outhwest ........................... 1 1 1                                       1      1       1      1 2 2 1 10
 West Southwest ...................... 0 I 0 10
 West ............................... 2               5 5 5 6 5 7 6 4 3 2 I                                                             4        10
 West Northwest ....................... I I 1 1                                     i       1      1      2 1 I                         1        10
 Northwest ........................... 4 7 7 9 t 1                                  9 11 16              12 6 4 4 8 10
 North Northwest ...................... 1 1 0                                                                                                    10
 Calm ............................... 43 43 37                      31 26 35 32 34 35 26 38 39 35 10
            ï¿½1SIBILITY
Days with Visibility equal to or less then 1/4 mile 5.2  1.3 4.6 1.6 2.4 0.7 2.0 4.5 3.1 0.8 2.9 9.5 3.2 9


                                     PETERSBURG, AK (56'49'N.. 132'57'W.1 ElevaUon 100 ft. (30.5m}


        WEATHER ELEMENTS JAN. FEB,  MAR. APR. MAY  JUNE JULY AUG. SEPT. OCT,  NOV. DEC. YEAR YEARS OF
                                                                                                           RECORD
     TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................ 28.6   30.3   34.8 40.6 47,8   53.5 55.7 55.2 50.9 43.9 35.9 31.1 42.4 21
Mean Daily Maximum .................... 34.0 36.2 41.4   48.7 56.7 62.2 63.5 63.4 58.1 49.8 41.1 35.8 49.2 21
Mean Daily Minimum ..................... 23.1 24.4 28.1   32.9 38.8   44.8 47.9 47.0 43.7 38.1   30,7 28,3 35.5
                                                                                                             21
Extreme Highest ........................ 55           64     59 72 76               81 84 79 81 72 63 59 94 21
Extreme Lowest ........................ --19  --7 0 10   27 29 37 32 26 19 4  --9 --19 21
          PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (Inches) ................... 9.73 7.09 7.18 6.98   5.60 4.71 5.44 7.49 15.48 16.97 12.31 10.10 105.08 21
Maximum in 24 Hrs. (Inches) ............... 3.77   4.42 3.16    2.54 2.83 2.35 2.86 3.55 4.49 5.70 3.64 3.24 5.70 21
Mean Amount of Snow (Inches} ............. 28.5 22.5 11 .B 0,9 t 0.0    0.0    0.0    0.0 0.7 10.1 22.0 96.6 21
0.01 inch or More, Mean Number of Days ..... 20       17 19          19 17 15 17 16 19 23 22 22 226 21
             WIND
Prevailing Wind Direction ................. SW SW SW SE SE E E E E SW SW SW SW 19
Direction (Precentage of Obs.)
 North ............................... 3              2 4 4 6 12 8 5 4 2 3 2 4 9
 North Northeast ....................... 1 2 1 2                            2 2 4 3 I 1 1 1 9
 Northeast ........................... 3              6      9 15 11 8 9 16                               8 5 4 4 9 9
 East Northeast ...................... 1 I 2 4 8 8 5                                                       1 I 0 2 9
 East .............................. I 10 13 12 7 7 10 7 12 5 5 3 8 9
 East Southeast ...................... 2              2      1 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 2 9
 Southeast .......................... 8 9 8                          9 14           5 3 3 3                       8 4 7 7 9
 South Southeast ..................... 2                             1       1 0 0                        0       1 3 1 I 9
 South ............................. 2 1                     t       1      2       1 I I 2 2 I 1 9
 South Southwest ..................... 1 ~                   I I 1 1 1 1 I I 1 I 1 9
 Southwest ........................... 3              8 ? 8 1 I 2 1 5 2 3 6 4 9
 West Southwest ...................... 0                      t 1 0 1 0                            1 1 1                                          9
 West ............................... I I                    2 1 I 0 1 1 2 2 1 9
 West Northwest ....................... 0                                   0       0                                     0 0 9
 Northwest ........................... 4              1       I      1 3 2 4 2 2 1 ! 2 9
 North Northwest ...................... I                            0      0 1 0 0 9
 Ca~m ............................... 72 57 48 40 46                               50 53 52 63 66 67 69 58 9







                                                                                                                              T-3

                                                       CLIMATOLOGICAL TABLES


       These tables were prepared by the National Environmental Satellite, Date, and information ' means less than 0.5 parcent.
      Service. Station level i~essure refers to the actual pressure taken al the elevation el the "means less.than 0.5 day.
      station. Where it has been reduced to sea level, the term sea level pressure is used. Time t means trace [not measurable) of precipitation.
      given is local standard time.


                                             SITKA, AK (57'03'N., 135'20'W.) Elevation ,67 It. (20.4m)


        WEATHER ELEMENTS JAN, FEB. MAR.  APR. MAY JUNE JULY AUG.- SEPT. OCT. NOV.  DEC. YEAR YEARS OF
                                                                                                                       RECORD
        SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean(Millibars) ........................ 1009,3 1008.4 1010.5 1012.1 1015.7 1015.6  1017.7 1015.5 1012.5 1006.5 1008,4 1005.4 22
      TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................ 32 33 36 41 46 51 55 56                                                   52 45 39 34 43 30
Mean Daily Maximum .................... 38 40 43 48                             54 59 61                62      59 52 44 40                     50        63
Mean Daily Minimum ..................... 26 28 29 33 39 44 48 49 45 39 33 29                                                                    37 63
Extreme Highest ........................ 60 60                  65 75 84 84                     87      88 82 70 52                     64      87 76
Extreme Lowesl ....: ................... --8 .-4    --5 8 27 31 34 30 28 16                                                      1 ---6 ---8 76
         RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ..................... 74.8 76.1 75.6 76.1 77.5 80.8 84.6    84.6 84.1 79,7 76,1 77.9 22
           CLOUD COVER
Equal to or Less than 2/8 Average Amount; Per-
 cent of Time ......................... 28.1 19.9 22.5 19.3 16.2 11.8    11.6 14.9 15.1 12,7 18.3    18.2                                                22
Mean Number el Days with Clear Skies ....... 6 5 7 7 5 6 3 5 4 4                                                                 ,4 3 59 l0
Mean Number of Days with Cloudy Skies ...... 18 15 14 14 16 13 18 16 16 18 19 16 193 10
Equal to or More than 6/8 Average Amount;
 Percent of Time ....................... 61,4 59.9 65.8 67,7   70.1 75.7 76.6 73.0 73.0 75.2 70.2 71.9 22
           PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (Inches) ................... 7.77 5.38 6.95 5.35 4.66 3,46 5.20 7,86 11.49 15.27 12.01 10.17 96.57 30
Greatest Amount {inches) ................. 15.44 12.13 13.52 8,46 10.12    8.19 12.01 13.03 23.32 20.08 22.82 18.25 128.06 20
Least Amount (Inches) .................. 2.64 1.83 3.57 1.36 1.36    0.53 1.85 0.52 6.03    7.01    3.59 4.93 59.43 20
Maxirnum in 24 hrs. (inches) ............... 2.24    3.40 2.43 2,96 2.17 1.58 4.42 4.23    3.82    4.43    3.34 3.69 4.43 10
Mean Amount o1 Snow (Inches} ............. 11.1 9.4 9.5 3.2 0.1 0.0 O.O 0.0 0.0                                         0.1 3.1 10.9 47.4 52
0,01 Inch or More. Mean Number of Days .... 11 13 13 1 '2 11 9                                   10 14           15 21 20 20    169 7
               WIND
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) ................. 7.6 7.7 7.3 7.1 6.1 5.9 5,1 5.0 5.8 8.1 8.6 8.5 22
Direction (Percentage of Obs.)
 North ............................... 3.2             3.0 2.5 2.6 3.0 4.2 3.9 3.5 3.0 2.1 3.1 2.5 22
 Northeast ........................... 5.1 3.1 3.3 2.2 2.1 1.1 1.2 1.6 1.7 2.4 3.4 4.0 22
 East ............................... 20.0 13.0 14.4 11.5 8.7 4.8 4,6 6.3 7.8 14.3 17.2 21.3 22
 Southeast ........................... 34.9 37.5 33.9    29.9 20.2 12.7 8.9 15,6 28.0 40.8 40.8 40.3 22
 South .............................. 4,8    7.0 6,6 7.5 7.8 6.7 7,5 9,1 9.8 9.7 7.4 6.2 22
 Southwest ........................... 2.5 3.4 4.3 7.4 11.8 12.8 13.8 11.7 7.1 4.6 3.2 2.5                                                               22
 West ................................ 3.2             4.5 4.7 6.1 8.3 11.6 11.0 7.7 5.0                               3.2     3.3 3.2 22
 Northwest ........................... 7.9 1().8 11.5 14.2 17,6 25.8 24.6 20.0 14,6 8.2 7.1                                            6.4 22
 Calm ............................... 18.4 17.7 18,8 18.7 20.6    20.4 24.3    24.6 24.9 14.7 14.4 13.6 22
Direction (Mean Speed. Knots)
 North ............................... 7.5 6.8 7.1 6.6                         6.3 6.6 6.0 8;1 5.9 6.0                         5.9 7.2 22
 Northeast ........................... 9.0             8.6 8.1 7.9 5.1 4.6 3.7 4.5                             4.7 5.8 7.0 8.5 22
 East ............................... 9,3 9.4 9.0 8.2 - 7.2                            7.0 5;2 5.0   '6.9 9.3                  9.6 9.1 22
 Southeast ........................... 10.3 10.4 10.2 10.4 9.2 8.8 6.9 7.4 8.8 10.6 11.2 10,8 22
 South .............................. 9.5 9.4 8.1 8.3                          6.0 7.0         6.7 6.5         8.2 10.0 10.6    10.0 22
 Southwest ........................... 9.0 8.6                 6.9 6.8 7.0 6.6                 6.0     5.9 7.0         8.4 9.9 10.3                      22
 West ............................... 7.7 7,7 7.5 7.3 6.4 6.3 5.9 6.0 6.4 8.0 9.0 9.4 22
 Northwest ........................... 6.9 7.4 7.6 8.0 7,8                             8.1 7.8         7.7 7.3 6.6 7.5 7.8 22
             VISIBILITY
Days with Visibility equal to or less than 1/2
 mile. Percent of Time ................... 1.2 1.1 0.9                 0.3 0,2 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 0,3 0.4 1.1 22


                                            HAINES. AK (59'14'N.. 135'26'W.) Elevation 100 It. (30.5m)


         WEATHER ELEMENTS JAN. FEB. MAR. APR. MAY JUNE JULY AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC. YEAR YEARS OF
                                                                                                                       RECORD
      TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................ 23.2 25.4 31.6 39.3 48.4 55.3 57,6   56.1 50.2 41.2 31.3 25.0 40.4 28
Mean Daily Maximum .................... 29.1    31.1 37.6 46.7 58.8 64.3 65.5 63.9 57.0 46.4    36.2 30.1   47.1 28
Mean Daily Minimum ..................... 17.3 19.7 25,5 31.8 39.9 46,2 49.7 48.2 43.4    35.9    26.3 19,8 33.8 28
Extreme Hi9hest,.. 54 53 63                                              70 83 88 go                    86 75 65 58 57 90 28
Extreme Lowest ........................ --15 --16 .--6    6   26 30   35 32 24 8  --11 --14 --16 28
           PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (Inches) ................... 6.61 4.10 4.75 3.40    2.12 1.43 1.94 2.75    6.38 11.63 8.60 6.93 60.64 28
Maximum in 24 hrs (Inches) ................ 3.62    2.95    2.63    2.72 1,62 2.07 2.10 2.75 3,60    5.64 3.92 3.68 5.64 28
Mean Amount of Snow (Inches] ............. 34.8    21.9 17.9 3.0                0.4 0.O 0,0 0.0 t 4.0    19,9 30.7 132,6                                  27
0.01 Inch or More. Mean Number of Days ..... 16          13      15 14           11 8 11 11                      25 20 18 17 179 27
               WIND
Prevailing Wind Directioe .................. W W W SE SE SE SE SE SSE SE W W SE 27








T-4

                                                       CLIMATOLOGICAL TABLES

        These tables were prepared by the National Environmental Satellite, Date, arid inlormation  ' means less than 0.5 percent.
      Service. Station level pressure relers to the actual pressure taken at the elevation of the ï¿½* means less then 0.5 day.
      station. Where it has been reduced to sea level. the term sea level pressure is used. Time t means ',race (not measurable) o! precipitation.
      given is local standard time.


                                            JUNEAU, AK (56'22'N., 134'35'W.) Elevation 12 if. (3.7m)


         WEATHER ELEMENTS JAN. FEB,  MAR.  APR. MAY JUNE   ,KILY AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC, YEAR YEARS OF
                                                                                                                      RECORD
        SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean(Millibars) ........................ 1012.2 1010.1 1011.6  1012.4 i015.5 1014. 1016.8 1014.0 1012.6  1007.3 1008.0 1007.5 1012.0 22
      TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................ 23.5 28.0 31.9 38.9 46.8 53.2 55.7 54.3 49.2 41.8    32.5 27.3 40.3                                               30
Mean Daily Maximum .................... 29.1 33.9 36.2 46.5 55.4 62.0 63.6 62.3 56.1 47.2 37.3 32.0 47.0 30
Mean Dally Minimum ..................... 17.8 22.1 25.6    31.3 38.2 44.4 47.7 46.2 42.3 36.4 27.6 22.5 33.5                                            30
Extreme Highest ........................ 57 50                  55     71 62 86                90      83 72 61 56 54 90 32
Extreme Lowest ........................ --22 --22 --15 6 25 31   36 27 23 12   --5 --21 --22 32
         RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percenlage (1000 I.s.t.) ............ 79 81 79 75                      74 76 61 64                    67      87 85 82 81 32
Average Percentage (1600 I.s.t.) ............ 76 75 69 64 63                           64 70 74 77 60 62 81 73 32
           CLOUD COVER
Mean Number of Days with Clear Skies ....... 6 4                 4      3 4 3 3 4 3 2 4 4 44 32
Mean Number of Days with Cloudy Skies ...... 22 21 24 23 23 22 23 23 24 27 243                                                        26    282 32
           PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (Inches) ................... 3.94 3.44 3.57 2.99 3.31 2.93 4.69 5.00    6.90    7.85    5.53 4.52 54.67 30
Greatest Amount (Inchesl ................. 7.75 8.48 6.36 4.33 6.33 5.34 7.88 12.31 11.51 15.25 11.22 9.89 68.11 32
I.east Amount (Inches) ................... 0.94 0.68 1.15 0.27 1.25    1,08 1.15 1.11 2.34 2.71 1.46 1.90 37.80 32
Maximum in 24 hrs. (Inches) ............... 2.74 2.37 1.81 1.57 1.39 1.92 1.88 2.62 3.17 4.66    3.34 3.56 4.66 32
:;lean Amount of Snow (Inches) ............. 26.0 21.4 19.0            5.0 0.1 t    0.0 0.0 t 1.3 12.0 24.3 109.1 32
;Jaximum Snowlall in 24 hrs. (Inches) ........ 20.1 23.7 31.0    24.2 0.7 t    O.0                    0.O       t 8.6 16.5 25.6 31.0 32
Mean Number of Days with Snow (One Inch or
 More) .............................. 7 6                       5       1 0 O                  O       0       O      ï¿½' 4 6 30                        32
0.01 Inch or Mere, Mean Number of Days ..... 18 17 17 17 17 15 17 18 20                                               23 19 21 220                      32
               VfiND
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) (0700 I.s.t.) ........ 7.0 7.5 6.8             6.6 5.7 5.4 5.6 5.6 6.2 7.9 7.9 8.1 22
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) (1300 I.s.t,) ........ 7.4     8.1 9.4 10.3 9.9 8.6                   8.1 6.1 8.7 9.5                 8,7 8.6 22
OireCtion (Percentage of Obs.) at 0700 I.s.t.
 North ............................... 18.6    16.2 15.4 12.0 12.5 18.7 27.8 25.5 16.6 6.8 t1.1 13.4 22
 North Northeast ....................... 3.9 4.7 4.2 4.8 3.8 6.8 7.7 7.1 5.6 4.3 3,6 3.5 22
 Northeast ........................... 3.6 3.0                2.9 2.7 2.8             2.3 1.6 2.8 2.6 2.4 2.7 2.9 22
 ~'ast Northeast ....................... 6.3 5.8              6.0 5.2         4.2     5.4    5.4 72. 6.2 5,9 5.4 6.6 22
 :iast ............................... 16.9 19.5 18.6 15.0    13.1    14.4 14.2   13.8   17.2 19.2 16.5 19.4 22
 i~ast Southeast ....................... 20.3 21.2 17.0    21.2 17.8 12.4 10.3 13.4    16.8 26.3 26,8 25.5 22
 ~outhesst ........................... 3.0            3.0 4.2 5.2 4.4                 2.5 2.3 1.4 3.8 4.6    5,7 4.4 22
 South Southeast ...................... 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 1.1                           0.4    0.5 0.4 0.6 1.2 0.4 0,6 22
 ~outh .............................. 0.7             0.8 0.7 1.1 1.0 1.6 0.9 0.2                            0.3 0.8 0.6 0.2 22
 :3outh Southwest ...................... 0.1    0.3 0.7 0.6 1.4 1.3 0,9 0.2                                  0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 22
 Southwest ........................... 0.4 0.7 0.6 0.8 2.4 2.6    0.7 0.1 0.6 1.2 0.1 9.3 22
 West Southwest ...................... 0.4 0.7 1,0 0.9 1.4 1.6 0.6 0.3 0.7 0.7 0.5 6.3 22
 West ............................... 0.4 1.1 1.0                     0.6 1.6 1.9 1.2 0.8 0.7 0.7                            0.9 0.7 22
 West Northwest ....................... 1.2 t.4 2.0 1.2 1.7 1.4    0.7 0.9 0.9 0.8 1.3 1.2 22
 Northwes1 ........................... 2.3 2.6 3.0 2.6 2.7 3.6 3.0                                   3.2     3.0 2.7 2.9 2.1 22
 North Northwest ...................... 5.6 4.5 6.8                   5.2     6.6 6.6 10.6 8.4 0.1 3.6 3.6                           4.9 22
 Calm ............................... 16.1 14.1 15.2 20.1 21.6    t4.8 11.0 14.3 18.1 15.8 17.3 13.4 22
Direction (Percentage of Obe.): at 1300 I.s.t.
 North ............................... 13.4           4.9 1.8 1.9 1.7 2.6 5.5 5.0    2.9 3.9 5.5    10.4                                               22
 North Northeast ....................... 2.6 1.2 1.4 1.1 1.3                          0.9 1.9 1.6 1.4 1.9 1.5 2.5 22
 Northeast ........................... 2.6 2.8 1.2 1.0    0.8 1.4                             1.5 1.1 1.1 1.1 2.2 2.8 22
 East Northeast ....................... '4.6 5.7 4,2 2.7 2.0 3.6                             5.9 8.6 6.3 4.6                 3.7     6.2 22
 East ............................... 17.2 18.3 14.3 9.1 8.1                          7.4    10.9 12.6 13.5 14.1 14.7 21.0 22
 East Southeast ....................... 21.7 26.0 29.9 26.8 26.0 19.7 16.9    17.7 24.3 32.8 31.6 28.0                                                 22
 Southeast ........................... 6.0 5.6 7.1 10.2 8.2 5.9 4.3 4.4 5.6 8.7 8.3                                                 6.4 22
 South Southeast ...................... 0.9 1.1 1.7 2.0 1.9 1.4 1.2 0.6                                      1.3 1.6 1.6 1.1 22
 South .............................. 0.8 2.2 3.3 4.0                         3.7 2.5        2.6 2.9 3.8             3.2 1.3 0.4 22
 south southwest ...................... 0.7 2.0 8.4 10.9 10.4 8.0                            8.1 10.9 12.7 4.8 1.7 0.8 22
 Southwest ........................... 0.7 3.9 10.2 12.1 12.3 15.2 13.8 13.5 12.3 5.9 2.0 0.6 22
 West Southwest ...................... 1.1 1.7 4.7 7.1 9.5 13.2 9.8 8.5 5.6 2.9 1.1 0.3 22
 West ............................... 1.0 2.0 2.4 4.4 7.1 11.0 7.6 5.0 2.6 1.8                                               1.4 0.7 22
 West Northwest ....................... 1.1            1.6 1.9 2.2 2.5 3.0                    2.8 2.5 0.9 1.2 1.0 1.0 22
 Northwest ........................... 2.3 2.5 0.9 1:1 0.6 1.5                                2.3    1.1 0.5 1.5 2.5 2.9 22
 North Northwest ...................... 5.0 3.6 1.1 0.7 1.4 2.1 3.5 2,6 2.0 1.8 3.6 4.0 22
 Calm ............................... 18.0 14.8               5.4 0.7 1.4 1.2 1.3 1.7 3.0 8.2 15.1 11.0 22
             VISIBILITY
Days with Visibility equal to or less than 1/4 mile 2 2          2 1 I 1 3 3 3 2 22 32







                                                                                                 T-5


                      METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF VANCOUVER ISLAND, CANADA
                               Boundaries: 50ï¿½N. to 53ï¿½N., between 134~/. and the coast


        Weather Elements Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr.   May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Annual

 Wind >_ 34 knots (1) 10.4 6.0 6.8 1.8 0.5 1.3 0.7 0.4 1.5 4.9 8.3 10.9 3.9
 Wave.height _> 10 feet (1)            32.6 29.0 30.0 16.8 6.7 8.9 5.0 8.0 8.5 28.6 26.4 33.8 19.0
 Visibility < 2 naut. mi. (1) 7.3 8.9 5.9 3.0 3.3 6.7 9.2    6.3 6.9 5.7 3.3 5.5 6.0
 Precipitation (1) 26.0 27.7 22.5 19.7 13.2 15.0 12.7 13.7 17.7 26.1 25.7 30.4 20.0
 Temperature > 85"F (1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0                                                                      0 0 0
 Mean Temperature (*F) 43.3 44.3 43.5 45.8 49.2 52.9 56.7 58.9 57.1 52.8 48.7 45.4 50.8
 Temperature <_ 32ï¿½F (1)                1.4 0 .3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0                                                             0.9
 Mean relative humidity (%) 84 85 81 82 82 84 86                                           86 86 83 83 85 84
 Sky overcast or obscured [1) 45.6 50.2 39.0   36.1 38.3 50.7 47.3   45.8 38.7 39.5 46.8 48.4 43.7
 Mean cloud cover (eighths) 6.1    6.3 5.9 5.4 5.7 6.5 6.1 6.2 5.6 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.0
 Mean sea-level pressure (2) 1,011 1,013 1,013 1,015 1,018  1,017 1,019 1,018 1,017 1,012 1,011 1.010 1,015
 Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2) 1,041 1,042 1,039 1,036 1,034 1,032 1,032 1,033 1,035 1,033 1,037 1,038 1,041
 Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2) 979 979 984 992 996 995 995    997 986 981 983 981 979

 Prevailing wind direction SE S S NW NW NW NW NW NW S S SE NW
 Thunder and lightning (1) 0 0 0 0 0.1 0.1 0 0.1 0.1 0 0.1 0


                         METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF QUEEN CHARLO'I-I'E
                               Boundaries: 53~N. to 56ï¿½N.. between 135~V. and the coast


        Weather Elements Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug,  Sept. Oct,  Nov. Bec. Annual

 Wind > 34 knots (1) 8.2    4.4 5.8 3.6 1.8    1.2 0.4    0.6 2.0 4.2 7.9 1.1.0 3.5
 Wave height > 10 feet(1)              11.2 14.5 16.0 13.2 4.2 7.2 1.0 1.7 9.3 18.5 15.9 19.4 10.7
 Visibility < 2 haut. mi. (1) 9.4 6,2 3.6    2.7 2.7 7.2 7.3 15.8 3.6 4.5 3.5 5.3 8,1
 Precipitation (1) 21.6 18.1 20.4 19.4 16.8 17.3 17.8 27.8 22.9 35.7 30.5 28.1 22.8
 Temperature _> 85ï¿½F (1)                  0 0 0 0 0 0                                0      0      0 0 0 0 0
 ;,/lean Temperature (ï¿½F)              38.5 41.6 39.9 43.9 49.3 53.2 56.4 56.9 54.7 50.0 44.4 41.3 49.3
 Temperature _< 32ï¿½F(1) 18.9 0.6 4.7 0 0                                      0      0      0 0 0 1.2 6.7 1.6
 Mean relative humidity (%) 85 85 84 80 83 85 88 88 87 85 85 85 85
 Sky overcast or obscured (1) 51.0 51.8 39.2   36.0 42.3 49.9 55.8 49.0 44.9 51.6 54.2 52.8 48.2
 Mean cloud cover (eighths) 6.0 6.4 5.7 5.0 5.7 6.1 6.3 6.1    6.0 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.0
 Mean sea-level ~ressure (2) 1,012 1,011 1,011 1,014 1,017 1,017 1,018 1,018 1,013 1,008 1,007 1,008 1,013
 Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2) 1,038 1,036 1,036 1,034 1,033 1,031 1,029 1,032 1,031 1,028 1,032 1,036 1,038
 Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2) 983 987 980 987 995 998 1005 999 990 984 975 976 975
 Prevailing wind direction SE SE SE SE NW SE NW SE SE SE SE SE SE
 Thunder and lightning (1)                0      0 0 0 0                      0 0 0 0.2    0.1 0.5 0                           0.1



                              METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF SITKA
                                 Boundaries: 56~N. and 60ï¿½N., from 140~N. to the coast


        Weather Elementa             Jan, Feb. Mar.  Apr.   May  June July Aug. Sept.   Oct. Nov. Dec. Annual

 Wind >__ 34 knots (1) 11.7 10.7 5.3    4.3 1.3 0.6                                       0.7 3.7 12.4 10.1 11.3 5.4
 Wave height _> 10 feet(1)             22.2 31.0 13.3 15.9 8.9 4.2 1.2 4.4 7.6 26.8 14.2 18.0 13.1
 Visibility < 2 haut. mi. (11 6.9 7.6 8.5 1.8 4.1 12.3 10.6   11.6 3.9 3.5 4.5 8.2 7.4
 Precipitation (1)                     23.6 19.9 21.5 19.4 18.8 24.9 26.6 23.4 18.2 19.0 25.8 24.1 22.3
 Temperature _> 85ï¿½F (i)                  0 0 0 0 0                           0      0      0      0      0 0 0 0
 Mean Temperature [~F) 35.7 39.2 38.5 41.4 46.1 51.8 55.2 56.5 54.0 47.3 41.2   39.1 46.6
 Temperature <_ 32ï¿½F (1) 20.3 7.1 8.6                          0 0 0                 0      0      0 0 6.6 10.2 4.0
 Mean relative humidity (%) 87 87 85 81 84 84 85 87 87 84 85 86 85
 Sky overcast or obscured (1) 48.3 50.4 47.7 39.0 48.1 55.7 80.4   57.2 45.1 43.7 49.9 55.2 50.7
 Mean cloud cover [eighths) 5.6 6.1 5.7 5.2 6.0 6.5 6.8 6.6 6.0 8.0 6.2 6.3 6.1
 Mean sea-level pressure (2) 1,009 1,010 1,011 1,011 1,016 1,015 1,017 1,015 1,012 1,004 1.005 1,007 1,012
 Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2) 1,037 1,035 1,034 1,032 1,034 1,034 1,032 1,030 1,031 1,031 1,031 1,036 1,037
 Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2) 982 980    980 985 998 995 1,000 992 987 974 974 978 974
 Prevailing wind direction E E SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE E SE
 Thunder and lightning (1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
 (1) Percentage hequency
 [2) Mill~3a~s
 ï¿½ 0.0-05%
These data are based upon obaervatk3ns me. de by ships in passage. Such sJfipo tend to e. veid bad weather when possible, thus biasing the data toward gooa weaner samples.









                                                                      MEAN SURFACE WATER TEMPERATURES (T) AND DENSITIES (D)


                                        Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sept got Nov Des Mean
           Stations
                               J ~ (D) (T) (D) ~ (D) (1') (D) (T) (D) (1') (D)
                                                                                                                 (T) (D) ~ (D) (1') (D) (1') (D)
                                           ~1S                                                                                                                                                     ~       (D)    o(~C.    (D)    ~(~)C     (D)
                                                 ï¿½C ï¿½I$                  ï¿½t5     ï¿½C ï¿½t5          ï¿½C ï¿½1s    ï¿½C            ale     ï¿½C ï¿½sG                  ï¿½15    ;C       ~1s      ï¿½C       lS              16             ï¿½15             ï¿½15

Ketchikan 44 5.2 21.0 5.1 21.6 5.4 21.8 6.4 21.7 8.9 20,6 12,2 19.1 13,6 18.5 14.0 18.3 12.0 18.7 9.5 18.5 7.2 18.5 5.8 19.6                                                                                                                     8.8 19.6
 56ï¿½20'N., 131ï¿½38'W,
Sitka 24                                        4.5 22.1 4.2 22.4               4.4 22.2 5.9 21.8 8.8   20.0    11,3 18.8 13.4 18.5 13.9    19.0 12,1 19.1 9.3 19.9 7.1 21.0 5.6 21.8 8.4 20.5
 67003'N., 135ï¿½20'W.
Juneau 20                                       2.2 21.2        2.1 21.8 2.8 21,9 4.5   20.9 7.6 15.2 10,3 10.7 1t.0 9.3 10.6    10.0 9.1 11.7 6.6 14.4 4.6 18.0 3.2 20.4                                                                        6.2 16.3
 58o18,N., 134.25'W.
Skagway 22 2.5 23.2 2.2 23.3 2.3 23.2 3.4   23,0 6.7 17.9 9.9 8.0 10.6 3.5 10.2 3.4 8.8 9.1 6.5 16.2 4.4 20.3 3.3 22.4                                                                                                                           5.9 16.1
 59o27'N., 135o19'W.
Yakutat 26 3.8 22.3 3.5 22.4 3.8 22.4                                                           5.3 22,0 7.7 21.2 10.8 19.7 12.8 17.6 12.9 17.7 11.4 19.1 9.0 20.6 6.7 21.5 4.9 22.1 7.7 20.7
 5go33,N., 139o44'W.
Cordova 14 2.9 23.3 2.7 23.3 2.6   23,4 4,0 23,3 6.0 22.8 8.3 21.7 10.2 20.5 11.2 19.4 10.0 19.8 7.8 21.0 6.2 22.5 4.7 22.8 6.4 22.0
 60o33,N., 145o46'W.
Seward 35 3.4 22.2 3.1 22.1 3.2   22.1 4,5 21,3                                                                 7.3 16.5 10.5 9.8 12.2 6.5 12.2 9.2 10.7 13.3 8.1 17.5 5.9 19.9 4.5 21.5 7.1 16.8
 60oO6'N., 149o27'W.
Womens Bay 17                                   0.7 21.1 0.9 21.6 1.5   22,5 3.6 22.4 6.4 19.0 8.7 16.1 11.3 17.0 11.7 20.2 10.0 19.8 6.9 20.9 4.0 20.7 1.8 21.6 5.6 20.2
 57'43'N., 152031'W.
Anchorage 9 -0.9 14.3 -0.9 16,2 -0.4 16.6 0.9 16.3                                                              6.1 15.4 11.4 11.4 14.2 6.2 13.6 4.9 11.2 5.9 5.9 7.6 0.8 9.9 -0.6 12.3 5,1 11,4
 61o15,N., 149o53'W.
Massacre Bay 15 2.3 24.3 2,1 24,4 2,2   24,6 3.2 24.3                                                           4.6 23.5 6.5 23.0 8.3 22.3 9.5 23.2 8.8 23.8 6.8 23.9 4.4 23.8 2,7 24.3 5.1 23,9
 52ï¿½48'N., 173~10'W.
Unalaska 12                                     2,5 21.5        2,0 2t.7 2.4   22,2 3.6 21.5 5.2 20.0 7.3 19.9 8.9 21.1 9.5 22.0 8.3 21.1 6.1 20.8 4.5 21.5 3.1 21.6                                                                             5.3   21.2
 53o53'N., 166ï¿½32'W.
Sweeper Cove 23                                 2.8 23,2        2.6 22,9 3.12 2.5               3.5 22.1 4.6 22.4 6.2 23.2 7.2 23.5 7.6 23.7 7.4 23.4 5.9 23.4 4.6 23.4 3.4 23.4 4.9 23,1
  51ï¿½51'N., 176ï¿½39'W.

                                                                                                     F (Fahrenheit) - 1.8C (Celsius) + 32
                                  Density as used In this table Is the specific gravity of the sea water or the ratio between the weight of a sea-water sample and the weight of an equal volume of distilled water
                               at 15ï¿½C (59ï¿½F). These figures representing density at 15ï¿½C ( P~s ) are expressed In terms of slgma-t ( ï¿½t ) where t = 15ï¿½C and ï¿½~s = ( Pu - 1) 1000. Thus, for P~s = 1.023g,
                               o is = 23.8.









                                                                                                                                                T-7

                                     DETERMINATION OF WIND SPEED BY SEA CONDITION



per        Knobt          Dsec"dv                                           See  cdormad                                            m       
hmr                                                                                                                                 fort)-        Gail)


 0.1          0-1      cohn                Sea smooth sand nhwrore.                                                                  0               -

 1-3         1-3       ugm SW             ScslomUe dppt~p   withou toan crss                                                         1             114


      4-7 ~ ~ ~ be                        Smell S"tool mweveet  ns   have a g~ase  appearance and do not break.                     2              1/2

      8-12 ~ ~ ~~i                 7      10g  Gaelessn"eV a M   reats baim to bro'a0 foam of glss  appeerarice. Oooeaionsl         32
      6-12   7-10~~ran white foam ornate


13-18        11-16     MmiatS              Smai  waves  become ige W      l frequentm Sits foawn reets                               4               4
                      bream


19-24        17-21     Fresh               Modiste wavse taldng a more pron-owicd WVlongton. MAN~  white loam Crmeet
                      breeze             ther  may be sawm  spray.


25431        22-27     5t011               larg  waves bagl  to fows; wtet foam ciant  me'ore #seAiwve evomttr#W   thee    a                         10
                           brome         romay be ansomesry


32-3        28-33      NWs  gale           Sa hmap. up and wWt  fent from  brea~n  wave  begins to be blwn in steaksm                7              14
                                         alon  the doecilon c the wmt spitct begins

          30-0  34-40   Gwe             ~~~Moderatlmy high waves of greater legth edge  of wsebreak kilo qkfllft foam i
          39-46  34-40  Gales               bft  In md-seake  sfteata alon  the dreton of die win.                                                  1


4744         41-47   Wmon                 Nfgh waves; doensetrasks of Wom al"i the dfrectlo  of the wkidi  eafts of waves                           23
                       gele               begin to topple  uautie  and roll over, gmra  nmy reduce viftty

                                         Viny hgh wae  with l  oncveulingt   oasis  The reANg fo-am gr eat peche
      ion4-5           Sa         e          Nowi  i dns  eit shteaks aong* fthe w Setof     tem "A  On the wtole. di                10             29
                                             sttaeof th Wse  is white in appearanc. The tUntmg of the se eon', heavy
                                         -r gmftolfc. Vbiatty is reduced.

                                         Exoepdona~y high waves #the may obscure ernst aW iodumsw-alzd sisp The -e
64-72   Mm4            violets             i* ocqetYf  covered wit long whit  patche  of foam l)l Alon  the  sectio  of          I    137
                       storm              the whit everywfare the edges of the wave wSae blow  kil froth. Vmalty Is
                                         reducet

73 or        64 ator        cl Thee   Is laMed wit Wom aid spray- Sea conipteWhfy ae Wmt dirin VWay                                  12             45
          a  maw                         ~~~~vmftt  mey much retice







                                          ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE CONVERSION TABLE





                    2944                  m6                  29.3       g     m      8                 30.21    l    o w 8
                    ass                  w                    29A41         g    m                      30oa0                102
                         2&62   g m us                       29.50                 m8                  30.3                 1029
                    2&70                 972                  29.6                 1002                 30A46                1002
                    2979                 975                  29.86                1006                 90.6       M     S     3
                    286                  978                  29.77                1008                 3066     l    o w 8
                    2897                 981       N     M      .8                 1011                 3074                 1041
                    mm0                  m6      M     L " 9                       1014      m     m      .6                 1044
                    3.16                 967                  30.0                 1017      m     m      .0                 1047
                    29.24                9030.12                                   1020                 31.01                1060







T-8



                                    COASTAL WARNING DISPLAYS
                                                      DAYTIME SIGNALS

          SMALL CRAFT                             GALE                              STORM                           HURRICANE
            ADVISORY                           WARNING                            WARNING                            WARNING











                                                  NIGHT (LIGHT ) SIGNALS

           SMALL CRAFT                            GALE                             STORM                            HURRICANE
             ADVISORY                          WARNING                            WARNING                            WARNING











                                                   EXPLANATION OF DISPLAYS


      Small Craft Advisory: One RED pennant displayed by day and a RED light ABOVE a WHITE light at night, to alert mariners to
    sustained (more than two hours) weather or sea conditions, either present or forecast, that might be hazardous to small boats.
    Mariners learning of a Small Craft Advisory are urged to determine immediately the reason by tuning their radios to the latest marine
    broadcasts. Decision as to the degree of hazard will be left up to the boatman, based on his experience and size and type of boat.
    The threshold conditions for the Small Craft Advisory are usually 18 knots of wind (less than 18 knots in some dangerous waters) or
    hazardous wave conditions.

      Gale Warning: Two RED pennants displayed by day and a WHITE light ABOVE a RED light at night to indicate that winds within
    the range 34 to 47 knots are forecast for the area.

      Storm Waming: A single square RED flag with a BLACK center displayed during daytime and two RED lights at night to indicate
    that winds 48 knots and above, no matter how high the speed, are forecast for the area. However, if the winds are associated with a
    tropical cyclone (hurricane) the STORM WARNING display indicates that winds within the range 48 to 63 knots are forecast.

      Hurricane Warning: Displayed only in connection with a tropical cyclone (hurricane). Two square RED flags with BLACK centers
    displayed by day and a WHITE light between two RED lights at night to indicate that winds 64 knots and above are forecast for the
    area.

      Note: A "HURRICANE WATCH" is an announcement issued by the National Weather Service via press and radio and television
    broadcasts whenever a tropical storm or hurricane becomes a threat to a coastal area. The "Hurricane Watch" announcement is not
    a warning, rather it indicates that the hurricane is near enough that everyone in the area covered by the "Watch" should listen to their
    radios for subsequent advisories and be ready to take precautionary action in case hurricane warnings are issued.

      Note: As of 1 February 1989 the National Weather Service discontinued its operation of the above visual system. Some local
    organizations, however, continued this program using information from a NOAA Weather Radio or some similar source for activating
    or ending their display, A SPECIAL MARINE WARNING BULLETIN is issued whenever asevere local storm or strong wind of brief
    duration is imminent and is not covered by existing warnings or advisories. Boaters will be able to receive these special warnings by
    keeping tuned to a NOAA VHF-FM radio station or to Coast Guard and commercial radio stations that transmit marine weather
    information.

















                                                                                                                  PACIFIC OCEAN DISTANCES
                                                                                                                              (Nautical Miles)

                                                                                                            Figure at intersection of columns opposite ports in
                                                                                                            question is the nautical mileage between the two.
                                                                                                            Example:  San  Francisco, Calif., is 2,091  nautical
                                                                                                            miles from Honolulu, Hawaii.







       ~b 0                , _ .

              2/ /
2939  95    I           C










46921         13  2170  20620    22245 -                    269 31265  23826    374  27923204 09 11j85'
      ..... 1074929962a









4604228   2212238  29 251  23    20                         214238  2390 41   2473  2378  2482 125224  207 21I1345I9                                   9               "








4767  2330  2284  2281  2128  2262  2347 0289   -    2413  2368  2361  2388  2429  2332  2440  2184  1963  1989   287   23018I                        961   92               4'0'.
4777  2347  230294 224                   366  2308   -    2432  2387  2380  2407 2445  2351  2459  2203  1972  1990   297   240J  193   106J 102J  214
5707  3097  3034  3031  2792 272    4  2809  2694   -    2818  2570  2481  2472  2386  2250  2305  2088  1680  1460  1338 12781232 1150 91164631069J1042 t
                                                             ï¿½~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~




                             Via inside passage
                                                 4527  2175 2143 2140 2019 2214 2299   2260  -  2384 2398   2410  2447 2524 2439  2542 229 6   2 1  2       6                2      1       9      8     ~      7
                                                 4594 2219 2183  2180  2051  2235 2320 2276    -    2400    2405   2412  2445 2513 2432 2535 2289 2116  21640















                                                                                                           GULF OF ALASKA DISTANCES
                                                                                                                         (Nautical Miles)


                                                                                          Figure at intersection of columns  opposite ports in question is the nautical
                                                                                          mileage between the two. Example: Anchorage is 385 nautical miles from Port
                                                                                          Valdez.



        1ga7/I'.t   k/ k,   //
                  -k~~~~~~~~.1






              500~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~i

681   192    95                                       0 X 
739      259       162        85                    OD~                                                          ~     
809      402       295       231      141
1093      627       522      472       393       278                                     ;
1100      634       529      479       400       285       78             Jo
1113      647       542       492      413       298       98        96            /ï¿½ï¿½
1076      617       527       467      395       286       85        83       64             /
1100      642       553       494      422       312      146       144      125        61
1167      718       636       580      514       411      260       257      239       172      147             /          /       I /
1178      729       647       591      525       422      270       267      249       183      158        16      C ID
1294      845       763       708      641       538      387       385      367       300      274       139      143
1124      687       613       564      505       414      282       280      261       201      175       115      126       242
1200      762       689       628      571       480      339       337      317       254      228       138      149       264  I    80             /
1301      874       811       772      717       636      503       501      481       418      392       302      313       428      245       180
1394      953       892       865      811       730      597       595      574       511      485       395      406  j   521       338  j   273        122
1473     1084      1016       980      926       844      711       709      689       626      600       510      521       636      453       388       236       135
1510     1120      1064      1027      987       897      763       761      742       678      652       562      573        688     505       440  j   289  j   187         0 86          /






















                                                                                   INSIDE - PASSAGE DISTANCES


                                                                       SEATTLE, WASH. TO CAPE SPENCER, ALASKA
                                                                                                  (Nautical Miles)



                                                                 Figure at intersection of columns opposite ports in question is the nautical
                                                                 mileage between the two. Example: Ketchikan. Alaska, is 220 nautical miles from
















                  ~~~~~~~~~~ 0N



   664      612
   690      636       169                                       1QD
   640      566        34       136            ID                        
   660      606        66       146        32                                                  -0
   659      606        79       144       45  le16c


   749      697       157      234       123       104    8 9  il111                                                                      6~  
   768      737       126      273       125       143       129        49        75                                          ,,~~
   612      761       ISO       297       149      167       153        73        99       24                      ~          ~
   771      719       160      256        146      126       112   1 13           40       76       100
   sea 632            221       366      220       236       224       144       170       95    8 2          159
   969      937       332      464       331       334       320       255      248       206       166       207    7    9I                                            
   679   827          266       364      254       235       220       206       148      157       140       106       162      123
   950      696       359      435       325       305       291       253      219       204       166       179   j176   I136   j   6
   962      910       371       447      337       317       303       264      231       215       198       191      187       148      100         14
   936      666       29       423       269       293       276       213      208       164       147       166      136        45        82        96       106
   976      924       319      451       318       32`1      307       242      235       193       173       195       65   I 16          110       124      136   I 32
Distances to Sitka are partly outside.








T-12

                                       Radio Bearing Conversion Table
                                               Table of correction~ in minutes
                                   [DIFFERENCE OF LONGITUDE IN DEGREES]



       Mid. L         h'    ~'   l'h'   2'   21'~' 3' S~'   4'   4h'   S' Sh'
                                                                                    iS' 6~'   ?'   ?l~.'   8' S~'   9'   9~' 10'

15'. .............................. 4 Es  12   16 19    23    27    Sl   35   40    43    47   50    54 S8
                                                                                                            e2   86 70    74 78
16'. .............................. 4  B    12 17   21 25    29   33   37   41 45    SO
                                                                                           54   58,  82    m       70    74 79    83
17. ............................... 4    11   13   18   22    28   31   35   3e   44   48    53   57
                                                                                                61   66   70   76   79   93    ee
18'. .............................. 5    9 '  13   19   23   28   32    31   42   46    Sl   56    ~    e5   70   74   79   83   ~
                                                                                                                                   93
10' ............................... 5 10    15   20    24    211 ~4   30    44   49    54   50   453   (m    73   76
                                                                                                                  83   88   93 28
20' ............................... 5 10    16    21 26    31   30   41   48   S1 SS   62   e7
                                                                                                 72 7'/   82 s? 92   08 103
21-. .............................. 5 1t 16   21   27   32   s8 43   48    54 59   64 70    75    81
                                                                                                            86    el   97  102   I1~
   ............................... S    11 17   22   2B   34    U  48    51   56   (12   67 73    79    84 90    96 101
                                                                                                                             107 112
22' ............................... 6 12 18   23 29 36 41 47   53    SO   04   70   76   ll2   88    94 100
                                                                                                                       105   151 117
24'. .............................. gt   12 18 24    31   37  48    42   55 st   61 73
                                                                                           70   e5   02   2a   104   110   116 122
25' ............................... 6    12   10   25   32   31   44 51    57   I~l   70   70   82    80    ~15   101
                                                                                                                 108   114  120 127
26'. .............................. 7    lS   20    ~  3i~    39   48   53   50    66    72   79   DS    92
                                                                                                      02   105   112 118 125 131
27' ............................... 7    14   20   27    34 41 48 54    61 II 75   02   02    gS   IQ2   1SO 116
                                                                                                                       123 129   136
2r ............................... 7 14 21 DS    35 42 40    56   e3    70    77   84 02 02 106 113 120 127
                                                                                                                             134 141
29' ............................... 7    15   21 20   38   44    51   58   85   7.J   35   67   95  10~   102'  116 124   131
                                                                                                                             138   145
30' ............................... 7    lS 22    30   38    45   53   60    Wl   75   83
                                                                                      gO   94   105   113 120 127 135   143   150
31'. .............................. S    15   23    31 ~11  48  54 62   70   77   93   53 100   108 11(S  124 131 1311
                                                                                                                             146 155
32' ............................... 8    16 24    3~   40   48    S6    64   12 70   117   BS 10G 1tl 11S  127 135
                                                                                                                       143   151 1SO
33' ............................... 8    16   2'3  53 41 49    57   (15   74   82    ~) 09  104 114 12'3  131 1311
                                                                                                                       147 155  163
34'. .............................. 8    17  2'3    34   42   50   53    67 ?&    84 02 101 102
                                                                                                 177 1211.  134  143   lsl 159 168
35'. .............................. 9    17   2(I   34   43    S2   ~SO   89   77   88   35 10S' 112 120
                                                                                                      128'  138  148 153 163 17'2
DS'. .............................. il  18.   29   2'3   44    S3   (12    71 79    BS    B7 108 115   120 132   141 150  1SO   168
                                                                                                                                   I76
37' ............................... B 18    27 30 45    5a, (~3   ?2    81   O0    B9 108   117 126 135
                                                                                                            144   153  163   172   181
38' ............................... 2 18    211   37 48    55   65    74   I~    92   102 111 120 12G   13B
                                                                                                            148   157 153   17S 185
3~ ............................... 8'  19  2'3   53   47    5?   eB    75   85    94 104 113 12'3 132 142 1~l   leQ 12~0 179
                                                                                                                                   189
   ............................... 10 19   29   39  48    58    68    77   B?   9e   IQe   116  125   135 145 154 164 174 183   193
,;,1'. .............................. 10   20 S0    39 49    511  (m   79   I~B   SIE 106 1111  128   138 148 157 167 177  187
                                                                                                                                   197
~_' ............................... 10    20   30   40   50   4)0   70   60   gO 100 110 120 130   140 151 181  171  181 191 201
43'. .............................. 10    20    31 41 51   61 7'2   82   112  102 113 123 133 143 153 184   174
                                                                                                                       194 194   205
ï¿½ ;4'. .............................. 10   21 31 42   52   63 73    63   94 104 115 12'3   135   148  156 167 177  168 102  208
4.5'. .............................. 11   21   ~12   42   S3    64    74    6S    95   106   117 127   138 148   159  170 180 191 351 212
~45'. .............................. 11 22    32 43    54   85 76    6([   9? 109   119 129   140 151   1112  173 1(13 194  205   216
47' ............................... 11 22    33 44 ~6   118   77   88    913  110 121 1~i2   ~143 154 135  1715 135 197'  208   219
46'. .............................. 11   22   35 45   56    67   79   SO 100 111  123 134   145 ISO 187 178 190  201  212   223
40-. .............................. 11 23   35 45    57   118  70  21 10:) 113 12'3 136   147 158 170  181 102  204   215  22(I
 ~'~'J~ ............................... !1 23    34    46   57   SO    80   02 103   115 1211  138   1411 lsl 172   184 12S   207   216   23G
 ~1'. .............................. 12    23   36 47   58    70    82    ~1  105   117   12111 140   152  le3   175   186 128   210 221
                                                                                                                                   233
 ~'. .............................. 12    24 3S   47   SO 71   83   86   106   11,8  Iqn   142   1S4  1tl5 177 188  201  213 225   238
~'. .............................. 12    24   3~    48   80    72    84   26 100   120   13~ 144 1SO   ISO 100   102  204 216  22S   240
~'. .............................. 12    24 316   49    61   73 85    97 100   121   I~IQ 148 1SO 1710 182   104  2(~   218  231 243
~--~L' ï¿½ .............................. 12    ;~5   317  48    61   74 06   9e 111 123 135 147 100   172  184 1S? 20~   221  233   248
=~'. .............................. 12  2'3    37 50    82   75    67  100   112  124 137 148  1~12 174 1117  1lie 211 224  238 242
~i'. .............................. lS   25   ,15   50   83   75   tl~  101 113 126   1SO 151 164 178 lira 201  214   220  239   252
-'~-~J~ '. .............................. 13   25 38    51 84   76   90  102   115 127 1dig  153 186 116 191 204  216   229   ~           254
    ............................... 13    26    38    51   84    77 ilO  I1~1  116 129 141 154 : 187  180   1~i~  ~Q~ 2111  2'31 244  2'37
~3' ............................... lS   De  SO    52   (16   7e 21   104 117   130  143   15e   1so    le2   19s   206 221  234  24?; 2es


      Example. A ship in latitude 39'51 'N., longitude 67o35' W., by dead reckoning, obtains a radio bearing of 299' true on the
 radiobeacon located in latilude 40o37'N., longitude 69ï¿½37' W.
      Radiobeacon station ...........~ ........................................................................................................................ Labrude 40'37' N.
      Dead-reckoning positiofi ot ahip Latitude 39'51'

                 Middle lalitucie .......................... ...............................................................................i .................
                                                                                                                       40'14'

      Radiobeacon stalJon .................................................................................................................................... Longitude 69'37' W.
      Dead-reckofdng position of ship ........................................, ..................................................................... longitude 67'35'

                 Longitude difference ................................................................................................................ 2'02'

      Entering the 1able wfih cliffmerles of longitude equal 2', which is 1he nearest tabuisted vaiue and opposite 40' middle latitude,
 the coneclion of 39' Is read.

      As 1he ~ is east of the radiobeacon, a minus correction is apptled. The Mercator be~ then will be 299' - 000'39' =
 298'21'. To facilitate plotting, sublm~ 180' and plot from Me po 'sdion of the radiobeacon the bearing 298'21' - 180', or 118'21'
 (MercetM bee'ins reckoned clockwise from true n(xth).







                                                                                                                     T-13



                                     Distance of Visibility of Objects at Sea

  This table gives the approximate geographic range of visibility for an object which may be seen by an observer at sea level. It is
necessary to add to the distance for the height of any object the distance corresponding to the height of the observer's eye above
sea level.
  Distances of visibility for objects of various elevations above sea level.

             Height      Nautical     Statute       Height       Height      Nautical      Statute      Height
              Feet        miles        miles        meters        Feet         miles        miles       meters
                 1          1.2          1.3         0.30         120          12.8         14.7         36.58
                2          1.7          1.9          0.61         125         13.1          15.1         38.10
                3          2.0          2.3          0.91         130         13.3          15.4        39.62
                 4          2.3          2.7          1.22         135         13.6          15.6        41.15
                 5          2.6          3.0          1.52         140         13.8         15.9         42.67
                 6          2.9          3.3          1.83         145         14.1         16.2         44.20
                 7          3.1          3.6          2.13         150         14.3         16.5         45.72
                 8          3.3          3.8          2.44         160         14.8         17.0         48.77
                 9          3.5          4.0          2.74         170         15.3         17.6          51.82
               10          3.7          4.3          3.05         180         15.7          18.1         54.86
                11          3.9          4.5          3.35         190         16.1          18.6         57.91
                12          4.1          4.7          3.66         200         16.5          19.0        60.96
                13          4.2          4.9          3.96         210         17.0          19.5        64.01
                14          4.4          5.0          4.27         220         17.4         20.0         67.06
                15          4.5          5.2          4.57         230         17.7         20.4          70.10
                16          4.7          5.4          4.88         240         18.1          20.9         73.15
                17          4.8          5.6          5.18         250          18.5         21.3         76.20
                18          5.0          5.7          5.49         260          18.9         21.7         79.25
                19          5.1          5.9          5.79         270          19.2        22.1          82.30
                20          5.2           6.0         6.10         280          19.6         22.5         85.34
                21           5.4          6.2         6.40         290          19.9         22.9         88.39
                22          5.5          6.3          6.71         300         20.3          23.3         91.44
                23          5.6          6.56         7.01         310         20.6          23.7         94.49
                24          5.7          6.6          7.32         320         20.9         24.1          97.54
                25          5.9          6.7          7.62         330         21.3         24.5         100.58
                26          6.0          6.9          7.92         340         21.6         24.8         103.63
                27          6.1          7.0          8.23         350         21.9         25.2         106.68
                28          6.2          7.1          8.53         360          22.2         25.5        109.73
                29          6.3          7.3          8.84         370         22.5          25.9        112.78
                30          6.4          7.4          9.14         380         22.8          26.2        115.82
                31          6.5          7.5          9.45         390          23.1         26.6        118.87
                32          6.6          7.6          9.75         400         23.4          26.9        121.92
                33          6.7          7.7         10.06         410         23.7          27.3        124.97
                34          6.8          7.9         10.36         420         24.0         27.6         128.02
                35          6.9          8.0         10.67         430         24.3          27.9        131.06
                36          7.0          8.1         10.97         440          24.5         28.2        134.11
                37          7.1          8.2         11.28         450         24.8          28.6        137.16
                38          7.2          8.3         11.58         460         25.1         28.9        140.21
                39          7.3          8.4         11.89         470         25.4         29.2         143.26
                40          7.4          8.5         12.19         480          25.6         29.5        146.30
                41          7.5          8.6         12.50         490          25.9         29.8        149.35
                42          7.6          8.7         12.80         500          26.2         30.1        152.40
                43          7.7          8.8         13.11         510          26.4         30.4        155.45
                44          7.8          8.9         13.41         520          26.7         30.7        158.50
                45          7.8          9.0         13.72         530         26.9          31.0        161.54
                46          7.9          9.1         14.02         540         27.2          31.3        164.59
                47          8.0          9.2         14.33         550         27.4          31.6       167.64
                48          8.1          9.3         14.63         560         27.7          31.9        170.69
                49          8.2          9.4         14.94         570         27.9         32.1        173.74
                50          8.3          9.5         15.24         580         28.2         32.4        176.78
                55          8.7         10.0         16.76         590         28.4         32.7         179.83
                60          9.1          10.4        18.29         600         28.7          33.0        182.88
                65          9.4          10.9        19.81         620         29.1          33.5        188.98
                70          9.8         11.3         21.34         640         29.5         34.1        195.07
                75         10.1         11.7         22.86         660         30.1         34.6        201.17
                80         10.5         12.0         24.38         680         30.5          35.1       207.26
                85         10.8         12.4         25.91         700          31.0         35.6       213.36
                90         11.1         12.8         27.43         720          31.4         36.1       219.46
                95         11.4         13.1         28.96         740         31.8          36.6       225.55
               100         11.7         13.5         30.48         760         32.3          37.1       231.65
               105         12.0         13.8         32.00         780         32.7         37.6        237.74
               110         12.3         14.1         33.53         800         33.1          38.1       243.84
               115         12.5         14.4         35.05         820          33.5         38.6        249.94

 Example: Determine the geographic visibility of an object, with a height above water of 65 feet, for an observer with a height of eye
 of 35 feet. Enter above table;
 Height of object                                                    65 feet                       9.4 nautical miles
 Height of observer                                                  35 feet                       6.9 nautical miles
 Computed geographic visibility                                                                   16.3 nautical miles







T-14

              Conversion of Degrees to Points and Vice Versa


                       Points                              P       oints
 000    00      N                          180      00      S
 002    49                                 182   ' 49
 005    38      N Y E                      185      38      S 1/2 W
 008    26                                 188      26
 011    15      NxE                        191      15      SxW
 014    04                                 194      04
 016    53      NxE1/2 E                   196      53      SxW2 W
 019    41                                 199      41
 022    30      NNE                        202      30      SSW
 025    19                                 205      19
 028    08      NNE 1/2 E                  208      08      SSW 1/2 W
 030    56                                 210      56
 033    45      NE x N                     213      45      SW x S
 036    34                                 216      34
 039    23      NE 1/2N                    219      23      SW  2 S
 042    11                                 222      11
 045    00      NE                         225      00     SW
 047    49                                 227      49
 050    38      NE 1/2 E                   230      38     SW 1/2 W
 053    26                                 233      26
 056    15      NE x E                     236      15      SW xW
 059    04                                 239      04
 061    53      NE x E V2 E                241      53      SWxW Y W
 064    41                                 244      41
 067    30      ENE                        247      30     WSW
 070    19                                 250      19
 073    08      ENE Y2 E                   253      08     WSW Y2 W
 075    56                                 255      56
 078    45      E x N                      258      45     WxS
 081    34                                 261      34
 084    23      E 1/2 N                    264      23      W Y2 S
 087    11                                 267      11
 090    00      E                          270      00     W
 092    49                                 272      49
 095    38      E1/2S                      275      38     W 1/2 N
 098    26                                 278      26
 101    15     ExS                         281      15     WxN
 104    04                                 284      04
 106    53      ESE 1/2 E                  286      53     WNW 1/2 W
 109    41                                 289      41
 112    30      ESE                        292      30     WNW
 115    19                                 295      19
  118    08     SE x E 1/2 E                298      08      NW x W 1/2 W
  120    56                                 300      56
  123    45     SE x E                      303      45     NW x W
  126    34                                 306      34
  129    23     SE 1/2 E                    309      23      NW Y2 W
  132    11                                 312      11
  135    00     SE                          315      00      NW
  137    49                                 317      49
  140    38     SE 1/2 S                    320      38     NW 1/2 N
  143    26                                 323      26
  146    15     SExS                        326      15     NWxN
  149    04                                 329      04
  151    53     SSE 1/2 E                   331      53     NNW Y2 W
  154    41                                 334      41
  157    30     SSE                         337      30     NNW
  160    19                                 340      19
  163    08     S x E Y2 E                  343      08     N x W Y2 W
  165    56                                 345      56
  168    45     S x E                       348      45     NxW
  171    34                                 351      34
  174    23     S 1/2 E                     354      23     N Y2 W
  177    11                                 357      11













                                                               TABLE FOR ESTIMATING TIME OF TRANSIT



                                                                                                 Speed in knots
  Distance          8         9        10   I11           1 2      13        14       1 5       16       1 7    la          1 9      20        21        22       23        24       25    so
                   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days.   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days.   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days-   Days-
Nautical miles     hours   hours   hours   hours   hours    hours    hours   hours   hours    hours    hours    hours    hours   hours    hours    hours   hours   hours   hours
        10        0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1        -
       20        0-3       0-2      0-2      0-2       0-2       0-2      0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1
       30        0O4      0-3       0-3       0-3      0-3      0-2       0-2      0-2       0-2      0-2       0-2      0-2       0-2      0-1       0-1       0-1      0-1       0-1      0-1
       40        0-5       0-4      0-4       0-4      0-3       0-3      0-3      0-3       0-3      0-2       0-2      0-2       0-2      0-2       0-2       0-2      0-2       0-2      0-1
       50        0-6       0-6      0-5      0-5       0-4       0-4      0-4      0-3       0-3      0-3       0-3      0-3       0-3      0-2       0-2       0-2      0-2       0-2      0-2
       60        0-8       0-7      0-6       0-5      0-5       0-5      0-4      0-4       0-4      0-4       0-3      0-3       0-3      0-3       0-3       0-3      0-3       0-2      0-2
       70        0-9      0-8       0-7      0-6       0-6      0-5       0-5      0-5       0-4      0-4       0-4      0-4       0-4      0-3       0-3       0-3      0-3       0-3      0-2
       80        0-10    0-9        0-8       0-7      0-7       0-6      0-6      0-5       0-5      0-5       0-4      0-4       0-4      0-4       0-4       0-3      0-3       0-3      0-3
       90        0-11     0-10      0-9      0-8       0-8      0-7       0-6      0-6       0-6      0-5       0-5      0-5       0-5      0-4       0-4      0-4       0-4       0-4      0-3
      100        0-13    0-11       0-10      0-9      0-8       0-8      0-7       0-7      0-6      0-6       0-6       0-5      0-5       0-5      0-5       0-4      0-4       0-4      0-3
      200         1-1      0-22     0-20      0-18     0-17      0-1 5    0-14      0-13     0-13      0-12     0-11      0-11     0-10      0-10     0-9       0-9       0-8      0-8      0-7
      300         1-14     1-9       1-6      1-3      1-1       0-23     0-21      0-20     0-19      0-18     0-17      0-16     0-15      0-14     0-14      0-13      0-13     0-12     0-10
      400         2-2      1-20      1-16     1-12     1-9       1-7       1-5      1-3      1-1       1-0      0-22      0-21     0-20      0-19     0-18      0-17      0-17     0-16     0-13
      500         2-15     2-8      2-2       1-21     1-18      1-14     1-12      1-9      1-7       1-5      1-4       1-2      1-1       1-0      0-23      0-22     0-21      0-20     0-17
      600         3-3      2-19     2-12      2-7      2-2       1-22     1-19      1-16     1-14      1-11     1-9       1-8      1-6       1-5       1-3      1-2       1-1      1-0      0-20
      700         3-16     3-6      2-22      2-16     2-10      2-6      2-2       1-23     1-20      1-17     1-15      1-13     1-11      1-9       1-8      1-6       1-5      1-4      0-23
      800         4-4      3-17     3-8       3-1      2-19      2-14     2-9       2-5      2-2       1-23     1-20      1-18     1-16      1-14     1-12      1-11      1-9      1-8       1-3
      900         4-17    4-4       3-18      3-10     3-3       2-21     2-16      2-12     2-8       2-5      2-2       1-23     1-21      1-19      1-17     1-15      1-14     1-12      1-6
    1,000        5-5       4-15     4-4      3-19      3-11     3-5       2-23     2-19      2-15     2-11      2-8      2-5       2-2      2-0       1-21      1-19     1-18      1-16     1-9
    2,000         10-10   9-6       8-8       7-14     6-23      6-10     5-23      5-13     5-5      4-22      4-15      4-9      4-4       3-23     3-19      3-15     3-11I  3-8         2-19
    3,000         15-15   13-21    12-12    11-9       10-10   9-15       8-22      8-8      7-20      7-8      6-23      6-14     6-6       5-23     5-16      5-10     5-5       5-0      4-4
    4,000        20-20   18-12    16-16    15-4        13-21    12-20    11-22   11-8        10-10   9-19       9-6       8-19     8-8       7-22     7-14      7-6      6-23      6-16     5-13
    5,000         26-1     23-4     20-20    18-23    17-9       16-1     14-21    13-21    13-1       12-6     11-14    10-23    10-10   9-22        9-11      9-1      8-16      8-8      6-23
   6,000         31-6     27-19   25-0       22-17   20-20    19-6       17-21    16-16   15-15   14-1 7    13-21    13-4         12-12    11-22    11-9       10-21    10-10    10-0      8-8







 T-16


                 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS for BROADCASTS
C/aafercrinic                 Abhev                         Lighted Hom Buoy                         LHB
Fixed                         F                             Lighted Whistle Buoy                     LWB
Occulting                     OC                            Ocean Data
Group-Occulting               OC(2)                            Acquisition System                    ODAS
Composite                                                   Privately
  GroupOcuting                OC(2+1)                         Maintained                             PRIV MAINTD
lsophase   -                  ISO                           Radar responder
Single-Flashing               FL                              beacon                                 RACON
Group-Flashing                FL(3)                         Radar Reflector                          RA REF
Composite                                                   Radiobeacon                              RBN
  Group-Flashing              FL{2+1)                       Temporarily Replaced
Continuous                                                    by Unlighted Buoy                      TRUB
  Quick-Flahing               Q                             Temporarily Replaced
Intenrupted                                                   by Lighted Buoy                        TRLB
  Quick-ahing                aIQ                            Whistle                                  WHIS
Morse Code                    MO{A)
Fixed and Flashing            FFL                           Ogailzains
Alternating                   AL                            Coast Guard                              CG
Characteristic                CHAR                          Commander, Coast
                                                             Guard District (#)                    CCCo(#)
Coor'                                                       Corps of Engineers                       COE
Black                         B                             Defense Mapping Agency
Blue                          BU                              Hydrographic/
Green                         G                               Topographic Center                     DMAHTC
Orange                        OR                            National Ocean Service                   NOS
Red                           R                             National Weather
White                         W                                Service                               NWS
Yellow                        Y
                                                           VYsels
Aids to Navigation                                          Aircraft                                 A/C
Aeronautical                                                Fishing Vessel                           FIV
  radiobeacon                 AERO RBN                      Liquified Natural
Articulated Daybeson         ART DBN                          Gas Carrier                           LNG
Articulated Ligh              ART LT                         Motor Vessel                            M/V2
Destroyed                     DESTR                         Pleasure Craft                           P/C
Discontinued                  DISCONTD                      Research Vessel                          R/V
Established                   ESTAB                         Saling Vessel                            S/V
Exposed Locatlbn Buoy         ELB
Fog signal station            FOG SIG                       CompaS  Directions
Lage Navigation                                             East                                     E
  buoy                        LNB                           North                                    N
Light                         LT                            Northeast                                NE
Light List Number             LLNR                          Northwest                                NW
Lighted Bell Buoy             LBB                           South                                    S
Lighted Buoy                  LB                            Southeast                                SE
Lighted Gong Buoy             LGB                           Southwest                                SW
                                                           West                                    W

' Color refers to light characteristics of aids to navigation only.
2 M/ includes: Steam Ship, Container Vessel, Cargo Vessel, etc.







                                                                                               T-17

               STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS for BROADCASTS
M~onths                                                 Hour                                 HR
January                     JAN                         International
February                    FEB                          RegulaLions for
Msrdc                       MAR                           Proventng Collisions
Apri                        APR                           at See  1972                       COLREGS
May                        MAY                          Kilohert                             KIZ
June                        JUN                         Kllofster                            KM
July                        JUL                         Knot(s)                              KT(S)
August                      AUG                         Latudï¿½e                              LAT
Septmber                    SEP                         Loca Notice to
October                    OCT                            Mariners                           LNM
November                    NOV                         Longide                              LONG
December                    DEC                        MAntaind                              MAUTD
                                                       Mecimwn                              MAX
Dqu of ike Week                                         MegsheU                              MHz
Monday                     MON                         Mliber                                MB
Tuesday                    TUE                         Mflmets                               MM
Wednesday                  WED                          Minue (tWme; go pee)                 MIN
Thursday                   THU                          Moderate                             MOD
Friday                     FRI                         Mounlhln. Mount                       MT
Saturday                    SAT                         Nu Mcale0(s)                         NM
Sunday                      SUN                         Notice to Mariners                   NTM
                                                       Obstruction                          OBSTR
 Various                                                Occmlcn/Occsaionally                  OCCASION
Anchoreae                   ANCI                        Operating Area                       OPAREA
 Anchoage                                                PaEcii                               PAC
  proh~ibted                ANCH PROHIB                 Pokis4.)                             PT(S)
 Approximate                APPROX                       Position                             PSN
 Atantic                    ATLC                         Poeltion Approximate                 PA
 Aidhoftied                 AUTH                         Pressure                             PRES
 Average                     AVG                         Private  Privately                   PRIV
 Swing                       ORG                        Prohibited                            PROHIB
 Breakwater                  Bm                          Pubication                           PUB
 Broadcast Notice            BNM             Reage                                            RGE
  to Meriners                                           Reported                             REP
 Chnnel                      CHAN                        Resticted                            RESTR
 Cods of Federal                                         Rock                                 RK
   Regulations               CFR                         Saint                                ST
 Continue                    COml                        Second (lime; gso poM)               SEC
 Degrees (aw,; goo pos)     DEG                         Signal station                        SIG STA
 Disneter                    mA                          Station                              STA
 Edtion                      ED                          Stau  Mile(s)                        SM
 Effect/Effective            EFF                         Storn signal
 Entance                    ENTR                          station                             S BIG STA
 -Vrodws                         Temorary                                                     TEMP
   Anchorage                 EXPLOS ANCl                 Through                              ThRU
 Fathom(s)                   FM(S)                       Thuderorm                            TSTM
 Foot/Feet                  FT                          True                                  T
 Mardxr                      HBR                         Uncovers; Dries                      UNCOV
 Heignt                      NT                          Universal Coordinate
 Hert                        HZ                          Tfme                                 UTC
 Hflontal cearnce             OR CL                      Urgent Marine
                                                          Inlfrmation
                                                          Broadcast                          UMIB






T-18
                STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS for BROADCASTS
  Varnos (coal.)                                          Northern Marianas                      cm
velocity                     VEL                          Ohio                                   OH
Vertaia clearance            VERT CL                      OklahMoxaO
Visibility                   VSBY                         Oregon                                  OR
Weirning                     WARN                          Pennsylvania                           PA
Weather                      WX                           Puerto Rico                             PR
Wreck                        WK                           Rhode Island                           RI
Yard(s)                      YD                           South Carolina                          SC
                                                        South Dakota                           S
Couiirne and States                                       Tennessee                               TN
Alabana.                     AL                           Taeas                                   TX
Alaska                       AK                           United States                           us
American Samoa               AS                           Utaf,                                   UT
Arizona                      AZ                           Vermont                                 VT
Arkansas                     AD                             kgin Islands                         VI
California                   CA                           Virginia                                VA
Cenada                       CN                            Washington                             WA
Colorado                     co                            West Virginia                          WV
Connecticut                  CT                           Wisconsin                              WI
Delaware                     DE                           Wyoming                                WY
Distic of Columbia           DC
Federated States of
  Microniesia                FSM
Florda                       FL
Georgia                      GA
Gusam                        GU
Hawaii                       Hi
Idaho                        ID
Illinois                     IL
Indiarna                     IN
Iowa.                        IA
Kansas                       KS
Kentucky                     KY
Louisiana                    LA
Maine                        ME
Marylan                      MD
 Massachusetts                MA
Mmolcic 
 Michigan                     ml
 Minnasots.                   MN
 Mississippi                  Ms
 Missouri                     MO
Montana            UT
 Nebraska                     NE
Now Hampshire                NH
 Neadas                       NV
 Now Jersey                   NJ
 Now Mexico                   NM
 Now York                     NY
 North Carolina               NC
 North Dakota                 ND






                                                                                                T-19
                    MEASUREMENT AND CONVERSION FACTORS


                                         EQUIVALENCIES

nautical mile                             1 852.0 meters
                                        6 076.12 feet

statute mile                             5 280 feet
                                        1 609.3 meters
                                        1.6 093 kilometers

cable                                    0.1 nautical mile (Canada)
                                        720 feet (United States)

fathom                                   6 feet
                                        1.8 288 meters

foot                                     0.3 048 meter

inch                                     2.54 centimeters

meter                                    39.37 inches
                                        3.281 feet
                                        1.0 936 yards

kilometer                                 1 000 meters

knot                                      1.6 877 feet per second
                                        0.5 144 meters per second

miles (statute) per hour                  1.466 feet per second
                                        0.44 704 meters per second

acre                                     43 560 square feet
                                        4 046.82 square meters

pound (avoirdupois)                      453.59 gram

gram                                     0.0 022 046 pound (avoirdupois)

short ton                                2 000 pounds

long ton                                 2 240 pounds

metric ton                               2 204.6 pounds

gram                                     0.035 274 ounce

kilogram                                 2.2 pounds

liter                                     1.0 567 quarts

barrel (petroleum)                       42 gallons (U.S.)






T-20

                                                    CONVERSION FACTORS

                 Symbol    When you know                 Multiply by         To find                     Symbol

                 Linear

                 in         inches                       25.40               millimeters                 mm
                 in         inches                       2.540               centimeters                 cm
                 cm         centimeters                  0.032 808           feet                        ft
                 ft         feet                         30.48               centimeters                 cm
                 ft         feet                         0.3 048             meters                      m
                 ft         feet                         0.00 016 458        nautical miles              nm
                 yd         yards                        0.9 144             meters                      m
                 m          meters                       3.2 808             feet                        ft
                 m          meters                       1.094               yards                       yd
                 m          meters                       0.0 005 399         nautical miles              nm
                  sm         statute miles                0.86 897            nautical miles              nm
                  sm         statute miles                1.6 093             kilometers                  km
                  sm         statute miles                1 609.3             meters                      m
                  nm         nautical miles               1.151               statute miles               sm


                  Area

                  ft2        square feet                  0.0 929             square meters               m2
                  m2         square meters                10.764              square feet                 ft2
                             acres                       4 046.9             square meters                m
                             acres                       43 560              square feet                  ft2
                  m2         square meters                0.0 002 471         acres
                  ft2        square feet                  0.00 002 296        acres
                  ha         hectare                      2.471 054           acres
                  ha         hectare                      10 000              square meters               m2
                  ha         hectare                      1.07 639x105        square feet                 ft2
                             acre                        0.404 685           hectare                      ha

                  Depths

                             fathoms                     1.8 288             meters                       m
                  m          meters                       0.54 681            fathoms
                  m          meters                       3.2 808             feet                        ft
                  ft         feet                         0.3 048             meters                      m





                                                                                                        T-21
                                  CONVERSION FACTORS

Symbol    When you know                Multiply by         To find                     Symbol

Rates

ft/sec     feet per second             0.5 925             knots                       kt
ft/sec     feet per second             0.6 818             miles per hour              mph
ft/sec     feet per second             30.48               centimeters per second      cm/s
mph        statute miles per hour      0.8 689             knots                       kt
mph        statute miles per hour      1.467               feet per second             fps
mph        statute miles per hour      0.447               meters per second           mn/s
kt         knots                       1.151               miles per hour              mph
kt         knots                       0.5 144             meters per second           m/s
kt         knots                       1.6 878             feet per second             fps
cm/sec     centimeters per second      0.01 944            knots                       kt
cm/sec     centimeters per second      0.02 237            miles per hour              mph
cm/sec     centimeters per second      0.032 808           feet per second             fps

Mass

g          grams                       0.035 275           ounces (avoirdupois)        oz
g          grams                       0.002 205           pounds (avoirdupois)        lb
oz         ounces (avoirdupois)        28.349              grams                       g
lb         pounds                      0.45 359            kilograms                   kg
           short tons                  2 000              pounds                      lb
           short tons                 0.89 286            long tons
           short tons                 0.9 072             metric tons                 t
           long tons                   2 240              pounds                      lb
           long tons                   1.12               short tons
           long tons                   1.016              metric tons                 t
t          metric tons                 1 000               kilograms                   kg
t          metric tons                 0.9 842             long tons
t          metric tons                 1.1 023             short tons
t          metric tons                 2 204.6             pounds                      lb

Volume

           barrels (petroleum)         42                 gallons (U.S.)              gal
           barrels (petroleum)         158.99             liters                      L
           barrels (liquid, U.S.)      31.5               gallons (U.S.)              gal
           barrels (liquid, U.S.)      26.229             gallons (British)           gal
           barrels (liquid, U.S.)      119.24             liters                      L
gal        gallons (U.S.)              0.02 381            barrels (petroleum)
L          liters                      0.26 417            gallons (U.S.)              gal
gal        gallons (U.S.)              3.7 854             liters                      L

Temperature

           Degrees Fahrenheit          5/9 after    De grees Celsius
                                       subtracting 32)    Degrees   ei
           Degrees Celsius             9/5 (then add 32)   Degrees Fahrenheit




T-22

                                            METRIC STYLE GUIDE


               Prefixes: Some of the metric units listed include prefixes such as kilo, centi, and milli. Prefixes,
               added to a unit name, create larger or smaller units by factors that are powers of 10. For
               example, add the prefix kilo, which means a thousand, to the unit gram to indicate 1000 grams;
               thus 1000 grams become 1 kilogram. The more common prefixes follow.

                       Factor                                          Prefix             Symbol

                       1 000 000               106                    mega                  M
                       1 000                   103                    kilo                   k
                       1/100                   10-2                   centi                  c
                       1/1000                  10-3                   milli                  m
                       1/1 000 000        -  '10-6                     micro                 /t

               Spelling: All units and prefixes should be spelled as shown in this guide.

               Conversions: Conversions should follow a rule of reason; do not include figures that imply
               more accuracy than justified by the original data. For example, 36 inches should be converted to
               91 centimeters, not 91.44 centimeters (36 inches x 2.54 centimeters per inch = 91.44
               centimeters), and 40.1 inches converts to 101.9 centimeters, not 101.854.

               Capitalization of Units: The names of all units start with a lower case letter except, of course,
               at the beginning of the sentence. There is one exception: in "degree Celsius" (symbol ï¿½C) the
               unit "degree" is lower case but the modifier "Celsius" is capitalized. Thus body temperature is
               written as 37 degrees Celsius.

               Capitalization of Symbols: Unit symbols are written in lower case letters except for liter and
               those units derived from the name of a person (m for meter, but W for Watt, Pa for pascal, etc.).

               Capitalization of Prefixes: Symbols of prefixes that mean a million or more are capitalized and
               those less than a million are lower case (M for mega (millions), m for milli (thousandths)).

               Pluralization of Units: Names of units are made plural only when the numerical value that
               precedes them is more than 1. For example, 0.25 liter or 1/4 liter, but 250 milliliters. Zero
               degrees Celsius is an exception to this rule.

               Symbols: Symbols for units are never pluralized (250 mm = 250 millimeters).

               Incorrect Terms: The prefix "kilo" stands for one thousand of the named unit. It is not a stand-
               alone term in the metric system. The most common misuse of this is the use of "kilo" for a
               "kilogram" of something. The word "micron" is an obsolete term for the quantity "micrometer."
               Also "degree centigrade" is no longer the correct unit term for temperature in the metric system;
               it has been replaced by degree Celsius.






                                                                                                  T-23

                         METRIC STYLE GUIDE (cont.)


Spacing: A space is used between the number and the symbol to which it refers. For example:
7 m, 31.4 kg, 370 C.

When a metric value is used as a one-thought modifier before a noun, hyphenating the quantity
is not necessary. However, if a hyphen is used, write out the name of the metric quantity with
the hyphen between the numeral and the quantity. For example:

        a 2-liter bottle, NOT a 2-L bottle;
        a 100-meter relay, NOT a 100-m relay;
        35-milimeter film, NOT 35-mm film.

In names or symbols for units having prefixes, there is not space between letters making up the
symbol or name. Examples; milligram, mg; kilometer, km.

Spaces (not commas) are used in writing metric values containing five or more digits. Examples
1 234 567 kIn, 0.123.456 mm. For values with four digits, either a space or no space is
acceptable.

Period: DO NOT use a period with metric unit names and symbols except at the end of a
sentence.

Decimal Point: The dot or period is used as the decimal point within numbers. In numbers less
than one, zero should be written before the decimal point. Examples: 7.038 g; 0.038 g.







                                                                                                                            I-i

                                                           Index







The numbers of the largest scale charts on which the names appear follow the                                                             Page
indexed items. Some geographic names are indexed more than once when
more than one place has the same geographic name. Charts published by the    Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service (APHIS)........   260
Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Service are indicated by    Animal Import Centers .............................. 260
an asterisk.                                                             Animas Island 17406 .................................            142
                                                                  Anita Bay 17382 .....................................            122
                                                         Page  Anita Point 17382 ....................................              122
                                                                  Annette Bay 17428 ...................................            109
Aaron Creek 17385 ...................................            123  Annette Island 17434 ................................. 107
Aaron Island 17316 ...................................           193  Annette Point 17434 ................................. 106
Aats Bay 17402 ......................................            195  Annex Creek Power Station 17315 ....................... 180
Aats Point 17402 ....................................            195  Appleton Cove 17338 ................................. 233
Abbess Island 17405 ..................................           139  Approach Point 17426 ................................ 110
Abraham Islands 17382 ...............................            117  Aranzazu Point 17420 ................................. 82
Abrejo Rocks 17406 .................................             142  Arboles Islet 17406 .................................. 142
Acceptable Vessel Watering Points .......................          7   Arcada Rock 17406 ...................................               143
Adams Anchorage 17316 ..............................             191  Arch Rock 17406 .................................... 143
Adams Channel 17323 .................................            231  Arena Cove 17407 ................................... 129
Adams Inlet 17318 ...................................            250  Arguello Island 17326 ................................. 222
Adams Point 17432 ...................................            102  Arrecife Point 17406.....................141
Admiralty Cove 17315 ............................... 190  Arriaga Passage 17404 ................................ 144
Admiralty Creek 17315 .............................. 190  Arthur Island 17323 .................................. 231
Admiralty Island 17320 .............................. 201  Articulated daybeacons ................................ 19
Admiralty Lake 17315 ................................            190  Articulated lights ..................................... 19
Adrian Cove 17407 ...................................            137  Aspid Cape 17326 ................................. 219
Affleck Canal 17386 ..................................           154  Aston Island 17408 ................................... 134
Agriculture, Department of .............................    2, 260  Astronomical Almanac ................................ 257
Agueda Point 17405 ............. .................... 138  Astronomical Point 17427 ............................. 85
Aguirre Bay 17404 .................................. 145  Augustine Bay 17408 ................................. 128
Aids to navigation ....................................   19, 72  Auke Bay 17315 ................................... 191
Aiken Cove 17432 ....................................            103  Aurora Basin 17315 .................................. 189
Aikens Rock 17403  .................................             148    Automated Mutual-assistance Vessel Rescue System (AMVER)             4
Air Almanac ........................................    257  Avon Island 17360 ................................... 116
Aircraft procedures for directing surface craft to scene of distress incident 10
Ajax Reef 17435 .....................................            105  Babe Islands 17436 ................................. 104
Akusha Island 17360 ..................................           175  Baby Island 17382 ................................... 161
Alaska .............................................              72  Back Channel 17385 .................................. 122
Alava Bay 17434 .....................................             94  Back Island 17422 .................................... 98
Alberto Islands 17405 .................. ..............          139  Bactrian Point 17427 .................................. 88
Alberto Reef 17405 ...................................           139  Badger Bay 17434 .................................... 88
AlderCove 17431 ....................................             132  Baht Harbor 17382 ................................ 162
Aleutkldna Bay 17326 ..................................          222  Bailey Bay 17422 .................................... 96
Alice Island 17327 ....................................          223  Bailey Rock 17428 .................................. 109
Alice Rocks 17402 ....................................           153  Baird Glacier 17367 .............................. 168
Alikula Bay 17402 ....................................           195  Baker Cove 17321 ................................... 238
Allan Point 17324 ....................................           226  Baker Island 17406 ................................... 138
Althorp Rock 17302 ..................................            245  Bakewell Arm 17424 ................................. 94
Althouse Point 17426 ..................................          112  Balandra Island 17405 ................................ 139
Alvin Bay 17360 .....................................            156  Balandra Shoal 17405 ............................... 139
Amalga Harbor 17316 .................................            193  Bald Mountain 17404 ................................. 146
Amelius Island 17386 .................................           155  Baldy Bay 17408 ..................................... 135
Amelius Island Shoal 17386 ............................          155    Ballena Island Shoal 17405 ............................           139
American Bay 17409 ..................................            134  Ballena Islands 17405......................139
AMVER............................................                  5  Bamdoroshni Island 17327 ............................. 223
AMVER Reporting ................................... 5  Band Cove 17368 .................................... 171
AnanBay 17385 .....................................              121  Bar Harbor 17430 .................................... 91
Anan Creek 17385 ....................................            121  Bar Point Basin 17430 ................................ 91
Anchor Pass 17422 ...................................             96  Baranof 17337 ....................................... 200
Anchor Point 17375 ...................................           164  Baranof Island 17320 ................................. 217
Anchorage Regulations ................................            39  Barbara Rock 17431 .................................. 131
Anchorages.........................................               72  Bare Island 17316 .................................... 208
Ancon Rock 17318 ...................................             247  Barlow Cove 17316 .................................. 191
Anderson Point 17436 .................................           104  Barlow Islands 17316 ................................. 191
AneskettPoint 17387 .................................            151  Barlow Point 17316 .................................. 191
Angle Point Light 17428 ..............................            88  Barnacle Rock 17401 ................................. 118
Angoon 17339 ................................... 203  Barnes Lake 17382 ...................................                                118
Anguilla Bay 17404 ..................................            145  Baron Island 17420 .................................. 82
Anguilla Island 17404 .................................          145  Barren Island 17434 .................................. 82
Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service ................ 2            Barren Island Light 17434 .............................           82







1-2

                                       Page                                                                                 Page
Barrie Island 17360                  .................158 Big John Bay 17372 ..................159
Barrier Islands 17386, 17387 .              .               ..............157  Big Port Walter 17333 .................199
Barrier Islands 17433                  ...................130 Big Rose Island 17323 .................231
Bartlett Cove 173 1 8....................248 Big Salt Lake 17405 ..................141
Bartlett Point 17336                  ....................172  Big Saltery Island 17360 ................162
Bartlett Point 17437 ....................84 Bill Point 17365....................174
Basalt Knob 17303................... 243 Binghamn Cove 17303..................241
Basin, The 17337....................201 Biorka Channel 17326 .................220
Basket Bay 17338....................204 Biorka Island 17326 ..................220
Bat Cove 17428 ....................90 Biorka Reef 17326...................221
Bat Point 17428 ....................90 Bird Island 17316 ...................193
Battery Islets 17375...................164 Bird Island 17434 ...................87
Battery Point 17317 ...................211 Bird Rock 17365 ...................174
Battleship Island 17435 .................108 Bird Rocks 17431 ...................131
Bay Islands 17409...................134 Birdsnest Bay 17326..................222
Bay of Pillars 17370 ..................197 Biscuit Lagoon 17433 .................131
Bay Point 17367....................168 Bishop Point 17315 ..................179
Bay Point 17382....................119 Bittersweet Rock 17422.................99
Bayou Point 17375...................165 Black Bay 17321....................237
Beacon Island 17372                                                     ................. 159 Black Bear Creek 17423.................120
Beacon Point 17367...................167 Black Island 17322...................235
Beacon Rock 17360...................177 Black Island 17422...................96
Bean Island 17433 ...................81 Black Point 17432...................102
Bear Bay 17323.....................231 Black Rock 17322...................236
Bear Bay Island 17323 .................231 Black Rock 17402...................153
Bear Cove 17326....................222 Black Rock 17426....................1I
Bear Harbor 17386...................  155 Black Rock 17433...................130
Bear Mountain 17408..................128 Black Rock Light 17434.................87
Bear River 17425....................85 Blake Channel 17385..................122
Beardalee Entrance 17318 ................249  Blake Island 17385...................123
Beardalee Islands 17318.................   249  Blanche Rock 17385..................121
Beardalee River 17316 ..................210 Blank Inlet 17428 ...................109
Bearnogs                                                        .......................   I Blank Islands 17428 ..................109
Beartrack Cove 17318..................249  Blanquizal Islands 17404 ................145
Beartrack River 1731 8...................249 Blaquiere Point 17360 .................163
Beauchamp Island 17326                                                ................ 219  Blashke Islands 17382 .................118
Beauclerc Island 17360 ................155 Blind Pass 17422 ...................96
Beaver Creek 17434 ..................106 Blind Point 17375 ...................164
Beaver Point 17325...................227 Blind River 17375...................164
Beavertail Island 17330 .................218 Blind Slough 17375 ..................164
Beck Island 17372 ...................159 Blind Slough 17382 ..................162
Beck Island 17401 ...................118 Block Island 17407...................136
Beck Rock 17432.................... 103 Blue Mouse Cove 17318 ................251
Bee Rocks 17434....................105 Bluff Island 17382...................119
Beecher Pass 17360 ..................... Bluff Island 17386, 17387 ................157
Beehive Island 17324..................226 Bluff Point 17365 ...................172
Beehive, The 17326 ..............I.....220 Bluff Point 17422 ...................96
Behm Canal 17420...................94 Bluff Point 17425 ...................85
Behm Narrows 17422..................96 Bluff Point Light 17422.................96
Belknap Islands 17326 .................222 Blunt Point 17375 ...................165
Bell Ann 17422 ....................96 Boat Harbor 17316...................210
Bell Island 17302....................254 Boat Harbor 17434...................86
Bell Island 17381....................160 Boat Rock 17437 ...................83
Bell Island 17422....................96 Boat Rock Light 174 37.................83
Bell Island Hot Springs 17422 ..............96 Boat Rocks 17433...................130
Belle Bay 17425....................85 Bobrovoi Point 17330 .................217
Benjamin Island 17316 .................208 Bobs Bay 17407....................129
Berg Bay 17318 ....................249 Bobs Place 17404 ...................145
Berg Bay 17385 ....................123 Boca de Quadra 17434 .................87
Beric Island 17321                                                     ................... 239 Bocas de Float 17404..................146
Bemners Bay 17316...................210 Bocas Point 17407...................137
Berry Island 17372...................159 Bock Bight 17367 ...................168
Berry Island 17426....................1I Bohemia Creek 17303 .................240
Bert Millar Cutoff 17433................. 81 Bold Island 17385...................121
Bertha Bay 17321                                                     ................... 238 Bold Island 17428 ...................88
Bessie Creek 17316...................210 Bolles Inlet 17409...................134
Betton Head 17422...................98 Bolles Ledge 17428 ..................93
Betton Island 17422...................98 Bond Bay 17422....................99
Biali Rock 17326.................... 219 Boot Point 17402 ...................153
Bibb Shoal 17368 ...................171 Boreas Point 17407 ..................136
Big Bay 17326 .....................220 Borlase Rock 17402 ..................153
Big Branch Bay 17330 .................218 Bostwick Inlet 17428..................109
Big Branch Rock 17330.................217 Bostwick Reef 17434..................106
Big Harbor 17405 ...................139 Boulder Point 17360...................156
Big Hazy Islet 17320 ..................194 Boulder Point 17375 ..................164








                                                                                                                1-3


                                                    Page                                                                      Page
Bowditch .......................................... 257 Camp Coogan Bay 17326 ..............................222
Bowie Seamount 531 .................................. 80 Camp Cove 17408 ....................................128
Brad Rock 17323 ..................................... 230 Camp Island 17360 ...................................167
Bradfield Canal 17385 ................................. 121 Camp Island 17408 ..................................128
Brady Glacier 17302 .................................. 243 Camp Point 17427 ...................................                               85
Breakfast Rock 17331, 17320 ........................ 198 Canal Point 17406 ....................................138
Breezy Bay 17407 .................................... 136 Canal, Bradfield 17385 ..............................121
Breezy Point 17425 ............................... 85 Candle Island 17424 .................................5
Bridge and cable clearances ............................. 17 Cannery Cove 17363 .................................71
Bridge lights and clearance gages ..................... 19 Cannery Cove 17432 ................................03
Bridges ............................................. I Cannery Point 17300 ................................04
Bridget Cove 17316 .................................. 210 Cannery Point 17302 ..................................253
Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Communication ........... 31  Cannery Point 17382 .................................. 116
Broad Island 17338 ................................... 232 Cannery Point 17432 .................................3
Brockman Island 17403 ................................ 150 Cannery Rock 17432 ..................................103
Brockman Pass 17403 ................................. 151 Canoe Cove 17303 ...................................                               239
Bronaugh Islands 17432 ............................... 107 Canoe Cove 17434 ...................................107
Brothers, The 17360 ................................... 171 Canoe Pass 17303 ....................................239
Brown Bear Head Island 17372 .......................... 159 Canoe Pass 17404 ....................................147
Brown Bear Rock 17433 ............................... 81 Canoe Passage 17385 ...............................120
Brown Cove 17360 ................................... 167 Cap Island 17403 ....................................149,150
Brown Glacier 17360 .................................. 178 Cape Addington 17406 ................................3
Brownson Bay 17433 .................................. 81 Cape Augustine 17408 ................................128
Brownson Island 17385 .............................. 120 Cape Bartolome 17406 ................................137
Bucareli Bay 17400 ................................... 137 Cape Bendel 17368 .................................. 169
Bug Island 17300 ..................................... 176 Cape Bingham 17303 ................................242
Bug Island 17422 ..................................... 97 Cape Chacon 17433 ................................ 81, 100
Bullhead (Bull Head) Cove 17434 ....................... 87 Cape Chirikof 17406 ................................143
Buoys .............................................. 20 Cape Cross 17303 ...................................40
Burger Point 17302 .................................. 246 Cape Dearborn 17321 ................................38
Burnett Inlet 17382 ................................. 116 Cape Decision 17386, 17402 ...........................154
Burnt Island 17368 .................................. 169 Cape Edgecumbe 17325, 17320 ................2
Burnt Island 17375 .................................... 164 Cape Edward 17322 ................................37
Burnt Island 17403 .................................... 150 Cape Fanshaw 17365 ................................4
Burnt Island Reef 17375 ............................... 164 Cape Fanshaw 17365, 17360 ...........................169
Burnt Point 17302 .................................... 254 Cape Felix 17406 ...................................138
Burroughs Bay 17424 ................................. 96 Cape Flores 17407 ............................7......
Buschmann Pass 17433 ................................ 130 Cape Fox 17437 ..................................... 83, 86
Bush Islets 17386 ..................................... 155 Cape Georgiana 17323 ................................229
Bush Islets 17407 ..................................... 137 Cape Horn Rocks 17400 ...............................126
Bush Rock 17401 ..................................... 118 Cape Knox 17400 ....................................80
Bush Top Island 17375 ................................ 164 Cape Lookout 17408 ..................................128
Bushtop Island 17404 ...................I...........1..  46 Cape Lynch Light 17404 ...............................147
Bushy Island 17382 ................................. 119 Cape Muzon 17400 .................................. 81
Bushy Island 17408 .................................. 134 Cape Muzon Light 17400 ............................81
Bushy Islands 17360 .................................. 178 Cape Ommaney 17320, 17330 ..........................195
Bushy Point 17422 .................................... 97 Cape Ommaney 17330, 17320 ..........................217
Bushy Point Cove 17422 ............................... 97 Cape Ommaney Light 17320, 17330 .....................195
Bushy Point Light 17422 ............................... 97 Cape Pole 17402 ................................ ....156
Buster Bay 17360 .................................... 160 Cape Spencer 17301 ..................................243
Butler Peak 17314 .................................... 179 Cape Strait 17367 ..................................67
 Butler Rock 17400 .................................... 126 Cape Suspiro 17405 ..................................139
 Butterworth Island 17382 .............................. 161 Car Point 17425 .............8.......................5
 Button Island 17385 .................................. 122 Caracol Island 17406 .................................142
 Byron Bay 17330 ..................................... 218 Carlton Island 17423 ..................................115
                                                            Caroline Shoal 17318 .................................250
 Caamano Point 17422 ................................. 97, 99 Carp Island 17424 .................................... 94
 Caamano Point 17422, 17420 ........................... 112 Carroll Inlet 17428 ................................... 89
 Caamano Point Light 17422 ............................ 99 Carroll Island 17320 .................................. 172
 Cabin Cove 17420 ................................... 113 Carroll Point 17428 ................................... 89
 Cabin Point 17339 .................................... 202 Cascade Bay 17320 ................................... 200
 Cable clearances ..................................... 17 Cascade Inlet 17428 .................................. 88
 Cable ferries ......................................... 1 Castle Islands 17360 .................................. 162
 Cables .............................................. 1 Castle River 17360 ................................. 162
 Cabras Islands 17406.................................. 138 Cat Island 17434 ..................................... 87
 Cache Island 17423 ................................... 98 Cat Passage 17434 ................................... 106
 Cactus Point 17424 ................................... 95 Catalina Island 17404 .................................142
 Calder Bay 17387 ................................... 157 Catherine Island 17337 ............................... 201
 Calder Rocks 17386, 17387 ............................. 157 Caution Island 17326 ................................. 222
 California Cove 17428 ................................. 89 Caution Pass 17321 ................................... 238
 California Head 17428 ................................  89 Cayman Point 17407 ................................. 136
 California Rock 17430 ................................ 90 Cedar Bight 17368 ................................... 171
 Cam Island 17368 .................................... 170 Cedar Cove 17300 .................................... 205
 Camel Mountain 17326 ................................ 221 Cedar Cove 17324 .................................... 226
 Cameron Pass 17326 .................................. 219 Cedar Island 17368 .................................. 170







1-4


                                       Page                                                                               Page
Cedar Island 17423...................98 Cliff Point 17425 ...................85
Cedar Pass 17326 ...................220 Close Bay 17328 ...................218
Cedar Point 17434 ...................107 Clover Bay 17436 ...................104
Celestial Reef 17420 ..................82 Clover Island 17422 ..................98
Center Island 17423...................115 Clover Pass 17422...................98
Center Island 17433...................130 Clover Passage 17422 .................98
Center Islets 17424...................96  Clover Passage Entrance Light 17422 ...........98
Chaik Bay 17341....................202 Clover Point 17436...................104
Change Island 17385 ..................121 Club Rocks 17434...................82
Channel Island 17385..................123 Clump Island 17403 ..................149
Channel Island 17402..................195 Coal Bay 17426....................112
Channel Island 17408..................128 Coast Guard .....................4
Channel Island 17428..................94  Coast Guard District Offices...............257
Channel Island Light 14 17428 .............94  Coast Guard droppable, floatable pumps ..........12
Channel Islands 17408 .................134  Coast Guard Marine Safety Offices ............258
Channel Islands 17424 .................95  Coast Guard Radio Broadcasts ..............258
Channel markers, caution ................20  Coast Guard radio stations................12
Channel Point 17339 ..................203 Coast Guard Stations..................258
Channel Rocks 17323..................230  Coast Guard vessels, warning signals ...........28
Chapel Island 17362 ..................176 Coast Pilot......................1,256
Chapin Bay 17336 ...................172 Cob Island 17404 ...................147
Chapin Island 17404 ..................147 Coco........................26
Charcoal Island 17327..................223 Coco Harbor 17408 ..................135
Charcoal Point 17430..................93 Cod Point 17423 ....................98
Charpentier Inlet 17318 .................251  Code of Signals, International ..............257
Chart Datum ..1...................i Coffman Cove 17401..................117
Chart Numbering System ................17 Coffman Island 17401 .................118
Chart symbols and abbreviations .............15  Coghlan Island 17315..................191
Charts and Publications-National Ocean Service .......256  Cohen Island 17316 ..................193
Charts and Publications-Other U.S. Government Agencies   ...256  Cohen Reef 17316...................193
Chasina Anchorage 17436 ................104 Coho Cove 17428 ...................89
Chasina Island 17436..................104 Cole Island 17405 ...................139
Chasina Point 17436 ..................104 Colorado Reef 17375..................164
Chatham 17338 ....................234 COLREGS Demarcation Lines..............39, 72
Chatham Strait 16016..................194 Colt Island 17315 ...................190
Checats Cove 17424 ..................95 Columbine Rock 17324.................227
Checats Point 17424 ..................95 Column Point 17303 ..................243
Chichagof Bay 17432..................102 Communications....................78
Chichagof Island 16016 .................235  Compass roses on charts.................18
Chichagof Pass 17382..................124 Composite Island 17318.................251
Chickamin River 17424 .................95  Computer Bulletin Board (BBS) .............26
Chickwan Bight 17409 .................127 Conclusion Island 17360 ................159
Chilkat Inlet 17317...................211 Cone Bay 17404....................147
Chilkat Islands 17317..................210 Cone Island 17406...................143
Chilkat Peninsula 17317.................211 Cone Island 17428...................89
Chilkat River 17317 ..................211 Cone Mountain 17408 .................128
Chilkoot Inlet 17317 ..................211 Cone Peak 17404 ...................146
Chilkoot Lake 17317 ..................212 Cone Point 17428 ...................89
Chilkoot River 17317..................212 Coney Island 17360 ..................167
Chimney Rock 17302..................254 Coning Inlet 17409...................129
China Cove 17402 ...................154 Coning Point 17409 ..................130
Cholmondeley Sound 17436 ...............103  Control of shipping in time of emergency or war                                                      ......30
Christmas Island 17368 .................171 Convenient Cove 17422.................96
Chuck River 17363...................175 Coon Cove 17428 ...................90
Church Point 17362...................176 Coon Island 17428...................89
Circle Bay 17382....................124 Cooney Cove 17382 ..................117
Circle Point 17314 ...................179 Cooper Point 17315 ..................180
City of Topeka Rock 17384................124 Coot Cove 17316 ...................208
Clam Cove 17403 ...................151 CoposolIsland 17406..................141
ClainCove 17431 ...................131 Copper Harbor 17431..................132
Clain Island 17403 ...................151 Cora Island 17402...................154
Clam Island 17405 ...................140 Cora Point 17402 ...................154
Clain Island 17408 ...................135 Cordova Bay 17400 ..................129
Clam Island 17422 ...................97 Conlies Islands 17407..................136
Clare Island 17432 ...................103 Cormorant Island 17321.................238
Clarence Strait 17420, 17360...............100  Cornwallis Point 17368.................170
Clark Bay 17426....................112 Coronados Islands 17405 ................139
Clarno Cove 17432...................103 Coronation Island 17402 ................153
Clear Creek 17360 ...................115 Corps of Engineers..................                                                                                   5
Clear Point 17316 ...................208  Corps of Engineers Offices................257
Clear Point 17408 ...................128 Cosmos Cove 17337 ..................201
Cleft Island 17368 ...................171 Cosmos Pass 17403 ..................148
Cleva Bay 17431....................135 COSPAS-SARSAT system................23
Cleveland Passage 17365 ................174 Courses .......................
Cleveland Peninsula 17420................113  Converden Island 17316.................208







                                                                                       I-S5


                                        Page                                                                               Page
Couverden Rock 17316 ..................208 Deadman Reach 17323 .................231
Cove Point 17300 ....................179 Deception Point 17375 .................163
Cow Island 17434 ....................105  Decision Passage 17386, 17402..............154
Cozian Reef 17323 ....................232 Deck officers .....................30
Crab Bay 17300 .....................205 Deep Bay 17323....................231
Crab Bay 17434;....................107 Deep Bay 17382....................124
Crab Cove 17316 ....................208 Deep Cove 17335 ...................199
Craig 17405 ......................140 Deep Inlet 17326....................222
Craig Island Reef 17405 .................140  Deepwater Point 17365..................172
Craig Point 17382 ....................162 Deer Bay 17431....................132
Craig Rock 17437 ....................83 Deer Harbor 17303...................240
Crawfish Inlet 17326 ...................219 Deer Island 17385 ...................121
Crawfish Inlets 17326, 17320 ...............219  Defense Mapping Agency ................2
Creek Point 17324 ....................226 Defense Mapping Agency (DMA) .............6
Creek Point 17435 ....................105  Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information                                                         .           ....256
Crist Point 17302 ....................252 Deicliman Island 17432.................103
Cristina Island 17406 ...................138 Deichman Rock 17382 .................118
Cross Sound 17302 ...................242 Dell Island 17431 ...................132
Crosswise Islands 17324 .................226   Department of Agriculture, Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service
Crow Island 17337 ....................201  (APR18) Offices ..................260
Crow Island 17435 ....................107 Depths........................1
Crowley Bight 17386 ...................196 Desconocida Reef 17404 ................146
Cruising schedules ....................12 Destructive waves ...................27
Cruz Islands 17404 ...................142 Deuce Island 17322...................236
Cruz Pass 17404 ............. .......142 Devil Island 17408...................128
Cub Mountain 17303 ..................239 Devil Lake 17408 ...................128
Cube Point 17300 ....................204 Devilfish Bay 17387 ..................151
Culebra Islands 17404 ..................145 Devils Elbow 17372 ..................159
Curacao Reef 17404 ...................145 Devils Rock 17435...................108
Curlew Ledge 17316 ...................208 Dew Point 17424....................96
Currents               .               .......................1,73 Dewey Anchorage 17423..............115
Customhouse Cove 17434 .................106 Dewey Rocks 17433 ..................130
Customs Ports of Entry and Stations .............259 DGPS........................25
Customs Service ....................2 Diamond Island 17339 .................204
Cutter Rocks 17428 ...................89 Diamond Point 17405..................138
Cuvacan Cove 17325 ...................227 Dickens Point 17427 ..8............... 5
Cygnet Island.-17427 ...................88 Dickman Bay 17432 ..................102
Cyrus Cove 17403 ....................149 Dicks Arm 17301 ...................243
                                              Didrickson Bay 17321 .................238
Dad Rock 17302 ....................245 Differential UPS (DGPS) ................25
Daisy Island 17426 ....................1I Dippy Island 17322...................237
Daiasuga Island 17317 ..................211 Disposal areas......................i
DalI Bay 17432 .....................107 Disposal Sites.....................18,72
DalI-lead 17432 ....................107 Distance Tables ....................256
DalI Island 17400 ....................126 Distances ~......................2
Dall Ridge 17434 ....................107 Distant Point 17339, 17320 ...............202
Danger Island 17381 ...................160  Distress Assistance and Coordination Procedures ......9
Danger Passage 17434 ..................87  Distress Signals and Communication Procedures .......                                                                8
Danger Point 17339 ...................203 Diver Bay 17407....................129
Danger Point 17375 ...................164 Diver Islands 17407 ..................129
Danger Point Ledge 17375 ................164 Diver Rocks 17407...................129
Danger signal ......................30 Divide Island 17387 ..................157
Dangers ........................73 Division Island 17318..................251
Dark Point 17437 ....................83 Dixon Entrance 16016 .................80
Dasani Islands 17404              ~..................147 Documentation....................                                                                      5
Dates of Latest Editions................. 15, 256  Dog Bay 17434 ....................106
Datzkoo Harbor 17409 ..................133 Dog Island 17434 ...................106
Datzkoo Islands 17409 ..................129  Dogfish: Island 17423..................98
Davidson Creek 17315 ..................180 Dolgni Island 17409...................127
Davidson Glacier 17317 .................211 Dolomi Bay 17432 ...................103
Davidson Wnet 17403 ..................148 Dolph Rock 17323...................231
Davis Creek 17339 ....................204 Dome Islets 17404...................146
Davis Rock 17376 ....................196 Donkey Bay 17363...................171
Davison Bay 17321 ...................238 Doolth Mountain 17322.................236
Davison Mountain 17435 .................105 Dora Bay 17436..104................
Dawes Glacier 17360 ...................178 Dom Island 17360, 17300 ................176
Daykoo Islands 17409               ~..................129 Domnin Rock 17315...................190
Daylight saving time ...................79 Dorothy Cove 17328 ..................219
De Groff Bay 17324 ...................226 Dorothy Narrows 17326.................220
De Long Islands 17434 ..................86 Dot Island 17403....................150
Dead Island 17381               ~...................160 Doty Cove 17300 ...................179
Dead Tree Island 17338 ..................233  Double Cove 17322 ..                                                                                             ................237
Dead Tree Point 17404 ..................146 Double Island 17423 ..................116
Deadman Island 17382 ..................116  Double Islands 17434.                                                                                            ~................106
Deadman Island 17384 ............. ....124 Double Rock 17385S..................122







1- 6


                                     Page                                                                            Page
Douglas 17315.....................184 Edward Islands 17322 .................237
Douglas Bay 17360...................160 Edward Passage 17437 .................84
Douglas Boat Harbor 17315 ...............184 Edwards Island 17360 .................156
Douglas Island 17315..................190 EeklInlet 17431....................132
Douglass Bay 17323 ..................232 Eek Point 17431....................132
Dova Bay 17431....................131 Egg Harbor 17402...................195
Dove Island 17403 ...................149 Egg Islands 17432...................102
Drag Island 17382 ...................124 Egg Passage 17433...................130
Drake Island 17318...................249 Egg Rock 17433....................130
Dress Point 17422 ...................96 Eight Fathom Bight 17302................254
Driest Point 17435 ...................109 El Capitan Island 17403.................150
Driftwood Cove 17330 .................217 El Capitan Passage 17403................149
Dry Island 17360 ..................163 Elbow Bay 17431 ...................131
Dry Pass 17321 ....................238 Elbow Passage 17322..................236
Dry Pass 17387 ....................149 Eldred Rock 17317...................210
Dry Strait 17360....................162 Electronic navigation..................72
Dry Strait Light 1 17360.................163 Elena Bay 17376 ...................197
Duck Islands 17434...................87 Elephants Head 17367 .................168
Duck Point 17365 ...................174 Elephants Nose 17382 .................124
Duck Point 17385 ...................121 Elf Cove 17322 ....................236
Duffield Peninsula 17323 ................232 Elfin Cove 17302 ...................244
Duke Island 17434 ...................82 Elghi Island 17403...................148
Duke Point 17434 ...................82 Eliza Harbor 17365 ..................172
Dumping Grounds ...................18,72 Etkug-u Bay 17322...................237
Dumping of dredged material...............6 Elkugu Island 17322 ..................237
Dunbar Inlet 17408...................135 Ella Creek 17424 ...................95
Duncan Canal 17360 ..................160, 161 Ella Point 17424....................95
Dundas Bay 17302...................246 Elliott Island 17363 ..................171
Dundas Island 17420 ..................82 Elovoi Island 17326 ..................220
Dundas Islands 17420..................82 Elovoi Islet 17323...................232
Dundas River 17302 ..................246 Emerald Bay 17385 ..................120
Dunira Island 17420 ..................82 Emerald Island 17404..................146
Dutch Harbor 17432..................103 Emergencies .....................79
                                           Emgeten Island 17326 .................222
Eagle Glacier 17316 ..................193 Emily Island 17360 ..................162
Eagle Harbor 17316...................193 Emmons Island 17323 .................231
Eagle Harbor 17400 ...................126 Endicott Arm 17360 ..................178
Eagle Island 17385...................115 Endicott River 17316..................210
Eagle Island 17403...................149 Entrance Island 17316 .................207
Eagle Point 17302 ...................246 Entrance Island 17324 .................227
Eagle Point 17407 ...................129 Entrance Island 17363 .................175
Eagle Point 17425 ...................85 Entrance Island 17372 .................159
Eagle Reef 17316 ...................193 Entrance Island 17403 .................149
Eagle Rock 17325 ...................228 Entrance Island 17408 .................128, 135
Eagle Rocks 17330...................217 Entrance Island 17424 .................95
Earl Cove 17302....................245 Entrance Islet 17326 ..................221
East Channel 17324...................226 Entrance Point 17315..................191
East Channel 17428...................90 Entrance Point 17405..................140
East Clump 17430 ...................93 Entry Point 17326 ...................222
East Clump Light 7 17430 ................93  Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)..........6
East Devil Rock 17434 .................82  Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Offices                                                    ......257
East Francis Rock 17323.................231 Eolus Point 17407...................136
East Island 17382 ...................118 EPIRBs .......................21
East Island 17428 ...................93 Ernest Point 17385...................115
East Island 17434 ...................82 Ernest Sound 17385 ..................120
East Pints Rocks 17368 .................169 Error Island 17326...................222
East Point 17300....................204 Escape Point 17422 ..................97
East Point 17367....................168 Escurial Island 17404..................146
East Point 17382....................124 Esquibel Island 17404 .................145
East Rock 17378....................158 Essowah Harbor 17409.................127
East Sentinel Island 17426................III  Essowah Lakes 17409 .................127
East Spit 17365 ....................174 Essowah Point 17409..................127
Easterly Island 17385..................120 Esther Island 17303 ..................239
Eastern Anchorage 17327 ................223 Etolin Island 17360 ..................115
Eastern Channel 17327 .................223 Eureka Channel 17433 .................130
Eastern Passage 17385 .................122 Eva Island 17368 ...................170
Eastern Passage Light 17384 ...............124 Eva Islands 17338...................233
Echo Cove 17316 ...................210 Exchange Cove 17382 .................118
Echo Cove 17337 ...................201  Exclusive Economic Zone of the United States........30
Echo Island 17382 ...................118 Excursion Inlet 17316 .................247
Echo soundings ....................18 Excursion Inlet 173 1 8.................247
Echoes........................73 Explorer Basin 17376..................197
Eckholms, The 17326..................222 Eye Opener, The 17360.................160
Edith Point 17424 ...................95
Edna Bay 17403....................148 Fair Island 17360 ...................1.62







                                                                                 I- 7


                                      Page                                                                               Page
Fairhaven 17315 ....................191 Flat Point 17315....................180
Fairway Island 17338 ..................233 Flaw Point 17360 ...................177
Fairway Island 17386 ..................154 Fleming Island 17321..................238
Fairway Rock 17321 ..................238 Flock Rock 17367 ...................168
Fake Pass 17403 ....................148 Flotsam Islet 17331I..................198
Falcon Arm 17322 ...................236 Flynn Cove 17302...................246
False Arden 17315..................190 Fog signal characteristics ................2
False Bay 17300 ................I...205 Fog signals......................20
False Cove 17402....................153 Foggy Bay 17434 ...................86
False Island 17338 ...................233 Foggy Point 17434...................86
False Lindenberg Head 17338...............233  Fontaine Island 17387.................157
False Point 17302....................254  Food and Drug Administration (FDA) ...........7
False Point Pybus 17360.................175  Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Regional Offices                                                    .         ...260
False Point Retreat 17316 ................208 Fool Inlet 17300....................176
Fankuda Islet 17326...................222 Fools Inlet 17385 ...................121
Fanshaw Bay 17365...................174 Foot Island 17365 ...................174
Far Point 17433 ....................130 Ford Arm 17322....................236
Farallon Bay 17407...................136 Ford Rock 17323....................232
Farm Island 17360 ...................163 Fords Cove 17425 ...................85
Farragut Bay 17367...................168 Fords Terror 17360...................178
Fassett Island 17326...................222 Foremost Rock 17382..................161
Faust Island 17360, 17300 ................176  Forrester Island 17400 ................ . 81, 126
Faust Rock 17316 ...................193 ForssaCove 17420 ...................114
Favorita Island 17404..................145 Forss Island 17422 .................98
Favorite Anchorage 17323 ................231  Fort Islet 17407.136
Favorite Bay 17339...................203 Fort Point 17365....................174
Favorite Channel 17316.................193 Fort Point 17437....................83
Favorite Reef 17316...................191 Fortaleza Bay 17406...................138
Fawn Island 17382 ...................116 Fortuna Reefs 17323 ..................229
Feather Rock 17404...................146 Fortuna Strait 17323 ..................235
Federal Communications Commission ...........6 Foul Bay 17407 ....................128
Federal Communications Commission Offices ........260  Found Island 17385..121...............
Federal Requirements for Recreational Boats.........257  Fox Island 17437....................83
Felice Strait 17434 ...................105 Fox Rock 17403....................149
Ferehee Glacier 17317..................214  Fragrant Island 17326..................220, 221
Ferehee River 17317 ..................214 Francis Anchorage 17367 ................168
Fern Harbor 17302 ..24................3 Francis Island 17318 ..................249
Fern Point 17405 ....................139 Frederick Cove 17432..................102
Fern Reef 17405 ..................~1                                      139 Frederick Point 17360..................167
Fern Rock 17321....................238 Frederick Sound 17320, 17360 ..............167
Fick Cove 17323....................232 French Harbor 17432..................103
Figgina Point 17426 ~..................114 Frequency units ....................12
Fillmore Inlet 17437 ..................84 Freshwater Bay 17300 .................205
Fillmore Island 17437..................84 Fripo Island 17434...................87
Fillmore Rock 17435 ..................108 Fritter Cove 17382...................123
Finger Point 17328 ...................218 Fritz Cove 17315....................191
Finger Shoal 17386, 17387................157 Frog Rock 17322 ..................a  237
Fir Rock 17403 ....................150 Frosty Bay 17385 ...................121
Fire Island 17382....................118 Fruit Island 17327 ...................223
Fire Point 17424 ....................96 Funter Bay 17316 ...................208
First Kekur 17330....................218
First Narrows 17326 ..................219 Gaff Rock 17302....................244
Fish Bay 17323 ....................230 Gain Island 17362 ...................176
Fish Egg Island 17405 ..................139 Gambier Bay 17362 ..................176
Fish Egg Reef 17405...................139 Game Creek 17302 ..................254
Fish havens .....................6, 18 Game Point 17302 ...................254
Fish Islands 17434 ...................106 Gannet Island 17434 ..................88
Fish Point 17424....................95 Gaohi Islands 17404 ..................147
Fisherman Chuck 17385.................121 Gap Point 17376 ................ ...197
Fisherman Cove 17408 .................128 Garcia Cove 17404...................145
Fishermans Harbor 17402~................156 Gardner Bay 17433...................101
Fishery Conservation Zone................30 Garforth, Island 17318..................250
Fishtrap areas ..1...................i Garnet Point 17437...................84
Fishtraps.......................6 Gas Rock 17403....................149
Fitz Island 17322....................237 Gastineau Channel 17315 ................180
Fitzgibbon Cove 17424 .................96 Gate Island 17408 ...................128
Five Finger Light 17360.................174 Gate, The 17322...................236
Five Fingers, The 17360.................174 Gauge Island 17316 ..................208
Fivemile Island 17382..................124 Gaviota Islets 17406 ..................143
Flag Point 17341....................201 Gaviota Rock 17406 ..143........ ......
Flag Point 17434 ................... 87 Gedney Channel 17302 .................252
Flat Cove 17322 ....................236 GedneylHarbor 17376, 17320...............196
Flat Island 17368'....................170 Gedney Pass 17422 .................. 96
Flat Island 17381....................160 Geikie Wnet 1731 8...................250
Flat Island 17403....................150 Geikie Rock 17318...................250






I- 8


                                     Page                                                                            Page
Geographic range ...................19 Grey Point 17435 ...................105
George Inlet 17428...................89 Greys Island 17360...................163
George Islands 17302..................244 Grief Island 17360...................162
George Rock 17315...................190 Grindall Anchorage 17426 .................l
Gerard Point 17385...................123 Grindall Island 17426..................110
Giant Point 17434 ...................87, 106  Grindall Passage 17426.................110
Gibbs Rock 17424 ...................96 Grindall Point 17426..................110
Gibby Rock 17315 ...................191 Grouse Rock 17427 ..................88
Gig Pass 17322 ....................237 Guard Islands 17428 ..................94
Gilbert Bay 17313 ...................179 Guard Islands Light 17428................94
Gilbert Peninsula 17318.................251  Guibert Islets 17328 ..................219
Gilmer Bay 17325 ...................228 Guide Island 17407 ..................136
Gilmer Cove 17324...................227 Guide Rock 17322...................236
Gish Bay 17402 ....................195 Guide Rocks 17433 ..................130
Glacier Bay 17318 ...................247 Gulf of Esquibel 17404.................145
Glacier Bay National Park and Preserve 17318........247  Gulf Cove 17302 ...................246
Glacier Point 17317...................211 Gull Island 17316 ...................193
Glacier Point 17425 ..................85 Gull Island 17404 ...................146
Glass Peninsula 17360..................176 Gull Island 17435 ...................107
Gnat Cove 17428....................89 Gull Point 17423 ...................115
Goat Island 17407 ...................133 Gull Rock 17321 ...................238
Gold and Galligan Lagoon 17382 .............118 Gull Rock 17401 ...................118
Gold Harbor 17408...................127 Gunboat Rock 17326..................220
Goleta Cove 17325 ..................227 Gusdagane Point 17433 ................131
Golf Island 17326 ...................220 Gustavus 17302....................247
Goloi Islands 17323...................230 Gut Bay 17336, 17320 .................199
Golovni Island 17326..................220
Good Island 17362...................176 Hadley 17426.....................114
Goose Cove 1731 8...................250 Haines 17317.....................211
Goose Island 17302...................246 Haley Anchorage 17323.................230
Gooseneck Harbor 17408 ................127 Haley Point 17323...................230
Gornoi Island 17326 ..................220 Haley Rocks 17323 ..................230
Gould Island 17431...................132 Halibut Bay 17427 ..................85
Gould Passage 17431 .................132 Halibut Harbor 17402..................153
Goulding Harbor 17321 .................238 Halibut Island 17302..................252
Gourd Island 17408...................127 Halibut Nose 17407 ..................136
Government Agencies..................2 Halibut Point 17324 ..................225
Government Prioting Office ...............256  Halibut Rock 17302 ..................252
GPS.........................24 Halleck Harbor 17368 .................170
GPS Navigation System.................24 Halleck Island 17324..................226
GPS System......................26 Ham Cove 17408 ...................134
Grace Creek 17424...................95 Ham Island 17385...................123
Grace Harbor 17408 ..................134 Ham Island 17428 ..................88
Grace Island 17321...................238 Ham Islands 17404...................147
Graham Island 17400..................80 Hamilton Bay 17368 .................170
Grand Island 17300...................179, Hamilton Island 17368 .................169
Grand Island 17408...................134 Hamilton Island 17387 .................157
Grand Pacific Glacier 17318 ...............252 Hanus Bay 17338 ...................233
Grand Point 17367 ...................168 Hanus Islet 17326 ...................221
Granite Cove 17302...................244 Hanus Reef 17316...................207
Granite Point 17406...................143 Happy Cove 17376...................197
Grant Cove 17436 ...................110 Happy Harbor 17426 ...................1
Grant Island 17423...................98 Harbor Island 17327 ..................223
Grant Island Light 17423 ................98 Harbor Island 17360 ..................178
Grass Rock 17435 ...................105 Harbor Island 17368 ..................170
Grasstop Rock 17323..................231 Harbor Point 17428 ..................88
Grassy Rock 17302...................254 Harbor Rock 17327 ..................223
Grave Island 17363 ~..................171 Harbormasters ....................78
Grave Island 17368...................169 Harmony Islands 17404.................146
Grave Point 17314 ...................179 Harrington Rock 17367.................168
Grave Point 17433 ...................131 Harris Cove 17376...................196
Grave Point 17434 ...................87 Harris Harbor 17315..................1899
Graveyard Cove 17331 .................198 Harris Island 17434 ..................105
Graveyard Island 17403.................150 Harris River 17426...................112
Gravina Island 17432..................107 Harris River Bay 17426.................112
Gray Rock 17322 ...................236 Harrison Point 17427..................85
Great Arm 17328 ...................219 Harry Bay 17437 ...................83
Greely Point 17315...................180 Harry Island 17302...................246
Green Inlet 17408 ...................136 Harry Saddle 17437 ..................83
Green Island 17403 ...................148 Harvey Lake 17360 ..................161
Green Islets 17425 ...................85 Hassiali Inlet 17431 ..................132
Green Point 17375 ...................164 Hassler Harbor 17428..................88
Green Rocks 17375 ...................164 Hassler Island 17422..................96
Greentop Harbor 17303 .................240 Hassler Pass 17422...................96
Greentop Island 17303 .................240 Hassler Point 17407 ..................136








                                                                                I1-9


                                     Page                                                                               Page
Hassler Reef 17434...................82 Hoot Island 17403 ...................149
Hat Island 17382....................124 Horse Island 17315...................190
Hattie Island 17427...................85 Horse Shoal 17315...................190
Hattie Island Light 17427 ................85  Horseshoe Island 17372.................159
Hawk Inlet 17316, 17300.................205 Hose Point 17424 ...................96
Hawk Point 17316 ...................205 Hot Springs Bay 17326 .....I............221
Haystack Island 17437..................84 Hotspur Island 17434..................105
Hayward Strait 17324..................226 Hound Island 17368 ..................170
Hazy Islands 17320...................194 Hour Islands 17405...................139
Heay Rock 17341 ...................201 Hourigan Point 17368..................171
Heceta Island 17404 ..................146 House Point 17339...................202
Heckman Point 17422..................97 House Rock 17434 ..................87
Heide Rock 17300 ...................205 Howard Bay 17316...................208
Heights........................2 Howard Cove 17386 ..................196
Helen Island 17431 .............I.....132 Howkan Narrows 17409.................133, 134
Helianthus Passage 17376 ................196 Howkan Reef 17409 ..................134
Helicopter evacuation..................11 Huaji Cliff 17433 ...................100
Helm Bay 17422....................97 Hub Rock 17403....................150
Helm Bay Light 17422..................97 Hub Rock 17435....................108
Helm Point 17402 ...................153 Hugh Miller Inlet 17318.................251
Helm Point 17422 ...................97 Hugh Smith Lake 17420.................88
Helm Rock 17378 ...................158 Hume Island 17428...................89
Hemlock Island 17435..................108 Hump Island 17316...................208
Hemlock Point 17339..................204 Hump Island 17422. .   ...............98
Henrys Arm 17363...................171 Hump Island 17436...................104
Herbert Glacier 17316..................193 Humpback Creek 17302.................254
Herbert Graves Island 17321 ...............238  Humpback Creek 17427.................88
Hermagos Islands 17404.................145 Humpy Point 17434 ..................86
Hennanos Islands 17404.................142 Hunter Bay 17433 ...................131
Herring Bay 17326 ...................220 Hunter Cove 17318...................250
Herring Bay 17336 ...................172 Hut Point 17424....................95
Herring Bay 17428 ...................89 Hydaburg 17407....................133
Herring Cove 17326...................222 Hyder 17425 .....................85
Herring Cove 17428...................89  Hydrographic survey source diagrams ...........15
Hessa Inlet 17433....................130
Hessa Island 17433...................130 Ibach Point 17318 ...................252
Hessa Narrows 17433..................130 Ice .........................76
Hetta Inlet 17431....................132 ley Point 17315 ....................190
Hetta, Point 17431 ...................132 Icy Strait 17300 ....................246
Hid Reef 17434....107 Idaho Inlet 17302 ...................246
Hidden Bay 17432 ...................101 Idaho Rock 17430 ...................90
Hidden Inlet 17437...................84 Ideal Cove 17360 ...................167
Hidden Island 17360 ..................163, 167 Ilin Bay 17321.....................239
Hidden Point 17437 ..................84 Immersion hypothermia.................75
High Island 17372 ...................159  Immigration and Naturalization Service...........6
High Island 17426 ...................110  Immigration and Naturalization Service Offices                                                        .......260
High Point 17408....................135 Impassable Island 17326 ....220
Highfield Anchorage 17384................124  Imperial Passage 17321.238
Highwater Island 17324 .................227  Independence Island 17382................117
Hill Island 17321....................238 Indian Creek 17382...................118
Hobart Bay 17363 ...................175 Indian Point 17315...................191
Hog Rocks 17428....................88 Indian Point 17423...................98
Hog Rocks Light 17428.88  Indian Rock 17317...................212
Hogan Island 17321...................238 Indian Rock 17368...................171
Hoggatt Bay 17336...................200 Indian Rock 17434...................106
Hoggatt Island 17323 ..................231 Ingraham Bay 17432 ..................101
Hoggatt Reefs 17323 ..................231 Ingraham Point 17432..................102
Hoktaheen Cove 17303 .................241 Inian Cove 17302 ...................245
Hole in the Wall 17378 .................157 Inian Islands 17302...................245
Hole in the Wall 17404 .................144 Inner Point 17315 ...................190
Hole in The Wall 17407 .................129 Inner Point 17432 ...................103
Hole-in-the-Wall 17428 .................89 Inside Passage 17303..................239
Holidays .......................79 Inside Passage 17428..................94
Holkham, Bay 17360 ..................177, 178 Inside Route .....................77
Holliday Island 17420 ..........83 International Code of Signals...............257
Holliday Island Light 17420.83  International distress signals...............                                                                                   8
Hollis 17426 .............. .......112 Iphigenia Bay 17400~..................152
Hollis Anchorage 17426.................112 Island Bay 17408 ...................135
Hood Bay 17339....................202 Island Cove 17322...................236
I-ook Arm 17408....................128 Island Point 17426...................110
Hoonoh 17302.....................253 Island Point 17428...................89
Hoonab Harbor 17302..................253 Island Point 17433...................101
Hoonah Island 17302~... ..............252 Island Point 17437...................84
Hoonah Point 17302~..................253 Islas Bay 17321 ....................239
Hoonab Sound 17323 ..................232 Islet Passage 17326...................222







1-10


                                                        Page                                                                   Page
Ittar Rock 17322 .....................................         237  Kauda Point 17404 ................................... 147
Iyoukeen Cove 17300 .................................          205  Keete Inlet 17431 .................................... 132
                                                                 Keete Island 17431 ...................................         132
Jackknife Islands 17326 ...............................        220    Keete Point 17431 ................................... 132
Jackson Island 17431 .................................         131  Keg Point 17400 ..................................... 133
Jackson Passage 17431 ................................         132  Keg Point 17401 .................................... 118
Jacob Rock 17326 ....................................          220  Kegan Cove 17432 ................................... 102
Jadski Cove 17382 ....................................         116  Kegan Creek 17432 .................................. 102
Jamboree Bay 17326 ..................................          219  Kegan Lake 17432 .................................... 102
Jamestown Bay 17327 .................................          223  Keku Islands 17368 .................................. 170
Japan Bay 17435 .....................................          109  Keku Strait 17360 .................................... 154
Japonski Island 17327 .................................        223     Keku Strait 17368 .................................... 169
Jarvis Island 17426 ...................................        112    Keku Strait, 17360, 17368 ............................. 158
Jaw Point 17315 .....................................          180  Kekur Point 17330 ................................... 218
Jenkins Rock 17317 ...................................         211  Kelgaya Bay 17317 .................................. 211
Jinhi Bay 17403 ......................................         148  Kell Bay 17386 ...................................... 155
Joe Island 17407 .....................................         137  Kelly Cove 17406 .................................... 144
Joe Island 17422 .....................................          98  Kelp Bay 17337 ..................................... 201
Joe Mace Island 17378 ................................         158  Kelp Island 17434 ................................... 82
John Bay 17331 ..................................... .   198  Kelp Island Anchorage 17434 .......................... 82
John Rock 17326 ............................. .......          220  Kelp Passage 17433 .................................. 130
Johns Hopkins Glacier 17318 ...........................        252    Kelp Point 17360 .................................... 116
Johns Hopkins Inlet 17318 .............................        252  Kelp Rocks 17435 ................................... 107
Johnson Cove 17318 ..................................          249  Kenasnow Rocks 17339 ............................... 202
Johnson Cove 17382 ..................................          117  Kendrick Bay 17433 .................................. 101
Johnson Cove 17432 ..................................          102  Kendrick Islands 17433 ............................... 101
Johnson Rock 17317 ..................................          211  Keski Island 17403 ................................... 150
Judd Harbor 17434 ...................................           82  Kestrel Island 17434 .................................. 88
Juel Point 17408 .....................................         128  Ketchikan 17430 ..................................... 90
Jumbo Island 17431 ...................................         132  Key Reef 17382 ..................................... 118
Junction Island 17303 .................................        240  Key Reef Rock 17382 ................................ 119
Juneau 17315 ........................................          184  Khayyam Point 17426 ............................... 111
Juneau Isle 17315 ....................................         180  Khaz Bay 17322 ..................................... 236
                                                                 Khaz Breakers 17322 .................................          235
Kabanof Rock 17404 ..................................          146  Khaz Head 17322 .................................... 235
Kadashan Bay 17300 ..................................          205  Khaz Peninsula 17322 ................................ 235
Kadin Island 17360 ...................................         163  Khaz Point 17322 .................................... 235
Kaguk Cove 17404 ...................................           147  Killisnoo Harbor 17339 ............................... 202
Kah Shakes Cove 17434 ...............................           87    Killisnoo Island 17339 ................................ 202
Kah Shakes Point 17434 ...............................          87  Kimshan Cove 17322 ................................. 237
Kah Sheets Bay 17382 ..............................            161  Kina Cove 17426 .................................... 112
Kahli Cove 17403 ....................................          148  Kindergarten Bay 17382 ............................... 117
Kaigani 17409 .......................................          129  King George Bay 17382 ............................... 123
Kaigani Point 17409 ..................................         133  King Island 17436 ................................... 104
Kaigani Strait 17400 ..................................        133  King Salmon Bay 17300 .............................. 177
Kaiuchali Island 17326 ................................        220    Kingsmill Point 17320 ................................ 198
Kake 17368 .........................................           169  Kirbas Island 17326 ................................. 220
Kake Harbor 17368 ...................................          169  Kirk Point 17434 .................................... 86
Kakovo Island 17328 ..................................         219  Kita Island 17326 .................................... 222
Kakul Narrows 17323 .................................          230  Kite Island 17434 .................................... 88
Kakul Rock 17323 ....................................          230  Kitkun Bay 17436 ................................... 104
Kalhagu Cove 17317 ..................................          211  Kittens, The 17316 ................................... 208
Kalinin Bay 17323 ....................................         229  Klag Bay 17322 ..................................... 236
Kanagunut Island 17437 ...............................          84  Klag Island 17322 ................................... 237
Kanalku Bay 17339 ...................................          204  Klahini River 17424 .................................. 96
Kane Islands 17324 ..................................          227  Klakas Inlet 17431 ................................... 131
Kanga Bay 17326 ....................................           221  Klakas Island 17431 .................................. 131
Karheen Cove 17404 ..................................          147  Klawock 17405 ...................................... 141
Karheen Passage 17404 ................................         147    Klawock Harbor 17405 ...............................140
Karta Bay 17426 .....................................          112  Klawock Inlet 17405 ................................. 139
Kasaan 17426 .......................................           112  Klawock Island 17405 ................................ 140
Kasaan Bay 17426 ....................................          110  Klawock Reef 17405 ................................. 140
Kasaan Island 17426 ..................................         111  Klinau Island 17403 .................................. 148
Kasaan Point 17426 ...................................         111  Klinkwan Cove 17433 ................................ 131
Kashevarof Islands 17382 ..............................        118    Kiokachef Island 17323 ...............................          229
Kashevarof Passage 17382 .............................         117 Kiu Bay 17422 ...................................... 96
Kasiana Islands 17324 .................................        225  Klukwan 17317 ..................................... 211
Kasnyku Bay 17337 ..................................           201  Knob Island 17403 ................................... 150
Kasook Inlet 17431 ...................................         135  Knob, The 17302 .................................... 246
Kassa Inlet 17431 ....................................         131  Knudson Cove 17422 ................................. 98
Kassan Islands 17403 .................................         148  Kochu Island 17317 .................................. 211
Kataguni Island 17317 .................................        210    Koka Island Passage 17326 ............................222
Katakwa Point 17437 .................................           84  Kolosh Island 17326 .................................. 221
Katlian Bay 17324 ....................................         226  Kootznahoo Head 17339 .............................. 203
Katzehin River 17317 .................................         211    Kootznahoo Inlet 17339 ............................... 203






                                                                                                                                         I-i11


                                                                Page                                                                                    Page
Kootznahoo Roads 17339 .                 ............................. 202  Limestone Point 17403 ................................148
Kosciusko Island 17402 .                ............................... 153  Lincoln Channel 17437 ................................ 84
Krestof Island 17324 .               .................................         226  Lincoln Island 17316 ................................. 208
Krestof Sound 17324 .                .................................         226  Lincoln Rock 17382 .................................. 117
Krishka Island 17328 .               .................................        219  Lindenberg Harbor 17338.............................. 233
Kritoi Basin 17328 ....................................                       218  Lindenberg Head 17338 ............................... 233
Krugloi Islands 17323 .               ................................        230  Linney Bay 17426 .................................... 111
Krogloi Islet 17323 .               ..................................         232  Lion Point 17425 .................................... 85
Kruzof Island 17325 .                .................................         221  Liscome Bay 17409 .................................. 127
Kuakan Point 17385 ...................................                         121  Lisianski Inlet 17303 .................................. 243
Kuin Island 17360 ....................................                         169  Lisianski Strait 17303 ................................. 239
Kukkan Bay 17322 ................................... 237  Lisianski Strait Light 2 17303 .......................... 239
Kukkan Passage 17322 .                 ............................... 237  List of Lights ........................................ 257
Kulichkof Rock 17326 .                ................................        222  Little Baht Harbor 17382 ............................ 162
Kupreanof Island 17360 .                ............................... 169  Little Bay 17321 ..................................... 238
Kwain Bay 17434 ................................... 107  Little Biorka Island 17326 ............................. 220
                                                                         Little Branch Bay 17330 ...............................                        218
Labandera Rock 17406 .                 ............................... 138  Little Branch Bay Light 17330 ..........................                                    218
Labouchere Bay 17378 .                 ...............................         157  Little Brownson Bay 17433 ............................                               81
Lacey Island 17431 ...................................                         132  Little Daykoo Harbor 17409 ............................ 129
Ladrones Islands 17405 .               ...............................         139  Little Duncan Bay 17360 .............................162
Lake Anna 17322 .....................................                          237  Little Island 17316 ................................... 208
Lake Bay 17401 ......................................                          118  Little Nankati Bay 17403 .............................. 148
Lake Bay Creek 17401 .                 ...............................         118  Little Port Walter 17333 ............................... 199
Lake Fortaleza 17406 .                .................................        138  Little Puffin Bay 17330 ................................ 217
Lamplugh Glacier 17318 .                ..............................         252  Little Pybus Bay 17363 ................................ 172
Lancaster Cove 17436 .                ................................         104  Little Rock 17434 .................................... 87
Lane Island 17434 ....................................                          87  Little Rose Island 17323 ............................... 231
Langara Island 17400 .                ................................. 80  Little Skookum Chuck 17404 ...........................                                      147
Langara Point Light 17400 .               ............................          81  Lively Islands 17407 .................................. 136
Larch Bay 17330 ...................................                            217  Lively Rock 17435 ................................... 108
Lars Island 17318 ....................................                        249  Local magnetic disturbance ............................ 73
Larzatita Island 17404 .              ................................         142  Local magnetic disturbances ............................                             18
Larzatita Island Reef 17404 .             ............................         142  Local Notice to Mariners .............................. 2
Late Point 17300 .....................................                         177  Lock Island 17321 .................................... 238
LaufIslands 17338 ....................................                        233  Lodge Island 17326 ................................... 220
Launch Passage 17404 .                 ................................        145  Logan Point 17427 ...................................85
Lawson Creek 17315 .                 .................................         184  Lone Island 17318 .................................... 250
Le Conte Bay 17360 .                 .................................         167  Lone Mountain 17316 ...........................191
Le Conte Glacier 17360 .                ...............................        167  Lone Rock 17339 .................................... 202
Leading Point 17433 .................................. 130   Lone Tree Island (Lone Spruce Rock) 17407 ...............                                                  133
Learmonth Bank 16016 .                 ..............................           80  Lone Tree Islet 17341 ................................. 201
Leask Cove 17428 ....................................                           90  Long Arm 17423 ..................................... 98
Ledge Island 17316 .                ..................................         208  Long Bay 17300 ..................................... 205
Ledge Point 17424 ....................................                          95  Long Island 17302 ................................... 254
Ledge Point 17437 ....................................                          83  Long Island 17363 ................................... 171
Lee Rock 17420 ......................................                          113  Long Island 17409 ................................... 129
Leesoffskaia Bay 17326 .                ...............................        222  Lontana Point 17407 .................................. 129
Legal public holidays .              .................................          79  Loran-C information .................................. 26
Legma Island 17326 .                 ..................................        220  Lord Islands 17437 ................................... 83
Lehunua Island 17317 .                ................................         211  Lord Rock 17437 .................................... 83
Leland Islands 17318 .................................                         249  Loring 17423 ........................................ 98
Lemesurier Island 17302 .............................                          246  Losa Island 17404 .................................. 147
Lemesurier Point 17423 .                ..............................         113  Lost Cove 17303 ..................................... 239
Lemly Rocks 17423 ...................................                          113  Louise Cove 17386 ................................... 155
Lemon Point 17386 .                 ..................................         154  Low Island 17325 .................................... 221
Lena Cove 17316 .....................................                          193  Low Point 17317 ..................................... 212
Leo Anchorage 17323 .                 ................................         235  Low Point 17382 ..................................... 161
Lester Island 17318 .               .................................. 248  Low Rock 17408 ..................................... 128
Letnikof Cove 17317 .                .................................         211  Lowrie Island 17400 .................................. 126
LevelIslands 17382 .                 ..................................        161  Loy Island 17426 .................................... 112
Lewis Island 17428 ...................................                          88  Luck Point 17360 .................................... 115
Lewis Point 17428 ....................................                          93  Lucky Cove 17428 ................................... 88
Lewis Reef 17428 ....................................                           93  Luke Point 17408 .................................... 134
Lewis Reef Light 11 17428 .               ............................          93  Lulu Island 17406 .................................... 141
Liar Rock 17326 .....................................                          222  Lumber Cove 17303 .................................. 239
Liesnoi Island 17360 .               .................................         163  Luminous range .................................... 19
Liesnoi Island 17365 .               .......................... ......         172  Lung Island 17382 .................................. 161
Liesnoi Shoal 17323 .................................                          231  Lutak Inlet 17317 .................................... 212
Light and fog signal characteristics ...... ................                     2   Lydonia Island 17321 ................................. 237
Light Lists ..........................................    5,257  Lyman Anchorage 17426 .............................. 113
Lighter Creek 17339                 . ................................         204  Lyman Point 17426 .................................. 114
Lights .............................................                            19  Lyman Rock 17426 ............................... 114
Lime Point 17431 .....................................                         132  Lynn Brothers 17316 .............................. 210
Limrestone Inlet 17314 .               ...............................         179  Lynn Canal 17300 ................................... 207






1- 12


                                     Page                                                                               Page
Lynn Sisters 17316...................208 Menefee Anchorage 17432 ...............102
                                          Menefee Inlet 17385 ..................121
Mab Island 17316 ...................210 Menefee Islands 17432 .................102
Mabel Bay 17431 ...................132 Menefee Point 17385..................121
Mabel Island 17423...................115 Mercator projection ..................18
Mabel Island 17431...................132 Merrifield Bay 17378..................158
Macnamara Point 17382.................119 Meter Bight 17382...................123
Madan Bay 17385 ...................123 Metlakatla 17435 ...................107
Madre de Dios Island 17405 ...............139 Mexico Point 17433 ..................130
Magnetic disturbances..................18, 73 Meyers Chuck 17423 ............... ..113
Magnetic Point 17423..................120 Meyers Island 17423..................113
Magoun Islands 17324 .................226 Midchannel Rock 17385 ................122
Mahoney Bight 17428..................89 Middle Arm 17337...................201
Maid Island 17326 ...................220 Middle Breaker 17322 .................235
Makhnati Islands 17328.................219 Middle Channel 17326 .................219
Male Point 17437 ...................84 Middle Channel 17327 .................223
Mallard Bay 17433...................100 Middle Island 17321 ..................238
Manhattan Arm 17408..................128 Middle Island 17382 ..................118
Mansfield Peninsula 17316................191 Middle Island 17387 ..................157
Manzanita Bay 17424..................95 Middle Island 17408 ..................128
Manzanita Island 17424.................95 Middle Island 17433 ..................130
Maple Bay 17425 ...................85 Middle Point 17315 ..................190
Marabilla Island 17406..................144 Middle Point 17323 ..................231
Marble Island 17403 ..................149 Middle Point Rock 17323 ................231
Marble Islands 17318..................249 Middle Shoal 17324 ..................226
Marble Islet 17386 ...................155 Midway Island 17302..................254
Marble Passage 17403..................149 Midway Island 17407..................136
Marble Point 17382...................116 Midway Islands 17300 .................178
Margerie Glacier 17318 .................252 Midway Islands 17363 .................171
Marguerite Bay 17422 .............I....97 Midway Point 17360..................177
Marine Broadcast Notices to Mariners ...........2 Midway Reef 17338 ..................233
Marine Weather Services Chart ..............257, 259  Midway Rock 17323..................231
Mariposa Reef 17360..................156 Midway Rock 17375..................164
Mariposa Rock 173 82..................117 Midway Rocks 17302..................254
Maritime Radio Users Handbook .............257 Mike Point 17422 ...................97
Marmion Island 17315 ..1...............0S Mill Creek 17385 ...................123
Marmot Bay 17425...................85 Mill Reef 17409....................134
Marnot River 17425 ..................85 Millar Rocks 17407 ..................129
Marsh Island 17382...................117 Miner Cove 17331...................199
Marten Arm 17427...................88 Miner Island 17303 ..................240
Martin Rock 17435...................108 Minesweeper signals..................28
Mary Island 17434 ...................87 Mink Bay 17427....................88
Mary Island Anchorage 17434 ..............87 Minnie Bay 17433...................81
Mary Island Light 17434.................87 Minnie Cutoff 17433..................130
Mastic Rock 17428...................88 Minnie Reef 17321...................237
Maurelle Islands 17404 .................145 Mirror Harbor 17321..................238
Max Cove 17431....................131 Misery Island 17423 ..................113
Maybeso Creek 17426..................112 Mission Cove 17409 ..................134
McArthur Reef 17382..................161 Mist Cove 17335 ...................199
McClellan Flats 17317 .................211 Mist Island 17313 ...................179
McClellan Rock 17338 .................233 Mitchell Bay 17339 ..................204
McCullock Rock 17420 .................82 Mitchell Point 17382..................161
McDonald Islands 17360.................167 Mite Cove 17303 ...................243
McDonald Rock 17360 .................175 Mite Head 17303 ...................243
McFarland Islands 17408 ................135 Mite Island 17303 ...................243
McHenry Anchorage 17360 ...............116 Mitkof Island 17360 ..................162
McHenry Inlet 17382..................116 Moira Island 17432 ..................102
McHenry Islet 17382 ..................116 Moira Sound 17432 ..................102
McHenry Ledge 17423 .................113 Mole Harbor 17360 ..................177
McKenzie Inlet 17426..1................1I Monte Carlo Island 17372................159
McKenzie Rock 17426 ..1...............1I Mop Point 17428 ...................89
McLean Arm 17433 ..................101 Morris Reef 17338...................233
McLean Point 17433 ..................101 Morse Cove 17434...................87
McLeod Bay 17409...................129 Morakoi Rock 17323..................229
McNairy Point 17365..................174 Moser Bay 17423 ...................98
Meadow Island 17360..................159 Moser Island 17323 ..................232
Mean Low Water....................15 Moser Island 17423 ..................98
Meares Island 17407 ..................137 Mosman Inlet 17382 ..................116
Meares Passage 17407..................128 Mosquito Islands 17368.................169
Medical advice ....................12 Moss Island 17360...................160
Medical advice and/or evacuation .............11 Moss Point 17434 ...................105
Mellen Rock 17431...................132 Moth Bay 17428....................89
Melville Island 17420..................82 Mound Point 17426 ..................112
MendenhaillBar 17315 .................180,184 Mount Calder 17387 ..................157
Mendenhall Glacier 17315................191 Mount Dolly 17425 ..................85





                                                                                     1- 13


                                       Page                                                                               Page
Mount Douglas 17321..................238 Needle Peak 17402...................153
Mount Edgecumbe 17325.................221 Neets Bay 17422....................97
Mount Edgecumbe 17327.................223 Nehenta Bay 17432...................109
Mount Georgiana 17323.................229 Neka Bay 17302....................254
Mount Henry 17420...................82 Neka Island 17302...................254
Mount Lazaro 17434 ..................82 Nellag Island 17408 ..................128
Mount Lydonia 17321 ..........I.......238 Nelson Bay 17320 ...................200
Mount McArthur 17386 .................196 Nemo Point 17382...................122
Mount Robert Barron 17316 ...............191  Neptune Island 17385..................123
Mount Woronkofski 17382................124 Nesbitt Reef 17382...................119
Mountain Head 17323..................231  Netlassd Island 17318..................249
Mountain Point 17375 ..................164 Neva Bay 17325....................227
Mountain Point 17428..................89 Neva Point Reef 17324 .................226
Mountain Point Light.17428 ...............89  Neva Strait 17324 ...................226
Mt. Katlian 17320 ...................217 Now Eddystone Islands 17424 ..............95
Mud Bay 17302 ....................246 New Eddystone Rock 17424 ...............95
Mud Bay 17324 ~....................226 New Port Walter 17333 .................199
Mud Bay 17428 ....................94 Now Tokeen 17403...................150
Mud Bay 17431 ....................132 Niblack Anchorage 17432................103
Mud Bay River 17302..................246 Nihlack Islands 17385..................121
Muffin Islands 17385 ................k.                                   115 Nihlack Point 17426 ..................113
Muir Glacier 17318 ...................250 Nichin Cove 17403...................148
Muir Inlet 17318....................250 Nichols Bay 17433...................81
Mule Rock 17435....................105 Nichols Islands 17407..................136
Murder Cove 17336 .................g  172 Nichols Lake 17433 ..................81
Murdo Island 17435...................108  Nichols Passage 17432, 17434 ..............107
Myriad Islands 17322 ................237 Nina Cove 17409 ...................129
                                             Ninefoot Shoal 17322..................236
Nagasay Cove 17404..                                                       ................145  Nipples, The 17387...................157
Naha Bay 17423....................98 Niquette Harbor 17434 .................106
Nahku Bay 17317 ...................214 Nismeni Cove 17338 ..................232
Nakat Bay 17437....................83 Nismeni Point 17323..................232
Nakat Harbor 17437...................83  NIST Time and Frequency Dissemination Services, Special Publication 432 13
Nakat Inlet 17437 ...................83 No Name Bay 17360 ..................159
Naked Island 17316...................208 No Thorofare Bay 17326 ................222
Nskwasina Passage 17324 ................226  No Thorofare Point 17375................164
Nakwasina Sound 17324 ................226 No Use Ledge 17316..................208
Narrow channels....................30 NOAA Weather Radio;................7, 13, 259
Narrow Pass 17434...................94 Nominal range.....................19
Narrow Point 17420...................114 Noon Point 17302 ...................246
Narrows, The 17302....................254 Norris Glacier 17315 ..................180
Narrows, The 17385...................122, 123 North Arm 17323 ...................232
Narrows, The 17433...................130 North Arm 17339 ...................202
Nation Point 17402...................195 North Arnm 17432 ...................103
National Environmental Satellite, Data, and Information Service             7   North Bay 17407....................136
National Forest, Tongass.................72 North Bight 17302 ..................254
National Historical Park, Sitka 17327............225  North Burnett Island 17382 ...............116
National Institute of Standards and Technology........13  North Cape 17328 ...................218
National Military Cemetery 17327.............225  North Flat 17375....................164
National Ocean Service .................3 North Inian Pass 17302 .................245
National Ocean Service Offices ..............256  North Island 17316...................210
National Park and Preserve, Glacier Bay 17318........247  North Island 17341...................201
National Park System Units in Alaska............61  North Island 17386...................154
National Weather Service.................7 North Kaigani Harbor 17409...............134
National Weather Service Forecast Offices (WSFOs).....7,260  North Ledge 17316...................208
National Weather Service Offices .............7,259  North Ledge 17375...................164
National Weather Service Port Meteorological Officers (PMOs)           7,260   North Marble Island 17318................249
Natoma Bay 17409....................130 North Mountain 17321 .................238
Natoma Point 17409 ..................130 North Pass 17303 ...................239
Natzuhini Bay 17407 ............-......133 North Pass 17407 ...................133
Naukati Bay 17403...................148 North Passage 17302 ..................246
Nautical Almanac.                                                           ..................257 North Passage 17365 ..................172
Nautical Charts  ....................256 North Passage Point 17300................205
Nautical charts....................3, 13 North Point 17337 ...................201
Naval Observatory ...................26 North Point 17339 ...................204
Navigation Rules ...................257 North Point 17375 ...................164
Navigation Safety Regulations..............51 North Rock 17326...................220
Navigation, Satellite...................24  North Sandy Cove 17318 ..                                                                                           ..............249
NAVSAT ....................24 North Sawyer Glacier 17300...............178
NAVSAT Navigation System ...............24 Northerly Island 17382~.................161
NAVTEX .................... ..13 Nossuk Anchorage 17404 ..........I......146
NAVTEX Transmitting Stations..............258  Nossuk Bay 17404...................146
Neck Point 17316....................255 Notices to Mariners..................2, 257
Necker Bay 17328 ...................219 Nowiskay Cove 17432 .................103
Necker Islands 17326 ..................220 Noyes Island 17406..................143





I - 14


                                     Page                                                                              Page
Noyes Peak 17406 ...................143 Pelican Entrance Light 17303 ..............243
Nukdik Point 17317...................211 Pellett Point 17426...................112
Nundei Cove 17404...................147 Peninsula Point 17428 .................93
Nunez Point 17433...................81 Peninsular Point 17338 .................204
Nunez Rocks 17433...................81 Pennock Island 17430 .................90
Nut Rock 17382 ....................116 Pennock Reef 17430 ..................90
Nutkwa Falls 17431...................132 Peratrovich Island 17405 ................141
Nutkwa Inlet 17431...................132 Percy Islands 17434 ..................105
Nutkwa Lagoon 17431 .................132 Percy Point 17434...................105
Nutkwa Point 17431 ..................132 Peril Strait 17320 ...................230
                                          Peschani Point 17338 ..................232
Obsechki Island 17326 .................222 Petersburg 17375 ...................165
Observation Island 17382 ................117  Petersburg Creek 17375.................165
Observation Rock 17437.................83 Petersen Islands 17385 .................120
Obstructnons......................2 Petrel Island 17400 ...................126
Ogden Passage 17322..................237 Petrof Bay 17376 ...................197
Ohio Rock 17428...................94 Phipp Point 17437...................84
Oil Pollution .....................29 Phocena Bay 17436, 17420 ...............109
Oil Spills.......................79 Phocena Rocks 17432 .................109
Old Kasaan 17426 ..1.................1I Piedras Island 17404..................142
Old Kasaan Village Historical Area 17426..11.......1I  Piehle Passage 17322..................235
Old Sitka Rocks 17324 .................225 Pigeon Island 17406 ..................142
Olga Rock 17323....................229 Piledriver Cove 17316 .................205
Olga Strait 17324....................226 Piledriver Cove 17376 .................197
Olive Cove 17385 ...................122 Pillsbury Point 17339..................204
Oliver Inlet 17300 ...................190 Pilotage, Alaska....................77
Olympic Mine 17360 ..................161 Pilotage, Haines....................212
OMEGA.......................25 Pilotage, Juneau....................184
Omega........................26 Pilotage, Ketchikan ..................91
Omnmaney Bay 17330..................217 Pilotage, Klawock...................141
One-Tree Island 17435 .................107 Pilotage, Metlakatla ..................107
Onslow Island 17385 ..................115 Pilotage, Petersburg ..................165
Onslow Point 17385 ..................115 Pilotage, Sitka.....................224
Open Bay 17436....................110 Pilotage, Skagway...................214
Optical Phenomena...................76 Pilotage, Wrangell...................124
Ores Point 17434....................88 Pin Peak 17402 ....................153
Orr Island 17403....................149 Pine Point 17381 ...................160
Ossipee Channel 17382 .................119 Pinta Bay 17321....................238
Otstnia Island 17323 ..................232 Pints Cove 17302 ...................246
Outer Point 17315 ...................191 Pints Rock 17302 ...................252
Outer Point 17406 ...................143 Pinta Rocks 17360, 17368................169
Outer Point 17426 ...................112 Pipelaying barges ...................73
Outer Rocks 17322...................235 Piper Island 17323...................230
Owl Island 17403 ...................149 Pirate Cove 17326...................222
                                          Pitt Island 17302....................253, 254
Pack Creek 17300 ...................177 Pivot Mountain 17400 .................80
Palisade Island 17404..................143 Plateau Glacier 17318 .................250
Palisade Point 17404 ..................143 Pleasant Bay 17360 ..................177
Paloma Pass 17406...................142 Pleasant Island 17302..................246
Papkes Landing 17375 .................164 Pleasant Island Reef 17302 ...............247
Paradise Flats 17338 ..................233 Plumsa Island 17321 ..................238
Paralysis Point 17368..................171 Pocket Island 17360 ..................163, 167
Panida Island 17405...................139 Pogibshi Anchorage 17323................231
Panida Island Reef 17405 ................139 Pogibshi Point 17323..................231
Parrot Rock 17409 ..1................. Point Adolphus 17302 .................246
Partofahikof Island 17324 ............ ....226 Point Agassiz 17367 ..................167
Passage Island 17339 ..................204 Point Aguirre 17404 ..................145
Passage Rock 17437 ..................83 Point Alava 17434...................94
Patterson Bay 17323 ..................232 Point Alexander 17382 .................162
Patterson Bay 17335 ..................199 Point Amargura 17405 .................139
Patterson Glacier 17367.................168 Point Amelia 17325 ..................228
Patterson Island 17426 .................110 Point Amelius 17386..................155
Patterson Point 17335..................199 Point Ancon 17382...................124
Paul Bight 17426 .....................l Point Animas 17406 ..................142
Paul Lake 17432....................103 Point Anmer 17313 ..................179
Pavlof Harbor 17300 ..................205 Point Arboleda 17406..................138
Payne Island 17368 ..................169 Point Arden 17315...................179
Peacock Island 17426 ..1................l Point Arucenas 17406 .................138
Pearse Canal 17437...................84 Point Astley 17360...................177
Pearse Canal Island Light 17437..............84  Point Augusta 17300..................205
Pearse Island 17437...................84 Point Baker 17360...................156, 160
Peep Rock 17404....................147 Point Baker 17378...................158
Peer Island 17321 ...................238 Point Barnes 17382 ..................118
Peisar Island 17326...................221 Point Barrie 17360...................158
Pelican 17303.....................243 Point Barrigon 17406..................138






                                                                                                                          1-15


                                                         Page                                                                    Page
Point Batan 17405 ....................................          138  Point Lull 17337 ................................... 201
Point Benham 17338 ..................................           233  Point Macartney 17368 ................................ 169
Point Borlase 17402 ...................................         153  Point Madan 17385 ................................... 123
Point Bridge 17339 ...................................          204  Point Mansfield 17437 ................................ 83
Point Bridget 17316 ...................................  210  PointMarsden 17300 ................................. 205
Point Brightman 17336 ................................          172  Point Marsh 17433 ........... ....................... 81
Point Camden 17368 ........................... ......           170  Point Marsh Light 17433 .............................. 81
Point Cangrejo 17406 .................................          138  Point Mary 17325 .................................... 228
Point Carolus 17318 ...................................         247  Point McCartey 17432 ................................ 107
Point Caution 17341 ..................................          201  Point Miliflores 17405 ................................ 138
Point Coke 17360 .....................................          177  Point Miraballes 17405 ................................ 139
Point Colpoys 17382 ..................................   119, 160  Point Napean 17365 .................................. 172
Point Conclusion 17331 ................................         198  Point Nesbitt 17382 .................................. 119
Point Comrnwallis 17409 ................................        127  Point Peters 17385 ................................... 121
Point Cosmos 17376 ............. ................. 196  Point Providence 17405 ............................... 138
Point Couverden 17316 ................................          208  Point Pybus 17363 ................................... 171
Point Craven 17338 ...................................          233  Point Quemada 17406 ................................. 138
Point Crowley 17386 ..................................          196  Point Remedios 17406 ................................ 138
Point Davison 17434 ..................................          105  Point Retreat 17316 ................................... 208
Point Delgada 17406 ..................................          142  Point Rosary 17406 ................................... 138
Point Desconocida 17404 ..............................          146  Point Samuel 17339 .................................. 202
Point Dundas 17302 ...................................          246  Point San Francisco 17406 ............................. 144
Point Eliza 17331 .....................................         198  Point San Jose 17406 ................................. 138
Point Elizabeth 17338 .................................         233  Point San Pasqual 17404 ............................... 143
Point Ellis 17370 ............a........................         197  Point San Roque 17406 ................................ 138
Point Ellis Light 17370 ................................        197    Point Santa Anna 17385 ............................... 121
Point Eugenia 17405 ..................................          139    Point Santa Gertrudis 17406 .................... ....... 142
Point Eva 17424 ......................................           95  Point Santa Lucia 17404 ............................... 142
Point Francis 17422 ...................................          97  Point Santa Rosalia 17404 ............................. 143
Point Fula 17406 .....................................          138  Point Santa Theresa 17406 ............................. 144
Point Gambler 17362 ..................................          176  Point Satchrun 17303 ................................. 240
Point Garcia 17404 ...................................          145  Point Shekesti 17384 ................................. 124
Point Gardner 17336 ..................................          173  Point Sherman 17316 ................................. 210
Point Glass 17360 ....................................          177  Point Shultz 17321 ................................... 238
Point Gorda 17406 ....................................          141  Point Siroi Island 17323 ............................... 231
Point Gustavus 17318 .................................          247  Point Slocum 17323 .................................. 235
Point Halliday 17432 ..................................         103  Point Sophia 17302 ................................... 253
Point Hamilton 17368 .................................          170  Point St. Albans 17386 ................................ 155
Point Hanus 17338 ....................................          233  Point St. Albans Reef 17386 ............................ 155
Point Hardscrabble 17402 ..............................         156  Point St. Isidor 17406 ................................ 144
Point Harrington 17382 ................................         117  Point St. John 17382 .................................. 161
Point Harris 17376 ....................................         196  Point St. Mary 17316 ................................. 210
Point Hayes 17338 ....................................          233  Point Stanhope 17382 ................................. 117
Point Hayes 17338, 17320 ..............................         204  Point Stephens 17316 ................................. 193
Point Hepburn 17300 ..................................          204  Point Stephens Rock 17316 ............................ 193
Point Higgins 17428 ..................................           94  Point Styleman 17313 ................................. 179
Point Highfield 17384 .................................         124  Point Sullivan 17370 .................................. 198
Point Highland 17360 .......... . .....................         168  Point Swift 17404 .................................... 147
Point Hilda 17315 ....................................          190  Point Swift Rock 17404 ............ .................. 147
Point Hobart 17363 ...................................          175  Point Sykes 17434 ................................... 94
Point Hogan 17321 ...................................           238  Point Tantallon 17315 ................................. 190
Point Howard 17316 ..................................           208  Point Thatcher 17320 ................................ 201
Point Howard 17386 .................................            196  Point Thatcher 17338 .....................233
Point Howe 17382 ....................................           162  Point Theodore 17303 ................................. 239
Point Hugh 17360 ....................................           176  Point Turbot 17337 ................................... 200
Point Hugh Light 17360 ...............................          177  Point Urey 17303 ......................239
Point Ildefonso 17404 ................................          142  Point Vandeput 17367 ................................ 168
Point Incarnation 17404 ................................        144  Point Verde 17407 .................................... 137
Point Iphigenia 17405 .................................         138  Point Walpole 17360 .................................. 175
PointIsleta 17406 ....................................          138  Point Warde 17385 ................................... 121
Point Kakul 17323 ....................................          230  Point Webster 17431..............:................... 131
Point Kennedy 17338 ..................................          233  Point Weigle 17321 ................................... 238
Point Lauder 17328 ...................................          218  Point Whidbey 17316 ................................. 210
Point Lavinia 17302 ..................................          244  Point White 17368 ................................... 169
Point League 17360 ................ .................           176  Point White 17434 ................................... 105
Point Lees 17422 ...................................             96  Point Wimbledon 17302 ............................... 245
Point Lena 17316 ....................................           193  Point Winslow 17434 ................................. 87
Point Leo 17323 ....................................            229  Point Woodhouse 17326 ......... ..................... 220
PointLockwood 17375 ..............................              164  Point Young 17315 ................................... 190
Point Lockwood Rock 17375 ............................          164  Poison Cove 17323 ................................... 231
Point Lomas 17405 ...................................           138  Pole Anchorage 17402 ............................... 156
Point Lookout 17360 ..................................          176  Pole Point 17322 ..................................... 237
Point Louisa 17315 ...................................          191  Polivnoi Rocks 17365 ................................. 172
Point Louise 17424 .. ................................           95  Polk Inlet 17426 ..................................... 111
Point Lucan 17302 ...................................           244  Polk Island 17432 ..........................102






1- 16


                                      Page                                                                               Page
Polk Point 17384....................124 Prolewy Rock 17323..................231
Pond Bay 17409....................134 Prolewy Rocks 17375..................165
Pond Bay 17434..................I..106 Promisla Bay 17324 ..................226
PondlIsland 17337 ...................201 Protection Head 17378 .................158
Pond Reef 17428....................94 Public Health Service..................6
Pond Rock 17408 ...................134  Public Health Service Quarantine Stations .........260
Porcupine Bay 17321..................239 Publications .....................256
Porcupine Creek 17382 .................117 Puffin Bay 17330 ...................217
Porcupine Islands 17321.................239 Puffin Island 17318...................249
Porcupine Rock 17321 .................239 Pulizzi Island 17316 ..................255
Porpoise Islands 17316 .................247 Punchbowl Cove 17424.................95
Port Alexander 17331..................198 Pup Island 17368 ...................170
Port Alice 17403....................148 Pup Island 17422 ...................98
Port Althorp 17302...................244 Purple Mountain 17435.................109
Port Armstrong 17331..................198 Pybus Bay 17363.....I..............171
Port Asumcion 17406..................138 Pyramid Harbor 17317 .................211
Port Bagial 17405 ...................139 Pyramid Island 17317..................211
Port Banks 17328 ...................218
Port Bazan 17409 ...................127 Quadra Point 17434 ..................87
Port Beauclerc 17360..................155 Quarantine stations...................260
Port Caldera 17405...................138 Quarantine stations, human ...............260
Port Camden 17368...................170 Quarantine, Animal .................2, 260
Port Chester 17435...................107 Quarantine, human..................6, 260
Port Conclusion 17331 .................198 Quarantine, Plant ...................2,260
Port Delores 17406...................138 Quartz Point 17302...................246
Port Estrella 17405...................138 Quartz Rock 17360...................116
Port Frederick 17302 ..................252 Queen Inlet 17318...................251
Port Herbert 17333...................199 Quiet Harbor 17382 ..................123
Port Houghton 17360..................175 Quit Point 17322 ...................236
Port Island 17322....................237 Quitasueno Rock 17406.................142
Port Johnson 17432...................103
Port Krestof 17324...................226 Race Point 17428 ...................109
Port Lucy 17333....................199 RacheklIsland 17326..................220
Port Malmesbury 17376, 17320 .............  196 Racons .......................23
Port Mary 17325....................227 Radar........................30
Port Mayoral 17406...................138 Radar beacons (Racons).................23
Port McArthur 17386..................154  Radar reflectors on small craft ..............12
Port Protection 17378..................158 Radenbough Cove 17430 ................90
Port Real Marina 17406.................141 Radio aids to navigation.................2
Port Refugio 17407...................137 Radio bearings ....................21
Port San Antonio 17406.................138 Radio distress procedures................                                                                             8
Port Santa Cruz 17406..................138  Radio navigation warnings and weather ..........12
Port Series of the United States ..............257  Radio Navigational Aids ................257
Port Snettishamn 17313..................178  Radio shore stations providing medical advice........260
Port St. Nicholas 17405 .................139  Radio Weather Broadcasts................259
Port Stewart 17422...................97 Radiobeacons.....................20
Port Tongass 17437...................83  Radiofacsimile Weather Information............260
Port Walter 17333 ...................199 RADIOMEDICAL...................12, 260
Port Walter Light 17333.................199  RADIONAVIGATION USER INFORMATION                                                                    .......26
Portage Arm 17337...................201 Radiotelephone channels ................31
Portage Bay 17367...................168 Rakof Islands 17326 ..................219
Portage Bay 17368...................170 Rakovoi Bay 17328 ..................219
Portage Bay 17431...................132 Ralston Island 17316..................208
Portage Cove 17317 ..................211 Ramp Island 17322...................236
Portage Cove 17424 ..................96 Rana Reef 17406 ...................141
Portage Islets 17367 ..................168 Rancheria Island 17405.................139
Portillo Channel 17406 .................142 Range Island 17382 ..................116
Portland Canal 17427..................84 Range Islet 17381 ...................160
Portland Inlet 17427 ..................84 Ranges .......................2
Portland Island 17316..................191 Rapids Island 17323 ..................231
Portlock Harbor 17321 .................238 Raso Rock 17404 ...................146
Ports and Waterways Safety-General............39  Rasp Ledge 17360...................177
Potter Rock 17430 ...................90 Rat Island 17316....................208
Poundatone Rock 17316.................208 Ratz Harbor 17423...................115
Povorotni Island 17323 .................231 Raven Island 17434 ..................88
Povorotni Point 17326..................222 Ray Anchorage 17434 .................87
Pow Island 17428 ...................88 Raymond Cove 17422 .................97
Preparations for being towed by Coast Guard.........12  Read Island 17367...................168
President Bay 17326 ..................220 Red Bay 17381 ....................160
Price Island 17362 ...................176 Red Bluiff Bay 17336..................200
Prince Island 17338...................233  Redcliff Islands 17300 .................205
Princesa Island 17404..................145 Redfish Bay 17330...................218
PrincessaBay 17424.................. 95 Redfish Breaker 17330 .................217
Principal ports.....................77 Redflsh Cape 17330 ..................217
Profit Island (Gui Kangulas) 17408.............135  Redfish Point 17330 ..................217







                                                                                I- 17


                                     Page                                                                            Page
Redoubt Bay 17326...................221 Ruth Cutoff 17431...................131
Redoubt Lake 17326 ..................221 Ruth Island 17367 ...................168
Reef Harbor 17434 ...................87 Rynda Island 17360 ..................163
Reef Island 17427 ...................85 Ryus Bay 17434....................106
Reef Island Light 17427 .................85
Reef Islands 17408 ...................135  Sachem .................... 173810
Reef Point 17382 ~...................124 Safa Islands 17437...................84
Reef Point 17406....................142 Safety Rock 17432 ~..................103
Reef Point 17408....................135 Saginaw Bay 17368 ..................170
Reef Point 17428....................88 Saginaw Channel 17316 .................191
Refuge Cove 17428...................93 Sail Island 17360....................175
Regina Cove 17437...................84 Sailing Directions ...................257
Regulated Navigation Areas and Limited Access Areas            .        ...56  Sakie Bay 17408....................128
Reid Bay 17360 ....................156 Sakie Point 17408 ...................128
Reid INlet 17318....................252 Saks Cove 17424....................96
Rendu Inlet 17318 ...................251 Sales agents......................3
Repairs........................78 Sales Information ...................256
Reported information ..................2 Salisbury Sound 17323 .................229
Reports from ships................... 13 Salmon Bay 17382...................119
Rescue Coordination Centers ..............9, 259  Salmon Creek 17315 ..................180
Retaliation Point 17368 .................171 Salmon River 17302 ..................247
Reverdy Mountains 17425 ................85 Salmon River 17425 ..................85
Revillagigedo Channel 17420...............86  Salmonberry Cove 17323 ................230
Revillagigedo Island 17420................86 Sailt Chuck 17302 ...................254
Ridge Island 17407...................137 Salt Lagoon 17420...................90
Rip Point 17432 ....................102 Salt Lake Bay 17302 ..................254
River Point 17427 ...................84 Salt Lake Bay 17404 ..................146
Roadstead Island 17368 .................170 Salt Water Lagoon 17403 ................150
Robert Islands 17360..................175 Saltchuck, The 17433..................131
Rock Point 17303....................240 Saltery Bay 17300 ...................205
Rock Point 17360....................178 Saltery Cove 17426....................1I
RockyfBay 17382....................117 Saltery Point 17431...................133
Rocky Cove 17403 ...................151 Samaing Cove 17326..................222
Rocky Island 17316...................207 San Adrian Island 17407.................137
Rocky Pass 17368 ...................170 San Alberto Bay 17405 .................139
Rocky Pass 17372 ...................159  San Christoval Channel 17404 ..............142
Rocky Pass 17433 ...................130 San Christoval Rock 17404 ...............142
Rocky Point 17341 ...................202 San Clemente Island 17406 ...............142
Rodman Bay 17338...................232 San Fernando Island 17405................139
Rodman Rock 17338 ..................232 San Francisco Island 17406 ...............144
Roe Point 17434 ....................94 San Island 17403....................150
Roller Bay 17406..                                                       .................143  San Juan Bautista Island 17405..............138
Romp Island 17362...................176 San Juan Islands 17363 .................171
Rookery Islands 17382 .................119  San Juanito Island 17405 ................138
Roosevelt Harbor 17382.................123  San Lorenzo Islands 17404................144
Roosevelt Lagoon 17423 ................98 Sand Island 17339 ...................202
Rosa Reef 17428....................94 Sand Islet 17360....................116
Rosa Reef Light 15 17428 ................94 Sand Point 17341 ...................201
Rosary Island 17404 ..................142 Sand Spit 17360....................178
Rose Channel 17323 ..................231 Sandbomn Canal 17360 .................175
Rose Channel Rock 17323 ................231 Sandfly Bay 17427...................85
Rose Inlet 17408....................134 Sandy Bay 17328 ...................218
Rose Island 17382 ...................118 Sandy Cove 17326...................222
Rose Island Rock 17323.................231 Sandy Point 17426...................112
Rose Rock 17382....................118 Sanford Cove 17360 ..................178
Rough Channel 17322..................236 Santa Anna Inlet 17385 .................121
Round Island 17323...................230 Santa Rita Island 17406.................141
Round Island 17326...................222 Sanok Bay 17338 ...................233
Round Island 17337...................201 Saook Point 17338...................233
Round Island 17382...................119 Sargent Bay 17424...................95
Round Island 17407 ...........I.......136 Sarheen Cove 17387 ..................151
Round Island 17426 ..11................i Sarkar Cove 17403...................150
Round Island 17428...................89 Sarkar Point 17403...................150
Round Islands 17433 ..................130 Satellite Navigation...................24
Round Islet 17360 ...................178  SATELLITE POSITION INDICATING RADIO BEACON (EPIRB)  21
Round Point 17382...................123 Sawmill Cove 17326 ..................222
Round Point 17431...................132 Saxman 17430 ....................90
Round Rock 17363...................171 Scenery Cove 17367 ..................168
Rowan Bay 17370 ...................197 Schulze Cove 17323 ..................230
Rudyerd Bay 17424...................95 Scidmore Bay 17318 ..................251
Rudyerd Island 17434..................94 Scidmore Glacier 17318.................251
Ruins Point 17386, 173 87 ................156 Scott Point 17432 ...................101
Rush Point 17318....................249 Scow Bay 17326....................219
Russell Island 17318 ..................252 Scow Bay 17375....................164
Russian Reef 17341...................201 Scow Cove 17315 ...................180









                                     Page                                                                              Page
Scow Island 17326...................219 Shoe Rock 17431 ...................131
Scow Island 17403...................150 Shoemaker Bay Boat Harbor 17384 ............125
Scrag Islands 17407...................133 Sholin Island 17321 ..................238
Scraggy Island 17302..................252 Short Arm 17433 ...................101
Scraggy Islands 17324 ..................227 Short Bay 17422....................96
Scraggy Point 17432 ..................103 Short Finger Bay 17300.................177
Screen Islands 17382 ..................117 Short Pass 17424 ...................95
Scrub Islands 17435 ..................108 Short Point 17424 ...................94
Scull Island 17315 ...................190 Shrimp Bay 17422...................96
Sea Lion Rock 17400..................126 Shrub Islet 17402 ...................195
Sea Otter Harbor 17408 .................128 Shrubby Island 17382..................118
Sea Otter Sound 17403 .................149 Siginaka Islands 17324 .................226
Sea Rock 17323 ....................229 Siketi Point 17406...................143
Seagull Crock 17302 ..................254 Siketi Sound 17406 ..................143
Seal Bay 17300 ....................205 Silver Bay 17326 ...................222
Seal Cove 17428, 17434.................109 Silver Point 17326...................222
Seal Cove Rock 17428 .................109 Silvester Point 17406..................138
Seal Rock 17382....................118 Simmons Point 17431 .................132
Scaled Passage 17434..................105 Simonton Point 17437 .................83
Scalers Island 17318 ..................250 Singa Island 17403...................150
Scaling Cove, 17327 ..................223 Sinitsin Cove 17323 ..................230
Sealing Reef 17434...................105 Sinitsin Island 17323..................230
Sealion Cove 17325...................228 Sister Lake 17322 ...................237
Scalion Islands 17325..................228 Sisters Reef 17316...................254
Sealion Rocks 17330 ..................217 Sisters, The 17316...................254
Search and Rescue ...................8 Sita Reef 17318....................249
Searchlights......................30 Sitka 17327......................223
Sebree Cove 17318...................250 Sitka Harbor 17327, 17320 ...............223
Sebree Island 17318 ..................250  Sitka National Historical Park 17327............225
Secluded Bay 17328 ..................219 Sitka Point 17325 ...................221
Seclusion Harbor 17360.................159 Sitka Sound 17320...................221
Second Narrows 17326 .................219, Sitklan Island 17437 ..................83
Security Bay 17368...................170 Sitklan Passage 17437 .................83
Security Cove 17409 ..................127 Sitkoh Bay 17338 ...................234
Seduction Point 17317..................211 Skagway 17317....................214
Seiche........................27 Skagway River 17317 .................214
Seismic sea waves ...................27 Skiff Island 17372...................159
Selected Worldwide Marine Weather Broadcasts .......257  Skin Island 17436 ...................104
Sentinel Island 17316..................208 Skinner Island 17321..................238
Sentinels, The 17407 ..................136 Skookumn Chuck, The 17407...............136
Sergief Island 17360 ..................163 Skowl Arm 17426 ....................I
Sergius Channel 17323 .................230 Skowi. Island 17426 ..1................1I
Sevenfathomn Bay 17326.................220 Skowl Point 17426 ..1.................I
Seward Passage 17385 .................121 Slab Hill 17420 ....................82
Sextant Point 17434...................105 Slag Point 17424 ...................95
Seymour Canal 17360, 17300...............176 Slate Islands 17434.................. 88
Shaft Rock 17406 ................ ...143 Slate Islands Light 17434 ................88
Shag Cove 17318....................250 Slate Islets 17328 ...................219
Shag Rock 17321....................238 Slaughter Island 17325 .................228
Shakan Bay 17387 ...................157 Slim Island 17437 ...................83
Shakan Island 17387 ..................157 Slocum Ann 17322 ..................236
Shakan Strait 17387...................157 Slocum Inlet 17314 ..................179
Shaman Island 17315..................190 Small Arm 17328 ...................219
Shamrock Bay 17326..................220 Small-craft facilities ..................79
Sharp Ledge 17316...................207 Smeaton Bay 17424 ..................94
Sharp Point 17365 ...................172 Smith Cove 17426....................1I
Sharp Point 17424 ...................95 Smooth Channel 17322.................236
Shaw Islands 17302...................246 Smuggler Cove 17434 .................107
Sheep Creek Flat 17315.................180 Smugglers Cove 17422.................98
Sheliof Bay 17325...................227 Snag Island 17321...................238
Shelter Cove 17405...................140 Snail Point 17404 ...................144
Shelter Island 17316 ..................191 Snail Point 17406 ...................142
Sherman Rock 17316..................210 Snail Point 17422 ...................97
Shikosi Island 17317 ..................210 Snail Rock 17434 ...................87
Shinaku Inlet 17405...................139 Snip Islands 17424...................95
Shingle Island 17360 ..................160 Snipe Bay 17328, 17320 ................218
Ship Cove 17331....................198 Snipe Head 17328...................218
Ship Island 17426 ...................113 Snipe Island 17428...................89
Ship Islands 17431...................131  Snipe Island 17435.                                                                                              ~.................106
Shipley Bay 17386, 17387................157 Snipe Point 17422...................96
Shipwreck Point 17431 .................131 Snipe Point Light 17422.................96
Shoal Cove 17428 ...................89 Snipe Rock 17322...................237
Shoalwater Pass 17424 .................95 Snow Passage 17382..................119
Shoe Inlet 17431....................135 Snug Anchorage 17420.................114
Shoe Island Light 17400.................135 Snug Cove 17362 ...................176








                                                                                  I1-19


                                      Page                                                                            Page
Soapstone Cove 17303.................242 St. Ignace Rock 17406 .................138
Soapstone Point 17303 .................242 St. James Bay 17316 ..................210
Sockeye Creek 17420..................88 St. John Baptist Bay 17324................227
Sockeye Islets 17360 ..................167 St. John Harbor 17382 .................161
Soda Bay 17407 ....................136 St. Joseph Island 17404 .................144
Sokolof Island 17382 ..................162 St. Lazaria Islands 17325 ................221
Sola Rock 17406 ...................142 St. Nicholas Channel 17406 ...............143
Soloma Point 17303...................244  St. Nicholas Point 17406 ................143, 144
Sonora Island 17404 ..................145 St. Philip Island 17404 .................145
Sonora Passage 17404..................145 Stack Island 17423...................98
Sore Finger Coe 17360.................177 Stag Bay 17303 ....................239
Sound Islands 17324 ..................226 Standard Time.....................79
Source diagrams ....................15 Staney Island 17403 ..................147
South Arm 17323....................232 Star Rock 17303....................239
South Arm 17337....................201 Star Rock 17316....................208
South Arm 17339....................202 Starrigavan Bay 17324 .................226
South Arm 17432....................102 Station Island 17316 ..................208
South Arm 17433 ....................101 Station Island 17382 ..................162
Sooth Arm 17436....................104 Station Island 17387 ..................157
South Bight 17302 ...................254 Station Point 17300...................178
South Burnett Island 17382................116 Staunch Point 17300 ..................177
South Craig Point 17382.................123 Steamboat Bay 17365..................174
South Flat 17375....................164 Steamboat Bay 17404..................144
South Inian Pass 17302 .................245 Steamboat Point 17404 .................144
South Island 17300...................178 Steamer Bay 17382...................117
South Island 17386...................154 Steamer Point 17382 ..................117
South Kaigani Harbor 17409 ...I............134  Steamer Rocks 17382..................117
South Ledge 17375...................164 Stedman Cove 17372..................159
South Marble Island 17318................249  Stephens Passage 16016.................174
South Pass 17407....................133 Stevenson Island 17401.................118
South Passage 17302 ..................246 Stewart 17425.....................85
South Passage 17321 ..................238 Stewart Light 17425 ..................85
South Passage 17365 ..................172, 174 Stewart Rock 17368 ..................171
South Passage Light 17302................246  Stikine River 17360 ..................163
South Passage Point 17300, 17320 .............204  Stikine Strait 17382 ..................123
South Point 17337 ...................201 Still Harbor 17328 ...................218
South Quadra Mountain 17434 ..............87  Stillwater Anchorage 17339 ...............203
South Rock 17302 ...................245 Stockade Point 17314..................179
South Rock 17400 ...................126 Stone Island 17339...................204
South Rocks 17326...................219 Stone Islands 17385 ..................115
South Rocks 17409...................129 Stone Rock 17433 ....................0o
South Sandy Cove 17318.................250 Stone Rock Bay 17433 .................100
South Sawyer Glacier 17300 ...............178 Stop Island 17367 ...................168
South Vallenar Point 17436................110 Stopford Point 17427..................85
Southeast Cove 17385..................121 Storm Islands 17365 ..................174
Southerly Island 17382 .................161 Storm surge ......................27
Southwest Cove 17385 .................121 Strait Island 17360...................156
Southwest Islands 17363.................171 Strauss Rock 17316...................191
Spacious Bay 17422...................97 Strawberry Island 17318.................249
Spanberg Island 17403 .................151  Streets Island 17426 .                                                                                      .................113
Spanish Islands 17402..................154 Streets Lake 17382...................117
Spasski Bay 17316 ...................255 Stripe Mountain 17409 .................127
Spasaki Island 17316 ..................254  Sturgess Island 17318..................249
Special Notice to Mariners ................257  Submarine cables and submerged pipelines .........17
Special signals.....................27  Submarine emergency identification signals.........28
Spedl Arm 17313....................179 Submerged pipelines ..................17
Speel River 17313 ...................179 Suemnez Island 17407..................128
Spike Rock 17375 ...................164 Sukkwan Island 17400 .................135
Spire Island 17428 ...................89 Sukkwan Narrows 17407 ................133
Spire Island Reef Light SI 17428..............89  Sukkwan Strait 17431..................132
Spit Point 17427 ....................85 Sukoi Inlet 17324 ...................227
Split Island 17423 ...................116 Sukol Islets 17360 ...................167
Spoil areas ......................18 Sullivan Island 17317..................210
Spokane Cove 17318 ..................249 Sullivan Rock 17317 ..................210
Spray Island 17367...................168 Sulnia Bay 17323 ...................230
Spruce Island 17363...................172 Suloia Islet 17323 ...................230
Spruce Point 17375...................164 Suloia Point 17323...................230
Spuhn Island 17315...................191 Sulnia Rock 17323...................230
Spohn Point 17315 ...................191 Sulzer Passage 17431..................132
Spurt Point 17367 ...................168 Sumdumn Glacier 17300.................178
Square Cove 17300 ............ ......204 Sumdumn Island 17360 .................178
Square Island 17408 ..................I134 Summit Island 17372..................159
Square Island 17422...................97 Summit, The 17372 ............I......159
Squid Bay 17303....................240 Sumner Island 17360..................156
St. Ignace Island 17406 .................138  Sumner Strait 17360, 17400 ...............152






1- 20


                                      Page                                                                               Page
Sun Rocks 17432 ....................102 The Beehive 17326...................220
Sunny Bay 17385 ...................121 The Brothers 17360 ..................171
Sunny Cove 17315..18................0S The Eckholms 17326..................222
Sunny Cove 17436...................104 The Eye Opener 17360 .................160
Sunny Point 17430...................93 The Five Fingers 17360.................174
Sunny Point 17436...................104 The Gate 17322 ....................236
Sunset Island 17363...................175 The Kittens 17316 ...................208
Sunshine Island 17385..................120 The Knob 17302....................246
Superstructure Icing ..................75 The Narrows 17302 ..................254
Supplies .......................78 The Narrows 17385 ..................122, 123
Surf Point 17403....................148 The Narrows 17433 ..................130
Surf Point 17433....................81 The Nipples 17387...................157
Surface ship procedures for assisting aircraft in distress       .          ...10  The SaItchuck 17433..................131
Surface ship procedures for assisting distressed surface vessels            9   The Sentinels 17407 ..................136
Surge Bay 17303....................240 The Sisters 17316...................254
Surprise Harbor 17336 .................173 The Skookumn Chuck 17407 ...............136
Surprise Point 17437 ..................83 The Summit 17372...................159
Survey Point 17422...................98 The Triplets 17382...................118
Survey Point 17435...................105 The Twins 17363 ...................175
Surveyor Passage 17321.................237 The Witnesses 17405..................139
Svenson Rock 17338 ..................233 Thetis Bay 17376 ...................197
Swaine Point 17376...................196 Thimble Cove 17406 ..................138
Swanson Harbor 17316 .................207 Third Kekur 17328...................218
Sweetwater Lake 17382, 17360..............118 Thistle Ledge 17360 ..................176
Syble Point 17422 ...................96 Thistle Rock 17437 ..................83
Sylburn Harbor 17435..................109 Thomas Basin 17430..................91
Symonds Bay 17326 ..................221 Thomas Bay 17367...................167
Symonds Point 17316..................191 Thomas Island 17422..................98
                                           Thompson Passage 17433................130
Table Bay 17386....................196 ThornsPlace 17385 ..................122
Table Island 17339...................202  Thomusen Harbor (Thomsen Boat Harbor), 17327                                                           ......225
Table Mountain 17320..................201 Thomne Arm 17428...................89
Table Rock 17408 ...................128 Thorne Bay 17420, 17423................114
Tah Bay 17433.....................131 Three Entrance Bay 17326................222
Tab Island 17433....................131 Three Hill Island 17302.................244
Taiya Inlet 17317....................211, 214  Three Way Passage 17382................117
Taiya Point 17317 ...................212 Threemile Ann 17360 .................159
Taiya River 17317 ...................214 Threenob Rock 17303 .................239
Taiyasanka Harbor 17317 ................214 Thumb Point 17365 ..................172
Takanis Bay 17303...................240 Thunder Mountain 17408 ................128
Takanis Peninsula 17303.................240  Tidal Current Charts .................3, 256
Takatz Bay 17337 ...................200 Tidal Current Tables ..................3,256
Takatz Islands 17337 ..................201 Tidal currents.....................73
Taku Glacier 17315...................180 Tidal Inlet 17318 ...................251
Taku Harbor 17314...................179  TIDAL PREDICTIONS AND DATA FROM THE NATIONAL OCEAN
Taku Inlet 17315....................179  SERVICE.....................3
Taku.Mountain 17314..................179 Tide Island 17382 ...................119
Taku Point 17315....................180 Tide Tables......................3,256
Taku River 17315 ..1.................0S Tides ........................73
Taku Winds......................184 Tiedeman Island 17360, 17300..............176
Talsani Island 17317 ..................211 Tikhaia Islands 17328..................218
Tarngas Harbor 17435..................105 Timber Knob 17404 ..................146
Tamngas Reef 17434...................106 Timbered Island 17404 .................145
Tanani Point 17317...................212 Time ........................2,79
Tarr Inlet 17318 ....................252 Time Signals .....................13
Tatoosh Islands 17422..................98 Tingberg Island 17437 .................84
Tatoosh Rocks 17422..................98 Tlevak Narrows 17407 .................136
Tava Island 17326 ...................220 Tlevak Strait 17400 ..................134
Tawak Passage 17322..................237 Tlingit Point 17318...................250
Taylor Bay 17302 ...................243 Tokeen Bay 17403...................149
Taylor Island 17302...................243 Tokeen Cove 17403 ..................149
Teal Island 17403 ...................150 Toledo Harbor 17333, 17320...............199
Tebenkof Bay 17376 ..................196 Tolstoi Bay 17423 ...................114
Tee Harbor 17316 ...................193 Tolstoi Island 17420 ..................114
Tenakee Inlet 17300, 17320............... 204 Tolstoi Point 17420 ..................114
Tenakee Inlet Entrance Light 1 17300............204  Tombstone Bay 17425 .................85
Tensakee Reef 17300 ..................204 Tongass Island 17437..................83
Tensakee Springs 17300 .................204 Tongass Narrows 17428 ..8.............6, 90
Tenses Island 17403 ............I......150  Tongass Narrows West Channel Light 4 17430........90
Tenass Pass 17403 ...................151 Tongass National Forest.................72
Tenfathom Anchorage 17330...............218 Tongass Passage 17437.................84
Terbilon Island 17326..................220 Tongasa Reef 17437 ..................83
Thane 17315 ..1...................0S Tongass Reef Daybeacon 17437 .............83
Thatcher Channel 17338.................233 Tonina Island 17404 ..................146
The Basin 17337....................201 Tonowek Bay 17404 ..................146






                                                                                    1- 21


                                       Page                                                                            Page
Tonowek Narrows 17404 .................147  Uniform State Waterway Marking System..........27
Torsar Island 17326 ...................220, 221 Union Bay 17423 ...................120
Totem Bay 17360 ....................160 Union Point 17423...................120
Totem Bight 17428 ...................94 Unuk River 17424 ...................96
Toti Island 17405 ....................139 Urey Rocks 17303 ...................239
Touchilt Cove 17431 .................. . 135 Ursus Channel 17405..................139
Tow Hill 17400 .....................80 Usblc Bay 17323....................231
Towage                                 ...... .................78
Toy Harborl17328S....................219 Vallenar Bay 17436...................110
Track Rack 17437 ....................83 Vallenar Point 17428 ..................94
Tracy Arm 17300;....................178 Vallenar Rock 17428 ..................94
Traders Islands 17338 ..................233 Van Sant Cove 17403..................149
Traffic Separation Schemes (Traffic Lanes) .........28  Vanderbilt Reef 17316 .................210
Traitors Cove 17422 ...................97 Van Island 17382..162...............
Tramp Point 17424 ....................95 Vasilief Bank 17326 ..................222
Tranquil Point 17405 ...................138 Vasilief Rock 17326 ..................220
Trap Bay 17300 ....................204 Vegas Islands 17434 ..................105
Trap Point 17424 ....................95 Verdure Point 17425~..................85
Trap Rock 17385 ....................122 Very Inlet 17434....................87
Tree Island 17362 ....................176 Vessel Arrival Inspection ................78
Tree Point 17427 ....................84  Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Regulations                                                   .          ....33
Tree Point 17434 ................. ...86  Vessel traffic procedures, gillnet fishing...........100, 152, 207
Tree Point Light 17434 ..................86 Vessel Watering Points .................7
Triangle Island 17318 .........I.........251 Vesta Bay 17408....................134
Trim Island 17404 ....................147 Vesta Point 17408 ...................134
Triplet Rocks 17431 ...................132 Veta Bay 17406 ....................143
Triplets, The 17382 ...................118 Veta Point 17406....................143
Trocadero Bay 17405 .................;..138 Vexation Pointl17375..................164
Troller Islands 17376 ...................196 VHF-FM Radiotelephone ..............31
Troller Point 17376 ...................196 Vichnefski Rock 17382 .................161
Trollers Cove 17426.                         ...................1I Viesokoi Rock 17326..................221
Trouble Island 17360.  ...........  ....                               159 View Cove 17408 ...................135
Trunk Island 17422 ...................97 Village Island 17434 ..................106
Tsa Cove 17428 .....................90 Village Islands 17385..................122
Tsunamis .......................27 Village Islands Rock 17385 .............I..122
Tsunamis (Seismic sea waves) ................73  Village Point 17341...................202
Tuft Rock 17404 ....................142 Village Point 17435...................107
Tunehean Creek 17372 ..................159 Village Rock 17339...................203
Tunga Inlet 17403 .....................150 Village Rock 17385...................122
Turn Island 17382 ....................122 Village Rock 17403 ..................148
Turn Island 17433 ....................131 Vincent Reef 17323...................229, 235
Turn Point 17339 ....................203 Virginia Lake 17385 ..................123
Turn Point 17375 ....................165  Vitakari Island 17326, 17320...............221
TumnPointl17403 ....................149 Vitskari Rocks 17326..................221
Turn Point 17407 ......... ..4.........136 Vixen Bay 17434 ...................88
Turn Point 17425 ....................85 Vixen Harbor 17423 ..................120
Turn Point 17433 ....................131 Vixen Inlet 17385 ...................120
Turn Rock 17407 ....................133 Vixen Islands 17323 ..................232
Turnabout Island 17360, 17368 ...............169  Vixen Point 173 85~...................120
Turner Creek 17315 ....................0S Vorots Island 17322 ..................236
Turtle Island 17404 ...................145
Tuxekan Island 17403 ..................147 Wschusett Cove 17300 .................205
Tuxekan Narrows 17403 .................147 Wachusett Inlet 17318..................250
Tuxekan Passage 17403              ~..........I........147 Wadding Cove 17422..................97
Twelvemnile Arm 17426 ..................112 Wadleigh Island 17405 .................139
Twenty Fathom Bank 17426 ................110 Wadleigh Rock 17405..................139
Twin Islands 17403 ....................o5 Walden Point 17428 ..................109
Twin Islands 17404...................145 Walden Rocks 17428..................109
Twin Islands 17434 ...................87 Wales Harbour 17437..................84
Twin Peaks 17408 ....................127 Wales Island 17437...................84
Twin Point 17300 .......... ..........178 Wales Passage 17437 ..................84
Twin Rocks 17406 ....................144 Walker Channel 17326 .................219
Twins, The 17363 ....................175 Walker Cove 17424...................95
Two Sisters 17435S....................108 Walker Island 17428 ..................88
Two Tree Island 17382..................162 .Walker Point 17336...................172
Twocrack Island 17404 ..................146 Wallace Reef 17434 ..................106
Tyee 17336              .              .......................172 Wallace Rock 17433 ..................131
Tyndall Cove 17318                          ...................250 Walter Island 17360 ......I...........175
                                             Warburton Island 17435.................107
U.S. Fishery Conservation Zone ..............30 Ward Cove 17428 ...................93
U.S. Nautical Chart Numbering System ....... -1 7  Warm Chuck Inlet 17404 ................146
Ulitka Bay 17404                           ........... ....... 144  Warm Spring Bay 17337.................200
Ulloa Channel 17407 ...................137  Warren Channel 17402............I..... 153, 156
UlloasIsland 17407 ....................137 Warren Cove 17402.................. 153
Under-keel clearances ...........I ....... .Warren Island 17402 ..................153






I -22

                                        Page                                          Page
Warren Peak 17402 ...................153 William Cove 17300....................178
Wart Point 17424 ....................95  William Henry Bay 17316      .................210
Washington Bay 17370 ..................198  Willoughby Cove 17302    ..................246
Washington Monument Rock 17428 .............89  Willoughby Island 17318 .................249
Wasp Cove 17424 ....................95 Wilson Ann 17424            ....................94
Wasp Point 17424 ....................95  Wilson Cove 17320         ............ ......201
Waterfall 17407 .....................137  Wilson Islands 17382      ...................162
Waterfall Bay 17408 ................ . ..127 Wind Chill         .......................76
Waterfall Cove 17322 ..................236  Windfall Harbor 17300    ..................177
Watkins Point 17385 ...................121  Windfall Harbor 17426    ...................114
Watson Point 17324, 17320 ................225  Windfall Island 17300   ....I.............177
Wayanda Ledge 17323 ..................231  Windfall Islands 17376......4      ...........196
Weasel Cove 17434 ...................88 Windham Bay 17363           ...................175
Weather ........................73 Winds . .......... ..............2
Wedge Islands 17432 ...................103 Windy Bay 17402.....................195
Wedge Point 17382 .............I......124 Windy Cove 17408         ....................135
Welcome Cove 17408 ..................128  Windy Passage 17326..                         .......I........ 220
Werlick Island 17434 ...................105  Windy Peak 17402      ....................153
West Arm 17321 ....................238 Windy Point 17436           ....................103
West Arm 17432 ....................102 Winifred Island 17321...................239
West Arm 17433 ....................101 Winning Cove 17300           ...................177
West Arm 17436....................103, 104  Winstanley Island 17424 . .................95
West Brother Island 17360 ................171  Winter Inlet 17437   ....................84
West Channel 17324 ...................226  Witness Rocks 17405      ...................139
West Channel 17363 ...................172  Witnesses, The 17405     ...................139
West Channel 17428 ...................90  Woewodski Harbor 17365      .................172
West Crawfish Inlet 17326 ................220  Woewodaki Island 17360 . .................161
West Devil Rock 17434 ..................82 Wolf Rock 17400.....................126
West Francis Rock 17323 .................231  Wolk Harbor 17409 .  ...................127
West Island 17382 ....................118  Wolk Point 17409        .......: ............127
West Mill Rock 17408 ..................134 Wood Cove 17400         ....................126
West Pass 17303 ....................239 Wood Islands 17404....................145
West Petersburg 17375 ..................165 Wood Point 17367       ....................168
West Pinta Rocks 17368 .................169 Wood Spit 17360.....................178
West Point 17367 ....................168 Wooden Island 17320        ...................195
West Rock 17378 ....................158 Wooden Wheel Cove 17378..              .        ..............158
West Rock 17434 ....................82 Woodpecker Cove 17382..................162
West Sentinel Island 17426 .................1l  Woody Island 17375 . ...................164
West Spit 17365 .....................174 Woody Point 17341....................201
Westerly Island 17385 ..................120  World Geodetic System (1984)   ...............24
Westemn Anchorage 17327 ................223  Woronkofski Island 17382 . .................124
Western Channel 17327 ..................223  Woronkofski Point 17382 . .................124
Whale Bay 17328 ....................218 Wrangell 17384           .....................124,162
Whale Head 17403 ...................148  Wrangell Harbor 17384       ..................124
Whale Head Island 17403 .................148  Wrangell Narrows 17375 . .................163
Whale Passage 17382 ..................118  Wrangell Narrows 17375, 17382 ...............162
Whale Rock 17403 ...................148 WWV and WWVH broadcasts..               .       .......... . ..26
Whale Rock 17434 ...................87 Wyvill Reef 17324           ....................227
Whaletail Cove 17385 ..................122
Whaletail Point 17385 ..................122  Yahku Cove 17404      ....................147
Whidbey Passage 1731 8.................249  Yakobi Island 17303 .  ...................240
Whisker Point 17407 ...................133  Yakobi Rock 17303      ....................241
Whisky Cove 17430 ...................90  Yamnani Islets 17328      ....................219
White Cliff 17404 ....................146  Yankee Cove 17316 .................... 210
White Cliff Island 17403.................148, 149  Yasha Island 17320   ....................173
White Cliff Passage 17403 ................149  Yellow Hill 17434   ....................107
White Crag Island 17303 .................240  Yellow Point 17323 . ...................231
White Point 17403 .....................0S  Yellow Point 17435 .    ...................106
White Reef 17434 ....................87 Yellow Rocks 17434:....................82
White Rock 17337 ....................200 Yelnu Islets 17437        ....................84
White Rock 17338 ....................204 Yes Bay 17422......................96
White Rock 17382 ....................161 Young Bay 17315.....................190
White Sisters 17322 ...................236 Young Rock 17382        ....................122
White Sulphur Springs 17321 ...............239
Whiterock Island 17432 .................102  Zarembo Island 17382 . ..................119
Whitestone Cove 17324 .................227  Zayas Island 17420     ....................82
Whitestone Harbor 17300 .................255  Zayas Island Reef 17434 . .................82
Whitestone Narrows 17324 ................226  Zeal Point 17324 ....................227
Whitestone Point 17324 .................227  Zenobia Rock 17326     ...................222
Whitewater Bay 17341, 17320 ...............201  Zhilo Cove 17321 ....................239
Whiting Harbor 17327.................. 223  Zimovia. Islets 17385   ...................122
Whiting River 17313 ...................179  Zimovia Strait 17385    ...................122
Whitney Island 17365 ..................174 Zip Rock 17301         .....................243
Willard Inlet 17437 ...................84








                                                                                           OMF Approval No. 0648-0007 Expires 6/30/98
NOAA Form 77-6
NOAA Form 77-6                                                                          U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
              ~~~(Rev. 8195i~)   ~NATIONAL OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC ADMINISTRATION

                                        COAST PILOT REPORT

SUBMIT TO:                                                      This record of your experience and observations when
NATIONAL OCEAN SERVICE, NOAA (NICS261)                          traversing the coast, entering port, and/or navigating inside
1315 EAST-WEST HIGHWAY, STATION 7317                            waters will be used to update the Coast Pilot.
SILVER SPRING, MD 20910-3282
FAX:            301-713-4516
INTERNET: [email protected]

OBSERVER: NAME AND ADDRESS                                     DATE OF OBSERVATION

                                                         DATE OF SUBMISSION

                                                         VESSEL NAME AND ADDRESS




TEL. (daytime)

FAX

                                           GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION
             (Refer to charted objects by distance and bearing and/or include latitude/longitude, as applicable)












CHART NUMBER                                                   COAST PILOT NUMBER and EDITION NUMBER


CHANGES TO EXISTING COAST PILOT TEXT
Give recommended revised language for the book. Identify affected text by page, paragraph(s), and line number(s). State the
source of the information if other than personal observation.














                                             (Continue on plain paper)










REQUEST FOR SURVEYS OR CHART CHANGE

List area for which surveys and/or changes in chart format, scale, or layout are needed. Include the name and geographic
position of the area, the chart number of the largest scale chart that covers the area, and the reason for the request.






















                                                       (Continue on plain paper)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR THE COAST PILOT

We are particularly interested in information about unusually strong currents; prominent landmarks; objects which provide
particularly good radar return; sheltered anchorages (be explicit on direction of weather and type of bottom observed);
drawbridge operation changes (e.g., drawbridge remains permanently in open position); changes in pilot pick-up points;
changes in radio frequencies monitored by pilots, marine exchanges, harbor masters, or drawbridges.

























                                                        (Continue on plain paper)

Public reporting burden for this collection is estimated to average thirty minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering
and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of
information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the National Ocean Service (N/CS261), 1315 East-West Highway, Silver Spring, MD 209 10-3282; and to the Office of
Management and Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project (0648-0007), Washington, DC 20503









                                                                                         OMF Approval No. 0648-0007 Expires 6/30/98
NOAA Form 77-6                                                                          U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
(Rev. 8195)                                                    NATIONAL OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC ADMINISTRATION

                                       COAST PILOT REPORT

SUBMIT TO:                                                      This record of your experience and observations when
NATIONAL OCEAN SERVICE, NOAA (N/CS261)                          traversing the coast, entering port, and/or navigating inside
1315 EAST-WEST HIGHWAY, STATION 7317                            waters will be used to update the Coast Pilot.
SILVER SPRING, MD 20910-3282
FAX:            301-713-4516
INTERNET: [email protected]

OBSERVER: NAME AND ADDRESS                                     DATE OF OBSERVATION

                                                        DATE OF SUBMISSION

                                                        VESSEL NAME AND ADDRESS




TEL. (daytime)

FAX

                                          GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION
             (Refer to charted objects by distance and bearing and/or include latitude/longitude, as applicable)











CHART NUMBER| COAST PILOT NUMBER and EDITION NUMBER


CHANGES TO EXISTING COAST PILOT TEXT
Give recommended revised language for the book. Identify affected text by page, paragraph(s), and line number(s). State the
source of the information if other than personal observation.













                                            (Continue on plain paper)











REQUEST FOR SURVEYS OR CHART CHANGE

List area for which surveys and/or changes in chart format, scale, or layout are needed. Include the name and geographic
position of the area, the chart number of the largest scale chart that covers the area, and the reason for the request.























                                                        (Continue on plain paper)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR TH E COAST PILOT

We are particularly interested in information about unusually strong currents; prominent landmarks; objects which provide
particularly good radar return; sheltered anchorages (be explicit on direction of weather and type of bottom observed);
drawbridge operation changes (e.g., drawbridge remains permanently in open position); changes in pilot pick-up points;
changes in radio frequencies monitored by pilots, marine exchanges, harbor masters.. or drawbridges.

























                                                       (Continue on plain paper)

Public reporting burden for this collection is estimated to average thirty minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering
and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of
information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the National Ocean Service (N/CS261), 1315 East-West Highway, Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282; and to the Office of
Management and Budget, Paper-work Reduction Projectr(0648-0007), Washington, DC 20503









                                                                                            OMF Approval No. 0648-0007 Expires 6/30198
NOAA Form 77-6                                                                          U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
(Rev. 8a95)                                                    NATIONAL OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC ADMINISTRATION

                                         COAST PILOT REPORT

SUBMIT TO:                                                      This record of your experience and observations when
NATIONAL OCEAN SERVICE, NOAA (N/CS261)                          traversing the coast, entering port, and/or navigating inside
1315 EAST-WEST HIGHWAY, STATION 7317                            waters will be used to update the Coast Pilot.
SILVER SPRING, MD 20910-3282
FAX:            301-713-4516
INTERNET: [email protected]

OBSERVER: NAME AND ADDRESS                                     DATE OF OBSERVATION

                                                          DATE OF SUBMISSION

                                                          VESSEL NAME AND ADDRESS




TEL. (daytime)

FAX

                                            GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION
             (Refer to charted objects by distance and bearing and/or include latitude/longitude, as applicable)











CHART NUMBER                                                   COAST PILOT NUMBER and EDITION NUMBER


CHANGES TO EXISTING COAST PILOT TEXT
Give recommended revised language for the book. Identify affected text by page, paragraph(s), and line number(s). State the
source of the information if other than personal observation.













                                              (Continue on plain paper)











REQUEST FOR SURVEYS OR CHART CHANGE

List area for which surveys and/or changes in chart format, scale, or layout are needed. Include the name and geographic
position of the area, the chart number of the largest scale chart that covers the area, and the reason for the request.























                                                        (Continue on plain paper)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR THE COAST PILOT

We are particularly interested in information about unusually strong currents; prominent landmarks; objects which provide
particularly good radar return; sheltered anchorages (be explicit on direction of weather and type of bottom observed);
drawbridge operation changes (e.g., drawbridge remains permanently in open position); changes in pilot pick-up points;
changes in radio frequencies monitored by pilots, marine exchanges, harbor masters, or drawbridges.

























                                                       (Continue on plain paper)

Public reporting burden for this collection is estimated to average thirty minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering
and maintaining tbe data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send commnents regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of
information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the National Ocean Service (N/CS261), 1315 East-West Highway, Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282; and to the Office of
Management and Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project (0648-0007), Washington, DC 20503